Reference Manual

CAFull_RM.
book Page 0 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM
Chief Architect® X2
Reference Manual
Professional Design & Drafting Software
Chief Architect, Inc.

6500 N. Mineral Dr.
Coeur d’Alene, Idaho 83815
www.chiefarchitect.com
CAFull_RM.book Page 1 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM
Copyright © 2009 by Chief Architect, Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this book or the accompanying software may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any
information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from Chief Architect,
Inc.
Chief Architect® is a registered trademark of The City Blueprint and Country Blueprint
Chief Architect, Inc. fonts are © 1992-1999 Payne Loving Trust.
All rights reserved.
The Sentry Spelling-Checker Engine
Copyright © 1994-2003 Wintertree Software
Inc.
All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of Chief Architect, Inc. or their respective
owners.
Printed in the United States of America.

Contents
Chapter 1: Program Overview

Chief Architect Full vs Interiors vs Lite..........................................26
Startup Options .................................................................................27
The Chief Architect Environment ...................................................28
Toolbars..............................................................................................31
Menus..................................................................................................32
Dialogs ................................................................................................33
The Status Bar ...................................................................................34
Preferences and Defaults ..................................................................34
Drawing a Plan ..................................................................................35
Viewing Your Plan ............................................................................37
Program Updates...............................................................................39
Getting Help .......................................................................................39
About Chief Architect .......................................................................40
Chapter 2: File Management

Compatibility with Previous Versions .............................................43
Organizing Your Files.......................................................................43
Chief Architect Data..........................................................................44
Creating a New Plan or Layout........................................................45
Saving a Plan or Layout File ............................................................46
Saving a Plan Thumbnail..................................................................48
Auto Archive ......................................................................................48
2
Chief Architect Reference Manual
Undo Files........................................................................................... 50
Opening a Plan or Layout File ......................................................... 50
Template Files.................................................................................... 51
Searching for Plans ........................................................................... 53
Exporting an Entire Plan.................................................................. 58
Closing Plans and Views ................................................................... 60
Exiting Chief Architect ..................................................................... 60
Chapter 3: Preferences & Default Settings

Defaults and Preferences .................................................................. 63
Default Settings.................................................................................. 63
Dynamic Defaults .............................................................................. 67
General Plan Defaults Dialog ........................................................... 68
Reset to Defaults ................................................................................ 69
Preferences Dialog............................................................................. 70
Chapter 4: Toolbars & Hotkeys

Toolbar Arrangement ..................................................................... 107
Customizing Toolbars ..................................................................... 107
Toolbar Configurations .................................................................. 112
Restoring Toolbars .......................................................................... 113
Hotkeys ............................................................................................. 114
Chapter 5: Layers
Displaying Objects........................................................................... 117
Layer Sets ......................................................................................... 118
Layer Set Management ................................................................... 119
Active Layer Set Control ................................................................ 121
Layer Display Options Dialog ........................................................ 121
3
Select Layer Dialog..........................................................................124

Layer Tab .........................................................................................125
Layer Painter and Eyedropper ......................................................126
Layout Layer Sets............................................................................127
Exporting/Importing Layer Sets ....................................................127
Layer Set Defaults Dialog ...............................................................129
Chapter 6: Editing Objects

Architectural vs CAD Objects........................................................131
Defaults and Preferences ................................................................131
Snap Behaviors ................................................................................133
Object Snaps ....................................................................................133
Angle Snaps......................................................................................135
Grid Snaps........................................................................................136
Edit Behaviors..................................................................................137
Undo and Redo ................................................................................141
Creating Objects..............................................................................141
Selecting Objects..............................................................................144
Editing Line Based Objects ............................................................147
Editing Arc Based Objects..............................................................150
Editing Open Polyline Based Objects ............................................155
Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects .........................................160
Editing Box-Based Objects .............................................................164
Editing Spline Based Objects .........................................................167
Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses ................................................171
Architectural and CAD Blocks.......................................................174
Displaying Objects...........................................................................175
Moving Objects................................................................................177
Aligning Objects ..............................................................................180
Resizing Objects...............................................................................183
4
Reshaping Objects ........................................................................... 184

Rotating Objects .............................................................................. 188
Reflecting Objects............................................................................ 190
Copying and Pasting Objects ......................................................... 191
Deleting Objects............................................................................... 196
Trim and Extend ............................................................................. 198
Transform/Replicate Object Dialog............................................... 200
Union, Intersection, and Subtract.................................................. 202
Converting Objects.......................................................................... 205
Select Same / Load Same ................................................................ 208
Edit Area Tools................................................................................ 209
Chapter 7: Walls, Railings, & Fencing

Wall, Railing and Fencing Defaults ............................................... 215
The Wall Tools................................................................................. 219
The Deck Tools ................................................................................ 221
The Fencing Tools ........................................................................... 221
Exterior and Interior Walls............................................................ 222
Foundation Walls ............................................................................ 222
Pony Walls........................................................................................ 223
Railings ............................................................................................. 224
Invisible Walls.................................................................................. 224
Polygon Shaped Rooms and Decks ................................................ 225
Hatch Wall ....................................................................................... 226
Break Wall ....................................................................................... 226
Deck Railings ................................................................................... 227
Deck Edge......................................................................................... 227
Fencing ............................................................................................. 227
Drawing Walls ................................................................................. 228
Connecting Walls............................................................................. 229
5
Displaying Walls ..............................................................................230

Editing Walls....................................................................................231
Editing Straight/Curved Wall Combinations ...............................234
Aligning Walls..................................................................................235
Attic Walls........................................................................................238
Double Walls ....................................................................................239
CAD to Walls ...................................................................................240
Wall Type Definitions......................................................................241
Wall Type Definitions Dialog .........................................................243
Exporting Wall Type Definitions ...................................................246
Importing Wall Type Definitions ...................................................247
Stepped and Raked Walls ...............................................................248
Wall Specification Dialog................................................................249
Wall Hatch Specification Dialog ....................................................264
Chapter 8: Rooms
Room Definition...............................................................................267
Floor Defaults...................................................................................267
Room Material Defaults..................................................................267
Floor & Ceiling Heights ..................................................................268
Selecting Rooms ...............................................................................270
Room Types......................................................................................271
Room Labels.....................................................................................273
Decks.................................................................................................275
Editing Rooms..................................................................................277
Special Ceilings ................................................................................279
Room Polylines.................................................................................282
Room Specification Dialog..............................................................283
Room Finish Schedules ...................................................................291
6
Chapter 9: Doors
Door Defaults ...................................................................................293
The Door Tools ................................................................................ 293
Displaying Doors.............................................................................. 295
Editing Doors ...................................................................................296
Changing Door Swings.................................................................... 297
Centering Doors and Windows ...................................................... 300
Special Doors.................................................................................... 301
Door Specification Dialog ............................................................... 303
Door Schedules ................................................................................ 314
Chapter 10: Windows

Window Defaults ............................................................................. 317
The Window Tools........................................................................... 317
Special Windows.............................................................................. 319
Grouped Windows........................................................................... 320
Make Mulled Unit ........................................................................... 321
Window Levels................................................................................. 324
Displaying Windows........................................................................ 325
Editing Windows ............................................................................. 326
Custom Muntins .............................................................................. 327
Bay, Box, and Bow Windows.......................................................... 328
Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs .................................................. 330
Window Specification Dialog ......................................................... 332
Bay/Box Window Specification Dialog .......................................... 349
Bow Window Specification ............................................................. 351
Window Schedules........................................................................... 351
7
Chapter 11: Multiple Floors

Floor Defaults Dialog ......................................................................353
Working With Multiple Floors.......................................................354
Floor Tools .......................................................................................355
Adding Floors...................................................................................355
Exchanging Floors ...........................................................................357
Copying Floors.................................................................................357
Deleting Floors .................................................................................358
Floor and Ceiling Platforms ...........................................................358
Rebuilding Walls, Floors & Ceilings .............................................358
The Current Floor ...........................................................................358
The Attic Floor.................................................................................359
Reference Floor................................................................................359
Chapter 12: Foundations

Foundation Defaults ........................................................................363
Building a Foundation.....................................................................366
Displaying Foundations...................................................................367
Editing Stem Wall Foundations .....................................................367
Editing Slab Foundations................................................................368
Aligning Foundation Walls.............................................................368
Deleting Foundations.......................................................................369
Foundations and Rooms..................................................................369
The Slab Tools..................................................................................370
Editing Slabs ....................................................................................371
Editing Piers and Pads ....................................................................371
Slab Specification Dialog ................................................................372
8
Chapter 13: Roofs

Roof Defaults.................................................................................... 375
Automatic vs. Manual Roofs .......................................................... 375
The Roof Tools................................................................................. 376
Build Roof Dialog ............................................................................ 377
Roof Planes....................................................................................... 385
Displaying Roof Planes ................................................................... 387
Editing Roof Planes ......................................................................... 387
Roof Plane Specification Dialog ..................................................... 392
Automatic Roofs .............................................................................. 396
Roof Baseline Polylines ................................................................... 401
Roof Baseline Specification Dialog ................................................ 403
Curved Roof Planes......................................................................... 404
Ceiling Planes...................................................................................408
Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog ................................................. 409
Gable/Roof Line............................................................................... 412
Skylights ........................................................................................... 414
Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog ....................................... 416
Dormers ............................................................................................ 417
Editing Auto Dormers..................................................................... 419
Dormer Specification Dialog .......................................................... 420
Roof Returns and other Details...................................................... 423
Roof Pitches in Degrees................................................................... 426
Chapter 14: Stairs & Landings

The Stair Tools................................................................................. 429
Anatomy of a Staircase ................................................................... 429
Drawing Stairs ................................................................................. 430
Displaying Stairs.............................................................................. 431
9
Merging Stair Sections ....................................................................431

Editing Stairs ...................................................................................433
Winders ............................................................................................434
Stair Landings..................................................................................435
Maintaining Tread Width...............................................................439
Flared Stairs and Curved Treads ..................................................440
Starter Treads..................................................................................443
Wrapped Stairs................................................................................444
Other Special Railings & Stairs .....................................................445
Creating a Stairwell.........................................................................448
Rooms Below Staircases..................................................................449
Staircase Specification Dialog ........................................................450
Stair Landing Specification Dialog ................................................458
Chapter 15: Framing

Framing Defaults .............................................................................461
Manual vs. Automatic Framing .....................................................462
The Framing Tools ..........................................................................464
Build Framing Dialog......................................................................467
Framing Reference Markers ..........................................................480
Bearing Lines ...................................................................................482
Joist Direction Lines........................................................................482
Displaying Framing .........................................................................485
Editing Framing...............................................................................487
Keeping Framing Current ..............................................................488
Framing and the Materials List .....................................................489
Framing Specification Dialog .........................................................490
Post Specification Dialog.................................................................492
10
Chapter 16: Trusses

Truss Defaults .................................................................................. 495
Floor and Ceiling Trusses ............................................................... 495
Roof Trusses..................................................................................... 495
Editing Trusses ................................................................................ 498
Editing Truss Envelopes ................................................................. 499
Truss Details ....................................................................................499
Truss Labels..................................................................................... 500
Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing............................................... 501
Truss Bases....................................................................................... 501
Truss Base Specification Dialog ..................................................... 504
Hip Trusses ...................................................................................... 505
Step Down Hip ................................................................................. 506
Drop Hip or California Hip............................................................ 507
Subgirder Hip .................................................................................. 508
Girder Trusses ................................................................................. 509
Scissors Trusses ............................................................................... 509
Roof Truss Specification Dialog..................................................... 510
Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog ...................................... 513
Chapter 17: Electrical

Electrical Defaults ........................................................................... 516
The Electrical Tools......................................................................... 518
Creating Wiring Schematics........................................................... 519
Auto Place Outlets ........................................................................... 519
Electrical Library ............................................................................ 520
Displaying Electrical Objects ......................................................... 520
Editing Electrical Objects............................................................... 521
Electrical Service Specification Dialog .......................................... 522
11
Chapter 18: Trim & Molding

Corner Boards .................................................................................529
Corner Board Specification Dialog................................................530
Quoins...............................................................................................531
Quoin Specification Dialog .............................................................531
Editing Corner Boards and Quoins ...............................................533
Molding Profiles...............................................................................533
Symbol Moldings .............................................................................534
Molding Polylines ............................................................................535
Displaying Molding Polylines .........................................................537
Changing Profiles on Existing Moldings .......................................537
Frieze Moldings ...............................................................................538
Molding Polyline Specification Dialog...........................................539
3D Molding Polyline Specification Dialog.....................................541
Chapter 19: Cabinets

Cabinet Defaults ..............................................................................547
The Cabinet Tools............................................................................548
Cabinet Fillers..................................................................................551
Placing Cabinets and Fillers ...........................................................551
Custom Countertops .......................................................................553
Displaying Cabinets.........................................................................554
Cabinet Labels .................................................................................555
Editing Cabinets ..............................................................................556
Editing Cabinet Door/Drawer and Panel Style.............................558
Editing Custom Countertops..........................................................558
Special Cabinets...............................................................................559
Cabinet Specification Dialog ..........................................................562
Cabinet Shelf Specification Dialog.................................................575
12
Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog............................................... 576

Custom Countertop Specification Dialog...................................... 578
Chapter 20: Terrain

Terrain Configuration Button........................................................ 581
Terrain Perimeter............................................................................ 581
Elevation Data Tools ....................................................................... 582
Terrain Modifier Tools ................................................................... 587
Terrain Feature Tools ..................................................................... 588
Garden Bed Tools............................................................................ 590
Water Feature Tools ....................................................................... 591
Stepping Stone Tools ....................................................................... 591
Terrain Wall and Curb Tools......................................................... 592
Sun Shadows ....................................................................................593
Terrain Objects in the Library ...................................................... 593
Displaying Terrain .......................................................................... 593
Editing Terrain Objects .................................................................. 595
Terrain Specification Dialog........................................................... 596
Elevation Point Specification Dialog.............................................. 600
Elevation Line Specification Dialog............................................... 603
Flat Region Specification Dialog .................................................... 604
Hill / Valley Specification Dialog ................................................... 605
Raised / Lowered Region Specification Dialog ............................. 606
Terrain Feature Specification Dialog ............................................606
Garden Bed Specification Dialog ................................................... 608
Terrain Break Specification Dialog ............................................... 609
Terrain Path Specification Dialog.................................................. 610
Importing Elevation Data ............................................................... 612
Import Terrain Wizard................................................................... 612
Import GPS Data Wizard............................................................... 616
13
Importing DXF/DWG Elevation Data...........................................620

Converting CAD Lines to Terrain Data........................................621
Plant Tools........................................................................................621
Plant Image Specification Dialog ...................................................622
Plant Specification Dialog...............................................................626
Plant Chooser Dialog.......................................................................627
Hardiness Zones...............................................................................629
Sprinkler Tools ................................................................................629
Sprinkler Specification Dialog........................................................630
Chapter 21: Roads, Driveways & Sidewalks

Road and Sidewalk Defaults...........................................................635
Road, Driveway and Sidewalk Tools .............................................636
Displaying Road Objects.................................................................639
Editing Road Objects ......................................................................639
Adding Road Objects to the Library .............................................640
Road Specification Dialog...............................................................640
Median Specification Dialog...........................................................642
Driveway Specification Dialog........................................................642
Road Marking Specification Dialog...............................................644
Sidewalk Specification Dialog ........................................................644
Chapter 22: Other Objects

Primitive Tools.................................................................................649
Creating Primitives .........................................................................649
Editing Primitives............................................................................650
3D Box Specification Dialog ...........................................................653
Sphere Specification Dialog ............................................................655
Cylinder Specification Dialog.........................................................656
Cone Specification Dialog ...............................................................657
14
Shape Specification Dialog ............................................................. 658

Polyline Solids .................................................................................. 658
Polyline Solid Specification Dialog ................................................ 659
Soffits ................................................................................................ 660
Special Applications for Soffits ...................................................... 660
Calculating Materials on Soffits..................................................... 661
Soffit Specification Dialog............................................................... 662
Distributed Objects ......................................................................... 666
Distribution Region/Path Specification Dialogs ........................... 666
Fireplaces ......................................................................................... 671
Fireplace Specification Dialog........................................................ 672
Library Fireplaces ........................................................................... 674
Chimneys .......................................................................................... 675
Chapter 23: Architectural Blocks

Architectural vs CAD Blocks ......................................................... 677
Creating Architectural Blocks ....................................................... 677
Displaying Architectural Blocks .................................................... 678
Editing Architectural Blocks .......................................................... 678
Architectural Blocks, Sub-Objects, and Components ................. 679
Architectural Block Specification Dialog ...................................... 680
Chapter 24: Libraries

The Library Browser ...................................................................... 683
Library Browser Contents.............................................................. 685
Selection and Preview Panes .......................................................... 686
Library Search Dialog..................................................................... 687
Select Library Object Dialog.......................................................... 689
Placing Library Objects.................................................................. 690
Place Library Object Button .......................................................... 692
15
Replace From Library ....................................................................693

Displaying Library Objects ............................................................694
Editing Library Objects..................................................................694
Library Objects and the Materials List.........................................696
Symbol Object Specification Dialogs .............................................696
Editing Libraries .............................................................................697
Adding to the Library .....................................................................700
Importing and Exporting Library Content ..................................702
Chapter 25: Materials

About Materials ...............................................................................707
The Material Painter.......................................................................707
Materials Tab...................................................................................709
Viewing Materials............................................................................711
Editing Materials .............................................................................711
Creating Materials...........................................................................712
Mapping Patterns and Textures.....................................................714
Material Types .................................................................................716
Managing Plan Materials...............................................................717
Define Material Dialog ....................................................................719
Material Defaults Dialog.................................................................726
Color Chooser Dialog ......................................................................727
Chapter 26: Zoom & View Tools

Zoom Tools.......................................................................................731
Undo Zoom.......................................................................................731
Fill Window......................................................................................732
Panning the Display.........................................................................732
Swapping Views ...............................................................................733
Window Menu Tools .......................................................................733
16
Cascade............................................................................................. 734
Tiling Views...................................................................................... 735
Arrange Icons .................................................................................. 736
Aerial View....................................................................................... 736
Closing Views ...................................................................................738
Chapter 27: 3D Views

OpenGL and Hardware .................................................................. 741
Types of 3D Views ........................................................................... 741
Defaults and 3D Preferences .......................................................... 742
Camera Defaults Dialog.................................................................. 742
3D Settings Dialog ........................................................................... 744
3D View Tools .................................................................................. 749
Creating Camera Views .................................................................. 750
Creating Overviews ......................................................................... 751
Cross Section/Elevation Views ....................................................... 752
Displaying 3D Views........................................................................ 756
Editing 3D Views ............................................................................. 758
Cross Section Slider......................................................................... 764
Working in 3D ................................................................................ 765
Saving & Printing 3D Views........................................................... 767
Camera Specification Dialog .......................................................... 768
Cross Section/Elevation Camera Specification............................. 770
Chapter 28: Rendering & Raytracing

Rendering Tips ................................................................................ 773
Lighting ............................................................................................ 775
Light Types ...................................................................................... 779
Light Specification Dialog............................................................... 781
Default Sun Light Specification Dialog ......................................... 782
17
Sun Angle Specification Dialog ......................................................782

Rendering Techniques.....................................................................785
Rendering Technique Options........................................................788
Glass House View ............................................................................796
Glass House Options........................................................................797
Speeding up 3D View Generation ..................................................797
Creating a Raytrace View...............................................................800
The Raytrace Window ....................................................................803
Creating Materials for Raytracing ................................................804
Raytracing Tips ...............................................................................805
POV-Ray ..........................................................................................807
Chapter 29: Dimensions

Compatibility With Previous Versions..........................................808
Dimension Defaults and Preferences .............................................809
Dimension Defaults Dialog..............................................................810
Temporary Dimension Defaults Dialog .........................................821
The Dimension Tools.......................................................................823
Displaying Dimension Lines ...........................................................826
Editing Dimension Lines.................................................................827
Editing Extension Lines ..................................................................829
Moving Objects Using Dimensions ................................................831
Dimension Line Specification Dialog .............................................833
Chapter 30: Text, Callouts & Markers

Text Defaults and Preferences........................................................839
Fonts and Alphabets........................................................................840
The Text Tools .................................................................................841
Creating Text, Callouts and Markers............................................842
Displaying Text, Arrows, Callouts and Markers..........................843
18
Rich Text Specification Dialog ....................................................... 843

Text Specification Dialog ................................................................ 850
Editing Text ..................................................................................... 854
Copying & Pasting Text.................................................................. 858
Spell Check....................................................................................... 859
Text Arrows ..................................................................................... 861
Callouts............................................................................................. 863
Callout Specification Dialog ........................................................... 864
Editing Callouts ............................................................................... 866
Markers ............................................................................................ 867
Marker Specification Dialog........................................................... 867
Editing Markers .............................................................................. 868
Text Macros ..................................................................................... 869
Designer Information Dialog.......................................................... 871
Client Information Dialog............................................................... 872
Chapter 31: CAD Objects

CAD Defaults and Preferences....................................................... 875
The CAD Drawing Tools ................................................................ 878
Line Styles ........................................................................................ 879
Point Tools........................................................................................ 880
Line Tools ......................................................................................... 884
Line Specification Dialog ................................................................ 888
Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes ............................................. 892
Arc Tools .......................................................................................... 894
Arc Specification Dialog ................................................................. 895
Circle Tools ...................................................................................... 897
CAD Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification Dialog.............................. 898
Polylines............................................................................................ 900
Polyline Specification Dialog .......................................................... 901
19
Box Tools ..........................................................................................903

CAD Box Specification Dialog........................................................905
Revision Clouds ...............................................................................906
Revision Cloud Specification Dialog..............................................907
Splines...............................................................................................908
Displaying CAD Objects .................................................................909
Creating Line Styles ........................................................................910
CAD Blocks ......................................................................................912
CAD Block Management ................................................................913
CAD Block Specification Dialog.....................................................915
Number Style/Angle Style Dialog...................................................917
CAD Details......................................................................................917
Plot Plans and Plan Footprints.......................................................918
Plan Footprint Specification Dialog...............................................920
Chapter 32: Project Management

Time Tracker ...................................................................................922
Time Log Dialog ..............................................................................923
Project Browser ...............................................................................924
Project Information.........................................................................925
House Wizard...................................................................................926
Plan Check .......................................................................................928
IRC Checklist...................................................................................929
Loan Calculator ...............................................................................929
Chapter 33: Pictures, Images, & Walkthroughs

Picture Files vs Pictures and Image Objects.................................933
Images...............................................................................................933
Displaying Images............................................................................935
Editing Images .................................................................................935
20
Image Specification Dialog ............................................................. 936

Pictures ............................................................................................. 940
Editing Pictures ............................................................................... 941
Picture File Box Specification Dialog ............................................ 942
Metafiles ........................................................................................... 943
Editing Metafiles.............................................................................. 945
Metafile Specification Dialog.......................................................... 945
Copy Region as Picture ................................................................... 946
Creating Screen Captures............................................................... 946
Walkthroughs .................................................................................. 948
Creating VRML Files...................................................................... 949
Chapter 34: Importing & Exporting

DXF vs DWG File Formats ............................................................ 953
Importing 2D Drawings .................................................................. 953
Import Drawing Wizard ................................................................. 954
CAD to Walls ................................................................................... 962
Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files ...................................................... 962
Additional 2D Export Information ................................................ 964
3D Data Import Requirements....................................................... 966
Importing 3D Symbols .................................................................... 967
Exporting a 3D Model in DXF/DWG Format .............................. 971
Exporting a 3D Model in 3DS Format........................................... 972
Chapter 35: Custom Symbols

Symbol Specification Dialog ........................................................... 974
Get Last Symbol .............................................................................. 987
Convert to Symbol........................................................................... 987
Editing Custom Symbols................................................................. 988
21
Chapter 36: Printing & Plotting

Introduction to Printing..................................................................993
Printers and Plotters .......................................................................994
The Printing Tools...........................................................................995
Display Options and Printing .........................................................995
Printing Directly from a View ........................................................997
Printing from Layout ......................................................................997
Printing to Scale...............................................................................997
Printing Across Multiple Pages......................................................998
Printing to a PDF File .....................................................................999
Line Weights ....................................................................................999
Printing Text and Dimensions......................................................1002
Creating Custom Sheet Sizes........................................................1002
Page Setup Dialog ..........................................................................1004
Print Dialog ....................................................................................1006
Print Image Dialog ........................................................................1009
Print Model ....................................................................................1009
Chapter 37: Layout

Layout Defaults..............................................................................1015
Preparing for Layout ....................................................................1015
Creating a Layout File ..................................................................1016
The Layout Tools...........................................................................1016
Sending Views to Layout...............................................................1018
The Current Page ..........................................................................1020
Layout Page Zero ..........................................................................1021
CAD and Text in Layout...............................................................1021
Images in Layout ...........................................................................1022
Keeping Layout Views Current ...................................................1022
22
Editing Layout Views .................................................................... 1024

Rescaling Views ............................................................................. 1025
Displaying Layout Views .............................................................. 1025
Layout Page Display Options ....................................................... 1026
Opening Layout Views .................................................................. 1027
Editing Layout Lines..................................................................... 1028
Edit Layout Lines Dialog .............................................................. 1028
Managing Layout Links................................................................ 1030
Printing Layout Files..................................................................... 1033
Exporting Layout Files ................................................................. 1034
Layout Box Specification Dialog .................................................. 1034
Chapter 38: Schedules

Schedule Defaults .......................................................................... 1036
Creating Schedules ........................................................................ 1037
Editing Schedules .......................................................................... 1038
Adding Columns to Schedules...................................................... 1039
Schedule Specification Dialog....................................................... 1039
Columns and Objects to Include .................................................. 1043
Object Labels .................................................................................1044
Chapter 39: Materials Lists

The Materials List Tools ............................................................... 1049
Creating an Accurate Materials List ...........................................1050
Organizing Materials Lists ........................................................... 1050
Material List Display Options Dialog..........................................1052
Materials List Columns................................................................. 1054
Editing Materials Lists.................................................................. 1056
Materials Polyline.......................................................................... 1057
Managing Materials Lists ............................................................. 1058
23
Exporting the Materials List ........................................................1058

The Master List..............................................................................1059
Components Dialog .......................................................................1062
Appendix A: Whats New in Chief Architect

Before You Begin...........................................................................1064
New and Improved Features by Chapter....................................1068
Appendix B: Additional Resources

Reference Manual..........................................................................1078
User’s Guide...................................................................................1078
Online Help Videos........................................................................1079
Chief Architect Web Site ..............................................................1079
Online Personal Training..............................................................1079
Training Seminars .........................................................................1079
Chief Talk Online User Forum ....................................................1080
Technical Support .........................................................................1080
Appendix C: Technical Support Services

Reference and Training Resources ..............................................1082
Troubleshooting Common Technical Issues ...............................1083
Troubleshooting Printing Problems ............................................1084
Error Messages ..............................................................................1086
Contacting Technical Support......................................................1087
Appendix D: Menus & Toolbar Buttons

Using the Menus ............................................................................1090
File Menu........................................................................................1091
24
Edit Menu....................................................................................... 1096

Build Menu..................................................................................... 1100
Terrain Menu................................................................................. 1110
Library Menu ................................................................................ 1115
3D Menu ......................................................................................... 1115
CAD Menu ..................................................................................... 1123
Tools Menu..................................................................................... 1128
Window Menu................................................................................ 1135
Help Menu...................................................................................... 1137
MEP Toolbar Configuration Buttons..........................................1139
Toggle Buttons ............................................................................... 1140
Edit Toolbar Buttons..................................................................... 1141
Other Buttons ................................................................................ 1147
25
Chapter 1:
Program Overview
Chief Architect is specifically designed for Chapter Contents

the residential and light commercial design • Chief Architect Full vs Interiors vs Lite
professional. It allows you to easily and • Startup Options
efficiently produce 3D models and • The Chief Architect Environment
construction documents for your projects. • Toolbars
We thank you for choosing Chief Architect • Menus
and wish you the best in your design work. • Dialogs
• The Status Bar
• Preferences and Defaults
• Drawing a Plan
• Viewing Your Plan
• Program Updates
• Getting Help
Chief Architect Full vs Interiors vs Lite

Not all features are available in the Interiors
and Lite versions of Chief Architect. For a
list of the features in each program, see our
website, www.chiefarchitect.com.
26
Startup Options
When Chief Architect opens, the The Startup Options dialog can be opened at
Startup Options dialog displays, any time by selecting File> Startup Options
allowing you to choose how you want to .
begin working in the program or access
useful resources.
2
1
3
1 Select a File command to open a .plan • Click New from Template to open a
file. new, blank plan based on a template that
• Click New Plan to open a new, blank you select. See “Template Files” on page
plan. See “Creating a New Plan or Lay- 51.
out” on page 45. • Select House Wizard to launch a
• Choose Open Plan to work on an new plan in the House Wizard. See
existing plan file. See “Opening a Plan or “House Wizard” on page 926.
Layout File” on page 50.
27
The Chief Architect Environment
• Click Find Plan Wizard to search a X2, the online Help menu, Reference Manual
plan database using criteria you select. and User’s Guide .pdfs, and links to the
See “Find Plan Wizard” on page 54. Chief Architect and Chief Talk Web sites.
2 Recent Files lists the names of the most 34 Uncheck Show Options on Startup if
recently opened files. Click on a name you do not want this dialog to display
to open the file. You set the number of files when you launch Chief Architect. Instead, a
that display in this list in the Preferences new, blank plan opens.
dialog. See “General Panel” on page 79.
To have the Startup Options dialog
3 The Help options provide access to a display at startup again, select File> Startup
variety of information resources. These Options and place a check mark at Show
include a list of the new features of version Options on Startup.

Object-Based Design displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the
program window.
Chief Architect’s parametric, object-based
design technology means you place and edit Architectural objects take up space in all
objects, rather than work with the many three dimensions and their height, width and
individual lines or surfaces used to represent depth can be specified in Imperial or metric
them. units. In addition, the location of objects can
be precisely defined using coordinates, again
You can quickly select and edit the location, specified in Imperial or metric units.
size, shape, style and other properties of
objects as well as change the materials CAD objects such as lines and arcs take up
applied to their surfaces. space in two dimensions in the current view.
Their dimensions can also be specified in
Use Chief Architect’s editing capabilities to Imperial or metric units and their locations
make the objects you place in a plan match precisely defined using coordinates.
the objects they represent in real life. For
example, you can set up your windows and
Easy Access to Tools
doors to match those available from your
supplier. You can access Chief Architect’s features in
various ways using the mouse and keyboard.
3D Drafting • Menus provide access to most tools.
In Chief Architect, the entire drawing area is • Convenient toolbar buttons allow fast
laid out on a three dimensional coordinate access to tools and let you customize the
system described using the X, Y and Z axes. interface.
The current position of your mouse pointer
28
• Keyboard shortcuts are available for most • The Status Bar at the bottom of the screen
tools and can be customized. provides tool descriptions and other
• Contextual menus display with a right- information about the current task.
click of the mouse.
Title
Bar Child
Tools
Menus
Parent
Tools
Library &
Selected Project
Object Browser
Library
Preview
Temporary Panes
Dimension
Edit
Toolbar Reference Pointer Crosshair Status Bar
Grid Lines Lines
Using the Mouse The Right button has several uses.

Right-click to select any object.
Many objects, such as doors and cabinets, are
created by clicking the left mouse button.
Others, such as walls, stairs and dimension
lines, are created by dragging the pointer If, for example, the Straight Exterior
from one end of the object to the other. Wall tool is active, the left mouse button
The left button is the primary allows you to select only walls. You can
button used in Chief Architect. select other object types such as cabinets
Unless specified otherwise, this with the right mouse button.
reference manual refers to the left Use the right mouse button to temporarily
mouse button. switch to the Alternate edit behavior. See
“Edit Behaviors” on page 137.
Note: If you are left-handed and have re-pro- You can also use the right mouse button to
grammed your mouse, reverse the instruc-
open a context sensitive menu with
tions for left and right buttons in this manual.
additional editing commands.
29
The Middle button can be used to • A circular arrow indicates that the
pan in floor plan view or to selected object can be rotated.
temporarily use the Move edit
Resize handles display along the edges of the
behavior. See “Edit Behaviors” on
object are used to change the size. See
page 137.
“Resizing Objects” on page 183.
You can also program it to work as a double-
click.
The Mouse Wheel can be used to
zoom in and out in most views. The Move handle at the object’s center lets
you move the object. See “Moving Objects”
on page 177.
The Back, or X1, button on a 5-button mouse
can be used to temporarily enable the
Concentric edit behavior. See “Edit
Behaviors” on page 137 or the
documentation for your mouse.
The Forward, or X2, button on a 5-button The triangular Rotate handle lets you rotate
mouse can be used to temporarily enable the the object. See “Rotating Objects” on page
Resize edit behavior. See “Edit Behaviors” 188.
on page 137 or the documentation for your
mouse.
Using the Edit Handles

When you select an object, its edit handles You can cancel any edit handle operation
display. How each handle behaves when it is before it is completed by pressing the Esc
clicked and dragged may depend on which key on your keyboard or by pressing any two
Edit Behavior is currently active. See mouse buttons at the same time.
“Edit Behaviors” on page 137. The edit handles that display depend on the
When you pass the mouse over the edit type of object selected, the current view, and
handles, the pointer changes to show how how far you are zoomed out.
you can use that handle. Edit handles do not resize as you zoom in or
• A two-headed arrow indicates that the out. If you are zoomed out far enough, some
object, corner or edge can be moved in edit handles may be hidden so that they do
the direction of the arrows. not stack over one another. As you zoom in,
these handles become visible again.
• A four-headed arrow indicates that the
selected object or edge may be moved in
multiple directions.
30
Toolbars
Using the toolbar buttons is the fastest, The most recently selected tool displays in
easiest way to access many program features. the toolbar.
You can move the toolbars, customize them
by adding or removing buttons, or create Parent and Child Tools
your own toolbars from scratch. “Toolbar
Customization Dialog” on page 107. An alternative to the Drop-Down toolbar
interface are Parent and Child tools. Parent
The toolbars that display in a given view toolbar buttons have a blue triangle in the
depend on the view type. For example, lower right corner. When you select a parent
toolbars that control camera position display button, child tools display on the right side of
in 3D views but not in floor plan view. the toolbar.
When you pass the pointer over a toolbar
When you click the Window Tools
button, a “tool tip” displays the name of the
parent button, for example, its child buttons
tool. When you see one of these tool tips,
display to the right.
press F1 to get more information about that
item. A more detailed description displays in
the Status Bar at the bottom of the window.
You can use either of two styles of toolbar You can select either Parent - Child or Drop-
interface: drop-down tools or parent-child Down tools in the Preferences dialog See
buttons. “Appearance Panel” on page 71.
Drop-Down Tools Toolbar Configurations

Click on the arrow to the right of a button to Toolbar configurations are sets of toolbars
display a drop-down list of related tools. For that are organized for certain tasks.
example, click the arrow to the right of the
There are eight toolbar configurations in
Window button to display a drop-down Chief Architect. Each can be accessed in the
list of the other Window Tools. Toolbar Customization dialog by right-
clicking on a toolbar button, or by clicking a
button:
The Default Configuration displays a
selection of architectural, file
management and display settings tools.
The Terrain Configuration displays a
selection of terrain, file management
and display setting tools.
31
Menus
The Space Planning Configuration The Edit Toolbar

displays a selection of file management
and display setting tools, as well as the When you select an object, the edit toolbar
House Wizard tools. appears. By default, it is located at the
bottom of the program window, just above
The Plan Detailing Configuration the Status Bar. The toolbar buttons that
displays a selection of display settings, display can be used to edit the selected
file management, annotation and other object(s). Which buttons display depends on
documentation tools. the type of object selected, the current view,
The CAD Configuration displays a and how you selected the object.
selection of CAD, file management
and display setting tools.
The 800x600 Configuration displays The edit toolbar buttons are the same as the
toolbars suitably sized for monitors set options in the contextual menu when you
at 800x600 screen resolution. right-click on an object.
The Expanded Configuration Hotkeys

displays an expanded selection of
architectural, terrain, file managment and Many commands can be invoked from the
display setting tools. keyboard. Press Alt on your keyboard and
press the underlined letter in a menu name to
Customizable Toolbars access that menu, as well as items in the
menus and submenus.
Since the work you are doing determines the
tools you need, Chief Architect allows you to Other keys or key combinations will invoke a
tailor toolbars to suit your own needs. You variety of program commands. If a Chief
can store various toolbar configurations for Architect menu item has a keyboard shortcut,
future use. For more information about or hotkey, associated with it, that hotkey will
customizing toolbars, see “Toolbar display to the right of its name in the menu.
Customization Dialog” on page 107. You can assign hotkeys to Chief Architect’s
tools to best suit your style of work. See
You can add toolbars to each configuration “Hotkeys” on page 114.
using the Toolbar Customization dialog
while that configuration is active. For more information about menu items and
toolbar buttons, see “Menus & Toolbar
Buttons” on page 1090.
Menus
Chief Architect uses a standard Windows be used to access nearly all tools in the
menu format. The menus are located below program.
the title bar in the program window and can
32
Menu items with an icon to their left have a In this reference manual, menu paths are
toolbar button associated with them. Some written in this format: Build> Window> Box
buttons are not included on the toolbar but Window . An icon image after the menu
can easily be added. See “Toolbar path indicates that a toolbar button is also
Customization Dialog” on page 107. available.
Many tools in Chief Architect also have
hotkeys associated with them. If a menu item Contextual Menus
has a hotkey, it will display to the right of the
Contextual menus are context sensitive
item’s name. See “Hotkeys” on page 114.
menus that display tools relevant to a
selected object or view.
To access contextual menus, right-click on an
object, in an empty space in a view window
Edit menu items with button icons or in a text field in any dialog box.
to the left and hotkeys to the right
Contextual menus can be enabled or disabled
in the Preferences dialog. See “Appearance
Panel” on page 71.
Dialogs
Default and preference settings, object active to open its specification dialog. See
specifications, display settings, and many “Selecting Objects” on page 144.
other functions are accessed through dialog
You can open the specification dialog for
boxes.
group-selected objects if they are of the same
Many dialogs have a preview that shows how type, such as base cabinets.
the changes affect the object. This preview • If a particular setting varies among the
updates when you click in a different field or different objects, its check box will have
press the Tab key on your keyboard. a solid fill instead of a check mark. Click
once to clear the box for all selected
Specification Dialogs objects, or click a second time to place a
Each object in Chief Architect has a checkmark for all selected objects.
unique specification dialog where you • If the setting has a text field, it will say
can enter size, style and other information “No Change”. Changes made to such a
specific to the selected object. To access it, setting can be undone by replacing the
select the object and click the Open Object value in the text field with the letter N
edit button. You can also double-click on an before you click OK.
object with the Select Objects tool If you select multiple objects of different
types, the Open Object edit button is
33
The Status Bar
usually not available. The button may

display if the objects have data in common,
but you can only edit the common data.
The Status Bar

The Status Bar at the bottom of the main • The current floor.
window displays information about the • The dimensions of the active window in
current state of the program. pixels.
• The current layout page.
• The current default CAD layer.
This information depends on a variety of
conditions such as settings in the • The current CAD coordinates of the
Preferences dialog, the type of object pointer.
selected, and the current position of the • The screen redraw time.
pointer. The information may include the
• The length and/or angle of an object as it
following:
is being drawn.
• A brief description of the toolbar button
or menu item highlighted by the mouse. The number format used in the Status Bar is
set in the Dimension Defaults dialog, while
• A description of the selected object. the angle style can be specified in the
• The total number of objects currently Number Style/Angle Style dialog. See
group-selected. “Primary Format Tab” on page 812 and
• The layer that the selected object is on. “Number Style/Angle Style Dialog” on page
917.
Preferences and Defaults

Preference and default settings control many Preferences
aspects of the user interface and tool
behavior in Chief Architect. You can use Preference settings let you change program
these settings to customize the program to behavior to suit your workflow. For example,
suit your personal work style. you can:
• Turn certain display elements on or off.
For more information about defaults and
preferences, see “Preferences & Default • Choose background and floor plan view
Settings” on page 62. colors.
• Set frequency of autosaves, maximum
number of “undos,” and file protection.
• Set default folders for various files.
34
• Control the editing behaviors of objects. Default settings, unlike Preferences, are file
• Setup the material list categories, sub- specific.
categories, and report style, as well as
manufacturer and supplier information. Dynamic Defaults
• Set rendering specifications to maximize Dynamic defaults are values that affect
efficiency and quality. existing objects in a plan.
Preference settings are global, affecting all In specification dialogs, dynamic default
plan and layout files. values have a Default checkbox beside them
or a [D] in their text fields. As long as this
Defaults checkbox is checked or the [D] is present,
changes made to the default affect the object.
Most objects in Chief Architect derive their
intial properties from their respective default To edit an individual object, you must delete
dialogs. the [D] or uncheck the box in the
specification dialog. Objects you edit in this
For example, a newly placed Window way do not update if you change the default.
gets its initial values from the Window
To restore a value to the default, click to
Defaults dialog and a newly placed Hinged
place a check in the Default checkbox or
Door gets its initial values from the Door type a “d” into an edit box.
Defaults dialog.
Once an object is placed in a plan, its initial Template Plans

properties can be overridden, but setting up You can set up an otherwise empty plan with
your defaults before you begin drawing can the default settings of your choice and use it
save you considerable time as you build a as your template for new, blank plans. See
model in the program. “Template Files” on page 51.
Drawing a Plan
When you draw a plan in Chief Architect, Set the Defaults
you are placing 3D objects that represent
building components. Chief Architect comes 1. Open the plan template you want to use,
with predefined default settings so you can or choose File> Startup Options> New
start drawing plans immediately. You should from Template to begin a new plan.
review these default settings to be sure they
2. Set the structural defaults:
match your drawing and building methods.
See “Preferences & Default Settings” on • Floor Defaults. Set the default ceiling
page 62. height for Floor 1. See “Floor
Defaults” on page 65.
35
Drawing a Plan
• Foundation Defaults. Set the founda- 7. Build additional floors. See “Adding
tion specifics such as type, footing size, Floors” on page 355.
and stem wall height. See “Foundation 8. Specify the default ceiling height for
Defaults” on page 65. each floor as soon as it is created. See
• Framing Defaults. Set the floor framing “Floor Defaults Dialog” on page 353.
specifications, including type and
9. Adjust the perimeter shape of additional
dimensions. See “Framing Defaults”
floors as needed. See “Editing Walls” on
on page 65.
page 231.
• Default Wall Types. Specify the
defaults for walls and railings. See 10. Align edited or moved walls with those
“Wall, Railing and Fencing Defaults” above or below where appropriate. See
on page 215. “Aligning Walls” on page 235.
3. Set material defaults for roof, walls, and

Entering Dimensions
rooms (optional). See “Material
Defaults” on page 65. When using Imperial units, enter distances as
4. Set style defaults for doors, windows, inches or feet and inches, in fractional or
molding, cabinets and other objects. decimal form. Millimeters are the default
unit for all metric distances. See “Dimen-
sions” on page 808.
Draw the Floors
• To enter feet, include the ( ' ) marker or
1. While the size of the drawing area in the program assumes inches.
Chief Architect is limited only by the • In most cases, the program allows
resources on your computer, it is best to precision to 1/16th of an inch. Fractions
begin your drawing near the origin, with denominators 2, 4, 8 and 16 are
0,0,0. See “3D Drafting” on page 28. allowed.
2. Draw the exterior walls on Floor 1 in a • The program usually converts decimals
clockwise direction. See “Drawing to fractions.
Walls” on page 228.
• You can enter angles as bearings, decimal
3. Adjust the perimeter shape and size as degrees, or degrees, minutes, and
required. See “Using the Edit Handles” seconds. See “Number Style/Angle Style
on page 232. Dialog” on page 917.
4. Place any first floor bearing walls.
5. Define types for special rooms such as Build the Foundation
garages and decks in the plan. See
“Room Types” on page 271. 1. Derive the foundation plan from the first
floor. See “Building a Foundation” on
6. Place perimeter doors and windows. See page 366.
“Doors” on page 292 and “Windows” on
page 316. 2. Adjust the foundation perimeter shape
as needed.
36
3. Place interior foundation walls as 5. Build the framing. See “Framing” on

needed for the first floor bearing walls. page 460.
4. Place any other foundation walls 6. Build the terrain and landscaping
required. (optional). See “Terrain” on page 580.
5. Align with Above as needed. See 7. Create the plot plan and plan footprint.
“Aligning Walls” on page 235. See “Plot Plans and Plan Footprints” on
page 595.
Add Structure and Details 8. Create any necessary views and print the
plan and use CAD Detail from View to
1. Build non-structural interior walls. create 2D elevations and plan details.
Begin on floor one and work up in mul- Use and modify details from the Library,
tiple story structures. as well. See “CAD Details” on page
2. Add walls where needed to create fea- 917.
tures such as chimney chases, plumbing
walls, or Open Below areas. Create the Layout
3. Finish the relevant interior structure
including interior doors, doorways, cabi- 1. If one does not exist, create a Layout file
nets, fixtures, and fireplaces. with a title block, placing the border,
title block, and other text on page 0. See
4. Build the roof planes. If you generate the “Layout” on page 1014.
roof automatically, remember to carry
the roof directives in the walls from the 2. Send views to the layout, starting with
first floor up to the top floor for multiple layout page 1. See “Sending Views to
story structures. See “Roofs” on page Layout” on page 1018.
374. 3. Print the plan. See “Printing & Plotting”
on page 992.
Viewing Your Plan

You can see your model in a wide variety of Floor plan view is a 2D view of the model and
different 2D and 3D views. You can display is most commonly used for drawing and
more than one view at a time and in any editing. In floor plan view, each floor displays
view, you can pan or zoom in or out. See separately and you can only edit one floor at a
“Zoom & View Tools” on page 730. time; however, you have extensive control
over which objects display at any given time,
37
Viewing Your Plan
can easily switch between floors, and can also the relationships between spaces, and plan
display items on a second floor for reference. traffic flow.
Framing Overviews display framing in 3D,

provided that framing has been built. You can
customize 3D views to serve special purposes
such as this.
You can create interior and exterior 3D views

of your model from any perspective. As in
floor plan view, you can select and edit many
objects in 3D views and can control which
objects are visible. See “3D Views” on page
740.
A variety of Cross Section and Elevation
camera tools create accurate, scaled 2D views
of a model’s exterior and interior. Just as in
other views, you can select and edit objects in
a Cross Section/Elevation view as well as
control which objects display. Cross Section/
Elevation views can be annotated and
dimensioned.
You can also create Floor Overviews that
show only the current floor. Ceilings are
omitted so you can see the interior, visualize
A variety of rendering techniques let you

produce customized 3D views, from detail
38
drawings to photorealistic Raytrace views to Layout

artistic presentation views.
All plan views can be sent to a layout
where they can be arranged to produce
full construction documentation. See
“Sending Views to Layout” on page 1018.
All views can also be exported as a graphic

image. See “To export a picture” on page
940.
Program Updates
From time to time, Chief Architect Inc. Select Help> Download Program Updates
releases program updates that are available to launch your default Web browser to the
for download from the Chief Architect Web Program Updates section of the Chief
site, www.chiefarchitect.com. Architect Web site.
Getting Help
There are many forms of help paste, and right-click to access contextual
available in Chief Architect including: menus. Help also assumes you are familiar
Tool Tips, the Status Bar, and the online Help with Windows terms.
menu.
More information is available in the product
All these forms of help assume you have a documentation in both printed and electronic
basic working knowledge of the Windows format and on Chief Architect’s official Web
operating system, including how to use a site, www.chiefarchitect.com. See
mouse, open, close and save files, copy, “Additional Resources” on page 219.
39
About Chief Architect
Tool Tips • When you move the cursor over a toolbar

button or menu item, a brief summary of
When you move the pointer over a toolbar that tool displays in the Status Bar. Press
button or menu item, a Tool Tipdisplays, the F1 key to open online Help to a page
offering a brief description of the tool. More with more information about the tool.
information displays in the Status Bar at the
bottom of the window. • When an object is selected, edit handles
display. Place the cursor over an edit han-
dle and press F1 to open online Help to a
Online Help Menu
page with information about that handle.
Online Help is a searchable menu that • Press the Help button in any dialog box
provides information about all of the tools in to open online Help to a page describing
Chief Architect. Select Help> Contents & the options in that dialog.
Index to open the online Help and
explore the table of contents, browse the
Index, or search for keywords. Chief Architect strives to make our doc-
umentation as helpful as possible for all
of our customers. Please send any
Current Mode Help questions, comments, or feedback to
documentation@chiefarchitect.com.
Online Help can also be used to provide
instant information about toolbar buttons,
menu items, and objects in your plan.
About Chief Architect

Select Help> About Chief Architect to Contact information for Chief Architect, Inc.
view information about your software is available on the More Information tab.
license, the program’s version number, and
its release date.
40
41
Chapter 2:
File Management
Chief Architect reads and edits two main Chapter Contents

document types: .plan files and .layout files. • Compatibility with Previous Versions
The complete 3D model of a structure, • Organizing Your Files
surrounding terrain and any CAD data • Chief Architect Data
associated with it are stored in the plan file. • Creating a New Plan or Layout
Data used to create working drawings and • Saving a Plan or Layout File
the links to various views or details are • Saving a Plan Thumbnail
stored in the layout file. • Auto Archive
All commands related to opening, saving and • Undo Files
closing plans are located in the File menu. • Opening a Plan or Layout File
You can also open plans from the Startup • Template Files
Options dialog. See “Startup Options” on • Searching for Plans
page 27. • Exporting an Entire Plan
• Closing Plans and Views
Just as with files created in other software • Exiting Chief Architect
applications, you should back up your plan
and layout files externally on a regular basis
to avoid accidental loss of work.
42
Compatibility with Previous Versions

Plans produced in the following programs Files that have been opened and saved in
can all be read by Chief Architect X2. Chief Architect X2 cannot be read by the
programs listed above. To continue to read
• Chief Architect® 5.0 through X1
files in the program in which they were
• 3D Home Architect® 3.0 and 4.0 created, be sure to create copies of your files
before opening them in Chief Architect X2.
• Chief Architect® Home Edition 5.0
• All Version 8 and prior Better Homes and
Note: Chief Architect automatically archives
Gardens Home Designer™ products
plans created in prior versions. See “Auto
• Better Homes and Gardens Landscaping Archive” on page 48.
and Deck Designer, Version 8 and prior
• Better Homes and Gardens Interior Limited editability of files saved in Chief
Designer, Version 8 and prior Architect X2 can be enabled when these files
are opened in Version 9 and later of Better
• Trading Spaces® Design Companion™ Homes and Gardens Home Designer
programs. See “General Plan Defaults
Note: 3D Home Architect 5.0 was not devel- Dialog” on page 68.
oped by Chief Architect, Inc. Plans written Several steps are required to successfully
using 3D Home Architect 5.0 or later cannot
convert plans created in an earlier program
be read by Chief Architect.
version to the Chief Architect X2 format.
Before doing so, see “Before You Begin” on
Only the .PL1, .LA1, .plan, and .layout files
page 1064.
from prior versions can be opened in Chief
Architect X2.
Organizing Your Files

You should keep your plan and layout files that use them so that they are easily found.
separate from the support files needed to run See “Adding to the Library” on page 700.
Chief Architect. To keep files organized, you
Here is one way to organize your files:
may find it helpful to create a new folder for
each project. • Create a folder in “My Documents”
(“Documents” in Windows Vista) called
Many Chief Architect files use imported “Chief Architect Plans” or another name
images, textures and other custom content you prefer. See Microsoft Windows Help
saved in their own external data files. to learn how to create folders.
Consider storing copies of all external files in
the same folder as the plan and layout files • Inside this folder, make a new folder for
each client or project. Save all the files
43
Chief Architect Data
for that client or project inside this folder,

including plan and layout files and refer- It is recommended that each layout file
enced external files. See “Saving a Plan be saved in the same folder as the plan
or Layout File” on page 46. file(s) associated with it. See “Managing Lay-
out Links” on page 1030.
Bear in mind, though, that path names
exceeding 260 characters cannot be opened To specify a default Save As location
by Chief Architect. As a result, it is a good
idea to limit the number of embedded folders
1. Select Edit> Preferences , then
you use in your file organization method.
select New Plans from Category list. See
Once you understand the file management of “New Plans Panel” on page 82.
Chief Architect, you should decide on a 2. Under Open and Save As, click Use this
naming convention that suits your needs. Folder. The Browse button becomes
available.
3. Browse to the folder you plan to save
your projects in. Click OK.
Chief Architect Data

When Chief Architect X2 is installed, the • lex - A folder of customized dictionaries.
program automatically creates a folder in My See “Spell Check” on page 859.
Documents called Chief Architect X2 Data. • Database Libraries - A folder of cus-
This folder contains important user-specific tomized libraries. See “User Libraries”
information saved in the following folders on page 686.
and files and should not be moved, renamed • Templates - A folder of plan and layout
or deleted: template files. See “Template Files” on
• Archives - A folder of automatically page 51“Creating a New Plan or Layout”
archived plan and layout files. See “Auto on page 45.
Archive” on page 48. • Textures - A folder of texture files that
• Backdrops - A folder of custom back- can be used to create custom materials.
drop images. See “3D Backdrops” on See “Creating Materials” on page 712.
page 756. • Toolbars - A folder of customized tool-
• Hotkeys - A folder of hotkey assign- bar files. See “Toolbar Customization
ments. See “Hotkeys” on page 114. Dialog” on page 107.
• Images - A folder of custom images. See • Dialogs Suppressed.int - Contains infor-
“Adding Images to the Library” on page mation about which dialog boxes have
934. been suppressed by clicking Do not show
this message again.
44
• mmaster.mat - The Master Materials Just as with your plan and layout files, it is a
List file. See “The Master List” on page good idea to back up your Chief Architect
1059. X2 Data folder.
• units.dat - A list of user-created units of
measurement. See “Unit Conversions If the Chief Architect X2 Data folder is
Panel” on page 85. moved or deleted, the program will
automatically replace it using default infor-
The name of the Chief Architect X2 Data mation from the Chief Architect installation
folder cannot be changed, but you can folder. When this occurs, customized user
specify its location on your computer in the settings and custom user libraries will not be
available.
Preferences dialog. See “Folders Panel”
on page 80.
Creating a New Plan or Layout

To create a new, blank plan, select Units of Measurement
File> New Plan.
All plan and layout files save measurements
You can also choose New Plan in the in either Imperial or Metric units. New files
Startup Options dialog. See “Startup are created using one or the other, depending
Options” on page 27.
on the current setting in the Preferences
By default, a new layout file will be dialog. When the program is first installed,
assigned the same name of the first the Windows OS setting for units determines
plan file sent to it, associating the layout files what system is used. See “New Plans Panel”
with the plan files used. on page 82.
A plan or layout file’s unit of measurement
Note: Only one layout file can be open at any must be specified before it is created and
given time. cannot be changed later. If you normally
work in one set of units but need to create a
New plan and layout files derive their default new file using the other, select File>
settings the from currently selected template
files. See “Template Files” on page 51. Templates> New Plan From Template
to open a new file using an appropriate
New, blank plans are called Untitled.plan template without changing your Preferences
and new, blank layout files, Untitled.layout. settings. See “Opening Template Files” on
Unless these files are named and saved, they page 52.
will be lost when closed. See “Saving a Plan
or Layout File” on page 46. While it is recommended that you create new
plans using the type of unit that you plan to
use, you can display dimensions using any
45
Saving a Plan or Layout File
type of unit. See “Dimension Defaults and Commonly used settings, defaults and other
Preferences” on page 809. information are included in template files.
You can customize the settings in a template
Template Files file to fit your work style and then save your
changes as a new template file. See “To
New plan and layout files are created as create your own template plan” on page 52.
copies of the current template files specified
If no template has been specified in the
in the Preferences dialog. See
“Template Files” on page 51. Preferences dialog, new plans and
layouts are created using the system defaults.
System defaults cannot be modified.
Saving a Plan or Layout File

When you first save a new, • File> Save As opens the Save Plan
untitled file, you must select a File dialog, allowing you to save the plan
location for it on your computer and give it a or layout file using a different name or
name. There are two options for saving plan location on your computer.
and layout files: File> Save and File> Save
As. To save an untitled plan or layout file
By default, a new layout file is assigned the
same name as the first plan file from which a 1. Select File> Save to open the Save
view is sent to it. It is also saved in the same Plan File dialog.
directory as the plan file. If no view has been
sent to a layout, it remains untitled until you
save it.
Although the program warns you if you

try to exit without saving, you should get
in the habit of saving plan files before exiting
the program.
Both Save and Save As can be used 2. In the Save in drop-down, browse to the
to save your plan and layout files; however, location on your computer where you
they accomplish this in two different ways. would like to save the file. See “Orga-
• File> Save saves the current state of nizing Your Files” on page 43.
your plan or layout file without changing 3. In the File name text field, type a name
its name and should normally be used for for the file.
saving your work.
46
4. Chief Architect automatically assigns If you transfer a plan file from one computer
the File of type and file extension .plan to another, the program will warn you of
to plan files and .layout to layout files. missing files if the external data files used by
5. When both the Save in location and File the plan cannot be found.
name are correct, click Save. Layouts are also dynamically linked to plan
Any previously saved cross section/elevation files. When transferring layout files to
views and CAD Details associated with the another computer, be aware that the plan files
plan are also saved with this command. are also external file references and are not
actually contained in the layout.
When saving a layout, the program saves all
pages of the layout, all the links to the When transferring plans or layouts to another
various views saved in the layout, and all the computer that does not have these external
CAD objects added to the .layout file. files, use the Export Entire Plan tool.
See “Exporting an Entire Plan” on page 58.
Initially, all Open and Save As
operations go to the “My Documents” folder Backing Up Your Files
of your computer. After that, the location last
visited is remembered and subsequent It is always a good idea to create backup
copies of all your important files on your
Open or Save As commands default
computer.
to the directory last used for that operation.
This path is saved when the program exits. It is strongly recommended, however, that
The next time Chief Architect is launched, you never save directly:
these defaults are used. • Across a network, such as onto a server;
If you prefer, you can instead specify a • Onto removable media such as a USB
directory to be used for all Open or Save thumb drive or CD;
As operations in the Preferences • Across the Internet.

dialog. See “New Plans Panel” on page 82. Instead, copy your files to such locations in
Windows Explorer only after you have saved
Exporting Files them on your computer’s hard drive and
closed the program.
File> Save As is a simple way to transfer
Similarly, you should never open files saved
a plan or layout to a different location on
in these locations. Copy the files to the local
your computer. Bear in mind, though, that
hard drive, and then open them. See
plan and layout files often reference external
“Opening a Plan or Layout File” on page 50.
data files such as imported textures, images,
and backdrops. These external files are not Archive folders are used by Chief Architect
affected when Save As is used. to manage prior versions of your files. You
should never save a file to an archive folder.
See “Auto Archive” on page 48.
47
Saving a Plan Thumbnail
Saving a Plan Thumbnail

A thumbnail is a miniature image that helps To save a custom thumbnail for the current
identify a file in the Open Plan File dialog file, make sure the view you want to use is on
and in the Find Plan Wizard. Any view of a screen, then select File> Save Plan
plan or any layout page can be saved as the Thumbnail .
thumbnail. See “Searching for Plans” on
page 53. You must save the plan and give it a name
before you can save a plan thumbnail.
If thumbnails are enabled in the Preferences Thumbnails are saved using the same
dialog, the program automatically creates filename as the current plan with the _p.jpg
one when you first save a new plan. You can file extension for plans and _l.jpg for
choose to generate small or large thumbnails. layouts. If a plan thumbnail already exists,
See “General Panel” on page 79. the program asks if you want to overwrite the
existing thumbnail.
Auto Archive
When a plan or layout is first saved, Chief Files can be archived by hour, day or most
Architect creates an Archive folder in the recent save. They are renamed according to
Chief Architect Data folder. The Archive which archiving option is selected in the
folder contains Auto Save and Archive files. Preferences dialog. See “General Panel” on
See “Chief Architect Data” on page 44. page 79.
Auto Save and Archive files should not be Previous
viewed as a substitute for regularly saving Save
your work by selecting File> Save or Daily
pressing Ctrl + S on the keyboard, nor should Hourly
they be considered an alternative to your own
Archive files illustrating all three archive options
file backup routine.
Plan, layout and related files from previous
You should never save a file in an versions of the program are automatically
archive folder. moved to the archive folder when the plan is
opened and saved in Chief Architect.
Archive Files Archive files are meant to be for emergency
Every time a model is saved, internal archive use only. If you must access an archive file,
files are automatically created that keep a open it as you would any other file. See
historical archive of your plan. “Opening a Plan or Layout File” on page 50.
48
As soon as the file is open, use Save As when changes are made to a file but not
to save this file to another location. saved by selecting File> Save .
These Auto Save files are appended
Legacy Archive Files _auto_save.plan or _auto_save.layout and
If you open a Chief Architect plan or layout are saved in the Archive folder.
file from a previous program version and When you close a file normally, its Auto
immediately Save it (not Save As ), Save file is retained until the next time the
the Auto Archive utility will create an file is opened and the Auto Save file is
additional archive file using the original overwritten.
program version format. This archive file is a
copy of the original and can still be opened in
the original program version.
Auto Save file after normal shut-down
If you open and Save a Chief Architect You can enable Auto Save and set its
Version 10 plan or layout file, the legacy
archive file name will be appended “_v10” to frequency in the Preferences dialog. See
help distinguish it from other archived .plan “General Panel” on page 79.
or .layout files of the same name, and a copy Auto save files created as a result of an
of its archive folder will be created in the improper program shutdown are appended
Chief Architect X2 Archives folder. _auto_save_bak.plan or
_auto_save_bak.layout.
Manage Archives
Chief Architect offers two convenient ways
to access Archive folders. Auto Save file after abnormal shut-down
• Select File> Manage Auto Archives If your computer shuts down accidentally,
to open the current plan’s Archive folder. you can recover some of your work by
• Click Yes in the Archived Files dialog opening the _auto_save_bak file.
when the program warns you that the
number of archive files exceeds the Auto A file is auto saved only if you have
Archive Files value. saved it previously. Auto Save does not
work for unnamed files.
You can also move or delete archived files
using Windows Explorer. See your Windows
When you reopen a file after a computer shut
documentation for more information.
down or system crash, the following dialog
displays if an Auto Save file newer than the
Auto Save Files original file is found.
As you work, Chief Architect automatically
creates Auto Save files at regular intervals
49
Undo Files
• Click the Save button.
• Select File> Save .

• Press Ctrl + S or F3 on the keyboard.
Even with Auto Save, you should save your
work manually on a regular basis using any
of the following methods:
Undo Files
Chief Architect stores a set number of copies use Windows system cleanup features, these
of all open plan file changes, known as undo files can be deleted. Because of this, you
files. Undo files are referenced whenever should only use these type of utilities when
you select Edit> Undo or Edit> Redo Chief Architect is not running.
. See “Undo and Redo” on page 141. The maximum number of Undo files is
specified in the Maximum Undos value in
Undo files are stored in the Undo Directory, the Preference settings. If you have Undo
which can be specified in the Preferences enabled, be sure to define a directory on a
dialog. See “Folders Panel” on page 80. hard drive with enough space for these files.
By default, the Undo Directory is the When Chief Architect is closed normally,
Windows Temporary Directory. When you any current Undo files are deleted.
Opening a Plan or Layout File

Select File> Open Plan to open
an existing .plan file or File> Never open a file located on a server or
Open Layout to open an existing .layout file other computer on a network, or on a
located on your computer. Chief Architect removeable storage device. Copy such files
to your local machine’s hard drive first, and
automatically browses to either the directory
then open the copy.
last used or to a specific directory, depending
on your current Preferences settings. See
The Open Plan File and Open Layout File
“New Plans Panel” on page 82.
dialogs can be resized by clicking and
dragging the lower right corner.
50
• In the Look in drop-down, browse to the • When the desired file is selected, click
location on your computer where the file Open.
you wish to open is saved.
• Any folders and either .plan or .layout Recently Opened Files
files in the current location display in the The names of the plan and layout files you
field below. The file type that displays most recently opened or saved display at the
depends on the Files of Type selection. bottom of the File menu. Click on a recent
• Click on the file you wish to open. Its file to open that file without using the Open
name will display in the File name text Plan File dialog.
field.
The maximum number of recent files listed
• If a preview image of the file is available, in the File menu can be changed in the
it will display on the right side of the
Preferences dialog. See “General
dialog. See “Saving a Plan Thumbnail”
on page 48.
• The only file types available in the Files The names of recently open files also display
of type list are .plan and .layout. in the Startup Options dialog. Click on the
name of a file to open it. See “Startup
Options” on page 27.
Template Files
When Chief Architect opens a new, predefined default settings, layer settings,
blank plan or layout file, the new file wall definitions, and page setup information.
is actually a copy of a template using either
You can create custom templates for metric
metric or Imperial units of measurement and
and Imperial plans that include the settings
51
Template Files
that you regularly use. In the Preferences

dialog, you can specify what templates the Note: Make sure you use the appropriate
program refers to when a new plan or layout units of measurement when you create a
file is opened. See “New Plans Panel” on template plan. The Imperial or metric units
used in the new plan are the same as when
page 82. the template was saved.
Once you are familiar with the default
settings in Chief Architect, you can create Creating Templates
template files to fit your needs, store them in
the templates directory, and specify them as The steps for creating template plans and
the defaults for new files. layouts are similar, although there are fewer
default settings in layout files, and most
If you make changes to a default template layout templates include a border and title
file, all subsequently created plans or layouts block where as most plan templates are
will use the new default settings. blank.
You can designate the template folder that
To create your own template plan
you would like to use in the Preferences
dialog. See “Folders Panel” on page 80.
1. Select File> New Plan .
If a template file is not specified or can- 2. Select Edit> Defaults Settings and
not be found, the program starts new open and modify the settings in the
plans using a set of system defined defaults. default dialogs as needed. See “Defaults
These system defined defaults are very basic
and Preferences” on page 63.
and unlikely to meet your drawing needs, so
you should always specify a template plan 3. Select Tools> Display Settings> Dis-
and layout.
play Options and create any custom
layers, layer sets and layer settings that
Opening Template Files you typically use. See “Layers” on page
If you have more than one plan or layout 116.
configuration that you regularly use, you can 4. Select Build> Wall> Define Wall
create multiple template files and open
whichever is needed for a given project. Types and create any custom wall
types that you often use. See “Wall Type
To create a new plan or layout file using a Definitions Dialog” on page 243.
template other than the current preference,
choose File> Templates> New Plan from 5. Select 3D> 3D Settings and set up
your backdrop and other options for 3D
Template or New Layout from
views. See “3D Settings Dialog” on
Template . The program browses to the page 744.
Templates directory specified in the 6. If you draw anything in the template
Preferences dialog. plan, it displays in all new plans created
with that template.
52
7. You can insert text macros into the tem- 5. Select Tools> Layout> Page Down
plate. See “Text Macros” on page 869. to go to layout page 0 and use the CAD
8. After modifying all your default set- tools to design a border and title block
tings, select File> Templates> Save that suits your needs. See “Layout Page
Plan As Template . Name the tem- Zero” on page 1021.
plate plan and save it in the Templates
directory. To set a template as your default
9. In the Change Default Template dialog,

click Yes to use the plan as your default 1. Select Edit> Preferences and go to
template whenever you select File> the New Plans panel of the Preferences
dialog.
New Plan . Click No if you prefer to
access this template by selecting File> 2. Click Imperial or Metric Units.
New Plan From Template . 3. Click the Browse button for either the
plan or layout template.
10. The current plan remains untitled, but a
copy of it is saved for use as a template. 4. Select a template file from the Templates
directory or navigate to a different loca-
tion and select a template from there.
To create your own template layout
Updating Templates
1. Select File> New Layout .
To change the default settings in your
2. Select Edit> Defaults Settings and template, you must open the template file as
open and modify the settings in the though it were a regular plan or layout by
default dialogs as needed. See “Default selecting File> Open Plan or Open
Settings” on page 63.
Layout .
3. Select Tools> Display Settings> Dis-
After the necessary changes are made, select
play Options and create any custom
File> Templates> Save Plan as
layers, layer sets and layer settings that
you typically use. See “Layers” on page Template . Select the name of the
116. template from the list of files in the
Templates directory. When the program asks
4. Select File> Print> Page Setup and if you want to replace the existing file, click
specify the desired print settings. See Yes.
“Page Setup Dialog” on page 1004.
Searching for Plans

Select File> Search for Plans to opens the Find Plan Wizard, which helps
locate an existing plan. This command you search specific plan database files and
53
Searching for Plans
define search parameters for plans based on When you open the Find Plan Wizard,
parameters that you define. choose a plan database to search. When you
first run Chief Architect there is only one
Find Plan Wizard plan database containing the sample plans
that come with the program. Click the
The Find Plan Wizard can be used to search Browse button to select a different plan
for plans using stored information about each database. You must create a plan database
plan, such as the style of construction and the before you can use the Find Plan Wizard to
number of bedrooms and other room types. locate files you created.
House Style
At the bottom of each page, the number of On any page, click the Back button to
plans that match your current search modify any previously selected parameters.
parameters displays. As you modify the
Select the style of house desired, the number
parameters, this number increases or
of floors in the house, and the number of
decreases as matching plans are found.
bedrooms, then click Next to continue.
54
House Size
Select the number of bathrooms, size, and

desired price range and square footage of the
house, then click Next to continue.
55
Searching for Plans
Plan Details
Click on the name of a plan in the list to see a Click Next, then click the Finish button to
preview of the plan, if one exists. See open the selected plan.
“Saving a Plan Thumbnail” on page 48.
Creating a Plan Database File

Select Tools> Plans Database> for plans using the Plan Find Wizard. The
Create Plan Database to create a new Create Plan Database dialog opens.
plan database file that can be used to search
1
2
3
4
1 Use the Database File field to name the the Browse button to save this file at the
plan database file to be created. Click location of your choice, as well as name it.
56
2 Use the Plan Search Path to specify plan and analyze it so this process may take
the location on your computer of the some time.
plans to be included in the plan database. The
You can Cancel the search process at any
program searches for any plan files that exist
time. If you do, your plan database will have
in this folder and adds them to the plan
incomplete information and will not contain
database. Click the Browse button to
entries for all plans in your search folder.
navigate to a particular folder on your
When all plans have been found and added to
machine.
the plan database, the program automatically
3 The Include Subfolders checkbox opens the new plan database file for
allows you to specify whether or not the modification.
search looks only in the Plan Search Path or
if it also searches any subfolders found. Editing a Plan Database File
4 Check Use Relative Path if you Once a plan database file is created, it
anticipate moving the folder containing can be modified. Select Tools> Plans
the database and plans to another location. Database> Edit Plan Database, then select
As long as the database and the plans it the plan database file you want to modify.
references remain in the same folder, the
folder can be moved to another location. Click OK to open the Edit Plan Database
dialog. You can edit any of the information in
When you click OK, the program searches the plan database and add and remove plans
for plan files and adds them to the plan from the database.
database file. The program must read each
Edit Plan Database Dialog
1 2
3
57
Exporting an Entire Plan
1 Plans in the Database - All plans that • Area - The area is automatically calcu-
currently have information stored in the lated by the program based on the living
plan database are listed here. area of the plan when it is added to the
• Click Add Plan to select a plan file to database. You can enter a different value
add to the plan database. if you wish.
• Click Remove to remove the currently • Bedrooms - The number of bedrooms is

selected plan from the plan database. automatically calculated when a plan is
added to the database. You can enter a
• Click Select File to relink the selected different number if you wish.
plan to a plan file on your computer. If a
plan file is renamed, moved or removed • Baths - The number of bathrooms is
from your system, the plan database does automatically calculated when a plan is
not know how to locate it. You must then added to the database. You enter a differ-
relink the plan database to the file or ent number if you wish.
remove it to keep the plan database infor- • Floors - The number of floors is automat-
mation accurate. ically calculated when a plan is added to
• Click Open Plan to open the selected the database. You can enter a different
plan. Opening a plan closes the Plan number of floors if you wish.
Database dialog. If you have not saved • Description - Enter a description for the
any changes you made before clicking plan, if desired. This description displays
the Open Plan button, you are asked to when a plan is found and selected using
do so before you continue. the Search for Plans tool.
2 Plan Information - Information about 3 Plan Thumbnail - The thumbnail
the selected plan displays and can be preview image of the selected plan
edited here. displays here. You can create a thumbnail for
• Style - Select a plan style from the drop any plan. See “Saving a Plan Thumbnail” on
down list. You can also create a new plan page 48.
style by typing in the name of the new
style in the blank area. 4 File Path - The selected plan file’s path
name displays here.
• Price - Enter the price range for this plan.
Exporting an Entire Plan

Because Chief Architect plans and this easily by selecting File> Export>
layouts often contain many references Entire Plan.
to other external files, it is necessary to copy
Exporting an Entire Plan is important when:
all the associated files to a new location
when a plan or layout is moved. You can do • Migrating legacy files created in older
program versions.
58
• Transferring files to another computer or 2. When you click the OK button in the
sending them to another user. Export Entire Plan dialog, the Browse
• Archiving or backing up your work. for Folder dialog opens. Here you can
select the destination folder for the asso-
ciated plan files.
Note: Always use File> Export> Entire Plan
when sending files to a user of the Chief
Architect Viewer to make sure that they have
all associated data.
To export a plan and all associated files
1. To copy all associated plan or layout

files to a new directory, select File>
Export> Entire Plan . The Export
Entire Plan dialog opens for you to
choose what files are copied.
3. Navigate to any folder on your system,

to an external storage device, or create a
new folder.
• Choose Export All Files to copy all
plan or layout files and all externally
You must select an empty folder for the
referenced files such as linked plan
Export Entire Plan feature to work. If
files, inserted picture files, and any you select an existing folder that is not empty,
graphics files such as textures, images, the export is cancelled.
and backdrops.
• Choosing Export Plan Files Only cop- Returning Viewer Files
ies all associated plan files and any
externally linked files and inserted pic- When customers review and annotate files
ture files, but it does not copy any using the Chief Architect Viewer, they only
graphics or pattern files. This is best need to return the .plan and/or .layout files.
used when transferring a plan or layout The associated files do not need to be
file to a computer that already has the returned.
graphics files installed.
59
Closing Plans and Views
Closing Plans and Views

Choose File> Close to close the active or Cancel to close the dialog and return to
window. If it is the last open view for a plan the window.
and you have not saved it, the program
Select File> Close All to close all currently
prompts you to save before closing. Edited
open windows.
cross section/elevation views also prompt
you to save before closing. Select Yes to
save, No to close the window without saving, Although the program warns you if you
try to exit without saving, you should get
in the habit of saving plan files before exiting.
Exiting Chief Architect

Select File> Exit to exit the program. If you When you exit from the program using File>
have not saved any open plans, you are Exit, all Autosave files and Undo files are
reminded to do so. It is better to save your automatically deleted.
work before exiting than to save on exit.
60
61
Chapter 3:
Preferences &
Default Settings
Becoming familiar with the program defaults Chapter Contents

and preferences is vital to understanding how • Defaults and Preferences
Chief Architect works and maximizing your • Default Settings
productivity. • Dynamic Defaults
• General Plan Defaults Dialog
• Reset to Defaults
If you use special settings regularly, it is
a good idea to save your settings in a • Preferences Dialog
template plan. See “To create your own tem-
plate plan” on page 52.
62
Defaults and Preferences

Default and preference settings have settings in one plan or layout file will have
important effects on how the tools in Chief no effect on other plans or layout files.
Architect function. These settings can be
Default settings are an important aspect of
customized to suit your needs and improve
template files, which determine the initial
your efficiency, so it is important to become
settings of new plan and layout files and can
familiar with them and learn how you can
be used to save you considerable time. See
best use them.
“Template Files” on page 51.
Default Settings Preferences
Default settings determine the initial
Preference settings influence the
characteristics of objects when they
overall environment of the program,
are first drawn. For example, when you place
such as what the interface looks like, how the
a base cabinet in a plan, its size, materials,
tools are accessed, the basic rules governing
front items, hardware and fill style are
how objects are drawn and edited.
determined by settings in the Base Cabinet
Defaults dialog. Unlike default settings, preferences are
global, which means that any changes that
Defaults are file-specific, which means that
you make to them will take effect in all plan
any changes that you make to the default
and layout files.
Default Settings
You can access a list of the various
default settings by selecting Edit> You can create Hotkeys to open any of
Default Settings from the menu. the defaults dialogs listed in the Default
Settings dialog. See “Hotkeys” on page 114.
63
Default Settings
Camera Defaults
Select Camera and click the Edit button or
double-click the Render Tools parent
button to display the Camera Defaults dia-
log. See “Camera Defaults Dialog” on page 742.
Dimension Defaults
Select Dimension and click the Edit button
or double-click the double-click the Dimen-
sion Tools parent button to display the
Dimension Defaults dialog. Dimension
Defaults are available in both plan and layout
files. See “Dimension Defaults and
Preferences” on page 809.
Door Defaults
Click the + beside Doors or double-click the
Cabinet Defaults
Door Tools parent button to access the
Click the + beside Cabinets to access the defaults dialogs for exterior and interior
default dialogs for the various cabinet types. doors. See “Door Defaults” on page 293.
See “Cabinet Defaults” on page 547.
Select General Cabinet and click the Edit Dormer Defaults
button to open the General Cabinet Defaults Select Dormer and click the Edit button or
dialog. See “General Cabinet Defaults” on
page 547. double-click the Auto Floating Dormer
or the Auto Dormer child button to open
CAD Defaults the Dormer Defaults dialog. See “Dormer
Select CAD and click the Edit button to
open the CAD Defaults dialog. You can also
Electrical Defaults
use the CAD Defaults button to access
the dialog if you add it to your toolbar using Select Electrical and click the Edit button or
Toolbar Customization. CAD Defaults are double-click the Electrical Tools parent
available in both plan and layout files. See button to display the Electrical Defaults dia-
“CAD Defaults Dialog” on page 875. log. See “Electrical Defaults” on page 516.
64
Floor Defaults dialog for the current floor. See “Room

Material Defaults” on page 267.
Select Floor and click the Edit button,
double-click the Floor Tools parent but- Plan and Layout Defaults
ton to open the Floor Defaults dialog for the
current floor. See “Floor Defaults Dialog” on Select Plan or Layout and click the Edit
page 353. button or double-click the Select Objects
button to open the Plan or Layout Defaults
Foundation Defaults dialog. See “General Plan Defaults Dialog”
on page 68 and “Layout Defaults” on page
Select Foundation and click the Edit button 1015.
to open the Build Foundation dialog. You
can also Build> Floors> Build Foundation
Road, Sidewalk, &
or double-click either the Foundation Driveway Defaults
Wall or Retaining Wall child button Click the + beside Roads, Sidewalks and
to open this dialog. See “Foundation Driveways or double-click the Road
Tools parent button to access the defaults
Framing Defaults dialogs for the various road tools. See “Road
and Sidewalk Defaults” on page 635.
Select Framing and click the Edit button or
• Select Road and click the Edit button,
double-click the Framing Tools parent
double-click the Road Tools parent
button to open the Framing Defaults dialog.
See “Framing Defaults” on page 461. button, or double-click the Road
child button to open the Road Defaults
Layer Sets Defaults dialog.
• Select Driveway and click the Edit but-
Select Layer Sets and click the Edit button
to open the Layer Sets Defaults dialog. See ton or double-click the Driveway
“Layer Set Defaults” on page 119. child button to open the Driveway
Defaults dialog.
Material Defaults • Select Road Marking and click the Edit
button or double-click the Road Stripe
Click the + beside Materials to access the
defaults dialogs related to materials. or Road Marking child button
to open the Road Marking Defaults dia-
Select General Materials and click the Edit log.
button to open the Material Defaults dialog.
See “Material Defaults Dialog” on page 726. • Select Sidewalk and click the Edit but-
ton or double-click the Sidewalk
Select Room Materials and click the Edit
child button to open the Sidewalk
button to open the Room Material Defaults
Defaults dialog.
65
Default Settings
Schedule Defaults and Preferences” on page 839. Text Defaults

are available in both plan and layout files.
Click the + beside Schedules or double-click
• Select Rich Text and click the Edit but-
the Schedule Tools parent button to
access a list of the default schedule dialogs. ton, double-click the Rich Text Tools
Select the type of schedule and click the Edit parent button, or double-click the Rich
button. See “Schedule Defaults” on page Text child button to open the Rich
1036. Text Defaults dialog. See “Rich Text
• Select Door Schedule and click the Edit Defaults” on page 839.
button to access the Door Schedule • Select Text and click the Edit button,
Defaults dialog.
double-click the Text Tools parent
• Select Window Schedule and click the
button, or double-click the Text child
Edit button to access the Window
button to open the Text Defaults dialog.
Schedule Defaults dialog.
See “Text Defaults” on page 839.
• Select Cabinet Schedule and click the
• Select Callouts and click the Edit button
Edit button to access the Cabinet
Schedule Defaults dialog. or double-click the Callout child but-
• Select Fixture Schedule and click the ton to display the Callout Defaults dia-
Edit button to access the Fixture log. See “Callout Defaults” on page 839.
Schedule Defaults dialog. • Select Markers and click the Edit button
• Select Furniture Schedule and click the or double-click the Marker child
Edit button to access the Furniture button to display the Marker Defaults
Schedule Defaults dialog. dialog. See “Marker Defaults” on page
• Select Electrical Schedule and click the 839.
Edit button to access the Electrical • Select Room Label and click the Edit
Schedule Defaults dialog. button to open the Room Label Defaults
• Select Room Finish Schedule and click dialog. See “Room Label Defaults” on
the Edit button to access the Room page 839.
Finish Schedule Defaults dialog. • Select Arrow and click the Edit button
• Select Plant Schedule and click the Edit or double-click the Text Line with
button to access the Plant Schedule Arrow or Leader Line child but-
Defaults dialog. ton to open the Arrow Defaults dialog.
See “Arrow Defaults” on page 840.
Text, Callout, &
Marker Defaults Wall, Railing, and
Click the + beside Text to access the various
Fencing Defaults
Text Defaults dialogs. See “Text Defaults Select General Wall and click the Edit
button or double-click the General Wall
66
Defaults toolbar button to open the Railing child button to open the
General Wall Defaults dialog. See “General Railing Defaults dialog. See “Railing
Wall Defaults” on page 215. and Deck Railing Defaults” on page 219.
• Select Interior/Exterior Wall and click • Select Fencing and click the Edit button
the Edit button or double-click the Exte- or double-click the Fencing child
rior Wall or Interior Wall child button to open the Fencing Defaults dia-
button open the Interior/Exterior Wall log. See “Fencing Defaults” on page 219.
Defaults dialog. See “Exterior/Interior
Wall Defaults” on page 216. Window Defaults
• Select Pony Wall and click the Edit but- Select Window and click the Edit button or
ton or double-click the Pony Wall double-click the Window Tools parent
child button to open the Pony Wall button to open the Window Defaults dialog.
Defaults dialog. See “Pony Wall See “Window Defaults” on page 317.
• Select Railing and click the Edit button Reset Defaults
or double-click the Straight Railing Select Edit> Reset to Defaults to open the
child button to open the Railing Defaults Reset to Defaults dialog. Use this dialog to
dialog. See “Railing and Deck Railing clear special settings made in various parts of
Defaults” on page 219. your plan. See “Reset to Defaults” on page
• Select Deck Railing and click the Edit 69.
button or double-click the Deck
Dynamic Defaults
Dynamic defaults are values that can be set
or changed globally throughout a model.
These values are found in the default
specification dialogs of most objects,
including walls, doors, cabinets and rooms.
Dynamic defaults are followed by either a
(D) in the value field or a Default check box.
You can change the value for that kind of
object and all the objects of the same type
update automatically. The exception to this To edit a dynamic default, delete the (D) or
rule is any object you edited the values for. In remove the check from Default box and type
that case, the value does not update when the desired value.
you change the dynamic default value.
67
General Plan Defaults Dialog
To reset a value back to the dynamic default, Materials are another example of an attribute
type the letter D in the field or click the that uses Dynamic Defaults. See “Material
Default checkbox. Defaults Dialog” on page 726.
General Plan Defaults Dialog

The settings in the General Plan Defaults Plan Defaults, and click the Edit button, or
dialog control basic features of the Chief double-click the Select Objects button.
Architect environment. To open this dialog,
select Edit> Default Settings , select
1 2
3 4
1 General Settings - Specify the default secting wall. Clear this box retain suffi-
functionality for a variety of general cient space for the opening’s specified
behaviors in the program. trim width.
• Check Warn Before Delete Selected • Check Fixture/Furniture Resize Enable
Item if you want the program to require to allow the resizing of library symbols.
confirmation before an item is deleted. When enabled, fixtures and furniture can
• Check Ignore Casing for Opening be resized from 1 to 2000 inches.
Resize to allow wall openings such as • Check Show Pitch as Degrees to display
doors to be positioned against an inter- the roof pitch in degrees.
68
• Chief Architect automatically calculates they are moved or resized. See “Grid Snaps”
the square footage of each floor in the on page 136.
plan and shows this number as the living • Check Use Snap Grid/Units to enable
area in floor plan view. Uncheck Show Grid Snaps.
“Living Area” to disable the display of
the Living Area label. See “Living Area” • Specify the Snap Unit you wish to use.
on page 275.
• Enter the number of Inches/MM It may be helpful to change the Snap
Unit temporarily when working with
Scrolled by Arrow Key in floor plan
large objects such as terrain or small objects
view. See “Using the Arrow Keys” on such as molding profiles.
page 732.
• Check Allow Editing in Select Home • Uncheck Show Snap Grid to turn off the
Designer Products to allow limited edit- display of the Snap Grid, a visual indica-
ing of the current plan in Version 9.0 tor of the location of the snap points.
Home Designer programs, when they • Click the Color bar to specify the Snap
become available. Grid Color. See “Color Chooser Dialog”
on page 727.
2 Specify the Allowed Angles used when
Angle Snaps are enabled. See “Angle • Check Display as Dots to display the
Snaps” on page 135. Snap Grid using dots rather than lines.
• Select 15 Degrees to enable Angle Snaps
in 15 degree increments. 4 Specify the display of the Reference
Grid.
• Select 7 1/2 Degrees and additional • Specify the Reference Grid Size.
angles to enable Angle Snaps in 7 ½
degree increments. • Check Display as Dots to display the
Reference Grid using dots rather than
You can also enter up to eight Additional lines.
Angles in the fields provided. Click the
Number Style button to specify the format You can also click Grid Snaps toggle
used to enter angles. See “Number Style/ button to turn on/off grid snapping or click
Angle Style Dialog” on page 917.
the Display Reference Grid toggle
The Snap Grid allows you to snap button to turn on/off the grid display.
3
objects to specific points on-screen as
Reset to Defaults
Select Edit> Reset to Defaults to open the This dialog allows you to clear the special
Reset to Defaults dialog. settings you have made in various parts of
your plan.
69
Preferences Dialog
roof group independently from the roof built

over other parts of the plan. Check to reset to
the default roof group, zero. See “Room
1 Specification Dialog” on page 283.
4 Roof Directives - You can set

directives describing how a roof surface
2 rises from a wall into a wall using the Roof
tab of the Wall Specification dialog. All
3
4 Roof tab items are unchecked and any value,
5 such as the roof pitch, is reset to the default
pitch. See “Wall Specification Dialog” on
page 249.
5 Wall Top Heights and Wall Bottom

Heights - Wall shape and height can be
edited in cross section/elevation views.
1 The settings can be cleared for the Check to reset wall shapes and heights.
current floor or for All Floors.
2 Floor and Ceiling Heights - Floor and If your plan behaves strangely, the cur-
ceiling heights for any room can be
rent settings may have been brought
changed in the Room Specification dialog. forward from a previous version and/or no
Check to reset the default values as specified longer be appropriate. To check for this, open
in the Floor Defaults dialog. See “Floor your plan and reset these items to their
Defaults Dialog” on page 353. defaults. Rebuild floors and ceilings to see if
the plan looks better. If so, you know what the
3 Roof Groups - You can designate a problem is. Rather than save your plan at this
different roof group for a room in the point and lose all these settings, you may
Room Specification dialog. This builds the want to investigate and find the specific set-
roof over this room and others in the same tings causing the problem and fix only those.
Preferences Dialog
The settings in the Preferences The category tree structure is similar to other
dialog are global: they apply to all Windows programs. A “+” next to a category
plan and layout files and are preserved indicates that it has subcategories. Click the
between sessions. Select Edit> Preferences “+” to make the subcategories visible; to hide
to access this dialog. them, click the “-.”
The Preferences dialog consists of panels The program remembers which panel you
which are accessed by clicking on the names last accessed and opens to that panel the next
in the Category tree along the left side. time you open the dialog.
70
Preference dialog panels: • CAD Panel

• Line Properties Panel
• Appearance Panel
• Sun Angle Panel
• Colors Panel
• Edit Panel
• Font Panel
• Behaviors Panel
• Library Browser Panel
• Snap Properties Panel
• Text & Page Setup Panel
• Material List Panel
• General Panel
• Report Style Panel
• Folders Panel
• Master List Panel
• New Plans Panel
• Categories Panel
• Layers Panel
• Render Panel
• Unit Conversions Panel
• Video Card Status Panel
• Time Tracker Panel
• Reset Options Panel
• Architectural Panel
Appearance Panel
1 6
7
2
8
3
9
4
1 When Contextual Menus are enabled, are unique to the selected object. The options
you can right-click an object and a in a contextual menu are usually the same as
contextual menu displays with options that those on the Edit toolbar.
71
Preferences Dialog
A menu of general commands displays if you the same object surface in order for the
right-click in an empty space in a view contextual menu to display: clicking on
window, away from any object. two different surfaces of the same object
is treated like two single-clicks.
2 The Status Bar at the bottom of the

main window displays information
about the current state of the program. See
“The Status Bar” on page 34.
• Check Enable to activate the Status Bar
or clear the check box to disable it.
• Check Show Screen Redraw Time to
display the number of seconds it takes to
redraw the screen. This is useful for
determining the effectiveness of the 3D
acceleration of your graphics card.
• Check Show Coordinates to display the
coordinates of your cursor at all times on
the right side of the Status Bar.
The number style for the coordinates is

controlled in the Number Style/Angle Style
dialog. See “Number Style/Angle Style
The contextual menu for a base cabinet Dialog” on page 917.
Since Chief Architect can use the right-click
as a general select, you have the option to
3 Check Show Line Weights to represent
line weights on-screen. Because of
disable or limit the contextual menus. monitor DPI, lines may appear to be much
• Check Enabled to activate contextual wider on screen than when they are printed.
menus. Clear the check box to disable Zooming closer may reflect a more accurate
contextual menus. idea of the actual line width.
• Check Click Twice to Display to require Specify the Min Display Weight, the lowest
two right-clicks on an object before the line weight possible on screen, regardless of
contextual menu displays. This allows how far you zoom out. A Minimum Display
the first right-click to be a general select. Weight of 0 is the same as 1. This setting is
See “Selecting Objects” on page 144. ignored when printing or when Print
Preview is enabled.
In 3D views, the two clicks must be on
72
• Check Plans and Layouts to double-buf-

The line weight for CAD objects may be fer in floor plan view and layouts.
defined individually through each
object’s specification dialog or globally in the • Check Elevations and Vector Views to
Layer Display Options dialog. double buffer in cross/section elevation
and Vector views.
4 Specify how Toolbars present child • Check Auto Cache to save a bitmap of
tools when a parent button is clicked. the last screen draw. This bitmap is used
• Choose Parent-Child to display child to refresh the screen if no changes are
tools as buttons at the end of the toolbar made to the model. This option is not
where the parent button resides. available on computers running Windows
Vista.
• Choose Drop Down to display child
tools when the drop-down arrow to the 8 Color Off is - Specify whether views
right of the parent button is clicked. appear in Black and White or
Grayscale when color is toggled off. Does
5 Images and Pictures - Check Always not apply to Rendered or Raytrace views.
Display in Color to display images and
See “Color On/Off” on page 757.
pictures in color, even if color is turned off in
a particular view. If you uncheck the box, 9 Specify how Vector Views are
pictures and images appear in grayscale generated. See “Rendered and Vector
when color is turned off. Views” on page 742.
• Enhanced Line Drawing - This option
6 Show Icons - Check this box to display produces superior quality Vector Views,
tool icons next to items in the menus.
but slows down the process. Remove the
7 Double Buffer Drawing - Double check mark to disable the option.
buffering means that all drawing is
done to an offscreen bitmap and then copied • Lower Interactive Quality - Check this
to the screen. The result is that the screen to speed up the generation of Vector
does not flicker, but there may be a slight Views by drawing surface edges with no
delay before individual objects appear on fill. This may be helpful when navigating
screen. This option does not affect render or a Vector view of a larger model.
raytrace views. • Lower Quality Timeout - Enter a value
in seconds for Lower Interactive Quality
to be initiated.
73
Preferences Dialog
Colors Panel
1
2
3
4
5
1 Background Color - Click the color 4 Selection Fill Color - Click the color
bar to open the Color Chooser dialog. bar to specify a color for selected
See “Color Chooser Dialog” on page 727. objects. The color may change to ensure that
selected objects are always visible, so this
Select the background color for all views
may not always be the color you expect.
except some rendered views. See “Rendering
Techniques” on page 785.
If the move color and the handle fill
The background color for some rendered color are similar, it may be difficult to
views is set in the 3D Settings dialog. See distinguish between active and inactive
“Backdrop Tab” on page 748. points. The colors should be sufficiently dis-
similar to avoid confusion between active and
2 Move Color - Click the color bar to inactive points.
select the color of the lines that
represent object(s) as they are being moved.
5 Specify the Editing Transparency,
which is the degree to which the
3 Handle Fill Color - Click the color bar selection fill and edit handles are transparent.
to select the color for the edit handles
for selected objects. The default value is 20%.
Font Panel
The Font panel controls the conversion of
text in legacy plans when they are opened in
74
Chief Architect as well as the text used in

materials lists.
1
2
3
1 Choose Legacy Text Conversion, Legacy Text and Dimension Conversion

Legacy Dimension Conversion, or
Materials to define the font for that use. settings only affect plans from previous
versions when they are opened in Chief
Legacy Text Conversion sets the default Architect. Set these values to the default font
font for text created in previous versions of that you used in previous versions before
Chief Architect. See “Character Size” on opening legacy files.
page 840.
Legacy Dimension Conversion sets the 2 Click the arrow to select a font for the
specified use. See “Fonts and
fonts for dimensions created in previous Alphabets” on page 840.
versions of Chief Architect. See
“Dimensions” on page 808. 3 Select one or more font styles to apply
to the specified use.
Materials sets the default font for the
Materials List and Master List created in 4 Sample text displays the selected font
previous versions of Chief Architect. See and font style.
“Materials Lists” on page 1048. Text size is set individually in the Text
Specification dialog or globally in the Text
75
Preferences Dialog
Defaults dialog. See “Text, Callouts &

Markers” on page 838.
Library Browser Panel

The Library Browser panel controls the
appearance of the Library Browser window.
See “The Library Browser” on page 683.
1
2
3
1 View options control the display of the 2 Preview Pane - Specify how selected
main sections of the Library Browser. library items look in the Preview Pane.
• Hide Selection Pane - Check to hide the • Render Display - Library items previews
pane that displays objects in a selected display textures and appear as they do in
library or library folder. rendered views. See “Rendered and Vec-
• Hide Preview Pane - Check to hide the tor Views” on page 742.
pane that shows a preview of a selected • Vector Display - Library item previews
object. are line-based and display patterns as
• Show Status Bar - Check to display the they do in Vector Views.
Library Browser Status Bar.
76
3 Selection Pane View items control the • Vertical - Displayed sections of the
display style of objects in the Selection Library Browser are divided vertically.
Pane. • Horizontal - Displayed sections are
• Tiled to Fit Window - Select to display divided horizontally.
all objects in a library or library folder. If • Stacked - Displayed sections are divided
there are many objects, they appear very both horizontally and vertically.
small.
• Scrollable List - Select to display all 5 Disable Docking - Check to prevent
the Library Browser from docking to
library objects at the highlighted level on
the sides of the Chief Architect window. See
a scrollable list.
“Docking the Library and Project Browser”
• Show Names in Selection Pane - Check on page 685.
to display the names of the objects in the
Selection Pane. Restore Position/Size Defaults - Click to
restore the original size and position of the
4 Preview Pane - Selection Pane Library and Project Browser: docked on the
Layout - Select a radio button to right side of the Chief Architect window.
change the appearance of the Library
Browser.
Text & Page Setup Panel

The Text & Page Setup panel controls some
text objects behaviors as well as the Page Legacy Plan and Layout Page Setup
Setup information for legacy plan and layout settings only affect files from previous
files. versions when they are opened in Version
X2. You should set these values to the default
font that you used in previous versions of
Chief Architect before opening legacy files.
See “Whats New in Chief Architect” on page
1064.
77
Preferences Dialog
1 Uncheck Text Specification Enter layout file created in an earlier version of

Key to close the Text and Rich Text Chief Architect. See “Page Setup Dialog” on
Specification dialogs when the Enter key is page 1004
pressed. When checked, a new line of text is
created when Enter is pressed. See “Text, 4 Default Designer Information - Click
the Define button to enter designer
Callouts & Markers” on page 838.
information that applies to all plans drawn in
2 Click the Legacy Plan Page Setup Chief Architect. This default may be
button to open the Page Setup dialog. overridden for individual plans. See
These settings apply whenever you open a “Designer Information” on page 925.
plan, or elevation, or CAD detail created in
an earlier version of Chief Architect. See 5 Leader Lines - Specify the Number of
“Page Setup Dialog” on page 1004. Segments that text Leader Lines
have. Changes to this setting only affects
3 Click the Legacy Layout Page Setup subsequently drawn Leader Lines: existing
button to open the Page Setup dialog. lines are not affected.
These settings applied whenever you open a
78
General Panel
The General panel contains settings that affect
file management and program updates.
1 6
2 7
3 8
5 9
1 To use Auto Save, select the Enable 2 File Locking - Choose whether or not
check box and enter a value greater to lock .plan and .layout files when
than zero to specify the frequency in minutes they are open. File Locking prevents another
that auto save files are created. Auto save program or copy of Chief Architect from
files are stored in the archive folder. opening and modifying the same file at the
same time.
Note: Even with auto save active, you should • Select Use File Locking to lock files.
frequently save your work to the hard drive by
• Select Disable File Locking to disable
selecting File> Save.
the feature. You should not disable the
feature unless you have conflicts with file
In the event that your computer shuts down
locking.
unexpectedly, you can recover your most
recent work by opening the auto save file
3 Recent File List - Specify the
created by the program. See “Auto Save maximum number of files to list at the
Files” on page 49. bottom of the File menu and in the Startup
Options dialog. Additional files are included
79
Preferences Dialog
if you increase the value. You can open any

6 Check the box to Enable Thumbnail
of the files in this list by selecting them, Images. This only applies to
making the list a quick way to access your automatically created thumbnails. Even if
most recent work. this option is disabled, you can still create a
thumbnail manually.
4 Undo - Click in the Enable check box
to enable Undos and Redos. Select a radio button for Small or Large
thumbnails. Large thumbnails provide a
Maximum Undos - Specify how many
higher quality image.
levels of Undo and Redo you want available,
from 1 to 100. Undo files are saved in the
7 Auto Archive Files - Select an archive
Undo Directory. option. Every time a model is saved by
Record undo state only if idle longer than - clicking the Save button, selecting File>
Use this setting to control how often undo Save from the menu, or pressing Ctrl + S on
states are recorded. If set to 0 milliseconds, the keyboard the current archive file is
an undo state is recorded every time a change overwritten. See “Archive Files” on page 48.
is made to a plan. Select Hourly to save and append archive
If set to a number larger than 0, an undo state files based on an hourly format.
is recorded if the specified amount of time Select Daily to save and append archive files
has elapsed since the last change was made. based on a daily format.
Depending on the time specified and the
speed work is being done, multiple changes Select Previous Save to archive only the
might be reversed with one undo. most recently saved file, unappended.
This setting can have a significant effect on 8 Auto Archive Warning - Enter the
the performance of the undo feature when number of files that must be in the
working with large plans. Archive directory for the Manage Archives
warning to display. Enter 0 to disable the
5 Check For Program Updates- Check warning. See “Manage Archives” on page
Enable and specify a frequency in days 49.
to check for program updates. By default
Chief Architect will check for program 9 Startup Options- Check Show
updates once a day, whenever the program is Options at Startup to open the Startup
launched. Options dialog when Chief Architect is
launched. See “Startup Options” on page 27.
Folders Panel
Chief Architect stores many support files in You do not need to change default locations
various folders on your computer. The under normal circumstances, but sometimes
default locations of these directories are it may be preferable to locate certain files in
listed and can be redefined on the Folders another location. To specify a new default
panel if necessary.
80
folder for a particular purpose, click the

Browse button to the right of that item. Changing the settings on the Folders
panel can result in unexpected program
functionality.
My Data Folder If you move this folder on your computer

without changing its default location,
Important user-specific information is saved however, the program will automatically
in a folder on your computer called Chief replace it using default information from the
Architect Data. Chief Architect installation folder. When
This folder contains custom libraries, this occurs, customized user settings will not
toolbars, template files, archive files, and be used and custom user libraries will not be
other important data and is located in My available.
Documents by default. See “Chief Architect
Data” on page 44. Temporary File Folders
While you cannot change the name of this By default, temporary files and undo files are
directory, you can change its default location stored in the same folder: by default this is
on the Folders panel. the Windows Temporary Directory. If you
81
Preferences Dialog
wish to use a different folder, you must Chief Architect will not let you save your
define a directory on a hard drive with work to or open files saved in the Temporary
sufficient space to hold these files. or Undo folder.
You can specify any directory as your Chief
Architect temporary folder, but you should Shared Folders
neither relocate the Windows Temporary You can share Libraries, Textures, Images,
Directory nor use it for anything other than Backdrops and Patterns with other users by
temporary files. copying these items into the appropriate
Shared Folder in Windows Explorer. Click
the Browse button to select a location on
your computer that other users can access.
New Plans Panel
1 New Plans - Select the Imperial Units different set of templates for imperial plans
or Metric Units radio button to and metric plans.
determine the units used in your new plans.
When Chief Architect is first opened on a
Once you create a new plan, the units of that
computer, it refers to the Windows system
plan cannot be changed. You can specify a
82
settings to determine whether to use Imperial Click the Browse button to select the new
or metric units. template.
If a template file is not specified or cannot be Layout Template - Displays the template
found, the program starts new plans in the file the program uses when you start a new
selected units but uses a set of basic system layout file. Select a new default layout
defined defaults for new plans. You should template by typing in a new file pathname or
always specify a template plan and layout, as click the Browse button to select a new file.
the system defined defaults are unlikely to
For information about creating templates,
meet your drawing needs.
see “Template Files” on page 51.
Be sure that you use an imperial plan 2 Open/Save As Directory - Control

how the program behaves when a new
for your imperial template file and a
metric plan for your metric template file. plan is opened or an existing plan is saved.
When a new plan is created, the plan is cre- Use Last Directory refers the program to the
ated in the units of the template file regard-
directory last used to save or open a plan file.
less of the units setting.
Use This Directory refers the program to a
particular location specified by you.
Plan Template - Displays the template file
the program uses when you start a new plan.
83
Preferences Dialog
Layers Panel
1 Layers were managed differently in the default names used in Chief Architect
earlier versions of Chief Architect. The Version X2.
options on the Layers panel determine how
If you would like your legacy plans to look
layers are treated when you open plans
like they did in previous versions of Chief
created in earlier versions.
Architect, uncheck Purge Unused Layers,
Check Purge Unused Layers to delete any check Keep All Layer Numbers, and
layers that do not have a name and contain no uncheck Reset Default Layer Names.
objects.
Note: When loading legacy plans, there may
Check Keep All Layer Numbers to keep all be a noticeable delay while converting these
layers that were on the System and User tabs layers.
in version 9 and use their layer numbers as
names.
2 If you check Modify Name In All
Check Reset Default Layer Names to reset Layer Sets and then change the name
the names of layers that were on the of a layer in one layer set, it will be changed
Architectural and System tabs in version 9 to in all layer sets. Clear the checkmark if you
want name changes to only affect a single
layer set.
84
Unit Conversions Panel

In many places throughout Chief Architect, drawing is only scaled at the time you print
you can choose what units are used with it. This means that if you import a drawing
different objects. The program automatically that is already scaled, you must convert the
calculates conversions based on the data on units using this panel. You must add the units
this panel. here for them to be available in the Import
Drawing Wizard.
These conversions are also useful when you
import drawings. Chief Architect draws The default unit conversions are locked and
plans in real world measurements. When you cannot be changed, but custom conversions
draw an object, it appears small on screen, can be added to the list.
but the program sees it as actual size. The
1 List of unit conversions available. 3 Add, Edit, Delete, or Copy the unit
conversions. Certain unit conversions
2 Sample - This area shows how the are locked and cannot be edited or deleted.
selected unit converts to a sampling of
similar units. Use this to verify that any unit If you click Add, Edit or Copy, the Add Unit
conversion you add is correct. Conversion dialog displays.
85
Preferences Dialog
1
2
3
1 Unit Name - Type the name of the unit. 4 Multiply by gives you a number to
Names must be unique. multiply by to convert to the unit you
select from the drop-down list. A
Names can include any characters, as well as
measurement type must be selected before
spaces. Bear in mind, though, that names of
the list is populated.
units for measuring length that have numbers
in them may be unusable if entered in some
To create a new unit conversion
dialogs in the program.
Create a unit conversion for furlongs, a unit
2 Default Unit - Check this box to of measurement equal to 660 feet that
display this unit in places that present
originated in England.
lists of available units. For example, if you
have inches as units and make inches a
1. Click Add on the Unit Conversions
default, inches appear on the list when you
page of the Preferences dialog to open
are given a choice of units, such as in the
the Add Unit Conversion dialog.
Import Drawing Wizard. In other places,
such as the Materials List, all units are listed. 2. Type Furlong into the unit name dialog.
3. Select Length in the measurement type.
3 Measurement Type specifies what the
unit measures. Select the appropriate 4. Type 660 in the Multiply by field.
radio button. 5. Select ft in the combo box.
6. Click OK to close the dialog.
86
Time Tracker Panel
Check Automatically Start Timer on File Check Display Idle Timeout Dialog to warn
Open to begin logging time whenever a file when a plan is considered idle.
is opened. If this is not checked you must
You can enter or change the Default User
click the Start Time Logging button to Name.
begin logging.
For more information, see “Time Tracker” on
Check Stop timer if idle for __ minutes, page 922.
and enter the number of minutes to stop
logging time when a plan has been idle.
87
Preferences Dialog
Architectural Panel
1 Select the desired default behaviors for 554, “Displaying Doors” on page 295, or
selected Walls. “Displaying Windows” on page 325.
Check Show Same Wall Type Handles to
3 Check Stair Sections Move
display edit handles on selected walls that Independently to allow stair sections
draw new walls of the same type when connected by landings to move separately,
dragged. See “Same Wall Type Edit without moving the entire staircase.
Handles” on page 232.
4 Select the desired Skylight Ceiling
Check Select Room Before Wall in 3D to Hole Default behavior.
select the room defined by a wall when you
If you select Skylights Automatically
click on the wall in 3D views. See “Selecting
Generate Ceiling Holes, the program
automatically generates a ceiling hole for a
2 Check Reverse Opening Indicators to new skylight.
change the direction that opening
Select Manually Edit Ceiling Hole
indicators point for doors, windows, and
Polylines to create your own ceiling holes.
cabinets. See “Displaying Cabinets” on page
88
CAD Panel
The CAD panel contains settings that define
how CAD blocks and other objects behave.
1 CAD Blocks - These settings determine dialog when a new CAD block is created.
the default fill style behavior for CAD See “General Tab” on page 915.
blocks. See “CAD Blocks” on page 912.
• Check Always use ’By Object’ for CAD
block fill style to retain the fill patterns
of the component objects of CAD blocks.
When checked, all settings that would
otherwise affect the fill style of a CAD
block in its specification dialog are
ignored. See “CAD Block Specification
Dialog” on page 915. Checked Unchecked
• Check Use ’By Object’ when creating

new CAD blocks to have By Object
2 Options - These settings control the
editability of polylines, polyline-like
checked in the CAD Block Specification objects such as walls connected to form a
room, and splines.
89
Preferences Dialog
• Check Edit Object Parts to edit the indi- • Check Advanced Splines to enable the
vidual components of a polyline or advanced spline setting as the default
polyline-like object. This functionality editing behavior for all subsequently
can also be accessed by clicking the Edit drawn splines. You can also enable this
Object Parts button. See “Edit function for an individual spline by click-
Object Parts” on page 132. ing the Advanced Splines edit but-
ton. See “Advanced Splines” on page
170.
Line Properties Panel

The Line Properties panel controls the
appearance of CAD lines.
Endcap Length (Pixels) - The beginning can be placed to eliminate this problem.
and end of CAD lines that are not solid are Specify the number of pixels for endcap
sometimes difficult to distinguish. Endcaps length.
90
Sun Angle Panel
Define a default Latitude, Longitude and See “Sun Angles” on page 776.
Time Zone used when creating Sun Angles.
91
Preferences Dialog
Edit Panel
The settings on the Edit panel of the
Preferences dialog control the appearance
of the cursor and selection behavior of edit
handles.
1 Use a cursor with Cross Hairs in Cross hair size is specified as a percentage of
different view types and control its window width. Specify Size (% of Window
appearance. Width) as 100% to extend the cross hairs
across the entire screen.
Check Enable in Plan and Cross Section to
use a cross hair cursor in floor plan, cross Set the Aperture Size, measured in pixels.
section, and elevation views. This option is The aperture is the space where the cross
checked by default. hairs meet. A value of 0 makes the cross
hairs meet at a point. Larger numbers leave a
Check Enable in Perspective Views to use a
gap in the center.
cross hair cursor in perspective camera views
and overviews.
2 Specify the desired Selection settings,
which affect how objects are selected
Click the color bar to open the Color
and their appearance.
Chooser dialog and specify the color of the
cross hairs.
92
Enter an Edit Handle Size in pixels. The edit

3 Specify program behavior when using
handles are twice this number of pixels plus Marquee Select. See “Marquee Select”
one. For example, the default value is 3, on page 146.
which results in a handle that is 7 x 7 pixels
(3 x 2=6, and 6 + 1=7). A value of 1 results • Select Select Intersected Objects to
in a handle that is 3 x 3 pixels. select any objects intersected by or
located within the marquee.
Enter a value, in pixels, for Edit Handle
Tolerance to specify how close to an edit • Select Select Contained Objects to
handle you must click in order to select it. select only objects located entirely within
The default value is 0. the marquee. This option provides the
best results in most situations.
Check (S)tart and (E)nd Indicators to
display an S and an E at the start and end • Select Select Objects by Center to
points of the selected edge of a CAD-based select only objects whose center points
object. This can make it easier to edit the are located within the marquee.
selected edge in the object’s specification
dialog. See “Selected Edge” on page 145. You can add the Selection Modes tools
to your toolbars. See “To add a button
to a toolbar” on page 109.
Behaviors Panel
The settings on the Behaviors panel of the
Preferences dialog define basic editing
behaviors of CAD and architectural objects.
1 2
1 Rotate/Resize About defines the point or resizes about. See “Rotate/Resize About”
an object or a group of objects rotates on page 132.
93
Preferences Dialog
• Select Object Center to rotate or resize Rotate Jump defines the angle an object or
the selection about its center point. group of objects jumps to when it is rotated.
Object Center is the default setting. It overrides the angle snaps set in Plan
• Select Current Point to rotate the object Defaults. If you set this to zero, the angle
about the current CAD point instead. snaps set under Plan Defaults are used.
Rotate about Rotate about

Object Center Current Point
To resize a CAD object about a current point, Box rotating about Current
select the Resize Edit Type. Point with Jump set to 45°
This function can also be accessed by 2 Select one of the four Edit Type
selecting Edit> Edit Behaviors> options. For detailed information about
the different edit types and how they affect
Resize . See “Edit Behaviors” on page
different objects, see “Edit Behaviors” on
137.
page 137.
If Concentric is selected, specify the desired
Jump increment.
3 The Primary Movement Methods

control the directions that you can
move objects using their edit handles.
Concentric Resize About • Select Orthogonal to move an object
Resize Current Point perpendicular to any of its edges.
• Select Polar to move an object at
Allowed Angles.
94
Snap Properties Panel

The settings on the Snap Properties panel of
the Preferences dialog control the behavior
of Object Snaps as well as the appearance of
snap indicators. See “Object Snaps” on page
133.
1 3
1 Check any combination of object

snapping options. You can also turn
these options on an off with the toggle
buttons on the toolbar. Endpoint and midpoint snaps
Endpoint - Enables snapping to the
Center - Enables snapping to the
ends of lines, arcs, splines and other
center of cabinets, fixtures, furniture,
objects.
as well as circles and arcs.
Midpoint - Enables snapping to the
midpoint of an object such as a line or
Note: Center snapping only works for arcs
arc. For objects such as boxes, you can snap and circles if Show Arc Centers and Ends is
to the midpoint of any side of the box. turned on. See.“Aligning Arc Centers” on
page 183.
95
Preferences Dialog
Quadrant - Enables snapping to the

2 Check any combination of extension
left, right, top, or bottom of an object. anchor options. You can also use the
Only used for arcs and circles. toggle buttons on the toolbar.
Tangent Extensions - Enables
snapping to a point tangent to the
point where the extension anchor sits.
Quadrant snaps
On Object - Enables snapping to any

point on the selected object, including
CAD objects and cabinets.
Tangent extension
Perpendicular Extensions - Enables
snapping to a point perpendicular to
the point where the extension anchor sits.
On object snaps
Points/Markers - Allows you to snap

to any temporary points you may have
placed, as well as callouts and markers.
Points/Markers snaps
Intersection - Enables snapping to the Perpendicular extension

intersection of two objects, such as the
Orthogonal Extensions - Enables
intersection of a line with another line.
snapping to a point on a 90-degree
Intersection snapping also snaps extension
axis from the extension anchor.
lines to objects, and allows you to snap two
extension lines to each other.
Orthogonal extension
Intersection snaps
96
3 Options - Specify the number of Specify the Maximum Bump Distance

extension line anchors that can display (pixels), which is the distance that a selected
at one time by changing the Objects in object must be dragged to override bumping
History setting. and move past an obstructing object.
The Snap Distance controls how far your the Check the box beside Angle Snaps to enable
cursor can be from a snap point for the snap snapping to allowed angles. See “Angle
to occur. It is measured in screen pixels. This Snaps” on page 135.
setting also controls the minimum length of
Check Snap Cabinets After Paste to make
camera and cross section/elevation lines of
the cabinets snap together after you paste
sight. When working with very small objects,
them.
you may find it helful to reduce this value;
when working with very large objects, you
4 Control the appearance of Snap
may find it helpful to increase it. The default Indicators.
value is 12. See “Creating Camera Views” on
Specify an Indicator Size in pixels.
page 750.
Click the color bar to select an Indicator
Check the box beside Bumping/Pushing to
Color and an Extension Color from the
enable bumping and pushing. See User’s
Color Chooser dialog. See “Color Chooser
Guide, “Bumping/Pushing” on page 178.
Dialog” on page 727.
97
Preferences Dialog
Material List Panel

The Material List panel controls which prefixes are listed here. They are defined by
categories are included in Materials Lists. the program and cannot be changed.
The names of all categories and their ID
When a material is entered in the Materials new materials list generated. Before you
List, the program decides what category it hide a category, make sure you know what
goes in and assigns it an ID, which is the items are listed within it.
prefix followed by a number. EX1 would be
the first exterior trim piece entered in the
It is usually better to remove categories
Materials List for a particular plan. from individual plan lists in the Layer
Include These Categories - Check the Display Options dialog, rather than globally.
See “Layer Display Options Dialog” on page
categories you want to to include in every
121.
98
Report Style Panel

The Report Style panel specifies the Tools> Display Options from within
appearance of the Materials List. This that Materials List.
information can also be specified
individually per Materials List by choosing
1 Include These Columns - Check the narrow or broaden your query when
columns that should be included in the searching the Master List.
Materials List.
Grid - Choose whether or not grid
3
Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons lines display in the materials list. If you
to change the order that columns appear. To want lines, choose to have horizontal,
change the order, select one or more items in vertical, or both. If the lines are turned off,
the list and click the button. The selected they do not show on-screen or in print. You
columns move up or down by one in the list. can select Solid Lines for the grids instead of
dotted lines.
For a more detailed description of Materials
Lists, see “Materials Lists” on page 1048.
4 Background Colors can be set for
even and odd numbered lines.
2 When Querying Suppliers &
Manufacturers - Select an option to
99
Preferences Dialog
Master List Panel

The Master List panel specifies how the information for materials. You can maintain
Master List(s) for materials appears. Master Multiple Master Lists, but only one may be
Lists contain price and manufacturer used at any given time.
3
4
1 Include These Columns - Check each subsequently opened plans when a materials
column to include it in the Master list is generated from any model.
materials list.
3 Press Browse to select a different
Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons Master List. Navigate the directory
to change the order of columns. To change structure until you find the new Master List
the order, select one or more items in the list to be used, select it, and click OK.
and click the button. The selected columns
move up or down by one in the list. See 4 Press New to create a new Master List.
Name and save it in the location of your
“Materials Lists” on page 1048.
choice. When you create a new Master List,
2 Master List File - The name and it is blank until you build a materials list and
pathname of the Master List currently enter prices, supplier or manufacturer
referenced is shown. It is referenced for all information. The Master List is saved
automatically when you close.
100
Categories Panel
The Categories panel allows you to Subcategories can also be included in
customize the organization of the Materials schedules. See “Adding Columns to
List by creating subcategories under the pre- Schedules” on page 1039.
defined Materials List categories. See
“Organizing Materials Lists” on page 1050.
1 2
To create or modify a subcategory The Sub Cat name can be any sequence of
characters, up to 12 characters in length.
1 Select a Category from the list.
5 Doors, Windows, Cabinets, Fixtures,
2 Existing subcategories display here. Furniture, and Electrical objects can
3 To Add, Edit or Delete a subcategory, generate schedules. Subcategories for these
select it and click the appropriate objects can appear as column headings. Type
button. Clicking Add or Edit opens the Sub- a Column Heading for Schedules.
Category dialog.
In the example above, two subcategories are
4 In the Sub Category dialog, type a added to the Windows category: GLZ
name of the subcategory to appear in (Glazing) and EXT (Exterior Trim).
the SubCat column of the Materials List.
101
Preferences Dialog
Render Panel
The Render panel settings control how 3D Previews and Final Views. See “Preview vs
views are generated, particularly Render Final View” on page 774.
2
3
1 The General Options settings affect that sometimes result along surface
both Render Previews and Final Views. edges, producing cleaner lines. Not avail-
• Optimizations On saves rendering data able if your video card does not support
to your video card, which speeds up ren- this feature. See “OpenGL and Hard-
dering time. This option may cause prob- ware” on page 741.
lems if the rendering data for your model • Zoom Using Field of View directs the
exceeds the video card’s memory. program to zoom in 3D views by adjust-
ing the camera’s Field of View, which can
If your computer stops responding when result in perspective distortion. When
rendering, try unchecking Optimizations unchecked, zooming in 3D views is done
On. This slows down rendering time con- by cropping or expanding the view’s
siderably, though, so if the problem is not extents. See “Zooming” on page 763.
solved, leave this check box selected. • Soft Shadows displays shadows with soft
• Hardware Edge Smoothing uses the edges instead of hard edges. This feature
video card to remove the jagged edges
102
is only used when Show Shadows and ows. They are typically used only for
Smooth Edges are also used. Final Views. See “Lighting” on page 775.
• Surface Backdrop generates the back- • Use Transparency allows materials such
drop image using hardware acceleration. as window glass to display effects. For
For some graphics cards, this option some video cards, rendering may be
improves rendering speed considerably. slowed when this feature is selected.
• OpenGL Vector View directs the pro- • Use Textures controls whether or not
gram to generate Vector views using surfaces are rendered with textures. This
OpenGL hardware acceleration. only affects surfaces with materials that
have assigned textures. When textures are
turned off, surfaces are rendered using
Note: If OpenGL Vector View is not selected,
you can create Vector Views but cannot apply the color assigned to the material, but not
any of the other Rendering Techniques to the texture. See “Mapping Patterns and
them. See “Rendering Techniques” on page Textures” on page 714.
785.
Textures can also be turned on or off in
The Preview Options settings affect most rendered view by selecting 3D>
2
only Render Previews. Camera View Options> Toggle Tex-
• Hardware Texture Filtering uses your tures .
video card to filter textures and improve
• Use Triangles divides large surfaces,
their appearance: noticeably, on surfaces
such as walls, floors, and ceilings, into
angled away from the camera. In some
small triangles. This feature enhances
rare instances, this may slow rendering
lighting effects when point or spot light
time somewhat. Not supported by some
sources are used. Triangles are not used
video cards.
by the Enhanced Lighting, Technical
• Smooth Faces generates smooth curved Illustration or Vector View techniques.
surfaces. It uses new surface normals to
• Max Triangle Size controls the size of
alter the lighting effects on surfaces,
the surface triangles modeled by the pro-
making them appear curved, even though
gram. Lighting looks better with smaller
it does not alter the shape of the surfaces.
triangles, but rendering takes longer. See
• Show Images controls the display of “Rendering Tips” on page 773.
images, such as plants, cars and people,
in rendered views. See “Displaying The initial settings for Previews and Final
Images” on page 935. Views are 60” (1500 mm) and 24” (600
• Show Shadows controls whether or not mm), respectively. The minimum value is
shadows display. Shadows are extremely 6" (150 mm).
complex to calculate and slow down ren- • Software Edge Smoothing removes the
dering speed significantly, particularly jagged edges that sometimes result along
when multiple lights are set to cast shad- surface edges, producing cleaner lines.
Use the slide bar or text field to specify
103
Preferences Dialog
how much jagged edge lines should be

3 The Final View Options settings are
smoothed. exactly the same as the Preview
Options, but affect Final Views instead of
Inital Software Edge Smoothing settings Render Previews. See “Final Views” on page
for Previews and Final Views are 0% and 758.
80%, respectively.
Video Card Status Panel

The Video Card Status panel displays this says “Installed Client Driver.” If it does
information about your video card, including not, it says “No Hardware Acceleration.”
the vendor and the version of OpenGL it There is a significant difference in speed
uses. See “OpenGL and Hardware” on page between rendering with acceleration and
741. without.
This information may be important if you are The Max Lights value indicates how many
having problems generating 3D views. lights you can have turned on at any given
time when generating a 3D view. This value
Notice the information following the
should be 8 or higher, depending on your
Acceleration label. If your video card
video card. See “Lighting” on page 775.
supports hardware acceleration for OpenGL,
104
Reset Options Panel
If message boxes have been suppressed, you with the program. For the reset to take effect,
can make them display again by clicking you will need to restart the program.
Reset Message Boxes.
Click the Reset Preferences button to restore Resetting all preferences to default can
all preferences to those that originally came be a drastic step if you have made
many changes to your defaults and should be
done with caution.
105
Chapter 4:
Toolbars &
Hotkeys
Two of the most efficient ways to access Chapter Contents

Chief Architect’s tools are the toolbars and • Toolbar Arrangement
keyboard shortcuts, also referred to as • Customizing Toolbars
hotkeys. • Toolbar Configurations
Toolbars are organized into configurations, • Restoring Toolbars
which are basically collections of multiple • Hotkeys
toolbars arranged for use during specific
drawing tasks. Within a given toolbar
configuration, buttons are arranged so that
similar tools are located near one another.
Both toolbars and hotkeys can be customized
to suit your workflow.
A complete list of Chief Architect’s tools can
be found in “Menus & Toolbar Buttons” on
page 1090.
106
Toolbar Arrangement
Chief Architect installs a set of Toolbar display its “child” buttons to the right. See
Configurations, which determines what tools “Appearance Panel” on page 71.
are initially included in the toolbars, as well
as where these toolbars are located.
Toolbar Preferences You can turn off the display of toolbars

entirely by selecting Tools> Toolbars &
Toolbars can be viewed in Drop - Down or Hotkeys> Hide Toolbars.
Parent - Child arrangement. Drop - Down
toolbar buttons have an arrow to the right of Moving Toolbars
the button that accesses additional, related
tools. You can, if you wish, move any toolbar to a
different location. Toolbars can be docked to
any side of the program window, or they can
be undocked and left floating. Undocked
toolbars can also be moved outside of the
program window.
Toolbars are saved between program
sessions. To restore the original toolbar
locations, as well as their display, click the
Alternatively, you can use Chief Architect’s Reset Toolbars button in the Toolbar
Parent - Child toolbar arrangement. In this Customization dialog. See “Toolbar Tab” on
arrangement, you select a “parent” button to page 110.
Customizing Toolbars
You can create custom toolbars as well as • Add and remove buttons from toolbars.
entire custom toolbar configurations in the • Specify which of the available toolbars
Toolbar Customization dialog. In this display in different view types.
dialog, you can:
• Select the active toolbar configuration.
Toolbar Customization Dialog

Select Tools> Toolbars & Hotkeys>
Customize Toolbars to open this dialog.
107
Tools Tab
The Tools tab allows you to add or remove
buttons from your toolbars.
1 4
5
Adding Toolbar Buttons

You can use the Empty Space button in
1 Select the type of View you would like your toolbars as a spacer.
to add toolbar buttons in. As you select
various views, the tools available change.
5 Click on a button in the “Main Toolbar
Buttons” area to display its child
2 A description of the selected button buttons in this Child Buttons area. If no
displays here.
child buttons display, the button you selected
3 Check Sort Alphabetically to sort the is not a parent tool. See “Parent and Child
tools in alphabetical order rather than Tools” on page 31.
the order they appear on the toolbars.
In the image above, the Cabinet Tools
4 A list of the Main Toolbar Buttons parent button is selected under “Main
available for the selected View displays
Toolbar Buttons” and its child tools display
here. Click on a button to display any child
under “Child Buttons”.
buttons to the right and a description at the
lower left of the dialog. See “Parent and Child tools are permanently associated with
Child Tools” on page 31. the parent tool. If, for example, you add the
Cabinet Tools parent button to a toolbar,
108
its child tools will always display whenever 2. Select the first button that you want on
it is selected. An individual child tool can, the toolbar from the Main Toolbar But-
however, be placed on a toolbar by itself. tons or Child Buttons areas.
3. Click and drag the button out of the dia-
To add a button to a toolbar log box and drop it:.
1. Select the View type that you want to • In an empty section of the program
add a toobar button in. window border to create a new toolbar
2. Select the desired button or its parent docked at that location.
from the Main Toolbar Buttons list. • In the drawing area to create a new,
undocked toolbar.
3. If the desired button is a child button,
select it from the Child Buttons list. 4. Additional buttons can be added to this
new toolbar.
4. Click and drag the button you wish to
add to a toolbar out of the dialog box. An undocked toolbar can be docked, or vice
• Drop it onto an existing toolbar to add versa, at any time.
the button to that toolbar.
• Drop it away from an existing toolbar Removing Tools from Toolbars
to create a new toolbar. The selected To remove a button from a toolbar, select
button is first in the new toolbar. The Tools> Toolbars & Hotkeys> Customize
new toolbar is named with the current Toolbars to open the Toolbar
view followed by a number. Customization dialog. With this dialog
open, click and drag the button off its toolbar.
To create a new toolbar
1. Select the View type to which you want You can only remove a button from a
to add a new toobar. toolbar when the Toolbar Customization
dialog is open.
• If you select All Views, your new tool-
bar will display in all views.
Buttons cannot be added to or removed from
• You can add any buttons you like to an
the Edit toolbar. See “Menus & Toolbar
All Views toolbar; however, not all
buttons will necessarily be available
for use in all views.
109
Toolbar Tab
The Toolbar tab allows you to manage your
individual toolbars.
2
1 3
4
5
1 Select a type of View to display the Reset Toolbars is only available if a

toolbars available for use in it. .toolbar.bak file with the same name as the
toolbar configuration file exists. See
2 The toolbars available for the selected “Restoring Toolbars” on page 113.
View display here. Select a toolbar by
clicking on its name.
Clicking on the Reset Toolbars button
• If the selected toolbar is not active, the deletes any toolbar customization you
Activate button is available. Click Acti- have done.
vate to make the selected toolbar active.
• Click Rename to rename the selected 4 Display Tool Tips - Check this to show
toolbar. Tool Tips when you move the cursor
over buttons.
• Click Delete to remove the selected tool-
bar from the list. A deleted toolbar is no 5 Lock Toolbars - Check the box to lock
longer available. toolbars in their current position on
screen.
3 Click Reset Toolbars to restore all the
toolbars to their original configuration.
110
Configurations Tab
The Configurations tab allows you to add, configurations. See “Toolbar
remove and switch between toolbar Configurations” on page 112.
1 2
3
4
5
1 A list of toolbar configurations displays 5 Switch To - Click to switch to the

here. Select a configuration before selected toolbar configuration. You can
clicking the Remove, Copy, or Switch To also right-click on any toolbar and select a
buttons. configuration from the menu, or click a
Toolbar Configuration button.
2 Add - Click to browse for a toolbar
configuration file and add it to the list.
6 The location of the Current Toolbars
Folder displays here. It can be
3 Remove - Click to remove the selected specified in the Preferences dialog. See
toolbar configuration. This removes the
“Folders Panel” on page 80.
configuration from the list but does not
delete the configuration file permanently.
Note: If you customize your toolbars, it is a
Copy - Click to create a copy of the good idea to back up your toolbar configura-
4 tion files (*.toolbar). See “Chief Architect
selected toolbar configuration.
Data” on page 44.
111
Toolbar Configurations
Toolbar Configurations
The Chief Architect program window has • CAD Configuration shows the tools
limited space for toolbar buttons. How many needed for CAD drawings.
can be shown depends on your monitor’s size
and screen resolution settings. • The Extended Configuration can be
accessed by right-clicking on a toolbar or
The toolbar configurations that come with using the Toolbar Customization dialog.
Chief Architect organize tools based on the It provides access to a variety of tools for
type of work being done as well as on various uses in plan files.
monitor screen resolution.
• The 800 x 600 Configuration is only
• The Default Configuration displays available through the Toolbar
architectural tools used for house design, Customization dialog. It is designed for
including walls, windows, doors, stairs, monitors with 800x600 resolution.
cabinets, etc.
To switch toolbar configurations
• The Terrain Configuration displays
buttons associated with the terrain and There are several ways to switch from one
road tools, including the plant and sprin- toolbar configuration to another.
kler tools. See “Terrain Configuration • Click a Toolbar Configuration button.
Button” on page 581. • Choose a configuration in the Toolbar
• The Kitchen and Bath Design Configu- Customization dialog. See “Configura-
tions Tab” on page 111.
ration displays buttons associated
with kitchen and bath design. See “Cabi- • Right-click on a toolbar and select a con-
nets” on page 546. figuration from the contextual menu.
• The MEP Configuration displays To create a custom configuration

buttons associated with mechanical, elec-
trical, and plumbing. See “Cabinets” on You can create a custom configuration that
page 546. shows only the buttons you need.
1. Access the Configurations tab of the
• The Space Planning Configuration Toolbar Customization dialog.
displays buttons associated with the
House Wizard. See “House Wizard” on 2. Select a configuration similar to the one
page 926. you want to create and click Copy.
3. Give the new configuration a name. It
• The Plan Detailing Configuration is should be saved to the Chief Architect
designed for dealing with materials lists, Toolbars folder. See “Chief Architect
time tracking, and client and designer Data” on page 44.
information.
112
4. Click Save. The program switches to the • The color (R:223, G:223, B:223) maps to
new configuration and it appears high- the system 3D light color.
lighted in the list.
5. Drag tools you want to add out of the To import a custom configuration
Toolbar Customization dialog and onto You can import an existing toolbar
the toolbars. configuration.
6. Drag any tools you do not want off the 1. Access the Configurations tab of the
toolbars. Toolbar Customization dialog.
7. When you are satisfied with the appear- 2. Click Add.
ance of your new toolbar, click Close.
3. Browse to the location of the toolbar you
By default, new toolbar configurations want to import.
display the Expanded Configuration 4. Click Open. If the .toolbar file is not in
button. the Chief Architect Toolbars folder, a
You can make your own button icon for your copy of the file will be created there.
custom toolbar configuration. Create a .bmp
file with the same name as the configuration Color Palettes
and save it in the Toolbars folder. To see an Color palettes are toolbars with library
example, look at the Default.bmp file in the materials which have been added to buttons
Chief Architect Toolbars folder, which
corresponds to the Default Toolbar using the Place Library Object tool.
configuration. They are available on the Toolbar tab of the
Toolbar Customization dialog and can be
• Toolbar button bitmaps must be 24 x 24 used in 3D views. You can customize these
pixels in size. toolbars and/or create your own toolbar
• The color (R:192, G:192, B:192) maps to palettes. See “Place Library Object Button”
the system 3D face color. on page 692.
• The color (R:128, G:128, B:128) maps to
the system 3D Shadow color.
Restoring Toolbars
Chief Architect installs two files that affect The program uses *.toolbar files to
the way toolbars display. These files are remember original toolbar settings. When
*.toolbar and *.toolbarbak. you click the Reset Toolbars button in the
Toolbar Customization dialog, the program
The program updates *.toolbarbak anytime
copies this file and saves it as *.toolbar. If
you select another toolbar configuration,
you make changes you prefer over the
close the Toolbar Customization dialog, or
original toolbar, create a copy of your
exit from the program.
113
Hotkeys
*.toolbar file and save it as *.toolbarbak.

The next time you click Reset Toolbars, the
program returns to the default settings.
Hotkeys
Many Chief Architect tools have a keyboard To use a hotkey, simply press the appropriate
shortcut, or hotkey, associated with them. If key or combination of keys on your keyboard
such a hotkey exists, it will display to the instead of selecting the menu item or clicking
right of the tool’s name in the menu. the toolbar button. For example, press the
Ctrl and Z keys at the same time to perform
an Undo .
You can specify which hotkeys activate
Edit menu items with button icons which Chief Architect tools in the
to the left and hotkeys to the right Customize Hotkeys dialog. Select Tools>
Toolbars & Hotkeys> Customize
Hotkeys to open this dialog.
Customize Hotkeys Dialog

The Customize Hotkeys dialog lets you a variety of commands such as opening
program hotkeys to activate tools and invoke dialogs, including Defaults dialogs.
4
1
2
114
1 Show commands/hotkeys containing Previous Command, Next Command and

- Type part or all of the name of a tool a Previous Command hotkeys. The tools in
hotkey to see a list of tool names and hotkeys this list are organized according to the order
with that string of characters. in which you selected them during the
current program session.
2 Click on an item in the list of
Commands and Hotkeys to select it. Cancel Selection/Previous Command,
Next Command and Previous Command
3 Edit hotkey for this command - Click are hotkeys only: they do not have toolbar
in this field, then press they key
buttons associated with them and are not
combination that you would like to use.
found in the menu.
4 Tool Available In - A list of the view By default, Cancel Selection/Previous
types that the selected command can be
Command is assigned to the Esc key. This
used in displays here.
command can be used to:
5 Tool Description - A brief description • Cancel a current object selection.
of the selected command displays here.
• Cancel a current drawing or editing
action that is in progress.
Note: Nearly all commands can be assigned
custom hotkeys; however, a few cannot. • Activate the previously used tool or com-
Delete and Enter Coordinates are two nota- mand if no object is selected or action in
ble examples. progress.
Create Hotkey List When using the Esc key, be careful to

press it only once.
A list of the hotkeys available to the current
program user can be saved in .html or .xhtml
By default, Next Command is assigned to
format.
the Shift+Esc keys. This command can be
Select Tools> Toolbars & Hotkeys> Create used to deactivate the current command and
Hotkey List to open the Save Hotkey List instead activate the one that is next in the list
File dialog, a standard Save dialog, and of recently used tools.
create a hotkey list that can then be opened in
If you prefer, you can assign two different
a web browser window and printed, if you
hotkeys to the Cancel Selection and
wish.
Previous Command instead of one single
hotkey.
Next/Last Command
You can navigate a list of up to 100 recently
used tools using the Cancel Selection/
115
Chapter 5:
Layers
Layers are used to organize and manage the layer set used by a particular type of view in
display of all objects in all views and in the the Layer Set Defaults dialog.
Materials List. A layer can be thought of as a
transparency sheet with objects placed on it Chapter Contents
for viewing. Nearly all views use multiple • Displaying Objects
layers, like a stack of transparencies put
• Layer Sets
together to show different types of objects.
• Layer Set Management
You can find out which layer an object is on • Active Layer Set Control
in its specification dialog or by selecting the • Layer Display Options Dialog
object and looking at the Status Bar. You can • Select Layer Dialog
customize how each layer displays in the • Layer Tab
Layer Display Options dialog. • Layer Painter and Eyedropper
• Layout Layer Sets
Multiple layers are organized into Layer
• Exporting/Importing Layer Sets
Sets, which are designed to help you perform
• Layer Set Defaults Dialog
different tasks efficiently or produce specific
views for your construction documents or for
presentation purposes. You can customize
the display settings for individual layer sets
and can also copy, add and delete layer sets.
Different types of 2D and 3D views use their
own layer sets. You can specify the initial
116
Displaying Objects
The display of objects in different views is inclusion of objects in the Materials List on a
controlled by layer sets and layers in the layer-by-layer basis.
Layer Display Options dialog. See “Layer
Some default layers, such as Patterns, do not
Display Options Dialog” on page 121.
generate materials and are not included by
default. See “Materials Lists and Layers” on
In All Views page 1051.
All layers with a check in the Disp. column
display when the current layer set is active.
Objects that are not displayed cannot be seen
or selected. If you try to place or draw an
object on a layer that is hidden, the program
asks if you want to turn the layer on.
The overall content and organization of
materials lists can be controlled in the
Preferences dialog. See “Material List
To control the components that are included
in a Materials List for a particular object,
A layer’s Color, Style, and Size attributes select the object and click the Components
determine how an object on that layer
appears in floor plan view and in 3D views edit button. See “Components Dialog”
using the Vector View rendering technique. on page 1062.
Locking Layers
Objects on layers with a lock symbol in the
Lock column are visible but cannot be
selected. This prevents them from being
accidentally changed.
Many objects, including all CAD and text
objects, allow you to override the line style,
color, and line weight for an individiual
instance without changing its layer.
Materials Lists
Layers showing an “M” in the Mat column
Layers with objects that have been
are included in subsequently generated
extensively edited and do not require further
materials lists. This allows you to control the
editing are good candidates for locking.
117
Layer Sets
Locking a layer does not prevent the program New objects cannot be drawn on a locked
from modifying the objects on that layer. layer. If you lock a layer and then attempt to
draw a new object on that layer, a warning
asks you to unlock the layer.
Although objects on locked layers can-
not be selected, most can nevertheless
be deleted using the Delete Objects dialog.
Objects are also deleted if the floor they are
placed on is deleted. See “Delete Objects
Dialog” on page 197 and “Deleting Floors” on
page 358.
Layer Sets
Layer Sets are used to control the layer
Each plan file can have an unlimited
settings for different views in a plan or layout
number of layer sets.
file. All views associated with a plan file -
including views sent to layout - make use of
While any view is active, select Tools>
layer sets stored in that .plan file.
Display Settings> Display Options to
A layer set consists of a complete list of the make changes to the layer set used for that
layers in the current plan or layout along with view type.
the display settings for each layer as set for a
particular type of view or purpose. These
Layout Layer Sets
display settings can be modified, and can be
different for each layer set. See “Layer Views sent to layout use layer sets saved with
Display Options Dialog” on page 121. the plan, rather than with the layout. See
“Displaying Layout Views” on page 1025.
Any changes made to a layer set in one view
affects all other views using the same layer
set. If this is not desired, you can create a Layer Sets & Templates
unique layer set for a particular view. See Layers and layer sets are plan-specific. A
“Layer Set Management” on page 119. custom layer set that you created in one plan
Layer sets are file specific, which means that file may not be available in another. To
changes made in one plan or layout file have include a custom layer set in all new plan
no effect on the settings in other files. If you files, add it to your template plan. See
find that you use the same settings often, you “Exporting/Importing Layer Sets” on page
should consider adding these layer sets to 127 and “Template Files” on page 51.
your template files. See “Template Files” on
page 51. Modify All Layer Sets
If you want changes made in one layer set to
apply to all other layer sets in the current
118
plan, check Modify All Layer Sets in the that view. Which layer set becomes active
Layer Display Options dialog before depends on the type of view created.
making changes. The layer name and display
The default layer sets for nine different view
attributes are applied to all other layer sets.
types, including the Reference Display, are
For example, if you check Modify All Layer specified in the Layer Set Defaults dialog.
Sets and then change the color and line style
Each of these layer sets can be edited as
for the Text layer of the Electrical Set, the
needed in the Layer Display Options dialog.
same changes are applied to the Text layer of
the Framing Set of the same plan.
121.
Layer Set Defaults Normally, it is best to change the settings in
the existing default layer sets rather than
Whenever a particular type of view is select different default layer sets, but you can
created, such as floor plan view or a framing do so if needed. See “Layer Set Defaults
overview, a specific layer set is activated for Dialog” on page 129.
Layer Set Management

The Layer Set Management dialog Select Tools> Display Settings> Layer Set
lists the layer sets available in the Management to open the Layer Set
current plan or layout file and lets you add Management dialog.
and remove layer sets and modify and copy
existing layer sets.
119
Layer Set Management
1 Use the Available Layer Sets options active layer set or any layer set in use as a
to manage the layer sets saved with the default.
current plan or layout file.
• Click on a layer set name in the list to Do not delete any layer sets that are used
select it. by a layout.
• Click the Define button (or double-click • Click the Import button to import layer
a layer set) to open the Layer Display settings from a .layers file. See “Export-
Options dialog and make changes to the ing/Importing Layer Sets” on page 127.
selected layer set. • Click the Export button to export the
• Click the New button to open the New layer settings in the current plan in a .lay-
Layer Set Name dialog and create a new ers file. See “Exporting/Importing Layer
layer set using the system default set- Sets” on page 127.
tings.
2 The Active Layer Set for Current
• Click the Copy button to open the New View options affect only the layer set
Layer Set Name dialog and enter a name used in the view that was active when the
for a copy of the currently selected layer Layer Set Management dialog was opened.
set. You can select a new Active Layer Set from
the drop-down list or click the Define button
• Click the Delete button to delete the
to make changes to the active layer set in the
selected layer set from the current file.
Layer Display Options dialog.
The Delete button is enabled if the layer
set can be deleted. You cannot delete the
120
3 Reference Display Layer Set - Click Display Set is usually sufficient, you can
the drop-down list to specify which create as many layer sets as you like and use
layer set is used when the reference display is any of them for the reference display. See
turned on. While the default Reference “Reference Display” on page 360.
Active Layer Set Control

The Active Layer layer sets saved with the plan. Click the
Set Control drop- drop-down list to select a new layer set for
down list displays on the toolbar for all views the current view.
and provides convenient access to a list of all
Layer Display Options Dialog

The Layer Display Options dialog Selecting Tools> Reference Floors>
controls the display of layers in a Reference Display Options opens the
selected layer set. It consists of a table that Layer Display Options dialog with the
lists all available layers and the attributes for Reference Display Set active. See
each. Layers can be added and deleted. There “Reference Floor” on page 359.
is no limit to the number of layers that can
exist in a plan. Selecting Tools> Display Options in a
From any view except the Materials List, materials list opens the Materials List
select Tools> Display Settings> Display Display Options dialog. See “Material List
Options to open the Layer Display
Options dialog. This dialog is resizeable and
maintains its size between program sessions.
121
1
2
6
4
5
7
1 The Available Layer Sets options 2 Click the column header to sort all
control which layer set is affected by layers in the Layer Display Options
changes made in the Layer Display Options dialog by that column.
dialog. • The Name column is sorted alphabeti-
• The currently selected layer set displays. cally. Sorting is also case sensitive to
Click the drop-down list to select a differ- allow greater control over organization.
ent layer set. • A red + in the Used column indicates
• Click the Copy Set button to create a which layers have objects placed on them
copy of the current layer set. in the current plan. This column cannot
be edited.
• When Modify All Layer Sets is checked,
changes made in the Layer Display • A check in the Disp column indicates
Options dialog apply to all other layer which layers are set to be visible. This
sets in the plan when you click OK. controls the display of objects in 2D and
3D views.
Modify All Layer Sets is a one-time • An M in the Mat column indicates which
action. It is always unchecked when layers are included in the Materials List.
the Layer Display Options dialog is opened.
• A yellow in the Lock column indicates
which layers are locked, preventing
122
objects on that layer from being manually display at the bottom of the dialog. If
edited. multiple layers are selected, “no change”
• The Color column shows the line color may display for attributes that are different
for each layer. You can sort this column among the selected layers.
so that like colors are listed together.
• The Style column shows the line style for When one or more layers are selected
and you click OK, the program remem-
each layer and can be sorted so that like
bers your selection so that the same layers
line styles are listed together. are selected when you reopen the Layer Dis-
• The Size column displays the line weight play Options dialog.
used by each layer and can be sorted so
that like line weights are listed together. 4 When a layer or layers is selected,
See “Line Weights” on page 999. single or shared layer attributes can be
edited in the section titled Properties for
• Click the Library button to open the
“Selected Layer.” Line Color, Style and Size
Library Browser to the Line Styles
affect lines in floor plan view and surface
library. See “Line Styles” on page 879.
edge lines in vector views.
3 Layers are named so that similar object • To change the color of lines on a selected
types such as Cabinets, Base and layer, click the Color bar to select a new
Cabinets, Wall are listed near one another color in the Color Chooser dialog. See
alphabetically.
“Color Chooser Dialog” on page 727.
Double-click a layer in the Name column to • To change the line style of a selected
rename it. layer, click the Style drop-down arrow or
click the Library button to select a line
style from the library. See “Line Styles”
on page 879.
• To change the width of lines on a selected
layer, enter a Size. See “Line Weights” on
page 999.
• To turn off a selected layer, uncheck
Display. See “Displaying Objects” on
page 117.
If a layer is turned on, a checkmark is shown • To exclude all objects on a selected layer
in the Disp column. If a layer is turned off, from the Materials List, uncheck Include
the column is blank. in Materials List. See “Materials Lists”
on page 1048.
Layers are selected by clicking them in the
table. Hold down the Shift key or the Ctrl • To protect the objects on a selected layer
key to select multiple layers at once. Click from accidental changes, check Lock.
the Select All button to select all layers in the Items on locked layers display but cannot
table. When selected, a layer’s attributes
123
Select Layer Dialog
be selected, deleted, moved, or modified. layers or any of the system layers used by
See “Locking Layers” on page 117. Chief Architect.
• Click the Reset Names button to revert
5 The buttons at the bottom left of the layer names for system layers back to the
dialog provide additional control of the
layers in the table. original names that installed with Chief
Architect. This does not affect layers you
• Click the Select All button to select all
created.
layers in the table at once. This allows
changes to be quickly applied to all lay- • Click OK to close the dialog and apply
ers. your changes.
• Click the New button to open the New • Click Cancel to close the dialog, ignor-
Layer Name dialog and create a new ing any edits.
layer with the unique name of your
choice. Duplicate layer names are not 6 Select a layer to serve as the Current
CAD Layer from the drop-down list.
allowed. This is the default layer used for new CAD
objects such as lines and arcs. See “Current
Note: New layers are added to all layer sets. CAD Layer” on page 910.
However, newly created layers will be turned
on to display only in the current layer set. 7 Click the size grip and drag to resize the
• Click the Copy button to create a copy of
the selected layer. The new layer is added Note: Not all objects display in all views. For
directly below the original layer in the instance, door labels do not appear in 3D
table. views and room labels do not appear in mate-
rials lists, regardless of the layer they are
• Click the Delete button to delete the placed on, or whether the layer is turned on
selected layer. You cannot delete used or not.
Select Layer Dialog

When new CAD objects are drawn, Current CAD Layer to open the Select
they are placed on the Current CAD Layer dialog.
Layer. See “Current CAD Layer” on page
This dialog is also used for the Layer Painter
910. You can specify which layer is the
tool. See “Layer Painter and Eyedropper” on
Current CAD Layer by selecting CAD>
page 126.
124
This dialog can only be accessed by clicking Options dialog but only allows a layer to be
the Current CAD Layer button. It is selected.
similar in appearance to the Layer Display
Layer Tab
The Layer tab is found in the specification
dialogs for many different objects. Here you Note: In some specification dialogs, layer
can specify on what layer the program uses information is located on the Line Style or
to display the selected object. Appearance tab rather than the Layer tab.
125
Layer Painter and Eyedropper
1
2
3
1 Check Default to place the selected 3 Click Define to open the Layer Display
object on the default layer for that Options dialog and select, modify, or
object type. add a new layer. See “Layer Display Options
2 Click the drop-down list to select from
all layers available in the plan file.
Layer Painter and Eyedropper

The Layer Painter and Layer 3. Note that the name of the layer being
Eyedropper tools allow you to painted is noted on the left side of the
move an object to any layer from any view Status Bar at the bottom of the program
without opening its specification dialog. window. See “The Status Bar” on page
34.
To use the Layer Painter 4. Move your cursor over an object and
notice that the Status Bar now states
1. In any view, select Tools> Display Set- both the layer being painted and the cur-
tings> Layer Painter . rent layer of the target object.
2. In the Select CAD Layer dialog, choose 5. Click on objects in the view to move
a layer and click OK. Your cursor will them to the selected layer.
display the painter icon.
126
To use the Layer Eyedropper 2. Click on an object to load the layer it is

on into the Layer Painter.
1. In any view, select Tools> Display Set-
3. Your cursor will display the painter
tings> Layer Eyedropper .
icon, and you can click on other objects
to place them on the selected layer.
Layout Layer Sets

Layer sets are an effective way to control not always saved with the plan that the view was
just what displays while you are working, but originally sent to layout from. For this
what displays in the views you send to layout reason, you should avoid deleting layer sets
and print. See “Layout” on page 1014. from a plan unless you are absolutely sure
that they are not being used by layout views.
When you send a view to layout, you have
two choices as to which layer set the view You can find out which layer set a layout
uses: view is using by selecting it and clicking the
• You can use the same layer set as the Layout Box Layers edit button. See
original view being sent to layout. “Editing Layout Views” on page 1017.
• You can make a copy of the layer set used If you select a layout view and click the
by the original view.
Open View edit button, you will return
Both approaches have advantages and to the original view in the plan file. Bear in
disadvantages, so you should use the option mind that the layout view’s layer set will be
that best suits your needs. active. If you make changes to its settings,
Whichever option you choose, remember the view on the layout page will be affected.
that the layer set used by a layout view is
Exporting/Importing Layer Sets

Layer sets created in one plan can convenient alternative to re-creating a layer
be exported as a *.layers file and set that may already exist in another plan.
imported into other plans. This is a
Exporting Layer Sets

To export layer sets from the current plan, Layer Sets to open the Save Layer Set
click the Export button in the Layer Set File dialog.
Management dialog, or select File> Export>
127
Exporting/Importing Layer Sets
• In the Save in drop-down, browse to the

location on your computer where you
would like to save the exported file.
• Any folders and .layers files in the cur-
rent location display in the field below.
• In the File name text field, type a name
for the exported file. Chief Architect
automatically attaches the file extension
.layers, which is the only file type avail-
able in the Save as type field.
• When both the Save in location and File
name are correct, click Save.
Importing Layer Sets

To import layer sets (*.layers file) into the • Click on the .layers file you wish to
current plan, click the Import button in the import. Its name will display in the File
Layer Set Management dialog, or select name text field.
File> Import> Layer Sets to display the • The only file type available in the Save
Open Layer Set File dialog. as type field is .layers.
• When the desired file is selected, click
Open. The Import Layer Sets dialog will
open next.
4. In the Look in drop-down, browse to the

location on your computer where the file
you wish to import is saved.
• Any folders and .dat files in the current Select a layer set or hold down the Shift key
location display in the field below. to select multiple sets and click OK.
128
Layer Set Defaults Dialog

The Layer Set Defaults dialog is used Settings to open the Default Settings dialog,
to specify the initial layer sets for then select Layer Sets from the list and click
different view types. Select Edit> Default the Edit button.
When a new view is created for any of the Select Use Active Layer Set to use the
specified view types, Chief Architect sets the currently active layer set for the new view
default layer set listed here as the active layer when it is created.
set. Click the drop-down list to change the
initial layer set for each view. Click the Define button to open the Layer
Display Options dialog and change the layer
settings for the layer set. See “Layer Display
Options Dialog” on page 121.
129
Chapter 6:
Editing Objects
In Chief Architect, a variety of architectural Chapter Contents

and CAD-based objects are used to create • Architectural vs CAD Objects
complete 3D models and working drawings. • Defaults and Preferences
Although these objects are sometimes very • Snap Behaviors
different from one another, the methods used • Object Snaps
to move, rotate, resize and otherwise edit • Angle Snaps
them are similar throughout the program. • Grid Snaps
• Edit Behaviors
Edit handles allow objects to be resized, • Undo and Redo
relocated, or rotated using the mouse. Edit • Creating Objects
toolbar buttons and the contextual menus • Selecting Objects
access edit tools relevant to the selected • Editing Line Based Objects
object(s). Most objects have a specification • Editing Arc Based Objects
dialog that allows you to edit it in ways that • Editing Open Polyline Based Objects
are specific to that type of object. • Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects
The editing characteristics common to most • Editing Box-Based Objects
objects are described in this chapter. Unique, • Editing Spline Based Objects
object-specific editing behaviors and the • Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses
specification dialogs are covered in their • Architectural and CAD Blocks
respective chapters. • Displaying Objects
• Moving Objects
• Aligning Objects
• Resizing Objects
• Reshaping Objects
• Rotating Objects
• Reflecting Objects
130
• Copying and Pasting Objects • Union, Intersection, and Subtract

• Deleting Objects • Converting Objects
• Trim and Extend • Select Same / Load Same
• Transform/Replicate Object Dialog • Edit Area Tools
Architectural vs CAD Objects

There are two broad categories of objects in In contrast, architectural objects such as
Chief Architect: architectural objects and walls, cabinets, doors, windows, and stairs
CAD objects. display in 2D and 3D views. Architectural
objects can be created and edited in 2D and
CAD objects such as lines, arcs, and text are
3D views but not in CAD Detail windows or
2D objects that can be created and edited in
on layout pages.
floor plan view, cross section/elevation
views, CAD detail windows, and on layout Some architectural objects, such as custom
pages but do not display in 3D camera views countertops and slabs, have some behaviors
and overviews. See “The CAD Drawing in common with CAD objects and are
Tools” on page 878. referred to as CAD-based.

The ways that objects in the program behave Object Snaps enable snapping to
as they are created and edited are affected by objects. See “Object Snaps” on page
a number of default and preference settings. 133.
See “Preferences & Default Settings” on
Angle Snaps enable snapping at
page 62.
Allowed Angles. See “Angle Snaps”
on page 135.
It is a good idea to be familiar with these
options and how they affect drawing Grid Snaps enable snapping to the
and editing in the program. Snap Grid. See “Grid Snaps” on page
136.
Snap Settings Bumping/Pushing enables bumping

and pushing behaviors. See
Select Edit> Snap Settings to access “Bumping/Pushing” on page 178.
the three categories of Snap Settings
that determine how objects snap to one Edit Behaviors
another and whether they snap to allowed
angles or to points on a grid, as well as object Select Edit> Edit Behaviors to
bumping and pushing behaviors. access the six global edit behavior
modes that determine how dragging the edit
131
handles with the left mouse button affects a current CAD point. See “Point Tools” on
selected object and may also affect how page 880.
objects are drawn.
Specify which behavior is used by selecting
The Default edit behavior provides Edit> Edit Behaviors> Rotate/Resize
the most commonly used editing About Current Point or in the
options. See “Default” on page 137. Preferences dialog. See “Behaviors Panel”
The Alternate edit behavior provides on page 93.
an alternative to the Default behaviors
that may be more useful in some situations. Arc Creation Modes
See “Alternate” on page 138.
Select Edit> Arc Creation Modes to
The Move edit behavior allows you to access the five Arc Creation Modes
move a selected object using the that control how arcs and curved walls are
corner handles and the Move handle. See drawn.
“Move” on page 138.
Free Form Arc mode allows you to
The Resize edit behavior scales an define an arc by clicking and dragging
object as you drag a corner handle. along the desired path. See “Free Form Arc”
See “Resize” on page 138. on page 892.
The Concentric edit behavior allows Center/Radius/End Arc mode allows
you to resize objects so that the you to define the center and radius of
distance moved by each edge is the same as an arc, and then its length. See “Center/
all other edges. See “Concentric” on page Radius/End Arc” on page 893.
139.
Start/End/On Arc mode allows you
The Fillet edit behavior allows you to to define the start and end points of an
add a fillet at any corner of an object. arc, then adjust the curvature. See “Start/
See “Fillet” on page 140. End/On Arc” on page 893.
Start/Tangent/End Arc mode allows
Edit Object Parts you to define the start and end points
Select Edit> Edit Behaviors> Edit of an arc, its tangent and its curvature. See
Object Parts to toggle the ability to “Start/Tangent/End Arc” on page 893.
edit the individual segments of polyline- Arc About Center mode allows you
based objects and connected walls. See “Edit to draw an arc by defining the center
Object Parts” on page 145. and then the start and end points. See “Arc
About Center” on page 893.
Rotate/Resize About
Objects can be rotated or resized
about either their own centers or the
132
Snap Behaviors
There are three categories of behavior when you begin an operation, but a
snap behavior in Chief different behavior when you end it.
Architect:
The Snap Behavior hotkeys are listed on the
• Object Snaps , which snap CAD right side of the Edit> Snap Settings
and architectural objects to other objects. submenu. See “Hotkeys” on page 114.
• Angle Snaps , which snap objects
To use snap behavior hotkeys
at specific angles.
• Grid Snaps , which snap objects 1. Select Edit> Snap Settings and
to points on a grid. toggle off the snap behavior category
that you wish to control using hotkeys.
Snap behaviors can be controlled in the
Preferences dialog and in the Plan or
2. Select a tool that you wish to draw with
Layout Defaults dialogs. See “Snap
or an object you wish to edit.
Properties Panel” on page 95 and “General 3. Begin drawing or editing and hold down
Plan Defaults Dialog” on page 68. the left mouse button without releasing.
4. Press and hold the appropriate key on
You can select Edit> Snap Settings to your keyboard to enable the snap behav-
quickly access Snap Behavior settings. ior associated with it.
To temporarily disable Snap Behaviors and 5. When you are finished using the snap
other move restrictions, press the Ctrl key behavior, release the hotkey but continue
while dragging an edit handle. See “Moving holding down your left mouse button.
Objects” on page 177.
6. If you wish, you can press and hold a
different hotkey on your keyboard and
Hotkeys continue the drawing or editing opera-
You can also temporarily enable individual tion.
Snap Behaviors during a mouse editing 7. When you are finished, release the left
operation using hotkeys. This can be helpful mouse button.
if you wish to use one particular type of snap
Object Snaps
Object Snaps allow you to position endpoints meet or roof plane edges so that
objects precisly relative to each other; they are colinear.
for example, to position lines so that their
Object Snaps can be turned on or off by
selecting Edit> Snap Settings> Object
133
Object Snaps
Snaps , by clicking the toggle button, or

in the Preferences dialog. See “Snap
Properties Panel” on page 95.
Object Snaps are indicated visually as you
create or edit objects. To remove any object
snap indicators that are visible on screen,
press the 1 (one) key. As you continue
drawing or editing, new indicators may Extension anchors and lines
appear.
Extension Snaps are indicated by extension
With the exception of On Object snaps, anchors, indicated by small blue circles.
have priority over all other types of snapping
Anchors display for Endpoint, Midpoint, and
in Chief Architect. Bumping/Pushing Quadrant snaps when these snap behaviors
overrides Object Snaps. See “Bumping/ are enabled.
Pushing” on page 178.
When an anchor is established, you can
Object Snap Locations create Tangent , Perpendicular and
There are many locations on an object that Orthogonal extension lines relative to it.
other objects can snap to. In addition to snap
points located on objects, Extension Snaps To use extension snaps
locate points away from objects. Each type
of object snap can be toggled by selecting 1. Toggle on Object Snaps and make
sure the extension snaps are enabled.
Edit> Snap Settings or in the
Preferences dialog. See “Snap Properties 2. Draw a Rectangular Polyline .
3. Select the Draw Line tool and move
Extension Snaps your pointer along the edges of the
polyline.
For some operations, it is helpful to snap to a
4. When your pointer passes over an end-
point far away from an original object, while
point or midpoint, an extension anchor is
maintaining a relationship to a point on that
created.
object. For example, you may want to snap to
a point exactly perpendicular to a line’s 5. Move your pointer perpendicular edge
endpoint. Extension Snaps are helpful in displaying the anchor to create a blue,
these situations. dashed extension line.
Only a limited number of anchors can exist at
one time; creating a new anchor removes the
oldest existing anchor. You can specify the
number of possible anchors in the
134
Preferences dialog. See “Snap Properties

A B
Object Snaps Hotkeys
• Press the “1” key to clear out all current
extension anchors.
4.
• Hold down the “S” key to temporarily
disable Object Snaps. You are still able to
use Extension Snaps to existing anchors, 5.
so the “S” key can be used to avoid pick- 1.
ing up unwanted extension anchors. 3.
The S key can help establish extension
The “S”Key - Case Study snaps when other objects may interfere
In the following example, there are several To establish two extension anchors
lines. Suppose we want to start a line at the
intersection of two orthogonal extension 1. Drag the mouse over the endpoint for
lines drawn from two lines, A and B. To line A to establish the first endpoint
establish an extension anchor, we need to anchor.
drag the mouse over line A’s endpoint, but 2. Temporarily disable object snapping by
there are several lines between the endpoints holding down the “S” key.
of lines A and B. We need to establish the
two extension anchors without snapping to 3. Move the mouse to the end of line B.
the intervening objects. 4. Release the “S” key to establish the sec-
ond endpoint anchor.
5. Move the mouse to the intersection of
the two extension lines and draw the
new object.
Angle Snaps
It is often important that objects be Angle Snaps allow you to snap at either 15
drawn at exact angles. This can be degree angles or at 7.5 degree angles plus
accomplished using Angle Snaps. any additional Allowed Angles that you
specify. See “General Plan Defaults Dialog”
Angle Snaps allow you to draw lines, walls,
on page 68.
and other objects at specified Allowed
Angles. Angle Snaps also affect the way Angle Snaps can be turned on or off by
objects rotate, the radius of arcs, and a selecting Edit> Snap Settings> Angle
variety of other operations.
135
Grid Snaps
Snaps , by clicking the toggle button, or Object Snap exists, the program uses that
in the Preferences dialog. instead of an Angle Snap.
Sometimes both Angle Snaps and Object
Angle Snap Settings Snaps apply. For example, suppose a wall is
drawn at 15 degrees using Angle Snaps and
You can change Allowed Angle settings for
another wall is approached. You can draw the
Angle Snaps in the Plan Defaults or Layout
new wall at 15 degrees while using
Defaults dialog. See “General Plan Defaults
Dialog” on page 68. Intersection Snaps to snap to a point on
the existing wall.
Specify 15 Degree or 7 ½ Degree angle
snaps. When 7 ½ Degree Angle Snaps are Use both object
selected, you can also specify Additional snapping and
Angles. These default settings are plan- angle snapping to
specific rather than global. create a 15-degree
line that intersects
Angle Snaps and an existing line
Object Snaps Now suppose that we don't want the new line
Angle Snaps have a higher priority than Grid to end on the existing line. Hold down the
“S” key to temporarily disable Object Snaps,
Snaps and On Object Snaps , but a lower
allowing only Angle Snaps. See “The
priority to all other Object Snaps. If a valid
“S”Key - Case Study” on page 135.
Grid Snaps
Grid Snaps allow you to snap objects zooming in and out, or for general layout
to points on an on-screen grid. The guidelines, but is not used for snapping.
display and size of this Snap Grid can be
controlled in the Plan or Layout Defaults Grid Snaps and Angle Snaps
dialog. See “General Plan Defaults Dialog”
on page 68. Of the three snap behaviors, Grid Snaps have
the lowest priority and are overridden by
Grid Snaps are turned on and off by selecting Angle Snaps and Object Snaps.
Edit> Snap Settings>Grid Snaps , by Grid snaps can work well with Angle Snaps.
clicking the toggle button, or in the Plan or For example, if the grid Snap Unit is set to
Layout Defaults dialog. 12" (1 foot), drawing a new wall at an
In addition to the Snap Grid, the Reference allowed angle snaps the line length to 0",
Grid is provided to give you a visual sense 12", 24", and so on.
of scale. The Reference Grid is useful for
136
To draw a line or wall at an Allowed

Angle but with unrestricted length, dis-
able Grid Snaps and leave Angle Snaps on.
Edit Behaviors
There are six Edit Behavior modes access to the most commonly used edit
that determine how edit handles affect behaviors and should be selected as your
an object, and may also affect how objects preference in most situations.
are drawn. The currently active edit behavior
is a global preference setting, affecting all
When the use of a tool is described in
plan and layout files. this manual, it is assumed that the
Two of these modes, Default and Alternate, Default edit behavior mode is active.
are useful for most drawing and editing
needs and can be considered primary editing • Drawing - Standard click and drag
modes. Default mode, in particular, accesses drawing behavior is enabled. See
the most commonly used behaviors and is the “Creating Objects” on page 141.
best choice in most circumstances. • Resize/Reshape - Default allows you to
adjust the angle of any corner of a
The other four modes, Move, Resize,
polyline without affecting adjacent cor-
Concentric and Fillet, offer special editing
ners, changing the object’s shape.
behaviors that may be useful only in certain
situations and can be considered secondary.
You can specify which edit behavior mode is
active when the left mouse button is used in
the Preferences dialog, by selecting Edit>
Edit Behaviors , or by clicking the
corresponding toggle button, which can be
added to your toolbar. See “Behaviors Panel”
on page 93.
Each edit behavior can also be enabled using Default edit behavior
the different buttons on your mouse or by
pressing the keyboard keys associated with • For box-based objects, the Default mode
each. See “Using the Mouse” on page 29. functions the same as the Alternate mode.
• Movement - Default allows you to move
Default objects orthogonal, or at a right angle, to
any of their edges.
The Default mode is one of the
primary edit behavior modes. It offers • Rotation - In Default mode, objects snap
at Allowed Angles as they are rotated.
137
Edit Behaviors
You can temporarily enable the Default • Movement - Alternate allows you to
edit mode when another mode is active by move objects at Allowed Angles when
pressing Alt + Z or Alt + / while performing Angle Snaps are enabled, or orthogo-
an edit or drawing operation. nal to any of its edges when they are not.
See “Angle Snaps” on page 135.
Alternate • Rotation - Alternate snaps objects at
The Alternate mode is the second Allowed Angles as they are rotated.
primary edit behavior mode. You can temporarily enable the Alternate
edit mode when another mode is active
Note: Not all commands have an Alternate by pressing Alt or using the right mouse
edit behavior. If a selected tool does not, it
button while performing an edit or drawing
will not work when this edit mode is active.
operation.
• Drawing - Continuous drawing behavior Move

is enabled.
The Move mode allows you to move
• Resize/Reshape - Alternate allows you an object using edit handles that
to keep the angle between adjacent edges would otherwise be used for resizing, as well
fixed when a corner edit handle is moved. as with the Move handle.
Instead, adjacent corners move and adja-
cent edges lengthen or shorten. • Drawing - Standard click and drag
drawing behavior is enabled.
• Resize/Reshape - Move allows you to
move the selected object when any edit
handle is used.
• Movement - Move mode allows you to
move objects at Allowed Angles.
• Rotation - In Move mode, objects snap
You can temporarily enable the Move

edit mode when another mode is active by
Alternate edit behavior pressing Z or / while performing an edit or
• Alternate allows you to drag an end han- drawing operation.
dle on an open polyline to change it from
a line to an arc or vice versa. Resize
The Resize edit behavior allows you
• Alternate overrides the Lock Center
to rescale an object. As you drag a
setting of arc-based objects.
corner edit handle of an object, you get an
138
exactly scaled version of the original. For button mouse while performing an edit or
example, you can resize an object to 50% of drawing operation. See “Using the Mouse”
its original size while maintaining the same on page 29.
proportions.
• Drawing - Standard click and drag Concentric
drawing behavior is enabled. The Concentric mode allows you to
• Resize/Reshape - Resize allows you to resize objects so that the distance
keep the angle between adjacent edges moved by each edge is the same. For
fixed when a corner handle is moved. example, you can resize an irregularly
shaped polyline so that each edge is exactly
ten feet in from the original position, which
is useful for creating site plans with setbacks.
• Drawing - Standard click and drag
drawing behavior is enabled.
• Resize/Reshape - Concentric allows you
to resize an irregularly-shaped polyline
so that each edge is moved the same dis-
tance from its original location.
Resize edit behavior
To proportionally resize an object,

always drag a corner edit handle and
not an edge handle.
• Movement - Resize allows you to move

an object orthogonal, or at a right angle,
to any of its edges.
• Rotation - In Resize Mode, objects snap Concentric edit behavior
• Concentric mode also allows you to
You can temporarily enable the Resize move opposite edges of an object so that
edit mode when another mode is active by each edge is moved the same distance
pressing X or using the X2 button on a five- from its original location.
139
Edit Behaviors
Unit specified in the Plan Defaults dialog.

See “Grid Snaps” on page 136.
To concentrically resize an object with

no restrictions, set the Concentric Jump
value on the CAD Panel of the Preferences
dialog to zero and turn off Grid Snaps.
You can temporarily enable the

Concentric edit mode when another
mode is active by pressing C or using the X1
• Movement - Concentric mode allows button on a five-button mouse while
you to move an object orthogonal, or at a performing an edit or drawing operation. See
right angle, to any of its edges. “Using the Mouse” on page 29.
• Rotation - In Concentric mode, objects
snap at Allowed Angles as they are Fillet
rotated. The Fillet mode allows you to add a
In some cases, the Concentric and Resize fillet, or curve, at any corner of an
edit behaviors have the same result, such as object. Dragging a corner edit handle adjusts
when a circle is resized. Usually, though, the the fillet radius at that corner.
two behaviors are different because • Drawing - Standard click and drag
concentric resizing does not maintain the drawing behavior is enabled.
original ratio between an irregular polyline’s
• Resize/Reshape - Fillet allows you to
edges.
create a fillet at by dragging a corner edit
handle inward.
Resize edit Concentric

behavior edit behavior
In Concentric mode, objects resize in
Concentric Jump increments specified in
the Preferences dialog. See “Behaviors
Panel” on page 93. Fillet edit behavior
When the Concentric Jump distance is set • Movement - Move mode allows you to
at 0", objects resize according to the Snap move objects at Allowed Angles.
140
• Rotation - In Move mode, objects snap You can temporarily enable the Fillet
at Allowed Angles as they are rotated. edit mode when another mode is active by
pressing F while performing an edit or
The Fillet edit behavior adjusts all the
drawing operation.
corners of a box at once. The radius of each
corner is the same.
To produce fillets or chamfers of an
Fillet does not have an effect on circles, exact radius, set the Fillet Chamfer
ovals, ellipses or arc segments. Radius and use the Fillet two Lines or Cham-
fer Two Lines edit button. See “Fillet Two
Lines” on page 186 and “Chamfer Two Lines”
on page 187.
Undo and Redo

The Undo and Redo commands To Undo an action, select Edit> Undo ,
allow you to both undo the last
action performed, as well as redo actions that click the Undo button, or press Ctrl + Z
were recently Undone. on your keyboard.
The ten most recent actions can be Undone The Redo command is only available
or Redone, depending on your settings in the immediately after Undo has been used. To
Preferences dialog. See “General Panel” on Redo an Undone action, select Edit> Redo
page 79. Actions that can be Undone and , click the Redo button or press Ctrl +
Redone include creating, editing, and Y on your keyboard.
deleting objects.
Undo and Redo do not affect
changes made to the display by panning the
display or zooming in or out. See “Undo
Zoom” on page 731.
Creating Objects
In Chief Architect, there are five ways to While the size of the drawing area in Chief
create objects: by clicking to place an object, Architect is limited only by the resources on
by clicking and dragging to draw an object, your computer, it is best to begin your draw-
by entering coordinates, by placing a ing near the origin, 0,0,0. The current
distribution path or region, or by importing position of your mouse pointer displays in
custom symbols, drawings, pictures or the Status Bar at the bottom of the program
metafiles. window. See “3D Drafting” on page 28.
141
Creating Objects
Click-to-Create Continue drawing the selected object until

another tool is selected.
Many objects, including doors and windows,
cabinets, library symbols, terrain objects, You can cancel any click-and-drag drawing
text, pictures and images are created by operation before it is completed by pressing
clicking. Select a tool or library object, then the Esc key on your keyboard, or by pressing
click in the drawing area to place the object any two mouse buttons at the same time.
at that location.
When the Alternate edit behavior is
Continue clicking to place the selected object active, a continuous drawing behavior is
until another tool is selected. enabled, allowing you to click at the start and
When most drawing tools are active or end points of line- and arc-based objects
library symbols selected for placement, a without dragging. See “Alternate” on page
preview outline follows your mouse pointer, 138.
indicating the size and shape of the object to
be created. The center point of the object’s To continuously draw by right-clicking
back edge will snap to active snap points 1. Select a tool that creates line- or arc-
when Grid Snaps or Object Snaps based objects.
are enabled1. 2. Right-click, drag and release the mouse
Many architectural objects can be created in button to draw the first object.
floor plan view or any 3D view. In order to 3. Move the pointer to a different location
place a stand-alone, click-to-create object in and notice the drawing indicator that
3D, it is necessary to click near a wall or begins at the object’s endpoint and fol-
within the Terrain Perimeter as these objects lows your pointer as it moves.
help orient the new object within the 3D 4. Click to create a second object begin-
space2. ning at the first object’s starting point
and ending where you clicked.
Clicking and Dragging 5. Continue clicking to create additional
Other objects, including walls and railings, objects until another tool is selected, the
straight stairs, and CAD and CAD-based Esc key is pressed, or two mouse buttons
objects are created by clicking and dragging are pressed at the same time.
to define either a path or an enclosed area.
Select a tool, then click and drag in the Entering Coordinates
drawing area to draw an object between your Objects created by clicking and dragging can
start and end points. also be drawn by entering coordinates. See
“3D Drafting” on page 28.
Coordinates can be either absolute or
relative. Absolute coordinates refer to a fixed
1.See “Snap Behaviors” on page 133.
point of origin at 0,0,0, while relative
2.See Terrain PerimeterTODO.
142
coordinates treat the current location of the from the start point rather than as X
selected object as the point of origin. and Y coordinates.
• The program remembers which option
To use the Enter Coordinates dialog you last used in this dialog.
1. Select any tool that requires you to click 6. Click OK to close the dialog and create
and drag to create an object. the object.
2. Click and begin dragging to draw the CAD lines, arcs and points can also be
object. created using the Input Line, Input Arc and
3. Before you finish dragging and with the Input Point dialogs. See “Input Point” on
mouse button pressed, press either the page 880, “Input Line” on page 884, or
Tab or Enter key on your keyboard. “Input Arc” on page 894.
4. In the Enter Coordinates dialog:

You can also move objects using the
Enter Coordinates dialog. Click and
drag the Move edit handle of an existing
object, then press the Tab key and proceed
with steps 3 and 4. See “Moving Objects” on
page 177.
Distributing Objects
You can place multiple copies of any object
• The Start Location, where you clicked in an evenly-spaced array either within a
and began dragging, displays on the region or along a path using the Distributed
right. Objects tools. See “Distributed Objects”
5. On the left, specify the desired New on page 666.
Location, or end point.
• Select Absolute to define the end point Importing Objects
using absolute coordinates on the snap
Custom symbols, drawings, pictures and
grid, or:
metafiles can be imported into the program
• Select Relative to Start to define the and placed in the drawing area with a click.
end point relative to the start point, as See “Importing & Exporting” on page 952
though the start point was at (0,0). and “Custom Symbols” on page 974.
• Check Polar to define the end point of
the new line by its Distance and Angle
143
Selecting Objects
Selecting Objects
“Select” refers to selecting an object for Architect can be selected using the Select
editing. An object must be selected before it Objects tool. Select Edit> Select Objects,
can be edited. click the toolbar button or press the Space
bar on your keyboard to activate this tool.
In order for an object to be selected, it must
be both unlocked and visible in the current You can also select objects or open context
view. See “Layers” on page 116. sensitive menus using the right mouse button
when any tool is active. See “Contextual
When an object is selected, it displays edit
Menus” on page 33.
handles and a selection fill color. See “Colors
Selecting Similar Objects
In 3D views, a selected object will also
display lines representing the selected edge If a tool other than Select Objects is
or surface. The size of the edit handles does active, you can only select objects of that
not change as you zoom in or out and is set in type using the left mouse button. For
the Preferences dialog. See “Edit Panel” on
example, if the Straight Exterior Wall
page 92. To prevent them from stacking on
tool is active, you can only select walls using
one another, some edit handles may not
the left mouse button.
display as you zoom away from the selected
object. This can be useful for selecting an object
when many objects of a different type
When an object is selected, its edit toolbar
occupy the same space in floor plan view.
also displays, typically at the bottom of the
Chief Architect program window just above Objects can be selected using the right mouse
the Status Bar. See “The Edit Toolbar” on button, regardless of which tool is active.
page 32.
Information about the selected object or Right-Clicking
objects may also display in the Status Bar. Regardless of which tool is active, you can
See “The Status Bar” on page 34. select an eligible object by right-clicking on
A selected object remains selected until it once. When you right-click to select an
another object is selected, a different tool is object a contextual menu also appears,
activated, the Esc key on the keyboard is displaying the object’s edit tools. You can
pressed, or any two mouse buttons are turn contextual menus on or off in the
pressed at the same time. Preferences dialog. See “Contextual
Menus” on page 33.
Select Objects If a drawing tool is active and you right-click
to select an object, you can unselect it by
With the exception of temporary CAD
left-clicking in an empty space in the
points, any object created using Chief
drawing area. Although a drawing tool is
144
active, it is not used. If you then left-click a independent of the object’s other edges when
second time, the active tool will be used. Edit Object Parts is enabled.
Select Edit> Edit Behaviors> Edit Object
Selected Edge
Parts to enable or disable the ability to
When you click on a polyline- or box-based edit polyline segments individually. Edit
object, the edge that you click nearest
becomes the selected edge and displays an Object Parts can also be turned on or off
edit handle larger than those on other edges. in the Preferences dialog. See “CAD Panel”
The handle on this edge may also display at on page 89.
the point where you clicked to select it.
Edit Object Parts also affects
connections between walls, railing and
fences, but does not affect CAD-based object
such as slabs and roof planes.
To use Edit Object Parts
1. Turn on Edit Object Parts .

2. Click on an individual edge of a
polyline, or a segment of wall, railing or
terrain path to select it.
This edge can be edited on the Selected Line
or Selected Arc tab of the object’s A selected Terrain Wall
specification dialog, as well as using a
variety of edit toolbar buttons. It can also be
moved using dimensions. See “Moving
Objects Using Dimensions” on page 831.
The start and end points of a CAD-based
object’s selected edge may be indicated by an
S and an E when the object is selected. This Edit Object Parts off Edit Object Parts on
can be helpful when editing the edge in the
object’s specification dialog. See “Edit 3. Notice that it is no longer connected to
Panel” on page 92. the rest of the polyline or adjacent walls.
4. The individual segment can now be
Edit Object Parts edited entirely independent of its neigh-
bors.
Polyline-based objects are composed
of lines and arcs that are connected 5. To connect the segment to the polyline
end to end. The individual edges of open and again, turn off Edit Object Parts
closed polylines can be selected and edited
145
Selecting Objects
and move the end handles so that they The marquee-select method can also be used
snap to the ends of adjacent segments. to group-select similar object types. For
example, click the Hinged Door child
Select Next Object button, hold down either the Shift or Ctrl key,
If there is more than one object in a drag a marquee, release the mouse button,
particular space, it may be difficult to and only door objects within the marquee are
select the desired object. When a nearby selected.
object is selected, click the Select Next
Object edit button or press the Tab key until To make marquee selection easier, you
the desired object becomes selected. This can turn off the display of objects you
function cannot be applied to groups of do not want to include in your selection set.
selected objects. See “Displaying Objects” on page 117.
Marquee Select Shift Select

Groups of objects can be selected by holding You can select a group of objects by adding
down either the Shift or Ctrl key when the them to the selection set one by one. Select
an object, hold down either the Shift or Ctrl
Select Objects tool is active and then key, and click additional objects to select
dragging a marquee around the objects to be them.
selected.
More than one type of object can be selected
You can specify whether objects must be using this method, but the ability to edit the
totally contained in or intersected by the group-selected items is limited to attributes
marquee, or whether an object’s center point that all selected objects have in common.
must be contained in the marquee, in the
Preferences dialog or using the Selection To remove an object from a selection set,
click it once more - again, with either the
Mode buttons, which can be added to
Shift or Ctrl key pressed.
your toolbars. See “Edit Panel” on page 92.
If an object is currently selected and a Select All
selection marquee is drawn around it, that
object becomes de-selected. If an object is Select Edit> Select All to select all objects
currently selected and a marquee is drawn drawn on the current floor, in the current
around other objects, the original object cross section/elevation view or CAD Detail
remains selected and the other objects are window, or on the current layout page.
added to the selection set.
Edit Area Tools
When using the marquee-select method, both
CAD and architectural objects included in The Edit Area Tools allow you to
the marquee are selected. To remove an define an area of your plan and select
object from the selection set, hold down the the objects within that area for editing. See
Shift key and click it. “Edit Area Tools” on page 209.
146
Using a Fence To Fence Select a group of objects
The Fence Select edit tool allows you 1. Draw a CAD line, arc, open polyline,
to group-select multiple CAD and closed polyline or spline that crosses or
CAD-based objects in contact with the touches all the objects you wish to
selected CAD line, arc, polyline or spline. group-select.
Using a Fence to make a group-selection can 2. Click the Fence Select edit button.
be helpful in a number of situations, for
3. The originally selected object serves as a
example:
fence to select the objects it touches,
• When many CAD objects must be while becoming deselected itself.
selected, particularly when they occupy
4. You can hold either the Shift or Ctrl key
the same area.
and click objects to add or remove them
• When a selection marquee would be the from the selection set.
wrong shape or include too many objects.
• When a selection group needs to be You can keep all fences on their own
selected more than once. custom layer and turn off their display
when not needed. See “Layers” on page 116.
The Fence Select edit tool cannot be
used to select architectural objects - only Select Same Type
CAD and CAD-based objects. See
“Architectural vs CAD Objects” on page Rooms, cabinets, windows and doors
131. on the current floor can be selected
based on a set of attributes that you specify
Fences are often used with the Trim Objects using the Select Same Type edit tool. See
and Extend Objects edit tools. See “Select Same / Load Same” on page 208.
“Trim and Extend” on page 198.
Editing Line Based Objects

Objects are considered line-based when they “Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on
can be edited similar to CAD lines using page 160.
their edit handles.
Some objects, notably walls, have line-based
CAD lines, framing members, straight walls editing behavior only when selected on
and railings, straight stairs and straight roads certain surfaces. See “Editing Walls” on page
are examples of line-based objects. 231.
Most line-based objects can be connected to Wall openings such as doors and windows
other like objects to form polylines or have line-based editing behavior in floor plan
polyline-based objects. See “Editing Open view only but cannot be rotated, reversed or
Polyline Based Objects” on page 155 and converted to an arc. See “Editing Doors” on
147
Editing Line Based Objects
page 296 and “Editing Windows” on page Move

326. • Click and drag the Move handle to move
the object according to the currently
active Edit Behavior . See “Edit
Behaviors” on page 137.
• Movement may be limited or stopped by
other objects or Snap Behaviors. Move
restrictions can be overridden by holding
down the Ctrl key while dragging. See
“Unrestricted Movement” on page 178.
Rotate
• The Rotate handle is used to rotate the
object, either about its center or about the
current CAD point. See “Rotating
Other objects, such as stairs and roads, have Extend/Change Angle
additional edit handles that allow you to • Drag an end handle parallel to the
concentrically adjust the object’s width. selected line to change its length.
Using the Edit Handles • Drag an end handle at an angle to the

selected line to change its angle. When
When selected, a typical line-based object
Angle Snaps are on, the line snaps to
displays four edit handles.
Allowed Angles.
Any action performed using the edit handles • Right-click and drag it to change the
can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or adjacent line into an arc, or vice versa.
any two mouse buttons at the same time. See “Alternate” on page 138.
Adjust Width
The behavior of the edit handles may
depend on the currently active Edit Some line-based objects, such as stairs and
Behavior. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 137. roads, have additional handles that allow the
width of the object to be adjusted.
Extend/Change Angle
Move Rotate
Adjust Width
148
• Click and drag a small, round Expand • Click the Open Object edit button to
handle to increase or decrease the open the specification dialog for the
object’s width. By default, objects are selected object(s). See “Specification
resized in 1" increments. This Snap Unit Dialogs” on page 33.
is defined in the Plan Defaults dialog.
See “General Plan Defaults Dialog” on • Click the Copy/Paste edit button to
page 68. copy the selected object(s) to the Win-
dows Clipboard so they can be pasted
Using Dimensions elsewhere. See “Copying and Pasting
Dimensions can be used to position
line-based objects relative to other • Click the Copy and Paste in Place
objects. See “Moving Objects Using edit button to create a copy of the
Dimensions” on page 831. selected object(s) at the same location as
the original. See “Copy and Paste in
Using Extension Line Snaps Place” on page 193.
Extension line snaps can be useful when • Click the Delete edit button to delete
editing line-based objects. See “Extension the selected object(s). See “Deleting
Snaps” on page 134. Objects” on page 196.
• Click the Transform/Replicate
Using the
Specification Dialog Object edit button to copy, move,
rotate, resize, or reflect the selected
Line-based objects can be edited using their object(s). See “Transform/Replicate
specification dialogs. See “Line Object Dialog” on page 200.
Specification Dialog” on page 888.
• Click the Multiple Copy edit button
Using the Edit Toolbar to make a series of copies at set intervals.
See “Multiple Copy” on page 194.
A selected line-based object can be edited in
a variety of ways using the buttons on the • Click the Accurate Move edit button
edit toolbar. to slow down the mouse speed when
using the edit handles. See “Accurate
The following toolbar buttons may display
Move” on page 179.
on the edit toolbar for a selected line-based
object: • Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular
edit button to make the selected
• Click the Select Next Object edit
object(s) parallel or perpendicular to a
button to select nearby objects instead of
straight edge. See “Using Make Parallel/
the selected object. See “Selecting
Perpendicular” on page 181.
149
Editing Arc Based Objects
• Click the Point to Point Move edit polyline-based object. See “Convert
button to accurately move the selected Polyline” on page 205.
object(s). See “Point to Point Move” on • Click the Change Line/Arc edit but-
page 179. ton to change a line-based object to an
• Click the Center Object edit button arc, or vice versa. See “Change Line/
to center an object along along a wall Arc” on page 186.
within a room or relative to a cabinet • Click the Fence Select edit button to
fixture. See “Center Object” on page 182. use the selected object(s) as a selection
• Click the Reflect About Object edit fence. See “Using a Fence” on page 147.
button to reflect the selected object(s) • Click the Fillet Two Lines edit but-
about another object. See “Reflecting ton, then click on a non-parallel line or
Objects” on page 190. arc to create an additional arc connecting
• Click the Move to Front of Group the two. See “Fillet Two Lines” on page
edit button to display the selected object 186.
in front of other objects in the same • Click the Chamfer Two Lines edit
drawing group. See “Move to Front of button, then click an edge adjacent to the
Group” on page 176. selected edge to chamfer the corner
• Click the Break Line edit button to between them. See “Chamfer Two Lines”
add a new corner or pivot point to the on page 187.
selected object. See “Break Line” on • Click the Extend Object(s) edit but-
page 185. ton to lengthen other object(s) until they
• Click the Reverse Direction edit but- intersect the selected object. See “Trim
ton to reverse the direction of the selected and Extend” on page 198. Not available
object(s). See “Reverse Direction” on for Sun Angles or North Pointers.
page 191. • Click the Trim Object(s) edit button
• Click the Convert Polyline edit but- to shorten the length of object(s) inter-
ton to convert the object into a special sected by the selected object. See “Trim
and Extend” on page 198. Not available
for Sun Angles or North Pointers.

Objects are considered arc-based when they CAD arcs, curved walls and railings, curved
can be edited similar to CAD arcs using their stairs, and curved roads are examples of arc-
edit handles. based objects.
150
Most arc-based objects can be connected to

other like objects to form polylines or The behavior of the edit handles may
polyline-based objects. depend on the currently active Edit
Behavior. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 137.
Resize Reshape
(changes radius) (moves center)
Move
Chord
Rotate
Extend Move Arc

Some objects, notably curved walls, have (along arc or chord) Center
arc-based editing behavior only when Move
selected on certain surfaces. See “Editing
• Two Move edit handles allow the arc to
be relocated without changing its shape.
Other objects, such as curved stairs and One is located at the center of the chord
roads, have additional edit handles that allow and the other, at the arc center.
you to concentrically adjust the object’s • If you would like to snap one of these
width. center points to another point, use that
handle when moving the arc. See “Align-
The currently active Arc Creation Mode
ing Arc Centers” on page 183.
determines how an arc-based object is
drawn. Once an arc is drawn, the active Arc • Click and drag the Move handle to move
Creation Mode does not affect it. See the object according the currently active
“Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes” on Edit Behavior . See “Edit Behaviors”
page 892. on page 137.
Using the Edit Handles other objects or Snap Behaviors. Move
When selected, a typical arc-based object restrictions can be overridden by holding
displays seven edit handles. down the Ctrl key while dragging. See
Any action performed using the edit handles
can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or
any two mouse buttons at the same time.
151
Resize
• Drag the small, round Resize edit handle
to change the radius and included angle
of the arc while maintaining its center.
Move edit handle
Rotate
• The Rotate handle is used to rotate the Resize edit handle
arc, either about its center or about the
Reshape
current CAD point. See “Rotating
Objects” on page 188. • Drag the small triangular Reshape
handle to change the length and location
Extend
of the center without moving the
• The end edit handles expand or contract endpoints.
the arc when moved along the arc radius
or chord.
• If you follow the path of the arc, the end
edit handles allow you to adjust the arc
length.
• The angle formed by the center point of
the arc and its two endpoints is referred to Reshape edit handle
as the Included Angle. If Angle Snaps
• If the object has a locked center, the
are on, the Included Angle of the arc, Reshape edit handle does not display.
as measured in degrees, can be rotated at See “Using Lock Center” on page 155.
Allowed Angles. See “Angle Snaps” on
Adjust Width
page 135.
• Right-click and drag it to change the Some arc-based objects, such as stairs, have
adjacent arc into a line, or vice versa. See additional handles that allow the width of the
“Alternate” on page 138. object to be adjusted.
Extend edit handles
152
Using the Edit Toolbar

A selected arc-based object can be edited in a
variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
toolbar.
on the edit toolbar for a selected arc-based
object:
Adjust Width
• Click and drag a small, round edit handle button to select nearby objects instead of
to increase or decrease the object’s width. the selected object. See “Selecting
By default, objects are resized according Objects” on page 144.
to the Snap Unit defined in the Plan
• Click the Open Object edit button to
Defaults dialog. See “General Plan
open the specification dialog for the
Defaults Dialog” on page 68.
selected object(s). See “Specification
Dialogs” on page 33.
Using Dimensions
• Click the Copy/Paste edit button to
Dimensions can be used to position
copy the selected object(s) to the Win-
arc-based objects. Dimension lines
typically locate tangent extension lines and
elsewhere. See “Copying and Pasting
any extension lines that may be parallel to
those lines rather than the arc itself. See
“Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on • Click the Copy and Paste in Place
page 831 and “Extension Snaps” on page edit button to create a copy of the
134. selected object(s) at the same location as
Extension line snaps can be useful when • Click the Delete edit button to delete
editing arc-based objects. See “Extension the selected object(s). See “Deleting
Snaps” on page 134. Objects” on page 196.
Using the
Specification Dialog Object edit button to copy, move,
Arc-based objects can be edited using their object(s). See “Transform/Replicate
specification dialogs. See “Arc Specification Object Dialog” on page 200.
153
• Click the Multiple Copy edit button polyline-based object. See “Convert
to make a series of copies at set intervals. Polyline” on page 205.
See “Multiple Copy” on page 194. • Click the Change Line/Arc edit but-
• Click the Accurate Move edit button ton to change an arc-based object to a
to slow down the mouse speed when line, or vice versa. See “Change Line/
using the edit handles. See “Accurate Arc” on page 186.
Move” on page 179. • Click the Convert Curve to Polyline
• Click the Point to Point Move edit edit button to convert the selected arc into
button to accurately move the selected a polyline. See “Convert Curve to Poly-
object(s). See “Point to Point Move” on line” on page 187.
page 179. • Click the Lock Center edit button to
• Click the Center Object edit button lock the selected arc-based object’s cen-
to center an object along along a wall ter. See “Using Lock Center” on page
within a room or relative to a cabinet 155.
fixture. See “Center Object” on page 182. • Click the Make Arc Tangent edit
• Click the Reflect About Object edit button to adjust the arc and attached
button to reflect the selected object(s) line(s) so they transition smoothly. See
about another object. See “Reflecting “Using Make Arc Tangent” on page 182.
Objects” on page 190. Only available when a selected arc is
attached on one or both ends to another
• Click the Move to Front of Group line or arc.
edit button to display the selected object
in front of other objects in the same • Click the Fence Select edit button to
drawing group. See “Move to Front of use the selected object(s) as a selection
Group” on page 176. fence. See “Using a Fence” on page 147.
• Click the Break Line edit button to • Click the Fillet Two Lines edit but-
add a new corner or pivot point to the ton, then click on a non-parallel line or
selected object. See “Break Line” on arc to create an additional arc connecting
page 185. the two. See “Fillet Two Lines” on page
186.
• Click the Reverse Direction edit but-
ton to reverse the direction of the selected • Click the Chamfer Two Lines edit
object(s). See “Reverse Direction” on button, then click an edge adjacent to the
page 191. selected edge to chamfer the corner
between them. See “Chamfer Two Lines”
• Click the Convert Polyline edit but- on page 187.
ton to convert the object into a special
• Click the Extend Object(s) edit but-
ton to lengthen other object(s) until they
154
intersect the selected object. See “Trim one of its Move edit handles or when the
and Extend” on page 198. Alternate edit behavior is enabled.
• Click the Trim Object(s) edit button An arc-based object with a locked center
to shorten the length of object(s) inter- lengthens and shortens along its curve when
sected by the selected object. See “Trim it is resized. When this is not possible, its
and Extend” on page 198. radius changes. In either case, its center
remains locked in the same place.
Show Arc Centers
Locked-center arcs do not display a Reshape
When working with arc-based objects edit handle when selected. See “Using the
or circles, it can be helpful to see their Edit Handles” on page 151.
center points. Click the Show Arc Centers
When it is part of a polyline, a locked-center
and Ends toggle button on the utility toolbar
arc resizes along its arc rather than its chord
to turn on their display. You can also turn on
when an adjacent line or arc is moved. Thus,
their display in the CAD Defaults dialog. See
the radius remains constant for an unlocked
“CAD Defaults Dialog” on page 875.
center arc, while the center does not change
Arc-based objects can be aligned using their for a locked-center arc.
center points. See “Aligning Arc Centers” on
page 183.
Using Lock Center

Click the Lock Center edit button to
lock or unlock the selected arc-based
object’s center. When an arc’s center is
locked, it cannot be moved except by using Unlocked center Locked center
Editing Open Polyline Based Objects

Open polyline-based objects are composed Objects are considered open polyline-based
of individual line- and arc-based objects that when they can be edited similar to open CAD
are connected at their end points but do not polylines using their edit handles.
form an enclosed area.
Open CAD polylines, connected walls,
stairs, and roads are examples of open
polyline-based objects.
155
center, a Reshape handle. See “Editing Arc

Based Objects” on page 150.
When a polyline is selected, the edge that
you click nearest is called the selected edge,
and certain operations affect only this edge.
The Move handle of the selected edge is
larger than that of other edges. It displays
along the length of a line segment, or at the
center of the chord on an arc segment. See
“Selected Edge” on page 145.
The behavior of the edit handles

Other objects, such as connected stair and depends on the currently active Edit
road segments, have additional edit handles Behavior. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 137.
that allow you to concentrically adjust the
width of all segments of the object.
Move Move arc
segment Resize
polyline
If Edit Object Parts is enabled, clicking arc
on a CAD polyline edge selecst the indi- Move line
vidual edge rather than the entire polyline. segment
Reshape
See “Edit Object Parts” on page 145.
arc
Using the Edit Handles Extend

Reshape Rotate
A polyline can be composed of many
polyline
segments. See “Polylines” on page 900.
Move
When selected, an open polyline-based
object displays a Move handle, a Rotate • Click and drag the Move handle to move
handle, a Reshape handle at the intersection the object according the currently active
of each segment, and an Extend handle at Edit Behavior .
each end.
Each straight, line-based segment also has a other objects or Snap Behaviors. Move
Move edit handle along its length. restrictions can be overridden by holding
Each curved, arc-based segment has its own
Move handle at the center of its chord, a
Resize handle and, if it has an unlocked
156
Rotate active Edit Behavior and whether

• The Rotate handle is used to rotate the the arc has a locked center. Adjacent seg-
object, either about its center or about the ments may extend, contract, or change
current CAD point. Its position varies angle to maintain their connections.
depending on which edge is currently
Resize Arc
selected. See “Rotating Objects” on page
188. • Click and drag the Resize Arc edit handle
to change the radius, chord length and
Extend chord position of the arc segment,
• Click and drag an Extend handle to depending on the currently active Edit
lengthen or shorten the unconnected end
Behavior and whether the arc has a
of the selected line or arc segment, or to
locked center. Adjacent segments may
change the radius of the selected arc. See
extend, contract, or change angle to
“Editing Arc Based Objects” on page
maintain their connections.
150.
Reshape Arc
• Right-click and drag it to change the
adjacent line into an arc, or vice versa. • Click and drag the Reshape Arc edit han-
See “Alternate” on page 138. dle to change the radius of the arc without
moving its end points. Only available if
Reshape
the arc has an unlocked center.
• Click and drag a Reshape edit handle to
Adjust Width
change the angle and/or length of the seg-
ments on either side of it, or the size of Some arc-based objects, such as stairs and
the object, depending on the currently roads, have additional handles that allow the
active Edit Behavior . width of the object to be adjusted.
Move Line Segment Adjust

Width
• The Move Line Segment edit handle is
found on straight segments of open
polylines and moves the straight section
according to the currently active Edit
Behavior . Adjacent segments may
extend or contract in their original direc- • Click and drag a small, round edit handle
tions to maintain their connections. to increase or decrease the object’s width.
Move Arc By default, objects are resized in 1"
increments. This Snap Unit is defined in
• Click and drag the Move Arc edit handle
the Plan Defaults dialog. See “General
to change the radius and/or chord length
Plan Defaults Dialog” on page 68.
or position, depending on the currently
157
Using Dimensions elsewhere. See “Copying and Pasting

Dimensions can be used to move or
reshape polyline-based objects. See • Click the Copy and Paste in Place
“Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on edit button to create a copy of the
page 831. selected object(s) at the same location as
Extension line snaps, especially tangent • Click the Delete edit button to delete
snaps, can be useful when editing polyline the selected object(s). See “Deleting
vertices. See “Extension Snaps” on page 134. Objects” on page 196.
Using the Specification
Dialog Object edit button to copy, move,
Open polyline-based objects can be edited object(s). See “Transform/Replicate
using their specification dialogs. See Object Dialog” on page 200.
“Polyline Specification Dialog” on page 901.
• Click the Multiple Copy edit button
Using the Edit Toolbar to make a series of copies at set intervals.
A selected open polyline-based object can be
edited in a variety of ways using the buttons • Click the Accurate Move edit button
on the edit toolbar. to slow down the mouse speed when
The following toolbar buttons may display Move” on page 179.
on the edit toolbar for a selected open
polyline-based object: • Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular
edit button to make the selected
• Click the Select Next Object edit straight edge parallel or perpendicular to
button to select nearby objects instead of another straight edge. See “Using Make
the selected object. See “Selecting Parallel/Perpendicular” on page 181. Not
Objects” on page 144. available when the selected edge is an
• Click the Open Object edit button to arc.
open the specification dialog for the • Click the Point to Point Move edit
selected object(s). See “Specification button to accurately move the selected
Dialogs” on page 33. object(s). See “Point to Point Move” on
• Click the Copy/Paste edit button to page 179.
copy the selected object(s) to the Win- • Click the Add to Library edit button
dows Clipboard so they can be pasted to add the selected object(s) to the library.
See “Adding a New Object” on page 700.
158
• Click the Center Object edit button • Click the Convert Curve to Polyline
to center an object along along a wall edit button to convert the selected arc into
within a room or relative to a cabinet a polyline. See “Convert Curve to Poly-
fixture. See “Center Object” on page 182. line” on page 187. Only available when
the selected edge is an arc.
• Click the Reflect About Object edit
button to reflect the selected object(s) • Click the Lock Center edit button to
about another object. See “Reflecting lock the center of the selected curved
Objects” on page 190. edge. See “Using Lock Center” on page
155. Only available when the selected
• Click the Move to Front of Group edge is an arc.
edit button to display the selected object
in front of other objects in the same • Click the Make Arc Tangent edit
drawing group. See “Move to Front of button to adjust the selected curved edge
Group” on page 176. and attached edge(s) so they form a
smooth shape. See “Using Make Arc
• Click the Break Line edit button to Tangent” on page 182. Only available
add a new corner or pivot point to the when the selected edge is an arc attached
selected object. See “Break Line” on on one or both ends to another line or arc.
page 185.
• Click the Fence Select edit button to
• Click the Reverse Direction edit but- use the selected object(s) as a selection
ton to reverse the direction of the selected fence. See “Using a Fence” on page 147.
object(s). See “Reverse Direction” on
page 191. • Click the Fillet Two Lines edit but-
ton, then click on an adjacent edge to cre-
• Click the Convert Polyline edit but- ate an arc connecting the two. See “Fillet
ton to convert the object into a special Two Lines” on page 186. Cannot be used
polyline-based object. See “Convert if the adjacent edge is an arc.
Polyline” on page 205.
• Click the Chamfer Two Lines edit
• Click the Change Line/Arc edit but- button, then click on an edge adjacent to
ton to change a line-based polyline edge the selected edge to chamfer the corner
to an arc, or vice versa. See “Change between them. See “Chamfer Two Lines”
Line/Arc” on page 186. on page 187.
• Click the Record Walkthrough Along
• Click the Extend Object(s) edit but-
Path edit button to record a walk- ton to lengthen other object(s) until they
through movie of your model along the intersect the selected object. See “Trim
path defined by the selected polyline. See and Extend” on page 198.
“Walkthroughs” on page 948.
• Click the Trim Object(s) edit button
to shorten the length of object(s) inter-
159
Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects
sected by the selected object. See “Trim

and Extend” on page 198.

Closed polyline-based objects are composed Other objects, such as connected road
of individual line- and arc-based objects segments, have additional edit handles that
joined end-to-end and forming an enclosed allow you to concentrically adjust the width
area. of all segments of the object.
Objects are considered closed polyline-based
when they can be edited similar to closed If Edit Object Parts is enabled, clicking
CAD polylines using their edit handles. on a polyline edge selects the individual
edge rather than the entire polyline. See “Edit
Closed CAD polylines, slabs and roof planes Object Parts” on page 145.
are examples of closed polyline-based
objects. Using the Edit Handles
Some objects, notably walls, have closed A polyline can be composed of many
polyline-based editing behavior only when segments. See “Polylines” on page 900.
they are selected on certain surfaces in 3D
views. See “Editing Walls” on page 231. When selected, a closed polyline-based
object displays a Move handle, a Rotate
handle, and a Reshape handle at the
intersection of each segment.
Each straight, line-based segment has a
Move edit handle along its length.
Each curved, arc-based segment has its own
Move handle at the center of its chord, a
Resize handle and, if it has an unlocked
center, a Reshape handle. See “Editing Arc
When a polyline is selected, the edge that
you click nearest is called the selected edge,
and certain operations affect only this edge.
The Move handle of the selected edge is
larger than that of other edges. It displays
along the length of a line segment, or at the
center of the chord on an arc segment. See
“Selected Edge” on page 145.
160
Any action performed using the edit handles the object, depending on the currently
can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or active Edit Behavior .
Move Line Segment
The behavior of the edit handles may • The Move Line Segment edit handle is
depend on the currently active Edit found on straight segments of closed
Behavior. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 137. polylines and moves the straight section
Behavior . Adjacent segments may
Move arc Rotate
extend or contract in their original direc-
segment
Move Resize tions to maintain their connections.
polyline arc
Move Arc
Reshape
• Click and drag the Move Arc edit handle
arc
to change the radius and/or chord length
or position, depending on the currently
Reshape Move line
polyline segment active Edit Behavior and whether
the arc has a locked center. Adjacent seg-
Move ments may extend, contract, or change
• Click and drag the Move handle to move angle to maintain their connections.
the object according the currently active Resize Arc
Edit Behavior . • Click and drag the Resize Arc edit handle
• Movement may be limited or stopped by to change the radius, chord length and
other objects or Snap Behaviors. Move chord position of the arc segment,
restrictions can be overridden by holding depending on the currently active Edit
down the Ctrl key while dragging. See Behavior and whether the arc has a
“Unrestricted Movement” on page 178. locked center. Adjacent segments may
Rotate extend, contract, or change angle to
maintain their connections.
• The Rotate handle is used to rotate the
object, either about its center or about the Reshape Arc
current CAD point. Its position varies • Click and drag the Reshape Arc edit han-
depending on which edge is currently dle to change the radius of the arc without
selected. See “Rotating Objects” on page moving its end points. Only available if
188. the arc has an unlocked center.
Reshape
• Click and drag a Reshape edit handle to
Using Dimensions
change the angle and/or length of the seg- Dimensions can be used to move or
ments on either side of it, or the size of reshape closed polyline-based objects.
161
See “Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on selected object(s) at the same location as
page 831. the original. See “Copy and Paste in
Place” on page 193.
Using Extension Line Snaps
• Click the Delete edit button to delete
Extension line snaps, especially tangent the selected object(s). See “Deleting
snaps, can be useful when editing polyline Objects” on page 196.
vertices. See “Extension Snaps” on page 134. • Click the Transform/Replicate
Using the Object edit button to copy, move,

Specification Dialog
object(s). See “Transform/Replicate
Closed polyline-based objects can be edited Object Dialog” on page 200.
using their specification dialogs. See
“Polyline Specification Dialog” on page 901. • Click the Multiple Copy edit button
to make a series of copies at set intervals.
Using the Edit Toolbar See “Multiple Copy” on page 194.
A selected closed polyline-based object can • Click the Accurate Move edit button
be edited in a variety of ways using the to slow down the mouse speed when
buttons on the edit toolbar. using the edit handles. See “Accurate
on the edit toolbar for a selected closed • Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular
polyline-based object: edit button to make the selected
straight edge parallel or perpendicular to
• Click the Select Next Object edit another straight edge by either rotating
button to select nearby objects instead of the selected edge or the entire polyline.
the selected object. See “Selecting See “Using Make Parallel/Perpendicular”
Objects” on page 144. on page 181. Not available when the
selected edge is an arc.
• Click the Open Object edit button to
open the specification dialog for the • Click the Point to Point Move edit
selected object(s). See “Specification button to accurately move the selected
Dialogs” on page 33. object(s). See “Point to Point Move” on
page 179.
copy the selected object(s) to the Win- • Click the Add to Library edit button
dows Clipboard so they can be pasted to add the selected object(s) to the library.
elsewhere. See “Copying and Pasting See “Adding a New Object” on page 700.
• Click the Center Object edit button
• Click the Copy and Paste in Place to center an object along along a wall
edit button to create a copy of the
162
within a room or relative to a cabinet • Click the Convert Polyline edit but-
fixture. See “Center Object” on page 182. ton to convert the object into a special
• Click the Reflect About Object edit polyline-based object. See “Convert
button to reflect the selected object(s) Polyline” on page 205.
about another object. See “Reflecting • Click the Change Line/Arc edit but-
Objects” on page 190. ton to change a line-based polyline edge
• Click the Move to Front of Group to an arc, or vice versa. See “Change
edit button to display the selected object Line/Arc” on page 186.
in front of other objects in the same • Click the Convert Curve to Polyline
drawing group. See “Move to Front of edit button to convert the selected arc into
Group” on page 176. a polyline. See “Convert Curve to Poly-
• Click the Break Line edit button to line” on page 187. Only available when
add a new corner or pivot point to the the selected edge is an arc.
selected object. See “Break Line” on • Click the Lock Center edit button to
page 185. lock the center of the selected curved
• Click the Reverse Direction edit but- edge. See “Using Lock Center” on page
ton to reverse the direction of the selected 155. Only available when the selected
object(s). See “Reverse Direction” on edge is an arc.
page 191. • Click the Make Arc Tangent edit
• Click the Union edit button to join button to adjust the selected curved edge
two or more objects. See “Union, Inter- and attached edge(s) so they form a
section, and Subtract” on page 202. Not smooth shape. See “Using Make Arc
available for objects specified as holes. Tangent” on page 182. Only available
when the selected edge is an arc attached
• Click the Intersection edit button to on one or both ends to another line or arc.
create a new object defined by the areas
shared by the original objects. See • Click the Fence Select edit button to
“Union, Intersection, and Subtract” on use the selected object(s) as a selection
page 202. Not available for objects speci- fence. See “Using a Fence” on page 147.
fied as holes. • Click the Fillet Two Lines edit but-
• Click the Subtract edit button, then ton, then click on an adjacent edge to cre-
click a second object to remove the area ate an arc connecting the two. See “Fillet
shared by both objects. See “Union, Two Lines” on page 186. Cannot be used
Intersection, and Subtract” on page 202. if the adjacent edge is an arc.
Not available for objects specified as • Click the Record Walkthrough Along
holes. Path edit button to record a walk-
through movie of your model along the
163
Editing Box-Based Objects
path defined by the selected polyline. See • Click the Extend Object(s) edit but-
“Walkthroughs” on page 948. ton to lengthen other object(s) until they
• Click the Chamfer Two Lines edit intersect the selected object. See “Trim
button, then click an edge adjacent to the and Extend” on page 198.
selected edge to chamfer the corner • Click the Trim Object(s) edit button
between them. See “Chamfer Two Lines” to shorten the length of object(s) inter-
on page 187. sected by the selected object. See “Trim
Editing Box-Based Objects

Objects are considered box-based when they Using the Edit Handles
can be edited similar to CAD boxes using
their edit handles. When selected, a box-based object displays
ten edit handles. Unlike polylines, boxes
Box-based objects are similar to closed must always have four sides with right-
polyline-based objects, but must always have angled corners.
four sides with right-angled corners.
In addition to the CAD Box tools, Text can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or
objects, many library symbols, CAD blocks, any two mouse buttons at the same time.
pictures and images are examples of box-
based objects.
depend on the currently active Edit
Extend Move
Resize
Rotate
• Click and drag the Move handle to move

the object according the currently active
Edit Behavior . See “Edit Behaviors”
on page 137.
164

Using Dimensions
reshape box-based objects. See
• The four Resize handles located at each
“Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on
corner are used to increase or decrease
page 831.
the size of the object.
Using the
Box-based objects can be edited using their
specification dialogs. See “CAD Box
• The four Extend handles display along Using the Edit Toolbar
each edge. If you select an object on an A selected closed polyline-based object can
edge, the Extend handle displays at the be edited in a variety of ways using the
point where you clicked; otherwise, it buttons on the edit toolbar.
displays at the center of the edge.
on the edit toolbar for a selected closed
polyline-based object:

button to select nearby objects instead of
the selected object. See “Selecting
• The triangular Rotate handle located Objects” on page 144.
near the selected edge of the object is
used to rotate it either about its center or • Click the Open Object edit button to
the current CAD point. The pointer open the specification dialog for the
changes to a circular arrow when selected object(s). See “Specification
moved over this handle. See “Rotating Dialogs” on page 33.
165
Editing Spline Based Objects
• Click the Copy/Paste edit button to available when the selected edge is an
copy the selected object(s) to the Win- arc.
dows Clipboard so they can be pasted • Click the Point to Point Move edit
elsewhere. See “Copying and Pasting button to accurately move the selected
Objects” on page 191. object(s). See “Point to Point Move” on
• Click the Copy and Paste in Place page 179.
edit button to create a copy of the • Click the Center Object edit button
selected object(s) at the same location as to center an object along along a wall
the original. See “Copy and Paste in within a room or relative to a cabinet
Place” on page 193. fixture. See “Center Object” on page 182.
• Click the Delete edit button to delete • Click the Reflect About Object edit
the selected object(s). See “Deleting button to reflect the selected object(s)
Objects” on page 196. about another object. See “Reflecting
• Click the Transform/Replicate Objects” on page 190.
Object edit button to copy, move, • Click the Move to Front of Group
rotate, resize, or reflect the selected edit button to display the selected object
object(s). See “Transform/Replicate in front of other objects in the same
Object Dialog” on page 200. drawing group. See “Move to Front of
• Click the Multiple Copy edit button Group” on page 176.
to make a series of copies at set intervals. • Click the Convert Polyline edit but-
See “Multiple Copy” on page 194. ton to convert the object into a special
• Click the Accurate Move edit button polyline-based object. See “Convert
to slow down the mouse speed when Polyline” on page 205.
using the edit handles. See “Accurate • Click the Extend Object(s) edit but-
Move” on page 179. ton to lengthen other object(s) until they
• Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular intersect the selected object. See “Trim
edit button to make the selected and Extend” on page 198.
straight edge parallel or perpendicular to • Click the Trim Object(s) edit button
another straight edge. See “Using Make to shorten the length of object(s) inter-
Parallel/Perpendicular” on page 181. Not sected by the selected object. See “Trim

Objects are considered spline-based when using their edit handles. See “Splines” on
they can be edited similar to CAD splines page 908.
166
Sprinkler lines, spline terrain curbs, spline Move

terrain walls and both round and kidney- • Click and drag the Move handle to move
shaped terrain features are spline-based the object according the currently active
objects.
on page 137.
Rotate
• Click and drag the Rotate edit handle to
rotate the entire spline.
Reshape
Using the Edit Handles • The Reshape edit handles display along
the spline at each vertex. Click and drag a
When a spline is selected, several different
Reshape edit handle to change the length,
types of handles display. How many handles
angle and curve of adjacent segments
display depends on whether the Advanced
without affecting other reshape handles.
Splines edit button is on or not. See
“Advanced Splines” on page 170.

Resize
Reshape
• The Resize edit handles display along the
Move spline, between each vertex. Click and
drag a Resize edit handle to move the
adjacent vertices and lengthen or shorten
adjacent segments.
Resize
Rotate
167
is enabled. See “Lock Control Handle

Angle” on page 171.
Using the
Spline-based objects can be edited using
their specification dialogs. See “Polyline
Advanced Splines Using the Edit Toolbar

Additional edit handles, called Control A selected spline-based object can be edited
Handles, display beside each spline vertex in a variety of ways using the buttons on the
when Advanced Splines is enabled. See edit toolbar.
“Advanced Splines” on page 170.
on the edit toolbar for a selected spline-based
Control
Handles
object:
Select Next Object - Select

nearby objects instead of the
selected spline.
Tangent lines Open Object - Open the specifica-
through the vertex tion dialog for the selected
object(s). See “Polyline Specifica-
• Click and drag a round Control edit han- tion Dialog” on page 901.
dle to change the angle of the associated Copy/Paste - Copy the selected
tangent line. object(s) to the Windows Clipboard
so they can be pasted elsewhere.
See “Copy/Paste” on page 192.
Copy and Paste in Place - Create
a copy of the selected object(s) at
the same location as the original.
See “Copy and Paste in Place” on
page 193.
Delete - Delete the selected
object(s). See “Deleting Objects” on
page 196.
• If two tangent lines pass through a vertex,

the angle between them remains constant
as long as Lock Control Handle Angle
168
Transform/Replicate Object - Trim Object(s) - Shorten the length

Copy, move, rotate, resize, or of object(s) intersected by the
reflect the selected object(s). See selected object. See “Trim and
“Transform/Replicate Object Dia- Extend” on page 198.
log” on page 200. Extend Object(s) - Lengthen other
Multiple Copy - Make a series of object(s) until they intersect the
copies of the selected object at set selected object. See “Trim and
intervals. See “Multiple Copy” on Extend” on page 198.
page 194. Convert Polyline - Convert the
Accurate Move - Slow down the object into a special polyline-based
mouse speed when using the edit object. See “Convert Polyline” on
handles. See “Accurate Move” on page 205.
page 179. Fence Select - Use the selected
Make Parallel/Perpendicular - object(s) as a selection fence..
Make the selected straight edge See “Using a Fence” on page 147.
parallel or perpendicular to another
Convert Spline to Polyline - Con-
straight edge. See “Make Parallel/
vert the selected spline into a
polyline. See “Convert to Spline” on
Point to Point Move - Accurately page 208.
move the selected object(s). See
Record Walkthrough Along Path
“Point to Point Move” on page 179.
- Record a walkthrough movie of
Make CAD Block - Block the your model along the path defined
selected object(s) together. See by the selected spline. See “Walk-
“CAD Blocks” on page 912. throughs” on page 948.
Add to Library - Add the selected Advanced Splines - Turn on
object(s) to the library. See “Adding advanced splines for the selected
a New Object” on page 700. spline. See “Advanced Splines” on
Center Object - Center the page 170.
selected objects(s) along a wall Straighten Spline Segment -
within a room or relative to a cabi- Straighten a segment of an
net fixture. See “Center Object” on advanced spline. See “Straighten
page 180. Spline Segment” on page 170. Only
Reflect About Object - Reflect the available when Advanced Splines is
selected object(s) about another turned on.
object. See “Reflecting Objects” on Lock Control Handle Angle -
page 190. Maintain the relative angle between
Move to Front of Group - Display the vertex and its control handles.
the selected objects in front of other See “Lock Control Handle Angle”
objects in floor plan view. See on page 171. Only available when
“Move to Front of Group” on page Advanced Splines is turned on.
176.
Break Line - Add a new corner or Advanced Splines
pivot point to the selected object.
See “Break Line” on page 185. Click the Advanced Splines edit
button to display additional edit
169
handles called Control Handles. These edit Straighten Spline Segment

handles allow you to reshape the spline with
more control at each vertex. The Straighten Spline Segment edit
button is used to straighten a segment
Tangent line of an advanced spline between two vertex
points.
Vertex Control To use, first select the spline. Click the

Handles
Straighten Spline Segment edit button,
then click the spline between two vertices.
The line between the vertex and the control That portion becomes straight.
handles defines the tangent to the spline
through the vertex.
• Move the control handles at the end of
the line to change the direction of the
spline at that point. The spline curves
away from its tangent direction at the ver-
tex on its way to the next vertex.
• Change the shape of the spline by click- Click a spline segment Result
ing and dragging the control handles.
If you reselect the spline, you see that the
two control handles point toward the straight
section from each vertex point on either end
of the straight section.
Control handle Result
Notice that the control handles on either side

of a vertex maintain their relationship to each
other in a straight line. When one is moved,
the other moves to keep the tangent line
tangent with the vertex. Lock Control Handle Angle
You can specify all subsequently drawn The Lock Control Handle Angle edit
splines to be Advanced Splines in the button is available when Advanced
Preferences dialog. See “CAD Panel” on Splines is enabled, and is turned on by
page 89. default, as well. This tool maintains the
relative angle between the vertex and its
control handles.
Click the Lock Control Handle Angle

edit button to free the control of the relative
170
edit angles between the vertex and its control

handles. The control handles can now be
adjusted individually. The opposite handle
remains unaffected by the change. Notice
that the spline adjusts so that it is tangent to
the lines between the vertex and both of its
control handles. Result
Notice that the control handles are not colinear
Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses

Objects created using the Circle Tools
are unusual in that no architectural The behavior of the edit handles may
objects share their functionalities. depend on the currently active Edit

When selected, circles, ovals and ellipses Reshape
display eleven edit handles. Move
Unlike Ovals and Ellipses , a Circle

Concentric
cannot be edited into any other shapes; it Resize
can only be a circle unless it is converted into
a polyline. See “Convert Curve to Polyline” Rotate
on page 187.
Any action performed using the edit handles Move
any two mouse buttons at the same time. • Click and drag the Move handle to move
the object according the currently active
on page 137.
171
Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses

Rotate
• Click and drag the Rotate handle of an
oval or ellipse to change its orientation.
Concentric Resize
• The Concentric Resize edit handle dis-
plays on the perimeter of a circle between
a corner Reshape handle and the center.
Click and drag this handle to resize the
circle without moving its center point.
Reshape
• The eight edit handles beyond the perim-
eter are Reshape edit handles. Move them
in or out to resize and reshape an oval or
ellipse.
Using Dimensions
resize circle-based objects. See
“Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on
page 831.
• Unlike ovals and ellipses, circles cannot Using the

be reshaped. When a Reshape handle is Specification Dialog
dragged on a circle, it is only resized.
Circles, ovals and ellipses can be edited
using their specification dialogs. See “CAD
Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification Dialog” on
page 898.
172
Using the Edit Toolbar • Click the Multiple Copy edit button
A selected circle, oval or ellipse can be to make a series of copies at set intervals.
edited in a variety of ways using the buttons See “Multiple Copy” on page 194.
on the edit toolbar.
• Click the Accurate Move edit button
The following toolbar buttons may display to slow down the mouse speed when
on the edit toolbar for a selected circle, oval using the edit handles. See “Accurate
or ellipse: Move” on page 179.
• Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular
button to select nearby objects instead of edit button to make the selected
the selected object. See “Selecting straight edge parallel or perpendicular to
Objects” on page 144. another straight edge. See “Using Make
Parallel/Perpendicular” on page 181. Not
• Click the Open Object edit button to available when the selected edge is an
open the specification dialog for the arc.
selected object(s). See “Specification
Dialogs” on page 33. • Click the Point to Point Move edit
button to accurately move the selected
• Click the Copy/Paste edit button to object(s). See “Point to Point Move” on
copy the selected object(s) to the Win- page 179.
elsewhere. See “Copying and Pasting • Click the Center Object edit button
Objects” on page 191. to center an object along along a wall
within a room or relative to a cabinet
• Click the Copy and Paste in Place fixture. See “Center Object” on page 182.
edit button to create a copy of the
selected object(s) at the same location as • Click the Reflect About Object edit
the original. See “Copy and Paste in button to reflect the selected object(s)
Place” on page 193. about another object. See “Reflecting
the selected object(s). See “Deleting • Click the Move to Front of Group
Objects” on page 196. edit button to display the selected object
• Click the Transform/Replicate in front of other objects in the same
drawing group. See “Move to Front of
Object edit button to copy, move, Group” on page 176.
object(s). See “Transform/Replicate • Click the Extend Object(s) edit but-
Object Dialog” on page 200. ton to lengthen other object(s) until they
intersect the selected object. See “Trim
and Extend” on page 198. Not available
for ellipses.
173
Architectural and CAD Blocks
• Click the Trim Object(s) edit button polyline-based object. See “Convert
to shorten the length of object(s) inter- Polyline” on page 205.
sected by the selected object. See “Trim • Click the Convert Curve to Polyline
and Extend” on page 198. Not available edit button to convert the selected circle,
for ellipses. oval or ellipse into a polyline. See “Con-
• Click the Convert Polyline edit but- vert Curve to Polyline” on page 187.
ton to convert the object into a special
Architectural and CAD Blocks

An architectural block is a group of objects CAD objects can be group-selected
joined together so that they behave as a and blocked together using the Make
single object. When an architectural block is CAD Block edit button.
created, it behaves as a single object while
The Explode CAD Block edit button
the components retain their own attributes.
breaks a CAD block into its individual
See “Architectural Blocks” on page 676.
components.
A CAD block is a group of CAD objects that
have been joined together so that they behave Add to Library
as a single object. Architectural objects
cannot be included in a CAD block, nor vice Architectural and CAD blocks can be
versa. See “CAD Blocks” on page 912. added to the library by clicking the
Add to Library edit button. See “Placing
Both architectural and CAD blocks can be Library Objects” on page 690.
added to the library for use in other plans.
Replace From Library
Blocking Objects
An architectural or CAD block can be
Architectural objects can be group- replaced by another object from the
selected and blocked together using the library by clicking the Replace from
Make Architectural Block edit button. Library edit button. An architectural block
The Explode Architectural Block edit can be replaced by an architectural object or
button breaks an architectural block block, while a CAD block can be replaced by
into its individual components. another CAD block. See “Replace From
Library” on page 693.
Displaying Objects
The display of objects in 2D and 3D views Objects” on page 117.
can be controlled by layer. See “Displaying
174
Line and Fill Styles To display views in gray scale
Line style, weight and color can be 1. Select Tools> Display Settings> Color
controlled by layer or overridden in the
specification dialogs for many objects. See Off to toggle color off.
“Line Style Tab” on page 889.
2. Select Edit> Preferences to open
You can also toggle the on screen display of the Preferences dialog.
line weights on and off. See “Show Line 3. On the Appearance panel, check Obey
Weights” on page 996. Color On/Off Setting. See “Appear-
In addition, many objects have a fill style ance Panel” on page 71.
that can be specified in the objects’
specification dialogs. See “Fill Style Tab” on To display views in black and white
page 902.
1. Select Tools> Display Settings> Color
Color On/Off Off to toggle color off.
The display of color on-screen can be 2. Select Edit> Preferences to open
toggled on and off in all views except the Preferences dialog.
most rendered views by selecting Tools>
Display Settings> Color On/Off. 3. On the Appearance panel, uncheck
Obey Color On/Off Setting. See
You can set defaults to specify whether cross “Appearance Panel” on page 71.
section/elevations, camera views and
overviews using the Vector View rendering When color is toggled off and Obey Color
technique are generated with colors turned in On/Off Setting is unchecked, all lines
the 3D Settings dialog. See “Options Tab” appear in black and solid fills appear in either
on page 745. white or black, depending on which is closer
to the actual line or fill color when color is
The display of colors may or may not make a turned on. The background remains as
view easier to understand. Experiment to see defined in the Preferences dialog. See
what works for you, then set your default in “Colors Panel” on page 74.
the 3D Settings dialog for each view.
You can also print in color, black and white,
Colors are used in Vector Views to represent or gray scale. See “Print Dialog” on page
different materials. The colors can be printed 1006.
if you have a color printer, or can appear as
shades of gray on a black and white printer. Arc Centers and Ends
If you have assigned a picture file to
represent the texture of a material in rendered The display of arc center- and
views, the program can sample that picture endpoints, and the display of circle
file and define an approximate color to use in center points can be enabled by clicking the
all Vector views. See “Define Material Show Arc Centers and Ends toggle button
175
Displaying Objects
or in the CAD Defaults dialog. See “CAD Group, but still displays behind objects in the
Defaults Dialog” on page 875. Front Group.
Drawing Groups Move to Front of Group

Each object in a plan or layout file belongs to Click the Move to Front of Group
one of three drawing groups, which edit button to move the selected
influences whether it displays in front of or object(s) so that it displays in front of other
behind other objects. objects in the same drawing group. Move to
• The Default Group is where most Front of Group functions like the checkbox
objects are placed when first created. of the same name in the object’s specification
dialog.
• Objects moved to the Back Group dis-
play behind those in the other two draw-
ing groups.
• Objects moved to the Front Group dis-
play in front of those in the other two
drawing groups.
With the exception of imported pictures,
when an object is first created, it is placed in
the Default Group. Objects in this group
display in front of or behind one another
according to program-defined rules that
Move to Front of Group is useful for
cannot be modified.
creating a sense of depth or to improve a
Once a CAD or CAD-based object is created, drawing’s clarity. For example, you can
though, you can control how it displays move a solid circle representing rebar to the
relative to other objects using its front of a foundation wall with a concrete fill
specification dialog. See “Line Style Tab” on pattern in a cross section so that the rebar is
page 889. not masked by the wall’s fill pattern.
For example, you can move an object to the
Back Group or Front Group so that it Patterns and Textures
displays behind or in front of objects in the The appearance of architectural objects in 3D
other drawing groups. views is affected by the materials applied to
You can also check Move to Front of Group the objects’ surfaces. See “Materials” on
to display the object in front of other objects page 706.
in its drawing group, but not necessarily in Material patterns display in Technical
front of objects in other groups. Illustration, Line Drawing and Vector Views,
An object moved to the front of the Default while textures display in other rendered
Group, for example, displays in front of views. See “Rendering Techniques” on page
objects in that group and those in the Back 785.
176
You can turn the display of patterns in Vector Delete Surface

views on or off by selecting 3D> Toggle
In any 3D view, select 3D> Delete
Patterns . Surface, then click a surface in the
In most rendered views, you can turn on or view to temporarily remove the surface from
off the display of textures by selecting 3D> the current view. See “Delete 3D Surface” on
page 757.
Toggle Textures .
Refresh Display
Low Detail Mode
Refresh Display redraws the current
Low Detail Mode suppresses patterns window to clean up extra lines, show
and textures and draws simplified missing items, and correct random on-screen
approximations of some objects in 3D. Select effects caused by changes to a model. Select
3D> Toggle Low Detail Mode to toggle Tools> Display Settings> Refresh Display
Low Detail Mode on or off. See “Low Detail or press the F5 key to refresh the on-screen
Display” on page 798. display.
Moving Objects
Objects can be moved individually and in When Object Snaps are enabled, a
groups using the edit handles, as well as a selected object snaps to its original location
variety of edit tools. if it passes over that location while being
moved.
The behavior of the Move edit handle varies
Select an object, then click the Move edit depending on the currently active Edit
handle and drag it to a new location. When
your pointer is over the Move handle, it Behavior . See “Edit Behaviors” on page
displays a four-headed arrow. 137.
• If the Default , Resize , Concen-

tric or Fillet edit behavior is
active, the object moves orthogonal, or at
a right angle to, any of its edges.
• If the Alternate edit behavior is

active, the selected object(s) can be
moved at Allowed Angles if Angle
As an object is moved, it jumps at set
Snaps are enabled, or orthogonal to
increments when Grid Snaps are
any of its edges if they are not. See
enabled. See “Grid Snaps” on page 136.
“Alternate” on page 138.
177
Moving Objects
• If the Move edit behavior is active, the CAD Stops Move/

selected object(s) can be moved by click- Wall Stops Move
ing and dragging any edit handle that
would otherwise be used for resizing. See CAD and CAD-based objects can be set to
“Move” on page 138. stop at other CAD objects and/or at walls as
they are being moved. See “Line Style Tab”
Bumping/Pushing on page 889.
When Edit> Snap Settings> Some objects, such as cross boxes, framing
Bumping/Pushing is enabled, CAD members and insulation, are automatically
and CAD-based objects with CAD Stops set to stop when moved against other CAD
Move and/or Wall Stops Move enabled, as objects.
well as architectural objects, bump into and CAD Stops Move and Wall Stops Move do
can push one another as they are moved.
not function if Bumping/Pushing is
When an object bumps into another similar turned off.
object while it is being moved, it stops.
Continue dragging and the selected item Unrestricted Movement
resumes movement through the obstructing
object. The Maximum Bump Distance, or Many objects have restrictions placed on
the distance you must drag to override their movement by their own properties or
bumping, is set in the Preferences dialog. specification settings. Architectural objects,
See “Snap Properties Panel” on page 95. for example, bump into other 3D objects as
they are being moved when Bumping/
Bumping/Pushing also affects objects Pushing is enabled.
when they are moved using dimensions. See
“Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on CAD-based objects may be set to stop at
page 831. other CAD objects or at walls. See “Line
Style Tab” on page 889.
Walls, wall openings, cabinets, furnishings
and fixtures, and CAD and CAD-based Other move restrictions are activated by the
objects are examples of objects that can push Snap Settings . See “Snap Behaviors” on
other objects of these same types once they page 133.
have bumped into them. Instead of dragging
through the obstructing object(s), release the These restrictions can be overridden when
mouse button and then click and drag the necessary by holding down the Ctrl key
Move edit handle a second time in the same while dragging to move an object.
direction to push.
To move an object freely
Certain types of objects, notably roof planes,
and objects on locked layers can be bumped 1. Select the object.
but cannot be pushed. See “Layer Display 2. Hold down the Ctrl key.
178
3. Click the Move edit handle and drag it To nudge an object in 3D views, you can
to the new location. program the keys of your choice for use as
nudging hotkeys. See “Hotkeys” on page
You can also press the Ctrl key while
114.
dragging an object’s Move handle to override
move restrictions.
Point to Point Move
Accurate Move The Point to Point Move edit button
allows a selected object or group of
Click the Accurate Move edit button,
objects to be accurately moved.
then move the selected object(s) at a
slower speed than normal for greater
To use Point to Point Move
precision. Accurate Move can also be used
to resize, reshape or rotate objects. 1. Select one or more objects that you
would like to move, then click the Point
Accurate Move is not a toggle button: it
only affects the speed of the mouse during to Point Move edit button.
the next edit. The next time you want to use 2. Click a point that you want to accurately
this edit tool, you need to click it again. reposition.
You can also slow down the movement speed 3. Click the point in the plan where you
of a selection after you have started moving would like the selected point to be relo-
it by pressing the Shift key. Release the Shift cated when it is moved.
key to resume movement at normal speed. 4. The selected object(s) are moved so that
they maintain their position relative to
Nudging the point.
You can use your keyboard to move a Point to Point Move can be used with
selected object or objects by single Snap
the Copy/Paste edit button. See “To
Grid increments in 2D and 3D views1.
point to point copy” on page 196.
In floor plan view, the arrow keys are
programmed to nudge a selected object by Point to Point Move can also be used
default; however, you can program different with the Edit Area tools. See “Edit Area
buttons for nudging instead2. Tools” on page 209.
To nudge an object in floor plan view, select
it and press any of the four arrow keys: Up, Center Object
Down, Left or Right. The Center Object edit button allows
you to move walls, cabinets and other
objects so that they are centered along a wall
1.“Grid Snaps” on page 136. within a room or relative to a window or
2.TODO. cabinet.
179
Aligning Objects
Move to Framing Reference Enter Coordinates

Framing members can be positioned Objects or the selected edges of some objects
relative to a Framing Reference using can be moved using the Enter Coordinates
the Move to Framing Reference edit tool. dialog. See “Entering Coordinates” on page
See “Framing Reference Markers” on page 142.
480.
Using the Transform/
Using Dimensions Replicate Object Dialog
Objects or the selected edges of some Objects and groups of objects can be
objects can be moved using moved relative to themselves or an
dimensions. See “Moving Objects Using absolute location using the Transform
Dimensions” on page 831. Replicate Object dialog. See “Transform/
Replicate Object Dialog” on page 200.
Aligning Objects
It is often important to align objects such as itself. This does not align objects to the grid
text boxes, roof plane edges or walls, or to unless they were already snapped to the grid.
align objects on different floors. There are
See “Snap Behaviors” on page 133.
several methods to choose from.
Using Dimensions
Using Snap Settings
Create a temporary or manual
With Object Snaps on, you can snap the dimension relative to an object such as
edge of a selected object to that of another. a wall or line, and relocate the objects to the
Select an edge of an object. Drag it to the same dimension. See “Moving Objects
edge of another object to reveal an object Using Dimensions” on page 831.
snap point, then release the mouse.
Text objects can be aligned using set-
With Grid Snaps on and Angle
tings in the Text Specification dialog.
Snaps off, select the left side of the See “Aligning Text” on page 856.
object, and drag from the center move
handle. This snaps the selected side to the CAD Stops Move/
grid. Wall Stops Move
When both Grid Snaps and Angle CAD and CAD-based objects can be aligned
using another CAD object or a wall as a
Snaps on, objects snap at increments
guide. Check the CAD Stops Move and/or
equal to the Snap unit specified in the Plan
Wall Stops Move boxes in the objects’
Defaults dialog rather than onto the grid
180
specification dialogs, then move them until 4. If the first object is within 45 degrees of
they bump into the CAD object or wall that parallel to the second object, it is made
you wish to use as a guide for alignment. See parallel. Otherwise, it is made perpen-
“Line Style Tab” on page 889. dicular to the second object.
Using Make Parallel/ Select edge

Perpendicular
The Make Parallel/Perpendicular Click button
edit button allows you to make a
selected object parallel or perpendicular to
any straight edge. Click
wall
If you select an edge of a polyline-based
object, adjacent edges extend or contract to
maintain contact, but other edges are remain Result
unchanged. The selected edge rotates about
its endpoint if selected near the end, or about You can also make the selected edge parallel
its center if you click within its middle third. by rotating the entire object. See “Make
Parallel/Perpendicular with Polyline Based
The Make Parallel edit button displays Objects” on page 189.
for a selected CAD block instance when a
line, including a straight polyline edge, or
box edge within a block instance,straight
Center Object
polyline edge is selected. The entire block is The Center Object edit button can be
rotated to make the selected line or edge is used to center a variety of objects
perpendicular or parallel to the item along a wall within a room in floor plan
subsequently clicked on. view.
To use Make Parallel/Perpendicular Center Object can also be used to center

objects relative to windows and cabinets. At
1. Select an object such as a roof plane on least one wall must be present in the plan.
the edge that you would like to make
parallel or perpendicular to another To center an object in a room
object.
• Click near the center of the edge to 1. Select an object such a cabinet.
rotate it about the center.
2. Click the Center Object edit button.
• Click near an end to rotate the edge
about that end. 3. Click near a wall within a room to center
the selected object relative to the portion
2. Click the Make Parallel edit button of that wall defining the room.
3. Click a straight edge such as a wall.
181
Aligning Objects
4. The object is moved relative to the wall If you click outside an exterior wall instead
you clicked closest to. of clicking the inside, you center the selected
• In the images below, the area physi- object along the edge of the Exterior Room.
cally closest to the vertical interior wall See “The Exterior Room” on page 271.
is highlighted for each room.
• Click in that area to center the door Using Make Arc Tangent
along the wall in that room. If a selected arc is attached on one or
both ends to another line or arc, the
Make Arc Tangent edit button displays.
Click this button to adjust the arc and
attached lines so they transition smoothly.
The door is centered in the room on the right
Before After
To use Make Arc Tangent
1. Select an arc-based object attached to

like objects one or both ends.
2. Click the Make Arc Tangent edit

button.
The door is centered in the room at the upper left
3. If the arc is attached to two objects, the
Radius of Tangent Arc dialog opens.
4. The radius from the center of curvature

to the middle of the arc-based object dis-
plays. Keep this radius or change it, and
The door is centered in the room at the lower left click OK.
182
• If the arc is attached to two perpendicu- Floor” on page 359 and “CAD Defaults
lar lines, this dialog opens but the Arc Dialog” on page 875.
Radius field is not enabled.
To align center points easily, it is helpful to
5. The arc and attached segments adjust so
turn on Object Snaps and turn off Angle
that the arc radius matches the target as
closely as possible and the arc is made Snaps . See “Object Snaps” on page 133
tangent to the attached segments. and “Angle Snaps” on page 135.
Aligning Arc Centers Aligning Objects on

The center points of circles and arc-based
Different Floors
objects can be aligned, even if the objects are Objects on different floors can be aligned
on different floors, when the Reference
with one another using Object Snaps
Display is turned on and Show Arc Centers
and the Reference Display . See “Object
and Ends is enabled. See “Reference
Snaps” on page 133 and “Reference Floor”
on page 359.
Resizing Objects
Objects can be resized using the edit handles, To override any movement restrictions
specification dialogs, and the Transform/ caused by snap settings or the presence of
Replicate Object dialog. other objects, press the Ctrl key while
dragging an edit handle.
Using the Edit Handles As an object is resized, any dimensions
Depending on the currently active Edit indicating its size will update to reflect yoru
changes. You can use dimensions as
Behavior , the end, corner and/or side
references to help you achieve the correct
edit handles can be used to resize a selected
size for most objects.
object. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 137.
When the Concentric edit behavior is Using the

active, dragging an object’s corner or end Specification Dialog
handle resizes it according to the Most objects can be accurately resized in
Concentric Jump value set in the their specification dialogs. See
Preferences dialog. See “Concentric” on “Specification Dialogs” on page 33.
page 139.
Objects can be resized about either their Using Dimensions
center points or the current CAD point. See
Many objects can be resized by
“Behaviors Panel” on page 93.
selecting an edge and then moving that
183
Reshaping Objects
edge using dimensions. See “Using point using the Transform Replicate Object
Dimensions” on page 180. dialog. See “Transform/Replicate Object
Replicate Object Dialog
Most objects can be resized about
either their centers or an absolute
Reshaping Objects
There is a variety of ways to reshape objects the Selected Line or Selected Arc tab of their
using the edit handles, specification dialogs specification dialogs. See “Polyline
and edit toolbar buttons. Specification Dialog” on page 901.
Some objects, notably circles and box-based
objects, cannot be reshaped - only resized. Using Dimensions
See “Resizing Objects” on page 183. Both temporary and manually drawn
dimensions can be used to increase or
Using the Edit Handles decrease the distance between the edge a
line- or polyline-based object and another,
Depending on the Edit Behavior in use, parallel edge or line.
the end, corner and/or side edit handles can
be used to reshape a selected object. See Angular Dimensions can be used to
“Edit Behaviors” on page 137. adjust the angle where two polyline segments
meet. See “Using Angular Dimensions” on
When a line-based, arc-based, or open-
page 189.
polyline based object is selected, you can
right-click and drag an end handle to change
a line into an arc or vice versa. This behavior Break Line
does not apply to closed polylines. The Break Line edit button can be
To override any movement restrictions used to break an individual line-, arc-,
caused by snap settings or the presence of or spline-based object into two segments.
other objects, press the Ctrl key while The edges of a polyline-based object can also
dragging an edit handle. be broken.
Using the Note: The Break Line edit button is not avail-
Specification Dialog able for box-based objects, objects created
with the Circle Tools, or some architectural
A variety of CAD and CAD-based objects objects such as stairs and trusses.
can be reshaped by editing values on either
184
The Break Line edit tool can be used to To create a complete break
create two types of breaks: partial breaks and 1. Click the object or edge that you want to
complete breaks. break into two segments.
When a partial break is created, a new corner
2. Double-click the Break Line edit
edit handle is placed at the location of the
button.
break. Partial breaks are also referred to as
joints, nodes or pivot points. 3. Click the edge to create a complete
break at that location.
• Click the Break Line edit button to
add a new corner or pivot point to the You can now click either side of the location
selected object. of the break and move the selected object or
edge completely independent of the object or
To create a partial break edge on the other side of the break.
1. Click the object or edge that you want to When Object Snaps are enabled, breaks
break into two segments. can be placed at snap locations such as
midpoints. See “Object Snaps” on page 133.
2. Click the Break Line edit button
once or press the 3 key. If you place a complete break at a polyline
corner, the adjacent polyline edges become
3. Click the edge to create a new corner disconnected.
edit handle at that location and two sepa-
rate edges on either side of that handle. Change Line/Arc
If you click and drag one of the edit handles
Select an individual line-based or arc-
on either side of the partial break, the edge
based object or a segment of a
moves at a right angle to itself and another
polyline-based object and click the Change
edge forms, connecting the moved edge with
Line/Arc edit button to convert the selected
the one on the other side that does not move.
segement from a line to an arc or vice versa.
You can remove an edge from a polyline-
based object by clicking and dragging a
corner handle until it snaps to an adjacent
corner handle.
When a complete break is created, the object
or edge is totally severed at that point.
With the exception of framing members,
complete breaks cannot be created on CAD-
based architectural objects. In the case of Make Parallel/Perpendicular
framing members, only complete breaks can
The Make Parallel edit button can be
be created.
used to reshape a polyline by making
a selected edge parallel or perpendicular to
185
Reshaping Objects
another straight edge. See “Using Make 4. Click on the line or polyline segment
Parallel/Perpendicular” on page 181. that you want the selected line to con-
nect to with a fillet.
Fillet Two Lines 5. Continue filleting two lines by clicking
The Fillet Two Lines edit tool allows on one line, clicking the Fillet Two
you to connect two non-parallel line- Lines edit button, then clicking on
based objects using an arc of a specified the second line. The same Fillet Radius
radius. If the two lines are already connected, is used until you open the Fillet/
this arc is inserted between them. Chamfer dialog again and change it.
If the two objects are not connected and one Once two lines are filleted, the arc between
of them is an arc, both objects will extend or them can be edited. See “Editing Arc Based
contract as needed to become connected. No Objects” on page 150.
additional arc is created.
The Fillet Two Lines edit tool can also
The Fillet Two Lines edit tool is be used to join non-adjacent edges of a
available for a selected roof or ceiling plane; closed polyline as long as those edges are not
however, it cannot be used to create an arc at parallel. In doing so, polyline edges may be
a corner. Instead, it can only be used to removed.
remove edges.
To remove polyline edges
To use Fillet Two Lines
1. Click on a closed polyline segment that
1. Click on a line or polyline segment that you would like to connect to another
you would like to connect to another line segment.
or segment with a filleted corner.
2. Click the Fillet Two Lines edit but-
2. Double-click the Fillet Two Lines ton.
edit button to open the Fillet/Chamfer 3. Click on a non-adjacent edge of the
dialog. same polyline.
Chamfer Two Lines

The Chamfer Two Lines edit tool
allows you to create a straight corner
bevel of a specified size connecting any two
non-parallel lines. It can also be used to
extend an arc so that it joins to another arc.
3. Specify the desired Fillet Radius and
click OK. The Chamfer Two Lines edit tool is
used much the way as the Fillet Two Lines
edit tool. First, set the Chamfer Distance
186
in the Fillet/Chamfer dialog, then select a 2. Click the Convert Curve to

line, click the button and click a second line Polyline edit button.
to chamfer the two.
3. In the Convert Curve to Polyline dia-
Deleting Intervening Lines log, specify the number of sides you
would like the converted arc or circle-
Fillet Two Lines and Chamfer Two based object to have.
Lines can also be used to eliminate parts

of a polyline. To use, fillet or chamfer two
non-adjacent lines that are in the same closed
polyline.
• The initial values in this dialog may

vary depending on the type of object
selected.
4. Click OK to convert the selected arc or
A dialog warns you that lines will be deleted circle-based object into a polyline with
if you proceed. Click OK to approve the the specified number of edges.
polyline edit and see the changes occur.
Convert to Spline
Convert Curve to Polyline Click the Convert to Spline edit
button to convert the selected polyline-
The Convert Curve to Polyline edit
based object into a spline. See “Convert to
button allows you to convert the
Spline” on page 208.
selected arc- or circle-based object to a
polyline composed of line segments.
Union, Intersection, Subtract
To convert curve to polyline Closed polyline-based
1. Select an arc-based object or circle. objects can be reshaped using
the Union, Intersection and Subtract edit
buttons. See “Union, Intersection, and
Subtract” on page 202.
Rotating Objects
Objects can be rotated individually and in By default, an object or group of objects
groups using a variety of methods. rotate about the center point of the selection
set. You can instead specify that objects
187
Rotating Objects
rotate about the current CAD point. See Rotate/Resize About

“The Current Point” on page 882.
Objects can be rotated or resized about
either their own centers or the current
CAD point. See “Point Tools” on page 880.
Select an object, then click the triangular
Rotate edit handle and drag it in any
direction. When your pointer is over the
Rotate handle, it displays a curved arrow.
The angles of line-based objects can also be
changed by dragging an end handle in a
direction other than parallel to the object.
The object rotates about the opposite end You can specify which behavior is used by
point. See “Editing Line Based Objects” on selecting Edit> Edit Behaviors> Rotate/
page 147.
Resize About Current Point . When this
option is selected, objects rotate about the
When Angle Snaps are enabled, objects
current CAD point; when it is not selected,
snap to Allowed Angles as specified in the
object rotate about their centers.
Plan Defaults dialog as they are rotated. See
“Angle Snaps” on page 135. The Rotate/Resize About behavior can also
be specified in the Preferences dialog. See
To override any movement restrictions
caused by snap settings or the presence of
other objects, press the Ctrl key while
dragging an edit handle. Entering Coordinates
A rotated array of copies of the selected Objects can be rotated by entering
object(s) can be created using the Multiple coordinates or a distance and angle in the
Enter Coordinates dialog. See “Entering
Copy edit tool. See “To create an array Coordinates” on page 142.
of copies” on page 195.
Using Angular Dimensions
Using the
Specification Dialog Angular Dimensions are useful for
adjusting the angles of a variety of
The exact angle of some objects such as objects with straight edges.
lines, arcs, walls and the selected edges of
polylines can be specified on either the To change an angular dimension
General tab, Selected Line tab, or Selected
Arc tab of that object’s specification dialog. 1. Select CAD> Dimension> Angular
Dimension , then click and drag to
draw an angular dimension line between
the objects you want to move.
188
• Begin and end as close as possible to

the two objects you wish to locate.
2. Select the edge that you want to move.
3. Click the dimension value to open the
Set Angular Dimension dialog.
• The Previous Value is indicated
degrees, minutes and seconds.
Choose to either Rotate only selected edge,
as before, or to Rotate entire polyline. Your
setting remains until you access the Make
Parallel dialog again and change it.
Polylines rotate according to the current

Rotate/Resize About setting. See
4. Enter a value in the New Value field.
5. Select Rotate Edge to move the selected
edge when OK is clicked or select
Rotate entire polyline to rotate the Objects and groups of objects can be
entire object the selected edge is a part rotated to a relative or absolute angle
of, maintaining the Previous Value of the using the Transform Replicate Object
angle. dialog. See “Transform/Replicate Object
6. Click OK to apply the change. Dialog” on page 200.
When an entire polyline is rotated using the Rotate View

Set Angular Dimension dialog, it rotates
around the vertex of the angle. To rotate everything in floor plan view,
including all objects on all floors, the
Make Parallel/Perpendicular Snap and Reference Grids, and the drawing
with Polyline Based Objects sheet, select Tools> Rotate View to open the
Rotate Plan View dialog.
The Make Parallel/Perpendicular
edit button usually adjusts the angle of
a selected polyline edge. See “Using Make
Parallel/Perpendicular” on page 181.
To rotate the entire polyline instead, double-
click the Make Parallel edit button to Enter the amount of degrees to rotate the
open the Make Parallel dialog. floor plan view in decimal units using either
positive or negative values.
189
Reflecting Objects
The degrees rotated displays in ±180 degree Text objects rotate with the plan unless you
format. For example, if you enter 270 uncheck Rotate with plan in the Text
degrees, it displays as -90 degrees when the Specification dialog for each object. See
dialog is reopened. “Text Specification Dialog” on page 850.
Rotate View rotates a plan relative to its

The Rotate View tool does not rotate
original orientation. For example, entering objects; it literally rotates your view of
90 degrees twice results in a rotation of 90 those objects. As a result, it does not alter the
degrees, not 180 degrees. orientation of the plan in layout views or on
the printed page.
Reflecting Objects
There are several ways to reflect an object, 2. Select the object(s) to be reflected.
group of objects, or an entire plan about an
axis or another object. Either the original 3. Click the Reflect About Object edit
object(s) or copies of the original(s) can be button.
reflected. 4. Click the CAD line to reflect the selec-
tion about the line.
Reflect About Object 5. The selection is reflected around the
A selected object or objects can be CAD line, and the original is no longer
reflected about another object, there.
regardless of its angle, using the Reflect To retain a copy of the selected object(s) in
About Object edit tool. the original location, click the Copy/
Line-based objects are often used for Paste edit button before clicking the
reflecting a selection, but most objects have
Reflect About Object button.
an axis that can be used.
• When an open or closed polyline-based Using the Transform/
object is used as the reflective object, the
edge that is clicked on acts as the axis.
• When a circle or box-based object such Objects and groups of objects can also
as a CAD box or cabinet is used as the be reflected horizontally or vertically
reflective object, the axis runs down the using the Transform Replicate Object
center of the object from back to front. dialog. See “Transform/Replicate Object
To use Reflect About Object
1. Draw a CAD line to act as the reflection

line.
190
Reverse Plan Reversing a plan rebuilds the entire model

and affects views sent to layout.
The Reverse Plan tool is a quick way
to mirror a plan so that everything is
Reverse Direction
swapped left to right.
Select a line-based, arc-based or
Select Tools> Reverse Plan to reflect an polyline-based object and click the
entire plan right to left, as though it were Reverse Direction edit button to reverse its
reflected about a vertical line. Reverse direction.
Plan reverses all floors associated with Reversing a line or polyline is useful with
the plan. certain line styles or with an arrow at one
end.
Copying and Pasting Objects

Objects can be cut, copied and pasted press Ctrl + V while in that application to
individually and as groups. They can be enable the Paste function.
copied from one floor to another, one view
window to another, and one file to another. Copy
Because copying uses the Windows
Clipboard, objects can be pasted into other Select Edit> Copy to copy the selected
applications, as well. object(s) to the Windows Clipboard.
To paste the selection in Chief Architect or
Objects cannot be pasted into any views that another application, select Edit> Paste or
they cannot be created in normally. Thus, press Ctrl + V while in that application to
CAD objects cannot be pasted into a 3D enable the Paste function.
camera view or overview.
Similarly, architectural objects cannot be Paste
pasted into CAD detail windows or onto a Select Edit> Paste to enable Paste
layout page. mode, then left- or right-click in the
A few objects, such as Terrain Perimeters current view to paste the selected object(s)
and camera symbols, cannot be copied. previously copied to the Windows Clipboard
at that location.
Cut Once pasted, these object(s) are selected.
Select Edit> Cut to remove the Objects pasted in 3D views are selected on
selected object(s) from the file and their top surfaces.
save them in the Windows Clipboard. To If the selection being pasted consists of text,
paste the selection in Chief Architect or it is placed in a Text object.
another application, select Edit> Paste or
191
If the selection being pasted is an image, the • Click the Main Edit Mode edit but-
Paste Image dialog opens.
ton or press the Esc key to return to the
selected objects’s main edit toolbar.
If you paste a selection in a file other than its
original source file, when you return to the
original, Paste mode is still enabled.
The Copy/Paste edit button can be used

with the edit handles in either of two ways:
by clicking or by dragging an edit handle.
The options in the Paste Image dialog and
their results are similar to those in the Screen To Copy/Paste by clicking
Capture Setup dialog. See “Creating Screen
Captures” on page 946. 1. Select an object or objects to copy.
2. Click the Copy/Paste edit button,

Copy/Paste
select Edit> Copy from the menu or
Click the Copy/Paste edit button to press Ctrl + C. The cursor displays the
copy the selected object(s) to the Copy/Paste icon.
Windows Clipboard and immediately enable 3. If you wish to paste the copy in a differ-
the Paste function in Chief Architect. ent view or program window, open that
window.
The Copy/Paste edit button activates
4. If your cursor does not display the Copy/
Paste mode in which each available edit tool
Paste icon, select Edit> Paste from the
and handle makes a copy in addition to its
menu or press Ctrl + V.
primary function and four new edit buttons
display on the edit toolbar. 5. Left- or right-click once to paste a copy
of the object at that location.
• Click the Sticky Mode edit button
remain in the current mode and place To Copy/Paste by dragging
multiple copies of the selected object(s).
1. Select an object or objects to copy.
• Click the Point to Point Move edit
button to make a copy of the selection at 2. Click the Copy/Paste edit button,
a specific location. See “Point to Point select Edit> Copy from the menu or
Move” on page 179. press Ctrl + C. The cursor displays the
Copy/Paste icon.
• Click the Reflect About Object edit
button to make a copy of the selection 3. Drag an edit handle:
reflected about another object. See • Drag the Move edit handle to position
“Reflecting Objects” on page 190. the copy at a new location.
192
• Drag a corner handle to create a copy in Because multiple walls, railing and fencing
the same location but with a different cannot share the same space, the Copy and
size or shape. The result depends on Paste in Place edit button is not avail-
which Edit Behavior you use. See able for these objects.
“Edit Behaviors” on page 137.
4. You can resize or position the copy Paste Hold Position
accurately with respect to the original by When copying between different floors
watching the moved distance in the Sta- or view windows, you can paste a copy
tus Bar at the bottom of the screen. at the same absolute position as the original
selection using Paste Hold Position.
Sticky Mode
Normally, after an action is performed To use Paste Hold Position
using the edit tools or handles while in 1. Select the object(s) to be copied.
an edit mode such as Paste mode, you return
to the Main Edit Mode. Click the Sticky 2. Click the Copy/Paste edit button.
Mode edit button to remain in Paste mode 3. Switch to the desired floor or plan file
and continue pasting copies of the selected and select Edit> Paste> Paste Hold
object(s).
Position .
To exit Paste mode and return to the main
edit toolbar for the selected object, click the 4. A copy is placed at the same X, Y coor-
dinates on the new floor or in the new
Main Edit Mode edit button or press the plan as the original’s position.
Esc key on your keyboard. If you have not
pasted a copy of the selected object and Paste Special
immediately click Copy/Paste after
The Paste Special tool allows you to
returning to the Main Edit Mode, Sticky
choose a representation for the
Mode is still enabled. selection to be pasted.
Selections can be pasted as:
Sticky Mode is available when the Trim
Object(s), Extend Object(s), Copy/Paste
• Enhanced Windows Metafiles (EMF).
or Multiple Copy edit button is clicked. See See “Metafiles” on page 943.
“Trim and Extend” on page 198. • Device Independent Bitmaps (BMP). See
“Importing Pictures” on page 940.
Copy and Paste in Place • Unformated non-unicode text (TXT).
Click the Copy and Paste in Place • File Name (a path to a file). Depending
edit button to create a copy of the on the file type, it will be either opened or
selected object(s) at the same location as the imported (if supported).
original. The copy remains selected so you
• Unformatted text (HTML). Pastes as text.
can perform additional operations.
193
• Model Objects - Chief Architect format, To use Multiple Copy

not compatible with other programs.
1. Select the object(s) to copy.
To use Paste Special 2. Click the Multiple Copy edit
1. Select an object, image, text or file on button.
your computer and copy it.
3. Click the Sticky Mode edit button if
2. Switch to the desired Chief Architect you wish to make more than one set of
view window and select Edit> Paste> multiple copies.
Paste Special . 4. Click and drag the Move edit handle.
3. In the Paste Special dialog, select the Copies of the selection are made at regu-
desired representation for the selection lar intervals between the original and the
and click OK. pointer’s location.
4. Click in the drawing area to place the 5. Release the mouse button to place the
copy at that location. copies. The dragged distance determines
the number of copies placed.
Multiple Copy 6. If you clicked the Sticky Mode edit
`The Multiple Copy edit button makes button, you can drag the last object cre-
it easy to create regularly spaced ated to make additional copies.
copies of any object or group of objects,
7. Click the Main Edit Mode edit but-
including CAD Blocks and Architectural
ton or press the Esc key to return to the
Blocks.
Multiple Copy Dialog

Separate multiple copy intervals can be To set the copy intervals for these objects,
specified for: click the Multiple Copy button, then
• General objects
click the Multiple Copy Interval button
• Roof and floor trusses to open the Multiple Copy dialog.
• Rafters The specified intervals are retained between
• Floor and ceiling joists program sessions.
• Wall studs
194
1 Offset Between Copies When • Primary Number of Copies - Specify

Dragging - Click this radio button to the number of copies to be made.
specify the offsets, or copy intervals, at • Secondary Copies - Specify the number
which objects are copied as you drag with the of copies to be made when the Alternate
mouse.
edit behavior is active.
• Primary Offset - Specify the offset, or
copy interval, for each object type.
The intervals for automatically generated raf-
• Secondary Offset - You can also specify ters, joists, and studs are set on their respec-
a secondary offset, or copy interval, for tive tabs in the Build Framing dialog. See
each object type that is used when the “Build Framing Dialog” on page 467
Alternate edit behavior is active. See
“Alternate” on page 138. The Multiple Copy tool can be used
• Rotation Of All Objects - Specify the with the Alternate edit behavior to
copy interval, in degrees, to be used when create arrayed copies of objects.
objects are rotated as they are copied.
To create an array of copies
2 Evenly Distribute Copies When
Dragging - Click this radio button to 1. Select the object(s) to copy.
specify a set number of copies to be made as
you drag with the mouse. The further you 2. Click the Multiple Copy edit
drag, the wider the spaces between the button.
copies. These settings apply to all object
types. 3. Right-click to enable the Alternate
edit behavior and drag the either Move
195
Deleting Objects
or the Rotate edit handle in any direc- Using Point to Point Move
tion. The Primary Offset or Primary
Number of Copies is used. The Point to Point Move edit button
can be used in combination with Copy/
4. Release the mouse button and move the
pointer in another direction. The Sec- Paste to make a copy of the selected
ondary Offset or Secondary Copies object(s) at a specified location. See “Point
value is used. to Point Move” on page 179.
5. Click the left or right mouse button to To point to point copy
place the array of copies.
1. Select the object(s) to be copied, click
A rotated array can be rotated about the the Copy/Paste edit button, then the
selected object’s center or a CAD point.
See “Rotate/Resize About” on page 188. Point to Point Move edit button.
2. Click at the start point and then at the
Using the Transform/ end point.
Replicate Object Dialog 3. An exact copy of the selected object(s)
is created at the end point while the orig-
Objects and groups of objects can be
inal remains unchanged.
copied and pasted using the Transform
Replicate Object dialog. See “Transform/
Replicate Object Dialog” on page 200. Using Reflect About Object
The Reflect About Object edit button
Copy Region as Picture can be used in combination with Copy/
The Copy Region as Picture tool Paste to make a reflected copy of the
allows you to copy any portion of the selected object(s), much the way Point to
screen and save it as a picture. See “Copy Point Move can. See “Reflect About
Region as Picture” on page 946. Object” on page 190.
Deleting Objects
Objects can be deleted in a variety of ways: • Entire categories of objects can be
• Select an object or group of objects, then deleted using the Delete Objects dialog.
click the Delete edit button, select If an object has a line with arrow or text
leader attached to it, the arrow or leader is
Edit> Delete from the menu, or press deleted if the object is deleted. To prevent the
the either the Delete or Backspace key on arrow from being deleted, drag the attached
your keyboard. end away from the object before deleting it.
196
Delete Objects Dialog 3. In the Delete section, check the box for
each category of objects you want to
Use the Delete Objects dialog to delete. Click Select All to check all the
delete all objects of one or more boxes or Clear All to uncheck all boxes.
specified types in one room, on the current
• If “Roof Planes” cannot be selected,
floor, or in the entire plan.
they may be locked. See “Editing Roof
Planes” on page 387.
Although objects on locked layers can-
4. When the scope is set to Single Room:
not be selected, most can nevertheless
be deleted using the Delete Objects dialog. • Move your cursor into the drawing area
and click in a room of the plan to delete
To use the Delete Objects dialog objects of the selected type within that
room without closing the dialog.
1. Select Edit> Delete Objects to open • Continue clicking on rooms or choose a
the Delete Objects dialog. different Delete Scope.
• Click Done when all selections have
been deleted.
5. If you select All Rooms On This Floor
or All Floors, you do not need to click in
floor plan view. The OK button
becomes available, and clicking it closes
the dialog and delete the specified
objects.
Deleting Polyline Edges

There are number of different ways to delete
individual edges of polyline-based objects:
• Select Edit Object Parts . Select the

edge and delete. See “Edit Object Parts”
on page 145.
• Drag a corner handle until it overlaps an
adjacent corner handle to remove the
edge between them and merge them into
a single handle.
• Create a complete break at both ends.
2. Specify the Delete Scope as Single Select the edge and delete. See “To create
Room,All Rooms On This Floor, or All a complete break” on page 185.
Floors.
197
Trim and Extend
• The Fillet Two Lines and Chamfer Delete Surface

Two Lines tools can be used to delete In any 3D view, select 3D> Delete
polyline edges. See “Reshaping Objects” Surface, then click a surface in the
on page 184. view to temporarily remove the surface from
the current view without permanently
affecting the object. See “Delete 3D Surface”
on page 757.
Trim and Extend

The Extend Object(s) and Trim Trim Objects
Object(s) edit tools allow you to
lengthen or shorten a variety of CAD objects Lines, arcs, polylines, circles and
and framing members. See “Framing” on framing items can be trimmed. The
page 460. trimming, or cutting, object may be any CAD
object, a group of CAD objects, or even a
When either the Extend Object(s) or Trim CAD block. Select the trimming object(s)
Object(s) edit buttons are clicked, its edit and click the Trim Object(s) edit button.
mode is enabled and three new edit buttons
display on the edit toolbar. The Trim Object(s) edit tool can be used
in three different ways:
• Click the Sticky Mode edit button
remain in the current mode and edit mul- • Individually clicking on objects to be
tiple objects or select multiple fences. trimmed.
• Selecting objects to be trimmed using a
• Click the Select Fence edit button, fence. See “Using a Fence” on page 147.
then click an object to use it as a fence.
See “Using a Fence” on page 147. • Selecting objects to be trimmed using a
temporary fence.
• Click the Main Edit Mode edit but-
ton or press the Esc key to return to the To trim by clicking
1. Draw the cutting line(s) or polyline(s)
If you did not do a fence selection and
through the objects to be trimmed.
then immediately click either Extend
Object(s) or Trim Object(s) after return- 2. Select the cutting line(s) and click the
ing to the Main Edit Mode, Sticky Trim Object(s) edit button.
Mode is still enabled.
you wish to click multiple objects to
trim them.
198
4. Click each segment intersected by a cut- Extend Objects

ting line one-by-one to trim it back to
the cutting line. Lines, arcs, polylines and framing
items can also be extended. The
To trim using a fence boundary the items is extended to may be
any CAD object, group of CAD objects, or a
1. Draw the cutting line(s) or polyline(s) CAD block.
through the objects to be trimmed.
As with Trim Objects , there are three
2. Draw a fence through the object seg-
ments to be trimmed. Be sure that the ways to use Extend Objects :
fence intersects the objects on the side of • Individually clicking on objects to be
the cutting line(s) that you want to edit. extended.
See “Using a Fence” on page 147.
• Selecting objects to be extended using a
3. Select the cutting line(s) and click the fence.
Trim Object(s) edit button. • Selecting objects to be extended using a
temporary fence.
you wish to trim objects using multiple
To extend by clicking
fences.
1. Draw the boundary line(s) or polyline(s)
5. Click the Select Fence edit button.
you want the objects to extend to.
6. Click the fence(s) to trim the object seg-
2. Select the boundary line(s) and click the
ments intersected by the fence.
Extend Objects edit button.
To trim using a temporary fence
1. Draw the cutting line(s) or polyline(s) you wish to click multiple objects to
through the objects to be trimmed. extend them.
2. Select the cutting line(s) and click the 4. Click an object that you would like to
extend to the boundary line(s).
Trim Object(s) edit button.
3. Click the Sticky Mode edit button if To extend using a fence

you wish to trim objects using multiple
temporary fences.
4. Click and drag a temporary line to act as
2. Draw a fence through the objects to be
a fence, trimming the object segments
extended. See “Using a Fence” on page
intersected by it. Be sure to draw this
147.
fence on the side of the cutting object(s)
that you wish to edit. 3. Select the boundary line(s) and click the
Extend Objects edit button.
199
Transform/Replicate Object Dialog
4. Click the Sticky Mode edit button if 2. Select the boundary line(s) and click the
you wish to extend objects using multi- Extend Objects edit button.
ple fences.
5. Click the Select Fence edit button. you wish to extend objects using multi-
6. Click the fence to extend the objects ple temporary fences.
segments intersected by the fence until 4. Click and drag a temporary line to act as
they meet the boundary line(s). a fence, trimming the object segments
intersected by it.
To extend using a temporary fence


Select any object or group of objects
and click the Transform/Replicate Caution: Always double-check the val-
Object edit button to open the Transform/ ues entered in the Transform/Repli-
Replicate Object dialog. cate Object dialog. Large numbers of copies
or large offsets or resize factors can result in
If multiple options are selected in the objects that are time-consuming to create or
Transform/Replicate Object dialog, they are may be off the screen.
performed in the order they appear in the
dialog, from top to bottom.
200
1 Number Of Copies - Select this • Select Relative to Current Point to

option, then specify the Number of move the object relative to the current
Copies to make. CAD point. See “Point Tools” on page
880. You can either specify its X Delta
2 Move - Select this option, then specify and Y Delta, or Angle and Distance, if
how far or where to move the object(s).
Polar is checked.
• Select Relative to Itself to move the
object relative to its current position.
When a CAD-based object is moved to
Specify the X Delta, Y Delta and Z
a new floor, only its display in floor plan
Delta values, which are the object’s view is moved - its physical locations in the
changes in position along each axis. model remains unchanged. See “Architec-
• Select Absolute Location to move the tural vs CAD Objects” on page 131.
object to an absolute location. You can
either specify its X and Y Position, or 3 Rotate - Select this option, then specify
Angle and Distance, if Polar is checked. the Angle to rotate the object(s).
201
Union, Intersection, and Subtract
• Absolute Angle - Select this option to You can also specify the point the selected
rotate the object so that its orientation is object(s) is reflected about, below.
at an absolute angle.
• Relative Angle - Select this option to 6 Rotate/Resize/Reflect About - This
section is enabled when the Rotate,
rotate the object the specified angle rela- Resize and/or Reflect functions are selected.
tive to its current orientation.
• X Position - Specify the X coordinate of
You can also specify the point the selected the point to perform the selected edit
object(s) rotate about, below. function(s) about when About Absolute
Point is selected.
4 Select Resize, then specify the Resize • Y Position - Specify the Y coordinate of
Factor in decimals. A resize factor of 2
doubles the size of the object, while a resize the point to perform the selected edit
factor of 0.5 halves the object’s size. function(s) about when About Absolute
Point is selected.
You can also specify the point the selected
object(s) is resized about, below. • About Object Center - Select this option
to perform the selected edit function(s)
5 Reflect - Select this option, then about the object’s center.
specify which axis to reflect about.
• About Absolute Point - Select this
• Horizontally - Select this option to option to perform the selected edit func-
reflect the object horizontally. tion(s) about the specified point.
• Vertically - Select this option to reflect • About Current Point - Select this option
the object vertically. to perform the selected edit function(s)
about the current CAD point.

New closed polyline-based Union
objects and solids can be
created based on existing closed polyline- Use the Union edit button to combine
based objects of the same type or solid two or more closed polylines or solids
objects. The Union, Intersection and into a single object.
Subtract edit tools are provided for this The following example shows three closed
purpose. polylines and the single closed polyline that
results when the three are merged using the
Note: The Union Intersection and Subtract Union edit button.
edit tools are not available for objects speci-
fied as holes, such asSslab Holes or Custom
Countertop Holes.
202
5. The new polyline of the same type as the

originals is created and is selected. Its
shape is defined by the boundaries of the
two originals and, if the original objects
There are two methods of combining closed were retained, it is superimposed over
them and can be moved.
polylines or solids using the Union edit
button: the single selection and group To use the group selection method
selection methods.
1. Group-select two or more closed
Begin by creating two or more overlapping
polylines or solid objects.
objects of the same type. If one object is a
countertop, for example, the others should be 2. Click the Union edit button.
countertops, as well.
3. If the object is a polyline, choose to
If the original objects do not overlap, they retain or delete the original objects in the
will either not produce a new object or will dialog that opens.
be duplicated on top of themselves. 4. A new object of the same type as the
originals is created, is selected, and is
To use the single selection method superimposed over the originals if they
1. Select a single closed polyline or solid were retained.
object. This second method allows you to combine
more than two polylines simultaneously.
2. Click the Union edit button.
3. Click another closed polyline or solid.
Note: If the original objects do not overlap,
4. If the object is a polyline, choose to the Union edit tool duplicates them and then
retain or delete the original objects in the either deletes or retains the originals.
dialog that opens.
Intersection
Use the Intersection edit button to
create a single polyline based on the
overlap area of two or more closed polyline-
based objects or solids.
203
The following example shows two closed 5. A new object of the same type as the
polylines and the single closed polyline that originals is created and is selected. Its
results when the Intersection edit button shape is defined by the area shared by
is used. the original objects and, if the originals
were retained, it is superimposed over
them and can be moved.
To use the group selection method
1. Group select two or more closed

polylines or solid objects.
2. Click the Intersection edit button.

retain or delete the original objects in the
dialog that opens.
There are two methods of combining closed 4. A new object of the same type as the
polylines or solids using the Intersection originals is created, is selected, and is
edit button: the single selection and group superimposed over the originals if they
selection methods. The second method were retained.
allows you to work with more than two
objects simultaneously. Subtract
Begin by creating two or more overlapping Use the Subtract edit button to
objects of the same type. If one object is a subtract the area of one object that
countertop, for example, the others should be overlaps another object of the same type to
countertops, as well. create a third, new object.
If the original objects do not intersect, no This polyline

new object is created. selected first
To use the single selection method
1. Select a single closed polyline or solid

object.
2. Click the Intersection edit button.

3. Click another closed polyline or solid. This polyline
selected first
retain or delete the original objects in the Originals
dialog that opens. There is one method for using the Subtract
edit button.
204
To use the Subtract edit tool 4. If the object is a polyline, choose to

retain or delete the original objects in the
1. Draw two or more closed polyline-based dialog that opens.
objects or solids that overlap. One object
can be completely enclosed by another. 5. A new object of the same type as the
originals is created, is selected, and is
2. Select one or more of these objects you superimposed over the originals if they
want to remove a portion from as were retained.
defined by the area shared in common
with the remaining, unselected object.
Note: If the original objects do not overlap, the
3. Click the Subtract edit button and Subtract edit tool duplicates the first object
then click the unselected object. selected and then either deletes or retains it.
Converting Objects
CAD objects and many CAD-based objects CAD Detail from View does not truly
can be converted into a variety of other types convert objects in the current view into CAD
of objects. objects; instead, it creates a copy of the
original view composed of CAD objects
CAD to Walls instead of architectural objects, leaving the
CAD to Walls allows you to convert a original view intact.
2D line drawing into a 3D model.
Double CAD lines and arcs drawn to Convert Polyline
represent wall layers and other structural The Convert Polyline edit button lets
items can be converted to actual Chief you to turn CAD objects into CAD-
Architect walls, railings, windows, or based architectural objects such as counter
doorsHome Designer Pro walls and railings. tops and stair landings, special polylines
See “CAD to Walls” on page 240. such as materials list polylines, and a variety
of slab, hole and terrain objects.
CAD Detail from View
To convert a CAD object into one of these
Select CAD> CAD Detail from View 3D objects, select the object and click the
to create a CAD drawing of the
current view. See “CAD Detail from View” Convert Polyline edit button to open the
on page 918. Convert Polyline dialog.
205
Converting Objects
Convert Polyline Dialog
Click the radio button beside one of the 3D Molding Polyline - Convert to a 3D
objects in this dialog, then click OK. molding polyline. See “3D Molding Polyline
Tool” on page 536.
Countertop - Convert the selected closed
polyline to a countertop. See “Custom Hole in Roof/Custom Ceiling - Convert the
Countertops” on page 549. selected closed polyline to a roof/ceiling
hole. Only available when the polyline is
Slab - Convert the selected closed polyline to
contained inside a single roof plane or ceiling
a slab. See “The Slab Tools” on page 370.
plane. See “Roof Hole/Skylight
Slab with Footing - Convert the selected Specification Dialog” on page 416.
closed polyline to a slab with footing. See
Hole in Ceiling Platform - Convert the
“The Slab Tools” on page 370.
selected closed polyline to a ceiling platform
Landing - Convert the selected closed hole. Only available when the polyline is
polyline to a landing. Only available when contained inside a single ceiling plane. See
the closed polyline is not a spline. See “Stair “Platform Holes” on page 358.
Landings” on page 435.
Hole in Floor Platform - Convert the
Material List Polyline - Convert the selected closed polyline to a floor platform
selected closed polyline to a materials list hole. Only available when the polyline is
polyline. See “Calculate From Area” on page contained inside a single floor platform. See
1049. “Platform Holes” on page 358.
Molding Polyline - Convert to a molding Polyline Solid - Convert the selected closed
polyline. See “Molding Polylines” on page polyline to a polyline solid. See “Polyline
535. Solids” on page 658.
206
Revision Cloud - Convert the selected creating medians on curved roads. See
closed polyline to a revision cloud. See “Median” on page 636.
“Revision Clouds” on page 906.
Road Marking (Perimeter) - Convert to a
Sprinkler Line - Convert to a sprinkler line. road marking where the polyline represents
See “Sprinkler Tools” on page 629. the perimeter of the road marking. See “Road
Marking” on page 637. Only available when
Terrain Perimeter - Convert to the terrain
a terrain perimeter exists and the polyline is
permeter. See “Terrain Perimeter” on page
closed.
581. This option is only available when:
• The polyline is closed Road Stripe (Center Line) - Convert to a
road stripe where the polyline represents the
• A terrain perimeter does not yet exist centerline of the road stripe. See “Road
• Only one polyline is currently selected Marking” on page 637. Only available when
a terrain perimeter exists.
Elevation Line - Convert to an elevation
line. See “Elevation Lines” on page 584. Sidewalk (Perimeter) - Convert to a
Only available when a terrain perimeter sidewalk polyline where the polyline
exists. represents the perimeter of the sidewalk. See
“Polyline Sidewalk” on page 638. Only
Terrain Break - Convert to a terrain Break.
available when a terrain perimeter exists and
See “Editing Terrain Objects” on page 595.
the polyline is closed.
Only available when a terrain perimeter
exists. Sidewalk (Center Line) - Convert to a
sidewalk where the polyline represents the
Terrain Feature - Convert to a terrain
center line of the sidewalk. See “Straight
feature. See “Terrain Feature Tools” on page
Sidewalk” on page 638. Only available when
588. Only available when a terrain perimeter
a terrain perimeter exists.
exists.
Click OK to convert the object or objects.
Road (Perimeter) - Convert the selected
closed polyline to a road polyline where the The specification dialog appropriate to the
polyline represents the perimeter of the road. newly converted object opens, allowing you
See “Polyline Road” on page 636. Only to specify its height, material and other
available when a terrain perimeter exists. information.
Road (Center Line) - Convert to a road
where the polyline represents the center line Convert to Plain Polyline
for the road. See “Straight Road” on page Click the Convert to Plain Polyline
636. Only available when a terrain perimeter edit button to convert special
exists. polylines to plain polylines.
Road Median - Convert the selected After a special polyline is converted into a
polyline to a road median. This is helpful for plain polyline, it can be converted into a
special of the same or different type.
207
Select Same / Load Same
Convert to Solid Unlike polylines, splines form smooth curves

rather than angled corners where their
Click the Convert To Solid edit direction changes. See “Splines” on page
button to convert the selected object 908.
into a Primitive object, or solid, so that it can
be used with other solids to create complex
Convert Spline to Polyline
structures. See “Primitive Tools” on page
649. Click the Convert Spline to Polyline
edit button to convert the selected
Convert to Symbol spline-based object into a polyline.
Create a 3D view of a custom object,

then select Tools> Symbol> Convert
to Symbol to convert the object into a
symbol. See “Convert to Symbol” on page
987.
Convert to Spline The spline is replaced by the new polyline

Click the Convert to Spline edit A curved portion in a spline is represented as
button to convert some CAD-based a number of smaller straight lines. You can
objects such as Custom Countertops or change a spline into a normal polyline that is
splines that have been converted to polylines made up of these straight lines using this edit
to spline-based objects. See “Editing Spline tool.
Select Same / Load Same

The Select Same/Load Same set of specified attributes as the selected
edit tools provide a fast way to object.
locate and modify rooms, cabinets, windows
With the exception of rooms, all selected
and doors in your plan based on attributes
objects can then be opened for specification
that you specify.
and/or edited using the toolbar buttons.
Select Same Type Although multiple rooms cannot be edited,
The Select Same Type edit tool the Load Values to Make Same edit tool
allows you to quickly select all can be used to quickly modify multiple
cabinets, doors, windows, or rooms on the rooms. Click any rooms that are not
current floor of your plan that share the same highlighted to change their attributes so that
they match those that you specify.
208
Load to Make Same Value apply to other like objects on the current
floor.
The Load Values to Make Same edit
button can be used to apply the 2. Click the Select Same Type edit
selected attributes, or values, to any other button.
objects on the current floor that do not yet 3. In the Select Similar Objects dialog,
share them. check the box beside attributes that you
want to load into other similar objects
Load Values to Make Same becomes
and click OK. The set of attributes
available only after the Select Same
available varies depending on the type
Type edit tool has been used to select a of object selected.
group of objects that share the same
attributes. 4. All objects sharing all of the specified
Some attributes can only be used for attributes are now selected in the draw-
selecting objects and cannot be loaded from ing area.
one object to another. These attributes 5. Click the Load Values to Make
display in the Select Similar Objects dialog
Same edit button, then click any like
followed by an asterisk.
object that is not currently highlighted to
apply the specified attributes to it and
To use Select Same/Load Same
add it to the selection set.
1. Select a room, cabinet, window or door 6. You can continue selecting/loading
with attributes that you would like to objects until the Esc key is pressed or
another tool is activated.
Edit Area Tools

The Edit Area Tools allow you to Some objects, such as cabinets, are included
quickly define an area of your plan in the selection only if more than half of the
and select the objects in that area. Once object is contained within the marquee.
selected, they can then be repositioned,
A few objects, notably CAD points, are not
copied or deleted. Select Edit> Edit Area to
view the Edit Area Tools. affected by the Edit Area Tools .
Unlike other selection methods, the Edit
The Edit Area tools can cause wide-
Area Tools cut walls, railing and fencing spread changes across an entire plan
where the selection marquee intersects them, and should always be used with caution.
allowing you to edit only the selected portion
of these objects.
209
Edit Area Tools
Edit Area Objects not currently displaying in floor plan

view are not affected.
Select Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area
and draw a rectangular marquee
Edit Area Polyline
around the area of the plan to be edited.
If a rectangular marquee’s shape does not
Edit Area affects all objects included in allow you to define an area precisely, use a
the selection marquee that are located on the closed polyline instead.
current floor, regardless of whether they are
displaying in floor plan view or not. Select a polyline that defines the desired area
in floor plan view and then select one of the
Edit Area Visible Edit Area Tools . The polyline becomes
temporarily highlighted and acts as an Edit
Select Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area Area marquee.
Visible and draw a marquee around
the area of the plan to be edited.
Edit Area Visible only affects visible An Edit Area marquee displays edit handles
objects included in the selection marquee: that are similar to those of a closed polyline.
objects not currently displayed in floor plan See “Using the Edit Handles” on page 160.
view are unaffected.
• Click the Move edit handle to move the
entire selection set. See “Moving
Edit Area (All Floors) Objects” on page 177.
Select Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area • Click the Rotate edit handle to rotate the
(All Floors) and draw a marquee entire selection set. See “Rotating
around the area of the plan to be edited. Objects” on page 188.
• Click and drag the Reshape and Resize
Edit Area (All Floors) affects all objects
edit handles at each corner and along
on all floors of the plan that are included in
each edge to adjust the size and shape of
the selection marquee, regardless of whether
the marquee. See “Using the Edit Han-
they display in floor plan view.
dles” on page 160.
Edit Area (All Floors) Visible Adjusting the size or shape of an Edit Area
marquee may change which objects are
Select Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area included in the selection set but does not
(All Floors) Visible and draw a otherwise affect those objects.
marquee around the area of the plan to be
edited.
Edit Area (All Floors) Visible affects all A selected Edit Area marquee and/or the
visible objects on all floors of the plan that objects within it can be edited in a variety of
are included in the selection marquee.
210
ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar. set. See “Point to Point Move” on page
See “Using the Edit Toolbar” on page 162. 179.
The following toolbar buttons may display • Click the Center Object edit button
on the edit toolbar for an Edit Area marquee: to center the selection along along a wall
within a room or relative to a cabinet
fixture. See “Center Object” on page 182.
copy the selection set to the Windows
Clipboard so it can be pasted elsewhere. • Click the Reflect About Object edit
See “Copying and Pasting Objects” on button to reflect the selection set about
page 191. another object. See “Reflecting Objects”
on page 190.
the selection set. See “Deleting Objects” • Click the Allowed Angles edit button
on page 196. to open the Place at Allowed Angles
• Click the Transform/Replicate Object dialog.
edit button to copy, move, rotate,
resize, or reflect the selection set. See Place at Allowed
“Transform/Replicate Object Dialog” on Angles Dialog
page 200. If more than one percent of the
• Click the Multiple Copy edit button straight walls included in an Edit Area
to make a series of copies of the selection marquee are not at an allowed angle, the
set at regular intervals. Concentric copies Allowed Angles edit button displays.
are not possible using the Edit Area tools.
Click the Allowed Angles edit button to
display the Place at Allowed Angles dialog.
• Click the Accurate Move edit button
to slow down the mouse speed when
• Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular
edit button to rotate the Edit Area
marquee and the selection set so that the
selected marquee edge is parallel or per- Select the first option and click OK to rotate
pendicular to another straight edge. See the plan so that the largest group of off-angle
“Using Make Parallel/Perpendicular” on walls move to an Allowed Angle. This may
page 181. place this largest group at Allowed Angles,
but has two disadvantages.
• Click the Point to Point Move edit
• First, other groups of off angle walls
button to accurately move the selection
remain off angle.
211
Edit Area Tools
• Second, any walls that were at an allowed Select the third option and click OK to do
angle before move off angle. The dialog nothing, which is the same as clicking
shows how much (weighted by length) of Cancel.
the selected walls are in each category.
You may want to rotate the majority of the
Select the second option and click OK to add walls to one of the normal allowed angles.
new entries to the Allowed Angles list and
Then, use an Edit Area tool to select
allow new walls to be placed at these angles.
everything again and select the second option
Walls already at Allowed Angles remain so.
to provide new angle entries to cover the
See “Angle Snaps” on page 135.
remaining walls.
212
213
Chapter 7:
Walls, Railings, &

Fencing
Walls are the single most important building Chapter Contents

component in Chief Architect. By creating • Wall, Railing and Fencing Defaults
walls and defining the rooms created by the • The Wall Tools
walls, you are telling the program how you • The Deck Tools
want the 3D model built. • The Fencing Tools
There are several ways that walls can be • Exterior and Interior Walls
created in Chief Architect. The most • Foundation Walls
common is to simply draw them with the • Pony Walls
Wall Tools. • Railings
• Invisible Walls
In addition, exterior walls can be generated • Polygon Shaped Rooms and Decks
automatically when a new floor is built by • Hatch Wall
using another floor as a model. For more, see • Break Wall
“Adding Floors” on page 355. • Deck Railings
2D CAD lines can also be converted into • Deck Edge
actual walls using the CAD to Walls tool. • Fencing
• Drawing Walls
Another feature that can be used to generate • Connecting Walls
walls automatically is the House Wizard. • Displaying Walls
See “House Wizard” on page 926. • Editing Walls
• Editing Straight/Curved Wall
Combinations
• Aligning Walls
214
• Attic Walls • Exporting Wall Type Definitions

• Double Walls • Importing Wall Type Definitions
• CAD to Walls • Stepped and Raked Walls
• Wall Type Definitions • Wall Specification Dialog
• Wall Type Definitions Dialog • Wall Hatch Specification Dialog
Wall, Railing and Fencing Defaults

There are several defaults dialogs for Wall defaults can also be accessed by
walls. Default Settings can be accessed double-clicking the Wall Tools button.
by selecting Edit> Default Settings. Click
the “+” next to Walls to display the walls The settings in the various wall defaults
sub-headings. Select a subheading and click dialogs determine what wall types are drawn
the Edit button to open the Wall Defaults when the different wall tools are used. It is a
dialog associated with your selection. good idea to be familiar with these settings
and how they relate to your style of building.
See “Wall Type Definitions” on page 241.
General Wall Defaults

The General Wall Defaults dialog For quick access, the General Wall
controls the general behavior and Defaults button can be added to the
display attributes of all walls, railings and toolbar or you can press Alt+Q on your
fencing. keyboard.
1 3
2 4
1 Resize About - These radio buttons to it or a connected wall is deleted, its length
determine at which layer a wall’s length is preserved based on this setting. Resize
is measured. When a new wall is connected About also controls the location of snap
215
points along walls as they are drawn or as Main Layer out. The inner line of the
they are connected to other walls. It also Main Layer does not move.
determines what part of a wall retains its • Inside Surface - Measure wall length at
position when the wall type or wall type the inside surface. Resize a wall from the
definition is changed. interior surface out. The interior surface
• Outer Surface - Measure wall length at does not move.
the outer surface. Resize a wall from the
exterior surface in. The exterior surface 2 Check Show Wall Length When
Editing to display a temporary
does not move.
dimension when a wall is drawn or edited.
• Main Layer Outside - Measure wall Wall length only displays when Display
length at the outer line of the Main Layer.
Temporary Dimensions is on. See
Resize a wall from the exterior side of the
“Display Temporary Dimensions” on page
main layer in. The outer line of the Main
826.
Layer does not move.
• Wall Center - Measure wall length at the 3 Enter the Wall Thickness to be used
center line. Resize a wall from its center. for Adjustable Thickness Types. See
The center line does not move, but wall “Wall Type Definitions” on page 241.
layers on either side may.
4 Check Auto Rebuild Attic Walls to
• Main Layer Inside - Measure wall generate attic walls automatically when
length at the inner line of the Main Layer. the model changes. When unchecked, the
Resize a wall from the interior side of the automatic generation of attic walls is
suppressed.
Exterior/Interior Wall Defaults

Specify which wall types are drawn using the
Exterior and Interior Wall tools in
the Exterior/Interior Wall Defaults dialog.
You can also double-click the Straight or
Curved Exterior or Interior Wall toolbar
buttons to open this dialog.
216
1 Exterior Wall Tool - From the drop- Click the Define button to open the Wall
down list, select the wall type drawn Type Definitions dialog.
with the Exterior Wall tool.
3 Default Thickness for Railings,
Click the Define button to open the Wall Fencing, Invisible and Adjustable
Type Definitions dialog. See “Wall Type
Thickness Walls - Select a thickness for
Definitions Dialog” on page 243. these tools and wall types from the drop-
down list.
2 Interior Wall Tool - From the drop-
down list, select the wall type drawn by
the Interior Wall tool.
Foundation and Retaining Wall Defaults

Specify which wall types are drawn when the build a structure. See “Terrain Wall and Curb
Foundation and Retaining Wall Tools” on page 592.
tools are used in the Foundation and You can also double-click the Foundation
Retaining Wall Defaults dialogs. See
Wall or Retaining Wall button to
“Terrain Wall and Curb Tools” on page 592.
open these dialogs.
Unlike other walls, Retaining Walls Footing size and other information used
allow you to modify your terrain rather than when building foundations is also specified
217
here. For more information, see “Foundation

Pony Wall Defaults

Specify the wall types used for the upper and You can also double-click either the Pony
lower portions of pony walls and other data Wall or Curved Pony Wall button to
associated with pony walls in the Pony Wall open this dialog.
Defaults dialog.
3 4
1 Upper Wall - From the drop-down list, 2 Lower Wall - From the drop-down list,
select the default wall type for the select the default wall type for the
upper portion of pony walls. lower portion of pony walls.
• Click the Define button to open the Wall • Height of Lower Wall - Specify the
Type Definitions dialog, where you can default height of the lower portion of
create and modify wall types. See “Wall pony walls.
Type Definitions Dialog” on page 243. • Click the Define button to open the Wall
Type Definitions dialog.
218
3 Align Pony Wall - Specify the default • Select Show Lower Wall to display this
option for aligning the layers of the wall type in floor plan view instead of the
upper and lower pony walls. See “Wall upper wall type.
Types Tab” on page 256. • Check Hide Openings in Non-Dis-
played Parts of Walls to hide any doors
4 Display In Plan - Specify how pony and windows located in the parts of pony
walls appear in floor plan view.
walls that are not visible. When
• Select Show Upper Wall to display this
unchecked, these openings will display
wall type in floor plan view instead of the
along with those located in the visible
lower wall type.
parts of pony walls.
Railing and Deck Railing Defaults

Specify the types of railings created when the Double-click the Deck Tools parent
Railing and Deck Railing tools are used. button or any of its child tools except
Double-click either the Straight Railing Polygon Shaped Deck to open the Deck
Railing Defaults dialog.
or Curved Railing button to open the
Railing Defaults dialog and specify what The tabs in these dialogs are the same as their
type of railing is drawn when either Railing respective tabs in the Wall Specification
tool is used. dialog. See “Wall Specification Dialog” on
page 249.
Fencing Defaults
Double-click the Fencing Tools parent The tabs in this dialog are the same as their
button or either of its child tools to open the respective tabs in the Wall Specification
Fencing Defaults dialog and specify what
dialog. See “Wall Specification Dialog” on
type of fencing is drawn when using the page 249.
Fencing tool.
The Wall Tools

Select Build> Wall to access the Wall Tools. Select Build> Curved Wall to access
Tools. The type of wall drawn by each these tools.
wall tool is specified in its corresponding
defaults dialog. Exterior Walls
The Curved Wall tools are similar to The Exterior Wall and Curved
their corresponding Straight Wall Exterior Wall tools draw walls
using the default wall type specified for
219
The Wall Tools
exterior walls in the Exterior/Interior Wall Specification dialog. See “Pony Walls” on
Defaults dialog. See “Exterior/Interior Wall page 223.
Railings
Interior Walls
The Railing and Curved Railing
The Interior Wall and Curved tools create railings. The type and
Interior Wall tools draw walls height of railings drawn with this tool are
using the wall type specified for interior defined in Railing Defaults dialog. See
walls. The interior wall type is defined in the “Railing and Deck Railing Defaults” on page
Exterior/Interior Wall Defaults Defaults 219.
dialog.
Invisible Walls
Note: Whether a wall is recognized as an Invisible walls are walls used to define
exterior or interior wall by the program is
separate room areas in a plan. They can
determined by its position in the model, not
by the tool used to draw it. See “Exterior and
display in floor plan view but not in 3D
Interior Walls” on page 222. views. You can also convert a normal wall
into an invisible wall and vice versa in the
Foundation Walls Wall Specification dialog. See “Invisible
The Foundation Wall and
Curved Foundation Wall tools Polygon Shaped Room
draw foundation walls according to the
information specified in the Foundation The Polygon Shaped Room tool
Defaults dialog. Foundation walls normally opens the New Polygon Shaped
have a footing and can be drawn on any floor Room dialog, where you can specify the
of the model, not just the foundation floor. exact size and number of sides of a new
See “Foundation Walls” on page 222. polygonal room and then click in floor plan
view to create that room. See “Polygon
Pony Walls Shaped Rooms and Decks” on page 225.
A Pony Wall, also called a split Hatch Wall

wall, is defined as a wall with two
separate wall types, one for the upper portion The Hatch Wall tool applies a hatch
and another for the lower portion. pattern to a wall that displays in floor
plan views. You must click the wall that you
The Pony Wall and Curved Pony Wall tools want to apply the hatch pattern to. You can
draw pony walls using the information then select the hatch and resize it if you want
specified in the Pony Wall Defaults dialog. to only hatch a portion of a wall. See “Hatch
You can also convert a normal wall into a Wall” on page 226.
pony wall and vice versa in the Wall
220
Break Wall few inches of each other but are not

connected. See “Fix Connections” on page
The Break Wall tool applies a break in 229.
a wall. Once a wall is broken, the two
wall segments are separate walls that can be
Define Wall Types
modified independent of each other. See
“Break Wall” on page 226. The Define Wall Types tool opens the
Wall Type Definitions dialog, where
Fix Wall Connections wall types can be created, copied and edited.
See “Wall Type Definitions Dialog” on page
The Fix Wall Connections tool 243.
connects walls whose ends are within a
The Deck Tools

Select Build> Deck to access the deck complete with framing, but without a railing.
tools. No deck supports are created. See “Deck
Edge” on page 227.
Deck Railing
Polygon Shaped Deck
The Straight Deck Railing and
Curved Deck Railing tools draw The Polygon Shaped Deck tool opens
decks, complete with framing and bounded the New Polygon Shaped Deck
by a railing. If a foundation level exists, dialog, where you can specify the exact size
supports for the deck are also created. See and number of sides of a new polygonal deck
“Deck Railings” on page 227. room and then click in floor plan view to
create that deck room. See “Polygon Shaped
Deck Edges Rooms and Decks” on page 225.
The Straight Deck Edge and

Curved Deck Edge draw decks
The Fencing Tools

Select Build> Fencing or click the The Fencing and Curved
Fencing Tools to access the fencing Fencing tools are used to draw
tools. fences, which are similar to railings but by
default do not define room areas. Fencing is
created and edited much like walls and
railings, and normally used outside of a
221
Exterior and Interior Walls
building and follows the shape of the terrain.

See “Fencing” on page 227.
Exterior and Interior Walls

Most walls are drawn using either the and then change the wall type in the Wall
Specification dialog.
Exterior Wall or Interior Wall tool.
The only difference between these two tools Whether a wall is recognized by the program
is the wall type used. You can specify the as an actual exterior or interior wall is based
default wall type for each tool in the Wall on the model, not by which tool you use to
Defaults dialog. draw the wall. Any wall that is entirely
To draw a wall using a different wall type, surrounded by interior room areas is
you can change the default wall type for considered an interior wall. Any wall
either tool in the Wall Defaults dialog. You exposed to the outside of the building is
can also draw a wall using the default type considered an exterior wall.
Foundation Walls
Foundation walls are similar to the wall layer. See “Foundation Tab” on page
interior and exterior walls but also 255.
have a footing. Foundation walls can either
Foundation walls are placed on the “Walls,
be created automatically when a foundation
Foundation” layer by default, but can be put
floor is created or manually by drawing them
on any layer you choose. In floor plan view,
using the Foundation Wall tool.
foundation wall footings are placed on the
The initial foundation wall type and footing “Footings” layer and cannot be moved; in 3D
size are specified in the Foundation views, they are on the “Walls, Foundation”
Defaults dialog. These values can be layer. See “Displaying Walls” on page 230.
changed for individual walls in the Wall
You can select the footing in 3D views and
Specification dialog. See “Wall
edit its size and shape using the edit handles.
You can draw a foundation wall on any floor
of a plan, not just on the foundation level.
Any wall can be specified as a foundation
wall, regardless of the tool used to draw it.
See “General Tab” on page 250.
Normally, the footing is centered on the wall,
but you can center the footing on the main
222
Pony Walls
A Pony Wall, sometimes called a The height where the upper portion meets the
split wall, is a wall with two lower can be specified in 3D views. Because
separate wall types for the upper and lower the upper and lower sections of a pony wall
portions. are linked, if either portion is modified along
the division between the two, such as raking
or the stepping of a footing, the other portion
of the pony wall adjusts to match. See
“Stepped and Raked Walls” on page 248.
You can specify whether the upper or lower
portion of pony walls displays in floor plan
view in the Pony Wall Defaults dialog. This
option can also be set for individual walls in
the Wall Specification dialog.
Changing Wall Types

for Pony Walls
Walls drawn using the Pony Wall tool The upper and lower parts of a pony wall can
are created using the wall types and other be redefined as different wall types in the
information specified in the Pony Wall Wall Specification dialog.
Defaults dialog. See “Pony Wall Defaults” You can assign any wall type to the upper
on page 218. pony wall; however, the Adjustable
You can also convert a normal wall into a Thickness Wall type cannot be used on the
pony wall and vice versa in the Wall lower pony wall.
Specification dialog. See “Wall Types Tab”
on page 256.
223
Railings
Railings
Railings are created and edited Use a Doorway to produce a break in a
just like walls. By default, newels railing for a stairway or other access. This
and balusters do not display in floor plan keeps the railing continuous to maintain
view, but their display can be turned on. See room definition.
“Newels/Balusters Tab” on page 261.
A doorway in a railing displays in a 3D view
The default type for new railings is defined as an opening, with newels or posts placed
in the Railing Defaults dialog. See “Railing on each side. Posts are evenly spaced
and Deck Railing Defaults” on page 219. between railing ends and breaks and can be
If Panels is selected on the Railing tab of the specified at defined intervals.
Railing Specification dialog, you can
choose a Panel Type on the Newels/
Balusters tab . See “Newels/Balusters Tab”
on page 261.
When first drawn, railings have the No
Locate attribute, which prevents them from
being located by dimension lines. The No
Room Def attribute may also be helpful if
you do not want a railing to divide a room
into two separate areas. See “General Tab”
on page 250.
Invisible Walls
Invisible walls are used to create or
modify room definitions, most often by
defining smaller areas within larger rooms.
See “Room Definition” on page 267. These
smaller room areas can have different floor
or ceiling materials or heights, allowing
stepped areas to be created.
Invisible walls can display in floor plan view
but not in 3D views.
Common uses for invisible walls include
dividing the living and dining areas of a
single room, or separating a kitchen from an An invisible wall can be turned into a normal
adjoining nook. wall, or vice versa, by clicking the Invisible
224
check box in its Wall Specification dialog. • Cabinets, fixtures and furniture can be
See “General Tab” on page 250. moved freely through Invisible walls.
• Invisible walls can be drawn through a
Important Notes on cabinet to attach to the wall behind.
Invisible Walls • Invisible walls do not produce a short
• Floor, wall and ceiling areas are calcu- wall section to cover the gap where the
lated separately for rooms divided by level of the floor or ceiling changes. Use
invisible and normal walls. an invisible railing for this. See “Floor &
• Invisible walls are ignored by the Auto Ceiling Heights” on page 268.
Place Outlets tool; it functions as

though they were not present.
Polygon Shaped Rooms and Decks

Select Build> Wall> Polygon Shaped
Room to open the New Polygon
Shaped Room dialog and create a polygon
shaped room with regular sides.
The settings in these dialogs are independent

of one another and are saved between
sessions.
Select Build> Deck> Polygon Shaped To create a polygon shaped room or deck
Deck to open the New Polygon
Shaped Deck dialog and create a polygon 1. Click the radio button beside an option
shaped deck with regular sides. to specify whether you want to Define
Polygon by Side Length, Radius to
Vertex or Radius to Side.
2. Specify the desired Number of Sides.
3. Specify the desired Side Length.
4. Specify the desired Radius.
5. Uncheck Include Railing to produce a
deck platform defined by Deck Edges.
225
Hatch Wall
This option is not available in the New 6. Click OK, then click once in floor plan
Polygon Shaped Room dialog. view to create the specified polygon
shaped deck.
Hatch Wall
The Hatch Wall tool fills any wall Once created, wall hatching can be selected,
segments except invisible walls with a edited and deleted much like other line-based
single hatch pattern in floor plan view. objects. See “Editing Line Based Objects” on
Hatch Wall places a hatch pattern across all page 147.
layers of the selected wall, covering any fill
Like doors and windows, wall hatching
styles specified for that wall type.
cannot extend across multiple wall segments.
In many cases, it is preferable to create a wall Unlike these objects, hatching cannot be
type definition rather than use the Hatch located by dimension lines.
Wall tool because multiple fill styles can The wall hatch pattern and its line weight can
be created for display purposes. See “Wall be specified in the Wall Hatch Specification
Type Definitions Dialog” on page 243. dialog. See “Wall Hatch Specification
To apply wall hatching, click the Hatch Wall Dialog” on page 264.
button, then click on a wall section. The When editing or deleting wall hatching,
hatch pattern covers the entire length and make sure that it is selected rather than the
width of the wall. wall by noting that “Wall Hatching” displays
in the Status Bar. See “The Status Bar” on
page 34.
Break Wall
To divide a wall or railing, select Once a break is placed, click the Select
Build> Wall> Break Wall and click Objects tool and select the original wall.
the wall. The wall is divided into two wall If edit handles display near the break, the
sections at the point where you click. wall was correctly broken.
The Break Wall tool remains active, so Walls separated by a break can be rejoined.
you can continue to place breaks in walls. Select one of the segments, then click on the
When you are finished, select a different end edit handle located at the break and drag
tool. it a few plan inches (mm) away from the
break. See “Connecting Walls” on page 229.
If a wall break is placed near the intersection
of two walls, the break is positioned at the
center of the intersection.
226
The Break Wall tool can be used to

create aligned walls on either side of a gap.
See “Creating a Nook” on page 236.
Deck Railings
Click and drag using the Deck When a room is defined using deck railing,
Railing or Curved Deck Railing its Room Type is automatically set to
tool to create decks on the exterior of a plan. “Deck”. See “Decks” on page 275.
Deck Edge
The Deck Edge tools are used to and drag using the Straight Deck Edge or
draw invisible railings, defining a Curved Deck Edge tool to draw deck edges.
deck room without enclosing it in rails. Click See “Decks” on page 275.
Fencing
Fencing in Chief Architect is created
and modified much like railings and
walls. Fences do not create room definition
and are normally used outside a structure to
divide the terrain or detail an exterior.
Fencing automatically follows the shape of
the terrain. You can choose to have the
Define the default fence style in the Fencing
fencing follow the terrain smoothly or to
Defaults dialog. See “Fencing Defaults” on
have each segment step as it follows the
page 219.
terrain. See “Railing Tab” on page 258.
227
Drawing Walls
Drawing Walls
Walls are drawn similar to the way CAD Temporary Dimensions
lines are drawn and can be drawn in floor
plan view, camera views, and overviews. See Temporary dimensions will display along the
“Draw Line” on page 884. length of a wall as it is drawn when Display
Temporary Dimensions is toggled on
Draw exterior walls in a clockwise direc- and Show Wall Length When Editing is
tion so that the exterior surfaces face checked in the General Wall Defaults dialog.
outward while interior surfaces face inward. See “Display Temporary Dimensions” on
page 826 and “General Wall Defaults” on
Drawing walls to create a floor plan is simple page 215.
if you keep a few things in mind:
• Draw exterior walls first to define the Continuous Wall Drawing
building’s footprint, then draw the inte- You can draw walls continuously by right-
rior walls after the perimeter is in place. clicking, Alt+clicking or Alt+dragging. See
• To flip the layers of an existing wall, “To draw continuous lines” on page 884.
select it and click the Reverse
Layers edit button. Drawing Curved Walls
• Initial wall heights are determined by the Drawing a curved wall is similar to drawing
default floor and ceiling heights of the a CAD arc. See “Arc Tools” on page 894.
current floor. See “Floor Defaults Dia- As with CAD arcs, the method used to draw
log” on page 353. a curved wall depends on which Arc
Wall Openings Creation Mode is currently active. See

“Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes” on
To create a door or doorway, do not draw page 892.
wall sections with a gap between them. Walls
A straight wall can also be converted into a
should be drawn to completely enclose
curved wall and vice versa using the Change
rooms, and then door and window objects
should be placed in the walls to create Line/Arc edit button. See “Change Line/
openings later. See “Doors” on page 292 and Arc” on page 185.
“Windows” on page 316.
Masonry fireplaces placed in walls are also To create a room in the shape of a cir-
considered to be types of wall openings. See cle, you must draw two curved walls.
“Fireplaces” on page 671.
Center
A curved wall always has a center point. The
center displays as a small cross when you
228
enable Show Arc Centers and Ends . Use Angle Snaps to draw walls at
See “Show Arc Centers” on page 155. specific angles. Modify the angle of an
existing wall by specifying a new angle in
the Wall Specification dialog, by dragging
an end edit handle to a new allowed angle, or
by using the Rotate edit handle. See “Angle
Snaps” on page 135.
As you draw a wall, note the temporary wall
that displays. The length and angle of this
temporary wall displays in the Status Bar at
Show Arc Center the bottom of the window as it is drawn.
Radius Drag the end of the temporary wall in a
circular motion. In the Status Bar, note that
The radius of a curved wall is measured from the wall jumps at defined angle increments.
the center to one surface or layer of the wall. Release the mouse button to draw the wall at
The radius can be defined on the General tab the length and angle last shown in the
of the Wall Specification dialog. You may information window.
elect to define the radius to the exterior or
interior wall layers. See “General Tab” on
House Wizard
page 250.
The House Wizard allows you to place
Wall Positioning and arrange room “objects” that can
then be converted into a fully editable house
If Use Snap Grid/Units is checked in the plan, including walls. See “House Wizard”
General Plan Defaults dialog, a new wall on page 926.
snaps to grid lines and line intersections as it
is drawn. See “General Plan Defaults
Connecting Walls
In order for a room to be defined, walls must By default, walls are automatically joined
be connected to completely enclose an area. when their center lines are within a distance
See “Rooms” on page 266. defined by the larger of the two wall widths.
Draw a wall sufficiently close to an existing
wall and the program joins them at the Fix Connections
intersection of their Main Layers. The new Occasionally, one or more walls do
wall moves, extends, or contracts slightly to not properly connect. To clean up
meet the existing wall. Existing walls do not
move.
229
Displaying Walls
most connections throughout the plan, select Removing Wall Breaks

Build> Walls> Fix Connections.
The Break Wall tool allows you to break
If you have only one connection to fix, the
a wall into two or more separate wall
Connect Walls edit button is faster to segments. See “Break Wall” on page 226.
use.
To merge two colinear walls separated by a
break,select one of the segments, then click
Connect Walls
on the end edit handle located at the break
Use the Connect Walls edit button to and drag it a few plan inches (mm) away
complete an intersection of two walls. from the break.
Select a wall, click the Connect Walls edit
If the two walls do not merge, either one or
button, then click on the other wall to
both walls have been moved and they are no
connect the two.
longer colinear, or one or both has been
If the unconnected wall ends are sufficiently edited in some way and they are no longer
close to one another, the tool connects them. identical. Open the Wall Specification
If the separation is too great, extend one dialog for each wall and determine how they
towards the other and try again. differ. See “Wall Hatch Specification
Displaying Walls
While the composition and appearance display. By default, walls are placed on
of each wall type is controlled in the layers with “Walls” at the beginning of the
Wall Type Definitions dialog, the display of layer name, such as “Walls, Attic”.
walls in all views is controlled in the Layer
The display of the wall layers specified in the
Display Options dialog. See “Displaying
Wall Type Definitions dialog can be
controlled. If you turn off the display of the
The program installs with a number of layers layer called Walls, Layers, wall types display
intended for specifically for various types of with two lines representing the inside and
walls; however, you can specify any layers as outside surfaces. See “Displaying Objects”
the defaults for these walls. Once created, on page 117.
you can also place a selected wall on any
In addition, you can turn off the display of
layer. See “Layer Tab” on page 264.
non-structural layers and show only the
walls’ Main Layers by turning on the display
In Floor Plan View of the Walls, Main Layer Only layer. This
There are several options for controlling how allows you to create both fully configured
walls are displayed in floor plan view. In the walls and true framing layouts. The Walls,
Layer Display Options dialog, you can Main Layer Only layer affects the display of
specify whether or not various types of walls
230
walls in floor plan view only. See “The Main Displaying Pony Walls
Layer” on page 242. in Floor Plan View
Foundation Walls have footings that display Either the upper or lower portion of a pony
in floor plan view as long as the “Footings” wall can display in floor plan view. Only the
layer is turned on. See “Foundation Walls” portion that displays can be snapped to or
on page 222. aligned with walls above or below. See
It is often desirable to display the walls from “Aligning Walls” on page 235.
a floor other than the current floor. To do By default, the upper portion of a pony wall
this, select and display a reference floor. See displays in floor plan view. To show the
“Reference Display” on page 360. You can lower pony wall in floor plan view instead,
also specify which layers are included in the select Show Lower in Plan View in the
Reference Display Layer Set in the Layer Pony Wall Defaults dialog. See “Pony Wall
Display Options dialog. Defaults” on page 218.
In 3D Views You can also specify which part of an

individual pony wall displays in the Wall
Each layer of a wall is generated when you Specification dialog. See “Wall Types Tab”
create a 3D view. You can see the different on page 256.
layers in 3D using the Delete Surface
tool. See “Delete 3D Surface” on page 757. When Object Snaps are enabled, you
can only snap to the outer, inner and Main
A wall’s framing layer displays as a solid Layer surfaces of the part of the pony wall
layer rather than studs and plates until wall set to display.
framing is built. See “Framing” on page 460.
Wall framing is placed on the Framing, Wall By default, windows and doors in pony walls
layer by default. are visible in floor plan view regardless of
which part of the pony wall displays. You
While most objects in the program can can, if you wish, select Hide Openings in
display in floor plan view and 3D views, a Non-Displayed Parts of Walls in the Pony
few cannot. Invisible walls and wall hatching Wall Defaults dialog.
are examples of items that do not display in
3D, regardless of what layer they are placed
on.
Editing Walls
Walls can be selected individually and as a ways in which a wall can be edited depends
group in all views. When a wall is selected, it on the current view and which edge is
displays edit handles and an edit toolbar that selected. See “Selecting Objects” on page
can be used to edit it in various ways. The 144.
231
Editing Walls
Selecting Walls allowing you to rotate, move, and extend

or shorten the length of the wall.
• When you try to select a wall in a Cross
Section/Elevation or 3D view, the interior • Moving a wall in any view will move any
or exterior room it defines may be cabinets attached to that wall, as well.
selected first. • In a cross section/elevation view, the top
and bottom edges of straight and curved
Click the Select Next Object edit walls can be edited like closed polylines.
button or press the Tab key on your key- See “Editing Closed-Polyline Based
board to select the wall itself. See Objects” on page 160. Only the top and
“Selecting Rooms” on page 270. bottom edges of walls can be broken,
angled or curved: the side edges cannot.
You can specify that the wall be selected • In a camera view or overview, click on an
first instead of the room in the interior or exterior surface to display the
Preferences dialog. See “Architectural same edit handles as in an elevation view:
Panel” on page 88. one at each corner and one on the top and
• In floor plan view, if wall hatching has bottom edges.
been applied to a wall using the Hatch • When a wall is connected to other walls
Wall tool, the hatching may be and Edit Object Parts is turned off,
selected first. Click Select Next Object it can only be moved perpendicular to
to select the wall itself. See “Hatch itself or, in the case of curved walls,
Wall” on page 226. perpendicular to its chord using the Move
edit handle. Unconnected walls can be
• The Edit Area tools allow you to moved at Allowed Angles.
select only part of a wall or walls. See • The footing of a foundation wall can be
“Edit Area Tools” on page 209. selected in 3D views and edited using the
edit handles.
• The Same Wall Type edit handles can be
Depending on the type of view, a wall enabled, allowing you to draw a new wall
displays a different set of edit handles when segment of the same type as the selected
selected. wall.
• In floor plan view, straight and curved
walls can be edited like other line- and Same Wall Type
arc-based objects. See “Editing Line Edit Handles
Based Objects” on page 147 and “Editing
When the Same Wall Type edit handles are
Arc Based Objects” on page 150.
enabled, two edit handles display just beyond
• In a camera view or overview, click on a selected wall’s Extend edit handles in floor
the top surface of a wall to display the plan view or when the top edge of the wall is
same edit handles as in floor plan view, selected in a 3D view.
232
the height of the walls that define it also

Same Wall Type edit handles change.
• The ceiling heights for all rooms on a
floor are controlled in the Floor Defaults
dialog for that floor. See “Floor Defaults
Dialog” on page 353. Whenever possible,
Click and drag a Same Wall Type edit it is best to set all ceiling heights using
handle at any angle to draw a new wall the defaults.
segment of the same type as the selected • The ceiling height of a single room can
wall. be set in its Room Specification dialog.
• The default Floor and Ceiling Heights for
a given floor can be adjusted by editing
the top and/or bottom edges of the Exte-
rior Room in a 3D view. See “The Exte-
rior Room” on page 271.
To temporarily enable the Same Wall Type
edit handles, select a wall and click the Same • The top or bottom edge of any wall can
be adjusted independent of floor or ceil-
Wall Type edit button. You can also ing heights using the mouse in Cross Sec-
enable these handles globally in the tion/Elevation and 3D views.
Preferences dialog. See “Architectural
• If the wall height of the Exterior Room is
adjusted in a 3D view, the default Floor
or Ceiling Height of the entire floor is
In the Specification Dialog changed. See “The Exterior Room” on
The appearance and structure of walls can be page 271.
customized in the Wall Specification dialog.
See “Wall Specification Dialog” on page Moving Walls
249. Using Dimensions
Using the Edit Tools Automatic, manually-drawn, and
temporary dimension lines can be used
A selected wall or walls can be edited in a to move walls. Select a wall, then click on a
variety of ways using the buttons on the edit dimension line that locates it. See “Moving
toolbar. See “Edit Toolbar Buttons” on page Objects Using Dimensions” on page 831.
1140.
Depending on your Dimension Defaults
settings, automatic and manual dimension
Wall Heights lines may locate wall surfaces or wall
The height of a wall is controlled by the dimension layers. See “Locate Objects Tab”
ceiling height of the room(s) it defines. If the on page 816
ceiling or floor height of a room is changed,
233
Editing Straight/Curved Wall Combinations
Bear in mind that temporary dimensions can 2. Click and drag a dimension line parallel
be set up to locate different wall layers than to the angled wall.
automatic and manual dimensions. As a
result, they may appear to give different 3. Click the Select Objects button,
measurements between the same walls. See then select the angled wall.
“Temporary Dimension Defaults Dialog” on 4. With the angled wall selected, click on
page 821. the End to End Dimension.
Only the portions of pony walls that display 5. In the inline text field, specify the
are located by dimensions. The upper and desired length of the angled wall.
lower parts of pony walls typically have 6. Click OK and the angled wall will move
different thicknesses, so which part you as needed so that it is the length that you
choose to display may affect your plan’s specified.
dimensions. See “Pony Wall Defaults” on
page 218. Locked vs. Unlocked Centers
The default for curved walls is an unlocked
Dimension Defaults and Temporary
Dimension Preferences settings can
center because it is easier to draw and edit
have a significant effect on wall position. It is when the center is unlocked.
recommended that you review these settings
Once walls are in place and curved walls are
and make sure that they meet your needs.
properly aligned with straight walls, it is a
good idea to lock the curved walls’ centers.
The length of a wall drawn at an angle in an
interior corner can be specified using an End To lock the center of a curved wall, select it
to End Dimension . The wall moves and click the Lock Center edit button.
closer to or away from the corner as needed See “Using Lock Center” on page 155. The
but does not break its connections to the curved wall remains selected, but its edit
walls forming the corner. handles change.
The locked status can also be changed in the
To resize an angled wall across a corner
General tab of the Wall Specification dialog.
1. Select CAD> Dimension> End to End
Dimension .
Editing Straight/Curved Wall Combinations

If you move a straight wall connected to a changing the center of the arc, the walls lose
curved wall with a locked center and the their connection.
connection cannot be maintained without
234
Make Arc Tangent

When an Extend edit handle of a curved wall
with a locked center is dragged with the If both ends of a curved wall are attached to
straight walls that are nearly tangent and the
Alternate Edit Behavior active, the
curved wall is selected, the Make Arc
locked center setting will be overridden. See
“Edit Behaviors” on page 137. Tangent edit button displays. Click this
button to open the Radius of Tangent
If you move a straight wall connected to a Curved Wall dialog.
curved wall with a locked center, the curved
wall extends along its curve and the straight
wall will either lengthen or shorten as needed
to stay connected to the curved wall.
If the connection between the straight and
curved wall cannot be maintained because of
the curved wall’s radius, it will be broken.
Here you can determine which wall layer the

radius of the curved wall is measuring.
Specify a layer and click OK. For more
information about Wall Layers, see “Wall
Type Definitions” on page 241.
Aligning Walls
Wall alignment refers to the way wall below. Walls may need to be aligned in a
segments line up with one another, either on variety of situations.
the same floor or on the floor above or
235
Aligning Walls
Aligning Colinear Walls

Colinear walls are parallel walls connected
end to end and drawn on the same floor.
When colinear walls join end-to-end and
Object Snaps are enabled, the walls
snap.
The way that colinear walls snap together is
determined by the Resize About setting in
the General Wall Defaults dialog when
Object Snaps are enabled. See “General
Wall Defaults” on page 215.
4. Right-click the middle section of the
Creating a Nook wall to select the wall section.
Walls can be aligned across an opening such 5. Click the middle Move handle and drag
as a nook, so that they are colinear, using the the wall outward.
Break Wall tool. 6. Draw side walls to connect the wall back
to the rest of the house.
To align walls across a gap 7. Move these short walls using dimen-
sions to accurately size the nook.
1. Select a wall to build a nook into and
click the Break Wall edit button. Aligning Walls
2. Click at a point on the wall close to one Between Floors
side of the nook area. Do not worry Walls can be aligned between floors by
about exact placement right now.
clicking the Align With Wall Above and
3. Click again near the other side of the
nook. Two short lines at each location Align With Wall Below edit buttons.
where you clicked indicate Wall Breaks.
In order for these edit tools to be avail-
able, the areas of the walls in question
must be partially aligned, or overlapping.
To align walls between floors
1. Select a wall that you want to align with

another wall either above or below it.
2. If the wall is above or below the other
wall along only part of its length, you
236
must click on it along that part. Select Aligning Curved Walls

Tools> Reference Floors> Reference With Straight Walls
Display On to help make sure you
Curved walls can be drawn tangent to
click on the correct part of the wall.
an existing straight wall using the
3. When you have selected the wall at the Start/Tangent/End Arc Mode. See
desired location, click either the Align “Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes” on
With Wall Above or Align With page 892.
Wall Below edit button. If both ends of a selected curved wall

are connected to other walls at angles
Aligning Curved Walls of 45 degrees or less, the Make Arc Tangent
edit button is available. Click this button to
Between Floors
move and resize the wall so that both ends
Curved walls are aligned between floors are tangent to the connected walls. See
using the same technique to align straight “Editing Arc Based Objects” on page 150.
walls. If the centers and radii of the walls are
The wall’s radius is usually changed by this
within a few inches of each other, the Align
action and a locked center automatically
With Wall Above and Align With Wall becomes unlocked. Once the wall is tangent,
Below edit buttons are enabled for the select it and drag its move handle until it is in
selected wall. The selected curved wall will the appropriate position.
take on the radius and center of the
referenced wall when the walls are aligned. Aligning Railing on
Different Floors
Aligning Pony Walls Two colinear Railings or Deck Railings on
Between Floors the same floor can be aligned one above the
When aligning a pony wall with either the other when they define rooms with different
wall above or below, it is important that the floor heights.
appropriate part of the pony wall display in
floor plan view. See “Displaying Pony Walls
in Floor Plan View” on page 231.
• To align a pony wall with the wall below,
make sure the lower pony wall displays
before using Align With Wall Below
. To align railing on different platforms
• To align a pony wall with the wall above,
make sure the upper pony wall displays 1. Click and drag to draw a Railing or
before using Align With Wall Below Deck Railing that divides a room such as
a deck in two.
.
237
Attic Walls
Deck Railing Specification dialog,

2. Click the Select Objects button,
then click in one of the room areas. check Generate on Low Platform. See
“Railing Tab” on page 258.
3. Click the Open Object edit button, 5. Click and drag a second railing parallel
and on the General tab of the Room to the one drawn in step 1.
Specification dialog:
6. Select this second railing and click the
• Specify a Floor Height that differs
from that of the other by at least the Open Object edit button. On the
height of the railing, then click OK. General tab of the Railing or Deck
Railing Specification dialog, check the
• The default railing height is 36”, so for
best results the Floor Height should be box beside No Room Def and click OK.
changed by at least this amount. 7. With the railing still selected, Ctrl + drag
4. Click on the railing drawn in step 1, then it into the same position as the first rail-
ing. See “To move an object freely” on
click the Open Object edit button. page 179.
On the Railing tab of the Railing or
Attic Walls
In Chief Architect, walls are built between When you Rebuild Walls/Floors/
the floor and ceiling platforms of the room. Ceilings , all Attic Walls in the plan are
See “Floor & Ceiling Heights” on page 268. deleted and rebuilt unless Auto Rebuild
When the program detects an open space Attic Walls is also checked in the General
between a wall and the roof plane above it, it Wall Defaults dialog. See “General Wall
automatically creates an Attic Wall on the Defaults” on page 215.
floor above that wall to fill in the gap.
Attic Walls are typically found above Full Knee Walls
Gable Walls, forming a gable or closing the
Knee Walls are a bit like Attic Walls in that
top portion of a side wall beneath a shed
they are not meant to generate to full ceiling
roof.
height. Instead, they build upward until they
Attic walls are often found on the Attic floor, encounter a roof plane. Unlike Attic Walls,
but can be generated on other floors, as well. however, Knee Walls are used in the interior
See “The Attic Floor” on page 359. of a structure, typically to separate loft areas
from Attic rooms on the upper floor. See
Attic Walls are specified as such in the Wall
“Room Types” on page 271.
Specification dialog. If needed, you can
specify a regular wall as an Attic Wall. See Chief Architect does not specify walls as
“General Tab” on page 250. Knee Walls automatically. If an interior wall
is drawn in a location where the roof is lower
than the ceiling height, you should specify it
238
as a Knee Wall in the Wall Specification

dialog. See “Roof Tab” on page 252.
Double Walls
In some situations, such as for sound You can make floor platform rim joists touch
insulation, furring, or where the walls of two each other at the boundary between Split
modular home units meet, two walls are Framing walls or provide spacing to carry
drawn side-by-side. In instances such as sheathing over them by checking Build
these, specify both walls as Double Walls. platform to this layer for the appropriate
layer in the Wall Type Definitions dialog.
Two walls become Double Walls when they
For more information, see “Wall Type
are parallel, touching, and both specified as
Definitions Dialog” on page 243.
Double Walls in the Wall Specification
dialog. See “General Tab” on page 250. To create a pair of Split Framing walls,
specify both walls as such on the General tab
There are three types of Double Walls:
of the Wall Specification dialog.
Frame Through, Split Framing and Furred
Wall.
Furred Wall
Frame Through Furred Walls are placed against the inside
of a primary wall, typically an exterior wall.
Frame Through walls can be considered the
An example is a concrete wall furred out by a
basic Double Wall type. A Frame Through
framed wall with an air gap or insulation
wall could be used as a double wall between
between them. Another example is a thick
hotel rooms for sound insulation.
wall with two framed layers.
To create a pair of Frame Through walls,
Rooms are defined in the normal manner by
specify both walls as such on the General tab
the primary wall, but the layers of the Furred
of the Wall Specification dialog.
Wall are treated by the program as though
they were added to the primary. An air gap
Split Framing between the primary and furred walls should
Split Framing walls divide floor and ceiling be defined as a layer of one of the walls,
platforms, as well as any walls they intersect. usually the furred wall.
The split occurs at the boundary where the As with Frame Through walls, Furred Walls
two double walls touch and is useful for do not split platforms or connected walls.
separating modular home units. Unlike Frame Through walls, they do not
Chief Architect frames walls and platforms connect or frame to non-parallel walls like
separately on either side of the Split Framing normal walls. Instead, they connect to other
wall boundary, with no framing members Furred Walls.
crossing it.
239
CAD to Walls
To create a Furred Wall, specify the primary specify how an opening builds through the
wall as a Frame Through wall and the Double Walls on the Frame and Trim tab of
furred wall as a Furred Wall on the General the Door Specification dialog or the Casing
tab of the Wall Specification dialog. tab of the Window Specification dialog. See
“Door Specification Dialog” on page 303 or
Openings in Double Walls “Window Specification Dialog” on page 332.
Doors and windows placed in one Double

Wall extend through both walls. You can
CAD to Walls
The CAD to Walls tool can be used to with unique layer attributes. See “Layer
convert CAD lines in floor plan view Display Options Dialog” on page 121.
into architectural objects. Two or more
To convert the lines of an imported drawing
parallel CAD lines can be converted to both
straight or curved walls or rails. CAD lines using CAD to Walls , map its layers in
representing windows and doors can also be the Import Drawing Wizard. Do not check
converted. “Boxes” or “Polylines”. See “Select File” on
page 955.
All lines that you want to convert to walls
must be located on one layer. The same is When CAD objects are located properly,
true for windows, doors, and rails. It is select CAD> CAD to Walls to display
helpful to place like items on a single layer the CAD to Walls dialog.
240
Convert CAD to Walls Dialog
1 2
1 Specify the source layers to be width of the wall type. Typically, only two
converted to walls, windows, doors, or wall types are used in a plan and an interior
rails. and exterior wall type are specified.
2 Click Define to view the Layer Display Conversion works better if lines representing
Options dialog and select a different windows and doors are on different layers,
source layer if needed. although it should still be satisfactory if they
are on the same layer. In either case, the arc
3 Specify wall types for the new walls. indicating door swing helps to identify a door
One, two, or neither can be specified.
and should be placed on the same layer as
To convert to a specific wall type, the lines doors.
must be within one inch or 25mm of that wall
Click OK to complete the conversion.
type’s width. If two wall types are specified,
Converted items are found in the Layer
new walls are converted to the one having
Display Options dialog.
the closest width. The new wall expands or
contracts about its centerline to reach the
Wall Type Definitions

Every wall in a plan is assigned a wall type, Material information in the Wall Type
and its Wall Type Definition determines its Definition can be calculated for take-offs in
structure, appearance in floor plan view and the Materials List. See “Materials Lists” on
default materials. page 1048.
241
Wall Type Definitions
Wall types can be viewed, edited and created material. All of these layers can be calculated
in the Wall Type Definitions dialog. See by the Materials List. Materials that are
“Wall Type Definitions Dialog” on page 243. applied to the outer layers of the wall layer
definition also defines how the wall displays
Walls fall into two categories: Adjustable
in 3D views.
Thickness walls and User Specified walls.
The Main Layer
Adjustable Thickness Walls
In most circumstances, the Main Layer
The Adjustable Thickness Wall type is a
should be specified as the structural layer of
generic, single-layer wall type that cannot be
the wall, particularly when the wall is a
edited in the Wall Type Definitions dialog.
framed type. The Main Layer determines
The Adjustable Thickness Wall is the default many things:
wall type for railings, deck railings and • Floor and ceiling platforms and automati-
fencing. Although its wall type definition cally built foundation walls normally
cannot be altered, you can specify its build to the outer edge of the Main Layer.
thickness in the Railing, Deck Railing and
Fencing Defaults dialogs, as well as on the • Exterior walls on different floors are
General tab of any wall, railing or fence aligned by the outer edges of their Main
using this wall type. See “Wall, Railing and Layers.
Fencing Defaults” on page 215. • Roof baselines are placed at the outer
edge of the Main Layer when roofs are
The program assigns materials and assumes
automatically generated. See “The Base-
certain characteristics of these walls when
line” on page 386.
the Materials List is generated.
• Roof base lines and gable/roof lines that
This wall type may be used in legacy plans are manually drawn snap to the edge of
created in previous program versions; this layer.
however, because of its limited editability, it
is not recommended for walls in new plans. • When wall framing is generated, stud
depth is based on the thickness of each
wall’s Main Layer.
User Specified Walls
All other wall type definitions in the program Wall framing will only generate in a wall
are considered User Specified Walls. Some when a framing material such as Fir
User Specified wall definitions are shipped Stud 16” OC or Metal Stud 24” OC is speci-
with the program and can be customized. fied for its framing layer. See “Material Types”
on page 707.
The 2D display qualities of user specified
walls are defined by the properties in the All of this information is reliant on the Main
Wall Type Defintions dialog.
Layer, so creating your wall type definitions
User Specified walls can have up to ten accurately beforehand and specifying the
layers defined, each representing a different Main Layer is very important.
242
The Dimension Layer • Where First Line Offset for Auto Exte-
Dimension line defaults can be set to locate rior Dimensions is measured from.
walls at their surfaces or at their Wall • How the minimum enclosed area
Dimension Layer. See “Locate Objects Tab” required by Auto Exterior
on page 816.
Dimensions is measured.
The Main Layer is the default Wall
The settings on the Locate Objects tab
Dimension Layer for installed wall types;
control how dimensions initially locate
however, this can be changed if need be in
walls. You can move a dimension line’s
the Wall Type Definitions dialog. In addition
extension or add new extensions to locate a
to the Wall Dimension Layer, the program
wall’s surfaces, its Main Layer Surfaces, and/
will locate the inside surface of the Main
or its center line.
Layer, as well.
Whether Surface or Wall Dimension Layer is iwalllay.dat and mwalllay.dat
selected on the Locate Objects tab of the
Dimension Defaults dialog determines a Two files in the Chief Architect program
number of aspects related to how dimensions directory contain some basic default Chief
locate walls: Architect wall type definitions: iwalllay.dat
(Imperial units) and mwalllay.dat (metric
• How Auto Exterior and Manual Dimen- units).
sions measure the lengths of walls.
If you open a .plan file containing no wall
• Where both Manual and Automatic
types, information from iwalllay.dat or
Reach are measured from.
mwalllay.dat is automatically imported,
• Where Extension line lengths and their adding basic wall types to your plan file.
Gap From Marked Object are measured
from.
Wall Type Definitions Dialog

The Wall Type Definitions dialog is using that wall type. Walls in other plan files
used to define new wall types and are unaffected.
redefine existing wall types in the current
If changes to a wall type affect its thickness,
plan file. Select Build> Wall> Define Wall
the position of any walls in the plan using
Types to open this dialog.
that wall type may be affected. See “General
You can also click the Define button on the Wall Defaults” on page 215.
Wall Types tab of the Wall Specification or
in most Wall Defaults dialogs.
Note: The definition of the Adjustable Thick-
Changes made to an existing wall type ness Wall cannot be edited. See “Adjustable
definition affect all walls in the current plan Thickness Walls” on page 242.
243
Wall Type Definitions Dialog
1
8
2 9
10
3 11
4 12
13
5
14
6
7
15
1 Click this drop-down list to display all Layer is usually the structural layer and is
available wall types in the current plan. wider than other layers in the wall assembly
Select a wall type from the list to display its diagram.
definition. You can rename a wall type by
typing in a new name. 3 Define the Thickness for each wall
layer. The layer thickness format can be
To create a new wall type, click New to changed by clicking the Num Style button.
define a new wall type from scratch or click
Wall layers are numbered and are listed from
Copy to copy the current wall type. The
exterior at the top to interior at the bottom.
copied wall type can then be renamed and
To select a layer for editing, click in its Layer
redefined.
Thickness text field. The arrow to the right of
To remove a wall type, select it and click the wall assembly diagram points to the
Delete. Wall types currently being used in selected layer, while the arrow to the left of
your plan or set as plan defaults cannot be the diagram points to its exterior surface.
deleted.
2 Main Layer - If the selected wall type You can also select a wall layer by
has multiple wall layers, select a radio clicking on it in the wall assembly dia-
button to specify the Main Layer. The Main gram at the bottom of the dialog.
244
4 Select a wall layer and check Build Check By Layer if you want the line to
platform to this layer to build floor assume the attributes of the wall’s layer as
and ceiling platforms to this layer of the wall. defined in the Layer Display Options
This option can only be selected for one wall dialog. See “Displaying Objects” on page
layer: when you check this box for a layer, it 117.
becomes unchecked for the layer it was
Click the Library button to open the Library
previously selected for. By default, this
Browser to the Line Style category. See
option is checked for the Main Layer.
“Line Styles” on page 879.
5 Select a layer and check Dimension to
this Layer to have dimensions locate 9 Layer Material - Specify the material
calculated in the Material List and any
the selected layer of the current wall type.
fill patterns that display in 2D for the
This option can only be selected for a single
currently selected, or active, wall layer.
wall layer, and can only be selected for the
Main Layer or a layer located between the Click either of the two material preview
Main Layer and the exterior surface. By boxes and the Select Library Object dialog
default, this option is checked for the Main opens to the Materials library category.
Layer. Does not affect Interior Dimensions. Specify a material for the active layer in the
See “The Dimension Layer” on page 243. wall layer definition.
6 Total - Displays the total thickness of 10 Click Library Material to open the
the wall type definition. If you change Select Library Object dialog to the
the total thickness value, the thickness of the Materials library category. See “Select
Main Layer automatically updates to account Library Object Dialog” on page 689.
for the difference.
Click Plan Materials to open the Plan
7 Click the Insert button to create a new Materials dialog. See “Plan Materials
layer directly above the selected layer Dialog” on page 718 .
in the wall type definition.
11 Click the Fill Style button to open the
To insert a layer at the bottom or interior of Wall Layer Fill Style dialog and specify
the wall type definition, click on the bottom a fill style for the selected wall layer. This
line in the wall assembly diagram. dialog is similar to the Fill Style tab for CAD
objects. See “Fill Style Tab” on page 902.
Click Delete to remove the currently active
layer. The arrow to the right of the wall Wall layer fill styles are overridden if you
assembly diagram points to the active layer. use the Hatch Wall tool on a wall in
floor plan view.
8 Wall Line - Define the Color, Style,
and Weight for the selected line in the
wall assembly diagram. The arrow to the left 12 Show as insulation in elevation -
Check this box to have insulation
of the diagram points to the active line. Any details generated in cross section views when
changes made in the dialog immediately
display in the diagram, illustrating how the the Autodetail tool is used. See “Auto
wall displays in floor plan view. Detailing” on page 755.
245
Exporting Wall Type Definitions
13 Always generate 3D surfaces - Check layer. To select a layer, click on a layer in the
this box to generate outer wall surfaces diagram or click in its Thickness field.
in 3D when wall framing has been built.
The arrow to the left of the wall assembly
When unchecked, outer wall surfaces are not
diagram points to the selected wall line.
displayed when wall framing is built. This
checkbox only affects single-layer framed
15 Click the Num Style button to open the
wall types. Number Style/Angle Style dialog.
Here you can change the numbering format.
14 The arrow to the right of the wall See “Number Style/Angle Style Dialog” on
assembly diagram points to the selected
page 917.
Exporting Wall Type Definitions

Wall type definitions can be exported from
one Chief Architect plan file and imported
into another.
The wall type definitions available to export
from the current plan are listed in the Wall
Type Definitions dialog. See “Wall Type
The File> Export> Wall Definitions
command exports all wall type definitions in
the current plan into a .dat file.
2. In the Save in drop-down, browse to the
To export wall type definitions location on your computer where you
would like to save the exported file.
1. Select File> Export> Wall Definitions • Any folders and .dat files in the current
to open the Export Wall Defintions File location display in the field below.
dialog. • Its possible you may see other .dat files
in this directory that are not wall defi-
nitions.
3. In the File name text field, type a name
for the exported file. Chief Architect
automatically attaches the file extension
.dat, which is the only file type available
in the Save as type field.
4. When both the Save in location and File
name are correct, click Save.
246
Importing Wall Type Definitions

Importing wall type definitions into a plan is 3. Click on the .dat file you wish to import.
a convenient alternative to re-creating wall Its name will display in the File name
types that already exist in another plan. text field.
4. The only file type available in the Save
To import wall type definitions as type field is .dat.
1. Select File> Import> Wall Definitions 5. When the desired file is selected, click
to open the Import Wall Defintions File Open.
dialog. When wall type definitions are imported, the
names of the wall type definitions in the .dat
file are compared with those already present
in your plan. If the program finds identical
names, it will ask you if you want to replace
existing wall definitions with the same name.
Click Yes to replace existing files in the plan
file, or No to keep the definitions already in
the plan.
The imported wall type definitions are now
available in your current plan
2. In the Look in drop-down, browse to the
location on your computer where the file Wall type definitions that you use often
you wish to import is saved. should be saved in your default tem-
• Any folders and .dat files in the current plate plan. See “To create your own template
location display in the field below. plan” on page 52.
• Its possible you may see other .dat files

in this directory that are not wall defi-
nitions.
Stepped and Raked Walls

Stepped and raked walls can be easily Stepped Walls & Footings
created using the Break Line tool and One application for pony walls is a stepped
the wall’s edit handles in any 3D or Cross foundation. The lower part of the pony wall
Section/Elevation view. In many cases, is the concrete wall with footing, and the
working in a Backclipped Cross Section upper part of the pony wall is a framed wall
is easiest and allows the greatest accuracy. built to the first floor platform.
247
Stepped and Raked Walls
In the illustration above, the lower pony wall Raked Walls

is a single layer concrete wall and the upper
part of the pony wall is faced with brick.
To create a simple raked wall:
1. Select the wall in cross section/elevation

or 3D view.
To add a step to a wall
2. Click one of the corner edit handles and
1. Select the wall in a Backclipped Cross drag that handle either up or down.
Section view. 3. To rake a wall at a specific angle, you
can use Angle Snaps , or draw a
2. Click the Break Line tool, then
click the top or bottom edge of the wall CAD Line at the desired angle.
to place the break. Select the raked edge of the wall, click
3. In addition to the corner handles, two the Make Parallel edit button, and
handles display along the broken edge. then click the CAD line. See “Using
Make Parallel/Perpendicular” on page
4. Select one of these two handles, and
181.
drag up or down.
5. A square step is created. Compound Raked Walls
The vertical edges of a wall cannot be The illustration below shows two walls
broken. meeting in a “V”. Both walls have three
By default, a stepped foundation wall angles across the top of the wall.
displays an “S” symbol at the location of the
step in floor plan view. The display of this
“S” is controlled in the Wall Defaults dialog.
See “Exterior/Interior Wall Defaults” on
page 216.
To create a compound raked wall, breaks

must be added to the raked edge. Each
section of the wall’s edge can then be
adjusted separately. Breaks cannot be added
248
to the vertical edges of a wall - only the 2. The new break point displays as an edit
horizontal edges. handle. Click this new handle and drag it
to create the desired angle.
To create a compound raked wall
1. In cross section/elevation view, select

the wall, click the Break Wall tool,
then click either edge to be raked.
Wall Specification Dialog

To open the Wall Specification dialog, select The settings in this dialog are alsosimilar to
a wall or group of walls and click the Open those in the Railing, Deck Railing and
Fencing Defaults dialogs. The settings in
Object edit button.
these defaults dialogs determine the initial
The tabs of the Wall Specification dialog are characteristics of railings, deck railings and
also found in the Railing, Deck Railing, and fencing when they are first drawn. See
Fencing Specification dialogs. “Default Settings” on page 63.
249
General Tab
1 4
2
3 5
6
7 8
Some items on the General tab are available

4 Specify the Wall Angle and Wall
only when they apply to the selected wall or Length of a straight wall. These
walls. options are not available for curved walls.
• Wall Angle - The current absolute angle
1 The Thickness of the selected wall of the wall in a floor plan view is shown.
displays here. It can be specified only
when the wall is an Adjustable Thickness Type in a new angle to rotate the wall
wall type. This option is not available for about its locked point.
layered wall types. • Wall Length - The current length is
shown. Type in a new length. The part of
2 Check Foundation to specify the the wall that extends or contracts is deter-
selected wall as a foundation wall.
More foundation wall settings are available mined by where it is locked.
on the Foundation tab.
5 Select a radio button to Lock the
selected wall at its Start, End or Center.
3 Check Railing to specify the selected When the Wall Angle or Wall Length of the
wall as a railing. More railing settings
are found on the Railing and Newels/ selected wall is changed, this part of the wall
Balusters and Handrail tabs. does not move.
250
6 Check any of the Options to modify the • Select Lock Center to lock the center of
selected wall accordingly. In most a curved wall.
cases, multiple options can be selected. • Select to Retain Wall Framing for this
• Check Invisible to specify the wall as wall, as seen in the wall detail view or in
invisible. Invisible walls are used to 3D framing, when the wall framing is
divide rooms areas that are not separated globally rebuilt.
by a wall or railing, such as a nook from a • Select Terrain Retaining Wall to treat
kitchen, and can display in floor plan the wall as a terrain retaining wall. See
view but not 3D views. “Terrain Breaks” on page 586.
• Select Stop at Platform to have the bot-
Select Railing and Invisible to place tom of the wall stop at the top surface of a
walls where there is a vertical break in
floor platform. This is the default for
the floor or ceiling level at the invisible
wall’s location. If railing is not selected, there
framed wall types.
will be a gap where the levels change. • Select Go Through Platform to have the
bottom of the wall go through a floor
• Select No Room Definition to display platform. This is the default for concrete
the wall in floor plan and/or 3D views but wall types.
not define or divide a room.
• Select No Locate to prevent dimension Whether a wall is a framed or concrete type is
lines from locating a wall. No Locate can determined by the material selected for its
be used for any wall that you do not want main layer. See “Wall Type Definitions Dia-
dimensioned. No Locate is selected by log” on page 243.
default for Railings and Invisible Walls.
• Select Stop at Ceiling to have the top of
• Select Invisible Beam to have the wall
the wall stop at the bottom of a ceiling
display as two lines in floor plan view.
platform.
This option is included for compatibility
with earlier versions and its use is not • Select Balloon Through Ceiling to have
encouraged. It does not create a beam. the top of the wall go through a ceiling
platform.
• Select Attic Wall to prevent the wall
from extending through the roof above. • Default Wall Top Height and Default
See “Attic Walls” on page 238. Wall Bottom Height are enabled if the
selected wall top and/or bottom height
• Automatic Wall displays for reference has been edited. Check these boxes to
and is checked whenever the selected restore the default heights.
wall was generated by the program. Typi-
cally automatic walls are also Attic walls. 7 Radius To - This section is only active
for curved walls and controls the
• Check Wall Butts Other Walls to con-
definition of the curved wall radius.
nect the selected wall at the surfaces of
other walls rather than at their main layer.
251
• Outer - Select this radio button to define Lock Ends - Select this button so that when
the radius from the center of the curved the radius is changed, the wall ends remain
wall to the outer surface of the wall. locked and the wall center changes.
• Inner - Select this radio button to define
the radius from the center of the curved 8 Check Double Wall to specify the
selected straight wall as a double wall.
wall to the inner surface of the wall. Two walls become double walls when they
• Outer Main - Select this radio button to are parallel, touching, and this box is
display or modify the radius from the checked for both. See “Double Walls” on
center of the curved wall to the outside of page 239.
the main layer of the wall. This section is only active for straight walls.
• Inner Main - Select this radio button to • Select Frame Through to create a basic
define the radius from the center of the double wall.
curved wall to the inside of the main
layer of the wall. • Select Split Framing to create a double
wall that splits platforms and connecting
• Radius - Displays the radius length as walls at its boundary.
defined by the above radio buttons. Mod-
ify this value to change the curvature of • Select Furred Wall to treat the selected
the wall. wall as additional layers added to another
wall.
Lock Center - Select this button so that
when the radius is changed, the wall center 9 Click the Num Style button to open the
remains locked and the wall ends change. Number Style/Angle Style dialog and
change the way the Wall Angle and Wall
Length values display. See “Number Style/
Angle Style Dialog” on page 917.
Roof Tab
Any automatically generated roof style other interacts with the roof plan, defining the
than a hip requires roof information to be portion of the roof plan that bears on it. See
defined in the exterior walls. On the Roof “Automatic vs. Manual Roofs” on page 375.
tab, you can specify how the selected wall
252
1 2
3
4
1 Roof Options - Specify the shape of • Check Roof Cuts Wall at Bottom to pre-
the wall relative to the roof. vent the portion of a selected wall located
• Check Full Gable Wall to create a gable below an intersecting roof plane from
end over the selected wall. building.
• Check High Shed/Gable Wall to specify • Combine with Above Wall - This check
the selected wall as the high end of a shed box is available for a selected wall with
roof. an attic wall above it. Check this box to
frame the upper and lower portions of the
• Check Knee Wall to define the selected wall together as one when automatic
interior wall as a knee wall. Only an inte- framing is built. See “Wall Framing” on
rior wall can be defined as a knee wall. A page 461.
knee wall’s height is defined by the roof
above, not the ceiling height. See “Knee 2 Pitch Options - Specify the pitch or
Walls” on page 238. pitches of the roof plane(s) above the
selected wall.
• Check Extend Slope Downward to con-
tinue a roof down over a bumpout in an • Enter a value to define the Pitch of the
exterior wall. See “Extend Slope Down- roof plane bearing on the selected wall.
ward” on page 397.
253
• Check Upper Pitch to create a roof with • Specify a Gable, Hip, or Full roof return.
two pitches or, if the selected wall is a Specify a Sloping or Flat roof return. See
Full Gable Wall, a half hip condition. “Roof Tutorial” on page 191 of the
• Enter the Pitch of the second, upper roof. User’s Guide.
• Specify the Height that the Upper Pitch • Check the boxes to Include Frieze mold-
Starts at, or define the distance in from ing and Include Gutter on the roof
Baseline that the second pitch begins. returns.
The two values are dynamic. Press the
Tab key to update the relative numbers. 4 Specify the Overhang Length, which
is the horizontal distance from the
baseline to the eave. See “The Baseline” on
3 Check Auto Roof Return to generate page 386.
roof returns on the selected wall. In
most cases, roof returns only work for Full
Gable Walls. See “Roof Returns” on page 5 Lower wall type if split by butting
roof - Specify the desired wall type for
423. the portion of the selected wall located
• Specify the horizontal Length of the roof beneath an adjacent, abutting roof plane,
return in inches. should one be present. The upper portion is
defined on the Wall Types tab.
• Enter a value in inches to Extend the roof
returns from the overhang.
254
Foundation Tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 Check Specify Foundation to turn the available when the footing bottom height has
selected wall into a foundation wall. been edited.
This produces a footing beneath the wall.
5 Center Footing on Main Layer -
2 The Thickness of the selected wall Check this box to center the footing on
displays here. It can be specified only the wall’s Main Layer. When unchecked, the
when the wall is the Adjustable Thickness footing is centered on the wall’s center line.
wall type. This option is not available for
layered wall types.
Note: Warning messages may display if the
foundation wall layer definition does not
3 Footing Width and Height - Define appear to be a foundation wall type.
the size of the footing below the
selected foundation walls.
The Height value will be unavailable if the 6 Specify the Footing Offset, which is
the distance between the center of the
bottom height of the footing has been edited. footing and the center of the wall. A positive
value offsets the footing to the right of the
4 Automatic Footing Bottom Height - wall’s center. A negative value offsets the
Check this box to restore the default
height of the selected wall’s footing. Only footing to the left of the wall’s center. The
255
left and right side of a wall is determined by page 92 for information about displaying
its start and end points. See “Edit Panel” on start and end points.
Wall Types Tab
2
3
4 5
1 Choose the selected wall’s Wall Type 2 Check Pony Wall to specify the
from the drop-down list of all currently selected wall as a pony wall having
available types. A preview of the selected different wall types on its upper and lower
wall type displays below the drop-down list. portions. See “Pony Walls” on page 223.
• Click the Define button to open the Wall
Type Definitions dialog to create or mod-
3 Specify the Lower Wall Type: the wall
type of the lower portion of the pony
ify existing wall types. See “Wall Type wall. A preview of the selected wall type
Definitions Dialog” on page 243. displays below the drop-down list.
The Adjustable Thickness Wall is the recom- Type Definitions dialog.
mended wall type for railings. See “Adjust-
able Thickness Walls” on page 242.
The Adjustable Thickness Wall cannot be
assigned to the Lower Pony Wall.
256
4 Align pony wall - Specify how the • Select Inner surface to align wall types
layers of the selected wall’s Upper and at their interior surfaces.
Lower portions align.
• No change is used by default when mul- 5 Specify which part of the pony wall you
would like to Display in Plan view.
tiple pony walls with different alignment
• Select Default to display the portion of
settings are selected. Choose this to leave
the pony wall specified in the Pony Wall
the alignment as it was when the dialog
Defaults dialog. See “Wall, Railing and
was opened.
Fencing Defaults” on page 215.
• Select Outer surface to align wall types
• Select Upper Wall to display the upper
at their outer surfaces.
portion of this pony wall in floor plan
• Select Outer main to align wall types at view regardless of the default setting.
the exterior edge of their main layers.
• Select Lower Wall to display the lower
• Select Central main to align the centers portion of this pony wall in floor plan
of the main layers of both wall types. view regardless of the default setting.
• Select Inner main to align the wall types • When walls are group-selected, choose
at the interior side of their main layers. No Change to allow each wall in the
selction set to maintain its own setting.
257
Railing Tab
2
6
7
3 8
4 9
5 10
1 Specify Railing - Check this box to • Solid - Create a solid, wall style railing.
specify the selected wall as a railing The wall is the type defined by the cur-
and enable the other options on this tab. rent wall layer definition.
Railings can be also drawn directly using the
Railing or Deck Railing tools.
2 Railing Type - Select the radio button

for the desired railing type. A preview
of the selected type displays to the left.
The following illustrations show the results • Open - Create a railing with only a top
of each option. rail.
• Balusters - Create balusters.
258
• Middle Rail - Create a railing with a top

and a middle rail.
• No Rail - Eliminate rails, leaving only

pillars or posts (and overhead beam, if
selected).
• Post to Ceiling - Check this box to
extend the newel posts to the ceiling.
• Panels - Create a solid panel.
3 Post Length - Select the check box for 4 Check Exterior Materials to make the
the desired post length. balusters the same material as the rails
instead of having them be defined separately.
• Post to Rail - Create newel posts from You have more flexibility if you define
floor to rail height. This option is selected materials for each part on the Materials tab.
by default.
5 Shoe Options - Select the check box
for the desired placement of the bottom
rail, or shoe. If neither box is checked, the
shoe is placed at floor platform level.
• Raise Shoe - Raise the shoe 3-1/2” or 87
mm off the floor platform.
• Post to Beam - Create newel posts from
floor to an overhead beam placed just
under the ceiling height. This option is
used when placing a cross beam along the
top of the railing.
259
• No Shoe - Eliminate the shoe altogether.

9 Terrain Options - Select the check box
Balusters go right to the floor. for the desired fencing or railing
behavior on terrain. These options only apply
when railing or fencing is drawn outside of a
building on top of a defined terrain.
• Step Terrain - Check this box to have the
railing or fencing follow the terrain in
horizontal steps between each newel.
6 A preview of the railing displays here
and updates as options are changed. • Follow Terrain - Check this box to have
the railing or fencing follow the terrain
7 Check this box to display the preview smoothly.
in color.
8 Halfpost Options - Select the check 10 Generate on Low Platform - Check

box for the desired halfpost placement. this box to display the selected railing
on the lower floor platform when the railing
• No Halfpost - Check this box to prevent defines two room areas with different floor
a half-width post from being placed when heights. See “Aligning Railing on Different
a railing intersects a wall. Floors” on page 237.
• Square Halfpost - Check this box to use
a square halfpost where a railing intersect
with a wall.
260
Newels/Balusters Tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 Railing Height - Specify the railing center of the railing. Use this when creating
height. a fence with the newels to one side of the
fence boards.
2 Baluster Width - Specify the width or
diameter of each baluster at its widest
6 Panel Type - Only available when the
point. For a Panel railing, this is the panel’s railing type has been specified as
thickness and can be no larger than the “Panels.” Select solid, framed, or Library to
railing’s total thickness, shown on the select a symbol to be used as a rail panel.
General tab.
7 Baluster Type - Only available when
3 Newel Width - Specify the width of the railing type is not specified as
each newel. For a library newel, this is “Panels.” Select square, round, or Library
its width or diameter at its widest point. Balusters and specify the on-center (O.C.)
spacing. Selecting Library from this drop-
4 Newel Height - This is the height from down list is the same as clicking the Library
the ground to the top of the newel.
button to the imediate right and allows you to
5 Newel Offset - Specify the amount select a symbol from the library to be used as
each newel should be offset from the a baluster.
261
8 Newel Type - Select square, round, or 9 Check Default to use the Draw Newels/
Library Newels and specify the on- Balusters setting in the Railing
center (O.C.) spacing. Selecting Library Defaults dialog. Check Draw Newels/
from this drop-down list is the same as Balusters to draw newels and balusters in
clicking the Library button to the immediate floor plan view.
right and allows you to select a symbol from
the library to be used as a newel.
Wall Covering Tab
1
2
1 All wall covering materials applied to “Select Library Object Dialog” on page
the selected wall are listed here. Select 689.
one from the drop-down list to edit it or • Click Select to replace the current wall
remove it from the wall. covering with a new one from the library.
2 Add, replace or remove the selected • Click Delete to remove the current wall
wall’s wall coverings. covering from the selected wall.
• Click Add New to open the Select
Library Object dialog and apply a new 3 Specify the position of the current wall
covering. Preview panes of the current
wall covering to the selected wall. See wall covering also display here.
262
• Enter the heights of the current wall cov- • Check Interior and/or Exterior to apply
ering’s Top To Ceiling and Floor To the wall covering to the inside and/or out-
Bottom. The wall covering’s Width can side of the selected wall. Interior is
also be specified. checked by default. See “Wall Type Defi-
nitions” on page 241.
Handrail Tab
The settings on the Handrail tab are used to
specify the style and size of the handrailing
on a selected railing, deck railing, or fence.
1
2
3
4
1 Molding - The name of the currently specify a profile from the library to be used
selected handrail profile displays here. as a handrail.
If no handrail profile is selected, “Default
Handrail” displays here and a 2” (5 mm) 3 Click the Default button to remove a
custom handrail that has been specified
square profile is used.
and use the default handrail.
2 Click the Select button to open the
Select Library Object dialog and 4 Molding Specification - Specify the
desired handrail profile.
263
Wall Hatch Specification Dialog
• Specify the Width and Height of the Layer Tab

handrail molding.
For information about the Layers tab, see
• A preview of the selected profile displays “Layer Tab” on page 125.
to the left. If no profile is selected, the
“Default Handrail” is used but does not
Materials Tab
display here.
For information about the Materials tab, see
“Materials Tab” on page 709.
Note: Handrails are shown on their side,
rotated counter-clockwise by 90 degrees.
Wall Hatch Specification Dialog

To open the dialog, select a wall hatch and Fill Style Tab
click the Open Object edit button. See For information about the Fill Style tab, see
“Hatch Wall” on page 220. “Fill Style Tab” on page 902.
Layer Tab
For information about the Layer tab, see
“Layer Tab” on page 125.
264
265
Chapter 8:
Rooms
When walls or railings create an enclosed Chapter Contents

area, a “room” is created. You can select • Room Definition
rooms defined in this manner like other • Floor Defaults
objects in Chief Architect. • Room Material Defaults
Rooms are assigned a Room Type. Each • Floor & Ceiling Heights
Room Type has predefined characteristics. • Selecting Rooms
For example, a room defined as Porch is • Room Types
assigned certain attributes that are different • Room Labels
than a Kitchen. • Decks
• Editing Rooms
Floor and ceiling heights, baseboard, chair- • Special Ceilings
rail, and crown moldings and materials can • Room Polylines
be defined room-by-room or for the entire • Room Specification Dialog
floor. • Room Finish Schedules
266
Room Definition
A room is a totally enclosed area defined by If a room is drawn within a larger structure
any combination of joined walls or railings, and none of its walls connect to the exterior
visible or invisible. To be recognized as a walls, either directly or indirectly by
room by Chief Architect, a room must have connecting to walls that do, the program will
an unbroken perimeter. view this room as a separate building and
unexpected issues may result. Connect such
Unless otherwise specified, rooms generate
a room to the larger structure with an
floor and ceiling platforms automatically.
invisible wall or an invisible railing.
Most rooms are also automatically covered
by the roof when one is built. There are Room definition disappears if part or all of a
exceptions to this, such as rooms defined as surrounding wall is deleted. It is a good idea
Decks. to finalize the position of walls before
defining rooms with names and attributes
such as floor height and ceiling height.
Floor Defaults
Default Settings can be accessed by to create 3D models - particularly floor and
selecting Edit> Default Settings. In ceiling heights. Moldings can also be
the Default Settings dialog, select Floor and specified in the Floor Defaults dialog.
click the Edit button to open the Floor
Only the defaults for the first floor of a
Defaults dialog for the current floor.
building can be set ahead of time. The
The default values for rooms are specified in program uses the setting from the first floor
the Floor Defaults dialog for the current to create subsequent floors. Once a new floor
floor. The Floor Defaults dialog contains is built, its floor defaults can be changed. See
important information that the program uses “Floor Defaults Dialog” on page 353.
Room Material Defaults

The default materials used for rooms are • Garage, Porches.
specified based on the type of room. There
The Room Material Defaults dialog is
are four separate room types that can have
accessed by selecting Edit> Default
their default materials specified:
Settings . Expand the Materials
• General Rooms
category, select Room Materials, and click
• Kitchens, Baths, and Utility Rooms Edit. Select a room type to open the Room
• Decks Material Defaults dialog for that room type.
267
Floor & Ceiling Heights
This dialog is similar to the Materials tab Wall Materials

found in many specification dialogs. See
“Materials Tab” on page 709. There are several ways that materials can be
assigned to walls, depending on how the
If a room type is assigned, the room uses one rooms and walls have been defined.
of the four defaults for its materials. If a
room type has not been assigned, the room When you create a room, the wall surfaces
uses the General Rooms default materials. use the default material specified in the Wall
Type Definition dialog. See “Wall Type
Floor and Ceiling Materials
You can change a room’s wall material on the
Specify floor materials and subfloor material
Materials tab of the Room Specification
for the entire floor in the Room Material
dialog. See “Materials Tab” on page 709. To
Defaults dialog or for individual rooms in
restore the default Wall Type material, click
the Room Specification dialog.
Plan Materials and select Use Default from
You can specify three separate ceiling the list. See “Plan Materials Dialog” on page
materials for a ceiling. 718.
Normally, only the Floor Covering and the In addition, you can change the surface
Ceiling Covering display in 3D views. If the material of an individual wall in the Wall
covering is specified as No Material, the Specification dialog. If you select Use
material below is visible. If no floor or Default as the material, the program refers to
ceiling material has been assigned, then the the material specified in the Room
program displays the default material for the Specification dialog. See “Wall
floor or ceiling. Specification Dialog” on page 249.
All floor and ceiling materials are used for When neither the wall nor the room has a
the calculation of the materials list. material assigned to it, the program refers to
the general material for walls in the Material
You can only assign unique ceiling materials
Defaults dialog. See “Material Defaults
to individual rooms when the checkbox Use
Above Floor’s Platform for Ceiling is
unchecked in the Floor Defaults dialog. See
“Floor Defaults Dialog” on page 353.
Floor & Ceiling Heights

Default floor and ceiling heights are defined Use the Room Specification dialog to set
in the Floor Defaults dialog for each floor, floor heights on a room-by-room basis. See
including the foundation. Use the Floor “Room Specification Dialog” on page 283.
Defaults dialog to change these values on a
floor-by-floor basis. See “Floor Defaults” on
page 267.
268
Different rooms on the same floor can have enclosing an area with solid walls, use
unique floor and ceiling heights, allowing Railings .
you to create:
• Split levels and bi-levels
• Sunken living rooms and garages
• Cathedral, vaulted, and coffered ceilings.
In 3D views, you can adjust the default floor
and ceiling height for the entire floor, the
floor and ceiling height for an individual
room, or the top and bottom heights of an
individual wall. See “In 3D Views” on page
278. Using Invisible Using an
Railings Invisible Wall
Visible or invisible, railings work well to

create room definition because they put a
railing where the two rooms meet and fill in
the vertical space between with a short wall.
An invisible wall does not fill in the vertical
space between the two levels.
Ceiling and floor heights are interrelated.
Changing the floor or ceiling height in one
room can affect floor and ceiling heights
above and below.
All floor and ceiling heights are measured • If a room’s floor is lowered, its ceiling
relative to zero, which is the default floor height is increased while the ceiling
height for Floor 1. Unlike other default floor below that room drops.
and ceiling heights, the default floor height
for Floor 1 cannot be changed, but the floor • If the floor is raised, the ceiling height
heights of rooms on Floor 1 can be edited decreases while the ceiling below that
individually. room is raised.
• If a ceiling is lowered or raised, the floor
In order to raise or lower a room’s floor or
above is lowered or raised as well.
ceiling height, you must give it a room
definition. To create room definition without If the rooms above a particular room have
more than one floor height, the room’s
ceiling is stepped.
269
Selecting Rooms
In the following example, the lowest floor

height is 0, the next is 24, and the next is 48
inches. The ceiling height in each room is set
at 96 inches. An overview and cross section/
elevation view are shown.
In a situation like this, a Lowered Ceiling can

be used to cover any “steps” made by
different floor heights on the floor above. See
“General Tab” on page 283.
Split Levels
A split level can be created by raising or
lowering the floor and ceiling heights of
various areas of the plan.
Selecting Rooms
Room definition is established when a room
is completely enclosed by walls. You can
confirm that a room has room definition by
using the Select Objects tool to select it.
When a fully-enclosed room is selected, the
room highlights.
Note: The selection color can be specified in

the Preferences dialog. See “Colors Panel”
on page 74.
The room at left is selected
Note: The selection color can be specified in

on page 74.
270
As with many other objects in the program, Preferences dialog. See “Architectural
rooms can be group-selected, as well. Panel” on page 88.
The Exterior Room In 3D Views

You can also select the exterior of a model. Click on the floor of a room or on a wall
This allows you to control the building’s surface inside the room in a 3D or cross
exterior wall coverings and materials using section view using the Select Objects
the Room Specification dialog. tool. If you select another object instead of
Click just outside an exterior wall using the the room, click Select Next Object edit
Select Objects tool to select the Exterior button or press the Tab key until the room is
Room. When it is selected, a highlighted selected. The Status Bar indicates which
band around the plan’s exterior displays. object is currently selected.
This band represents the selection area for In camera views and overviews, the Exterior
the Exterior Room. Room can be selected by clicking once on
the exterior surface of an exterior wall using
the Select Objects tool, provided that
Select Room Before Wall in 3D is selected
in the Preferences dialog. See
“Architectural Panel” on page 88.
Note: If the wall height of the Exterior Room

is adjusted in a 3D view, the default Floor or
Ceiling Height of the entire floor is changed.
See “Floor Defaults” on page 267.
Using Select Same Type

The Exterior Room is selected
Click a room to select it, then click the
In camera views and overviews, the Exterior Select Same Type edit button and use
Room can be selected by clicking on the it to group-select rooms with shared
exterior surface of an exterior wall using the attributes. See “Select Same / Load Same”
Select Objects tool, provided that Select on page 208.
Room Before Wall in 3D is selected in the
Room Types
When a room is first created by enclosing an Once your floor plan is laid out, each room
area with walls, it is assigned a generic room should be assigned a Room Type in the
type of “Unspecified.” Room Specification dialog. See “General
271
Room Types
Tab” on page 283. The Room Type applies • Exterior rooms are assumed to be open to
appropriate structural and display properties the outside and do not generate a roof
to the room. above them.
When you assign a Room Type, a label • Attic rooms are ignored by the program’s
showing the room’s Type displays in floor automatic roof generator.
plan view. • Garage, Slabs, and Porches are treated
You can edit the text of a room label in floor like exterior rooms in all cases except
plan view, but the type of room originally that they generate a ceiling and a roof
assigned remains until it is changed in the above them.
Room Specification dialog. See “Editing Floors and Foundations
Room Labels” on page 274. • Open Below is a unique type of interior
room. It has no floor platform and can be
Available Room Types used for defining stairwell openings.
There are three categories of room types: • Exterior walls of rooms default to create
Interior, Exterior and Hybrid. the foundation type specified in the
Foundation Defaults dialog.
Interior - Living, Dining, Family, Kitchen,
Nook, Bath, Master Bath, Master Bedrm, • Walls that define the garage have a foun-
Bedroom, Study, Office, Entry, Hall, Closet, dation under them defined by the
Dressing, Storage, Laundry, Utility and Foundation Defaults dialog with a con-
Unspecified. crete slab at the top of stem wall or grade
beam.
Exterior - Court, Deck, Balcony.
• The garage floor displays in 3D with the
Hybrid - Open Below, Garage, Slab, Porch, foundation floor, not the first floor.
Attic.
• Defining a room as Slab causes the floor
platform thickness to equal the slab thick-
Effects of Room Types ness value in the Foundation Defaults
The program applies specific structural and dialog.
display properties to rooms depending on the • Courts, decks and balconies do not gener-
assigned Room Type. ate foundations.
Living Area Doors and Windows
• All interior type rooms are included in • A window placed in a wall between an
Living Area calculations; exterior and exterior room and an interior room
hybrid rooms are not. always faces out toward the exterior.
Ceilings and Roofs • Windows placed between interior rooms
• Interior rooms have a ceiling and roof generate a warning message.
above them unless specified otherwise. • Door placed between interior and exterior
type rooms display threshold lines.
272
• Interior doors do not display thresholds. • Any outlet manually placed in an exterior
• Open Below rooms are treated as interior room automatically becomes a water-
rooms for window and door placement. proof outlet designed for exterior use.
Electrical Trim and Molding

• Moldings are not automatically drawn in
• The Auto Place Outlets tool adds exterior rooms.
outlets automatically to all interior rooms
except bathrooms. Only one outlet over • Baseboards and chair rails are not drawn
each sink is added for a bathroom. in Open Below rooms, but crown mold-
ing is.
• The Auto Place Outlets tool places Plan Check
fewer outlets in hybrid rooms.
• Plan Check uses the room type and
• The Auto Place Outlets tool does its characteristics for basic plan checking.
not place outlets in exterior type rooms, For example, a closet does not need a
Porches or Open Below rooms. smoke detector but a bedroom does. See
“Plan Check” on page 928.
Room Labels
A label can display in floor plan view for any Room Label Defaults
area defined as a room. There are two parts
to each room label: The initial settings that control the
size, font, color and other aspects of
• The Room Name, which is similar to a room label appearance are controlled in the
Text object and can be selected and Room Label Defaults dialog. See “Room
edited. See “The Text Tools” on page Label Defaults” on page 839.
841.
• The room area, which is not a standard Custom Room Labels
text entry and cannot be directly edited. The Room Names that display in room labels
You can assign a custom Room Name, move are often based on the Room Types assigned
a room label or even delete it without in the Room Specification dialog. You can,
affecting the Room Type. See “Room Types” however create a custom name for a selected
on page 271. room, also in the Room Specification
dialog. See “General Tab” on page 283.
Room labels can move or even disap- Before creating a custom Room Name,
pear when room entries are revalidated. assign the Room Type most similar to the
room’s actual use. For example, if you wish
to name a room “Guest Room”, begin by
273
Room Labels
specifying it as a “Bedroom” since these Rooms, Standard Area can be measured to

rooms have similar uses. either the exterior main wall layer surface or
to the exterior wall surface. Specify which
When a Room Name is based on its Room
method you prefer in the Floor Defaults
Type, the name in the label will be in all
capital letters. When a custom Room Name
is used, capitalization is user-defined.
You can customize room labels using a
If you wish to further customize a room’s variety of text macros. See “Text Mac-
label by adding text or a text macro, uncheck ros” on page 869.
Show Room Label in the Room
Specification dialog and create your own Editing Room Labels
label using a Text object. See “The Text
Tools” on page 841. Room labels are similar to simple Text
objects and can be changed, moved and
Displaying Room Labels resized much like any other text object. The
actual text of a room label cannot be
The display of room labels is controlled in modified, however.
the Layer Display Options dialog. See
“Layer Display Options Dialog” on page If you delete a room label, the Room Type
121. You can specify how the area of rooms remains in the Room Specification dialog.
is calculated by the program by turning on To restore the label, check the Show Room
the display of one of these layers: Label check box in the Room Specification
• Rooms, Standard Area is measured
from center of interior walls to either the
outside surface of exterior walls or exte- Note: If you use the Convert to Rich Text edit
rior wall framing, depending on the Liv- tool to convert a Room Label to a Text object,
ing Area to setting in the Floor Defaults it will no longer be display room size informa-
tion or update if the room type is changed.
dialog. It is rounded to the nearest square
See “Convert to Rich Text” on page 855.
foot or mm and does not include the area
within bay, box and bow windows.
Room Area
• Rooms, Interior Area is measured from
the inner surfaces of all the room's walls. Unlike the rest of a room label, the room area
Its format is set in the Floor Defaults dia- and dimensions are not standard text entries
log for the current floor. See “Format and cannot be edited or changed. The room
Tab” on page 354. area moves, resizes and rotates with the rest
of the room label, but you can turn the area
• Rooms, Interior Dimensions is also
and dimensions on or off separately in the
measured from the inner surfaces of the
room walls. Its format is set in the Floor
Defaults dialog for the current floor. The Interior Area room area calculation
includes the areas within bay, box or bow
274
windows, while the Standard Area and Living Area vs. Footprint
Interior Dimensions calculations do not.
The Living Area should not be mistaken for
You can also insert room areas as well as the footprint of the house. Only true livable
other information into text objects using Text areas are included in the Living Area
Macros. See “Text Macros” on page 869. calculation. Exterior and hybrid room types
such as Garage, Deck, and Porch are not
Living Area included. Neither is any room labeled Open
Below or Attic. See “Available Room Types”
The Living Area label displays the area of
on page 272.
the floor platform for living areas in a plan. It
is found near the bottom center of the plan as Living Area is measured from the outside
soon as a room area is defined by walls and/ surface or main layer surface of exterior
or railing. The area is recalculated every time walls, and to the center of walls or railings
you Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings . separating the living area from exterior or
hybrid room types.
The Living Area displays for an individual
building if half or more of that building's area To find the footprint of a floor
is living area. For example, a living area
label would not display for a detached garage 1. Click outside a plan, near an exterior
that contains a bathroom or small shop. wall. This selects the exterior “room”
You can choose not to display this label by surrounding the plan.
clearing the Show “Living Area” check box 2. Click the Make Room Polyline edit
in the Plan Defaults dialog or by turning off button. This creates a polyline surround-
the display of the Room Labels layer in the ing the plan from the exterior wall sur-
Layer Display Options dialog. face.
The Living Area label can be moved or 3. You can edit the polyline shape if you
deleted. To restore a deleted Living Area want to measure portions of a home.
label, select Tools> Checks> Plan
4. Select the Polyline and click the Open
Check . You can click the Done button
Object edit button. A Polyline Area
immediately, without actually completing
displays in the Polyline Specification
Plan Check.
dialog. If no area is shown, the polyline
is not closed.
Decks
You can define a room as a “Deck” in the To draw a deck, select Build> Deck> Deck
Room Specification dialog. See “General
Railing , then click and drag to draw a
Tab” on page 283. railing. Once room definition is established,
275
Decks
the area defined by the deck railing is right mouse button) and drag in the
assigned the “Deck” room type. direction of the stairs. Holding the Alt
key produces a stairway that goes down
To create a deck without a railing, use one of
instead of up.
the Deck Edge tools. See “Deck Edge” on
page 227. 3. Place a doorway in the railing at the top
of the steps.
You can also create a regular, polygon-
shaped deck using the Polygon Shaped
The only time you should ever draw
Deck tool. See “Polygon Shaped Rooms stairs from an upper level down is when
and Decks” on page 225. you are going from a floor platform such as a
deck to the ground or finished grade. When
A room does not have to be defined by Deck stairs are drawn between two floor platforms,
Railing to be specified as a “Deck.” See they should be drawn from the lower floor
“Room Types” on page 271. platform to the upper floor platform.
By default, decks do not have roofs. If you
want to have a roof over a deck, check Roof Deck Framing
over this room in the Room Specification There are two ways to frame a Deck room in
dialog. See “Structure Tab” on page 286. Chief Architect: using Standard deck
To give the roof a visible means of support, framing or Advanced Deck Framing.
you can select the Post to Beam option in the • Standard deck framing includes joists and
Wall Specification dialog. See “Railing Tab” rim joists and is created when regular
on page 258. floor framing is generated using the
Build Framing dialog. See “Floor Tabs”
Deck Stairs on page 468.
There are two ways to create stairs from a • Advanced Deck Framing is created by
deck down to the terrain. selecting a Deck room and clicking the
Build Advanced Deck Framing edit
To create stairs using the Click Stair tool button. In addition to joists and rim joists,
deck planking is generated and beams
1. Select the Click Stair tool. and posts may be created, all based on the
settings in the Room Specification
2. Click within 12 inches of the deck rail,
dialog. See “Deck Tab” on page 288.
outside the deck.
Standard deck framing is built for a Deck
To draw a down stairway from a deck only if its Advanced Deck Framing has not
been generated.
1. Select Build> Stairs in floor plan If Standard deck framing is present when
view. Advanced Deck Framing is generated, it is
2. Place the pointer at the edge of the deck, deleted.
hold down the Alt key (or click with the
276
To create Advanced Deck Framing Deck Planking

1. Select a Deck room that you wish to In 3D views, deck surfaces typically appear
have Advanced Deck Framing and click as solid platforms. This surface material can
be specified in the Room Specification
the Open Object edit button. dialog. See “Materials Tab” on page 709.
2. In the Room Specification dialog, spec-
If Advanced Deck Framing has been built,
ify how deck planking, joists and beams
deck planking displays in 3D views instead
should be created. See “Deck Tab” on
of the deck surface. The display of deck
page 288.
planking is controlled by the “Framing, Deck
3. With the Deck still selected, click the Planking” layer in the Layer Display
Build Advanced Deck Framing Options dialog. See “Layer Display Options
edit button. Dialog” on page 121.
• If a floor is present below the selected Planking overhang, width, spacing and
Deck room, the Advanced Deck Fram- border can be customized in the Room
ing will be created there. If needed, Specification dialog. See “Deck Tab” on
posts for the deck may be generated page 288.
beneath any beams that are generated.
• If a floor is not present below the Editing Deck Framing
selected Deck, beams may be created
Once created, the individual planking and
but posts will not.
framing objects created by the Advanced
If changes are later made to the settings on
Deck Framing tool can be edited like
the Deck tab of the Room Specification
other framing objects. See “Editing
dialog, the Advanced Deck Framing must be
Framing” on page 487.
removed and then rebuilt for these changes to
take effect. The display of deck framing and planking is
controlled by the “Framing, Deck Framing”
To remove Advanced Deck Framing, select
and “Framing, Deck Planking” layers in the
the Deck room and click the Remove
Advanced Deck Framing edit button. Display Options Dialog” on page 121.
Editing Rooms
Once a room is defined by walls or railings, dialog. See “Room Specification Dialog” on
its structure and appearance can be edited page 283.
using the edit buttons or the Room
As a general rule, only one room can be
Specification dialog. Floor and ceiling
selected and edited at a time; however, you
heights, floor platform structure, moldings,
can apply attributes to multiple rooms using
wall coverings and an array of materials can
all be specified in the Room Specification the Select Same Type and Load Values
277
Editing Rooms
to Make Same edit tools. See “Select 2. Click on the surface of a wall that faces
Same / Load Same” on page 208. the room to select it. When the room is
selected in 3D:
In 3D Views • The room highlights
• The Status Bar says “Room.” See “The
The floor and ceiling heights for floors, Status Bar” on page 34.
rooms, and individual walls can be edited
• Two edit handles display on the top and
using edit handles in camera views and
bottom edges of the highlighted wall.
overviews. The default floor and ceiling
heights for an entire model can be edited by 3. Click and drag the edit handle on the top
selecting the Exterior Room. See “The wall edge to adjust the room ceiling
Exterior Room” on page 271. height, or the handle on the bottom edge
to adjust its floor height. Temporary
Lowered ceilings cannot be edited in 3D. dimensions display.
To change default floor heights in 3D 4. As you drag a handle, notice that all
walls defining that room are affected.
1. Create a 3D or Cross Section/Elevation
view of your plan. Although walls can To adjust the height of a wall in 3D
be edited in any 3D view, cross sections,
elevations, floor camera views, or floor 1. Create a 3D or Cross Section/Elevation
overviews are often best for editing view of your plan. Although walls can
walls. be edited in any 3D view, cross sections,
elevations, floor camera views, or floor
2. Click on the exterior surface of a wall to overviews are often best for editing
select the Exterior Room. The Status Bar walls.
indicates when the exterior room is
selected. 2. Click on a surface of the wall. By
default, the room will be selected. You
3. Click and drag the edit handle on the top can change this behavior in the
wall edge to adjust the default ceiling Preferences dialog. See “Architectural
height, or the edit handle on the bottom Panel” on page 88.
edge to adjust the default floor height.
Temporary dimensions display. 3. Click the Select Next Object edit
button to select the wall. The Status Bar
To adjust room heights in 3D says “Wall.” See “The Status Bar” on
page 34.
1. Create a 3D or Cross Section/Elevation 4. Click and drag the edit handles. Tempo-
view of your plan. Although walls can rary dimensions display in elevation
be edited in any 3D view, cross sections, views. See “Editing Closed-Polyline
elevations, floor camera views, or floor Based Objects” on page 160.
overviews are best for editing walls.
278
the surfaces of the selected room. See

Note: Any rooms that do not update when the “Room Polylines” on page 282.
default floor or ceiling height is changed are
not using the default values. To use the • Click the Make Room Molding Polyline
default values for a specific room, open it for edit button to create a room molding
specification and check Default for any of the polyline. See “Room Molding Polylines”
room height values. See “Room Specification
on page 282.
• Click the Expand Room Polyline
In the Specification Dialog edit button to create a room polyline that
Room structure and appearance can be ignores invisible walls and railings. See
customized in the Room Specification “Expand Room Polyline” on page 283.
dialog. See “Room Specification Dialog” on • Click the Calculate Materials for
page 283. Room edit button to create a materi-
als list of the contents of the selected
Using the Edit Tools room, not including walls. See “Calculate
A selected room can be edited in a variety of From Room” on page 1049.
ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar. • Click the Create Room Elevation
See “Edit Toolbar Buttons” on page 1140.
Views edit button to create an interior
• Click the Make Room Polyline edit elevation view of each wall defining the
button to create a polyline that follows selected room. See “Cross Section/Eleva-
tion Views” on page 752.
Special Ceilings
By default, the program builds a flat ceiling dialog and the Ceiling Plane tool.
platform on top the wall plates of a room. Ceiling planes are drawn and can be edited
More varied and complex ceilings are made much like roof planes. See “Ceiling Planes”
using settings in the Room Specification on page 408.
Lowered Ceiling Height

You can define a Lowered Ceiling height to In the illustration below, the default ceiling
model a dropped ceiling without affecting height for the entire floor is 120", and the
the wall plate height. See “General Tab” on room on the right has a Lowered Ceiling
page 283. height of 96". The dashed line in the dialog
preview represents the lowered ceiling.
279
Special Ceilings
Vaulted and Cathedral Ceilings

A cathedral ceiling has the same pitch as the 3. On the Structure tab, clear the check box
roof and is created using the underside of the for Ceiling Over This Room.
roof above the room. A vaulted ceiling
typically has a different pitch from that of the To create a vaulted ceiling
roof and is often framed using scissor
trusses. See “Scissors Trusses” on page 509. 1. To create a ceiling pitch different from
the roof’s, select Build> Roof> Ceiling
To create a cathedral ceiling Plane and draw ceiling planes. See
“Ceiling Planes” on page 408.
1. Build a roof for your plan. See “Roofs”
on page 374. 2. Select each ceiling plane and specify its
pitch. See “Ceiling Plane Specification
2. Select the room and open the Room Dialog” on page 409.
Specification dialog. See “Room Speci-
fication Dialog” on page 283.
Tray Ceilings
Tray ceilings are usually based on a hip-style the Room Specification dialog, the new
roof. If you use a hip roof and uncheck Ceil- ceiling follows the entire hip roof line.
ing Over This Room, on the General tab of
280
Hip roof with cathedral Hip roof, ceiling over, ceiling Tray ceiling from floor plan
ceiling over. height raised and ceilings view. Note dashed lines for
rebuilt. changed ceiling direction.
Generally, only the lower part of a tray For this example, a hip roof is based on 8’
ceiling follows the roof line, with the rest ceilings. After the roof is built, the Ceiling
remaining flat. In this case, the ceiling needs Height is raised to 10’. The resulting ceiling
to remain checked for that room and the follows the roof pitch for 2’, then becomes a
ceiling height adjusted instead. flat ceiling.
The roof must be built before adjusting the Dashed lines in floor plan view show where
ceiling height for a coffered ceiling. Any the ceiling changes from sloped to flat. This
attempt to rebuild the roof after adjusting the line is located on the Ceiling Break Lines
ceiling height results in the roof itself being layer in the Layer Display Options dialog.
raised to match the new ceiling height.
Other Special Ceilings

Soffits can be used in various ways to
enhance the 3D model. Soffits’ ability to
follow the slope of the roof offers unlimited
possibilities, such as exposed beams or
trusses and coffered ceilings. See “Special
Applications for Soffits” on page 660.
281
Room Polylines
Polyline solids, framing members and locked

roof trusses can also be used for similar
purposes.
Room Polylines
Click the Make Room Polyline edit Make Room Molding
button to create a standard polyline Polyline Dialog
that follows the surfaces of the selected
room.
Room polylines and room molding polylines
are not affected when the room is altered.
Room Molding Polylines 1

To create a molding polyline that
follows the interior surfaces of a 2
room, select the room and click the Make
3
Room Molding Polyline button on the edit
toolbar.
Room molding polylines can be edited just
like other molding polylines. Their shape and 1 Select the type of molding to convert to
a molding polyline.
height can be altered and the molding profile
can be changed. Additional molding profiles Each option is only enabled if the selected
can also be assigned. See “Molding room has that type of molding applied to it.
Polylines” on page 535. When you convert a molding type to a mold-
ing polyline, the room molding turns off. See
“Moldings Tab” on page 290.
Use a room molding polyline to wrap a
molding around an object the molding • Base Molding - Select to convert the
would not normally wrap around. You can room’s base molding into a molding
also remove a portion of an existing room polyline.
molding by removing an edge of the polyline.
• Chair Rail Molding - Select to convert
See “Selected Edge” on page 145.
the room’s chair rail molding into a mold-
ing polyline.
• Crown Molding - Select to convert the
room’s crown molding into a molding
polyline.
2 Blank Molding - Select to generate a

blank molding polyline at the specified
282
height. The polyline follows the room To use the Expand Room Polyline tool
perimeter and has blank sections where the
polyline crosses windows and doors if these 1. Click in a room defined by at least one
objects are at the polyline height. invisible wall or railing.
3 Height - Specify the height of the blank 2. Click the Expand Room Polyline
molding. edit button.
Expand Room Polyline 3. Click the Make Room Polyline or
The Expand Room Polyline edit Make Room Molding Polyline edit
button displays when you select a button to create a polyline that follows
room separated from other rooms by the interior surfaces of walls, ignoring
invisible walls or railings and creates a invisible walls and railings.
polyline that ignores those invisible walls The Expanded Room Polyline tool does not
and railings. create a new room that can be opened for
specification; it only allows you to generate a
larger room polyline or room molding
polyline.
Room Specification Dialog

The Room Specification dialog controls the value to the default, replace the check mark.
structural characteristics and appearance of a See “Dynamic Defaults” on page 67.
selected room. To open the Room
The settings in this dialog are similar to those
Specification dialog, select a room and click
in the Floor Defaults dialog, but affect only
the Open Object edit button. the selected room See “Floor Defaults” on
Some values in this dialog are dynamic. A page 267.
value with Default checked is referenced Many of the settings in this dialog can be
from the Floor Defaults dialog. To return a included in a Room Finish Schedule. See
“Schedules” on page 1036.
General Tab
The General tab features a cross section and thicknesses rather than provide a scaled
diagram that shows the locations of the drawing of the model.
various heights and platform thicknesses that
If a room exists below the selected room, it
can be set here. This diagramis meant to
will be represented in the diagram. Only two
represent the relationships between heights
floors can included in the diagram: the floor
283
that the selected room is located on, and the is positioned over two smaller rooms, the
floor below it. position of the pointer relative to the smaller
lower rooms determines which of the rooms
What appears in the diagram may be affected
displays as the floor below.
by the location where you clicked to select
the room. For example, if the selected room
1 The settings here control the Room • If you wish to use a custom name in the
Type, the appearance of the Room room label and schedule, uncheck Use
Label, and how the room appears in the Room Type, then specify the desired
Room Schedule. Room Name in the text field.
• Select the Room Type. This affects some
of the room characteristics. See “Room 2 Specify the Heights associated with the
selected room. In the cross section
Types” on page 271. diagram, items with arrows indicate which
• Check Show Room Label to display the parts of the structure move if changes are
room label in floor plan view. See “Room made to the settings here.
Labels” on page 273.
284
• Specify the Floor Height, which is the erence only. It can be changed on the
height of the subflooring above or below Structure tab.
the default first floor height of zero.
If the material for the current room floor is
• Specify the Ceiling Height, measured Concrete, and floors and ceilings have been
from the top of the subflooring to the bot- rebuilt since it was set to this, the Platform
tom of the ceiling framing. thickness defaults to the Slab thickness in the
• Lowered Ceiling height, measured from Foundation Defaults dialog, unless is was
the top of the subflooring to the bottom of explicitly set in the Structure tab.
the lowered ceiling framing. • Slab Thickness - The thickness of the
• Specify the Stem Wall Height, which is slab on the floor below (if any) is shown
the distance from the bottom of the floor here, but cannot be edited. The slab thick-
framing to the top of the foundation wall ness can be changed in the Foundation
footing. Only available if the room below Defaults dialog or on the Structure tab.
is defined by foundation walls.
3 Specify a Roof Group for the selected
• Specify the Floor Above Height, mea- room. The program builds a complete
sured from the top of the current floor’s roof plan for each set of rooms in the same
subfloor to that of the room above. Roof Group. This roof plan is not influenced
• Ceiling Below - The ceiling height for by any other parts of the structure where the
the room below is shown. This value can rooms are in different roof groups. This
be defined here, or in the specification for number is nearly always left zero. Change
that room. The values are linked. this number to break off a structure so that
the program does not automatically combine
• Platform Thickness - The thickness of its roof system with the main building.
the floor platform assembly, including the
subfloor and joists, displays here for ref-
285
Structure Tab
1
2 10
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 If Floor Under This Room is checked, 4 Slab Foundation for This Room -
the room has a floor platform, as Check this box to change this room’s
specified below. If unchecked, the room has floor platform into a concrete slab. This slab
no floor platform. Available for Court, gets its thickness from the Foundation
Garage, Storage and Utility room types only. Defaults dialog. See “Building a
Foundation” on page 366.
2 If Ceiling Over This Room is checked,
the room has a flat ceiling. If it is This option is only available if there is no
unchecked, the ceiling follows the underside room or foundation room under the selected
of the roof or manually drawn ceiling planes. room.
3 If Roof Over This Room is checked, a 5 Floor for This Room is Supplied by
roof automatically generates over the the Foundation “Room” from the
room. If unchecked, no roof generates. Floor Below - Check this box to make the
current room similar to an Open Below
room, deleting its own floor platform. The
286
floor of the room below, which is often a Subfloor Thickness, this determines the
room on the foundation floor, then supplies depth of the platform under the room.
the floor of the current room. While the same
thing could be accomplished by naming the 8 Floor Structure Type - Select the type
of floor structure. Check Default to use
current room Open Below, this method
the structure type specified on the
allows the current room to retain its normal
appropriate floors tab of the Build Framing
designation as Living, Garage, etc. This is
dialog.
often used in situations where framed walls
are built above concrete curb walls, such as
9 Frame Lowered Ceiling - Check this
in garages. box if you want the program to frame a
lowered ceiling. Specify the thickness.
6 Subfloor Thickness - Set the thickness
of the subfloor under this room. The
10 Insulation (cross sections only) -
default value for this is set in the Build Check these boxes to generate
Framing dialog on the Floor tab for the insulation details in cross section views when
current floor (subfloor for floor “x”). Along the Autodetail tool is used. See “Auto
with the Floor Structure Thickness, this Detailing” on page 755.
determines the depth of the platform under
this room. Check Insulation Above Ceiling to generate
insulation details above the ceiling in cross
When viewing framing, this Subfloor
Thickness may be represented by a gap. To section views when the Autodetail tool
remove this gap, change the value to zero is used.
and rebuild the appropriate framing. Check Insulation Under Floor to generate
insulation details under the floor in cross
7 Floor Structure Thickness - Set the
thickness (or depth) of the selected section views when the Autodetail tool
structure under this room. Together with is used.
287
Deck Tab
The options on the Deck tab are only
available for rooms designated as decks, and
control how Advanced Deck Framing is
generated. See “Deck Framing” on page 276.
1 Specify the appearance of the Deck • If you want to enter a Plank Direction,
Planking. remove the checkmark from Default.
• Specify how far the deck planking Over- Enter the direction as degrees.
hangs the rim joists. • Specify the Number of Border Planks.
• Enter the Width of the deck planking. These are planks that follow the outside
edge of the deck and may not be parallel
• Specify the width of the Gaps between with the rest of the deck planking. Border
the deck planks. planks generate as long as the length of
the inside edge is greater than 0”.
288
Border planks are not generated for curved • If you want to specify joist Direction,
deck edges. uncheck Default. Enter the direction as
• Check No Border Against Walls to pre- degrees.
vent border planking from being gener- • Select the Type of deck joists from the
ated along any walls defining the deck. drop-down list. See “Framing Member
• Check Herringbone to produce a her- Types” on page 489.
ringbone pattern where the border planks
meet. 2 Specify the configuration of the Deck
Support Beams.
2 Specify the configuration of the Deck • Enter the Depth and Width of the beams
Support Joists. that support the deck.
• Enter the Depth and Width of the joists • Specify the Spacing between beams, as
that support the deck. measured from beam center to center.
• Specify the Spacing between joists, as • Select the Type of deck joists from the
measured from joist center to joist center. drop-down list.
289
Moldings Tab
The settings in the Moldings tab are similar
to those found in other specification dialogs
throughout the program.
2
3
4
5
Chair rail, crown and base moldings can be

2 Click the Library button under each
assigned to a selected room on the Moldings type of molding to open the Select
tab. Moldings are placed around the wall Library Object dialog and browse the
surfaces of a room. They continue around the Moldings and Profiles library and select the
surface of any soffit that is attached to the molding desired profile. See “Select Library
wall at the molding height. Object Dialog” on page 689.
1 Previews of the selected Crown 3 Click the Clear button under a molding
Molding, Chair Rail and Base Molding type to remove the selected profile from
display in these panes. If no profile is the room. Unless the molding Height is set at
selected, a flat profile is used. 0”, a flat profile is still used.
290
4 Specify a Height for the selected Wall coverings can be applied to exte-
molding profile. If no profile is
specified, a flat profile is used unless the rior rooms as well by selecting the exte-
Height is set at 0”. Molding heights can be rior room and opening it for specification. See
“Selecting Rooms” on page 270 for informa-
specified in 1/16”or 1 mm increments. tion about selecting exterior rooms.
A (D) following any value signifies that it is
a default value set in the Floor Defaults Fill Style Tab
dialog. If a value is not followed by a (D),
replace it with “d” to reset it to the default. For more information about the Fill Style tab,
see “Fill Style Tab” on page 902.
5 Specify a Distance Above Floor for
the molding type. Crown molding and Materials Tab
chair rail are measured to the top of the
profile while base molding is measured to the The Materials tab is found in the
bottom of the profile. specification dialogs for many different
objects, including rooms. Unlike most other
Wall Covering Tab objects, however, rooms have a number of
components that you can assign materials to
The Wall Covering tab of the Room but are not modeled in 3D views.
Specification dialog contains the same
elements as the Wall Covering tab of the Wall The following room component materials are
Specification dialog. When a wall covering included in the Materials List but are not
is assigned using the Room Specification visible in 3D:
dialog, that wall covering is applied to all • Ceiling Underlayments
walls in the selected room only. See “Wall
• Floor Underlayments
Covering Tab” on page 262.
• Subfloor
For more information about the Materials
tab, see “Materials Tab” on page 709.
Room Finish Schedules

Chief Architect can automatically produce a room size, structure, materials and molding.
room finish schedule with information about See “Creating Schedules” on page 1037.
291
Chapter 9:
Doors
Chief Architect comes with tools for creating Chapter Contents

a wide variety of interior and exterior doors. • Door Defaults
In addition, the library offers a full line of • The Door Tools
specialty doors and doorways including • Displaying Doors
hinged, sliding, pocket, bifold, garage, and • Editing Doors
manufacturer specific products. • Changing Door Swings
• Centering Doors and Windows
• Special Doors
• Door Specification Dialog
• Door Schedules
292
Door Defaults
Default Settings are accessed by made to individual doors after they have
selecting Edit> Default Settings. been placed do not alter the default settings.
Click the “+” next to Doors to show the door
You can save time by going over the settings
sub-headings. Select a subheading and click
in the Door Defaults dialog before doors are
the Edit button to open the defaults dialog
placed. Settings for interior and exterior
associated with your selection.
doors are similar and should both be defined.
Interior and Exterior Door defaults can also
The Interior Door Defaults and Exterior
be accessed by double-clicking the Door
Door Defaults dialogs look nearly the same
Tools parent button or Hinged Door as the Door Specification dialog. See “Door
child tool. Specification Dialog” on page 303. There are
only a couple of differences:
• Since default settings are specified here,
“Use Default” is not an option on some
drop-down lists as it is in the Door
• Only Doors and Doorways can be used as
defaults for Interior or Exterior doors:
Sliding, pocket, bifold and garage doors
cannot.
Some default settings, like the casing width
on the Frame & Trim tab, are dynamic and
update globally when a new value is entered.
The values in the Door Defaults dialog are
When you change a dynamic default,
initial values for interior or exterior doors.
existing doors in the model update. See
Individual doors can be edited by selecting
“Dynamic Defaults” on page 67.
and opening them for specification. Changes
The Door Tools

To place a door, select the type you settings for exterior doors. If the wall is an
want from the Build> Door submenu. interior wall, the program places an interior
door based on the default settings for interior
With a door tool activated, click a wall to
doors. See “Door Defaults” on page 293.
place a door in the wall. If the wall is an
exterior wall or a wall that separates an Doors can also be placed in curved walls.
interior from an exterior room, the program See “Options Tab” on page 305.
places an exterior door based on the default
293
The Door Tools
Once placed, any door may be changed into The default pocket door dimensions are 2’-6”
any other type of door using the Door x 6’-8” high. A pocket door becomes a
Specification dialog. See “Door double pocket door if its width is four feet or
Specification Dialog” on page 303. greater.
Hinged Doors Bifold Doors

Select Build> Door> Hinged Door Choose Build> Door> Bifold Door
and click a wall where you want to and click a wall where you want to
place a hinged door. Hinged doors can be place a bifold door.
placed on interior or exterior walls. A hinged
The default interior single bifold door is 2’-
door becomes a double door when its width
6” x 6’-8”. A bifold door becomes a double
is four feet or greater.
bifold if its width is greater than three feet.
Doorways Bifold doors always display closed in all 3D
views.
Choose Build> Door> Doorway and
click a wall to place a doorway (an
Garage Doors
opening without a door). Doorways can be
placed on interior or exterior walls, or in Choose Build> Door> Garage Door
railings and fences to provide an opening. and click a wall to place a garage door.
You can assign a door from the library to a
The default garage door is 8’-0” x 7’-0” high.
doorway.
A garage door must be at least two feet wide.
Sliding Doors In floor plan view, dashed lines show the size
and location of the garage door when open.
Select Build> Door> Sliding Door
and click a wall where you want to Garage doors will build into a garage stem
place a sliding door. Sliding doors can be wall provided the room is designated as a
placed on interior or exterior walls. If placed garage before the door is inserted. See
in an exterior wall, the door is glass; if placed “Room Types” on page 271.
in an interior wall, it is a solid slab.
The Doors Library
The default sliding door dimensions are
5’-0” x 6’-8” with a 12” bottom frame and a The Doors library can be accessed by
6” frame on the sides and top. selecting Library> Library Browser.
The Door library contains a variety of
Pocket Doors customized interior and exterior doors, and
doors offered by specific manufacturers. The
Select Build> Door> Pocket Door Doors library also contains garage doors and
and click a wall where you want to
place a pocket door. gates that can be used with Fencing .
294
To place a library door in a doorway:
1. Go to floor plan view or any 3D view.

2. Open the Library Browser.
3. Navigate through the Doors library cate-
gory until you find the custom door style To add a door to the doorway, select a Door
desired. Type other than Doorway from the drop-
4. Select the door in the Library Browser, down list in the Door Specification dialog or
then click on the doorway to place the click the Library button and select a door
selected door within it. If a door already style from the Doors library. See “General
exists, it is replaced. Tab” on page 304.
5. Continue clicking other doorways until You can also select a custom door from the
all changes have been made. library and drop it into a doorway in floor
plan view or any 3D view.
The Doorway Library
Select Library> Library Browser Creating Your Own Doors
and expand the Doorways category to You can create custom doors and doorways
access a library of special entryways and and save them in your own library for use in
doorways. Select a doorway and click a wall future plans. See “Custom Symbols” on page
to place it. 974.
Displaying Doors
The display of doors, door sizes, Doors in exterior walls and doors that open
opening indicators and headers is to exterior type rooms such as a garage,
controlled in the Layer Display Options porch, or deck have a threshold line across
dialog1. the opening in floor plan view.
In Floor Plan View

When the “Doors” label is turned on in floor Threshold
Line
plan view, door symbols represent the width
of the opening and the swing. If a door is
recessed, the affected wall layers will adjust
to accomodate the casing. If the “Doors” layer is turned off, doors and
their casing do not display but openings in
1.See “Displaying Objects” on page 117. the walls where they are located are visible.
295
Editing Doors
If the “Doors, Labels” layer is set to display,

labels are centered on the doors that they
represent. Label size is controlled in the
Door Schedule Specification dialog. See
“Label Tab” on page 1042.
The size displays in the format “3068”,
which is width by height in feet and inches.
A 3068 door is three feet, zero inches wide
and six feet, eight inches high. Metric door
dimensions format is “900x2100,” where the
first number is the width in mm.
Customized labels can also be specified for
individual doors in the Door Specification
dialog. See “Label Tab” on page 314.
In 3D Views
To display opening indicator arrows in vector Door showing opening indicator
views, turn on the “Opening Indicators”
Reverse door opening indicators on the
layer in the Layer Display Options dialog.
Architectural panel of the Preferences
dialog. See “Architectural Panel” on page 88.
Editing Doors
Before a door can be edited, it must be Select a blocked unit by clicking on it in any
selected. To select a door, click it when the view. To select a door that is a component of
Select Objects tool or any of the Door a blocked unit, click at the location of the
component in question, then click the Select
Tools are active. Doors and/or windows
can also be group selected and edited. See Next Object edit button. See “Selecting
“Selecting Objects” on page 144. Objects” on page 144.
Blocked units are made up of individual Doors can be edited using the edit handles,
doors and windows that have been grouped edit toolbar buttons, and in the Door
Specification dialog. See “Door
together to act as one object. You can create a
blocked door unit or by creating an Specification Dialog” on page 303.
Architectural Block composed of doors When you select a door in floor plan view,
and/or windows. See “Make Mulled Unit” the door size label indicates the width
on page 321. followed by the height. For example, a 3068
door is 3’-0” wide by 6’-8” high.
296
Using the Mouse continue to drag and it resumes movement

past or onto the intersecting wall. Place a
In floor plan view, click either of the two end check in the Ignore Casing for Opening
handles and drag along the wall to change the Resize check box in the Plan Defaults dialog
width. The label showing the size updates as to turn off this behavior. See “General Plan
the handles are dragged. Click and drag the Defaults Dialog” on page 68.
Move handle at the center to move the door
along the wall it is placed in. Use the
Using Dimensions
triangular Rotate handle to adjust the door’s
swing. If the door’s label displays, an Individual doors can be moved using
additional handle is available to move the the dimensions. See “Moving Objects
label. Using Dimensions” on page 831.
In 3D views, a selected door has five edit
handles: the Move handle at the center and a In the Specification Dialog
Resize handle on each edge. Click and drag Doors can be extensively customized in the
an edge handle to resize the door. Door Specification dialog. See “Door
Using the edit handles, a door resizes Specification Dialog” on page 303.
Using the Edit Tools
Behavior . See “Edit Behaviors” on page
137. A selected door or doors can be edited in a
A door or window moved against an
toolbar. See “Edit Toolbar Buttons” on page
intersecting wall temporarily stops when the
1140.
casing meets the intersecting wall. You can
Changing Door Swings

Door swing direction and hinge Hinged Doors
side can be changed using the
Change Opening/Hinge Side and Change In addition to using the edit buttons, hinged
Swing Side edit buttons. doors’ hinge side and swing direction can be
changed using the triangular Rotate edit
handle.
Note: If the door is set to draw closed, the
swing as it appears in floor plan view has no
To adjust the angle of swing:
affect on the 3D view. See “Options Tab” on
page 305.
1. In floor plan view, select the door and
grab the triangular handle.
2. Drag to change the amount of swing.
297
Changing Door Swings
To change the swing using edit buttons:
1. In floor plan view, select the door.

2. To change the hinge side, click the
Change Opening/Hinge Side edit
button.
3. Release the mouse.

If you drag near the closed position, the door
snaps to a closed position.
To change the swing using edit handles:
1. In floor plan view, select the door and

grab the triangular edit handle.
3. To change the swing direction, click the

Change Swing Side edit button.
2. Drag the pointer along the path of the

new arc to change the hinge side and/or
swing direction.
Sliding Doors
To change the side of a sliding door that is
fixed, select the sliding door then click the
Change Opening/Hinge Side edit
button.
3. Release the mouse.
298
Note: There must be enough room for the

entire door to fit in the opposite wall or the
door does not change.
As with hinged doors, you can also change

the Opening/Hinge side of a pocket door by
clicking and dragging the triangular edit
To flip the fixed and moving sides of the handle.
door, click the Change Swing Side edit

Bifold Doors
button.
To change the side of a bifold door that is
fixed, select it then click the Change
Opening/Hinge Side edit button.

the Opening/Hinge and Swing sides of a
sliding door by clicking and dragging the
triangular edit handle.
Pocket Doors To change the hinged side of the door, click
To change the direction of a pocket door, the Change Swing Side edit button.
select it and click the Change Opening/
Hinge Side edit button.

the Opening/Hinge and Swing sides of a
bifold door by clicking and dragging the
triangular edit handle.
299
Centering Doors and Windows
Garage Doors
To change the side of a garage door that it
faces, select it and click the Change Swing
Side edit button.
As with other door types, you can also

change the Swing side of a bifold door by
clicking and dragging the triangular edit
handle.
Centering Doors and Windows

The Center Object edit button allows
you to center the selected object along
a wall within a room or relative to a cabinet
or window.
To center a door or window along a wall
1. Select a door or combination of win-

dows and doors in floor plan view.
2. Click the Center Object edit button

then choose from one of the following
options:
• Click near a wall inside a room to cen-
ter the door along that wall in that
room.
• Click outside the house (on the exterior
room) near an exterior wall to center
the door along an exterior wall.
300
Special Doors
Wrapped Openings that space. See “General Tab” on page 304 of
the Reference Manual.
Wrapped
openings of
Transoms Above Doors
various shapes
are available in Transom windows above doors are created
the Doorway the same as other stacked windows. See
Library. You “Grouped Windows” on page 320.
can also create a
wrapped Recessed Doors
opening by
placing a A door placed in a brick or stone wall is often
doorway in the recessed into the wall’s exterior. In the
wall and illustration below, the door to the right is
checking recessed, so the brick wraps the opening. The
Suppress door on the left is not recessed, so the casing
Casing in the Frame and Trim tab of the is outside the brick.
Door Specification dialog. Note that the You can specify a door as recessed in the
base molding wraps around the opening. See Door Specification dialog. See “Options
“Casing Tab” on page 307. Tab” on page 305.
Openings in Railings Importing Doors

Use the Doorway tool to open a railing You can import custom doors and save them
for a stairway or other access. in your own library for use in future plans.
See “Custom Symbols” on page 974.
Placing a Gable Over a Door

Click the Gable Over Door/Window
edit button to produce a gable roof
over the selected door(s) the next time
automatic roofs are built. See “Gable Over
Door/Window” on page 423.
To open a railing across an entire section, You can manually edit or delete this gable
resize the doorway’s Width so that it is line at any time. Your changes take effect
greater than the length of the railing in the when the automatic roofs are rebuilt. This
Door Specification dialog. The opening can also be used with group selected doors.
resizes to the maximum width possible for
301
Special Doors
Custom Muntins
Like windows, doors with glass can have
custom muntins. Custom muntins are created
from CAD lines. See “Custom Muntins” on
page 327.
Blocked Doors and Windows

Combinations of doors and windows can be
blocked. Blocked units are mulled together
and can be copied together as a unit. Blocked
units containing doors can be treated as
either windows or doors for materials list and
schedule generation. See “Make Mulled To create a doorway with railing
Unit” on page 321.
1. Place a Doorway at the desired loca-
Passthroughs tion in your plan.
To create a passthrough, place a Doorway 2. Select Build> Wall> Straight
at the desired location. Create a camera Railing , then click and drag to draw
view and select the doorway. Click and drag a railing parallel to the wall with the
the bottom edit handle up to the correct doorway.
height for the passthrough. 3. Click on the railing, then use the Resize
edit handles to adjust the length of the
You can also drag the top and sides to the
railing as needed. See “Using the Edit
correct dimensions or set them in the
Handles” on page 148.
Doorway Specification dialog.
4. With the railing selected, click the Open
Check Suppress Casing in the Doorway
Specification dialog if you want a wrapped Object edit button.
opening instead of casing. See “Casing Tab” 5. On the General tab of the Railing
on page 307 of the Reference Manual. Specification dialog, check No Room
Def and click OK. See “General Tab” on
Creating a Doorway page 250.
with a Railing 6. With the railing still selected, Ctrl + drag
it into position within the doorway. See
When a railing is specified as No Room Def,
“To move an object freely” on page 179.
it can be positioned within a Doorway .
302
Positioning a railing in a doorway
Door Specification Dialog

The most precise method of editing an to all the selected doors. If interior doors are
individual door or group of doors is to use different from the exterior doors, they must
the Door Specification dialog. Door type, be selected and edited as a separate group.
size, casing, materials, shape, and more can
Select one or more doors and click the Open
all be specified in this dialog.
Object edit button to open the Door
If a group of doors is selected, changes made Specification dialog for the selected door(s).
in the Door Specification dialog are applied
303
General Tab
1
2
3 5
6
7
1 Door Style - Define the door as slab, 3 Specify the Size and Position of the
glass, panel, or louvered, or select a selected door.
door style from the library. Select use • Specify the Width, Height, and Thick-
default to use the default door style set in the ness of the door.
Door Defaults dialog. See “Door Defaults”
on page 293. • Floor to Bottom - Specify the height of
the bottom of the door frame as measured
• Select “Library” from the list or click the from the subfloor.
Library button to choose a door symbol
from the library. Once a library door is • Specify the Swing Angle of the selected
selected, that door is added to the Door door in floor plan view, between 0° and
Style list. See “Select Library Object Dia- 180°. An angle of 0° displays the door as
log” on page 689. closed and an angle of 180° displays it as
wide open. If Draw Closed is unchecked
2 Door Type - Specify doorway, hinged, on the Options tab, the swing angle also
slider, pocket, bifold, or garage door. affects the door’s appearance in 3D.
Slider, pocket, bifold and garage are not
allowed as exterior door defaults. 4 Add for Rough Opening - Specify the
amount to add to Each Side, the Top
304
and the Bottom for the door’s framed rough

5 A preview of the door displays here.
opening. The rough opening should be large
enough to accomodate the door frame and
space for shims. If the Bottom Rough 6 Check Show Color to show the door in
color in the preview.
Opening value is greater than the Floor to
Bottom value, the difference is added to the
7 Select Interior or Exterior to specify
top of the rough opening when framing is which side of the door displays in the
built. preview.
Options Tab
1 5
2 6
7
3
4 8
1 Specify the number of Door Units or • Select Double Door to force the selected
panels that the selected door has. Not hinged, pocket or bifold door to be a dou-
available for garage doors. ble door, regardless of its width.
• Select Single Door to force the selected • Select Calculate From Width to use the
hinged, pocket or bifold door to be a sin- program defaults. Hinged, pocket and
gle door, regardless of its width. bifold doors default to Single Door when
less than four feet (1200 mm) wide. If the
width is greater than four feet, Double
Door is the default.
305
• If a Slider door is selected, instead • Select To Sheathing Layer to recess the

choose Four, Three or Two Panel. door to the wall’s sheathing layer.
Note: The defaults for Calculate From Width

are not editable.
2 Door Swing - Specify how the selected

door swings. Most options here are Not Recessed
only available when the selected hinged or
pocket door is a Double Door. Not available
for bifold, slider or garage doors.
• Check Both Doors Swing to allow both
sides of a double door to swing. Available
for double doors only.
• Check Left Swing Only or Right Swing
Only to allow only the left or right side of Recessed (to Main Layer)
a double door to swing. Available for
double doors only.
• Check Swings Both Directions to allow
a door or both sides of a double door to
swing both directions.
3 Specify the number of Vertical Panels Recessed to Sheathing Layer

to be placed on a selected garage door.
Only available for garage doors.
6 In Curved Wall - Specify whether a
4 Check Tempered Glass to specify the door placed in a curved wall is Straight
selected door’s glass as tempered in the or Curved. Curved is selected for Pocket
Door Schedule. Doors and cannot be changed. See “Drawing
Curved Walls” on page 228.
5 The Recessed into Wall options allow .
you to recess the selected door into a
wall, away from the exterior surface. Only
available if the door is placed in a multi-
layered wall. See “Wall Type Definitions” on
page 241. Straight
• Check Recessed to activate the settings
that follow.
• Select To Main Layer to recess the door
to the wall’s Main Layer. Curved
306
7 3D Display - Specify whether the 8 Plinth Blocks - Add an Interior Plinth

selected door is drawn open or closed in Block and/or Exterior Plinth Block to
3D and cross section/elevation views. the selected door. Plinth blocks do not
display in 3D views, but are counted in the
If Draw Open is selected, the Swing Angle
Material List.
set on the General tab is used in 3D views.
Casing Tab
Changes made on the Casing tab can only be materials can also be included in Room
seen in 3D views. Door casing profiles and Finish Schedules.
1 Specify the casing for the selected door. • Check Suppress Interior Casing to have
a wrapped opening instead of casing.
• Select the Interior or Exterior radio but- • Define the Width of the selected casing.
ton to define the casing for that door side • Define the Reveal, the distance between
and display it in the preview image. This the inside edge of the door frame and the
choice is not available for interior doors, inside edge of the casing. Define the
which use the same values for both sides. Width of the selected casing.
307
• Check Suppress Sill to prevent a sill Door and window casing and jamb can be
from being generated under the door. constructed three ways in curved walls:
• Click the Library button to select a • Straight - Both the door and casing are
molding profile for the casing1. A pre- straight. This can be used where the
view of the casing profile displays in the wall’s curvature is not too sharp and the
window above. opening is not too wide. It cannot be
selected for Pocket Doors, which must be
• Click the Clear button to remove a
curved if placed in a curved wall.
selected casing profile from the door.
2 Double Wall Options - This section is

enabled if the door is placed in a
Double Wall. See “Double Walls” on page
239.
Straight
• Select Through to create a single jamb
running through both Double Walls. This • Radial - A vertical surface that would be
option is selected by default. perpendicular to a straight wall has its
• If Enlarged is selected, casing is created plane pass through the wall's center of
only on the wall the door is inserted in. curvature.
The opening on the other wall is enlarged
to accomodate the casing.
• Select Double to place a second door in
the Double Wall opposite the selected
door. This second door cannot be Radial
selected. Casing is produced as with the
Through type window. • Parallel - A vertical surface that would
be perpendicular to a straight wall
3 Curved Wall Casing - This section is remains parallel to the line from the wall
enabled if the door is placed in a curved center through the opening center.
wall. See “Drawing Curved Walls” on page
228.
1.“Select Library Object Dialog” on

page 689. Parallel
Lintel Tab
The settings on the Lintel tab allow you to mitred joint. These settings are not available
assign a lintel,or top molding that meets the if the door has a reflected arch. See “Arch
side casing using a butt joint instead of a Tab” on page 311.
308
Door lintel profiles and materials can be

included in Room Finish Schedules.
1
2
1 Select the Interior or Exterior radio • Define the Width of the lintel. This is
button to define the casing for that door independent of the Casing width.
side and display it in the preview image. This • Specify how far the lintel Extends on
choice is not available for interior doors, either side. A value of 1” (25 mm) aligns
which use the same values for both sides. it with the outside edges of the casing.
2 Specify a lintel for the selected door. • Check Wraps to wrap the lintel profile
back toward the wall.
• Check Use Exterior/Interior Lintel to
have a lintel on the selected side of the
door instead of the regular top casing.
309
Frame & Lites Tab

The options on this tab are only available for
glass doors. See “General Tab” on page 304.
1 3
1 Specify the number of Lites, or panes

of glass, as well as their configuration.
• Specify the number of horizontal Lites
Across, between 1 and 8.
• Specify the number of Lites Vertical,
between 1 and 8.
Normal Diamond Prairie Craftsman
• Muntin Width - Specify the width of the
muntins used to divide the lites. • Normal style is the most common, with
the muntin bars going horizontally and
• Choose a Type, or style, from the drop-
vertically.
down list. Normal, Diamond, Prairie and
Craftsman styles are available. • Diamond style uses angled muntins to
divide the lites.
• Prairie style is based on the normal style,
but with all the central muntins removed,
310
leaving only the two outside muntins, • Check Concentric to produce muntins
both horizontally and vertically. For best radiating from a curved inner muntin that
results, Lites Across and Vertical should is concentric with the door’s arch. You
be set between 6 and 8. must have at least three lites across for
• Craftsman style is based on the normal this to be used.
style, but only the topmost horizontal
muntin is kept with all the portions of the
vertical muntins above it. For best results,
Lites Across and Vertical should be set
between 4 and 8.
1
2 If the door is defined as Round Top ,
you can specify a Ray Count of up to
10 radial muntin bars in the portion of the
door within the arch. There is one more pane 3 Frame - If the door is a glass, panel or
louvered door, you can specify the
of glass than the number of rays specified.
dimensions of the door’s rails and stiles.
• Specify the Width of the stiles and top
rail.
• Specify the height of the Bottom rail.
1.“Arch Tab” on page 311.
Arch Tab
The settings on the Arch tab are not available selected door has been assigned a lintel. See
if the selected door is a Sliding, Bifold or “Lintel Tab” on page 308.
Garage door. They are also unavailable if the
311
1 Specifications - Define the style and

size of the arch.
• Select the Type of arch desired from the
drop-down list.
Round Broken Gothic Elliptical Flat

Top Top
Tudor Double Trifoil Octo- Dogear

gonal
• Specify the Height of the arch, as mea-

sured from the base of the arch to the top
312
of the window. The height can be defined unique configurations. Not available if a
for all arch types except Round Top and lintel is specified for the selected door.
Octagonal Arches. See “Lintel Tab” on page 308.
• The Radius can also be defined for Tudor • Select Full Arch to produce an arch with
and Double Arches. the apex at the door’s center.
• Select Left Arch to produce an arch with
2 Options - Define the orientation of the the apex on the door’s right side.
arch.
• Check Reflect to reflect the arch, top to • Select Right Arch to produce an arch
bottom. This is rarely used for doors, but with the apex on the door’s left side.
can be specified for windows to create
Hardware Tab
Many of the settings on the Hardware tab are dialog is used. See “Dynamic Defaults” on
Dynamic Defaults: if “use default” is page 67.
selected, the setting in the Door Defaults
1 Specify a Handle to be used on the • Select an Interior Handle and/or Exte-

selected door. rior Handle from the drop-down lists.
313
Door Schedules
Select “Library” or click the Library Library button to select a hinges from
button to select a handle from the library. the library.
See “Select Library Object Dialog” on • Specify the distance In From Top/Bot-
page 689. tom of the door to the center of the top
• Specify the location of the door handles and bottom hinges.
In From Door Edge.
• Specify the location of the door handles Note: For hinges to look right, it is best to
have at least a 1/4" (6 mm) reveal for the inte-
Up From Bottom.
rior, or hinge side, door casing.
2 Specify the door’s interior and exterior

Locks. Layer Tab
• Select an Interior Lock and/or Exterior The Layer tab is available for a variety of
Lock from the drop-down lists. Select different objects. For more information, see
“Library” or click the Library button to “Layer Tab” on page 125.
select a lock from the library.
• Specify the location of the door locks Up Materials Tab
From Floor. The locks assume the same
In From Door Edge value as the handles. The Materials tab is available for numerous
objects. For more information, see
3 Specify the Hinges to be used on the “Materials Tab” on page 709.
door. Two hinges are placed for interior
doors, and three for exterior doors. Label Tab
• Select a style of Hinges from the drop-
The Label tab is available for a variety of
down list. Select “Library” or click the
different objects. For more information, see
Door Schedules
Chief Architect can automatically produce a
door schedule. See “Creating Schedules” on
page 1037.
314
315
Chapter 10:
Windows
Chief Architect comes with a wide variety of Chapter Contents

windows. Fixed glass, hung, casement, • Window Defaults
sliding, awning, hopper, and louver window • The Window Tools
styles can all be created with the standard • Special Windows
Window tool, and even set as the default. • Grouped Windows
The shape of a window can be angled or • Window Levels
made into a round top or other arch styles. • Displaying Windows
Chief Architect can create bay, box, and bow • Editing Windows
windows at the click of a button. In addition, • Custom Muntins
the library contains many mulled window • Bay, Box, and Bow Windows
combinations and manufacturer-specific • Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs
products. • Window Specification Dialog
Once windows have been placed in the • Bay/Box Window Specification Dialog
model, the program can automatically • Bow Window Specification
generate a window schedule. See “Creating • Window Schedules
Schedules” on page 1037.
316
Window Defaults
Default Settings can be accessed by For more information, see “Window
selecting Edit> Default Settings. Specification Dialog” on page 332.
Select Window from the Default Settings
There are three types of values set in the
dialog and click the Edit button.
Window Defaults dialog:
You can also double-click the Window
Tools parent button to open the Window 1. Dynamic Defaults: These values affect
Defaults dialog.
all existing and new windows that are
still set to the default specification. See
The settings in the Window Defaults dialog “Dynamic Defaults” on page 67. These
control the attributes of a window when it is settings are:
initially placed in a plan, so you should • Window Type
define the type of window that will be placed
• Sash Width
most often in your model.
• Sash Depth
The tabs in the Window Defaults dialog are • Casing Width
similar to those found in the Window
Specification dialog, with one exception.
2. Initial Values: These only affect new
windows, and changing the value has no
On the General tab of the Window Defaults affect on existing windows. These are:
dialog, you can specify the Minimum • Width, Height
Separation for windows and doors in mulled
• Floor to Top
units in the plan.
• Default Level
For more information, see “Dynamic
3. Editing Limits: This affects both the
The Minimum Separation value in the
creation of new and the modification of
Window Defaults dialog specifies how close
existing windows/doors. There is one
windows in a mulled unit can be to each
only:
other. Define a value that specifies the
desired width for the shared casing. • Minimum Separation
The Window Tools

To place a window, select Build> Bay, box and bow windows can only be
Window and choose the desired placed in straight walls, while standard
window type. Click on a wall to place a windows can be placed in both straight and
window of the selected type at that location. curved walls.
317
The Window Tools
Standard Windows Box windows initially measure 4’-2” wide

with a depth of 1’-6”. The component
Select Build> Window> Window, windows are specified in the Window
then click on a straight or curved wall Defaults dialog and their sizes adjust to fit
to place a standard window at that location. the available space.
A standard window is a single window that is
not one of the special types such as bay, box,
bow, corner or blocked. These special types
are made up of multiple standard windows.
A standard window that is part of a special
window is called a component window. Bow Windows
A Bow Window is a group of
Bay Windows identical wall segments that form a
segmented curve. Select Build> Window>
The roof is affected by Bay, Box and Bow Window and click on a straight wall to
Bow Windows. These windows should produce a 5-section bow window.
therefore be placed before the roof is built.
Bow windows can be composed of between
two and twenty sections. The number of bow
A Bay Window is composed of three window components can be changed in the
wall sections, each with a single Bow Window Specification dialog. See
component window. The two side walls are “Bow Window Specification” on page 351.
at an angle to the main wall. Select Build>
Window> Bay Window and click on a The component windows are specified in the
straight wall to produce a bay window. Window Defaults dialog. Their sizes adjust
to fit the available space.
When initially placed, bay windows measure
2’-2” across at the front, 4’-2” across at the The 5-section bow below has a 4’-10” radius
back, and are 1’-0” deep. The component centered 3’-9” inside the wall, giving an
windows are specified in the Window opening 5’-10” across and a depth of 11½”.
Defaults dialog and their sizes adjust to fit
the available space.
Box Windows Note that for a bow with an odd number of

sections, the radial dimension is from the
A Box Window is a bay window with center of the arc to an outside corner where
side angles set at 90 degrees. Select two window sections join. The depth (11 ½”)
Build> Window> Box Window and click on is measured to the flat area of the center
a straight wall to produce a box window.
318
section, not to a corner. As a result, the radius Windows Library

is a bit greater than the sum of the depth and
the distance from the center of the bow’s Select Library> Library Browser,
curve to the exterior of the wall. then browse to Chief Architect
Libraries> Architectural> Windows to access
a selection of special windows. Select the
Note: Bay, box, and bow window areas are desired window, then click on a wall to place
not included in the living area or in room stan-
the window at that location.
dard area calculations. They are included in
room interior area calculations.
Special Windows
A variety of special windows can be created
using multiple standard windows, the edit
tools or custom symbols.
Creating Manual Bay, Box

and Bow Windows
Sometimes it is easier to draw bay, box and
bow windows manually than to use the
automatic tools. Bays created using walls can
have more than one window per section, To create a corner window, first create the
which is not possible using a bay window desired window on each side of the corner.
unit. The header height and the sill height of both
Bear in mind that moving a manually created windows must be the same.
bay, box or bow window is generally more
difficult than moving a unit created with one To move a window all the way into a
corner, check Ignore Casing for
of the Window Tools since it is Opening Resize in the Plan Defaults dialog.
composed of individual walls. See “General Plan Defaults Dialog” on page
68.
Corner Windows
Slant top, or shaped windows can be
Corner windows are produced when each
components of corner windows as long as
window has one edge at or past the interior
their heights are equal at the corners.
side of the adjacent wall.
Windows with single or two segment tops
can be used, but windows with three cannot.
If a two segment window is used, the
segment nearest the corner must be flat.
319
Grouped Windows
Once the corner window is formed, its over the selected window(s) the next time
components and corner post size can be automatic roofs are built. See “Gable Over
adjusted using dimension lines. Blocked Door/Window” on page 423.
units can also meet at a corner this way.
You can manually edit or delete this gable
line at any time. Your changes take effect
Recessed Windows when the automatic roofs are rebuilt. This
A window or mulled unit placed in a brick or can also be used with group selected
stone wall is often recessed into the wall’s windows.
exterior, so the brick wraps the opening. The
window on the left is not recessed, so the Stained Glass
casing is outside the brick.
A selection of solid stained glass materials is
You can specify a window as recessed in the available in the Materials> Glass library. See
Window Specification dialog. See “Options “Materials” on page 706.
Tab” on page 335.
Vents
Importing Windows
A selection of attic, foundation and gable
You can import custom windows and save vents are available in the Library Browser.
them in your own library for use in future See “Libraries” on page 682.
plans. See “Custom Symbols” on page 974.
Vents are placed in the same manner as
regular windows and can be edited in much
Placing a Gable the same way, as well.
Over a Window
edit button to produce a gable roof
Grouped Windows
Windows can be grouped together to create a
wide variety of custom configurations.
Stacked windows are easy to create in 3D
views, particular Cross Section/Elevation
views, using their edit handles. See “Editing
Windows” on page 326.
320
Notice how the windows and door in this The Minimum Separation value in the
example are separate, with a sections of wall Window Defaults dialog specifies how close
showing between them. Doors and/or mulled windows can be to each other. Define
windows can also be organized into a unit in a value that specifies the desired width for
which the casing connects the windows and the shared casing. See “Window Defaults”
door and no wall surface shows between on page 317.
them.
To help organize their display in floor plan
view, you can place stacked windows of
varying heights on different Window Levels.
See “Window Levels” on page 324.
Automatically Mulled Openings

To form a mulled group of windows and/or
doors, move them close enough together so
that their casings touch. Once the casings
touch, the windows are mulled together with
one casing between the two of them.
The sill of each window in the group must be Mulled Units in the Library
at the same level for them to share the middle
casing. The casing tops do not have to be at A selection of mulled window units is
the same level. The casings are modeled as if available in the Windows library. To place
they are one unit but the windows remain one in your plan, select it and click on a wall
separate objects for dimensioning and the in any view. See “Placing Library Objects”
Materials List. on page 690.
Windows can be automatically mulled to Make Mulled Unit

doors if the bottom of the window is at the
elevation of the floor, equal to the bottom of Windows and doors can be selected as
the door. a group and blocked together into a
single unit by clicking the Make Mulled
Unit edit button.
Make Mulled Unit

The Make Mulled Unit edit tool Wall openings in a mulled unit are referred to
allows you to block a group of as components. Components of a mulled unit
selected windows and/or doors into a single must be within 24” (600 mm) of one another
unit. in order to become a blocked unit; however,
their casings do not have to touch.
321
Make Mulled Unit
Windows and doors in a mulled unit can be Mulling Stacked Openings

framed as a single opening or as multiple
openings, and can be listed as a single unit or Group selection can be done in floor plan
individual objects in the Materials List. See view or any 3D view. Floor plan views work
“Materials Lists” on page 1048. well for blocking windows that are side-by-
side, but a camera or elevation view is
To create a mulled unit needed to block vertically stacked objects.
1. In any view, group-select multiple win- To block stacked openings

dows and doors on the same wall that
are within 24” of each other. 1. In a cross section/elevation view, select
the door and the windows on level 1 and
2. Click the Make Mulled Unit edit 2 above it, then click the Make Mulled
button to create a block. Unit edit button.
The Make Mulled Unit edit tool can be 2. Repeat step 1 with the sidelight on the
used to block component windows and/or right and the window above it.
doors only if they meet the following 3. Repeat step 1 with the sidelight on the
requirements: left and the window above it.
• They must be placed in the same wall. 4. Group select the three vertically joined
• Adjacent objects be within 24” (600 mm) units and click the Make Mulled Unit
of one another (side to side or top to bot- edit button to join them side to side.
tom).
The configuration of the horizontal and
• The edges of adjacent components that vertical mullions in a mulled unit will vary
face one another must be parallel. depending on the order in which you block
• The edges of adjacent components that stacked openings.
face one another must be straight, not • If you form a mulled unit by first block-
curved. ing objects vertically, the vertical mul-
• The selected components can be adjacent lions of the larger unit will extend
vertically or horizontally, but not a com- continously from the bottom to the top of
bination of the two. Complex units can be the entire unit, breaking any horizontal
formed only by mulling several blocks mullions.
together. • If you form a mulled unit by first block-
Unlike automatically mulled openings, ing objects horizontally, the horizontal
adjacent component edges of mulled units do mullions of the larger unit will extend
not need to be the same length. from side to side, breaking any vertical
mullions.
In a complex unit composed of smaller units,
there may be a variety of ways to organize
the sub-units.
322
Selecting Components windows category of the Materials List and

of Mulled Units in window schedules. This is the case even
with units that include one or more doors.
To select a component of a mulled unit, click
at the location of the component in question, If you check Treat as Door in the Mulled
Unit Specification dialog, the unit’s label is
then click the Select Next Object edit placed on the “Doors, Labels” layer but the
button or press the Tab key until that individ- unit itself remains on the “Windows” layer
ual component is selected. Only the compo- unless you change it. Units set to Treat as
nent clicked on is selectable using this Door are also included in the doors category
method. If you need to select a different com- of the Materials list and in door schedules
ponent, click on it and repeat the process. instead of window schedules.
The selected component may be on any You can, if you wish, also uncheck Single
window level in the mulled unit. If there are Label to display the labels of windows and
multiple levels, it is easiest to select the doors in a mulled unit individually. Labels
components in a 3D view. When you have are placed on the layers they would be on
selected an individual component, you can were the unit not mulled. Similarly, each
change its parameters in the Window component is listed in the Materials List
Specification dialog. See “Window category and schedule it would be in were it
Specification Dialog” on page 332. not mulled. See “Options Tab” on page 335.
If the selected component is not itself a
mulled unit and has no components above it, Editing Mulled Units
its Height and Arch parameters can be
A mulled unit moves as a single standard
changed. Changing the Height causes the
window in both floor plan and 3D views.
component top to move. The bottom remains
stationary. The components of a mulled unit cannot be
moved relative to one another. If this is
Displaying Mulled Units required, you will first need to explode the
mulled unit.
As with other windows, the display of
mulled windows is controlled in the To explode a mulled unit
Layer Display Options dialog. See
“Displaying Objects” on page 117. 1. Select the mulled unit.
Mulled units are placed on the “Windows”
2. Click the Explode Mulled Unit edit
layer by default and have a single label,
button.
which is on the “Windows, Labels” layer.
Mulled units are also included in the
323
Window Levels
Window Levels
It is often necessary to position more than matches your default Window Type and
one window and/or door at the same location the Height is 12". Once the window is
along a wall in floor plan view: for example, placed in the plan, its parameters can be
to create an entry with side lites and transom. changed. See “General Tab” on page 333.
To help control and organize the appearance Typically, the Default Level is set as 0 (zero).
of stacked wall openings in floor plan view,
you can assign windows at various heights to Window Level Zero
different Window Levels.
Window Level 0 (zero) is the level that all
Window Levels do not define the height of a doors, bay, box and bow windows are always
window, just the appearance and behavior of placed on. Typically, it is also the initial level
windows and doors in floor plan view. that standard windows are placed on.
• In floor plan view, windows and doors on Because doors are always on Level 0 and
the Default Level display the line color because these line colors affect printouts, it is
and style of the layer they are on. See best to keep the Default Level at 0. If you do
“Layers” on page 116. change the Default Level, remember to
• Windows on any other level appear light change it back before printing.
gray, regardless of the layer they are on.
When you specify the default level as a value
other than zero, the initial window type
The Default Level changes to fixed glass and no Sill is created.
The Default Level is the Window Level that The Width of the window matches your
Standard Windows are initally placed on default Window Type and the Height is 12".
when created and affects several things: Once the window is placed in the plan, its
parameters can be changed. See “General
• In floor plan view, windows and doors on
Tab” on page 333.
the Default Level display the line color
and style of the layer they are on.
Creating Stacked Units
• When you click on stacked doors and
windows in floor plan view, those on the The door and windows in the illustration
Default Level are selected first. To select below were organized have been placed on
an opening on another level, use the different levels.
Select Next Object edit button. See
“Select Next Object” on page 146.
• When you specify the default level as a
value other than zero, the initial window
type changes to fixed glass and no Sill is
created. The Width of the window
324
always on level zero. The three windows

above the door are placed on level one, and
the round top window is placed on level two.
2 The first row above on the same floor is
1 represented by Window Level 1 and contains
any windows stacked above a single window
or door. The second row is represented by
0
Window Level 2 and contains all windows
stacked above two stacked windows, etc.
When you place a window in floor plan view
on a level greater than zero, the program
attempts to locate it over windows on lower
levels. Once placed, it can be moved to the
desired height in a 3D view or in the Window
Specification dialog. See “Editing
Windows” on page 326.
When you specify the default level as a value
other than zero, the initial window type
changes to fixed glass and no Sill is created.
The Width of the window matches your
default Window Type and the Height is 12".
Once the window is placed in the plan, its
parameters can be changed. See “General
Tab” on page 333.
Instead of using levels to manage stacked
windows, you may want to combine them
into a single blocked unit. See “Make Mulled
To create this entry, set the two windows on
Unit” on page 321.
either side of the door to level zero. A door is
Displaying Windows
The display of windows, window If the Windows layer is not set to display,
labels, openings, and headers in floor window casing, lites and other window
plan and 3D views can be controlled in the components are not visible, but the openings
Layer Display Options dialog. See “Layer in the walls where they are located can still
Display Options Dialog” on page 121. be seen.
325
Editing Windows
In Floor Plan View Customized labels for individual windows

can also be specified in the Window
Some window types, notably Sliding and Specification dialog. See “Label Tab” on
Double and Triple Casement windows, are page 1045.
distinguishable in floor plan view.
Windows in pony walls display in floor plan
view regardless of which part of the pony
Double Hung wall is visible. If you wish, you can instead
display only openings located entirely
Left Sliding portion of a pony wall that is set to display in
floor plan view. See “Pony Wall Defaults” on
page 218.
Triple Casement
In 3D Views
To show opening indicator arrows in vector
Window types in floor plan view
views, turn on the “Opening Indicators”
If the “Windows, Labels” layer is set to layer in the Layer Display Options dialog.
display, window labels show in floor plan
view, centered on the windows that they
represent. Label format and size is specified
in the Schedule Specification dialog. See
Window labels indicate the width, height and
window type. For example, a 3040 DH label
describes a 3’-0” wide by 4’-0” high double
hung window. The format of metric window
dimensions is “900x1200”, where the first Windows showing opening indicators
number is the width in mm and the second,
the height in mm. You can change the direction of indicator
arrows in the Preferences dialog. See
“Architectural Panel” on page 88.
Editing Windows
Before a window can be edited, it must be also be group-selected and edited. See
selected. Click on a window when the Select “Selecting Objects” on page 144.
Objects tool or any of the Window Tools To select a window that is part of a blocked
are active. Doors and/or windows can unit, click the component window, then click
the Select Next Object edit button. See
326
“Selecting Components of Mulled Units” on • A single window or a group of windows

page 323. can be moved with the center edit handle.
Windows can be edited using their edit • A door or window moved against an
handles, the edit toolbar buttons, and the intersecting wall temporarily stops when
Window Specification dialog. See “Window it is the casing distance from the inter-
Specification Dialog” on page 332. secting wall. You can continue to drag
and it resumes movement past or onto the
When you select a window in floor plan intersecting wall. Enable Ignore Casing
view, the window size label displays the for Opening Resize in the Plan Defaults
width followed by the height. For example, a dialog to turn off this behavior. See “Gen-
3036 window is 3’-0” wide by 3’-6” high. eral Plan Defaults Dialog” on page 68.
Using the Mouse Using Dimensions

• In floor plan view, click either of the two
Individual windows can be moved
end handles and drag along the wall to
using dimensions. See “Moving
change the width. The label showing the
size updates as the window is resized.
• In 3D views, a selected window has five In the Specification Dialog
edit handles: the Move handle at the cen-
ter and a Resize handle on each edge. Windows can be edited extensively in the
Click and drag an edge handle to resize Window Specification dialog. See “Window
the window. Specification Dialog” on page 332.
• Using the edit handles, a window resizes
according to the currently active Edit Using the Edit Tools
Behavior . See “Edit Behaviors” on A selected window or windows can be edited
page 137. in a variety of ways using the buttons on the
edit toolbar. See “Edit Toolbar Buttons” on
page 1140.
Note: Using the edit handles is the only way
to resize bay, box and bow window systems.
Custom Muntins
Design your own muntins for the glazing of a vertically, but should not overlap it in either
window or door. Muntins are formed from a direction by more than five percent.
CAD block composed of lines and arcs
drawn over window or door glass in a cross Creating Muntins
section/elevation view. The CAD block
should cover at least half the glass Custom muntins are created by
horizontally and one quarter of the area drawing their pattern using the CAD
327
Bay, Box, and Bow Windows
tools, blocking the pattern to create a CAD each pane. When you click Load
block, and then selecting the window and Muntins , all CAD blocks are loaded.
clicking the Load Muntins edit button.
Custom muntins move with the opening and
To create custom muntins copy with their opening. They also stretch or
compress when the glass area is resized. This
stretching may not be perfect for non-
1. Create a Cross Section/Elevation
rectangular glass areas that are resized by a
view of the wall the window or door is
large amount.
in and Zoom in on the window or
door. Custom muntins can be created for the
components of Bay Windows , Box
2. Use the Draw Line and Draw Arc
Windows , and mulled units.
tools to design the desired muntins.
Try to make them start and end as close Editing Muntins
to the edge of the glass as possible.
3. When the muntin design is complete, Once blocked and loaded, custom muntins
group-select all lines and arcs and click cannot be edited. If you wish to make
changes to them, you must first remove
the Make CAD Block edit button. them.
See “Selecting Objects” on page 144.
4. Select the door or window and click the Removing Muntins
Load Muntins edit button to con- Remove custom muntins from a door
vert the CAD block into custom mun- or window by selecting the opening in
tins. cross section/elevation view and clicking the
If your window has more than one sash (a Unload Muntins edit button. The muntins
double-hung window, for example, has two), disappear and the original CAD block takes
you must create a separate CAD block for their place.
Bay, Box, and Bow Windows

Bay, Box and Bow Windows foundation wall is also a bay/box/bow, but
are created much the way without windows. If the foundation was
regular windows are: select a tool, then click generated before the window is placed, the
a wall to place that window type. foundation must be rebuilt or edited
manually.
Chief Architect automatically builds a
foundation under bay/box/bow windows
placed on floor 1 unless they are raised from
their original position. That section of the
328
Editing Bay, Box and Next Object edit button or press the Tab
Bow Windows key.
Bay, box and bow windows are edited • Only the bay or box window component
similar to regular windows, with one that was clicked on is selected using this
exception: in floor plan view, a diamond- method. If you need to select a different
shaped Depth edit handle displays on the component, click on it and repeat the pro-
section. Drag this Depth handle outward to cess.
increase the depth, or inward to decrease the • In a bow window, all components are
depth of the unit. See “Editing Windows” on identical, so only one component can be
page 326. selected. Changing this component
changes them all.
Resizing Components
An individual component window can be
resized using the edit handles, by changing
Depth edit handle on a bay window settings in the component’s Window
Specification dialog, or by using the
Bay, box and bow windows can also be Transform/Replicate Object dialog. See
edited in their respective specification “Transform/Replicate Object Dialog” on
dialogs. See “Bay/Box Window page 200.
Specification Dialog” on page 349 or “Bow
Window Specification” on page 351. When a bay/box/bow window is first created,
there is room for one standard trimmer on
each side of each component window. When
Displaying Bay, Box
the bay as a whole is moved and resized, its
and Bow Windows components automatically resize so that a
The display of bay, box and bow windows is standard trimmer is still accomodated.
controlled in the Layer Display Options If you increase a component window’s width
dialog. Bay, box and bow window width and to the point where there is not enough room
radius dimensions, which display in floor for standard trimmers, a thinner trimmer can
plan view, are placed on the Dimensions, be used. The size of this thinner trimmer is
Manual layer. See “Displaying Objects” on specified in the Build Framing dialog. See
page 117. “Openings Tab” on page 473.
Component Windows If a component window is resized, it retains

its size if at all possible when the containing
A component window within a bay, box or bay/box/bow window is moved or resized. If
bow window can be resized like any other the bay is resized in such a way that the
standard window. To select a component component is too large to fit even with a
window, click at the location of the thinner trimmer, the component resumes its
component in question, then click the Select
329
Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs
default behavior, resizing as the containing Lowering the Ceiling

bay window is resized.
To lower the ceiling and the wall heights,
select the window in a 3D view. When the
Ceilings
window is selected, grab the top handle and
When originally drag toward the floor. The ceiling is lowered,
created, the ceiling which lowers the height of the walls. Any
within a bay, box, or roofs that are subsequently built are affected.
bow windows is the
same height as the Creating a Bench Seat
default ceiling for that
floor. To create a bench seat or garden window,
follow the same step for lowering the ceiling
Both the top and except this time drag the lower handle
bottom heights of these toward the ceiling.
window units may be
When you raise the bottom of the window to
adjusted from a 3D
create a bench seat, the exterior walls that
view.
create the window do not reach the ground.
Use the following When you build a foundation, the foundation
techniques for is not produced under a window unit that has
modifying any bay, box, or bow window. bench seats.
Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs

Several different roof styles are available for
bay, box and bow window units.
Hip Roofs
Unless a different option is selected, a hip
roof is built above the unit when roofs are
automatically generated.
If a different style of roof is desired, the

window’s specification dialog can be used to
change the style of roof that is be generated
over a bay, box or bow window.
See “Bay/Box Window
330
Place Under Roof Slope With this option the bay, box, or bow
windows is tucked under the roof eave.
To have the main roof plane extend down
over the window unit while following the
shape of the unit, select Extend Existing
Roof Over. Rebuild the roofs to see the
changes.
Place Under Roof - Rectangular

To extend the roof plane down over a bay,
box or bow window with a rectangular roof,
ignoring the shape of the unit, select both
Extend existing roof over and Rectangular
roof over in the specification dialog. The
For this roof style to work successfully, the Rectangular roof over option does not work
ceiling heights of the window unit and the in combination with Use existing roof since
room containing it must be the same. This the existing roof does not cover the window
does not work if you have lowered the unit.
ceiling for the window unit.
See the previous section for directions on
If a header is desired over the bay, box or extending the roof down over bay, box or
bow window, first build the roof correctly, bow windows.
then lower the ceiling of the bay, box or bow
window in 3D. Once the ceiling is lowered,
select Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings .
This fills in the area between the header and
the roof. Do not rebuild roof planes, if you
do, a lower hip roof over the window unit is
created.
Use Existing Roof

To generate a standard roof with no Rectangular Hip Roof
allowances made for bay, box, or bow
windows below, check Use Existing Roof. To create a rectangular hip roof, select only
Rectangular roof over, then rebuild the
roof.
331
Window Specification Dialog
2. Delete the front hip section.

3. Select each side roof plane at the gable
end and drag it out to set the overhang.
4. Once the roof planes are shaped prop-
erly, open the Build Roof dialog and
select the Build Fascia, Gutters option
to complete the roof. Do not select Build
Roof Planes.
Gable Roof
A gable roof is not one of the automatic
options for the roof above a bay, box or bow
window. A gable can be created by manually
editing the rectangular hip roofs that are
automatically created. See “Roof Planes” on
page 385.
To create a gable over a bay window
1. Select each side hip sections on the front To create a gable roof over a normal
angled edge. Select the front ridge cor- window, use the Gable Over Door/
ner handle and drag the roof section for- Window edit button. See “Gable Over Door/
ward until the fascia is straight and let it Window” on page 423.
snap to the edge of the front hip section.

To open the Window Specification dialog, The settings in this dialog are also similar to
select a window or a group of windows and those in the Mulled Window Specification
click the Open Object edit button or dialog for mulled units. Although similar, a
double-click the window using the Select number of the options cannot be edited when
a mulled unit is selected. See “Grouped
Objects or Window tool. Windows” on page 320.
The settings in this dialog are similar to those
in the Window Defaults dialog. See
“Window Defaults” on page 317.
332
General Tab
1
2
5
3
4
6
7
1 Window Type - Select the type of the list is the Default type set in the Window
window from the list. The first entry in Defaults dialog.
Window Types
333
2 Specify the Size and Position of the rough opening. The rough opening should be
selected window. large enough to accomodate the window
• Specify the Width and Height of the frame and space for shims.
window.
4 Swing Direction - Select from the
• Floor to Top - Specify the height of the available hinge options. The preview in
top of the window frame as measured the dialog updates as options are changed.
from the subfloor. Only available for Casement, Double and
Triple Awning, and Double and Triple
• Movable Size - Specify the dimension of
Hopper windows.
the movable portion of the window. A
value of 0 defaults the movable size to
5 A preview of the window displays here.
whatever is normal for that type of win-
dow. Not available for Fixed Glass, Sin-
gle or Double Casement, Single Awning 6 Check Show Color to show the
window in color in the preview.
or Hopper, or Louvered windows.
3 Add for Rough Opening - Specify the which side of the window displays in
amount to add to Each Side, the Top
the preview.
and the Bottom for the window’s framed
334
Options Tab
1 4
5
2
1 Options - • Check Reverse Symbol to reverse the

window as though it were reflected about
• Check Interior Corner Block to count a vertical line through its center.
interior corner blocks in the materials list.
These do not display in 3D views. 2 The Mulled Units are available when a
mulled unit is selected. See “Displaying
• Check Exterior Corner Block to count Mulled Units” on page 323.
exterior corner blocks in the materials • Select Treat as Door to include the unit
list. These do not display in 3D views. in door schedules and the Door category
• Check Egress to specify the window as of the Materials List rather than in the
an egress window in the Window Sched- Window schedules and Materials List
ule and Materials List. category. Only available when the
selected unit contains a door.
Consult your local building and fire code • Uncheck Single Label to produce labels
authorities for your local egress window and Materials List and schedule entries
requirements. for each component of the unit. When
checked, the unit is treated as a single
335
object for labeling in floor plan view, in wall. Check Recessed to enable these
schedules and in the Materials List. options.
• Uncheck Single Wall Hole to produce • Select To Main Layer to recess the
individually framed wall openings for window to the wall’s Main Layer.
each unit in a mulled unit. When this box • Select To Sheathing Layer to recess the
is checked, a single wall opening with window to the wall’s sheathing layer.
one header for the entire unit is produced.
3 Specify the Mullion Depth for the

casing between the components of a
blocked unit, measured from wall surface.
Positive values move the mullion surface Not Recessed
towards the wall center; negative values,
away from it. Only available when a mulled
unit is selected.
• Specify the Inside depth of the mullion Recessed (to Main Layer)
on the interior surface of the wall.
• Specify the Outside depth of the mullion
on the exterior surface of the wall.
Recessed to Sheathing Layer
4 The Recessed into Wall options allow
you to recess the selected window or
mulled unit into a wall, away from the 5 Vertical Stacking - Specify the
window Level that the selected window
exterior surface. Only available if the
is placed on. See “Window Levels” on page
window or mulled unit is in a multi-layered
324.
Casing Tab
Changes made on the Casing tab can only be and materials can also be included in Room
seen in 3D views. Window casing profiles Finish Schedules.
336
1 Specify the casing for the selected • Click the Library button to select a
window or mulled unit. molding profile for the casing. A preview
• Select the Interior or Exterior radio but- of the casing profile displays in the win-
ton to define the casing for that window dow above. See “Molding Profiles” on
side and display it in the preview image. page 533.
• Check Suppress Exterior/Interior Cas- • Click the Clear button to remove a

ing to have a wrapped opening instead of selected casing profile from the window.
casing on the selected side of the window.
2 Double Wall Options - This section is
• Define the Width of the selected casing, enabled if the window is placed in a
including the Apron, if one is being used. Double Wall. See “Double Walls” on page
If a Lintel is defined, this setting does not 239.
affect the top. See “Lintel & Sill Tab” on • Select Through to create a single frame
page 338. running through both Double Walls. This
• Define the Reveal, the distance between option is selected by default.
the inside edge of the window frame and • If Enlarged is selected, casing is created
the inside edge of the casing. only on the wall the window is inserted
337
in. The opening on the other wall is • Radial - The sides of the casing or jambs
enlarged to accomodate the casing. are inserted in the wall at an angle that
• Select Double to place a second window passes through the center of the curve.
in the Double Wall opposite the selected
window. This second window cannot be
selected. Casing is produced as with the
Through type window. Radial
3 Curved Wall Casing - This section is • Parallel - The sides of the casing are
enabled if the window is placed in a inserted in the wall at a right angle to the
curved wall. See “Drawing Curved Walls” on line tangent to the curved wall at the cen-
page 228. ter of the window.
Door and window casing and jamb can be
constructed three ways in curved walls:
• Straight - Both window sash and casing
Parallel
are straight. Straight casing may not fit
properly into a wall if the window is too Normally, parallel casing has a straight sash.
wide or the curvature of the wall, too Radial casing is more like traditional curved
tight. windows, and typically has a curved sash.
Straight
Lintel & Sill Tab

The settings on the Lintel tab of the Window been assigned a reflected arch. See “Arch
and Mulled Window Specification dialogs Tab” on page 345.
allow you to assign a sill and lintel, or top
The profiles and materials of window lintels
molding that meets the side casing using a
and sills can be included in Room Finish
butt joint instead of a mitred joint. These
Schedules.
settings are not available if the window has
338
1
2
1 Select the Interior or Exterior radio • Click the Library button to select a
button to define the lintel and/or sill for molding profile for the lintel. A preview
that window side and display that side in the of the lintel profile displays in the win-
preview image. dow to the left of the button. See “Mold-
ing Profiles” on page 533.
2 Specify a lintel for the selected window • Click the Clear button to remove a
or mulled unit.
selected lintel profile from the window.
• Check Use Exterior/Interior Lintel to
have a lintel on the selected side of the
3 Specify the sill for the selected window
window instead of regular top casing. or mulled unit.
• Define the Width of the selected lintel. • Check Use Exterior/Interior Sill to have
This is independent of the Casing width. a sill on the selected side of the window.
• Specify how far the lintel Extends on • Specify how far the sill Extends on either
either side. A value of 1” (25 mm) aligns side. A value of 1” (25 mm) aligns it with
it with the outside edges of the casing. the outside edges of the casing. If an
• Check Wraps to wrap the lintel profile Apron is specified, it is also affected.
back toward the wall. • Check Wraps to wrap the sill profile
back toward the wall. If checked, the sill
339
extends on 1” (25 mm) further on each the sill profile displays in the window to
side of the window. the left of the button. See “Molding Pro-
• Check Apron to include an apron under files” on page 533.
the sill. • Click the Clear button to remove the
• Click the Library button to select a selected sill profile from the window.
molding profile for the sill. A preview of
Sash & Frame Tab

The settings in the Sash & Frame tab are not
available in the Mulled Window
2
3
1 Specify the size and position of the and sliding windows. This is also the
Sash. Increasing the Side, Middle, Top width of the top portion of the window
or Bottom decreases the area of the glass. when an arch is specified.
• Specify the Side width of all vertical sash • Specify the Middle width of horizontal
members: those at the window sides as components between the top and bottom
well as the central members of casement sash in double hung, double and triple
340
awning, and double and triple hopper positive value moves the frame towards
windows. It does not affect casement and the wall’s exterior while a negative value
sliding windows. moves it towards the interior.
• Specify the Top and Bottom sash widths.
The Top value is not used if the window
has an arch.
• Specify the Depth, or thickness, of the
sash stock measured from the exterior to
the interior.
• Specify the Inset, the distance between
the frame and the outermost sash. If there
is no frame, the inset is measured from
the outer surface of the wall’s main layer.
2 Specify the size and position of the 3 Curved Sash Options - Specify
Frame. If this value is set to zero, the whether a window placed in a curved
wall’s main layer thickness is used as the wall is also curved or is straight. Normally, a
frame depth. curved sash is used with radial casing. See
• Specify the Side, Top and Bottom widths “Casing Tab” on page 336.
of the window frame.
• Specify the Frame Depth. This value Radial Casing
cannot be less than the wall’s main layer
thickness.
• Specify the Inset, the distance that the Straight Sash
window frame is inset from the exterior
of the main wall layer. Normally, the
outer surface of the frame aligns with the
outer surface of the main wall layer. A Curved Sash
Lites Tab
The Lites tab allows you to add muntins to A window that has been modified using the
various window styles and shutters. There Shape tab cannot have divided lites or
are four possible styles of muntin bars for shutters added. You can, however, create
regular windows, plus two additional options Custom Muntins for such a window. See
for arch top or round top windows. “Custom Muntins” on page 327.
341
A maximum of 8 lites can be specified in

either direction.
1 Specify the number, position and style

of Lites for the selected window.
• Enter the number of horizontal Lites
Across in each sash.
• Enter the number of vertical Lites Verti- Lites in fixed Lites in moveable
cal in each sash.
• Muntin Width - Specify the width of the Note: Because the fixed window in a Triple
bars that divide the panes of glass. Sliding window is twice the size of the mov-
able windows, the fixed section has a vertical
• Check or uncheck Lites in Fixed and muntin bar. To eliminate this, clear the Lites in
Lites in Moveable to specify either one fixed check box.
or both of the sashes to have divided lites.
• Select a Type, or style, of window lite
from the drop-down list.
342
Lites vertical should be set between 4 and

8.
1
2 If the door is defined as Round Top ,
you can specify a Ray Count of up to
10 radial muntin bars in the portion of the
door within the arch. There is one more pane
• Normal style is the most common, with of glass than the number of rays specified.
muntins going horizontally and vertically.
Colonial windows are an example of the
normal style.
• Diamond style uses angled muntin bars
to divide up the lites. French windows are
an example of the diamond style.
• Prairie style is based on the normal style,
but with all the central muntin bars • Check Concentric to produce muntins
removed, leaving only the two outside radiating from a curved inner muntin that
muntin bars both horizontally and verti- is concentric with the door’s arch. You
cally. To be effective, both the Lites must have at least three lites across for
across and the Lites vertical should be set this to be used.
between 6 and 8. Federal or Federation
windows are an example of the Prairie
style.
• Craftsman style is based on the normal
style, but only the topmost horizontal
muntin bar is kept with all the portions of
the vertical muntin bars above it. To be
effective, both the Lites across and the
1.“Arch Tab” on page 345.
Shape Tab
Any type of non-symbol window may be
shaped. All “shaped” windows are defined as Note: Settings on the Shape tab that refer to
“Fixed Glass” on the General tab. the left and right side of the window describe
the window when viewed from the exterior.
343
1
5
1 Window Width displays for reference. • Specify the Height of the left inner cor-
It can be changed in the General tab. ner, as seen from the exterior, measured
from the bottom of the window.
2 Left Side - Specify the Height of the • Specify the Offset of the left inner cor-
left upper corner, as viewed from the
exterior, measured from the bottom of the ner, as measured from the left side of the
window. Unless changed, this matches the window. Minimum value is 1” (10 mm).
window height. Minimum value is 1/4” (4 An additional Right Inner Corner can be
mm). specified in a similar manner.
The height of the Right Side can be specified
in a similar manner. 4 Check Raise Bottom Left to raise the
height of the bottom left corner.
Check Left Inner Corner to add an • Specify the Height of the bottom left cor-
3
additional corner along the top edge. ner, as seen from the exterior, measured
from the bottom of the window. This
value cannot exceed the Height of the
Left Side.
344
The height of the Bottom Right corner can

be raised in a similar manner.
5 Click Match Roof to match the angle • A has different left and right heights with
of the top of the window to the pitch of
the roof on a gable end. The window no Inner corner added.
maintains the angle even when resized and • B has matching left and right heights with
repositioned. Left and Right Inner Corner an added Inner corner.
must both be unchecked for this to work.
• C is the same as B, except that the left
This option does not work for curved roofs.
and right heights have been shortened to
• Click Revert to restore the window to its 1/4”.
original shape, type and arch settings.
• D is the same as B except it has two
A shaped window must have two vertical added Inner corners.
sides at least 1/4” high. • E is the same as A except that Raise Bot-
The following diagram represents added tom Right has been defined.
Inner corners using open circles and the left
and right corners using solid black circles: 6 Select Interior or Exterior to specify
which side of the window displays in
the preview. This can significantly affect a
shaped window’s appearance in the preview,
as the Left and Right Side settings always
refer to the window as seen from the exterior.
Arch Tab
The settings on Arch tab of the Mulled rectangular top openings whose tops are at
Window Specification dialog defins the the same height.
overall shape of the blocked units top. If you
A window that has been modified using the
intend to arch the top of a blocked unit, the
Shape tab cannot have an arched top.
top components should be constructed with
345
1 Specifications -Define the style and

size of the arch.
• Select the Type of arch desired from the
drop-down list.
Round Broken Gothic Elliptical Flat

Top Top
Tudor Double Trifoil Octo- Dogear

gonal
346
Note: The settings on the Shape tab take pre-

2 Options - Define the orientation of the
arch.
cendence over those on the Arch tab. If the
window’s Shape has been modified, you can • Check Reflect to reflect the arch, top to
select an Arch but it will have no effect on the bottom. Not available if a lintel is speci-
window’s appearance. fied for the selected window. See “Lintel
& Sill Tab” on page 338.
• Specify the Height of the arch, as mea- • Select Full Arch to produce an arch with
sured from the base of the arch to the top the apex at the window’s center.
of the window. The height can be defined
• Select Arch on Left to produce an arch
for all arch types except Round Top and
with the apex on the window’s right side.
Octagonal Arches.
• Select Arch on Right to produce an arch
• The Radius can also be defined for Tudor
with the apex on the window’s left side.
and Double Arches.
Treatments Tab
The settings on the Treatments tab allow you exterior of the selected window or mulled
to assign embellishments to the interior and unit.
5
2
4 6
7
347
1 Specify Interior treatments for the • Check Louver for louvered shutters.
selected window or mulled unit. Uncheck this for solid shutters. If Outside
• Specify a style of Curtains by selecting Casing is checked, the louvers face out-
“Use Default”, “None” or “Library” from ward, away from the wall; if checked,
the drop-down list. louvers face toward the wall.
• Click the Library button or select

“Library” from the Curtains drop-down Note: If there is not enough room for a shutter
on one side of the window because it is too
list to choose a style of curtain from the
close to another wall opening or to a wall cor-
library. See “Select Library Object Dia- ner, a shutter will not be created.
log” on page 689.
• Specify the Height Off Floor of the bot- • Specify a Capital in the same manner
tom edge of the curtains. that Curtains are chosen, above.
• Specify the Height Above Casing of the • Specify the Height and Width of the
top of curtains. capital.
• Specify a style of Blinds in the same • Specify a Sill in the same manner that
manner that Curtains are chosen, above. Curtains are chosen, above.
• Specify the Height of the sill.
2 Specify Exterior treatments for the
selected window or mulled unit. • Specify the distance that the sill Extends
• Check Shutters to apply shutters to the past the side casing.
window’s exterior and enable the settings
below to customize them. 3 A preview of the window displays here.
• Check Set Width by Window to assign a
shutter width exactly half that of the win- 4 Check Show Color to show the
window preview in color.
dow, excluding casing. If unchecked, you
can Specify Width; however, if the win-
dow is later resized, the shutters width which side of the window displays in
will not adjust in response. the preview.
• Check Outside Casing to position shut-
ters outside the window casing, as deco- Layer Tab
rative shutters often are. Uncheck this to The settings on the Layer tab are the same as
position the shutters just outside the win- those found on the same tab in dialogs
dow frame, like functional shutters. throughout the program. See “Layer Tab” on
• Check No Arch for shutters with flat tops page 125.
that reach the bottom of the curved por-
tion of an arched window. Only available Materials Tab
when an Arch is selected. See “Arch Tab”
on page 345. The settings on the Materials tab are the
same as those found on the same tab in
348
dialogs throughout the program. See Label Tab

The settings on the Label tab are the same as
The settings on the Materials tab of the those found on the same tab in dialogs
Mulled Window Specification dialog apply throughout the program. See “Label Tab” on
to all components of the blocked unit. Any page 1045.
settings made for individual components of
the blocked unit are overridden here.
Bay/Box Window Specification Dialog

To open the Bay/Box Window Specification do not have a defaults dialog. Many of these
dialog, select a bay or box window and click same options are available for Bow
the Open Object edit button. windows. See “Bow Window Specification”
on page 351.
The options in this dialog can be set for
individual objects only: bay or box windows
General tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1 Bay Angle - Enter the angle of the side 2 Has Component Windows - Uncheck
components of the bay window in this box to remove the component
degrees. Enter 90 degrees to create a box windows of the bay/box window unit.
window.
349
Bay/Box Window Specification Dialog
3 Use Existing Roof - Check this box if components, which allows the component
the existing roof needs no changes to width to increase.
accomodate the bay window.
10 No Framing Between Components -
4 Extend Existing Roof Over - Check Check this box to remove both studs
this box to extend the existing roof between the bay components.
plane to cover the bay window below.
11 Components Recessed - Check this
5 Rectangular Roof Over - Check this box if the window is placed in a brick
box to create a roof over the bay wall and you want to recess the exterior
window that is square across the end instead casing to produce a brick molding.
of following the profile of the roof. See “Bay,
Bay window components default to a size
Box, Bow Windows & Roofs” on page 330.
that allows one standard trimmer when a bay
6 Suppress Dimension - Check this box is first created. When the bay as a whole is
to suppress the automatically-produced moved and resized, its components auto-
dimensions that show the size of the bay or matically resize to fit a standard trimmer.
box window.
12 To Sheathing Layer - Check this box
7 No Labels - Check this box to suppress to recess the components to the
the label in floor plan view and to sheathing layer instead of the outside layer
prevent the Bay window from being included (typically brick) as in item 11.
in the materials list or Window Schedule.
13 Connect Outer Casing - Check this
8 Single Label for Entire bay - Check box to have the exterior casing
this box to create one label to list the surround all three bay component windows
Bay window in the Materials List and together, not separately, on the exterior.
schedules. Mullions are provided between components.
This is how casing is always done for the
9 No Trimmers for Components - A interior.
normal window has two framing studs
on either side. The trimmer stud is against
the window and ends where it butts to the Layer Tab
bottom of the header. Check this box to For information about using the Layer tab,
eliminate the trimmer stud for bay see “Layer Tab” on page 125.
350
Bow Window Specification
2
3
Many of the options in this dialog are the

2 Suppress Standard Dimension -
same as the Bay/Bow Window Check this box to suppress the
Specification. See “Bay/Box Window dimensions showing width and depth of the
Specification Dialog” on page 349. bow.
Three options are unique to the Bay/Bow
3 Suppress Dimension to Center -
Window Specification dialog: Check this box to suppress the radial
dimension.
1 Define the Number of sections to
increase or decrease the number of
components in the window.
Window Schedules
Chief Architect can automatically produce a
window schedule. See “Creating Schedules”
on page 1037.
351
Chapter 11:
Multiple Floors
Chief Architect allows for multiple floors in Chapter Contents

a plan. Floors that are based on the first floor • Floor Defaults Dialog
footprint can be easily added at any time. • Working With Multiple Floors
Floors can also be deleted and moved at any • Floor Tools
time. • Adding Floors
Chief Architect also supports special floors • Exchanging Floors
for foundations and attics. Only one • Deleting Floors
foundation level and one attic can exist in a • Floor and Ceiling Platforms
plan. Foundations are discussed in their own • Copying Floors
chapter. See “Foundations” on page 362. • Rebuilding Walls, Floors & Ceilings
• The Current Floor
Only one floor can be active at a time. This • The Attic Floor
floor is referred to as the current floor. One • Reference Floor
additional floor can be displayed (but not
edited) for reference in the same view.
352
Floor Defaults Dialog

The default settings for the current In addition, the Floor Defaults button
floor can be accessed by selecting can be added to a toolbar for quick
Edit> Default Settings, then choosing Floor access to the Floor Defaults dialog. See
from the category tree in the Default “Toolbar Customization Dialog” on page
Settings dialog. See “Defaults and 107.
The Floor Defaults dialog is similar to the
The Floor Defaults dialog can also be Room Specification dialog, but controls the
opened by double-clicking the Floor default settings for all rooms on the current
Tools button. floor. See “Room Specification Dialog” on
page 283.
General Tab
1
2
3
353
Working With Multiple Floors
Three settings on the General tab of are

2 Check Default to no ceiling to have
unique to the Floor Defaults dialog. newly defined rooms have no ceiling
above them.
Note that in the Floor Defaults dialog, the
only Height value that can be specified is
3 On Floor 1 only, define the wall layer
Ceiling Height (B). that you would like to calculate the
Living Area To. See “Living Area” on page
275.
Note: You can also set the default ceiling
height for a floor by raising or lowering the
wall height of the Exterior Room in a 3D view. Moldings Tab
See “The Exterior Room” on page 271.
The settings on the Moldings tab are similar
to those in the Room Specification dialog.
1 Check Use Above Floor’s Platform for See “Moldings Tab” on page 290.
Ceiling to create a single ceiling
platform for the entire floor, which prevents
unique materials from being assigned to the Format Tab
ceiling in individual rooms. This box is The settings on the Format tab control the
normally left unchecked. dimension format of Room Labels on the
current floor. They are similar to the settings
in the Dimension Defaults dialog. See
“Primary Format Tab” on page 812.
Working With Multiple Floors

When a new, blank plan is opened, the plan The Reference Floor is a single floorthat can
name is Untitled 1.plan. be shown for reference in addition to the
current floor, similar to an overlay. The
Once the plan file is saved, the title bar
reference floor is visible but not editable.
displays filename:Floor Plan, indicating:
Objects snap to the reference display, helping
• The active drawing file is filename. align items with other floors.
• The file is a .plan file. All other floors can be shown in 3D views
• The active view is floor plan view. but not floor plan view.
Any model can have up to 30 floors, plus a
foundation and attic. Floors can be added, To view more than one floor of your plan
deleted, copied, and swapped. All floors and at a time, open the plan file again. This
the foundation are visible in most 3D views. creates a new editable window of the same
file that can show any floor. Changes made in
The Current Floor is the active floor. There this new window are also reflected in the orig-
can be only one active floor at a time. When inal window.
a plan file is first opened, the current floor is
always Floor 1.
354
Floor Tools
Select Build> Floor to access the Choose Build> Floor> Build
floor tools. Foundation to open the Foundation
Defaults dialog and build a foundation floor.
Select Build> Floor> Build New
See “Building a Foundation” on page 366.
Floor to build a new floor. A new
floor can be generated based upon the Select Build> Floor> Delete
perimeter of the floor below or a blank floor Foundation to remove the foundation
can be created and drawn from scratch. See from the plan. See “Deleting Foundations”
“Adding Floors” on page 355. on page 369.
Select Build> Floor> Insert New Select Build> Floor> Hole in Floor
Floor to insert a new floor below the Platform to draw a hole in a floor
current floor. See “Adding Floors” on page platform on the current floor. See “Platform
355. Holes” on page 358.
Choose Build> Floor> Delete Select Build> Floor> Hole in Ceiling
Current Floor to remove the current Platform to draw a hole in a ceiling
floor from the plan. For more information, platform on the current floor. See “Platform
see “Deleting Floors” on page 358. Holes” on page 358.
Select Build> Floor> Exchange Choose Build> Floor> Rebuild
With Floor Above to move the Walls/Floors/Ceilings to force Chief
current floor up one floor and the floor above Architect to recalculate the relationship
it down. See “Exchanging Floors” on page between the walls, floors, and ceilings in
357. your model. See “Rebuilding Walls, Floors
& Ceilings” on page 358.
Choose Build> Floor> Exchange
With Floor Below to move the Select Build> Floor> Rebuild Slabs
current floor down one floor and the floor to force the rebuild of any slabs in the
below it, up. See “Exchanging Floors” on plan.
page 357.
Adding Floors
New floors can be added in floor plan view To create a new floor
and 3D views.
1. Select Build> Floor> Build New
Floor to open the New Floor dialog.
Two options are available.
355
Adding Floors
helpful to turn on reference layers in order to

align walls with bearing walls below. Items
snap to the reference floor display. See
1 “Reference Floor” on page 359.
2 2. Select one of the two options and click
OK. A new floor is added based on the
settings in the Floor Defaults dialog.
See “Floor Defaults Dialog” on page
1 Most often, Derive new 2nd floor plan 353.
from the 1st floor plan is used. This
option creates an upper floor with exterior 3. The new floor becomes the current floor
walls of the same type generated over the in floor plan view. If, however, the new
exterior walls of the floor below. Roof floor is created in a 3D view, the camera
directives associated with the walls on the remains on its original floor and does
floor below are also duplicated; however, not move.
interior walls are not. See “Roof Tab” on
page 252. Note: Chief Architect allows only one floor,
• Check Move Highest Floor’s Roof Up the foundation/basement, below the first floor.
to move any roof planes displaying on Keep this in mind when you begin an as-built
the highest floor in the plan up one or plan for a multi-story building.
floor when the new floor is created.
Roof planes displaying on floors other Inserting Floors
than the top floor are unaffected. This A floor can be inserted beneath the current
option is not available when Auto floor in both floor plan view and 3D views.
Rebuild Roofs is enabled. See “Build
Roof Dialog” on page 377. If you are in a 3D view, begin by selecting
Tools> Reference Floors> Change Floor/
When Move highest floor roof up is Reference and select the floor you would
checked, roof planes on the top floor like to insert a floor under as the Current
will move even if roof planes are locked and Floor. See “Change Floor / Reference” on
manually edited roof planes are set to be page 359.
retained. See “Build Tab” on page 378.
To insert a floor
2 Make new (blank) plan for the 2nd
floor - This option is typically selected 1. Select Build> Floor> Insert New
only if none of the exterior walls are directly
above the existing walls on the floor below. Floor . The Insert Floor dialog
This creates a blank floor above the current opens.
floor. If you choose this method, it may be
356
• Make new (blank) plan - Select this

option to insert a blank floor below the
current floor.
3. Click OK. The existing floor any any
floors above it are moved up, and a new
floor is created below.
2. Select one of the two available options: Adding a Foundation

• Derive new x floor plan from the x To add a foundation, select Build> Floor>
floor plan - Select this option to insert
Build Foundation . See “Building a
a new floor below the current floor,
Foundation” on page 366.
based on the exterior walls of the cur-
rent floor.
Exchanging Floors
Select Build> Floor> Exchange The floor that was moved becomes the
With Floor Above or Exchange current floor at its new location. You can
With Floor Below to swap the current floor easily move a floor up or down several floors
with the floor above or below. by using either one of these buttons
repeatedly.
Copying Floors
The Edit Area tools can be used to make Copying Between Plans
copies of entire floors in a plan. See “Edit While you can copy and paste floors from
Area Tools” on page 209. You can use these one plan file to another, this is not always the
tools to: best approach.
• Make a copy of an existing floor to be • To make a copy of the plan for backup or
pasted onto a new floor.
your records, use Save As to save the
• Make a copy of all existing floors in a file using a new name. See “Saving a
plan to be pasted into a different plan. Plan or Layout File” on page 46.
You can also copy the information on a floor • To copy the model into another plan with
by pressing Ctrl + A (Select All), then using multiple structures, consider exporting it
Copy and Paste Hold Position . See as a symbol and importing it into the new
“Paste Hold Position” on page 193. plan. See “Custom Symbols” on page
974.
357
Deleting Floors
Deleting Floors
Select Build> Floor> Delete Current
Floor to remove the current floor When a floor is deleted, all objects on
from the plan. If there is a floor above, it that floor are deleted with it, including
becomes the current floor; if there is no floor locked roof planes and any other objects on
locked layers. See “Locking Layers” on page
below, the floor beneath becomes the current
117.
floor.
Floor and Ceiling Platforms

In many ways, floors in Chief Architect are rectangular polyline that forms a hole in the
defined by the floor platforms below them designated platform.
and the floor and/or ceiling platforms above.
You can also create a hole in a floor or
ceiling platform by drawing a closed CAD
Platform Holes polyline and then using the Convert
Select Build> Floor> Hole in Polyline edit button to convert it into a
Floor Platform or Hole in platform hole. See “Convert Polyline” on
Ceiling Platform, then click and drag a page 205.
Rebuilding Walls, Floors & Ceilings

When you make a change to the walls You can direct the program to rebuild walls,
or to the floor or ceiling platforms in floors and ceilings at any time, however, by
your plan, they may not immediately resize selecting Build> Floor> Rebuild Walls/
or move in the 3D model. The program does Floors/Ceilings .
detect such changes, though, and the next
time you generate a 3D or section/elevation If you do not want the program to rebuild
view, walls, floors and ceilings are rebuilt. walls, floors and ceilings when a 3D view is
created, uncheck Auto Rebuild Floors &
By default, walls, floors and ceilings are also Ceilings in the 3D Settings dialog. This may
rebuilt when an automatic roof is generated. speed up plan view editing for very large
See “Build Roof Dialog” on page 377. plans. See “3D Settings Dialog” on page 744.
The Current Floor

Only one floor can be active at any given Current Floor, and is the only floor that can
time. The active floor is referred to as the be edited.
358
If you want to edit two different floors at the Floor/Reference button, which can be
same time, you can open the plan again. This found between the Down One Floor and the
opens a second window on the current open Up One Floor buttons.
plan that has the same editing abilities as the
first. Only one of these windows can be Floors become available once they have been
active at any given time. built. The Attic and foundation levels are
also accessible using these tools.
Floor Up / Floor Down
Change Floor / Reference
If you are working with
more than one floor, you can If there are multiple floors, select
select Tools> Reference Floors> Up One Tools> Reference Floors> Change
Floor or Down One Floor to switch from Floor/Reference to open the Change Floor/
one floor to another. Reference dialog, where you can select both
the current floor and which floor is used in
You can also change the current floor in floor the Reference Display, as well as control the
plan, cross section/elevation and 3D views. appearance of the Reference Display.
The current floor displays on the Change
The Attic Floor

Chief Architect automatically creates In some situations, you may find it necessary
a floor above the top numbered floor to draw one or more walls on this floor;
level of each plan. This floor is called the however, even if you enclose an area with
Attic floor and has only one purpose: to walls, rooms cannot be created on the Attic
provide a space for automatically generated floor.
Attic walls. See “Attic Walls” on page 238.
If you wish to create an attic loft or storage
Because the Attic floor is not meant to be a area in your plan, you will need do so on a
living area, a warning message will display if numbered floor level.
you try to draw walls or other objects on this
floor.
Reference Floor
When there is more than one floor in a When the Reference Display is turned on, the
model, it is often helpful to see how different floor that you were last on prior to the current
floors relate to each other. Any floor can be floor is used as the Reference Floor. Objects
shown as the Reference Floor along with the on the current floor can snap to objects on the
current floor. Reference Floor; however, objects on the
Reference Floor cannot be selected or edited.
359
Reference Floor
Reference Display Change Floor / Reference

To display the Reference Floor, select By default, the floor below the current
Tools> Reference Floors> Reference floor is the Reference Floor, but any
Display or press F9 on your keyboard. The floor can be referenced using the Change
reference floor can also be toggled on or off Floor/Reference dialog. To open the dialog,
quickly in floor plan view by clicking the select Tools> Reference Floors> Change
Reference Display toggle button on the Floor/Reference button.
utility toolbar.
If the Reference Display is on when a floor
plan view is sent to layout, the Reference 1
Display is always on in that layout view and 2
cannot be turned off.
If the Reference Display is turned on when a
view is printed, it will be included in the
printed output. See “Display Options and
Printing” on page 995. 3
Note: If the current floor and the Reference 4

Floor have edges that line up, the Reference
Floor may be difficult to see on screen. When
lines of two different colors are superimposed
upon each other, discoloration may result.
1 The Reference Floor currently used for
reference is highlighted here. You can
Reference Display Options
select another floor.
The display of objects in the
Reference Display is controlled by 2 The Current Floor is highlighted here.
You can select another floor to make it
layer set. You can control the appearance of
the current floor.
the layer set currently in use by selecting
Tools> Reference Floors> Reference 3 The Reference Display Layer Set,
Display Options. See “Layer Display which controls which layers are visible
Options Dialog” on page 121. in the reference display, shows here. The
Reference Display Set is active by default.
The current Reference Display layer set can
Select another layer set from the drop-down
be specified in both the Change Floor/
list to use it for the reference display.
Reference and Layer Set Management
dialogs. See “Layer Set Management” on
page 119.
360
may cover objects on the current floor

While any layer set can be used as partially or completely.
the Reference Display Layer Set, for
best results you should use the default • Use Object Settings displays the line and
Reference Display Set or create a new fill styles of objects in the Reference Dis-
layer set specifically for reference display play that aren’t using their default line
purposes. See “Layer Sets” on page 118. and fill styles. When this is unchecked,
objects display according to their layer
settings in the Reference Display Set.
4 Display Options allow you to control
how the lines and fill patterns of objects • Use XOR Drawing changes the color of
in the Reference Display appear. lines in the Reference Display that are
• Select Draw First to draw the Reference drawn on top of one another. Lines with
Display before drawing the objects on the identical properties do not display.
current floor. The lines and fill patterns of
objects in the Reference Display display Swap Floor/Reference
behind the current floor.
If one floor is defined as the current
• Select Draw Last to draw the Reference floor and another floor is defined as
Display after the objects on the current the reference floor, select Tools> Reference
floor are drawn. The lines and fill pat- Floors> Swap Floor/Reference to switch
terns of objects in the Reference Display the status of the two floors.
display in front of the current floor, and
361
Chapter 12:
Foundations
There are three foundation types in Chief Chapter Contents

Architect: footing, slab, and piers. All three • Foundation Defaults
can be generated automatically or manually. • Building a Foundation
The foundation type can be specified in the • Displaying Foundations
Foundation Defaults dialog when the • Editing Stem Wall Foundations
foundation is built. • Editing Slab Foundations
There can be only one foundation level in • Aligning Foundation Walls
your plan, Level 0. Foundation walls can be • Deleting Foundations
drawn on upper floors using the Foundation • Foundations and Rooms
Wall tool. • The Slab Tools
• Editing Slabs
• Editing Piers and Pads
Always consult registered geotechnical • Slab Specification Dialog
and civil engineers for information
regarding the proper foundation for your site.
362
Foundation Defaults
Default Settings are accessed by Because the settings in the Foundation
selecting Edit> Default Settings. Defaults dialog determine foundation type,
Select Foundation and click the Edit button this dialog opens automatically when Build>
to open the Foundation Defaults dialog. Floor> Build Foundation is selected.
The Foundation Defaults dialog allows you See “Building a Foundation” on page 366.
to specify stem wall height, footing size, slab
thickness, presence of treated sill plates, and The Foundation Defaults dialog cannot
other characteristics of a foundation. These be used to edit the foundation after it
values determine how a new foundation is has been built. The foundation must be
built and the sizes for foundation walls, slabs deleted and rebuilt. See “Deleting Founda-
and footings added to an existing foundation. tions” on page 369.
Foundation Tab
3 6
4
7
5
1 Three different Foundation Types can • Select Walls with Piers to generate a
be created in Chief Architect. Select the pier and grade beam foundation. The
radio button next to the desired type. floor framing rests directly on top of the
• Select Walls with Footings to produce a grade beam.
foundation composed of stem walls with • Select Monolithic Slabs to build a slab
footings that run continuously under the foundation with a perimeter footing. This
base of the walls. slab is the floor platform for the first
363
Foundation Defaults
floor. It is visible on Floor 0 and can be See “Room Specification Dialog” on

selected and edited. See “Editing Slabs” page 283. To remove this slab, specify
on page 371. the room areas in the basement as “Open
Below”. See “Room Types” on page 271.
Each type of foundation has different default
settings, options, and behaviors.
3 When Walls with Footings is selected,
specify the Footing Size.
2 The Wall settings are available when • Specify the Width and Height of the
Walls with Footings or Walls with Piers
is selected. footing. To generate a foundation with a
stem wall and no visible footing, set the
• Select a Wall Type for automatically
footing width to the same dimension as
generated foundation walls from the
the stem wall.
drop-down list.
• If the Minimum Wall Height is sufficient
to produce an automatic slab floor in the
Type Definitions dialog and change the
basement, the bottom of this slab rests on
definition of the selected wall type. See
the top of the footing. The footing can be
“Wall Type Definitions” on page 241.
subsequently lowered by increasing Stem
Wall Height for the first floor room
Note: If you plan to turn the foundation wall above the foundation.
into a pony wall, a wall type other than
Default (concrete) must be selected. 4 Treated Sill Plate Size - Enter a Width
and Height for the treated sill plate,
• Specify the Wall Thickness of founda- also referred to as a mudsill. If either value is
tion walls and grade beams. Only avail- set to zero, no sill plate is produced. A sill
able when “Adjustable Thickness Wall” plate is only produced if the Main Layer of
is selected above. See “Adjustable Thick- the wall above is a framing type.
ness Walls” on page 242.
5 Check Show “S” Markers on Step
• Specify the Min. Wall Height, which is Foundation to include an “S” symbol
the minimum height for foundation walls in floor plan view anywhere there is a step in
and grade beams and includes the treated foundation wall height.
sill plate.
• If the Minimum Wall Height is at least 6 The Piers options are only available
when Walls with Piers is the selected
72” (1800 mm), a slab floor is generated Foundation Type.
above the footing and the Basement
• Specify the Diameter, Depth and Maxi-
Ceiling Height displays to the right as a
mum Separation of the piers.
reference. This is the distance from the
top of the slab floor to the basement ceil-
7 The Slab options are only available
ing and is equal to the Minimum Wall when Monolithic Slab is the selected
Height minus the Slab Thickness. Foundation Type.
The ceiling height can be changed later.
364
• Specify the Slab Thickness, which is the Walls with Footings is the selected Foun-
thickness of the slab produced above the dation Type.
footing or at the top of the stem wall.
If Slab at top of Stem Wall is selected, all
rooms on the first floor are automatically set
Note: Monolithic slabs are rebuilt whenever to Floor for this room is supplied by the
you Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings foundation room from the floor below, as
noted in the Room Specification dialog. See
• Check Slab at top of Stem Wall to raise “Structure Tab” on page 286.
the slab so its top is flush with the top of
the stem walls. Only available when
Options Tab
The Options tab allows you to include rebar Some options on this tab may be unavailable
and other materials related to the foundation depending on the foundation type selected on
in the Materials List. See “Materials Lists” the Foundation tab.
on page 1048.
1 2 3
4
5
1 #bars/course - Specify the number of Horizontal and Vertical rebar courses in the
rebar in the Footing, the number of stem walls, and the number of rebar layers in
365
Building a Foundation
the slab. If piers are used, specify how many

3 Bar size - Define the rebar size in 1/8th
rebar are used per pier. Rebar does not inches. 4 represents 4/8, or ½ inch.
display in cross section/elevation views, but
Use Mesh - Select the check box to
is added to the Materials List. 4
reinforce the slab floor with mesh
2 Course Spacing - Define the Wall instead of rebar, or uncheck it to use rebar.
Horizontal and Wall Vertical spacing
for the rebar in the stem wall, and in Slabs. If 5 Select either Foam Seal, Termite
Flashing or both. These options are
slabs are to have rebar instead of mesh, this
added to the Materials List, but do not
spacing value applies to both directions.
display in the model.
Building a Foundation
Foundations can be built automatically To build an automatic foundation
or drawn manually. A combination of
the two methods can also be used. 1. Select Build> Floor> Build Founda-
Three foundation types are available: walls tion .
with footings, walls with piers and 2. Specify the desired foundation type and
monolithic slabs. The first two options are other information in the Build
created using walls; the last creates concrete Foundation dialog. The settings in this
slabs with footings. dialog are similar to those in the Foun-
Automatically built foundations are placed dation Defaults dialog. See “Foundation
on Floor 0 and are based on wall positions Defaults” on page 363.
and floor heights on Floor 1. At least one 3. In the New Floor dialog, select Derive
room must be defined on Floor 1 for a new Foundation plan from the 1st
foundation to be automatically generated. If floor plan and click OK to build a foun-
no rooms are defined on Floor 1, a blank dation based on Floor 1.
Floor 0 is created.
If you prefer, you can instead select Make
Once a foundation is generated, you can add new (blank) plan for the Foundation to
walls, piers, and slabs to customize it. create an empty foundation level where you
can manually draw foundation walls or slabs.
There can be only one Floor 0 per plan. If
your plan requires a foundation on more than In most cases, it is preferable to base Floor 0
one floor, you will need to draw the required off the first floor plan and then manually edit
foundation walls or slabs yourself. the foundation as needed.
366
Displaying Foundations
The display of foundation walls, In floor plan view, footings are drawn with
footings and piers is controlled in the dashed lines and walls with solid lines.
Layer Display Options dialog on the Walls,
Automatically generated piers are drawn
Foundation and Footings layers. The
using a dashed line and are centered on the
Footings layer controls the display of
grade beam. The grade beam is represented
footings and foundation piers. The
by two solid lines. It aligns with the wall
Foundation layer controls the display of
above unless specified otherwise.
foundations in 3D views. See “Layer
Editing Stem Wall Foundations

Foundation stem walls can be selected and 2. Specify the desired Stem Wall Height
edited much like other walls. See “Editing in the Room Specification dialog. See
Walls” on page 231. “General Tab” on page 283.
Footing size can be changed on a wall by 3. If you wish to reduce the Stem Wall
wall basis in the Wall Specification dialog. Height, you will first need to reduce the
See “Foundation Tab” on page 255. Ceiling Height value by the same
amount.
Stem Wall Height
If adjacent rooms have stem wall
When a foundation is created, all of Floor 0
heights that differ by at least 1/16 of an
uses the stem wall height specified in the inch, the stem wall separating them uses the
Foundation Defaults dialog, larger of these two values.
This height is measured from the bottom of
floor platform of Floor 1 to top of the stem In 3D views, individual stem walls can be
walls’ footings. If Floor 1 has multiple floor selected and edited. In most cases,this
platform heights, the foundation stem walls method should only be used for stepping the
will be stepped. bottom of the foundation wall. See “Stepped
Walls & Footings” on page 248.
Once a foundation is created, stem wall
heights can be adjusted either on a room-by- In addition, in 3D views you can select and
room basis or for individual walls. edit the top and bottom heights of an
individual stem wall’s footing. This method
To change a room’s stem wall height is helpful if you need two different footing
depths in the same stepped wall.
1. Select a room on Floor 0 and click the
Open Object edit button.
367
Editing Slab Foundations
Aligning Foundation Walls

By default, the exterior surface of the main
layer of the foundation stem walls aligns
with the exterior surface of the main layer of
the walls above. See “Wall Type Definitions”
on page 241.
If there is only one layer for both the stem
wall and the first floor wall above it, the
exterior surfaces of the walls align. The
footing is centered on the stem wall unless
this option is unchecked in the Wall
Specification dialog. See “Foundation Tab”
on page 255.
Editing Slab Foundations

Monolithic slabs can be edited in both 2D moved, you can update the slabs by selecting
and 3D views. See “Editing Closed-Polyline Build> Floor> Rebuild Slabs.
Based Objects” on page 160. In the Rebuild Monolithic Slabs dialog,
The footing size for a monolithic slab can be click Rebuild Slabs to delete all existing
specified in the Slab Specification dialog. slabs and rebuild them to match the current
See “Slab Specification Dialog” on page footprint of the walls.
372. Any changes you may have made to the slab
Monolithic slab foundations can also be are lost when slabs are rebuilt.
updated by editing the footprint of the floor
above then deleting and rebuilding the
foundation.
Rebuild Slabs
If the walls defining the area of a
monolithic slab foundation or a room
specified as having a slab foundation are
Aligning Foundation Walls

By default, the exterior surface of the main
layer of the foundation stem walls aligns
368
with the exterior surface of the main layer of exterior surfaces of the walls align. The
the walls above. See “Wall Type Definitions” footing is centered on the stem wall unless
on page 241. this option is unchecked in the Wall
Specification dialog. See “Foundation Tab”
If there is only one layer for both the stem
on page 255.
wall and the first floor wall above it, the
Deleting Foundations
Select Build> Floor> Delete Founda- Deleting and rebuilding the foundation is
tion to delete the entire foundation often the quickest way to update the model
floor. when substantial changes are made to Floor 1
after the foundation is built.
You can also select and delete individual
foundation walls and slabs by clicking the
Note: To change the foundation type, you
Delete edit button or pressing the Delete should delete and rebuild the foundation.
key. See “Deleting Objects” on page 196.
Foundations and Rooms

When a foundation plan is created, rooms Two options on the Structure tab of the
included in the Living Area calculation Room Specification dialog affect the
generate a spread footing, grade beam, or foundation: Slab foundation for this room
slab foundation below them. Garage rooms if the foundation is a monolithic slab, and
generate slab foundations, but exterior rooms This foundation ‘room’ supplies the floor
such as Decks do not. for the room above if the foundation is
composed of footings or piers. See
Foundation walls are not generated under
“Structure Tab” on page 286.
interior walls on Floor 1 unless:
• They separate the garage from the rest of Garages
the plan;
A room labeled “Garage” on the first floor
• They separate rooms with different floor
produces an automatic footings or pier
heights.
foundation with a slab floor.
To produce this foundation, the following
Note: To remove the concrete slab or part of
the slab in the basement area, select a base- options are checked on the Structure tab of
ment room and define it as Open Below in the the Room Specification dialog for the
Room Specification dialog. foundation “room” under a Garage:
• Ceiling over this room is not checked.
369
The Slab Tools
• This foundation ‘room’ supplies the The floor height of the garage and the top of
floor for the room above is checked. stem wall must be properly defined relative
to the zero level of the first floor. Typically,
On the Structure tab of the Room
the garage area in the foundation must be
Specification dialog for the Garage itself,
selected and the floor height or slab to stem
“Floor for This Room is Supplied by the
wall top raised if it is to be less than 24"
Foundation ‘Room’ from the Floor
below the zero level of the main floor.
Below” should be checked. See “Structure
Tab” on page 286.
Basement Rooms
These settings create a 4" slab to sit on top
of the footings, with a short stem wall around When a foundation is assigned a Minimum
the garage. Stud walls are placed on top of Wall Height of 72” (1800 mm) or greater, a
the stem wall when framing is built. slab floor is automatically generated. The
resulting basement can be divided into
If Floor for This Room is Supplied by the
separate rooms using Interior Walls or
Foundation “Room” from the Floor Below
any wall type you wish.
is selected, a Floor Overview of the
foundation plan includes the slab. A Floor If the rooms in a basement have different
floor heights, it is best to separate them using
Overview on Floor 1, on the other hand,
shows no garage floor. walls specified as Foundation Walls .
The Slab Tools

Select Build> Slab to access the Slab Once created, slabs can be edited like other
Tools. The Slab Tools are designed for closed polylines. See “Editing Closed-
more generic purposes than foundations and Polyline Based Objects” on page 160.
should not be substituted for a foundation
plan. The settings in the Foundation Slab Holes
Defaults dialog do not affect slabs created
with the Slab Tools. A hole can be placed in a slab or
in the floor of a foundation slab
with footings. Select Build> Structure>
Slabs
Slab Hole or Build> Structure> Slab Hole
Select Build> Structure> Slab or With Footing, then either click or click and
Build> Structure> Slab With drag within an existing slab to create a hole.
Footing, then either click or click and drag a
rectangle to draw a slab. See “Rectangular Piers & Pads
Piers and pads can be manually
placed under walls, railings, or
370
beams on any floor. Select Build> Slabs and the

Structure> Round Pier or Build> Materials List
Structure> Square Pad and click in floor
plan view to place a pier or pad. If the slab material type is specified as
Concrete or Volume, the materials list
The pier or pad placed uses the specified in calculates the total volume of the slab and all
the Foundation Defaults dialog. footings. See “Define Material Dialog” on
For information about editing Piers and Pads, page 719.
see “Editing Piers and Pads” on page 371.
Editing Slabs
Slabs and Slab Holes can be selected in 2D 3D views. See “Editing Closed-Polyline
and 3D views both individually and as a Based Objects” on page 160.
group and can be edited using the edit
handles, the edit toolbar and the Slab Using the Edit Tools
Specification dialog. See “Slab Specification
Dialog” on page 372. One or more selected Slabs or Slab Holes
can be edited in a variety of ways using the
buttons on the edit toolbar. As with most
Using the Mouse
objects, slabs can be copied, replicated,
Slabs and Slab Holes can be edited like other moved, deleted, etc. See “Edit Toolbar
closed-polyline base objects in both 2D and Buttons” on page 1140.
Editing Piers and Pads

Round Piers and Square Pads can be selected allow the pier or pad to be resized and moved
individually and in groups in 2D and 3D along the wall it is placed beneath. See
views and edited using their edit handles and “Editing Line Based Objects” on page 147.
edit toolbars.
In 3D views, piers and pads can be edited
There are several ways to move piers and like CAD boxes. See “Editing Box-Based
pads; however, they must always be Objects” on page 164.
positioned under a wall. A pier or pad can
only be moved away from the wall it is Using Dimensions
placed beneath if it is moved to another wall.
In floor plan view, piers and pads can also be
moved using dimensions. See “Moving
Using the Mouse
In floor plan view, piers and pads can be
edited like CAD lines. Three edit handles
371
Slab Specification Dialog

If you move a foundation wall or beam,
any piers or pads it contains move with A selected pier or pad can be edited in a
it. variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
toolbar. As with most objects, piers and pads
can be copied, replicated, moved, deleted,
etc. See “Edit Toolbar Buttons” on page
1140.
Slab Specification Dialog

Select a slab and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Slab Specification
dialog.
General Tab
1
2
1 Check Hole in Slab to convert the 3 Thickness - Specify the thickness of

selected slab into a slab hole. A slab the selected slab.
hole must be contained within a larger slab.
4 Has Footing - Check this box if you
Top Height - Specify the height of the want the slab to have footings, and
2
selected slab’s top surface. specify the Height and Width for those
footings.
372
Polyline Tab Line Style Tab

For information about the Line Style tab, see
“Line Specification Dialog” on page 888.
Fill Style Tab

For information about the Fill Style tab, see
“Fill Style Tab” on page 902.
Materials Tab
Use this tab to select a material to apply to
The perimeter, total area, and volume of the the terrain surface in 3D views. This material
selected slab displays here. The volume is is not calculated in the Materials List.
the amount of concrete required to pour the
slab. For information about the Materials tab, see
Selected Line Tab
For information about using the Selected
Line tab, see “Polyline Specification Dialog”
on page 901.
373
Chapter 13:
Roofs
Chief Architect’s manual and automatic Roof Chapter Contents

Tools allow you to draw almost any roof • Roof Defaults
style. • Automatic vs. Manual Roofs
Proficiency with the Roof Tools can be • The Roof Tools
attained only through practice, but mastering • Build Roof Dialog
these tools saves you time and effort in plan • Roof Planes
development. • Displaying Roof Planes
• Editing Roof Planes
• Roof Plane Specification Dialog
Verify that all roof planes join as • Automatic Roofs
intended. The program does not con-
• Roof Baseline Polylines
firm correct geometry between manually
designed or edited roof planes. It is possible • Roof Baseline Specification Dialog
to design and edit roof planes with hips and • Curved Roof Planes
valleys that do not meet properly. • Ceiling Planes
• Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog
• Gable/Roof Line
• Skylights
• Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog
• Dormers
• Editing Auto Dormers
• Dormer Specification Dialog
• Roof Returns and other Details
• Roof Pitches in Degrees
374
Roof Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings, to open
the Default Settings dialog for a Iif Auto Rebuild Roofs is checked in the
variety of drawing tools, several of which Build Roof dialog and you change floor
directly affect roof generation. or ceiling heights, floor or ceiling platform
depths, wall positions or roof directives in
walls, the roof rebuilds to reflect your
Build Roof Dialog changes. See “Rebuilding Roofs” on page
401.
While not listed in the Default Settings
dialog, the Build Roof dialog functions as
the defaults dialog for roofs. Many, but not Wall Specification Dialog
all, initial default values for both manually By default, when an automatic roof is built, a
drawn and automatically generated roofs are roof plane is generated over each exterior
set in this dialog. See “Build Roof Dialog” wall, creating a hip roof.
on page 377.
Any deviations from this default hip roof,
such as a gable or a different pitch, can be
Framing Defaults
specified in the Wall Specification dialog for
Default settings for framing can be specified any exterior wall. See “Roof Tab” on page
in either the Build Roof or the Framing 252
Defaults dialog. Framing defaults control the
depth of roof planes as well as the depth of Dormer Defaults
floor and ceiling platforms, which influence
roof plane heights. See “Framing Defaults” The settings in the Dormer Defaults dialog
on page 461. determine the initial settings for automatic
dormers and are much like those in the
Dormer Specification dialog. See “Dormer
Floor Defaults
The initial heights of floors and ceilings,
The Dormer Defaults dialog can be opened
which influence roof heights, are specified in
from the Default Settings dialog or by
the Floor Defaults dialog for each floor. See
double-clicking either of the Auto
“Floor Defaults Dialog” on page 353.
Dormer tools.
Automatic vs. Manual Roofs

Chief Architect can create just about any roof including curved roof planes, can be created
style. Most common roof styles such as hips manually. The manual roof tools allow you
and gables can easily be generated to create any roof system that can be
automatically. More complex roof styles, represented using roof planes.
375
The Roof Tools
Automatically Bay, bow, and box windows also produce

Generated Roofs roof planes automatically. For information
about these windows and the roof styles that
The quickest and easiest way to create a roof can be used with them, see “Bay, Box, Bow
is automatically. By default, a roof plane is Windows & Roofs” on page 330.
generated over each exterior wall, creating a
hip roof. The program automatically joins Manually Drawn Roofs
the roof planes at ridges and valleys. See
“Build Roof Dialog” on page 377. Any roof system that can be created
automatically can also be created manually.
Any deviations from the default hip roof can Each roof plane is drawn and edited
be specified on the Roof tab of the Wall individually, offering full control over the
Specification dialog for any exterior wall. process and limiting the possibilities only to
Here, you can specify a Full Gable Wall, your imagination.
High/Shed Gable Wall, or other options
instead of a default hip roof. You can also
specify a different overhang, pitch, an upper Note: You cannot manually draw or edit roof
planes when Auto Rebuild Roofs is enabled
pitch, and the elevation where the upper
in the Build Roof dialog. See “Build Tab” on
pitch begins for the roof plane that rests on page 378.
the selected wall. See “Roof Tab” on page
252.
Using Both Techniques
Roofs can also be automatically generated
Another useful option is to start with an
based on a roof baseline polyline. When a
automatically generated roof and use manual
roof baseline polyline is used, information
design techniques to finish it. Using both
that determines where and how roof planes
automatic roof generation and the manual
are generated is contained in the Roof
roof drawing and editing techniques, you can
Baseline Specification dialog. See “Roof
quickly design highly customized roof
Baseline Polylines” on page 401.
systems.
The Roof Tools

Select Build> Roof to access the Roof Roof Plane
Tools.
Select Build> Roof> Roof Plane to
draw a roof plane manually. See
Build Roof
“Roof Planes” on page 385. You can also
Select Build> Roof> Build Roof to double-click the Roof Plane button to open
open the Build Roof dialog and the Build Roof dialog.
specify the settings for automatically
generated and manually drawn roofs. See
“Build Roof Dialog” on page 377.
376
Auto Dormer
Note: You cannot use the Roof Plane tool
when Auto Rebuild Roofs is enabled in the Select Build> Roof> Auto Dormer
Build Roof dialog. See “Manually Drawn and click within a roof plane to place a
Roofs” on page 376. dormer. See “Dormers” on page 417.
Ceiling Plane Edit All Roof Planes

Select Build> Roof>Ceiling Plane to Select Build> Roof> Edit All Roof
draw a ceiling plane manually. Ceiling Planes to open the Roof Plane
planes are drawn and behave much like roof Specification dialog and edit all roof planes
planes. See “Ceiling Planes” on page 408. in the entire plan at once. See “Roof Plane
Gable/Roof Line
Select Build> Roof> Gable/Roof
Delete Roof Planes
Line to draw a gable line that Select Build> Roof> Delete Roof
generates a gable along a baseline edge when Planes to delete all roof planes in the
roofs are automatically generated. See plan. See “Delete Roof Planes” on page 377.
“Gable/Roof Line” on page 412.
Delete Ceiling Planes
Skylights
Select Build> Roof> Delete Ceiling Planes
Select Build> Roof> Skylight, then to delete all manually drawn ceiling planes in
draw a rectangle over an existing roof the plan. See “Delete Ceiling Planes” on
plane to create a skylight. The skylight, sky- page 377.
light shaft, and ceiling hole (if a ceiling
exists) are drawn at the same time. See Fix Roofs
“Skylights” on page 414.
Select Build> Roof> Fix Roofs to
Auto Floating Dormer remove breaks where a single edge of
one roof plane meets the broken edge of
Select Build> Roof> Auto Floating another along a ridge, hip or valley. Fix
Dormer and click within an existing Roofs does not affect eave edges. See
roof plane to place an auto floating dormer. “Aligning Roof Edges” on page 388.
See “Dormers” on page 417.
Build Roof Dialog

The Build Roof dialog is used to Roof dialog, select Build> Roof> Build
automatically produce roof planes and Roof.
roof baseline polylines. To open the Build
377
Build Roof Dialog
Roof planes and roof baseline polylines are Use the Build Roof dialog to automatically
generated based on the roof directive settings produce roof planes and roof plane baselines
for each of the exterior walls in the plan. See based on the roof directive settings for each
“Wall Specification Dialog - Roof Tab” on of the exterior walls in the plan. See “Wall
page 397. Specification Dialog - Roof Tab” on page
397.
You can also double-click the Roof Tools
If you make changes to any of the settings,
button or the Roof Plane button to open you will need to build the roof again for them
this dialog. to take effect.
The settings in the Build Roof dialog act as The settings in this dialog are similar to those
defaults for both manually drawn and found in the Roof Plane Specification
automatic roofs. dialog. See “Roof Plane Specification
Build Tab
1 8
9
2
3 10
3
4 11
5 12
13
6 14
7
15
16
1 Check Build Roof Planes to build a

new roof structure over the entire
378
model. Unless you specify otherwise, the

6 Pitch - Enter a value to describe the
program discards the existing roof planes pitch in a ratio over 12. This affects all
and produces new ones. roof planes as they are created but does not
update existing roof planes. For a conversion
2 Specify whether roof baseline polylines to degrees, see “Roof Pitches in Degrees” on
are created or used. See “Roof Baseline
page 426.
Polylines” on page 401.
• Check Make Roof Baseline Polylines to 7 Roof Overhang - The overhang is
delete the existing roof and to create roof measured from the exterior Main Layer
baseline polyline(s) based on the exterior wall surface horizontally to the end of the top
wall layout and roof information defined of the rafter. It does not include frieze
in those walls. If checked, Build Roof thickness, gutters, sheathing or siding. See
Planes becomes unchecked. “The Main Layer” on page 242.
• Check Use Existing Roof Baselines to • Eave is the overhang at the eaves and is
produce a roof plan based on your roof always the overhang for a roof plane hav-
plane baseline polyline(s) instead of the ing the default Pitch specified above. If
exterior wall layout. the pitch for a particular roof plane is set
differently, its overhang may try to main-
3 Check Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings tain its fascia at the same height. Over-
to rebuild the walls and floor and hang can be greater for a shallower pitch,
ceiling platforms of your model before the lesser for a greater pitch.
roof is built. It is independent of Build Roof
• Gable is the overhang dimension at gable
Planes and helps ensure that your roof is
ends or rake walls.
generated based on the most up-to-date
model. See “Rebuilding Walls, Floors &
8 Auto Rebuild Roofs - If you check this
Ceilings” on page 358. option, the program automatically
rebuilds the roof if you make a change that
4 Check Build Fascia, Gutters, Frieze affects the generation of roofs, such as
to regenerate fascia, gutters, and frieze
changes to exterior walls or ceiling heights.
boards. See “Fascia, Gutters & Frieze” on
page 424.
9 Check Lock Roof Planes to lock the
“Roof Planes” layer and prevent
You can check this box to rebuild Fascia,
changes from being made to the roof plan
Gutters, Frieze without rebuilding the roof.
either manually or automatically. See “Layer
This function is automatically invoked after Display Options Dialog” on page 121.
you manually edit roof planes or draw new
When Lock Roof Planes is selected, Build
roof planes if Auto Rebuild Walls/Floors/
Roof Planes cannot be selected.
Ceilings is checked in the 3D Settings
dialog. See “Options Tab” on page 745. If you check Move highest floor roof up
when you create a new floor, roof planes on
5 Uncheck Allow Low Roof Planes only the highest floor will move up, even if they
when an upper floor overhangs roof
are locked. See “Adding Floors” on page
planes below.
355.
379
Build Roof Dialog
10 Check Retain Manually Drawn Roof 13 Raise Off Plate - Enter a positive value
Planes and/or Retain Edited Roof in this field to produce the trusses with
Planes to retain manually drawn and/or an energy heel to allow for more insulation.
automatic roof planes that have been The distance is measured along the outside
manually edited, including roof planes over main wall layer, up from the top plate up to
exploded dormers, when roof planes are the bottom side of the top chord.
automatically generated.
Enter a negative Raise Off Plate value to
If a newly generated roof plane is coplanar control the Birdsmouth Depth. For example,
with a retained plane, and area by which they for the Birdsmouth Depth of 3”, enter -3”.
overlap is at least half the area of least half of The location of the baseline may change if
either of them, the new roof plane is deleted you use the Raise Off Plate setting to
and only the retained plane is kept. specify the birdsmouth depth. See
“Birdsmouth Depth” on page 391.
11 Check Ignore Top Floor to ignore the
top floor when roof planes are To control the Birdsmouth Depth in this
generated. Roof planes are built on the top manner, you must also check Same Roof
plates of the walls below the top floor. Height at External Walls.
12 Check Trusses to raise the roof so that Note: If trusses is not checked, and Raise Off
the bottom edge of the truss top chord
(or rafter) is flush with the top of the wall. Plate is set to zero, the program generates a
birdsmouth cut. To eliminate the birdsmouth
Incorrect--Trusses is cut, you must set Raise Off Plate to at least
not checked. 1/16” (1 mm).
14 Specify how you would like the eaves

of roof planes with different pitches to
Correct--Trusses meet. See “Aligning Eaves” on page 389.
is checked.
• Check Same Roof Height at External
Walls to keep bearing walls the same
height and change horizontal roof over-
hang distances as needed so that eaves
meet correctly. See “Aligning Eaves” on
When Trusses is checked, the size of the roof page 389.
rafter framing is the Top Chord size from
the Trusses tab in the Framing dialog. When checked, this option ignores any
When Trusses is cleared, the size of the roof overhang values you may have entered in
framing is the Rafter size from the Roof tab the Wall Specification dialog. See “Wall
the Framing dialog. If trusses are laid out Specification Dialog - Roof Tab” on page
without selecting the Trusses box, the roof 397.
uses the rafter size instead. The “Incorrect”
diagram shows this problem. Uncheck this option to raise or lower
380
some roof planes relative to the wall’s top segement that covers a curved wall. This
plate, allowing all horizontal overhangs value is only used when roofs are
to be the same unless a non-default value automatically generated. A smaller angle
has been entered in the Wall produces more roof planes.
• Check Same Height Eaves to keep the 16 Min. Alcove - Specify the minimum
width of an alcove (depression into an
eave height for all roof planes the same. otherwise straight exterior wall). Any alcove
Roof planes are raised and lowered as less than the specified width is treated as
needed so that eaves meet correctly. though the exterior wall continues straight
across. Alcoves that measure wider than this
The eave height used when this box is value are not roofed over; they cause a
checked is that of a roof plane using the change in roof planes.
default Pitch and Overhang values. When
this box is checked, all roof planes are Following is an example showing this
affected, including those that do not need difference. If Min Alcove is 36", a 36" wide
adjustment in order to align with adjacent alcove requires a change in the roof line.
planes. Each wall of the alcove has an eave. On the
right, the alcove is less than the 36"
When Same Height Eaves is checked, minimum, so the roof passes right over it.
any non-default overhang values speci-
fied in the Wall Specification dialog are
used. Roof planes are raised or lowered
so that the eave height is the same,
regardless of the horizontal overhang.
15 Segment Angle at Curved Wall -

Enter the maximum angle for a roof
381
Build Roof Dialog
Options Tab
3
1
4
1 Square Cut or Plumb Cut - Select • You can specify the Length of the boxed
either option to determine how the eaves or check Default to Overhang to
rafter tails are cut. This change displays only extend the boxed eave from the edge of
after you have rebuilt roofs. Individual roof the roof to the exterior main layer of the
planes can have this defined in their own wall, covering the overhang area.
Roof Plane Specification dialog.
2 Check Boxed Eave to produce

horizontal boxed eaves or uncheck it
for sloping eaves. You can also change this
for individual roof planes in the Roof Plane
• Higher Eaves Boxed - If the selected
roof plane contains more than one eave,
check this box to box the higher eaves as
With Boxed Eave checked
well.
382
is available in the Roof Plane Specification

dialog.
• Uncheck Gutter to not include gutters on
subsequently-built roof planes. This
option affects both the Materials List and
3D views.
• Check Edge Flashing to calculate edge
flashing in the Materials List..
• Check Ridge Vent to calculate ridge
With Higher Eaves Boxed checked
venting in the Materials List.
3 Specify the Thicknesses of the roof’s • Check Ridge Cap Shingles to count
non-framing structural components. ridge cap shingles in the Materials List.
The materials for these components are
• Check Metal Drip Edge at Eave to cal-
specified on the Materials tab.
culate metal drip edge along the eaves in
• Specify the Thickness of the Roof Sur- the Materials List.
face material.
• Check Metal Drip Edge at Gable to cal-
• Check Sheathing to include a sheathing culate metal drip edge along any gable
material above the roof framing of subse- eaves in the Materials List.
quently built roof planes and specify its
• Check Valley Flashing to calculate val-
Thickness.
ley flashing in the Materials List.
• Check Soffits to include soffits under the
eaves of subsequently built roof plane 5 3D Display - Check Show All Ridges
eaves and specify their Thickness. to display a line along all ridges and
valleys in Vector Views. This includes the
• Check Ceiling to include a ceiling mate- hip ridges between roof planes forming the
rial under the roof framing on subse- conical roof above a curved wall.
quently built roof planes and specify its
Thickness. Framing Tab
4 Specify the material components to The settings on the Framing tab of the Build
Supply for subsequently-built roof
Roof dialog are the same as those on the
planes. When checked, these items are
Roof tab of the Build Framing dialog.
calculated in the Materials List. See
Changes made in one dialog are also applied
“Materials Lists” on page 1048. Only Gutter
in the other. See “Roof Tab” on page 477.
Rafter Tails Tab

The settings on the Rafter Tails tab allow you The settings on this tab function like those on
to specify a rafter tail profile for exposed the Moldings tab found in many dialogs in
rafter ends under roof eaves. See “Rafter the program. See “Moldings Tab” on page
Tails” on page 425. 540.
383
Build Roof Dialog
1
2
3
1 The name of the selected rafter tail 3 Profile Specification - A preview of

Profile displays here. the selected profile and sizing
information are found here.
2 Add, replace or remove a rafter tail • Uncheck Stretch to Fit Rafter to use the
profile.
rafter tail profile’s default size. When
• Click Add New to select a profile from
checked, the profile is sized by the pro-
the Select Library Object dialog. See
gram to match the roof rafters.
“Select Library Object Dialog” on page
689. Only available when no profile is • The default Height and Width of the raf-
currently selected. ter tail profile display here for reference,
but cannot be changed. If you need differ-
• Click Select to replace the currently
ent dimensions, you can create your own
selected profile with a new one from the
profile. See “Molding Profiles” on page
Select Library Object dialog. Only avail-
533.
able when a profile is already selected.
• Specify the distance that the rafter tail
• Click Delete to delete the currently
profile should Extend past the inside sur-
selected profile. Only available when a
face of the subfascia. This distance is
profile is already selected.
measured along the top of the rafter tail,
384
so it is greater than the length as mea- Materials Tab

sured in floor plan view.
The settings on the Materials tab allow you
to specify materials for the roof’s various
Gutter Tab
components. For information about using the
The settings on the Gutter tab allow you to Materials tab, see “Materials Tab” on page
specify a gutter profile for the eave ends of 709.
roof planes. The settings on this tab are like
those on the Moldings tab found in many Roof Styles Tab
dialogs in the program. See “Moldings Tab”
on page 540. The Roof Styles tab provides links to tutorial
information about creating different roof
styles automatically. Click on a roof style to
Frieze Tab
launch the online Help to a page with
The settings on the Frieze tab allow you to information about the roof style you selected.
specify a frieze molding profile. The settings See “Roof Tutorial” on page 191.
on this tab are like those on the Moldings tab
found in many dialogs in the program. See
“Moldings Tab” on page 540.
Roof Planes
When creating a roof, it is helpful to know 2. As in the following example, click and
how to draw a roof plane manually and be drag a baseline from point 1 to point 2.
familiar with its parts.
Drawing Roof Planes

Roof planes are CAD-based objects
that are created and edited like much
closed polylines, and also have pitch,
elevation and structural properties.
Before drawing roof planes, you should set
your roof defaults so that the 3D attributes of
Line 1 - 2 is the baseline
your roof planes are correct. See “Roof
Defaults” on page 375. 3. Release the mouse button at point 2 and
move your cursor in the upslope direc-
To draw a roof plane tion. As you move the cursor, a preview
outline of the roof plane displays.
1. Select Build> Roof> Roof Plane .
385
Roof Planes
4. Click at point 3 to build the roof plane.

Point 3 is located on the ridge edge of Straight up from outside
the roof plane. of main wall layer at top
surface of roof framing
Note: You cannot manually draw roof palnes

when Auto Rebuild Roofs is enabled in the
Build Roof dialog. See “Build Tab” on page
378.
The upslope mark displays at the center

point of the baseline and indicates the
upslope direction of the roof plane.
The distance from the outer main layer of the Location of Roof Baseline in cross-section
wall to the end of the eave is the overhang. In floor plan view, the baseline displays as as
separate line within its roof plane and can be
The Baseline selected and edited independent of the roof
plane. In most cases, moving a roof plane’s
The initial height of any roof plane - manual
baseline is not recommended; however, it
or automatic - is determined by its baseline.
can be resized without causing any
The baseline of the roof plane is normally unexpected results.
located over the outer main layer of the wall
A baseline has a tick mark at its center point
and is used as the pivot point for the roof
which indicates the direction that the roof
plane when the pitch is changed.
plane slopes upward. You cannot redefine the
The baseline height is determined by the direction of the slope. If the upslope tick is
following formula: pointing the wrong direction, either rotate the
roof plane or delete it and draw another.
Elevation of the wall top plate
+ Vertical Rafter Depth When drawing the baseline of a roof plane,
here are some things to consider:
- Vertical Birdsmouth Depth
• A baseline does not have to be drawn
= Baseline Height over a wall, although it often is.
In a cross section, the baseline is located • A baseline drawn along a wall should be
directly above the outer surface of the main drawn over the outer edge of the wall’s
wall layer, at the top surface of the roof main layer. It tries to snap to that layer.
framing.
• The elevation of the top plate is defined
by the ceiling height in the room. If the
roof plane is not drawn over a wall, it’s
height is based on the default ceiling
height value for the current floor.
386
• If a baseline is drawn over the top of any plane at the point where you started
other roof plane, the baseline height drawing.
equals the height of the existing roof
Displaying Roof Planes

Roof planes are drawn on the “Roof The appearance of curved roof planes in 3D
Planes” layer by default, although you views can be controlled by adjusting the
can place a roof plane on any layer. See Facet Angle in the Roof Plane
“Line Style Tab” on page 411. Specification dialog. See “General Tab” on
page 393.
You can also choose to display frieze
molding, gutters, gable lines, the overhang
area, roof openings, valley truss bases and Display on Floor Above/Below
roof baseline polylines. See “Layer Display In floor plan view, roof planes
Options Dialog” on page 121. can display on any floor without
If the “Roof Planes” layer is turned off and affecting their height in 3D.
Auto Rebuld Roofs feature is turned on, To move the display of a roof plane to a new
changes made to the plan that cause the roof floor, select it in floor plan view and click
to rebuild will not automatically turn on the either the Display on Floor Above or
display of the roof planes. See “Rebuilding Display on Floor Below edit button. The
Roofs” on page 401. display of group-selected roof planes can
also be controlled in this manner.
Editing Roof Planes

A selected roof plane can be edited in 2D and edited roof planes and do not want them to be
3D using edit handles, edit toolbar buttons, replaced, be sure to check Retain Edited
the Roof Plane Specification dialog and the Roof Planes. See “Build Tab” on page 378.
Material Painter .
2D Shape and 3D Orientation
Roof planes cannot be edited while There are two basic aspects to editing roofs:
Auto Rebuild Roofs is turned on. If you 2D shape and 3D orientation.
try to do so, the program will prompt you to • The 2D shape of a roof plane can be
turn it off.
edited just like a CAD polyline. As a roof
plane is reshaped in 2D, the program
By default, all roof planes are deleted and maintains its height and pitch in 3D. See
replaced whenever the roof is rebuilt using “Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects”
the Build Roof dialog. If you have manually on page 160.
387
Editing Roof Planes
• The 3D orientation of a roof plane is

defined by its height and pitch and can be If opposite sides of a roof plane are par-
edited in the Roof Plane Specification allel, Temporary Dimensions will display
dialog. See “General Tab” on page 393. between them when one side is selected.
An understanding of these two concepts Sometimes, what appears to be a single,

allows you to design almost any kind of roof. straight roof plane edge may actually be
A roof plane’s display and appearance can be broken into two or more edges, which can
customized. See “Displaying Roof Planes” affect your ability to align the edge properly.
on page 387 and “Roof Plane Specification A single edge will have three edit handles; if
Dialog” on page 392. more than three display, more than one edge
is present. An extra handle can be removed
Adding a Step to an Edge removed manually by dragging it into an
adjacent handle. You can also use Build>
You can make a step, or jog, in the edge of a
roof plane by selecting it, clicking the Break Roof> Fix Roofs . See “Fix Roofs” on
page 377.
Line edit button and then clicking on the
roof edge. See “Break Line” on page 184. When Bumping/Pushing is enabled and
CAD Stops Move is checked in the Roof
Plane Specification dialog, a roof plane will
bump against another roof plane, CAD or
CAD based object as it is moved. Roof
planes cannot push these objects, however.
See “Bumping/Pushing” on page 178.
Join Roof Planes

Two roof planes can be joined at
adjacent edges in both 2D and 3D
using the Join Roof Planes edit button. To
use this tool, you must first identify which
Aligning Roof Edges edges of the roof planes can extend to meet at
After moving a corner edit handle, it may be a ridge, hip, or valley. The program will try
difficult to make an edge parallel to an eave to join the two planes along the line where
or a wall. Use the Make Parallel/ they intersect whenever possible.
Perpendicular edit button to align a roof
To use Join Roof Planes
plane edge with a wall, another roof plane
edge, or another object with a straight edge. 1. Select a roof plane on the edge to be
See “Using Make Parallel/Perpendicular” on joined to another plane.
page 181.
388
2. Click the Join Roof Planes edit but-

ton (or press 2 on the keyboard).
3. Click on a second roof plane on the edge
that should join to the selected edge of
the first plane.
If the roof planes are not close enough, or
their shape is not correct, you may need to
align their edges, remove extra edges, or roof plane
move them closer. intersections
When roof planes adjust, the program joins marked with
an “X”
the planes at the proper location and the
adjacent edges extend or contract to remain
connected. If the joining of the two will Aligning Eaves
completely eliminate or reverse an adjacent It is not uncommon for roof plans to feature
edge, the connection cannot be made. more than one pitch. In order for the eaves of
roof planes with different pitches to meet
Locating Intersections correctly at ridges and hips, you must control
When roof planes of differing slopes meet, the roof planes’ heights and their horizontal
they create a ridge, hip, or valley. While the overhang distances. Two options in the Build
Roof dialog allow you to control how the
Join Roof Planes edit button is normally eaves of automatically generated roof planes
used to move edges to make the planes meet, align. See “Build Tab” on page 378.
these edges can also be moved by placing
• Same Roof Height at Exterior Walls
snap points where the ridge, hip or valley
maintains the default height of roof
should be. Once you know where the planes
planes where they bear on exterior walls.
will meet, you can drag edges or corners to
The horizontal overhang distances of any
those points, joining the roof planes.
non-default roof planes are adjusted so
that they continue to join correctly with
To find a roof plane intersection
default roof planes.
1. Select the roof plane you would like to • Same Eave Heights maintains the
place meeting points on. default roof plane height at the eaves as
2. Click the edge of another roof plane to well as any non-default horizontal over-
project this edge forward in space and hang distances . All roof planes are raised
place an “X” where it would meet the or lowered so that they all have the same
selected roof plane. height at the eaves as default roof planes.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the ridge edge Roof planes that do not join other roof planes
and both fascia edges. You should have with different pitches at ridges or hips are
three points located on the larger roof referred to as Independent.
plane, the “tie-in” points.
389
Editing Roof Planes
• When Same Roof Height at Exterior planes displaying on the top floor up one
Walls is checked, Independent roof floor. See “Adding Floors” on page 355.
planes are not affected and will maintain
any non-default overhang values. Change Roof Pitch or
• When both Same Roof Height at Exte- Height Dialog
rior Walls and Same Eave Heights are
This warning dialog displays when you
checked, the overhangs of Independent
attempt to snap the corner or an edge of a
roof planes will be adjusted to preserve
roof plane near the edge of another roof
their heights at both the exterior walls
plane that does not match vertically. The
and the eaves.
Change Roof Pitch or Height dialog gives
you the option to move the roof plane
Move to be Coplanar vertically, or pivot it about a point and
The Move to be Coplanar edit button change the pitch.
allows you to move the selected roof In this case, the current roof plane would
plane to be coplanar (in the same plane) with have to raise its pitch or height in order to
the next selected roof plane. You can use this meet the second roof plane at the corner that
tool in both 2D and 3D views. The results you moved.
can be easily seen in a cross section view.
The two roof planes must have parallel
baselines for this to work.
1
Raising/Lowering
Roof Planes
2
Roof planes can be raised or lowered in the
Roof Plane Specification dialog. Begin by
locking the Pitch, then change the value of
the Baseline Height. See “General Tab” on 3
page 393. 4
6
5
You can open the specification dialog
for all roor planes in an entire plan by
selecting Build> Roof> Edit All Roof Planes. 1 The amount of vertical displacement
between the selected roof plane and
another nearby roof plane displays here.
You can also raise or lower roof planes in the
Transform/Replicate Object dialog. See Pivot Roof Plane About - Select
“Transform/Replicate Object Dialog” on
2
which part of the selected roof plane to
page 200. use as pivot point when its pitch is adjusted
to meet the other roof plane.
In addition, when a new floor is added to a
plan, you can choose to move any roof
390
3 Raise/lower (no pivot) - Select this Birdsmouth Depth

option to maintain the current pitch and
raise or lower the entire plane to connect the The birdsmouth is the notch cut into a rafter
roofs. This may affect plate heights of the where it rests on the wall top plate. To
walls below. control its vertical depth, specify the desired
depth as a negative number for the Raise Off
4 To prevent this dialog from displaying, Plate value in the Build Roof dialog. See
check Don’t show again during this “Build Tab” on page 378.
session. The dialog does not display again
until you have terminated and restarted the There are two ways to create a roof plane
program. with no birdsmouth:
• Check Trusses (No Birdsmouth) in the
5 Click Yes to make the selected change Build Roof dialog before drawing the
so the roofs meet. The roof plane either
roof plane.
changes pitch or is raised or lowered.
• Specify a Raise Off Plate value of at
6 Click No to leave the roof plane least 1/16” in the Build Roof dialog.
unchanged. The roof planes will not
meet vertically. To change the birdsmouth depth after the
roof is built, you can move the roof planes up
or down, or change the pitch. For example, if
Unless you have a specific reason to you lock the pitch and raise the roof plane by
adjust the roof plane this way, it is one inch, you decrease the birdsmouth depth
usually best to select No. by one inch.
Changing the Locking Roof Planes

Baseline Angle
When the roof plan is correct, roof planes
A roof plane baseline can be selected like can be locked to prevent accidental changes.
any line and edited. If the baseline coincides The Build Roof dialog has a Lock Roof
with a roof edge then select that roof edge Planes check box to prevent accidental
and press the Tab key to select the baseline. editing or rebuilding. See “Build Tab” on
The Status Bar tells you when the roof plane page 378.
baseline is selected.
You can also protect roof planes from
accidental changes by locking the “Roof
If the roof plane baseline is moved in Planes” layer in all layer sets. See “Layer
floor plan view, its height does not Display Options Dialog” on page 121.
change. This means that moving a roof plane
baseline toward the ridge lowers its height Locking roof planes will not prevent roof
where it meets the bearing wall. planes from being deleted if the floor they
are on is deleted.
The baseline angle can be set in the Roof
Plane Specification dialog. See “General
Tab” on page 393.
391
Roof Plane Specification Dialog
Deleting Roof Planes key or click the Delete edit button to

There are several ways to delete roof planes. delete it from the plan. See “Deleting
Delete the entire roof quickly by
selecting Build> Roof> Delete Roof Generally speaking, roof planes cannot be
Planes. deleted if they are locked. An exception to
this rule occurs when an entire floor of a plan
You can also delete all roof planes at is deleted. Any roof planes present on a floor
once in the Delete Objects dialog. will be deleted when the floor is deleted,
See “Delete Objects Dialog” on page 197. locked or not. See “Deleting Floors” on page
In addition, you can select any roof plane or 358.
group of roof planes, then press the Delete

Select one or more roof planes and click the You can also open this dialog for all roof
Open Object edit button to open the planes in the entire plan by selecting Build>
Roof Plane Specification dialog. Roof> Edit All Roof Planes .
392
General Tab
1 5
3 7
There are four values that define the 3D If you lock the Pitch and change a Height
orientation of a roof plane: Ridge/Top value, the roof plane moves vertically,
Height, Baseline Height, Fascia Top keeping the same slope. It will not pivot. For
Height and Pitch. a conversion to degrees, see “Roof Pitches in
Degrees” on page 426.
Locking any of the Height values defines
that value as the pivot point for the selected Changing these values does not affect the 2D
roof plane. Each of these dimensions is representation of the roof plane.
measured from the first floor default
elevation of 0' - 0".
393
1 Specify the Height of the selected roof 4 Rafter Depth - Specify the rafter depth
plane(s). for the selected roof plane. The default
• Define the Ridge/Top height of the rafter depth is set in the Build Framing
selected roof plane, or lock this value to dialog. See “Build Framing Dialog” on page
make it the roof plane’s pivot point. 467.
• Define the Baseline height, or lock this 5 Information about the structure of the
value to make it the pivot point. selected roof plane(s) displays here for
reference.
• Definethe Fascia Top height, or lock this
value to make it the pivot point. • Birdsmouth Depth - The plumb or verti-
cal depth of the birdsmouth cut. To
2 Specify the Pitch for the selected roof change it, move the roof plane some way.
plane, or lock this value to move the For example, if you lock the pitch and
roof plane vertically when a Height value is raise the roof plane by one inch, you will
changed. decrease the birdsmouth depth by one
• Check Pitch in Degrees to display the inch. See “Birdsmouth Depth” on page
pitch value in this dialog in degrees. Val- 391.
ues between -80 and 80 degrees are • The Vertical Rafter Depth is defined by
acceptable. measuring a plumb line across the rafter.
The degree of pitch affects the Vertical
3 Set the Baseline angle. A positive rafter width. The greater the pitch, the
value causes the baseline to tilt upward
from its start point. A negative value causes greater the vertical rafter depth.
it to tilt downward. The wall top under this • Top of Plate is is defined by the ceiling
baseline will then tilt with it. height for the room.
The baseline height is specified at the start or • Overhang from Baseline is the horizon-
end of the baseline using the Start and End tal overhang measured from the baseline
radio buttons. In floor plan view, the baseline to the eave.
direction is clockwise around the house.
6 Mark as Edited - When an automatic
roof plane is moved or reshaped, the
394
program marks it as "edited". You can check Options Tab

Retain Edited Roof Planes in the Build
Roof dialog to prevent these marked planes The settings on the Options tab are the same
from being deleted when the roof is rebuilt. as those on the same tab of the Build Roof
Checking Mark as Edited also marks an dialog, but affect the selected roof plane
automatically generated roof plane, even if it only. See “Options Tab” on page 382.
has not been edited. Edited planes can also
be unmarked. Framing Tab
The settings on the Framing tab are the same
7 Curved Roof - Specify the selected as those on the Roof tab of the Build
roof plane as curved, then define the
curve by specifying the roof plane’s Angle at Framing dialog, but apply to the selected
eave, Angle at ridge and Radius to roof roof plane only. See “Roof Tab” on page 477.
surface. See “Curved Roof Planes” on page
404. Rafter Tails Tab
• These three values are interrelated - when The settings on the Rafter Tails tab are the
one is changed, the other two adjust same as those on the same tab of the Build
accordingly. You may find it helpful to Roof dialog, but affect the selected roof
first specify the Radius value, then the plane only. See “Rafter Tails Tab” on page
Angle values. 383.
A flat roof plane with a pitch of 0 has angles
of 0 at both the ridge and eave, as well as a Frieze Tab
radius of 0. The settings on the Frieze tab allow you to
• Uncheck Automatic Facet Angle to specify a frieze molding profile. The settings
specify the Facet Angle, which is the on this tab are like those on the Moldings tab
angle at which curved roof surfaces are found in many dialogs in the program. See
broken in 3D views. The default value is “Moldings Tab” on page 540.
7.5°; a smaller value produces a smoother
curve while a larger value may generate Polyline Tab
more quickly in 3D.
The Polyline tab indicates the length of the
The Facet Angle value must divide into roof plane’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and
360° evenly; if it does not, the program its Volume.
will choose the nearest value that does.
Selected LineTab
8 Click the Num Style/Angle Style The Selected Line tab is similar to the Line
button to change the way numbers
display in the dialog. See “Number Style/ tab of the Line Specification dialog. See
Angle Style Dialog” on page 917. “Line Tab” on page 888.
395
Automatic Roofs
Line Style Tab Materials Tab

For information about the Line Style tab, see The settings on the Materials tab allow you
“Line Style Tab” on page 889. to specify materials for the selected roof
plane’s various components. For more
Fill Style Tab information, see “Materials Tab” on page
709.
Automatic Roofs
When roofs are automatically generated, a roof), you can change the settings in the Wall
roof plane is created over each exterior wall Specification dialog. See “Wall
by default, resulting in a hip roof. Specification Dialog” on page 249.
To automatically generate a roof plane using For more information about creating
values other than the defaults or to not different roof styles, see “Roof Tutorial” on
generate a roof plane bearing on a particular page 191 of the User’s Guide.
wall (as with a gable or the sides of a shed
396
Wall Specification Dialog - Roof Tab
1
2
4
5
1 An automatically generated roof style Knee walls are usually found next to top
other than a hip requires one of the floor Attic room areas.
Options to be checked.
• Check Full Gable Wall to create a gable Extend Slope Downward
with a ridge centered above the selected • Check Extend Slope Downward to
wall(s). extend the roof plane downward over a
• Check High Shed/Gable Wall for the bumpout, instead of creating additional
wall under the high side of a shed roof. It roof planes. The two connecting walls
can produce ridges, but it may also be that create the bumpout must be Full
used for gable ends that have a raked Gable walls.
wall. In the following bottom image, the outer
• Check Knee Wall to define an interior bumpout wall has the Extend Slope Down-
wall whose height is defined by the roof ward check box selected. The two short side
plane above it, not the ceiling height. walls are Full Gable Walls.
397
Automatic Roofs
Full Gable
Wall
Before After
Extend Slope
Downward
• Check Roof Cuts Wall at Bottom to • Starts at - Specify either the Height or
have the bottom of the selected wall the distance in from Baseline where the
clipped by the roof plane below, as where second roof plane begins.
a floating dormer wall meets the main
roof plane. To determine either of these values in an
elevation view
Pitch
1. Create the model.
Any exterior wall can define the pitch
2 2. Generate the roof using only the first
of the roof plane built above it. pitch. Be sure to define all the roof infor-
If the Pitch value is followed by a [D], the mation for each wall (gable, hip, first
value is the default pitch as set in the Build pitch, etc.).
Roof dialog. The minimum pitch is ¼” in 3. Create a cross section view of the house
12” or 20 mm in 1000 mm. that includes the roof plane that will
• Pitch - Specify the pitch for the roof have the second pitch. See “Cross Sec-
plane above this wall if different from the tion/Elevation Views” on page 752
default roof pitch set in the Build Roof 4. Using the CAD tools, place a temporary
dialog. If a roof plane is specified with point near the location where you want
two pitches, this field controls the pitch the second pitch to start.
of the lower roof plane.
• Using the End-to-End Dimension
• Upper Pitch - Check this to define the tool, drag a dimension line from the
pitch for a second roof plane above this first floor 0'-0" to the temporary point.
wall. Mansard, gambrel, gull wing and
half-hip are examples of roof styles that • Using the End-to-End Dimension
use two pitches. tool, drag a dimension line from the
baseline to the vertical plane of the
temporary point.
398
3 Overhang - Specify the overhang of

the roof plane to be generated above the
selected wall. This setting only takes effect
when Same Height at Exterior Walls is
unchecked in the the Build Roof dialog,
which is also where the default Overhang
value is set. See “Build Tab” on page 378.
4 Lower Wall Type If Split By Butting

Roof - Designate a wall to be split into
5. Enter either of these values in the Wall a pony wall. It is split by roof planes that
Specification dialog. You can press the abut its outside surface. The upper portion
Tab key to update the other value. Click retains the same type. This is defined on the
OK to close the dialog. Wall Types tab of the Wall Specification
dialog, and the lower portion specified here.
See “Wall Types Tab” on page 256.
5 Check Auto Roof Return to generate

roof returns on the selected wall. In
most cases, roof returns only generate on
Full Gable Walls.
• Specify the roof return’s horizontal
Length.
• Enter a value to Extend the roof returns
6. Open the Build Roof dialog, check from the overhang.
Build Roof Planes and click OK to • Specify a Gable, Hip, or Full roof return
rebuild the roof. and whether the roof return is Sloping or
Flat. See “Roof Returns” on page 423.
• Check the boxes to Include Frieze mold-
ing and/or Include Gutter along eave
edges.
Curved Walls and Roofs

Automatically generated roof planes are
placed over curved walls at specified
increments. In the Build Roof dialog, you
Note: You can control how the roof over a can specify the degree increments for the
bay, box or bow window is build in the win- roof over curved walls, from 6 to 90 degrees.
dow’s specification dialog. See “Bay/Box The lower the number, the more roof sections
Window Specification Dialog” on page 349. are created over the curved wall.
399
Automatic Roofs
The following illustrations show a roof

created at two different curved increments:
30 degrees and 15 degrees.
Concave Curved Walls & Roofs

Concave curved walls can produce roof
planes that follow them. If the concave area
is too small, simpler roof planes are pro-
duced. To follow the curved wall, the section
baselines must be longer than the Min.
Alcove value on the Build tab of the Build
Roof dialog. If baselines are shorter, the
automatically generated roofs are simplified
by either:
1. Ignoring the curved wall, as if the walls

on either side extended to their meeting
point and the roof was produced.
2. Spanning the concave curved wall with
a straight baseline and produce a roof
plane for it from that.
400
Changes made to floor heights, ceiling

heights, or floor or ceiling platform
thicknesses will also cause the roof to be
automatically rebuilt.
When the roof is rebuilt using Auto Rebuild
Roof or Build Roof Planes in the Build
Roof dialog, all roof planes in the plan, both
automatically generated and manually
drawn, are deleted and replaced.
• To preserve any manually drawn roof
planes, check Retain Manually Drawn
Roof Planes on the Build tab of the Build
Roof dialog before the roof is rebuilt.
Rebuilding Roofs • To preserve any automatically generated

roof planes that you have edited, check
By default, when changes are made to the Retain Edited Roof Planes on the Build
model, the roof does not update to reflect tab of the Build Roof dialog before the
these changes. This is the case even if the roof is rebuilt.
roof was automatically built.
Roof planes cannot be edited or manually
When Auto Rebuild Roofs is checked in the drawn when Auto Rebuild Roofs is turned
Build Roofs dialog, on the other hand, any on. If you try to either edit or draw a roof
changes made to the position of an exterior
plane using the Roof Plane tool, a
wall or to its roof directives will prompt the
warning message will display.
roof to regenerate to reflect these changes.
See “Build Tab” on page 378.
Roof Baseline Polylines

Typically, the program builds an automatic To create roof baseline polylines
roof based on the settings in the Build Roof
dialog and on the Roof tab of the Wall 1. Select Build> Roof> Build Roof .
Specification dialog, along with the layout
2. On the Build tab of the Build Roof
of the exterior walls and floor and ceiling dialog, check Make Roof Baseline
heights. Polylines.
If you want to build a roof that diverges from 3. Click OK. A set of roof baselines is cre-
the footprint of your building as well as the ated along the outside edge of the Main
roof directives in the exterior walls, you can Layer of the exterior walls, forming one
use Roof Baseline Polylines. or more closed polylines.
401
Roof Baseline Polylines
As with roof planes, the heights of Roof Roof Baseline Polylines always form a
Baseline Polylines are determined by ceiling closed area with straight sides only. They
heights in the plan. If roof planes will be cannot be severed or curved, but additional
built at more than one height, a separate joints or corners can be added.
baseline polyline is created for each height.
When a new roof is built, it follows the shape
Once created, a Roof Baseline Polyline can of the Roof Baseline Polyline even if that
be edited in a variety of ways, then used as shape does not follow the exterior walls.
the basis for the roof then next time it is built
In addition to length and direction, each Roof
automatically.
Baseline Polyline edge has roof directives
To create a new roof using the directives in associated with it, much like the roof
your Roof Baseline Polyline(s), check Use directives in individual walls. See “Wall
Existing Roof Baselines in the Build Roof Specification Dialog - Roof Tab” on page
dialog and click OK. See “Build Tab” on 397.
page 378.
An Example
Displaying Roof
For a simple example of roof plane baseline
Baseline Polylines editing, consider an L-shaped house, with a
Roof Baseline Polylines are placed on the rectangular roof. The inner part of the ’L’ is a
Roofs, Baseline Polylines layer by default patio that is covered under the same roof.
and can display in floor plan view only. See
“Displaying Objects” on page 117.
Roof directive information displays along
each edge of the polyline, including:
• The pitch along that edge, or
• V - vertical (against wall)
• G -gable/shed
• K - knee wall
• L - lower (extend slope downward).
On the left is the roof plane baseline as it was
Editing Roof originally produced and the roof plan it
Baseline Polylines creates.
A Roof Baseline Polyline’s shape can be To model the roof plan shown on the right
edited much like a CAD polyline using its
edit handles and edit toolbar buttons. See 1. Select the Roof Baseline Polyline along
“Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on its bottom-most edge.
page 160.
402
2. Click the Fillet Two Lines edit but- (those on the inside of the L) to join the
ton. See “Reshaping Objects” on page two selected lines.” Click OK.
184. 5. Open the Build Roof dialog and select
3. Click the left-most edge to remove the the Build Roof Planes and Use Existing
two intervening edges. Roof Baseline check boxes to model the
roof plan shown on the right side of the
4. A message box informs you that “The image above.
system must delete intervening lines
Roof Baseline Specification Dialog

Like walls, each line of a roof baseline Select any edge of a roof baseline polyline
polyline contains roof directives that affect click the Open Object edit button open
automatic roof generation. the Roof Baseline Specification dialog.
Roof Baseline Tab
1
2
1 Options - wall. This is similar to checking High Shed/

Gable Wall.
The first four checkboxes, Full Gable Wall,
2 Specify the Pitch for the selected edge
High Shed/Gable Wall, Knee Wall, and of the Roof Baseline Polyline. This
Extend Slope Downward are the same as overrides the default pitch set in the Build
those in the Wall Specification dialog. See Roof dialog. See “Build Roof Dialog” on
“Wall Specification Dialog - Roof Tab” on page 377.
page 397.
The Pitch, 2nd Pitch and Starts at entries are
Check Against Wall if the roof plane rising the same those in the Wall Specification
from this baseline butts against an exterior dialog.
403
Curved Roof Planes
3 Baseline height - This is the height of Selected LineTab

the entire Roof Baseline Polyline, not
just that of the selected edge. See “The This tab is similar to the Line tab of the Line
Baseline” on page 386. Specification dialog. See “Line Tab” on
page 888.
Polyline Tab
Line Style Tab
roof plane’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and For information about the Line Style tab, see
its Volume. “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
Fill Style Tab

Curved Roof Planes

Any roof plane can be turned into a curved and a cross section/elevation view may
roof plane in the Roof Plane Specification be helpful.
dialog. See “Roof Plane Specification
One way to produce a barrel roof is using a
single roof plane that starts out flat (zero
pitch) and covers the entire building.
Curving a Single Roof Plane

4 in 12 pitch Shed roof
To curve a roof plane
2. Select the roof plane in floor plan view
1. Draw a simple four wall structure 18' x
24', set three of the walls as High/Shed and click the Open Object edit but-
Gable walls on the Roof tab of the Wall ton to open the Roof Plane
Specification dialog for that roof plane.
Specification dialog and automatically
generate a roof. The initial pitch does 3. Change the Pitch from 4 in 12 to 0 in 12
not matter. Tiling the floor plan view to flatten the roof.
404
4. On the General tab, check Curved

Roof. Notice that the angle values are
currently at zero.
5. Change the Angle at eave from zero to 7. Change the Radius to roof surface to a
15 and press the Tab key. Notice that the smaller number, such as 50.
other values update. All three values are
interrelated and dynamic. Changing one
changes the others. In order to maintain
the underlying 0 in 12 pitch (the chord
of the curved roof), the other end of the
roof plane must compensate.
A radius of 50 could not be achieved unless

the walls were closer together. The curved
roof plane accepts the minimum radius,
6. Change the Angle at Ridge from -15 which in this case is 116.5.
degrees to -45 degrees.
Curving Two Roof Planes
You can also create a barrel roof using two
roof planes. We’ll use the same basic 24' x
18' plan we used before, designate the two
opposite walls as gable walls, and generate a
gable with a 12 in 12 (45 degree) pitch. The
12 in 12 pitch often underlies curved roofs
405
Curved Roof Planes
because it allows the curved roof to be nearly

vertical at the eave and nearly flat at its peak.
To curve two roof planes
1. Draw a simple four wall structure 18' x

24', set the two end walls as Gable
Walls, and automatically generate a roof
at a 12 in 12 pitch.
5. In floor plan view, select both roof

planes and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Roof Plane
2. Select one of the roof planes and click Specification dialog.
the Open Object edit button to open 6. Set the Angle at ridge to 0 and click
the Roof Plane Specification dialog. OK.
3. Check Curved Roof and notice that the
Angle values are the same.
4. Change the Angle at ridge from 45 to 0.
This makes the roof plane nearly flat at
the ridge. The Angle At Eave will
update to maintain the 12 in 12 pitch.
Notice that the program changed the Angle at
Ridge from 0 to 1 so that the eave does not
become vertical at 90°. Curved roofs are not Similar results can be achieved using two
allowed to be vertical or inverted. roof planes instead of one. Because the
curvature can be set independently for each
roof plane, using two roof planes allows
more variation.
406
Compound Curved the same as 8 in 12. Notice that the

Roof Planes Angle at Eave is almost flat.
Compound curves can be created using two

or more curved roof planes or a combination
of straight and curved roof planes. To
illustrate this, we’ll produce a flared Asian
style roof eave that is almost flat at the eave
edge and merges into an 8 in 12 pitch roof.
Before curving roof planes or joining the
edges of any curved plane, make sure all flat
roof planes are joined as well as possible.
After this you can curve the roof planes and
then make any curved join edges.
4. To create the high roof plane, use the
To create a compound curved roof
Roof Plane tool and draw the base-
1. Draw a simple four wall structure 18' x line of the roof plane along the top, or
24', set the two end walls as Gable ridge edge of the curved roof plane in
Walls, and automatically generate a roof floor plan view. The bottom edge of the
at a 4 in 12 pitch. new roof plane snaps to the top of the
2. Turn on Display Temporary Dimen- curved plane.
sions , select one of the roof planes 5. Select the two new roof planes, open
in floor plan view at its ridge edge and them for specification and change their
pull it back so that it is 4 feet from the pitch to 33.6901. Viewed in 3D, the
wall. Do the same to the other roof planes appear to join together into one.
plane.
3. Select both roof planes in floor plan Upper roof planes with pitch set (using
view and check Curved Roof in the degrees) to match the ridge edge pitch
Roof Plane Specification dialog. Set of the lower curved roof planes
the Angle at Ridge to 33.6901, which is
407
Ceiling Planes
Ceiling Planes
Ceiling planes are drawn the same unchecked in the Room Specification
way as roof planes and are edited dialog. See “Structure Tab” on page 286.
using the same tools. They are useful for • The baseline of a ceiling plane should be
creating custom vaulted ceilings. drawn along the outer surface of the bear-
ing wall’s Main Layer. This allows the
ceiling plane to extend over and be sup-
ported by the wall. See “The Main
Layer” on page 242.
• The sloping edge at the side of a ceiling
plane should butt to the inside of the wall.
• Ceiling planes act independent of the roof
planes above.
Ceiling planes • Usually, the pitch of a ceiling plane is
lower than the pitch of the corresponding
roof plane.
• Ceiling planes can be joined together
using the Join Roof Planes edit but-
ton. See “Join Roof Planes” on page 388.
• Select a ceiling plane and click the Open
Cross Section showing ceiling planes. Object edit button to open the
Ceiling Plane Specification dialog. See
Ceiling planes are drawn using the same “Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog” on
pitch as roof planes, specified in the Build page 409.
Roof dialog. See “Build Roof Dialog” on
page 377. Displaying Ceiling Planes
If you wish, you can specify the desired pitch Ceiling planes have their own layer in the
in the Build Roof dialog before drawing a Layer Display Options dialog, although
ceiling plane, or you can change the pitch once created, they can be placed on any
after it is drawn in the Ceiling Plane layer. See “Displaying Objects” on page 117.
Specification dialog. See “Ceiling Plane
Specification Dialog” on page 409. Editing Ceiling Planes
There are a few things to remember when Ceiling planes can be edited much like roof
drawing ceiling planes. planes using their edit handles and edit
• Ceiling planes should be created over toolbar buttons. See “Editing Roof Planes”
rooms that have Ceiling Over this Room on page 387.
408
Ceiling planes can also be edited in the Ceiling planes can also be deleted at
Ceiling Plane Specification dialog. once in the Delete Objects dialog.
See “Delete Objects Dialog” on page 197.
As with roof planes, the ceiling planes layer
can be locked to prevent editing. In addition, you can select any ceiling plane
or group of ceiling planes, then press the
Deleting Ceiling Planes Delete key or click the Delete edit button
Select Build> Roof> Delete Ceiling Planes to delete it from the plan. See “Deleting
to delete all ceiling planes in the current plan. Objects” on page 196.
Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog

Select a ceiling plane and click the Open The Ceiling Plane Specification dialog is
Object edit button to open the Ceiling similar to the Roof Plane Specification
Plane Specification dialog.
dialog. See “Roof Plane Specification
409
Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog
General Tab
5
1
6
There are four values that define the 3D

1 Specify the Height of the ceiling plane.
orientation of a ceiling plane: Bottom at
Ridge, Inside Bottom, Outside Bottom and • Bottom at ridge - Set the highest point
Pitch. on the underside of the ceiling plane.
Locking any of the Height values defines • Inside Bottom - Set the underside height
that value as the pivot point for the selected at the lowest point on the ceiling plane. If
ceiling plane. Each of these dimensions is the plane is drawn over a wall, this is
measured from the first floor default located at the inside surface of the wall’s
elevation of 0' - 0". Main Layer.
If you lock the Pitch and change a Height • Outside Bottom - Only available when a
value, the ceiling plane moves vertically, ceiling plane is drawn over a wall, this is
keeping the same slope. It will not pivot. the height of the lower edge of the ceiling
rafters, were they not clipped by the wall
Changing these values does not affect the 2D
below.
representation of the ceiling plane.
410
2 Specify the Pitch of the selected ceiling Main Layer surface of the wall. The base-
plane. For a conversion to degrees, see line is typically drawn over the outside
“Roof Pitches in Degrees” on page 426. Main Layer surface, so this value is equal
• Check Pitch in degrees to display the to the wall’s Main Layer thickness.
Pitch value in degrees. • Clip End - Only appearing when a ceil-
ing plane is drawn over a bearing wall,
3 Curved Roof - Specify the selected this is the amount a ceiling rafter’s under-
ceiling plane as curved, then define the
side must be clipped at its lower end to
curve by specifying the ceiling plane’s Angle
rest on the wall top plate. This is equal to
at eave, Angle at ridge and Radius to roof
the ceiling plane’s rise in slope over the
surface.
distance of the Overhang from inside
These three values are interrelated - when bottom.
one is changed, the other two adjust accord-
ingly. You may find it helpful to first specify The Outside Bottom value plus the Clip
the Radius value, then the Angle values. end value equals the Top of Plate value.
A flat ceiling plane with a pitch of 0 has
6 Specify the Ceiling Thickness, which
angles of 0 at both the ridge and “eave”, as is the thickness of the bottom surface of
well as a radius of 0. the ceiling plane.
4 Rafter Depth - Specify the rafter depth 7 Click the Num Style/Angle Style
for the selected ceiling plane. The button to change the way numbers
default rafter depth is the same as that for display in the dialog. See “Number Style/
roof planes and is set in the Build Framing Angle Style Dialog” on page 917.
dialog. See “Build Framing Dialog” on page
467. Polyline Tab
5 Information about the selected ceiling The Polyline tab indicates the length of the
plane’s structure displays here for roof plane’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and
reference. its Volume.
• Vertical Rafter Depth - This is defined
by measuring a plumb line through a raf- Selected LineTab
ter. The greater the pitch, the greater the
This tab is similar to the Line tab of the Line
vertical rafter depth.
Specification dialog. See “Line Tab” on
• Top of Plate - This is the top plate height page 888.
of the bearing wall, which also defines
the ceiling height of the room. Line Style Tab
• Overhang from inside bottom - Only
appearing when a ceiling plane is drawn
over a bearing wall, this is the horizontal
distance from the baseline to the inside
411
Gable/Roof Line
Fill Style Tab Materials Tab

For information about the Fill Style tab, see For information about the Materials tab, see
“Fill Style Tab” on page 902. “Materials Tab” on page 709.
Gable/Roof Line
The Gable/Roof Line tool can be To create a Gable/Roof Line
used to create a gable above the
bearing wall of a hip roof plane. 1. Select Build> Roof> Gable/Roof
Line , then click and drag to draw a
This tool can be helpful when you want to
line outside of the exterior wall that you
maintain a roof plane baseline where there is
want to create a gable over.
no wall below, such as across the front of an
alcove. 2. Position the Gable/Roof Line within 10
feet (2260 mm) of the wall’s Main
You can also create a Gable/Roof Line using Layer.
the Gable Over Door/Window edit • Make sure that the Gable/Roof Line is
button. See “Gable Over Door/Window” on exactly parallel to the exterior wall.
page 423.
3. Resize the Gable/Roof Line so that it is
Gable/Roof Lines can be selected and edited the length of the desired gable.
much like regular CAD lines. See “Editing • The length of the Gable/Roof Line
Line Based Objects” on page 147. determines the gable width at the wall
If an entire wall supports a gable, the wall Main Layer, not at the overhang.
should be defined as a Full Gable Wall in • At the larger roof eave, a gable roof is
the Wall Specification dialog. See “Wall wider than the gable line by twice the
Specification Dialog - Roof Tab” on page overhang distance.
397.
4. Select Build> Roof> Build Roof
and regenerate the roof. See “Build Roof
412
Before, with default roof generation
A Gable/Roof Line drawn across the

alcove causes roof planes to span across the
alcove when roofs are automatically
generated.
Result, after automatic roof generation
Covering Alcoves
A Gable/Roof Line can also be used to
maintain a roof plane baseline where there is
no wall below. For example, a house may Gable/roof lines drawn to extend roof planes
have a large alcove and you want the roof The program models a hip in that area. When
plane to extend across the alcove, rather than extending roof planes across alcoves, the
wrap into it. gable/roof line must be drawn inline with the
wall’s main layer.
413
Skylights
Gable/roof line extends past end of side wall
Result, after automatic roof generation If the line is drawn along or in front of the
Main Layer of the bay’s outer wall, the
Covering a Bay resulting gable will extend only to the eave
of the larger roof. Draw the line beyond the
A Gable/Roof Line drawn across a bay bay’s outer wall to extend out to cover the
causes a gable to be build above the bay bay.
when roofs are automatically generated.
Gable/roof line used to create a gable over a bay Gable/roof line drawn beyond outer wall of
bay results in gable extending to cover bay
In order for the gable to be built, at least one
end of the gable/roof line must extend past
the side walls of the bay.
Skylights
A skylight can be created by selecting The Skylight tool places a flat panel
Build> Roof> Skylight and drawing a skylight into a roof hole, produces a hole in
rectangular polyline within a single roof the ceiling platform below, and automatically
plane. You can also simply click once within generates the skylight shaft between these
a roof plane to place a 2’ x 2’ skylight. two holes.
414
To place a skylight in a vaulted ceiling, Editing Skylights

uncheck Ceiling Over This Room in the
Room Specification dialog, draw the ceiling Skylights can be selected individually or in
planes to produce the vault and edit them as groups. Once selected, skylights can be
needed, and then draw the skylight. See edited using the edit handles, edit toolbar
“Structure Tab” on page 286. buttons, or the Roof Hole/Skylight
Specification dialog. See “Roof Hole/
Skylight Specification Dialog” on page 416.
Note: If a sloped ceiling plane is present
under the skylight, a hole in this ceiling plane Skylights must remain contained by a single
is automatically produced. This hole is visible, roof plane. If the roof plane is deleted, any
and may be located directly under the roof skylights or holes it contains are also deleted.
hole. It can be moved and edited separately. Aside from this restriction, skylights can be
edited much like standard closed polylines.
See “Editing Closed-Polyline Based
If you clear the Skylight check box in the
Roof Hole/Skylight Specification dialog,
the curb and glass for the skylight is removed
but the opening remains.
By default, the flat ceiling hole does not
display separately; but it can be edited
separately, and even deleted entirely. See
“Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog”
on page 416.
415
Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog
Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog

General Tab
1
2
1 Check Skylight to specify this polyline • Plumb Sides - The framing for the sky-
as a skylight. If unchecked, the curb light is plumb-cut.
and glass for the skylight are removed but the • Plumb/Square - The bottom edge is
opening remains. plumb-cut, the top edge square-cut.
12 Skylight Frame Width and Height - 4 Specify how the selected skylight/roof
Define the width and height of the hole’s Ceiling Hole should be built.
frame or curb of the skylight. These options are only available if the room
below has a default ceiling specified in the
3 Angle for Inside Hole Rim - Defines Room Specification dialog. See “Structure
the shape of the skylight well where it
passes through the roof plane. Tab” on page 286.
• Square Sides - The framing for the sky- • Select Skylight Automatically Gener-
light is cut square to the pitch of the roof. ates Ceiling Hole to automatically gener-
416
ate and maintain the skylight hole in a flat Polyline Tab

ceiling. This option is the selected for
skylights in valuted ceilings. The Polyline tab indicates the length of the
roof plane’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and
its Volume.
Note: Holes automatically produced in a
sloping custom ceiling plane by a new sky-
light must be manually maintained.
Selected LineTab
• Select Manually Edit Ceiling Hole Specification dialog. See “Line Tab” on
Polyline to edit the flat ceiling hole page 888.
polyline manually. Click OK to return to
floor plan view and edit the ceiling hole Line Style Tab
polyline. When this option is selected, the
ceiling hole polyline and the skylight can For information about the Line Style tab, see
be selected separately in floor plan view. “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
• Select Do not generate ceiling hole to
generate a hole through the roof plane but Fill Style Tab
not the ceiling. For information about the Fill Style tab, see
• Uncheck Generate shaft to ceiling hole “Fill Style Tab” on page 902.
to generate a roof hole and a ceiling hole,
but no vertical surfaces connecting them. Materials Tab
When checked, a shaft between the two is
produced. Not available if Do not gener-
ate ceiling hole is selected.
Dormers
Dormers can be drawn manually • Automatic Dormer side walls cannot be
or placed automatically using the positioned above other walls in the plan.
Auto Dormer tools.
If you click within a roof plane to place an
Automatic Dormers can be placed only automatic dormer, but click too close to an
under certain conditions: eave or the ridge, a dormer will not be
• Automatic Dormers can only be placed created; however, its outline will. Move this
entirely within a single roof plane. They outline box to a location that meets the
cannot extend past the eaves or ridge of dormer’s requirements and it will be created.
this roof plane. Automatic dormers reside by default on their
own layer, “Auto Dormers”. See “Layer
417
Dormers
Auto Floating Dormer within this roof plane in floor plan view to
create the dormer. Normally it does not
Select Build> Roof> Auto Floating matter what floor the dormer is on, but it may
Dormer and click the roof plane need to be on a certain floor so that the
where you would like to place the center of dormer walls do not interfere with walls or
the dormer's front wall. railings in the room below it. To do this, it
The bottom edges of all floating dormer may help to display the underlying roof plane
walls are cut off by the underlying roof on the appropriate floor using the Roof
plane. To produce such a dormer manually, Plane Specification dialog. See “Roof Plane
check Roof Cuts Wall at Bottom for the Specification Dialog” on page 392.
dormer walls on the Roof tab of the Wall If the dormer is defined on the floor above
Specification dialog. and the room below has a flat ceiling, then
Usually no room is defined by the walls of defining a room, which is automatically
this type of dormer. The images below show Open Below, causes a hole to be produced in
both the outside and inside of a typical the ceiling under the dormer.
floating dormer.
Auto Dormer
Select Build> Roof> Auto Dormer
and click on a roof plane where you
want the center of the dormer's front wall to
be.
The walls of an auto dormer go to the floor
and meet a knee wall on either side on the
back of the dormer. This knee wall must run
parallel to the underlying roof plane.
• If you are creating a (non-floating) auto
dormer, a knee wall must already exist.
The dormer side walls run back to the
knee wall and the knee wall is broken
where the dormer walls meet it.
• The knee wall does not have to be desig-
nated as such on the Roof tab of the Wall
A floating dormer can be placed in floor plan Specification dialog unless you are gen-
view on the same floor where its underlying erating an automatic roof.
roof plane displays, or it can be placed on the
• A non-floating dormer must always be
floor above. Which floor it should be on does
created on the same floor as the knee
not depend on which floor the underlying
walls.
roof plane is on, but you must always click
418
Manually Drawn Dormers

Once you are familiar with Chief Architect’s
roof tools, drawing dormers manually can be
quite simple. There are several different
ways to draw dormers; some methods work
better in certain applications.
A variety of resources is available at
www.chiefarchitect.com with information
about drawing dormers manually. See, too,
“Manually Drawn Dormers” on page 207 of
the User’s Guide.
There are a few things to keep in mind.
• Walls extend upward until they meet an
overlying roof plane.
• A wall can also be cut by underlying roof
planes if Roof Cuts Wall at Bottom is
checked in the Wall Specification dialog.
For this to work properly, the edge of the
roof plane must extend completely
through the width of the wall. See “Wall
Specification Dialog - Roof Tab” on page
The initial width, height, roof style and other 397.
settings of Auto Dormers are set in the
• Polylines can be converted into a Hole in
Dormer Defaults dialog. See “Dormer
Roof/Ceiling that allows walls to extend
above or below the roof line. See “Con-
vert Polyline Dialog” on page 206.
Editing Auto Dormers

Auto Dormers are a collection of objects that Using the Mouse
behave as one. When a dormer is selected, it
can be edited using its edit handles, edit When selected, an auto dormer displays three
tools, and specification dialog. See “Dormer edit handles. The Move handle displays over
Specification Dialog” on page 420. the front wall and allows you to relocate the
dormer. Two resize handles display on the
If you click the Explode Dormer edit side walls and allow you to change the width
button, the dormer’s individual components of the dormer.
can be edited.
419
Dormer Specification Dialog
See “Editing Windows” on page 326. You

can place several windows in the front wall.
Unless the dormer's window has been edited
or changed in the Window Specification
dialog, when the dormer width is changed, its
width changes automatically to fill the front
Move Resize dormer wall. If the window has been edited,
its width stays fixed. If a change to the
There are some things to keep in mind when dormer makes its front wall too short to hold
editing auto dormers and auto floating the window, the window reverts to auto
dormers using the mouse. width.
• Dormers move at 90 degree angles unless
the Ctrl key is pressed before moving Exploding Dormers
them.
Click the Explode Auto Dormer edit
• The dormer must be contained within one button to explode the auto dormer into
underlying roof plane. its component parts. The dormer walls, roof
• Auto dormers cannot be moved beyond planes, window, and hole in the roof/ceiling
the required knee wall. can be edited individually.
The program treats roof planes over an
Editing the Window exploded anto dormer as though they were
Dormer windows can be selected, edited, manually drawn, allowing you to protect
deleted and replaced just like other windows. them from being rebuilt in the Build Roof
dialog. See “Build Tab” on page 378.

Select a dormer or dormers and click the The settings in the Dormer Defaults dialog
Open Object edit button to open the are much like those in the Dormer
Specification dialog, but apply to all
Dormer Specification dialog.
dormers as they are created rather than to a
selected dormer.
420
General Tab
1 6
2
7
3
8
9
4 10
11
1 Specify the Roof Type above this Gable, Shed, Gambrel, Mansard, Barrel,
dormer. You can choose from Hip, Curved Eave, Hip Curved Eave or Eyebrow.
Hip, Gable, Shed, Gambrel, Mansard, Barrel, Curved Eave,

Hip Curved Eave, and Eyebrow dormer roof types
2 Specify the Pitch of the dormer roof Initially, the default dormer pitch matches the
planes. roof pitch for all dormer roof types except
421
Shed, which has a default 3 in 12 pitch. For flat. The top dormer window casing is
Gambrel and Mansard types, this applies to usually close to this height.
the lowest, or eave, roof planes.
Unlike other dormer types, shed dormer
Check Pitch in Degrees to display the pitch height is measured from the same bottom
in degrees. point to where the underside of the dormer
rafter meets the dormer front wall interior.
3 The Second Pitch specifies the upper • Check Set to Existing Ceiling to assign
roof of a Gambrel, Mansard, curved
eave, and hip curved eave. Specify the the ceiling height of the room behind the
Distance In from the lower roof plane eave dormer to the dormer.
to where the upper roof plane starts. • Height to Reach Existing shows the dif-
ference between the dormer height where
4 Plumb or Square cut eaves can be the inside of the wall meets the underside
specified for dormer roof planes, as
well as Gutters and Boxed Eaves. of the roof and the ceiling of the room
behind it.
Check Include Frieze to include frieze
boards on this dormer. 8 Width is measured between the outside
surfaces of the dormer side walls.
5 Overhang, Fascia Depth for gable
fascia, Eave Fascia Depth and Rafter 9 Form Room Inside Dormer is used
Depth can also be set. only for floating dormers and creates a
flat ceiling in the dormer. If you check this
6 The Wall Type for the dormer walls is option, you should define the dormer on the
set here. floor above the room it is positioned over. If
this room has a flat ceiling, checking this
7 Specify the Height of the dormer, as option makes a hole in the ceiling under the
measured from where the top of the
underlying roof plane meets the dormer front dormer. This option should normally be left
wall exterior to where the underside of the unchecked.
dormer rafter meets the dormer side wall
interior. 10 If Set Inside Window Trim Width is
checked, the inside casing width for
dormer windows defaults to the Inside
Window value entered below. Dormer
windows can appear too narrow on the
outside due to the space required for the
Dormer inside casing to clear the inside surfaces of
height
the side walls. This value sets the width for
the inside casing of the dormer window.
Dashed line indicates
interior dormer side wall. 11 Roof Returns can be specified only for
gable dormers. See “Roof Returns” on
This top height is called the dormer ceiling page 423.
height, even if the ceiling in the dormer is not
422
Line Style Tab

Roof Returns and other Details

Chief Architect provides a selection of tools
to add details to your roof design.
Roof Returns
A roof return is a small decorative roof plane
that connects to the low side of a gable roof
overhang and extends below the upper
triangular portion of the gable wall. There Full Return
are three styles of roof returns that can be
produced automatically. It is not difficult to manually draw roof
returns using small roof planes, but it is
The first two styles are called Gable and Hip
quicker to produce them automatically.
returns since the return ends in a gable or hip.
The settings that generate auto roof returns
are found in the Wall Specification dialog.
See “Roof Tab” on page 252.
These roof return settings are also found in
the Dormer Specification dialog for gable
roof dormers and function similarly. See
Gable Over Door/Window

Hip Return Gable Return edit button to add a small gable
dormer over one or more selected doors or
The third is called a Full return because it windows the next time automatic roof planes
extends under the entire gable, connecting are built.
both sides.
The Gable/Roof Line displays in floor plan
view when the Roofs, Gable Lines layer is
set to display.
423
Roof Returns and other Details
whenever Build Fascia, Gutters, Frieze is

checked in the Build Roof dialog. See “Build
Tab” on page 378.
The materials used for fascia, gutters and
frieze can be specified in the Build Roof
dialog. See “Materials Tab” on page 385.
Fascia, gutters and frieze molding display in
3D views and are included in the materials
list. You can also display them in floor plan
view, if you wish. See “Layer Display
Fascia
The material specified for fascia in the Build
It is located about 12 inches (300 mm) Roof dialog displays as part of the roof plane
outside the wall and extends a foot on either rather than as a separate object.
side of the opening. Once produced, a gable
line can be moved, stretched, and edited. See In addition, fascia boards are generated when
“Gable/Roof Line” on page 412. roof framing is generated and are placed on
the “Framing, Roof” layer. The fascia
The Gable Over Door/Window edit material is not applied to these framing
button is not available for doors or windows members, however.
placed in Full Gable Walls or if a bay, box or The width and depth of fascia and eave fascia
bow window is selected. See “Bay, Box, can be specified in the Build Framing dialog.
Bow Windows & Roofs” on page 330. See “Roof Tab” on page 477.
If you move or resize the door or window(s), If you would like to create shadow boards, or
the associated Gable/Roof Line does not built-up fascia, you can do so using 3D
update until the roof is built again.
Molding Polylines . See “3D Molding
To remove a Gable Over Door/Window, Polyline Tool” on page 536.
select the door or window(s) and click the
Gutters
Delete Gable Over Opening edit button,
or select the gable line and click the You can select a gutter profile on the Gutter
tab of the Build Roof dialog. See “Gutter
Delete edit button. The next time the
Tab” on page 385.
roof is built, the gable will be removed.
Gutters are placed on the “Roofs, Gutters”
Fascia, Gutters & Frieze layer. By default, this layer is locked and
displaying in 3D views but not in plan view.
Fascia, gutters and frieze molding can be
added to roof planes. They are generated
424
Rafter Tails
Rafter tails are the rafters ends that overhang
the bearing walls and are located under the
eaves. They can be the full rafter depth or
trimmed to the depth of the soffits. Rafter
tails can also be partially enclosed by soffits,
and sometimes feature decorative profiles.
To produce a particular type of rafter tail, set
the correct defaults before you build both the
If you do not want gutters built, open the
roof planes and the roof framing:
Build Roof dialog, select Build Fascia, Gut-
ters, Frieze on the Roof tab, and then
To create full-depth exposed rafter ends
uncheck Gutters on the Options tab. The
fascia and frieze are rebuilt, but not the • Uncheck Soffits on the Options tab of the
gutters. Any existing gutters are deleted. Build Roof dialog. See “Options Tab” on
page 382.
To delete a gutter on a specific roof plane,
select the roof plane and uncheck Gutter in • Uncheck Generate Fascia and Generate
its Roof Plane Specification dialog. When Eave Sub Fascia on the Framing tab of
Gutter is unchecked, a gutter will not be the Build Roof dialog. See “Roof Tab”
generated on this roof plane next time you on page 477.
Build Fascia, Gutters, Frieze. See “Options
Tab” on page 382. To create hidden, trimmed rafter ends
• Check Soffits on the Options tab of the
Frieze Molding
Build Roof dialog.
Automatically generated frieze boards are • Check Trim To Soffits on the Framing
3D Molding Polylines placed along all tab of the Build Roof dialog.
exterior walls directly under the eaves.
Frieze does not generate along railings; To create full-depth, partially-exposed
however, if an attic wall is built above a rafter ends
railing, it can generate along that wall. • Check Soffits on the Options tab of the
You can specify one or more frieze molding Build Roof dialog.
profiles in the Build Roof dialog. See “Frieze • Uncheck Trim To Soffits on the Framing
Tab” on page 385. tab of the Build Roof dialog.
Frieze moldings are placed on the “Roofs, • Specify the desired Eave Sub Fascia
Frieze Molding” layer. By default, this layer Depth on the Framing tab of the Build
is locked, turned on in 3D views but not in Roof dialog.
plan view.
425
Roof Pitches in Degrees
To add a decorative profile to rafter tails

Soffit height is determined by the depth
• Set soffits and fascia as needed to pro-
of the eave subfascia, which is set on
the Framing tab of the Build Roof dialog. duce the desired rafter tail exposure, as
described above.
• Select a rafter tail profile on the Rafter
Tails tab of the Build Roof dialog. See
“Rafter Tails Tab” on page 383.
Roof Pitches in Degrees
426
427
Chapter 14:
Stairs & Landings
Staircases can be composed of one or more Chapter Contents

straight or curved stair sections and landings • The Stair Tools
in nearly any combination. Stair sections can • Anatomy of a Staircase
be edited individually or as a group. Starter • Drawing Stairs
treads can be defined, stair sections can be • Displaying Stairs
flared, treads can be wrapped, and curved • Merging Stair Sections
sections can be turned into winders. • Editing Stairs
Landings can be created automatically or • Winders
manually and their shape customized. You • Stair Landings
can edit an existing landing, or create a • Maintaining Tread Width
landing from a closed CAD polyline. • Flared Stairs and Curved Treads
Landing heights can be defined or you can let • Starter Treads
them automatically adjust as needed. • Wrapped Stairs
• Other Special Railings & Stairs
Stairwells can be created automatically or • Creating a Stairwell
manually and can be seen in all 3D views. • Rooms Below Staircases
Stairs can be drawn, selected and edited in • Staircase Specification Dialog
3D views. • Stair Landing Specification Dialog
Local building and fire authorities must

be consulted for specific stair construc-
tion codes and access requirements.
428
The Stair Tools

Select Build> Stairs to access the Stair same floor with a single click of the mouse.
Tools. Click the low side, within a few feet of where
the floor changes height.
Straight Stairs
Curved Stairs
To draw a straight staircase select
Build> Stairs> Straight Stairs, then Select Build> Stairs> Curve to
click and drag in floor plan or a 3D view. Left or Curve to Right and click
once in floor plan view to place a curved
Click Stairs staircase. For more information about creat-
ing curved stairs, see “Creating Curved
Select Build> Stairs> Click Stairs to Stairs” on page 430.
create stairs between levels on the
Anatomy of a Staircase
Stairs are often described in terms of rise and Rise - The height of a riser.
run. Rise is typically between 6" and 8", and
Riser - The vertical member of stairs
the run between 10" and 12". In metric plans,
between the treads.
rise is 177 to 190 mm, and the run about 250
mm. Run - The width of a stair tread.
Runner - The carpet that runs down the
A good rule of thumb is that rise plus center of the staircase.
run should equal 18" for a comfortable
stair step. Any rise over 7 1/2” is considered Shoe - The bottom railing, placed on the
steep regardless of the run. landing floor, that anchors the balusters at
landings.
Balusters - The vertical members that run
Stringer - The inclined support member of a
between the handrail and the treads.
staircase that supports the treads and risers.
Bracket - Decorative L-shaped supports on
Tread - The horizontal member of a stair the
the exposed side of stairs below each tread.
foot is placed on.
Landing - The platform connecting two stair
Winder - A wedge-shaped stair tread used
sections.
where curved or angled stairways change
Newels - The end post of a stair railing direction.
located at landings and the beginnings and
endings of new stair sections.
429
Drawing Stairs
Drawing Stairs
Stairs can be drawn in floor plan and 3D be dragged until it stops at the railing or
views but not in cross section/elevation wall defining the stairwell.
views.
Stairs can be drawn from the current floor
level downward; however, drawing stairs
To draw straight stairs
between floors in this manner is not
1. Select Build> Stairs> Straight recommended. Drawing stairs downward
should only be used to create stairs between a
Stairs .
room such as a porch or deck and the ground.
2. Click and drag to create straight stairs.
To draw stairs going downward
1. Select Build> Stairs> Straight

Stairs .
Stairs drawn on one floor in the UP direction 2. Hold down the Alt key or the right
begin at that floor level and automatically adjust mouse button.
rise and run to connect with the floor above. 3. Click and drag to create straight stairs.
If the finished grade is known, you can also
There are a few things to keep in mind when
create a “room” outside the structure using
drawing stairs.
invisible walls and establish the floor height
• Before stairs are created, make sure that for that area to match the finished grade.
the heights for both the lower and upper
Click Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
floors are correctly defined.
calculate the floor platform at the lower
• Stairs are drawn going UP, so they should elevation, then draw a normal staircase in an
be drawn from the lower of the two floors upward direction from the lower platform to
they connect. the upper platform. The program will
• Stairs adjust their riser and tread dimen- correctly connect the two heights.
sions to connect two floor heights if pos-
sible. The rise and run are calculated so Creating Curved Stairs
that the steps are consistent in size.
Curved Stairs can be created in
• If you have the Reference Display floor plan view by selecting
turned on, stairs snap to the reference dis- Build> Stairs> Curve to Left or Curve to
play. See “Reference Display” on page Right. Click to place a 90 degree curved stair
360. section that can then be edited.
• If a stairwell room has been defined on You can also curve straight stairs by drawing
the floor above, the top of the stairs can them against a curved wall.
430
• Select the stairs, hold down the Alt key

(or right-click), and drag an end edit han-
dle. See “Alternate” on page 138.
+ Alt
Straight stairs drawn along a curved wall
In addition, you can change a straight stair

section into curved stairs, or vice versa:
• Select the stairs and click the Change
Line/Arc edit button. See “Change
Line/Arc” on page 185.
Displaying Stairs
The display of stairs in all views is only multi-floor views show the upper floor
controlled in the Layer Display with the platform opening and the lower
Options dialog. See “Displaying Objects” on floor with the staircase simultaneously.
page 117.
You can specify whether newels and
In floor plan view, stairs display on the floor balusters display in floor plan view in the
they were drawn on and are only visible from Staircase Specification dialog. See
the floor above if there is a stairwell. “Newels/Balusters Tab” on page 455.
Stairs have an UP arrow on the floor they To see the center of a stair section curve,
were created on and a DN arrow when click Show Arc Centers and Ends . See
viewed from the floor above. “Show Arc Centers” on page 155.
Although stairs span between two floors,
they can only belong to one floor. As a result,
Merging Stair Sections

Any combination of straight or curved stair up of subsections and, if there are no
sections can be merged to create a single stair landings, functions as a single unit.
section. The resulting stair section is made
431
Merging Stair Sections
Stair subsections must be created in the same subsection. See “Using the Mouse” on page
direction if they are to be merged. Multiple 433.
stairs drawn in the UP direction may be
Subsections can be joined into a single stair
merged, and multiple stairs drawn DOWN
section without being aligned. If the stair
may be merged, but combinations of UP and
sections are parallel, the selected section
DOWN stairs do not merge.
moves so that it joins properly with the other.
Stair subsections merge at the center points
It is possible to merge stair sections that are
of their upper and lower risers.
not parallel, but they may not merge properly
if they are not precisely aligned.
To merge stair sections
1. Position the sections so they are in the

desired relationship to each other.
2. Select either stair section so that its edit
handles display.
3. Click the Extend handle on the end to be
merged and drag it to the point where the
Caused by
two stairs are to meet.
misalignment
Merging unaligned stair sections
The one method for joining stair sections at

different angles is to use curved stairs and
create winders. See “Winders” on page 434
and “Curved Stairs” on page 429.
Lock Tread Width

When a stair section with Lock Tread
Width selected in the Staircase
Merging parallel stair sections Specification dialog is resized, the length
expands or contracts one full tread at a time.
A staircase consisting of merged subsections
resembles a single stair section in floor plan When Lock Tread Width is checked, it can
view. The UP (or DN) arrows join, becoming be difficult to merge the section with another
a single direction arrow. section or landing. If this is a problem, you
can temporarily uncheck Lock Tread
When a subsection is clicked, the entire
Width. After the stairs are merged, the tread
staircase is selected. Most of the edit handles
width can be locked again. See “General
display within the boundaries of the selected
Tab” on page 450.
432
Curved Subsections 3. Click the Change Line/Arc edit

Stair subsections attached at both ends by button. The center section turns into a
other sections do not have a free end that can curved stair section.
be dragged into a curve. In this situation,
change the middle sub-section to a curve
using the Change Line/Arc edit button.
See “Change Line/Arc” on page 185.
To curve an enclosed stair subsection
1. Draw three straight stair sections and

connect them end to end.
2. Select the middle subsection.
After using Change Line/Arc
4. Use the Change Curve edit handle to

adjust the curvature of the middle sec-
tion as needed.
Stairs joined in this manner can easily be
turned into winders. See “Winders” on page
434.
Select the middle stair subsection
Editing Stairs
Staircases can be selected and edited in floor customize the staircase in many ways. The
plan view and 3D views. See “Selecting edit handles for stairs are similar to those of
Objects” on page 144. other objects. See “Editing Objects” on page
130.
Using the Mouse • Straight stair sections are edited like
When a staircase is selected edit handles lines. They have additional edit handles
display. These edit handles can be used to for resizing the width of the stair section.
433
Winders
See “Editing Line Based Objects” on Adjusting the Radius

page 147. of Curved Stairs
• Curved stair sections edited like arcs and
The easiest way to match the radius of a stair
also include edit handles for resizing the
section to the radius of a curved wall is to
stair’s width. See “Editing Arc Based
draw a staircase near one side of the curved
wall using the Straight Stairs tool. The
• When stair sections are merged, the edit
stairs snap to the wall, and the radius of the
handles display a little differently
new staircase is defined. See “Creating
depending on what subsection is
Curved Stairs” on page 430.
currently selected. See “Merging Stair
Sections” on page 431. Existing curved stairs can be aligned with an
• When moving merged stair sections, all existing curved wall by aligning their
merged stair sections also move. centers, much the same way that curved
stairs on different floors can be aligned. See
• Several additional edit handles display on “Aligning Objects” on page 180.
a staircase if the Flare/Curve Stairs
If there is no curved wall, the radius of a stair
edit button has been clicked. See “Flared
section can be aligned to a CAD arc or circle.
Stairs and Curved Treads” on page 440.
To align curved stairs to an object
1. Align the centers of the CAD object and
A selected staircase or staircases can be
the staircase. See “Aligning Objects” on
edited in a variety of ways using the buttons
page 180.
on the edit toolbar. See “Edit Toolbar
Buttons” on page 1140. 2. Select the curved stairs and move the
side nearest to the arc or circle edge
using the Resize edit handle.
Finally, restore the stair width by dragging
from the other side handle or using the Stair
Winders
Winders are steps located where a staircase Curved stair sections are typically used to
turns and are narrower on the inside of the create winders, although straight stairs can
turn than they are on the outside. A staircase also be used. See “Creating Curved Stairs”
defined as a winder expands to fill in any on page 430.
gaps between the side of the stairs and
nearby walls.
434
To create winders
1. In an enclosed room area, place and con-

nect the stair sections that you want to
be winders.
2. Select any subsection of the stairs and
click the Open Object edit button to Winders extend to nearby walls
open the Staircase Specification dia-
log. 4. The steps nearest the wall corner adjust
3. On the General tab, place a check in the their shapes and extend into the corner
box beside Winder and click OK. after the stair is changed to a winder.
Winders must be in a room with valid

room definition. You cannot create
winders in an area composed of only 2 corner
walls. If this configuration is needed, enclose
the area in with Invisible walls so that a room
area is defined.
Stair Landings
Stair landings are platforms between stair
sections and can be created in either of two
ways.
To create a landing between stair sections:
1. Draw two stair sections going UP. They

can be at any angle.
2. Click between the two sections using the Creating a stair landing
Straight Stairs tool to create a land- Multiple stair sections can be connected to
ing. Notice that only one direction arrow one landing. For example, two or three stair
displays after the sections are joined by sections might meet at a landing with a single
a landing. stair section continuing to the next level.
To be linked by a landing, all sections must
be drawn in the same direction (UP is
preferable) and the top of one section should
be near the bottom of the next.
435
Stair Landings
Stair sections connected with a landing will Unlocked Landings

move together as a single unit unless Stair
Sections Move Independently is checked in By default, a new stair landing is unlocked,
the Preferences dialog. See “Architectural so the stair sections attached to it determine
Panel” on page 88. its height. If the entire stair system forms a
single path from the lower to the upper floor
A landing formed between two stair sections with each landing connecting only two stair
having less than a 90 degree angle between sections, the program can set landing heights
them are created with a short edge not less without any difficulty.
than 6” (150 mm). This is because most
building codes require the shortest tread to be
at least 6” wide. This edge can be manually
edited to less than 6” if needed.
Custom Shaped Landings

Landings can be edited like other closed
polyline-based objects. You can add or
remove edges, convert an edge from straight In this example, two stair sections of the
to curved, or vice versa. A curved landing same length are located within a stairwell
creates curved railings. See “Editing Closed- and connected by a landing. Both stair
Polyline Based Objects” on page 160. sections have seven treads. Because the
landing height is set automatically according
You can also create a stair landing out of to the number of treads, all treads have the
closed polyline created with the CAD tools same tread width and riser height.
using the Convert Polyline edit button.
See “Convert Polyline” on page 205.
Landing Height
Landing height can be either user-defined or
controlled by the program. A landing with a
height that has not been specified by the user
is considered unlocked, and its height will
adjust automatically as the stairs attached to
it are modified.
If you specify a landing’s height, that landing
becomes locked and will maintain that height
no matter how the stairs connected to it are
adjusted.
436
may want to define the exact height of the

landing instead of letting the program define
it for you.
Locked Landings
A locked landing has a specifically defined
height that does not adjust automatically
when there are changes in the attached stairs.
Instead, the stairs adjust to the landing.
For example, start with the same staircase
used to illustrate unlocked landings, with one
change: the landing height is now defined at
75 inches (190 mm).
An unlocked landing maintains consistent stairs
Since both stair sections are the same length,

7 treads 6 treads
the landing height is a half of the total height
in each
between the two connected floors. section 8 treads
A change to either stair section affects the
Unlocked landing Landing locked at 75"
height of the connected landing and the other
stair section. The program tries to maintain Notice that a tread is subtracted from the top
the connection to the floor above, and the and added to the bottom. The program makes
landing adjusts in height so that the entire this adjustment to keep the riser heights
stair system has the same riser height, within a reasonable range.
regardless of how many stairs are placed on
each side of the landing. The stair sections no longer relate to each
other when they are attached to a locked
If more than two stair sections meet at a landing. Changes to one stair section do not
landing, the relationship between them affect the other.
becomes more complex. In this situation, you
437
Stair Landings
You can use a locked landing to break up a

complex network of stairs and landings into
smaller pieces with known starting and
ending heights.
To lock a landing
1. Select the landing and click the Open

Object edit button to open the Stair
Landing Specification dialog.
2. The Height value displays with a “[D]”,
indicating that the landing height is
defined by the stair sections.
3. Remove the “[D]” and enter the desired

height.
Locked landings produce
independent stair sections
In this example, each set of stairs is adjusted 4. The landing moves to that height. Once
so it bridges the height from the floor to the you have defined a height for the land-
landing. Since the landing height is above the ing, all stairs that meet that landing are
halfway mark, the upper stair section has redefined.
very shallow (5") riser height, and the lower
section has a steeper (7-1/2") riser height. To unlock a landing
When a locked landing is used, the Staircase 1. Select the landing and click the Open
Specification dialog shows only the selected
stair section and those connected to it by Object edit button to open the Stair
unlocked landings, rather than the entire stair Landing Specification dialog.
system. 2. Enter a “d” in the Height field and press
When a stair section is moved, all unlocked the Tab key. The current default height
landings and any stair sections connected to reappears with “[D]” after it. Then land-
those landings move as well. A locked ing changes to the appropriate height
landing, does not move when attached stairs when you close the dialog. See
are moved. To move a stair section “Dynamic Defaults” on page 67.
independently, select this option in the
Preferences dialog. See “Architectural
438
Maintaining Tread Width

Most building codes require staircases to There are two ways to keep tread width even
maintain consistent tread width. throughout a stair section made of multiple
subsections.
Walk Line
Lock Tread Width
By default, Chief Architect measures the
length and tread width of a stair section along The first way to maintain tread width is to
a walk line. The walk line is typically located Lock Tread Width to a specified value in
12" or 30 cm from the edge of the stair the Staircase Specification dialog. See
section. On curved stairs, it is measured from “General Tab” on page 450.
the inside edge of the curve.
Once locked, any changes to the length of the
The walk line distance from the staircase stair section are by maintaining the specified
edge can be specified on the Style tab of the tread width and instead changing the number
Staircase Specification dialog. See “Style of treads.
Tab” on page 453.
A stair section consisting of multiple
Alternatively, you can turn the walk line subsections must have the tread width locked
feature off and tread width will be measured so the tread width of each subsection is set to
at the tread center. See “Style Tab” on page the same value.
453.
Ignore Subsection
Boundaries
Uniform tread width can also be maintained
by selecting Ignore Subsection Boundaries
in the Staircase Specification dialog. This
maintains a consistent tread width
throughout a stair section without regard to
Walk Line at 12" Center Line subsection boundaries. The tread width value
may change when the stair section is edited,
When the walk line is used on a curved stair but remains consistent throughout all
section, the number and/or width of treads in subsections. See “General Tab” on page 450.
a section or subsection changes when the
inner edge is moved because the walk line is Because the program is ignoring the
measured from this inner edge. You should boundaries where one stair section merges
set the stair section width to its final value as with another, the treads where a straight
early as possible. section joins a curved section may angle to
accomodate the adjustment.
439
Flared Stairs and Curved Treads
These are the subsection boundaries. Check Ignore Subsection

Note that they are straight, exactly as Boundaries to have the
created. The walk line around the program adjust all the treads
center treads is too narrow. of a stair system so that they
maintain consistent width along
the walkline. Note that it
adjusted the boundary lines to
accomodate the walk line along
the center stairs.

Any stair section can be flared and/or
its treads curved using the Flare/
Curve Stairs edit button.
Only exposed sides of a stair section can be
flared. If one side of a stair section is against
a wall or wrapped (see “Wrapped Stairs” on
page 444), only the exposed end can be
flared.
Flaring, curved treads, and special

treads should be the last changes that
you make to any stairs.
Creating a Flared Stair

Flared stairs grow wider near one end,
typically sweeping outward at the bottom.
Stairs can also be flared at the top or on both To create flared stairs
ends.
1. Create the stairs and connect them to a
landing, floor platform edge, or another
stair section.
2. Specify the section width, tread width,
and any other needed information.
440
3. Select the stairs and click the Flare/ Adjusting the Flare Radius
Curve Stairs edit button. New Flare After a flared staircase has been created, you
edit handles display on all four corners may want to soften the radius of the flare.
of the stairs.
4. Drag one of the corner handles to flare
that corner. As you drag the flare, the
Status Bar shows the distance the side
handle moves. This allows you to move
the opposite handle the same amount.
Flare
dimensions
display in the
Status Bar
Creating flared stairs

The four handles at the sides and the four
5. When you are finished editing the flare, handles at the corners flare the stair section
click the Main Edit Mode to restore when dragged outward. The two handles in
the stairs’ regular edit handles and tool- the center of the section move the starting
bar buttons. point for flaring along the stair section.
To adjust the flare radius

Symmetrically Flared Stairs
First, adjust the curvature of the flared
Use the dimension information that displays
section.
in the Status Bar as a reference to create
symmetric flares on both sides. 1. Select the flared stair and click the
Flare Flare/Curve Stairs edit button to

dimensions access the flare handles again.
display in the 2. Select the handle along the flared edge
Status Bar of the stair. Drag this handle outward
very slightly. This forms a more gradual
flare.
Creating symmetrically flared stairs
441
To curve the edges of flared treads
1. Select the flared stair and click the

Flare/Curve Stairs edit button to
access the flare handles again.
2. Drag a corner edit handle upward one
tread width or less.
Adjusting the flare curvature
Then, adjust the starting point of the flare:
1. Select the flared stair and click the

Flare/Curve Stairs edit button to
access the flare handles again.
2. This time, drag the lower of the two cen- Curving the edges of flared treads
tral handles upward. The handle above it
moves with it. This moves the start point 3. When you are finished editing the curve,
for the bottom flare from the middle of click the Main Edit Mode to restore
the section toward its top, making the the stairs’ regular edit handles and tool-
flare even more gradual. bar buttons.
This type of tread curving works only on
flared edges and concentrates the curvature
at that edge.
Flared treads can also be curved using the
Curve edit handle, which curves the treads
more uniformly.
Curving the Treads

Adjusting the flare’s starting point
When treads are curved, all treads in the
Treads Perpendicular to Flare section show some degree of curvature.
Flared stairs often look best when the treads Treads close to the curved end have a greater
curve to meet the flared side perpendicular to curve than those at the opposite end, but both
the radius. ends can be curved.
442
2. Drag the edit handle at the center of the

bottom edge a small distance to curve
the treads.
Creating curved stair treads
3. When you are finished editing the curve,

To curve stair treads
click the Main Edit Mode to restore
1. Select the staircase, then click the Flare/ the stairs’ regular edit handles and tool-
bar buttons.
Curve Stairs edit button.
Starter Treads
The first and second treads of a
staircase can be turned into starter
treads by clicking the Starter Tread edit
button. Starter treads extend to the side of the
staircase, have rounded edges and are
common on traditional staircases.
A starter tread can be added only to open
sides of a stair section. If one side of a stair
section is against a wall or wrapped (see
“Wrapped Stairs” on page 444), only the
exposed tread end can become a starter tread.
443
Wrapped Stairs
To create starter treads 6. Drag either of the two square handles

upward to increase the width of the
1. Click on a staircase to select it. rounded ends of the tread.
2. Click the Starter Tread edit button.
An edit handle displays on each end of
both the first and second treads.
7. Drag the edit handle on the second tread

outward from the stair section to create a
second starter tread.
3. Drag either of the handles on the first
tread outward from the stair section. If
the stair section is against a wall, only
one handle displays on the side opposite
the wall.
4. As you drag, the ends of the tread
become rounded. 8. To make changes to existing starter
treads, select the stairs, click the Starter
Tread edit button and repeat the
above steps as needed.
9. When you are finished editing the starter
5. Two additional edit handles display on treads, click the Main Edit Mode to
each side of the tread, along the back restore the stairs’ regular edit handles
edge. and toolbar buttons.
Wrapped Stairs
Check Allow Wrap on the Style tab of the To wrap stairs around a deck
Staircase Specification dialog and the
selected stairs can be wrapped around the 1. Draw a deck if you have not already
corner of a deck or landing. Curved stairs done so. See “Decks” on page 275.
and stairs with multiple subsections cannot 2. Use the Click Stairs tool to draw a
be wrapped. See “Style Tab” on page 453. stair section on each side of the corner
Edits made to any of the wrapped stair around which you want them to wrap.
sections apply to all adjacent (wrapped) 3. Draw a second set of stairs on the other
sections. edge of the deck the same way.
444
4. If necessary, move the stair sections 2. Click between them to create a landing.
toward the corner of the deck. The two 3. Rotate one stair section 180°.
sections merge to form wrapped steps.
You can also draw stairs down from a

deck by right-clicking to draw them or by
pressing the Alt key while you drag. See “To
draw stairs going downward” on page 430.
4. The stairs wrap around the corner.

Notice that the Up arrow displays on the
most recently edited stair section.
To wrap stairs around a landing
1. Draw two perpendicular Straight

Stair sections.
Other Special Railings & Stairs

Partial Railings
A staircase can be enclosed on one side by a
combination of wall and railing.
445
Other Special Railings & Stairs
rior wall is 4" thick, setting this value to

4" should be sufficient.
5. On the Style tab, increase the Stringer
Bottom value to enclose the area under
the stairs with railings. The best value
depends on the design of your stairs.
6. On the Newels/Balusters tab, remove the
check from either Right or Left Railing
at Wall, depending on the position of
the stairs and wall in your plan.
7. Click the Object Snaps toggle but-

ton to temporarily turn off Object Snaps.
Partial railings can be created by specifying See “Object Snaps” on page 133.
the stairs as winders and increasing the Max 8. Select the stairs and use the side edit
Tread Contraction in the Staircase handle to move the edge of the stairs to
Specification dialog. See “Style Tab” on approximately the middle of the wall.
page 453.
The Max Tread Contraction defines the
largest distance that any section of the stair
system is allowed to move inward when the
stairs are turned into winders. If any point on
the edge of the stairs would have to move
inward more than this defined amount in
order to locate the surface of the wall, the
stairs do not contract and snap to that wall.
To create a partial stair railing
1. Create a staircase and draw an Interior Resizing stairs to the middle of the wall
Wall against, but not underneath, the
9. You may need to Zoom in on the
stairs.
stairs and wall to move the stair edge.
2. Select the stairs and click the Auto
Stairwell edit button to create a Solid Railings
stairwell.
To create a solid rail along a staircase, create
3. On the General tab of the Staircase the solid rail against, but not underneath, the
Specification dialog, check Winders. stairs. The solid railing recognizes the
4. On the Style tab, define the Max Tread adjacent stairs and climbs alongside them.
Contraction (for Winder). If the inte- See “Railing Tab” on page 258.
446
Steel Stringer
To make a steel stringer with concrete

treads:
1. On the Style tab of the Staircase

Specification dialog, set the Tread
Thickness to 2 inches or more.
If any balusters show beyond the railing, 2. Select the Single Stringer check box.
eliminate them by unchecking Left railing 3. On the Materials tab, set the Tread
or Right railing in the Staircase material to Concrete and the Riser/Trim
Specification dialog. See “Style Tab” on
material to steel.
page 453.
Masonry Stairs
Concrete Stairs
To make a solid concrete staircase: To make a set of masonry stairs:

1. On the Style tab of the Staircase 1. Set the Tread Overhang to zero.
Specification dialog, set the Tread
Overhang to zero. 2. Set the Tread Thickness to the thick-
ness of the masonry material.
2. Set the Tread Thickness to zero.
3. On the Materials tab, set the Tread
3. Remove any check from Open Risers. material to the masonry material and the
4. On the Materials tab, set the Tread and Riser/Trim material to concrete.
the Riser/Trim materials to Concrete.
447
Creating a Stairwell
An interior staircase must be located in a Floor. See “Reference Floor” on page
stairwell, an opening to the floor above. A 359.
stairwell is an Open Below room type on the 3. Select Tools> Reference Floors>
floor above.
Reference Display to show the Ref-
If you create a stairwell away from other erence Floor, including the stairs. If the
walls so the Open Below is created in the stairs do not display with the reference,
center of another room, connect a wall of the make sure the Reference Display Set is
Open Below room to another wall using an selected in the Layer Display Options
invisible wall. dialog. See “Displaying Objects” on
page 117.
Automatically 4. On the upper floor, use the Railing
tool to create a room around the stairs.
To create a stairwell that matches the Use the edit handles to position the rail-
perimeter of a selected staircase, click ings as needed.
the Auto Stairwell edit button. This button is
only available when a living space exists
above the staircase. It will not be available if
the space above is Open Below or on the
Attic Floor.
Auto Stairwell automatically creates a

room on the floor above enclosed by railings,
defined as Open Below in the Room
Specification dialog, and given a Stairwell 5. Select the railings one at a time and drag
room label. This room can be selected and them into position.
edited like any other room. 6. When the railings are positioned prop-
erly, select Tools> Reference Floors>
Creating a Stairwell Manually Reference Display to turn off the
Stairwells can also be created manually. display of the Reference Floor.
7. Click inside the room using the Select
To create a manual stairwell
Objects tool to select it, then click
1. Draw a two-story building. Create the
the Open Object edit button.
staircase on the first floor.
8. On the General tab of the Room
2. Make the second floor the Current
Specification dialog, select Open
Floor and the first floor the Reference
Below from the Room Type list. Click
OK to close the dialog.
448
If the doorway is specified larger than

the railing, the door maximizes to fit the
space available.
9. Place a Doorway in the railing at the

top step for an opening.
10. Select the doorway and define a large
width in the Door Specification dialog.
Rooms Below Staircases

Rooms such as closets or storage areas are • On the Fill Style tab, select None
commonly located beneath staircases. (Transparent) so the walls and other
objects under the stairs can be seen.
To create a room below a staircase 2. On the same floor as the staircase, draw
1. Draw a staircase, select it, and click the the Interior Walls under them, fol-
Open Object edit button to open the lowing their shape.
Staircase Specification dialog. 3. Reposition the walls as needed, making
• If Winders are specified for this stair- sure that each is entirely under the stairs.
case, set Max Tread Contraction to 2" 4. The wall at the foot of the stairs should
on the Style tab to allow walls to be be placed no closer to the bottom than
built entirely under the staircase. the second step.
5. Add a door and specify the Room Type.
449
Staircase Specification Dialog

Staircases can be defined with the greatest Specification dialog for the entire stair
accuracy using the Staircase Specification system.
dialog.
If more than one stair section attaches to an It is recommended that all floor heights,
unlocked landing, information about all the ceiling heights and platform thicknesses
linked stair sections is available in the be established before using the Staircase
specification dialog.
If a stair section is composed of multiple To open the Staircase Specification dialog,
subsections, the complete section may be select a stair section and click the Open
adjusted as a unit, or by defining each of its
Object edit button or double-click a stair
individual subsections. Any section or
subsection can be used to open the Staircase section using the Straight Stairs or
Select Objects tool.
General Tab
1 4
5
2
6
1 The comment line tells whether or not does not, the Make Reach button displays.
the staircase reaches the next floor. If it Click this button to add risers to the stairs.
450
The stair jack extends, raising the bottom move. If you change the length of the section
edge of the stair section until the staircase you originally selected, the end of that
reaches the next floor. section nearest where you clicked moves,
along with any unlocked landings and
Make Reach will also extend stairs drawn in
sections connected to it.
a downward direction until they reach the
terrain. Tread Width - Click the column title, then
specify the run of each individual tread. To
2 Structural information about the lock this value, check Lock Tread Width.
staircase displays here. This
information cannot be edited directly, but If you do not specify the tread width of each
updates with changes made in the dialog. subsection, the tread width for the whole
section is the same.
If you modify a value, press the Tab key to
update this information. If a landing is created by clicking between
two stair sections and one of them has locked
3 The specifications for each stair section tread width, the staircase formed from them
display and can be edited here. This
has locked tread width. Any landings and
section expands if the number stair sections
sections connected to this new staircase
and subsections increases.
adjust to meet it and then have locked tread
A stair section can be modified as a complete width as well.
unit or by subsection.
Five values can be changed. To change Note: You cannot both Lock Tread Width
Tread Width or Riser Angle, click the and Retain # Treads in the same staircase. If
column title to activate the fields below. a landing is created between two stair sec-
tions and one has locked tread width, the
A change in one value usually affects other entire staircase has locked tread width.
values in the same row. You may need to
reposition the staircase after the changes. # Treads - Define the number of treads in a
stair section or subsection. If you enter a
Section # - Identifies the stair sections. If
value and want to prevent it from changing,
Retain # Tread in Subsections is checked,
check Retain # treads in either Sections or
subsections are also identified.
Subsections to lock the value.
Length - Define the run, or length, of each
Sec. Width - Define the width of a section.
section measured along the Walk Line. The
Only one width can be defined for a section;
length is equal to the number of treads
all subsections in the same section have the
multiplied by the tread width and can be
same width.
defined with a specific value.
Rise Angle - Define the steepness of the stair
Before you change the length, you may want
section.
to first select Retain # Treads.
The maximum angle is 42 degrees. To
When the length of a section changes, all
exceed the 42 degree limit, decrease Length,
other stairs and landings connected to it also
Tread Width and/or # Treads.
451
Winders - Check this box to specify the average of all subsections. Check Lock
selected section as winders. This affects the Tread Width or Ignore Subsection
section as a whole, even if it is defined by Boundaries to ensure that the tread width
subsections. If multiple sections are shown is the true tread width throughout the
separated by landings, each section can be entire section. See “Lock Tread Width” on
individually specified as winders. page 439.
4 Click the Revert button to restore all Ignore Subsection Boundaries - Check this
values as they were when the dialog box to maintain tread width throughout a
was first opened. Revert only works within stair section composed of merged
the same editing session. subsections, regardless of subsection
boundaries. See “Ignore Subsection
If you select and then clear one of the Retain
Boundaries” on page 439.
# treads in check boxes, the settings also
revert. Retain #treads in: Sections - Check this box
to lock the number of treads in stair sections
5 Best riser height of ___ inches (mm) as a whole. This does not define the distribu-
requires ___ risers to reach ___
tion of treads throughout the different sub-
inches to next floor. This area describes the
sections, and does not include landings.
ideal rise and run for the selected staircase.
Note the number of inches (mm) to the next Retain # treads in: Subsection - Check this
floor; this value includes the ceiling height of box to specify the number of treads in each
the room plus the platform thickness of the subsection.
floor above.
If either check box is selected, any change in
If a landing is locked, its height is used to the length of a stair section is evenly
calculate this information. See “Locked distributed among the treads in that section
Landings” on page 437. or subsection. No new treads are added.
6 These options control the behavior of All stair sections linked by unlocked
the stair sections. landings to a selected stair section display in
the lower part of the dialog. If you select
Lock Tread Width - Check this box to lock
Retain # treads in: Subsection, all
the tread width value. If subsections are not
subsections display as well.
shown, the tread width for each section is the
452
Style Tab
The settings on the Style tab affect all stair
sections and subsections.
2 7
3 8
4 9
5
6
1 Stringer at Wall - Check this box to setting only affects those stringers that are
produce a raised stringer top baseboard not against a wall.
trim at the sides of the stair sections against
Large Stringer Base - Check this box to
walls. This baseboard follows the slope of
widen the stringer at the foot of the staircase.
the stair.
This is helpful when walls are created below
Single Stringer - Check this box to form a the stairs.
single 5-inch (125-mm) thick stringer in the
center of the staircase.
Checking Single Stringer automatically
checks the Open Risers box and clears the
Closed Stringer and Stringer at Wall
boxes. You may want to increase the tread
thickness when this is checked.
Large Stringer Base shown at right
Closed Stringer - Check this box to raise
each exposed stringer to cover the sides of Extend Stringer Top - This box is checked
the treads. If this is checked, no central by default. This option extends a triangular
stringer is applied to open riser stairs. This
453
portion of the stringer under the landing or generate along the bottom of the skirt, and
platform at the top of the stairs. doors cannot be placed in it.
Specify the height of the Stringer Top when The recommended way to enclose the area
Stringer at Wall or Closed Stringer is beneath stairs is to use walls. See “Rooms
selected. This is measured along the plane of Below Staircases” on page 449.
the riser face from the top of a tread to the
Open Risers - Check this box to eliminate
top of the stringer. It cannot be less than 2
the riser face under each tread and expose the
inches (5 cm).
stringers. If Closed Sides is also selected, no
Specify the height of the Stringer Bottom. central stringer is supplied.
This is measured from the top back corner of
a tread down to the bottom edge of the 5 Show Arrow - Check this box to show
the UP arrow or DN arrow in floor plan
stringer. It must be equal to or greater than
view.
the riser height.
6 Use Exterior Materials - Select the
2 Runner - Check this box to add a check box to have the entire staircase
carpet runner to all sections connected
use the same material as the railing.
by unlocked landings. Specify the Runner
Materials can be defined for the individual
Width. The default value of 0 does not create
parts of a staircase if this is not checked.
a runner.
Runner not Tucked - Normally, carpet 7 Max Tread Contraction (for Winder)
- Define the amount a tread may
runners are tucked under the tread overhang.
contract to create a winder. See “Partial
Check this box to have the runner span
Railings” on page 445.
directly from the tread front tothe bottom of
the riser below.
8 Tread Overhang - Specify the distance
that the tread overhangs the riser.
3 Use Walk Line - By default, Chief
Architect calculates the tread width Tread Thickness - Specify the tread
based on a walk line. Specify how far from thickness.
the edge of the stairs the Walk Line is
measured. This is normally 12 inches.
Uncheck the box to disable this function.
1
Show Walk Line - Check this box to show
the Walk Line in floor plan view. 8
8
For more information, see “Walk Line” on
page 439.
4 Open Underneath - Uncheck this box Tread Overhang, Tread Thickness, Stringer Top
to add a skirt below the staircase along
the two sides. It looks like a wall in 3D, but it
has only a single face. Base molding does not 9 Nosing at Top Landing - This option
produces tread nosing attached to
454
platform edge at the top of stairs. Landing platform edge at the top of the stairs.
edges are not affected. Checking this allows stair risers to match all
the way to the top of the platform. Landing
Riser Surface at Top Landing - Check this
edges are not affected.
box to produce a riser surface against the
Newels/Balusters Tab
1
6
2
3
1 Rail Height - Specify stair and landing • Baluster Type - Select Square, Round,
rail height. or Library balusters. Selecting Library
• Stair Rail Height defines the height from from the drop-down list is the same as
tread surface directly over the riser to clicking the Library button to the right
railing top. and allows selection of a baluster from
the library.
• Landing Rail Height defines the height
of the landing rail top from the landing • Baluster Width - Specify the width of
surface. each baluster. For Library balusters, this
is the width, or diameter, at its widest
2 Check Draw Newels/Balusters to point.
display newels and balusters in floor
• No Shoe for Rail - This option applies
plan view. This displays the Newels and
only to landing rails. Uncheck this box to
Balusters only for the selected stair section.
place a low rail on the landing surface
3 Baluster specifications. that receives the baluster bottoms.
• Cut Baluster Top - Each tread normally
has two to three balusters, growing lon-
455
ger toward its back. The default is to use

6 Railing specifications.
the same baluster and cut it off at the bot-
tom to shorten it toward the tread front.
• Railing - Select either or both check
Check this box to cut the balusters at the
boxes to specify placement of railings on
top instead.
stair sections and landings where they are
4 Newel specifications. not against a wall.
• Railing at Wall - Check to specify the
• Newel Type - Select Square, Round, or placement of wall railings.
Library newels. Selecting Library from
the drop-down list is the same as clicking
the Library button to the right and
allows selection of a newel from the
library.
• Newel Width - Specify the width of each
newel. For Library newels, this is the
width, or diameter, at its widest point.
• Newel Height - Specify the height from
the landing surface to the top of the
newel. This is used only when Rail
passes over Newel is unchecked. • Railing Transitions - Check to specify
• Newels at First Tread - Check this box the placement of “gooseneck” connec-
to place a newel where the rail starts at tions between stair and landing railings.
the base of the stairs. A newel is placed This option only has an effect when Rail
only on a side of the stairs not against a Passes Over Newel is checked.
wall.
• Rail Passes Over Newel - Adjust the
newel height to reach the bottom of the
rail that passes over it. Checking this
causes the Newel Height to be ignored.
5 Bracket - Click the Library button to

apply a 1/4 inch thick bracket to the
side of the stringer under each riser. Brackets
are applied only where the side of the stairs is
not against a wall. The stringer on that side is
moved in 1/4 inch to accomodate the bracket. Checking both Railing Transitions and
Smooth Transitions produces a handrail like
this:
456
• Smooth Transitions - Check to specify

the placement of smooth connections
between stair and landing railings.
Handrail Tab
1
2
3
4 5
1 Molding - Shows the current handrail 4 Preview Pane - Shows the selected
profile. This says “Default Handrail” molding profile. No preview displays
unless you select a custom handrail profile. for the Default Handrail option, which is
rectangular.
2 Select - Click this button to open the
Select Library Object dialog and
choose a profile from the library. Note: Handrails are shown on their side,
rotated counter-clockwise by 90 degrees.
3 Default - Click this button to remove a
specified handrail and use the default.
5 Width and Height - Specify the width
and height of the railing.
457
Stair Landing Specification Dialog

For information about using the Line Style For information about using the Materials
tab, see “Line Style Tab” on page 889. tab, see “Materials Tab” on page 709.
Fill Style Tab

For information about using the Fill Style
tab, see “Fill Style Tab” on page 899.
Stair Landing Specification Dialog

Select a landing and click the Open
3 No Rail on Selected Edge - Suppress
Object edit button to open the Stair railing on the edge nearest to where you
Landing Specification dialog.
clicked when selecting this landing.
General Tab Polyline Tab

For information about the Polyline tab, see
“Polyline Tab” on page 901 .
Selected Line Tab

1 For information about the Selected Line tab,
2 see “Selected Line Tab” on page 901.
3 Line Style Tab

1 Height - Specify the height of the see “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
landing. Enter a “D” to unlock the
landing height and use the default height. Fill Style Tab
The default height is determined by corrected
stair sections when you exit the dialog. See For information about the Fill Style tab, see
“Locked Landings” on page 437. “Fill Style Tab” on page 899.
2 Thickness - Enter a thickness for the Materials Tab

landing. Enter a “D” to use the default.
458
459
Chapter 15:
Framing
In Chief Architect, framing can be produced Chapter Contents

both manually and automatically, and can be • Framing Defaults
calculated in the Materials List. • Manual vs. Automatic Framing
Manual framing members are drawn by • The Framing Tools
clicking and dragging, like drawing a CAD • Build Framing Dialog
line. Automatic framing for the major • Framing Reference Markers
components of a 3D model (floors, ceilings, • Bearing Lines
walls and roofs) can be generated using the • Joist Direction Lines
Build Framing dialog. • Displaying Framing
• Editing Framing
Both manually drawn and automatically • Keeping Framing Current
generated framing members can be selected • Framing and the Materials List
and edited in 2D and 3D views. • Framing Specification Dialog
Trusses are covered in their own chapter, • Post Specification Dialog
“Trusses” on page 494.
460
Framing Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings to open on a room by room basis in the Room
the Default Settings dialog. Select Specification dialog, or for individual
Framing from the list, then click the Edit platforms using Joist Direction lines.
button to open the Framing Defaults dialog. See “Structure Tab” on page 286 and “Joist
Both automatic and manually-drawn framing Direction Lines” on page 482.
are generated according to the settings in the
Framing Defaults dialog. Wall Framing
This dialog is nearly identical to the Build Like other types of framing, wall framing is
Framing dialog in both appearance and generated based on settings in the Framing
function. The only difference is that the Defaults dialog. See “Wall Tab” on page
Build Framing dialog has checkboxes that 471, “Openings Tab” on page 473 and
allow you to automatically generate different “Headers Tab” on page 474.
types of framing in your plan. See “Build
In addition, though, wall framing is
Framing Dialog” on page 467.
dependent on settings from other sources:
Any changes made in the Framing Defaults • The wall type definition settings used by
or Build Framing dialogs will affect each wall type in the plan. See “Wall
subsequently drawn or generated framing, Type Definitions Dialog” on page 243.
but not framing already present in the plan.
• The definition of the framing material
assigned to each wall type used in a plan.
The settings in the Framing Defaults See “Material Types” on page 707.
dialog directly affect a variety of impor-
tant structural elements in each plan which In order for wall framing to automatically
determine floor, ceiling and roof heights; so it generate, a wall’s framing layer must be set
is best to set your Framing Defaults before as its Main Layer and its framing material
building your model. See “Drawing a Plan” on
just be a Framing type. See “The Main
page 35.
Layer” on page 242.
Floor and Ceiling Framing
Roof Framing
Floor and ceiling platform depths contribute
Settings on the Roof and Trusses tabs of the
to the overall height of a structure, so their
Framing Defaults dialog determine the
default values should be set as early as
structure of roof planes and how they rest on
possible. See “Floor Tabs” on page 468.
bearing walls, so it is important tht their
If you plan to draw floor trusses, also see default values be set before building the roof.
“Trusses Tab” on page 479. See “Roof Tab” on page 477 and “Trusses
Tab” on page 479.
The default floor and ceiling platform
settings for a given floor can be overridden
461
Manual vs. Automatic Framing
If changes are made to these defaults that you need to rebuild the entire roof - not just the
need to apply to the entire roof plan, you will roof framing. See “Roofs” on page 374.
Manual vs. Automatic Framing

Platform, roof, and wall framing can be then click OK to build wall framing once
produced manually or automatically. In most based on the current state of the model.
cases, automatically-generated framing is • Select the Automatic checkbox, then
preferable because it is faster than manually click OK to build automatic framing
placing, replicating and editing numerous every time a change is made to that struc-
individual framing members. tural component in the plan. For example,
In many plans, though, framing is drawn check Automatic Wall Framing on the
using both approaches. For example, a Wall tab to rebuild all wall framing any
combination of automatically generated time a wall is affected by changes to the
rafters and manually drawn trusses can be model.
used to model a roof framing plan. See
“Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing” on Manual Framing
page 501.
Framing objects can also be drawn manually.
Regardless of how it is created, individual With the exception of Posts, framing objects
framing members can be selected and edited. are drawn by clicking and dragging in a
See “Editing Framing” on page 487. straight line, the way other line-based objects
are. See “Draw Line” on page 884.
Automatic Framing The manual framing tools are organized into
Automatic framing of floor and ceiling families: general framing, floor and ceiling
platforms, walls and roofs can be generated framing and roof framing. The family that a
using the Build Framing dialog. The settings drawing tool belongs to determines where it
in this dialog control the size, spacing, and can be used:
type of framing drawn in a plan, and related • Roof framing objects can only be drawn
structural information for the major within the area of one or more roof
components of the 3D model. See “Build planes.
• Floor and ceiling framing objects can
Automatic framing of a particular structural only be drawn within one or more floor
component is not generated until the Build or ceiling platforms.
Framing dialog is opened to the appropriate
tab and one of two checkboxes selected: • General Framing objects and
• Select the Build checkbox to build auto- Posts can be drawn anywhere in a
matic framing once. For example, check model.
Build Wall Framing on the Wall tab,
462
• General Framing objects can also be Framing in the Wall Specification dialog.
drawn in CAD Details. See “CAD See “General Tab” on page 250.
Details” on page 917.
Mixing Rafters and Trusses
• Wall Bridging can only be drawn in
If you plan to mix roof trusses with rafters
a Wall Detail window. See “In Wall
and/or ceiling joists, you can save time by:
Detail Views” on page 486.
• Check Trusses (No birdsmouth) in the
Rebuilding Framing Build Roof dialog before automatically
building or manually drawing a roof. See
It is important to remember that by default, “Build Roof Dialog” on page 377.
framing does not update automatically when
• Draw and position all roof trusses before
changes are made to the model. For example,
using the automatic framing generator to
if a window is moved or resized, the wall
produce rafters and ceiling joists. See
framing must be rebuilt. If the footprint is
“Floor and Ceiling Trusses” on page 495.
enlarged, the wall framing and any roof or
platform framing that is affected must be Some other important things to consider:
rebuilt. • Rafters and joists that are parallel to a
You can direct the program to rebuild the roof truss are not generated closer than 14
automatic framing of floors/ceilings, walls inches (350mm) to the truss.
and/or roofs every time a change to the • Automatically produced rafters and joists
model affects one of these components. To do not cross an existing truss, but do gen-
do this, select the Automatic checkbox on erate from the eave inward until they butt
the Floor, Wall and/or Roof tabs of the Build into a truss.
Framing dialog.
• Rafters and hip ridges can pass over a
To learn more, see “Keeping Framing drop hip truss. See “Drop Hip or Califor-
Current” on page 488. nia Hip” on page 507.
When automatic framing associated with a • Lookouts can pass over a reduced gable
particular tab in the Build Framing dialog is truss.
built, any previously existing automatically • When rafters are parallel to trusses, the
produced framing of the same type is deleted tops of the rafters are placed in line with
and replaced. the tops of the trusses. Since the depth of
With the exception of wall framing, a rafter is normally greater than that of a
manually drawn framing is unaffected when truss's top chord, the lower rafter edge is
automatic framing is rebuilt and remains below the top plate of the supporting
along with the newly produced automatic wall, requiring a birdsmouth cut into the
framing. By default, manually drawn wall rafter. If the truss is raised to provide
framing is deleted when automatic framing is space for insulation, the rafter may not
rebuilt; however, you can prevent this from need to be cut at all. If the truss is raised
occurring by checking Retain Wall
463
The Framing Tools
too much, the rafter may not rest on the priate floor or ceiling framing. See
top plate at all. “Floor Tabs” on page 468.
Framing with Beams To build joists that butt against a beam
Floor/Ceiling Beams can be drawn in a 1. Draw a Floor/Ceiling Beam at the

plan either before or after automatic framing desired location in your plan.
has been generated. If a beam is created
before automatic framing, you can specify 2. Select the beam and click the Open
whether joists bear on the beam or hang on Object edit button. On the General
its sides. tab of the Beam Specification dialog:
• Specify the desired Depth value and
To build joists that bear on a beam then lock it.
• Specify the Bottom Height value so
1. Draw a Floor/Ceiling Beam at the that it is equal to the Ceiling Height of
desired location in your plan. the room(s) over which the beam is
2. Select the beam and click the Open placed.
• Uncheck Bearing Beam.
Object edit button. On the General
tab of the Beam Specification dialog, 3. If necessary, select Build> Framing>
confirm that: Joist Direction Line and draw a line
• The Top Height value is equal to the perpendicular to the beam and within the
Ceiling Height of the room(s) over floor or ceiling platform.
which the beam is placed. 4. Click OK, then select Build> Framing>
• Bearing Beam is checked.
Build Framing and build the appro-
3. Click OK, then select Build> Framing> priate floor or ceiling framing. See
Build Framing and build the appro- “Floor Tabs” on page 468.
The Framing Tools

Select Build> Framing to access the The default settings for framing members are
automatic and manual Framing Tools. derived from their respective tabs in the
Framing Defaults dialog.
The Framing Tools family has three separate
parent buttons: General Framing Tools , Most types of framing can be created both
manually and automatically. Once created,
Floor/Ceiling Framing Tools , and Roof both automatically generated and manually
Framing Tools . drawn framing members can be selected and
edited. See “Editing Framing” on page 487.
464
Automatic wall bridging can be created when

As a general rule, horizontal framing wall framing is built or rebuilt. See “Wall
members are referred to as "joists" Tab” on page 471.
(floor/ceiling platform framing); vertical fram-
ing members are referred to as "studs" (wall
framing); and sloped framing members are Post
referred to as rafters (roof framing).
Posts can only be placed manually. To
do so, select Build> Framing> Post
Build Framing and click in floor plan view. Placing a post
Select Build> Framing> Build on the lowest level of a plan also creates a
Framing to open the Build Framing footing.
dialog. Here, you can define settings that
control how framing is drawn and generate Rafter
automatic framing. See “Build Framing Rafters can be drawn both manually
Dialog” on page 467. and automatically. To draw a rafter
manually, select Build> Framing> Rafter,
General Framing in floor plan view, then click and drag in a
General Framing objects are generic, straight line within a roof plane.
framing members that can be drawn Rafters are edited like other framing
outside of a floor or ceiling platform or roof members, except that you cannot set the
plane. Select Build> Framing> General height. If a rafter is moved, its height and
Framing, then click and drag in a straight slope are automatically reset to fit under the
line to create one of these objects. In floor roof plane at its new position.
plan view, a horizontal framing member is
created; in a Wall Detail, vertical members Roof Blocking
can also be drawn. See “In Wall Detail
Views” on page 486. Roof blocking can only be drawn
manually. To do so, select Build>
Wall Bridging Framing> Roof Blocking in floor plan view
and click and drag in a straight line within a
Wall Bridging can be created both roof plane.
automatically and manually, but can
only be drawn manually in a Wall Detail Each run of blocking has gaps where it
Window. To do so, open a Wall Detail and crosses rafters, trusses or other blocking but
select CAD> Boxes & Framing> Wall behaves as a single object.
Bridging, then click and drag in a straight Blocking is typically drawn perpendicular to
line across the wall in the view. See “In Wall the rafters, but at the same pitch. so blocking
Detail Views” on page 486. as seen in floor plan view represents the
Each run of bridging has gaps where it position of the top of the blocking.
crosses studs, but behaves as a single object. Before drawing Roof Blocking:
465
The Framing Tools
• Specify whether you want In Line, Stag- • If there is no floor platform above, a ceil-
ger blocking, or Cross bridging in the ing joist is drawn.
Framing Defaults dialog. • If there is a floor platform above, a floor
• Build the roof framing. See “Roof Tab” joist is drawn.
on page 477.
If you want to draw floor joists for Floor 1,
In 3D, roof blocking is tilted to follow the for example, you must do so on Floor 0. See
pitch of the roof plane in which it is drawn. “Foundations” on page 362.
Joists can be automatically generated for
Roof Truss multiple floors in the Build Framing dialog.
Roof trusses can only be drawn See “Floor Tabs” on page 468.
manually. To do so, select Build>
Framing> Roof Truss in floor plan view Ceiling joists, floor joists and rafters
and click and drag in a straight line within have their own layers. Proper layer
one or more roof planes. Roof planes and assignment maximizes display and materials
either a default or manually drawn ceiling flexibility.
must be present before a roof truss can be
drawn. See “Roof Trusses” on page 495. Joist Blocking
Joist blocking can only be drawn
Roof Beam manually. To do so, select Build>
Roof beams can only be drawn Framing> Joist Blocking in floor plan view
manually. To do so, select Build> and click and drag in a straight line within a
Framing> Roof Beam in floor plan view floor or ceiling platform.
and click and drag in a straight line. Roof Each run of blocking behaves as a single
beams are normally be drawn across rafters object.
and placed directly under them.
Before drawing Joist Blocking:
Joist • Specify whether you want In Line, Stag-
ger blocking, or Cross bridging in the
Floor and ceiling joists can be drawn
both manually and automatically. To
manually draw a joist, select Build> • Build the floor and/or ceiling platform.
Framing> Joist in floor plan view, then See “Floor Tabs” on page 468.
click and drag in a straight line within a floor
or ceiling platform. Floor/Ceiling Truss
Joists are always drawn as the ceiling Floor and ceiling trusses can only be
framing for the current floor. See “The drawn manually. To do so, select
Current Floor” on page 358. Whether a floor Build> Framing> Floor/Ceiling Truss in
or ceiling joist is drawn is determined by the floor plan view and click and drag in a
presence of a floor platform above. straight line within a floor or ceiling
466
platform. See “Floor and Ceiling Trusses” on can only be drawn manually. To place one,
page 495. select Build> Framing> Framing
Reference Marker in floor plan view and
Floor/Ceiling Beam click to place a framing reference marker.
Floor and ceiling beams can only be A Framing Reference Marker can also
drawn manually. To draw one, select
Build> Framing> Floor/Ceiling Beam in be created by placing a Marker and then
floor plan view and click and drag in a specifing its type. See “Markers” on page
straight line within a floor or ceiling 867 and “Framing Reference Markers” on
platform. page 480.
Beams can be drawn in two different ways: Bearing Line

• Under Joists places the beam underneath
Bearing Lines direct the program to
the joists so the joists can bear on it.
lap or butt joists and/or rafters where
• With Joists places the top of the beam they cross the line instead of framing across
even with the tops of the joists it sup- it to the next wall and can only be drawn in
ports. The joist then butts against it. See floor plan view. To draw one, select Build>
“Posts/Beams Tab” on page 475. Framing> Bearing Line and click and drag
in a straight line. See “Bearing Lines” on
Beams should be placed before joists page 482.
are produced by automatic framing. If
With Joists is specified, the joists are cut by Joist Direction
and butted against the beam. If Under Joists
is specified, the joists are automatically Joist direction lines define the
butted or lapped over the beam. direction in which joists run in a floor
or ceiling platform and can only be drawn in
Framing Reference Marker floor plan view. To draw one, select Build>
Framing> Joist Direction and click and
Framing Reference Markers are drag within a floor or ceiling platform. See
reference points that specify how to “Joist Direction Lines” on page 482.
lay out automatically-produced framing and
Build Framing Dialog

Automatic framing can be generated The Build Framing dialog is organized so
by selecting Build> Framing> Build that each major structural component of the
Framing to open the Build Framing dialog. model has its own tab or tabs. The number of
This dialog can also be accessed by double- tabs in the dialog varies depending on how
clicking either the Framing Tools button many floors are in your model. There is be a
tab called “1st” for the first floor, “2nd” for
or the Rafter tool. the second floor, and so on.
467
• Floor and ceiling framing settings are • Roof framing settings are fouind on the
found on the Floor tabs. See “Floor Tabs” Roof and Trusses tabs. See “Roof Tab”
on page 468. on page 477 and “Trusses Tab” on page
• Wall framing settings are located on the 479.
Wall, Openings and Headers tabs. See • You can set the default materials used for
“Wall Tab” on page 471, “Openings Tab” framing on the Materials tab.
on page 473 and “Headers Tab” on page
474.
Floor Tabs
The Build Framing dialog opens to the Build Floor Framing check box will be
framing tab for the current floor, such as available. If there is no living space above
Foundation, 1st or 2nd. Each tab specifies the floor, the Build Ceiling Framing check
framing for specific floors or assemblies. box will be available instead.
Switch between tabs to define all settings. The platform structure settings defined here
The floor framing information for a given affect all rooms on the floor, but can be
floor is found on the Floor tab for the floor overridden for individual rooms in the Room
below it, because that is where the framing Specification dialog or for individual
will display in floor plan view when it is platforms using Joist Direction lines.
generated. For example, the floor framing See “Structure Tab” on page 286 and “Joist
information for Floor 2 is found on the 1st Direction Lines” on page 482.
tab, while the floor framing for Floor 1 is
found on the Foundation tab. By default, joists will automatically generate
in the direction that results in the shortest
To automatically generate the floor framing span; however, you can produce different
for Floor 1, a foundation on Floor 0 must be
present. If a Floor 0 has not been built, the results using Bearing Lines , Floor/Ceil-
Build Floor Framing check box on the ing Beams and/or Joist Direction
Foundation tab will not be available. lines. See “Bearing Lines” on page 482 and
“Joist Direction Lines” on page 482.
Each Floor tab is divided into two halves:
• The right half is for floor framing specifi-
cations, and applies to the model when
the floor above is living space.
• The left half is for ceiling framing speci-
fications, and is relevant only when the
floor in question is the top floor of the
plan.
If there is living space above the floor
corresponding to a particular Floor tab, the
468
1
2 8
3 9
4 10
5 11
6 12
7 13
1 Check Automatic Floor/Ceiling coincide with rafters. Be sure to build the

Framing to regenerate floor and ceiling roof framing first if you are doing this.
framing whenever changes are made to the
A Framing Reference Marker is not usually
model. See “Automatic Framing” on page
used for both ceiling joists and nearby rafters
462.
that run the same way because one is placed
2 Check Build ceiling framing to on top of the other.
generate or regenerate ceiling framing
For floor joists, the starting point for a joist
when the OK button is clicked. Build Ceiling
layout is always the Framing Reference
Framing is only available when there is no
Marker. See “Framing Reference Markers”
living space above at least part of the current
on page 480.
floor.
4 Specify whether the ceiling framing
3 Use Framing Reference - This applies members Lap or Butt over bearing
to ceiling framing only. The Framing
walls. The lap is eight inches (200 mm) and
Reference Marker is the starting point for
centered over the support.
framing layout. If a reference is placed, the
center of the first joist is placed at this point • When a Framing Reference Marker is
and spacing goes from there. If joists are used and Butt Over Support is checked,
lapped, the surface is placed at this point. the joists are placed at reference spacing.
If the check box is cleared, the program • If Lap is checked, the surfaces where the
attempts to position ceiling joists so that they joists lap are placed at reference spacing,
469
so that joists are placed on either side of is only available when there is no living
the framing reference locations. space above at least part of the current floor.
5 Specify the spacing and size of the 9 Check Rim Joist to automatically
ceiling framing. produce a rim joist across the ends of
• Enter a value for the Spacing of ceiling the floor joists. If this is unchecked, line
joists above the current floor. blocking across the ends of the floor joists is
usually drawn in later.
• Specify the Joist Width, which is their
horizontal thickness. 10 Specify if the framing members Lap or
Butt over bearing walls. See #4, above.
• Specify the Joist Depth , which is their
vertical depth. This value affects the ceil-
11 Specify the spacing and size of the floor
ing platform thickness. framing.
The Joist Depth affects ceiling platform • Enter a value for the Spacing of floor
thicknesses and be overridden per room in joists above the current floor.
the Room Specification dialog. See • Specify the Subfloor Thickness, which
“Structure Tab” on page 286. is the thickness of the floor sheathing.
6 Select the Type of ceiling joist from the • Specify the Joist Width, which is their
drop-down list. See “Framing Member horizontal thickness.
Types” on page 489. • Specify the Joist Depth, which is their
The Type can be overridden per room in the vertical depth.
Room Specification dialog. See “Structure The Subfloor Thickness and Joist Depth both
Tab” on page 286. affect floor platform thicknesses and can be
overridden per room in the Room
7 Blocking / Bridging specifies how Specification dialog. See “Structure Tab” on
blocking is manually drawn after joists
have been placed. See “Joist Blocking” on page 286.
page 466. When viewing framing, Subfloor Thickness
• In Line produces blocking pieces that may be represented by a gap. To remove this
align with each other. gap, change the value to zero and rebuild the
• Stagger produces blocking that alternates framing. See “Structure Tab” on page 286.
on either side of the line you draw. If the material Concrete is applied to the
• Cross produces cross bridging that looks floor, platform thickness is specified in the
like in line blocking in floor plan view, Foundation Defaults dialog. See “Building
but shows as cross bridging in 3D views a Foundation” on page 366.
and the materials list.
12 Select the Type of floor joist from the
drop-down list. See #6, above.
8 Check Build floor framing to generate
or regenerate floor framing when the
OK button is clicked. Build Ceiling Framing
470
13 Specify how Blocking / Bridging is

manually drawn after joists have been
placed. See“Joist Blocking” on page 466.
Wall Tab
The Wall, Openings, and Headers tabs are all
referenced by the program to determine how You can still make changes to your plan
walls are framed. The settings on these three once you have framed your model. If
tabs define how automatic framing generates your changes affect framing, if a wall or ceil-
ing were moved for instance, rebuild framing
and how wall framing is calculated for the
to update the model.
Materials List.
1 2
1 Specify how Wall studs and bridging changes are made to the model. See
are built. “Automatic Framing” on page 462.
• Check Build Wall Framing to build wall • Check Use Wall Framing Material to
framing for the entire model. Framing is use the stud thickness and spacing
built in walls whose Main Layer material defined for the framing material used by
type is “framing”. See “Wall Type Defi- each wall type. See “Define Material
nitions” on page 241. Dialog” on page 719. Uncheck this box
• Check Automatic Wall Framing to to use the thickness and spacing values
regenerate wall framing whenever below for all wall types.
471
• Specify the Stud Thickness for all walls angles are framed. 90 degree corners are not
in the plan. Stud depth is set by each affected by these settings.
wall's Main Layer thickness. Not avail- • Select Mitre Plate Ends to mitre the
able when Use Wall Framing Material is ends of the top and bottom plates. If
used. unchecked, top and bottom plates will be
• Specify the Stud Spacing for all walls in butted together.
the plan, starting from the Framing Ref- • Select Rotate End Studs to rotate the
erence Marker, if one is present. See studs closest to mitre ends to the angle of
“Framing Reference Markers” on page the mitre. If unchecked, studs will remain
480. Not available when Use Wall Fram- perpendicular to the angle of the walls.
ing Material is used.
• Select Horizontal Frame Thru to frame
• Check Build Wall Framing Details through the horizontal walls in floor plan
from Exterior to have Wall Detail views view, butting vertical walls against them.
display from the exterior of the plan If unchecked, walls that are vertical in
rather than the interior. See “In Wall floor plan view will frame through.
Detail Views” on page 486.
Specify where and how Bridging is drawn.
See “Wall Bridging” on page 465.
• Check Exterior to automatically produce
bridging on external walls when wall
framing is built.
• Check Interior to automatically produce
bridging on internal walls when wall
framing is built.
• In Line produces bridging pieces that
align with each other.
• Stagger produces bridging that alternates
on either side of a center line along the
wall.
2 Define how top and bottom Plates are

generated.
• Specify the Number of Top Plates, as
well as their Thickness.
• Specify the Number of Bottom Plates,
as well as their Thickness.
3 Mitre Ends of Angle Walls - Specify

how wall corners that are not right
472
Openings Tab
The rough openings for doors and windows
can be specified in the Door and Window
Defaults dialogs. See “Default Settings” on
page 63.
1 2
1 Specify when to build more than one • Specify the Bay Component Thickness,
Trimmer, or stud shortened to support which is the thickness of a thinner trim-
a header, based on wall opening width. mer for bay/box/bow window component
• Double Trimmer At - Openings up to headers if a standard trimmer does not fit
this value in width have two trimmers on after the component window is manually
each side. resized. See “Resizing Components” on
page 329. The default for this value is 3/
• Triple Trimmer At - Openings up to this 4” (20mm).
value in width have three trimmers.
• Specify the Max Bay Trimmers , which 2 Specify the construction of the window
Sills, which refer to the framing below
is the maximum number of trimmers that
the window rather than the finished sill.
a bay, box or bow window with a lowered
top height can have on each side of the • Specify the Thickness for window sills.
opening. Enter 0 to suppress trimmers for • Check Double Sill to specify a double sill
bay/box/bow window opening headers. for all windows.
473
Headers Tab
Chief Architect does not calculate loads or bearings. It is dependent upon user input
and does not attempt any structural analysis. Always consult your local building
authorities and contact a licensed engineer for structural calculations.
1
3
4
5
6
2
1 Specify the header depth dependent on 3 Specify the Thickness of all headers.
the opening width. These values should
be set so that the wider the opening, the
deeper the header. 4 Specify the Count of boards required to
make a header. Using this number, the
2 Check Precut to show precut headers program generates a count of header stock
in the Materials List. Precut headers are for you in the Materials List.
shown only if the walls have been framed.
When using stock as thin as 1-1/2 inches,
If this is unchecked, the Materials List headers are usually doubled or laminated, so
produces a total footage for all headers. the default number of boards making up a
When checked, each different length of header in Count is 2.
precut header is listed separately. Note that
the total number of headers is twice the 5 If the top of the rough opening is closer
to the top plate than the value in Max
number of openings if Count is set to 2.
Depth, a solid header is produced to fill the
entire area. This disables the building of
474
short cripple studs between the top of the

6 Specify the Type of material used for
header top and bottom of the plate. The headers. See “Framing Member Types”
default of 12 1/16 inch works well for 6’8” on page 489.
headers in 8’0” walls.
Posts/Beams Tab
Posts and beams not produced with the
automatic framing. They can only be drawn
manually.
2
3
1 4
5
6
1 Specify the size of the beams in the 3 Specify the Rebar and Wrap for
plan. concrete beams. Only available if the
• Specify the beams’ vertical Depth. beam Type is “solid concrete”.
• Specify the beam Thickness, which • Specify the Size Number for both Rebar
appears as width in floor plan view. and Wrap.
• Specify the # Bars, or number of bars, for
2 Select the Type of beam from the drop- both Rebar and Wrap.
down list. See “Framing Member
Types” on page 489. • Specify the distance both Rebar and
Wrap Extend.
4 Under Joists/With Joists - A beam can

be drawn under the joists or up in the
475
floor platform with the joists. If floor joist • Specify the Width of the automatically
depths and subfloor thickness have been set produced footing under a new post.
in the Build Framing dialog, the beam height • Specify the Height of the automatically
is properly positioned even if the joists have produced footing under a new post.
not yet been produced. If With Joists is
specified, the beams should be drawn before • Select the Square or Round radio button
framing is automatically produced. Then the to specify the shape of post footings.
joists are broken and butted to the beam. • Specify the Size Number and number of
bars (# Bars) for post footing Rebar.
5 Outer Layer/Main Layer - When a
beam is drawn along and over an
exterior wall, its outer surface snaps to either
the wall’s outer layer or outer main layer, as
specified here.
Posts are produced manually by clicking in
floor plan view where a post is desired using
the Post tool.
6 Post Initial Values -

• Dimension - A post is created initially
square with each side having this dimen-
sion. It can be subsequently edited to
have a rectangular shape with any dimen-
sions.
• Select the Type of post from the drop-
down list.
• Specify the Rebar and Wrap for posts.
See #3, above. Only available if the post
Type is “solid concrete”.
7 Post Footing Initial Values - When a

post is created on the lowest floor of a
plan and inside a floor platform, a footing for
it is automatically produced and included in
the Materials List. See “Materials Lists” on
page 1048.
• Specify the Top (from floor) value,
which is the distance from the top of the
footing to the bottom of the floor plat-
form.
476
Roof Tab
The settings on the Roof tab of the Build
Framing dialog are exactly the same as those
on the Framing tab of the Build Roof dialog.
See “Build Roof Dialog” on page 377.
1 3
1 Roof - Note: Use Framing Reference is useful when

framing a gable roof, but not necessarily a hip
• Check Build Roof Framing to build roof roof. See “Framing References and Roof
framing for the entire model. Only avail- Framing” on page 481.
able if roof planes are present in the plan.
See “Roofs” on page 374. • Check Angled Dormer Hole to create a
• Check Automatic Roof Framing to 5-sided hole in a roof plane to accomo-
automatically rebuild roof framing if date a gable dormer. The two top edges of
changes are made to the roof plan. See the hole are located under the dormer val-
“Automatic Framing” on page 462. leys, and an angled double-header runs
between the doubled rafters on one side
• Check Use Framing Reference to use a
to the ridge. A shorter angled doubled
defined starting point for rafter layout.
header frames the opposite valley.
See “Framing Reference Markers” on
page 480.
If Angled Dormer Hole is unchecked, a
rectangular hole is framed under the dor-
477
mer. A double header is placed where the • Select the Rafter Type from the drop-
peak of the dormer roof meets the main down list. See “Framing Member Types”
roof plane, and rafters are placed under on page 489.
the dormer valleys.
2 Specify how Blocking/Bridging is
manually drawn after rafters have been
If the double header does not fit within
placed. A row of blocking is drawn and can
the main roof plane, angled headers are
be moved and edited as a single object, but
produced regardless of this setting.
displays as separate pieces separated by the
rafters. See “Roof Blocking” on page 465.
• In Line produces blocking pieces that
align with each other.
• Stagger produces blocking that alternates
on either side of the line you draw.
• Cross produces cross bridging that looks
like in line blocking in floor plan view,
rectangular dormer Angled Dormer Hole but shows as cross bridging in 3D views
hole and the materials list.
• Uncheck Generate Fascia if you do not 3 Specify the desired Width and Depth
want fascia boards on the roof eaves. If for Rafters, the Ridge, Lookouts,
unchecked, the Gable Fascia and Eave Gable Sub Fascia, Eave Sub Fascia, Gable
Fascia options under Roof Size will be Fascia, Eave Fascia and Blocking.
unavailable.
• Uncheck Generate Eave Sub Fascia if
you do not want subfascia boards on the
roof eaves. If unchecked, Eave Sub Fas-
cia under Roof Size will be unavailable.
• Uncheck Trim To Soffits to generate
full-depth rafters all the way to the sub-
fascia. If checked, rafter depths are
trimmed to the top surface of the soffits
in the eave area. See “Rafter Tails” on
page 425.
• Specify the Spacing of automatically
generated rafters. This also sets the initial
offset value for laying out rafters using
the Multiple Copy edit button. See
“Multiple Copy” on page 194.
478
Trusses Tab
The parameters set in this tab apply to any The program uses these values to model
subsequently drawn trusses. They can be trusses for graphic representation only.
overridden for any selected group of trusses
using the Truss Specification dialog. See
Chief Architect does not engineer
“Trusses” on page 494. trusses. Always consult an engineer or
truss company to have your trusses profes-
sionally designed.
1 3
2 4
5
1 Member Depth - Specify the depth of needed to support the chords at or closer than
the truss chords and webbing. the specified maximum spans.
• Specify the depth of the Top Chord.
3 The Maximum Span settings control
• Specify the depth of the Bottom Chord. the maximum length between junctions
of the supporting webbing to the Top Chord
• Specify the depth of the Webbing
and Bottom Chord. Changing these values
2 For triangular trusses, check Require may cause different truss configurations such
Kingpost to require a vertical member as kingpost, queenpost, fink, double fink,
from the roof peak to the bottom chord. fan, howe, or double howe to be represented.
If this is not checked, a vertical member may These distances are measured horizontally
still be supplied, depending on what is for both roof and floor and ceiling trusses. In
479
Framing Reference Markers
some instances, especially in more complex spacing can be set in the Multiple Copy
trusses, making these spans equal may result dialog. See “Multiple Copy Dialog” on page
in the webbing appearing more normal or 194.
standard. See “Trusses” on page 494.
Materials Tab
4 Select either Roof or Floor/Ceiling to
specify whether the settings apply to The Materials tab sets the default materials
Roof or Floor/Ceiling trusses. used for framing objects in 3D views. These
material specifications are not used for
4 Specify the Ceiling Step, which is the material take-offs. Materials List information
maximum distance its bottom chord can
step down to locate a ceiling on the floor is derived from the structure type of each
below the top floor. See “Ceiling Steps” on framing object.
page 497. Changes made on the Materials tab of the
Build Framing dialog only affect
Truss Spacing subsequently created framing, whether it is
automatically generated or manually drawn.
Trusses are always drawn manually, so while
their depth, span and kingpost defaults are The settings in the Materials tab of the Build
specified in the Build Framing dialog, their Framing dialog are the same as in many
spacing is not. other specification dialogs. See “Materials
Tab” on page 709.
Trusses are typically replicated using the
Multiple Copy edit button, and their
Framing Reference Markers

Framing Reference Markers are
reference points that specify how to It is a good idea to place a single fram-
lay out automatically-produced framing. ing reference marker on Floor 1. If no
Layout for wall, ceiling and floor framing framing reference markers exist in your plan,
the point at 0, 0 is used as the framing refer-
starts at the framing reference marker closest ence marker location and unexpected results
to the center of the area to be framed. may occur.
If no framing reference marker is found on
the floor being framed, the closest framing The placement of automatically generated
reference marker on the first floor is used. wall framing is based on the framing
Normally, a single framing reference marker reference marker; however, floor, ceiling and
on Floor 1 is used for the entire model. roof framing placement is not.
You can elect to use the framing reference
marker for positioning rafters and ceiling
480
joists in the Build Framing dialog. See

The Move to Framing Ref edit button
“Build Framing Dialog” on page 467.
may also reference spacing specific to a
particular floor or ceiling platform. See
Placing Framing “Joist Direction Lines” on page 482.
Reference Markers
A group of selected framing objects that are
To place a Framing Reference Marker, select all parallel to each other can be moved using
Build> Framing> Framing Reference
the Move to Framing Ref edit button.
Marker . Click in floor plan view to Only one of the objects in the group is
place the framing reference marker. compared to the framing reference marker
and moved; the remaining objects are simply
When Object Snaps are enabled, moved the same amount as the first object.
framing reference markers snap to framing Ideally, therefore, the group should have
members and other CAD-based objects first, proper spacing relative to each other before
and then to a wall main layer surface or the move.
corner if possible.
To move framing objects to a framing
Framing Reference Markers can be reference marker
modified just like other markers. See
“Markers” on page 867. 1. Group select the framing objects.
When automatic framing is produced using
the framing reference marker, a corner of the 2. Click the Move to Framing Ref edit
first framing member snaps to this point and button.
all other framing members are laid out from 3. The framing members are moved to the
there. nearest Framing Reference Marker.
Using Framing References Framing References and

Manually drawn framing and
Roof Framing
automatic framing that was not Framing Reference Markers are useful when
generated based on a framing reference framing a gable roof, but not necessarily a
marker can be moved the correct distance hip roof. When a Framing Reference is used,
from a framing reference marker using the common rafters on either side of a hip rafter
Move to Framing Ref edit button. do not meet in the same place.
When a framing member is moved relative to If the Framing Reference is not used, the
a framing reference marker using the Move automatic framing utility starts common
to Framing Ref edit button, the on- rafter spacing from each end of the
center spacing distance set in the Build horizontal ridges, which results in common
Framing dialog is used. rafters on either side of hip jacks meeting
each other.
481
Bearing Lines
Bearing Lines
Bearing Lines direct the program to Bearing lines snap to the center of nearby
lap or butt joists and/or rafters where parallel walls when framing is built.
they cross the line instead of framing across
it to the next wall.
Select Build> Framing> Bearing Line ,

then click and drag to draw a bearing line as
you would draw a CAD line. Bearing lines
are edited just like CAD lines or polylines, as
well. See “Editing Line Based Objects” on
page 147 or “Editing Open Polyline Based
If a bearing line exists, the program laps or
butts the joist and/or rafters over the line, Joists butting over a Bearing
depending on the option selected in the Build Line and interior wall
Framing dialog. See “Floor Tabs” on page
A platform can be split into two by a bearing
468.
line, and the joist direction and/or depth can
be specified separately on each side of the
bearing line. Each platform takes on
properties given by the joist direction line it
contains. See “Joist Direction Lines” on page
482.
Placing a Floor/Ceiling Beam in a plan

can also have the same effect as a Bearing
Line when Bearing Beam is checked in its
Beam Specification dialog. See “Framing
Joists lapping over a Bearing Line
A bearing line should start outside the floor
or ceiling platform and end outside of it,
passing completely through the building.
Joist Direction Lines

A Joist Direction line defines the floor or ceiling platform in which it is drawn,
direction in which joists run in the as well as their depth and spacing.
482
If a direction line is not specified, joists are Select Build> Framing> Joist
run the way that results in the shortest span Direction and draw a joist direction line
using the depth and spacing settings in the just as you would draw a CAD line.
The text along the joist direction line states
Each floor in a plan can have more than one the joist size and spacing for the platform.
floor platform, and each floor platform can These values reflect the settings in the
have its own joist direction. Framing Defaults dialog. See “Floor Tabs”
on page 468.
Joist Direction
A Joist Direction Line controls the joist
depth and spacing information for the floor
or ceiling platform in which it is drawn.
To change this information, select a joist
direction line and click the Open Object
edit button. The Joist Direction
Specification dialog opens.
• Define the joist Spacing for the platform.

• Define the Depth for these joists.
483
Joist Direction Lines
Normally, the program produces a floor

Note: This is not the recommended method platform under the second floor living area
for specifying joist depth. You should instead and a ceiling platform under the eave area,
use the settings in the Room Specification which is not a room area.
dialog.
This is fine if the first floor has supporting
The Joist Direction Line affects the joists in walls or a large beam under the second floor
the entire platform, but does not change the kneewalls. If it does not, the floor platform
settings in the Build Framing or Room should extend to the first floor outside
Specification dialogs. Settings in the Joist supporting walls, replacing the ceiling joists.
Direction Specification dialog affect
Use joist direction lines to define separate
subsequently produced framing only in the
floor platforms under the second floor living
platform that contains the selected joist
area and ceiling platforms under the attic
direction.
eave area or one continuous framed platform
across both spaces.
Using Joist Direction Lines
To connect a floor and ceiling platform into a
Two Joist Direction lines, one on either side
of a Bearing Line, can divide a single floor single platform, draw a Joist Direction
or ceiling platform into two, allowing you to line that crosses the boundary between them.
define different framing specifications for Following is a diagram of the original
each area. framing with the new Joist Direction Line
A less common application would be to use a spanning the knee wall area.
single joist direction line across two separate
platforms in order to define a single framing New Joist
specification for both platforms. This is Direction Line
illustrated by the following example:
A 1 1/2 story house is shown in cross section
in the diagram.
Original
Framing
Ceiling Platform Floor Platform
484
(Note: Several framing members have been

deleted to make the new Joist Direction Line
more visible.)
Although the framing of the 2nd floor
platform is being edited here, the joist
direction is drawn on the first floor. In Chief
Architect, floor platform framing displays Knee Wall on 2nd
with the floor below, so its joist direction Floor shown in
reference
information must be placed there, as well.
Next, rebuild the floor framing for the
second floor and the ceiling framing for the
first floor. The floor framing now spans into
the area which was previously framed using
ceiling joists.
The 3D view of the framing also reflects the

change.
Floor and Ceiling

Joists combined
Displaying Framing
The display of framing members is In Floor Plan View
controlled in the Layer Display
Options dialog. See “Displaying Objects” on Joists, rafters and trusses are represented in
page 117. floor plan view by line-based CAD objects
485
Displaying Framing
that are essentially long, thin rectangles. See You can also use the Delete Surface tool
“Editing Line Based Objects” on page 147. to temporarily delete the surfaces of wall
If you prefer, framing and trusses can instead layers or other objects that block the view.
be represented by a single line. See “Line In cross section/elevation views, framing
Properties Panel” on page 90. objects that are cut by the cross section plane
By default, framing polylines have a solid display as boxes containing an ’X’.
white fill, and new members display in front
of older ones, helping to distinguish newer In Wall Detail Views
members from those drawn previously. You
Wall Details are a special type of wall
can specify whether new framing members
elevation view in which only the studs, plates
are drawn with this fill. See “CAD Defaults
and headers used to frame a selected wall
display. They are the only views in which
In 3D Views Wall Bridging can be built. See “Wall
Bridging” on page 465.
The easiest way to view framing in 3D is to
use either the Orthographic Framing A Wall Detail view for each framed wall in
your plan is automatically created by the
Overview or Perspective Framing program and saved in the Project Browser
Overview tool, which display the model when wall framing is built. See “The Library
using the 3D Framing Set layer set. See Browser” on page 683.
“Framing Overview” on page 752.
After wall framing has been built, select a
Framing objects can display in other 3D and wall and click the Open Wall Detail edit
cross section/elevation views, although by button to open its Wall Detail. See “Editing
default they are not set to do so. If you wish Walls” on page 231.
to see framing in other views, turn on the
framing layers in the appropriate layer set. Most wall framing members occupy the
entire thickness of the wall’s framing layer.
To reveal framing covered by other objects Some, notably doubled headers or corner
or wall layers, use the Delete Surface sheetrock nailers, may be turned sideways.
tool. See “Delete 3D Surface” on page 757. Double or triple headers display one behind
the other in a Wall Detail. You can select
In Cross Section/ them using the Select Next Object edit
Elevation Views button. See “Select Next Object” on page
146.
To display framing in a cross section/
elevation view, make sure the framing layers By default, Wall Details show walls as
are turned on in the default layer set for viewed from the interior. You can specify
Cross Sections. See “Layer Set Defaults whether Wall Details are viewed from the
Dialog” on page 129. interior or exterior in the Build Framing
dialog. See “Wall Tab” on page 471.
486
The framing members of an individual wall Wall Specification dialog. See “General
can be selected and edited in its Wall Detail. Tab” on page 250.
If you rebuild wall framing after manually
As with regular 3D views, Wall Details can
editing in a Wall Detail, your changes will be
be sent to layout and printed. See “Layout”
lost. To protect changes made to a wall’s
on page 1014 and “Printing & Plotting” on
framing, check Retain Wall Framing in the
page 992.
Editing Framing
Framing members can be individually • Click a side surface to display the same
selected in all views. Some framing members edit handles as in an elevation view, one
can be group selected. Once selected, at each end and one at the center.
framing members can be edited using the edit • Zoom in and click on the appropriate
handles, edit toolbar buttons, or the Framing edge to display edit handles that control
Specification dialog. See “Framing the width and depth of framing members.
Using Dimensions
Framing members can be both moved and
Framing members can be drawn, edited and resized using dimensions. See “Moving
moved much the way CAD lines can. See Objects Using Dimensions” on page 831.
“Editing Line Based Objects” on page 147.
In Cross Section/Elevation views, joists and Using the Edit Tools
rafters cut by the cross section and displaying
A selected framing member can be edited in
a cross box can also be edited. See “Editing
a variety of ways using the buttons on the
Box-Based Objects” on page 164. Also, in
Cross Section/Elevation views headers can
page 1140.
be edited like closed polylines. See “Editing
Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on page
160. Mitered Joints
In a camera view or overview, the handles Mitered joints can be created using the Fillet
that display on a framing member depend on Two Lines edit button. Click on the end
where it is clicked for selection and your edge of a framing member such as a joist,
current zoom factor.
click the Fillet Two Lines edit button,
• Click the top surface to display the same then click on the end edge of another nearby
edit handles as in floor plan view, allow- joist to extend one framing item to another
ing you to rotate, move, and extend or framing item and join them with angled cut.
shorten the length of the member. See “Fillet Two Lines” on page 186.
487
Keeping Framing Current
Roof and Floor Trusses objects in the program are. See “Deleting
Roof and floor trusses cannot be edited like
regular framing members can and are Categories of framing, such as wall
discussed in their own chapter. See “Editing framing or floor and ceiling framing,
Truss Envelopes” on page 499. can also be deleted in the Delete Objects
dialog. See “Delete Objects Dialog” on page
Deleting Framing 197.
Individual and group-selected framing

members can be deleted the way other
Keeping Framing Current

When you modify your plan, move walls, made to that structural component in the
raise or lower platforms or redesign the roof, plan. For example, check Automatic
any framing present in the plan will not Wall Framing on the Wall tab to rebuild
update to reflect your changes. In order for all wall framing any time a wall is
the framing to be updated, you must affected by changes to the model.
regenerate automatically produced framing
When floor, ceiling or roof framing is
and either edit or delete and replace manual
regenerated, all automatically produced
framing.
framing objects and any copies of them are
For this reason, it is recommended that you deleted and new framing is calculated. See
wait until your model is finished, or nearly “Rebuilding Framing” on page 463.
finished, before creating framing. See
“Drawing a Plan” on page 35. Manual Framing
It is vital to remember that manually drawn
Automatic Framing
framing objects and copies of them are not
Automatically-generated framing can be retained when automatic framing is rebuilt.
rebuilt using either of two checkboxes in the
If a plan is not final, therefore, do not spend a
Build Framing dialog:
lot of time altering or copying automatically
• Select a Build checkbox to build auto- produced framing objects. It is best to wait
matic framing once. For example, check until your design is final before doing
Build Wall Framing on the Wall tab to manual framing work.
build wall framing once based on the cur-
rent state of the model. If the model is
changed later, you may need to do this
again.
• Select an Automatic checkbox to build
automatic framing every time a change is
488
Framing and the Materials List

Each framing member created in a plan is and the Materials List produces a count
counted in the Materials List. This list is as of the rafters found in the model.
accurate as the framing in the plan that
produces it. See “Materials Lists” on page Framing Member Types
1048.
There are a variety of framing member types
Depending on what a framing member is available for use in Chief Architect: lumber,
used for, it may be listed as R (Roofing), SF I-joist, glulam, engineered lumber, lvl, steel
(Sub Floor), or F (Framing – general). I, steel box, solid concrete, C channel, and U
R (Roofing) includes trusses, rafters and channel.
sheathing . You can select any of these types as the
SF (Sub Floor) lists floor and ceiling framing default for floor and ceiling framing,
joists including sheathing. headers, beams and roof framing. See “Build
F (Framing – general) includes all wall
framing, posts and General Framing objects. You can also specify the type for individual
framing members in their specification
It is important to note that the framing in the dialog. See “General Tab” on page 490.
Materials List can be calculated in either of
two ways: Changing the framing member type does not
affect how framing is placed, but it does
• If no framing has been produced in the change its appearance in cross section and
model, then the amount of framing that 3D views and in the Materials List.
would be produced is estimated as accu-
rately as possible. Total lineal footage for
Framing Materials and
various depths of rafter and joist material
is given, rather than a quantity of specific the Materials Tab
lumber lengths and sizes. The settings on the Materials tab of the Build
• If framing objects exist, then the framing Framing and Framing Specification dialogs
members are counted instead of esti- specify the materials used for framing
mated for the Materials List. objects in 3D views. These material
specifications are not used in the Materials
Roof framing is treated the same way. List, however.
• If no roof framing objects are found, an
Materials List information is derived from
estimation is done.
the structural use of each framing object and
• If even one rafter is created, the program its Type - not the texture on its surfaces in 3D
assumes roof framing has been produced views.
489
Framing Specification Dialog
Framing Specification Dialog

Select a floor or ceiling joist, wall stud or The options available in this dialog may vary
rafter and click the Open Object edit depending on the type of object selected.
button to open the Framing Specification The settings in this dialog are similar to those
dialog for the framing member type selected. in the Beam Specification dialog. See
“Framing with Beams” on page 464.
General Tab
1 3
4
5
6
1 Depth and Height - Click the radio • Specify the Top Height of the post, as
button beside one of the height values measured from the first floor subfloor at
to lock it, then change a value that remains 0”. For a rafter, this is the top height at its
available. Changing the Top Height, Bottom low end.
Height or Depth may change the other two • Specify the Bottom Height of the post,
values. as measured from the first floor subfloor
490
at 0”. For a rafter, this is the bottom • Select Lock End to resize or rotate the
height its low end. object about the location where you
• Specify the Depth of the framing object. stopped drawing it.
For a rafter, this is the depth measured
perpendicular to the roof plane. 3 Check Bearing Beam to specify the
selected Floor/Ceiling Beam as a load-
• Click the radio button beside Raise/ bearing beam. When checked, automatically
Lower to enable it, then enter a value to generated joists run perpendicular to the
raise or lower the framing object from its selected beam and either lap or butt over it,
current position. Once a value is entered, as specified in the Build Framing dialog. See
the other controls are disabled. The “Floor Tabs” on page 468. Only available for
amount is added to both the top height Floor/Ceiling Beams.
and the bottom height when you click
OK, and does not affect the depth. 4 Set the framing member’s Thickness,
which appears as its width in floor plan
• Manual Rafter Height - Normally, the view.
height of each Rafter or Roof Beam end
is reset after any move or edit so that it is 5 Type - Select a type of structural
member from the drop-down list. See
located just under the roof surface. Check
“Framing Member Types” on page 489.
this box to allow the height of the object
to be changed. Only available for Rafters
and Roof Beams. Note: If the beam Type is specified as con-
crete, the beam does not appear as such in
2 Length and Angle - Lock the point the Materials List. Instead, the amount of
about which you want like the selected concrete required for all such beams and for
object to resize and/or rotate, then specify its all such posts is listed. In addition, the square
exact length and angle. footage required for beam forms, and for post
forms is also listed.
• Length of the framing object. Rafter
length is measured along the top of the
rafter, and so is greater than the length 6 Specify the Rebar and Wrap for
concrete beams. Only available for
measured in floor plan view. Beams when “Solid Concrete” is selected
• Angle of the framing object in floor plan from the Type drop-down list.
view. Changing this rotates the object • Specify the Size Number for both Rebar
about the location specified by the radio and Wrap.
buttons described below.
• Specify the # Bars, or number of bars, for
• Select Lock Center to resize or rotate the both Rebar and Wrap.
object about its center point.
• Specify the distance both Rebar and
• Select Lock Start to resize or rotate the Wrap Extend.
object about the location from which you
started drawing the framing object.
491
Post Specification Dialog

For information about the Line Style tab, see For information about the Materials tab, see
“Line Style Tab” on page 889. “Materials Tab” on page 709.
Fill Style Tab

Post Specification Dialog

General Tab
1
3
4
1 Post Height - Click the radio button Height, Bottom Height or Total Height may
beside a height value to lock it, then change to the other values.
change an unlocked value. Changing the Top
492
• Specify the Top Height of the post, as

3 Type - Select a type from the drop-
measured from the first floor subfloor at down list. See “Framing Member
0”. Types” on page 489.
• Specify the Bottom Height of the post,
as measured from the first floor subfloor 4 Specify the Rebar and Wrap for
concrete posts. Only available when
at 0”. “Solid Concrete” is selected from the Type
• Specify the Total Height of the post, drop-down list.
which is the difference between the Top • Specify the Size Number for both Rebar
and Bottom Heights. and Wrap.
• Click the radio button beside Raise/ • Specify the # Bars, or number of bars, for
Lower to enable it, then enter a value to both Rebar and Wrap.
raise or lower the post from its current
• Specify the distance both Rebar and
position. When Raise/Lower is selected,
Wrap Extend.
the other controls are disabled. The
amount is added to both the top height
and the bottom height when you click Note: If a concrete Type is specified, the post
OK, and does not affect the total height. is not listed as such in the Materials List.
Instead, the amount of concrete required for
2 Post Width 1 & 2- Specify the post all concrete beams and posts is listed. The
square footage required for beam forms, and
width in each dimension.
for post forms is also listed.
• Specify the Angle of the post’s rotation.
493
Chapter 16:
Trusses
There are two basic ways to frame a roof.

The first is commonly called “stick framing,” Always have your truss designs
or sometimes “handstacking” or “cut-and- approved by a licensed engineer.
stack.” This type of roof incorporates
framing such as rafters, ridges, and ceiling Chapter Contents
joists. See “Framing” on page 460. • Truss Defaults
• Floor and Ceiling Trusses
The other method is to use prefabricated,
• Roof Trusses
engineered roof trusses. Chief Architect
• Editing Trusses
allows you to design and display a wide
• Editing Truss Envelopes
variety of trusses.
• Truss Labels
• Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing
Disclaimer • Truss Bases
Chief Architect does not engineer trusses. • Truss Base Specification Dialog
The trusses displayed by Chief Architect are • Hip Trusses
for illustrative purposes only. They can show • Girder Trusses
how trusses are used in your plan, and help • Scissors Trusses
you communicate to the licensed engineer • Roof Truss Specification Dialog
who produces your final truss design where • Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog
you want your trusses and how you would
like them to work.
494
Truss Defaults
The default settings for floor, ceiling The overall depth of individual floor and
and roof trusses are set in the Framing ceiling trusses are based on the thicknesses
Defaults dialog. Select Edit> Default of the platforms in which they are drawn. See
Settings and in the Default Settings dialog, “Floor Tabs” on page 468.
select Framing and click the Edit button.
The structure of roof trusses is determined by
The default settings for truss chord and the position of the roof plane(s) above and
webbing depth, maximum span, and kingpost the ceiling plane(s) below. See “Roof Planes”
are set in the Framing Defaults dialog. See on page 385 and “Ceiling Planes” on page
“Trusses Tab” on page 479. 408.
Floor and Ceiling Trusses

Floor and ceiling trusses can be used Roof trusses seek an exterior wall and adjust
instead of joists to frame platforms. their length automatically. Floor trusses do
As with manually-drawn floor and ceiling not, but if you start or end your truss close to
framing, the room type above determines a wall surface or CAD object, the truss snaps
whether a floor or ceiling truss is drawn. For to the surface or object.
example, a truss drawn on the first floor of a
The Trusses tab of the Build Framing dialog
single story home will be a ceiling truss,
contains default settings for floor and ceiling
while a truss drawn on the first floor of a
trusses. See “Trusses Tab” on page 479.
two-story building will be a floor truss for
These default settings can be overridden by
the 2nd floor.
the settings in the Floor/Ceiling Truss
To place a floor or ceiling truss in your plan, Specification dialog. See “Floor/Ceiling
select Build> Framing> Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog” on page 513.
Truss . Click and drag to create a truss in
floor plan view.
Roof Trusses
Roof trusses can only be drawn If you intend to use roof trusses, you need
manually, and can only be created first to build your roof planes with this in
where roof and ceiling planes already are mind. Before building the roof, select the
present. Select Build> Framing> Roof Trusses (no birdsmouth) check box in the
Truss, then click and drag in floor plan view Build Roof dialog. When this is checked,
within one or more roof planes to manually roof plane thickness is based on the default
draw a roof truss. Top Chord Depth set in the Framing
495
Roof Trusses
Defaults dialog. See “Trusses Tab” on page happens, it will end exactly on the surface of
479. the existing truss, producing a girder truss.
See “Girder Trusses” on page 509.
If Trusses (no birdsmouth) is not checked,
the roof plane thickness is determined by the Trusses can end on interior walls. You can
rafter Depth setting on the Roof tab. draw a truss that partially crosses the
building by starting and/or ending it within
Draw a truss as you would a CAD line, by
two feet (600mm) of an interior wall. The
dragging from the start of the truss to the
truss extends over the wall’s Main Layer. Its
end. The first truss can be drawn over a gable
end lines up with the Main Layer surface on
end wall or at the ridge end of a hip roof. The
the far side of the wall.
program shapes the truss so that it fits
properly between the roof and ceiling planes.
Roof Truss Webbing
Roof Truss Placement The webbing in a newly drawn truss is
controlled by the Top Chord and Bottom
A roof truss can only exist in the space
Chord settings in the Framing Defaults
defined by the roof planes above it and the
dialog. See “Trusses Tab” on page 479.
ceiling planes below it. This is because the
shape of a truss is defined by the location of Changing these default values may cause
the roof and the ceiling. different truss configurations such as
kingpost, queenpost, fink, double fink, fan,
If Ceiling over this room is unchecked in
howe, or double howe to be represented.
the Room Specification dialog, you must
manually draw a Ceiling Plane before a When Trusses (no birdsmouth) is selected
roof truss can be drawn over that room. See and Raise Off Plate is zero, the bottom edge
“Structure Tab” on page 286. of the bottom chord bears on the top of the
exterior supporting walls at the outside edge
If the program either does not find both roof of the Main Layer.
and ceiling planes, or if there is not enough
room between them, to model a truss, a The bottom chord can be raised to produce
warning message displays. For example, if an energy heel using the Raise Off Plate
you draw a truss in a roof overhang where setting in the Build Roof dialog.
there is no ceiling , this message displays:
Attic Trusses
“Roof and ceiling surfaces too close together
or cannot be found, so cannot make truss.” Attic trusses, a variation of roof trusses, can
be drawn if a plan contains an Attic area on
The incorrect truss may still display in floor both sides and above an upstairs room, such
plan view with a label of the form “TR-*”. If as in a Cape Cod style home. The following
it does, it should be deleted or moved. See is a typical cross section view of a building
“Editing Trusses” on page 498. with attic trusses:
One or both ends of a truss may be truncated
if they are drawn across another truss. If this
496
2. Select the Attic Truss check box and

click OK. See “Roof Truss Specification
Knee walls
The final product can be scrutinized in a
framing overview or in the Truss Detail
window. See “Truss Details” on page 499.
Flat ceilings Ceiling Steps

Certain conditions must be met before an If a roof truss is drawn across areas with
attic truss can be built: different ceiling heights on the top floor of a
plan, the bottom chord will automatically
• The structure should be sufficiently wide step to accomodate those ceiling heights.
to allow for a loft and attic spaces.
In addition, a roof truss can be made to
• The loft area must be on a living floor. It
recognize ceiling heights on two different
cannot be on the Attic floor. See “The
floors: one on the top floor of the structure
Attic Floor” on page 359.
and one on the floor below.
• The loft area must have Attic rooms on
both sides. See “Room Types” on page
271.
• The loft area must be separated from the
Attic rooms on both sides by Knee Walls.
See “Knee Walls” on page 238.
• A flat ceiling in the loft area and a floor
below must be present.
• The roof pitch must be steep enough to
provide appropriate ceiling height for the
loft area. Typical pitches for such a con-
dition are 8 in 12 or greater.
• The roof should bear on the walls of the To create a ceiling step
floor below the loft area and form contin-
uous planes from ridge to baselines. 1. The area in which the step is to be pro-
duced must be a separate room specified
Once these conditions are met, a roof truss is as an “Attic”. See “Room Types” on
ready to be designated as an attic truss. page 271.
2. Select the roof truss in floor plan view
1. Select the roof truss in floor plan view
and click the Open Object edit
and click the Open Object edit
button to display the General tab of the
button to display the General tab of the
Roof Truss Specification dialog.
Roof Truss Specification dialog.
497
Editing Trusses
3. In the Ceiling Step field, specify the dis- • Check Force Truss Rebuild, then click
tance that the bottom chord must step OK to regenerate the truss.
down to locate the ceiling platform of
the room beneath the Attic. 4. You can now use the Multiple Copy
edit tool to replicate your truss within
• If the Ceiling Step value will place the
the area of the roof plan requiring a step.
bottom of the stepped bottom chord
within the ceiling platform, a step will For best results, you may want to make sure
be created to the bottom of the ceiling that the Bottom Chord is the same depth as
platform. the ceiling platform framing. See “Structure
Tab” on page 286.
Editing Trusses
Trusses can be selected like other objects in If a truss has been locked, the size does not
Chief Architect. See “Selecting Objects” on update if the truss is moved, but maintains its
page 144 for more information. original settings. See “Roof Truss
Once selected, trusses can be edited using
dimensions, their edit handles, the edit The depth of truss chords can be changed in
toolbar buttons, or by opening them for the truss’s specification dialog, but not using
specification. the edit handles.
Trusses can be deleted all at once in the When a roof truss is moved, it snaps to two
Delete Objects dialog. See “Delete Objects things:
Dialog” on page 197. • If drawn along an exterior wall, it snaps
so that its outer surface is flush with the
Using Dimensions outer surface of the wall's main layer.
Trusses can be relocated precisely using • The center line can snap to the edge or
dimensions. See “Moving Objects Using corner of a nearby roof plane.
Dimensions” on page 831.
To prevent this, special snapping, check No
special snapping in the Roof Truss
Using the Edit Handles Specification dialog. See “General Tab” on
When selected in floor plan view, trusses edit page 510.
like lines. See “Editing Line Based Objects” When selected in Cross Section/Elevation
on page 147. views and 3D views, trusses edit like closed
When a truss is moved, its shape updates to polylines. See “Editing Closed-Polyline
conform to the roof and ceiling plane Based Objects” on page 160.
positions in its new location. Like joists or rafters, trusses can be selected
and moved in 3D views. The only difference
498
is that the Lock Truss and Webbing setting 2. Click the Multiple Copy edit
in the Roof Truss Specification dialog button.
prevents the truss from moving back to
between the roof and ceiling planes the next 3. Click the Multiple Copy Interval
time it is edited or otherwise changed. edit button to open the Multiple Copy
dialog. See “Multiple Copy” on page
Using the Edit Tools 194.
A selected truss can be edited in a variety of 4. Enter the correct spacing in the All
ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar. Trusses box. Once set, click OK.
See “Edit Toolbar Buttons” on page 1140. 5. Select the truss and use the Move edit
handle to drag it perpendicularly. The
Copying Trusses pointer becomes a four-headed arrow
When a truss has been edited to suit your when it is over the Move handle.
needs, use the Multiple Copy edit tool to 6. New trusses appear as you drag. Drag as
create duplicates at specified intervals. The far as necessary to produce all desired
copies conform to the roof and ceiling plane trusses. Each truss is created according
positions in their new location. to the particular Roof/Ceiling/Truss
Base planes above and below it.
To use Multiple Copy When replicated, trusses and their labels may
become different from the original as a result
1. Select the truss to be copied in floor plan of the roof and ceiling planes around them.
view. See “Truss Labels” on page 500.
Editing Truss Envelopes

When a truss is viewed at a 90° angle in a 3D The Lock truss and webbing attribute is set
view, its envelope, or shape, can be edited. after editing so that the truss does not reshape
Click on the truss to select it and edit handles itself back between the roof and ceiling
display on a surrounding polyline. Change planes the next time it is edited or otherwise
the shape of this polyline and the truss changed. See “Roof Truss Specification
regenerates inside it. Use this function to Dialog” on page 510.
change overhang or truss end details rather
than the overall truss shape.
Truss Details
When you draw the first truss, the program
automatically creates a CAD detail named
499
Truss Labels
Truss Detail. Open the Truss Detail by diagram gives a number that designates this
selecting CAD> CAD Detail Management truss type in floor plan view and in the
and selecting it from the list. Materials List. The quantity of each type is
also listed.
Note: The Truss Detail is for display of

trusses only. Editing the members that make
up the trusses in the Truss Detail is not rec-
ommended.
To restore an edited Truss Detail
1. Delete any new members you have

drawn in the detail view.
2. In floor plan view, select the truss and
click the Open Object edit button to
open the Roof Truss Specification dia-
All the trusses used in your plan are log.
displayed in the Truss Detail. If several 3. Click OK and the truss regenerates
trusses are identical, only one diagram is along with its Truss Detail diagram.
drawn. The label at the lower left of the
Truss Labels
Roof and attic trusses are labeled in floor built differently and displays a different
plan view in the format TR-xx. The xx are label.
numbers following the consecutive order in
Truss labels are centered on the truss that
which each distinct truss configuration or
they represent. If the truss is moved or
type was created.
deleted, the label is moved or deleted as well.
For example, the first truss type created is Truss labels cannot be selected by
labeled TR-1; the second, TR-2; and so on. themselves. Truss labels are selected when
Truss labels also display in the Truss Detail the truss is selected. Truss labels are located
and the Materials List. Floor and ceiling on their own layer, so their display can be
trusses are labeled FTR-xx. controlled in the Layer Display Options
dialog. See “Layer Display Options Dialog”
A copied truss has the same label as the
on page 121.
original if the conditions at the location of
the copy are the same as the original. If
conditions are different, the copied truss is
500
Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing

After the trusses for your roof are in place, and common rafters at the end of a hip roof
the Build Framing dialog can be used to can pass over a drop hip truss.
create roof framing in areas not framed by
Lookouts at a gable end are modeled to pass
the trusses. See “Roof Tab” on page 477.
over a truss at the gable and end at the next
The framing produced is extended or truss in. Both standard and hip ridges are
truncated where it encounters a truss. The chopped into blocking between the trusses.
exception to this truncation is that hip ridges
Truss Bases
A Truss Base is a closed polyline that
defines the area in which valley fill
roof trusses are to be built across and above
the tops of normal, full size roof trusses.
Valley fill trusses (shown darker)

Truss Base (in red) with valley fill trusses
Valley fill trusses are often used in reverse
gable conditions, where a roof ridge builds Normal roof trusses are built between roof
onto a roof plane that has a ridge running at a planes and ceiling planes. See “Roof
different angle. A classic example of this is Trusses” on page 495. Valley fill roof trusses
an “L” shaped house with a gable roof. The created using a Truss Base, on the other
main portion of the house is trussed through hand, are built between a larger, supporting
from end to end with normal trusses. Starting roof plane below and overbuilt roof planes
at its outside end, the smaller wing is trussed above.
with normal trusses until the main house is
Truss bases are drawn and can be edited
reached. Where the wing’s roof builds over
much like roof planes, with some limitations.
the main house, valley fill trusses are used.
See “Truss Base Specification Dialog” on
page 504.
501
Truss Bases
To work correctly, a truss base must be in the

same plane with the underlying roof plane,
so their baselines should be colinear.
To create a truss base
1. Create an L-shaped house with a reverse

gable roof.
3. Move the pointer and click on the point

where the gable intersects the main roof.
The triangular area of overlap between the

main roof and the gable must be defined as a
Truss Base.
2. Select Build> Roof> Truss Base ,

then draw a baseline that is colinear with
the baseline of the roof plane that will 4. A rectangular Truss Base is created. Use
support the overbuild. See “The Base- its edit handles to reposition it and
line” on page 386. change its shape as needed.
• The two angled sides should be colin-
ear with the roof valleys.
• The straight bottom edge must remain
colinear with the Truss Base baseline
and that of the underlying roof plane.
502
the Move edit handle up to the peak of

the Truss Base.
• Copies of the truss appear as you drag
the pointer.
• The truss copies all appear to be full
length until you release the mouse.
5. Draw the normal Roof Trusses

across the length of the main portion of
the house. See “Roof Trusses” on page
495.
• The trusses of the underlying roof gen-
erate through the Truss Base, but stop
at the Truss Base’s bottom edge so that
no overhang is produced in that area. Trusses drawn perpendicular to the
baseline of a Truss Base go under the
Truss Base. Trusses drawn parallel to the
baseline of the Truss Base become valley fill
trusses drawn over it..
8. When you release the mouse button, any

copies drawn in the Truss Base are
clipped by it.
6. When the trusses of the underlying roof

are in place, draw the first truss of the
reverse gable and position it over the
outer wall.
7. With this truss selected, click the
Multiple Copy edit button and drag
503
Truss Base Specification Dialog
Editing Truss Bases Truss bases can be edited much the way roof
planes can, with some limitations. They are
A selected truss base can be edited in floor not actual 3D objects, so they cannot be
plan view using edit handles, edit toolbar assigned materials, moldings or other design
buttons, and the Truss Base Specification attributes; however, their shape, height, pitch
dialog. and display can be edited. See “Editing Roof
Planes” on page 387.
Truss Base Specification Dialog

Select a truss base and click the Open This dialog is almost identical to the Roof
Plane Specification dialog. Although truss
Object edit button to open the Truss
Base Specification dialog.
bases are not the same as roof planes, Chief
Architect handles the positioning of the two
in a similar manner.
General Tab
3
1 4
504
Four values define 3D orientation of a truss

3 Rafter Depth - The truss base is a
base: Ridge/Top Height, Baseline Height, plane used by the program to place
Fascia Top Height, and Pitch. These values trusses, so it has no rafters. This value should
are related; if one is changed, the others be the same as that for the surrounding roof
change as well. plane in order to align the truss base with it.
These values are measured from the first
4 The Vertical Rafter Depth, Top of
floor elevation of 0’ 0". Baseline Height and Plate and Overhang from Baseline
Pitch should be set identical to those for the values are shown for reference.
roof plane that surrounds the truss base.
Click the radio button to the right of a value Options Tab
to define it as the pivot point for the truss Click Up to display the truss base up one
base and prevent it from being changed. floor, or click Down to show it on the floor
Changing these values does not affect the 2D below. If no higher or lower floor exists, the
representation of the truss base. option is not available.
1 Specify the Height of the selected truss Polyline Tab

base.
• Specify the Ridge/Topheight, which is
“Polyline Tab” on page 901.
the truss base’s highest point.
• Specify the Baseline height. Selected Line Tab
• Specify the Fascia topheight, which is
For information about the Selected Line tab,
the truss base’s lowest point. Usually, this
see “Selected Line Tab” on page 901.
is the same height as the Baseline.
2 Specify the Pitch of the selected truss Line Style Tab

base. If you lock the pitch and change
one of the Height values, the truss base For information about the Line Style tab, see
moves vertically keeping the same slope. “Line Specification Dialog” on page 888.
• Check Pitch in degrees to display pitch

Fill Style Tab
in degrees rather than run-and-rise units.
Hip Trusses
A variety of different hip truss configurations • Drop Hip or California Hip trusses
can be created, including: • Subgirder Hip trusses
• Step Down Hip trusses
505
Step Down Hip
Step Down Hip

Step Down hip roofs are the quickest style of In the following illustration, the flat-topped
hip truss framing to produce. trusses are hip trusses. Alternating hip
trusses are colored differently for clarity.
Step Down Hip Roof
Jack Trusses
Hip Trusses
Hip Jack
To create a step down hip truss system 4. Using the Roof Truss tool, draw hip
jacks along the hip ridge from the last
1. First, draw a Roof Truss at the apex truss out into the overhang.
of the triangular hip roof plane. It will
snap exactly into position. 5. Using the Roof Truss tool, draw a
jack truss from the intersection of the
2. Select the truss; click the Multiple last hip truss and the hip jack to the eave.
Copy edit button; and click and drag 6. Select the jack truss; click the Multiple
the Move handle down into the hip to
create copies at regular intervals. See Copy edit button; and lay out jack
“Copying Trusses” on page 499. trusses up to the other hip jack.
3. Stop when the height of the hip truss
reaches a reasonable minimum.
506
Drop Hip or California Hip

A Drop Hip, or California Hip, system uses In the following image, two of the drop hip
trusses with lowered top chords to support trusses are colored gray for clarity. Notice
stick frame hip ridges and common rafters. that these trusses support the rafters.
Drop Hip (or

California Hip)
Common Rafters
Drop Hip Trusses (deepen the joist
for this truss)
To create a drop hip truss system Specification dialog, and select the
Drop hip truss check box. See “General
1. Start a drop hip truss system as you Tab” on page 510.
would a step down hip system. See 3. Use the Build Framing dialog to pro-
“Step Down Hip” on page 506. duce the common rafters, and the short
2. When the hip trusses are drawn, group joists at the hip end. See “Build Framing
select them, open the Truss Dialog” on page 467.
507
Subgirder Hip
Subgirder Hip
Subgirders are the partial trusses that butt In the following illustration, the double truss
into the doubled truss at the end of the main has one face colored dark gray, and several
run. subgirders are colored light gray.
Subgirder Hip
Double Truss
Subgirder Trusses (11)
To create a subgirder truss system 3. Using the Roof Truss tool, draw the
first subgirder from the hip apex out to
1. Draw a Roof Truss where the hip the eaves.
apex meets the ridge. 4. Select it and using the Multiple Copy
2. Double it by drawing a second truss on edit button, make copies in both
the far side from the hip section.
508
directions. Stop when the height of the 5. Finish off with hip jacks and jack trusses
subgirders reach a reasonable minimum. as in a step down hip system.
Girder Trusses
Girder trusses provide support for trusses
that are cut short, for example, by a reverse
gable or a skylight. They are often doubled-
or tripled-up for strength.
Draw a new truss from an existing truss to
the roof edge, as you would to draw a hip or
end jack truss; or draw a truss between two
trusses, forming a girder. This may be
necessary for a large opening, such as a
skylight.
Trusses cannot be drawn through each other.

If a truss is drawn through an existing truss,
the program automatically shortens it so that
it butts into the existing truss.
Scissors Trusses
Trusses drawn between roof planes and The following is an example of a scissors
sloping ceiling planes of a different pitch truss drawn beneath a 6 in 12 pitch gable roof
than the roof are called Scissor trusses. See and above 3 in 12 pitch ceiling planes.
“Ceiling Planes” on page 408.
509
Roof Truss Specification Dialog

Select a roof truss or group of roof trusses individual trusses, such as gable trusses,
and click the Open Object edit button to while others affect the whole group.
open the Roof Truss Specification dialog. The shape or volume of a roof truss is
controlled by the roof planes above it and the
The Roof Truss Specification dialog allows ceiling planes below it. It cannot be changed
you to redefine parts of an existing truss or from this dialog.
group of trusses. Some settings affect only
General Tab
1 8
2 9
3 10
4
5 11
6 12
7 13
14
1 Specify the depth of the different 2 Check Require Kingpost to require a

members that form the selected truss. vertical webbing member from the roof
• Specify the depth of the Top Chord. peak to the bottom chord.
• Specify the depth of the Bottom Chord. If this is not checked, a vertical member may
still be supplied, depending on what is
• Specify the depth of the Webbing.
510
needed to support the chords at or closer than dialog. Because both common rafters and hip
the specified maximum spans. ridges must pass over this truss, the ridge
depth should be set equal to that of the rafter
Following is a truss detail. The lower truss
depth. For an illustration of a Drop Hip truss,
was a copy of the upper truss, with Require
see “Drop Hip or California Hip” on page
Kingpost checked.
507.
5 Check Energy Heel to model a truss

with an energy heel, which removes the
bottom chord from the overhang area. For
Kingpost this to be modeled, the Raise Off Plate value
in the Build Roof dialog must be equal to or
greater than eight.
To provide more space for ceiling insulation
at the exterior walls, roofs are sometimes
3 Check End Truss to replace the raised off of the top plate with an energy
webbing with vertical members
heel. When a truss is built for such a roof, a
positioned and spaced the same as the wall
vertical member is added over the supporting
studs below. If an end truss is in the same
wall to prevent the bottom chord from extend
position as a gable attic wall, it replaces the
ing into the overhang area as far as the end
framing that would otherwise be produced
of the rafter, or until it intersects the rafter.
for that wall. See “Framing Reference
Marker” on page 467.
Energy Heel
No Energy Heel
End Truss with vertical supports
4 Check Drop Hip Truss to lower the

flat top of a truss in the hip area of a
roof.
6 Check Reduce Gable to lower the top
The flat top is lowered so that common chord of the gable truss so that lookouts
rafters and hip ridges can pass over and be may pass over the truss. Any overhang is
supported by it. The amount that the top removed from a reduced truss. You can
chord is lowered is derived from the rafter supply this overhang with short rafters drawn
Depth on the Roof tab of the Framing at the ends of the truss.
511
11 Specify the Ceiling Step of the selected

truss, which is the maximum distance
its bottom chord can step down to locate a
ceiling on the floor below the top floor. See
“Ceiling Steps” on page 497.
12 Check Force truss rebuild to rebuild

the truss envelope based on the existing
roof planes when you click OK. Not
available if Lock Truss Envelope is checked.
Reduce Gable
End Truss 13 Check Lock truss envelope to lock the
size and configuration of the selected
truss. If a locked truss is moved, it will
Lookouts maintain its original settings and will not fit
properlyif the new roof and ceiling
7 Check Attic Truss -to specify an attic conditions are different from the original.
truss. See “Attic Trusses” on page 496.
14 Check No special snapping to prevent
8 Specify the Maximum Span, which is the selected truss from snapping along
the maximum horizontal distance its long edge to a wall’s main layer or to the
between supports along the Top Chord and corner of a roof plane. If enabled, Object
the Bottom Chord. When these values are
Snaps may still occur. See “Object
equal, the truss webbing often appears more
regular.
The default Maximum Span settings are set Line Style Tab
in the Build Framing dialog. See “Trusses
Tab” on page 479. For more information about the Line Style
tab, see “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
Truss webbing is drawn for representa- Fill Style Tab

tional purposes only and as with trusses
in Chief Architect in general, is not engi- For more information about the Fill Style tab,
neered. see “Fill Style Tab” on page 902.
9 Specify the Thickness, or truss width Materials Tab

in floor plan view. This setting
overrides default settings. For more information about the Materials
tab, see “Materials Tab” on page 709.
10 Specify the Maximum Height of the
selected truss.
512
Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog

Floor trusses can be created whenever walls To open the Floor Truss Specification
define one or more rooms. dialog, select a floor truss in floor plan view
and click the Open Object edit button.
General Tab
1 5
2
3
4 6
7
8
9
1 Specify the depth of the different 3 Specify the Maximum Span, which is
members that form the selected truss. the maximum horizontal distance
• Specify the depth of the Top Chord. between supports along the Top & Bottom
Chord.
• Specify the depth of the Bottom Chord.
The default Maximum Span is set in the
• Specify the depth of the Webbing.
Build Framing dialog. See “Trusses Tab” on
2 Check Vertical Supports to use page 479.
vertical supports in the selected truss.
513
Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog
9 Check Lock truss envelope to lock the

Top Chord Vertical Support size and configuration of the truss. A
locked truss which has been relocated will
maintain its original settings.
Line Style Tab

Bottom Chord Webbing “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
6 Specify the Overall Thickness of the Fill Style Tab

selected truss.
7 Specify the Webbing Thickness “Fill Style Tab” on page 902.
thickness of the webbing.
8 Check Force Truss Rebuild to rebuild Materials Tab

the truss envelope based on the existing
floor or ceiling platform when you click OK. For information about the Materials tab, see
Not available if Lock Truss Envelope is “Materials Tab” on page 709.
checked.
514
515
Chapter 17:
Electrical
The electrical plan shows the location of all electrical objects is determined by the
electrical objects such as lights, switches, location of walls, cabinets and other objects.
outlets, smoke detectors and vent fans. Basic
wiring diagrams show which objects share
Building requirements vary throughout
circuits and the locations of the controlling the country and around the world. It is
switches. your responsibility to comply with local codes.
Electrical objects can be displayed in 2D and
3D views. Some electrical light fixtures also Chapter Contents
add light sources to 3D and Raytrace views. • Electrical Defaults
See “Lighting” on page 775. • The Electrical Tools
• Creating Wiring Schematics
Electrical objects can be selected, deleted, • Auto Place Outlets
copied, moved, rotated, reflected, and added • Electrical Library
to the library like other objects. • Displaying Electrical Objects
Usually, the electrical plan is one of the last • Editing Electrical Objects
additions to a plan since the position of most • Electrical Service Specification Dialog
Electrical Defaults
Default Settings for electrical objects Default Settings from the menu or by
control which symbols are placed in double-clicking the Electrical Tools
the current plan when the Electrical Tools are
used and can be accessed by selecting Edit>
516
button. See “Preferences & Default Settings” Default heights of individual objects can be
on page 62. overridden in the Electrical Service
Specification dialog. See “Electrical Service
2
3
4
1 Default Library Objects - These are 4 Default Heights - Specify the heights
the items used when electrical objects at which electrical outlets and switches
are automatically generated or created using are initially placed.
the Electrical Tools. Select an item in the • Check Use Default Heights to apply the
scrollable list to see a preview image to the default heights specified here to electrical
right and the symbol’s name below. objects placed in floor plan view.
2 Select an item in the Default Library • Outlet - Specify the default height for
Objects list and click the Library outlets, and phone, cable and tv jacks.
button to select a new default object from the
• Switch - Specify the default height for
library. See “Select Library Object Dialog”
switches, doorbells and thermostats.
on page 689.
• Above Cabinet - Specify the default
Symbol Name - The name of the object
3 height for switches and outlets placed
shown in the preview image displays above most cabinets in floor plan view, as
here. measured from the countertop. See
“Adjusting the Height of Electrical
517
The Electrical Tools
The Electrical Tools

Select Build> Electrical to access the Outlets placed outside the building or in an
Electrical Tools. exterior area such as a deck or porch are
labeled WP, or Water Proof.
Click in floor plan view to place an electrical
object. Some can only be placed against Outlets placed on the wall behind a base
walls, some only on the ceiling or floor, and cabinet containing a dishwasher or sink are
some automatically change as needed. If you placed at the normal 12" (300 mm) above the
click within 12" of the wall, the selected floor. If an outlet is placed above a cabinet,
object is placed on the wall. the default Above Cabinet Default Height is
used instead.
Electrical objects are placed according to the
settings in the Electrical Defaults dialog. Other types of outlets, such as floor outlets,
See “Electrical Defaults” on page 516. are available in the Electrical Library .
Outlets Lights
Select Build> Electrical> 110V Select Build> Electrical> Light to
Outlet to place 110 volt duplex place light fixtures as specified in the
outlets in walls or on the floor. Select Build> Electrical Defaults dialog. Depending on
Electrical> 220V Outlet to place 220 volt where you click in floor plan view, the light
outlets. may be mounted on the ceiling or on a wall.
Outlet locations are measured from their Some light symbols can be mounted under
centers in floor plan view. Individual outlet wall cabinets, as well. All lights placed in a
heights can be specified in the Electrical plan can also serve as light sources in most
Service Specification dialog. 3D and Raytrace views.
Certain room types and situations cause Click away from any wall to place a light on
various types of outlets to be placed. To take the ceiling. Click near a wall to place the
advantage of the program’s capabilities, light in the wall. Specify the height of an
define room types properly before placing individual light in the Electrical Service
electrical objects. See “Room Types” on Specification dialog.
page 271. Many lights are available in the Electrical
In rooms defined as Bath or Master Bath, Library . All library lights create light
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupt (GFCI) sources in camera Render and raytrace
outlets are placed. views.
If standard outlets are placed in a room Light Render Data

prior to defining it as a Bath, you should
replace them with GFCI outlets. The rendering characteristics of individual
lights that control how they appear in Render
518
and raytrace views can be specified on the height of switches is measured from the floor
Light Data tab of the Electrical Service to the center of the object.
Specification dialog. See “Light Data Tab”
on page 524.
If you connect two or more switches in a
circuit, they update to 3-way or 4-way
Switches switches automatically.
Select Build> Electrical> Switch to

Switches placed from the Electrical Library
place wall switches as specified in the
do not automatically update by default, but
Electrical Defaults dialog. Like outlets, the
can be specified to do so. See “Electrical
Service Specification Dialog” on page 522.
Creating Wiring Schematics

Electrical schematics can be created in two See “Editing Spline Based Objects” on page
ways. Using the Connect Electrical tool 166. When attached to other electrical
is quick and easy, but if you need detailed objects, however, connections display only
schematics, you can create your own wiring Reshape edit handles when selected.
diagrams using the CAD tools. Remove an electrical object from a circuit by
selecting it and clicking the Delete edit
Connect Electrical button. See “Deleting Objects” on page 196.
Select Build> Electrical> Connect More than one switch can control an object
Electrical to illustrate circuits. Using or group of objects. Two switches controlling
this tool, you can show which lights and the same objects are referred to as three-way
outlets are attached to any given switch. switches. Three switches controlling the
To create a new circuit or to add to an same objects are called four-way switches.
existing circuit, click one electrical object The number of “ways” is one more than the
number of switches in the same circuit. This
while using Connect Electrical tool,
number displays with the switch symbol in
drag to the next object and release.
floor plan view.
Connections created with the Connect
Electrical tool can be edited like splines.
Auto Place Outlets

Select Build> Electrical> Auto Place entire room at intervals not greater than
Outlets and click in a room tool to twelve feet so that no wall position is farther
place outlets, usually 110 volt, around the
519
Electrical Library
than six feet (1800mm) from the nearest placed and does not work in any room
outlet. defined as an exterior room. Exterior rooms
require that the outlets be placed individually
Outlets are placed based on settings in the
Electrical Defaults dialog. See “Electrical using the 110V Outlets tool or from the
Defaults” on page 516. It is important that Electrical Library. See “Room Types” on
the room type be defined before using Auto page 271.
Place Outlets so that outlets are placed Railings and invisible walls do not separate
appropriately in each room type. rooms for Auto Place Outlets : If Auto
Stand-alone or built-in appliances such as Place Outlets is used in a room defined
ranges, washers, and dryers each have their by railings or invisible walls, outlets are
required 110 volt or 220 volt outlets placed automatically placed in all adjacent rooms
automatically. Lights are always placed that share these wall types with that room.
above sinks.
Any outlet can be moved, deleted, or merged
Auto Place Outlets requires a room to with other outlets or switches. See
have a door before outlets are automatically “Switches” on page 519.
Electrical Library
Select Library> Library Browser to You can create electrical symbols and save
accesses a variety of electrical them to the library. See “Custom Symbols”
symbols. on page 974.
Browse for electrical objects such as bath You can also assign electrical objects from
vent fans, an electrical panel, fluorescent the library to toolbar buttons for easy access
lights, chandeliers, a smoke detector, and placement to frequently-used library
thermostat, and much more. Select a symbol, objects. See “Place Library Object Button”
then click in your plan to place it on a wall, on page 692.
floor, or ceiling.
Displaying Electrical Objects

The display of electrical objects and Electrical labels display in floor plan view
connections is controlled in the Layer when these conditions are met:
Display Options dialog. See “Displaying • The layer Electrical, Labels layer is
Objects” on page 117. turned on.
When displayed in 3D, light fixtures act as • Show Labels is checked and a label
sources of light that help illuminate your 3D shape is specified in the Electrical
model. See “Lighting” on page 775.
520
Schedule Specification dialog. See Specification dialog. See “Label Tab” on

“Label Tab” on page 1042. page 527.
• To produce a component or custom label, • To produce automatic electrical labels, an
specify it in the Electrical Service electrical schedule exists in the plan.
Editing Electrical Objects

Electrical objects can be selected as a group
and individually in 2D and 3D and edited
using the edit handles, the edit toolbar and
their specification dialog. See “Electrical
Service Specification Dialog” on page 522.
Light fixtures and Added Lights can be
group-selected, but their light data cannot be Wall-mounted outlet in 2D and 3D views
edited unless they have the same number of
light sources associated with each. See Electrical objects placed on floors and
“Lighting” on page 775. ceilings can be rotated.
Lights can also be edited using the Adjust
Lights dialog. See “Adjust Lights Dialog” on
page 779.
Moving Electrical Objects

Ceiling-mounted outlet in 2D and 3D views
Using Dimensions
Electrical connections edit like splines. See
Electrical objects can be moved precisely “Editing Spline Based Objects” on page 166.
using manual dimensions. See “Moving
First, dimensions must be checked on the
Locate Objects tab of the Dimension
Defaults dialog. See “Dimension Defaults

Using the Edit Buttons
The edit handles for electrical objects vary
depending on the location of the object. Wall A selected electrical symbol can be edited in
mounted electrical objects cannot be rotated, a variety of ways using the buttons on the
so only the Move edit handle displays. edit toolbar. See “Edit Toolbar Buttons” on
page 1140.
521
Electrical Service Specification Dialog
Adjusting the Height To change the height of an electrical object in

of Electrical Objects floor plan view, open the object for
specification and type the desired height in
The heights where electrical objects display the Electrical Service Specification dialog.
in 3D views are initially based on settings in See “Electrical Service Specification Dialog”
the Electrical Defaults dialog. See on page 522.
“Electrical Defaults” on page 516.
Electrical objects placed in 3D views are
In floor plan view, an outlet placed where a placed wherever you click a wall, regardless
base cabinet meets a wall is placed above the of the height. In 3D views, the position of an
counter unless the cabinet contains a fixture electrical object can be adjusted using its edit
or appliance other than a bathroom sink. If handles.
the fixture requires electricity, the outlet
remains behind the cabinet at normal wall Deleting Electrical Objects
height, where it can supply power to the
fixture or appliance. An electrical object can be deleted by
Kitchen sinks are assumed to require selecting it and clicking the Delete edit
electricity since they often contain a garbage button or by pressing the Delete key.
disposal. Dishwashers are not considered to All electrical objects in a room, on a floor, or
require electricity since they are usually in the entire plan can be deleted as a group
plugged in under a nearby sink. If an outlet is using the Delete Objects dialog. See
needed above a cabinet containing a kitchen “Deleting Objects” on page 196.
sink, place the outlet before adding the sink,
or move the outlet up.

Select one or more electrical objects and • The Light Data tab specifies how lights
click the Open Object edit button to appear in rendered views. See “Lighting”
open the Electrical Service Specification on page 775.
dialog. The settings in this dialog vary, • The Layer tab specifies the layer the
depending on the type of object(s) you select. object is placed on.
The Electrical Service Specification dialog • The Materials tab allows you to change
consists of four tabs: materials on electrical objects.
• The Service Data tab specifies the loca- Depending on the type of symbol selected,
tion of individual electrical objects. only some of the tabs are available. Only the
Service Data, Layer and Material tabs are
available for switches and outlets.
522
Service Data Tab

The items on this tab vary, depending on the
type of electrical object selected.
1
2
1 The Name of the selected object as • Specify the Offset From Floor of a floor
used in the Library Browser and outlet or floor lamp.
Materials List displays here. • Specify the Distance From Wall of a
wall mounted symbol. A negative value
2 Specify the Position of the selected will recess the symbol into the wall and
electical symbol. The options available
depend on the type of electrical symbol may prevent it from being seen in 3D.
selected.
3 Specify the Size of the selected
• Specify the Offset From Ceiling of a electical symbol.
ceiling outlet or ceiling mounted light. If • Specify the Height, Width and Depth of
the light is mounted to a cabinet, this the selected symbol.
value is the offset from the cabinet.
• Click the Reset button to restore the elec-
• Specify the Height to Center of a trical symbol’s original size
switch, wall outlet or wall light.
523
4 Check Automatically Change Switch “Connect Electrical” on page 519. Switches

Type When Wiring for a selected placed from the toolbar use this option by
switch to become a three- or four-way switch default; switches placed from the library do
if your wiring plan later uses it as such. See not. Only available for switches.
Light Data Tab

The Light Data tab is available when the sources are selected, the settings on this tab
selected electrical object is a light fixture. are not available.
The available options vary depending on the
The settings on this tab are similar to those
type of light selected. If multiple light
on the same tab of the Light Specification
fixtures with different numbers of light
dialog. See “Light Specification Dialog” on
page 781.
1
2
3
4
5
8
6
7 9
10
1 The currently selected Light Source • Select an existing Light Source associ-
displays here. Each fixture can have ated with the selected light fixture from
multiple light sources. See “Lighting” on the drop-down list .
page 775. • Click Add Light or Delete Light to add
or delete light sources from the list.
524
2 Select a light source Type from the effects. You may need to experiment to fully
drop-down list for the currently understand how to use them.
selected Light Source. Available types are
Point Light, Spot Light, and Parallel Light. 6 Specify the direction and drop off rate
of a Parallel or Spot Light source.
See “Light Types” on page 779.
• The Tilt Angle controls the angle of the
3 Check Auto Intensity to have the illumination with respect to the horizon.
program provide an average intensity to A value of -90° means that the light is
render the light source with reasonable pointing straight down and a value of 90°
lighting effects. Uncheck this box to enable means that the light is pointing straight
the slider bar and text box and control how up. 0° is parallel to the horizon.
bright the light appears in rendered views.
• The Dir Angle defines the direction of
Lights with an intensity of 0% act as though the illumination relative to the ground.
they are turned off. It is possible to have too Zero° is measured horizontally pointing
much light. If you have multiple lights in a to the right. Positive values rotate in a
room all set to maximum intensity, colors counter-clockwise direction from there.
and textures can turn white. Enter a value up to 360°. If you enter a
negative value, the program will add
4 Click the Color to define the color of 360° to it when you click OK or press the
the selected light source. Colored lights
alter the appearance of textures and can be Tab key.
used to achieve special effects. • The Cut Off Angle controls the angle of
the cone of illumination for Spot Lights
The default color of light is pure white,
only. A cone angle of 180° creates a spot
which has the least affect on the material
light that shines on one side of the light
colors and textures.
source, representing a half sphere. A
5 Check Attenuated to control how small cone angle, for example 10°, cre-
quickly the light sources’ intensity ates a very narrow cone of light. The cut
drops as its distance from the light source off angle should always be between 0°
increases. Only Spot and Point Lights have and 180°.
attenuation. • The Drop Off Rate affects how fast the
The three edit values represent the three intensity of illumination drops off from
coefficients (a, b, and c) in the expression the center of the cone to the outside edge.
1 / (a + b*d+c*d*d), where d is the distance This is only available for Spot Lights.
from the light source. Increasing any of these
values results in the light intensity dropping The default drop off value is 7.5, which
faster (the light does not travel as far). means the light drops off fairly quickly.
Decreasing any value results in the light Do not set this value too low because
intensity dropping slower (the light travels there are limitations in the OpenGL light-
farther). Small changes in these coefficients ing model that result in jagged circles of
can have significant impact on lighting light when they are shining on large flat
surfaces. Appearances can be improved
525
by decreasing the Maximum Triangle • Casts Shadows controls whether or not

Size and increasing the Drop off Rate. the light source casts shadows when
Shadows are turned on in Camera views.
7 Offset Position gives you control over
the location of the light source relative
You should only use one or two light
to the fixture.
sources to casts shadows at a time.
• From Base controls how far the light Shadow calculations can slow rendering
source is from the fixture base. The fix- significantly.
ture base is determined by the surface
• Check Show Position in Camera View
that it is attached to (i.e. wall, floor, or
to indicate the position of a selected Point
ceiling).
or Spot Light source in 3D views when it
• Offset in X/Offset in Y allow you to is turned On. This tool can be used to
position the light source relative to the determine if your light source is posi-
center of the fixture, along the floor/ceil- tioned correctly.
ing.
10 Specify which view types in which the
8 Specify the appearance of Soft selected light source is used. The more
Shadows (raytracing), or how the lights you use in either view, the slower the
selected light source casts soft shadows in a time to generate that view.
Raytrace view.
• Select Use in Camera View to turn the
• The Light Size determines how big the selected light source on in regular 3D
illumination appears. Zero indicates a views only.
single point light source, while a size of 3 • Select Use in Raytrace View to turn the
indicates a larger source such as a light- selected light source on in Raytrace
bulb. views only.
• The Softness setting determines how • Select Use in Both to turn the selected
many iterations the raytracer should go light source on in both Camera and
through to soften the light. This value Raytrace views.
determines the quality of the raytrace, but
also slows it down. You should not use
values greater than 2 or 3, unless the Note: Many more lights can be included in
Raytrace views than in rendered views.
Light Size is very large.
Some fixtures may have four or five lights for
use in Raytrace views but only one in Cam-
9 Specify the appearance of the selected era views. See“Rendering & Raytracing” on
light source in Camera and/orRaytrace
page 772.
views.
• Check On to use the light source is used Layer Tab
in Camera or Raytrace views, or uncheck
it if you prefer that the light source not be The Layer tab is found in the specification
used. dialogs for a variety of objects, including
electrical objects. For more information, see
526
Materials Tab
Note: If you choose a label shape in the Elec-
The Materials tab is found in the trical Schedule Specification dialog, the set-
specification dialogs for a variety of objects, tings here are overridden and the schedule
including electrical objects. For more label is used instead.
information, see “Materials Tab” on page
709. The display of electrical labels can also be
controlled in the Layer Display Options
Label Tab dialog. See “Layer Display Options Dialog”
on page 121.
The Label tab is found in the specification
dialogs for a variety of different objects,
including electrical objects. For more
information, see “Label Tab” on page 1045.
527
Chapter 18:
Trim & Molding
Chief Architect offers a wide selection of Chapter Contents

trim and molding options. Corner boards, • Corner Boards
quoins, and frieze moldings can be added to • Corner Board Specification Dialog
a building’s exterior. Molding polylines and • Quoins
3D molding polylines can be edited as 2D • Quoin Specification Dialog
CAD objects using the CAD editing tools, • Editing Corner Boards and Quoins
then extruded to display in 3D for a variety • Molding Profiles
of powerful applications. • Symbol Moldings
In addition, Chief Architect offers a wide • Molding Polylines
selection of trim and molding options for • Displaying Molding Polylines
doors, windows, rooms, and many interior • Changing Profiles on Existing Moldings
objects. See “Libraries” on page 682. • Frieze Moldings
• Molding Polyline Specification Dialog
You can also assign moldings to a variety of • 3D Molding Polyline Specification Dialog
objects, such as rooms and cabinets, in those
objects’ specification dialogs. See
“Specification Dialogs” on page 33.
528
Corner Boards
Corner boards are added to a building Corner boards extend from the top plate
exterior in any view by selecting down to the bottom of the floor platform of
Build> Trim> Corner Boards. the floor on which it is placed, but do not
extend to other floors. You must add corner
boards to all floors of the building that you
want to have corner boards.
A selected corner board or boards can be
moved, but only to another wall corner or
corners. In 3D views, corner boards can be
lengthened or shortened using the edit
handles. Corner boards can be copied,
deleted and resized similar to other objects
Click at a wall corner where you want to add using the edit toolbar or the Corner Board
trim. Be sure to click where the outside wall Specification dialog.
surfaces meet. If you click where the inside The default material for corner boards is
surfaces meet, corner trim will be created defined by the Exterior Trim entry in the
inside the room. Material Defaults dialog. See “Material
529
Corner Board Specification Dialog
Corner Board Specification Dialog

General Tab
3
1
1 Specify the Width and Thickness of • Specify the Initial Thickness of all sub-
the selected corner board(s). sequently created corner boards. This
does not change the thickness of any
2 Check Set Top/Set Bottom to specify existing corner boards.
the top and bottom heights of the corner
board(s). The Initial Width and Initial Thickness are
• If Set Top is unchecked, the top of the not saved with the plan file and are reset the
corner board automatically extends to the next time you run the program.
top plate.
Layer Tab
• If Set Bottom is unchecked, the bottom
of the corner board automatically extends For information about the Layer tab, see
to the bottom of the floor platform. “Layer Tab” on page 125.
3 The Initial Values settings affect Materials Tab

subsequently created corner boards.
• Specify the Initial Width of all subse- For information about the Materials tab, see
quently created corner boards. This does “Materials Tab” on page 709.
not change the width of any existing cor-
ner boards.
530
Quoins
Select Build> Trim> Quoins in any 3D views, quoins can be lengthened or
view and click at a wall corner where shortened using the edit handles. Quoins can
you want to place quoins. be copied, deleted and resized similar to
other objects using the edit toolbar or the
Quoin Specification dialog.
The size of quoins in floor plan view is

relative on their size in 3D.
Initially, quoins use the same material as the
default material of the wall surface they are
placed against. This material is specified in
the Wall Type Definitions dialog. See “Wall
Type Definitions Dialog” on page 243.
A selected quoin or quoins can be moved,
but only to another wall corner or corners. In
Quoin Specification Dialog
2 4
1 Specify the dimensions of the quoins in • Specify the Width, which is the long
the selected Quoin object. dimension of each quoin in the selected
Quoin object. The dimension along the
531
Quoin Specification Dialog
other wall is half this value when they are • Specify the Initial Width of all subse-
staggered or mirrored. quently created quoins. This does not
• Specify the Thickness, which is the change the width of any existing quoins.
amount that the quoin protrudes from the • Specify the Initial Thickness of all sub-
exterior surface of the wall. sequently created quoins. This does not
• Specify the Height for all quoins in the change the thickness of any existing
selected Quoin object. quoins.
• Specify the Gap, which is the distance The Initial Width and Initial Thickness are
between successive quoins. not saved with the plan file and are reset the
next time you run the program.
2 Check Set Top/Set Bottom to specify
the top and bottom heights of the 4 Specify the arrangement of quoins used
quoin(s) in the text fields. by the selected Quoin object(s).
• If Set Top is unchecked, the top of the • Staggered - Produce quoins that have
corner board automatically extends to the one long side and one short side stag-
top plate. gered on opposite sides of the corner.
• If Set Bottom is unchecked, the bottom • When Staggered is selected, check Swap
of the quoin automatically extends to the Start Block to switch the starting order
bottom of the floor platform. for staggered quoins.
• Uniform - Produce quoins that are of
3 The Initial Values settings affect equal length on both sides of the corner.
subsequently created quoins.
• Mirrored - Produce quoins that alternate
having either two long sides or two short
sides.
Staggered Mirrored Uniform
Layer Tab Materials Tab

For information about the Layer tab, see For information about the Materials tab, see
“Layer Tab” on page 125. “Materials Tab” on page 709.
532
Editing Corner Boards and Quoins

Before a corner board or quoin can be edited, • In floor plan view, corner boards and
it must be selected. Click on a trim object quoins display two edit handles and can
when the Select Objects tool is active. be moved and rotated.
Corner boards and quoins can also be group • In cross section/elevation and 3D views,
selected and edited. See “Selecting Objects” corner boards and quoins can be moved,
on page 144. lengthened, and shorted much the other
line-based objects are. See “Editing Line
Corner boards and quoins can be edited using
their edit handles, the edit toolbar buttons,
and their specification dialogs. See “Corner
Board Specification Dialog” on page 530 and
Using the Edit Buttons
“Quoin Specification Dialog” on page 531. A selected corner board or quoin can be
Using the Mouse on the edit toolbar. See “Edit Toolbar
Depending on the type of view, a corner
board or quoin displays a different set of edit
handles when selected.
Molding Profiles
A molding profile is a polyline that Creating a Molding Profile
represents a 2D cross section of a particular
style of molding. A molding profile does not You can easily create custom molding
display in 3D on its own; it must be applied profiles using the Line and Arc CAD Tools
to a room or a molding polyline. See by following a few basic guidelines. The
“Moldings Tab” on page 540 or “Molding object is to draw a polyline, closed or not.
Polylines” on page 535. • Moldings can be drawn in either floor
plan view or in a CAD Detail window.
The library contains a selection of moldings,
as well as curbs, gutters, handrails and rafter • Draw the molding profile at its actual,
tails. You can customize library molding unscaled size.
profiles and also create your own custom • The profile must be drawn with the
profiles and add them to the library. See proper orientation. The back of most pro-
“Adding to the Library” on page 700. files, or the side facing the wall, must be
drawn as a vertical edge on the left side
of the polyline.
533
Symbol Moldings
• Similarly, curbs and gutters are drawn When the molding profile suits your needs,
with the back of the profile as a vertical select it and click the Add to Library
edge on the left side of the polyline. edit button. See “Adding to the Library” on
• Open polylines should be used for gutter page 700.
and rafter tail profiles. Gutter profiles
attach to the roof on the left side. Place Molding Profile
• Open polylines should be used for rafter An existing molding profile can be placed in
tail profiles. Rafter tail profiles should be floor plan view or a CAD Detail, edited, and
open on the left side. added to the library as a new profile.
• In the case of handrail profiles, the bot-
Right-click on a molding profile in the
tom edge must be drawn on the left side
library and select Place Molding Profile
of the polyline.
from the contextual menu. Move your
pointer into the drawing area and click once
to place a closed polyline identical to the
selected profile at that location. The polyline
can then be edited to suit your needs.
Note: Place Molding Profile cannot be used

to apply a molding profile to an object - it is
only used to. place a profile polyline.
Base molding profile - Handrail profile -

back edge faces left bottom faces left
Symbol Moldings
Symbol Moldings are 3D symbols that are Creating a Symbol Molding
repeated along a path to form molding.
Molding symbols are different from molding Begin by opening a new, blank plan and
profiles because they are replicated 3D creating a single instance of the molding
sumbols instead of extruded 2D shapes. symbol using the Primitive Tools . See
“Primitive Tools” on page 649. For example,
to create the molding shown in the
illustration above, make an object that looks
like this:
534
2. In the Import 3D Symbol dialog, specify

the symbol as Molding and click the
Advanced button.
• If you plan to use the molding symbol
more than once, check the box beside
Add to Library. See “Adding a New
Object” on page 700.
3. On the 3D tab of the Symbol
Specification dialog, rotate the symbol
as needed so that it faces you in the pre-
view image.
When you are satisfied with its appearance,
convert it to a 3D symbol. See “Convert to Symbol moldings work best if you make
Symbol” on page 987. them symmetrical.
You can also import a 3D symbol from
another application. See “Importing 3D Symbol moldings are center aligned. Both
Symbols” on page 967. ends have a 45° miter, so the end instances
may be chopped.
To import a molding symbol Once created, a symbol molding can be
replicated along a molding polyline. See
1. Select File> Import> 3D Symbol “Molding Polylines” on page 535.
from the menu. See “Import 3D Symbol
Molding Polylines
A molding polyline is a 3D path that either a • Molding Lines
2D molding profile is extruded along or a
series of molding symbols is repeated along. • 3D Molding Polylines
Molding polylines can be used to create
custom room moldings and decorations • 3D Molding Lines
anywhere in your 3D model. To create a molding polyline, first select the
The Molding Polyline tools are desired Molding Polyline tool. The Select
accessed by selecting Build> Trim Library Object dialog will open. Select a
from the menu. molding profile or symbol from the library,
then click and drag to draw the path for the
There are four types of molding polylines: selected molding profile or symbol.
• Molding Polylines
535
Molding Polylines
If a molding profile or symbol has been

previously selected during the current
session in the program, you can begin
drawing using this molding without selecting
anything from the library.
Molding polylines can also be created using
the Make Room Molding Polyline and Molding polyline and molding line in
Floor Plan View and 3D overview
the Convert Polyline edit tools.
3D Molding Polyline Tool
Molding Polyline Tool Select Build> Trim> 3D Molding
Select Build> Trim> Molding Poly- Polyline in floor plan or cross section/
line in floor plan view, a camera view elevation view to create a closed molding
or overview to create a molding polyline polyline.
with a closed shape and a single height off • When drawn in a cross section/elevation
the floor along its entire perimeter. Molding view, a 3D Molding Polyline’s top and
Polylines are drawn like rectangular bottom edges have two different heights.
polylines. Its sides have different heights at their
In floor plan view, Molding Polylines can start and end points.
also be created by selecting a profile from the • If drawn in floor plan view, a camera
Library Browser. Single-click to place a view or overview, a 3D Molding Polyline
2’x2’ closed polyline or click and drag to has a single height along its perimeter.
draw a rectangular polyline.
In either case, its edges can be edited so that
it travels in three dimensions rather than two.
Molding Line Tool
Select Build> Trim> Molding Line in 3D Molding Line Tool
floor plan view, a camera view or over-
Select Build> Trim> 3D Molding
view to create a molding line with a single
Line in floor plan or cross section/ele-
height off the floor along its entire length.
vation view to create a molding line.
Multiple Molding Lines can be connected to
form open or closed polylines as long as they • If drawn in a cross section/elevation
share the same height. view, a 3D Molding Line’s start and end
points can have two different heights.
• If drawn in floor plan view, a camera
view or overview, a 3D Molding Line has
a single height along its length.
3D Molding Lines can be connected to form
polylines as long as the ends at which two
segments connect have identical heights.
536
Once drawn, a 3D Molding Line can be page 539 and “3D Molding Polyline
edited so that it travels in three dimensions. Specification Dialog” on page 541.
Floor Plan View Moldings Library

In the floor plan view, select a molding
profile from the library. The Molding Poly-
Cross Section/ line tool becomes active, allowing you to
Elevation View draw a molding polyline with using the
(selected) selected profile.
3D Overview Converting Room Molding

Select a room and click on the Make Room
3D Molding polyline and 3D molding line Molding Polyline edit button. This
as they appear in three different views. opens the Make Room Molding Polyline
dialog, allowing you to select which type of
Editing Molding Polylines room molding to convert to a molding
Molding polylines can be edited much the polyline. See “Room Polylines” on page 282.
way CAD polylines are. See “Editing Open
Polyline Based Objects” on page 155 and Converting a CAD Polyline
“Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on Select a CAD polyline and click the
page 160. Convert Polyline edit button to covert
All molding lines and polylines also can be it into a molding polyline or a 3D molding
edited in their specification dialogs. See polyline. See “Converting Objects” on page
“Molding Polyline Specification Dialog” on 205.
Displaying Molding Polylines

As with other objects, the display of dialog. See “Displaying Objects” on page
molding polylines in 2D and 3D views 174.
is controlled in the Layer Display Options
By default, molding polylines are placed on
the Moldings layer.
Changing Profiles on Existing Moldings

In 3D views, select a molding profile or profile has been selected. Click on a molding
symbol from the Library Browser and the polyline, 3D molding polyline, room
pointer changes to indicate that a molding molding, cabinet molding, door molding, or
537
Frieze Moldings
window molding to change the current

molding profile. This is the same as changing
the molding profile in the specification
dialog for the object.
Click on a molding in 3D view to change it
Frieze Moldings
Frieze moldings (also known as freize Creating Frieze Moldings
boards) are mounted below the eaves of roof
planes and can be generated automatically To create automatic frieze moldings, specify
using the Build Roof dialog. a molding profile on the Frieze tab of the
Build Roof dialog; check Build Fascia,
Gutters on the Build tab of the Build Roof
dialog; and click OK. See “Build Roof
Frieze moldings below the eave of automatically generated roof planes
Displaying Frieze Moldings Selecting Frieze Moldings

By default, frieze molding displays in 3D To select a frieze molding, its layer must first
views but not in floor plan view and its be unlocked and turned on. See “Locking
default layer, Roofs, Frieze Moldings, is Layers” on page 117. In floor plan or cross
locked. See “Layer Display Options Dialog” section/elevation view, select a wall and click
on page 121.
538
the Select Next Object edit button or Frieze molding can also be edited in the 3D
Molding Polyline Specification dialog. See
press the Tab key until the frieze molding is
selected. When the frieze molding is selected “3D Molding Polyline Specification Dialog”
the Status Bar says “3D Molding Polyline.” on page 541.
See “The Status Bar” on page 34. If you edit a frieze molding, you may want to
uncheck the Automatic Frieze property on
Editing Frieze Moldings the 3D Molding Polyline Specification
dialog to avoid losing your edits if fascia is
Like other 3D Molding Polyines, frieze
recalculated.
molding can be edited much the way CAD
polylines are in floor plan and cross section/ Once Automatic Frieze is unchecked, it
elevation views. See “Editing Molding cannot be checked again.To restore the
Polylines” on page 537. automatic updating behavior of frieze
molding, it must be regenerated.
Molding Polyline Specification Dialog

To open the Molding Polyline Specification Polyline Tab
dialog, select a molding polyline or group of
molding polylines and click the Open For information about the Polyline tab, see
Object edit button.
Selected Line Tab
General Tab
The Selected Line tab is available when the
selected segment of the molding polyline is a
line, as opposed to an arc. For more
information, see “Line Style Tab” on page
889.
Arc Tab
The Arc tab displays when the selected
Specify the Height of the polyline. segment of the 3D molding polyline is an
arc, as opposed to a line. See “Arc Tab” on
Select No Molding on Selected Edge to page 896.
create blank section in the molding polyline
along the selected line segment.
539
Molding Polyline Specification Dialog
Moldings Tab
1
2
3
1 Molding - Select the molding to edit. moves the molding up and a negative offset
always moves the molding down.
2 Add New - Click to open the Select
Library Object dialog and add a new To Top - Click to specify that the top of the
molding profile or symbol to the molding molding is at the polyline height plus the
polyline. See “Select Library Object Dialog” offset.
on page 689.
To Bottom - Click to specify that the bottom
Select - Click to remove the currently of the molding is placed at the polyline
selected profile and replace it with a new one height plus the offset.
from the Select Library Object dialog.
Inside - Click to extrude the molding profile
Delete - Click to delete the currently selected on the inside or right side of the polyline.
profile. Clear to extrude the molding profile on the
outside or left side of the polyline.
3 Height - Specify the molding profile
height. It must be greater than 0.
Width - Specify the width. This option is
not available for molding polylines created
from default room moldings. This value must
be greater than 0.
Offset - Specify the offset from the molding
polyline height to the top or bottom of the
molding profile. A positive offset always Molding extruded inside
540
Line Style Tab

Fill Style Tab

Molding extruded outside (Inside unchecked)
Materials Tab
3D Molding Polyline Specification Dialog

Select a 3D molding polyline and click the When Automatic Frieze is checked, the
Open Object edit button to open the 3D frieze molding is updated whenever you
Molding Polyline Specification dialog.
check Build Fascia, Gutters on the Build
Roof dialog and click OK.
General Tab Once Automatic Frieze has been

unchecked, it cannot be checked again.To
restore the automatic updating behavior of
the frieze molding, it must be regenerated.
See “Creating Frieze Moldings” on page
1
538.
2
Selected Line Tab
1 Uncheck Molding on Selected Edge to The Selected Line tab is available when the
turn off the display of the specified
molding on the edge of the 3D molding selected segment of the 3D molding polyline
polyline that was selected when the dialog is a line as opposed to an arc.
was opened. For more information about the The Length/Angle section in the 3D
selected edge, see “Selecting Objects” on Molding Polyline Specification dialog is
page 144. different other Selected Line tabs.
2 Automatic frieze is enabled when a

frieze molding is selected (see
“Selecting Frieze Moldings” on page 538).
541
Angle in XY Plane specifies the counter-

clockwise angle that the selected line makes
with the positive X axis when viewed from
above, as in floor plan view.
Angle from XY Plane specifies the angle
that the selected line makes with the
horizontal XY plane when viewed from the
side, as in a cross section/elevation view. A
positive value means that the line slopes up;
a negative value means that it slopes down.
For more information about using the other
settings on the Selected Line tab of the 3D
Molding Polyline Specification dialog, see
Length specifies the 3D length of the “Selected Line Tab” on page 901.
selected line of the 3D molding polyline.
542
Selected Arc Tab

The Selected Arc tab is available when the
selected segment of the 3D molding polyline
is an arc as opposed to a line.
1 5
6
3
7
4
1 The Lock options specify how Select Chord to keep the start and end fixed
changing one value affects other values. and change the radius.
Select Start to keep the start and center of
2 The Start options specify the
the arc fixed and move the end. coordinates of the starting point of the
selected arc, and are editable when either
Select End to keep the end and center of the
Lock End or Lock Arc are selected.
arc fixed and move the start.
Select Center to keep the center of the arc 3 The End options specify the
coordinates of the end point of the
fixed and move the start or end.
selected arc, and are editable when either
Select Arc to keep the arc geometry fixed Lock Start or Lock Arc are selected.
and translate the arc.
543
4 The Chord options specify the length selected arc and are editable when Lock Arc
and angle of the selected arc and are is selected.
editable when either Lock Start or Lock
End are selected. The Chord Angle is also 7 The Normal options specify the
coordinates of the normal for the plane
editable when Lock Arc is selected.
that the arc exists in. The normal is a vector
• Chord Length - the 3D distance between that is parallel to that plane and is expressed
arc start and end. as a line between two points: (0,0,0) and the
• Chord Angle - the angle created by the point defined in the dialog.
arc chord and the positive X axis. In plan view, the arc direction is counter
clockwise if the normal has a positive value
5 The Arc options specify radius, angle on the z axis (0,0,1) and clockwise if the
and length values of the selected arc:
value on the z axis is negative (0,0,-1).
• Radius - the distance from the arc to the
arc center.
Moldings Tab
• Start Angle - the angle created by a line
from the arc center to the start and the For information about the Moldings tab, see
positive X axis. “Moldings Tab” on page 540.
• End Angle - the angle that a line from the
center to the end Line Style Tab
• Arc Angle - the angle created by a line For information about the Line Style tab, see
from the arc center to the start and a line “Line Style Tab” on page 901.
from the center to the end.
• Arc Length - the length of the arc. Materials Tab
6 The Center options specify the “Materials Tab” on page 709.
coordinates of the center point of the
544
545
Chapter 19:
Cabinets
With Chief Architect’s cabinet tools you can Chapter Contents

create base, wall, and full height cabinets as • Cabinet Defaults
well as soffits, shelves, partitions, and • The Cabinet Tools
custom countertops. These objects are very • Cabinet Fillers
versatile, allowing for a wide range of • Placing Cabinets and Fillers
customization. • Custom Countertops
Chief Architect also has many customized • Displaying Cabinets
cabinet symbols and cabinet groups available • Cabinet Labels
in the library. Cabinets you have customized • Editing Cabinets
can be saved to your own library for future • Editing Cabinet Door/Drawer and Panel
Style
use.
• Editing Custom Countertops
• Special Cabinets
• Cabinet Specification Dialog
• Cabinet Shelf Specification Dialog
• Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog
• Custom Countertop Specification Dialog
546
Cabinet Defaults
Access default settings for each Cabinet Fillers and Custom Countertops do
cabinet type by selecting Edit> not have defaults dialogs. Instead, their
Default Settings, then clicking the + beside initial settings are based on the those of other
Cabinets. Select a subheading and click the objects.
Edit button to open the defaults dialog • Base Cabinet Fillers’ initial settings are
associated with your selection. based on Base Cabinet Defaults.
The Cabinet Defaults dialogs can also be • Wall Cabinet Fillers’ initial settings are
accessed by double-clicking the Cabinet based on Wall Cabinet Defaults.
Tools parent button. • Full Height Cabinet Fillers’ initial set-
tings are based on Full Height Cabinet
Defaults.
• Custom Countertops’ initial settings are
based on Base Cabinet Default settings
but are also influenced by the settings of
cabinets beneath them.
See “Custom Countertops” on page 549.
Dynamic Cabinet Defaults

The following cabinet default values are
dynamic: Separation, Backsplash Height
and Thickness, Countertop Overhang and
Double-clicking a Cabinet Tools child button Thickness, Toe Kick Height and Depth,
also opens its corresponding defaults dialog, Side and Vertical Overlap, Stiles,
if that object has a defaults dialog. Hardware spacing, and all Materials. See
“Dynamic Defaults” on page 67.
Each type of cabinet object has default
definitions for size, style, materials and much When changed, existing cabinet objects
more. In fact, the default dialog for each using the default value are affected.
cabinet type is similar to its corresponding
specification dialog. For descriptions of General Cabinet Defaults
these settings, see “Cabinet Specification
The General Cabinet Defaults dialog can be
Dialog” on page 562, “Shelf/Partition
accessed only from the Default Settings
Specification Dialog” on page 576 and
dialog.
“Soffit Specification Dialog” on page 662.
547
The Cabinet Tools
3 Specify how Cabinet Resizing takes

place when the edit handles are used.
1 • Select Use Grid Snaps to resize cabinets
2 using Snap Grid increments1.
3 • Select Use Resize Increment to resize
cabinets using the increment specified
here.
• Set the Resize Increment at which cabi-
4 nets resize. The minimum allowable
increment is 1/16 of an inch (10 mm).
4 Uncheck Show Partial Module Lines

to display lines between merged cabinet
modules as specified by the “Cabinets,
1 Specify the Minimum Cabinet Width.
The minimum allowable width is 1/16 Module Lines” layer2. Check this box to
of an inch (10 mm). represent module lines as grey lines that do
not extend across the cabinets.
2 Uncheck Create Automatic Fillers to
prevent fillers from automatically
generating in spaces between cabinets. This You can set these values specifically for
setting is dynamic: changing it will affect particular manufacturers.
cabinets already present in your plan.
1.See “Grid Snaps” on page 136.
2.See “Displaying Objects” on page 117.
The Cabinet Tools

Select Build> Cabinet to access the Once created, cabinets, soffits, shelves,
Cabinet Tools. partitions and fillers can be selected and
Cabinets are easily created with a single click edited much like other box-based objects4.
in any view3. Typically, though, groups of
cabinet objects are positioned closely Base Cabinets
together and arranged to form work spaces, Select Build> Cabinet> Base Cabinet
and there are some special behaviors and and click in any view. Base cabinets
techniques to be aware of. See “Placing can be placed directly under wall cabinets
Cabinets and Fillers” on page 551.
4.See “Editing Box-Based Objects” on

3.See “Click-to-Create” on page 142. page 164.
548
and generate a countertop and toe kick by Create corner shelves by placing one shelf on
default. each wall, then moving or stretching them
until they touch.
Wall Cabinets Once created, shelves can be selected and
To place a wall cabinet, select Build> edited. See “Shelf/Partition Specification
Cabinet> Wall Cabinet and click in Dialog” on page 576.
any view. Wall cabinets can be placed
directly over base cabinets. Partitions
Select Build> Cabinet> Partition
Full Height Cabinets button and click in any view to create a
To place a full height cabinet, select vertical partition.
Build> Cabinet> Full Height and Like shelves, partitions can be selected and
click in any view. Full height cabinets edited after they are placed.
generate a toe kick by default and cannot be
placed on top of other cabinets. Partitions can be used with shelves to create
complex storage systems.
Soffits
Custom Countertops
Soffits typically fill the space between
cabinet tops and the ceiling, but can Custom Countertops are drawn and
also be used to create any object that can be edited just like other closed-polyline
modeled as a 3D box. To place a soffit, select based objects1. Select Build> Cabinet>
Build> Cabinet> Soffit and click in any Custom Countertop, then either click and
view. drag a rectangle or single-click to place a
2’x2’ countertop. See “Custom Countertops”
Soffits can display in both floor plan and 3D
on page 553.
views. They can be assigned materials that
are calculated in the Materials List; by You can also generate a custom countertop
default, they use the material assigned to over one or more base cabinets using the
interior walls in the General Materials
Generate Custom Countertop edit tool.
dialog. Like cabinets, soffits can have
See “Using the Edit Buttons” on page 557.
custom molding profiles specified for them.
For more information about using soffits for Custom Counter Holes
a variety of purposes, see “Other Objects” on
page 648. Select Build> Cabinet> Custom
Counter Hole, then either click and
drag a rectangle or single-click to place a
Shelves
2’x2’ countertop hole. Custom Counter
Select Build> Cabinet> Shelf and
click in any view to create a shelf. 1.See “Rectangular Polyline” on page
903.
549
The Cabinet Tools
Holes must be drawn within an existing

Custom Countertop, can be drawn in any Place range tops and sinks into cabi-
view except cross section/elevation views nets early, so that any resizing can be
and can be edited to any shape. See “Editing done before too many cabinets are placed.
Custom Countertops” on page 558.
To install an appliance into a cabinet, select
the appliance for placement in the selection
Cabinet Modules Library
pane of the Library Browser and click on a
In the Library Browser, expand the cabinet. There must be enough space in the
Cabinet Modules category to access a cabinet or adjoining cabinets to contain the
list of cabinets. Select the library object you selected appliance. See “The Library
want, then click in any view to place it in the Browser” on page 683.
plan. Once placed, library cabinets can be
Fixtures can be added to both the top and
edited. See “Libraries” on page 682.
front of the same cabinet. The fixture on top
You can add single cabinets or blocked units can be selected by clicking the cabinet and
to the library. See “Adding to the Library” on pressing the Tab key or clicking the Select
page 700 and “Architectural Blocks” on page Next Object edit button. The fixture on
676. the face can be deleted on the Front tab of the
Cabinet Specification dialog. When a
Cabinet Door and cabinet has fixtures on both its top and front,
Drawer Library
the Open Symbol edit button opens the
A selection of special cabinet doors, specification dialog for the fixture on the
drawers and panels is available in the front. If a cabinet has only one fixture, the
Library Browser. Select a library object, then Open Symbol edit button opens it for
click on an existing cabinet to place the door specification.
or drawer onto that cabinet. Doors, drawers
and panels can be assigned to a cabinet in its
In the real world, some appliances can
specification dialog, as well. Cabinet doors,
share a cabinet, while others cannot. It
drawers and panels can also be placed as is up to you to determine which appliances
stand-alone fixtures. can be effectively and safely combined.
You can use the symbol development tools to
create custom cabinet doors and drawers and Electrical Objects
save them in the library for future use. See
Electrical objects such as switches and
“Adding to the Library” on page 700.
outlets can be placed on cabinets in
most views. See “The Electrical Tools” on
Built-In Appliances page 518.
A variety of fixtures and appliances such as
sinks, cooktops, dishwashers, and garbage
disposals can be placed into cabinets. See
“Inserted Objects” on page 691.
550
Cabinet Fillers
Cabinet fillers can be created automatically Cabinet Filler Tools
or placed manually. See “General Cabinet
Defaults” on page 547. If you prefer, you can place cabinet
fillers manually using the Cabinet
Both automatic and manually placed cabinet Filler Tools. Select Build> Cabinet Filler to
fillers are included in the Materials List. access these tools.
Cabinet filler sizes in the Materials List are
rounded to the nearest 1/16” (1 mm). To create a cabinet filler, select Build>
Cabinet Filler , choose the desired tool
Automatic Fillers from the submenu, then click to place a filler
just as you would a cabinet, in any view.
By default, Chief Architect models a
continuous countertop and generates fillers Base Cabinet Fillers are composed
automatically when cabinets of the same of a front surface, a toe kick and a
height are either touching or placed with 3” section of countertop.
(30 mm) of one another. Wall Cabinet Fillers are composed of
If two cabinets meeting at a corner are a front surfac only.
separated from each other by 3”(30 mm) or Full Height Cabinet Fillers are
less, the program will automatically generate composed of a front surface and a toe
a filler in the angle between them. A filler is kick.
used to separate the front of one of these
cabinets from the one it meets so that You can also convert a regular base, wall or
drawers and doors have room to operate. full height cabinet into a filler by checking
Filler in the Cabinet Specification dialog.
Similarly, a cabinet filler can be converted to
a regular cabinet by unchecking this box. See
Once created, manually placed cabinet fillers
can be edited much like regular cabinets.
Two base cabinets and the filler between them
Placing Cabinets and Fillers

Cabinets and cabinet fillers are easily created shared attributes, they have some special
with a single click in any view1. Because behaviors.
they are typically organized into groups with
1.See “Click-to-Create” on page 142.
551
Placing Cabinets and Fillers
Cabinet Snapping and Aligning by moving a cabinet into the desired position
using dimensions2.
Cabinets have several special snapping and
aligning behaviors which help you create
precisly aligned cabinets quickly and easily. Cabinet Merging
• When Base and/or Full Height cabinets When cabinets of the same height and type
are within 3” of one another’s sides, they are placed side-by-side within 3” (30 mm) of
will snap together. Wall cabinets snap in a one another they will automatically merge,
similar manner, but only with other Wall making any shared components such as the
cabinets. toe kick, countertop, backsplash and
moldings continuous. Any gap between
• When Base and/or Full Height cabinets
merged cabinets will be automatically filled.
are within 3” of one another’s sides and
their front or back surfaces are within 3” The exposed ends of merged cabinets have
of aligning, they will become aligned. side counter overhangs, closed toe kicks, feet
Wall cabinets snap in a similar manner and corner pilasters. Adjacent merged
with other Wall cabinets as well as Full cabinets share front pilasters.
Height cabinets.
Cabinets placed at different angles will also
• When a Base and/or Full Height cabinet merge if they face toward one another and
is placed against the back of another Base meet at a front corner. Cabinets that meet at a
or Full Height cabinet, its back surface back corner will also merge provided that
will automatically face the other cabinet’s they face away from one another at an angle
back. Wall cabinets snap in a similar no greater than 87°. In either case, a filler is
manner with other Wall as well as Full created in the angle between the two.
Height cabinets.
If the side of a cabinet is placed within 3” (30
• When a cabinet or cabinet filler is placed mm) of a wall, the countertop will extend to
against a wall, its back and/or side will the wall and a filler will be created.
snap to the wall and, if the wall is moved,
the cabinet will move with it. Cabinet merging occurs even when Object
When cabinets are snapped to a wall or to Snaps are turned off; however, you can
other cabinets, only exposed end cabinets suppress this behavior for cabinets that do
have side counter overhangs, closed toe not actually touch by turning off Create
kicks, feet and corner pilasters. Adjacent Automatic Fillers. See “General Cabinet
cabinet fronts share front pilasters. Defaults” on page 547.
Cabinet snapping and aligning occurs even Base and Wall Cabinets
when when Object Snaps are turned
1
Base and wall cabinets have different default
off ; however, you can override this behavior heights, so they can be placed directly above
2.See “Moving Objects Using Dimen-

1.See “Object Snaps” on page 133. sions” on page 831.
552
or below one another without interference. places an 18” cabinet. See “General Cabinet
You can use Object Snaps to center a Defaults” on page 547.
wall cabinet’s back center point above that of If you try to place a cabinet into a space
a base cabinet, or vice versa. See “Click-to- narrower than the default Minimum
Create” on page 142. Cabinet Width, a cabinet will not be placed.
If, for example, you have a space that is 8”
Minimum Cabinet Size and your Minimum Cabinet Width is 9”, no
cabinet is placed.
If you try to place a cabinet into a space that
is too narrow for its default size, the program
will place a smaller cabinet with a width that
Cabinet Fillers
is a multiple of the default Resize By default, the program will automatically
Increment. For example, if you try to place a place a filler between cabinets that are within
24” wide cabinet in a 20” wide space and 3” of one another. You can instead turn off
your Resize Increment is 3”, the program Create Automatic Fillers and place fillers
manually.
Custom Countertops
Countertops are automatically clicking the Generate Custom Countertop
generated on top of base cabinets. edit button. See “Using the Edit Buttons”
These default countertops are basically on page 557.
components of the cabinets. They can be
edited in the Cabinet Specification dialog When a Custom Countertop covers any
but cannot be selected and modified portion of a base cabinet, it overrides the
separately. You can instead use Custom default countertop.
Countertops, which are drawn and edited If a sink or built-in appliance is added to the
just like other closed-polyline based objects cabinet, a hole for the fixture is automatically
can be selected and edited independent of the cut in the custom countertop.
cabinets beneath. See “Rectangular Polyline”
on page 903. A custom countertop bases its thickness and
height on the base cabinet(s) below.
Select Build> Cabinet> Custom
• If there are multiple cabinets below, it
Countertop , then either click and drag a uses the specifications for the cabinet
rectangle or single-click to place a 2’x2’ with the greatest overall height.
countertop. Custom Countertops can be
drawn in any view except cross section/ • If there is no base cabinet below, its
elevation views. height and thickness are based on the
base cabinet defaults. See “Cabinet
You can also generate a custom countertop Defaults” on page 547.
over one or more selected base cabinets by
553
Displaying Cabinets
The countertop initially uses the default dialog. See “Custom Countertop
countertop material set in the Base Cabinet Specification Dialog” on page 578.
Defaults dialog. You can specify a different
Once created, a custom countertop can be
material as well as the height and position in
edited like other closed-polyline based
the Custom Countertop Specification
objects. See “Editing Closed-Polyline Based
Displaying Cabinets
The display of the various cabinet Custom Countertop edit tool, a Custom
object types, labels, module lines, Countertop uses the same fill style as the
door opening indicators and more is selected cabinet. See “Fill Style Tab” on page
controlled in the Layer Display Options 902.
dialog. See “Displaying Objects” on page
117. Both automatic and Custom Countertops
display if the “Cabinets, Countertops” layer
In Floor Plan View is turned on.
Cabinets are drawn so that wall cabinets, By default, cabinet module lines do not
soffits and shelves are always in front of base display when cabinet modules are merged.
and full height cabinets, countertops and To show lines between individual cabinets in
partitions. floor plan view, set the “Cabinets, Module
Lines” layer to display. You can specify
You can select a cabinet of any type and click whether module lines are full or partial. See
the Move to Front edit button to make “General Cabinet Defaults” on page 547.
that object display in front of other cabinets You can also display cabinet front indicator
of the same type. See “Move to Front of arrows in floor plan view by turning on the
Group” on page 176. “Cabinets, Front Indicators” layer.
If the “Cabinets, Labels” layer is turned on,
cabinet labels are centered on the cabinet In 3D Views
they represent. Cabinet labels have their own
To show opening indicator arrows in cross
edit handle and can be moved when the
section/elevation and Vector views, turn on
cabinet is selected. Label size is controlled in
the “Opening Indicators” layer.
the Schedule Specification dialog. See
In the Materials List
Fill Styles and colors can be assigned to
cabinets and Custom Countertops. Custom There are a number of ways to control how,
Countertops use a transparent fill style by or whether, cabinets are included in the
default. If generated using the Generate Materials List. See “Organizing Materials
Lists” on page 1050.
554
You can also add and edit information about its Components dialog. See “Components
cabinet components and subcomponents in Dialog” on page 1062.
Cabinet Labels
Labels for both cabinets and cabinet fillers
display in floor plan view when the Cabinets, Code
Labels layer is turned on. See “Displaying All Cabinets
Objects” on page 117. LS + Key Lazy Susan
LSD + Key Lazy Susan Diagonal Door
Label size is controlled in the Cabinet
DC + Key Diagonal Door
Schedule Specification dialog. See “Label
LC + Key Left Corner
Tab” on page 1042.
BC + Key Blind Corner
Select a cabinet to see the label edit handle. PBC + Key Peninsula Blind Corner
This can be used to move the label. Key + P Peninsula
Cabinet labels are available in three different Key + F Filler
formats: E + Key Right or Left End
A + Key Angled Front
• Automatic Labels, which include size,
PR + Key Peninsula Radius
type and other information in abbreviated
R + Key Radius End
form.
B Base
• Component Code, which can be speci- OB Oven Base
fied in a cabinet’s Components dialog. SB Sink Base
See “Components Dialog” on page 1062. RB Range Base
• User-Specified, which is entered in a #DB Drawer Bank (# is the
cabinet’s specification dialog. See “Label number of drawers
Tab” on page 1045. FHB Full Height Base (1 full
height door
Automatic Labels
W Wall
The format for automatic cabinet labels has Code from Drawer (# is the number
four parts: Key, Code, Size, and Door Swing. above + #D of drawers
The Key provides basic information about
the cabinet box and its use. B refers to base U Full Height (Utility)
cabinets, W refers to wall cabinets and U OTC Tall Oven
refers to full height cabinets. RTC Tall Refrigerator
Together with the key, the Code provides Blind corner cabinets are dependent on the
additional information about the shape of the cabinet’s position in the plan. A cabinet can
cabinet box: only be a blind corner cabinet when its front
is partially hidden by another cabinet. See
555
Editing Cabinets
“Blind Cabinets” on page 562. If a cabinet is

moved, therefore, its Code information may Full Height WHD
change. Width (W) Always included
The Size follows the Code in a cabinet label. Depth (D) Always included
Cabinet width is always included in the label; Height (H) Always included
depth and height, on the other hand, may be Corner Always included
included depending on the cabinet type and Depth (D)
whether they are standard or non-standard.
Door Swing is included at the end of the
Base and full height cabinet labels present
label as either L or R, but only if all the
Size information in this order: width, depth,
doors on a cabinet have the same swing.
height. Wall cabinet labels present it in a
slightly different order: width, depth, height. Here are a few examples of automatic
cabinet labels and their meanings:
Sizes • 3DB24: Base cabinet with 3 drawers, 24”
Base W(D)(H) wide. Depth and height are standard.
Width (W) Always included
• SB24R: Sink base, 24” wide, with a right
Depth (D) 24” (60 cm)
door. Depth and height are standard.
Height (H) 34 1/2” (90 cm)
Corner Depth = Width
• BCW2436R: Blind wall cabinet, 24”
Depth (D) wide, 36” high, with a right door. Depth
is standard.
Wall WH(D) • DCW2436L: Diagonal corner wall
Width (W) Always included cabinet, 24” wide, 36” high, with a left
Height (H) Always included door. Depth is standard (equal to width).
Depth (D) 12” (30 cm) • OTC362490: Full height cabinet with
Corner Depth = Width oven, 36” wide, 24” deep, 90” high.
Depth (D)
Editing Cabinets
Cabinets and cabinet fillers can be selected in Using the Mouse
2D and 3D views both individually and as a
group and edited using the edit handles, the Cabinets can be edited like other box-based
edit toolbar and their specification dialog. objects. See “Editing Box-Based Objects” on
See “Cabinet Specification Dialog” on page page 164. Depending on the view, the edit
562. handles a cabinet displays when selected
will vary.
556
When a cabinet is selected in floor plan view Cabinet Specification dialog. For example,
or on its top surface in a 3D view, ten edit you cannot redefine the crown molding on a
handles display. They are the Move handle at full height cabinet if it was selected with a
the center, the Rotate handle, and a Resize base cabinet that does not have crown
handle on each edge and at each corner. molding.
Soffits, shelves, and partitions can be group
selected and edited using their corresponding
specification dialog. It is important that only
soffits, or only shelves, or only partitions be
a part of the selection set in order to access
the needed specification dialog.
See “Cabinet Specification Dialog” on page
562.
If cabinet labels are displayed, a label will Using the Edit Buttons
move as its cabinet is moved or resized. An
A cabinet or cabinets can be edited in a
edit handle for the label also displays when a
cabinet is selected. See “Displaying
Cabinets” on page 554.
1140.
When a cabinet is selected on a side in a
cross section/elevation or 3D view, it has five Add to Library
edit handles: the Move handle and a Resize
handle on each edge. In 3D views, cabinets Cabinets can be saved in the
can be selected on any surface: front, side, Library Browser. Select a base,
back or top. wall or full height cabinet or cabinet filler
and click either the Add to Library or Add
Cabinets cannot be concentrically resized, to Library As edit button. See “Adding a
even when the Concentric edit behavior is New Object” on page 700.
enabled. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 137.
If you use Add to Library As , you can
Multiple Cabinets add the selected cabinet to the library in
either of two ways:
When cabinets are selected as a group, they
can be modified as a group in the Cabinet • Select Cabinet Module to save the cabi-
Specification dialog. Any specifications that net along with its doors, drawers and pan-
the selected objects share in common can be els and any fixtures or appliances.
edited. • Select Cabinet Doors and Drawers to
When you group select cabinets of different save the cabinet door style only.
types, some options are not available in the
557
Editing Cabinet Door/Drawer and Panel Style
Using Dimensions Moving Walls with

Like various other objects, cabinets can be Cabinets Attached
moved and resized using dimensions. See When a cabinet is placed or moved against a
“Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on wall, it will snap to the wall and become
page 831. attached to it. When a wall is moved, all
In order to be edited using dimensions, attached cabinets move with it.
cabinets must be located by them. You can Moving a wall to an unattached cabinet will
specify whether cabinets are located by not attach the cabinet to it: the cabinet must
dimensions in the Dimension Defaults be moved to the wall. A cabinet can also be
dialog. See “Locate Objects Tab” on page
attached to a wall when Plan Check is
816.
used. See “Plan Check” on page 928.
Dimensions can be set to locate the sides
When wall layers are resized or the wall
and/or corners of cabinet boxes - not the
layer definition redefined, the cabinets may
countertop. If you wish, you can move a
become unattached. To reattach, select them,
dimension’s extension lines to locate the
drag them away from the wall, and then drag
countertop after the dimension is drawn. See
them back again.
“Editing Extension Lines” on page 829.
Editing Cabinet Door/Drawer and Panel Style

There are several ways to specify the cabinet the Cabinet Specification dialog. See “Front
door, drawer and panel style. Tab” on page 565.
If the desired cabinet door, drawer and/or You can also apply a door, drawer or panel
panel styles are known before cabinets are style to a cabinet directly from the Library
placed, they can be specified in the Cabinet Browser. Select a door or drawer style in the
Defaults dialog. See “Cabinet Defaults” on library, then click on a cabinet face item to
page 547. apply the selected style to that cabinet. If you
are in a 3D view, the view updates. Continue
Once cabinets are placed, select or group-
clicking on cabinets or select a different tool
select them and click the Open Object to stop using this function. See “Placing
edit button to choose a new door style from Library Objects” on page 690.
Editing Custom Countertops

Custom Countertops and Custom handles, the edit toolbar and their
specification dialogs. See “Custom
Counter Holes can be selected in 2D Countertop Specification Dialog” on page
and 3D views and edited using the edit 578.
558
closed polylines are. See “Editing Closed-

Polyline Based Objects” on page 160.

A selected Custom Countertop or
Custom Counter Hole can be edited in a
Using the Mouse 1140.
Custom countertops are considered to be

CAD-based objects and are edited the way
Special Cabinets
There are a number of special cabinet shapes Corner Cabinets
that can be specified. Certain requirements
must be met before some special cabinet To create a corner cabinet, click as close to
shapes can be specified. If the requirements an inside wall corner as possible in using
are not met, a warning message will explain either the Base Cabinet , Wall Cabinet
what is needed. See “Cabinet Specification
, or Full Height cabinet tool. A
corner cabinet remains a corner cabinet when
it is moved, edited or copied.
Normal Cabinets
Turn an existing cabinet into a corner
Select Build> Cabinet> Base Cabinet cabinet by selecting Corner Cabinet from the
and click in floor plan view to place a Special drop-down list in its specification
normal, rectangular base cabinet. dialog. See “General Tab” on page 563.
• Before a corner cabinet can be specified
in the Cabinet Specification dialog, the
cabinet’s Width must be greater than its
Depth.
• The Left and the Right Side Widths can
be set independently for corner cabinets.
Normal (default) cabinet
559
Special Cabinets
• If multiple cabinets are joined together,

only exposed end (outside) cabinets have
corner pilasters, cabinet feet, side counter
overhangs and closed toe kicks.
• If multiple joined cabinets have both
Front Pilasters and Corner Pilasters
specified, the exposed end cabinets
include corner pilasters and inside cabi-
Corner cabinet with sides of equal width
nets have front pilasters.
• You can specify a Diagonal Door on cor- • If multiple cabinets are joined, inside
ner cabinets to create an angled corner cabinets share Front Pilasters.
cabinet. See “Front Tab” on page 565.
• Corner pilasters and cabinet legs are
eliminated on the back if the cabinet is
against a wall, and on either side if it’s
joined with another cabinet.
• For more information see “Cabinet Spec-
ification Dialog” on page 562.
Corner cabinet with diagonal door
• The diagonal door on corner cabinets can

be curved by entering a negative value in
the second Right Side Width field. See
Exposed End Cabinets
End Cabinets
Open a cabinet for specification and select
Left or Right End Cabinet from the Special
drop-down list to create an end cabinet.
Corner cabinet with curved door
Exposed End Cabinets

A cabinet that is merged on one side but not
the other is referred to as an exposed end.
Pilasters, feet, countertop overhangs and
closed toe kicks all behave differently when Left End Cabinet
groups of cabinets are merged: • End Cabinets have an angled front and
side.
560
• The cabinet width must be no greater The radius can be adjusted by changing the
than its depth for an end cabinet to be Depth/Bow Depth value. See “General Tab”
specified. on page 563.
Radius End Cabinets Angled Front Cabinets

Open a cabinet for specification and select Open a cabinet for specification and select
Right or Left Radius End from the Special Angled Front from the Special drop-down
drop-down list to create a radius end cabinet. list to create an angled front cabinet.
Radius End cabinets have a 90° arch

Angled Front Cabinet
As you face the cabinet, a right radius end
• The length of the left and right side of an
curves to the right, and a left radius end
Angled Front cabinet can be defined by
curves to the left.
changing the Depth/Bow Depth value.
Left Right
Radius Radius Bow Front Cabinets
End End
Bow Front from the Special drop-down list
Peninsula Radius Cabinets
to create a bow front cabinet.
Pen. Radius from the Special drop-down list
to create peninsula radius cabinet.
Bow Front Cabinet
• The bow depth of a Bow Front cabinet

can be defined. See “General Tab” on
Peninsula Radius Cabinet page 563.
561
Cabinet Specification Dialog
• The bow depth cannot exceed half the

cabinet width.
• The doors and drawers on a Bow Front
cabinet automatically match the curva-
ture of the cabinet.
Kitchen Islands
To create a kitchen island, simply place
several cabinets back-to-back and/or side-to-
side. Match the widths so that each cabinet
back or side meets the back or side of only Blind Cabinets
one other cabinet. If this is not done, the lines Often, when two cabinets meet in a corner,
separating the cabinets cannot be suppressed. one is partially hidden by the other. This
Two cabinets cannot merge with the same partially hidden cabinet is called a “blind”
side of another cabinet. The picture shows cabinet. Chief Architect will resize and offset
two instances when cabinets are placed back- the front items of the partially hidden cabinet
to-back. Cabinet fronts and joining surfaces so that they are not located in the hidden
are shown. portion of the cabinet face.

Select a cabinet and click the Open The Cabinet Specification dialog allows
Object edit button to open the Cabinet you to customize cabinets individually and in
groups.
If the selected cabinet is an imported symbol, The options in the cabinet specification
the Cabinet Symbol Specification dialog dialogs are similar to the corresponding
Cabinet Defaults dialog. See “Cabinet
opens instead and has fewer options than the
Cabinet Specification dialog. See “Symbol
562
General Tab
1
2
3 7
6
8
9
1 A number of Special cabinet types are • Height (Including Counter) - This is the
available in the drop-down list. Certain measurement of the cabinet box from the
requirements must be met before some bottom to the top. For base cabinets, this
special cabinet shapes can be specified. See dimension includes the counter thickness,
“Special Cabinets” on page 559. but not the height of the backsplash.
• Check Filler to specify the selected cabi-
net as a filler of the same type instead of a Note: Height defines the height of the entire
true cabinet. See “Cabinet Fillers” on cabinet. The height of the cabinet face, coun-
page 551. This checkbox is disabled in tertop and the toe kick are all included in this
value. If you change either the Countertop
the Cabinet Defaults dialogs.
Thickness or the Toe Kick Height, the cabinet
face height is altered. This changes the
2 Specification - The selected cabinet’s heights of your face objects.
dimensions can be specified here.
Fractional cabinet widths, depths, and
heights are supported to 1/16th of an inch.
563
• Width - This is the measurement of the • Flat Sides can be added to base cabinets.
front of the cabinet box from left to right. Checking Flat Sides eliminates the coun-
This does not include the countertop ter overhang on the cabinet’s exposed
overhang. ends.
• Depth - This is the measurement of the • Check Flat Back to eliminate the over-
cabinet box from front to back. It does hang on cabinets with an exposed back.
not include the thickness of overlay doors
or the countertop overhang. 4 Backsplash - The dimensions and style
of the backsplash are specified here.
• For Special type Bow Front cabinets,
• Specify the Backsplash Height. The
specify the Bow Depth in inches. Up to
backsplash is only available when the
half the cabinet width is allowed.
cabinet is against a wall.
• For corner cabinets, the Width and
• Backsplash Thickness - Specify the
Depth/Bow Depth fields become Right
thickness of the backsplash material.
Side Width and Left Side Width. If a
corner cabinet is assigned a diagonal door • Side - Check this box to have the same
on the Front tab, the second Right Side height backsplash added to the side of a
Width field specifies the bow depth: a base or wall cabinet that is against a wall
positive number creates a bow and a neg- or taller cabinet.
ative number, an inside bow. • Check Always Present to display the
• Floor to Bottom - Specify a distance. backsplash at all times. If unchecked, a
For base and full height cabinets, this is backsplash is present only when the cabi-
usually 0. Increase this value by at least net is against a wall.
1/16” to eliminate the toe kick. If a toe Any base cabinet or wall cabinet can have a
kick height has been changed from the backsplash defined. The backsplash for a
default values, raising a cabinet off the wall cabinet extends from the bottom of the
floor does not remove the toe kick. cabinet down to the base cabinet. The
• Follow Terrain - If the cabinet is outside backsplash for a base cabinet is measured
a room, check this box to place the cabi- from the countertop up.
net relative to the terrain height.
Wall cabinets offer a check box for
Countertop - Specify the dimensions Backsplash to Base Below. If a backsplash
3
and style of the countertop here. is added to a wall cabinet, it completely
• Counter Thickness and Counter Over- covers the wall from the bottom of the
hang - Specify these values for base cab- cabinet to the countertop or backsplash
inets. The Counter Overhang is used for below.
any side of a cabinet that is not against a If a base cabinet and a wall cabinet both have
wall or another cabinet. Changing the a backsplash, the backsplash from the wall
counter thickness does not alter the cabi- cabinet extends down to the top of the base
net height but it does affect the height of cabinet backsplash.
face items.
564
Electrical switches or outlets that are placed pilasters that do not extend to the floor are
within the backsplash area display in front of specified, checking this places a support
the backsplash in a 3D view when electrical block under them at exposed corners.
items are turned on in the Layer Display The preview of the cabinet updates as the
Options dialog. See “Layer Display Options cabinet changes.
6 Corner - Specify angled or rounded
Toe Kick - The dimensions and style of corners for the selected cabinet(s).
5
the toe kick are specified here.
Corner Width - Enter a value to create a flat
Toe Kick Height and Depth - Specify these corner plane of the specified width. This also
values for base or full height cabinets. If a applies to the countertop.
Toe Kick Height or Depth is defined, it
Check Rounded to eliminate the 45 degree
becomes part of the cabinet and is not deleted
plane and round the cabinet corners.
if the cabinet is raised off the floor.
If the Toe Kick Height or Toe Kick Depth is 7 The preview of the cabinet updates as
the cabinet changes.
set to use the default “(D),” the toe kick is
only available when the cabinet is resting on
8 Show Color - Uncheck this box to
the floor. Delete the “(D)” and enter a show the cabinet preview in black and
positive value to display a toe kick on a white.
cabinet that is raised off the floor.
9 The Automatic Cabinet Label displays
Changing the Toe Kick Height does not alter below the preview diagram.
the cabinet height but it does affect the height
The cabinet label displays the cabinet’s type
of face items.
and size, which is also found in the Size
Flat Sides can be added to base and full column of the Materials List. See “Materials
height cabinets. Checking Flat Sides Lists” on page 1048.
eliminates the toe kick area on the exposed
The automatic label is not editable, but you
end of the cabinet.
can specify a custom label on the Label tab.
Check Flat Back to eliminate the toe kick on See “Label Tab” on page 1045.
cabinets with an exposed back. This does not
The labels display in floor plan view if
eliminate the toe kick on the cabinet front.
Cabinet Labels are turned on in the Layer
Check Closed Toe to extend the cabinet Display Options dialog.
sides to cover the sides of the toe kick area. If
Front Tab
The configuration of the cabinet’s front items
and shelves is specified here.
565
1
2
1 Click on a face item in the preview • Select Library or click the Library but-
diagram to select it. The selected item ton to select a cabinet door or drawer
is highlighted, and the Item Number, Item front from the library. See “Select Library
Type and Item Height identify the part Object Dialog” on page 689.
selected.
Once a door style is selected from the library,
Select the Door Style and Drawer it displays in the drop-down list. See
2
Style from the drop-down lists. “Editing Cabinet Door/Drawer and Panel
• Select Plain Doors or Drawers to apply Style” on page 558.
a flat drawer or door front.
3 Define the Face Items on the front of
• Select Framed Doors or Doors to apply the selected cabinet.
a drawer with a frame and flat panel The Item Number of the currently selected
front. The drawer must be at least 6 face item displays here. Click the drop-down
inches for the frame and panel to display. list to select a different number. Item
numbers start at the top of the cabinet and go
566
down the face. Item number 1 usually • The backsplash can be selected but its
identifies the top face frame rail (separation). type cannot be changed.
Click the Item Type drop-down list to select Item Height - Define a value for the selected
from the available front items, such as doors, item in the cabinet front. Fractional heights
drawers and panels. are supported to 1/16th of an inch.
Each front item is usually separated by a • When the height of a cabinet is changed,
frame piece, or rail. The exposed portion of a or the height of a face item is changed,
rail is defined as a separation. The frame the height of the lowest face item is
pieces on the side are referred to as stiles. altered to make up the difference.
• If you modify the lowest item, the item
Note: The program makes sure that the directly above is adjusted. Set the coun-
heights of the front items equal the total cabi- tertop height and the toe kick height first,
net face height. When necessary, a blank and then work from the top to the bottom
area is inserted at the bottom or the lowest when adjusting face items.
face item is deleted when there is not enough
room. This means you should start editing • If the height of an appliance has been
face items at the top and work down. altered, entering “d” restores its default
height.
• A cabinet can have any number of front
Click Specify Shelves to open the Cabinet
items, but there is a limit to the number of
Shelves Specification dialog and specify
items that can actually fit on a given cabi-
the shelf configuration for a door or opening
net’s front.
face item.
• Auto Right and Auto Left Doors become
double doors automatically when the cab- Click Add New to add a new face item
inet width is greater than 24” (600 mm). directly below the currently selected item.
Left, Right and Double Doors are as • When you click Add New, the New
specified regardless of the cabinet width. Cabinet Face Item dialog displays.
• Cabinet fronts may be composed of any Define the Item Type, Item Height and
combination of face items. click OK.
• False Drawers assume the appearance of

the drawer style and hardware assigned to
the cabinet.
• Door Panels assume the appearance of
the cabinet’s door style but not the door
hardware.
• Appliances cannot be added from the
Item Type list, but are included once • If you click Add New with no face item
they have been added from the library. selected, the program adds the new item
See “Built-In Appliances” on page 550. at the bottom of the cabinet face.
567
• When a face item is added to the cabinet • Diagonal Door - This option is only
front, the program attempts to reduce the available for corner cabinets. Check this
height of the lowest item on the cabinet box to create a diagonal door instead of a
front to make room for the new item. double door at right angles.
Click Delete to remove the currently selected
If Diagonal Door is checked in the
item.
Cabinet Defaults dialog, corner cabinets
• When a face item is deleted, the height of have a diagonal door by default.
the lowest item is usually increased to
• Stile Between Doors - Select the check
make up the difference.
box to have double doors and double
• When an Auto Left, Auto Right, Left, drawers separated by a stile. This has no
Right, or Double Door is deleted, it is effect on other item types.
replaced by an Opening.
• Lazy Susan - This option is only avail-
Click Move Up to move the currently able for corner cabinets. These do not
selected item up one position, switching show, but are reflected in the cabinet
places with the item directly above. label and how the cabinet is drawn in
floor plan view.
Click Move Down to move the currently
selected item down one position, switching • The Reverse Appliance check box is
places with the item directly below. available if a sink, appliance or other fix-
ture is placed into the cabinet. Select
Reverse Appliance to reverse the fixture
Note: The program tries to maintain a single
separation between all face items. When you from left to right. This feature can be
add or delete a face item, separations are used to change a left hand door on a built-
usually added or deleted with them. in refrigerator to a right hand door.
• Check Double Face to replace the cur-
Some Options are available depending
4 rent cabinet face with two faces, each
on the type of cabinet selected. approximately half as wide.
• Inset Doors may be selected for all cabi- • Check Triple Face to replace the cabinet
nets. This option makes all door and face with three faces.
drawer faces flush with the cabinet face
instead of overlaying it. • Enter a Bevel width value to apply bev-
eled edges to plain drawers and doors.
• Doors On Back may be selected if the This does not affect framed or library
cabinet back is not attached. The back doors. The bevel width, as viewed from
matches the front. the front has a maximum value of 3”.
• Glass Doors may be defined for any cab- • Enter a Side Overlap value to apply an
inet that doesn’t use a library door. When overlap to doors and drawers. A value of
selected, the door panel is created using 1 inches creates an overlap of one inch on
the glass material. The entire door is either side.
glass on plain doors.
568
• Enter a Vertical Overlap value to apply a These can be set independently if neces-
vertical overlap to doors and drawers. A sary. When set to default ([D]), the pro-
value of 1 inches creates an overlap of gram uses the separator width for the left
one inch on top and bottom. and right stiles.
• Separation - Defines the width of the
face frame between doors, drawers, and 5 Appliance Front Offset - This option
is available for cabinets with top-
face items. A European style cabinet typ- mounted fixtures, such as sinks and
ically has a 3/4” separation. cooktops. Enter a value to adjust the depth of
• Left and Right Stile - Define the frame the counter surface between the counter edge
width to the left or right of all face items. and the fixture.
Sides/Back Tab
The settings on the Sides/Back tab allow you
to control the appearance of the selected
cabinet’s sides and back surface.
569
1 Side Type - Specify the appearance of • Select Match Front to apply the same
the Left, Right and Back Sides of the face items as the cabinet front to its back.
cabinet by selecting an option from the drop- Only available for the Back Side.
down list for each:
• Select Use Default to use the default 2 Specify the appearance of the selected
cabinet’s Panels.
panel type set in the Cabinet Defaults
• Choose “Use Default” or select a Plain,
dialog. See “Cabinet Defaults” on page
Framed or Library Panel Style from the
547.
drop-down list.
• Select Finished to specify the side a fin-
• Click the Library button to select a panel
ished.
style from the Library Browser. Cabinet
• Select Unfinished to specify the side as doors are typically used, although draw-
unfinished ers can be used, as well. See “Select
• Select Auto Finished to finish the side Library Object Dialog” on page 689.
only when it is not adjacent to another • Check Full Size Panel to apply a single
cabinet or a wall. panel to the entire side. When unchecked,
• Select Paneled to apply a panel to the the panel uses the same Style and Over-
side. lap values as the front. If the cabinet has
multiple levels of doors on its front, the
• Select Auto Paneled to apply a panel to
side will have matching panels.
the side only when it is not adjacent to
another cabinet or a wall. • Specify the selected panel’s Thickness.
570
Hardware Tab
1 Specify the desired Hardware for the ates two handles the specified distance
selected cabinet(s). from the drawer edge.
• Specify the location of the handle Down
• Select a Door Handle from the drop- from Drawer Top. A value of 0" centers
down list or select a Library handle from the handle on the drawer.
the Select Library Object dialog. • Hinges - Select from the list of available
• Specify the location of the handle In styles or select a Library hinge from the
from Door Edge and Down from Door Select Library Object dialog. Specify the
Top. For Wall Cabinets, this value is Up location of the hinges Up/Down from
From Door Bottom. Door Edge. Two or three hinges are
• Select a Drawer Handle from the drop- placed, depending on the door height.
down list or select a Library handle from
the Select Library Object dialog. Enter- 2 Specify the desired Pilasters for the
selected cabinet(s).
ing a value In from Drawer Edge cre-
571
• Front Pilaster - Select the default front

pilaster, a pilaster from the library, or
None.
• Corner Pilaster - Select the default cor-
ner pilaster, a pilaster from the library, or
None. Specifying a corner pilaster auto-
matically creates a flat corner surface and
overrides the Flat Corner setting on the
General tab.
• The Width applies to both front pilasters
and corner pilasters.
• Check Extend to Floor to extend front
pilasters and corner pilasters to the floor.
Removing the Toe Kick on the General
tab also extends the pilasters to the floor.
3 Cabinet Feet - Select the default

cabinet leg, a cabinet leg from the
library, or None. Adjoining cabinets share
cabinet legs. Not available for wall cabinets. Base cabinet with front pilasters and legs
572
Moldings Tab
1
2
Multiple moldings for each type of cabinet Moldings and Profiles library category.
can be specified. For example, you may want Browse and add a new molding to the list.
a wood edge around countertops of base
Select - Click here to open the Moldings and
cabinets and a crown molding that ties
Profiles library category. If you select a
together the tops of the wall cabinets and full
molding using the Select button, you replace
height cabinets.
the current molding in the list. This option
1 Molding - Select a molding for the substitutes one molding for another; it does
cabinet. This list has items only if you not add a new molding to the list.
assigned moldings to your default cabinet.
Delete - Click here to delete the selected
These moldings are stored with individual
molding from the cabinet.
cabinets in all other cases.
3 Molding Specification - Modify the
2 Add New - If no moldings are selected selected cabinet’s molding profile.
or if you want to add a new molding to
the list, click the button to open the
573
Height - This is the vertical dimension of the objects. For more information, see “Fill Style
molding profile. This value is initially set in Tab” on page 902.
the selected molding profile but can be
adjusted. Materials Tab
Width - This value can be used to resize the The Materials tab is found in the
molding profile horizontally. specification dialogs for many different
Offset - This value defines the distance the objects. For more information, see
molding is offset from the top or bottom of “Materials Tab” on page 709.
the cabinet. Where it is measured from Some material options may be disabled if the
depends on which option is selected below. selected cabinet is a manufacturer symbol.
You can enter positive or negative values in
this field. The molding does not display if it Label Tab
is completely above or below the cabinet.
Once an offset is defined, select From Top dialogs for a variety of different objects,
or From Bottom to specify a reference point. including cabinets. For more information,
• From Top is measured from the cabinet see “Label Tab” on page 1045.
top and the molding top.
• From Bottom is measured from the Note: If you choose a label shape in the Cab-
molding bottom and the cabinet bottom. inet Schedule Specification dialog, the set-
tings here are overridden and the schedule
label is used instead.
Layer Tab
The Layer tab is found in the specification The display of cabinet labels can also be
dialogs for many different objects. For more controlled in the Layer Display Options
information, see “Layer Tab” on page 125. dialog. See “Layer Display Options Dialog”
on page 121.
Fill Style Tab
The Fill Style tab is found in the
specification dialogs for many different
574
Cabinet Shelf Specification Dialog

From the Front tab of the Base Cabinet, and click the Specify Shelves button to open
Wall Cabinet, or Full Height Cabinet the Cabinet Shelf Specification dialog. See
Specification dialog, select a door or “Front Tab” on page 565.
opening face item in the preview diagram
Automatic Manual
1 By default, cabinet shelves are 2 Select the Manual radio button to
specified automatically. The default specify cabinet shelving for the selected
number of shelves, shelf type, thickness, door or opening. If a cabinet is resized after
spacing, and depth display here. shelving has been manually edited, the
specifications are maintained, but all shelves
may not be display in all situations.
The Number of Shelves can be specified.
Equal Spacing is checked by default.
575
Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog
3 The shelf type, thickness, spacing, and Enter a shelf Thickness in fractions or
depth can be specified on a per shelf decimals.
basis or for all shelves at once. To determine
Changing the Spacing From Previous
which, select the shelf number or All Shelves
unchecks Equal Spacing above.
You can select Full, Half or Specify the shelf
Note: If All Shelves is selected after Depth manually.
changes have been made to any one shelf,
“no change” displays, indicating that all 4 The preview shows shelf numbers,
shelves are not the same.
thickness, depth, and spacing. Press the
Tab key to update the preview as changes are
Specify the shelf Type from the drop-down made.
list.
Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog

Select a shelf or partition and click the Open The options in these specification dialogs are
Object edit button to open the Shelf similar to the corresponding defaults dialogs.
Specification or Partition Specification
See “Cabinet Defaults” on page 547.
dialog.
576
General Tab
Specify the Height, Width, Depth, and the Moldings Tab

distance from the Floor to Bottom of the
shelf or partition. This tab is similar to the same tab in the
Cabinet Specification dialog. For more
Click the Follow Terrain check box if you information, see “Moldings Tab” on page
want the shelf or partition to follow the 573.
terrain.
Layer Tab
Fill Style Tab
For information about using the Layer tab,
The Fill Style tab is found in a variety of see “Layer Tab” on page 125.
specification dialogs throughout the
program. For more information, see “Fill Materials Tab
577
Custom Countertop Specification Dialog
Custom Countertop Specification Dialog

Select a custom countertop and click the Thickness - Specify the thickness of the
Open Object edit button to open the countertop independent of the cabinet below.
Custom Countertop Specification dialog.
Set Thickness From Cabinet must be
unchecked.
General Tab
Polyline Tab
1 Selected Line Tab
2
4 Moldings Tab
This tab is similar to the same tab in the
Cabinet Specification dialog. For more
information, see “Moldings Tab” on page
1 Check Hole in Countertop to convert 573.
the polyline into a countertop hole. The
selected polyline must be contained within a
custom countertop.
Line Style Tab
2 Check No Molding On Selected Edge “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
to turn off molding on the selected
edge.
Fill Style Tab
3 Check Set Height From Cabinet to The Fill Style tab is found in a variety of
allow the Countertop Height to be
determined by the cabinet below. specification dialogs throughout the
program. For more information, see “Fill
Top Height - Specify the height of the top of Style Tab” on page 902.
the custom countertop independent of the
cabinet below. Set Height From Cabinet Materials Tab
must be unchecked.
4 Check Set Thickness From Cabinet to “Materials Tab” on page 709.
allow the Countertop Thickness to be
determined by the cabinet below.
578
579
Chapter 20:
Terrain
Chief Architect allows you to model the • Stepping Stone Tools

terrain around a house. Begin by specifying • Terrain Wall and Curb Tools
elevation data that creates the surface • Sun Shadows
contours, and then add surface features such • Terrain Objects in the Library
as planting areas, water features and plants. • Displaying Terrain
• Editing Terrain Objects
You can import terrain data from a variety of
• Terrain Specification Dialog
sources and use this data to produce your 3D
• Elevation Point Specification Dialog
model.
• Elevation Line Specification Dialog
Once the terrain is modeled, shadows that • Flat Region Specification Dialog
follow the terrain can be created using the • Hill / Valley Specification Dialog
Sun Angle tool. See “Sun Angles” on page • Raised / Lowered Region Specification
776. Dialog
• Terrain Feature Specification Dialog
Roads and sidewalks are among the objects • Garden Bed Specification Dialog
that can be placed in your terrain and are • Terrain Break Specification Dialog
discussed in “Roads, Driveways & • Terrain Path Specification Dialog
Sidewalks” on page 634. • Importing Elevation Data
• Import Terrain Wizard
Chapter Contents • Import GPS Data Wizard
• Terrain Configuration Button • Importing DXF/DWG Elevation Data
• Terrain Perimeter • Converting CAD Lines to Terrain Data
• Elevation Data Tools • Plant Tools
• Terrain Modifier Tools • Plant Image Specification Dialog
• Terrain Feature Tools • Plant Specification Dialog
• Garden Bed Tools • Plant Chooser Dialog
• Water Feature Tools • Hardiness Zones
580
• Sprinkler Tools • Sprinkler Specification Dialog
Terrain Configuration Button

The Terrain and Road Tools can be • Garden Bed Tools
accessed through the Terrain menu.
You can also display these tools on your • Water Feature Tools
toolbar using the Terrain Configuration.
See “Toolbar Configurations” on page 112. • Stepping Stone Tools
The Terrain Configuration and Terrain menu • Terrain Wall and Curb Tools
both display the following terrain and road
• Road, Driveway and Sidewalk Tools
parent tools:
• Elevation Data Tools

• Plant Tools
• Terrain Modifier Tools
• Sprinkler Tools
• Terrain Feature Tools
Terrain Perimeter
The Terrain Perimeter is a closed
polyline defining the boundary of the
terrain that generates in 3D views and the
contour lines that generate in floor plan view.
Select Terrain> Create Terrain Perimeter
to create a terrain perimeter.
If you do not see the Terrain Perimeter in
floor plan view, select Window> Fill Terrain Perimeter
Window . See “Zoom Tools” on page
731.
581
Elevation Data Tools
affect how the terrain displays in 2D and 3D.

See “Terrain Specification Dialog” on page
596.
Click the Terrain Specification
button to open the Terrain
Specification dialog. The Terrain
Specification dialog controls how terrain is
generated and how it displays in 3D views.
Terrain perimeter at 0' - 0" in a 3D view
See “Terrain Specification Dialog” on page
596.
Build Terrain
When created in a new, blank plan, a terrain
perimeter will be 50’ x 100’. If you create a Select Terrain> Build Terrain to
terrain perimeter after you have drawn all or generate the terrain surface based on
part of a 3D model, it will increase in size as the provided elevation data. See “Building
needed to encompass everything in floor plan the Terrain” on page 594.
view.
The Terrain Perimeter can be resized and Clear Terrain
edited like other polyline-based objects. See To remove the generated terrain
“Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on contours, select Terrain> Clear
page 160. Terrain. When the terrain is cleared,
A CAD polyline can be converted into a contours do not display in 3D and contour
terrain perimeter. See “Editing Terrain lines do not display in floor plan view.
Clear Terrain does not remove the
If you do not add any terrain elevation data terrain perimeter, elevation data, or terrain
within the terrain perimeter, the terrain features from the model. Rather it deletes all
remains flat at an elevation of 0' - 0". program-generated 2D contour lines and 3D
The Terrain Perimeter has a variety of contours.
editable properties, including many that

Select Terrain> Elevation Data to represented by contour lines in floor plan
add elevation information to your view and a curved surface in 3D. See
terrain. “Displaying Terrain” on page 593.
When terrain is generated, this data is used to Elevation data can be specified using the
calculate the surface of your site and is Elevation Point , Elevation Line ,
582
Elevation Spline , Elevation Region To place an elevation point
and Terrain Break tools. 1. Select Terrain> Elevation Data> Ele-

The elevation of each Elevation Line, Spline vation Point and click in floor plan
and Region is specified in inches (in metric view at the point where you would like
plans, mm) relative to an absolute terrain to place elevation data. See “Place
elevation of 0. In order to create rising and/or Point” on page 880.
falling terrain, multiple terrain data objects 2. The Elevation Point Specification dia-
with different elevation values must be used. log opens. Enter an elevation value and
click OK. See “Elevation Point Specifi-
To avoid unexpected results, try to avoid cation Dialog” on page 600.
drawing Elevation Data objects - includ-
ing Terrain Breaks - with different elevation 3. Click somewhere else in floor plan view
information at the same location. and the Elevation Point Specification
dialog opens again with the last eleva-
Elevation Points tion value entered.
An Elevation Point contains the

absolute elevation data for one point in
the terrain model. Typically, Elevation Points
are imported rather than placed manually.
Chief Architect requires many points to
make an accurate approximation of your site.
When adding elevation data manually, it

is recommended that Elevation Lines
and Splines be used instead of Elevation
Points. Elevation Points are most effectively
Elevation Points before terrain generation
used when they are imported. See “Importing
Elevation Data” on page 612.
Even small sites may require over a hundred 4. Repeat steps 1, 2 and 3 to place addi-
points to generate an accurate model of the tional elevation points with varied elva-
terrain if it is sloped. For the sake of tion values as needed.
illustration, the images in the following 5. Select Terrain> Build Terrain . See
example shows only a few elevation points. “Building the Terrain” on page 594.
583
120"
0"
Contour lines after terrain generation Elevation Lines before terrain generation
Elevation Lines 5. Select Terrain> Build Terrain . See

“Building the Terrain” on page 594.
An Elevation Line contains absolute
elevation data for many points along a
line at a constant elevation. Elevation lines
can be connected to create a polyline with
many straight sections. For the sake of
illustration, the images in the following
example show single-section elevation lines.
To draw an elevation line
1. Select Terrain> Elevation Data> Ele-

vation Line , then click and drag a
Contour lines after terrain generation
line inside the Terrain Perimeter in floor
plan view.
2. Click on the elevation line to select it,
then click the Open Object edit but-
ton.
3. At first, an elevation line is at elevation
0' - 0". In the Elevation Line
Specification dialog, specify the desired
elevation and click OK. See “Elevation Full Overview after terrain generation
Line Specification Dialog” on page 603.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to draw additional After it is drawn, an Elevation Line can be
elevation lines as needed. edited much the way other line-based objects
584
can. See “Editing Line Based Objects” on

page 147.
Elevation Splines
Elevation Splines can be used to form
complex curves and shapes. Like
elevation lines, elevation splines contain
absolute elevation data for many points along
a constant elevation.
To place an elevation spline, select Terrain>
Elevation Data> Elevation Spline and
click and drag multiple sections in floor plan
view. See “Splines” on page 908. After it is drawn, an Elevation Spline can be
edited much the way other spline-based
Elevation splines are initially placed at
objects can. See “Editing Spline Based
elevation 0' - 0"and must be opened and
assigned an elevation. See “Elevation Line
Elevation Regions
An Elevation Region contains
60" absolute elevation data for an enclosed
region and is ideal for creating a flat surface
36" in your terrain.
To create an elevation region
1. Select Terrain> Elevation Data>

0" Elevation Region .
2. There are two ways to add a Terrain
Elevation splines before terrain generation Modifier to your plan:
• Click once to place an 8’ (0.6 m)
square feature at that location.
• Click and drag from end to end to draw
a feature sized as needed. See “Rectan-
gular Polyline” on page 903.
3. Click on the region to select it, then click
4. At first, an elevation line is at elevation
0' - 0". In the Elevation Region
585
Specification dialog, specify the desired

An Elevation Region can also be created
elevation and click OK. See “Elevation by drawing a closed polyline using Eleva-
tion Lines .
After it is drawn, an Elevation Region can be
240" reshaped much the way other closed
polyline-based objects can. See “Editing
120" 160.
Terrain Breaks
A Terrain Break creates a division
0" along the terrain surface that affects
terrain generation. Elevation data on one side
Elevation lines used to create a terrain grade, of the terrain break does not affect the terrain
elevation region used to create building pad. generation on the other side, allowing you to
create immediate drops in terrain.
To place a Terrain Break, select Terrain>
Elevation Data> Terrain Break and
click and drag a line in floor plan view.
• If the Terrain Break divides the terrain
perimeter into two separate pieces, the
terrain data on either side is calculated
independently and smoothed separately,
resulting in sharp terrain contours.
• If the Terrain Break does not extend com-
pletely from one side of the terrain perim-
eter to the other, the areas near each end
of the Terrain Break are blended.
Full Overview after terrain generation
586
240"
120"
84" Full Overview after terrain generation

18"
0" The Retaining Wall tool creates a
similar effect by drawing a Terrain Break as
Elevation lines create the grade, elevation well as a retaining wall that rests against the
region creates the building pad, and the terrain break. By default, the top height of the
break (dashed) creates a vertical drop. retaining wall matches the terrain on the high
side of the break and the bottom matches the
low side. See “Retaining Walls” on page 592.
Terrain Modifier Tools

Select Terrain> Modifier to access boundaries. The rest of the terrain is
tools that allow you to modify the unaffected.
existing elevation data by drawing a closed
polyline. Their height is relative to the terrain Raised/Lowered Regions
surface generated from the Elevation Data
provided in your plan. A Raised Region creates a raised
area that is flat on the top like a
The elevation data associated with Terrain plateau, while a Lowered Region creates a
Modifiers only affects the terrain within their depression that is flat on the bottom.
587
Terrain Feature Tools
Hills and Valleys

Elev. Line
The Hill and Valley tools create (240")
raised and lowered areas in the
Raised
terrain that come to a point rather than Hill Region
flattening at their highest or lowest Elevation
Region (120")
elevations.
Flat
Valley
Region
Flat Regions
Lowered Region
Elev. Line
A Flat Region adjusts to the (0")
surrounding terrain to maintain a flat
elevation. Elevation lines create the grade, elevation region
creates the building pad, and the terrain modifiers
There are two ways to add a Terrain Modifier create terrain shapes relative to the elevation data.
to your plan:
• Click once to place a modifier with end-
points that form a 10’ (4 m) square at that
location.
• Click and drag from end to end to draw a
feature sized as needed. See “Rectangular
Terrain Modifiers can only be drawn when a
Terrain Perimeter is present, and will only Full Overview after terrain generation
display in 3D when they are drawn within the
perimeter. See “Displaying Terrain” on page
593.
Terrain modifiers can be blocked with
Once created, Terrain Modifiers can be images and stored in the library for
selected and edited in a variety of ways. See future use. See “Creating Architectural
“Editing Spline Based Objects” on page 166. Blocks” on page 677.
Terrain Feature Tools

Select Terrain> Feature to access example, create paths and planting beds with
tools for drawing bounded areas that gravel or mulch materials that stand out in a
follow the contours of the terrain rather than grassy Terrain Perimeter.
modifying them.
In fact, Garden Beds , Water Features
Terrain Features are useful for creating
landscaping features because they have and Stepping Stones are special
specified heights and materials. You can, for Terrain Features with material and height
588
attributes already applied to them, saving

you time when drawing these objects.
Terrain Features can only be drawn when a
Terrain Perimeter is present, and will only
display in 3D when they are drawn within the
perimeter. See “Displaying Terrain” on page
593.
Terrain Features were used to create the
following images. Positive or negative
elevation values are assigned to each, as are
landscaping materials such as sand, water,
and soil. The volleyball net, flowers, and tree
are all objects found in the Library Browser.
See “Libraries” on page 682.
Terrain features in floor plan view
Terrain features in a Final View
Terrain Features can be created in either of ing Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on page
two ways: 160 and “Editing Spline Based Objects” on
• Click once to place a feature with end- page 166.
points that form a 10’ (4 m) square at that
location. Terrain Features can be drawn in 2D
and 3D views.
feature sized as needed. See “Rectangular Rectangular Features
The Rectangular Feature tool can be
Once created, Terrain Features can be edited used to create straight-sided features
into nearly any shape you require. See “Edit-
589
Garden Bed Tools
that can be edited into a wide variety of Terrain features can also be converted from
shapes. closed 2D polylines or splines using the
Rectangular Features can also be edited like Convert Polyline edit tool. See “Convert
other closed polyline-based objects. See Polyline” on page 205.
“Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on For information about adding height and
page 160. material information to Terrain Features, see
“Terrain Feature Specification Dialog” on
Spline Feature page 606.
The Spline Feature tool can be used to
create features with rounded edges and Terrain Holes
smoothly curved corners. A Terrain Hole is a region that cuts a
Spline Features can be edited like other hole in the terrain. Using this tool is the
closed spline-based objects. See “Editing same as creating a Terrain Feature and
Spline Based Objects” on page 166. checking Make Hole in the Terrain Feature
Specification dialog. See “Terrain Feature
Kidney Shaped Features Specification Dialog” on page 606.
The Kidney Shaped Feature tool Terrain Holes are useful for manually
allows you to quickly create features clipping the terrain around a foundation that
with curved edges, smooth corners and a does not match the footprint of the first floor.
right angle bend in its shape.
Kidney Shaped Features can be edited like Terrain features can be blocked with
other closed spline-based objects. See images and stored in the library for
future use as planting beds. See “Creating
“Editing Spline Based Objects” on page 166.
Architectural Blocks” on page 677.
Garden Bed Tools

Select Terrain> Garden Bed to access Polyline Garden Bed
tools that can be used to place garden
bed features in your terrain. This tool draws a garden bed with
straight sides and four right angles. See
Garden Beds are basically Terrain Features “Rectangular Features” on page 589.
with material and height attributes typical of
planting beds. See “Terrain Feature Tools” Round Garden Bed
on page 588.
Use this tool to draw garden beds with
In addition, you can choose to distribute rounded edges and smoothly curved
copies of a plant image within a Garden Bed. corners. See “Spline Feature” on page 590.
See “Distributed Objects” on page 666.
590
Kidney Shaped Garden Bed Once drawn, Garden Beds can be selected
and edited just like other Terrain Features.
You can draw a kidney shaped garden
bed with this tool. See “Kidney Shaped Specify the material and set the height of
Features” on page 590. Garden Beds in the Terrain Feature
Water Feature Tools

Select Terrain> Water Feature to drawn and edited the same way that splines
access tools for drawing ponds and are. See “Splines” on page 908 and “Editing
streams in your terrain. Spline Based Objects” on page 166.
Water Features are basically Terrain Click the Advanced Splines edit button
Features with material and height attributes to activate additional edit handles that you
typical of bodies of water. See “Terrain can use to reshape the stream. See
Feature Tools” on page 588. “Advanced Splines” on page 169.
Round Pond Streams follow the contours of the

Use this tool to draw a pond with terrain, so they may appear to flow uphill if
rounded edges. See “Spline Feature” they are not drawn correctly in the terrain.
on page 590. Try to draw them so that they follow a
downward course for their entire length.
Kidney Shaped Pond Once drawn, Water Features can be selected
and edited just like any other Terrain Feature.
This tool draws a kidney shaped pond.
See “Kidney Shaped Features” on page Specify the material and set the height of
590. Water Features in the Terrain Feature
Stream Specification Dialog” on page 606.
Select the Stream tool, then click and

drag to draw a stream. Streams are
Stepping Stone Tools

Select Terrain> Stepping Stone to Stepping Stones are basically Terrain
place a walkway made of individual Features with material and height attributes
stepping stones. typical of walking paths. See “Terrain
Feature Tools” on page 588.
591
Terrain Wall and Curb Tools
There are two ways to draw Stepping Stones: Round Stepping Stone
• Click once to place a stepping stone with The Round Stepping Stone tool draws
endpoints that form a 1’ (300 mm) square stepping stones with rounded edges.
at that location. See “Spline Feature” on page 590.
Once drawn, Stepping Stones can be selected
stepping stone sized as needed. See
and edited just like any other Terrain Feature.
“Rectangular Polyline” on page 903.
By default, Stepping Stones have a concrete
Polyline Stepping Stone material; however, you can specify the
material and set the height of Stepping
The Polyline Stepping Stone tool Stones in the Terrain Feature Specification
draws rectangular stepping stones. See dialog. See “Terrain Feature Specification
“Rectangular Features” on page 589. Dialog” on page 606.
Terrain Wall and Curb Tools

Select Terrain> Terrain Wall and Specification. See “Terrain Path Specifica-
Curb to draw landscaping walls and tion Dialog” on page 610.
curbs that follow the contours of the terrain.
Straight and curved Terrain Walls and Curbs Retaining Walls
are drawn just as other walls are. See The Retaining Wall tools function similarly
“Drawing Walls” on page 228. to Terrain Breaks, but include a wall. See
“Terrain Breaks” on page 586.
Terrain Walls
Use the Straight Retaining Wall tool
Use the Straight Terrain Wall tool to draws a straight wall that holds back
draw a wall that sits on top of and sloped terrain.
follows the terrain.
Use the Curved Retaining Wall tool
Use the Spline Terrain Wall to draw a to draw a curved retaining wall.
curved terrain wall. This wall is drawn
A Retaining Wall’s height is determined by
the same way as a CAD Spline. See
the elevation of the terrain on each side. By
“Splines” on page 908.
default, the height of the wall matches the
Once drawn, a Terrain Wall can be like other terrain on the high side of the break and the
line-based objects. See “Editing Line Based bottom matches the low side. If you insert a
Objects” on page 147 and “Editing Spline Retaining Wall into flat terrain, it looks like a
Based Objects” on page 166. concrete strip in 3D views.
Terrain walls are 5’ (1500 mm) high and con- Once drawn, a Retaining Wall can be edited
crete by default, but you can specify the much like other walls. See “Editing Walls”
material, height and more in the Terrain Path on page 231.
592
Terrain Curbs Once drawn, a Terrain Curb can be like other

line-based objects. See “Editing Line Based
Terrain Curbs are useful for creating curbs Objects” on page 147 and “Editing Spline
around planting beds and along paths. Based Objects” on page 166.
Use the Straight Terrain Curb tool to You can specify the height of straight and
draw a straight landscaping curb. spline terrain curbs on the General tab of the
Use the Spline Terrain Curb tool to Terrain Path Specification. See “Terrain
draw a curved landscaping curb. This Path Specification Dialog” on page 610.
curb is drawn the same way as a CAD
Spline. See “Splines” on page 908. You can also add Fencing to your ter-
rain, complete with gates from the
Doors Library. See “Fencing” on page 227.
Sun Shadows
Sun shadows are computed based on the Sun Shadow and the terrain is not up-to-date,
contour of the terrain. If a terrain perimeter the terrain automatically rebuilds. You can
exists, the sun shadow adjusts to the terrain. turn off the automatic rebuild. See “Sun
Angle Specification Dialog” on page 782.
The Sun Shadow is automatically rebuilt
whenever terrain is rebuilt. If you generate a
Terrain Objects in the Library

The Library Browser contains a lines, terrain features, roads, sidewalks, road
variety of objects that can be placed in markings, or even the terrain perimeter itself
a plan’s terrain, including plants, exterior and send them to the library as one unit. This
fixtures, accessories and roadway objects. library object can then be placed into any
See “The Library Browser” on page 683. plan. Once placed into a plan, each object is
independent and is no longer part of the
You can also create your own objects and
group. See “Adding to the Library” on page
save them in the library. Select any
700.
combination of elevation points, elevation
Displaying Terrain
How terrain objects display in 2D and In order for objects such as Terrain Features
3D views is controlled in the Layer and Roads to be visible in 3D views, the
Display Options dialog. See “Layer Display Terrain Perimeter layer must also display. In
Options Dialog” on page 121. addition, only the portions of these objects
593
Editing Terrain Objects
that are drawn within the Terrain Perimeter generated, sometimes only briefly, indicating
will be seen in 3D views. See “Terrain the progress.
Feature Tools” on page 588.
3D View Tools
A variety of tools are available to help you
adjust the perspective of your 3D views. See
“Editing 3D Views” on page 758.
Building the Terrain

When terrain is generated, Chief You can turn off Auto Rebuild Terrain in
Architect gathers all elevation data that the 3D Settings dialog and rebuild the
has been added to the model and creates a terrain manually only when needed by
terrain surface. The program interpolates the selecting Terrain> Build Terrain . See
data to produce smooth contours. “3D Settings Dialog” on page 744.
Contour lines are generated at intervals
specified on the Contours tab of the Terrain Terrain & 3D Drawing Time
Specification dialog. If elevation data is Terrain is typically large with many surface
added to the model at 24 inch intervals and triangles, which often increases the drawing
the contour line interval is set to 12 inches, time of 3D views. The time required is
generating terrain creates one additional affected by the quality of the terrain, the
contour line between each piece of elevation amount of elevation data and number of
data. See “Contours Tab” on page 598. terrain features present. For information
A Terrain Perimeter with no additional about surface triangles and how they
elevation data generates a terrain that is flat influence terrain quality, see “General Tab”
at the elevation 0' - 0". on page 596.
By default, the terrain is automatically built Lights and symbols can be placed outdoors
before a 3D view is generated. This process and included in 3D views when the terrain is
takes a variable amount of time, depending generated. These objects can also contribute
on the amount of elevation data and number to the time needed to generate 3D views. See
of terrain features in the plan. The Building “Rendering Tips” on page 773.
Terrain progress dialog displays as terrain is
Editing Terrain Objects

Before a terrain object can be edited, it must Terrain Perimeter and Terrain Features can
be selected. All terrain objects can be be selected in 3D views. See “Selecting
selected in floor plan view. In addition, the Objects” on page 144.
594
A selected terrain object can be edited using Using the Edit Tools
its edit handles, edit tools and specification
dialog. See “Specification Dialogs” on page A selected terrain object can be edited in a
33. variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
toolbar. The edit tools available for a terrain
Any time elevation data is changed, the object depends on the type of terrain object
terrain must be regenerated. This occurs selected. See “Edit Toolbar Buttons” on page
automatically when a 3D view is created. It 1140.
can also be done manually by selecting
Terrain> Build Terrain . Note: If you copy terrain objects from one
plan to another, you cannot view the pasted
objects in 3D unless a Terrain Perimeter
Using the Edit Handles exists.
• The shape of the Terrain Perimeter can be
edited like other polyline-based objects. Moving Terrain Objects
See “Editing Closed-Polyline Based Using Dimensions
Objects” on page 160. If dimensions display when a terrain object is
• Elevation Points can be moved in floor selected, the object can be moved using the
plan view using the Move edit handle. them. For more information see “Moving
• Elevation Lines, Elevation Splines and Objects Using Dimensions” on page 831.
Terrain Breaks are edited like other line-
and spline-based objects. See “Editing Plot Plans and
Line Based Objects” on page 147, “Edit- Plan Footprints
ing Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on
There are two different ways to create a plot
page 160, and “Editing Spline Based
plan in Chief Architect:
• In floor plan view using the Terrain and
• The shape of a Raised Region, Lowered
CAD Tools.
Region, Hill, Valley, and Flat Region
can be edited like a spline. See “Editing • In a CAD Detail using the Plan Foot-
Spline Based Objects” on page 166. print tool and other CAD Tools.
• Terrain Features are edited like other
Each method has its advantages. For more
spline- and polyline-based objects. See
information, see “Creating a Plot Plan” on
“Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects”
page 125 of the User’s Guide.
on page 160 and “Editing Spline Based
Terrain Specification Dialog

The Terrain Specification dialog controls appearance.
how your terrain is modeled, as well as its
595
The Terrain Specification dialog can be

accessed in any of three ways:
• Select Terrain> Terrain
Specification .
• Select the Terrain Perimeter and click the
• Double-click the Terrain Perimeter using
the Select Objects tool.
General Tab
3 5
Chief Architect builds 3D terrain surfaces by Triangle size is computed roughly as

splitting them into triangles. Increasing the follows:
triangle count decreases triangle size,
Size of Triangle = Area of Terrain Perimeter /
yielding more detailed contour lines and a
Number of Triangles
better 3D approximation of the terrain.
596
There is no upper limit to the number of elevation. 8 inches is used for a slab
triangles you can specify, but smaller foundation, 18 is used if a foundation floor is
triangles demand longer terrain generation present, and 12 is used otherwise.
time, increased memory requirements, and
Building Pad Elevation - Enter a value to
increased drawing time. If you select a large
offset terrain from floor 1. The default value
number of small triangles for a large site, you
of 12 inches results in floor 1 being 12 inches
may wait a long time for the calculation.
above any terrain at an elevation of 0 inches.
Elevation lines are sampled less frequently This value does not change existing elevation
when the surface triangle size is larger, data and does not alter elevation contours.
speeding up terrain generation when there
The program always defines the first floor
are many elevation lines in the plan.
elevation at 0’-0”. While this is desirable for
The Low (1000), Medium (2000), and High adjusting walls, roofs and floor platforms, it
(4000) values work well for an average lot leads to misrepresentations in relation to real
area of 20,000 square feet. If your terrain world elevations. Finished grade can be
perimeter varies greatly from this, consider measured relative to the finished floor, but to
defining the number of triangles using the measure elevation in the real world, building
Custom setting or the Triangle Size setting. pads are rarely at 0’-0” sea-level.
1 Triangle Count - Specify the number For example, if a structure is placed in the
of surface triangles. middle of a terrain sloping evenly from a
• Custom - Specify a custom triangle height of 100.00 feet to a height of 112.00
count value. feet, entering a value of 106.00 feet for the
building pad elevation places the structure at
• Triangle Size - Specify the maximum tri- the correct height in 3D views.
angle size in the terrain surface.
Smoothing - Control the amount of 4 Hide terrain intersected by building -
2 Check this box to cut out the portion of
rounding applied to terrain edges. A the terrain that is intersected by the first floor
low value for smoothing produces terrain footprint. Checking this box prevents the
that has sharp peaks and abrupt changes in generation of contour lines inside the house.
slope. A high value results in terrain that
continuously flows from point to point. If your foundation footprint differs from your
first floor footprint, you may need to use the
3 Flatten Pad - Check this box to flatten Terrain Hole tool for custom clipping
the area beneath your building.
instead. See “Terrain Feature Tools” on page
Auto Calculate Elevation - Check this box 588.
to automatically calculate the building pad
elevation value during terrain rebuild. Chief 5 Skirt - Define the thickness of the skirt
Architect takes the center of the building added to the terrain. The skirt is only
footprint and finds the terrain elevation at visible in 3D views and gives the viewer a
this point. This elevation is added to 8, 12, or sense of depth when viewing the terrain.
18 inches to calculate the building pad
597
Flat specifies that the skirt be flat at its base. Follow Terrain specifies that the skirt base
Chief Architect determines the lowest point maintains a consistent distance below the
in the terrain and then offsets this value by terrain. The distance is obtained from the
the user specified thickness value. The thickness value you provide.
resulting value is used as a uniform elevation
for the base of the skirt.
Contours Tab
Chief Architect identifies two types of are drawn on different layers, so you can
contour lines: Primary and Secondary. They control how they display in floor plan view.
1 Specify the Frequency at which 12”, a contour line is computed for each
contour lines are generated. elevation change of 12”.
• Define the Interval between contour • Specify the Offset value. If the offset is 5
lines, which is the change in elevation feet and the interval is set to 10 feet then
between contours. If the interval is set to contours are generated at the elevations
598
5’, 15’, 25’, 35’, etc. Most often, the Off- Spline Tab
set is set to 0.
The Spline tab has a single option and is only
• Primary Contour Every__Contours - available when the selected object is a spline.
Specify the interval for primary contours. See “Convert to Spline” on page 187.
A value of 1 produces only primary con-
tours, while a value of 5 defines every
fifth contour line as a primary contour.
2 Specify the appearance of contour

Labels in floor plan view. Most settings
here are the same as those for Simple Text.
See “Text Specification Dialog” on page 850.
• Check Label Secondary Contours to New Segment Angle - Specify the angle
label secondary contour lines with their between line segments that are used to draw
elevation data. Primary Contour lines are the spline. Specifying a smaller angle makes
labelled with their elevation data auto- the spline smoother. Specify a larger angle to
matically. draw the spline faster.
3 Specify the Contour Line Units, the Selected Line Tab

units used by contour labels. Select
either Inches or Decimal Feet (Millimeters The Selected Line tab is available when the
or Meters for metric). selected edge of the Terrain Perimeter is a
line as opposed to an arc. See “Selected
4 If contour Smoothing is turned on, Edge” on page 145.
Chief Architect attempts to remove
sharp bends and jagged sections from the 2D This tab is similar to the Line tab of the Line
contour lines. Specification dialog. See “Line Tab” on
• Specify the number of Passes to perform page 888.
when smoothing. The more passes, the
smoother the contour lines become, but Selected Arc Tab
contours become less accurate.
Polyline Tab selected segment of the polyline is an arc as
opposed to a line. See “Change Line/Arc” on
The Polyline tab indicates the length of the page 185.
polyline’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and
the Volume of a closed polyline. For more This tab is similar to the Arc tab of the Arc
Specification dialog. See “Arc Tab” on page
information, see “Polyline Tab” on page 901.
896.
599
Elevation Point Specification Dialog

For information about the Line Style tab, see Use this tab to select materials to apply to the
“Line Style Tab” on page 889. terrain surface and terrain skirt in 3D views.
These materials are not calculated in the
Fill Style Tab Materials List. See “Materials Tab” on page
709.
Elevation Point Specification Dialog

To open the Elevation Point Specification Objects tool.
dialog, select an elevation point and click the
Use the Elevation Point Specification
Open Object edit button, or double-click
dialog to define the selected elevation point
on an elevation point using the Select
and control its appearance in floor plan view.
When all changes are made, click OK to
store the changes or Cancel to ignore them.
General Tab
600
1 Location - Specify the exact location of • Y Coordinate - Enter the y coordinate of

the elevation point. the elevation point.
• Elevation - Enter the height of the eleva-
tion point in inches and/or feet (mm for 2 Text - Enter notes, such as elevation, in
this box. This text displays beside the
metric). For example entering 5’6 (with elevation point in floor plan view. You can
the apostrophe as foot mark) results in an enter a pound (#) sign to display the
elevation of 66 inches. elevation value in floor plan view.
• X Coordinate - Enter the x coordinate of
the elevation point. 3 Marker Radius - Enter the radius in
inches (or millimeters).
Attributes Tab
1 Layer - Define the Layer the elevation By Layer - Check this box to use the line
point should be placed on. See “Layer color of the layer the elevation point is
Tab” on page 125. located on.
2 Color - Click the color bar to open the 3 Click the drop-down list to specify the
Windows Color dialog and select the Font of any accompanying text. Check
color of the elevation point and the boxes to apply text options.
accompanying text. See “Color Chooser
Dialog” on page 727. 4 Specify the Size of the Elevation Point
and any associated text.
601
Elevation Line Specification Dialog
Character Height - Define the character Compatible Size to use this information for
height of the text. text sizing. See “Character Size” on page 840
Version 9 Compatible Size -In Version 9, Transparent - Check this box to make the
text size was based on sizing information background of the text transparent.
stored in each font rather than actual
Rotate with Plan - Check this box to allow
character dimensions. Check Version 9
the text to rotate when the plan is rotated.
Elevation Line Specification Dialog

To open the Elevation Line Specification for metric). For example entering 5’6 (with
dialog, select one or more Elevation Line/ the apostrophe as foot mark) results in an
Splines, or a polyline composed of elevation elevation of 66 inches.
Lines/Splines, and click the Open Object
edit button. You can also double-click an
2 Interior is Flat - This option is
available for closed Elevation Regions.
Elevation Line/Spline using the Select Check this box to maintain a flat surface at
Objects tool. the specified Elevation.
The Elevation Line Specification dialog is 3 Interpolate Tangent to Edge - This

used to define the selected Elevation Line/ option is available for closed Elevation
Spline and controls its appearance in floor Regions. Check this box to flatten the terrain
plan view. surface as it approaches the edges of the Ele-
vation Region.
The settings in this dialog are the same as
those in the Elevation Region Specification Polyline Tab
dialog. See “Elevation Regions” on page
585. The Polyline tab indicates the length of the
line or polyline’s Perimeter, its enclosed
Elevation Tab Area, and the Volume of a closed polyline. If
multiple Elevation Line/Spline segments
form a closed Elevation Region, its Area will
be calculated. Elevation Lines/Splines do not
have a thickness, so they have no Volume.
1 Spline Tab
2 The Spline tab has a single option and is only
3
available when the selected object is an
elevation spline. See “Splines” on page 908.
1 Elevation - Enter the elevation of the
Line/Spline in inches and/or feet (mm
602

Selected Arc Tab

selected object or segment is an arc as
opposed to a line.
New Segment Angle - Specify the angle
between line segments that are used to draw For information about the Selected Arc tab,
the spline. Specifying a smaller angle makes see “Selected Arc Tab” on page 901.
the spline smoother. Specify a larger angle to Moving the Start of a line segment moves the
draw the spline faster. end of the previous connected line. Similarly,
moving the End of a line segment moves the
Selected Line Tab start of the next connected line.
selected object or segment is a line as Line Style Tab
opposed to one that has been converted to an For information about the Line Style tab, see
arc. See “Selected Edge” on page 145. “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
Flat Region Specification Dialog

To open the Flat Region Specification dia- Spline Tab
log, select a Flat Region and click the Open
Object edit button, or double-click a Flat available when the selected object is a spline.
Region using the Select Objects tool. See “Splines” on page 908.
The options in the Flat Region Specification
dialog are similar to those a number of other
dialogs in the program.
Polyline Tab
polyline’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and New Segment Angle - Specify the angle
the Volume of a closed polyline. between line segments that are used to draw
the spline. Specifying a smaller angle makes
the spline smoother. Specify a larger angle to
draw the spline faster.
603
Hill / Valley Specification Dialog
Selected Line Tab Selected Arc Tab

The Selected Line tab is available when the The Selected Arc tab is available when the
selected edge of the polyline is a line as selected segment of the polyline is an arc as
opposed to an arc. See “Selected Edge” on opposed to a line.
page 145.
This tab is similar to the Arc tab of the Arc
Moving the Start of a line segment moves the Specification dialog. See “Arc Tab” on page
end of the previous connected line, if there is 896.
one. Similarly, moving the End of a line
segment moves move the start of the next Line Style Tab
connected line, if there is one.
This tab is similar to the Line tab of the Line “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
page 888. Fill Style Tab
Hill / Valley Specification Dialog

The Hill/Valley Specification defines the Enter a Height for the selected Hill or Valley.
selected Hill or Valley and controls its This height is relative to the terrain surface
appearance in floor plan view. that is generated from the Elevation Data in
your plan. See “Terrain Modifier Tools” on
To open the Hill/Valley Specification dialog,
page 587.
select one or more Hill or Valley and click
the Open Object edit button, or double- Polyline Tab
click the region(s) using the Select Objects
tool. polyline’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and
the Volume of a closed polyline. Hills and
Hill / Valley Tab Valleys do not have a volume measurement.
Spline Tab
available when the selected object is a spline.
See “Splines” on page 908.
604
segment moves move the start of the next

page 888.
Selected Arc Tab

between line segments that are used to draw The Selected Arc tab is available when the
the spline. Specifying a smaller angle makes selected segment of the polyline is an arc as
the spline smoother. Specify a larger angle to opposed to a line.
draw the spline faster. This tab is similar to the Arc tab of the Arc
Selected Line Tab 896.
selected edge of the polyline is a line as Line Style Tab
opposed to an arc. See “Selected Edge” on For information about the Line Style tab, see
page 145. “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
Moving the Start of a line segment moves the
end of the previous connected line, if there is Fill Style Tab
one. Similarly, moving the End of a line For information about the Fill Style tab, see
Raised / Lowered Region Specification Dialog

To open the Raised/Lowered Region The Raised / Lowered Region
Specification dialog, select one or more Specification dialog is similar to the Hill /
raised or lowered regions and click the Open Valley Specification dialog. See “Hill /
Object edit button, or double-click the Valley Specification Dialog” on page 605.
region(s) using the Select Objects tool.
Terrain Feature Specification Dialog

To open the Terrain Feature Specification edit button or double-click the Terrain
dialog, select a Terrain Feature or group of
Terrain Features and click the Open Object Feature(s) using the Select Objects tool.
605
Terrain Feature Specification Dialog
The Terrain Feature Specification defines Most of the tabs in this dialog are similar to
the selected Terrain Feature and controls its those for a variety of other objects in the
appearance in 2D and 3D views. program.
General Tab
1 Specify the Height and Thickness of Polyline Tab

the terrain feature relative to the terrain
surface. The Polyline tab indicates the length of the
• Specify the top Height of the feature the Volume of a closed polyline.
using a positive or negative number.
• Specify the feature’s Thickness. Spline Tab
If a feature’s height above the terrain is The Spline tab has a single option and is only
greater than its thickness, the program will available when the selected object is a spline.
fill in the resulting gap. See “Splines” on page 908.
• Make Hole - Check this box to make a
Terrain Hole. See “Terrain Holes” on
page 590.
2 Clipping - Check this box to remove

sections of the Terrain Feature that
intersect other Terrain Features at a lower
height. Clipping is also useful for creating
features that contain other features such as New Segment Angle - Specify the angle
planters or swimming pools. between line segments that are used to draw
Distributed Plant Tab the spline smoother. Specify a larger angle to
This tab is only available when the For
information about the Polyline tab, see
606
Selected Line Tab For information about the Selected Arc tab,
selected object or segment is a line as
Line Style Tab
opposed to an arc. See “Selected Edge” on
page 145. For information about the Line Style tab, see
Fill Style Tab
Selected Arc Tab For information about the Fill Style tab, see
opposed to a line. See “Change Line/Arc” on Materials Tab
page 185. For information about the Materials tab, see
Garden Bed Specification Dialog

To open the Garden Bed Specification Distributed Plant Tab
dialog, select a Garden Bed or group of
The Distributed Plant tab is similar to the Fill
Garden Beds and click the Open Object Objects tab of the Distribution Region
edit button or double-click the Garden Bed(s) Specification dialog. See “Distributed
using the Select Objects tool. Object Tab - Distribution Region” on page
667.
The Terrain Feature Specification defines
the selected Terrain Feature and controls its
Polyline Tab
appearance in 2D and 3D views.
The tabs in this dialog are similar to those for
a variety of other objects in the program.
the Volume of a closed polyline.
General Tab
Spline Tab
The settings on the General tab are the same
as those on the same tab of the Terrain
available when the selected object is a spline.
Feature Specification dialog. See “General
See “Splines” on page 908.
Tab” on page 607.
607
Terrain Break Specification Dialog
Selected Arc Tab

opposed to a line. See “Change Line/Arc” on
page 185.
For information about the Selected Arc tab,
New Segment Angle - Specify the angle see “Selected Line Tab” on page 901.
between line segments that are used to draw
the spline. Specifying a smaller angle makes Line Style Tab
the spline smoother. Specify a larger angle to For information about the Line Style tab, see
draw the spline faster. “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
Selected Line Tab Fill Style Tab

The Selected Line tab is available when the For information about the Fill Style tab, see
selected object or segment is a line as “Fill Style Tab” on page 902.
page 145.
Materials Tab
Terrain Break Specification Dialog

To open the Terrain Break Specification Transition Distance - Define the distance
dialog, select a Terrain Break or group of from the edge of the terrain break to where
Terrain Breaks and click the Open Object the break stops affecting the terrain.
edit button or double-click the Terrain
Polyline Tab
Break(s) using the Select Objects tool.
General Tab polyline’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and
the Volume of a closed polyline. Terrain
Breaks do not have a thickness, so they have
no volume. If multiple Terrain Break
segments form a closed polyline, its Area
will be calculated.
608
Spline Tab one. Similarly, moving the End of a line

The Spline tab has a single option and is only connected line, if there is one.
available when the selected object was
converted to a Terrain Break from a spline. This tab is similar to the Line tab of the Line
See “Splines” on page 908. Specification dialog. See “Line Tab” on
page 888.
Selected Arc Tab

selected segment of the polyline is an arc as
opposed to a line.
This tab is similar to the Arc tab of the Arc
896.
draw the spline faster. Line Style Tab
Selected Line Tab “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
selected edge of the polyline is a line as Fill Style Tab
opposed to an arc. See “Selected Edge” on The Fill Style tab is only available when
page 145. multiple Terrain Break segments enclose an
Moving the Start of a line segment moves the area. For more information, see “Fill Style
end of the previous connected line, if there is Tab” on page 902.
Terrain Path Specification Dialog

To open the Terrain Path Specification Most of the tabs in this dialog are similar to
dialog, select one or more Terrain Walls or those for a variety of other objects in the
Terrain Curbs and click the Open Object program.
edit button or double-click the terrain path(s)
using the Select Objects tool.
609
Terrain Path Specification Dialog
General Tab
1 Enter the Width of the item and the

Height. If you enter a negative number
for the height, the item sinks into the terrain.
2 When one terrain path joins another,

you can flare the intersection. Enter a
radius for the flare and indicate whether the
start or the end of the path should be flared
by checking the appropriate box. New Segment Angle - Specify the angle
Polyline Tab the spline. Specifying a smaller angle makes
The Polyline tab indicates the length of the draw the spline faster.
Terrain Path polyline’s Perimeter, its
enclosed Area, and the Volume of a closed Selected Line Tab
polyline.
Spline Tab selected object or segment is a line as
The Spline tab has a single option and is only page 145.
available when the selected object is a spline
path. See “Splines” on page 908. For information about the Selected Line tab,
Selected Arc Tab

610
opposed to a line. See “Change Line/Arc” on Fill Style Tab

page 185.
For information about the Selected Arc tab, “Fill Style Tab” on page 902.
Materials Tab
Line Style Tab
For information about the Line Style tab, see “Materials Tab” on page 709.
Importing Elevation Data

Elevation data can be added to a plan using Text Files
the tools and techniques described in this
chapter or it can be imported from a file. Elevation data can be saved in text files as x,
y, and z coordinates where x and y define the
Chief Architect can import elevation data location of a point on a Cartesian grid, and z
saved in DWG/DXF, GPS Exchange (.gpx) defines the elevation for that point. Each
and a variety of text file formats (.txt, .csv, elevation point must be on a separate line in
.prn, .xyz, .auf and .nez). If your terrain data the text file.
is not saved in one of these file formats, there
are third party programs available that can Importable text files can come from
convert to these formats. surveyors, other software programs, or you
can create your own using a GPS system.
DXF/DWG Files Elevation data saved in text files can be
imported using the Import Terrain Wizard.
If you have a model of your terrain created
on another program that contains contour
lines and elevation data, that information can GPS Exchange Files
be imported directly as elevation data into Elevation data can also be imported from
Chief Architect as a .dxf or a .dwg file. See .gpx files created using a GPS system using
“Importing DXF/DWG Elevation Data” on the Import GPS Data Wizard.
page 620.
Import Terrain Wizard

The Import Terrain Wizard allows you Select File> Import> Terrain Data to
to import elevation data saved in text open the Import Terrain Wizard. Click Next.
(.txt) file format into your model.
611
Select File
1 Select File to Import -Enter the name followed by the X coordinate, the Y
of a text file, or Browse to locate a file coordinate, and the Z coordinate.
on your computer.
#XYZ Description - Information in this
2 Select the Organization of the Data - format begins with a number that belongs to
You need to know how the data in your each data point followed by the X
text file is organized. Each data point con- coordinate, the Y coordinate, the Z
tains information about its X-axis (East to coordinate, and a description.
West location), Y-axis (North to South
YXZ - Information in this format begins with
location), and Z-axis (elevation). It might
the Y coordinate followed by the X
also contain a brief description.
coordinate and the Z coordinate.
Elevation information can come in one of six
#YXZ - Information in this format begins
different sequences, and is separated by
with a number that belongs to each data point
either a comma (comma delimited) or a
followed by the Y coordinate, the X
space (space delimited).
coordinate, and the Z coordinate.
XYZ - Information in this format begins with
#YXZ Description - Information in this
the X coordinate, followed by the Y
format begins with a number that belongs to
coordinate and the Z coordinate.
each data point followed by the Y
#XYZ - Information in this format begins coordinate, the X coordinate, the Z
with a number that belongs to each data point coordinate, and a description.
612
Filter Data
1
2
3
1 This is the number of points your data

contains. Building terrain with too
many elevation points may take a long time,
depending on your processor speed and
memory. If you import more than 1000 or
2000 elevation points, the Linear Smoothing
option in the Terrain Specification dialog is
recommended. See “Terrain Specification
2 Use Every __ Points - Reduce the data

imported by skipping data points.
Specifying every 2 points reduce thes data by
50%; specifying every 10 points reduces the
data by 90%.
3 Restrict the Data to the Ranges

Below - Another way to restrict the data The outer box in this diagram and the points
used is to define a range. Data within these within it represent all of the data contained
ranges is imported, while data outside these within a given text file. If you are only
ranges is not. interested in a small area represented in the
text file, a subset of this information could be
used instead by defining a range, which is
represented by the smaller box in this
diagram. To do this you must define the
range using X, Y, and Z coordinates. The
same effect is accomplished by deleting
613
unwanted data from your text file before it is

imported.
Scale Data
1
2
3
4
1 This describes the total number of data 3 Units - Select the units of measurement
points to be imported and the range of used in your data for each axis. Only
the coordinates of those points. linear units are available. The units in the
drop-down lists are a subset of the units in
2 Translate - Accurately position the the Edit Preferences dialog. For more
terrain beneath your plan. You need to
information on specifying default units, see
know where the origin is located in your
“Unit Conversions Panel” on page 85.
plan, and where that origin is located relative
to the geographical data in your text file. The
4 Scale Coordinates - Multiply the
coordinates of the data point that correspond coordinates of each axis by a specific
with the origin point in Chief Architect number to decrease or increase the relative
should be entered here. size or relief of your terrain.
To find the origin point in your plan, 5 Rotate Coordinates - Accurately

rotate terrain data counterclockwise
open the Move Point dialog, enter abso-
around the Z axis.
lute coordinates X=0, Y=0, and click OK to
move the point to the (0, 0) location. See
“Move Point Dialog” on page 883.
614
Import GPS Data Wizard

The Import GPS Data Wizard allows file format. Select File> Import> GPS Data
you to import terrain data from .gpx to open the Import GPS Data Wizard.
Welcome
Click Next to continue.
615
Select File
Enter the name and directory of the file you Click Next to continue.
want to import, or click Browse to select a
.gpx file on your computer.
616
Import Data As
1 Specify which items you want to import 2 Specify what you would like each item
by checking the box to the left of the to Import As from the drop-down list.
Name. Items with unchecked boxes are not
imported.
617
Transform Coordinates
1
2
3
1 Map - Specify the point in the imported 2 Lower Elevation Data - Specify the
terrain data, defined by degrees amount that you would like to lower all
latitude and degrees longitude, that you imported elevation data.
would like to locate at the origin in the Chief
Architect plan. 3 Rotate - Accurately rotate the position
of north in the imported terrain data
counterclockwise around the Z axis.
618
Finish
Click Finish to close the Import GPS Data If you do not see the imported terrain, select
Wizard and return to floor plan view.
Window> Fill Window .
Importing DXF/DWG Elevation Data

Select File> Import> Drawing • If the vertices have differing Z values, an
(DWG/DXF) to open the Import elevation point is created for each vertex.
Drawing Wizard, which you can use to • Imported points are converted to eleva-
import elevation data in .dxf/.dwg format. tion points.
See “Import Drawing Wizard” on page 954.
• Other imported entities (solids, faces,
On the Select File page of the Wizard, check etc.) are imported normally.
the Terrain Elevation Data box.
Lines and points in the imported drawing are When importing elevation data, only
converted to elevation lines and elevation import layers containing this data. To
import other layers as normal CAD, run the
points, preserving the elevation data
Terrain Import Wizard again with Terrain Ele-
associated with them. vation data unchecked.
• If an imported line has vertices with the
same Z values, an elevation line is cre-
ated.
619
Converting CAD Lines to Terrain Data
If a terrain perimeter does not already exist in

the plan, a perimeter that surrounds the data
is generated.
Converting CAD Lines to Terrain Data

CAD lines can be selected and If a terrain perimeter is not present in your
converted to terrain data using the plan, this will be the only terrain object
Convert Polyline edit tool. available to select. A terrain perimeter must
exist before any of the other terrain objects
Using this tool, you can convert CAD lines
can be created.
in an imported drawing into terrain data that
can be used to generate a 3D terrain model. Roads and road objects can also be created.
They are discussed in “Roads, Driveways &
Select a CAD line, spline, or polyline in floor
Sidewalks” on page 634.
plan view and click the Convert
Polyline edit button to open the Convert When you click OK, the terrain object’s
Polyline dialog. See “Convert Polyline
specification dialog opens, allowing you to
Dialog” on page 206. specify elevation data or other attributes.
Plant Tools
Select Terrain> Plant> to add plants Select Terrain> Plant> Plant
to your landscaping plan. Plants can Chooser to open the Plant Chooser
also be placed in a plan directly from the dialog. See “Plant Chooser Dialog” on page
library. See “Placing Library Objects” on 627.
page 690.
Select Terrain> Plant> Create Plant
Plant objects are actually images, which Image to create a plant image. Once a
provide realism while avoiding high 3D plant image is created, it can be added to the
surface count. Once created, plant images library for future use. See “Adding to the
can be selected and edited much like other Library” on page 700.
image objects. See “Editing Images” on page
Choose Terrain> Plant> Grow All
935.
Plants to open the Grow Plants dialog.
Plants have labels which you can display in
floor plan view. You can also create a Plant
Schedule . See “Schedules” on page
1036.
620
Click and drag the slider bar and select a Select Terrain> Plant> Show
growth period from zero to twenty years. Hardiness Zones to access regional
This only works for plants that have a mature climate zone maps. See “Hardiness Zones”
height and mature age specified in the Plant on page 629.
Image Specification dialog. See “Plant
Information Tab” on page 624.
Plant Image Specification Dialog

Select a plant in a floor plan or 3D view and This dialog can also be accessed by selecting
click the Open Object edit button to Terrain> Plant> Create Plant Image .
open the Plant Image Specification dialog.
Image Tab
1
2
3
4
621
1 Image File - The path and name of the • Enter a Width for the image.
selected image file displays here. Click • When Retain Aspect Ratio of is
Browse to specify the saved location on your checked, if you change either the Height
computer of the image that represents the or Width, the other value changes to
plant in 3D views. maintain this ratio. If this is unchecked
and you resize the plant image, it may
2 2D Plant Symbol - A number of 2D become distorted.
symbols are available to mark the
location of the image in floor plan view. • Click Reset Original Aspect Ratio of to
Select one from the drop-down list or click reset the image’s original aspect ratio and
the Library button to choose a CAD block remove any distortion caused by resizing.
from the Library Browser.
If you change the symbol that represents an 5 Specify the Location of the selected
plant image.
image, you may want to save the new image
• Precisely position the selected plant
to the library. See “Adding to the Library” on
image in reference to the plan coordinates
page 700.
by specifying its X Coordinate and Y
3 Options Coordinate.
• Specify the selected plant image’s Height
• Check Reverse Image to reflect the Above Ground.
appearance of the image about an imagi-
nary vertical line through its center. Transparency Tab
• Check Do not rotate in 3D view to pre- The settings on the Transparency tab of this
vent the plant image from rotating with dialog are similar to those on the same tab of
the camera. the Image Specification dialog. For more
information, see “Transparency Tab” on page
4 Specify the Size of the plant image, as 938.
seen in 3D views.
• Enter a Height for the image.
622
Plant Information Tab

You can search for plants using the attributes
on the Plant Information tab. See “Plant
Chooser Dialog” on page 627.
1 6
2 8
3 9
4
1 The selected plant’s Common Name, 4 This section indicates the Bloom Time
Scientific Name and/or Variety Name when you can expect the plant to
display here. A Pronunciation guide is also produce flowers.
provided.
45 The boxes with checks are the Special
This indicates the Flower Color of the Characteristics of the selected plant.
2
plant.
6 Plant Size information at maturity. An
Leaf Color of the plant is indicated average mature height range can be
3
here. entered using the drop-down lists. This is
used with the Grow Plants feature. See
“Plant Tools” on page 621.
623
7 The special needs of this plant are 8 The check boxes indicate the Type of
shown here.These include the Sun, plant.
Water, Soil pH, and Hardiness Zone range.
See “Hardiness Zones” on page 629. 99 The check boxes indicate the Sub-Type
of the plant.
Plant Description Tab
1
2
1 A detailed Description of the plant Layer Tab

displays in this text field.
2 Information in the Lighting “Layer Tab” on page 125.
Comments fields describes the plant’s
light requirements. Fill Style Tab
3 Hardiness Zone Comments are given For information about the settings on the Fill
here. See “Hardiness Zones” on page Style tab, see “Fill Style Tab” on page 902.
629.
624
If the plant’s 2D Plan Symbol is a CAD Label Tab

block is selected from the library, the settings
on the Fill Style tab will have no effect on the The Label tab is available for a variety of
appearance of the plant in floor plan view. If different objects. For more information, see
you wish, you can create a custom CAD “Label Tab” on page 1045.
block with the desired fill pattern. See “CAD
Blocks” on page 912.
Plant Specification Dialog

Select a 3D plant symbol and click the Open 3D plants also have a Symbol Specification
Object edit button to open the Plant dialog, which can be accessed by clicking the
Specification dialog. Open Symbol edit button.
General Tab
1 Specify the Size/Position of the • If you want the plant to sit on a table
selected 3D plant. rather than the floor, edit the Floor to
• Specify the Height, Width, and Depth of Bottom value.
the plant. • Click the Reset button to return to the
default values if they have been edited.
625
Plant Chooser Dialog
2 Check Reverse Symbol to reflect the Materials Tab

appearance of the plant about an
imaginary vertical line through its center. Use this tab to select materials to apply to the
plant in 3D views. These materials are not
3 A preview of the plant displays on this calculated in the Materials List. See
side of the dialog. Remove the check “Materials Tab” on page 709.
from Show Color to see the image in black
and white. Label Tab
Layer Tab The Label Tab is available for a variety of
For information about the Layer tab, see “Label Tab” on page 1045.
Plant Chooser Dialog

Select Terrain> Plant> Plant Use the Plant Chooser to search the library
Chooser to open the Plant Chooser for plant images and symbols that meet your
dialog or click the button at the bottom of the search parameters. You can search using any
Library Browser window. or all of the options in this dialog.
6
1
7
9
2
3 10
4
5
11
626
1 the Common Name, Scientific Name Hardiness Zone range. See “Hardiness
or Variety Name for the plant. A Zones” on page 629.
Pronunciation field is also provided.
8 When you have entered all the
Specify the Flower Color of the plant. parameters, click the Search button at
2
the bottom of the dialog. The search results
3 Specify the Leaf Color here. display in this pane of the window.
4 Indicate when the plant produces Specify whether you want the Common
flowers in the Bloom Time field.
Name or Scientific Name listed by clicking
5 Check the boxes to show the Special either radio button above the search results.
Characteristics of this plant.
9 Check the boxes to indicate selected
6 Enter Plant Size information at plant’s Type.
maturity. An average mature height
range can be entered using the drop-down 10 Check a box to specify the selected
plant’s Sub-Type.
lists. This is used with the Grow Plants
feature. See “Plant Tools” on page 621.
11 Highlight a plant in the list and click the
View Item button to see a preview.
7 Special needs are shown here.These
include the Sun, Water, Soil pH, and
1 4
627
Hardiness Zones
1 Enter a Description to search for in this 4 When you have entered all the
text field. parameters, click Search. The search
results display in this pane of the window.
2 Enter Lighting Requirements to Specify whether you want the common or
search for in this field.
scientific names listed.
3 Enter Hardiness Zone Comments to
search for here.
Hardiness Zones
Select Terrain> Plant> Show of regional Hardiness Zone Maps. Click the
Hardiness Zones to view a selection drop-down list to select various regions.
Sprinkler Tools
Use the Sprinkler Tools to design a be selected and edited. See “Sprinkler
sprinkler system in your plan. Specification Dialog” on page 630.
Select Terrain> Sprinkler> Select Terrain> Sprinkler>
Sprinkler Head to open the Library Sprinkler Line to draw sprinkler
Search dialog. Choose a sprinkler type from lines in your plan. Sprinkler lines are drawn
the library, then click in the drawing area to and edited much like CAD Lines. See “Line
place them. Once drawn, sprinkler heads can Tools” on page 884.
628
Select Terrain> Sprinkler>

Sprinkler Spline to draw curved 90° Spray 180° Spray 360° Spray
sprinkler lines in your plan. Sprinkler splines Angle Angle Angle
are drawn and edited like CAD Splines. See
Sprinkler Line Sprinkler Spline
The display of sprinkler heads, lines and

splines can be controlled in the Layer
Display Options dialog. See “Displaying
Sprinkler Specification Dialog

To open the Sprinkler Specification dialog, can also double-click the sprinkler(s) using
select a sprinkler or group of sprinklers and the Select Objects tool.
click the Open Object edit button. You
629
Sprinkler Specification Dialog
General Tab
1 Enter the Height, Width, and Depth, 2 Check Reverse Symbol to reverse the
or top to bottom height, of the sprinkler. sprinkler from left to right.
• Enter a Floor to Bottom value to define
the distance from the bottom of the sprin- 3 Set the sprinkler Spray Angle and
Spray Radius.
kler to elevation 0 of floor one.
• Click the Reset button to return the sprin- Fill Tab
kler values to the defaults.
The Fill Tab for sprinklers is similar to that
• Check Follow Terrain to make the sprin- for other many objects such as base cabinets.
kler follow the surface of the terrain. See “Fill Style Tab” on page 574.
Check Follow Terrain and enter a Floor to
Bottom value to set sprinkler’s elevation Layer Tab
relative to the terrain surface. For example, a For information about the Layer tab, see
value of -6 recesses the sprinkler head 6 “Layer Tab” on page 125.
inches below the surface of the terrain.
Spray Fill Tab
The elevation of a sprinkler can be
edited in cross section/elevation view. The Spray Fill tab controls how the area
within the sprinkler’s reach displays in floor
630
plan view and is similar to the Fill Style tab Label Tab
found in many dialogs. See “Fill Style Tab”
on page 902. The Label Tab is available for a variety of
Materials Tab
631
Chapter 21:
Roads, Driveways
& Sidewalks
Roads and sidewalks are modeled in 3D like Chapter Contents

other terrain objects in Chief Architect. • Road and Sidewalk Defaults
Because they have much in common with • Road, Driveway and Sidewalk Tools
terrain objects and rely upon terrain data to • Displaying Road Objects
be viewed in 3D, it is helpful to be familiar • Editing Road Objects
with terrain modeling before using these • Adding Road Objects to the Library
tools. See “Terrain” on page 580. • Road Specification Dialog
• Median Specification Dialog
• Driveway Specification Dialog
• Road Marking Specification Dialog
• Sidewalk Specification Dialog
634
Road and Sidewalk Defaults

Default Settings can be accessed by The settings in this dialog are the same as
selecting Edit> Default Settings. those in the Driveway Specification dialog.
Click the + beside Roads, Sidewalks and See “Driveway Specification Dialog” on
Driveways to display the subheadings. See page 642.
“Default Settings” on page 63.
The settings in the Road Defaults, Driveway Road Marking Defaults
Defaults, Road Marking Defaults, and You can access the Road Marking Defaults
Sidewalk Defaults dialogs determine the dialog from the Default Settings dialog, or
initial settings when the road and sidewalk
by double-clicking the Road Marking
tools are used. It is a good idea to check these
button.
settings before placing any roads or
sidewalks in your plan. The settings in this dialog are the same as
those in the Road Marking Specification
Road Defaults dialog. See “Road Marking Specification
You can access the Road Defaults dialog
from the Default Settings dialog, or by
Sidewalk Defaults
double-clicking the Road Tools button.
You can access the Sidewalk Defaults dialog
The settings in this dialog are the same as from the Default Settings dialog, or by
those in the Road Specification dialog. See
double-clicking the Sidewalk button.
“Road Specification Dialog” on page 640.
The settings in this dialog are the same as
Driveway Defaults those in the Sidewalk Specification dialog.
See “Sidewalk Specification Dialog” on page
You can access the Driveway Defaults 644.
dialog from the Default Settings dialog, or
by double-clicking the Driveway button.
635
Road, Driveway and Sidewalk Tools

Road objects can be drawn in floor Straight Road
plan view, camera views and
overviews, but only when a Terrain To place a road without any curves,
Perimeter exists in the plan. See “Terrain select Terrain> Road> Straight
Perimeter” on page 581. Road and click and drag to draw a line in
floor plan view. The ends of multiple road
When road objects are first placed into your sections can be connected together.
plan, their initial dimensions and properties
are controlled by their default settings. See Roads are edited alone their center line like
“Road and Sidewalk Defaults” on page 635. CAD lines and polylines. See “Editing Line
Road objects created with the Road Tools
have a consistent width that can be defined in Spline Road
their specification dialogs. See “Road
Specification Dialog” on page 640 and Use Terrain> Road> Spline Road to
“Terrain Path Specification Dialog” on page draw a curved road. Spline roads are
610. drawn and edited like CAD splines. See
Road objectss are flat along their widths,
which makes it easy to create roads on
Polyline Road
sloping terrain.
A polyline can be used to model roads
Roads have curbs, and Sidewalks and
of any shape. It is ideal for creating
Driveways cut out curbs and gutters
parking lots and other non-linear road
wherever they meet a Road or a Road
surfaces. Roads created with the Polyline
Polyline.
Road tool conform to the surface of the
terrain beneath them.
To place a road polyline select Terrain>
Road> Polyline Road and click and
drag to draw a rectangular polyline in floor
plan view.
Road Polylines are edited alone their center
line like polylines. See “Polylines” on page
900.
Once road objects have been placed, they can Median

be edited individually or as a group. See
“Editing Road Objects” on page 639. A median is a polyline that can be
used within a road. The median is
636
made of the same material as the terrain Road Stripe

beneath it and has a curb if the road that
encompasses it has one. The Road Stripe tool allows you to
paint lines on a road surface.
To place a road stripe, select Terrain>

Road> Road Stripe and click and drag
To place a median select Terrain> Road> to draw a line within a road in floor plan
view. Multiple road stripes can be connected
Median and click and drag to draw a
together.
rectangular polyline in floor plan view. Road
median polylines must be contained within a Road Stripes are edited like CAD lines. See
road. “Line Tools” on page 884.
Road medians are edited just like CAD
polylines. See “Polylines” on page 900. Road Marking
Polylines can be converted to road medians. A Road Marking paints polylines on
See “Converting Objects” on page 205. a road surface, allowing any shape to
be created.
Cul-de-sac To place a road marking select Terrain>
A Cul-de-sac is a road object with a Road> Road Marking and click and
special, rounded shape that can be drag to draw a rectangular polyline within a
placed at the end of a Road object. Select road in floor plan view.
Terrain> Road> Cul-de-sac and click on
Road markings are edited like CAD
the end of a road to place a cul-de-sac at that
polylines. See “Polylines” on page 900.
location.
A driveway is a road without a curb. A
Culs-de-sac cannot be placed on road
driveway cuts out a curb wherever it meets a
polylines.
road or a road polyline. Like a road, the
Culs-de-sac can be edited just like CAD elevation of a driveway is flat across its
polylines. See “Editing Closed-Polyline width.
637
Straight Driveway end to draw a line. The ends of multiple

sidewalk sections can be connected together.
To create a driveway, select Terrain>
Driveway> Straight Driveway, then Sidewalks are edited along their center line
click and drag to draw a line. Multiple like line- and polyline- based objects. See
driveway sections can be connected together. “Editing Line Based Objects” on page 147.
Height, thickness and material information Sidewalks can be edited in the sidewalk’s
can be specified in a driveway’s specification specification dialog. See “Sidewalk
dialog. See “Driveway Specification Dialog” Specification Dialog” on page 644.
on page 642.
Driveways are edited like other line-based
objects. See “Editing Line Based Objects” on
page 147.
Spline Driveway
Use the Spline Driveway tool to
create a curved driveway. Select
Terrain> Driveway> Spline Driveway.
Spline driveways are drawn and edited like
CAD splines. See “Splines” on page 908. Spline Sidewalk
Use the Spline Sidewalk tool to
Polyline Driveway create a curved sidewalk. Select
Use the Polyline Driveway tool to Terrain> Sidewalk> Spline Sidewalk.
create a sidewalk of any shape. Spline roads are drawn and edited like CAD
Driveway polylines conform to the surface of splines. See “Splines” on page 908.
the terrain beneath them.
Polyline Sidewalk
To place a driveway polyline, select
Terrain> Driveway> Driveway Use the polyline sidewalk tool to
create a sidewalk of any shape.
Polyline and click and drag to draw a
Sidewalk polylines conform to the surface of
rectangular polyline in floor plan view.
the terrain beneath them.
Driveway polylines are edited just like CAD
To place a sidewalk polyline select Terrain>
polylines. See “Polylines” on page 900.
Sidewalk> Sidewalk Polyline and click
Straight Sidewalk and drag to draw a rectangular polyline in
floor plan view.
To create a sidewalk with no curves,
select Terrain> Sidewalk> Straight Sidewalk polylines are edited just like CAD
Sidewalk, then click and drag from end to polylines. See “Polylines” on page 900.
638
Auto Generate Sidewalks 1 Left/Right Side of Road - Check one

or both boxes to generate a sidewalk on
Select a road or median and click the the selected road object.
Auto Generate Sidewalk edit button
to open the Auto Generate Sidewalks 2 All Connected Roads - Check this box
dialog. to generate a sidewalk along all other
roads connected to the selected road object.
3 Offset From Road - Specify a gap

between the generated sidewalk and the
1 selected road object.
2
3
Displaying Road Objects

Roads and sidewalks display in floor roads and sidewalks will not display, either:
plan and 3D views based on the even if their layers are turned on.
settings for their layers in the Layer Display
By default, terrain rebuilds automatically
Options dialog. See “Layers” on page 116.
when road objects are added, removed or
edited. If it does not, you can select Terrain>
In 3D Views
Build Terrain . See “Terrain Perimeter”
Road objects display in 3D views within the on page 581.
Terrain Perimeter. If the display of the
Terrain Perimeter is turned off in 3D views,
Editing Road Objects

Road objects can be selected individually Using the Mouse
and as a group in 2D and 3D views and
edited using the edit handles, the edit toolbar The edit handles available for a selected road
and their specification dialogs. See “Road object depend on the type of object selected.
Specification Dialog” on page 640 and • Straight Roads , straight Driveways
“Terrain Path Specification Dialog” on page
610. , straight Road Stripes , and
Straight Sidewalks are edited along
their centerline like a line or open
639
Adding Road Objects to the Library
polyline. See “Editing Line Based In the Specification Dialog

Road objects can be extensively customized
• Spline Roads and Sidewalk Splines in their specification dialogs. See “Road
are edited along their centerline like
CAD splines. See “Splines” on page 908.
• Polyline Roads , Cul-de-sacs ,
A selected road object or objects can be
Medians , Road Markings edited in a variety of ways using the buttons
Polyline Driveways and Polyline on the edit toolbar. See “Edit Toolbar
Sidewalks are edited along their
perimeter, like standard polylines. The Convert to Polyline Object
width is determined by the polyline’s
shape. See “Editing Closed-Polyline A selected Straight or Spline Road,
Based Objects” on page 160. Sidewalk or Driveway can be
converted into a Polyline Road, Sidewalk or
• Medians are also edited like Driveway by clicking the Convert to
polylines. See “Editing Closed-Polyline Polyline Object edit button.
Polyline Roads, Sidewalks and Driveways
display the same edit handles as closed
polylines, allowing you to edit their shapes
as much as needed.
Adding Road Objects to the Library

You can create your own road objects and When a group of terrain objects from the
save them to the library. Select any library is placed into a plan, each object
combination of elevation points, elevation becomes independent and can be edited
lines, terrain features, roads, sidewalks, road individually. See “Adding to the Library” on
markings, or even the terrain perimeter itself page 700.
and send them to the library as one unit.
Road Specification Dialog

To open the Road Specification dialog, Many of the settings in this dialog are similar
select a Straight Road, Spline Road, Polyline to those in the Terrain Path Specification
Road, Median or Cul-de-sac and click the dialog.
640
General Tab
1 Specify the Width and Height of the 2 Flare - Roads can be flared at the Start
road relative to the terrain. and the End when they intersect with
other road objects. Check one or both boxes.
The Width option is not available for a cul-
de-sac or non-centerline road. Radius - Enter the flare radius.
Flaring is not available for culs-de-sac or
non-centerline roads.
Curb Tab
2
3
4
1 Has Curb - Check the box if you want 2 Cut Curb for Driveways and
the selected road to contain a curb. Sidewalks - Check this box to cut the
curb for driveways and sidewalks.
Width - Enter a width value for the curb.
Height - Enter a Height value for the curb. 3 Select Curb Profile - Click this button
to select another curb profile.
641
Median Specification Dialog
4 Default Curb Profile - Click this For more information, see “Spline Tab” on
button to use the default curb profile. page 901.
Polyline Tab Line Style Tab

The Polyline tab lists the perimeter, area and This tab is the same as the Line Style tab in
volume of the road. For more information, many other specification dialogs. See “Line
see “Polyline Tab” on page 901. Style Tab” on page 889.
Selected Line/Arc Tab Fill Style Tab

The Selected Line tab is available when a This tab is the same as the Fill Style tab in
Straight Road is selected. For more many other dialogs. See “Fill Style Tab” on
information, see “Line Tab” on page 888. page 902.
curved segment of a Straight Road is Materials Tab
selected. See “Arc Tab” on page 896. This tab is the same as the Materials tab in
many other specification dialogs. See
Spline Tab “Materials Tab” on page 709.
The Spline tab is available when a Spline The material selected here displays in 3D
Road is selected. Specify the angle between views but is not calculated in the Materials
the line segments used to draw the spline. List.
Median Specification Dialog

The options in the Median Specification Specification. See “Road Specification
dialog are similar to those in the Road Dialog” on page 640.
Driveway Specification Dialog

Select a driveway and click the Open Object
edit button to display the Driveway
642
General Tab
1
2
3
1 Width - Enter a width for the driveway. The Selected Arc tab is available when the
curved segment of a driveway is selected.
2 Height - Enter a Height above the For more information, see “Arc Tab” on page
terrain.
896.
3 Flare - Driveways can be flared at the
Start and the End when they intersect Line Style Tab
with roads or other driveways. Check one or
both boxes. This tab is the same as the Line Style tab in
many other specification dialogs. See “Line
Radius - Enter the flare radius. Style Tab” on page 889.
Polyline Tab Fill Style Tab

The Polyline tab lists the perimeter, area and This tab is the same as the Fill Style tab in
volume of the driveway. For more many other dialogs. See “Fill Style Tab” on
information, see “Polyline Tab” on page 901. page 902.
Selected Line/Arc Tab Materials Tab

The Selected Line tab is available when the This tab is the same as the Materials tab in
straight segment of a driveway is selected. many other specification dialogs. See
For more information, see“Line Tab” on “Materials Tab” on page 709.
page 888.
The material selected here displays in 3D but
is not calculated in the Materials List.
643
Road Marking Specification Dialog
Road Marking Specification Dialog

Select a Road Marking and click the Open selected. For more information, see“Line
Object edit button to display the Road Tab” on page 888.
Marking Specification dialog. The Selected Arc tab is available when the
curved segment of a road marking is
General Tab selected. For more information, see “Arc
Tab” on page 896.
Line Style Tab

This tab is the same as the Line Style tab in
1
1 Width - Enter a width value for the Fill Style Tab

selected Road Marking.
This tab is the same as the Fill Style tab in
many other dialogs. See “Fill Style Tab” on
Polyline Tab page 902.
The Polyline tab lists the perimeter, area and
volume of the road marking. For more Materials Tab
information, see “Polyline Tab” on page 901.
This tab is the same as the Materials tab in
many other specification dialogs. See
Selected Line/Arc Tab “Materials Tab” on page 709.
The Selected Line tab is available when the The material selected here displays in 3D but
straight segment of a road marking is is not calculated in the Materials List.
Sidewalk Specification Dialog

Select a Straight Sidewalk, Spline the Open Object edit button to display
Sidewalk, or Polyline Sidewalk and click the Sidewalk Specification dialog.
644
General Tab
1
2
3
1 Specify the Size of the sidewalk. The Selected Arc tab is available when the
curved segment of a Straight Sidewalk is
• Width - Enter a width for the selected selected. See “Arc Tab” on page 896.
road. This option is not available for a
cul-de-sac or non-centerline road. Spline Tab
• Height - Enter a Height above the terrain The Spline tab is available when a Spline
for the selected road. Sidewalk is selected. See “Spline Tab” on
page 901.
2 Flare - Roads can be flared at the Start
and the End when they intersect with
other road objects. Check one or both boxes. Line Style Tab
Radius - Enter the flare radius. This tab is the same as the Line Style tab in
Flaring is not available for culs-de-sac or Style Tab” on page 889.
non-centerline roads.
Fill Style Tab
Polyline Tab
This tab is the same as the Fill Style tab in
The Polyline tab lists the perimeter, area and many other dialogs. See “Fill Style Tab” on
volume of the sidewalk. See “Polyline Tab” page 902.
on page 901.
Materials Tab
Selected Line/Arc Tab
This tab is the same as the Materials tab in
The Selected Line tab is available when a many other specification dialogs. See
Straight Sidewalk is selected. For more “Materials Tab” on page 709.
information, see“Line Tab” on page 888.
The material selected here displays in 3D but
is not calculated in the Materials List.
645
Sidewalk Specification Dialog
646
647
Chapter 22:
Other Objects
Chief Architect has additional objects that Chapter Contents

can be used to customize your design. • Primitive Tools
• Creating Primitives
• Editing Primitives
• 3D Box Specification Dialog
• Sphere Specification Dialog
• Cylinder Specification Dialog
• Cone Specification Dialog
• Polyline Solids
• Polyline Solid Specification Dialog
• Soffits
• Special Applications for Soffits
• Calculating Materials on Soffits
• Soffit Specification Dialog
• Distributed Objects
• Distribution Region/Path Specification
Dialogs
• Fireplaces
• Fireplace Specification Dialog
• Library Fireplaces
• Chimneys
648
Primitive Tools
The Primitive Tools allow you to Cylinder
create basic solid geometric shapes,
which can be combined to create a wide Select the Cylinder tool, then click
variety of custom solid objects. Select and drag to draw a solid 3D cylinder.
Build> Primitive to display the Primitive
Tools. Cone
With the exception of Faces, objects made Select the Cone tool, then click and
with the Primitive Tools are included in drag to draw a solid 3D cone.
materials list calculations, although it is best
that their specified materials are either Polyline Solid
Concrete or Volume material types. See
Select the Polyline Solid tool, then
“Define Material Dialog” on page 719.
click and drag to draw a polyline solid.
Despite their name, polyline solids are not
Box true solids; however, they can be converted
Select the Box tool, then click and drag into solids. See “Polyline Solids” on page
to draw a solid 3D box. See “Creating 658.
Primitives” on page 649.
Face
Sphere Select the Face tool, then click and
Select the Sphere tool, then click and drag to draw the edges of a two-
drag to draw a solid 3D sphere. dimensional surface. Faces are two-sided,
can display in 3D views and be used to create
custom Solid objects. See “Face Objects” on
page 650.
Creating Primitives
Primitive solids are drawn similar to the way • To create 3D Box , click and drag in
CAD boxes and circles are. Depending on any direction other than vertical or hori-
the view in which they are created, however, zontal to define the width and depth of
the method may differ somewhat. the box’s base. Its initial height is 1”.
In Floor Plan View • To create a Sphere , Cylinder or

In floor plan view, primitive solids are drawn Cone , click and drag in any direction
much the way boxes and circles are. Select a to define the radius.
tool, then click and drag to define an area.
649
Editing Primitives
• As it is drawn, the height of a Cylinder Convert to Solid

or Cone is equal to its radius. Click the Convert To Solid edit button
Initially, the bottom surface of boxes, to convert the selected polyline solid or
cylinders and cones, and the center point of slab into a solid so that it can be used with
spheres, are all set at 0” on the Z axis. See other solids to create complex structures.
“Entering Coordinates” on page 142.
Face Objects
In 3D Views Regardless of the view, primitive faces are
In 3D views, the height of boxes, cylinders drawn the way line-based objects are when
and cones can be defined as they are drawn. the Alternate edit behavior is active. See
“Alternate” on page 138.
• To create 3D Box , Cylinder or
Cone , click and drag to define the To draw a Face
width and depth of the box’s base, then
drag upward or downward to define its
1. Select Build> Primitive> Face ,
height.
then click, drag and release the mouse
• Drag upward to set the height of the bot- button to draw the first edge.
tom surface at 0”, or drag downward to
2. Click to define the endpoints of addi-
set the top surface at 0”.
tional edges. A Face must have at least
• To create a Sphere , click and drag in three edges.
any direction to define its radius. 3. To finish drawing, click at the original
starting point. This is easiest to do when
In Cross Section/Elevation Endpoint snapping is enabled. See
Views “Object Snaps” on page 133.
With the exception of Polyline Solids Once drawn, Faces can be extruded to create
Solid objects.
and Faces , primitives cannot be created
in cross section/elevation views. See
“Polyline Solids” on page 658.
Editing Primitives
Primitives can be selected individually and Using the Mouse
as a group and edited using the edit handles,
the edit toolbar and their respective Objects drawn using the Primitive Tools can
specification dialogs. be edited similar to CAD boxes or circles.
When selected, a primitive displays six edit
handles: a Move handle, a Rotate handle and
650
a Resize handle on each edge. Unlike CAD A custom chimney can be designed using 3D
boxes or circles, primitives do not have Boxes and Cylinders and the Union
corner Resize edit handles.
and Subtract edit tools.
Faces are the exception to this statement.
Like Polyline Solids, they have Resize edit
handles on each edge and can be edited like
closed polylines. See “Editing Closed-

A selected primitive or primitives can be
Creating Complex Structures

with Primitives
Primitive objects can be manipulated and
combined to produce complex structures.
Use the Union , Intersection and
Subtract edit tools to create unique 3D
shapes and combine shapes into Architec-
tural Blocks . See “Architectural Blocks”
on page 676.
A detailed model truck can be created using
A fireplace, for example, can be created by
3D Boxes and Cylinders and the
arranging 3D Boxes .
Union , Intersection and Subtract
edit tools.
651
Editing Primitives
Structures created using the Primitive Tools

can be converted to symbols. See “Convert
to Symbol” on page 987.
Explode Shape
The Explode Shape edit tool allows
you to explode a selected Solid object
into a collection of faces.
Extrude Object
Decorative stone columns can be modeled The Extrude Object edit tool allows
you to produce a Solid object by
using 3D Boxes and the Union , and extruding a selected Face object in any direc-
Subtract edit tools. tion. See “3D Drafting” on page 28.
To use Extrude Object
1. Select a Face object and click the

Extrude Object edit button.
2. In the Extrude Object dialog, specify

When a primitive has been manipulated the Extrusion Delta, which is the direc-
tion and distance that the object is
using the Union , Intersection and extruded.
Subtract edit tools, it is no longer a • Specify the distances that the object
primitive that can be resized or reshaped should extrude in the directions of each
using the edit handles or specification dialog. of the three axes.
Instead, it is a considered a solid. See “Shape 3. Click OK.
652
Revolve Object Axis in the current plan. The object

will revolve in the Y and Z axes.
The Revolve Object edit tool allows
• Select Y-Axis to revolve the object
you to produce a Solid object by
around a line that runs parallel to the Y
extruding a selected Face object while rotat-
Axis in the current plan. The object
ing it around an axis or point that you spec-
will revolve in the X and Z axes.
ify.
• Select Z-Axis to revolve the object
To use Revolve Object around a line that runs parallel to the Z
Axis in the current plan. The object
1. Select a Face object and click the will revolve in the X and Y axes.
• Select User Defined to define the axis
Revolve Object edit button.
around which the object will revolve.
3. When User Defined is selected, the X, Y
and Z Direction fields become active.
Type a length value in each field to spec-
ify the direction of a custom Axis of
Rotation. All three values cannot be 0.
No specific unit is used: instead, the
ratio between these numbers is used to
define an axis of rotation.
4. Specify the Rotate About Point, which
is the point around which the object will
rotate.
5. Specify the Angle of Rotation, which is
2. In the Revolve Object dialog, specify
how far around the axis of rotation that
the Axis of Rotation, which determines
the object will rotate. A value of 180°
the direction that the object will rotate.
will rotate the object half-way around
The Axis of Rotation is a line that is per-
the axis, while 360° will rotate it in a
pendicular to the direction in which the
complete circle.
object will rotate.
• Select X-Axis to revolve the object 6. Click OK.
around a line that runs parallel to the X
3D Box Specification Dialog

Select a 3D box and click the Open When you first draw a 3D box, the origin of
Object edit button to open the 3D Box the box is the point where you start drawing
it; the width of the box is the X axis
dimension.
653
3D Box Specification Dialog
1 2
1 Dimensions - Use this section to Angle in XY Plane - Enter a number from 1

specify the size of the box. to 360 to control the rotation of the box on
the X axis.
Enter the Width, Length, and Height of the
box. Angle From XY Plane - This number
controls the rotation of the box on the Y axis.
2 Origin - Use these settings to position
the origin of the box in relation to the Angle Around Width Vector - Enter the
origin point of your plan. See “Entering number to specify the rotation of the box on
Coordinates” on page 142. the Z axis.
Enter the X, Y, and Z delta coordinates for
the box. Line Style Tab
3 Width Vector - A width vector is an “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
invisible line that runs the width of the
box. Use the width vector settings to
precisely control the rotation of the box in Materials Tab
free space. For information about the Materials tab, see
654
Sphere Specification Dialog

Select a sphere and click the Open
Object edit button to open the Sphere
1
2
3
4
1 Radius - Specify the radius of the Line Style Tab

sphere.
2 Center X - Specify the exact position “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
of the sphere by entering the location of
the center on the X axis. Materials Tab
3 Center Y - Enter the position of the For information about the Materials tab, see
sphere center relative to the Y axis. “Materials Tab” on page 709.
4 Center Z - Enter the position of the
sphere center relative to the Z axis.
655
Cylinder Specification Dialog
Cylinder Specification Dialog

Select a cylinder and click the Open
Object edit button to open the Cylinder
1 2
1 Dimensions - Use these settings to settings to control the rotation of the cylinder
specify the size of the cylinder. in free space.
• Radius - Enter the radius of the cylinder. • Angle in XY Plane - Use this number to
• Height - Specify the height of the cylin- control the rotation on the X axis.
der. Because the cylinder is round, it only
changes appearance if you also enter a
2 Center - Locate the cylinder precisely number in Angle From XY Plane.
with these settings.
• Angle From XY Plane - This number
• X - Enter the location of the cylinder cen- controls the rotation of the cylinder on
ter along the X axis. the Y axis.
• Y - Enter the location of the cylinder cen-
ter along the Yaxis. Line Style Tab
• Z - Enter the location of the cylinder cen- For information about the Line Style tab, see
ter along the Z axis. “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
3 Axis - The axis is an invisible line that Materials Tab

runs the length of the cylinder. By
default, this axis is vertical. Use the Axis For information about the Materials tab, see
656
Cone Specification Dialog

Select a cone and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Cone Specification
dialog.
1 2
1 Dimensions - These setting specify the • Angle in XY Plane - Use this number to
size of the cone. control the rotation on the X plane.
• Radius - Enter the radius of the cone. Because the cone is round, it only
changes appearance if you also enter a
• Height - Enter the height of the cone. number in Angle From XY Plane.
2 Center - You can locate the cone • Angle From XY Plane - This number
precisely relative to the origin using controls the rotation of the cone on the Y
these settings. plane.
• X - Enter the location of the cone center
along the X axis. Line Style Tab
• Y - Enter the location of the cone center For information about the Line Style tab, see
along the Yaxis. “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
• Z - Enter the location of the cone center
along the Z axis. Materials Tab
3 The Axis is an invisible line that runs For information about the Materials tab, see
the length of the cone. By default, this “Materials Tab” on page 709.
axis is vertical. Use the Axis settings to
control the rotation of the cone in free space.
657
Shape Specification Dialog
Shape Specification Dialog

Select a Face, a solid created using the converting a slab or polyline solid and click
Union , Intersection and Subtract the Open Object edit button to open the
Shape Specification dialog.
edit tools, or a solid created by
Shape Tab
The 3D Surface Quality settings control can be from the true location of the
how any curved surfaces on the selected curved surface. Lower values produce
object are rendered in 3D views. more triangles and a smoother appear-
• Check Automatic to have the program ance in 3D views.
define the Maximum Deflection, which is
the amount each flat, triangular surface Line Style Tab
used to represent a curved surface in 3D For information about the Line Style tab, see
can deviate from the true curvature of the “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
object. For more information about trian-
gles, see “Higher Quality Rendering” on
Materials Tab
page 774.
• Specify the Maximum Deflection in For information about the Materials tab, see
plan inches (mm). This value is the maxi- “Materials Tab” on page 709.
mum distance that a point on a triangle
Polyline Solids
Polyline Solids are polyline shaped 3D Creating Polyline Solids
objects with a specified thickness.
They can be oriented either horizontally or A horizontal polyline solid can be created in
vertically and are useful for creating custom floor plan view or any 3D view by selecting
details anywhere in your 3D model. Build> Primitive> Polyline Solid , then
either clicking clicking and dragging to draw
658
a rectangle. See “Rectangular Polyline” on Converting CAD Polylines

page 903.
A closed CAD polyline can be converted into
A vertical polyline solid can be created in a a polyline solid in floor plan and cross
cross section/elevation view by selecting section/elevation views using the Convert
Build> Primitive> Polyline Solid , then Polyline edit button. See “Convert
either clicking or clicking and dragging to Polyline” on page 205.
draw a rectangle. The polyline solid is placed
in front of any objects visble in the view. If Convert to Solid
no objects are behind, the polyline solid is
placed one foot in front of the camera. You can convert a polyline solid to a
primitive in order to build complex
Polyline solids can be edited the way other solid structures. Select the polyline solid you
closed polyline-based objects are. See want to convert and click Convert to Solid
“Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on on the edit toolbar.
page 160.
Polyline Solid Specification Dialog

To open the Polyline Solid Specification
3 Thickness - Specify the thickness for
dialog, click on a polyline to select it, then the polyline solid. Increasing the
click the Open Object edit button. thickness will cause the polyline solid to
grow upward (horizontal) or toward the
elevation/cross section camera (vertical).
General Tab
Polyline Tab
1
Selected Line Tab
2
1 Hole in Polyline Solid - Select to Line Style Tab

convert the polyline solid into a hole in
a surrounding polyline solid. For information about the Line Style tab, see
2 Height - Specify the height of the top
of the polyline solid. This property is
not available for vertical polyline solids.
659
Soffits
Fill Style Tab Materials Tab

For information about the Fill Style tab, see For information about the Materials tab, see
“Fill Style Tab” on page 902. “Materials Tab” on page 709.
Soffits
Soffits typically fill the space between Once a soffit is placed in a plan, you can
the tops of wall cabinets and the change its size and position to meet a variety
ceiling, but they are very versatile and can be of needs.
used to create almost any other object that
can be modeled as a 3D box. Placing Soffits
Soffits can be created in both 2D and 3D
Soffit Defaults
views. They can be assigned materials that
The default settings for soffits are set in the are calculated in the Materials List, but by
Soffit Defaults dialog. The settings in this default they use the material assigned to the
dialog are similar to those in the Soffit default wall. See “Wall, Railing and Fencing
Specification dialog. See “Soffit Defaults” on page 215.
When positioned against a wall in a room,
For best results when placing soffits above soffits will display any moldings present in
wall cabinets, soffits should be the same that room that are at the same height as the
width as and 1" (20mm) deeper than the soffit. See “Moldings Tab” on page 290.
default wall cabinet. See “Cabinet Defaults”
Like cabinets, soffits can also have custom
on page 547.
molding profiles specified. See “Moldings
The default soffit height should be equal to Tab” on page 573.
the space between the ceiling and the top of
When a soffit is created, it is placed on the
the wall cabinets.
Cabinets, Soffits layer. See “Layer Display
The maximum soffit width is 170 feet (52m), Options Dialog” on page 121.
and the minimum width is 1/16" (1 mm).
Special Applications for Soffits

Anything that can be represented by a three
dimensional box of any size or angle can be Note: For free form shapes, polyline solids
represented by a soffit. They can be resized may be better suited for the job. See “Polyline
to as small as 1/16" x 1/16" x 1/16" (1mm x Solids” on page 658.
For a box that can be rotated around any
1mm x 1mm) or as large as 135 feet (32m).
side, a 3D box may be better suited. See
“Box” on page 649.
660
Soffits can have materials applied to them to Masonry Veneer

represent simple mirrors, posts, chimneys
and so on. As an alternative to pony walls, create a
brick or stone veneer that extends halfway up
Following are some additional examples. a wall using soffits placed around the base of
the house. Specify a depth for the soffits
Accent Tiles equal to the masonry material to be used.
A material such as ceramic tile can be
assigned to one or more soffits applied to the
walls above tubs or in showers.
Soffits automatically stop at the floor

platform when moved downward. To place a
soffit for a brick ledge, create a Cross
Section/Elevation view looking straight
at the brick ledge. Select the brick soffit, hold
the Ctrl key down, grab the soffit by its
middle handle, and drag it down past the
floor so that it covers the floor platform edge
as well. See “Unrestricted Movement” on
page 178.
Calculating Materials on Soffits

The number of bricks, tiles, shingles, shakes mortar joint) the front of the soffit is
or other materials applied to a soffit is 48"x48”=2304 square inches. Including
calculated using the following rules: the mortar joint, each brick requires 3 3/
• If the soffit depth is less than the larger of 8” x 8 3/8” = 28.26 square inches. 2304
4 inches (10 mm) or 1 ½ times the mate- sq. in. divided by 28.26 sq. in. per brick
rial thickness, then only the front area of gives 81.5 bricks.
the soffit is used. Thus if a soffit is • If the soffit depth is greater than both 4
48"x48”x4” thick, and the Dark Red inches (10 mm) and 1 ½ times the mate-
brick material is used (3"x 8" with 3/8” rial thickness, then the surface areas of
661
Soffit Specification Dialog
the soffit back, sides and top are used in gle layer of the material applied to each
addition to the front, if these surfaces are applicable face.
not attached to a wall or other soffit. • For shingles and shakes, the overlap
However, only those portions of the amount should be subtracted from the
sides, top and bottom remaining after height, as opposed to brick or tile, where
subtracting twice the material thickness the joint width is added to the size.
are used. So, for Dark Red brick, which
has a depth of 4", the sides, top and bot- • For materials in the area category, the
tom surface areas cannot contribute to the soffit area calculation above is used, with
brick count unless the soffit depth is the material thickness treated as zero.
greater than 8 inches. • For materials in the volume, concrete or
• If surface materials such as brick are earth categories, the true volume of the
applied to a large soffit, the soffit center soffit is used.
is assumed to be hollow, with only a sin-

To customize a soffit using the Soffit The settings in this dialog are similar to those
Specification dialog, double-click on the in the Soffit Defaults dialog, but affect only
soffit using the Soffit tool or select the the selected object(s).
soffit and click the Open Object edit

button.
662
General Tab
1 Specification - Define the size and Sloped Soffit is checked. See “Sloped
position of the selected soffit relative to Soffits” on page 664.
the floor or terrain. • Follow Terrain - Check this box to make
• Height - Define the vertical height of the a soffit placed outside a building adjust
soffit. its height to the height of the terrain.
• Width - Specify the width of the soffit.
2 Options - Specify a sloped soffit and/or
• Depth - Define the the distance between position relative to the roof or ceiling.
the front and the back of the soffit. When • Check Sloped Soffit to slope the soffit
selected in floor plan view, the front of a vertically from the back up towards the
soffit has a “V,” and the back of the soffit front. When you specify a soffit as
has a triangular rotation handle. sloped, the options on the General tab
• Floor to Bottom - Specify the distance change. See “Sloped Soffits” on page
from the bottom of the soffit to the floor. 664.
This is sometimes more easily done by • Check Place Under Roof to have the sof-
positioning the soffit in a 3D view. fit’s slope follow that of the roof. The
• Height at Front - This option applies to soffit moves up and the top of the soffit is
sloped soffits and becomes enabled when in the same plane as the roof, at the same
pitch as the roof. Be sure to place the
663
front of the soffit toward the high side of Layer Tab

the roof. Only available when Sloped
Soffit is checked. Not available in the The Layer tab is found in the specification
Soffit Defaults dialog. dialogs for many different objects. For more
information, see “Layer Tab” on page 125.
• Check Place Under Ceiling to move the
soffit vertically until the top contacts the
Fill Style Tab
ceiling plane. Not available in the Soffit
Defaults dialog. The Fill Style tab is found in the
3 A preview of the soffit displays on the objects. For more information, see “Fill Style
right side of the dialog box.
Tab” on page 902.
4 Check Show Color to display the
soffit’s material in the preview. Materials Tab
The Materials tab is found in the
Moldings Tab
The Moldings tab is found in the specifica- objects. For more information, see
tion dialogs for many different objects. For “Materials Tab” on page 709.
more information, see “Moldings Tab” on
page 573.
Sloped Soffits
When a soffit is specified as a sloped soffit, The three inset diagrams show how the
the options on the General tab of the Soffit options in the dialog affect a sloped soffit.
Specification dialog change.
664
Elevation View
Floor Plan View

3D view
Front
• Thickness is measured perpendicular to Both the front and back heights of a sloped
the slope of the soffit. soffit must be defined.
• Width is measured left to right across the • Height at Back is measured from the fin-
soffit. ished floor to the lowest point at the back
• Horizontal Length is measured from of the soffit.
back to front in floor plan view. Since the • Height at Front is measured from the
soffit is sloped, this measurement is not finished floor to the underside of the sof-
the actual length of the soffit. It cannot, fit at the upper end.
for example, be used to determine the
length of a sloped beam.
665
Distributed Objects
Distributed Objects
The Distributed Object tools allow 3. Distribution paths are drawn like other
you to place multiple copies of an open polyline and spline-based objects.
object in an evenly spaced array, either • Click and drag from end to end to draw
within a region or along a path. Select one or more connected lines or spline
Build> Distributed Object to access these segments.
tools.
4. Select the region and click the Open
Object edit button.
5. In the Distribution Region
Specification dialog:
• Select the object to be distributed
within the region.
• Specify the distributed objects’ spac-
ing, orientation and positioning.
Distribution Distribution • Click OK to close the dialog.
Regions Paths Once created, Distribution Regions and
To create distributed objects Paths can be edited into nearly any shape you
require. See “Editing Closed-Polyline Based
1. Select Build> Distributed Object and Objects” on page 160 and “Editing Spline
choose the desired Distributed Object Based Objects” on page 166.
tool.
Explode Distributed Objects
2. Distribution regions are drawn like other
closed polyline and spline-based objects. Objects grouped in a Distribution
• Click once to place a region with end- Region or Path cannot be individually
points that form a 10’ (4 m) square. selected. You can, however, click the
• Click and drag from end to end to draw Explode Distributed Object edit button to
a region sized as needed. separate a region or path into its individual
components. Once exploded, a Distribution
Region or Path cannot be regrouped.
Distribution Region/Path Specification Dialogs

Select a Distribution Region or Path and The settings in these two dialogs are similar
click the Open Object edit button to and most tabs are also found in the
open the Distribution Region or specification dialogs for a variety of other
Distribution Path Specification dialog.
CAD-based objects.
666
Distributed Object Tab - Distribution Region
1 Current Object - Specify the object • Check Show Objects to display the dis-
assigned to the selected region. tributed objects in floor plan view.
• Click the Select button to choose an • Check Show Region to display the edges
object from the library. See “Select of the distribution region in floor plan
Library Object Dialog” on page 689. view.
• A preview of the Current Object along
with its name display to the left. 2 Object Spacing - Specify how the
objects in the region are spaced.
• Click the Delete button to unassign the • Specify the Distance between the objects
Current Object from the selected region. in the region, as measured from their cen-
• Click the Edit button to open the Current ter points.
Object’s specification dialog. Changes • Select Standard Grid to position the
made here affect all objects generated objects in rows and columns based on the
within the region. See “Specification standard X/Y grid in the program. This
Dialogs” on page 33. grid is affected by Rotate View. See
“Rotate View” on page 189.
667
• Select Alternate Grid to position the • Select Random Angle to rotate the
objects in rows and columns based on the objects in the region at a variety of ran-
shape of the region. dom angles.
3 Object Orientation - Specify how or if 4 Object Positioning - Specify the

the objects in the region are rotated. positioning of the distributed objects
These settings do not affect the region itself relative to a point of origin within the region.
or its edges. • Specify the X Offset, the horizontal dis-
• Specify the Angle that the distributed tance in floor plan view from the region’s
objects should be placed at. specified point of origin.
• Select Absolute Angle to rotate the • Specify the Y Offset, the vertical dis-
objects to the specified Angle as mea- tance in floor plan view from the region’s
sured from an imaginary horizontal line specified point of origin.
drawn from the origin towards the right. • Select From Polyline Center to measure
• Select Relative Angle to rotate the the offset from the region’s center point.
objects relative to the angle of the • Select Polyline Start to measure the off-
region’s first edge or, if that edge is set from the region’s start point. This start
curved, to the angle of its chord. The first point is typically located at the top left of
edge is typically located at the top of the the region when it is first created; how-
region when it is first created; however, ever, this can change as the region is
this can change as the region is edited. edited.
668
Distributed Object Tab - Distribution Path
1 Current Object - Specify the object • Check Show Objects to display the
assigned to the selected path. assigned objects in floor plan view.
• Click the Select button to choose an • Check Show Path to display the distribu-
object from the library. See “Select tion path in floor plan view.
Library Object Dialog” on page 689.
• A preview of the Current Object along 2 Object Spacing - Specify how the
objects along the path are spaced, as
with its name display to the left. measured from their center points.
• Click the Delete button to unassign the • Select Distance Between Object Cen-
Current Object from the selected region ters to maintain a specific distance
or path. between all objects, measured from their
• Click the Edit button to open the Current centers. If the path is resized, the total
Object’s specification dialog. Changes number of objects may change.
made here affect all objects generated • Specify the Distance Between Object
along the path. See “Specification Dia- Centers in the text field to the right.
logs” on page 33.
669
• Select Number of Evenly Distributed Polyline Tab

Objects to maintain a specific number of
objects. If the path is resized, the spacing The Polyline tab is found in the specification
between objects may change. dialog for closed polyline-based objects
throughout the program, and indicates the
• Specify the Number of Objects in the length of the polyline’s Perimeter, its
text field to the right. enclosed Area, and its Volume.
3 Object Orientation - Specify how or if
the objects on the path are rotated. Spline Tab
• Specify the Angle that the distributed The Spline tab has a single option and is only
objects should be placed at. available when the selected object is a spline.
• Select Absolute Angle to rotate the See “Splines” on page 908.
objects to the specified Angle as mea-
sured from an imaginary horizontal line
drawn from the origin towards the right.
• Select Relative Angle to rotate each
object relative to the edge of the polyline
or spline that it is located on.
• Select Random Angle to rotate the
objects in the region at a variety of ran- New Segment Angle - Specify the angle
dom angles. between line segments that are used to draw
4 Object Positioning - Specify the the spline smoother. Specify a larger angle to
positioning of the distributed objects draw the spline faster.
relative to the path itself.
• Specify the Side Offset, the distance that Selected Line Tab
the objects are offset to the side of the
path, using positive or negative numbers
selected edge of the region or path is a line as
to offset to one side or the other.
• Specify the Start Offset, the distance that page 145.
the first object on the path is offset from
the starting point of the line, polyline or Moving the Start of a line segment moves the
spline. end of the previous connected line, if there is
• Check Alternate Sides to position segment moves move the start of the next
objects on alternating sides of the path, connected line, if there is one.
creating a stepped pattern.
The settings on the Line tab are found in a
variety of specification dialogs throughout
the program. See “Line Tab” on page 888.
670
Selected Arc Tab Line Style Tab

The Selected Line tab is available when the The settings on the Line Style tab are found
selected edge of the region or path is an arc in a variety of specification dialogs
as opposed to a line. See “Selected Edge” on throughout the program. See “Line Style
page 145. Tab” on page 889.
The settings on the Arc tab are found in a
variety of specification dialogs throughout Fill Style Tab
the program. See “Arc Tab” on page 896. The settings on the Fill Style tab are found in
a variety of specification dialogs throughout
the program. See “Fill Style Tab” on page
902.
Fireplaces
A masonry fireplace can be placed in Built into a Wall
or away from a wall by selecting
Build> Fireplace and then clicking in the To place a masonry fireplace in a wall, select
drawing area. Build> Fireplace and click on a wall. A
• If created in a wall, it is considered a wall fireplace is created with the outside of the
opening and can be moved or resized like fireplace flush with the outside of the wall.
a window or door.
• If created away from a wall, it moves and
resizes similar to a cabinet.
A selection of prefabricated metal fireplaces
is also available from the Fixtures (Interior)
library category. These can be framed in with Select the fireplace to display four edit
standard walls. See “Libraries” on page 682. handles located along the wall.
The display of fireplaces is controlled in the
Fireplaces are edited, moved, resized, and
deleted similar other objects. See “Editing
Objects” on page 130. Click the diamond-shaped Depth handle and
drag toward the outside of the wall. The
fireplace will stop when the firebox front is
flush with the inside edge of the wall.
671
Fireplace Specification Dialog
Unlike fireplaces placed in walls, free-

standing fireplace have ten edit handles when
selected and may be rotated, resized, or
moved in any direction, similar to the way
CAD boxes can. See “Editing Box-Based
In 3D views, fireplaces placed in walls Free-standing fireplaces can be selected and

display five edit handles: a Resize handle replaced with a symbol from the library by
along each edge and a Move handle at the clicking the Replace From Library edit
center. button. See “Replace From Library” on page
693.
Fireplaces always face the interior when
placed on an exterior wall. When placing a
fireplace in an interior wall, click on the edge Fireplace Foundations
of the wall that you want the fireplace to If a fireplace is added on the first floor before
face. The fireplace is created with the firebox building the foundation plan, a foundation
on the same side as the wall edge you clicked will be generated under the fireplace when
on to create it. the foundation is built.
Freestanding The fireplace foundation is the same material

type as the original fireplace, but will not
To place a free-standing masonry fireplace, have a firebox or a hearth. This fireplace
select Build> Fireplace and click in an foundation may be edited or deleted as
open area away from a wall. desired. A firebox and hearth can be added in
the Fireplace Specification dialog.
Fireplace Specification Dialog

Select a masonry fireplace and click the objects in selection group must be either
Open Object edit button to display the placed in a wall or free-standing.
Fireplace Specification dialog. Multiple Dimensions in this dialog here must be
fireplaces can be group-selected, but all entered in whole inches. Fractions and
decimals are not accepted.
672
General Tab
1 3
1 Specify the dimensions of the fireplace • Floor to Bottom - Enter the distance
and hearth. from the floor to the bottom of the hearth.
• Height - Specify the height of the fire-
place. 2 Check Suppress Dimensions to turn
off dimensions when this fireplace is
• Width - Specify the width of the fire- selected. This option is only available for a
place. fireplace placed in a wall.
• Depth - Specify the depth of the fire-
3 Add for Rough Opening - Specify the
place. amount to add to Each Side, the Top
• Hearth Depth - Specify the Hearth and the Bottom for the window’s framed
Depth. This is measured from the front of rough opening. These options are only
the fireplace out into the room. To elimi- available for a fireplace placed in a wall.
nate the hearth altogether, enter a zero for
this value. 4 The preview image of the fireplace
updates as changes are made. Press the
• Hearth Height - Specify the height of Tab key to update to the most recent change.
the hearth relative to the floor in that
room.
673
Library Fireplaces
Firebox Tab
1
2
1 No Firebox - Select the check box to from the center. A value of 0 centers the
eliminate the firebox from the fireplace. firebox in the fireplace.
This is often used in the foundation plan to
Offset to Left/Right - Choose to offset the
provide a solid matching base for the
firebox to the left or to the right.
fireplace on the first floor.
2 Set the dimensions of the firebox. Layer Tab

• Enter the firebox’s Height and Width. “Layer Tab” on page 125.
• Enter the Depth of the firebox.
Materials Tab
3 Offset - Enter the number of inches (or
mm) to offset the firebox, measured For information about the Materials tab, see
Library Fireplaces
A variety of different fireplace symbols are 682. The fireplaces in the Library behave just
available in library. See “Libraries” on page like other Library objects.
674
Some fireplace symbols can be enclosed by

Always check the manufacturer’s prod- walls or positioned to project through a wall.
uct information for the framing and
clearance requirements of the fireplace unit
you plan to use, and design your plan
accordingly
Placing a Library Fireplace

A variety of fireplace symbols are available
in the library, See “Creating Objects” on
page 141.
Flush fireplace are designed to snap to wall
surfaces. Open Front Library fireplace
projecting through a 4" wall
Chimneys
Chimneys for • Place a soffit in position over the chim-
Masonry Fireplaces ney chase, resize it to match, then extend
the soffit in a 3D view using the same
To create a chimney on a masonry fireplace method as extending a masonry fireplace.
• Define the chimney chase as a room area
1. Select the fireplace in a 3D view. using walls, making sure these walls are
2. Ctrl + drag the top edge of the chimney aligned between floors. The chimney
upward through all the floors and the chase “room” on the uppermost floor
roof until it is to the desired height. See should have a much higher ceiling than
“Unrestricted Movement” on page 178. the other rooms on that floor and should
also have no ceiling or roof. See “Room
3. When the chimney is approximately the Specification Dialog” on page 283.
correct height, select the fireplace, click
A selection of chimney tops is available in
the Open Object edit button, and
the library. In addition, custom chimney
type in the exact height.
caps can be made using soffits, polyline
solids or other primitive objects.
Chimney Chases & Caps
There are two ways to draw a chimney chase.
675
Chapter 23:
Architectural
Blocks
An architectural block is a collection of Chapter Contents

individual 3D objects that are grouped • Architectural vs CAD Blocks
together so that they can be placed and • Creating Architectural Blocks
moved as a single object. Although blocked • Displaying Architectural Blocks
together, these objects retain many of their • Editing Architectural Blocks
own attributes, such as materials. • Architectural Blocks, Sub-Objects, and
Components
Architectural blocks can also be exploded so
• Architectural Block Specification Dialog
that the individual sub-objects become
independent of one another.
676
Architectural vs CAD Blocks

Just as there are two types of objects in Chief Knowing the differences between these two
Architect, architectural and CAD, there are types of blocks helps you decide which type
two types of blocks. See “Architectural vs of block can best meet your needs.
CAD Objects” on page 131.
A CAD block can include and also be nested
Architectural objects such as cabinets and in a larger block with CAD objects, text and
fixtures can be included in architectural dimensions, but cannot include or be blocked
blocks, while CAD objects such as lines, with architectural objects.
arcs, text and dimensions can be included in
An architectural block can include and also
CAD blocks. See “CAD Blocks” on page
be nested in a larger block with architectural
912.
objects, but cannot include or be blocked
with CAD objects, text or dimensions.
Creating Architectural Blocks

An architectural block is created by • Primitives and Polyline Solids
group-selecting multiple architectural • Molding Polylines
objects and then clicking the Make
Architectural Block edit button. • Roads, Driveways, Sidewalks
• Terrain Features and Terrain Modifiers
The following is a list of objects that can be
included in architectural blocks: Once blocked, the set of blocked objects is
• Cabinets (Base, Wall, Full Height) contained in a bounding box, indicating that
they are now an architectural block.
• Soffits, Shelves, Partitions
• Fixture/Furniture Symbols
• Hardware Symbols
• Millwork Symbols
• Geometric Shape Symbols
• Electrical objects
• Images
Architectural blocks can be created in any
• Custom Countertops & Counter Holes
view.
• Slabs & Foundation Slabs
677
Displaying Architectural Blocks
Displaying Architectural Blocks

Architectural blocks can be displayed in all You can control the appearence of the
views. The display of architectural blocks, bounding box by changing the layer
including their bounding box, is controlled in properties for the architectural block.
The label for an architectural block in floor
“Displaying Objects” on page 117.
plan view can be generated automatically,
You can select an architectural block and created manually, derived from the
click the Move to Front edit button to component code, or suppressed. See “Label
make that block display in front of other Tab” on page 681.
objects in the same drawng group, including The display of architectural blocks in
cabinets and some library symbols. See materials lists and schedules can be turned
“Move to Front of Group” on page 176. off completely. The block can appear as a
The sub-objects of a block can use the layer single unit or its sub-objects and components
attributes assigned to their current layer or can be listed separately. See “General Tab”
the layer attributes assigned to the block. See on page 680.
Editing Architectural Blocks

Architectural blocks can be selected and block has a label, it also has its own Move
edited in 2D and 3D views. See “Selecting handle.
Architectural blocks cannot be resized, but
the individual objects in the block can be.
Note: Moving an architectural block in 3D
view regenerates the view. If the architectural In the Specification Dialog
block contains terrain objects, the terrain is
rebuilt. Architectural blocks can be edited in their
specification dialog. See “Architectural
Once selected, an architectural block can be Block Specification Dialog” on page 680.
edited using its edit handles, edit toolbar
buttons, and specification dialog. See Using the Edit Tools
“Architectural Block Specification Dialog”
on page 680. A selected architectural block or blocks can
be edited in a variety of ways using the
Using the Edit Handles buttons on the edit toolbar. See “Edit Toolbar
A selected architectural block displays a
Move handle and a Rotate handle. If the
678
Editing Sub-Objects Adding Architectural Blocks

The individual objects included in an to the Library
architectural block can also be selected and You can create your own architectural
edited. See “Architectural Blocks, Sub- blocks and save them in the library.
Objects, and Components” on page 679. See “Adding to the Library” on page 700.
Explode Architectural Block Note: If you open a plan that was created in
You can break an architectural block the Full version of Chief Architect in the Base
to make its objects independent. version and select an architectural block, you
cannot unblock it or edit its components.
Select the architectural block and click the
Explode Architectural Block edit button.
Architectural Blocks, Sub-Objects, and Components

An architectural block is composed of a • Explode the architectural block, select
group of sub-objects that have been blocked the sub-object, and click the Open
together. For example, a kitchen island Object edit button.
architectural block may consist of cabinets,
appliances, a custom countertop, and other • Select the sub-object while it is part of
accessories. the architectural block and click the
Each of the sub-objects in an architectural Open Object edit button. Some attri-
block may contain additional parts called butes may not be editable while the
components. The cabinets in a kitchen island, object is part of a block. See “Editing
for example, may contain handles, hinges, Architectural Blocks” on page 678.
and drawer glide.
To edit a sub-object
Architectural blocks can be treated as a
single unit in materials lists, ignoring sub- 1. Click the Select Objects button,
objects and their components. See “General then click on the sub-object that you
Tab” on page 680. would like to edit.
2. With the architectural block selected,
Sub-Objects
click the Select Next Object edit
Certain attributes of an architectural block button or press the Tab key.
can be edited at the sub-object level. A sub-
The selection switches to the individual
object can be edited by accessing its
object and it can be edited using its edit
specification dialog in either of two ways:
handles, edit toolbar and specification
dialog.
679
Architectural Block Specification Dialog
The ability to edit an object as part of a block Components dialog lists all the sub-objects
may be more restricted than if the object that comprise an architectural block, as well
were independent. If more extensive editing as the components that make up each sub-
is required, the architectural block must be object.
exploded.
To open the Components dialog, select an
architectural block and click the
Components
Components edit button. See
You can view and/or modify the components “Components Dialog” on page 1062.
of an architectural block (or group of blocks)
through the Components dialog. The
Architectural Block Specification Dialog

The Architectural Block Specification Select an architectural block or group of
dialog controls the way architectural blocks architectural blocks and click the Open
display in floor plan view and in materials Object edit button to open the
lists and schedules. Architectural Block Specification dialog
for the selected block(s).
General Tab
1
2
3
4
1 Display Bounding Box - Check this to the architectural block. The box uses the
show the bounding box of the objects in Architectural Blocks Layer settings.
680
2 Display Sub-Objects Using Block Note: "Other" must be checked in the Sched-
Layer - Check this box to apply the
display properties for the architectural block ule Specification dialog for the architectural
layer as specified in the Layer Display block to appear in the schedule. See “Text
Tab” on page 1040.
Options dialog to all of the sub-objects.
If this box is not checked, all the sub-objects Layer Tab

display according to the display properties
set for their current layer. See “Displaying For information about the Layer tab, see
Objects” on page 117. “Layer Tab” on page 125.
3 Ignore Sub-Objects - Check this box Label Tab

to treat the architectural block as a
single unit in materials lists and schedules. The Label Tab is available for a variety of
This also turns off sub-objects in floor plan different objects. For more information, see
view, displaying only the bounding box. “Label Tab” on page 1045.
4 Block Schedule - Specify which

schedule the architectural block appears Note: Labels for architectural blocks only dis-
in when Ignore Sub-Objects is checked. play in floor plan view.
Select None to exclude the architectural
block from all schedules.
681
Chapter 24:
Libraries
Chief Architect’s library contains thousands Chapter Contents

of symbols, materials, and images that can • The Library Browser
enhance any plan. Anything that you want to • Library Browser Contents
incorporate in your building design that • Selection and Preview Panes
cannot be made with Chief Architect’s • Library Search Dialog
architectural and drafting tools can be found • Select Library Object Dialog
in the library, created or imported and then • Placing Library Objects
saved in the library for future use. • Place Library Object Button
New library catalogs and enhancements are • Replace From Library
created by Chief Architect on a continuing • Displaying Library Objects
basis and are available for download. There • Editing Library Objects
are also third party developers who have • Library Objects and the Materials List
created their own libraries for Chief • Symbol Object Specification Dialogs
Architect that are available for purchase. • Editing Libraries
• Adding to the Library
• Importing and Exporting Library Content
682
The Library Browser

The Chief Architect Library Browser is
a repository of ready-to-use symbols,
images, and components that can be used in a 1
plan. Explore the contents, find what you’re
looking for, and place it in your plan. 2
To open the Library Browser:
• Select Library> Library Browser.

• Press Ctrl + L on your keyboard. 3
By default, the Library Browser is docked to
the right side of the program window, but can
be undocked or docked to another side. See
“Docking the Library and Project Browser”
4
on page 685.
The Library Browser window has three
adjustable sections: library directory pane,
selection pane, and preview pane. To adjust
the height or width of a section, place the 5
pointer over the split bar you want to move.
When the double-headed arrow displays, 1 Select the Library Browser tab to view
the Library Browser.
click and drag.
Select the Project Browser tab to view the
Project Browser. See “Project Browser” on
page 924.
2 The library directory displays here. The

overall structure is:
• Library Category
• Library Folder 1
• Library Subfolder 1
• Library Object 1
• Library Subfolder 2
• Library Folder 2 and so on.
683
The Library Browser
Navigate the hierarchy using the tree view, Click the Library Search button to
by clicking in the view window, or by using open the Library Search dialog. See
the keyboard. “Library Search Dialog” on page 687.
You can add your own custom objects to the Click the Plant Chooser button to
User Libraries category and organize them in open the Plant Chooser dialog. See
folders that you create to suit your needs. See “Plant Chooser Dialog” on page 627.
“Adding to the Library” on page 700.
Click the Online Content button to
3 The Selection pane shows thumbnails launch your default web browser to the
for the highlighted item in the directory Chief Architect Web site, where links to third
tree view. Move your cursor over an item in party content developers can be found.
the selection pane to see a tool tip with the
Click the Show/Hide Selection Pane
item’s name. See “The Selection Pane” on
button to toggle the Selection window
page 686.
on and off.
If you have Scrollable List checked in your
Click the Show/Hide Preview Pane
preference settings, a scroll bar is present at
button to toggle the Preview window
the bottom of the selection pane. See
on and off.
“Library Browser Panel” on page 76.
Click the Toggle Display button to
4 The Preview pane displays a 3D or switch between Standard Render and
alternate view of the selected object.
Vector View images of a selected library
You can display preview images in either
object in the Preview pane. See “Rendered
Standard Render or Vector View style. See
and Vector Views” on page 742.
“The Preview Pane” on page 687.
Click the Preferences button to open
You can control the configuration of the
the Library Browser panel of the
Library Browser panes in the Preferences
Preferences dialog, where properties of the
dialog. See “Library Browser Panel” on page
Library Browser are controlled. See “Library
76.
Browser Panel” on page 76.
Select an object by clicking on the desired
object in the pane, then click in the plan to Using the Contextual Menus
place it. Once placed, the object can be
selected, moved, or edited. All placed objects Right-click on an item in the Library
are saved with the plan. Browser to open a contextual menu
displaying options related to that item.
You can work with the Library Browser
open. To close the Library Browser, click the
Close button or double-click on an object
in the Selection pane.
5 The toolbar beneath the tree view aids

in navigating and displaying windows.
684
Once undocked, the Library and Project

Browser can be moved by clicking and
dragging the title bar.
When moved to the top, bottom, or side of
your screen, it automatically docks in a
vertical or horizontal orientation, depending
on its location.
• Disable Docking in the Preferences
dialog prevents the Library and Project
Browser from docking to the side of the
screen. See “Library Browser Panel” on
page 76.
• Holding down the Ctrl key prevents the
Library and Project Browser from dock-
Docking the Library ing while moving.
and Project Browser • If you close the program with the Library
Initially, the Library and Project Browser is and Project Browser docked, it displays
docked to the right side of the Chief in the same position the next time the
Architect program window. program is opened.
To undock the browser window, double-click To return the browser window to its original
the striped grab bar. You can also undock the position and size, click the Restore Position/
browser window by clicking on the grab bar Size button on the Library Browser Panel of
and dragging it into the center of the program the Preferences dialog.
window.
Library Browser Contents

The Library Browser’s contents are divided Select the Help menu and choose Download
into five categories: Chief Architect Library Catalogs to view additional libraries
Libraries, Manufacturer Libraries, User available for download.
Libraries, Import and Export.
Manufacturer Libraries
Chief Architect Libraries
The Manufacturer Libraries category
The Chief Architect Libraries category contains a variety of name-brand products,
contains a wide selection of 3D symbols, from materials to fixtures to CAD blocks.
images, CAD objects, and materials.
For users who participate in the Support and
Software Assurance program, manufacturer
685
Selection and Preview Panes
content can be downloaded from the Chief and organized in a manner that best suits
Architect website and then imported into the your work style.
program. See “Adding to the Library” on
Library content can be imported in either of
page 700.
two ways:
User Libraries • Symbols or groups of symbols can be
imported using the Import 3D Symbol
The User Libraries category contains your dialog. See “Import 3D Symbol Dialog”
custom library files. Here, you can create and on page 968.
organize custom library folders and imported
• Entire Chief Architect library files can be
items such as symbols, CAD blocks, images,
imported using the Import Library Data
backdrops, line styles and materials.
dialog.
Import Libraries Export Libraries
The Import category contains any symbols,
The Export category is used to organize
images, line styles, backdrops and backdrop
library items so that they can be exported as a
libraries that you have recently imported into
Chief Architect library file and either shared
the program. See “Importing and Exporting
with other users or imported into the program
Library Content” on page 702.
on another computer. See “Importing and
Items in the Import category can be selected Exporting Library Content” on page 702.
and moved into the User Libraries category
Selection and Preview Panes

The Selection and Preview panes allow you If you have Scrollable List checked in your
to view and select the items in the tree list. preference settings, a scroll bar is present at
the bottom of the selection pane. See
The display of these preview panes can be
“Library Browser Panel” on page 76.
controlled in the Preferences dialog. See
“Library Browser Panel” on page 76. When you click on a thumbnail in the
selection pane to select it, a rendered 3D
The Selection Pane preview of the item displays in the Preview
pane. You can move your cursor into the
When an item is selected in the Library drawing area to place the selected object.
Browser tree list, a basic three-dimensional
line-based representation of the item displays Click the Show/Hide Selection Pane
in the Selection pane. If the selected item is button to toggle the Selection window
a folder, a thumbnail drawing representing on and off.
each item in the folder displays; if the
selected item is a single object, a drawing of
that object displays.
686
The Preview Pane by clicking in the Selection pane or by right-

clicking on the Preview pane and select
When an individual library item is selected, Reset Preview.
either in the tree list or the Selection pane, a
rendered picture of the object displays in the Click the Show/Hide Preview Pane
Preview pane. button to toggle the Preview window
on and off.
If the selected object is a 3D symbol, you can
rotate and zoom in or out on the Preview Click the Toggle Display button to
using the mouse. Two-dimensional objects, switch between Standard Render and
such as CAD Blocks or Line Styles cannot be Vector View images of a selected library
adjusted in this manner in the Preview pane. object in the Preview pane. See “Rendered
and Vector Views” on page 742.
If you have rotated a view in the Preview
pane, you can restore the default angle either
Library Search Dialog

The Library Search dialog can be used window and the Select Library Object
to search the library for items that meet dialog, to open this dialog.
your search parameters. Click the Library
You can also access this dialog by selecting
Search button, found in the Library Browser
Library> Library Search .
687
Library Search Dialog
5
1
6
1 Search Text - Enter a word or words to • Check Include Folders to include library
use in your search for a name in the folders in your search.
library.
Substrings are not included. For example, The Library Search dialog remembers
searching for the word “windows” will not the last valid search whenever it is
produce “window” as a search result. On the accessed.
other hand, searching for the word “window”
will produce “windows” as a search result. 2 Check Filter by Style, then select one
or more architectural styles to restrict
• Check Match Keyword to match the the search results to objects of that style. If
entered word with an object’s search no styles are checked, search results will not
attributes. See “Search Attributes” on be restricted. See “Search Attributes” on
page 689. page 689.
• Check Match Entire Word to match the
entire word or words with the complete 3 Check Filter by Type, then select one
or more categories of library item to
name of the object.
include in your search.
688
• Click Select All to select all of the cate- performing a Library Search. See “Library
gories in the list. Search Dialog” on page 687.
• Click Clear All to clear all of the catego-
ries. To associate keywords with unlocked library
objects
4 Click the Search button to search the
library using the parameters you 1. Right-click on an object in the User
selected. Libraries, Import or Export category.
2. Select Search Attributes from the con-
The Library Search dialog remembers textual menu.
the last valid search whenever it is
accessed.
5 When the search is complete, the

Number of Items that match your
description displays here.
6 A scrollable list of items in the search

results displays here.
• Click on an item in the list to open the
Library Browser to that item’s location.
• Use the scroll bars or arrow keys to scroll
through the search results.
The Library Search dialog remembers 3. Any searchable Keywords associated

the last valid search whenever it is with the object display in the list on the
accessed.
left. Type in any additional keywords.
Search Attributes 4. Check the box beside any Styles that

you want to associate with the object.
The Search Attributes dialog lists the
5. Click OK to close the dialog and apply
keywords and styles associated with a
your changes.
selected library object. Keywords and styles
can be used to locate the object when
Select Library Object Dialog

The Select Library Object dialog is a modal button to select and apply items from the
version of the Library Browser that is library to the object currently opened for
accessible from object specification dialogs specification. See “Specification Dialogs” on
that display the button. Click this page 33.
689
Placing Library Objects
The Select Library Object dialog and its

individual panes can be resized ; display
the Preview and Selection panes; and can
initiate a Library Search .
If the Select Library Object dialog is opened
by clicking the Library Material button on
The Select Library Object dialog only the Materials tab of any specification dialog
displays categories that are related to the (see“Materials Tab” on page 709), three
opened object. For example, this is how the additional options are available:
Select Library Object dialog displays when
accessed from Front tab of the Door • Click the New Library button to cre-
ate a new library in the Materials cate-
gory.
• Click the New Material button to

open the Define Material dialog and cre-
ate a new material.
• Click the Open Item button to open

the Define Material dialog for the
selected custom material in an unlocked
library. See “Define Material Dialog” on
page 719.
These three options are also found in the
New submenu of the contextual menu that
displays when you right-click an unlocked
library in the Library Browser. See “Using
the Contextual Menus” on page 684.
To make your selection, highlight the desired Click on the Use default material checkbox
object and click OK, or simply double-click to select the material which is currently in
on the object in the selection pane to close use as the default for that particular item in
the Select Library Object dialog. the plan.
Placing Library Objects

Library objects are subject to placement they are placed, for example, and some
restrictions based upon typical real-life library objects have additional requirements.
placement. Most library objects require
Library windows and doors, for example,
sufficient free space at the location where
must be placed in a wall just like standard
690
windows and doors, and some fixtures are is located at the point where they are first
designed to be placed in cabinets. placed.
Library symbols have placement restrictions • A few objects, notably some light fix-
that are determined when the symbol is tures, will mount on the bottom of a wall
created but can be changed later. See cabinet or on the ceiling.
“Symbols vs. Native Objects” on page 695 • In addition, some objects will attach to a
and “Symbol Specification Dialog” on page wall if one is nearby.
974.
If a warning message displays when placing To place a stand alone library object
a library object or symbol, it will indicate
where the object can be placed. 1. Click on an object in the tree view or
selection pane of the Library Browser to
There are three main categories of items select it for placement. See “The Library
available in the Library Browser: Browser” on page 683.
• Stand-alone objects that can be placed 2. Move your cursor into the view area and
directly into a plan. Examples include notice that it displays an icon indicating
cabinet modules, furnishings and images. the type of object selected instead of an
• 3D objects designed to be inserted into arrow icon.
another 3D object. Examples include 3. Click to place the selected object at that
cabinet fixtures, windows and doors. location.
Some items, such as cabinet doors and
4. Continue clicking to place as many
fixtures, can be inserted into another
instances of the selected object as
object or placed as stand-alone objects.
needed. When you are finished, click the
• Materials, molding profiles and line
Select Objects button.
styles, which cannot stand alone and
must be assigned or applied to another Once a stand-alone object has been placed, it
object. can be edited in a variety of ways. See
“Editing Library Objects” on page 694.
Stand-Alone Objects
Most library categories contain objects that
Inserted Objects
can be selected in the Library Browser and Some objects cannot stand alone and must be
placed directly in a 2D or 3D view. placed into other objects in a plan. For
• Most stand-alone objects are designed to example, doors and windows must be
rest on the floor or terrain. inserted into a wall, while some appliances
and plumbing fixtures must be placed inside
• Some objects will rest on top of a cabinet, a base cabinet. See “Doors” on page 292,
shelf, furniture or roof plane object if one “Windows” on page 316 and “Cabinets” on
page 546.
691
Place Library Object Button
To insert a library object • Using the specification dialog of the con-

taining object. See “Select Library Object
1. Click on an object in the tree view or Dialog” on page 689.
selection pane of the Library Browser to • By selecting the item in the library and
select it for placement. See “The Library then clicking on the containing object in
Browser” on page 683. floor plan view.
2. Move your cursor into the drawing area. • Materials can be assigned to objects
3. Click on the object into which you wish directly from the library in 3D views by
to insert the selected library item. The by selecting the material and then
library item is inserted into the object. clicking on an object’s surface. See “The
4. Continue clicking to place as many Material Painter” on page 707.
instances of the selected item as needed. • Moldings and Line Styles can also be
When you are finished, click the Select added to a plan by selecting the desired
Objects button. library item, then clicking and dragging a
line in the drawing area. The result is
either a Molding Line or CAD Line,
Assigned Items depending on the selected library item.
Some library items, such as moldings and See “Molding Polylines” on page 535.
materials, are not objects in themselves but
can be applied to objects in a variety of ways.
Place Library Object Button

The Place Library Object button can
be added to your toolbar and used for
quick access and placement of frequently
used library items.
1
If the Place Library Object button has
not yet been assigned a library object, click it 2
once to open the Library Object Button
Double-click a Place Library Object

button that has been assigned a library object
to open the Library Object Button
1 Click the Library button to open the

Select Library Object dialog and
692
assign a library object to the button. If a from two automatically generated button
library object has already been assigned, icons or click Browse to browse your
click this button to assign a new library computer for a different icon.
object. See “Select Library Object Dialog”
on page 689. Up to 100 Place Library Object buttons
can be added to the same toolbar, each
2 When a library object has been assigned a different object.
selected, assign a button icon. Choose
Replace From Library

The Replace From Library edit Select Replace Identical Objects in Room
button is available for most selected to replace all objects that are in the same
objects. Click this button to open the room as, and are identical to, the currently
Replace From Library dialog and replace selected object.
the selected object, and others like it if you
Select Replace Identical Objects on Floor
choose, with an object of the same type from
to replace all objects that are on the same
the library.
floor as, and are identical to, the currently
selected object.
A few things to remember about Replace
1 From Library :
• Works in floor plan and 3D views.
2 • The replacement option Replace

Identical Objects in Room is not avail-
able for doors and windows.
Replace From Library is available for

any object that can be stored in the Library
1 Click the Library button to open the Browser and can be selected, including:
Select Library Object dialog and select
an object to use as a replacement. The name architectural objects, architectural blocks,
of the object that is currently selected as a electrical objects and image objects.
replacement displays above. Objects that cannot be replaced using this
feature include materials, backdrops, and
2 Select one of the Replacement items assigned to other objects, such as
Options.
materials.
Select Replace Selected Object to replace
only the currently selected object.
693
Displaying Library Objects
Displaying Library Objects

The display options available for library Object Labels
objects depend on the type of object in
question, as well as the view. Fixtures, Furnishings, Geometric Shapes,
Hardware, Millwork, Architectural Blocks
and Plants can display labels in floor plan
In Floor Plan View
view when the appropriate layer is set to
All library objects except materials, doors display in the Layer Display Options dialog.
and drawers applied to cabinets, and For example, fixture labels are placed on the
backdrops can display in floor plan view. “Fixtures, Labels” layer.
Library objects are represented in floor plan
The size of labels for any objects with
view by 2D CAD blocks that resemble the
schedules can be specified in the Schedule
size and shape of the object when viewed
Specification dialog. Label size for objects
from above. To learn how to specify the
without schedules is 2 1/2” (60 mm). See
symbol that represents an object, see “2D
Block Tab” on page 978.
As with other architectural objects, the In 3D Views
display of library objects is controlled by
layer in the Layer Display Options dialog. All library objects except CAD blocks can
Each library category has its own layer. See display in 3D views.
“Layer Display Options Dialog” on page By default, images rotate to face the camera
121. in 3D views. For information about turning
Symbols belong to one of three drawing off image rotation, see “Image Specification
groups that influence which objects display Dialog” on page 936.
in front of others in floor plan view. You can Cabinets from Architectural Blocks and
click the Move to Front of Group edit Cabinet Modules library categories and
button to display a selected symbol in front Doors from the Doors category may also
of over symbols or architectural blocks. See display door opening indicators in Vector
“Drawing Groups” on page 176. Views when the “Opening Indicators” layer
is turned on. See “Layer Display Options
Editing Library Objects

Library objects placed in a plan or layout can information, see “Selecting Objects” on page
be selected individually or as a group, like 144.
other objects in Chief Architect. For more
Once selected, library objects can be edited
in a variety of ways using dimensions, the
694
edit handles, the edit toolbar buttons and the like other objects. See “General Plan
specification dialog. See “Symbol Object Defaults Dialog” on page 68.
Specification Dialogs” on page 696.
When a furnishing or fixture symbol is
selected in floor plan view or on the top
Symbols vs. Native Objects surface in a 3D view, up to ten edit handles
A symbol is an object that is based on a 3D display. They are the Move handle at the
.dxf, .dwg, .obj, .3ds or .skp file that has center, the Rotate handle just outside the
been imported into Chief Architect. front indicator (a V) and a Resize handle on
each edge and at each corner.
Native objects are those placed into the plan
using Chief Architect’s standard tools, such When a symbol is selected on a side in a
as Doors , and Cabinets . Native objects do cross section/elevation or 3D view, it
not have a 3D .dxf, .dwg, .obj, .3ds or .skp displays five edit handles: the Move handle
file associated with them and are not and a Resize handle on each edge.
symbols. Symbols cannot be concentrically resized,
Remove Manufacturer Lock even when the Concentric edit behavior

is enabled. See “Edit Behaviors” on page
Manufacturer symbols are limited in 137.
the ways that they can be edited. After
The labels of library cabinets, electrical,
such a symbol is placed in a plan, select it
furnishings and fixtures, when displayed,
and click the Remove Manufacturer Lock
have a separate Move edit handle that
edit button to remove the manufacturer data
displays when the object is selected.
so that it can be edited like other symbols.
Fixtures and furniture placed in a plan are
Using Edit Handles subject to bumping/pushing behavior when
moved. See “Bumping/Pushing” on page
Most library symbols are box-based objects 178.
and can be edited as such. See “Editing Box-
Based Objects” on page 164. Depending on
the type of view and the surface selected, the
Deleting Built-in Fixtures
edit handles a symbol displays will vary. and Appliances
To resize Fixtures and Furniture, you must A fixture installed into the front of a cabinet
check Fixture/Furniture Resize Enabled in becomes a cabinet face item, like a door or
the Plan Defaults dialog. When this option is drawer. It can be resized or deleted like other
checked, these library objects have edit face items in the Cabinet Specification
handles when selected and can be resized dialog. See “Front Tab” on page 565.
695
Library Objects and the Materials List
Library Objects and the Materials List

Most library objects are counted in the
Materials List, as are any comments added to Note: Although the size and materials of
the Components dialog for a library object. many library objects can be edited, these
See “Components Dialog” on page 1062. changes are not reflected in the Materials
List.
Symbol Object Specification Dialogs

The Fixture, Furniture, Geometric Shape, Object edit button opens the Furniture
Hardware and Millwork Specification
dialogs all display the same options. The
actual name of the dialog is determined by Many library symbol objects can also be
the type of object currently opened for edited in the Symbol Specification dialog.
specification. See “Symbol Specification Dialog” on page
974.
For example, selecting a library object from
the Interiors library and clicking the Open
General Tab
1
2
1 The Name of the selected object displays here.
696
2 Specification - Define the size and refrigerator. This option has no effect on
height above the floor of the object. objects that are symmetrical.
• Enter the Height for the object.
4 A preview of the library object displays
• Enter the Width of the object. here and updates with changes.
• Enter the Depth of the object.
5 Show Color - Check this box to display
• Floor to Bottom - Enter the distance the preview of the object in color.
from the floor to the bottom of the object.
A value of zero makes the object rest on Layer Tab
the floor. For information about the Layer tab, see
• Check Follow Terrain if you want the “Layer Tab” on page 125.
object to follow the surface of the terrain
when it is placed outside a building. Materials Tab
• If the selected symbol is ceiling mounted, For information about the Materials tab, see
Height Above Ceiling will be available “Materials Tab” on page 709.
instead of Floor to Bottom. Specify the
selected object’s height above the ceiling.
Label Tab
Enter a negative value to offset the sym-
bol below the ceiling, or uncheck Follow For information about the Label tab, see
Ceiling if you prefer to specify the “Label Tab” on page 1045.
object’s Floor to Bottom height instead.
• Reset - Click to reset the symbol’s origi- Manufacturer Tab
nal, unmodified size. If the selected symbol or material was copied
from the Manufacturers category, the
3 Reverse Symbol - Check this box to Manufactuer’s tab lists contact information
reverse the object’s appearance, so that
features on its left are positioned on its right, about the manufacturer. See “Manufacturer
and vice versa. This turns a right-hand Libraries” on page 685.
refrigerator, for example, into a left-hand
Editing Libraries
Most library folders in the Library Browser
are locked and cannot be deleted, moved, An individual library object in a locked
renamed, or modified. library can be edited if you first copy it
into an unlocked library.
User-created library folders and objects,
however, are unlocked and can be moved, Preferences
copied, deleted, and renamed.
Click the Preferences button at the
bottom of the Library Browser to open
697
Editing Libraries
the Preferences dialog, where display same name, it is best to use short, descriptive
properties for the Library Browser can be and unique names.
controlled. See “Library Browser Panel” on
page 76. Moving Folders and
Library Objects
Expand/Collapse All
Unlocked library folders and objects can be
When a Category, Library or Folder level moved to new locations in the Library
item is selected in the tree view of the Browser provided that the destination is an
Library Browser, Expand All and Collapse unlocked library. Folders and library objects
All are available in the Library and are organized alphabetically within each
contextual menus, allowing you to expand or hierarchy.
contract its contents in the tree view.
To move an unlocked item to a different
location, select it in the tree list, then click
Copy Library List
and drag it to the new location in the list.
To make a copy of the list of all library
Folders able to accept additions highlight as
objects, select a folder in tree view and
the file is moved. Release the mouse button
choose Library> Copy Library List, then
to relocate the selected library item.
paste the entire library heirarchy as text into
a text program such as Notepad or Text
Editor. Copying Folders and
Library Objects
Renaming Libraries To copy a Folder or Library Object, right-
Unlocked library folders and the objects click on it in the Library Browser and select
within them can be renamed. There are Copy from the contextual menu. Click on a
several ways to rename a selected, unlocked new location in the tree view and select
library item: Edit> Paste to paste a copy in the new
location or right-click and select Paste from
• Right-click on the item, select Rename the contextual menu.
from the contextual menu, and type a
new name. You can also copy items by dragging and
dropping them into an unlocked library
• Press F2 on your keyboard and type a
folder.
new name.
• Click once on the item, pause for a Library Categories cannot be added, copied,
moment, then click a second time, then moved or deleted.
type a new name.
Components
Library names are case-sensitive and can
contain up to 63 characters. While you can The display of architectural library objects in
have more than one library item that uses the the Materials List is affected by information
in the Components dialog. In the Library
698
Browser tree view, right click to highlight

and select an unlocked symbol in the Library Changes made to library objects are
Browserand choose the Components option permanent and immediate. They cannot
to open the Components dialog . See be undone, so use care when modifying your
libraries. You should create backups of all
“Editing Library Objects” on page 694. your library files (*.alb) before making any
Once placed in a plan, many objects have a modifications.
Components edit tool that allows you to

make changes to that object’s Components
Keyboard Commands
without affecting the symbol in the library. The Library Browser can be navigated using
See “Components Dialog” on page 1062. the arrow keys on your keyboard.
Terrain objects, CAD blocks, moldings, • The right and left arrow keys expand and
images, backdrops, and materials do not collapse folders.
display in the Materials List. • The up and down keys change which
library object is currently selected.
Open Symbol • Select an item in an unlocked library and
Any image, material, plant image,or symbol press F2 to rename it.
in an Unlocked library can be edited from • Select an item in an unlocked library and
the Library Browser menu. press Delete to delete it.
To open the Symbol Specification dialog, If you have Scrollable List selected in the
click on a symbol name in the tree view of Preferences dialog, pressing the Tab key
the Library Browser and select Library> switches focus between the tree view and the
Open. See “Symbol Specification Dialog” selection pane. Use your mouse to select an
on page 974. object for placement. See “Library Browser
Deleting Libraries
If you have Tiled To Fit Window selected
Unlocked libraries and the folders and library instead, pressing the Tab key switches focus
objects within them can be deleted in any of between the tree view and the selection pane.
three ways: You can then use the arrow keys to select a
• Select it in the Library Browser and library object within the selection pane.
choose Library> Delete Object.
• Right-click on it and choose Delete from
the contextual menu.
• Press the Delete key on your keyboard.
699
Adding to the Library
Adding to the Library

New libraries, folders, and library objects Adding a New Object
can be added to the Library Browser. Library
objects are always placed in alphabetical New materials, images, plant images and line
order within their heirarchy. styles can be created in an unlocked library
folder. Right-click on the folder, select New>
Most libraries shipped with Chief Architect from the contextual menu, then select the
are locked and cannot be edited, indicated type of item you wish to create from the
by a small padlock on the folder; however, submenu.
you can copy a locked library, and paste it as
an unlocked file or entire folder into the User Nearly any object imported into a plan,
Libraries category. The newly created copy converted into a symbol or placed from the
can then be edited. Library Browser can be added to the library.
• Check Add to Library in the Import 3D
Additional unlocked libraries can also be
Symbol dialog. See “Importing 3D
added to the User Libraries category,
Symbols” on page 967.
allowing you to customize the organization
of your user library. • Check Add to Library in the Convert to
Symbol dialog. See “Convert to Symbol”
Unlocked libraries are saved in the Chief on page 987.
Architect Data folder on your computer. See
“Chief Architect Data” on page 44. • Select an object in your plan and click the
Add to Library edit button.
Adding a New Folder In addition, some Chief Architect objects
New folders can be added to an unlocked that are not symbols, such as cabinets,
library category or folder by right-clicking windows, doorways, CAD blocks, molding
on an unlocked library or folder and selecting profiles, architectural blocks, and terrain
New> Folder from the contextual menu. objects can be added to the library. See
“Symbols vs. Native Objects” on page 695.
A new folder initially named “Untitled” is
created. Some objects, notably cabinets and doors
with custom door styles, have other library
objects inserted into them. See “Inserted
Objects” on page 691. You can choose to add
the containing object to the library, or the
inserted object:
• Click the Add to Library edit button

to add the containing object to the Import
library category with the inserted object
included.
An object created using a tool within
700
Chief Architect will automatically be the window you are working in.
added to the Import category using the
name of that tool, whereas a symbol
You can create digital photos of a build-
imported will automatically use the Sym- ing site for use as a backdrop.
bol Name. These objects can be renamed
after adding them to the Library, either To add a backdrop to the library
before or after moving them to their
appropriate user created folder in the
User Libraries category. See “Renaming 1. Select File> Import> Backdrop to
Libraries” on page 698. open the Import Backdrop File dialog,
which is similar to the Import Picture
• Click the Add to Library As edit File dialog. See “Importing Pictures” on
button to choose which symbol category page 940.
to add the object to. Depending on your 2. Browse to an image file on your com-
choice, either the inserted object is added puter, select it, and click Open. This
to the Import library category, or the con- backdrop can now be found in the My
taining object with the inserted one Backdrops library.
included.
You can also create a new backdrop by
Adding Materials and copying and pasting an image into Chief
Architect or by using the Screen Capture
Images to the Library
tools. See “Copying and Pasting Objects” on
Chief Architect can use materials and images page 191 and “Creating Screen Captures” on
in a variety of file formats and provides page 946.
several means of adding new material and
image files to the library. For more Folders in the Backdrops category can-
information, see “Creating Materials” on not have the forward slash “/” character.
page 712, “Managing Plan Materials” on
page 717, “Images” on page 933, and Bonus Catalogs
“Adding Images to the Library” on page 934.
Chief Architect periodically posts new and
Adding Backdrops updated Chief Architect library catalogs
to the Library available for download. Select Help>
Download Library Catalogs from the
Backdrops are images that display behind the
menu to launch your Internet browser to the
model in 3D views. See “3D Backdrops” on
Chief Architect Web site.
page 756.
New backdrops can be created using a Legacy Library Conversion
variety of graphic file formats. Backdrops
are automatically adjusted to fit the window If you have any custom libraries created in
size, so they look best when they are created Chief Architect X1, the initial startup of
with the same height to width proportions as Chief Architect X2 will give you the option
701
Importing and Exporting Library Content
to convert these libraries for use in Chief 4. Click on the Open button to import
Architect X2. See “Legacy Library these prior version third party .alb files
Conversion” on page 11 of the User’s Guide. into the Import category.
You can also convert legacy .alb files by 5. Click and drag these files or folders into
selecting Library> Convert Legacy (.alb) the appropriate folder that you have cre-
Library Files. ated for them in your User Libraries cat-
egory.
To convert legacy library files
Third Party Libraries
1. Select Library> Convert Legacy (.alb)
There are a variety of third party sources for
Library Files.
3D symbols, textures and other items that
2. In the Select a Legacy Library File may be of use in Chief Architect. Some
Folder dialog, select one or more .alb sources even provide this content in .alb file
files that you want to bring in to Chief format, which was the library file format
Architect X2. used by Chief Architect versions 8.0 through
3. Once selected, the names of these files X1. These third party libraries can be
will display in the File name: field. converted for use in Chief Architect X2 as
described above.

Chief Architect’s Import and Export library Items in the Import category can then be
categories allow you to easily copy library selected and moved into the User Libraries
content, including 3D symbols, images, line folder, which is where your custom library
styles, backdrops and backdrop libraries content is located and can be organized to
from one computer to another as well as suit your needs. See “Library Browser
share entire custom libraries with colleagues. Contents” on page 685.
Chief Architect library files have two
To import library files into the library
different file extensions: .calib and .calibz.
Both files can include any combination of
1. Select Library> Import Library to dis-
Chief Architect library items; in addition,
play the Import Library Data dialog.
.calibz files are able to save any data
associated with textures and images. 2. Browse to the .calib or .calibz file(s) that
you want to import and either single or
Import Libraries group-select the files so that their names
display in the File Name field.
When library files are imported into the • To select a group of files, click on the
program or 3D symbols are added to the first one, hold down the Shift key, then
library upon import, these items are placed in
the Import library category.
702
click on another file. The two files plus 6. Click and drag one of the imported sym-
all files in between are selected. bols to the appropriate category that you
• To select multiple files individually, have created for it in your User Librar-
click on one, hold down the Ctrl key, ies folder.
then click on additional files. Only the If Add Symbol to Library is not checked
files you click on are selected. when a symbol is imported into the program,
• To select all files in the directory, click you can still add it to the library at a later
on one and press Ctrl + A. Only do this time by selecting it and clicking the Add to
if you wish to import all files in the
Library edit button. See “Adding a New
folder.
Object” on page 700.
3. Click the Open button.
4. A progress bar will display, telling you Export Libraries
the progress of each library data file as it
The Export category is used to organize
is imported. Once imported, each file
library items so that they can be exported as a
will be located in the Import category of
Chief Architect library file and either shared
the Library Browser.
with other users or imported into the program
5. Click and drag each imported item to the on another computer.
desired location in the User Libraries
category. To export content from the library
To import 3D symbols into the library 1. Locate an object or folder of objects that
you want to export, right click on it and
1. Select File> Import> 3D Symbol . select Copy.
2. In the Import 3D Symbol dialog, make 2. Right-click on the Export category and
sure Add Symbol to Library is select Paste.
checked. See “Import 3D Symbol 3. When all of the items you wish to export
Dialog” on page 968. are copied into the Export category,
3. Browse to the 3D file(s) that you want to select Library> Export Library to dis-
import and either single or group-select play the Export Library Data dialog.
the files so that their names display in • You can also right-click on the Export
the File Name box. heading and select Export Library.
4. Click the Open button. 4. In the Export Library Data dialog:
5. A progress bar will display telling you • Choose the appropriate Save in: loca-
the progress of each symbol, and once it tion for your exported library file.
has completed importing a file, that • Type in a name for your library file in
symbol will now be located in the the File Name field.
Import section of the Library Browser.
703
• Click the Save as type: drop down list customized library content before placing it
and select whether or not you want the in its final location.
library to include Textures/Images. • Items in the Import category should be
moved into User Libraries.
If any of the items being exported are • Items in the Export category should be
images or use textures, be sure to
exported and then removed.
select the .calibz file type.
For best results, it is recommended that you
• Click Save. clear out these categories whenever you
5. After you export library data, a dialog finish importing or exporting library data.
will prompt you to clear the Export cate- You can clear out the items located in the
gory. Unless you plan to modify the cur- Import and Export categories at any time by
rent export selections and export a new selecting Library> Delete Import Items or
library, click Yes. Delete Export Items. A warning dialog will
confirm that you are sure you want to delete
Deleting Items from the all of the items in that category. Click Yes.
Import/Export Libraries
The Import and Export library categories are
intended to be places where you can organize
704
705
Chapter 25:
Materials
The objects used in Chief Architect have a

variety of 3D properties. These objects - Redefining only the visual properties of
walls, windows, doors, cabinets, roof planes, a material may create unexpected
lot perimeters, etc. - can have materials results. For example, changing the image of
a brick material to represent siding does not
assigned to them so that they look realistic in cause the material to be considered as siding
3D views. These materials can also be used during material calculations.
to generate materials lists that can help with
cost estimations. Chapter Contents
Designing with objects that look correct in • About Materials
3D and calculate properly in the Materials • The Material Painter
List requires that you use realistic material • Materials Tab
definitions and apply them appropriately to • Viewing Materials
objects in your plan. • Editing Materials
• Creating Materials
Chief Architect comes with many materials
• Mapping Patterns and Textures
that are ready for use. From siding, roofing,
• Material Types
flooring, masonry, tile, and paneling, to road
• Managing Plan Materials
surfaces, grass, water, and wood materials,
• Define Material Dialog
Chief Architect has materials for every
• Material Defaults Dialog
application, inside and out. If you cannot find
• Color Chooser Dialog
a material that suits your needs, you can
customize the materials provided or create
your own.
Learning how to create, manage, apply, and
edit materials saves time and adds that
professional touch to your designs.
706
About Materials
The materials that are assigned to objects in and most Rendering Techniques. See
Chief Architect perform two important roles: “Textures & Patterns” on page 757.
• They determine what the surfaces of • Patterns are composed of CAD lines and
objects look like in 3D views. are seen in Technical Illustration, Line
• They influence how objects are calcu- Drawing and Vector Views. See “Render-
lated in the Materials List. See “Materials ing Techniques” on page 785.
Lists” on page 1048. Unlike textures, patterns are associated with
Materials are stored in the Materials library a Type that determines if and how materials
in the Library Browser and can be applied to are calculated in the Materials List.
objects in either of two ways:
Material Types
• Using the Material Painter .
Every material is classified by Type, which
• In an object’s specification dialog. See defines how the material is calculated in the
“Materials Tab” on page 709. Materials List. Not every Type is calculated
in the Materials List; however, most
Patterns and Textures determine whether a material is counted by
In Chief Architect, materials have two piece, area, volume and so on. See “Material
attributes that determine what they look like Types” on page 716.
in 3D views: Textures and Patterns. Some Types are associated with patterns.
• Textures are created using special image Only Chief Architect Pattern Types are
files that tile seamlessly when applied to figured in the Materials List. If a .pat file is
surfaces and are visible in Raytrace views selected, the pattern type is listed as Custom.
See “Pattern Tab” on page 722.
The Material Painter

Select 3D> Materials> Material
Painter to access the Material Painter Note: Not all surfaces can be edited using
Tools, which are used to apply materials to the Material Painter or Mat erial Eyedropper.
object surfaces in 3D views. The sides of floor platforms and the tops of
ceilings are two examples. .
The Material Painter tool can also be
activated by selecting a material in the Material Painter Modes
library while a 3D view is active. There are five Material Painter Modes. Each
mode specifies how broadly or narrowly the
707
The Material Painter
selected material will be applied to surfaces When the Material Painter tool is
in your plan. active, the Material Painter Mode toolbar
• The Material Painter Component buttons display in the edit toolbar, allowing
Mode is the default mode. This you to quickly change modes.
applies the selected material to an object
component. Using this tool is the same as
opening an object for specification and You can also specify the active mode in the
changing the material for one of its com-
ponents on the Materials tab. See “Mate- 3D> Materials> Material Painter
rials Tab” on page 709. menu. A check displays next to the active
mode in the submenu.
• The Material Painter Object Mode
applies a material to all components of an
object that share the same material
assignment.
• The Material Painter Room Mode

applies a material to all the objects in the
room that currently have the same mate-
rial. For example, if you apply a material Blend Colors With Materials
to a dining room chair, this mode applies
the material to all other objects in the In addition to the Material Painter
room with the same original material, Modes, the Blend Colors With
such as other chairs and the dining table. Materials option allows you to apply a solid
color to a surface displaying a pattern or
• The Material Painter Floor Mode texture and blend the two.
applies the selected material to all sur-
faces on the floor that currently have the Blend Colors With Materials works in
same material. For example, if you apply all five Material Painter Modes. See
a material to the kitchen countertops “Blending Materials” on page 713.
using this mode, the bathroom counter-
tops on the same floor also have the To use the Material Painter tool
material applied.
1. Create 3D view of your plan.
• The Material Painter Plan Mode
2. Select 3D> Materials> Material
applies the selected material to all sur-
faces in the entire plan that currently have Painter> Material Painter .
the same material. For example, if you 3. Select a material from the Select
have the same carpet on all floors in a Library Object dialog. See “Select
plan, applying a selected material while Library Object Dialog” on page 689.
this mode is active will change all carpet
on all floors.
708
4. Select a Material Painter Mode from the 8. If either the Component or Object
edit toolbar, which displays at the bot-
tom of the program window when the Mode is active, you can continue to
Material Painter is enabled. click on surfaces to apply the selected
material. When you are finished, select a
5. Click the Blend Colors With Textures
different tool.
edit button to turn this feature on or
off depending on your needs.
When the Material Painter is used to
6. Note that the name of the material being apply a material to a wall, the material
painted displays on the left side of the is applied to the entire room - not the individ-
Status Bar at the bottom of the program ual wall. You can apply a material to a single
window. See “The Status Bar” on page wall in its specification dialog. See “Materials
Tab” on page 709.
34.
• Move your pointer over a surface in the
Material Eyedropper
3D view. The Status Bar now states
both the material being painted and the The Material Eyedropper tool
current material on the target surface. allows you to load the material
7. Click on the surface to apply the assigned to an existing object and apply that
selected material to that surface. The material to other objects.
material is applied to surfaces in the In a 3D view, select 3D> Materials> Mate-
model based on the active Material
Painter Mode. rial Eyedropper and then move your
mouse pointer over a surface in the view. The
• When both the Material Painter name of the material on that surface is stated
and Blend Colors With Textures are on the left side of the Status Bar. Click on the
active, the cursor displays a paint roller surface to load its material assignment. The
pointer then changes to indicate that the
icon .
material is ready to be applied to another
• When the Material Painter is object using the Material Painter tool.
active and Blend Colors With Depending on the currently active Material
Textures is not, the cursor displays Painter Mode, you can continue to apply the
material to the surfaces of other objects.
a spray can icon .
Materials Tab
The specification dialogs for most objects Object edit button to open the
include a Materials tab. Select an object or a specification dialog for that selection.
group of similar objects and click the Open
On the Materials tab, you can specify
material assignments for the components that
709
Materials Tab
make up that object. When a new material is have a single component while more
assigned, the appearance of the preview complex objects may have many.
image on the right side of the dialogupdates.
Some components contain additional sub-
The tree list on the left side of the tab lists the components, which display separately in the
components of the selected object that can be components tree list.
assigned materials. Some objects may only
1 Select a component in the tree list to 3 Click Library Material to open the
assign a new material to it. Select Library Object dialog. Select a
material and click OK to assign that material
2 The two boxes on the right display a to the selected component. See “Select
preview of the color, pattern and texture
of the material assigned to the selected
component. If “No Texture” displays in the Click the Plan Material button to open the
preview window, either the material has no Plan Materials dialog and select a material
texture assigned or the texture file could not from those already used in your plan. See
be found on the system. “Managing Plan Materials” on page 717.
710
Select OK to close the dialog and return to

the active view.
Viewing Materials
Textures display in Raytrace views and most and off by selecting 3D> Camera View
Rendering Techniques, while patterns Options> Toggle Textures .
display in Technical Illustration, Line
Drawing and Vector Views. See “Textures & If you receive an error message regarding a
Patterns” on page 757. missing file when creating a 3D view, your
plan might contain two textures of the same
In Technical Illustration, Line Drawing and name or textures that did not originally come
Vector Views, you can turn the display of with the program and are not currently saved
material patterns on and off by selecting 3D> in the library.
Toggle Patterns . See “Rendering
To resolve this, find the original texture file
named in the error message and copy it
When most other Rendering Techniques are (while recreating its path) into the “Old
used, you can turn the display of textures on Textures” folder. The next time Chief
Architect is opened, it will find the missing
file and correctly show the texture.
Editing Materials
Much like objects, materials in Chief Changes made in this way will affect any
Architect can be edited so that they better instances of that material in the current
suits your design needs. There are two plan only.
approaches to material editing:
Editing the material applied to an object is
• Select a material in an unlocked library in not the same as applying a different material
the Library Browser, edit it, and your to that object. See “The Material Painter” on
changes will be used when you next use page 707.
the material in any plan. Changes made
in this manner do not affect materials Library Browser
already in use in a plan.
Right-click on a material in an unlocked
• Apply a material to an object in a plan
library and select Open from the contextual
and then edit that applied material using
menu to open the Define Material dialog for
either the Plan Materials dialog or
that material. See “Define Material Dialog”
Adjust Material Definition tool. on page 719.
711
Creating Materials
Plan Materials Select 3D> Materials> Adjust Material
Select 3D> Materials> Plan Definition and then click any surface in
Materials to open the Plan Materials a 3D view to modify the material currently
dialog for the current plan. Select a material assigned to that surface in the Define
and click the Edit, Copy, or New button to Material dialog. See “Define Material Dia-
open the Define Materials dialog. You can log” on page 719.
add a newly defined material to the library Changing a material definition with this tool
from the Plan Materials dialog by selecting affects all objects in the current plan that are
it and clicking the Add to Library button. using that material but does not affect any
See “Plan Materials Dialog” on page 718. materials saved in the library or materials
used in other plans. See “Adding to the
Adjust Material Definition Library” on page 700.
The Adjust Material Definition tool
is useful for changing plan materials
directly from a 3D view.
Creating Materials
Chief Architect comes with many materials Library button. See “Adding to the Library”
that are ready for use. They are found in the on page 700.
Materials and Manufacturers categories of
the Library Browser. If you cannot find a In the Library Browser
suitable material, you can edit an existing
material or create a new one. See “Editing Materials can be created in the Library
Materials” on page 711. Browser, making them available for use in
any plan. See “The Library Browser” on
page 683.
In the Plan Materials Dialog
In the directory pane of the Library Browser,
There are several ways to create a new
right-click on an unlocked folder and select
material in the Plan Materials dialog. See
New> Material from the contextual menu.
“Plan Materials Dialog” on page 718.
• Click the New button to create a new
material for use in the current plan file.
• Select a material and click the Copy but-
ton to make a new material based on the
original, which can then be edited and
used in the current plan.
To make a plan material available for use in
other plans, select it and click the Add to
712
Blending Materials
In 3D views, you can create a new
material by blending a solid color
such as a paint color with a textured and/or
patterned material. Select 3D> Materials>
Material Painter> Blend Colors With
Materials to toggle this feature on or off.
To blend a color with another material
1. Create a 3D view in which the patterned/

textured material is visible.
2. Select 3D> Materials> Material
Painter> Material Painter and
In the Define Material dialog, you can create select a solid color.
a new material in the selected unlocked
folder. See “Define Material Dialog” on page 3. Confirm that Blend Colors With
719. Materials is selected in the Mate-
rial Painter submenu or edit toolbar.
Using Paste Image 4. Also in the edit toolbar, select the Mate-
You can create a new material by first rial Painter Mode that you would like to
copying an image that will serve as its use. See “Material Painter Modes” on
texture to the Windows Clipboard, then page 707.
navigating to a Chief Architect window and 5. Click on the patterned/textured material
selecting Edit> Paste> Paste from the to apply the solid color over it. When
menu. See “Paste” on page 192. Blend Colors With Materials is
active, the mouse pointer displays a
From a Screen Capture paint roller icon .
You can use the Screen Capture tools to
The result is a new material that is saved in
create a texture based on a screen capture
the current plan. It can be found in the Plan
from any application and use it to create a
Materials dialog, edited as needed, and
new material in the My Materials library. See
added to the library if desired. See “Plan
“Creating Screen Captures” on page 946.
Materials Dialog” on page 718.
By default, materials created from a screen
Materials created using the Blend Colors
capture will be set to Stretch to Fit. If you
would like the texture to tile instead, uncheck With Materials tool are given the name
this box. See “Stretch to Fit” on page 715. of the patterned/textured material with the
extension “--PAINTED:” followed by the
name of the solid color material.
713
Mapping Patterns and Textures
Converting Material
Template Plans
Select 3D> Materials> Create Plan
Materials Library to create a library
Converting Textures to of materials based on the materials used in
the current plan. This is useful for converting
Materials
material template plans, a common way to
An entire folder of textures can be store material definitions in prior versions of
converted into a library of materials. Chief Architect, into a materials library. This
Select 3D> Materials> Convert Texture to command creates a new library in the
Materials and then browse to a folder of Materials category using the same name as
textures on your computer. The converted the plan. Adding materials to the library
library folder assumes the same file structure individually allows you to store the material
as the original folder. within the existing directory structure.
Mapping Patterns and Textures

Materials have two attributes that determine Determining the Origin
what they look like in 3D views: patterns and
textures. See “About Materials” on page 707. Before a new origin can be specified, the
display of coordinates in the Status Bar
Both patterns and textures are assigned should be enabled. See “The Status Bar” on
origins, which determine where the pattern page 34.
or texture begins on an X/Y axis. By default,
this origin is 0,0. To determine origin coordinates on the
horizontal plane, place your cursor over the
Depending on the placement of a particular origin location in floor plan view. When the
object relative to this origin, a material pointer is in the position you want to
applied to it may not look right in 3D. You establish as the material origin, take note of
can address this by specifying a new origin the coordinates that display in the Status Bar.
for the material’s pattern and/or texture.
To determine origin coordinates on the
A pattern’s origin can be set on the Pattern vertical plane, place your cursor over the
tab of the Define Material dialog, and a origin location in a cross section/elevation
texture’s origin, on the Texture tab. See view.
“Define Material Dialog” on page 719.
714
The pointer’s current coordinates display in the Status Bar
Once you have taken note of the new origin Stretch to Fit
coordinates, enter them on either the Pattern
or Texture tab of the Define Material dialog. Some special textures, often used for
See “Define Material Dialog” on page 719. artwork, do not tile. Instead, these textures
resize to stretch across any surfaces that they
A texture or pattern origin is a property of the are applied to. Materials that behave this way
material rather than of the object that the are specified as Stretch to Fit in the Define
material is assigned to. When an object is Material dialog.
moved, the pattern or texture maintains its
absolute position and may not look right. It is To display an artwork texture, first place a
a good idea to assign pattern or texture wall or desk frame in your plan. A selection
origins only after the position of the object of both are available in the library at
has been finalized. Furnishings (Interior)> Interior Accessories>
Mirrors & Frames. See “Placing Library
If you have multiple objects using the
same material, they all share the same Next, simply apply a material specified as
origin. Duplicate materials can be created if Stretch to Fit to the center portion of the
you want different origins specified for the frame. See “The Material Painter” on page
same texture or pattern. 707.
715
Material Types
Material Types
Every material is classified by Type. The number of sheets needed. If a sheet material
Type defines how the material is calculated is applied to a library object such as chair, the
in the Materials List. Some but not all Types Materials List does not calculate it.
are associated with 3D patterns. Not every
Gap - This does not show a pattern. Specify
Type is calculated in the Materials List.
gap to a material to create an Air Gap
Following are the available Types and their between materials as in the case of a wall
characteristics: layer definition. This would be the same as
defining no material at all. This does not go
Framing - These types are used by the
to the Materials List.
program to estimate stick framing quantities
if they are applied to the main layer of a wall Area - This does not generate a pattern. The
layer definition. Materials List calculates surface area. In the
case of walls it is the area of the vertical
Brick - Displays a typical brick course
surfaces.
pattern. The height and length of the brick
can be specified. This can be specified for Volume - This does not generate a pattern.
anything using this type of layout, including The Materials List calculates cubic feet.
plywood with staggered joints. The Materials
Concrete - This does not generate a pattern.
List calculates the number of bricks (by
The Materials List calculates cubic yards or
height and length) that fit on the total surface
cubic meters. When you apply this to a floor
area of the defined object. For a wall, the
platform, the thickness is defined as four
surface area is used. For a full masonry wall
inches, by default.
with two layers of brick, be sure to define the
wall as having two layers to get the right Tile - This produces a grid-like tile pattern.
count. You can define the mortar width that The Materials List calculates the number of
enables the program to do an accurate count units based on the total surface area, exactly
of bricks. as for bricks.
Strip - Shows a parallel line pattern in 3D Shingles - This produces a pattern similar to
views. The height, separation of the lines, the brick pattern, but you are able to define
and the angle can be specified. The Materials an overlap amount. The Materials List
List calculates lineal footage based on the calculates the number of shingles required to
height of the strip and the surface area cover the surface area.
covered. Overlap is subtracted from the
Flooring - This does not produce a pattern.
height to get the exposure of the material.
The Materials List calculates the total surface
Grouping can be used to model a material
area.
that has a repeating pattern across its width.
Shakes - This produces a pattern to represent
Sheet - Sheets do not show a pattern. If a
wood shingles. The Materials List calculates
sheet material is applied to a wall or floor
surface, the Materials List calculates the
716
the number of shingles required to cover the List calculates the required number of
surface area. parquet units.
Herringbone - This produces a herringbone Textured - This produces a pattern similar to
pattern. Height and width are restricted to a stucco. The density or frequency of the dots
2:1 ratio. The Materials List calculates the is definable. The Materials List does not
number of units required to cover the surface calculate this material Type.
area.
Earth - This produces a 2D hatch that
Octagon - This produces a “tile” pattern of represents earth in cross section view. The
octagons and small squares. The size Materials List does not calculate this material
specified is the size of the small squares Type.
between the octagons. The octagon resizes
Stars - This produces a star pattern. The
proportionally. The Materials List calculates
Materials List does not calculate this material
the number of square and octagonal tiles
Type.
required to complete the pattern.
Custom - If you select a pattern from the
Hexagon - This produces a hexagon pattern.
Entries drop-down list, the material is
The Materials List calculates the number of
automatically defined as Custom regardless
units required to cover the area of the object.
of the pattern style. Custom materials are
Parquet - This produces a parquet wood calculated in the Materials List as area.
floor pattern of small squares. The Materials
Managing Plan Materials

The Plan Materials dialog can be used material wherever it is found throughout that
to manage the materials used in the plan. Other objects in that plan that use that
current plan. Select 3D> Materials> Plan material are also affected, but objects outside
Materials to open this dialog. the current plan are not.
When a material is applied to an object in a
plan, a copy of that material is made and All materials that come with Chief Archi-
saved with the plan. If you access the Define tect are stored in the Library Browser.
Material dialog through a menu or You can also create your own materials and
save them in the Library Browser. See “Cre-
specification dialog, your changes affect that ating Materials” on page 712.
717
Managing Plan Materials
Plan Materials Dialog
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 This is the list of materials in your plan. If you access the Define Material dialog
Select a material to display a preview of
it to the right. through a menu or specification dialog,
your edits affect the material throughout the
If an X displays in the In Use column, the current plan. Other objects in that plan that
material is used by an object in your plan or use that material are also affected, but
is defined as a default material for one or objects outside the current plan are not.
more objects in your plan.
If the In Use column is empty, the material 4 Click New to open the Define Material
dialog to create a new material.
was referenced at one time but is no longer
assigned to any objects or used as a default. 5 Click Copy to create a copy of the
selected material and opens the Define
2 Click OK to close the dialog and save Material dialog where you can make changes
any changes, Cancel to delete any to the copied material.
changes made during this session in the
dialog and return to the current view, or Help 6 Click Purge to remove all unused
for more information about materials. materials from your plan.
3 Click Edit to open the Define Material 7 Click Delete to remove a material from
dialog for the selected material. See the list of plan materials. If the material
“Define Material Dialog” on page 719. is used in the model, you cannot delete it.
8 Click Add to Library to add the

selected material to the Library
Browser, making it available for use in other
718
plans. See “Adding to the Library” on page Texture” display, either a texture has not
700. been assigned to the material or the texture
file could not be found on your system. In
The preview window on top shows how the
either case, the material displays in rendered
material appears in Vector Views.
views as a solid color.
The bottom preview shows how the texture
appears in rendered views. If the words “No
Define Material Dialog

The Define Material dialog allows you to If you select a manufacturer’s material, the
adjust how materials look in 3D views and options in the Define Material dialog may
can be accessed in a number of ways: change. Some options are not available and
• Select a material from the Plan Materials the tabs may vary.
dialog and click Edit, New, or Copy. If you access the Define Material dialog
• Right-click on a material in an unlocked through a menu or specification dialog, your
library in the Library Browser and select edits affect that material wherever it is found
Open from the contextual menu. in the current plan. Other objects in that plan
that use that material are also affected, but
• You can also right-click on an unlocked
objects outside the current plan are not.
library and select New> Material.
719
General Tab
The options on the General tab will vary
depending on the selected material Type.
1
6
2
3
4 7
1 The Material Name displays here. You Vector views. See “Patterns and Textures” on
can type a different name if you wish. page 707.
Renaming the material does not create a new
material: it redefines the existing material. 4 Shading Contrast - Use the slider bar
or text field to specify the amount of
2 Material Color - This color displays in contrast between surfaces at different angles
Vector Views and also in rendered to each other in 3D views. The farther to the
views if no texture has been selected. Click right the slide bar is set or higher the contrast
the color box to open the Color Chooser value, the more contrast you see. This setting
dialog and select a new color. See “Color only affects Vector Views.
The following image shows the same curved
3 Line Color - The color of the pattern wall view with three different shading
lines displays here. Click in the box to contrasts (combined using a separate
open the Color Chooser dialog and select a graphics program). Notice how the lowest
new line color. Pattern lines are only used in contrast at the top appears almost flat, while
the highest contrast on the bottom is sharp.
720
typically affect the display of the material

but is used for materials list calculations.
Low Contrast • Depth - Specify a depth for the material
such as brick. Depth does not typically
affect the display of the material but is
Normal used for materials list calculations.
Contrast • Size - Some patterns are defined by rela-
tive size. Enter a number here. The num-
ber does not have any units: it is more
like a scaling factor.
High
Contrast • Joint Width - Enter a value for the width
between pieces of the material. This does
not draw the joint any wider, but is used
by the program when counting pieces of
tile or brick.
• Mortar Width - Enter a value for the
mortar joints in a brick or block pattern.
5 A preview of the material’s pattern This does not draw the mortar any wider,
displays here. It updates as you change
but is used by the program when counting
the material definition.
pieces of bricks or block.
6 Type - This is the list of material types • Overlap amt - Enter the amount the
defined by the program. Some types are material overlaps itself, such as lap sid-
associated with patterns. A Type defines how ing. Note: the Height - Overlap Amount
a material is calculated in the Materials List. = Exposure of the material.
See “Material Types” on page 716.
• Pattern Angle - Some patterns can be
7 Depending on the Type selected, rotated to a different orientation.
several additional edit boxes may
• Line Weight - Specify the desired line
display in the dialog.
weight for pattern lines in Vector views.
• Height - Define a height for the material.
• Grouping - With a Strip type, grouping is
This value may be restricted to a ratio of
used to describe the repeat of the pattern
another dimension. When applied to a
across the width of the material. i.e. A
strip or siding pattern, this number repre-
13" wide siding with an overlap amount
sents the width of the material. Note: the
of 1" and a grouping of 3 calculates mate-
Height - Overlap Amount = Exposure
rials based on a 12" coverage and a repeat
of the material.
line pattern of 4".
• Length - Define a length dimension for
• DXF Code - This field holds up to five
the pattern seen in Vector views.
characters that appear at the end of the
• Thickness - Specify a thickness for a layer names used when exporting a 3D
material such as Tile. Thickness does not DXF file.
721
Pattern Tab
Patterns are used to represent materials in Materials List. See “Patterns and Textures”
Technical Illustration, Line Drawing and on page 707.
Vector Views. Pattern Types also affect the
1
2
4
5
6
7
1 The Material Name displays here. You Click Browse to select a Pattern File on your
can type a different name if you wish. hard drive.
Renaming the material does not create a new
Once you have selected a pattern file, use the
material: it redefines the existing material.
Entries drop-down list to pick a hatch
2 This is a preview of the material as it pattern from the file.
appears in Vector Views. The preview
updates as changes are made. 5 Entries - Pattern files are text files that
typically define more than one pattern.
3 Select a Pattern Type from the drop Individual patterns are defined in the .pat file
down list. Each item in this list is with names that appear in the Entries list.
affects if or how a material is included in the Select an entry from the drop-down list. The
Materials List. See “Material Types” on selected pattern displays in the preview.
page 716.
When an Entry from a .pat file is used, the
4 The pathname of the current Pattern Pattern Type is always “Custom”, which
File, with the file extension .pat, means that the material will be counted as an
displays here. Area type in the Materials List.
722
6 Scale - Rescale the pattern if necessary. 7 Origin - Enter coordinates to specify

If the pattern displays as black, the where the pattern begins. See
pattern repeats too often and the number in “Mapping Patterns and Textures” on page
this field should be increased. 714.
Texture Tab
In most Rendering Techniques, materials are Transparency information may be contained
represented by textures. See “Rendering on the alpha channel of a texture is used in
Techniques” on page 785. rendered views.
3
4
5 7
6 8
1 The Material Name displays here. You Click the Browse button to select a texture
can type a different name if you wish. for the material. See “Creating Materials” on
Renaming the material does not create a new page 712.
material: it redefines the existing material.
4 Set a new Origin, if needed, so the
2 This is a preview of the selected texture texture displays correctly on surfaces in
as it appears using the Standard rendered views. See “Mapping Patterns and
Rendering Technique. As the settings are Textures” on page 714.
changed, the preview updates.
5 Adjust the Scale, or height and width
Texture File - Displays the path and ratio, of the selected texture. The values
3
file name of the selected texture. are in inches (or mm).
723
In this example, the texture shown is mapped

6 Rotate Angle - Specify how the texture
to a 48” x 48” area. is rotated on the surface.
If the surface rendered is larger than this
7 Check Blend Color and Texture to
ratio, the surface has “tiles” of the texture blend the selected texture with a solid
that are 48” x 48”. If it is smaller, only a color, then click the Select Color button to
portion of the texture is shown. specify the color you want to blend it with.
Check Stretch to Fit to stretch the texture When a new material is created using the
image to cover each surface it is applied to. Blend Colors With Materials tool, the
resulting material has this box checked. See
Note: Changing the scale or selecting Stretch “Blend Colors With Materials” on page 708.
to Fit can cause textures to appear distorted if
applied to a surface with a different aspect 8 Click Set Color Using Texture to
ratio than the original texture image. represent the texture in 3D views when
textures are not shown using the average
color of all pixels in the texture file.
Render Tab
The Render tab controls how the material rendered on a 3’ x 6’ panel using the
appears in most rendered 3D views. The Standard Rendering Technique. As the
preview on the right displays the material settings are changed, the preview updates.
1
2
3
724
1 The name of the material displays here. point or spot light source on it. Shiny
materials appear to have a bright white spot
2 Click a radio button to select either the that simulates reflection of light.
Simple or Advanced editing options.
The Simple options are described here and 5 Specify the material’s Transparency.
the Advanced options, below. Most materials are Opaque. Partial is
used for glass that can be seen through
3 Brightness - Controls how bright the without being invisible. Materials with
material appears when rendered. It can transparency can slow down rendering speed
be used to get the desired appearance relative in some situations. See “Speeding up 3D
to other materials. View Generation” on page 797.
4 Shininess - Controls the sheen of the
material when it is rendered with a
Render Tab - Advanced
1
2
3
4
5
6
The Advanced options provide finer control Adjust settings using the slide bar or by
over the appearance of the rendered material. entering a value in the edit box.
If you change an Advanced value, these
The Ambient and Diffuse settings are used
options willbe active if you later return to
together to modify a material’s brightness.
this tab. You can always change back to the
Simple settings.
725
Material Defaults Dialog
1 Ambient - Controls how bright the simulate surfaces that are glowing with their
material appears when only ambient own light, such as the glass on a light fixture.
light is present. See “Ambient Light” on
page 775. 6 Transp - Controls the transparency
range from completely opaque to
2 Diffuse - Controls how bright the completely transparent.
material appears when illuminated by a
A material’s Render Properties are affected
light source.
by the Render settings in the Preferences
The Specular and Shininess settings are used dialog and the lights that have been placed in
together to modify a material’s shininess. the model. See “Light Types” on page 779.
3 Specular - Controls how bright the To get proper lighting effects on an object,
material appears when illuminated by a use at least one point or spot light. For these
positional light source. It simulates the highlights to appear on large flat surfaces,
reflection of light off a surface. select Use Triangles in the Preferences
dialog. See “Render Panel” on page 102.
4 Shininess - Controls how shiny the
surface appears when illuminated by a
positional light source. It must be used Raytrace Tab
together with the specular value to simulate For information about the Raytrace tab, see
light being reflected from a surface. Adjust “Raytrace Tab” on page 804.
the shininess value to control the size of the
reflected highlight on a surface. Manufacturer Tab
5 Emissive - Controls how bright a If the selected material was copied from the
material appears without regard to the Manufacturer library category, the
lighting of the current scene. It can be used to Manufactuer’s tab lists contact information.
See “Manufacturer Libraries” on page 685.
Material Defaults Dialog

Default Settings are accessed by Defaults dialog. See “Defaults and
selecting Edit> Default Settings. Preferences” on page 63.
Expand the Materials category in the tree
The settings here are similar to those on the
view, select General Materials, and click
Materials tab found in object specification
the Edit button to display the Material
dialogs throughout the program. See “Mate-
rials Tab” on page 709.
726
• Select a category from the scrollable list.

• Click the Library Material button or
either preview box to open the Select
Library Object dialog. See “Select
• Click the Plan Material button to open
the Plan Materials dialog. See “Plan
Not all objects have default settings that can
be accessed prior to being placed.
Stairs, for example, do not have a defaults
dialog. Instead, you can specify the materials
for stair components in the Material Defaults
dialog. Once a stairway is created, you can
change its materials.
Color Chooser Dialog

The Color Chooser dialog is opened by clicking on the color bar that can be found
by selecting Tools> Color Chooser or in many dialogs throughout the program.
3
4
1
5
6
2
7
8
1 Click in any one of the Base colors or to specify it as the box for a new custom
boxes to select it as the new color. color to be defined.
2 Click in one of the Custom colors 3 Click anywhere in the color palette area
boxes to either select it as the new color to dynamically choose a color. The
727
Color Chooser Dialog
location of a selected color is identified by a

6 Click Create Material to add the color
black crosshairs. to the library under My Materials. The
new material’s name is “Custom Color”
4 Click anywhere in the vertical bar to followed by the RGB values of the color.
adjust the selected color’s darkness.
Only available when the dialog was opened
5 Drag the Color Chooser Eyedropper by selecting Tools> Color Chooser.
anywhere on your monitor and release
the mouse button to select the color 7 Information about the selected color
displays and can be edited here.
displaying at that location.
8 Click Add to Custom Colors to add
You can select a color from any pro- the color to selected Custom Colors
gram window. Before opening the Color box.
Chooser dialog, make sure the desired color
can be seen onscreen by tiling Chief Archi-
tect and the other program window.
728
729
Chapter 26:
Zoom & View Tools
Use the Zoom tools to position the current Chapter Contents

view. To work on a specific area, you may • Zoom Tools
need to zoom in so that the entire screen is • Undo Zoom
filled by only a single room. At other times • Fill Window
you may need to view the entire plan. • Panning the Display
Up to eight 3D views and ten total view • Swapping Views
windows can be open at any given time. The • Window Menu Tools
name of the file and the type of view displays • Cascade
at the top of each view window in its title bar. • Tiling Views
If the view is saved, its name also displays. • Arrange Icons
• Aerial View
There are also a number of ways to pan • Closing Views
across the screen, shifting the visible part of
the plan slightly while still maintaining the
same zoom factor.
Multiple views of one or more open files can
be arranged and managed using the View
tools.
730
Zoom Tools
Zoom is used to magnify any given Pan Window - Move the display
area on the plan or 3D view. Select without changing the zoom factor. See
Window> Zoom, then click and drag a .
marquee around an area on screen. When
you release the mouse, the selected area Zooming With
expands to fill the screen. the Mouse Wheel
When the zoom is complete, whatever tool Use the mouse wheel to zoom in and
was active prior to selecting the Zoom out in plan and 3D views. Scrolling
tool automatically becomes active again. If the mouse wheel one click up or
down zooms in or out, centering on the
another zoom is needed, click the Zoom
location of your pointer and changing the
tool again.
zoom by about 10%.
Zoom In - Click to zoom in towards
the screen center by a factor of two.
Note: Depending on the configuration of your
Zoom Out - Click to zoom out from mouse, it may be necessary to hold down the
the screen center by a factor of two. Ctrl key while turning the mouse wheel. If
zooming in and out are not working correctly,
Undo Zoom - Reverse the last zoom contact the manufacturer of your mouse and
operation. See . mouse driver for their assistance.
Fill Window - Fits all visible items on

Zooming in 3D Views
screen. See .
Zooming in 3D views does not change the
Fill Window Building Only - Fits all
camera’s location or field of view. Instead,
walls and railings on the current floor
the extents of the view are expanded or
on screen.
cropped. You can alternatively set cameras to
zoom by adjusting their Field of View. See
“Render Panel” on page 102.
Undo Zoom
Select Window> Undo Zoom to Zoom and Undo Zoom are also
reverse the last zoom operation. available through the contextual menu. See
“Contextual Menus” on page 33.
Note: Undo and Redo do not affect zoom.
731
Fill Window
Fill Window
In floor plan view, a CAD Detail or a Fill Window Building Only
cross section/elevation view, select
Window> Fill Window or press the F6 key Window> Fill Window Building
to view nearly everything on screen that is Only is similar to Fill Window, but
visible, including the Reference Display. zooms in or out to so that all walls and
CAD Points are the only objects that are not railings in the view fill the current window.
included when Fill Window is used. Other objects are ignored.
If you are zoomed in so that only a portion of In 3D Views

the drawing displays on screen, selecting Fill
Window zooms out so that the entire Fill Window and Fill Window Building
view fits on the screen. If you are zoomed Only behave slightly differently in
out so that the entire drawing is smaller than perspective and orthographic 3D views. In
the screen, selecting Fill Window perspective views, the original zoom factor is
zooms in until the drawing fills the screen. restored, while in orthographic views the
camera’s Field of View is adjusted so that all
When the drawing sheet is shown, Fill surfaces in the 3D view are included.
Window zooms to the sheet borders.
Panning the Display

There are four ways to pan the display • Click the end arrow keys on the scroll
without changing the zoom factor. bars to shift the display in 12" incre-
ments.
Using the Scroll Bars • The 12" increment is defined in the Plan
One method is to use the scroll bars on the Defaults dialog under Inches Scrolled
right and bottom edges of the window. by Arrow Key. See “General Plan
Using the Arrow Keys

In floor plan view, the arrow keys on the
keyboard work exactly like clicking the
arrows on the scroll bar. They shift the
display according to the number of inches
defined in the Plan Defaults dialog.
• Drag the square button in the bar itself in
order to pan a larger distance.
732
Using the Mouse Using the Pan Window Tool

If you have a wheel mouse, you can pan the The Pan Window tool works much
display by pressing the middle mouse button, like the mouse wheel method.
or wheel, and moving the mouse in the
direction you would like to pan. When the • Select Window> Pan Window . The
middle mouse button is held down, the pointer changes to a hand icon. Click
pointer changes to a hand icon. and drag in floor plan view to pan the
window. The command is invoked once
Mouse drivers sometimes have other and the program reverts to the previously
functions assigned to the wheel and buttons. active tool when you release the mouse
These override the Chief Architect setting. button.
• Double-click the Pan Window tool

and the command remains active.
Swapping Views
There are several ways to switch between cycle through all open views in the order
open view windows. you prefer.
• Select Window> Swap Views or • Press the Ctrl + Tab (Next Window) or
press F7 to switch between the two most Ctrl + Shift + Tab (Previous Window)
recent views. keys to cycle through all open views.
• A list of all the views currently open is
• The Swap Views button toggles located at the bottom of the Window
between the current view and the view menu. Each view is identified by its name
that was current before it. and what type of view it is. Select one to
go directly to that view.
• Select Window> Next Window or
Window> Previous Window to
Window Menu Tools

Select Window from the menu to access the
Window Menu tools, which help you display Note: The Window Menu Tools button
multiple view windows of your model at the does not display on the toolbar by default
same time. but it can be added. See “Toolbar Cus-
tomization Dialog” on page 107.
733
Cascade
Click Window> Cascade to cascade Click Window> Next Window to

all open views. See “Cascade” on switch to the next open view. See
page 734. “Swapping Views” on page 733.
Select Window> Tile Select Window> Previous Window
Horizontally or Tile Vertically to switch to the previous open view.
to tile all open views. See “Tiling Views” on See “Swapping Views” on page 733.
page 735.
Click Window> Aerial View to open
Choose Window> Arrange Icons to the aerial view window. See “Aerial
arrange all open views that are View” on page 736.
currently minimized. See “Arrange Icons” on
page 736.
Cascade
Select Window> Cascade to cascade windows in a cascading pattern. Click on any
all open views. Cascade is a Windows visible edge to activate that window.
function which allows you to organize open
734
Tiling Views
The window tiling options allow To activate a view, click the title bar or
you to display multiple views anywhere in the view. Note that any changes
side by side in the Chief Architect window. you make are reflected in the camera view as
well.
Select Window> Tile Horizontally to
display both views in a horizontal To end window tiling, click the Maximize
orientation. button in the upper right corner of any open
view.
Select Window> Tile Vertically or press
Shift + F6 on the keyboard to display both
views in a vertical orientation.
Tiling allows you to see the results of versa, and can also be useful for copying
changes in floor plan view in 3D or vice objects from one plan to another.
735
Arrange Icons
Arrange Icons
Arrange Icons is a Windows function bars in a row at the bottom of the working
used when several active windows desktop. You can then click the minimized
have been minimized. Select Window> title bars to reactivate them or use them for
Arrange Icons to align the minimized title swapping and closing views.
Aerial View
In floor plan view, select Window> As you pan around the floor plan view
Aerial View to open the Aerial View window or zoom in or out, the marquee in
window. Aerial View moves and resizes to reflect
these changes. This can make it easier to
The Aerial View window shows everything
navigate in floor plan view.
on the current floor as well as a marquee
indicating the portion currently visible in the
floor plan view window.
736
The grey border that displays in the aerial view window represents the extent of the floor plan view.
The Aerial View window is initially docked window. The floor plan view updates to
on the right side of the window, but it can be match.
moved to any other edge or allowed to float. • No matter what tool is active, when you
The Aerial View always displays the entire move the pointer to the Aerial View win-
plan, so it has no scroll bars. dow and drag a marquee, the floor plan
• The Aerial View window can be moved view zooms in on that area.
by clicking and dragging the grip bar and • The display of objects in the Aerial View
resized by clicking and dragging an edge. is controlled by the default layer set for
• The grey marquee that displays in the Aerial Views. See “Layer Set Defaults
Aerial View represents the extent of the Dialog” on page 129.
floor plan view. This marquee updates if
you zoom or pan in floor plan view. Since the primary purpose of the Aerial
• Use the left mouse button to drag a new View is to enhance navigation in plan
marquee within the Aerial View window. view, you may want to turn off any layers
The floor plan view updates to match. that clutter and slow down the Aerial
View window. To change the display of
• Use the right mouse button to pan the objects in this layer set, see “Layer Sets”
existing marquee within the Aerial View on page 118.
737
Closing Views
Closing Views
Select File> Close or click the at the top view is still needed, swap to a different view
right corner of a window to close it. If the without closing the current views.
738
739
Chapter 27:
3D Views
Little preparation is needed to create a 3D Chapter Contents

view of a model: simply click a button to • OpenGL and Hardware
create an overview or click and drag to create • Types of 3D Views
a camera or cross section/elevation view. • Defaults and 3D Preferences
To improve the quality of the rendering and • Camera Defaults Dialog
create a custom look, you can adjust lighting • 3D Settings Dialog
and edit the materials used in the plan. You • 3D View Tools
can create Final and Raytrace views that are • Creating Camera Views
even more realistic. See “Rendering & • Creating Overviews
Raytracing” on page 772. • Cross Section/Elevation Views
• Displaying 3D Views
Many objects can be placed and edited in 3D • Editing 3D Views
views, and any camera view or overview can • Cross Section Slider
be saved or even used to record a • Working in 3D
walkthrough. See “Walkthroughs” on page • Saving & Printing 3D Views
948. • Camera Specification Dialog
• Cross Section/Elevation Camera
Specification
740
OpenGL and Hardware

Chief Architect features a built in, easy to in seconds that might otherwise take minutes
use rendering engine that makes use of or even hours with a non-accelerated card or
OpenGL rendering technology. OpenGL is chipset.
the standard for high-end 3D graphics and
OpenGL is required in order to use most of
has good hardware support on most video
the stylized Rendering Techniques. See
cards.
“Rendering Techniques” on page 785.
To take full advantage of the rendering • Duotone, Enhanced Lighting and Techni-
capabilities of Chief Architect, a graphics cal Illustration rendering all require
card that supports OpenGL hardware OpenGL 2.0.
acceleration and has at least 256 MB of
dedicated video memory is highly • Watercolor and Line Drawing rendering
recommended. For complex models, an require OpenGL 1.5.
accelerated card generates quality renderings
Types of 3D Views
There are three categories of 3D views in the camera appear larger while objects
Chief Architect: camera views, overviews farther from the camera appear smaller.
and cross section/elevation views. Each of
Orthographic views do not have a focal or
these view types can be generated using a
vanishing point. Parallel surface edges and
variety of rendering techniques. See
pattern lines appear parallel in these views
and objects appear to be the same size
Every 3D view is also either orthographic or regardless of their distance from the camera.
perspective in nature. Cross section/elevation
views are always orthographic while camera
views are always perspective. You can
choose to generate overviews as either
orthographic or persective.
Perspective and
Orthographic Views Perspective Overview Orthographic Overview
Perspective views have a focal, or vanishing, Perspective views display 3D objects much
point. Surface edges and lines that would be the way that they appear to the eye in real
parallel in real life appear to converge life, so they are ideal for presentation views.
towards that focal point, and objects closer to By default, perspective views are created
using the Standard rendering technique.
741
Defaults and 3D Preferences
Orthographic views, on the other hand, are photorealistic appearance to artistic painting
useful for technical drawings. By default, styles. Standard rendered views can also be
orthographic views are created using the Raytraced for additional realism. See
Vector View technique. “Creating a Raytrace View” on page 800.
Vector Views are non-photorealistic views in
Rendered and Vector Views which objects are drawn using surface edge
3D views can be generated using a variety of lines, or vectors. Lighting is not calculated,
different rendering techniques. See and materials are represented using pattern
“Rendering Techniques” on page 785. lines and solid colors, making Vector Views
quicker to generate and ideal for layout
Most rendered views represent materials drawings and high resolution printing. See
using textures. Surface edge lines are “Vector View” on page 789.
generally not drawn and lighting is often
modeled, creating results that range from a
Defaults and 3D Preferences

There are a number of defaults and 3D views can be generated using any
preference settings that allow you to control of the Rendering Techniques. See
the initial characteristics of 3D views. “Rendering Techniques” on page 785.
Camera positioning, field of view and The initial settings for each Rendering
related initial settings for camera Technique can be set in the
views are specified in the Camera Defaults Rendering Techniques Defaults dialog. See
dialog. See “Camera Defaults Dialog” on “Rendering Technique Options” on page
page 742. 788.
Ambient lighting settings, 3D The Render panel of the Preferences
backdrop information, and other dialog controls settings for Render
settings that affect 3D views as they are Previews and Final Views. See “Render
generated are found in the 3D Settings Panel” on page 102.
dialog. See “3D Settings Dialog” on page
744.
Camera Defaults Dialog

Default Settings can be accessed by The settings in the Camera Defaults dialog
selecting Edit> Default Settings or affect how a camera clips, captures and
by double-clicking either Perspective View renders views, how it displays in floor plan
Tools parent button or any Camera toolbar view, how it is positioned, and how it moves.
button.
742
1 3
2
5
1 The Positioning settings determine the 2 The Plan Display settings control the
position and orientation of the camera. camera’s appearance in floor plan view.
• The Incremental Move Distance con- For more information, see “In Floor Plan
trols how many inches the camera moves View” on page 764.
each time you direct it to move right, left, • Specify the Camera Symbol Size, mea-
forwards or backwards. For interior sured in plan inches (mm).
views a small number is good, but for • Set the Clip Plane Indicator Length for
exterior you may want a larger increment. Cross Section/Elevation, Backclipped
• The Incremental Rotate Angle defines Cross Section, and Wall Elevation cam-
how many degrees the camera rotates era symbols. The length is measured in
each time you direct it to. A setting of 90° plan inches (mm). See “Cross Section/
would make one full rotation in four Elevation Views” on page 752.
moves. • Check Show Camera Focal Point to
• The Height Above Floor defines the display the camera’s focal point in floor
height that the camera is above the floor plan view.
level for the current floor. • Check Show Field of View Indicators to
• The Field of View defines the camera’s display the field of view indicator for
field of vision in angular degrees. cameras in floor plan view. You can also
• The Tilt Angle is the camera’s angle rela- change the FOV Indicator Length,
tive to the horizon. 0° is horizontal, 5° which is measured in plan inches (mm).
points slightly upward, and -5° points
slightly towards the ground. 3 The Wall and Surfaces settings
determine the extent of camera views.
743
3D Settings Dialog
• Clip Surfaces Within - Specify that the • Select a Rendering Technique from the
camera does not display an object within drop-down list to be used when the
this distance. Alternate Mode is active.
• Remove Wall Within - Remove the dis-
play of walls within this distance of the 6 Click the Advanced button to open the
Advanced Camera Options dialog and
camera.
specify how hidden lines are removed when
Both of these distances are measured as a OpenGL is not used. See “OpenGL and
radius from the camera position. Hardware” on page 741.
• Check Unless Opening to display a wall
that is inside the Remove Wall Within Advanced Camera Options
range if the camera is pointing through an Dialog
opening such as a door or window.
4 Orthographic Rendering Techniques

- Specify which Rendering Techniques
are used to create Orthographic 3D views.
See “Rendering Techniques” on page 785.
• Select a Rendering Technique from the
drop-down list to be used when the
Default Mode is active. See “Edit
Behaviors” on page 137.
drop-down list to be used when the • Select NNS Method to use Chief Archi-
Alternate Mode is active. tect’s default method. In most cases, this
method is both faster and requires less
5 Perspective Rendering Techniques - memory than the BSP Method.
Specify which Rendering Techniques
are used to create Perspective 3D views. See • Select BSP Method to use an alternative
“Perspective and Orthographic Views” on method. This method may provide better
page 741. results in some situations; however, it
may be slower and require more memory.
drop-down list to be used when the • When the BSP Method is used, checking
Use Panels may increase speed and
Default Mode is active. reduce memory usagr.
3D Settings Dialog
Select 3D> 3D Settings or double- parent button to display the 3D Settings
click the Perspective View Tools dialog.
744
Settings in the 3D Settings dialog are not affect Vector views, and some affect both
global: they are saved with each plan file. view types. See “Rendered and Vector
Some settings affect rendered views, some Views” on page 742.
Options Tab
1 2
4
3
5
1 The General Options affect all 3D 3D backdrop. Use this option to maxi-
views. mize computer resources or to minimize
• Start in Low Detail 3D Mode - Check file size when creating a single room 3D
this box to create any camera in Low Walkthrough.
Detail mode by default. See “Low Detail
Mode” on page 757.
• Restrict Camera to Room only affects
subsequently generated floor camera
views. See “Camera Views” on page 749.
Check this box to suppress the generation
of objects beyond the room containing
the floor camera. If checked, the view
through a doorway into anothear room
shows only blank space or the selected
“Restrict Camera to Room” is unchecked
745
3D Settings Dialog
3 The Vector View Options only affect

views using the Vector View rendering
technique. See “Vector View” on page 786.
• Check Opaque Glass From Outside to
make the glass in windows and doors
opaque when seen from outside the
house.
• View Panel Factors adjust the perfor-
mance of Vector views. Normally, these
values should not need changing, but you
“Restrict Camera to Room” is checked may be able to get modest performance
improvements by trying other values. See
• Camera Bumps Off Walls - Uncheck “Speeding up 3D View Generation” on
this box to allow the camera to move page 797.
freely through walls.
• View Panel Factor 1 determines how
• Auto Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings - many surfaces are drawn for each hori-
Check this box to automatically rebuild zontal panel. Each horizontal panel is
floors and ceilings before a 3D view or then subdivided into vertical panels - and
elevation is displayed. View Panel Factor 2 determines how
• Auto Rebuild Terrain - Check this many surfaces are contained in each ver-
option to automatically rebuild terrain to tical panel.
reflect recent changes before generating a • View panel factors represent target num-
3D view. If this option is unchecked, you bers of surfaces to use in defining each
are asked if the terrain should be rebuilt. panel. A value of 10000 for Factor 1
• Version 10 Compatible Texture Map- means that a total of 10,000 or more sur-
ping - Check this box to use global tex- faces are collected to define each panel
ture mapping settings rather than texture vertically. A value of 2000 for Factor 2
mapping fixed to individual objects. means that 2,000 or more surfaces are
collected to define panels horizontally.
Version 10 Compatible Texture Mapping • Making these numbers larger results in
should remain unchecked except for fewer panels; making them smaller
legacy plans with custom rotated textures. results in more panels. Adjusting these
numbers either too low or too high causes
2 The Lighting Options control the the time required to draw to increase.
ambient light in rendered views. Click
• Framing Back Clip defines the back clip
and drag the slide bar or type in a percent
for framing members in cross section
value to adjust these options or click the
views. Framing must be set to display to
Reset button to restore initial default values.
see the effects of this value. A zero value
See “Ambient Light” on page 775.
does not back clip at all.
746
4 Default Color Display controls across the window. See “Panning the
whether views created using the Vector Display” on page 732.
View rendering technique are generated
using color or not. See “Rendering 6 Specify how the Surface Edge Lines
display for all objects in 3D views.
• Check Use Layer Settings to display sur-
• Select a check box to generate that view
face edge lines for objects using the dis-
type in color or uncheck to generate that
play settings specified by layer in the
view type as a line drawing.
• A colored view can always be changed to
a line drawing and vice versa by choosing If this option is not checked, all edge
Tools> Color Off/Color On . lines are drawn black and solid with a
line weight of 0.
5 The Scroll Bars check boxes control • If Use Layer Settings is checked you can
the display of scroll bars along the right
side and bottom of each view window. Clear also check Use Object Settings. All
a check box to suppress the scroll bar in that objects that have special settings speci-
view type and yield more viewing area. fied on the Line Style tab of their specifi-
cation dialog display using those settings,
When the scroll bars are suppressed, you can overriding the layer settings in the Layer
use the keyboard arrow keys to scroll. To pan Display Options dialog.
the display, hold the key and drag the pointer
747
3D Settings Dialog
Backdrop Tab
1 5
6
2
3
4
7
1 A preview of the selected backdrop sphere that surrounds your model in cam-
displays. See “3D Backdrops” on page era views and overviews.
756. • The Horizontal Angle controls how
many times the backdrop appears as you
2 Click Select Backdrop to open the rotate in a full circle from side-to-side. A
Select Library Object dialog. Browse
the Backdrops library, select a backdrop, value of 360 makes the backdrop wrap
and click OK. around the scene once. A value of 720
makes it wrap around the scene twice.
3 Click Remove Backdrop to change the 180 makes only half the backdrop wrap
backdrop to a solid color. The color around the scene.
used is defined in the Background Color
section of this dialog. • The Vertical Angle determines how
much of the backdrop stretches up-and-
4 Show Backdrop in... - Select the check down. To have the backdrop stretch from
boxes to specify in which views the the highest point in the sky to the lowest
selected backdrop image displays. point in the ground, use a value of 180.
To have the backdrop stretch from just
5 Backdrop Options can be used to below a horizontal render to just above,
create spherical panoramic backdrops.
use a smaller value such as 100.
• Check Spherical Panoramic Backdrop
to place the selected backdrop onto a
748
Some experimenting with backdrop images

7 Specify which Rendering Techniques
and Angle values may be necessary to you would like to use the selected
achieve the desired results. backdrop in. See “Rendering Techniques” on
page 785. By default, Standard, Enhanced
6 Click the color bar to select the Lighting, Painting and Watercolor use
Background Color that displays when
backdrops while the other techniques do not.
a backdrop image is not being used. See
3D View Tools
Select 3D> Create The Exterior Elevations tool creates
Orthographic View to display an exterior elevation of the top,
the Orthographic View Tools or 3D> Create bottom, left and right sides of the model.
PerspectiveView to display the Perspective
The Create Room Elevation Views
View Tools.
edit tool creates an interior elevation
view of each wall defining a selected room.
Cross Section/Elevation Views
Cross Section/Elevation views are the The framing members of an individual
traditional, orthographic views often used in wall can also be displayed and edited in
drafting. They are scaled and can be fully a Wall Detail view. See “In Wall Detail Views”
annotated. See “Cross Section/Elevation on page 486.
Views” on page 752.
Camera Views
A Cross Section/Elevation view
displays all floors of the model. If the Camera views are perspective views. They
view is created outside the structure looking are not scaled and cannot be annotated but
toward it, the result is an exterior elevation. are ideal for creating presentation views.
If the view is created inside the structure, or
The Full Camera tool creates multi-
passes through any of the structure, a cross
floor views of the 3D model. It can be
section is created.
used to create interior and exterior
The Backclipped Cross Section tool perspectives, and is good for displaying
includes only the objects between the cathedral ceilings, roofs, lofts, stairwell
starting point and stopping point of the cross openings, and other variation in floor and
section line. ceiling levels.
The Wall Elevation tool creates an The Floor Camera tool creates
elevation of a wall on a single floor perspective views of the current floor
and in a single room. only. The ceiling and anything above it is not
generated, and neither is anything below the
floor.
749
Creating Camera Views
The Glass House Camera tool lets tools create drawings of the current floor
you create a Glass House View without a roof or ceiling.
directly from floor plan view. Not available
The Orthographic and
in the Full Version of Chief Architect. See
Perspective Framing Overview
“Glass House View” on page 796.
tools create drawings of the framing in the
model. Framing must be built in order for it
Overviews to display in a framing overview. See
An overview can be either orthographic in “Framing Overview” on page 752.
nature or perspective, depending on the tool
used to create it. Raytrace Views
The Orthographic and Raytrace views are not typical 3D
Perspective Full Overview tools views and cannot be created directly
create drawings of the entire model including from floor plan view. Instead, you must first
all floors, ceilings, and the roof. create a Standard rendered view of the
desired scene and then select 3D> Raytrace
The Orthographic and
Current View. See “Rendering &
Perspective Floor Overview
Raytracing” on page 772.
Creating Camera Views

All full and floor camera views are created • Where your line begins is the camera’s
using the same method. position.
• The line that you drag defines the
To create a camera view direction the camera is pointed.
• The end of the line is the focal point of
1. In floor plan view, select the desired the view, the point the camera rotates
camera tool. The pointer changes to a around.
camera ( ) with a crosshair marking • By default, the field of view is 45
the position of the pointer. degrees, which is similar to what the
2. Click and drag a line to define the view human eye sees or a 50mm camera
direction. lens.
750
FOV Indicators
1. Camera
(click)
2. Line of
Sight
(drag)
3. Focal
Point
(release)
3. When you release the mouse button, a In order to create a camera view, you must
view generates in a new window. click and drag at least as far as your current
4. Return to the floor plan view. A camera Snap Distance. See “Snap Properties Panel”
symbol now displays in floor plan view. on page 95.
See “Swapping Views” on page 733.
Creating Overviews
In Chief Architect, there are three different Once generated, an overview window’s title
overview types: Full, Floor and Framing bar indicates whether it is a perspective or
Overviews. orthographic view and a camera symbol
representing the overview displays in floor
Each type of overview can be generated as
plan view, The overview ‘camera’ can be
either an orthographic or perspective view.
edited much like regular camera views can.
An overview window’s title bar indicates
See “Editing 3D Views” on page 758.
whether it is perspective or orthographic. See
“Perspective and Orthographic Views” on
page 741. Full Overview
Overviews generate as soon as you select the Select 3D> Create Ortho-
tool and are always created at the same graphic View> Full Overview or
angle. 3D> Create Perspective View> Full
Overview to generate a drawing of the entire
model.
751
floor plan view and make another floor

current before generating the Floor Overview
Framing Overview
Select 3D> Create Ortho-
graphic View> Framing
Overview or 3D> Create Perspective
View> Framing Overview to create a view
of the entire model, displaying only framing
Floor Overview and the foundation.
Select 3D> Create Ortho- Framing overviews include all floor, wall,
graphic View> Floor Overview and roof framing as well as foundations.
or 3D> Create Perspective View> Floor Unlike other overviews, which use the
Overview to create a drawing of the current Camera View layer set, Framing Overviews
floor with the ceiling removed. use the 3D Framing Set. See “Layer Sets” on
page 118.
Floor Overviews are an effective tool for
illustrating traffic flow and the relationships Framing must be built before generating this
between spaces. They are also helpful for view or the view will be empty.
trouble-shooting, since they isolate a single
floor for review.
If you want to save or print a picture

To see a different floor, select Tools> using resolution that is higher than your
screen resolution, you can create the image
Reference Floors> Up One Floor or using Raytracing. See “Creating a Raytrace
View” on page 800.
Down One Floor . You can also return to

The Cross Section/Eleva- the traditional, orthogonal views often used
tion, Back-clipped Cross in drafting. Regardless of their distance from
Section and Wall Elevation tools produce the camera, all lines and dimensions in these
752
views are their true lengths, making it easy to The Wall Elevation tool creates a
accurately see the spatial relationships of the single floor, single room elevation. It
3D objects in the model. does not cut through walls or show the
ceiling, flooring, or roof. It creates a 2D
Two additional elevation tools,
projection of a vertical face, such as a wall,
Exterior Elevations and the
and the objects between the wall and the
Create Room Elevation Views edit tool,
camera. It is used primarily for applications
allow you to create and save multiple
such as kitchen elevations or bath elevations.
elevation views of either the entire plan or a
The view can be taken at any angle to the
single room with a single click.
wall.
Cross section/elevation views have the
editing capabilities found in other 3D views, Cross Section/Elevation , Backclipped
and can be further enhanced with the CAD Cross Section and Wall Elevation
tools. They are the only 3D views that can views are created in the same way.
have information added to them using the 2D
CAD tools. They can be fully annotated and To create a Cross Section/Elevation view
dimensioned and then printed to scale.
Cross Section/Elevation 1. Select the Cross Section/Elevation ,

Camera Tools Backclipped Cross Section or Wall
Each of the three cross section/elevation Elevation tool. The pointer changes
camera tools has a specific function. to a with crosshairs marking the
position of the pointer.
A Cross Section/Elevation view
displays all floors of the model. The • Click in floor plan view and drag a line.
cross section begins at the point where the • A Camera symbol displays where you
camera arrow is drawn and continues click, along with a Cross Section Line
through the entire model. indicating the plane of a cross section’s
cut line.
The Backclipped Cross Section tool
includes only the objects or portions 2. Drag in the direction of the Line of Sight
of objects between the starting point and to draw a camera arrow.
stopping point of the camera’s Line of Sight. • Always drag the camera arrow perpen-
dicular to the wall to be viewed.
753
Clip Plane Indicators
1. Camera
(click)
2.Line of
Sight
(drag)
3. Focal
Point
(release)
3. When you release the mouse button, the The directions that these four elevation
view generates in a new window. cameras point are directly related to the
• If the view is a Backclipped Cross Sec- orientation of the X and Y axes, reference
tion, a second Cross Section Line at the grid and snap grid in the plan. See “3D
end of the Line of Sight indicates the Drafting” on page 28.
furthest extent of the backclip. Typically, the front elevation is located
As with camera views, you must click and below the model on-screen and points
drag at least as far as your current Snap upward while the back elevation is found
Distance in order to create a Cross Section/ above the model and points downward. This
Elevation view. See “Snap Properties Panel” may not be the case, however, if you have
on page 95. used the Rotate View tool. See “Rotate
If the Line of Sight does not cut through a 3D View” on page 189.
object and the object is within the back
clipped distance, such as a window shown in Exterior Elevations is found in the
elevation, the object retains its 3D definition. menu and can be added to the toolbars if you
3D objects can be selected, moved, stretched, wish. See “Adding Toolbar Buttons” on page
or otherwise modified in a cross section/ 108.
elevation view. The 3D model is updated in
all views. Room Elevation Views
The Create Room Elevation Views
Exterior Elevations edit tool creates an interior elevation
The Exterior Elevations tool creates view of each wall defining or present in a
exterior elevations of the front, back, selected room. To create elevation views for
left and right sides of the model. To use this a room, select the room and then select this
tool, simply select it. The four camera views edit tool. See “Editing Rooms” on page 277.
are automatically created, saved and named.
754
Detailing Cross Section/

Elevation Views
The CAD tools are accessible in cross
section/elevation views. CAD
information added to a cross section or
elevation view, including dimensions and
text, is stored in that view when it is saved.
CAD objects are superimposed on the view
and have no effect on the 3D model itself. If
CAD objects are added to a cross section/
elevation view, the program asks you to save
the view before closing the window.
CAD objects will snap to the Snap Grid
when Grid Snaps are enabled. Note that
the 3D model may obscure the display of the
Snap Grid. See “Grid Snaps” on page 136.
When the Vector View rendering The auto-detailer creates CAD objects for the
technique is used, you can select following:
CAD> CAD Detail From View to create a
2D line drawing of an active cross section/ • Wall Details - Add closed CAD
elevation view in a CAD Detail window. polylines for each wall layer to a cross-
This drawing can then be edited as needed. section or elevation view where the wall
See “CAD Detail from View” on page 918. intersects the viewing plane. The polyline
fill defaults to the fill specified in the
Wall Specification dialog. See “Wall
Auto Detailing
To save time, use the Autodetail tool • Insulation - Specify which wall layers in
to give you a head-start in detailing should display insulation fill when auto-
your cross section/elevation view. The auto- detailed. See “Wall Specification Dialog”
detailer automatically creates CAD objects on page 249. Specify which rooms
for commonly detailed aspects of a view. To should have insulation below the floor or
activate the auto-detailer, select CAD> above the ceiling. See “Room Specifica-
Autodetail. This tool is only available in tion Dialog” on page 283.
cross section views when the Vector View
rendering technique is active. • Foundation Walls - Closed polylines are
created for foundation walls and footings
• Slabs - Closed polylines with a concrete
pattern are created for slabs where the
slab intersects the front clipping plane.
755
Displaying 3D Views
For more information on editing CAD When the auto-detailing tool is used, CAD
objects, including closed polylines, see objects are placed on the default CAD layer.
“Polylines” on page 900. Using the auto-detailing tool twice results in
two copies of the same CAD objects.
Displaying 3D Views
Up to eight total 3D view windows can be Different view types use different layer sets
open at any time. The name of the file and when they are created. See “Layer Sets” on
the type of view displays at the top of each page 118. By default:
view window in its title bar. If the view is • Full and Floor Camera Views and Over-
saved, its name also displays. views use the Camera View Set.
A variety of tools and settings allow you to • Framing Overviews use the 3D Framing
control the appearance of your 3D views. Set.
There are also numerous ways to adjust the
• Cross Section/Elevation Views use the
position, focal point and field of view of a
Section View Set.
3D view. See “Editing 3D Views” on page
758. To show framing in a cross section/elevation
view, framing must first be built using the
In Floor Plan View Build Framing dialog and the appropriate
framing layers must be turned on in the
A camera symbol displays in floor plan view Section View layer set. See “Framing” on
for each camera view that is open. The views page 460.
are named and numbered sequentially in the
order they were created. The camera symbol
3D Backdrops
is an on-screen reference, and does not print.
Backdrop images can be used to add realism
Saved cameras that are not currently open
and a sense of perspective to 3D views. You
can also display in floor plan view when the
can select a backdrop image for a plan file
“Cameras, Inactive” layer is set to display.
from the library in either of two ways:
All camera symbols display a letter
indicating the Rendering Technique it uses. • In any view, select 3D> 3D Settings
See “Rendering Techniques” on page 785. to open the 3D Settings dialog. See
“Backdrop Tab” on page 748.
Layer Display Options • In a 3D view, open the Library Browser.
Browse to and select a Backdrop image,
Which objects display in a 3D view is then move your cursor into the view win-
controlled in the Layer Display dow. Click anywhere in the view to apply
Options dialog. See “Layer Display Options
the selected backdrop.
756
By default, Standard, Enhanced Lighting, quicker view drawing, editing and camera
Painting and Watercolor use backdrops while movements.
the other techniques do not. You can specify
which techniques use backdrops on the Line Style
Backdrops tab of the 3D Settings dialog.
The line style, color and weight of objects in
Regardless of how it is selected, only one Vector Views can be specified by layer or, for
backdrop can be used in a plan at any given most objects, individually in their
time. You can specify which views use the specification dialogs. See “Line Style Tab”
selected backdrop in the 3D Settings dialog. on page 889.
You can also create your own backdrop Line weights display on screen when Show
images and import them into the library. See
Line Weights is enabled. See “Show
“Adding Backdrops to the Library” on page
Line Weights” on page 996.
701.
The line weight, color and style for a
Color On/Off material’s pattern is set in the Define
Material dialog. See “Define Material
Select Tools> Display Settings> Dialog” on page 719.
Color On/Off to control the display
of color in all views except rendered views.
See “Color On/Off” on page 175.
Delete 3D Surface
The individual surface of an object
Textures & Patterns can be temporarily removed from any
3D view by selecting 3D> Delete Surface
Select 3D> Camera View Options> and then clicking on a surface. When the
Toggle Textures in a 3D view to turn pointer is over a surface, that surface will
off the display of material textures views. become highlighted.
See “About Materials” on page 707. Not
available in Glass House,Technical Surfaces removed in one view are removed
Illustration, Line Drawing or Vector Views. in all 3D views, but are not permanently
removed from the model. Continue clicking
Select 3D> Toggle Patterns in a surfaces to remove them, then select another
Technical Illustration, Watercolor, tool when you are finished.
Line Drawing or Vector View to turn on or
off the display of the “Patterns, 3D Views” Surfaces in 3D views are composed of
layer, which controls the display of material multiple triangles. Hold the Alt key while
pattern lines. See “Layers” on page 116. clicking to delete one triangular face at a
time rather than all triangles forming a
Low Detail Mode surface. See “Higher Quality Rendering” on
page 774.
Select 3D> Toggle Low Detail Mode
to switch between High- and Low- Select 3D> Delete Surface or click the
Detail display modes. Low-Detail allows toolbar button to restore the most recently
757
Editing 3D Views
deleted surface. All surfaces can be restored using a variety of rendering techniques to
by selecting Build> Floor> Rebuild Walls/ produce views for a range of different
Floors/Ceilings or by exiting the 3D purposes, from detail drawings to artistic
view and reopening it. presentation views. Select 3D> Rendering
Techniques to access these tools.
Enhanced Vector Views
Final Views
Vector Views can be drawn using Enhanced
Line Drawing, a setting located in the Select 3D> Camera View
Preferences dialog. See “Appearance
Options> Final View or Final
Panel” on page 71. View with Shadows to regenerate the
rendered view based on the final view
Enhanced Vector Views remove small gaps settings on the Render panel of the
in vector lines, which can be useful in cross Preferences dialog. See “Preview vs Final
section/elevations and other images that are View” on page 774.
sent to layout.
Rebuild 3D
Lighting
Select 3D> Rebuild 3D to regenerate
Select 3D> Lighting> Adjust Lights all 3D data asociated with the current
to open the Adjust Lights dialog and plan. All open views will remain open.
edit the light sources in the current plan.
Interior default lights in the list cannot be Remove 3D
changed or altered, but the default sun can be
changed. See “Adjusting Lights” on page Select 3D> Remove 3D from floor
778. plan view to close all 3D views
associated with the current plan file and
Rendering Techniques remove unsaved 3D data from memory.
Any cross section/elevation, camera Any views saved with the plan are closed but
view or overview can be generated not deleted.
Editing 3D Views
Once a 3D view is created, there are many move it perpendicular to the line of sight and
ways to manipulate the camera location, rotate the camera around its focal point.
focal point, and line of site to adjust the view
Cameras can be moved in incremental steps
on-screen.
using either the toolbar or the keyboard. The
The camera movement tools provide the distance the camera moves is defined in the
ability to pivot the camera in any direction, Camera Defaults dialog. See “Camera
758
Each time you move the camera, the view is

updated. If you are using either the toolbar or
keyboard to move the camera, you can hold
down the Shift key, suppressing the redraw
of the view until the Shift key is released and
allowing you to move multiple increments
more quickly.
In the Specification Dialog

You can make adjustments to a camera in the
Camera Specification dialog. This dialog is Up One Floor/Down One Floor
particularly helpful for making fine You can move a camera to a different floor.
adjustments to the camera’s position and While the camera view is active, select
other attributes. See “Camera Specification Tools> Reference Floors> Up One Floor
or Down One Floor .
Tile a 3D view and the floor plan view The position and movement of a camera is
and use the camera movement tools to affected by its location within the model.
see how they affect the camera. See “Tiling When the camera is outside a building, its
Views” on page 735. height is relative to the terrain and follows
the terrain as it is moved. When inside a
Using the Contextual Menu building, the camera goes up and down stairs
automatically and bounces off walls.
In a 3D view, right-click in an empty space in
which the backdrop or background color Which floor an active camera is on
displays to access the contextual menu. See determines which floor is affected when any
“Contextual Menus” on page 33. floor-specific actions are done. For example,
• In Vector Views, the options are a selec- if a camera is on Floor 2 and changes are
tion of commonly used commands from made to the Floor Default settings while in
the File, Edit, Tools and Window menus. that view, Floor 2 will be affected.
• In rendered views, the options are a If the camera is on an upper floor and you
selection of tools and toggles specific to move the camera outside of the building, the
rendered views or override the settings on camera remains at the same height relative to
the Render panel of the Preferences dia- the floor it was created on.
log. See “Render Panel” on page 102.
Move Camera with Mouse
Changing a setting in the contextual menu
only affects the current view. It does not A camera’s position can also be edited while
affect the settings in the Preferences dialog. the view is active.
759
Editing 3D Views
Select 3D> Move Camera With Move Camera with Arrow Keys
Mouse to access the Move Camera
with Mouse modes. Select 3D> Move Camera with Arrow
Keys to access these tools. These tools are
Click Mouse-Orbit Camera (or use not available in Cross Section/Elevation,
the hot key Alt + O) then move the Back Clipped Cross Section, or Wall
mouse to rotate the camera around the Elevation views.
current camera focal point. You can also
click in the 3D view, move the mouse, and Select 3D> Move Camera with Arrow
release the mouse button to “throw” the Keys> Arrow-Orbit Camera to rotate the
view. Click again in the view to stop the it camera around the current focal point. Use
from rotating. the arrow keys on your keyboard to move the
camera. This is the only arrow keys tool
Click Mouse-Pan Camera (or use the available in orthographic views.
hot key Alt + P) then move the mouse
to move the camera up, down, left and right. Select 3D> Move Camera with Arrow
This tool is not available in orthographic Keys> Arrow-Pan Camera to move the
views. camera up, down, right, and left using the
arrow keys.
Click Mouse-Dolly Camera (or use
the hot key Alt + D) then move the Select 3D> Move Camera with Arrow
mouse to move the camera forward and Keys> Arrow-Dolly Camera to move the
backward by moving the mouse up and camera forward and back using the up and
down. It also allows you to turn the camera down arrow keys, and side to side using the
left and right in the same way. This tool is left and right arrow keys.
not available in orthographic views. Select 3D> Move Camera with Arrow
Click Mouse-Tilt Camera (or use the Keys> Arrow-Tilt Camera to use the arrow
hot key Alt + T) then move the mouse keys to tilt the camera any direction at the
to tilt the camera in any direction while same location.
staying in the same location. This tool is not
available in orthographic views. Move Camera Tools
3D Center Camera on Point - Select 3D> Move Camera to access
Allows you to focus the camera at a these tools. These tools relocate the
particular point in the scene. This also sets camera, while keeping the direction of the
the camera center so that future use of the field of view in the same place.
Mouse-Orbit tool rotates around that Move Camera Forward - Moves the
particular point. To use the 3D Center tool, camera and the focal point forward.
activate the tool and then click any object in You can also use the hot key F.
the scene. This tool is not available in
orthographic views. Move Camera Back - Moves the
camera and the focal point back. You
can also use the hot key B.
760
Move Camera Left - Moves the Orbit Camera Left - Rotate the
camera and the focal point to the left camera to the left about the focal
in a line perpendicular to the line of sight. point.
You can also use the hot key L.
Orbit Camera Right - Rotate the
Move Camera Right - Moves the camera to the right about the focal
camera and the focal point to the right point.
in a line perpendicular to the line of
sight.You can also use the hot key R. Tilt Camera Tools
Move Camera Up - Moves the Select 3D> Tilt Camera to access
camera and the focal point up.You can these tools. Tilting keeps the camera
also use the hot key U. in one place and pivots the camera about its
Move Camera Down - Moves the vertical or horizontal axis. This movement is
camera and the focal point down. You similar to tilting your head up and down or
can also use the hot key D. turning it side-to-side.
Tilt Camera Upward - Tilts the
Orbit Camera Tools camera up while keeping it in the
same location. The camera does not tilt
Select 3D> Orbit Camera to access
beyond the vertical position.
these tools. Orbiting the camera
rotates the camera about the focal point. Tilt Camera Downward - Tilts the
camera down while keeping it in the
Move Camera In - Move the position
same location. The camera does not tilt
of the camera closer to the focal point
beyond the vertical position.
along the line of sight. The camera does not
rotate past the focal point using this tool. You Turn Camera Left - Turns the
can also use the hot key I. camera to the left while staying in the
same location.
Move Camera Out - Move the
position of the camera away from the Turn Camera Right - Turns the
focal point along the line of sight. You can camera to the right while staying in
also use the hot key O. the same location.
Orbit Camera Upward - Rotate the
camera up about the focal point. The Keyboard Camera Movements
camera does not rotate past the vertical line Camera movement in 3D views can be
going up from the focal point. controlled using the keyboard.
Orbit Camera Downward - Rotate F - Move forward.
the camera down about the focal
point. The camera does not rotate below the B - Move backward.
vertical line going down from the focal point. U - Move up.
D - Move down.
761
Editing 3D Views
L - Move left. Bottom View - Create a bottom view

of the model.
R - Move right.
Left Side View - Create a left side
I - Move inward along the line of sight.
view of the model.
O - Move outward along the line of sight.
Right Side View - Create a right side
W - Increase camera Field of View. view of the model.
N - Decrease camera Field of View. Restore Original View - Restore the
original view position.
Left or Right Arrow - The program
remembers the mode you selected under 3D>
Move Camera with Arrow Keys. If you are Press Ctrl + Alt + S while in a camera
in a view that does not support the mode you view or overview to spin the view. Pres
selected, the arrow keys move the screen Esc to stop the spinning.
right or left.
View Angle Dialog
Up or Down Arrow - The program
remembers the mode you selected under 3D>
Move Camera with Arrow Keys. If you are
in a view that does not support the mode you 1
selected, the arrow keys move the screen up
or down.
2
Overview Direction Tools
The Overview Direction Tools allow
you to view the model from a specific
direction in an orthographic overview. While
an orthographic overview is active, select
3D> Overview Direction Tools to access 3
these tools.
View Angle - Open the View Angle 4
dialog.
Front View - Create a front view of
the model.
Back View - Create a back view of the
model.
Top View - Create a top view of the
model. 1 Specify how close or far the overview
camera is zoomed towards the model.
762
• Use the slide bar to adjust the zoom fac- If you wish, you can instead set the Zoom
tor. tools to change the Field of View when
• Select a check box to zoom as far In or used in a 3D view. See “Render Panel” on
Out as possible, or check the middle box page 102.
to keep the current zoom factor.
Field of View
2 Specify the camera’s height relative to
the model. The Field of View refers to a camera’s field
• Use the slide bar to adjust the height. of vision. A wider field of view makes the
focal point appear further away, as more of
• Select a check box to view the Top or
the image is included in the same view
Bottom of the model, or select Elevation
window.
view the model from the side.
In floor plan view, the angled lines of a
3 Specify which side of the model the camera symbol indicate its field of view.
overview camera should face.
• Use the slide bar to adjust the camera’s FOV Indicators
direction and position.
• Select a check box to view the Back,
Left, Front or Right side of the model.
4 A preview drawing of the model’s

exterior walls updates as changes are
made to the View Angle settings.
Note: The CAD Tools are not available in ele- A camera’s field of view can be adjusted in
vation views created using the Overview the Camera Specification dialog. See
Direction Tools.
“Camera Specification Dialog” on page 768.
Zooming The field of view can also be adjusted while

in a camera view by pressing the W key to
The Zoom Tools are available in all increase the field of view or the N key to
3D views. See “Zoom Tools” on page decrease the field of view.
731.
The field of view can also be adjusted with
Selecting Window> Zoom In , Zoom the mouse wheel when Zoom Using Field of
View is checked in the Preferences dialog.
Out or Fill Window does not change See “Render Panel” on page 102.
the camera’s location or field of view.
Instead, the extents of the view are expanded
or cropped.
763
Cross Section Slider
In Floor Plan View • Drag the Move handle to relocate the

camera while maintaining its relative
Return to floor plan view without closing the angle.
3D view. See “Swapping Views” on page
733. • Drag the Focal Point handle to reposition
the camera, the focal point, and line of
Using the Select Objects tool, select the sight.
camera object. When a camera symbol is • Drag the Rotate handle to rotate the cam-
selected it displays four edit handles. era’s line of sight about its center.
The 3D view corresponding to the camera
Line of sight symbol reflects changes made to the symbol
in floor plan view.
Multiple camera symbols can also be
Move selected; however, their editing options are
limited to being moved, rotated, and deleted.
You can also create revision clouds around
Focal point group-selected camera symbols.
Rotate Using the Edit Tools

• Drag the Line of Sight handle to change A camera symbol or symbols selected in
the camera angle without moving the floor plan view can be edited in a variety of
focal point. ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar.
See “Edit Toolbar Buttons” on page 1140.
Cross Section Slider

Select 3D> Camera View Options> Choose one of the cross section angles and
Cross Section Slider when a 3D view move the Position slider to adjust the
is active to open the Cross Section Slider position of the cutting plane. Select the
dialog. option at top right to turn off the cutting
plane.
Note: The Cross Section Slider is not avail-
able when the Enhanced Lighting, Duotone,
or Technical Illustration Rendering Tech-
niques are used. See “Rendering Tech-
niques” on page 785.
764
Working in 3D
A variety of tools are available in 3D views manual Framing Tools and Roof Tools
that allow you to edit your 3D model.
are not.
Creating Objects in 3D Views
Selecting and Editing
You can place windows, doors, cabinets,
Objects in 3D Views
electrical objects, corner trim, and most
library objects directly into 3D views. To do Most objects can be selected and edited in
this, select the appropriate tool and click in 3D views. Select Edit> Select Objects
the 3D view. You can then edit the object’s and click on the surface of an object to select
size and placement. it. Once selected, objects can be edited using
When created in 3D, most objects must be their edit handles, buttons on the edit toolbar,
placed against a wall, on a floor platform or and the object’s specification dialog. See
within the Terrain Perimeter. “Editing Objects” on page 130.
You can also click and drag to draw some When you select an object, edit handles and a
CAD-based objects such as custom handle surface display. The handle surface is
countertops, roof planes, terrain features and a rectangle around the perimeter of the object
road, in camera views and overviews views. that indicates the overall height and width of
the selected surface. The edit handles that
The Build Framing and Build Roof dialogs display depend on the type of object selected.
are also accessible in 3D views, although the Walls, for example, display two resize edit
handles when selected while a slab displays
765
Working in 3D
ten handles, allowing you to move, resize Because cross section/elevation views are
and reshape it. orthogonal and display objects at their actual
dimensions, they are sometimes more
suitable for editing objects than camera
Note: If the wall height of the Exterior Room
is adjusted in a 3D view, the default Floor or views or overviews. See “Cross Section/
Ceiling Height of the entire floor is changed. Elevation Views” on page 752.
See “Floor Defaults Dialog” on page 353.
When several 3D views are open, changes
made in the plan automatically rebuild the
All moving or resizing is in the plane of the
model in all views. Because of this, it is
handle surface. You cannot move an object
typically faster to make changes to your plan
directly towards or away from the camera,
with as few windows open as possible.
for example, because that surface plane
cannot be seen in the view.
Editing Materials in 3D Views
By default, object movement is restricted to
one inch or 10 mm increments, but this Select 3D> Materials> Adjust
restriction can be set to custom increments in Material Definition, then click on a
the Plan Defaults dialog and toggled off and surface in the 3D view to open the Define
Material dialog for that material. See “Adjust
on using the Grid Snaps button. See Material Definition” on page 712.
“Grid Snaps” on page 136.
Unrestricted positioning can also be enabled Painter to apply materials to surfaces
by holding down the Ctrl key while moving in the view using the Material Painter Tools.
or resizing an object. See “Unrestricted See “The Material Painter” on page 707.
Movement” on page 178.
When Fixture/Furniture Resize Enable is Eyedropper to apply the material on
unchecked in the Plan Defaults dialog, only a surface in the view to other surfaces in the
a single handle displays for furniture and view. See “Material Eyedropper” on page
stand-alone fixtures and appliances. In this 709.
case, the object can only be moved. See
“General Plan Defaults Dialog” on page 68.
Rebuild 3D
Temporary dimension lines display when
As changes are made to your plan, a
many objects are selected to help you resize
3D view automatically updates to
the object and determine its height. These are
reflect any changes visible in the view. If you
sometimes easier to see when the color is
find that a view is not updating as expected,
toggled off. See “Display Temporary
select 3D> Rebuild 3D to rebuild the entire
3D model.
766
Saving & Printing 3D Views

3D camera views, overviews and cross Activating Saved Views
section/elevation views can be saved with the
plan in which they are created, exported and There are four ways to open a saved 3D
saved outside of Chief Architect, as well as view:
sent to layout and printed. • Select the camera symbol in floor plan
view and click the Open View edit
Saving 3D Views button.
Select 3D> Save Active Camera to • Double-click the camera symbol using
save the current camera in the plan.
the Select Objects tool.
Saved cameras retain their Rendering
Technique settings and can be closed and re- • Click the Activate button in the camera’s
opened for later use. See “Rendering Camera Specification dialog. See “Cam-
Techniques” on page 785. era Specification Dialog” on page 768.
You can also save a camera view by clicking • Double-click on the saved camera view
the Save button in the Camera Specification in the Project Browser or right-click on
dialog. See “Camera Specification Dialog” it and select Open View from the contex-
on page 768. tual menu.
In addition, if a cross section/elevation view Unsaved cameras that are open in another
has been edited using CAD, you will be view window can also be activated by
prompted to save the view when you close it. clicking the Open View edit button.
Any CAD objects added to a cross section/
elevation view are saved with the view as CAD Detail From View
part of the plan file.
When you have finished modifying
Once a view is saved, it is listed in the your cross section view, select CAD>
Project Browser and can be named. The CAD Detail From View tool to generate a
name displays as a label with the camera CAD detail drawing of the view. All lines in
symbol in floor plan view. See “Project the view are converted to CAD lines in an
Browser” on page 924. editable CAD Detail window. This tool can
only be used in line-based Vector Views.
When a view is saved, its 2D symbol is CAD Details created from a view do not
placed on the Cameras, Inactive layer update when the model is changed. See
in the Layer Display Options dialog. See “CAD Detail from View” on page 918.
“Layer Display Options Dialog” on page 121.
Exporting 3D Views
All 3D views can be exported and
saved as .bmp, .jpg, .png, .tif, or .pcx
767
Camera Specification Dialog
files. Select File> Export> Picture to save Printing 3D Views

the current screen image as an image file.
See “To export a picture” on page 940. Since rendered views are created
using pixels instead of lines, File>
In addition, Vector Views can be exported Print> Print Image must be used when
and saved as .emf files. See “Metafiles” on printing. Print Image is a special Chief
page 943. Architect function that prints the screen in
Once saved, a picture can be opened and picture format. The entire view prints,
converted into many other formats using a including images such as plants and textures.
graphics program. Picture files can be sent to The quality of your print image is affected by
layout or used in word processing, desktop your current window size and screen
publishing, and web development programs resolution. To maximize the quality of your
to create advertisements, brochures, etc. printed image, generate it in full screen size
When a picture is exported, it is assigned the and use the maximum screen resolution.
same size as it displays on screen. You can 3D views can also be sent to layout and then
change the size of your Render window to printed as part of your construction
create a smaller or bigger picture. documents.
Select File> Send to Layout to send
Plan Export
the current view to layout. See
When transferring a plan to another “Sending Views to Layout” on page 1018.
computer or to another user, it is
Select a saved, inactive camera
helpful to include all the Images, Textures,
symbol in floor plan view and click
and Backdrops used in the plan so that
the Send Camera’s View to Layout edit
rendered views are complete. The Export
button to send the view to layout.
Entire Plan tool allows you to do so. See
“Exporting an Entire Plan” on page 58.
Camera Specification Dialog

The Camera Specification dialog can be represents and clicking the Open Object
accessed in all camera views and overviews edit button. See “In Floor Plan View” on
by selecting 3D> Edit Active Camera . page 756.
The selected view’s specific type is indicated
Only one camera object can be opened for
in the dialog’s title bar: the specification
specification. If more than one camera
dialog for a Full Camera , for example,
symbol is selected, Open Object will not
is named Full Camera Specification.
be available.
This dialog is also accessible from floor plan
view by selecting the camera symbol that
768
1
5
2
Depending on the type of camera view Check Unless Opening to display a wall that
selected, not all the settings may be editable. is inside the Remove Wall Within range if
In addition, some settings only affect some the camera is pointing through an opening
types of views. such as a door or window.
To change a setting, first uncheck Default, Check Default for any value to use the
then type a new value in the text field. default setting. See “Camera Defaults Dia-
log” on page 742.
1 Camera Name - The camera name
displays in floor plan view and is listed
3 Settings in the Plan Display section
in the Project Browser. See “Project determine the camera’s display in floor
Browser” on page 924. plan view. For more information, see “In
Floor Plan View” on page 764.
2 Settings in the Wall and Surfaces
section determine the extent of the Check Show Field of View Indicators to
camera view. display the camera’s field of view indicators
in floor plan view. You can also change the
Clip Surfaces Within - Specifies that the
FOV Indicator Length, which is measured
camera does not display an object within this
in plan inches.
distance.
Check Show Camera Focal Point to
Remove Wall Within - Removes the view of
display the camera’s focal point in floor plan
walls within this distance of the camera.
view.
Both of these distances are measured as a
The Camera Symbol Size is measured in
radius from the camera position.
plan inches.
769
Cross Section/Elevation Camera Specification
Check Default for any value to use the The Field of View defines the camera’s field
default setting. See “Camera Defaults Dia- of vision in angular degrees. See “Field of
log” on page 742. View” on page 763.
4 Click Save Camera to name and save You can increase a camera’s Field of
this view with the plan. The camera
view can be named and is listed in the Project View when the view is active by press-
Browser. See “Project Browser” on page ing the W key, or decrease the Field of View
by pressing the N key.
924.
5 Settings in the Positioning section The Tilt Angle determines the angle the
determine the position and orientation camera is tilted. The camera maintains its
of the camera. focal point and position in floor plan view,
but if the camera is tilted, the focal point is
The Incremental Move Distance controls
above or below the current camera height.
how many inches the camera moves each
time you direct it to move right, left, Specify the Camera Angle for the selected
forwards or backwards. For interior views a camera. This is an absolute value. Entering a
small number is good, but for exterior you value of 90 degrees orients the camera to the
may want a larger increment. top of the screen.
The Incremental Rotate Angle defines how Specify the X Position and Y Position for
many degrees the camera rotates each time the selected camera. These are absolute
you direct it to. A setting of 90 degrees coordinates. Specifying zero for both places
would make one full rotation in four moves. the camera at the plans origin point (0,0).
The Height Above Floor defines the height Check Default for any value to use the
that the camera is above the floor level for default setting. See “Camera Defaults Dia-
the current floor. log” on page 742.
Cross Section/Elevation Camera Specification

The Cross Section/Elevation Camera You can also select the camera symbol in
Specification dialog is accessible from floor plan view and click the Open
Cross Section/Elevation, Wall Elevation, Object edit button.
and Backclipped Cross Section views by
selecting 3D> Edit Active Camera .
770
2 Settings in the Wall and Surfaces

section determine the extent of the
camera view.
1
Back clip after - Enter the distance in inches
2 from camera to backclip plane. If zero, no
clipping occurs.
3
3 Settings in the Positioning section
determine the elevation of the camera.
• Specify the X Position of the camera in
4 absolute coordinates.
• Specify the Y Position of the camera in
absolute coordinates.
1 Camera Name - The camera name 4 Click Save Camera to save this view
displays in floor plan view and is listed with the plan. The camera view can be
in the Project Browser. See “Project named and is listed in the Project Browser.
Browser” on page 924.
771
Chapter 28:
Rendering &
Raytracing
There are a variety of tools available to Chapter Contents

create 3D views of a model: simply click a • Rendering Tips
button to create an overview, or click and
• Lighting
drag to create a camera or cross section/
• Light Types
elevation view. See “3D Views” on page 740.
• Light Specification Dialog
To improve the quality of the rendering and • Default Sun Light Specification Dialog
create a custom look, you can adjust lighting, • Sun Angle Specification Dialog
edit the materials used in the plan, choose • Rendering Techniques
from a variety of rendering techniques and • Rendering Technique Options
fine-tune 3D view quality settings. From • Glass House View
most 3D views, you can create Final views of • Speeding up 3D View Generation
even higher quality. • Creating a Raytrace View
• The Raytrace Window
You can also use Raytracing to create highly
• Creating Materials for Raytracing
realistic images of your Chief Architect
• Raytracing Tips
plans. Raytracing uses POV-Ray technology
• POV-Ray
to calculate the rays of light in a view as they
travel through the 3D model and reflect off
surfaces. As a result, Raytracing is slower
than OpenGL rendering, but can be used to
achieve much more complex effects such as
reflections and highly realistic lighting.
772
Rendering Tips
There are a variety of factors which affect the If no texture is selected for a material or if
appearance and quality of rendered 3D the display of textures is turned off, affected
views. You can use these tools and settings to surfaces are a solid color instead.
achieve renderings that meet your needs.
Images
Lighting
Images are very important for the appearance
Lighting is extremely important in most 3D of rendered views and exported VRML files.
renderings, in Raytracing, and in VRML file Images are picture files that represent
export. Lighting controls the visibility of individual objects such as trees, flowers,
objects in a view, affects the appearance of cars, and people. Images are represented in
surfaces, and influences the appearances of floor plan view by 2D symbol and are visible
colors and textures on those surfaces. Even in Vector views. See “Placing Images” on
small changes to light intensity, direction and page 933.
color can have a large impact on image
quality. See “Lighting” on page 775. Backdrops
Backdrops are images that display in the
Material Textures
background of 3D views. Only one backdrop
Textures are graphic files that represent can be used at a time. If a backdrop is not
irregular surfaces of objects such as carpet, applied, Chief Architect applies a
bricks, tile, and wood in rendered views. background color.
Textures are assigned to materials which in
Backdrops and background colors are
turn are assigned to objects. See “Patterns
selected in the 3D Settings dialog. See
and Textures” on page 707.
The display of materials in rendered views is
You can drag and drop a backdrop directly
controlled by settings on the Texture and
into a rendered view from the Library
Render tabs of the Define Material dialog.
Browser. Select a backdrop from the upper
See “Define Material Dialog” on page 719.
pane of the Library Browser, notice that the
For realistic rendered views, it is important pointer changes in the rendered view ( ) to
to adjust texture properties correctly. indicate that a backdrop is loaded for
Textures can be mapped to objects for correct placement, and then click in the view to
placement. See “Mapping Patterns and apply the selected backdrop.
Textures” on page 714.
Spherical Panoramic Backdrops are a
Brightness, shininess and transparency special type of backdrop that wraps around
control how light sources affect the display the model in 3D views and appears to rotate
of surfaces in rendered views. See as the camera is moved.
“Lighting” on page 775.
773
Rendering Tips
It takes a special camera or an image For high quality Final Views, consider
processing program to generate spherical experimenting with these settings:
panoramic backdrops. • Soft Shadows displays shadows with soft
edges instead of hard edges. This feature
Preview vs Final View is only used when Show Shadows is used
and can slow renderings considerably.
With the exception of Vector Views, 3D
views are generated using the Preview • Triangle Size - When you use triangles,
settings in the Preferences dialog. By the program divides surfaces in most 3D
default, Rather than produce the best quality views into triangles which are used to
possible, Previews are set to generate 3D illuminate the surfaces properly. Gener-
views quickly but with reasonable quality, ally speaking the smaller the Triangle
and are best when working on the model in Size, the slower the rendering, but the
3D. See “Render Panel” on page 102. higher-quality result you can achieve.
Triangles are not used in the Enhanced
Final Views produce much higher quality Lighting and Technical Illustration Ren-
images that are more suitable for printing or dering Techniques. See “Rendering Tech-
saving as graphics files. Final Views often niques” on page 785.
take significantly longer to generate than
• Use Transparency - Necessary to dis-
Previews, so the 3D view reverts back to the
play transparent or semi-transparent sur-
Preview settings as soon as anything is
faces such as the glass in windows in
changed within the view.
rendered views.
When you have finished making adjustments • Software Edge Smoothing - A higher
in the 3D view, select 3D> Camera View degree of surface edge smoothing can
Options> Final View or Final View significantly improve the quality of a 3D
view.
with Shadows .
The Final View tools are available for all
To generate a high-quality picture of
views except Vector Views. See “Rendered your scene, consider Raytracing. See
and Vector Views” on page 742. “Creating a Raytrace View” on page 800.
To generate higher quality renderings

than can be created with the final view
settings, use the Raytrace feature. See “Ren-
dering & Raytracing” on page 772.
Higher Quality Rendering

The settings on the Render panel of the
Preferences dialog allow you to adjust
rendering quality and speed so that you can
strike a balance that best suits your needs.
774
Lighting
In most rendered views, lighting is calculated ambient light can give a rendered view a flat
on a room-by-room basis; only the light look.
sources in the room containing the camera • Interior Ambient controls the ambient
are used. This limitation does not apply in light in interior rendered views of the
Raytrace views, however. model.
When the camera is outside a building, the • Daytime Ambient controls the ambient
program normally uses sunlight for lighting light in exterior rendered views of the
calculations and turns off all other light
model when Toggle Sunlight is on.
sources. You can turn the sunlight off and use
See “Sun Angles” on page 776.
all the other exterior lights to simulate night
time views. • Nighttime Ambient controls the ambient
light in exterior rendered views of the
The maximum number of light sources that
can be turned on in a view at the same time is model when Toggle Sunlight is off.
determined by your video card. If your video In addition to the ambient lighting specified
card’s maximum number of lights is eight, in the 3D Settings dialog, there are four
the program only uses the eight light sources ways to create light sources for rendered or
closest to the camera’s position. You can Raytrace views:
manually turn on and off certain lights in
order to get the desired lighting effects. See • Default Lights
“Adjusting Lights” on page 778. • Light Fixtures
Each individual light source has a set of • Added Lights
Rendering properties, such as intensity and • Sunlight
color, that can be defined. See “Light Data
Tab” on page 781. Default Lights
Ambient Light If you create an interior rendered view of a
room and no lights have been placed there,
Ambient light is used to simulate the way the program creates a Default Light source
light “bounces” around a scene and within that room. The Default interior light
approximates this by ensuring that all objects acts like a central point light source.
are at least as bright as the specified ambient
value, which is set in the 3D Settings dialog. The Default Light cannot be adjusted in any
See “Options Tab” on page 745. way. If you want to control the light in an
interior rendered view, you must add a light
Ambient light is in addition to other light to the room that you are rendering by placing
sources in a room or scene. Too much a lighting fixture or by adding a light source
using 3D> Lighting> Add Lights .
775
Lighting
Light Fixtures
An electric symbol that represents a Light
Fixture can have one or more light sources
associated with it. Properties for each light
source such as light type, color and intensity
can be modified in the fixture’s Electrical
Service Specification. See “Electrical
Service Specification Dialog” on page 522. A Point Light that casts shadows in
both rendered and Raytrace views
If the light source is a Point or Spot Light,
you can also adjust the Offsets to specify the While Added Lights do not display as objects
light source’s position relative to the fixture. in 3D, you can specify that an Added Light’s
By using Show Position in Camera View, position be represented by a cross hairs in a
you can tell where in the scene your light is rendered view that uses lighting. See “Light
located. Data Tab” on page 524.
Lighting looks most realistic if it is offset Added lights can be placed into objects that
from a surface. normally do not generate light, such as a TV.
There are three types of added light sources:
Added Lights
• Parallel Light sources
In floor plan view, select 3D> Light- • Point Light sources
ing> Add Lights to quickly add a
light source to a plan. Added Lights are • Spot Light sources
placed on the Light Sources layer by default, See “Light Types” on page 779.
display 2D symbols in floor plan view but do
not display as objects in 3D views. Sun Angles
Added Lights can serve as sources of light in A Sun Angle arrow is a marker that
rendered views, Raytrace views, or both. In displays in floor plan view and indi-
addition, Added Lights can be set to cast cates the angle of the sun at a specific time
shadows. An Added Light’s symbol in floor and location on the Earth. Multiple Sun
plan view indicates which of these attributes Angles can be created in floor plan view,
the light has: each with different specifications.
• R - Used in rendered views.
Sun Angles are parallel light sources. Their
• T - Used in Raytrace views. location and direction are defined per plan.
• S - Casts shadows. To accurately define the Sun’s location
relative to the model, use a North
• No letters - Light is not turned on.
Pointer . See “North Pointer” on page
886.
776
To create a Sun Angle off in the Sun Angle Specification dialog. If

a Sun Angle does not exist, the program uses
1. Make the first floor or foundation level the Default Sun. See “Sun Angle
the current floor. Sun Angles can only be Specification Dialog” on page 782.
created on these floor levels.
3D> Lighting> Toggle Sunlight
2. In floor plan view, select CAD> Lines>
controls the display of either the Default Sun
Sun Angle and click the screen or the current Sun Angle as a source of light.
where the Sun Angle arrow should dis-
play. Default Sun Light
3. In the Sun Angle Specification dialog,
If you create an exterior rendered view and
specify the Sun Angle’s Earth Data and
no Sun Angle exists, the program creates a
other information. See “Sun Angle
Default Sun. The Default Sun acts like a
parallel light source but its location is not
4. After it is created, a Sun Angle can be based on any real world locations.
moved to a different location in floor
plan view. Shadows are not affected. The Default Sun can be opened for
specification in a rendered view by selecting
A Sun Angle’s position is specified by Lati-
tude and Longitude. The following table lists 3D> Lighting> Adjust Lights . If there
a sample of latitude and longitude values for are no other lights in the view, the default
some cities: sun’s Light Specification dialog opens. See
“Light Specification Dialog” on page 781.
If there are other lights in the scene, but no
Sun Angles, the Adjust Lights dialog opens.
Select Default Sun from the list of available
light sources and click Adjust to open the
Default Sun Light Specification dialog. See
“Default Sun Light Specification Dialog” on
page 782.
If you place a Sun Angle in floor plan

view, the Default Sun can no longer be used
as a light source in exterior rendered views
unless the Sun Angle’s light is turned off.
Sun Shadows
Sun Angles allow the shadow cast by a
When rendering an exterior view, the building at any time of the year to be dis-
program looks for any Sun Angles that are played in floor plan and rendered views.
turned on. A Sun Angle can be turned on or
777
Lighting
.
Specify different line colors and/or
styles for shadows cast by multiple Sun
Angles on the Line Style tab of the Sun
Angle Specification dialog.
If no Terrain Perimeter has been created,

shadows fall on an imaginary plane at height
zero, the default height for the first floor. If a
Terrain Perimeter exists, shadows are modi-
fied to indicate where the real shadow would
Sun angle for: fall on the actual terrain.
March 1, 2007 There are several ways to delete the shadow
created by a Sun Angle.
12 p.m. (noon)
• In floor plan view, select and delete the
Coeur d’Alene, ID defining polyline.
To display shadows created by a Sun Angle • In floor plan view, select and delete the
Sun Angle arrow.
1. On the Render tab of the Preferences • In the Sun Angle Specification dialog,
dialog, check Show Shadows for Pre- click the Delete Shadow button. See
view and/or Final View. See “Render “Earth Data Tab” on page 783.
• In the Sun Angle Specification dialog,
2. Select a Sun Angle and click the Open click the Make Shadow button to delete
Object edit button. the existing shadow and create a new
one.
3. On the Render Data tab of the Sun
Angle Specification dialog, make sure
Adjusting Lights
that Casts Shadows is checked.
4. To display the shadow in floor plan Light sources in the current plan can
view, click the Make Shadow button on be accessed and edited using the
the Earth Data tab. Adjust Lights dialog. Select 3D> Adjust
Lights to open this dialog in floor plan or
Multiple Sun Angles can be placed in the any 3D view.
same plan to allow the simultaneous display
of shadows cast at different times in floor
plan view.
778
Adjust Lights Dialog
All lights in the current plan display in the Light Specification Dialog” on page 782,
list. Check the box beside a light to turn it on “Light Specification Dialog” on page 781 or
or uncheck the box to turn it off. “Electrical Service Specification Dialog” on
page 522.
To adjust the properties of one or more
specific lights, select that light in the list and Select another light to adjust or click Done.
click the Adjust button. Make changes to the
If you are in a rendered view, the view will
light in its specification dialog and click OK.
regenerate based on the new light settings.
For more information, see “Default Sun
Light Types
There are three types of light source, each of if it were at an infinite distance from the
which generates light in a different way and object. A Parallel Light source is commonly
allows you to create a variety of lighting used to simulate distant light sources, such as
effects: the sun. It is the best choice of light to use for
• Parallel Light sources maximum speed generating rendered views.
• Point Light sources Parallel Light sources are represented in

floor plan view by three arrows. To modify
• Spot Light sources
the light, double-click it or select it, then
Parallel Lights click the Open Object edit button. The
Light Specification dialog opens, allowing
A Parallel Light has a direction but you to modify the light’s characteristics. Any
no position. The light appears to light source can be changed into a Parallel
illuminate all objects with equal intensity, as
779
Light Types
Light source by changing its light type in the To create a Point Light source
Light Specification dialog.
1. In floor plan view, select 3D> Lighting>
To add a Parallel Light Add Lights .
1. In floor plan view, select 3D> Lighting> 2. Click in floor plan view. Do not drag the
pointer when you click the screen, or
Add Lights . you will create a spot or parallel light.
2. Click and drag in floor plan view two or
more plan feet (600 mm) in any direc- Spot Lights
tion.
A Spot Light focuses the light in a
3. When you have dragged a sufficient dis- specified direction. The location,
tance, the light preview will change to a tilt angle, direction and intensity of
parallel light icon. a Spot Light can be defined. Spot Lights
4. When you release the mouse, a parallel cannot be placed directly in the plan. They
light pointing in the direction that you are created by changing an existing light’s
dragged is created. specification. Once defined as a Spot Light,
the direction of a spot light can be changed in
Point Lights the Light Specification dialog or for an
added light source, by rotating the light in
Like a bare light bulb, a Point Light floor plan view.
radiates light equally in all directions
from its origin. It slows rendering To create a Spot Light source
down, but it is a more realistic representation
of electric lighting and should be used where 1. In floor plan view, select 3D> Lighting>
visual fidelity is the deciding concern.
Add Lights .
If no user defined light exists, Chief
2. Click and drag in floor plan view no
Architect creates a Point Light source to
more than two plan feet (600 mm) in any
represent a light within a room. Any light
direction.
source, except a sun angle, can be changed
into a Point Light source by changing its 3. As you drag, the light preview will look
light type in the specification dialog. like a spot light icon. If you drag too far,
it will change to a parallel light icon.
To modify the light, double-click it (or select
4. When you release the mouse, a parallel
it, then click the Open Object edit light pointing in the direction that you
button). The Light Specification dialog dragged is created.
opens.
Parallel, Point and Spot lights can also be
associated with a light fixture placed from
the Library Browser or using the Light
tool. See “Light Fixtures” on page 776.
780
Light Specification Dialog

Select one or more parallel, point or spot In addition, you can right-click on a light
lights and click the Open Object edit fixture in an unlocked library (see “Adding
button to open the Light Specification to the Library” on page 700) or click on it
dialog. and select Library> Edit Light Data to
open a version of the Light Specification
You can also select 3D> Adjust Lights dialog that is similar to the Electrical
to access a list of the light sources present in Service Specification dialog. See “Light
the current plan and open the specification Data Tab” on page 524.
dialog for any of them. See “Adjusting
Lights” on page 778.
Location Tab
Floor Number - Define where the symbol a Height value that includes the total height
for an added light displays in floor plan view. of the first floor. A value of 0 equals the floor
elevation of the first floor.
The Floor Number controls which floor the
added light symbol is drawn on. If you assign
the number of a non-existent floor, you can Light Data Tab
neither see the light nor delete it. The settings on this tab are also found on the
A floor number of -1 draws the light symbol same tab of the Electrical Service
on all floors, a value of 1 draws the light Specification dialog. See “Light Data Tab”
symbol on the first floor. The floor number on page 524.
has no effect on the light height. Set the Depending on the type of light(s) selected,
number equal to the floor plan that contains the options available here may vary.
the room that the light is in, if you want it to
display in floor plan view. Layer Tab
Specify the selected light’s Height. The For information about the Layer tab, see
height of an Added Light is always relative “Layer Tab” on page 125.
to the first floor. If you want an Added Light
to illuminate a room on the second floor, use
781
Default Sun Light Specification Dialog
Default Sun Light Specification Dialog

The Default Sun Light Specification dialog An intensity of 0% is the same as turning the
allows you to control the intensity, direction sun light off. An intensity of 100% is the
and color of the Default Sun light source. maximum brightness allowed.
While in a 3D view, select 3D> Lighting> Tilt Angle - Specify the angle of the sun
Adjust Lights , then select Default Sun light with respect to the horizon. A value of
from the list in the Adjust Lights dialog and 90 degrees means that the light is pointing
click the Adjust button. See “Adjust Lights straight up, while a value of -90 degrees
Dialog” on page 779. means that the light is pointing straight
down. 0 degrees is parallel to the horizon.
If there are no light fixtures or added lights in
the plan, this dialog will open as soon as Dir Angle - Specify the direction that the sun
Adjust Lights is selected. light points toward. Zero degrees is
measured horizontally on screen, pointing to
the right. Positive values rotate in a counter-
clockwise direction from there, while
negative values rotate clockwise.
Color - Click the rectangle to define the
color of the light being modeled. Colored sun
light may be used to achieve special lighting
effects, but may alter the appearance of your
material colors and textures.
The Default Sun light color is pure white,
Intensity - Use the slider bar or text field to which has the least effect on the material
control how bright the default sun light colors and textures.
appears in rendered views.
Sun Angle Specification Dialog

Select CAD> Lines> Sun Angle, then click You can also open the Sun Angle
anywhere in floor plan view to open the Sun Specification dialog for an existing sun
Angle Specification dialog and create a new angle by selecting it and clicking the Open
sun angle. See “Sun Angle” on page 888. Object edit button.
782
Earth Data Tab
1
2
3
4
5
7 10
8 11
9
12
1 Latitude is measured North or South of 6 In the lower part of the Sun Angle
the equator. Specification dialog is a section dis-
playing the calculated angles.
2 Longitude is measured West or East of
the Greenwich meridian. The Solar altitude angle displays the angle
Common values for latitude, longitude can of the sun in degrees above the horizontal
be found in any atlas. plane.
The Solar direction angle shows the angle
3 Date - Enter a date for each arrow you between true north and the sun's direction.
create.
This is the angle the Sun Angle arrow dis-
4 Time - Enter a time for each arrow you plays in floor plan view.
create. Define whether or not it should
be adjusted to allow for Daylight Savings This angle is always measured relative to
Time. north. North is defined by a user specified
North Pointer . If you have not created a
5 Time Zone - Specify the time zone. North Pointer, north is assumed to be straight
The previous values default to the setup in the floor plan view. If a North Pointer is
tings on the Special CAD panel of the drawn, or the direction of an existing North
Preferences dialog.
Pointer is changed, Sun Angles and their
shadows automatically update.
783
Sun Angle Specification Dialog
7 Always Update - Check this box to Note that the Make Shadow option does not
have the program update the shadow affect the rendered view. To turn shadows on
for this arrow whenever any of the defining and off for the view, use the Render tab.
information is changed. When checked, it
slows the system down while the Sun Angle 12 Delete shadow - Removes the sun
shadow generated using Make Shadow
Specification dialog is displayed. If this is from the floor plan view.
not checked, click the Make Shadow button
to generate a new shadow based on the new
Render Data Tab
information.
Show Date on Sun Angle - Check this
8
box to have the date and time display
on the Sun Angle arrow in floor plan view.
1
9 Auto Rebuild Terrain - Check this 2
box to rebuild the terrain automatically
whenever you create a sun shadow. 3
If the Auto Rebuild Terrain check box is 4
checked, then if you rebuild the sun shadow,
the terrain automatically rebuilds as needed
before the sun shadow generates. If this You can define if the Sun Angle is used as a
check box is unchecked, you are prompted to light source in rendered views. Set the
rebuild the terrain. parameters here if you want to use the Sun
Angle as a light source in rendered views.
Note that when you use the Build Terrain
command in floor plan view, all sun shadows The settings defined on the Render Data tab
in the plan are automatically updated. are not related to how the shadow is dis-
played in floor plan view. They only affect
10 Length of Plan Symbol - Enter the rendered views.
length of the Sun Angle arrow for floor
plan view. 1 On - Check this box to select the cur-
rent Sun Angle as a rendering light
11 Make shadow - Click the button to cal- source. If there is more than one defined Sun
culate the shadow on screen. The shadow is a Angle, the renderer selects the first Sun
polyline filled with a hatch pattern derived Angle that is defined as On. To make sure
from the Sun Angle direction. you are rendering the correct Sun Angle,
make sure all others do not have this box
No shadow generates if the sun is not above
checked.
the horizon or if the sun is so low on the hori-
zon that the shadow would be extremely 2 Casts Shadow - Check this box to have
long. If no shadow appears, reset the time to this light source cast shadows. These
noon to test the function. If the shadow shadows are similar to the shadow shown in
appears, your original time setting was too floor plan view, but they may render differ-
early or too late to generate shadows. ently based on other light sources.
784
3 Intensity - Use the slider bar or text Line Style Tab

field to define the relative intensity of
the light source. Time of day as set on the For information about the Line Style tab, see
Earth Data tab, does not affect how the Sun “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
Angle renders as a light source, but this does.
Fill Style Tab
4 Color - Select a color for the light
source. The Fill Style tab of the Sun Angle
Specification dialog controls the appearance
of the selected Sun Angle’s shadow in floor
plan view. For information about the Fill
Style tab, see “Fill Style Tab” on page 902.
Rendering Techniques
Any cross section/elevation, camera If a camera view is saved, its Rendering
view or overview can be generated Technique settings are saved, as well. See
using a variety of rendering techniques to “Saving & Printing 3D Views” on page 767.
produce views for a range of different
You can specify in which Rendering
purposes, from detail drawings to artistic
Techniques a backdrop image are used. See
presentation views. When a 3D view is
active, select 3D> Rendering Techniques to
access these tools.
The Painting, Watercolor and Line
There are two ways to create a view using a Drawing techniques require more time
particular rendering technique: to generate than other Rendering Tech-
• Create a 3D view, then select the desired niques. To save time, adjust the camera’s
perspective before using one of these tech-
rendering technique from the menu.
niques. See “Editing 3D Views” on page 758.
• Select the desired rendering technique in
the Camera Defaults dialog, then create Standard Rendering
a 3D view. See “Camera Defaults Dia-
log” on page 742. Standard rendering is a photo-
realistic technique that represents
Many of the Rendering Techniques have materials using textures, models lighting, and
default settings that control their initial can also display shadows. Surface edge lines
appearance. Once a view is created, these are not drawn and no special colors or effects
settings can be adjusted for that particular are applied. Lighting is limited to the room
view in the Technique Options dialog. See containing the camera and the capabilities of
“Rendering Technique Options” on page your video card.
788.
785
Rendering Techniques
transparent surfaces. Lighting is not

modeled, and materials are not represented,
so neither pattern lines nor textures are used.
In floor plan view, the camera

symbol for a view using the
Standard technique displays an S
in its center. In floor plan view, the camera
symbol for a view using the Glass
Vector View House technique displays a G in
its center.
In Vector Views, surface edge lines
are drawn and pattern lines and colors Enhanced Lighting
are used to represent materials. Textures and
lighting are not used, and special colors and Enhanced Lighting is similar to
effects are not applied. Standard rendering, but calculates the
effects of lighting on surfaces to a higher
degree of realism, so this technique can be
slower than Standard rendering.

Vector View technique displays a
V in its center. In floor plan view, the camera
Enhanced Lighting technique
Glass House
displays an E in its center.
Glass House rendering uses different
Enhanced Lighting requires a video card
shades of a single color to display the
that supports OpenGL 2.0.
model with surface edge lines and semi-
786
Duotone
Duotone rendering represents
materials using textures and models
lighting. Surface edge and pattern lines are
not drawn and two colors, one Light and one
Dark, are applied over the surfaces, allowing
you to create special effects such as
sepiatone or grayscale.
Technical Illustration technique
displays a T in its center.
Technical Illustration requires a video card
that supports OpenGL 2.0.
Painting
In floor plan view, the camera Painting rendering uses textures to
symbol for a view using the represent materials and models
Duotone technique displays a D lighting, but draws views by placing small
in its center. regions of color and then stroking them along
Duotone requires a video card that supports the surfaces in multiple layers. This
OpenGL 2.0. technique can produce a variety of distinct
non-photo-realistic painting styles.
Technical Illustration
Technical Illustration rendering
draws surface edge and pattern lines,
and uses shades of two colors, Warm and
Cool. The warm shade is applied to surfaces
that face the light source in the view, and the
cool shade,to surfaces that face away from it.
Only one light source is used: the light with
the hightest Intensity found in the room In floor plan view, the camera
containing the camera. In exterior views, this symbol for a view using the
light is always the Default Sun Light. Painting technique displays a P
Lighting is modeled as non-photorealistic, in its center.
stylized highlights.
787
Rendering Technique Options
Watercolor Line Drawing

Watercolor rendering uses textures to In a Line Drawing rendering, surface
represent materials and models edges are represented by lines with a
lighting, but approximates the effects of hand-drawn style. Surfaces are completely
watercolor painting such as pigment pooling opaque and patterns are used, but textures
and flow. When Line Drawing on Top is and lighting are not.
enabled, pattern lines are also used.

In floor plan view, the camera symbol for a view using the Line
symbol for a view using the Drawing technique displays an L
Watercolor technique displays a in its center.
W in its center. Line Drawing requires a video card that
Watercolor requires a video card that supports OpenGL 1.5.
supports OpenGL 1.5.
Note: In some plans, the Painting, Watercolor
and Line Drawing techniques may take a
considerable amount of time. You can press
the Esc key to cancel the rendering.

The settings in the Rendering The Rendering Technique Options dialog
Technique Options dialog allow you can also be accessed by double-clicking the
to control the specific effects of each Rendering Techniques parent button.
rendering technique on an active 3D view. To
access this dialog, create a cross section/ The settings in the Rendering Technique
elevation view, camera view or overview and Defaults dialog are the same as those in the
select 3D> Rendering Techniques> this dialog, but control the initial settings of
Technique Options. each technique when it is first applied.
In the Rendering Technique Options
dialog, select a technique from the list on the
788
left to make its options active on the right. except Painting, Watercolor and Line
When this dialog is first opened, the Drawing. To update views using these
technique currently used by the view is techniques, which take more time to draw
selected. If the view is new, the settings are than the others, click the Update button in the
based on those in the Rendering Technique dialog.
Defaults dialog.
When a 3D view is saved, its Rendering
As changes are made in the Rendering Technique Options settings are saved, as
Technique Options dialog, the 3D view well. See “Saving & Printing 3D Views” on
behind the dialog box automatically updates page 767.
to reflect those changes for all techniques
Standard Technique
There are no Rendering Technique Settings dialog. See “3D Settings Dialog”
Options for Standard rendering; on page 744.
however, you can specify the ambient
There are a variety of other tools that affect
lighting for rendered views in the 3D
the appearance of standard rendered views.
See “Displaying 3D Views” on page 756.
Vector View
There are no Rendering Technique 3D Settings dialog. See “3D Settings
Options for Vector View rendering; Dialog” on page 744.
however, a variety of settings that affect the
There are a variety of other tools that affect
appearance of Vector Views an be set in the
the appearance of Vector Views. See
“Displaying 3D Views” on page 756.
Glass House Technique

The active 3D view immediately the Rendering Technique Options settings for
updates to reflect any changes made to Glass House renderings.
789
• Click the Color bar to select a color for • Specify the Line Thickness of surface
the semi-transparent surfaces and lines in lines in Glass House view.
a Glass House view. See “Color Chooser • Click Reset to Defaults to apply the
Dialog” on page 727. Glass House settings defined in the
• Specify the Transparency of the surfaces Rendering Technique Defaults dialog.
in Glass House view. For example, to cre- If clicked in the defaults dialog, the origi-
ate a wireframe line drawing of your nally installed settings are restored.
structure, turn transparency to full and
minimize line thickness.
Enhanced Lighting
There are no Rendering Technique There are a variety of other tools that affect
Options for Enhanced Lighting the appearance of rendered views using
rendering. Enhanced Lighting. See “Displaying 3D
Duotone
updates to reflect any changes made to Duotone renderings.
790
• Click the Color bars to select a Light • Specify the Tone, which is the extent to
Color and Dark Color for surfaces and which the Light and Dark Colors cover
lines in a Duotone view. See “Color the original colors in the view. A value of
Chooser Dialog” on page 727. 100% completely obscures the view’s
• Specify the Desaturation, which is the original colors as well as the effects of
degree to which color is removed from Desaturation.
the original image. A value of 0% retains • Click Reset to Defaults to apply the
the original colors in the view while a Duotone default settings set in the
100% results in a grayscale image. Rendering Technique Defaults dialog.
If clicked in the defaults dialog, the origi-
nally installed settings are restored.
Technical Illustration
updates to reflect any changes made to Technical Illustration renderings.
791
• Click the Color bar to select a Warm is blended with original colors on shaded
Color for surfaces that face the light surfaces in the view.
source and a Cool Color for surfaces that • Specify the Line Width of all surface
face away from the light. See “Color edge and pattern lines in the view.
• Click Reset to Defaults to apply the
• Specify the Warm Blend, which is the Technical Illustration settings defined in
degree to which the selected Warm Color the Rendering Technique Defaults dia-
is blended with original colors on well-lit log. If clicked in the defaults dialog, the
surfaces in the view. originally installed settings are restored.
• Specify the Cool Blend, which is the
degree to which the selected Cool Color
Painting
In order for the active 3D view to renderings, you must click the Update View
reflect changes made to the Rendering button in the dialog.
Technique Options settings for Painting
792
• Select a predefined painting Style from • Specify the Blur Factor, which is the
the drop-down list. The settings that fol- degree to which the original image is
low reflect the selected style. If you cus- blurred. A low value retains more detail
tomize any of the settings, the selected in the original view and thus a more accu-
style will be “Custom”. rate representation of the original view
• Specify the Minimum Brush Size, • Specify the Stroke Curvature , which is
which is the size of the brush used to the degree to which brush strokes are
paint the final layer. curved. A low value produces straight
• Specify the Number of Coats, which is curves while a high value creates small,
the number of times the view is painted tight strokes.
using progressively smaller brushes. • Specify the Stroke Opacity, or how
• Specify the Minimum Stroke Length of transparent the paint brushed over the
the brushes used to draw the view. A low original view is. A value of 0% results in
value produces finer detail while a higher completely transparent paint.
value creates a choppier appearance. • Specify the Color Jitter, which is the
• Specify the Maximum Stroke Length of amount of random colors added to brush
the brushes used to draw the view. strokes.
• Specify the Approximation Threshold, • Click Reset to Defaults to apply the

which is how closely the painted render- Painting settings defined in the
ing conforms to the original view. Rendering Technique Defaults dialog.
793
If clicked in the defaults dialog, the origi- • Click OK to close the dialog and redraw
nally installed settings are restored. the active 3D view based on these set-
• Click Update View to apply any changes tings. Depending on your plan, this may
made to these settings to the active 3D take several moments.
view.
Watercolor
Technique Options settings for Watercolor
• Specify the Smooth Amount, which is • Specify the Pigment Settling Strength,
the degree to which details are removed which is creates the appearance of pig-
from the original view. ment settling into low areas in paper.
• Specify the Paint Contrast, which deter- • Specify the Edge Strength, which is how
mines the extent to which variations in well-defined surface edge lines are.
pigment color are used. • Check Line Drawing on Top to generate
• Specify the Turbulence Strength, which pattern lines and surface edge lines with a
produces “pooling”, or variations in the hand-drawn appearance, as in the Line
strength of pigment colors. Drawing Technique. When checked, the
• Specify the Turbulence Scale, which three settings that follow are enabled.
controls the size of the areas of pooling.
794
• Specify the Thickness of lines drawn on Rendering Technique Defaults dialog.

top of the rendering. If clicked in the defaults dialog, the origi-
• Specify the Extend Amount, which is nally installed settings are restored.
the distance that lines may extend past • Click Update View to apply any changes
intersecting surface edges. made to these settings to the active 3D
• Specify the Squiggle Amplitude, which view.
controls the average amount of curvature • Click OK to close the dialog and redraw
in the lines’ squiggles. A value of 0 pro- the active 3D view based on these set-
duces straight lines. tings. Depending on your plan, this may
• Click Reset to Defaults to apply the take several moments.
Watercolor settings defined in the
Line Drawing
Technique Options settings for Line Drawing
• Click the Color bar to select a color for • Specify the Extend Amount, which is
the lines used to draw the view. See the distance that lines may extend past
“Color Chooser Dialog” on page 727. intersecting surface edges.
• Specify the Thickness of the lines, in • Specify the Squiggle Amplitude, which
pixels. controls the average amount of curvature
795
Glass House View
in the lines’ squiggles. A value of 0 pro- If clicked in the defaults dialog, the origi-
duces straight lines. nally installed settings are restored.
• Specify the Squiggle Frequency, which • Click Update View to apply any changes
controls how often the lines have curves. made to these settings to the active 3D
A value of 0 produces straight lines. view.
• Click Reset to Defaults to apply the Line • Click OK to close the dialog and redraw
Drawing settings defined in the the active 3D view based on these set-
Rendering Technique Defaults dialog. tings. Depending on your plan, this may
take several moments.
Glass House View

In Chief Architect Interiors and Lite, Glass Rendering Techniques> Glass House
House View can be used to display the 3D Options.
model using semi-transparent surfaces.
Different shades of blue are used to represent
surfaces and surface edge lines. Lighting is
not modeled, and materials are not
represented, so neither pattern lines nor
textures are used.
Glass House View is an excellent way to
illustrate the spatial relationships between
different areas in the plan.
You can display a current camera view
or overview as a Glass House View by • Click the Color bar to select a color for
selecting 3D> Rendering Techniques> the semi-transparent surfaces and lines in
Glass House Mode. a Glass House view. See “Color Chooser
You can also create a Glass House Dialog” on page 727.
View by selecting 3D> Create • Specify the Transparency of the surfaces
Perspective View> Glass House Camera in Glass House view. For example, to cre-
and then clicking and dragging to draw a ate a wireframe line drawing of your
camera arrow. See “Creating Camera Views” structure, turn transparency to full and
on page 750. minimize line thickness.
• Specify the Line Thickness of surface
Glass House Options lines in Glass House view.
You can modify the appearance of • Click Reset to Defaults to apply the
Glass House Views by selecting 3D> Glass House settings defined in the
Rendering Technique Defaults dialog.
796
If clicked in the defaults dialog, the origi- In the Full Version of Chief Architect, Glass
nally installed settings are restored. House is one of the nine Rendering
Techniques. See “Rendering Techniques” on
page 785.
Glass House Options

In Chief Architect Interiors and Lite, Glass represented, so neither pattern lines nor
House View can be used to display the 3D textures are used.
model using semi-transparent surfaces.
In the Full Version of Chief Architect, the
Different shades of blue are used to represent
Glass House Options settings are available in
surfaces and surface edge lines. Lighting is
the Rendering Technique Options. See
not modeled, and materials are not
“Rendering Technique Options” on page
788.
Speeding up 3D View Generation

Depending on the speed of your processor Layer Display Options dialog. Turning off
and the memory of your computer, a 3D view the display of unneeded objects in 3D views
may generate in a few seconds or less. can speed up 3D view generation time. See
“Layer Display Options Dialog” on page
When you have a large, complex model with
121.
a lot of interior detail, many objects, or hatch
patterns with many lines, it may take a few Each camera view and overview uses the
minutes to generate a 3D view of everything default layer set for Camera Views. Changes
in the model. During this process, progress made to this layer set in one view affect all
information may display in the Status Bar other views using that set. See “Layer Set
and in a message window. Management” on page 119.
There are several ways to speed up the
generation time of views. Halt Generation with Esc Key
Using the Esc key, you can interrupt the
You can turn on "Show Screen Redraw modeling process at any point and display
Time" in the Preferences dialog to see the incomplete model “as is.” This is
how your changes affect 3D view generation particularly helpful when you just need to
time. See “Appearance Panel” on page 71. reorient a model on the screen for a specific
angle or view.
Turn Off Layers
The Esc option allows you to place the view
The display of objects in 3D views quickly, then press the F5 function key to
can be turned on or off by layer in the refresh the display with all 3D Faces intact.
797
Speeding up 3D View Generation
Low Detail Display you have no lights, you probably want to turn
off Use Triangles.
Select 3D> Toggle Low Detail Mode
to switch to and from Low Detail Soft Shadows - Only used when Shadows
Mode. Low Detail Mode suppresses patterns are turned on, this significantly slows down
and textures and draws 3D approximations of the rendering speed. To save time, only use
some objects, allowing for a quicker screen this option for final images, and consider
redraw time and quicker camera movement. Raytracing as an alternative way to generate
a high-quality image.
To draw all 3D views in Low Detail Mode by
default, check Start in Low Detail Mode on Surface Backdrop - For some OpenGL-
the Options tab of the 3D Settings dialog. accelerated video cards, this option
See “3D Settings Dialog” on page 744. drastically increases rendering speeds. When
turned on, this option creates surfaces that
the backdrop is drawn on. When this option
Faster Rendering
is turned off, the backdrop is send directly to
To improve rendering speed, consider the video card. For most modern video cards,
turning off some or all of the following Off is the recommended setting.
options. Bear in mind that render quality may
Use Optimizations - Many video cards with
be affected.
OpenGL are capable of ’optimizing’ the
Always Rebuild - This forces Chief view for subsequent redraws. Use of this
Architect to re-create the entire model every option varies from video card to video card.
time the camera is moved. For most video
In general, you should leave this option
cards you may want to turn this off, and turn
turned on unless you are experiencing
Keep All Surfaces on.
crashes when rendering.
Keep All Surfaces - When Chief Architect
Software Edge Smoothing - Only use this
creates the 3D model, this option toggles
option for Final Views, as this slows down
whether to only create surfaces facing you.
even the fastest video card.
On most OpenGL-accelerated video cards, it
is faster to create the model with all surfaces Show Shadows - This option has the greatest
once, rather than re-create it every time the impact on rendering speed and should only
camera position changes. For most scenarios be used for final views, unless you have an
you may want to turn this on, and turn extremely fast OpenGL-accelerated video
Always Rebuild off. card.
Use Triangles - This determines whether or When rendering shadows, a percentage
not lights illuminate the scene accurately. complete value displays in the Status Bar.
Turning off this option speeds up render
times, but results in large objects (such as
walls) appearing to be lit incorrectly. When
In general, you should make sure you are
you are editing in a rendered view, or when
only using a minimum number of lights to
cast shadows.
798
Use Textures - Some older video cards slow dividing the screen into horizontal and
down significantly using textures. If you find vertical panels.
that you need to uncheck this box often, you
The Options tab of the 3D Settings dialog
may want to upgrade your video card.
has two tuning factors that allow you to
In addition, the number of light sources in a adjust the way the adaptive method works.
plan can drastically affect rendering speed, See “3D Settings Dialog” on page 744.
especially if you are using shadows. Light
sources can be added by selecting 3D> Higher Quality Rendering
Lighting> Add Lights and can be There are a number of settings you can use to
removed by clicking on the light source in improve the quality of your renderings.
floor plan view and deleting it. Some can affect rendering times, so you may
To speed up the render speed even further, want to consider optimizing them for your
you can switch to Low Detail rendering needs in Final Views only. See “Preview vs
mode, that draws a simplified version of the Final View” on page 774.
view without lighting. See “Options Tab” on Hardware Texture Filtering - Improves the
page 745. appearance of textures, particularly on
For the best rendering quality, but slowest surfaces angled away from the camera. Not
rendering speed, all rendering options should supported by some video cards.
be turned on in Final View settings. Use Triangles - When you have lights in
your scene, triangles are used to make those
Lower Interactive Quality lights appear to illuminate objects properly.
When navigating a Vector View of a Generally speaking the smaller you set your
large model, the view regeneration Triangle Size, the slower the render, but the
speed can be improved using Lower higher-quality result you can achieve.
Interactive Quality. See “Vector View” on Use Transparency - Necessary to display
page 786. transparent or semi-transparent surfaces in a
This option is found on the Appearance panel rendered view.
of the Preferences dialog and is enabled by Software Edge Smoothing - Though slow,
default. See “Appearance Panel” on page 71. this can significantly improve the quality of
3D views.
View Panel Factors
Vector Views are drawn using an To generate a high-quality picture of
adaptive method that saves time by your scene, consider Raytracing.
799
Creating a Raytrace View

To create a raytraced image in Chief Unlike a Standard rendered view, a Raytrace
Architect, begin with a Standard view has no limit on the number of lights that
rendered view. The camera position, field of can be used to create a scene.
view and orientation determine the way the
scene appears in the Raytrace window. Most
The more lights that are turned on and
other Render settings, including your Render set for use in raytracing, the longer it
Preferences, are not used for generating a takes to raytrace a scene.
Raytrace view, although Ambient Light, set
in the 3D Settings dialog, is. See “Options In a Standard rendered view, select 3D>
Tab” on page 745.
Raytrace Current View to begin
The lighting used in a Raytrace view is also raytracing. The Raytrace Options dialog
different than the lighting used in Standard opens.
views. In Raytrace views, lights are not
When the Raytrace Options dialog is
limited to the current room; instead, all the
opened, the configuration last used in the
lights currently modeled in the plan are used,
current plan is selected by default, even if a
as long as the light is turned “on” in its
Raytrace was not created.
specification dialog and has been set to Use
in Raytracing. See “Light Specification
800
Raytrace Options Dialog
4
5
6
Raytrace Properties window, subsequent raytraces are also the

new size.
1 Width/Height – The size, in pixels, of Save Raytrace to File – Save the raytrace
the image you are about to create. You
can set these values to virtually anything you image directly to a .bmp, .png or .tga file
want, but images larger than 2000 x 2000 while it raytraces. Saving as a file is the only
pixels cannot be viewed from within Chief way to produce a final image larger than the
Architect and must be saved directly to a Chief Architect view window.
.bmp, .png or .tga file.
Raytrace Parameters
Retain Aspect Ratio - Check this box to
maintain the width to height ratio of the
2 Radiosity – Radiosity is slower, but
original image and prevent the raytrace from produces a much more realistic lighting
being stretched or distorted. model than standard raytracing. Without
radiosity, the raytracer uses a lighting model
Use Render Window Size - Check this box
similar to a Standard rendered view, which
to set the raytrace to the size of the 3D view
uses a constant value for ambient lights.
window. If you change the size of the view
Unlike the constant Ambient Lighting model
that assumes any object not directly exposed
801
to a light is a pre-set brightness, Radiosity Time of Day – Similar to the Daytime/

traces light as it bounces around a scene, Nighttime setting in Standard rendered
capturing the subtle variations in shadows. views, this allows you to choose whether to
render a daytime or a nighttime image.
Without Radiosity
Anti-Aliasing – This setting determines
what quality of “smooth edges” to create in
your raytraced image. The High Quality
setting is somewhat slower than the Normal
quality setting. This is similar to the Smooth
Edges option used in rendered views. See
“Faster Rendering” on page 798.
With Radiosity 3 The Sunlight Contribution options are

available when a Radiosity setting other
than None is used, and allow the ability to
have light coming directly from the sun, as
well as light ‘scattered’ through the clouds.
Direct Sunlight allows you to brighten the
intensity of the light coming from the sun.
Diffuse Sunlight allows you to brighten the
The following options allow you to adjust intensity of the light from the surrounding
how Radiosity works in the scene: atmosphere. For a cloudy day, you might turn
• None - Uses an ambient lighting model up the diffuse sunlight, and turn down the
similar to the rendered view. direct sunlight.
• Low Quality - This option should pro-
vide reasonable image quality for most
4 Use Soft Shadows – You can specify
soft shadow settings for each light in
images, though the results may appear the Adjust Lights dialog. See “Adjusting
‘blotchy’. This is the fastest Radiosity Lights” on page 778. These settings only
option. take effect if you enable Use Soft Shadows.
• Medium Quality - This option should Soft shadows may slow image generation.
only be used for images where Low Radi-
osity is insufficient, as it is more time- 5 Create Default Light – If you have no
lights in your scene, the raytracer
consuming. creates one for you if the scene is indoors and
• High Quality - Extremely time-consum- this box is checked.
ing and only necessary for the most dis-
cerning tastes. High Radiosity often takes Raytrace Configurations
hours to render what takes minutes using
Low Radiosity. 6 A Raytrace Configuration is a group
of Raytrace settings. Configurations are
saved with the plan and can be reused.
802
• Select a configuration from the drop- To add a configuration

down list.
• Click the New button to create a new 1. Click New. A configuration called
configuration. “Copy of Default Configuration”
appears in the list. When you add addi-
• Click the Save button to save a new con- tional configurations, they are called
figuration or any changes made to it. “Copy of” and the name of the configu-
• Click the Delete button to delete the ration that is currently selected.
selected configuration from the list. This 2. Give this new configuration a short,
button is not available if there is only one descriptive name.
configuration in the list.
3. Make any desired changes to the Ray-
The existing configurations are shown on the trace Options settings in this dialog.
drop-down list. There must always be at least
4. Click Save to keep this configuration
one configuration available. If none have
with the plan.The new configuration can
been added, the program creates a Default
now be used to create a Raytrace view.
Configuration.
5. To reuse this configuration, select it
You can add your preferred raytrace
configurations to your template plan.
See“Template Files” on page 51 .
The Raytrace Window

If your raytraced image is small enough to fit Adjust Image Properties
in a window, your image appears as it is
created. Unlike rendered views, you can A raytracer mimics a camera while it
minimize your Raytrace window or perform generates your image. Select File>
other tasks while the raytrace is progressing. Adjust Image Properties to open the Adjust
Simply restore your raytrace window when Image Properties dialog and adjust the
you are ready to view your image. brightness and contrast of your image. This
can be done during the raytrace process or
The following options are available from the when the raytrace is completed.
raytrace window:
Select File> Print Image to print your
picture.
Select File> Save Image to save your picture
to any of several file formats including .jpg,
.bmp, and .png.
803
Creating Materials for Raytracing
Creating Materials for Raytracing

There are several properties of materials that the Show Preview option on the Raytrace
only come into effect when you are doing a tab in the Plan Material dialog. See “Define
raytraced image. To view the effect of your Material Dialog” on page 719.
material settings in a raytrace, you can use
Raytrace Tab
1
2
3
5
6
The Raytrace tab controls how materials

3 Use Bump Map - A bump map is an
appear in raytrace views. Modifying these image file used to make a material
values has no effect on rendered views. You appear non-flat where light hits it. For more
can activate the raytrace preview window by information on bump maps, see “Rendering
clicking the Show Preview button. & Raytracing” on page 772. To create a
bump map, turn on Use Bump Map and
1 The name of the material displays here. select a bump map to use. Any image file or
2 Reflectivity - This controls how texture can be used as a bump map, with dark
reflective the material appears in areas of the image corresponding to low
raytrace views. Push the slide bar all the way points in the bump map, and brighter areas
to the right to simulate a highly reflective corresponding to high points.
material such as a mirror. For more accuracy,
enter a value in the edit box.
804
4 Bump Height allows you to specify but still appears in the image. An example of
how drastic the effect of the bump map a translucent material is a lampshade.
is. The Ratio and Stretch to Fit options Translucency is an effect that looks best
work for bump maps the same way that they when rendering with Radiosity.
do for textures. If you are using a texture and
a bump map, they both use the same values 6 Transparency Filters Light – A
material that filters light acts like a
for Ratio and Stretch to Fit.
stained-glass window. A material that does
5 Material is translucent - A translucent not filter light simply transmits it, such as
material allows light to pass through it, white tissue paper.
Raytracing Tips
Faster Raytracing consuming and only necessary for very
complicated scenes where Low or Medium
Calculating a realistic image can take time, radiosity is not sufficient.
but there are several things to think about
before you Raytrace that can drastically If your image is very large, or if you have
reduce your Raytrace time. complicated aspects such as grills or grates,
you may want to try Medium radiosity.
Always try Low radiosity first to see if you
Without the appropriate setup, a scene
get the desired result.
that should take five minutes to raytrace
can quite literally take five to ten days. These Preview Your Raytrace – When you are
tips can help you reduce raytrace times so setting up lighting for a scene, there is no
you can get the image you want, when you
need to raytrace a full-screen image. Try
want it.
using a much smaller image size – such as
300x200 – that can give you the information
Number of Lights – Unlike a rendered view,
you need to determine whether lighting is
which can support only a limited number of
appropriate.
lights, a Raytrace view can handle as many
lights as you like. Leaving the lights on is the Image size is a significant factor in
number one cause of slow Raytracing. determining raytrace speed. Only raytrace
your full image when you are certain that
Use the Adjust Lights dialog available in
your scene lighting is correct.
Render or floor plan views to turn off any
lights that are not important to your scene. It may be helpful to create a configuration for
Remember that most lights are ‘on’ by previews so you do not have to reset all the
default. options each time. See “Raytrace
Configurations” on page 802.
Radiosity Quality – For simple scenes, Low
Quality Radiosity is usually sufficient. High Anti-Aliasing Level – Anti-aliasing works
Quality Radiosity is extremely time- to smooth edges that otherwise would appear
805
Raytracing Tips
jagged. High-quality anti-aliasing is most climate, from cloudy day to sunny day. Use
useful when you are raytracing a smaller the Direct/Diffuse Sunlight Settings to find
picture that contains a very complicated a setting that provides the appropriate
scene. If you are raytracing a very large lighting for the scene you are rendering.
picture, you probably only need low-quality
Lighting – Lighting is an extremely
anti-aliasing.
important tool for achieving high-quality
Bump Maps – Bump map calculation is results. Work with the lighting of your scene
time-consuming and should only be used as until you achieve something realistic.
necessary.
Add 3D lights as necessary to capture the
Soft Shadows – Soft shadow calculation is effect you want. For lights that cast shadows
time-consuming and should only be used as into the scene, consider soft shadows that
necessary. Only enable soft shadows for smooth the appearance of the scene lighting.
lights whose shadows are significant to the See “Added Lights” on page 776.
scene you are raytracing.
Finally, from the raytrace window, use the
File> Image Adjustment options to subtly
Raytrace Quality adjust the brightness of your finished
It is not hard to create an image that looks rendering. Don’t be afraid to over-saturate
reasonably realistic with raytracing, but your image slightly in very bright areas – this
producing an image that really looks like a is a common occurrence in actual
photograph takes extra attention to detail. photographs.
Here are a few tips for achieving the most Interior Shots - If you are raytracing an
photo-realistic images possible: interior radiosity view where the primary
Use Radiosity - Although slower, radiosity source of light is the sun through a window
adds significant depth to the scene by or door, you probably need to adjust your
simulating the way that light works in the image brightness using File> Image
real world. Radiosity is especially effective Adjustment in the raytrace window. You
in scenes with a fair number of shadows. may also need to use Medium radiosity
quality to ensure that the raytracer models
Use Reflections – For outdoor scenes, the light bouncing through the window
ensure that your windows are slightly accurately.
reflective. You may want to set up a building
across the street that, though not in the scene, Bump Maps – Though the effect of bump-
appears in the reflections in the windows. maps are usually very subtle, they do add to
Especially important are partly reflective the impression that the scene is actually a
materials on objects such as stovetops, tile photograph. A tile floor that shades
floors, and coffee pots. The subtle effect of appropriately to the lighting in the room, for
the reflections help convince the viewer’s example, lends to an appearance of realism.
eye that the picture is a real photograph. Emissive Materials – A material with
Sunlight Settings – The brightness of the emissive properties actually cast light into
sun varies dramatically from climate to the scene when Radiosity is used. This effect
806
can be used to achieve the subtle variations

of light seen in the real world.
POV-Ray
The Persistence of Vision Raytracer (POV- Exporting to POV-Ray Format
Ray) is a high-quality raytracer that has been
used for over ten years to generate images of
Note: You do not need to export a POV-Ray
virtually anything imaginable. POV-Ray has
scene in order to raytrace in Chief Architect.
even been used on the space shuttle!
Chief Architect uses POV-Ray to generate To use a Chief Architect Standard rendered
raytraced images. It communicates with and view in the POV-Ray raytracer, you can
manages POV-Ray directly, so you do not export your scene to a POV-Ray format
need to understand POV-Ray to create high- (.pov) file. While in a Standard rendered
quality, raytraced images from within Chief view, select File> Export> POV-Ray
Architect. (.POV) .
Hobbyist raytracers or those interested in the When exporting to a POV-Ray file, you have
highest possible visual quality may want to the option of including all the images that are
learn about POV-Ray to take advantage of used in the scene. This makes a copy of the
the complete flexibility that it provides. For necessary textures and images into the same
more information on POV-Ray, or to directory as the destination for your POV-
download the latest version, please visit the Ray export.
POV-Ray Web site at www.povray.org.
807
Chapter 29:
Dimensions
Chief Architect provides a variety of Chapter Contents

dimensioning tools for measuring walls, • Compatibility With Previous Versions
doors, windows, and many other objects. • Dimension Defaults and Preferences
Dimensions can be used to accurately • Dimension Defaults Dialog
position objects relative to other objects. In • Temporary Dimension Defaults Dialog
addition, dimension lines and extensions can • The Dimension Tools
be selected and customized. • Displaying Dimension Lines
• Editing Dimension Lines
• Editing Extension Lines
• Moving Objects Using Dimensions
• Dimension Line Specification Dialog
Compatibility With Previous Versions

Dimensions function differently in Versions Extension Lines
9.0 and later of Chief Architect than they did
in previous versions. Being familiar with In Version 8, extension lines had two modes:
these changes is necessary if you plan to normal and short. Version 9 and later offer
open plans from earlier versions. full control over extension lines. If Chief
Version 8 Compatible Extensions is
808
checked, you do not have this control. See

“Extensions Tab” on page 819.
Accuracy
The Rounding Method in the Dimension
Defaults dialog controls how Chief Architect
handles dimensions that require rounding.
See “Setup Tab” on page 811. no fractions
Chief Architect uses a different method for

rounding dimensions than it did in Versions 8
and prior. Prior versions showed the distance
between equally spaced objects correctly, but
dimension runs weren’t always accurate
when added. In Versions 9 and later,
dimension runs always add up correctly.
Dimensioning the same object in different smallest fraction of 1/16”
ways obtains the same results as long as
objects are placed with the same accuracy as A good approach to accurate dimen-
the precision of the dimension lines. If an sioning is to turn on the accuracy indi-
object is placed using more precision than cators and position objects so that the
the dimensions, results will vary between inaccuracy indicators do not display.
methods.
Dimension Defaults and Preferences

All plan and layout files save measurements Default Settings
in either Imperial or metric units. The type of
unit used is determined when the file is first Dimension defaults define the
created and cannot be changed later. See behavior and appearance of
“Creating a New Plan or Layout” on page 45. dimensions in the current plan or layout file
and can be accessed by selecting Edit>
While you cannot change how measurements Default Settings or by double-clicking any
are saved in an existing file, you do have
Dimension Tools parent button or any of
control over the display and behavior of
its child buttons (with the exception of Auto
dimension lines in the file - inclucing the
default units. Exterior Dimensions ). There are two
defaults dialogs that affect dimensions:
• Dimension Defaults Dialog.
809
Dimension Defaults Dialog
• Temporary Dimension Defaults Dia- When Angle Snaps are enabled,

log. dimensions can be drawn at the Allowed
Each plan file has multiple Dimension Angles set in the Plan Defaults dialog.
Defaults dialogs for manual and automatic Regardless of their angles, however,
dimensions: one that affects floor plan view, dimensions will only locate objects that are
one for each cross section/elevation view and parallel to one another. See “General Plan
one for each CAD Detail and each Wall Defaults Dialog” on page 68.
Detail. Each dialog can be accessed by Default settings for temporary dimensions,
opening the Dimension Defaults dialog which can display automatically when
when that particular view window is active. objects are selected, are set in the Temporary
Dimension Defaults dialog. See “Temporary
Dimension Defaults Dialog” on page 821.

Select Edit> Default Settings, Dimensions as well as Temporary
expand the Dimension category, Dimensions. In addition, you can specify
select Manual & Automatic and click Edit, how Temporary Dimensions locate walls in
or double-click the Dimension Tools the Temporary Dimension Defaults dialog.
button to access the Dimension Defaults See “Temporary Dimension Defaults
dialog. Dialog” on page 821.
Each plan file has multiple Dimension

Defaults dialogs: one that affects floor
plan view, one for each cross section/eleva-
tion view and one for each CAD Detail and
Wall Detail. Layout files also have their own
Dimension Defaults dialog. Each dialog can
be accessed by opening the Dimension
Defaults dialog when that particular view win-
dow is active.
The settings in the Dimension Defaults

dialog are saved with the plan. You may find
it helpful to include your settings in your
templates for use in future files. See
“Template Files” on page 51.
Dimension Defaults settings affect manually
drawn dimensions, Auto Exterior
810
Setup Tab
1 4
1 General - Specify the size of both This value should always be greater than
manual and automatic dimensions. the Number Height. If two formats are
• Specify the Number Height of used, it should be at least twice this value.
dimension numbers in plan inches (mm).
A Number Height of 6” prints a 1/8” tall 2 Specify the use and appearance of
Rounded Value Indicators, which can
number at 1/4” = 1’ scale. A Number display when the degree of accuracy in use is
Height of 125 mm prints a 3 mm tall not sufficient to describe a dimension’s true
number at 1 m = 50 m scale. value.
• Specify the Display Size for dimension • Check + or - After Number to indicate
numbers. This is the size of dimension that the actual dimension value is higher
numbers on-screen and does not affect or lower than the value shown.
printed or exported output. To see
• Check ~ Before Number to indicate
dimension numbers on the screen at the
dimension values that are not accurate
printing scale, turn on Print Preview with the ~ symbol.
or set this value to 0. Changing this value
affects all dimensions immediately. 3 Rounding Method - Specify how the
sections of dimension lines that locate
• Line Separation - Specify the distance more than two objects are rounded.
between Auto Exterior and Baseline
dimension lines in plan inches or mm.
811
• Grid Rounding ensures that the sum of

5 Automatic Dimensions - Specify how
the parts of a dimension line add up to the Auto Exterior Dimensions are gener-
whole distance. To produce this result, ated. See “Auto Exterior Dimensions” on
some sections may not be rounded accu- page 825.
rately. This is the recommended rounding • Specify how far automatic dimension
method and is selected by default. lines Reach to locate objects set back
• Distance Rounding addresses each sec- from exterior walls. The default is 192
tion of a dimension line individually, inches or 4800 mm. If exterior walls are
which could result in the sum of these set back further than this distance, addi-
sections not being equal to the whole. tional dimension lines are produced to
This option is selected by default for files dimension the set-back walls.
created in Version 8 or prior but is not • Specify the 1st Line Offset, the distance
recommended for newer files. See “Com- between the exterior wall and the nearest
patibility With Previous Versions” on automatic dimension line in plan inches
page 808. or mm.
• Specify the Min. Dimen Area, the mini-
You can avoid the appearance of inac- mum enclosed area needed for automatic
curacy that rounding may cause by
dimensions to generate.
placing the objects in your plan precisely.
• Check Locate Openings for automatic
dimensions locate doors and windows. If
4 Manual Dimensions - Specify how far unchecked, openings may still be located
manually drawn dimension lines Reach
to locate walls and/or objects specified on the by manually drawn dimensions.
Locate Objects Tab. The default is 24” (450 • Check Overall Dimension to generate
mm) in plan files and 1” (10 mm) in layout. the overall exterior dimensions of a plan.
Primary Format Tab

The settings on the Primary Format tab allow Line Specification Dialog” on page 833 and
you to specify the units, degree of accuracy “Floor Defaults Dialog” on page 353.
and position of dimension numbers.
In addition to these Primary dimension
These settings are the same as those on the numbers, you can display a set of Secondary
Primary Format tab of the Dimension Line dimension numbers that indicate the
Specification dialog and the Format tab of dimension’s length using different units,
the Floor Defaults dialog. See “Dimension degree of acuracy, and/or location.
812
The settings on this tab also control the

format of numbers indicating object length in
the Status Bar. See “The Status Bar” on page
34.
1 3
1 Specify the numbering Format for • Check Unit Indicators to display the unit
dimension numbers. of measurement along with the dimen-
• Select the Units of measurement to be sion number.
used by dimensions from the drop-down • Check Leading Zeros to include the zero
list. The choices in this list correspond to before a decimal less than 1 or to display
all units measuring length specified in the 0’ or 0” when the ft-in or ’-” unit formats
Preferences dialog. See “Unit Conver- are used.
sions Panel” on page 85. • Check Trailing Zeros to display trailing
zeros at the end of decimal values.
Note: Although you can select Imperial or • Check Thousands Separator to use a
metric units in any plan or layout, it is best to
thousands separator for values greater
use the same unit type that the file uses to
save measurements. See “Units of Measure-
than 999.
ment” on page 45. . • Select the Use , or Use . radio button to
use a comma as the thousands separator.
• Select the Use Space radio button to use
a space as the thousands separator.
813
2 Specify the Location of dimension tors are only turned off when eighths are
numbers relative to the dimension line. desired.
• Center primary dimension numbers on • Uncheck Reduce Fractions to always
the dimension line. If two formats are use the denominator specified above.
used, the primary format is placed above When checked, the lowest possible
the line and the secondary format, denominator will be used.
beneath it.
• Position dimension numbers Above 4 Reduce Fractions Using - Specify how
fractions are reduced. These settings
Line. are only available when Smallest Fraction is
• Position dimension numbers Below selected above.
Line. • Select the Greatest Common Divisor
radio button to reduce fractions using the
3 Specify the degree of Accuracy used largest value that divides equally into the
by dimension numbers.
numerator and the denominator specified
• Select the Decimal Places radio button above. This option is best for fractional
for dimension numbers in decimal for- inches.
mat. In the text field, specify the number
of decimal places to use, from 0 to 20. If • Select the Closest Fraction radio button
0 is used, no decimal places are used. to reduce fractions without referring to
the denominator specified above. Should
• Select the Smallest Fraction radio but- only be used with Distance Rounding.
ton for dimension numbers using whole Not recommended when fractional inches
numbers and fractions. In the text field, are used.
specify the largest denominator to use,
from 1 to 128. If 1 is entered, whole num- A value of 0.33333 is represented by the
bers are used. fraction 5/16 when Greatest Common
Divisor is used and the Smallest Fraction
• Uncheck Show Denominator to turn off
denominator is 16. When Closest Fraction is
the display of fraction denominators used
selected, this value is represented by 1/3.
by dimension lines. Typically, denomina-
Secondary Format Tab

In addition to the Primary dimension dimension’s length using different units and/
numbers, you can display a set of secondary or degree of acuracy.
dimension numbers that indicate the
These settings are the same as those on the
Secondary Format tab of the Dimension
814
Line Specification dialog. See “Dimension

If you choose to use a second format, you
may want to increase the default Line
Separation on the Setup tab.
1 3
2
1 Check Include Second Format to use Note: Although you can select Imperial or
a secondary format for dimensions.
metric units in any plan or layout, it is best to
2 Specify the numbering Format for use the same unit type that the file uses to
secondary dimension numbers. save measurements. See “Units of Measure-
ment” on page 45. .
• Select the Units of measurement to be
used by dimensions from the drop-down
• Check Unit Indicators to display the unit
list. The choices in this list correspond to
of measurement along with the secondary
all units measuring length specified in the
dimension number.
Preferences dialog. See “Unit Conver-
sions Panel” on page 85. • Check Leading Zeros to display the zero
before a decimal less than 1 or to display
0’ or 0” when the ft-in or ’-” unit formats
are used.
• Check Trailing Zeros to display trailing
zeros at the end of decimal values.
815
• Check Thousands Separator to use a nator specified above. When checked, the
thousands separator for values greater lowest possible denominator will be
than 999. used.
• Click the Use , radio button to use a
comma as the thousands separator. 4 Reduce Fractions Using - Specify how
fractions are reduced in secondary
• Click the Use Space radio button to use a dimension numbers. These settings are only
space as the thousands separator. available when Smallest Fraction is selected
above.
3 Specify the degree of Accuracy used • Select the Greatest Common Divisor
by secondary dimension numbers.
radio button to reduce fractions using the
• Select the Decimal Places radio button largest value that divides equally into the
for secondary dimension numbers in dec- numerator and the denominator specified
imal format. Specify the number of deci- above. This option is best for fractional
mal places to use in the text field. inches.
• Select the Smallest Fraction radio but- • Select the Closest Fraction radio button
ton for secondary dimension numbers to reduce fractions without referring to
using whole numbers and fractions. the denominator specified above. Not
Specify the largest denominator to use in recommended when fractional inches are
the text field. used.
• Uncheck Show Denominator to turn off
A value of 0.33333 is represented by the
the display of fraction denominators used
fraction 5/16 when Greatest Common
by secondary dimension lines. Typically,
Divisor is used and the Smallest Fraction
denominators are only turned off when
denominator is 16. When Closest Fraction is
eighths are desired.
selected, this value is represented by 1/3.
• Uncheck Reduce Fractions for second-
ary dimensions to always use the denomi-
Locate Objects Tab

The settings on the Locate Objects tab this tab only affect new dimension lines, not
specify whether or not dimension lines locate those already drawn.
specific types of objects. Changes made on
816
These settings affect dimension lines as they lines can be edited so that they locate objects
are drawn. Once created, their extension in ways not specified here.
1 4
5
2
1 The Walls options affect Auto Exterior The next three settings control how interior
and Manual dimensions. See “The walls are located where .
Dimension Tools” on page 823. • Select Interior Wall Centers to have
The first two settings also determine the dimension lines locate the centers of inte-
location of the marked location used by rior walls’ centers. If Wall Dimension
Manual Reach, 1st Line Offset and Extension Layer is selected above, dimensions
Lines lengths. See “The Dimension Layer” locate interior walls at the center of their
on page 243. Main Layers. See “The Main Layer” on
page 242.
• Select Surfaces to locate exterior walls
by outer surface and interior walls by one • Select Primary Wall Side to have
of their surfaces. dimension lines locate one side of interior
walls.
• Select Wall Dimension Layer to locate
walls at the Dimension Layer. A wall’s • Select Both Wall Sides to have dimen-
Dimension Layer is specified in the Wall sion lines locate both surfaces of interior
Type Definitions dialog for its wall type. and exterior walls. Wall thicknesses are
See “Wall Type Definitions Dialog” on also dimensioned.
page 243
817
• Check Interior Walls Only for dimen- • Select Centers for dimensions to locate
sions to ignore the interior surface of the centers of wall openings.
exterior walls and the thicknesses of inte- • Select Sides to locate both sides of wall
rior walls. Only available when Both openings. This option locates the nominal
Wall Surfaces is selected. width - not the rough opening.
2 The Cabinets options affect only • Select Casing to locate both sides of wall
Manual Dimensions. openings at the outer edges of the casing.
• Check to locate cabinet Sides using man- Because interior and exterior casing often
ual dimensions. The sides must be per- has different widths, an opening may
pendicular to the dimension line. have different interior and exterior
dimensions when this option is selected.
• Check to locate the Corners of all cabi-
nets within the manual reach area. • Select Rough Opening to locate both
Angled cabinets are dimensioned to their sides of windows and doors at the rough
corners at a right angle to the dimension opening.
line. The cabinet fronts or sides do not • Select None for dimensions to not locate
need to be perpendicular or parallel to the wall openings. This setting does not
dimension line. affect Auto Exteriro Dimensions.
3 The Other Objects options affect 5 The CAD Objects options affect
Manual, End to End, Point to Point and Manual dimensions locating 2D CAD
Centerline Dimensions. objects, CAD-based objects such as slabs
• Check Electrical to locate electrical and polyline solids, and stairs.
objects. Use this option when you want to • Check Line/Sides to locate lines and
precisely position electrical objects. edges that are perpendicular to the
• Check Plants and Images to locate these dimension line. If the lines or edges are
objects. not perpendicular to the dimension line,
they are not dimensioned.
• Check Fixtures/Appliances to locate
these objects. • Check Ends/Corners to locate all ends
of lines or corners of polylines, no matter
4 The Openings options control how what angle they are in relation to the
wall openings are located by Manual, dimension line.
Centerline and Auto Exterior Dimensions.
• Check Text to locate text objects.
818
Extensions Tab
1 Specify the length and spacing of of the extension line that extends from
Extension Lines relative to the marked the dimension line in the opposite
location on an object. direction of the object it locates.
• Select Gap From Marked Object to • Check Proximity Fixed to specify a
specify the distance between the end of fixed distance between the marked object
the extension line and the marked and the dimension line. You can only fix
location in plan inches or mm. If the the proximity for a single extension line.
dimension line is moved, the extension • Distance to Marked Object - When
line updates, and the size of this gap is Proximity Fixed is checked, you can
maintained. specify the distance from the dimension
• Select Length Towards Marked Object line to the marked object.
to specify a fixed length for the portion of
Gap From Marked Object
the extension line that extends from the
dimension line toward the object it + Length Toward Marked Object
locates. If the dimension line is moved,
= Distance to Marked Object
this length remains the same but the size
of the gap updates. Proximity Fixed only affects dimension lines
• Specify the Length Away From Marked that locate an object using an extension line.
Object, which is the length of the portion When a dimension line arrowhead points
819
directly to the object without using an Chief Architect Version 8 or prior. See
extension line, this option has no effect. “Compatibility With Previous Versions” on
page 808.
Auto Exterior Dimensions ignore Distance to
Marked Object and use the default 1st Line • Check Chief Version 8 Compatible
Offset and Line Separation values. See Extensions to make extensions function
“Setup Tab” on page 811. as they did in Chief Architect Version 8.
• Check Short Extensions to have short,
Extension Line and Gap lengths are uniform-length extension lines instead of
measured from the marked location on extension lines that reach all the way to
a wall. See “The Dimension Layer” on page the objects they locate.
243.
Note: If you select an extension line, Chief

2 Legacy Support - Specify how Version 8 Compatible Extensions will be
dimensions behave in files created in turned off automatically.
Font Tab
1 Specify the default Layer for manual • Select a layer from the drop-down list.
dimensions. See “Displaying Objects” • Check Default to use the “Dimensions,
on page 117. Manual” layer.
820
• Click the Define button to set that layer’s Arrow Tab

properties. See “Layer Display Options
Dialog” on page 121. For information about the Arrow tab, see
“Arrow Tab” on page 891.
2 Specify the Font and font style used by
dimensions. For more information, see
“Text Tab” on page 851.
Temporary Dimension Defaults Dialog

The settings in the Temporary lines, are set along with those of manual and
Dimension Defaults dialog allow you automatic dimensions in the Dimension
to control how Temporary Dimensions locate Defaults dialog. See “Dimension Defaults
walls. Select Edit> Default Settings, expand Dialog” on page 810.
the Dimension category and choose
The settings in the dialog are global,
Temporary, and click Edit to access this
affecting all plan and layout files. They do
dialog. See “Display Temporary
not affect manually drawn or automatic
dimension lines, however.
The appearance of Temporary Dimensions,
including their size, format, and extension
1 3
2
4
1 Locate When Wall Selected - Specify in the Wall Type Definitions dialog. See
how walls are located by temporary “Wall Type Definitions” on page 241.
dimensions when a wall is selected. • Select Primary Wall Side for temporary
• Select Wall Surface to locate wall sur- dimensions that locate walls along their
faces, or Wall Dimension Layer to exteriors, or choose Both Wall Sides to
locate wall dimension layers as specified locate walls on both sides.
821
Temporary Dimension Defaults Dialog
• Select Primary Wall Side for temporary

If Both Wall Sides is selected, dimen- dimensions that locate walls along their
sions will locate both sides of interior exteriors, or choose Both Wall Sides to
walls; if Primary Wall Side is selected, locate walls on both sides.
only one side of each interior wall will be
located. If Both Wall Sides is selected, dimen-
sions will locate both sides of interior
2 Check Locate Interior Wall Centers walls; if Primary Wall Side is selected,
to locate interior walls at their centers
only one side of each interior wall will be
instead of their surfaces. When checked, this
located.
option overrides the other settings in this
dialog for interior walls.
When Automatic is selected, you can
3 Locate When Opening Selected - locate a wall’s exterior with temporary
Specify how a wall is located by dimensions by clicking on a wall opening
temporary dimensions when a door, window, near its exterior side, or locate the wall’s
or masonry fireplace in that wall is selected. interior by clicking on a wall opening
• Select Wall Surface to locate wall sur- near its interior side.
faces, or Wall Dimension Layer to
locate wall dimension layers.
Clicking on the exterior side of a window Clicking on the interior side of a window
produces temporary dimensions produces temporary dimensions

that locate the wall’s exterior side that locate the wall’s interior side
4 CAD Options - Specify how CAD • Select Locate First Objects Inside to
objects inside a selected CAD object locate the first edge of another CAD
are located by temporary dimensions. object drawn inside a selected CAD
• Select Ignore Objects Inside for tempo- object.
rary dimensions to ignore any other
objects inside a selected CAD object.
822
Ignore Objects Inside Locate First Objects Inside
The Dimension Tools

Select CAD>Dimension to access the The zoom factor of the current view affects
Dimension Tools. Dimensions are whether objects drawn close together are
drawn by clicking and dragging like other dimensioned or not. If you try to dimension
line-based objects and can be drawn in floor an array of objects but the dimension line
plan view, cross section/elevation views, locates only the first and last objects along its
CAD Details, and on layout pages, all of path, Zoom in on the objects and try
which are considered 2D views. again. Similarly, if you want to dimension
With the exception of Angular between two objects but the dimension
locates unwanted objects between them,
Dimensions , dimension lines only locate
objects that are parallel or nearly parallel to Zoom out. See “Zoom Tools” on page
one another and should be drawn orthogonal, 731.
or at right angles, to the objects being Once created, both manually drawn and
located. automatically generated dimension lines can
Dimension lines locate objects using Object be selected and edited. See “Editing
Dimension Lines” on page 827.
Snaps , although they do not need to be
enabled in order to draw dimensions. See
“Object Snaps” on page 133. Bear in mind, Manual Dimensions
though, that Object Snaps must be enabled in To display the distance between two
order to: objects, select CAD>Dimension>
• Locate parallel objects drawn at angles Manual Dimension and drag a dimension
other than Allowed Angles. line near or through the objects.
• Locate more than one object drawn in the Manual Dimensions locate objects as
same space, such as a CAD line drawn specified on the Locate Objects tab and lying
over a wall. within the Manual Reach distance specified
in the Dimension Defaults dialog. See
“Dimension Defaults Dialog” on page 810.
823
The Dimension Tools
End-to-End Dimensions disappear when edited or changed. If this

occurs, it can be redrawn.
Use the End-to-End Dimension tool
to dimension between any two defined
Interior Dimensions
objects in floor plan view or a CAD Detail.
Draw Interior Dimension lines
Select CAD> Dimension> End-to-End
parallel to walls in floor plan view to
Dimension , then drag the dimension create interior dimensions.
from the first object to the second object. The
dimension line snaps to each object, ignoring The Interior Dimension tool locates
any other objects located between either end. interior wall surfaces only. It does not
dimension between layer surfaces in the
End-to-End Dimensions locate objects as
same wall, and it does not locate walls unless
specified on the Locate Objects tab and lying
it actually intersects them.
within the Manual Reach distance specified
in the Dimension Defaults dialog. Interior Dimensions locate either wall
surfaces or the Main Layer, depending on the
Angular Dimensions settings in the Locate Objects tab of the
The Angular Dimension tool Dimension Defaults dialog. See “Locate
measures the angle between any two Objects Tab” on page 816.
straight edges, including lines, walls, the
sides of boxes, the straight sides of polylines, Point to Point Dimensions
cabinets, and soffits. Any straight line or side The Point to Point Dimension tool
within a CAD block can be dimensioned, as places point markers at the start end
well. Edges nested up to four levels deep and points of a dimension line as it is drawn
within a CAD block can be dimensioned. and dimensions between them. See
To create an angular dimension, click on the “Markers” on page 867.
first edge to be dimensioned, then drag an arc Point to Point Dimensions can be drawn in
and release on the second edge. either of two ways:
As with other dimension lines, Angular
Dimensions adjust if one of the dimensioned • When the Default edit behavior is
objects is moved. Angular Dimensions can active, a Point to Point Dimension places
also be selected and moved using its edit point markers at its start and end points,
handle. As it is moved, an Angular which it locates. Any objects along the
Dimension maintains the location of its arc dimension line’s length are ignored. See
center. “Edit Behaviors” on page 137.
Like other dimension lines, an Angular • When the Alternate edit behavior is
Dimension can be included in a CAD block. active, a Point to Point Dimension locates
When the block is exploded, the Angular objects along its length as well as objects
Dimension may become invalid and or markers at its start and end.
824
Point markers can be selected and edited. See Centerline Dimensions

“Editing Markers” on page 868.
The Centerline Dimension tool is
If the objects or point markers located by a available in floor plan and cross
Point to Point Dimension line are section/elevation views. It allows you
moved, the dimension updates to reflect the to locate the centers of wall openings,
change. fixtures and appliances, and electrical objects
using special centerline extension lines.
Objects and point markers located by a Point Centerline extensions can be distinguished
to Point Dimension line can be by a dashed line style and a symbol.
accurately relocated by specifying new
dimension values. See “Moving Objects
Using Dimensions” on page 831.
Baseline Dimensions
The Baseline Dimension tool creates
a series of dimensions that all share
the same origin instead of continuing from
each previous location. Baseline
Dimensions are independent and can be Electrical objects, fixtures and appliances are
edited separately. This tool is not available in only located when these options are selected
layout files. in the Dimension Defaults dialog. Similarly,
wall opening centers are only located when
In floor plan view, a cross section/elevation opening Centers is selected. See “Locate
view or a CAD Detail, select CAD> Objects Tab” on page 816.
Dimension> Baseline Dimension , click Both free-standing fixtures and appliances as
near an object and drag a dimension line near well as those placed into cabinets can be
or through the objects requiring dimensions. located by Centerline Dimensions.
Centerline Dimensions can also locate the
edges of other types of architectural objects,
as well as CAD objects, and will locate walls
as specified on the Locate Objects tab of the
Dimension Defaults dialog.
Auto Exterior Dimensions

The spacing between lines is the default The Auto Exterior Dimension tool
Line Separation value, which is also used generates dimensions around a plan’s
by Auto Exterior Dimensions. See “Setup exterior in floor plan view. The dimension
Tab” on page 811. lines locate walls and openings as specified
825
Displaying Dimension Lines
in Dimension Defaults dialog. See “Locate Display Temporary

Objects Tab” on page 816. Dimensions
Temporary Dimensions display when
Auto Exterior Dimensions do not gener-
an object is selected and show the
ate properly if there is a gap in the exte-
rior walls. For example, sometimes angled distance between the selected object and
walls may not connect properly. If automatic other objects. Select CAD> Dimension>
dimensions do not generate, try Build> Wall> Display Temporary Dimensions to turn on
Fix Wall Connections . or off the display of temporary dimensions.
This toggle affects all views and is saved
If you edit an Auto Exterior Dimension between launches of Chief Architect.
line, it will be converted to a manual As with other dimension lines, Temporary
dimension, so if Auto Exterior Dimensions Dimensions only locate objects that are
are later regenerated, your changes will not parallel or nearly parallel to one another.
be lost. They will also locate the endpoints of CAD
There are a maximum of three rows of lines.
automatically generated dimensions per A temporary dimension will not display
exterior wall direction. The innermost when an object is selected if a manually
dimension line locates exterior walls, interior drawn dimension line is already present that
walls, and all openings in exterior walls. The shows the same information.
second dimension line locates exterior and
interior walls. The outermost dimension line You can control how temporary dimensions
is the overall exterior dimension. locate objects in the Temporary Dimension
Defaults dialog. See “Temporary Dimension
Displaying Dimension Lines

The display of dimension lines is Dimension lines created by any of the
controlled in the Layer Display dimension tools share the same components.
Options dialog. See “Displaying Objects” on • Dimension Lines run parallel with the
page 117. distance being measured.
Dimension lines can be included in the • Extension Lines are perpendicular to
Reference Display. See “Reference Floor” on dimension lines, indicating where they
page 359. begin and end and what they locate.
You can customize the display of dimension • Arrowheads display at the intersections
lines by placing them on different layers. See of dimension and extension lines.
“Layer Tab” on page 835. • Dimension Labels display at the mid-
point of dimension lines and indicate the
826
distance that the dimension line mea- If a manual dimension line is on a layer that
sures. is turned off and you select an object located
by that dimension line, it will display for
You can select a dimension label and drag it
reference using the Move color specified in
away from the dimension line using its move
handle.
on page 74. This will happen only if Display
Dimension Dimension Temporary Dimensions is turned on.
Lines Labels
See “Display Temporary Dimensions” on
page 826.
Displaying Arrowheads
Extension
Arrowheads
Lines The arrow at the end of a dimension line will
not display if it is close enough to to another
dimension arrow that the two will overlap. A
typical example of this is where two sections
of an Interior Dimension locate two sides of
an interior wall.
Editing Dimension Lines

With the exception of Temporary Dimension line numbers and extension lines
Dimensions, dimension lines can be selected can be individually selected, moved and
and edited using the mouse, the edit toolbar deleted, and new extension lines can be
buttons, and the Dimension Line added. See “Editing Extension Lines” on
Specification dialog. See “Dimension Line page 829.
If an Auto Exterior Dimension line is edited, Edit Handles
it will no longer be considered an automatic When a dimension line is selected, its edit
dimension line and will not be deleted and handles can be seen. There are four types of
replaced the next time the Auto Exterior dimension line edit handles. More than one
Dimensions tool is used. of some types display, depending on how
many extension lines are present.
827
Editing Dimension Lines
• The Rotate handle is located one plan

Rotate foot past the end of the dimension line
and is used to rotate the dimension line.
Extension Line
Edit Buttons
Move Dimension
Dimension lines can be repositioned, copied,
Label
and deleted using the edit toolbar buttons just
Move like other objects in the program can. See
“Editing Objects” on page 130.
Add Extension
Line Click the Edit Dimension Ends edit
button to edit the dimension line using edit
Extension Line handles similar to those on line based
objects. See “Editing Line Based Objects” on
• The Extension Line handles mark the page 147.
location being dimensioned and are used
to move or delete extension lines. See Edit Dimension Ends is useful for
“Moving Extension Lines” on page 830. locating a point on an object that it might not
locate otherwise, such as the corner of a
• The Add Extension Line handle displays
polyline.
to the side of the Move handle and is used
to add extension lines to the dimension
Click the Edit Extensions edit button to
line. Dimension lines do not extend
edit the lengths of the selected dimension’s
unless an object can be located. See
extension lines. See “Editing Extension
“Adding Extension Lines” on page 829.
Lines” on page 829.
• The small, square Move Dimension
Label handle is located at the center of Dimension Number Size
the selected label. Use this handle to
move the dimension number for each The initial size of dimension numbers is
dimension line section. The pointer specified in the Dimension Defaults dialog.
See “Dimension Defaults Dialog” on page
changes to a four-headed arrow when
810.
moved over this handle.
• The Move handle is located where you You can specify number height for individual
clicked to select the dimension line and is dimension lines in the Dimension Line
used to move the entire dimension line, Specification dialog. See “Dimension Line
including any subsections, perpendicular Specification Dialog” on page 833.
to itself. Extension lines are resized as You can also specify the number height for
appropriate. The pointer changes to a dimension lines in a floor plan view sent to
two-headed arrow when moved over layout. See “Layout Box Specification
this handle. Dialog” on page 1034.
828
As with text and other objects, dimension The Delete Objects dialog allows you
number size is subject to scaling when sent to to delete all dimension lines at once.
layout or printed. See “Printing Text and See “Delete Objects Dialog” on page 197.
Individual dimension line segments located
between extension lines can also be deleted.
Deleting Dimension Lines If a segment is located between two other
There are several ways to delete dimension segments along the same dimension line, that
lines. dimension will be broken in two.
You can select any manual or automatic To delete a portion of a dimension line
dimension line or group of dimension lines,
then press the Delete key or click the 1. Select any Dimension Tool aside from
Delete edit button to delete it. See Angular or Auto Exterior Dimensions.
“Deleting Objects” on page 196. 2. Click and drag a manual dimension line
over the segment that you wish to
remove, dragging from extension line to
extension line.
Editing Extension Lines

Extension lines can be added, edited, and
deleted using the mouse. Extension lines are
also affected by settings in the Dimension
Line Specification dialog. See “Extensions
Tab” on page 835.
Adding Extension Lines
To add an extension line

4. Release the mouse button to add an
1. Select the dimension line. extension line.
2. Click the diamond-shaped Add Exten-
sion Line edit handle which displays
near the Move edit handle. The pointer
changes to a double-headed arrow .
3. Drag the handle to the object that you
want to locate with a new extension han-
dle. This example adds an extension line
to the window edge.
829
Editing Extension Lines
Moving Extension Lines

Not all library symbols can be located
Extension lines can be moved to locate the by a dimension line as it is drawn. Once
centers, sides, or surfaces of most objects. In a dimension is drawn, however, you can
this example an extension line is moved from move or add an extension line to locate the
the windows edge to the center. library object.
To move an extension line Resizing Extension Lines

You can resize extension lines in the
1. Select the dimension line it is connected
Dimension Line Specification dialog or
to, not the extension line itself.
using its edit handles. See “Extensions Tab”
2. Click the Extension Line edit handle. on page 819.
The pointer changes to a two-headed
arrow . To resize an extension line
1. Select the extension line or select the

dimension line and click the Edit
Extensions edit button to display
two handles along the extension line.
3. Drag the handle to a new location. The

extension line snaps to possible marks as
the handle is moved.
2. Click either handle, turning the pointer
4. Release the mouse button at the new
into a two-headed arrow .
location.
3. Extend or contract the extension line and
release the mouse.
Deleting Extension Lines

When an extension line is deleted, the
remaining dimensions update. If a dimension
line hasonly two extension lines, they cannot
be deleted.
To remove an extension line
1. Select the dimension line it is connected

to, not the extension line itself.
830
2. Click the Extension Line edit handle. 3. Drag it perpendicular to the direction of
the arrows, away from any dimension-
able object, and release the button when
the extension line disappears.
Moving Objects Using Dimensions

Most objects can be moved by changing an See “Primary Format Tab” on page
automatic, manual or temporary dimension 812.
value that locates it. This technique can be • If the dimension is locating two differ-
applied in nearly any situation where ent objects, the Move edge and Move
dimensions are present, including angular entire object buttons display to the
dimensions. See “Moving Objects” on page right of the text field.
177.
In addition, some objects can be resized Move edge (selected)
using dimensions. See “Resizing Objects” on
page 183.
Your pointer indicates which dimensions can Move entire object
be used to relocate the selected object by
changing to a pointing hand icon. 2. Enter a new value in text field. The unit
of measurement is set in the Number
Another way to tell is to select an object and Style/Angle Style dialog. To use a dif-
drag it in the desired direction. As you drag, ferent unit, include its indicator after the
note which dimensions update. These value. See “Number Style/Angle Style
dimensions are the dimensions that can be Dialog” on page 917.
used to move that object.
3. Click the Move entire object button to
To move an object using dimensions move the entire object rather than the
selected edge. See “Selected Edge” on
1. Select the object and click on a dimen- page 145.
sion line that locates it. An inline text 4. The selected object moves when you
field opens at the location where you press the Enter key or click outside of
clicked. the text field.
• The actual distance displays in the text
field using the default primary format.
831
Moving Objects Using Dimensions
5. If Bumping/Pushing is enabled, the Using Angular Dimensions

object being moved will bump into any Angular Dimensions are useful for
objects in its move path and not move adjusting the angles of polyline-based
the entire distance. Hold down the Ctrl objects and walls.
key when you press Enter to override
this move restriction. See “Bumping/ To change an angular dimension
Pushing” on page 178.
1. Draw an CAD> Dimension> Angular
To resize an object using dimensions
Dimension , then click and drag to
1. Select the object along the edge that you draw an arc within the angle you wish to
would like to move. See “Selected measure.
Edge” on page 145. 2. Select the edge that you want to move.
2. Click on a dimension line that indicates 3. Click the dimension value to open the
its distance from the object’s opposite Set Angular Dimension dialog.
side.
The Set Angular Dimension dialog indi-
3. In the inline text field, enter a value. cates the Previous Value in degrees, minutes
4. Click Move edge to move the selected and seconds.
edge only.
5. The selected edge moves, resizing the
object, when you press the Enter key.
You can cancel a move or resize opera-

tion using dimensions at any time by
pressing the Esc key..
Resizing a House Using

Exterior Dimensions
When resizing a house using dimensions, it 4. Enter a value in the New Value field.
is important to work your way around the 5. Specify what you want to rotate:
house in one direction. Relocate one wall at a • Select Rotate Edge to move the
time in succession so that you do not redefine selected edge when you click OK, or
the same dimension more than once.
• Select Rotate entire polyline to rotate
For more information, see “Adjusting Wall the entire object about the corner
Positions” on page 26 of the User’s Guide. formed by the edges that the Angular
Dimension locates, maintaining the
previous value of that angle.
6. Click OK to apply the change.
832
Dimension Line Specification Dialog

To open the Dimension Line Specification group of dimension lines and click the Open
dialog, double-click a dimension line using Object edit button.
the Select Objects or Manual Dimen-
sion tool, or select a dimension line or
Dimension Tab
1 2
1 Options - Specify general size and may still be located, but their thickness
display of wall widths for the selected will not be displayed.
dimension line.
• Specify the Number Height for the 2 Specify the use and appearance of
Rounded Value Indicators, which can
selected dimension. Type “d” in the box display when the degree of accuracy in use is
to reset the number size to the default. not sufficient to describe a dimension’s true
• Check Suppress Wall Widths to sup- value.
press those portions of the dimension line • Check Use Default to use the default
that measure between two surfaces of the indicator(s). Uncheck this box to make
same wall. Both sides of interior walls the options that follow active.
833
• Check + or - After Number to indicate • Check ~ Before Number to indicate

that the actual dimension value is higher dimension values that are not accurate
or lower than the value shown. with the ~ symbol.
Dimension Tab for Angular Dimensions
1 2
1 Number Height - Define a number but apply only to the selected dimension
height for the selected dimension. Type line(s). See “Primary Format Tab” on page
“d” in the box to reset the number size to the 812. Not available for Angular Dimensions.
default.
Secondary Format Tab
2 Angle Style - Click a radio button to
specify the how the selected angular To enable the settings on the Secondary
dimension line’s angle value displays. See Format tab of the Dimension Line
“Number Style/Angle Style Dialog” on page Specification dialog, uncheck Use Default
917. Formatting and then check Include Second
Format.
Primary Format Tab
The settings that are enabled are the same as
To enable the settings on the Primary Format those on the same tab of the Dimension
tab of the Dimension Line Specification Defaults dialog, but apply only to the
dialog, uncheck Use Default Formatting. selected dimension line(s). See “Secondary
Format Tab” on page 814. Not available for
These settings are the same as those on the
Angular Dimensions.
same tab of the Dimension Defaults dialog,
834
Extensions Tab
The Extensions Tab is not available for
dimensions selected as a group or for Opening this tab will turn off Version 8
Compatible Extensions if it is enabled in
Angular Dimensions . the Dimension Defaults dialog. See “Exten-
sions Tab” on page 819.
1 2
4
3
1 Selected Extension - Choose an 3 These settings are the same as those

extension line associated with the found on the Extensions tab of the
currently selected dimension from the drop- Dimension Defaults dialog, but apply to the
down list. The selected extension can then be extension lines associated with the selected
edited here. dimension line only.
Each extension line’s number displays beside
4 Apply to All - Check this box to apply
it when a dimension line is selected. the settings for the Selected Extension
line to all extension lines associated with the
2 Uncheck Use Plan Default to enable selected dimension.
the rest of the settings on this tab.
Check this box to restore the default settings
to the Selected Extension line. See Layer Tab
“Dimension Defaults Dialog” on page 810. For more information about the Layer tab,
see “Layer Tab” on page 125.
835
Arrow Tab
For information about the Arrow Tab, see
“Arrow Tab” on page 891.
836
837
Chapter 30:
Text, Callouts
& Markers
Text, callouts and markers are an ideal way Chapter Contents

to draw attention to special details in plans. • Text Defaults and Preferences
Text can be added in floor plan and cross • Fonts and Alphabets
section/elevation view, and to layout pages. • The Text Tools
Text lines with arrow can be attached to text • Creating Text, Callouts and Markers
objects, allowing you to direct attention to • Displaying Text, Arrows, Callouts and
Markers
specific plan details.
• Rich Text Specification Dialog
The display of text can be controlled by layer • Text Specification Dialog
or set specifically for each text object. • Editing Text
• Copying & Pasting Text
• Spell Check
• Text Arrows
• Callouts
• Callout Specification Dialog
• Editing Callouts
• Markers
• Marker Specification Dialog
• Editing Markers
• Text Macros
838
• Designer Information Dialog • Client Information Dialog
Text Defaults and Preferences

The default settings for Rich Text, Text, The Text Defaults dialog looks almost the
Callouts, Markers, Room Labels and Arrows same as the Text Specification dialog. See
determine what these objects look like when “Text Specification Dialog” on page 850.
they are first created.
Default Settings can be accessed by Callout Defaults
selecting Edit> Default Settings.
Double-click the Callout tool to open the
Click the "+" next to Text, Callouts and
Callout Defaults dialog and specify the
Markers to display the sub-headings. See
default appearance of callouts.
“Defaults and Preferences” on page 63.
The Callout Defaults dialog looks almost the
Changes made to default settings do not alter
same as the Callout Specification dialog.
existing text objects, so it is a good idea to go
See “Callout Specification Dialog” on page
over these settings before placing text.
864.
Rich Text Defaults
Marker Defaults
Double-click the Rich Text or Leader
Double-click the Marker tool to open
Line tool to open the Rich Text Defaults the Marker Defaults dialog and specify the
dialog and specify the default appearance of default appearance of markers.
Rich Text objects.
The Marker Defaults dialog looks almost the
Leader Lines and Text Lines with same as the Marker Specification dialog.
See “Marker Specification Dialog” on page
Arrows use the same default layer as 867.
Rich Text, so by default they have the same
color, line weight and line style. See
Room Label Defaults
“Layers” on page 116.
Accessible only through the Default
The Rich Text Defaults dialog is similar to
Settings dialog, the Room Label Defaults
the Rich Text Specification dialog. See
dialog allows you to specify the initial
“Rich Text Specification Dialog” on page
appearance of room labels. See “Room
843.
Labels” on page 273.
Text Defaults The options on most tabs of the Room Label
Defaults dialog are similar to those in the
Double-click the Text tool to open the Text Specification dialog. See “Text
Text Defaults dialog and specify the default Specification Dialog” on page 850.
appearance of Text objects.
839
Fonts and Alphabets
The options on the Dimension Format tab are drawn using the Leader Line and Line
similar to those in the Displayed Line With Arrow tools.
Length dialog. See “Displayed Line Length
The Arrow Defaults dialog looks almost the
same as the Arrow tab of the Text
Any text added to the Room Label Defaults Specification dialog. See “Arrow Tab” on
dialog displays in all subsequently created page 891.
room labels, after the Room Name. Changes
made to default settings do not alter existing
Avoid typing any text in any text
room labels. To update existing labels so that Defaults dialog unless you want it to be
they reflect changes made to the defaults, present in all text objects you create.
delete and replace them. See “Editing Room
Labels” on page 274. Preferences
Arrow Defaults Specify the number of segments for
new leader lines and whether pressing
Double-click the Text Line with Arrow the Enter key creates a new line of text or
tool to open the Arrow Defaults dialog. closes the Text Specification dialog in the
Preferences dialog. See “Text & Page Setup
The settings on the Arrow Defaults dialog Panel” on page 77.
determine the initial settings for arrows
Fonts and Alphabets

Chief Architect allows you to use any font International Alphabets
found in your Windows Fonts directory.
The Rich Text tool supports unicode
For best printed results, using true-type or
alphabets and characters. In order to use a
open-type fonts is recommended.
unicode alphabet or characters, the
appropriate language support must be
Blueprint Fonts installed on your computer. See “The Text
Three architectural fonts: Chief Blueprint, Tools” on page 841.
City Blueprint, and Country Blueprint are
installed in the Windows Fonts directory Character Size
when Chief Architect is installed.
Text, callouts, markers as well as dimension
numbers can be sized using either of two
methods:
Using a font sizing method that specifies text
size as the measurement from the baseline to
the topmost part of the capital letter A. This
method is similar to that used in most CAD
840
programs and is the one Chief Architect uses To size Text , Callouts , Markers
by default. and dimension numbers based on font
• Alternatively, you can use a font sizing information, use Legacy Compatible Size.
method similar to most word processing See “Text Tab” on page 851, “Attributes
applications, where size is based on Tab” on page 865 and “Font Tab” on page
information stored in the font. This infor- 820.
mation varies from font to font and is
The sizing method used for text objects can
responsible for apparent differences in
be set as defaults and also specified per
font height.
object in objects’ specification dialogs. See
To size Rich Text based on font “Text Defaults and Preferences” on page
information, do not use CAD Style Font 839.
Sizing. See “Options Tab” on page 849. The sizing method used for dimensions can
only be specified in the Dimension Defaults
dialog. See “Font Tab” on page 820.
The Text Tools

Select CAD> Text to display the Text
Tools. Text objects can be created in You can convert simple Text to a Rich
floor plan view, cross/section elevation Text object by clicking the Convert to
views, CAD Details, and in layout files. Rich Text edit button. See “Convert to Rich
Text” on page 855.
The Rich Text tool is used to create
text objects. See “Creating Text, The Text Line with Arrow tool is
Callouts and Markers” on page 842. used to connect text and another
object with an arrow. See “Text Arrows” on
The Text tool is used to create simple
page 861.
text objects with a single font and
style format, or with Tab-delimited columns. The Leader Line tool places a Rich
It is not as flexible as the Rich Text tool; Text object with an arrow attached.
however, it was the tool used to create text in See “Leader Line” on page 861.
Chief Architect X1 and prior. See “Creating The Callout tool is used to place
Text, Callouts and Markers” on page 842. callouts. See “Callouts” on page 863.
The Marker tool is used to place
markers for Level Lines, Test
Borings and Point Markers. See “Markers”
on page 867.
841
Creating Text, Callouts and Markers
Creating Text, Callouts and Markers

Text, callouts and markers can be created in Once created, text can be selected and edited
floor plan view, cross/section elevation in a variety of ways. See “Editing Text” on
views, CAD Details, and on layout pages. page 854.
To create Rich Text

1. Select CAD> Text> Rich Text . for a single line of text. See “Paragraph
2. Click and drag to draw a rectangle defin-
• When you release the mouse button, a
ing the area of the text object.
blank text box is created with an active
• The rectangle that you drag must be at cursor, ready for you to type.
least as tall as the default line spacing
Text Field Edit Bar
3. Type or paste the desired text into the drag to create additional Text objects if
Text Field. you wish.
4. Use the options on the Edit Bar, which
displays above the Text Field, to change Note: If you do not type anything in the Text
the font, style and size of any portion of Field, a text object will not be created when
the text. See “Editing Text” on page 854. you click outside of it.
5. When you are finished, simply click out-
side of the Text Field to close it and the Rich Text , Callouts and
Edit Bar. The Rich Text tool Markers can also be created in the same
remains active, so you can click and
manner as Text .
To create Text
1. Select CAD> Text> Text . 3. Enter text and click OK.
2. Click where you want the upper left cor- Up to 32,000 characters can be inserted in
ner of the text to be located. The Text one Text object. It is usually better to use
Specification dialog opens. See “Text
several smaller Text objects when a lot
of text must be inserted.
842
Displaying Text, Arrows, Callouts and Markers

The Text Tools can be used in floor plan layer of the text it is attached to. See
view, on layout pages, in CAD Details, and “Displaying Objects” on page 117.
in cross section/elevation views. The display
of text objects in these views is controlled in Custom Text Layers
“Layer Display Options Dialog” on page Text objects do not need to be shown at all
121. By default, text objects are located on times. For instance, electrical notes will be
the Text layer. included with the electrical plan, but are not
needed in the framing plan. You can create
The display attributes can be controlled for custom layers and layer sets to control the
individual text objects, independent of the display of text and other objects. See “Layer
layer that contains it. See “Text Specification Sets” on page 118. See “Layer Display
Dialog” on page 850. Options Dialog” on page 121.
To move text to a different layer, select the
Text Arrows
text object or group of text objects, then click
If a text arrow is attached to a text object and the Open Object edit button to open the
they are on the same layer, changing the Text Specification dialog. The layer
layer of the text will also change the layer of containing the selected text object can be
the attached text arrow. However, changing changed on the Line Style tab. See “Line
the layer of the text arrow will not change the Style Tab” on page 889.
Rich Text Specification Dialog

The Rich Text Specification dialog opens if cannot be changed, but everything else can
you select the Rich Text tool and then be.
click once in the drawing area. The Rich Text Specification dialog is
You can also open this dialog by selecting similar to the Rich Text Defaults dialog. See
“Text Defaults and Preferences” on page
one or more Rich Text objects, then 839.
clicking the Open Object edit button.
Note: Text objects have a different specifica-
When Rich Text objects are group- tion dialog. See “Text Specification Dialog” on
selected, the text content and zoom factor page 850.
843
Text Tab
The settings on the Text tab allow you to type the attributes of all or portions of the text
the selected Rich Text object’s content and content after it is typed. To change text that
control many aspects of its appearance, already exists, simply highlight it using the
including its font, size, color and style. mouse and/or the Shift + arrow keys and then
make any needed changes to its attributes.
You can specify the appearance of the text
before typing, and can also select and change
1 Use the options on the Edit Bar, which Select the desired options before typing to
displays above the Text Entry field, to affect the text as it is typed, or select some or
change the font, style and size of the text. all of the text and then specify which options
to apply to it.
The Edit bar also displays in the drawing
area above the Text object when you click • Specify the text size in drawing units.
the Edit Text in Place edit button. See • Select a font from the drop-down list.
“Editing Text” on page 854.
844
• Click the Print Size button to open the text field or clicking the up/down arrows.
Printed Size Input dialog. See “Scaling This setting only affects the text as it
Text” on page 856. appears in this dialog.
• Click the Color button to specify the
color of the selected or subsequently Note: Some fonts cannot be drawn at certain
typed text. See “Color Chooser Dialog” zoom factors. When this is the case, the
on page 727. If Layer Color Text is appearance of the text will not change.
checked on the Appearance tab, any cus-
tom colors specified here are lost. 2 Type or paste text in the Text Entry
field. See “Copy, Cut and Paste” on
• Click the Bold button to specify the
page 857.
selected or subsequently typed text as
bold. Right-click in the Text Entry field to access a
• Click the Italic button to specify the contextual menu from which you can select
selected or subsequently typed text as Cut, Copy, Paste, Spell Check and Select All.
italic. See “Contextual Menus” on page 33.
• Click the Underline button to specify the To edit text in the entry field, click and drag
selected or subsequently typed text as to highlight any portion of it and then use the
underlined. tools on the Edit Bar as needed.
• Click the Strikethrough button to
selected or specify the subsequently Paragraph Options Dialog
typed text as stricken-through.
• Click the Align Left, Align Center or
Align Right button to specify the how 1
the selected or subsequently typed text is
aligned.
• Click the Paragraph Options button to
specify the selected paragraph’s align-
ment, spacing and bullets or numbering 2
in the Paragraph Options dialog.
• Click the Spell Check button to check
the spelling in the selected text object.
See “Spell Check” on page 859.
3
• Click the Insert Macro button to place a
Text Macro at the location of the cursor.
See “Text Macros” on page 869.
• Specify the Zoom factor of the selected
text by typing a percentage value in the
845
1 Specify the Alignment of the selected • Select the desired punctuation Style for
paragraph(s). See “Aligning Text” on the selected numbered or lettered Type.
page 856. Only available when a numbered or let-
tered Type is selected.
2 Specify the Line Spacing of the • Numbering Start At - Specify the num-
selected paragraph(s).
ber assigned to the first numbered or let-
• Click the radio button beside Single, 1.5
tered paragraph in the selected text
Lines, Double or User Specified.
object. Value must be 1 or greater.
• If you select User Specified Line
Height, type the desired height for each To adjust the size of bullets
line of text in the selected paragraph(s). 1. Click at the end of a bulleted paragraph
For best results, this value should be at to position your cursor there.
least as much as the largest character size
2. Hold down the Shift key and press the
used in the selected paragraph(s).
right arrow key once to highlight the end
3 Specify the appearance of Bullets and of the paragraph.
numbering in the selected paragraph(s).
3. Specify the desired bullet size in the text
• Select the desired bullet, numbered or let- size field at the top of the Text tab.
tered Type from the drop-down list.
Appearance Tab
Leader Lines and Text Lines with color, line weight and line style. See
“Layers” on page 116.
Arrows use the same default layer as
Rich Text, so they share the same default
846
1 Specify the Layer that the selected 2 Specify the appearance of the text
object is located on. object’s Border.
• Check Default to place the selected • Check Display Border to display a bor-
object on the default Text layer. der around the selected text object.
• Click the drop-down list to select from all • Check Use Layer Color to use the line
layers available in the plan or layout file. color assigned to the text object’s layer,
• Click Define to open the Layer Display or click the Color bar to select a different
Options dialog and select, modify or add color. See “Color Chooser Dialog” on
a new layer. See “Layer Display Options page 727.
• Check Layer Color Text to apply the Note: If you change the color of some of the
selected object’s text and then check Use
layer line color to the text on the Text tab.
Layer Color, your customization will be lost.
If a custom color was previously applied
to any portion of the text, it will be lost.
847
• Check Use Layer Line Style to use the • Select Use Custom Color then click the
line style assigned to the text object’s Color bar to use a fill color of your
layer, or choose another style either from choosing. See “Color Chooser Dialog”
the drop-down list or by clicking the on page 727.
Library button. See “Line Styles” on • Check Use Background Color to use
page 879. program’s Background color as the text
• Check Use Layer Weight to use the line object’s fill color. See “Colors Panel” on
weight assigned to the text object’s layer, page 74.
or specify a different weight. See “Line • Check Use Layer Color to use the color
Weights” on page 999. assigned to the text object’s layer as its
fill color.
3 Specify the appearance of the text
object’s Fill.
4 Specify the Top, Bottom, Left and
• Check Display Fill to display a fill color Right Margins, the distance between
within selected text object(s). the text and the border, of the selected text
object(s).
848
Options Tab
1 Options • Check Add an Arrow to add a Text

Arrow to the selected text object. See
• CAD Style Font Sizing measures text “Text Arrows” on page 861.
size based on the total height of the capi-
tal letter A, as most CAD programs do. 2 Specify the Position of the selected text
object using CAD coordinates.
Uncheck this to instead size text accord-
ing to information stored with the font. The X Position and Y Position of the pointer
can be set to display in the Status Bar, which
• Check Rotate with Plan to rotate the may help determine the exact coordinates of
selected text when Rotate View is a location in a plan or layout file. See
used. If unchecked, the selected text is “Appearance Panel” on page 71.
unaffected when Rotate View is used. See
An exact Angle can be entered. An angle of
“Rotate View” on page 189.
90 is vertical (pointing up) and an angle of
180 is upside down.
849
Text Specification Dialog
3 Specify the Size of the selected text • Specify the Default Group to display the
object. selected object(s) in front of those in the
• Check Auto Height to automatically Back Group but behind those in the Front
adjust the text object’s height to match its Group.
contents. • Specify the Front Group to display the
• Check Auto Width to automatically selected object(s) in front of objects in
adjust the text objects width to match its the other two drawing groups.
contents. When Auto Width is used, text • Check Move to Front of Group to dis-
extends in a single line rather than wrap. play the selected object(s) in front of
• Specify the Height of the selected text other objects in the same drawing group.
object(s).
5 Specify the desired Bumping behaviors
• Specify the Width to of the selected text for the selected object(s). See
object(s). “Bumping/Pushing” on page 178.
• Check CAD Stops Move to bump the
4 The Drawing Group options control selected object into other CAD or CAD-
how the selected object(s) display
relative to other objects. See “Drawing based objects as it is moved.
Groups” on page 176. • Check Wall Stops Move to stop the
• Specify the Back Group to display the selected object when it bumps into a wall.
selected object(s) behind objects in the
other two drawing groups. 6 Specify the layout Page that the
selected object(s) is located on. Only
available in layout files. See “Layout” on
page 1014.

The Text Specification dialog opens if you everything else (character height, color, font,
select the Text tool and then click once in etc.) can be.
the drawing area. The Text Specification dialog is similar to
You can also open this dialog by selecting the Text Defaults dialog. See “Text Defaults
one or more Text objects, then clicking
Note: Rich Text objects have a different spec-
ification dialog. See “Rich Text Specification
When Text objects are group-selected,
the text content cannot be changed, but
850
Text Tab
1 4
2
3 5
6
1 Specify the Text Size. a file is opened, you are prompted to select
from the available fonts in the Font dialog.
Enter the Character Height. This height is The text styles Bold, Underline, Italic, and
subject to the current drawing scale. Strikeout are available. Check any of the
boxes to apply that style.
Click the Scale button to open the Printed
Size Input dialog.
3 Click Insert to choose from a list of
special characters and text macros. See
In Version 9, text size was driven by
“Text Macros” on page 869.
dimension information associated with the
current font. Check Version 9 Compatible
4 Check Rotate with Plan to rotate the
Size to use this information for text sizing. selected text when Rotate View is
See “Character Size” on page 840. used. If unchecked, the selected text is
unaffected when Rotate View is used. See
2 Click the drop-down list to select a “Rotate View” on page 189.
different Font. If a font is missing when
851
Check Preview to show the text in the Text

5 Check Add an Arrow to add a Text
Specification dialog using the selected font Arrow to the selected text object.
and font size, and the current settings in the
Page Setup dialog. 6 Enter text in the Text Entry field.
If you are entering text in a view that you • Depending on the current preference set-
plan to send to layout at a drawing scale that tings, pressing the Enter key either forces
is different from the current drawing scale in a new line in the text box or closes the
the Page Setup dialog, the text may not dialog. See “Text & Page Setup Panel” on
preview accurately. page 77.
• Text automatically wraps to a new line
Note: Changing the drawing scale in the without requiring a hard return.
Printed Size Input dialog does not effect the
appearance of text in preview mode. • Tabs can be added to the text by pressing
the Tab key.
Click the Spell Check button to check the To jump from the text entry area to Text Size
spelling of the text that displays in the Text Height using the keyboard, press Shift +
Entry area. If Spell Check finds a word that Tab.
may be spelled incorrectly, the Check
Spelling dialog opens. See “Spell Check” on 6 Click the Num Style button to specify
page 859. the number format used in dialog
boxes. See “Number Style/Angle Style
852
Attributes Tab
1 Tabs - Check Box/Grid to have The X Position and Y Position of the pointer
gridlines separate the rows and columns can be set to display in the Status Bar, which
of tabbed text. When no tabs are present, a may help determine the exact coordinates of
simple box is drawn around the text. a location in a plan or layout file. See
“Appearance Panel” on page 71.
The edit box defines the number of spaces
from the left edge of the text box where each An exact Angle can be entered. An angle of
new column begins. The first column always 90 is vertical (pointing up) and an angle of
starts at 0. In this case, the second column 180 is upside down.
(following the first Tab) starts 10 spaces in,
the next at 20 spaces, etc. 4 Adjust the Size of the text box
surrounding the text by entering a
Select an Alignment option from the Height and Width.
2
drop-down list to apply to the text.
A width of 0 makes the text box as small as
Specify the Position of the text using the text within it allows. This is a one-time
3
CAD coordinates. resizing. To make text automatically resize to
the width or height, use the Auto Width and
853
Editing Text
Auto Height check boxes. If you manually • Chief Architect appends the http:// prefix
edit the width or height of the text box, the automatically for links that begin with
corresponding auto size option turns off. "www" when Test Link is clicked.
5 Specify the Margins to be used with To create a hyperlink

the text. This is the distance between
1. Enter text on the Text tab of the Text
the text and the edge of the text box.
A default Left and Right margin is applied.
2. Enter a link on the Link tab.
Top and Bottom margins are measured
relative to the line height and may not extend • Click the Browse button to browse to a
to the text box completely when given a file on your computer or network.
value of 0. • The link can be tested by clicking the
Test Link button.
Link Tab 3. Click OK to close the Text
To use a hyperlink
1. Select the text object.
2. Click the Follow Hyperlink edit

button to activate the link.
Line Style Tab

Hyperlinks can be associated with text “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
objects. The link entered on the Link tab is
associated with the text object that is entered Fill Style Tab
on the Text tab.
• If no text object is entered on the Text “Fill Style Tab” on page 902.
tab, the link has nothing to attach itself to
and is not created.
Editing Text
Once created, Rich Text objects can be Text objects can be selected and edited
selected individually and as a group and much the way Rich Text objects can;
edited using the edit handles, the edit toolbar however, there are a few differences which
buttons, and the Rich Text Specification are described here.
dialog. See “Rich Text Specification Dialog”
on page 843.
854
Using the Mouse

When text is resized using the edit han-
A selected Rich Text or Text object dles, there is a “sticky point” at the natu-
ral size of the text box. Hold down the Ctrl key
has the same edit handles as other box-based
while resizing to override this behavior.
objects. See “Editing Box-Based Objects” on
page 164.
Edit Text in Place
Move The contents and appearance of text
Extend/
Contract objects created with the Rich Text
Resize tool can be edited directly in the drawing
area using the Edit Text in Place edit tool.
To use Edit Text in Place

Rotate
1. Select a Rich Text object and click
As a Text box is made narrower or wider the Edit Text in Place edit button.
using an edit handle, the bottom of the text • The text appears as it did when it was
box may expand or contract to allow all text first created: inside a text field with the
to be shown. Edit Bar above. See “To create Rich
Text” on page 842.
As a Rich Text box is made smaller
using an edit handle, not all of the text may 2. Click inside the Text Field to type or
be visible. select any of the existing text.
3. Use the tools on the Edit Bar to edit any
Depending on the active Edit Behavior , or all of the text as needed. The tools on
the text box and the characters within it may the Edit bar are the same as those on the
or may not resize together when a corner edit Text tab of the Text Specification dia-
handle is dragged. See “Edit Behaviors” on log. See “Text Tab” on page 844.
page 137.
4. When you are finished, click outside of
• If Resize editing is enabled, both the the text field to close it and the Edit Bar.
text object and the font resizes when a
corner edit handle is dragged. Convert to Rich Text
• If Default or Concentric editing Text objects cannot be edited to the
is enabled, the text box resizes, but not same degree that Rich Text can. You
the font size. can, however, convert a selected simple Text
object to Rich Text by clicking the
• If Fillet editing is selecting, the cor- Convert to Rich Text edit button. Most
ners become rounded and the font size
does not change. See “Behaviors Panel” attributes of the selected simple Text
on page 93. object are retained; however, columns
855
Editing Text
created using the Tab key are not. See “Tab

Spacing” on page 857.

A selected Rich Text or Text object
can be edited in a variety of ways using the
buttons on the edit toolbar. See “Edit Toolbar
Resizing Text
To use the Printed Size Input dialog
Both the border of a text object and the 1. Click the Print size button on the Text
characters it contains can be resized. tab of the Rich Text Specification dia-
The border of a text object can be resized log.
using its edit handles or by specifying the 2. In the Printed Size Input dialog, con-
Height and Width in its specification dialog. firm the desired Drawing Scaleenter the
Desired Print Size of the text.
The character height of Rich Text and
3. Click OK to return to the Text
Text objects can be specified as a default Specification dialog. The Height
or for individual objects in their specification updates, reflecting the character height
dialogs. See “Text Defaults and Preferences” necessary to print the text at the Desired
on page 839. Print Size when printed at the specified
Drawing Scale.
Character height can be measured in either of
two ways. See “Character Size” on page 840. In most cases, the Drawing Scale does not
need to be changed in the Printed Size Input
Scaling Text dialog unless you intend to send the current
view to layout at a different drawing scale.
As with the size of other objects, text size is
subject to the current drawing scale specified
in the Page Setup dialog. See “Page Setup
Aligning Text
Dialog” on page 1004. Text can be aligned in a number of ways.
To determine the Height needed to produce • The text content of a Rich Text
text of a certain printed size, click the Print object can be aligned to the left, right,
size button in the Rich Text Specification to center or justified in the Rich Text
open the Printed Size Input dialog. See Specification dialog. See “Text Tab” on
“Text Tab” on page 851. page 844.
• The text content of a Text object can

be also be aligned in the same ways in the
856
Text Specification dialog or by clicking Tab Spacing

the Align Left , Align Right , The Tab key functions differently in Rich
Center , or Justify edit button. Text and Text objects.
See “Attributes Tab” on page 853.
• The center points of text objects can be In Rich Text , the Tab key creates a
aligned with one another by assigning space. CAD Style Font Sizing affects the size
them the same X and/or Y Position. See of the space created. See “Options Tab” on
“Attributes Tab” on page 865. page 849.
• Text objects can be aligned by bumped Tab spacing in Text objects produces
them against a CAD line. See “Bumping/ columns with widths that can be edited using
Pushing” on page 178. edit handles.
A variety of other alignment methods are
also available. See “Aligning Objects” on To insert tab-spaced text
page 180. 1. Highlight a block of text objects con-
taining tabs from another program or
Copy, Cut and Paste text from the Materials List and press
Ctrl + C to copy them to the Windows
Copy, Cut and Paste of text into and out of clipboard.
the text specification dialogs can be
accomplished using keyboard hotkeys: 2. Return to the floor plan view, select the-
• Press Ctrl + X to Cut the selected text and select Tools> Text tool, and click to
save it to the Windows clipboard. place a text object.
• Press Ctrl + C to Copy the selected text 3. Press Ctrl + V to paste the copied mate-
and copy it to the Windows clipboard. rials into the text box, then click OK.
The text object displays on-screen.
• Press Ctrl + V to paste your last cut or
copied selection in a new text object. 4. Select the text object and note the addi-
tional lines with handles separating each
For more, see “Copying and Pasting column.
Copy, Cut and Paste use the Windows
clipboard, making it possible to to transfer
text between text objects, between Chief
Architect files, froma plan or layout into
another application, or vice versa. See
“Copying & Pasting Text” on page 858. Columns automatically resize to fit the
contained text. When a text object is selected
you can use the edit handles that display at
each column to adjust spacing.
857
Copying & Pasting Text
Copying & Pasting Text

The Copy, Cut and Paste commands use the Bear in mind that when text is copied and
Windows clipboard, making it possible to pasted, its formatting is not always retained.
transfer text between text objects, between The results depend on the program or type of
Chief Architect files, from a plan or layout text object in which the content was created
into another application such as a text editor as well as the type of text object into which it
or spreadsheet program, or vice versa. See is pasted.
“Copying and Pasting Objects” on page 191.
All or selected portions of the Materials List Pasting into Text
can also be copied and pasted into a text
Text pasted into a simple Text object
object, as well as into a word processing or
from another source will not retain its
spreadsheet program. See “Materials Lists”
formatting. Instead, the settings for that Text
on page 1048.
object are always used. See “Text
Cut, Copy, and Paste can also be accessed
from the Edit menu of many applications,
including Chief Architect. These menu This is the case even if the text is copied
commands are not available when the text from another Text object unless that
specification dialogs are open, but you can object happens to use the same formatting.
use the associated hotkeys.
Text pasted into a simple Text object
To Copy, Cut and Paste text
from a spreadsheet program will retain basic
1. On the Text tab of either text specifica- column and row information. Each row can
tion dialog or in another program alto- only have a single line of text; however, the
gether, highlight the text you wish to cut, width of each column can be adjusted. See
copy or paste. “Tab Spacing” on page 857.
2. Press Ctrl + X to Cut the selected text
out of its original location and save it to Pasting into Rich Text
the Windows clipboard
Text pasted into a Rich Text object
3. Press Ctrl + C to Copy the selected text from another source, on the other
to the Windows clipboard without hand, will retain most of its custom
removing it from its original location. formatting.
4. Open the text object or a file in another
application and click to place your cur- Text pasted into a Rich Text object from
sor in the Text field, writing area, or a spreadsheet program retains basic column
spreadsheet cell. and row information. Column width cannot
5. Press Ctrl + V to Paste the copied text at be adjusted as it can in simple Text ;
the location of your cursor. however, as you add or remove text froma
858
cell, row height will increase or decrease to retained if pasted in to Rich Text ;
accomodate your changes. however, once pasted background color
The background colors of two or more cells cannot be edited.
copied from a spreadsheet application will be If you want to retain the color of the actual
retained if pasted in to Rich Text ; text being pasted into a Rich Text object,
however, once pasted background color be sure to uncheck Layer Color Text in the
cannot be edited. Rich Text Specification dialog. See
The background colors of two or more cells “Appearance Tab” on page 846.
copied from a spreadsheet application will be
Spell Check
Select Tools> Checks> Spell Check Text Specification dialog or by clicking the
to open the Check Spelling dialog. Spell Check edit button. When accessed
The Spell Check feature checks each text in this manner, only the selected text object is
object in the current current .plan or .layout checked for spelling errors. See “Editing
file consecutively for spelling errors. Text” on page 854.
Spell Check can also be accessed by clicking
the Spell Check button in the Rich Text or
Check Spelling Dialog
1
2 6
3
4
5
Note: Spell Check has its own Help system.

1 Spell check looks in for each word in
all open dictionaries. Any words not
For complete documentation, click the Help found display in this field. Type a correction
button in the Check Spelling dialog.
859
Spell Check
in the field and click Change or select one of

5 The contents of the text object display
the suggested corrections below. in this field, and any misspelled words
are highlighted to help you locate them in
2 Spell check displays Suggestions for context.
corrections here.
• Click on a suggestion to select it, then 6 Click Ignore to ignore the word in
click Change to accept it. question during the current spell check
session. Running spell check again does not
3 If a word is not misspelled but is not ignore the same word.
found in a dictionary, it can be added.
• Click Ignore All to ignore the word in
Click the Add words to drop-down list to
question every time spell check is run.
select which dictionary the word is saved to,
then click the Add button. • Click Add to add the word in question to
the dictionary.
Note: New words can be added to any dic- • Click Change to replace the word in
tionary file, but if Chief Architect is uninstalled question with the suggested word that is
and reinstalled, only additions to the User currently highlighted.
Dictionary, userdic.tlx, are retained. Words
• Click Change All to replace all instances
added to other dictionary files are not saved.
of the word in question with the sug-
gested word that is currently highlighted.
4 Click Undo to reverse the previous • Click Suggest to initiate a deeper search
Spell Check operation.
for suggested corrections. Once all possi-
• Click Options to open the Spelling
ble suggestions have been made, the but-
Options dialog. Select options to specify
ton is disabled.
how Spell Check functions.
• Click Dictionaries to open the Spelling When Spell Check is finished checking the
Dictionaries dialog. Additional diction- text object or file for errors, the Spell Check
aries can be opened or closed by clicking results window displays.
the Add File or Remove File buttons.
Click the New File button to add a new
dictionary to the list.
• Click Help to open the Spelling Checker
Dialog help system for complete docu-
mentation.
• Click Cancel to close the Spell Check
dialog without making any further
changes.
860
Text Arrows
Lines with arrows can be independent or • Leader Lines drawn from right to left
attached to other objects. If an arrow is produce text that is left-aligned.
attached to text or another object, deleting • Leader Lines drawn from vertically pro-
that object will also delete the arrow. duce text that is center-aligned.
Leader Line
Note: Leader lines have two segments by
The Leader Line tool places a Rich default. You can change this in the Prefer-
Text object with an arrow already ences dialog. See “Text & Page Setup Panel”
attached. This arrow can be selected and on page 77.
moved like any other line with arrow.
Text Line with Arrow
To create text with a leader line
Text Lines with Arrow can be
1. Select CAD> Text> Leader Line . attached to text, CAD and
architectural objects by selecting CAD>
2. Starting at the point where you want the
arrow to point, drag to where you want a Text> Text Line with Arrow and then
bend in the leader line and release the clicking and dragging to draw a line. There is
mouse button. no limit to the number of text lines with
3. Click at the point where you want the arrows that can be attached to an object.
center of the first line of text to display. The endpoints of Text Lines with
The Rich Text Specification dialog
Arrows can be joined to form polylines
opens. See “Rich Text Specification
with corners that can be adjusted using the
edit handles. See “Polylines” on page 900.
4. Enter text and click OK.
Click in the same location to create a Rich A Text Line with Arrow behaves like a
Text object without a leader. Line With Arrow with one exception:
Text Lines with Arrow are initially placed on
For multiple leaders, click in the same
the default Text layer, not the default CAD
location to stop adding leader segments.
layer. See “Layers” on page 116.
The initial alignment of text created with the
Leader Line tool depends on the Auto Positioning Arrows
direction that the leader line was drawn: If either or both ends of a line with arrow are
• Leader Lines drawn from left to right attached to a text object, Auto Position Tail
produce text that is right-aligned. and Auto Position Head are available on the
Arrow Tab of the Line Specification dialog.
See “Arrow Tab” on page 891.
861
Text Arrows
If a selected Text Line with Arrow is moved

away from an auto position location and you
check Auto Position Tail, the tail will snap
to the nearest auto position location.
Check either or both if you want the text line Special Use Arrows
with arrow to update its position on the text
object if the text object or text line with A text line with arrow designated as a special
arrow is moved. use arrow offers unique functionality that
• The first segment of a polyline arrow may be useful when annotating the height of
attached to text maintains its angle when various platforms. A special use arrow
Auto Position is off and text is moved. replaces the first number in the attached text
object with the height of the architectural
• Auto Position is turned off automatically object it is attached to on the other end. The
when an arrow is not attached to one of height is relative to the first floor elevation of
the auto position locations. 0’-0”.
• Arcs and splines with arrows can also be
attached to text objects. To create a Special Use Arrow
1. In floor plan view, use the Leader
There are four auto position locations on a
text object: one at the midpoint of each side. Line tool to create a text object that
includes a number such as, Foundation
The following image illustrates the behavior
Wall Height 1.
of auto positioning. The arrow has the Auto
Position Tail option checked. When the head 2. Connect the leader line to a foundation
of the line with arrow is moved, the tail of wall or slab, slab, slab with footing, stair
the arrow snaps to different auto position landing or custom countertop.
locations on the text object, maintaining its 3. Select the line with arrow click the
connection.
4. On the Arrow tab of the Arrow
Specification dialog, check Special Use
and click OK.
5. The text object should now read Foun-
dation Wall Height followed by the
height of the connected object in feet
and inches.
862
Callouts
Select CAD> Text> Callout, then
click at the location where you want a
callout to be placed in floor plan view, a
cross section/elevation view, a CAD Detail
or on a layout page. The Callout
Specification dialog displays. Make any
needed changes and click OK to place a Cross section lines can be added to any
callout. See “Callout Specification Dialog” callout shape. Resize or rotate the cross
on page 864. section line by dragging the triangular edit
handle near the end of the cross section line.
Cross Section Lines
Pointers and Arrows
Check the Cross Section Line box in the
Callout Specification dialog to add a cross Callouts can have arrows and/or pointers
section line perpendicular to the nearest wall. added.
See “Callout Tab” on page 864.
With With
Pointer Arrow
863
Callout Specification Dialog
To add a pointer to a callout, select the • Remove a pointer by selecting the

callout and drag the diamond-shaped handle. Callout and dragging the pointer’s handle
A pointer is created. into the center of the callout.
• If there is a cross section line, only one You can also add as many arrows as you like
pointer may be created. to callouts. To add an arrow to a callout,
• Change the pointer’s direction by select- select CAD> Text> Text Line with
ing the callout and dragging the edit han- Arrow , then click and drag to create a
dle appearing just beyond the pointer. line with arrow, which can be moved or
resized as needed.
Callout Specification Dialog

To open the Callout Specification dialog, This dialog also displays when a new callout
select a callout and click the Open Object is created using the Callout tool.
edit button.
Callout Tab
2
3
1 Callout Label - Enter the text for the 2 Text Below Line - Enter text for a
top row of the callout. bottom row, if desired.
864
3 Options 4 Specify Callout Size - Check this box

to activate the Callout Size field and
• Check Cross Section Line to add a cross type the desired size.
section line. Cross section lines may be If this box is unchecked, the callout is sized
added to callouts of any shape. according to the size of the text in the callout.
• Specify the shape of the callout.
Attributes Tab
The settings on the Attributes tab are similar
for both callouts and markers.
1 Specify the Layer to place the callout • Click Define to open the Layer Display
on. Options dialog. See “Select Layer Dia-
• Select a layer from the drop-down list. log” on page 124.
• Click Define to open the Layer Display 2 Specify the Color of the selected
Options dialog and choose from all lay- callout.
ers. See “Layer Display Options Dialog” • Click the Color bar to choose the desired
on page 121. line color. See “Color Chooser Dialog”
• Check Default to use the default layer on page 727.
specified in the Callout Defaults dialog.
865
Editing Callouts
• Check By Layer to use the default color • In Version 9 and prior, text size was
for the specified layer. based on sizing information stored in
each font rather than actual character
dimensions. Check Legacy Compatible
You can assign white if an object is to
exist but not appear on the screen or in Size to use this information for text siz-
printouts (must print with color on). ing.
• Check Transparent to allow objects
Specify the Font of the selected callout. behind the callout to display. If
3
See “Fonts and Alphabets” on page unchecked, the callout displays in front
840. of other objects.
• Select a font from the drop-down list. • Check Rotate with Plan to prevent the
• Check Bold, Underline, Italic, and/or selected callout from rotating if Rotate
Strikeout to use any of these text styles. View is used. See “Rotate View” on
page 189. If checked, the callout center
4 Specify the Size of the callout’s text. moves with other objects as the plan
rotates, but the orientation of the callout
• Specify the Character Height of the does not change.
callout’s text.
• Click the Scale button to open the 5 Specify the layout Page that the callout
is located on. Only available when the
Printed Size Input dialog. See “Charac-
callout is placed on a layout page.
ter Size” on page 840.
Editing Callouts
Callouts can be edited using the edit handles,
the edit toolbar buttons and the Callout Rotate Move Extend/
Specification dialog. See “Callout pointer Rotate
When a callout is selected, it has at least four
edit handles. An additional rotate handle
displays for each pointer added to the callout.
Add Resize
• The Move handle is located at the center

of the callout and is used to move it.
• The triangular Extend/Rotate handle is
used to extend and/or rotate the callout’s
866
cross section line, if one exists. See Resizing Callouts

“Cross Section Lines” on page 863.
Callout shapes can be resized either in the
• The small, square Resize handle is Callout Specification dialog or using the
located on the edge of the callout and is edit handles. See “Callout Tab” on page 864.
used to resize it and its associated text.
Callout text can be resized in the Callout
• The Add pointer handle is used to add
Specification dialog. See “Attributes Tab”
pointers by dragging away from the call-
on page 865.
out.
• The small triangular Rotate pointer han- As long as Specify Callout Size box is
dle located at the end of a pointer, if one checked, a callout’s shape and text resize
has been added, is used to rotate that independent of one another. When this box is
pointer. unchecked, the two are dynamically linked:
if you resize the shape, the text adjusts
accordingly or vice versa.
Markers
Markers for Level Lines, Test You can also place a framing reference
Borings and Point Markers can be marker using Build> Framing> Framing
placed in floor plan viewcross sections, or Reference . See “Framing Reference
CAD Details. Framing Reference Markers Markers” on page 480.
should only be placed in floor plan views.
In addition, a Point Marker is placed using
To create a marker, select CAD> Text>
the Point to Point Dimension tool if an
Marker and click at the location where existing object is not available to snap to. See
you want it to be placed. The Marker “Point to Point Dimensions” on page 824.
Specification dialog opens. See “Marker
Marker Specification Dialog

To open the Marker Specification dialog, This dialog also displays when a new marker
select a marker and click the Open Object is created by clicking in floor plan view
edit button. using the Marker tool.
867
Editing Markers
Marker Tab
1
2
3
4
5
1 Enter optional Text Above Line. 4 Enter a number in the Height field.
The height value will display with the
2 Enter optional Text Below Line (Level marker symbol when a pound sign (#) is
Line Marker only).
entered in the Text Above and/or Below
3 Choose a Marker Type. Line fields.
Enter the Marker Radius, in inches or
Level Line 5
millimeters.
Test Boring
Point Marker
Attributes Tab
Reference Marker The Attributes tab for markers is similar to
the Attributes tab for callouts. See
Only a Framing Reference marker effects “Attributes Tab” on page 865.
the model. The other marker types are only
cosmetically different.
Editing Markers
Markers can be edited using the edit handles, When a marker is selected, it has four edit
edit toolbar and Marker Specification handles.
dialog. See “Marker Specification Dialog”
on page 867.
868
• The Move handle is located at the center

Move Extend of the marker and is used to move it.
• The Resize handle is located on the edge
of the marker and is used to resize the
marker and associated text.
• The triangular Rotate handle is used to
rotate the marker and associated text.
Resize Rotate • The Extend handle is used to adjust the
distance between the marker and its asso-
ciated text.
Text Macros
Text macros insert dynamic information
relevant to the current plan or layout file. The macro
Macros are particularly useful in layouts; formula appears
page numbers, drawing scale, and in the dialog’s
information to identify drawings can be Text Entry field
inserted to improve organization and clarity.
Text macros can also be used to create 4. Click OK to close the Text
customized room labels. See “Room Labels” Specification dialog and place the text.
on page 273.
To insert a text macro

1. Click the Insert Macro button on the
Text tab of either the Rich Text or Text 5. The text object displays the date rather
Specification dialog. than the macro formula.
2. A menu of macros displays. Move your
cursor over a menu item to view its sub- Contact Info
menu. Macros in the Contact Info submenu display
3. Select from the list of available text information about the Client, Designer and
macros. In this example Time& Date> the Registered User of Chief Architect.
Short Date (%date.short) is selected. • Information supplied by Client macros is
specified in the Client Information dia-
log. This information is file-specific and
can be edited at any time. The client info
for a plan file and a layout file are seper-
869
Text Macros
ate. See “Client Information Dialog” on Plan Info

page 872.
Macros in the Plan Info submenu display
• Information supplied by Designer macros information about the current plan or layout
can be specified in the Designer file.
Information dialog. Information in this
dialog is file-specific and can be edited at
any time. See “Designer Information Macro Description
Dialog” on page 871. %scale Current drawing scale. When
printed, this is the scale used
By default, the Designer Information for printing. On screen this var-
ies based on the zoom factor.
dialog is populated by information from
the Default Designer Information dia- %sheet.size The size of the drawing sheet.
log. See “Text & Page Setup Panel” on %room.area. Internal room area of the room
internal that the center of the text is in.
page 77.
%page Page number of the current
• Information supplied by Registered User layout page.
macros corresponds to the information %living.area Living area of the current plan.
that was given when the current installa- %numpages Total number of printable
tion was registered and cannot be modi- pages in the current layout.
fied without reinstalling and registering %room. Dimensions of the room that
the program. dimensions the center of the text is in.
%room.area. Standard room area of the
File Info standard room (at center of text).
%room.height. Ceiling height of the room (at
Macros that display information about the ceiling center of text).
file name and saved location of the current %room.height. Lowered Ceiling height of the
plan or layout are available in the File Info loweredceiling room (at center of text)
submenu. %room.name Name of the room (at center of
text).
%room.type Room Type of the room (at
Macro Description
center of text).
%file.dir The directory path of the current
file. (\myplans\)
Macros that display information about rooms
%file.drive The drive letter of the current
derive that information from the location of
file. (C:)
the text object. Information about a room
%file.ext The file type of the current file.
will display if at least half of the text object is
(.plan or .layout)
located inside that room.
%file The full pathname of the current
file (C:\myplans\myPlan.plan) • Information about a room will display if
%file.name The name of the current file. at least half of the text object is located
(myPlan) inside that room. See “Room Definition”
on page 267.
870
• If the text object has a Text Arrow When a documented is printed, these macros
attached to it, room macros display infor- display the date and time that the printing
mation about the room located at the Text took place.
Arrow’s endpoint rather than at the loca-
tion of the text. See “Text Arrows” on
Macro Description
page 861.
%time.24 24 hour time.
%time AM/PM time.
Special Characters
%date.short Inserts a short version of the
Special text characters such as ® and ™ can date using system settings.
be inserted into text in the same manner as (10/25/04)
dynamic text macros. %date.long Inserts a long version of the date
using system settings (Monday,
Oct 25, 2004)
Time & Date
The current date and time can be displayed
using macros in the Time & Date submenu.
Designer Information Dialog

Select Tools> Designer Information apply to Designer text macros and are plan-
to open the Designer Information specific.
dialog. The specifications in this dialog
871
Client Information Dialog
Enter information in each field exactly as corresponding text macro is used. See “Text
you want it to display when the Macros” on page 869.
Client Information Dialog

Select Tools> Client Information to must be filled out seperately for plan files
open the Client Information dialog. and layout files.
This dialog is similar to the Designer
Information dialog, but its specifications
apply to Client text macros. This information
872
873
Chapter 31:
CAD Objects
With the 2D Computer Aided Design (CAD) Chapter Contents

tools included in Chief Architect, you can • CAD Defaults and Preferences
add details to views of your 3D model to • The CAD Drawing Tools
create complete working drawings. Custom • Line Styles
details can be created, saved, and used in • Point Tools
other plans. • Line Tools
The CAD Tools are used to add information • Line Specification Dialog
to 2D views of your model. CAD objects do • Arc Tools
not affect 3D objects or display in camera • Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes
views or overviews, but they can be used to • Arc Specification Dialog
add details to layout pages, floor plan view • Circle Tools
and cross section/elevation views. • CAD Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification
Dialog
CAD polylines can be converted to 3D • Polylines
objects such as countertops and terrain data, • Polyline Specification Dialog
and shown in 3D views. See “Convert • Box Tools
Polyline” on page 205. • CAD Box Specification Dialog
• Revision Clouds
CAD objects are edited much like other
• Revision Cloud Specification Dialog
objects in Chief Architect. See “Editing
• Splines
• Displaying CAD Objects
• Creating Line Styles
• CAD Blocks
• CAD Block Specification Dialog
• Number Style/Angle Style Dialog
• CAD Details
874
• Plot Plans and Plan Footprints • Plan Footprint Specification Dialog
CAD Defaults and Preferences

CAD Defaults can be accessed by Behaviors, and Snap Properties Panels of the
selecting Edit> Default Settings from Preferences dialog.
the menu or by clicking the CAD Defaults
Unlike default settings, preference settings
button, which can be added to a toolbar See
are global, affecting all plan and layout files.
“Adding Toolbar Buttons” on page 108.
See “Preferences Dialog” on page 70.
The behavior and appearance of CAD
The CAD Defaults dialog controls the
objects are also affected by settings on the
general appearance of CAD objects.
CAD, Line Properties, Sun Angle,
CAD Defaults Dialog

Settings in the CAD Defaults dialog control views and a third affects CAD Details.
the basic appearance of CAD objects. Layout also has CAD defaults. Each dialog
can be accessed by opening the CAD
In each plan file, there are three different
Defaults dialog from within that view.
CAD Defaults dialogs. One affects floor plan
view, another affects cross section/elevation
3 5
1 Select the Current CAD Layer from • Click the Define button to open the Layer
the drop-down list. See “Current CAD Display Options dialog. See “Layer Dis-
Layer” on page 910. play Options Dialog” on page 121.
875
CAD Defaults and Preferences
Note: Although there are three CAD Defaults

5 Display Line Angles as - Select either
Degrees or Bearings relative to the
dialogs in each plan file, only one layer can North Pointer. If no North Pointer has been
be specified as the Current CAD Layer. When established, north is assumed to be straight
a new Current CAD Layer is selected, the
up on the screen.
change affects all view types.
Line angles only display when Show Angle

2 Specify the Displayed Line Length is checked in the object’s specification
Format, which controls the appearance
dialog. See “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
of line length indicators. Line lengths only
display when Show Length is checked in the
object’s specification dialog. See “Line Style
6 Select any combination of the available
Options.
Tab” on page 889.
Check Show Arc Centers and Ends
• A preview of the current line length for- to show arc centers and ends. Ends
mat displays here. display as small lines where arcs connect to
• Click the Define button to open the one another. Centers also acts as snap points.
Displayed Number Style dialog and edit
the displayed line length format.
3 Specify the desired Line Label Height

in plan inches (mm). You can set this
higher so that line labels on objects such as
property lines can be easily read at small
scales.This value does not affect the size of Show Arc Centers andEnds
dimension numbers or other text objects.
Check Fill New Framing Members to draw
all new framing members with a solid white
fill.
Check Use Line for Framing to show all
framing members as single lines rather than
• Fractional • Degrees as closed polylines in floor plan view. See
“Displaying Framing” on page 485.
• Decimal Feet • Bearing
Displayed Line Length Dialog

The settings in the Displayed Line Length length indicators, when set to display. See
dialog control the appearance of CAD line “Show Length and Angle” on page 910.
876
To access this dialog, click the Define button Label Defaults dialog and the Format tabs of
in the CAD Defaults dialog. the Dimension Defaults dialog. See
“Primary Format Tab” on page 812.
The settings here are similar to those found
on the Dimension Format tab of the Room
1 2
1 Specify the numbering Format for • Select the Use Space radio button to use
dimension numbers. a space as the thousands separator.
• Select the Units of measurement to be
used by dimensions from the drop-down 2 Specify the degree of Accuracy used
by dimension numbers.
list.
• Select the Decimal Places radio button
• Check Unit Indicators to display the unit for dimension numbers in decimal for-
of measurement along with the dimen- mat. In the text field, specify the number
sion number. of decimal places to use, from 0 to 20. If
• Check Leading Zeros to display the zero 0 is used, no decimal places are used.
before a decimal less than 1 or to display • Select the Smallest Fraction radio but-
0’ or 0” when the ft-in or ’-” unit formats ton for dimension numbers using whole
are used. numbers and fractions. In the text field,
• Check Trailing Zeros to display trailing specify the largest denominator to use,
zeros at the end of decimal values. from 1 to 128. If 1 is entered, whole num-
bers are used.
• Check Thousands Separator to use a
thousands separator for values greater • Uncheck Show Denominator to turn off
than 999. the display of fraction denominators used
by dimension lines. Typically, denomina-
• Select the Use , or Use . radio button to
tors are only turned off when eighths are
use a comma as the thousands separator.
desired.
877
The CAD Drawing Tools
• Uncheck Reduce Fractions to always the denominator specified above. Not

use the denominator specified above. recommended when fractional inches are
When checked, the lowest possible used.
denominator will be used.
A value of 0.33333 is represented by the
3 Reduce Fractions Using - Specify how fraction 5/16 when Greatest Common
fractions are reduced. These settings Divisor is used and the Smallest Fraction
are only available when Smallest Fraction is denominator is 16. When Closest Fraction is
selected above. selected, this value is represented by 1/3.
• Select the Greatest Common Divisor
radio button to reduce fractions using the Revision Cloud Defaults
largest value that divides equally into the Settings in the Revision Cloud Defaults
numerator and the denominator specified dialog determine the initial appearance of
above. This option is best for fractional Revision Clouds. The settings in this dialog
inches. are similar to those in the Revision Cloud
• Select the Closest Fraction radio button Specification dialog. See “Revision Cloud
to reduce fractions without referring to Specification Dialog” on page 907.
The CAD Drawing Tools

The CAD Tools are available in the The Draw Line , Input Line , Line
CAD menu, and also in the CAD
toolbar configuration, which can be accessed With Arrow , Sun Angle , and the
by clicking the CAD Configuration button. North Pointer allow you to create
See “Toolbar Configurations” on page 112. various types of lines. See “Line Tools” on
page 884.
Point Tools
Select CAD> Points to access the Arc Tools
Point Tools. Select CAD > Arcs to access the Arc
Tools.
The Place Point , Input Point , Point
Marker , and Delete Temporary The Draw Arc , Input Arc , and the
Points tools can be used to create or Arc With Arrow tools allow you to
remove snap points for a variety of purposes. create arcs. See “Arc Tools” on page 894.
See “Point Tools” on page 880.
Box Tools
Line Tools Choose CAD > Boxes & Framing to
Select CAD> Line to access the Line access the Box Tools.
Tools.
878
The Rectangular Polyline , Regular Select CAD> Draw Spline to draw

connected line segments that form a spline.
Polygon , Box , Framing , Wall See “Splines” on page 908.
Bridging , Cross Box , and Once created, a spline can be selected and
Insulation tools allow you to create a edited. See “Editing Spline Based Objects”
variety of polyline and box objects. See “Box on page 166 and “Polyline Specification
Tools” on page 903. Dialog” on page 901.
Circle Tools Dimension Tools

Select CAD> Circles to access the Select CAD> Dimension Lines to
Circle Tools. access the Dimension Tools. The
Dimension Tools can be used with CAD and
The Circle , Circle About Center , architectural objects and are discussed in
their own chapter. See “Dimensions” on page
Oval , and the Ellipse tools are
808.
discussed in detail later in this chapter. See
“Circle Tools” on page 897.
Text Tools
Revision Cloud Select CAD> Text to access the Text
Tools. The Text Tools are discussed in
Select CAD> Revision Cloud, then
their own chapter. See “Text, Callouts &
click and drag to draw a rectangular
Markers” on page 838.
shape with edges that display a series of arcs.
See “Revision Clouds” on page 906.
Current CAD Layer
Splines Select CAD> Current CAD Layer to
change the current default CAD layer.
A Spline is a curve that passes
See “Select Layer Dialog” on page 124.
smoothly through a set of points.
Line Styles
The Line Styles library contains line styles The MEP Toolbar Configuration
that be applied to objects individually in their includes a selection of toolbar buttons that
specification dialogs, by default in their access line styles from the library. See “MEP
defaults dialogs, or by layer in the Layer Toolbar Configuration Buttons” on page
Display Options dialog. See “Line Style
1138.
Tab” on page 889 and “Layer Display
Options Dialog” on page 121. You can draw a line with a selected style
directly from the library. See “Line Tools” on
page 884.
879
Point Tools
To use a line style from the library To import line styles
1. Select a line style in the selection pane 1. Locate a line style and copy its file to a
of the Library Browser. See “The convenient location on your hard drive.
Library Browser” on page 683. These files have the extension .lin. Pre-
2. Click and drag in a 2D view to produce a vious versions of Chief Architect used
CAD line with the selected style. the .dat format, which also works.
2. Select File> Import> Line Style Defi-
You can also apply line styles to the Place
nitions .
Library Object button. See “Place
Library Object Button” on page 692. 3. Browse to the location where you saved
the .lin file.
Additional line styles can be imported into
the library. 4. Click Open to add the line style to the
library.
You can also create custom line styles for use
in Chief Architect. See “Creating Line
Styles” on page 910.
Point Tools
Select CAD> Points to access the Input Point
Point Tools.
Temporary CAD points can be placed
Temporary points created using the Place with precision by entering
Point and Input Point tools and coordinates. See “3D Drafting” on page 28.
permanent Point Markers can be used To use the Input Point tool
with Object Snaps to accurately position
a variety of objects. 1. Select CAD> Points> Input Point
to open the New CAD Point dialog.
Place Point
2. Select a Location option, and enter
Select CAD> Points> Place Point, thedesired location of the point.
then and click in the drawing area to 3. Click OK to close the dialog and create
place a temporary CAD point at that the new point. The new point becomes
location. the Current Point and is highlighted. See
“The Current Point” on page 882.
4. Alternatively, click Next to create the
new point but remain in the New CAD
Point dialog and create additional
880
points. As each is created, it becomes

the Current Point.
New CAD Point Dialog
1 2
3
4
5
1 Begin by specifying how you want to • X Position and Y Position coordinates

define the Location of the new point. relative to (0,0) are entered if the Abso-
• Absolute Location - Define the point in lute Location method is specified.
X Position (horizontal) and Y Position • X Position and Y Position coordinates
(vertical) coordinates, relative to (0,0). relative to the Current Point are entered if
• Relative to Current Point - Define the the Relative to Current Point method is
new point in X and Y coordinates that are specified.
relative to the Current Point, as though • Distance and Angle from the Current
that point was at (0,0). See “The Current Point are entered if the Relative to Cur-
Point” on page 882. Only available when rent Point: Polar method is specified.
a Current Point exists.
• Relative to Start Point: Polar (Counter 4 Click Next to create the new point
without exiting the dialog so you can
Clockwise from horizontal) - Check this input data for the next point. The newly
box to define the new point by its Dis- created point becomes the Current Point.
tance and Angle from the Current Point
rather than in X and Y coordinates. This 5 Click Num Style to change the units
is helpful when creating a plot plan. See shown in the New CAD Point dialog.
“Plot Plans and Plan Footprints” on page See “Number Style/Angle Style Dialog” on
595. page 917.
2 The location of the Current Point Point Markers

displays here.
Use a permanent Point Marker as a
3 The position of the new point is defined snap point for dimension lines and
here. The information used to define it other CAD objects. Select CAD> Points>
depends on the method chosen to define the Point Marker and click in the view to place
End Point Location. a permanent point marker. Point markers
881
Point Tools
display as a simple cross, with or without a Delete Temporary Points

text label. They can be opened for
specification and modified to include a label All temporary points can be deleted at
or alter their attributes. once using CAD> Points> Delete
Temporary Points.
You can also place point markers using the
You can also press the Delete key when
Marker tool, which lets you specify the nothing is selected to delete the points one by
marker label and type. See “Markers” on
page 867. one; however, Delete Temporary Points
can save time when there are many points.
The Current Point

In any plan view, there may be multiple tem-
porary CAD points created by the user and/or
the program. The Current Point is either the
most recently created or the most recently
accessed temporary CAD point and is used
for a variety of functions, such as:
• As an anchor for snapping objects to a
precise location.
• As the starting point for objects as they
are drawn by entering data. See “Entering Current
Coordinates” on page 142. Point
• As the point about which objects are
rotated. See “Rotating Objects” on page There can only be one Current Point
188.
To delete the Current Point
• To indicate the points at which roof
planes can join. See “To find a roof plane
1. Make sure no other objects are selected
intersection” on page 389.
by clicking the Select Objects but-
When multiple temporary points are on-
ton. You can also press the Esc key to
screen, the current CAD point is highlighted
deselect any selected objects.
so it can be easily identified.
2. Press the Delete key on the keyboard to
delete the Current Point. The temporary
point created prior to this one becomes
the new Current Point.
3. If you continue pressing the Delete key,
temporary points will be deleted in the
reverse order that they were created.
882
Move Point Dialog

The Current Point can be repositioned location can then be used for the start point
relative to itself, another point, or a CAD of a new line or other purpose.
object such as a line using the Move Point
To reposition a temporary point, double-click
dialog.
the point you want to move using the Select
For example, you can locate the point exactly Objects tool. Doing so makes that point
one-quarter the distance along a given line, the Current Point and also opens the Move
or exactly 6 inches from one end. This new Point dialog.
1 2
3
4
1 Begin by specifying how you want to Check Polar (CCW from horz.) to
define the New Location of the point. define the new location’s Distance and
• Absolute Location - Define the new Angle from the previous point instead of
location in X Position (horizontal) and Y using X and Y coordinates.
Position (vertical) coordinates, relative to • From Line End - Define the new loca-
(0,0). tion along the edge of a nearby CAD
• Relative to Itself - Define the new loca- object. This option is enabled only when
tion in X Position and Y Position coordi- the point is near a CAD object and
nates relative to the current location, as applies to the edge nearest to the point’s
though that point was at (0,0). original location.
Check Polar (Counter Clockwise From Check Percentage (%) to specify the
Horizontal) to define the new location’s Along Line value as a percentage of the
Distance and Angle from the original total line or arc length. 0% moves the
point instead of using X and Y coordi- point to the closest end of the nearest
nates. edge, 50% to the midpoint, and 100% to
the other end. Negative numbers and per-
• Relative to Prev. Point - Define the new centages greater than 100 are allowed.
location relative to the point that was the
Current Point prior to this one, as though If the point is near an arc, Along Line is
that point was at (0,0). measured along the curve.
883
Line Tools
If the point is near a box or polyline, Along method is specified or if either Relative
Line is measured along the nearest side just method is used with Polar unchecked.
as it does with an individual line or arc. • Distance and Angle are entered if either
If the point is near an oval or circle, Along Relative method is specified when Polar
Line is measured along an (invisible) axis is checked.
line that the item was originally drawn along. • Along Line - When the From Line End
method is used, specify the distance from
2 The Current Location of the selected the new location of the point along the
point displays here for reference.
nearest edge of the CAD object to the end
3 Specify the new position of the point it was originally closest to. When Per-
here. The information used to define it centage (%) is checked, enter this value
depends on the method chosen to define the as a percentage instead.
New Location.
• X Position and Y Position coordinates 4 Click Num Style to change the units
shown in the New CAD Point dialog.
are entered if the Absolute Location See “Number Style/Angle Style Dialog” on
page 917.
Line Tools
Select CAD> Draw Lines to display To draw continuous lines
the Line Tools.
1. Select CAD> Lines> Draw Line .
If Object Snaps is enabled and Edit
2. Press the Alt key on your keyboard (or
Object Parts is disabled, you can
use the right mouse button) and click
connect the ends of two lines and/or arcs to
and drag to draw a line. You can also
form a single entity called a polyline. See
toggle to alternative mode.
“Polylines” on page 900.
3. Move your cursor to a new location in
Draw Line the drawing area and click once. A new
line is drawn that is connected to the end
There are two methods that you can of the previous line.
use to draw lines is with the Draw
4. To stop, press Esc on your keyboard or
Line tool. The standard method is to select
press two mouse buttons at the same
CAD> Lines> Draw Line, then click and
time.
drag from beginning to end.
An alternative method for drawing multiple Input Line
lines is also available.
CAD lines can also be created using
absolute values entered with the
keyboard by selecting CAD> Lines> Input
884
Line. This method is slower but more precise 2. Select CAD> Lines> Input Line to
than using the mouse and is ideal when the open the New CAD Line dialog.
desired length and angle of each line is
known, such as with property lines. The New CAD Line dialog can also be
opened by double-clicking the Line
Before any line is drawn using this method, a
starting point must be defined. If a starting Tools parent button.
point has not been defined, Chief Architect 3. If necessary, specify the start point.
assumes a starting point of 0,0. 4. Specify the line end point using either
distance and angle or coordinates.
To use the Input Line tool
5. Click OK to close the dialog and draw
the line, or click Next to draw the line
1. Select CAD> Points> Place Point , but remain in the New CAD Line dialog
then click the screen to place a CAD and draw additional lines.
point. This is the Current Point, and is
the start point for the new line. See “The
Current Point” on page 882. Note: If you accidentally click OK instead of
Next and need to continue drawing a polyline
using the New CAD Line dialog, select the
Input Line tool again and continue.
New CAD Line Dialog
1 2
3
4
5
1 Begin by specifying how you want to nates that are relative to the start point, as
define the line End Point Location. though the start point was at (0,0).
• Absolute Location - Define the end • Relative to Start Point: Polar (Counter
point of the new line in X Position (hori- Clockwise from horizontal) - Check this
zontal) and Y Position (vertical) coordi- box to define the end point of the new
nates, relative to (0,0). line by its Distance and Angle from the
• Relative to Start Point - Define the end start point rather than in X and Y coordi-
point of the new line in X and Y coordinates. This is helpful when creating a plot
885
Line Tools
plan. See “Plot Plans and See “Number Style/Angle Style Dialog” on
Plan Footprints” on page 595. page 917.
• Relative to Previous Line - Define the
end point of the new line by its Distance Enter Coordinates
and Angle relative to the end of the last Similar to Input Line, lines can also be
line drawn, as though that line’s end point specified by pressing the Tab key on the
were (0,0). keyboard when a line is in the process of
being drawn. This opens the Enter
2 The X Position (horizontal) and Y Coordinates dialog. See “Entering
Position (vertical) coordinates of the
start point for the new line display here. They Coordinates” on page 142.
can also be changed, if you wish.
Line With Arrow
3 The end point of the new line is defined
here. The information used to define it Create a line or polyline with an arrow
depends on the method chosen to define the on one or both ends by selecting
End Point Location. CAD> Lines> Line With Arrow, then
• X Position (horizontal) and Y Position clicking and dragging on screen. The initial
(vertical) coordinates relative to (0,0) are attributes of the line’s arrow are set in the
entered if the Absolute Location method Arrow Defaults dialog. See “Arrow
is specified. Defaults” on page 840.
• X Position (horizontal) and Y Position As with lines, lines with arrows can
(vertical) coordinates relative to the start connected to form polylines and can be
point are entered if the Relative to Start edited after they are created. See “Editing
Point method is specified. Line Based Objects” on page 147 and “Line
• Distance and Angle from the start point
are entered if the Relative to Start Point: You can also create arcs with arrowheads.
Polar method is specified. See “Arc with Arrow” on page 895.
• Distance and Angle from the start point If a line or arc with arrow is snapped to
are entered if the Relative to Previous another object such as text and that object is
Line method is specified. deleted, the line or arc with arrow will be
deleted, as well.
4 Click Next to create the line without
exiting the dialog so you can input data
for the next line. The start point of the next North Pointer
line is the end point of this line. The North Pointer defines true north
Click Num Style to change the units in floor plan view. If north is not
5 defined, it is assumed to be straight up.
shown in the New CAD Line dialog.
886
If you choose to display line angles when a

Every bearing is defined relative to North Pointer exists, be sure to select the
North, so establish this direction before appropriate format in the CAD Defaults
entering survey information for plot layout or dialog. See “CAD Defaults and Preferences”
for bearings to establish polar direction for on page 875.
the creation or editing of objects such as
points, lines, arcs, etc. • If angles are set to Bearings, they are rel-
ative to the North Pointer.
• If angles are set to show as Degrees, the
Select CAD> North Pointer , then click angle relates to 0 degrees (horizontal to
and drag to draw the pointer, starting at the the right) even if a North Pointer is pres-
tail and dragging toward the point. Once it is ent.
drawn, you can define its exact length and
angle in the Line Specification dialog. See
“Line Specification Dialog” on page 888.
When a North Pointer is placed on one floor
of a plan or into a CAD Detail, a North
Pointer drawn on any other floor
automatically points in the same direction. If
the direction of the North Pointer is reset on
any floor, those on all other floors
automatically reset, as well.
Line angle shown in degrees. This
does not reference the North Pointer.
To enter the angle in bearings
1. First, type N or S (for North or South).

2. Next, type the degrees (followed by d),
then the minutes (followed by '), then
the seconds (followed by ").
3. Finally, type either E or W (for East or
West).
If minutes are zero, you do not need to enter
a value. Following are some examples of
bearings. It is not necessary to capitalize the The same line angle is set to show
letters. Spaces are also optional. Bearings. This shows the angle in
reference to the North Pointer.
• N 20d 30' E
• S 45' W North Pointers can be selected and edited
using their edit handles and the edit toolbar
• N 89d 48' 30" W buttons. For more information, see “Editing
• N 90' E Line Based Objects” on page 147.
887
Line Specification Dialog
Sun Angle Sun Angles can be moved and extended

using the edit handles, but cannot be rotated.
In floor plan view, you can create
multiple Sun Angles. Select CAD>
Create Line Style
Lines> Sun Angle, then click in floor plan
view. For each Sun Angle you place, specify The Line Style Specification dialog
time of year, time of day, and a location allows you to create new line styles
based on longitude and latitude. for use in Chief Architect. Select CAD>
Lines> Create Line Style to access this
If you have created a North Pointer, the Sun
dialog. See “Creating Line Styles” on page
Angle location relative to the model will be
910.
accurate relative it. See “Sun Angles” on
page 776.

Select a line, line with arrow, or text line with
arrow and click the Open Object edit
button to open the Line Specification dialog.
Line Tab
The information on the Line tab of the Line on the Selected Line tabs of various
Specification dialog is similar to that found specification dialogs in the program.
1 3
4
2
1 Lock - These lock options control how Start - Select this option to keep the start of
changing properties on this dialog the line fixed when changing the length,
affect the line. angle, and end.
888
End- Select this option to keep the end of the

2 Specify the Length and Angle of the
line fixed when changing the length, angle, selected line.
and start.
3 Specify the X and Y coordinate for the
Center- Select this option to keep the center Start of the line.
of the line fixed. Changing the length of the
line moves the start and end of the line 4 Specify the X and Y coordinate for the
End of the line.
equally. Changing the angle rotates the line
around the center. The format used here can be changed by
clicking the Num Style button. See “Number
Select Length/Angle to keep the length and
Style/Angle Style Dialog” on page 917.
angle of the line segment fixed. Moving the
start or end moves the other end so the length
and angle of the line do not change.
Line Style Tab

The Line Style tab is found in the CAD line(s) and/or arc(s) that make up an
specification dialogs for many different object.
objects. Here you can control the display of a
4 6
5 7
1 Specify the Layer the selected object 2 Specify the Line Color used to
should be located on. See “Layer Tab” represent the selected object.
on page 125.
889
Check By Layer to use the line color • Select Front Group to display the
assigned to this layer. selected object(s) in front of objects in
the other two groups.
Click the color bar to assign another line
color to the selected object(s) using the Color • Check Move to Front of Group to dis-
Chooser dialog. See “Color Chooser play the selected object(s) in front of
Dialog” on page 727. other objects in the same drawing group.
3 Specify the Line Style used to represent You can also move a selected object to
the selected object. the front of its drawing group by clicking
Check By Layer to use the line style the Move to Front of Group edit
assigned to this layer. button. See “Move to Front of Group” on
Click the drop-down list to select from all page 176.
available line styles. You can use the
keyboard arrow keys to scroll up and down Note: “Move to Front of Group” is an action,
through the options. not an attribute. The box is not checked the
next time the specification dialog is opened.
Click the Library button to access the Line
Styles library and add a line style to the drop-
down list. See “Line Styles” on page 879. 6 Specify the desired Bumping behaviors
for the selected object(s).
Define the Line Weight (in pixels). • Check CAD Stops Move to bump the
4
selected object into other CAD or CAD-
Check By Layer to use the Line Weight based objects as it is moved, and/or to
assigned to the specified layer. push the other object(s).
• Check Wall Stops Move to stop the
Setting the line weight to zero (0) selected object when it bumps into a wall.
makes the line weight print as thin as Walls cannot be pushed by other objects.
possible.
CAD Stops Move and Wall Stops Move are
not available for Primitive objects and only
5 The Drawing Group options control function when Bumping/Pushing is
how the selected object(s) display enabled. See “Bumping/Pushing” on page
relative to other objects. See “Drawing 178.
Groups” on page 176.
• Select Back Group to display the 7 Select the desired Display Options.
These options not available for CAD
selected object(s) behind objects in the
Box- or CAD Circle-based objects.
other two drawing groups.
• Check Show Length to show the length
• Select Default Group to display the
of each line centered above the line.
selected object(s) in front of those in the
Back Group but behind those in the Front • Check Show Angle to show the angle of
Group. each line centered below the line. If the
890
object is an arc, it’s radius will also dis- tical. This is automatically checked when
play. Show Angle is checked.
• Check Reverse Angle to reverse the
The Length and Angle formats are speci- angle by 180 degrees. This is most com-
fied in the CAD Defaults dialog. See monly used when showing the bearing of
“CAD Defaults Dialog” on page 875. a line, since the start point of the lines
• Uncheck All Angles to show only those defines the bearing.
angles that are neither horizontal nor ver-
Arrow Tab
The Arrow Tab is available for any line, arc, Closed polylines and Electrical connections
polyline, or spline that can have an arrow. are examples of objects that cannot have
arrows.
1
2
3
4
1 Check Include Arrow to turn the 3 Select the Fill Color used to fill the
arrows on or off. arrowheads.
2 Select an arrowhead Type from the If multiple arrows are selected and they have
drop-down list. more than one fill color, check No Change to
keep the defined Fill Color for each arrow.
If multiple arrows are selected, and they have
more than one arrowhead type, check No Check Default to use the default fill color.
Change to keep the defined arrow type for
each arrow. 4 Define a Size for the arrow(s).
Check Default to use the default size.
Check Default to set the arrow type to the
default specified on the Arrow tab of the Text
5 Select from the available Options.
Defaults dialog. See “Rich Text Defaults” on
Check Arrow on Both Ends to place a
page 839.
head on both ends of the selected arrow(s).
891
Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes
Check Special Use Arrow to create an arrow attached to a text object. Check either or both
that can be used in layouts and floor plan options if you want this text line with arrow
views to show platform elevations. See to update its position on the text object if the
“Special Use Arrows” on page 862. text object or text line with arrow is moved.
See “Auto Positioning Arrows” on page 861.
Auto Position Tail and Auto Position Head
are available when either end of the line is
Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes

There are five Arc Creation Modes • The end is where the arc stops.
that control how arcs and arc-based • The chord is the straight line between the
objects are drawn. Each mode allows you to start and end point.
specify a different aspect of the arc, such as
its radius or tangent. Select Edit> Arc • A straight line that intersects an arc and is
Creation Modes to select a mode. perpendicular to the radius of the arc at
that point is tangent to the arc.
The program remembers the last creation
mode used between sessions. Once drawn, Free Form Arc
all arcs are edited similarly. See “Editing Arc
Based Objects” on page 150. Free Form Arc mode allows you to
define an arc by clicking and dragging
Before deciding which Arc Tool or Arc along the desired path. There are two
Creation Mode is best for the project at hand, methods for using this mode.
it is helpful to be familiar with the different
components that make up an arc. To draw a Free Form arc
End
Tangent 1. Select CAD> Arcs> Draw Arc ,
then click at the arc’s start point.
2. Move the pointer along the desired
curve while dragging to curve the arc.
Start Chord
3. Release the mouse button at the end
point to complete the arc.
Radius Center
To draw continuous Free Form arcs
• The center of an arc is the point the arc is
drawn about. This mode is useful for making custom
• The radius is the distance from the center revision clouds.
to the arc.
• The start is where the arc begins. 1. Select CAD> Arcs> Draw Arc .
892
2. Press the Alt key on your keyboard and 3. Move the mouse to adjust the curvature
click and drag to draw an arc. of the arc, then click to release the
3. Move your cursor to a new location and mouse and create the arc.
click. A new arc is drawn that is con-
nected to the end point of the previous Start/Tangent/End Arc
arc. Start/Tangent/End Arc mode allows
you to define the start and end points
Center/Radius/End Arc of an arc, its tangent and its curvature.
Center/Radius/End Arc mode allows
you to define the center and radius of To draw a Start/Tangent/End arc
an arc, and then its length.
1. Select CAD> Arcs> Draw Arc ,
To draw a Center/Radius/End arc then click at the start of the arc and drag
a line to define the arc’s tangent at the
1. Select CAD> Arcs> Draw Arc , start point.
then click at the center of the arc and 2. Release the mouse button.
drag to define the radius. 3. Move the mouse to adjust the length and
2. Release the mouse button, then move the curvature of the arc, then click to release
mouse to the end of the arc and click the mouse and create the arc.
again.
Arc About Center
Start/End/On Arc
Arc About Center mode allows you to
Start/End/On Arc mode allows you to draw an arc by defining the center and
define the start and end points of an then the start and end points.
arc, then adjust the curvature.
To draw an Arc About Center
To draw a Start/End/On arc
1. Select CAD> Arcs> Draw Arc ,
1. Select CAD> Arcs> Draw Arc , then click once to define the center
then click at the start point of the arc and point.
drag to the end point. 2. Click and drag from the start point of the
2. Release the mouse button at the end arc to its end point.
point. 3. Or, click and drag an arc. The Current
Point is used as the center. See “The
Current Point” on page 882.
893
Arc Tools
Arc Tools
Select CAD> Arcs to display the
submenu of Arc Tools.
Draw Arc
The method used to draw an arc using
Draw Arc depends on which Arc
Creation Mode is currently active. Once
drawn, an arc can be edited. See “Editing Arc
Input Arc
An arc can be drawn to exact
specifications using the New Arc
dialog.
3. Select either the Start Direction or the
To use the Input Arc feature Chord Direction.
• The Start Direction defines the angle
1. Define a start point by clicking the of the tangent from the start point.
screen using the Place Point tool. • The Chord Direction defines the angle
The “X” defines the current point, which of the arc’s chord from the start point.
is the start point for the new arc.
2. With the start point defined, select
CAD> Arcs> Input Arc to open the
New Arc dialog. Define the arc end-
point, curvature, and direction.
Start Direction = 0 Chord Direction = 45
4. Define the Radius of the arc.

5. Define one of the values in the Exten-
sion group:
Arc Angle - The positive number of
degrees from the center point of the arc
to each of its two endpoints.
894
Arc Length - The length along the arc Arc with Arrow
itself from one endpoint to the other.
You can create an arc with an arrow on
Chord Length - The length of the one or both ends, using the Arc With
straight line from one end to the other. Arrow tool.
Arc Angle = -90° Draw an Arc With Arrow like a regular
arc. When you release the mouse button, the
Chord Length = arc has an arrowhead at the end. The default
282 13/16
attributes of the arrow are determined by the
Radius = 200 settings in the Arrow Defaults dialog. See
“Arrow Defaults” on page 840.
As with regular arcs, arcs with arrows can be
edited after they are created. See “Editing
Arc Length = 314 3/16 Arc Based Objects” on page 150 and “Arc
6. Select the direction the arc bends, either
cw (clockwise) or ccw (counter Continue to draw connected lines and arcs to
clockwise). form a polyline with an arrowhead at the end.
The arrowheads display only at the free ends,
7. Click OK to draw the specified arc.
not where the lines connect. See “Polylines”
Click the Num Style button to display the on page 900.
Number Style / Angle Style dialog. See
Lines with arrowheads can also be created.
“Number Style/Angle Style Dialog” on page
See “Line With Arrow” on page 886.
917.
A line can be converted to an arc or vice

versa by selecting the line, pressing
and holding down the Alt key, then using the
edit handle at either end to bend the line.
Arc Specification Dialog

Select an arc and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Arc Specification
dialog.
895
Arc Specification Dialog
Arc Tab
The settings on the Arc tab are also found on
the Selected Arc tabs for many objects.
1 3
2
4
1 The Lock options control how 2 Arc - These parameters define the arc.
changing properties on this dialog Various controls are disabled depending
affects the arc. on what lock option is used.
• Start - Select this option to keep the start • Center X - Specify the X coordinate for
fixed when changing the arc, chord, or the center of the arc.
end. • Center Y - Specify the Y coordinate for
• End - Select this option to keep the end the center of the arc.
fixed when changing the arc, chord, or • Radius - The distance between the center
start. of the arc and the arc surface.
• Center - Select this option to keep the
center of the arc fixed when changing the
arc.
• Arc - Select this option to keep the arc
fixed when changing the arc location.
• Chord - Select this option to keep the arc
chord fixed when changing the arc • Start Angle - Specify the angle that a line
radius. drawn from the arc center to the arc start
makes with a horizontal line to the right.
896
• End Angle - Specify the angle that a line • End X - Specify the X coordinate for the
drawn from the arc center to the arc end end of the arc.
makes with a horizontal line to the right. • End Y - Specify the Y coordinate for the
• Arc Angle - The angle between the cen- end of the arc.
ter of the arc and each end. • End Direction - Specify the angle of a
tangent line at the end of the arc.
5 Chord - These values define the chord

of the arc.
• Chord Length - The straight line dis-
tance between the two ends of the arc.
• Arc Length - The length of the arc along

the curve.
• Chord Angle - Specify the angle of the

chord (the imaginary straight line going
from the start of the arc to the end of the
3 Start - These values define the start arc).
point of the arc.
• Start X - Specify the X coordinate for the Line Style Tab
beginning of the arc.
• Start Y - Specify the Y coordinate for the
beginning of the arc.
• Start Direction - Specify the angle of a Arrow Tab
tangent line at the start of the arc.
For information about the Arrow tab, see
End - These values define the end point
4 “Arrow Tab” on page 891.
of the arc.
Circle Tools
Select CAD> Circles to access the Draw a Circle by dragging across the
Circle Tools. diameter. If a small circle is needed,
draw a larger circle and then resize it.
897
CAD Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification Dialog
Use the Circle Specification dialog to Ovals

accurately define size, position and other
attributes. See “CAD Circle/Oval/Ellipse An Oval is a four-arc approximation of
Specification Dialog” on page 898. an ellipse. To draw an oval, select
CAD> Circles> Oval, then click and drag.
Draw Circle About Center Use the CAD Oval Specification dialog to
accurately set the length and width of the
Select CAD> Circles> Circle About
oval and other attributes.
Center to create a circle by dragging
the radius out from the center point.
Ellipses
To draw a Circle About Center An Ellipse is a set of points with a
constant combined distance from two
1. Click the Circle About Center tool. points called foci. An ellipse looks like a
stretched circle, or a circular surface viewed
2. Click the screen to define the center.
at an angle.
3. Drag the radial distance and release the
mouse button. If you are using Object To draw an ellipse, select CAD> Circles>
Snaps , both the center point and the Ellipse and drag at an angle to define its
radius snap to any appropriate nearby maximum height and width.
CAD object, intersection or point. Use the CAD Ellipse Specification dialog to
accurately set the length and width of the
ellipse and other attributes.
CAD Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification Dialog

Select a circle, oval or ellipse and click the The CAD Circle, Oval and Ellipse
Specification dialogs are almost exactly the
Open Object edit button to open the
CAD Circle, Oval or Ellipse Specification
same. The Oval and Ellipse Specification
dialog. dialogs have an additional setting for Angle
on the General tab.
898
General Tab
1 Specify the Position of the circle, oval Line Style Tab

or ellipse.
• Specify the X Position and Y Position of “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
the center of the circle, oval or ellipse.
• Specify an oval or ellipse’s Angle. Fill Style Tab
2 Specify the Size of the circle, oval or For information about the Fill Style tab, see
ellipse. “Fill Style Tab” on page 902.
Specify the Length and Width of an oval or
ellipse, or the Diameter and Radius of a
circle.
899
Polylines
Polylines
A polyline consists of two or more create a polyline by drawing lines and/or arcs
line and/or arc segments that are end-to-end, allowing the end of each new
attached at their endpoints. Select CAD> object to snap to the end of the previous one.
Boxes & Framing> Rectangular Polyline,
If one end of the polyline is connected to the
then click and drag from corner to corner to
other, it becomes a closed polyline. Closed
create a rectangular-shaped, closed polyline.
polylines can be assigned a fill pattern and/or
When Object Snaps is enabled and Edit turned into special 3D objects such as slabs
or countertops that display in 3D views.
Object Parts is disabled, you can also
Closed Polylines Open Polylines
Lines and polylines can be distinguished by In contrast, the left edge of the polyline on
the edit handles that display when you select the right is part of the larger polyline unit.
each. A line displays an edit handle at each
end and one in the middle. If more than three
edit handles display, the object is a polyline.
Line
Polyline
Unconnected Connected
Polylines can be copied, moved, reshaped, or

Lines that appear connected to a polyline resized as a single unit. Additionally, the
may prove to be unconnected when selected. individual segments can be edited. See “Edit
Object Parts” on page 145.
For example, the two polylines in the
following image appear identical until their Once created, polylines can be edited in a
left edges are selected. The polyline on the variety of ways. See “Editing Open Polyline
left reveals that its left edge is not attached. Based Objects” on page 155 and “Editing
900

160.
Polyline Specification Dialog

Select an open polyline, closed polyline, or New Segment Angle - Specify the angle
spline and click the Open Object edit between line segments that are used to draw
button to open the Polyline Specification the spline. Specifying a smaller angle makes
dialog. the spline smoother. Specify a larger angle to
Polyline Tab
Selected Line Tab
polyline’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and The Selected Line tab is available when the
the Volume of a closed polyline. selected edge of the polyline is a line as
page 145.
Moving the Start of a line segment moves the
end of the previous connected line, if there is
If the polyline is not closed, the Area and page 888.
Volume are described as “Not closed”. The
Volume of a 2D polyline will always be 0, Selected Arc Tab
even if it is closed.
selected segment of the polyline is an arc as
Spline Tab opposed to a line.
The Spline tab has a single option and is only This tab is similar to the Arc tab of the Arc
available when the selected object is a spline. Specification dialog. See “Arc Tab” on page
See “Splines” on page 908. 896.
Line Style Tab

This tab is similar to the Line Style tab in the
Line Specification dialog. See “Line Style
Tab” on page 889.
901
Polyline Specification Dialog
Fill Style Tab

Fill patterns can be applied to boxes, circles, The information on the Fill Style tab for
closed polylines and a variety of architectural polylines is similar to that for many other
objects. objects in the program.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Fill Pattern - Choose a fill pattern from 3 Angle - Define the angle of the selected
the drop-down list. If the Custom fill pattern.
pattern is selected, the custom pattern
options become available below. 4 Set the Line Weight for the selected fill
pattern.
The options that follow are disabled until you
select a pattern other than None from the Fill 5 Check Transparent Pattern Fill to
make the fill pattern transparent. When
Pattern drop-down list.
you check this option, any objects behind the
2 Spacing - Define the spacing for the fill pattern are visible through it.
selected fill pattern. Hatch spacing set
Fill Pattern Color - Select a line color
at 12" matches grid/reference spacing set at 6
or fill color if a solid fill is specified.
12".
902
This overrides the layer color. See “Color file elsewhere on your computer. The
Chooser Dialog” on page 727. selected .pat file’s path name displays
and can be edited in the text field.
7 Select Use Background Color to use • Select a Pattern from the drop-down list.
the background color for solid fills or
patterns. This list includes all custom patterns
available in the selected file.
8 Check Use Layer Color to have the fill • Specify a Scale for the selected pattern.
pattern use the layer color for the
pattern lines. If it is a solid fill, the fill color
is the same as the layer’s color. Arrow Tab
The Arrow tab is available for most open
9 Custom Pattern File and Name - This polylines and splines and is similar to the
section is enabled when Custom is
selected from the Fill Pattern list. Arrow tab of the Line Specification dialog.
See “Arrow Tab” on page 891.
• Click the Browse button to open the
Custom Pattern File dialog and select a The Arrow tab is not available for closed
pattern (.pat) file from the Chief Archi- polylines or for Electrical Connections.
tect Patterns directory or a custom .pat
Box Tools
Select CAD> Boxes & Framing to the radius to a vertex or a side. Select your
access the Box Tools. options in the New Regular Polygon dialog
and click OK. Click in your plan to place the
Rectangular Polyline polygon.
A Rectangular Polyline can be drawn

in either of two ways:
• Click in the drawing area to place a 24” x
24” square polyline at that location.
• Click and drag from corner to corner to
draw a rectangle of any size.
Once created, a rectangular polyline can be
edited into any shape or converted to a 3D
object. See “Editing Closed-Polyline Based
Box
Objects” on page 160. Draw a 2D box from the midpoint of
one side to the midpoint of the opposite
Regular Polygon side. The sides of a box can be resized, but a
box always has four 90 degree corners.
You can draw a regular polygon based
on the length of a side, or the length of
903
Box Tools
Boxes have some unique editing behaviors. “Detailing Cross Section/Elevation Views”
See “Editing Box-Based Objects” on page on page 755.
164.
Cross Box
Framing
The Cross Box behaves the same as a
Select CAD> Boxes & Framing> box. The only difference is the cross
Framing to draw a 1-1/2" (38 mm) that is automatically drawn whenever this
wide, 9 1/2” deep generic framing member tool is used. Use the Cross Box to add 2D
of any length. As it is drawn, a framing framing details to cross section views.
member looks like a line until the mouse
button is released.
Unlike other Box Tools, the Framing

tool creates 3D objects. Specially designed to
represent general framing materials, Framing
boxes can be seen in 3D views and resized as
needed using the edit handles or Framing
Specification dialog. See “Editing Framing” Cross boxes are automatically maintained at
on page 487. ends of framing members cut by a cross
section cutting plane. They automatically
Objects drawn with this tool are listed in the update when the cross section is first created
Framing category of the Materials List. To
and whenever you click Fill Window .
specifically draw rafters or joists, instead use
the Rafter or Joist tool and drag to You may want to create and resize one cross
draw a framing member. box for each framing member size used, such
as 2x4, 2x6, 2x12, then copy and paste the
The Trim Objects and Extend original as needed. It is easiest to resize using
CAD Box Specification dialog.
Objects tools work well to adjust the
framing members to the correct length, and
Insulation
to cut their ends off at an angle to fit against
the trimming members. See “Trim and Use the Insulation tool to draw
Extend” on page 198. insulation in cross section details. Drag
the length of the insulated area, then select
Wall Bridging the object and use the edit handles to move or
resize it. It may be easier to use the CAD Box
Select CAD> Boxes & Framing Wall Specification dialog to define the insulation
Bridging to draw wall bridging in a width and length exactly.
wall detail. For more information, see
904
Drag to Result Select

create to edit
CAD Box Specification Dialog

Select a CAD box, a framing box, a wall click the Open Object edit button to
bridging box, a cross box, or insulation and open the CAD Box Specification dialog.
General Tab
1 Specify a Box Style. 2 Define the Position of the box.
Select Normal to specify a normal box, Specify the X Position and Y Position of the
Cross to specify a cross box, or Insulation to center of the box.
specify an insulation box.
Specify the Angle of the box.
905
Revision Clouds
3 Define the Size of the box by Line Style Tab

specifying its Height and Width.
“Line Tab” on page 888.
To find out which direction is the height
and which is the width of a square box,
select it. The triangular rotate handle is near-
Fill Style Tab
est the side you originally dragged from when For information about the Fill Style tab, see
creating the box. Changing the height
changes the length of this side.
Revision Clouds
The Revision Cloud tool allows you when it is selected. When it is not selected,
to draw a closed polyline with a series only the arcs along its perimeter are visible.
of arcs or bulges displaying along each edge.
Select CAD> Revision Cloud, then click
and drag to draw a rectangular shape with
edges that display a series of arcs.
You can also create Revision Clouds around
one or more selected objects in floor plan
view by clicking the Revision Cloud(s)
Around Objects edit button. A separate Not Selected Selected
revision cloud will be drawn around each
Only arcs are visible Edges are also visible
selected object.
The arcs along a Revision Cloud are not its
A Revision Cloud can also be created by
actual edges and cannot be individually
converting a closed CAD polyline. See
selected, although you can control their size
“Convert Polyline Dialog” on page 206.
and frequency. See “Revision Cloud
Once created, Revision Clouds can be Specification Dialog” on page 907.
selected and edited much like other closed-
If you wish to individually edit the arcs,
polyline based objects. See “Editing Closed-
convert it to a plain polyline. See “Convert to
Plain Polyline” on page 207.
Unlike other closed polylines, however, the
edges of a Revision Cloud can only be seen
906
Revision Cloud Specification Dialog

Select one or more Revision Clouds and The settings in the Revision Cloud Defaults
click the Open Object edit button to dialog are similar to those in the Revision
Cloud Specification dialog, but determine
open the Revision Cloud Specification
dialog. the initial settings of revision clouds as they
are drawn. See “CAD Defaults and
Cloud Tab
1 Specify how the arcs on the selected • Select Average Arc Length to specify
revision cloud(s) are sized. the selected cloud’s average arc length,
• Select Automatic Arc Lengths to have which is measured along its chord.
the program automatically size the • Select Number of Arcs, then specify thte
selected cloud’s arcs. number of arcs on the selected cloud.
907
Splines
2 Use the slider bars or text fields to one. Similarly, moving the End of a line
specify the degree to which the selected segment moves move the start of the next
cloud’s arcs vary in size. connected line, if there is one.
• Specify the Length Diversity, which is This tab is similar to the Line tab of the Line
the maximum amount that a given arc’s Specification dialog. See “Line Tab” on
length can deviate from the Average Arc page 888.
Length, specified above.
• Specify the Minimum Bulge, which is Selected Arc Tab
the smallest amount that a given arc can
extend out from its center. 0% allows arcs
selected segment of the cloud edge is an arc
with a radius of 0, essentially flat lines;
as opposed to a line.
50% allows 180° arcs, or half-circles;
100% only allows arcs of about 300°. This tab is similar to the Arc tab of the Arc
• Specify the Maximum Bulge, which is Specification dialog. See “Arc Tab” on page
the largest amount that a given arc can 896.
extend out from its center. 100% allows
arcs of about 300°;50% allows 180° arcs; Line Style Tab
0% only allows arcs with a radius of 0. This tab is similar to the Line Style tab in the
Line Specification dialog. See “Line Style
Selected Line Tab Tab” on page 889.
selected cloud edge is a line as opposed to an Fill Style Tab
arc. See “Selected Edge” on page 145. This tab is similar to the Fill Style tab in the
Moving the Start of a line segment moves the Polyline Specification dialog. See “Fill
end of the previous connected line, if there is Style Tab” on page 902.
Splines
A Spline is a curve that passes To use the Spline tool
smoothly through a set of points.
Splines are typically used in situations where 1. Select CAD> Spline .
there is an irregular curve. A contour line is a
typical example. Splines are useful wherever 2. Draw the first spline segment just as you
a free-flowing curve is needed. would a line. A single spline segment
looks identical to a line. You may need
Once created, splines can be selected and
edited. See “Editing Spline Based Objects” to turn off Angle Snaps to draw
on page 166 and “Polyline Specification freely.
908
Result
As drawn
6. Notice as additional segments are drawn

3. Draw the second segment from the end that the spline changes the curvature of
of the first at a different angle. Object the previous segment to create a contin-
Snaps should be on to assure that uous curve between the last three points.
new segments attach correctly to the
ends of previous segments. As drawn
As drawn
Result
7. Form a closed spline by drawing a seg-

Result ment between its two free ends.
4. As soon as two straight spline segments

connect end-to-end, the straight seg- Draw segment to close
ments become a curve that passes
through the endpoints defined by the
original segments. Each point is called a
vertex.
8. The result is an irregular curve that
5. Draw a few more segments, connecting flows smoothly through each vertex.
each to the free end of a previously
drawn segment.
Result
Displaying CAD Objects

As with architectural objects, the display of Display Options dialog. See “Layer Display
CAD objects is controlled in the Layer Options Dialog” on page 121.
909
Creating Line Styles
CAD objects can be drawn in floor plan

view, CAD Details, layout, and cross section/ Changing the Current CAD Layer
elevation views. They are 2D objects only, affects subsequently-drawn objects, but
though, so they cannot be seen in camera existing CAD objects are unaffected by the
change. As a result, you can efficiently pro-
views or overviews. See “Architectural vs duce CAD drawings on multiple layers
CAD Objects” on page 131.
Show Length and Angle
Current CAD Layer
You can specify that line segment length and
When drawn, CAD objects are automatically angle display along a CAD line, CAD arc, or
placed on the Current CAD Layer. In floor along each segment of a CAD polyline. If the
plan and cross section/elevation views, the segment is an arc, its radius also displays.
name of this layer displays on the right side See “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
of the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen.
See “The Status Bar” on page 34. You can specify the size and format of the
length and angle in the CAD Defaults dialog.
Initially, the Default CAD Layer is set as the See “CAD Defaults Dialog” on page 875.
Current CAD Layer, but this can be changed
at any time in the CAD Defaults dialog. See Line Styles
“CAD Defaults Dialog” on page 875.
A selection of line styles is available in the
The Current CAD Layer can also be changed
Library Browser which you can apply to both
in the Select CAD Layer and Layer Display
CAD and architectural objects. See
Options dialogs. See “Select Layer Dialog”
“Libraries” on page 682.
on page 124 and “Layer Display Options
Dialog” on page 121. If you do not see a line style that meets your
needs, you can create your own custom line
styles. See “Creating Line Styles” on page
910.
Creating Line Styles

The Line Style Specification dialog clicking on it and selecting Open from the
allows you to create new line styles contextual menu. See “Using the Contextual
for use in Chief Architect. To open this Menus” on page 684.
dialog, select CAD> Lines> Create Line
Style or right-click on an unlocked library
Note: Line styles created using the Line Style
folder and select New> Line Style. See Specification dialog are not retained in views
“Adding to the Library” on page 700. exported to .dxf/.dwg. See “Exporting 2D
DXF/DWG Files” on page 962.
You can also edit an existing line style by
copying it to a User library, then right-
910
Line Style Specification Dialog
1
2
4 3
1 Line Style Name - Type the name of • Click on the name of a component in the
your custom line style in the text field. list to select it. When Highlight Selec-
This is the name that will be listed in the tion is checked, a red rectangle displays
Library Browser. around this component in the preview
diagram.
2 A preview diagram of the line style • Click the Up arrow to move the selected
displays here. You can click on a line
style component in the preview to select it. component up one position in the list and
one position to the left in the preview dia-
3 These checkboxes allow you to control gram.
the display of the preview diagram:
• Click the Down arrow to move the
• Check Highlight Selection to display a selected component down one position in
red rectangle around the currently the list and one position to the right in the
selected line style component. preview diagram.
• Check Mark Repeating Segments to • Click the Remove button to remove the
display vertical dashed lines indicating selected component from the line style.
the division between the last component
of one segment and the first component 5 The Insert options allow you to add
of the next in the preview diagram. new components to your line style.
• Click the Dash button to add a line seg-
4 A list of the line style’s individual ment to the line style.
components displays here.
911
CAD Blocks
• Click the Dot button to add a single point • Specify the Length of a selected Dash or
to the line style. Text component. If the Length exceeds
• Click the Text button to add a section of that required by a Text component, empty
text to the line style. space is added on each side of the text.
• Select the Insert Before radio button to • Specify the Spacing of the selected com-
add the new component before the component by defining the length of an empty
ponent that is currently selected. space to the component’s right.
• Select the Insert After radio button to • Type the Text of a selected Text compo-
add the new component after the cur- nent.
rently selected component. • Specify the Text Height of a selected
Text component. Each text component
6 Control the appearance of the selected can have its own height.
component.
CAD Blocks
A CAD block is a group of 2D CAD objects, CAD blocks can also be added to the library
text objects, and/or other CAD blocks that as well as exploded into their individual
have been grouped together so that they parts.
behave as a single object.
A CAD block can also include dimension Make CAD Block
lines, but only if the object(s) that the To create a CAD block, select
dimensions reference are included in the multiple CADobjects, text objects,
block. and/or CAD blocks, then click the Make
With the exception of some CAD-based CAD Block edit button. See “Marquee
architectural objects such as custom Select” on page 146.
countertops and framing, CAD blocks cannot
contain architectural objects. Such objects Explode CAD Block
can instead be blocked as architectural When a block is selected, click the
blocks. See “Architectural Blocks” on page Explode CAD Block edit button to
676. separate it into its individual components.
A CAD block contained within a larger CAD You cannot explode a block by using a
block is referred to as “nested”. marquee to select it; you must click on it to
select it.
CAD blocks can be selected, moved, rotated
and resized much like CAD boxes. See If a CAD block includes nested blocks, these
“Editing Box-Based Objects” on page 164. nested blocks are not exploded.
912
When a selected CAD block is exploded, its

definition is not affected: only the instance.
See “CAD Block Management” on page 913.
If a block has been resized so that its original
aspect ratio is altered, it cannot be exploded.
See “CAD Block Specification Dialog” on
page 915.
If you do not see an existing CAD block that
Add to Library suits your needs, you can create your own.
Like a variety of other objects, CAD For best results, follow these guidelines:
blocks can be added to the library for • The CAD block should have the same X
future use in other files. See “Adding to the and Y dimensions as the 3D symbol. An
Library” on page 700. incorrect CAD block size will result in
inconsistent placement of your symbol.
Many manufacturers provide CAD details in
DXF/DWG format. These drawings can be • It is usually best to build your CAD block
imported, blocked and added to the library. with solid filled properties. This keeps
See “Adding to the Library” on page 700. background patterns and other objects
from showing through. See “Fill Style
Tab” on page 902.
You can organize your custom CAD
blocks in the Library Browser by creat- • So that your custom CAD block can be
ing library folders. easily identified, it is best to give it a
name in the CAD Block Specification
Custom 2D Symbols dialog. See “General Tab” on page 915.
In floor plan view, 3D symbols are
represented by 2D CAD blocks. You can Blocks can also be imported with the
specify the CAD block used by a symbol in Import Drawing Wizard, but nested
blocks cannot be used in the symbol develop-
its Symbol Specification dialog. See “2D ment process. See “Importing & Exporting”
Block Tab” on page 978. on page 952.
CAD Block Management

A list of all CAD blocks present in the • The block definition, which holds infor-
current plan or layout file can be mation about the items included the
accessed by selecting CAD> CAD Block block.
Management.. • The block instance, which holds informa-
There are two aspects to each CAD block: tion about its position, orientation, size,
913
CAD Block Management
aspect ratio and other settings specific to Copying a block instance to a completely
an individual block placed in a file. different file also copies the block definition
to that file.
All instances of a given CAD block can have
unique positions and sizes; however, the If all instances of a CAD block are deleted
block definition that they share is the same from a file, its definition will remain saved
regardless of the floor, CAD Detail, view, or with the file. To control file size, it is a good
layout page that they display in. idea to regularly purge files of unused CAD
blocks.
2
3
4
5
1 An alphabetical list of all CAD block place a new instance of the block into that
definitions present in the current file view. Not available for blocks marked for
displays here. CAD blocks that currently deletion.
have no instance anywhere in the file may
also be included. 3 Select a block from the list, then click
Rename to specify a new name for it.
• When you click on a CAD block in the Not available for blocks marked for deletion.
list to select it, it is highlighted in blue.
• CAD blocks with at least one instance in 4 Press the Purge button to mark all
unused block definitions for deletion.
the current file are marked “In Use”. Click OK to delete these blocks.
• Unused CAD blocks with no instances in
the current file have nothing after their 5 Select an unused block from the list and
click the Delete button to mark it as
names.
“Deleted”. Select a block marked “Deleted”
• Unused CAD blocks selected for Dele- and click this button (now, Undelete) to clear
tion are marked “DELETED”. it of its “Deleted” status. Blocks are deleted
when you click OK.
2 Select any block in the list, click Insert,
then click in floor plan view, a CAD It is not possible to delete all CAD block
Detail, or in a cross section/elevation view to definitions from a plan file. Even if no
914
objects are present in the plan, the CAD symbols are saved with the plan and cannot
blocks associated with default electrical be removed.
CAD Block Specification Dialog

General Tab
2 4
1 Name and Copyright - Specify the export the block via DXF/DWG, and is also
name for the CAD block using 255 imported with DXF/DWG block definitions.
characters or less. If the CAD block has a
Unlike other settings in this dialog, which
copyright, that information displays here.
affect only the selected instance of the block,
This name is included in the CAD Block changing the name modifies the actual block
Management dialog and is used when you definition. See “CAD Block Management”
on page 913.
915
CAD Block Specification Dialog
If you use a name that is in use by

4 Line/Fill Style - Specify how line and
fill styles are applied to the selected
another CAD block, the definition of the CAD block instance.
other block is overwritten and the instances
of that block are updated to match the current • Select By Block to use the line and fill
definition. styles specified for the selected CAD
block instance.
2 Specify the Position and Angle of the • Select By Object to use the line and fill
selected CAD block instance. styles of the individual objects in the
• Specify the X and Y Positions, which are selected CAD block instance.
the x and y coordinates of the center of New block instances use to By Block unless
the CAD block instance. Use ‘By Object’ when creating new CAD
• Specify the Angle at which the CAD blocks is checked in the Preferences dialog.
block instance is placed. See “CAD Panel” on page 89.
3 Check Retain Aspect Ratio of x to Line Style Tab

retain the existing ratio between the
height and width of the selected block Many of the settings on the Line Style tab are
instance. This only affects changes made to only available if By Block is selected on the
the Height or Width values in the dialog and General Tab of this dialog. For information
does not affect manual editing using edit about using the Line Style Tab, see “Line
handles. If a block is resized so that it loses Style Tab” on page 889.
its original aspect ratio, you explode it.
• Specify the Height of the selected CAD Fill Style Tab
block instance.
The settings on the Fill Style tab are only
• Specify the Height Factor, which is the available if By Block is selected on the
ratio of the current height of the CAD General Tab of this dialog.
block instance to its original height.
If Always use “By Object” for CAD block
• Specify the Width of the selected CAD
fill style is checked in the Preferences
block instance.
dialog, the settings on this tab are not used.
• Specify the Width Factor, which is the See “CAD Panel” on page 89.
ratio of the current width of the CAD
For information about the settings on this
block instance to its original width.
Note: If the Height and Width Factors are set

to different values, the selected CAD block
instance cannot be exploded and ovals and
arcs within it may appear distorted.
916
Number Style/Angle Style Dialog

At the bottom of many dialogs, you can click The settings in this dialog control the format
the Num Style/Angle Style button to open distances, coordinates and angles of angles in
the Number Style/Angle Style dialog. these dialogs. They also control the format of
angles and in the Status Bar. See “The Status
Bar” on page 34.
When Imperial units are used, fractional Angles may be entered as bearings, decimal
inches with denominators of 2, 4, 8 and 16 degrees, or degrees, minutes and seconds.
are allowed. Millimeters are used for all
metric distances.
CAD Details
CAD Details are special view windows for Each plan file can store any number of CAD
drawing, saving and organizing any 2D Details. CAD Details saved with the current
drawings associated with the current plan, plan are listed in the Project Browser and
such as plot layouts and cross section details. the CAD Detail Management dialog.
Like other views, CAD Details are saved
with the plan they are created in and can be CAD Detail Management Dialog
sent to the printer or layout sheet. Select CAD> CAD Detail Manage-
2D CAD information can also be copied into ment to open the CAD Detail
or out of a CAD Detail window using the Management dialog. An alphabetical list of
group select and copy functions. all CAD Details saved with the current plan
displays on the left side of the dialog.
917
Plot Plans and Plan Footprints
Special CAD Details

Some CAD details are created automatically
by the program. If any roof or floor trusses
are present in your plan, the program creates
a Truss Detail that includes an editable
diagram of each truss type used and a count
of each. See “Truss Details” on page 499.
When walls are framed using the Build
Framing dialog, a Wall Detail is created for
each wall. These details are listed in the
Click New to open the Create New CAD Project Browser and are also accessible by
Detail dialog. selecting a wall and clicking the Open Wall
Detail edit button. Wall Details are not
listed in the CAD Detail Management
dialog. See “The Library Browser” on page
683.
CAD Detail from View

Type a short, descriptive name for the CAD CAD> CAD Detail from View
Detail, click OK, and a new CAD Detail converts the current view into a 2D
window opens. CAD drawing composed of editable CAD
objects.
To rename an existing CAD Detail, click
Rename. In the Create New CAD Detail
Note: CAD Details created using CAD Detail
dialog, type a new name for the selected from View are not dynamically linked to the
CAD Detail and click OK. original view. Changes made to the view do
To open an existing CAD Detail, click its not update in the detail or vice versa.
name to select it, then click Open.
CAD Detail from View is available in
To delete an existing CAD Detail, click its
all line-based views, including floor plan
name in the alphabetized list to select it, then
view and any 3D view using the Vector View
click Delete.
rendering technique. See “Rendered and
Vector Views” on page 742.
Plot Plans and Plan Footprints

Using the CAD Tools and conventional
survey information, you can create an
918
accurate plot plan in floor plan view or a 2. Select CAD> Plan Footprint . The
CAD Detail. See “Creating a Plot Plan” on program creates a new CAD Detail with
page 125 of the User’s Guide. the footprint of the current floor.
A plot plan can be sent to layout and By default, this new CAD Detail uses the
included in working drawings. See “Floor Plan Footprint layer set. You can control
Plan Views and CAD Details” on page 1022. what displays in the footprint using the Layer
A plot plan can also be converted into a Display Options dialog. See “Layer Sets” on
terrain perimeter, allowing you to add page 118.
elevation data and accurately position You can also control the appearance of a Plan
buildings for 3D modeling of home and lot. Footprint in the Plan Footprint
Specification dialog. See “Plan Footprint
Plan Footprint Specification Dialog” on page 920.
Select CAD> Plan Footprint to create
a CAD object representing the building To insert a footprint in a CAD Detail
footprint in a CAD Detail window. Once the
Plan Footprint appears in the detail window, 1. Open the CAD Detail in which you want
you can control what information displays. to insert a Plan Footprint.
2. Select CAD> Plan Footprint .

To create a Plan Footprint
3. Select the floor to use from the drop-
1. Open the floor plan view of the plan you down list and click OK.
want to create a plan footprint from.
DN
DECK
15'8 x 9'7
30" GE
KITCHEN
electric
cooktop
12'4 x 10'5
4. The floor plan appears in the CAD
DINING Allow 39"
12'4 x 13'5
for ref.
Double
electric
oven
Detail window. Select Window> Fill
LIVING
15'6 x 25'2
HALL
NOOK
Window to center the footprint on
2'6 x 6'5
10'3 x 9'5
UP
screen. The footprint can be rotated and
DN
moved anywhere in the window.
HALL
4'8 x 31'10
CLOSET
2'2 x 7'2
two vents, min 50 sq in ea., FAMILY
max 5 in off floor
13'1 x 19'1
solid core door, 1

hr rating
UP
5/8 inch, wallboard on walls

& ceiling between house and
garage
GARAGE
22'7 x 27'5
BATH
6'6 x 5'6
PORCH
15'7 x 5'6
DN
Floor Plan View
919
Plan Footprint Specification Dialog
If you edit a plan using Reverse Plan or

DN
the Edit Area tools, the plan footprint
updates automatically.

When you create a plan footprint by selecting
CAD> Plan Footprint while in floor
UP
plan view, the default layer set for plan

DN
footprints is used. See “Layer Set Defaults

UP
When a plan footprint is created by selecting

CAD> Plan Footprint while in a CAD
Detail, the current layer set is used. See
DN
“Layer Set Management” on page 119.
Plan Footprint Regardless of the layer set in use, the

appearance of objects in a Plan Footprint is
If the model consists of several buildings, a controlled in the Layer Display Options
footprint is created for each building. dialog. Individual objects are on the same
Moving one footprint automatically adjusts layer as in floor plan view, while the entire
all the footprints in order to maintain their Plan Footprint is on the Default CAD Layer.
relationship. See “Layer Display Options Dialog” on page
121.
Plan Footprint Specification Dialog

Select a plan footprint and click the Open Footprint Specification dialog for the
Object edit button to open the Plan selected plan footprint.
920
General Tab
1
2
3
4
1 Select the Floor Used for Plan If you uncheck this box, you lose control of
Footprint from the drop-down list. what displays and the program makes the
determination for you.
2 Check Display Footprint Polyline to
draw a polyline around the perimeter of
the footprint. This polyline may not be Polyline Tab
visible if you also have Display Plan Details For information about the Polyline tab, see
checked.This option must be chosen if you “Polyline Tab” on page 901.
want to use a fill pattern or specify a line
style. Line Style Tab
3 Check Display Plan Details to show For information about using the Line Style
the walls and other details as they tab, see “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
appear in floor plan view.
4 Check Use Current Layer Set to Fill Style Tab

Display to to control what displays in
For more information about the Fill Style tab,
the footprint using Layer Display Options.
see “Fill Style Tab” on page 902.
You can choose an alternate layer set from
the drop-down list on the toolbar at any time.
921
Chapter 32:
Project
Management
The tools described in this chapter allow you Chapter Contents

to track the time you spend on plans, • Time Tracker
eliminating guesswork and making billing • Time Log Dialog
easier. • Project Browser
Others let you draw plans with ease and • Project Information
flexibility, run checks on plans so you can be • House Wizard
more confident that they are free of code • Plan Check
violations and common drawing errors, and • IRC Checklist
consider loan calculations for your projects. • Loan Calculator
Time Tracker
The Time Tracker tool monitors the for the current plan or layout file. This
time spent on each Chief Architect creates a new entry. Opening a plan or layout
file. You can enter start and end times each automatically starts a time log if you set your
time a plan or layout file is opened and preferences to do so. See “Time Tracker
closed, or allow it to run automtically. The Panel” on page 87.
Time Tracker keeps a log that can be
Select Tools> Time Tracker> Stop
amended and edited as needed.
Time Logging to stop logging time
Select Tools> Time Tracker> Start for the current file. This button is only
Time Logging to begin logging time
922
available when an entry is currently being You can control how Time Tracker
recorded. functions in the Preferences dialog. See
Select Tools> Time Tracker> View “Time Tracker Panel” on page 87.
Time Log to open the Time Log
dialog and view the time log for the current Time Tracker logs times for each plan
file. and layout file separately, even if they
have the same project name or are saved in
Time Tracker information is stored with each
the same directory on your computer.
file and can be printed or exported from the
Time Log dialog.
Time Log Dialog

The Time Log dialog displays all Select Tools> Time Tracker> View Time
entries logged for the current plan or Log to open the Time Log dialog.
layout file. Entries can be added, deleted,
edited, exported, and printed.
3
4
5
923
Project Browser
1 A summary of the entries displays here. Click Print to open the Print dialog and print
Select an entry in the Start Time the log.
column and edit the details in the lower
portion of the dialog. 3 Select an entry and edit the Start and
End times. Highlight the digits and
Click Add to add a new entry using the enter new values or use the arrow keys on the
2
current time. keyboard. You can also click the drop-down
list and select a date from the calendar. The
Select an entry and click Delete to remove it.
start time must predate the end time.
Click Export to open the Select Log Export
The Duration of the selected entry and the
File dialog and specify a name and
Total Duration display at right.
destination for the exported file. Time log
information can be exported as either a text
4 Initially the User information is derived
(.txt) or Comma Separated Values (.csv) file. from the Chief Architect license
registration information. By default, the User
information prefills from the Default User
If you have multiple plan and/or layout
files associated with a particular project Name on the Time Tracker panel of the
and wish to bill them together, export your Preferences dialog. You can select an entry
Time Logs to another application and then- and change the User here.
combine them.
5 Select an entry and add Notes.
Project Browser
The Project Browser is a convenient To open the Library and Project Browser
way access to all the floors, cameras, directly, select Tools> Project Browser .
elevations, CAD Details, Wall Details, and You can also use one of the many methods to
Materials Lists saved with the current plan. open the Library Browser, then simply click
The Project Browser is shared with the the Project Browser tab. See “The Library
Library Browser in the Library and Project Browser” on page 683.
Browser window. You can dock it to the top,
bottom, or sides of the Chief Architect You can open files listed in the Library and
window or let it float freely. Project Browser by double-clicking them.
You can rename some files by right-clicking
them and selecting Rename.
924
CAD detail name to rename it. See “CAD

2 Any Cameras saved with the plan are

1 listed here by floor, as are overviews.
2 Save or rename 3D views by selecting and
opening the camera object in floor plan view.
3 See “Saving & Printing 3D Views” on page
767.
3 Any saved Cross Sections and

4 elevation views are listed here. Save or
rename these views by opening the camera
object. See “Saving & Printing 3D Views”
5 on page 767.
6 4 All Floors in the current plan are listed

here, including the Foundation and
Attic. Double-click on a floor name to make
it active in floor plan view. See “Multiple
Floors” on page 352.
5 All materials lists saved with the

Library and Project Browser current plan are listed here. See
in a floating state (not docked) “Materials Lists” on page 1048.
1 Any CAD Details you have saved with 6 Whenever wall framing is generated,
the plan are listed here. Right-click a Wall Details are automatically created
as well and are listed here by floor. See “In
Wall Detail Views” on page 486.
Project Information
Information about the current project, the dialog, which is initially populated by
client it is drawn for, and the registered Chief registered user information. See “Text &
Architect user can be inserted into text Page Setup Panel” on page 77.
objects to improve organization and clarity in
To override designer information for a
your documents. See “Text Macros” on page
particular plan, select Tools> Project
869.
Information> Designer Information to
Designer Information open the Designer Information dialog. See
“Designer Information Dialog” on page 871.
Designer information is specified in
the Default Designer Information
925
House Wizard
Client Information Registered User Information

Select Tools> Project Information> Registered User information corresponds to
Client Information to open the the information that was given when the
Client Information dialog and enter data current Chief Architect installation was
regarding the client that the current plan is registered and cannot be modified without
drawn for. reinstalling and registering the program. See
“User Information” on page 9.
House Wizard
The House Wizard is a time-saving
feature used to create a preliminary
room-by-room design of a home without
getting caught up in the details. Once the
shape and layout of the rooms are finalized,
the House Wizard converts them into a
working plan that can be edited and detailed
to completion.
Start House Wizard

Select Tools> House Wizard> Start
House Wizard. The House Wizard
leads you through a series of windows that
gather information about the rooms you want Room boxes can now be arranged into a floor
to include in your house. When you click plan.
Finish and close the House Wizard, the
selected room boxes display.
926
Editing Rooms
• Select Tools> House Wizard> Hide

Room Boxes or click the toggle but-
ton to hide or show the room boxes.
Build House
When the rooms are in place, select Tools>
House Wizard> Build House to convert
the rooms into a building model. Walls and
doors are inserted between the rooms that
you arranged.
• Select room boxes using the Select

Objects tool just like other objects in
Chief Architect. See “Selecting Objects”
on page 144.
• Room boxes can be resized, rotated, and
rearranged. See “Editing Box-Based
• Try to line up the rooms so that they are
just touching. Excessive overlaps may
cause your rooms to form incorrectly.
Closets are the exception. You can over-
lap a room with a closet, or place in
inside another room box. Multiple Floors
• Rooms can be copied and pasted using
If you specified a two-story house, follow
the Copy/Paste edit button and these steps:
deleted using the Delete edit button.
1. Edit and arrange the room boxes on
• Select Tools> House Wizard or click Floor 1 as desired.
the Space Planning Configuration 2. Select Tools> House Wizard> Build
button to access the room box tools and House tool to create the walls on the
place additional room boxes in your plan. first floor.
Select a tool and click in the plan to place
a room box of that type.
927
Plan Check
3. Go Up One Floor and notice that 5. On the second floor, select Tools>
the positions of the walls on Floor 1 dis- House Wizard> Build House to
play in red as a reference. complete the second floor.
4. Arrange the rooms on Floor 2 as desired,
using the reference display as a guide.
Plan Check
Plan Check checks the floor of your Plan Check Dialog
plan currently shown on screen for
anything that appears to violate common
building practices. Plan Check may not find 1
all the problems in a plan, but does it point
out areas that may need improvement.
2
As your plan evolves, a number of things that 3
may become incorrect can be fixed using
Plan Check. For example, doors that change
from exterior to interior as you add new
rooms are redrawn without the threshold line
that marks an exterior door. A cabinet,
fixture or furniture item that is against a wall
because the wall was moved into it, as
1 The current error number, along with
the total number of errors found.
opposed to the item moving, are attached to
the wall. 2 A description of the current error
displays here.
Disclaimer: The Plan Check feature in 3 Options for navigating Plan Check are
Chief Architect compares your plan with found on the right side.
common building practices. This Plan Check • Click Next to ignore the current error and
does not claim to detect all building code and
proceed to the next.
design requirements. Always have your plans
checked by a licensed professional before • Click Previous to return to the previous
beginning actual construction. error.
• Click Hold to suspend Plan Check so you
To run Plan Check, select Tools> Checks> can fix the current error. Select Tools>
Plan Check . Checks> Plan Check again and the
check starts where it left off.
• Click Done to terminate Plan Check.
Potential plan errors found are usually
highlighted in floor plan view. To ensure the
928
highlighted item is on-screen, make sure the should assign a Room Type to each room in
entire plan is shown in the window before your plan. See “Room Types” on page 271.
you run Plan Check .
The first time Plan Check runs in a plan,
If this dialog obscures the floor plan view, it automatically assigns a room type to as
drag its title bar to move it. It remembers its many undesignated rooms as it can. Some
new position and displays there the next time rooms are determined by their size and
Plan Check is run. shape, and others by their contents. For
example, a shelf in a small room indicates a
Room Types closet; a stove or refrigerator indicates a
kitchen; or a bed, a bedroom. If the program
Plan Check can do a much better job of cannot assign a room type, Plan Check
checking for problems if it knows what the highlights it and suggests that you do so
rooms in your plan are to be used for, so you manually.
IRC Checklist
Chief Architect includes the browser and download a copy of the IRC
International Code Council’s IRC Checklist from the International Code
Checklist, a comprehensive list of standard Council’s web site.
building codes that can greatly facilitate your
planning, design, and plan approval Note: The IRC Checklist is a useful reference
processes. tool but is not an alternative to the local build-
ing codes in your area.
Select Tools> Checks> Download IRC
Checklist to launch your default Internet
Loan Calculator
Select Tools> Loan Calculator to a loan for the current plan based on a variety
open the Loan Calculator dialog. This of parameters.
dialog lets you calculate different aspects of
929
Loan Calculator
3 The Required Fields are the same as

the options in the Calculate drop-down
list. The option selected under Calculate will
1 be inactive under Required Fields.
2 • Specify the desired Loan Amount.
• Specify the desired Term, in years.
3 • Specify the desired Interest Rate.
• Specify the desired Monthly Payment.
4 The Optional Fields allow you to

include additional information in your
loan calculation.
4 • Specify the expected Property Taxes per
year.
• Specify the expected Homeowner’s
Insurance cost per year.
• Specify the expected Private Mortgate
Insurance (PMI) cost per year.
• Specify the cost of any expected Other
Fees.
1 Specify what aspect of the loan you
would like to calculate from the When Monthly Payment is calculated, each
Calculate drop-down list: Optional value is divided by twelve (months)
• Monthly Payment and then added to the total payment.
• Loan Amount When a Calculate option other than Monthly
Payment is selected, these values are divided
• Term
by twelve (months) and then subtracted from
• Interest Rate the specified Monthly Payment value. The
result, which does not display, is then used to
2 The calculation Result, based on the determine the Loan Amount, Term or Interest
information you provide, displays here.
Rate.
If you make changes to any of the fields in
the dialog, click the = button to refresh the
Result.
930
931
Chapter 33:
Pictures, Images, &

Walkthroughs
Chief Architect uses picture files in a variety Chapter Contents

of ways to enhance your drawings. • Picture Files vs Pictures and Image Objects
The Library Browser contains images of real • Images
world objects like plants, vehicles, and • Displaying Images
people that can display in 3D views. • Editing Images
• Image Specification Dialog
Picture files can also be imported into Chief • Pictures
Architect and shown in most views. • Editing Pictures
You can save any view using a variety of • Picture File Box Specification Dialog
picture file formats. In addition, Chief • Metafiles
Architect allows you to create virtual tours • Editing Metafiles
that can be saved as .avi files, shared with • Metafile Specification Dialog
others, and played back later. • Copy Region as Picture
• Creating Screen Captures
Chief Architect can also generate a POV-Ray • Walkthroughs
file from a Standard rendered view for photo- • Creating VRML Files
realistic rendering capabilities. The POV-
Ray feature is covered in its own chapter. See
“Rendering & Raytracing” on page 772.
932
Picture Files vs Pictures and Image Objects

In common computer language, picture files, two-dimensional only and do not display in
pictures and images are more or less camera views or overviews.
synonymous. In the Chief Architect
An image object is also based on a picture
environment, however, there are some
file, but it does display in both 2D and 3D
notable differences between these terms.
views. Images have 3D width and height data
In Chief Architect, a two dimensional image associated with them, as well as a 2D symbol
file such as a .bmp, .jpg, .gif, or .png is which displays in floor plan view.
referred to as a picture file or an image file.
Picture files have additional uses in Chief
Examples of these files are saved on most
Architect, as well:
computers and can be opened in a variety of
applications. • Backdrops are picture files that display
behind 3D views. See “3D Backdrops”
A picture, on the other hand, is a file that has on page 756.
been imported into the program. Pictures can
be imported into floor plan view, cross • Textures are picture files that realistically
section/elevation views, wall elevations, represent materials in 3D views. See
CAD details, and layout pages. They are “About Materials” on page 707.
Images
Images add realistic detail to 3D views Placing Images
without adding many surfaces to the
model. For example, a tree image with a A selection of images are available in
single surface can be used instead of a tree the Library Browser. Select one and
symbol with thousands, dramatically click in a floor plan view, camera view or
improving realism without compromising overview to place it. See “Placing Library
drawing time. Objects” on page 690.
There are two types of images in Chief Creating Images

Architect:
Select Build> Image to view the
• Images rotate so that they always Image Tools, which allow you to add
face the camera in 3D views. images to the current plan.
• Billboard Images do not rotate to To create an image in floor plan view
face the camera. An example of when
this may be useful is an image of a trellis, 1. In floor plan view, select Build>
which might look awkward when facing
Image> Create Image or Billboard
a camera from a side view.
933
Images
Image to open the Image information in these options, see “Image

Specification dialog. See “Image Speci-
fication Dialog” on page 936.
To create an image in the Library Browser
2. On the Image tab:
• Click the Browse button to select a pic- 1. In the Library Browser, right-click on an
ture file on your computer or enter the unlocked folder.
path to a valid picture file in the Image 2. Select New> Image from the contextual
File field. menu to open the Image Specification
• Select CAD block or or 2D plan sym- dialog. See “Image Specification Dia-
bol to represent the image in floor plan log” on page 936.
view. Choose a 2D Plan Symbol from 3. Once created, the image is listed in the
the list or click the Library button and library folder that you right-clicked on.
select a CAD block or symbol from the Size and other data is saved.
library. See “Image Tab” on page 937.
• Enter Height and/or Width and Loca- Using Paste Image
tion information.
You can also import an image by first
3. Enter transparency information and
copying it to the Windows Clipboard,
layer information on the Transparency
then navigating to a Chief Architect window
tab.
and selecting Edit> Paste> Paste from the
4. Click OK to close the Image menu, or by using the Screen Capture tools.
Specification dialog. See “Paste” on page 192 and “Creating
5. Click to place the new image in floor Screen Captures” on page 946.
plan view.
Converting a
Adding Images to the Library Folder of Images
Chief Architect can use any image with a A folder of images can be converted
*.bmp, *.jpg, *.png, *.gif, *.tif, or *.pcx. into image objects all at once, saving
extension. the effort of converting them individually.
Generally, .png files work best as images
To convert a folder of images
because this format has good compression
and allows for the image to contain 1. Select Build> Image> Create Image
transparency information.
Library .
Right-click on an unlocked folder in the
2. Select a folder of images to convert in
Library Browser. Select New> Image from
the Browse For Folder dialog and click
the contextual menu. The Image
OK.
Specification dialog opens.
3. When all of the images in the folder are
Browse to the image you want to add and
converted, a new library of the same
select your other options. For more
934
name and directory structure as the con- The display of images in floor plan and
verted folder is listed in the Library 3D views is controlled in the Layer
Browser. Display Options dialog. See “Displaying
Displaying Images
The display of images in floor plan and according to its Width and Height
3D views is controlled in the Layer specifications. Any transparency data
Display Options dialog. See “Displaying associated with the image is also applied. See
Objects” on page 117. “Image Specification Dialog” on page 936.
Images are placed on the”Images” layer by Images can be set to either rotate so that they
default but they can be moved to other always face the camera or to remain
layers. See “Image Specification Dialog” on stationary, like billboards. See “Images” on
page 936. page 933.
You can also choose to turn off the display of
In Floor Plan View images in rendered 3D views in the
In floor plan view, most images are typically Preferences dialog. See “Render Panel” on
page 102.
represented by an Image symbol. You
can specify a different symbol to represent an
image if you wish. Any 2D CAD block from
In Layout
the library can represent an image object. See The symbols representing images in floor
“Image Specification Dialog” on page 936. plan view, whether 2D symbols or CAD
blocks, can display on a layout sheet and be
In 3D Views printed or plotted.
The actual picture associated with an image
object can be seen in 3D views. It is sized
Editing Images
Images can be selected in 2D and 3D views Using the Mouse
and edited using the edit handles, edit tools
and the Image Specification dialog. Images can be resized in floor plan view by
dragging the circular Resize handle at the top
of the 2D symbol.
935
Image Specification Dialog
When an image is resized, the aspect ratio of

the image and its 2D symbol are retained, so
the image resizes proportionally.

Images can also be resized in 3D views by A selected image or images can be edited in a
dragging the circular Resize edit handle at variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
the top. toolbar. As with most objects, images can be
copied, replicated, moved, deleted, etc. See
“Edit Toolbar Buttons” on page 1140.

Select an image and click the Open You can also open this dialog by right-
Object edit button to open the Image clicking on an image in an unlocked library
and selecting Open from the contextual
menu.
936
Image Tab
1
2
3
4
1 Image File - The path and name of the • Check Reverse Image to reflect the
selected image. Click Browse to appearance of the image about an imagi-
replace the current image with a different one nary vertical line through its center.
saved on your computer. • Check Do Not Rotate in Camera Views
2 2D Plan Symbol - Select a CAD block to prevent the image from rotating to face
or 2D symbol from the drop-down list the camera in 3D views. This box is
to mark the location of the image in floor checked for Billboard Images. See
plan view. See “Displaying Images” on page “Images” on page 933.
935.
4 Specify the Size of the image as it
Click the Library button to choose a CAD displays in 3D views.
block or symbol from the library. See “Select • Enter a Height for the selected image.
• Enter a Width for the selected image.
If you change the CAD block or 2D symbol,
• When Retain Aspect Ratio of is
you may want to save the change as a new
checked, if you change either the Height
image in the library.
or Width, the other value changes to
3 Options maintain this ratio. If this is unchecked
and you resize the image, it may become
distorted.
937
• Click Reset Original Aspect Ratio of to symbol in floor plan view. Only available
reset the image’s original aspect ratio and when a CAD block from the library is
remove any distortion caused by resizing. selected as the image’s 2D Plan Symbol.
• Select Use Image Settings to use the
5 Specify the Location of the selected image’s line style, which is set by layer,
image.
and its fill style, which is None (Trans-
• Position the selected image precisely by
parent).
specifying its X and Y Coordinates.
• Select Use Block Settings to use the2d
• Specify the image’s Height Above
CAD block’s line and fill styles. See
Ground.
“Custom 2D Symbols” on page 913.
6 Specify the appearance of the Block
Line/Fill Style of the image’s 2D
Transparency Tab
2
3
1 Click the Use transparency from the Click the color box to open Color Chooser
image file radio button to use the dialog and select another transparency color.
transparency data included in the image file. See “Color Chooser Dialog” on page 727.
2 Click the Custom transparency color Enter a level of Tolerance to be applied to

radio button to use another color to colors that are almost the same color as the
represent the transparency. specified transparency color. Use the slide
bar or type a number in the edit box.
938
3 Place your pointer over a part of the If this happens, the image may appear
preview and a magnified preview partially disintegrated.
displays here, allowing for accurate pixel
You may need to experiment to find the best
selection.
transparency color and tolerance for the
image.
Note: The image preview will display its orig-
inal orientation, even if Reverse Image is Layer Tab
checked on the Image tab.
For information about using the Layer tab,
The Transparency Color see “Layer Tab” on page 125.
If the portion of the image file that you wish

Fill Style Tab
to use contains the transparency color, that
part of the image also becomes transparent. For information about using the Fill Style
939
Pictures
Pictures
A variety of picture file types can be Importing Pictures
imported into and exported out of Chief
Architect. There are several ways to import a picture
into Chief Architect.
Enhanced Metafiles (.emf) and Windows
Metafiles (.wmf) are also types of picture Picture files can be imported into and
files that can be imported and exported. See displayed in floor plan view, cross section/
“Metafiles” on page 943. elevation views, wall elevations, CAD
details, and layout pages. Picture files do not
display in camera views or overviews.
Exporting Pictures
Using Import Picture
Using the Export Picture tool is
similar to creating a screen capture of Select File> Import> Picture (BMP,
everything in the current Chief Architect JPG, PNG) to insert a picture file into
window. Pictures can be saved in various file a plan or layout file. The Import Picture File
formats and used in other applications. dialog opens.
Click Open to finish importing the picture.
Export Picture is best suited for The picture is placed in the center of the
rendered and Raytrace views. When current view, and can be selected and edited.
exporting a line-based view, best results can
be achieved by saving it as a Metafile. See Clicking and Dragging
“To export a metafile” on page 944. You can import a picture directly into floor
plan view by dragging an image file from a
To export a picture Windows Explorer window into the Chief
1. Open the view that you would like to Architect window
export to a picture file. Using Paste Image
2. Zoom, pan or otherwise adjust the view You can import a picture by first
so that what you see on screen suits your copying it to the Windows Clipboard,
needs. See “Displaying 3D Views” on then navigating to a Chief Architect window
page 756. and selecting Edit> Paste> Paste from the
3. Select File> Export> Picture (BMP, menu, or by using the Screen Capture tools.
See “Paste” on page 192 and “Creating
JPG, PNG) in any view to open the
Screen Captures” on page 946.
Export Picture File dialog, which is a
typical Save File dialog. See “Saving a
Plan or Layout File” on page 46.
940
Editing Pictures
Pictures can be selected individually and as a 5. Enter a new dimension that matches the
group in 2D and 3D views and edited using desired distance between the points.
the edit handles, the edit toolbar and their 6. Click OK and the picture is resized.
specification dialog. See “Picture File Box
Resize Factor
Using the Mouse With a bit of calculation, an imported picture
of a floor plan or site map can be resized to
Pictures can be edited like CAD boxes. See scale using the Transform/Replicate Object
“Editing Box-Based Objects” on page 164. dialog. Once resized, the picture can be
traced using Chief Architect’s drawing tools
Using the Edit Tools and then deleted.
A selected picture or pictures can be edited in
a variety of ways using the buttons on the It is a good idea to delete a resized pic-
edit toolbar. See “Edit Toolbar Buttons” on ture after it is traced to help limit your
page 1140. plan or layout file’s size.
Resize Picture To calculate the Resize Factor
A selected picture can be resized in 1. Find two items on the imported picture
either the X or Y direction with the that are separated by a known horizontal
Resize Picture edit tool. or vertical distance, such as two walls or
plot lines.
1. Select the picture.
2. Draw parallel CAD lines on top of these
2. Click the Resize Picture edit button. two items. See “The CAD Drawing
Tools” on page 878.
3. Click two points in the image that have a
known distance between them. 3. Find the distance between the CAD
lines. See “The Dimension Tools” on
4. After you click at the second point, the
page 823.
Resize Picture dialog opens showing
the current distance between the points. 4. The Resize Factor for the image is the
distance described in the picture divided
by the distance between the CAD lines.
In other words, if the items are supposed to
be 10 feet apart on the picture, but the
distance between the two CAD lines drawn
on them is only 2 feet, you need to set the
Resize Factor for the picture to 5. (10’
divided by 2’ equals 5). When the picture is 5
941
Picture File Box Specification Dialog
times the original size, the items on the 6. In the Transform/Replicate Object dia-
picture are at the actual scale shown on the log, select the Resize Factor check box.
picture. 7. Enter the Resize Factor calculated
5. Select the picture and click the Trans- above, then click OK.
form/Replicate Object edit button.
Picture File Box Specification Dialog

Select an imported picture file and click the
Picture File Box Specification dialog.
3 5
1 Filename - The full pathname for the • Retain Aspect Ratio - Check this box to
picture file. Type a new name to change maintain the width to height ratio of the
the picture assigned to this box. original image. If you change one value,
the other recalculates so the image is not
Browse - Click this button to browse for a
stretched or distorted as it is resized.
new picture file or to relink to a missing file.
• Reset Original Aspect Ratio - If the
Specify the Size of the picture in plan
2 aspect ratio is changed, you can click this
inches (mm).
942
button to return the picture to its original • Check Black and White Dither to
aspect ratio. dither the selected picture file. Dithering
• Width - Specify the desired width of the creates a two tone effect that may pro-
picture box in plan inches. The original duce better results when printed.
width in pixels displays to the right. • Check Grayscale to replace the color in
• Height - Specify the desired height of the the selected picture file with shades of
picture box in plan inches. The original gray.
height in pixels displays to the right. • Check Reflect to reverse the image.
• Enter a degree of Brightness from 1 -
3 Specify the Position of the picture. 100%.
• X Position - The location of the picture • Enter a degree of Contrast from 1 -
box relative to the absolute origin. 100%.
• Y Position - The location of the picture
box relative to the absolute origin. Line Style Tab
• Angle - The current angle of the picture The Line Style tab in the Picture File Box
box relative to a horizontal line pointing Specification dialog is similar to the
towards the right hand side of the screen. sameLine Style tab in numerous other
dialogs, with one exception.
4 Input/Output (IO) Options - Check Check the Show Outline box to turn on the
Save in Plan to embed the image in the
plan file. If a picture file is embedded in a display of the picture’s border polyline.
plan, you do not need to include it when
sending the plan to a different computer.
Click the radio button beside either PNG or
JPEG to specify:
• Picture files that were originally using
.jpg format select the .jpg option by For more information, see “Line Style Tab”
default. on page 889.
• Picture files that were using .gif or .png
formats select the .png option by default. Fill Style Tab
5 Choose from a variety of Display For information about using the Fill Style
Options. tab, see “Fill Style Tab” on page 902.
Metafiles
A metafile (.emf, .wmf) is a special picture allow the image to be rescaled without loss
file format made up of vectors (lines) that of quality.
943
Metafiles
High resolution pictures of line-based views later.

can be exported as a metafile.
Specify, too, the desired Dots Per Inch
Exporting Metafiles (DPI) for the metafile. A larger value
results in a higher quality metafile, but
An enhanced metafile (.emf) can be also a larger file size.
exported from any vector-based view -
that is, any view except rendered and
Vector Views and
Raytrace views.
Metafiles
Only objects that display on screen are
included in an exported metafile. When a metafile is exported from a Vector
View, the Metafile Size dialog also allows
To export a metafile you specify the printed thickness, or line
weight, of lines in the view. See “Rendered
1. Accurately position the view on screen. and Vector Views” on page 742.
2. Select File> Export> Metafile (EMF)
.
3. Drag a marquee from corner to cor-

ner, defining the area that will included
in the metafile.
4. Release the mouse to open the Export
Metafile dialog, which is a typical Save
As dialog. See “Saving a Plan or Layout To increase the printing line weight, type a
File” on page 46. larger number in the Use Line Weight field.
A line weight of 3 or 4 is usually sufficient
5. Enter a name and location for the meta-
for plotting.
file,. then click Save.
6. The Metafile Size dialog opens next. This option is not available for metafiles
exported from floor plan view. Metafiles
exported from floor plan view use the line
weights defined in the Layer Display
Importing Metafiles
Select File> Import> Metafile
7. Specify the metafile desired Width or (EMF,WMF) from floor plan view, a
Height. When one value is edited, the cross section/elevation view, or a CAD
other changes to maintain its aspect Detail to open the Import Metafile dialog,
ratio. Metafiles can always be resized
944
which is a typical open file dialog. See

“Opening a Plan or Layout File” on page 50.
Editing Metafiles
Once imported into a plan, a metafile can be Using Edit Handles
selected and edited like other objects. See
“Selecting Objects” on page 144. Metafiles can be edited using their edit
handles much the way CAD boxes can. See
“Editing Box-Based Objects” on page 164.
Using Dimensions
Metafiles can be relocated relative to other Using the Edit Tools
objects with precision using dimensions. See
“Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on A selected metfile or metafiles can be edited
page 831. in a variety of ways using the buttons on the
page 1140.
Metafile Specification Dialog

Select an imported metafile and click the
Metafile Specification dialog.
General Tab
1 3
1 The metafile’s Size displays here. You 2 Check Retain Aspect Ratio to
can enter a different Width or Height. maintain the aspect ratio when the
Width or Height values are edited. Click
Reset Original Aspect Ratio to reset the
945
Copy Region as Picture
edited. Uncheck the Show Outline box to turn off

the display of the picture’s border polyline.
3 The metafile’s current Position and
orientation display here. Enter a new X
Position and/or a Y Position to relocate the
Metafile in absolute coordinates. You can
also change the Metafile’s Angle.
Line Style Tab

For more information, see “Line Style Tab”
The Line Style tab of the Metafile on page 889.
Specification dialog is similar to the Line
Style tab in numerous other dialogs, with one Fill Style Tab
exception.
Copy Region as Picture

You can copy any portion of the screen 4. The selection is copied to the Windows
and save it as a picture using the Copy clipboard.
Region as Picture tool. • If the current view is vector-based, the
Metafile Size dialog displays because
To use Copy Region as Picture the program uses this file format to
produce vector-based pictures. See
1. Open the view that you would like to
“Metafiles” on page 943.
copy all or part of as a picture.
• If the current view is a rendered or
2. Select Edit> Copy Region as Raytrace view, the region is sent
Picture . Your pointer displays a directly to the Windows clipboard.
marquee icon. 5. From there, the picture can be pasted
into another view or another program.
3. Click and drag a rectangular selection
marquee around the desired region.
Creating Screen Captures

Use the Screen Capture tools to add Begin by selecting Tools> Screen Capture>
backdrops, images or materials to the Chief Screen Capture Setup to open the
Architect Library or to create picture objects. Screen Capture Setup dialog.
You can capture screens in Chief Architect or
other applications.
946
Screen Capture Setup Dialog
1 Select the Screen Capture Creation 3 Click Capture when you are ready to
Type that you want. proceed.
• If you select Backdrop as the capture
type, the program will add the capture to To create a screen capture
the My Backdrops library category, and it 1. Select Tools> Screen Capture> Cap-
will display in the library preview panes.
To use this backdrop, select 3D> 3D Set- ture Screen , or click the Capture
button in the Screen Capture Setup
tings from the menu. See “3D Set- dialog.
tings Dialog” on page 744.
2. Navigate to the window you want to
• If you select Image as the capture type, capture from. This can be in Chief
the program will add the capture to the Architect, another program, or a Web
My Images library category. The image page in your Internet browser.
will display in the preview panes and will
be selected. Click in the plan to place it. 3. Right-click on screen to activate the cap-
ture tool, then left-click to specify the
• If you select Material as the capture first corner of the capture.
type, the new material will be added to
the My Materials library category and 4. Left-click to specify the second corner.
will be shown in the preview panes. A marquee defines the capture area as
Select 3D> Materials> Material you move the mouse to the location of
the second click.
Painter to apply the material.
To change the name of a captured backdrop,
• If you choose Picture as the capture type,
image, or material, right-click on it’s name in
the picture displays on screen in Chief
the library list, select Rename, and type in
Architect.
the new name. See “Renaming Libraries” on
page 698.
2 Follow these instructions to create the
screen capture after you have selected a
capture type.
947
Walkthroughs
Walkthroughs
A 3D Walkthrough is a series of 5. In the Walkthrough Options dialog:
picture files saved in .avi format that
can be played like a movie by other
applications such as Windows Media Player.
There are two ways to record a walkthrough:
• Draw a path in floor plan view using the
CAD tools, then direct the program to
record a walkthrough along that path.
• Create a 3D view, then begin recording
and use the Move Camera tools to navi-
gate through the view.
If you resize the current view window while
recording a walkthrough, the program will
stop recording.
• Specify the desired number of Frames
To record a walkthrough along a path Per Second, between 1 and 100. A
higher number results in a higher qual-
1. Using CAD tools such as lines and arcs ity recording but also a larger .avi file.
or splines, draw a path in floor plan view • Specify a Duration Along Path, in
that travels through a single floor of seconds.
your plan.
• The Total Frames to Record equals
2. Select the polyline or spline path. the Frames Per Second times the Dura-
3. Click the Record Walkthrough Along tion along Path.
Path edit button or select 3D> • Specify a Compression percentage
Walkthroughs> Record Walkthrough between 0 and 100. A value of 0 gives
Along Path from the menu. the highest quality images and largest
file sizes.
• From the drop-down list, select the
You can create a video that plays in a Rendering Technique you would like
continuous loop by specifying a closed
the walkthrough to use. See
polyline as your walkthrough path.
4. An Information message displays, • Click OK.
reminding you that while a walkthrough To cancel the recording as it is being created,
is being recorded along a path, you press the ESC key on your keyboard.
should avoid using your computer.
948
To record a walkthrough frame by frame the next frame in sequence. See “Editing
3D Views” on page 758.
1. Create a camera view. This view is the
first frame of the walkthrough. 6. To move the camera without saving a
view, select 3D> Walkthroughs> Pause
2. From the view, select 3D> Walk-
Recording to temporarily stop
throughs> Record Walkthrough . recording.
3. Specify a location and name for the • You can then select 3D> Walk-
walkthrough in the Write Movie File
throughs> Save Frame button to
dialog and click Save.
control what views are saved.
4. In the Walkthrough Options dialog: • You can start recording again by select-
ing Pause Recording once more.
7. When the walkthrough sequence is com-
plete, select 3D>Walkthroughs> Stop
Recording or close the view.
• Select a Frame Rate between 1 and Note: Zooming in and out and using the scroll
100. The value entered is the number bars does not change the viewpoint and does
of frames per second. not produce a frame for the walkthrough.
• Select a Compression Percent
between 0 and 100. A value of 0 gives To play a walkthrough
the highest quality images and the larg-
1. Select 3D> Walkthroughs> Play
est file size.
• Click OK. Walkthrough to open the Open
Movie File dialog.
5. Use the camera movement tools to cre-
ate additional views. Each time the 2. Browse to an .avi file on saved on your
screen redraws, that view is recorded as computer. Your default video application
plays the walkthrough.
Creating VRML Files

VRML (Virtual Reality Modeling can also be referenced. You can post a .wrl
Language) is a 3D file format that can file and its associated image and texture files
be used by various “walkthrough” viewers, to the web or e-mail them to a customer.
as well as other rendering packages.
VRML files are often created from rendered
VRML files use the .wrl file format and views so that lighting and textures are used;
contain an entire 3D model, including however, you can export from a Vector View
lighting information. Images and textures if you wish.
949
Creating VRML Files
The entire model is exported, but the starting When a camera view or overview is active,
point for the walkthrough is defined by the select File> Export> Export VRML .
camera location at the time of export. The VRML Export Options dialog opens.
VRML Export Options Dialog
1 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Define the Camera Field of View. 6 Night Sky/Ground Colors darkens the
Standard most closely corresponds to ground plane and sky to create a
the default Chief Architect camera view. The nighttime appearance.
other options generate a wider field of view.
7 Run Default VRML Viewer starts the
Select as many options along the right side as .vrml viewer and opens the new .vrml
desired. file as soon as it is generated.
2 No Textures Exported - Check this 8 Copy Images to Export Directory

box to prevent texture files from being should be checked if you plan to share
exported with the .wrl file. If textures are the VRML with others. This copies texture
exported, the texture files must be in the bitmaps with the .wrl file so that they render
same folder as the .wrl file. correctly when exported.
3 Walk Through Surfaces allows you to Once the general parameters have been
walk through walls and closed doors selected, click OK. Name the .wrl file and
from room to room, instead of stopping when save it to the desired folder and click Save.
you reach a wall.
It is best to keep all .vrml files in a folder
4 Turn off Ambient Lights turns off the separate from your normal Chief Archi-
default lights that are used to light a
scene. tect files, since all textures used in the model
also export to the same folder. This could add
a significant number of files, creating poten-
5 Turn off Fixture Lights turns off the tial organization problems.
default lights that are generated for
fixtures and used to light a scene.
950
VRML Use of Texture & them into Chief Architect. This is the rec-
Image Files ommended option.
• Create a .gif file with the same name and
In order for textures to be rendered correctly,
in the same directory as the .bmp file.
the texture and image files associated with an
When you export the .wrl file, Chief
exported VRML file must be in the same
Architect automatically substitutes the
directory as the .wrl file.
.gif for the .bmp file. Whenever possible,
VRML files do not support the use of .bmp you should use a supported file format
textures or images. Instead, compressed file instead of using .bmp and .gif pairs.
formats such as .gif, .png, or .jpg files must
For more information about .vrml players,
be used.
visit the Chief Architect Web site at
If you wish to use custom textures or images www.chiefarchitect.com.
in your VRML file, you have two options:
• Make sure that they are saved in a format
other than .bmp before you bring import
951
Chapter 34:
Importing &
Exporting
Importing is the process of opening a file that Chapter Contents

was produced in a different program in Chief • DXF vs DWG File Formats
Architect. Exporting, on the other hand, is • Importing 2D Drawings
the process of saving information in a Chief • Import Drawing Wizard
Architect file to a format that can be read by • CAD to Walls
another program. • Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files
Chief Architect allows you to import and • Additional 2D Export Information
export a variety of information from and to • 3D Data Import Requirements
other applications. This chapter focuses on • Importing 3D Symbols
importing and exporting 2D .dxf/.dwg files • Exporting a 3D Model in DXF/DWG
Format
and a variety of 3D file formats.
• Exporting a 3D Model in 3DS Format
There are numerous other options for
importing objects and data in Chief
Architect. They are discussed in the chapters
in which those objects or settings are
discussed.
952
DXF vs DWG File Formats

Many design programs can read and write .dxf (Drawing eXchange Format) is a
.dxf and .dwg files. Both formats interpret standard file format created by Autodesk for
data as CAD objects such as lines, polylines, the transfer of data between other programs.
and circles. Both formats can also contain 3D
Binary .dxf format is another related file
data which can be imported into Chief
format. It is easier for computers to read, is
Architect, as well.
more accurate, and occupies less disk space
.dwg is the native AutoCAD file format. and regular .dxf files. When exporting,
Originally a proprietary format, it is now however, bear in mind that not all
widely used with many different products. applications support binary .dxf.
Importing 2D Drawings
2D drawings are imported by reading entities • Circles - Fully supported in 2D.
from a .dwg or .dxf file and creating the • Arcs - Fully supported in 2D.
equivalent CAD objects in Chief Architect.
• Ellipses - Fully supported in 2D.
Chief Architect X2 can import 2D .dxf or
• Spline entities - Fully supported as 2D
.dwg files compatible with AutoCAD
polylines.
through version 2009.
• Polylines and Lightweight Polylines -
Only drawings created in AutoCAD’s Model Polylines are imported as polylines.
Space can be imported into Chief Architect. Bumps are converted to arcs. Line widths
Entities drawn in Paper Space are not are ignored.
recognized.
• Lightweight Polylines - Fully supported
A .dxf or .dwg file can be imported into floor in 2D.
plan view, a Wall Elevation view, Cross
• Text & Multi-line Text - Both are
Section/Elevation view, or a CAD Detail
imported as Rich Text and mapped to the
window.
Text layer. Multi-line text objects retain
In general, all Z coordinates are mapped to their original width. The first font in a
zero. If an entity in an imported drawing has multi-line text object is applied to the
thickness, Chief Architect ignores it. entire object.
• Unicode Text - Fully supported.
Supported Entities
• Blocks & Block Inserts - A block is a
The following is a list of the entities that are named group of CAD entities that have
imported and how they are converted. All been joined together to behave as a single
other entities are ignored: object. A block insert is a reference to
such a block. Blocks are loaded by name.
• Lines - Both 2D and 3D lines.
953
Import Drawing Wizard
If a duplicate name is found, you can appropriate location but the association
specify whether a block is imported with the original object is broken.
under a new name, replaces an existing • Line Styles - Line styles are not
block or simply uses the existing block of imported. Instead, if a style of the same
the same name. name displays in the Chief Architect line
• Hatch entities - If Import Hatch enti- styles, that line style is used. Otherwise a
ties is selected on the Select File page of solid line style is used.
the Import Drawing Wizard for a .dwg • Layers - You can specify which layers in
file, Hatch patterns are imported as a the imported drawing to import into your
CAD block consisting of solid black Chief Architect file. Objects on these lay-
filled polylines. ers will be placed on the Default CAD
• 2D Solids (Not ACIS Solids) - Fully sup- Layer. See “Layers” on page 116.
ported in 2D.
• Solids - A solid is a 3 or 4-sided filled Layers
area. These are imported as 2D faces. There can be some confusion between
• 2D Solids (Not ACIS Solids) importing a layer and mapping a layer; the
• 3D Faces/Polyface Meshes - A 3D face distinction, however, is important.
has its Z coordinate mapped to zero, and You can control which objects in a drawing
imports as a polyline. are imported by choosing to import the layers
• Dimensions - Rotated, aligned and 3- they are on.
point angular dimensions are supported. Once you have elected to import a layer, you
All other dimension types are imported as can then specify how you would like to map
lines and text rather than functioning it in the Chief Architect drawing. You have
dimensions. three options:
CAD blocks containing dimensions as • You can map all layers in the imported
text must be exploded before the text can drawing to a single Chief Architect layer.
be edited separately. For more on • You can map all layers in the imported
exploding, see “CAD Blocks” on page drawing to Chief Architect layers of the
912. same name. The program will create
• Attributes - Attributes are text objects those layers if they do not already exist.
associated with other items, like blocks. • You can use Advanced Layer Mapping
These are imported as text objects at the to individually map each imported layer
to a Chief Architect layer.

A .dxf or .dwg file can be imported view, Cross Section/Elevation view, or a
into floor plan view, a Wall Elevation CAD Detail window.
954
To import a 2D drawing file, open the view You can also launch the Import Drawing
window in which you would like to place the Wizard by dragging a .dxf/.dwg file from a
drawing and select File> Import> Drawing Windows Explorer window into the Chief
(DWG/DXF) to open the welcome page Architect window.
of the Import Drawing Wizard. Click Next
to continue. CAD Detail windows are an excellent
place to import and organize CAD draw-
ings. See “CAD Details” on page 917.
Select File
1 Type the full pathname of the drawing • Check Polylines to import lines as
file you want to import or click the polylines. Unconnected lines will be con-
Browse button to locate a file on your nected. This option is rarely needed.
computer. The directory containing the last • Check Boxes to import lines as boxes.
file selected using the Import Drawing Unconnected lines will be connected.
Wizard displays in this field. This option is rarely needed.
2 If you want to convert lines to polylines 3 Specify how to treat CAD blocks
or boxes, check the appropriate options. associated with the selected drawing.
Polylines are imported as polylines
regardless of these settings. • Select Import all CAD blocks to include
all CAD blocks associated with the file
955
being imported whether or not they are

4 Check Import Hatch entities to import
visible. See “CAD Block Management” areas of hatching as solid-filled
on page 913. polylines.
• Select Only import CAD blocks if they Click Next to load the file into memory so
are referenced in the drawing to reduce that Chief Architect can present information
the volume of transferred data. about the contents of the file. This can take a
while for larger files.
Select Layers
2 3
1 A list of the layers found in the • Layers that were Frozen in the original
imported file and information about program are not checked by default. You
each layer displays in this table. can include a frozen layer by checking
• In the Layer column, check the box to the box to its left.
the left of each layer name to specify • If a layer is set to Convert To a terrain
which layers you want to import. Layers perimeter or elevation data, it will be
with checked boxes are imported; those indicated in this column provided that
with unchecked boxes are not. you are importing into floor plan view.
• Layers that were Visible in the original
program are checked by default. You can 2 Click Check All to import all layers
associated with the drawing. Click
include a layer that is not visible by Check None to import none of the layers.
checking the box to the left of its name.
956
3 The Convert To drop-down list allows To convert a layer to terrain data, click on the
you convert the data on any layer into a layer in question in the table and then select
“Terrain Perimeter” or “Elevation Data”. See an option from the Convert To drop-down
“Terrain Perimeter” on page 581 and “Import- list. The option you choose will then display
ing DXF/DWG Elevation Data” on page 620. in the Convert To column in the table.
Only available when importing into floor
plan view.
Note: if an open polyline is converted into a
Terrain Perimeter, the program will draw an
additional edge to close the gap.
Layer Mapping
1
2
3
4
5
The Layer Mapping page specifies how Line color, style, and weight are preserved on
layers are structured once imported into a per object basis.
Chief Architect.
2 All CAD objects to be imported are
placed on the layer indicated in the box.
Mapping to a Single Layer Select a layer from the drop-down list or
click the Define button to open the Layer
1 The simplest layer mapping option is to Display Options dialog and specify a layer
assign all CAD objects to a single Chief
Architect layer. This choice offers the least and its properties. See “Layer Display
control as original layer attributes are lost. Options Dialog” on page 121.
957
Mapping Layers By Name 4 In combination with the second

alternative, you may choose to import
3 The second option is to map layers by all attributes for each layer or none at all.
name. Layers are created in Chief
Architect with the same names as those listed The third option is to map each layer
5
on the Select Layers window of the Import individually with complete control of
Drawing Wizard, and the imported CAD all layer mapping options. Selecting the third
objects are placed on those layers. option opens the Advanced Layer Mapping
page.
Advanced Layer Mapping
If you select the Advanced Layer Mapping • The name of the Chief Layer that each
option, the Advanced Layer Mapping page imported layer is mapped to is listed in
displays, allowing you complete control of the second column. The initial Chief
how all imported layers are mapped. Layer selections depend on which option
was selected on the Layer Mapping page.
1 A list of the layers found in the • If a Chief Layer does not already exist in
imported file and the layers in Chief
Architect that they are mapped to display in the destination plan or layout file, it will
this table. be listed as “New” in the third column.
• The original name of each DWG/DXF
2 When a row in the table above is
Layer is found in the first column. selected, the Chief Layer options
958
become active. Select multiple entries by • Select a layer already present in the desti-
holding down the Shift key nation plan or layout file from the drop-
• If the layer in the selected row is mapped down list.
to an existing Chief layer, it will display • Click the Browse button to open the
in the drop-down; if not, the drop-down Layer Display Options dialog. See
will be blank. “Layer Display Options Dialog” on page
121.
Duplicate CAD Blocks
1
2
3
4
If one or more CAD blocks in the imported for each duplicate. For instance, if the
file have the same name as a block in the original file’s name is “blockname,” the
destination plan or layout, the Duplicate program gives the new block a name like:
CAD Blocks page displays. “blockname-copy” or “blockname-copy-1.”
There are four alternatives. Selecting any of
2 The second alternative is to replace the
the first three applies that choice to all existing block in the plan with the
duplicate CAD blocks in your plan. duplicate. This option is not recommended,
as all instances of the CAD block are
1 The first choice is to allow the program replaced in the plan.
to automatically generate unique names
959
3 The third is to keep the block that 4 Select the fourth option to open the
already exists in the plan and discard Advanced Duplicate CAD Blocks
the duplicate. page and manage each duplicate individually.
Advanced Duplicate CAD Blocks
3
1
If you chose the fourth option from the the selected CAD block. The duplicate’s
Duplicate CAD Block page, the Advanced name is the same as the original with
Duplicate CAD Block dialog displays, “_Copy” appended to the end.
allowing you to manage each duplicate CAD • Click Replace to replace the existing
block individually. CAD block in the destination file with the
CAD block listed here. This option is not
1 Click on a CAD block name in the list recommended, as all instances of the
of Duplicate Names. Select multiple
names by holding down the Shift key. CAD block are replaced.
• Click Use Existing to keep the CAD
2 Click one of the three active buttons in block already in the destination file and
the center of the dialog to specify how
the selected block(s) are to be treated. discard the CAD block listed here.
• Click Auto Name to have the program 3 Review your choices in the tables at the
automatically generate a unique name for right.
960
• To remove a CAD block from a field on Click Next to continue.

the right, select it and click the Remove
button.
Drawing Unit
1
2
3
1 What unit of measurement was used 3 Select Import as CAD blocks to

to create this drawing? - Select a unit import dimensions as CAD entities that
of measurement from the drop-down list. are not recognized by Chief Architect as
Selecting the correct unit helps ensure that dimensions.
your imported drawing is accurately sized.
Import Complete
Note: During the import process, Chief Archi- When a file is imported into Chief Architect,
tect defaults to inches or millimeters. If you
its various components are selected as a
are importing a site plan or topo prepared by
a surveyor, or if you are importing a metric
group. The group-selection has Move and
drawing into an imperial plan (or vice versa), Rotate edit handles available for relocating
you may need to change units. the entire drawing. Once another object or
tool is selected, the drawing components are
no longer group-selected.
2 Select Import as dimensions where
possible to import dimensions as Chief Imported drawings are assigned the same
Architect supported dimensions. coordinates at which they were originally
drawn. If you do not see your imported
961
CAD to Walls
drawing, select Window> Fill Window , Replicate Object edit button to move it
as it may have been placed at a location not closer to the origin. See “Transform/
currently visible on screen. Replicate Object Dialog” on page 200.
When the drawing can be seen, move your Imported CAD objects can be selected and
mouse pointer over it and note its coordinates edited just like objects that were drawn in the
in the Status Bar. If any coordinate value has program. See “Editing Objects” on page 130.
more than six digits, use the Transform/
CAD to Walls
This feature allows you to convert a layers and other structural items can be
flat line drawing into a 3D model. converted to actual Chief Architect walls,
Once a drawing has been imported into Chief railings, windows, or doors. See “CAD to
Architect, CAD lines that represent wall Walls” on page 240.
Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files

Line-based 2D files can be exported from Export Current View
Chief Architect in both .dxf and .dwg file
formats. You can specify the version of To export the floor plan view, Vector
AutoCAD to export to. Compatibility with view or CAD Detail that is currently
other software may vary. visible, select File> Export> Current View
(DWG/DXF).
Custom line styles created in Chief Architect
cannot be exported. When exported to .dxf/ Bear in mind that Orthographic views are
dwg, they are replaced by a solid line style, drawn to scale and will produce a 2D
although the line weight and color are drawing that can be accurately dimensioned.
retained. See “Creating Line Styles” on page Perspective views, on the other hand, are not
910. scaled and do not produce drawings that can
be dimensioned accurately.
Dimensions
Export All Floors
Aligned, rotated, and angular dimensions can
all be exported. CAD blocks containing To export the floor plan view for all
dimensions as text must be exploded before floor plans simultaneously, select
the text can be edited separately. For more on File> Export> All Floors (DWG/DXF)
exploding, see “CAD Blocks” on page 912. from any floor of the plan. The floor plans
are exported to a single .dxf or .dwg file.
There are two ways to export a 2D drawing
file in Chief Architect: If you choose to export all floors, the file will
contain all floors superimposed on each
962
other. Upon export, each layer in your Chief

Architect drawing is divided into separate You can use the CAD Detail from View
layers: one for each floor. For example: tool to automatically create a 2D line
“Electrical-2” contains objects on Floor 2 drawing from a 3D view. See “CAD Detail
From View” on page 767.
that were originally on the “Electrical” layer.
Export Drawing File Dialog
3 8
4
1 Save In - The current directory displays • Select Binary DXF to export the file in
here. Click the drop-down arrow and binary .dxf format. Binary .dxf is easier
browse to the export location you prefer. for computers to read, is more accurate,
and occupies less disk space, but some
2 Existing .dxf or .dwg files in the applications do not support binary .dxf.
current directory are listed here.
5 File Format Options - .dxf and .dwg
3 Enter a File name. files created by Chief Architect can be
4 Save as type - Specify the file format compatible with a variety of AutoCAD
Chief Architect should use to export.
963
Additional 2D Export Information
versions. Specify which version from the inches for Imperial plan or layout files, or
drop-down list. mm for metric files. See “Dimension
Defaults and Preferences” on page 809.
6 The Layer Options settings allow you • Uncheck Create Associative Dimen-
to control the layers associated with the
file being exported. sions to export dimensions as simple
CAD entities that are not recognized
• Split Wall Assemblies Into Layers -
dimensions by other programs. Associa-
Wall assemblies can be split into layers,
tive dimensions are recognized by Auto-
allowing them to be edited separately.
CAD and many other CAD programs.
• Export only displayed layers - Select
• Check Export Pattern Lines to export
this radio button to export only those lay-
pattern lines. Pattern lines are exported as
ers that display on screen.
normal CAD lines.
• Export all used and named layers -
• Check Export Filled Areas to export
Select this radio button to export all lay-
filled areas as AutoCAD 2D solid enti-
ers that either have something on them or
ties.
have a layer name specified. See “Layer
Display Options Dialog” on page 121. • Check Export AutoCAD Index Colors
to automatically map all colors used in
• Select a Layer Set to export. See “Layer
the drawing to the closest 256 AutoCAD
Sets” on page 118.
Index (ACI) color. Black (rgb 0,0,0) and
• Click the Define Layers button to edit white (rgb 255,255,255) are mapped to
the selected layer set. See “Layer Display ACI 7.
Dimension lines using non-default primary
or secondary formatting will lose their
Create a custom layer set to accommo- changes and will use the default format(s)
date desired naming conventions or dis-
upon export.
play attributes.
8 When you are satisfied with your

Other Options selections, click Save to export the file
7
as specified.
• Scaling Unit - Select the unit of measure- The file is now ready to be imported by
ment to be used. For best results, choose another program.
Additional 2D Export Information

The export process converts high level Chief Supported Entities
Architect objects (doors, windows, etc) into
simple, CAD-based objects (lines, arcs, etc). The following entity types are currently
Chief Architect exports all data to supported for 2D export:
AutoCAD’s Model Space.
964
Line - The simplest entity. In AutoCAD, Block Insert - A block insert is a reference
lines are 3 dimensional with the Z coordinate to a block, which is a named collection of
set to zero. entities. A block can also contain block
inserts.
Arc - Arcs have a start angle, end angle and
radius.
Line Types
Circle - Fully Supported.
A line type, or line style, is used by layers
Multi Line Text - If exporting to an and entities to determine how lines are
AutoCAD release that supports multi-line drawn. Chief Architect line types installed
text, Chief Architect writes the file as multi- with the program are supported on export;
line text. If exporting to a version that does custom, user-created line styles, however, are
not support multi-line text, the file is written not. See “Line Styles” on page 879.
as simple text.
Unicode Text - Fully supported. Layers
Polylines - Polylines are a collection of Layers in other systems are similar to Chief
points with lines or arcs connecting them. Architect layers, but there are some subtle
Chief Architect supports both lines and arcs. differences. Layer information is mapped as
Arcs are referred to as bulges in AutoCAD. follows:
Dimensions - Each dimension has an

Chief Other Systems
associated block containing a representation
Architect
of the dimension as it is drawn in Chief
Architect. It also contains all the data to Name Name
recreate that information. Color Nearest AutoCAD Color. Chief
Architect uses the default Auto-
• When an exported dimension is modified CAD color table to determine this
in AutoCAD or other CAD program, its mapping.
appearance changes. Display On
• Chief Architect does not support arrow- Size Line Weight. In AutoCAD, line
head styles or fonts. weights are determined by a
• Three kinds of dimensions are generated: table of mm line widths. Chief
Architect maps to the closest
Aligned, Rotated and 3 Point Angular.
match in the default line weight
• Please refer to AutoCAD documentation table based the Line Weight
for more information. Scale set in the Page Setup dia-
log. See “Page Setup Dialog” on
page 1004.
Note: Uncheck “Use Associative Dimensions”
Style Line type
in the Export Drawing File dialog if the CAD
program you are using does not support Lock Lock
AutoCAD Associative dimensions. See
“Export Drawing File Dialog” on page 963.
965
3D Data Import Requirements
3D Data Import Requirements

Importing a symbol that can be used by Chief • The face data should be assigned to dif-
Architect is a relatively simple process that ferent layers so that you can map them to
begins with previously created 3D data. This the correct materials when viewing them
3D data often comes from a program other in 3D. It is helpful to name your layers
than Chief Architect. If you use another 3D using a convention that identifies that
modeling program to create the 3D data, be materials should be assigned to each sub-
aware of the following requirements before component.
attempting to create symbols. • Pay attention to the origin and orientation
of the 3D data when designing symbols.
Chief Architect is not able to provide Chief Architect allows some adjustment
support for any third party software. when creating the symbol, but it is easier
to build the 3D data correctly before
There are a number of requirements that importing it into Chief Architect. For
must be met before any 3D data can be used more information about defining the ori-
to create a symbol in Chief Architect: gin, see “Symbol Origin” on page 988.
• The 3D data must be stored in a standard • Chief Architect does not support grouped
Drawing Exchange File (.dxf), AutoCAD objects in symbols imported from .3ds
Drawing (.dwg), object (.obj), 3D Studio files.
Mesh (.3ds) or SketchUp (.skp) file for-
mat. If you have 3D data in another for- Surface Normals
mat, you must convert it into one these
formats first. If you use third party software to help you
create the .dxf /.dwg/.obj/.3ds./skp files that
• Geometry and material information will be turned into symbols, you should be
stored in .3ds files are imported; cameras familiar with the concept of surface normals.
and lights are not.
A surface normal is a vector
• The 3D model must be composed of 3D
that is perpendicular to the
DWG or 3DSOLID solid entities, or face
plane of a surface. This
data. Faces are typically referred to as 3D
vector points in one
faces, polygonal faces, or poly meshes.
direction, determined by the
Other types of entities such as lines,
way the face is drawn.
curves, circles, polylines, and free form
surfaces can exist in the file but are not If the face is drawn
imported when the symbol is created. clockwise, the surface normals are directed
This is true for all (.dxf /.dwg/.obj/.3ds/ outward, if the face is drawn counter-
.skp) file types. clockwise, the surface normals point inward.
966
right shows which direction the surface

normal for each face points as a result.
Many objects can be drawn using only one
side of each face. A cube is a good example.
The inside of a cube is not visible when only
the outside faces are drawn. When the inside
faces are not calculated, 3D views in Chief
Architect generate faster. Chief Architect
assumes that the face on the positive side of
the normal vector is the outside face.
A time saving option, Make Faces Double
Sided, allows you to view faces from any
The cube on the left shows which direction perspective. See “3D Tab” on page 975.
each face was drawn and the cube on the
Importing 3D Symbols
Chief Architect supports the import of To drag and drop a 3D symbol
3D surface and 3D solid objects saved
1. Open the plan in which you would like
to .dxf, .dwg, .3ds, .obj, and .skp formats.
to import a 3D symbol and remain in
There are two ways to import a 3D symbol floor plan view.
into Chief Architect: 2. Open a Windows Explorer window in
• By dragging and dropping the file from front of the Chief Architect program
Windows Explorer into floor plan view. window.
• Using the Import 3D Symbol dialog. 3. If the Explorer window fills your screen,
click the Restore Down button at the top
Symbols imported by clicking and dragging
right and resize the window so that the
are imported for use in the current plan,
Chief Architect program window can be
while those imported using the Import 3D
seen behind it.
Symbol dialog are also saved in the Import
library category. See “Libraries” on page 4. Click on the desired .3ds, .obj or .skp
682. file and drag it into the Chief Architect
program window.
Only .3ds, .obj, and .skp files can be
imported by dragging and dropping; 3D .dxf/ 5. When your cursor changes to a +, click
.dwg files can only be imported using the in the drawing area to place as many
Import 3D Symbol dialog. copies of the symbol as desired. When
you are finished, select a different tool.
Symbols imported by clicking and dragging
are imported as generic stand-alone interior
967
fixtures. If you wish to assign different you try to drag and drop group-selected
characteristics to a symbol, use the Import files in Windows Explorer, only the file
3D Symbol dialog to import it. that was selected first is imported.
• When imported as a group, symbols must
Importing Multiple Symbols be assigned to the same symbol category.
More than one symbol can be imported into If you wish to assign them to different
the Chief Architect library at a time provided categories, they must be imported sepa-
that the following requirements are met: rately.
• The symbols are located in the same Symbols that are imported as a group are
folder on your computer. assigned names based on their original file
names with the file extension omitted.
• Multiple symbols can only be imported
using the Import 3D Symbol dialog. If
Import 3D Symbol Dialog

Select File> Import> 3D Symbol to
open the Import 3D Symbol dialog.
1
2
5
3
1 Look in - Browse to the location of the 2 The names of any .dxf, .dwg, .3ds, .obj
3D symbol file(s) on your computer. and .skp files in the selected location
display here.
968
3 Click on a file in list above to select it • Choose the symbol category from the
and display its File name here. drop-down list, which affects how the
symbol will behave and how it can be
In the Files of type drop-down, you can
edited.
select a particular file type to narrow the
variety of files that can be seen in this dialog. • Check Add Symbol to Library to save
the symbol in the Import library category.
• To select a group of files, click on the
This is always checked when multiple
first one, hold down the Shift key, then
symbols files are selected. See “Adding a
click on another file. The two files plus
New Object” on page 700.
all files in between are selected.
• Click the Advanced button to open the
• To select multiple files individually, click
symbol’s specification dialog. See “Sym-
on one, hold down the Ctrl key, then click
bol Specification Dialog” on page 974.
on additional files. Only the files you
click on are selected.
5 Click Open to import the symbol, then
• To select all files in the directory, click on click in floor plan view to place the
one and press Ctrl + A. Only do this if symbol at that location. Continue clicking to
you wish to import all files in the folder. place as many copies of the symbol as
needed. Select another tool when finished.
4 Import symbol options - By default, Note: If you import a .obj, .3ds or .skp file
Chief Architect will import a 3D file as
a generic stand-alone interior fixture. If you with textures that are already present in your
prefer, you can select different attributes library, the Texture Filename Conflict
instead. dialog opens. See “Texture Filename
Conflict” on page 970.
3D Symbols and Materials

When a symbol is imported into Chief display in the list on the left side of the
Architect, material definitions may be Materials window.
included with it. Whether and how material OBJ Files
information is included depends on the
symbol’s file format. See “About Materials” Material definitions for most .obj files are
on page 707. saved in a separate file with the .mtl file
extension. If such a file exists, the materials
DXF/DWG Files
associated with the .obj file display in the list
.dxf/.dwg files do not include information on the left side of the Materials window.
about material definitions. If the .dxf/.dwg
If Chief Architect does not receive material
file associated with a symbol is changed, all
definition information in an accompanying
previously specified material information for
.mtl file, default material properties are
the symbol will be lost.
assigned.
All layers, layer names, solids and instances
of blocked solids from the .dxf/.dwg file
969
Material definitions for .obj files can also it. The associated texture files are copied to
include texture information in the form of the user’s Textures folder.
image files (.jpg, .png, etc). SKP Files
In order to properly import an .obj file, Chief The textures associated with a .skp file are
Architect needs the .obj file, the .mtl file, saved in the file. After you import a symbol
and any referenced texture files. If a texture and either place it in a plan or add it to the
file is not available, the material it is Library, these textures are saved in the Chief
associated with is created without a texture. Architect Textures folder. See “Chief
The material definitions associated with an Architect Data” on page 44.
imported .obj symbol are not available for Chief Architect does not support textures in
use by other objects in Chief Architect until .tga file format, nor does it support deformed
that symbol has been placed into a plan. The textures. If a texture associated with a .skp
associated texture files are then copied to the file is a .tga, it will not be imported; if it is
user’s Textures folder. See “Chief Architect deformed, it will be imported without the
Data” on page 44. deformations.
3DS Files
Material definitions for .3ds files refer to Texture Filename Conflict
texture information in separate image files. If a texture of the same name already exists
In order to properly import a .3ds file, Chief in the plan when an .obj, .3ds or .skp file is
Architect needs these referenced image files. imported, the Texture Filename Conflict
If a texture file is not available, the material dialog displays.
it is associated with will be created without
• Select Rename the imported texture, • Select Use the existing texture instead
then click the Browse button to create a of the imported texture or Replace the
copy of the texture’s image file with a existing texture with the imported tex-
new name that you specify. ture to either keep the existing texture or
replace it with the new, imported one.
970
• Check Do this for all remaining tex- selection for all textures with filename
tures in this object to use the same conflicts associated with this symbol.
Exporting a 3D Model in DXF/DWG Format

The entire 3D model, including A-APPL-MAIN Appliance
geometry, can be exported from Chief A-CASE-CABF Cabinet Door
Architect as a 3D file, with all surfaces A-CASE-CABN Cabinet Box
exported as 3DFACE entities. This file can A-CASE-CNTR Cabinet Counter Top
then be imported by any program that is fully A-CASE-GLAS Cabinet Glass
compatible with AutoCAD’s 3D .dxf or .dwg
A-CASE-SOFF Soffit
format.
A-CASE-TOEA Cabinet Toe Area
A-CEIL-BAY Bay / Bow Window
A 3D model exported to .dxf/.dwg does Ceiling
not include any material or texture infor-
A-CEIL-MAIN Platform Ceiling
mation.
A-CEIL-SLOP Roof Ceiling
To export the 3D model, a 3D view must be A-DOOR-STND Door
active. Make sure that everything to be A-EQPM-DOOR Window Hardware
exported is visible. If you use the delete A-EQPM-HDWR Cabinet Hardware
surfaces tool, the deleted surfaces are not A-FIXT-GLAS Fixture Glass
exported. A-FIXT-MAIN Fixture
A-FLOR-BAY Bay / Bow Window
When the model is ready, select File>
Floor
Export> 3D Model (DWG/DXF) . Give A-FLOR-MAIN Platform Floor
the file a name, making sure to save it in the A-FOOT-FOOT Footing Top
desired location. The 3D model is created.
A-FRAM-CEIL Ceiling Framing
A-FRAM-DECK Deck Framing
Layer Names for 3D A-FRAM-GENL Framing
DWG/DXF Models A-FRAM-JOIS Floor Framing
When you export a 3D model, all surfaces A-FRAM-ROOF Roof Framing
are exported as 3DFACE entities. Each entity A-FRAM-TRUS Truss Framing
represents a surface in the 3D model. The A-FRAM-WALL Wall Framing
entities are placed on layers that are named A-FURN-MAIN Furniture
by Chief Architect. The names currently A-GLAZ-DOOR Door Glass
used by Chief Architect are listed below. A-GLAZ-WIND Window
A-HRAL-BAL Stair Baluster
AutoCAD Layer Chief Architect A-HRAL-BLST Railing Baluster
Name Surface / Object
A-HRAL-NWEL Newel
971
Exporting a 3D Model in 3DS Format
A-HRAL-RAIL Handrail A-WDWK-MOLD Molding

A-CASE-CABD Cabinet Drawer A-WDWK-SHLF Shelf
A-MASN-FIRE Fireplace A-WDWK-TRIM Interior Door /
A-NONE-NONE Miscellaneous Window Trim
A-PLAT-RIM Platform Rim C-PROP-CURB Curb
A-RISR-MAIN Stair Riser C-PROP-ROAD Road
A-ROOF-EAVE Roof Soffit C-PROP-TERA Terrain
A-ROOF-FASC Roof Fascia C-PROP-TRFE Terrain Feature
A-ROOF-MAIN Roof C-PROP-TRSK Terrain Skirt
A-STRS-RUNR Stair Runner E-ELEC-TRIM Electrical
A-STRS-TRED Stair Tread
A-STRS-UNDR Stair Bottom DXF Code
A-WALL-BAY Bay / Bow Window
Each layer name exported can include a DXF
Wall
Code for the materials applied to objects on
A-WALL-EXTW Corner Board that layer. If a material has been specified for
A-WALL-MAIN Wall an object and appears on its surface, the DXF
A-WALL-PAPE Wallcovering code for the material is included in the layer
A-WALL-PONY Pony Wall name.
A-WDWK-EXTR Exterior Door /
DXF Codes are specified for each material in
Window Trim
the Plan Materials dialog. See “Plan
A-WDWK- Exterior Sash
EXTTRIM
Exporting a 3D Model in 3DS Format

The entire 3D model, including not they are visible, but if you use the delete
geometry, can be exported from Chief surfaces tool, the deleted surfaces are not
Architect as a 3D .3ds file. A .3ds file can be exported.
opened by any program that is compatible
When the model is ready, select File>
with 3D Studio’s .3ds format.
Export> 3D Model (3DS) , and enter a
To export the 3D model, a 3D view must be file name and location.
active. All surfaces are exported whether or
972
Check Truncate Texture Names to 8.3 applications that support only legacy .3ds
format to truncate material and object names files.
to an eight character file name with a three
character extension. This allows import into
973
Chapter 35:
Custom Symbols
Chief Architect provides a complete set of Custom symbols can also be edited and
architectural tools for highly customized added to the library. See “Libraries” on page
design, as well as the vast selection of 682.
objects in the Library Browser that can be
used to add more detail to a plan. Chapter Contents
In addition, if you don’t find precisely what • Symbol Specification Dialog
you need, you can either import symbols • Get Last Symbol
from third party sources or create your own • Convert to Symbol
symbols in Chief Architect. See “Importing • Editing Custom Symbols
3D Symbols” on page 967.
Symbol Specification Dialog

The Symbol Specification dialog allows copy of the symbol placed in your plan is
you to specify the attributes of a symbol edited.
before it is imported, as well as to edit • Select a symbol in your plan and click the
existing symbols in either a plan or the
Library Browser. Open Symbol edit button. Editing a
symbol in a plan affects the selected sym-
This dialog can be accessed in several ways. bol only: the symbol saved in the library
The method used determines whether the and other instances of the symbol in plans
original symbol in the library or a single are not affected. Cabinet symbols cannot
be edited in this manner.
974
• Click on a symbol in an Unlocked • Click the Advanced button in the Import

library and select Edit> Open 3D Symbol dialog. Editing a symbol as it
Symbol . Editing a symbol in the is imported determines the initial attri-
library changes this original symbol and butes that it will have once brought into a
all future instances of it, but not any sym- plan or saved in the library. See “Import-
bols already placed in a plan. Cabinet ing 3D Symbols” on page 967.
symbols cannot be edited in this manner. • Click the Advanced button in the
See “Open Symbol” on page 699. Convert to Symbol dialog. See “Convert
to Symbol” on page 987
3D Tab
The options in the 3D window affect the
symbol’s appearance in 3D views.
1 7
2
3
4
5
6 8
1 Enter the path name of the file you want If you assign a new .dxf/.dwg/.obj/.3ds/.skp
to import, or click Browse to locate a file to an existing symbol, all material
file on your computer. This field is only information is lost. See “Materials” on page
active if the selected symbol is placed in a 706.
plan or saved in an Unlocked library.
975
2 This informational line indicates the • Check Automatic Edge Lines to have
Number Of Faces that the selected Chief Architect automatically determine
symbol has. Although there is no limit to the which lines display as surface edge lines
number of faces, large numbers can increase in 3D views.
render time.
If a file with faces containing more than

four vertices is imported, the faces are
truncated, resulting in an object that appears
to have holes. The best remedy is to re-
export the model from the original application
using only triangular or quadrilateral faces.
3 Specify how the selected symbol’s 3D

Faces are generated.
• Check Double-Sided to make all symbol The center edge lines on this object do not display
when Automatic Edge Lines is checked
faces double sided. While making faces
double sided increases the amount of
Edge lines emphasize the edges and corners
information calculated for rendered
of the symbol in 3D views. Each face has up
views, it also simplifies the symbol build-
to 4 edge lines. Some edge lines are helpful
ing process by ensuring that all surfaces
in third-party programs but are not needed in
are visible from any perspective.
Chief Architect. If your modeling program
has the capability to turn edges off, that may
To understand this option, it is helpful to
be the ideal place to do so.
be familiar with the concept of surface
normals. See “Surface Normals” on page • Specify the Surface Smoothing Angle,
966. which determines whether two adjacent
surfaces are shown with a smooth or
• Reversed - Chief Architect assumes that
sharp angle between them in rendered
faces in the imported model are drawn
views. If the angle between two surface
counterclockwise and automatically
normals is less than this angle, normal
reverses them to clockwise on import. If
averaging is used to give the effect of a
the model is already clockwise, click
curved surface. This value also effects the
Reversed to keep that orientation.
generation of automatic edge lines.
Chief Architect always imports the front
A good example is a hexagonal cylinder.
side of faces in .skp files; however, it
The angle between adjacent surfaces is
does not support faces with different tex-
360/8, or 45°. If you want it to look cylin-
tures on the front and back and will
drical, then the Surface Smoothing
import the back side as a separate face. In
Angle should be set to something greater
many cases, it is necessary to check Dou-
than 45°. If you want to make the cylin-
ble-Sided when importing a .skp file.
976
der look hexagonal, set it to less than 45°. type of symbol and the origin from the
The default is 35°. original .dxf/.dwg/.obj/3ds file.
4 Select the Units of measurement that 6 Rotation - These settings allow you to
were used to create the symbol. If any rotate the selected symbol(s) about the
units other than inches or mm are selected, X, Y and Z axes.
the program will convert the data into units • Select an axis and click Rotate + or
appropriate for Chief Architect. Rotate - to rotate the object around that
axis in a clockwise or counterclockwise
Note: SKP files are always imported using direction, respectively.
inches, regardless of the default units used in
• Specify the number of Degrees to rotate
the plan file.
the symbol in the text field. 90° is set by
default.
5 Check Specify Origin to specify how
the selected symbol is positioned when
7 A preview of the symbol’s appearance
placed in a Chief Architect plan. Specifying in 3D views displays here. The preview
a particular origin is helpful if the selected updates as changes are made to the settings
symbol will be inserted into another object, in this dialog.
such as a sink to be placed in a cabinet. See
When multiple symbols are selected, the
“Symbol Origin” on page 988.
most recently selected symbol displays.
There are three options here:
• Leave this box unchecked to accept Chief If changes are made to an existing sym-
Architect’s default origins for the symbol in a plan or the Library Browser, you
bol. Checking this box and entering 0 in may also want to generate a new 2D Block to
the X, Y, and Z fields produces the same represent it in floor plan view.
results. For most symbols, this is the
appropriate option. 8 Specify how the symbol’s Name should
appear in the Symbol Specification
• Check this box and enter new values to dialog, its object specification dialog, its
manually adjust the origin. The values in label and in the Materials List. See
the X, Y, and Z fields represent the offset “Materials Lists” on page 1048.
of the symbol’s origin point from the
default Chief Architect origin. This • Enter a Symbol Name up to 63 charac-
option is appropriate for symbols that ters. Symbol names are case sensitive.
will be placed within other objects. Not available when multiple symbols are
selected.
• Check this box and leave the X, Y, and Z
values unchanged to use the origin point • Select a Display Size format from the
from the original .dxf/.dwg/.obj/.3ds/ drop-down list to append the name of the
.skp file. The values in the X, Y, and Z symbol with size information. Choose
fields represent the difference between “None” to append nothing to the name.
the default Chief Architect origin for that
977
2D Block Tab
The 2D Block tab allows you to select a 2D This tab is not available for Windows, Doors,
CAD block to represent the selected symbol Cabinet Doors, and Doorways.
in floor plan view. See “CAD Blocks” on
page 912.
1
4
2 5
1 Select a CAD block from the list of • Check No Fill (transparent) to have the
Available Blocks. 2D background be transparent.
• Check Use Original Plan Colors to
If you do not see a CAD block in this list make the symbol’s fill color white.
that suits your needs, you can create
your own. See “Custom 2D Symbols” on 4 A preview of the selected CAD Block
page 913. displays here.
5 Enter a Rotation Angle to rotate the 2D

2 Click Generate Block to automatically CAD block from its original angle. The
generate a CAD block based on an orientation of the 2D CAD block in floor
overhead projection of the selected symbol. plan view is independent of the symbol
orientation in 3D view.
3 Plan Fill Color - Click the color bar to
select a fill color for the 2D symbol.
See “Color Chooser Dialog” on page 727.
978
Options Tab
The settings on the Options tab affect how a
symbol behaves and can be placed.
2 4
3
The options that display in this window vary,

4 Select a Type of Object from the drop-
depending on the type of symbol selected. down list. Available for doorway,
cabinet door/drawer, fixture, furniture and
1 Options - How each of these options window symbols.
affects a symbol is detailed in the
following table. Default Light Offset - This field is available
only for electrical symbols in the process of
2 Height Off Floor - Enter a value if you being imported or converted, and is enabled
want the symbol to rest a certain height
when the Light option is checked. Enter a
above the floor.
distance to offset the light source from the
3 Click Material Components to open symbol’s origin.
the Components dialog. Not available
The Light Offset for an existing symbol can
for symbols in the process of being imported
be specifyed in its Electrical Service
or converted. See “Components Dialog” on
Specification dialog. See “Light Data Tab”
page 1062.
on page 781.
979
Available Options
The following table lists each of the options
that are available and how this option affects
the behavior of the symbol:
Option Categories Effect on Symbol

110 / 220 Volts Electrical If a 110V or 220V item is on a wall and you select Build>
Electrical> Auto Place Outlets , an outlet is not
placed in that area.
3-Way Electrical Electrical symbol is a 3-way switch.
4-Way Electrical symbol is a 4-way switch.
Appears in appli- Fixture Check this box to make this fixture appear in the Appli-
ance schedule ance Schedule.
Appears in HVAC Fixture Check this box to make this fixture appear in the HVAC
schedule Schedule.
Appears in plumb- Fixture Check this box to make this fixture appear in the Plumb-
ing schedule ing Schedule.
Breaker Panel Electrical No effect
Can sit on base Fixtures, Allows fixture to be placed on top of a cabinet. Symbols
cabinet or table Furniture, remain selectable and independent of cabinet after place-
Electrical ment. Can also be placed independently, 0" from floor to
bottom.
Ceiling Mounted Electrical Electrical item is attached to ceiling at origin.
Doorbell Electrical Uses switch default height.
Fan Electrical Recognized by Plan Check as needing to be connected
to a switch.
Fits under wall Fixtures Attaches fixture top to bottom of selected wall cabinet
cabinet and fixture back to adjacent wall. Fixture can be placed
independently on plan, and locates itself 54" from floor to
bottom.
Floor Mounted Electrical Electrical item is attached to floor at origin. Use Height
Off Floor to specify distance from floor.
GFCI Electrical If an electrical symbol is given the GFCI attribute and is
placed behind a cabinet in a bathroom, Build> Electri-
cal> Auto Place Outlets recognizes it and does not
insert a GFCI outlet behind the cabinet.
Hangs on wall Fixtures and Fixture attaches to wall at 54" from floor if placed within
Furniture 8" of the nearest wall. Can be placed independently of
wall if placed more than 8" away and inserts at 54" from
floor to bottom.
980

Inserts into Fixtures Fixture attaches itself centrally to the front of a full height
cabinet front cabinet. The fixture becomes merged with the cabinet,
and is selectable and resizable only from the Cabinet
Specification dialog. Cannot be placed independently.
When this is the single option selected, fixture can be
placed in a full height cabinet only.
*Note: CAD must also be the same size as the 3D's or
width/depth modification is required. For modification,
depth must equal distance from back of block to point
wanted to attach to cabinet, in order for 2D CAD to show
properly.
Inserts into Fixtures Fixture rests on top of base cabinet, merging itself to it.
countertop Cannot be placed independently. Fixture is not select-
able.
Light Electrical Creates light source with available properties to individ-
ual symbols. Recognized by Plan Check as needing to
be connected to a switch.
Move casing out Doorways This option only applies when a sill is present. Check this
1/2 inch, 1 inch at and Windows box to have the casing moved out from the window or
sill doorway. The option System Supplies Rectangular Cas-
ing must also be checked.
Mounts under wall Electrical Symbol attaches to underside of wall cabinet if one is
cabinet present, or to the ceiling if one is not.
No default door in Doorways Check this option to exclude a door from the doorway.
this doorway and Windows
Outdoor Electrical Plan Check warns that this is not a waterproof switch/out-
let.
Outlet Electrical Can be placed automatically using the Place Outlets
option. Electrical Defaults determines placement above
floor.
Phone Electrical Presence is recognized by Plan Check. Uses outlet
default height.
Requires high/ Fixtures If against a wall, Place Outlets places an outlet of the
standard voltage appropriate type behind the fixture. Also makes fixture
appear in Appliance Schedule.
Requires natural Fixtures Appears in Appliance Schedule.
gas
Requires water Fixtures Appears in Plumbing Schedule.
drain
Sits on floor Fixtures and Default option for Fixtures. Places fixture on floor.
Furniture
Sits on Roof Fixtures and Places symbol on top of roof plane.
Furniture
981

Smoke Detector Electrical Recognized by Plan Check as a requirement for certain
rooms.
Switch Electrical Recognized by Plan Check for connection to a switched
item. Electrical Defaults determines height above floor.
Switched Electrical Recognized by Plan Check as needing to be connected
to a switch.
System supplies Doorways Chief Architect automatically supplies rectangular casing
rectangular casing and Windows if your model does not already have a casing.
Thermostat Electrical No affect. Uses switch default height.
TV Electrical Presence is recognized by Plan Check. Uses outlet
default height.
Wall Mounted Electrical Electrical item is attached to wall at origin.
Available Types
Item Type Placement Affect

Appliances Placement in base cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Front option is
(built-in base cabs) selected.
Appliances Placement under wall cabinet is allowed if Fits under Wall Cabinet option is
(under wall cabs) selected.
Cooktops Placement in cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Top option is selected.
Ovens (built-in) Placement in cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Top option is selected.
Refrigerators Placement in cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Front option is
(built-in) selected.
Sinks (bathroom) Placement in cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Top option is selected.
Sinks (kitchen) Placement in cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Top option is selected.
Sinks (laundry) Placement in cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Top option is selected.
Materials Tab
The Materials tab allows you to assign information, so the symbol’s components
materials to the symbol’s components. will not have materials assigned to them. See
“3D Symbols and Materials” on page 969.
The Materials tab is similar to the Materials
tab in many specification dialogs. See
If the selected symbol is in the process of
being imported, bear in mind that .dxf/.dwg
files do not include material definition
982
Sizing Tab
The settings on the Sizing tab allow you to
control the size of a symbol’s bounding box A symbol’s actual size cannot be
and how the symbol behaves when resized. changed in the Symbol Specification
dialog. Once created, some symbols can be
resized using their edit handles or by clicking
the Open Object edit button. See “Resizing
1 Bounding Box Dimensions - Specify 2 Stretch Planes define where a symbol

the Width, Depth and Height of the stretches when resized. If no stretch
selected symbol’s bounding box. These planes are used, the symbol resizes
values are measured from the symbol’s uniformly. See “Stretch Planes and Zones”
origin with 1/16" (1 mm) accuracy. Not on page 990.
available when multiple symbols are • Planes defined in the first column, YZ
selected. plane at X=, run along the X axis, from
When a symbol is first created, its bounding the back of the symbol to its front and
box is the same size as the actual 3D object, affect how its width changes.
and in most cases this is appropriate. See • Planes defined in the second column, XZ
“Bounding Boxes” on page 989. plane at Y=, run along the Y axis, per-
pendicular to those in the first column
983
and from one side of the symbol to the

other. They affect how its depth changes. Note: Stretch Planes and Stretch Zones do
not affect how a symbol’s 2D CAD block
• Planes defined in the third column, XY resizes. CAD blocks always resize in a uni-
plane at Z=, run parallel to the floor or form manner. If you resize a symbol based on
ground and affect how its height changes. custom Stretch Planes and Zones, consider
generating a new CAD Block. See “2D Block
3 Stretch Zones define an area between Tab” on page 978.
two planes that stretches uniformly,
leaving the area outside unaffected.
Cabinet Front Symbols Tab

The Cabinet Front Symbols tab is only control the function of both the cabinet and
available for Cabinet symbols as they are its individual parts once it is imported.
being imported. The settings on this tab
1 2
1 Layer/Component Assignment - Cabinet symbols should not include

Specify the type of component for each
layer associated with the cabinet symbol. hardware. Handles and hinges are
assigned according to cabinet defaults when
Click a layer in the list, then select the type the cabinet is created. See “Hardware Tab”
of cabinet component type from the Select on page 571.
Component drop-down list.
984
2 Cabinet Type - Specify whether the

cabinet symbol is a Base Cabinet, Wall
Cabinet or Full Height Cabinet.
Opening Tab
The settings on the Opening tab define the The Opening tab is only available for
selected Window or Doorway symbol’s Windows and Doorways.
rough opening when placed in a wall.
1 An editable diagram of the symbol’s drop-down and choose the section diagram
wall opening displays here. that most closely resembles the rough
opening shape that you want. You can then
Edit the symbol’s opening size and shape by
edit the section as needed.
clicking on a dimension number and typing
the desired value. To update the preview,
press the Tab key. The size and shape of a symbol’s open-
ing is independent of the symbol’s size.
2 If a window or doorway has an angled Make sure that the two are compatible.
or arch top, click the Opening Sections
Plan View Tab

The Plan View tab controls the appearance of view.
Window or Doorway symbols in floor plan
985
The Plan View tab is only available for

Windows and Doorways.
1 An editable diagram of the symbol’s The size of a symbol’s units is entirely

representation in floor plan view
displays here. The settings here also affect independent of the size of the symbol
how many units the symbol contains as well itself. Make sure that the total width of the
symbol’s units in plan view equals the width
as their size in both 2D and 3D views. of the 3D symbol.
• To change the size of the symbol’s units
in floor plan view, click on a dimension
number and type the desired value. Press
2 Click the Plan View Sections drop-
down and choose the number of units
the Tab key to update the diagram. contained by the Doorway or Window
• To change a unit in the preview from a symbol. Up to five units are possible.
window to a door swing, click on the unit
in the diagram.

This tab is available when the Symbol Specification dialog. See “Plant Information
Specification dialog is opened for a plant. Tab” on page 624.
The options are the same as the Plant
Information tab of the Plant Symbol
986

This tab is available when the Symbol Description tab of the Plant Symbol
Specification dialog is opened for a plant. Specification dialog. See “Plant Description
The options are the same as the Plant Tab” on page 628.
Get Last Symbol

If you import or convert a symbol that Open a view in which the symbol can be
cannot be placed in the current view placed or create an object to place the symbol
or must be contained by another object that is into, then select Tools> Symbol> Get Last
not present in the view, you can quickly Symbol to retrieve the last symbol
select it for placement once the needed created and click in your plan to place the
conditions are met using the Get Last symbol.
Symbol command.
Convert to Symbol
While 3D symbols can be imported To convert an object to a symbol
from third parties, you can also create
1. Create a camera view or overview in
your own symbols in Chief Architect using
which the object or objects that you wish
any combination of architectual and CAD-
to convert to a single symbol are the
based objects.
only things displaying.
2. Select Tools> Symbol> Convert to
A wide variety of unique objects can be
created using the Primitive Tools. See Symbol .
“Primitive Tools” on page 649.
3. The Convert to Symbol dialog displays.
When the object(s) are configured as desired,
you can use the Convert to Symbol tool
to create a single symbol assigned to a
category of objects that reflects how the
object will be used. For example, if you
designed a cabinet door, select Cabinet Door/
Drawer as the symbol’s category so you can
assign the resulting symbol to a cabinet. 4. Choose the symbol category from the
drop-down list.
5. Check Add To Library if you would
like the symbol to be added to the library
987
Editing Custom Symbols
associated with the symbol category you extensive control over the symbol’s
selected. See “Adding a New Object” on settings. See “Symbol Specification
page 700. Dialog” on page 974.
6. Check Show advanced options to open 7. Click OK to close the dialog and con-
the Symbol Specification dialog when vert your custom object to a symbol.
you click OK, where you have more

Custom symbols can be selected and edited 2. Click the Open Symbol edit button
much like other objects in the program. A to open the Symbol Specification dia-
symbol’s category determines exactly what log.
editing options are available; however, most
symbols can be edited using the edit handles, 3. On the 3D tab, check Specify Origin.
edit toolbar and specification dialog. See 4. Adjust the X, Y and/or Z values as
“Editing Objects” on page 130. needed:
Symbols have some additional options that • To insert the back of the symbol into
allow you to control how the symbol behaves the side of another object at a particular
when it is placed, selected, moved and distance, specify that distance in the Y
resized. field as a positive value.
• To insert the bottom of the symbol into
the top of another object, specify the
Symbol objects have two specification
dialogs: one based on its object type
distance that it should be dropped as a
and accessed using the Open Object edit negative value in the Z field.
button, and the Symbol Specification dialog
The origin point also determines the location
accessed using the Open Symbol edit button.
of a symbol’s bounding box and 2D block.
Unlike the 3D object itself, its bounding box
Symbol Origin and 2D block cannot be offset from the
All symbols have an origin point, which origin.
determines how the object is positioned The location of a symbol’s origin point is
when it is placed in a plan. You can offset a typically on its back surface, at the bottom
symbol’s origin point so that when placed in center; however, this may vary, depending on
a plan, it easily inserts into another object. the symbol’s category.
To create an insertable symbol

1. Make a note of the symbol’s actual size
on the General tab of its specification
dialog.
988
Origin 0,0,0
located middle,
bottom, back of
object
Window origin located bottom, outside, center.
The following table lists these default origins Bounding Boxes

by symbol type.
An object’s bounding box determines the
amount of space it requires in 3D and thus
Symbol Type Origin location how close it can be moved to other objects
Cabinet Bottom, Back, Center before it bumps into them.
Cabinet Door Bottom, Back, Center
The bounding box also defines the selectable
Doors Bottom, Back, Center area around a symbol: when you click within
Doorways Bottom, Outside, Center an object’s bounding box, it will become
Electrical, Center Top selected. Similarly, the bounding box affects
Ceiling Mounted
whether an object is included in a selection
Electrical, Back, Center marquee. See “Selecting Objects” on page
Flush Mounted
144.
Electrical, Center, Bottom
Floor Mounted When a symbol is selected, its edit handles
Electrical, Center, Back display around the perimeter of its bounding
Wall Mounted box. See “Using the Edit Handles” on page
Furniture Bottom, Back, Center 30.
Fixture Bottom, Back, Center
You can create setback space for a symbol by
Geometric Shapes Bottom, Back, Center
increasing its bounding box size on the
Hardware Bottom, Back, Center
Sizing tab of the Symbol Specification
Millwork Bottom, Back, Center
dialog. See “Sizing Tab” on page 983.
Molding n/a
Plant Bottom, Back, Center To create setback space for a symbol
Sprinkler Back, Center. Height
varies. 1. Make a note of the symbol’s actual size
Windows Bottom, Outside, Center on the General tab of its specification
(of sill) dialog.
989
2. Click the Open Symbol edit button To define an X-axis (width) stretch plane
to open the Symbol Specification dia- 1. Open a symbol’s Symbol Specification
log. dialog using any of the available meth-
3. On the Sizing tab, increase the Width, ods. See “Symbol Specification Dialog”
Depth and/or Height values by the on page 974.
amount of the desired setback space. 2. On the Sizing tab, check the box beside
• The bounding box Width is always 1 to the left of the first column under
centered on the symbol’s origin point. Stretch Planes. The field to its right
• The Depth is measured from the sym- becomes active.
bol’s origin point towards its front. 3. By default, this new plane has a value of
• The Height is measured from the sym- 0” along the X axis.
bol’s origin point towards its top. • Leave it at 0” to run the plane through
You can also allow a symbol to set into the object’s default origin point.
another object by reducing its bounding box • Specify a negative number to define a
size. plane to the left of the origin.
• Specify a positive number to define a
Stretch Planes and Zones plane to the right of the origin.
Stretch Planes and Stretch Zones define 4. Click OK. When the symbol’s width is
where a symbol stretches when resized. changed, only the cross section defined
by the Stretch Plane will be affected.
If a symbol has no Stretch Planes or Zones,
its surfaces will all resize uniformly; if, on Location and effect of X-axis stretch planes
the other hand, a Stretch Plane or Zone is
defined, the object will resize only within the
plane or zone. Any portions of the symbol
located outside of the plane or zone will not
resize at all.
• A Stretch Plane is a two dimensional
plane within a symbol which increases or To define a Y-axis (depth) stretch plane
decreases in thickness as the symbol is
1. Open a symbol’s Symbol Specification
resized.
dialog.
• A Stretch Zone defines an area between
2. On the Sizing tab, check the box beside
two Stretch Planes that resizes uniformly,
1 to the left of the second column under
leaving the area outside unaffected.
Stretch Planes. The field to its right
Stretch Plane coordinates are relative to the becomes active.
symbol’s origin point. For many object types, 3. By default, this new plane has a value of
the origin is located at the bottom center of 0” along the Yaxis.
its back surface.
990
• Specify a negative number to define a To define two stretch planes

plane within the symbol.
4. Click OK. When the symbol’s depth is dialog.
changed, only the cross section defined
2. On the Sizing tab, check the boxes
beside 1 and 2 to the left of a column
Location and effect of Y-axis stretch planes under Stretch Planes. The fields to their
right becomes active.
3. Specify the desired values to define each
Stretch Plane within the symbol.
4. Click OK. When the symbol is resized,
the two cross sections defined by the
Stretch Plane will be affected.
Location and effect of two X-axis stretch planes

To define a Z-axis (height) stretch plane
dialog.
2. On the Sizing tab, check the box beside
1 to the left of the third column under
Stretch Planes. The field to its right
becomes active.
3. By default, this new plane has a value of
0” along the Z axis. To define a stretch zone
• Specify a positive number to define a
plane within the symbol.
dialog.
4. Click OK. When the symbol’s height is
2. On the Sizing tab, check the boxes
changed, only the cross section defined
beside 1 and 2 to the left of a column
under Stretch Planes. The fields to their
Location and effect of Z-axis stretch planes
right becomes active.
3. Specify values for both planes.
4. Check the box beside the corresponding
option in the Stretch Zones section of the
tab.
5. Click OK. When the symbol is resized,
only the area within the Stretch Zone
will be affected.
A symbol can have up to three Stretch Planes
in each direction, for a total of nine.
991
Chapter 36:
Printing & Plotting
Chief Architect provides a variety of printing Chapter Contents

options, from printing plan and 3D views to a • Introduction to Printing
set of templates that can be assembled into a • Printers and Plotters
3D model. • The Printing Tools
To create working drawings, you can use the • Display Options and Printing
program’s Layout facility. Multiple views of • Printing Directly from a View
the model can be arranged on pages along • Printing from Layout
with a border and title block. For more • Printing to Scale
information, see “Layout” on page 1014. • Printing Across Multiple Pages
• Printing to a PDF File
Chief Architect also allows you to save your • Line Weights
drawings in an electronic file format that can • Printing Text and Dimensions
then be sent to a printing service. • Creating Custom Sheet Sizes
• Page Setup Dialog
Screen captures are provided for • Print Dialog
illustrative purposes only and are not an • Print Image Dialog
endorsement of any products. • Print Model
992
Introduction to Printing
Sheet Size - The dimensions of the final
Always familiarize yourself with your printed output. This may or may not be the
printer or plotter before a deadline. It same as the paper size. If the sheet size and
takes a little time to configure the machine paper size are the same, only one page is
properly when you first start.
required per sheet. See “Page Setup Dialog”
on page 1004.
Chief Architect offers printing options to suit
a variety of needs. You will benefit from Paper Size - The dimensions of the paper to
understanding the output options clearly and be printed on. Specifying a paper size that is
choosing the one that makes the most sense smaller than the sheet sizescaled drawing
for the project at hand. allows large drawings to be printed across
multiple pages.
Output Options The preview diagram in the Page Setup
Printing From Layout - For professional dialog illustrates the difference between page
quality drawings and details in full size size and drawing sheet size. See “Page Setup
format, printing from layout provides the Dialog” on page 1004.
most control and the best results. For more
information, see “Layout” on page 1014.
When a Printer Paper
Printing Directly From a View - For
size of Letter (8½” x
individual drawings, you may prefer to print 11”) is selected, 8
directly from a view. The process is quick pages are required to
and allows control over scaling, positioning, fill an Architectural C
and line weights, depending on the view Drawing Sheet size
type. See “Printing Directly from a View” on (18" x 24").
page 997.
Printing to a Remote Plotter/Printer -
Plans can be saved as a .pdf file and printed Check Plot - A test printing, typically at a
remotely. See “Printing to a PDF File” on smaller scale, made before final output to
page 999. large paper format. For more information,
see “Check Plots” on page 998.
Print Model - If your final printed output
will be used to create a 3D model of your Line Weight - The thickness of a line. A
design, the Print Model feature works best. thicker line weight is easier to see, but may
See “Print Model” on page 1009. not show as much detail. See “Line Weights”
on page 999.
Terminology Printing Scale - Drawings are often printed
There are a few terms that you should to scale for accuracy. ¼" = 1' and 1 m = 50 m
familiarize yourself with. are examples of common scales.
993
Printers and Plotters
When a particular scale is not important, graphics from Windows programs. If you
drawings can also be sized to fill a particular encounter difficulties when trying to print,
area. See “Printing to Scale” on page 997. see “Troubleshooting Common Technical
Issues” on page 1083.
Printing Problems
Chief Architect can print to almost any
printer or plotter that supports printing
Printers and Plotters

There are many different types of printers Faxes to view the Printers information for
and plotters. In general, a printer is smaller, Windows. Select the printer in question, then
normally outputting 8½ x 11" (Letter or choose File> Properties.
ANSI A size), 8½ x 14" (Legal Size) or
In most Printer Properties dialogs is an
sometimes as large as 11 x 17" (Tabloid or
About button which you can click to find the
ANSI B size).
version and creation date of the driver
Plotters are typically used to output larger currently in use. If you experience printing
sheets of paper such as 17 x 22" (ANSI C), problems and yours is not the latest driver,
22 x 34" (ANSI D) or 34 x 44" (ANSI E). consider replacing it with an updated driver.
Printing to pen plotters is not supported. Visit your printer manufacturer’s Web site
for more information.
Printer Drivers Windows provides information about
Printer drivers are programs that interpret installing printer drivers. To access Windows
between software programs and the printer. Help, select Start> Help. If you have
The drivers are usually created by the problems installing a driver, refer to your
manufacturer of the printer and are typically printer documentation for technical support.
updated regularly. Different drivers are used
for different versions of Windows. Options available with one driver may
not be available with another. Printers
It is useful to keep track of the drivers for and plotters supported in one version of
each printer or plotter you use and update Windows may not be supported by the
them whenever the Windows operating manufacturer in another.
system is updated or replaced.
Clearing Printer Information
Note: You should only update your printer
driver if you are having problems printing.
Some information specific to individual
printers and plotters, such as available paper
To find the version of your printer driver, sizes, is saved with each plan and layout file.
select Start> Control Panel> Printers and You can select File> Print> Clear Printer
994
Info to clear the printer-specific information

stored with the plan or layout file.
The Printing Tools

Select File> Print to view the Print for making a physical model of your plan.
Tools submenu. See “Print Model” on page 1009.
Page Setup - Opens the Page Setup File> Print> Customize Sheet Sizes -
dialog, where printing options are set. Allows you to create custom sheet sizes. See
See “Page Setup Dialog” on page 1004. “Creating Custom Sheet Sizes” on page
1002.
Scale to Fit - Automatically selects a
scale that fits your plan to the drawing Clear Printer Info - Clears the printer
sheet. See “Printing to Scale” on page 997. information associated with the current page
setup.
Center Sheet - Automatically centers
your drawing on the sheet. See “Cen-
ter Sheet” on page 997. Toggle Buttons
Print Preview - Shows how your Toggle buttons are either on or off. When on,
view will appear when printed. See they appear depressed and remain depressed
“Print Preview” on page 996. until clicked again. See “Toolbar
Configurations” on page 112.
Print - Prints the current floor plan
view, Vector View or cross section/ Show Line Weights - When this is on,
elevation view, CAD Detail, or layout sheet. line weights appear on screen as they
See “Print Dialog” on page 1006. will print. See “Show Line Weights” on page
996.
Print Image - Prints a screen view
including images, textures and Show Sheet - Turn this toggle on for a
backdrops. See “Print Image Dialog” on preview of your plan relative to the
page 1009. current sheet size. See “Show Sheet” on page
996.
Print Model - Opens the Print Model
dialog, allowing you to print templates
Display Options and Printing

The display of objects in views can be used Objects must be visible in order for them to
to affect the printed output. Some display print; but not all items that are visible print.
options allow you to preview the printed
output on screen before any paper is used.
995
Display Options and Printing
• Camera symbols in floor plan view, CAD and dashed lines as they will appear on the
points, and the snap and reference grids, printed page.
for example, do not print.
When Show Line Weights is off, dashed
• The Reference Display does print if it is lines look the same, regardless of the zoom
visible. See “Reference Display” on page factor.
360.
Show Line Weights can also be turned on or
off in the Preferences dialog. See
To see how your printed output will “Appearance Panel” on page 71.
appear on paper, select File> Print>
Print Preview or click the Print Preview tog-
gle button. Print Preview
Select File> Print> Print Preview for
Displaying Objects an on-screen representation of how
You can control the display of objects the current view will appear when printed.
when printing directly from a view in Objects such as camera symbols that do not
print do not display in Print Preview .
“Layer Display Options Dialog” on page
Text and dimension objects appear on-screen
121.
as they will on the printed page.
To control the display of objects in an
orthogonal view sent to layout, select the When Print Preview is on the drawing
view, click the Layout Box Layers edit sheet and line weights are displayed, and the
button, and make any needed changes in the toggle buttons Show Sheet and Show
Line Weights are overridden.
To control the display of objects in a camera
view sent to layout, turn layers on/off in the Show Sheet
view before it is sent to layout.
Select File> Print> Show Sheet to
Creating a special layer set for printing may show the drawing sheet on screen. The
be useful if you are not printing from layout. drawing sheet size is specified in the Page
See “Layer Sets” on page 118. Setup dialog. See “Page Setup Dialog” on
page 1004.
Show Line Weights
Any portion of your plan that cannot fit on
Select Tools> Display Settings> the drawing sheet at the current scale
Show Line Weights for an on-screen displays outside the sheet.
representation of line weights and line styles.
Turning Show Line Weights on or off does A blue border represents the printable area,
not affect the final printed output. which varies depending on which printer is
currently selected. This border may not
When Show Line Weights is turned on, you display on all edges of the drawing sheet. See
can Zoom In to see the location of lines “Printer Drivers” on page 994.
996
When Show Sheet is on, the drawing sheet. See “Moving Objects Using
sheet behaves as an object. Dimensions” on page 831.
• When selected at its border the sheet has

edit handles, allowing it to be resized, Note: Specifying a standard sheet size
in the Page Setup dialog is preferable to
relocated, and rotated. See “Editing
editing the sheet size on-screen.
• If the sheet size is changed, the drawing Center Sheet
sheet dimensions update in the Page
Setup dialog. See “Page Setup Dialog” Select File> Print> Center Sheet to
on page 1004. center the drawing sheet on the
drawing. This moves the sheet relative to the
• Dimension lines locate the borders of the
drawing but does not affect the coordinates
sheet. These dimensions can be used to
of objects in the drawing. The location of the
relocate other objects in relation to the
drawing sheet is independent for each floor
of the model.
Printing Directly from a View

To print directly from any floor plan To set up print formatting before printing,
view or cross section/elevation view, select File> Print> Page Setup . See
choose File> Print> Print. See “Print Dia- “Page Setup Dialog” on page 1004.
log” on page 1006.
Rendered 3D views can be printed using
File> Print> Print Image . See “Print
Image Dialog” on page 1009.
Printing from Layout

Chief Architect layout files can be used to title block that display on all sheets and can
print professional working drawings. be printed at full size or printed at a smaller
Multiple views at different scales can be sent scale for check plots. See “Layout” on page
to each page and organized as desired. 1014.
Layout sheets can accomodate a border and
Printing to Scale
Several different print scaling options are printing determines which options you may
available. The type of view that you are choose from.
997
Printing Across Multiple Pages
Orthogonal Views Perspective Views

Floor plan views, Orthographic 3D views, Camera views and Perspective overviews
CAD details and layout pages are orthogonal display the model much the way the eye
views, which means: would see it and cannot be scaled.
• Your line of sight is at a right angle to all • Objects in the view may be at any angle
objects in the view. relative to your line of sight.
• Objects do not appear to decrease in size • Objects seem to decrease in size as their
as their distances from the viewer distances from the viewer increase.
increase.
While perspective views cannot be scaled,
Orthogonal views can be printed to scale. you can control the printed size of the view.
If Fit to Paper is selected in the Print dialog,
The scale set in the Page Setup dialog is
a percent value can be set that defines how
inherited by the Print and Send to Layout
much of the printed page to fill. See “Print
dialogs. This scale can be overridden on an
Dialog” on page 1006. 50% causes the print
individual basis in either of these dialogs.
to be 50% of both the height and width of the
See “Print Dialog” on page 1006 and
paper, not including the non-printable border.
“Sending Views to Layout” on page 1018.
If printing to an 8½ x 11 page with a 1" non-
Select File> Print> Scale to Fit in an printable border in each direction, 100%
orthogonal view to select a suitable scale and would print 7½ x 10, and Full Page 50%
recenter the drawing sheet so that everything would print 3¾ x 5. Each printer may vary
fits on the sheet. slightly.
Imperial drawing scales are typically noted Check Plots

in inches per foot. Larger scales, such as 1
inch = 50 feet or 1:200m, are often used for A check plot is a test print that allows you to
property layouts. print at a reduced scale on smaller, less
expensive paper so you can check that the
Once a view has been sent to layout, there drawing will print as expected.
are a variety of additional scaling options.
See “Rescaling Views” on page 1025. In a check plot, the drawing scale is
temporarily adjusted to a specified fraction
of its true value. Both drawing scale and line
weights are subject to this scale adjustment.
Printing Across Multiple Pages

When printing directly from a floor plan When printing to a paper size that is smaller
view, cross section/elevation view, or layout than the sheet size, a 2% overlap is used.
it is possible to print at a scale that does not Crop marks print where the paper needs to be
fit the drawing on one page. cut between pages. A solid line is drawn at
998
the drawing sheet boundary on the sides that Sheet and then Window> Fill Window
need to be cut.
. Grey lines across the drawing sheet
To see on-screen what the drawing will look indicate where the page breaks will occur.
like when printed, select File> Print> Show See “Show Sheet” on page 996.
Printing to a PDF File

The .pdf, or Portable Document Format, When you print to a .pdf print driver, you
creates viewable and printable documents will be asked for a file name and destination
and is one of the most universally compatible automatically.
and efficient file formats.
To print to .pdf
Creating a .pdf document requires that a .pdf
printer driver be installed on your computer. 1. Select your .pdf printer driver as you
This is not a physical print device, but a would select any other printer in the
software program that is recognized as a Page Setup dialog. See “Page Setup
printer by all other programs and creates a Dialog” on page 1004.
.pdf file that can be read and printed using
Adobe® Reader®. 2. Select File> Print> Print to open
the Print dialog. Your .pdf printer driver
is listed as the selected printer.
The PDF995 .pdf printer and Adobe
Reader .pdf reader are available for 3. Select the needed options in the Print
download. Select Help> Download PDF dialog, then click OK.
Printer Driver or Help> Download PDF
4. In the Save As dialog, select a File
Reader.
name and Save in location for your .pdf
file. For more about the Save As dialog,
see “Saving a Plan or Layout File” on
page 46.
Line Weights
The weight of a line refers to its thickness on numbers that correspond to the numerator of
the printed page and is described in absolute this fraction.
terms as a fraction of a unit, often 1/100th of
You can specify the Line Weight Scale by
a millimeter or 1/1000 of an inch.
defining the denominator and the unit used in
In Chief Architect, line weights are assigned this fraction in the Page Setup dialog. See
to objects, patterns or layers using whole “Page Setup Dialog” on page 1004.
999
Line Weights
• An assigned line weight of 0 draws a line

It is extremely important that every view weight of 1 pixel, the thinnest line weight
sent to layout and the layout file share a printer allows. How thick this is varies
the identical Line Weight Scale, set in the from printer to printer. See “Printers and
Page Setup dialog. Unwanted printed output
Plotters” on page 994.
can easily result when this is not the case..
Your preferred line weights and line weight Line Weights and Scaling
scale can be saved in your template plan and When a view is sent to layout, line weights
layout files. See “Template Files” on page may be affected by the drawing scale
51. selected for the view. This occurs when the
The method for changing the line weight for layout view’s scale is different from the
a particular object depends on the object and drawing scale of the original view.
the type of view. For example, assume that you have an object
• Most objects’ line weights can be set in in a view with a line weight of 20, and that
their specification dialogs. See “Line the view’s drawing scale is 1 mm = 50 mm.
Style Tab” on page 889. • If you send the view to layout at 1 mm =
• The line weight for a group of objects can 25 mm scale, twice the original scale, the
be set by layer. See “Layer Display resulting printed line weight for this
Options Dialog” on page 121. object will increase to 40 instead of 20.
• The line weights for walls in floor plan • If you send the view to layout at 1 mm =
view are defined by wall type in the Wall 100 mm scale, half the original scale, the
Type Definitions dialog. See “Wall Type resulting printed line weight for this
Definitions Dialog” on page 243. object will decrease to 10 instead of 20.
• The line weights of material pattern lines, You can specify the drawing scale for any
which are visible in Vector views, can be orthogonal view by opening the Page Setup
set in the Define Material dialog. See dialog while in that view. See “Page Setup
“Define Material Dialog” on page 719. Dialog” on page 1004.
• The line weight for fill patterns is set for For any layout view, you can specify whether
individual objects on the Fill Style tab of the original line weight is maintained or not
their specification dialogs. See “Fill Style in the Send to Layout and Change Scale
Tab” on page 902. dialogs. See “Send To Layout Dialog” on
• The line weight applied to surface edges page 1019 and “Rescaling Views” on page
in Vector views can be set in the Print 1025.
dialog. See “Print Dialog” on page 1006.
• The end cap length of dashed lines in Note: Under most circumstances, you should
floor plan view is controlled in the select Use Layout Line Scaling when sending
Preferences dialog. See “Line views to layout.
Properties Panel” on page 90.
1000
Line weight scaling affects both line weights

and line styles and can be particularly
noticable with dashed line styles.
In the following image, the same floor plan
view has been sent to layout twice, at two
different scales. The view on the left was sent
at the same scale as the original view,
1/8” = 1’. The view on the right was sent at
1” = 1’, or magnified eight times, to show an
area of the plan in greater detail.
with Use Layout Line Scaling disabled

If Use Layout Line Scaling is enabled, line
weights are no longer scaled and the dashed
lines display at the same size as in the
original view.
Because the view on the right was sent to

layout at a scale other than that of the
original, it is subject to layout line scaling.
The solid lines representing walls, cabinets
and doors are rescaled to be eight times
thicker than in the original view.
Similarly, the dashed lines representing the
door jambs are rescaled so that the dashes
and the spaces between them are eight times
larger than in the original view.
with Use Layout Line Scaling enabled
Because the view in this example is scaled

eight times larger in this case, the dashes and
line weights look relatively small and fine
when Use Layout Line Scaling is enabled.
1001
Printing Text and Dimensions
Were the view rescaled to be smaller instead,

the line weights would look relatively large The default Line Weight Scale of
and thick. 1 = 1/100 mm makes it easy to meet
many professional drawing standards. In
most cases, this scale will produce positive
Printers and Line Weight results using any printer or plotter and should
not be changed.
Line weight and print scaling are subject to
the limitations of the printer being used. For
example, you will not be able to see the Legacy Plans
difference between a line that is 1/150th of When plans and layouts created in prior
an inch wide and one that is 1/300th of an versions of Chief Architect are opened in
inch wide when they are printed using a Version X2, they assume the Page Setup
printer that prints 150 dots per inch (DPI). settings, including the Line Weight Scale,
That is, a CAD line with a line weight of 1 specified in the Preferences dialog. See
will look the same as a CAD line with a line “Text & Page Setup Panel” on page 77.
weight of 4 when the Line Weight Scale is When working with legacy files, using a
set at 1 = 1/600th of an inch and you print to Line Weight Scale of 1 = 1/X, where X is the
a printer capable of 150 DPI. DPI of your printer, will produce the most
faithful translation from the previous
version.
Printing Text and Dimensions

As with other objects your drawings, text and dimension characters will print, you may
dimension numbers are subject to scaling find it helpful to Zoom In on them.
when views are sent to layout or printed. See
“Scaling Text” on page 856. For best printed results, using true-type or
open-type fonts is recommended.
Printed text size is also influenced by the
selected font and the method used to specify
its size. See “Character Size” on page 840. Text may not appear accurately on
screen when the font used by the
Text may not print exactly as it appears on- printer is different than the font used on
screen. To get a better idea of how text and screen. Consult your printer documentation
for more information on font substitution.
Creating Custom Sheet Sizes

Standard drawing sheet sizes can be selected
in the Page Setup dialog.
1002
To create custom sheet sizes, select File> • Click Delete to remove the selected sheet
Print> Customize Sheet Sizes or click size.
Customize in the Page Setup dialog. • Select a sheet size and click Edit to open
the Edit Paper Size dialog and change its
description, dimensions, and units of
measurement.
Several options are available: • Click OK to close the dialog. Any new
• Click New to create a new sheet size. sheet sizes created are now available in
the Page Setup dialog.
• Select a sheet size and click Copy to cre-
ate a duplicate sheet size. • The data for this dialog is stored in the
“sheetSizes.sheet” file in the program
directory.
1003
Page Setup Dialog
Page Setup Dialog

Select File> Print> Page Setup to perspective view is active, Page Setup is
open the Page Setup dialog. not available.
The Page Setup dialog is only available The settings in this dialog, including the
when an orthogonal view is active. When a selected printer, are specific to the current
orthogonal view or layout file, and are saved
with the .plan or .layout file.
1 Click the Printer button to select the Check Show Page Breaks to display page
current printer or edit its settings. If you breaks as grey lines across the drawing sheet
have questions about your printer’s settings, in the plan or layout view when Show Sheet
consult its documentation. is enabled. See “Show Sheet” on page 996.
2 Select the printer paper Size and Plotters can often have paper inserted
Source. The options available in these
drop-down lists are controlled by the into the machine in either of two orienta-
currently selected printer’s driver. See tions. Test your own machine and refer to the
printer manual to find out which way to insert
“Printer Drivers” on page 994.
the paper for correct results.
Specify the Orientation of the printer paper.
1004
3 Specify the Size of the Drawing Sheet, Line Weight Scale is based on a 1/4 inch = 1
which is the final printed output. foot drawing scale and 1= 1/300 inch line
weight scale and is an option for .plan files.
Click the Customize button to open the
Customize Sheet Sizes dialog. See Plan files originally created in one of the
“Creating Custom Sheet Sizes” on page Better Homes and Gardens Home Designer
1002. products have Automatic checked by
default; however, this option is not normally
Specify the Orientation of the drawing
recommended. See “Line Weights” on page
sheet, which is the orientation of the entire
999.
drawing. The dialog preview at right updates
as the orientation is changed. Automatic Line Weight Scale is not
available in .layout files.
Check Show Drawing Sheet to display the
drawing sheet on screen.
Setting the line weight to zero (0) for
4 Specify the Drawing Scale for your any object or group of objects causes
printed plan. The scale is specified in the line weight to print as thin as is possible.
two parts, which by default are 1 ft = 1 ft or 1
m = 1 m for layout views, and ¼ inch = 1 ft
or 1 m = 50 m for all other views. Both 6 Check Use These Settings When
Converting Old Files and click OK to
imperial and metric units of measurement are establish the current settings as the default
available and can be selected independently. settings for plans, elevations, and CAD
The units of measurement available here can details when opening plans created in earlier
be controlled in the Preferences dialog. See versions of Chief Architect. Layout plans
“Unit Conversions Panel” on page 85. must be set separately. See “Text & Page
Setup Panel” on page 77.
This scale is applied for printing purposes
only and has no effect on the plan scale. 7 A line weight preview shows how
changes to the drawing scale affect the
The Drawing Scale acts as the default scale printed size of various line weights at the
for the Print, Printed Size Input, and Send current Drawing Scale.
to Layout dialogs.
Clearing Printer Information
5 Select the Line Weight Scale. See
“Line Weights and Scaling” on page Select File> Print> Clear Printer Info to
1000. This setting should always be the same clear the printer-specific information stored
for both a given layout file and any plan in the Page Setup dialog.
views associated with it.
This is useful for creating template plans
Check Automatic to have the program without an associated printer. See “Template
specify the line weight scale and adjust it to Files” on page 51.
maintain line thickness and dash size when
the drawing scale is changed. Automatic
1005
Print Dialog
Print Dialog
To print directly from any floor plan, view, select File> Print> Print. The Print
Vector View or cross section/elevation dialog opens.
Rendered 3D views can be printed

using the File> Print Image command.
See “Print Image Dialog” on page 1009.
5
3
1 Specify the Printer parameters. In the Print To File dialog, type the entire
pathname of the file to be printed, making
sure the name has a .prn or .plt extension.
Browse the Name list to choose a printer.
Click Properties to verify that the printer is
configured correctly. Paper size, orientation,
and other settings can be accessed here.
Select the Print to file check box if you need
to create a file for remote printing. Do not check Print to file if you are creating
a .pdf file. See “Printing to a PDF File” on
page 999.
1006
• Select To Scale to print at the scale speci-

Printing to a PDF file is often preferable fied in the Page Setup dialog. See “Page
to printing to file. For more information, Setup Dialog” on page 1004.
see “Printing to a PDF File” on page 999.
• To print a check plot, select Check Plot
at and choose a scale adjustment from the
2 Specify the Print Range. drop-down list. This temporarily modi-
fies the scale for the current print job but
• Select All to print the entire drawing. In a does not alter the scale specified in the
plan file, the current view is printed on as Page Setup dialog. Line weights are also
many pages as needed. In a layout, all subject to the temporary scale adjust-
pages are printed. ment. If a drawing sheet larger than the
• Select Current Page to print only the printer paper is specified, a check plot
currently active layout page. Current prints across multiple pages.
Page is selected by default in layout files.
• Select Pages to specify which layout Note: None of these options override the
pages to print, then type the first and last printer paper size specified in the Page
page numbers in the text fields. Setup dialog.
• Select Current Screen to print only that

portion of the active view that can cur- 4 Check the accuracy of your printed
scaled documents using Height/Width
rently be seen on screen, including any
Correction. If your scaled documents are not
blank space if you are zoomed out.
correct, you can fine tune or calibrate the
• Select Entire Sheet to print the entire printer with these adjustments. These
sheet even though you may be zoomed in numbers are multiplied into the scaling units.
on a portion of the view. Such corrections should only be necessary if
you are using a dot matrix printer.
3 Specify the Scaling of the printed
output.
• Fit to Paper prints the view on one page. Check printer calibration by printing a
The program uses whatever scale is nec- four foot square at ¼” = 1’-0”. Measure
the print to see if it measures out exactly 1"
essary to fit the plan on one page.
square.
• When Fit to Paper is selected,specify the
percentage of the printable area of the
paper to be used. For example, if printing 5 Copies - Specify the number of copies
you would like to print.
to an 8½ x 11 page with a 1" non-print-
able border in each direction, 100% Check Print in Color to print in color or
would print 7½ x 10, and Full Page 50% clear the check box to print in either gray
would print 3¾ x 5. Each printer may scale or black and white.
vary slightly. • To print in gray scale, check Obey Color
On/Off Setting in the Preferences dia-
log before printing, then uncheck Print
1007
Print Dialog
in Color. See “Appearance Panel” on resolution. The resulting bitmap is then

page 71. printed. This can greatly improve print speed
• To print in black and white, uncheck when printing Vector Views, but a lot of
Obey Color On/Off Setting in the memory is required. This method is not
Preferences dialog before printing, then normally recommended for layouts, plans, or
uncheck Print in Color. Lines and fill details; however, it may help you avoid
colors print as either black or white, issues with certain drivers for older printers.
depending on which is closer to the line See “Printers and Plotters” on page 994.
or fill’s actual color. If there are a lot of pictures on your plan or
Most black and white printers print a grey layout, using double buffered printing may
scale approximation of the colors if Print in improve your print speed.
Color is selected. Line Weight - Available for Vector Views
only. Specify the Line Weight for all lines
Printing to pen plotters is not supported. defining the edges of 3D objects. This is a
global setting for all edges. Individual lines,
other than superimposed CAD lines, cannot
Use Outline Printing - Select the check box be defined with different line weights.To
to have True Type text and dimension modify individual lines, the 3D view must
numbers drawn as outlines. first be sent to layout. To edit a line once the
If Use Outline Printing is selected when 3D view has been sent to layout, select Edit>
printing to a regular printer, only the outlines Edit Layout, and then select the line to be
of text objects and dimension numbers print. modified. See “Editing Layout Lines” on
page 1028.
Double Buffered Printing uses computer
memory to render the output at printer
1008
Print Image Dialog

Any view can be printed by selecting The Print Image dialog is similar to the Print
File> Print Image. This is the only dialog; however, the printing process is
way to print a Raytrace or most 3D views. different. Print Image prints individual
See “Rendering & Raytracing” on page 772. pixels as opposed to vectors (lines).
2 3
1 Specify Printer parameters. Select the Print to file check box to send the
print to a file for remote printing. For more
information, see “Printing to a PDF File” on
Choose a printer from the Name list.
page 999.
Click Properties to verify that the printer is
configured correctly. Paper size, orientation, 2 Specify the Print Range.
and other settings are accessed here.
3 Specify the number of Copies.
Print Model
The Model Maker allows you to create providing the most necessary tools. It may
a template of your plan that can be not necessarily give you everything you
printed to scale and assembled into an actual might want in order to build house models
3D model. Three groups of templates are your way. For example, you may want to
used in the process. Walls and roofs are affix tabs to certain wall or roof edges to help
printed separately. These can then be placed attach them to their neighbors. While you
onto a floor plan view, which is printed as a can draw some of these things onto printed
layout for the entire model. sheets, the system does not provide them
automatically. What it does provide is
Since different people build house models in
accurate templates for wall and roof sections.
different ways, the Model Maker focuses on
1009
Print Model
Combining these with your own skills helps To print the model templates, choose File>
you create professional quality models. Print> Print Model . The Print Model
dialog opens.
Printing the Model
The best way to understand how the various
options affect the final product is to make a
very simple two story plan and try them out.
The Print Model Dialog
2
3 10
4
5 11
6 12
7
8
13
14
9
1 Printer - Select the printer for your 4 Exterior Only - Check this box to
model. Larger sheet sizes are better. suppress interior wall surfaces.
Landscape is usually the best mode for Normally it is only the exterior walls that
printing models. If it is not your default display in a model. If interior walls and
printing mode, it can be selected via the surfaces are produced, much more paper is
Properties button. required. Interior surfaces are typically
printed when composing a model of only the
2 Printer Info - Information about your current floor, without a roof.
printer and its current setup displays
here. Check this box if you prefer to Print to
5 Fold Interior Down - Check this box
File instead. to print the interior surface of a wall
above its corresponding exterior surface and
3 Walls - Clear the check box to prevent upside down. This allows both walls to be
walls from printing.
cut in one piece and folded over. This is
1010
convenient when making a separate model Plan View Instructions - Remove check
for each floor to show its interior. from box to suppress floor plan view
instructions from printing.
6 Combine Floors - Check this box to
print together the exterior surfaces of
10 Copies - Use the spin box to specify the
walls that are on top of each other. Interior number of copies to be printed.
surfaces of those walls still print separately.
11 Scale - Specify the scale to be printed
Allow Offset - This modifies the outcome of in inches per feet. A simple ratio (1:48
the Combine Floors Option. Normally the for example) is used for metric plans.
main layers of stacked walls must be closely
The system arranges as many wall or roof
aligned and have the same thickness for
sections as possible onto a single sheet. For
walls to combine. Check this box to allow an
larger scale models, a printer with a larger
offset of up to six inches (15 cm) and allow
sheet sizes is helpful. If any wall surface,
different thicknesses.
roof surface, or floor plan view covers more
7 Railings - Check this box to print than one sheet, it prints by itself on the
railings along with walls. number of sheets required. Models with large
surfaces may require a lot of paper.
8 Outdoor Walls/Foundation Walls -
Check this box to include Outdoor
12 Use Scale Wall Thickness - Uncheck
Walls and/or Foundation Walls in the walls this box to print walls to the width
group. This also affects which walls display specified in the edit box, ignoring the scale
in the floor plan view template. width. The walls of your plan temporarily
resize so that their interior and exterior
Outdoor Walls - An Outdoor wall is
surfaces accurately match the materials they
normally a garden wall or a wall used as a
are modeled with. These changes can be
fence. It may be a No Room Def. type wall,
most readily seen when the floor plan view
see “Wall Specification Dialog” on page 249,
of your model template is printed. Changing
or have exterior type rooms, such as Deck,
the wall thickness is useful when producing a
Porch, or Attic on both sides of it.
model with an interior using material of the
If a plan has extensive outdoor walls, specified thickness for walls.
printing them all may use a considerable
amount of paper. 13 Floor Thickness - Specify the
thickness of the material you use for the
Foundation Walls - Walls on floor zero, the floor platform.
foundation floor, still print unless they are
specified as foundation walls on either the 14 Print in Color - This option depends
on whether you have a color printer.
General or Foundation tab of the Wall
Check this box to print in color.
Specification dialog. See “Wall
Assembling the Model
Roofs - Remove check from box to
9 Once the templates have been printed, they
suppress roofs from printing.
are ready to be assembled. You need scissors
1011
Print Model
and an adhesive and a rigid material that can If your walls were resized in the Print Model
be easily cut and glued, such as thin dialog, you may see unwanted lines between
cardboard or styrofoam, to provide support floors that should merge together seamlessly.
for the 3D model. This is usually due to walls whose exterior
surfaces match but overall thickness does
Floor Plan View Template
not. You can prevent this by checking Use
Begin by laying out the floor plan view, Scale Wall Thickness, which prevents walls
which is used as a layout for the entire 3D from resizing. This is best if you do not want
model. If your floor plan view template to print the interior wall surfaces, or are
printed on a number of sheets, they should be using a modeling material that closely
combined into one. Exterior and interior wall matches the scale thickness of your walls.
surfaces should match throughout.
Roofs
Adhere your complete floor plan view
Roof planes are joined together when
template to a sturdy and dedicated surface to
possible before printing. For each roof
provide support for your walls.
surface, the fascia and soffit surfaces are
Walls attached at the eave, so that the least amount
of taping produces the roof and adjoining
Walls should be cut and fixed to a rigid
surfaces.
backing so that they can stand on their own
and support the weight of the roof or floors All flattened roof/fascia/soffit surfaces are
above them. How they are cut and assembled placed into a CAD detail named “Model
varies depending on the desired final
Detail.” This is overwritten and updated each
appearance of the model and how they were
time the roof group is printed for a particular
printed.
model. If the roof or portions of the roof need
It may be helpful to take the thickness of the to be reprinted, those pieces can be printed
rigid material being used into consideration
from the detail.
and override the scale thickness of the walls
so that it agrees with your material thickness.
1012
1013
Chapter 37:
Layout
The Chief Architect layout facility offers a Chapter Contents

set of easy to use tools for arranging multiple • Layout Defaults
views and/or details on a single page for • Preparing for Layout
printing. You can create and print sets of • Creating a Layout File
working drawings or blueprints in almost any • The Layout Tools
paper size. • Sending Views to Layout
Each layout can contain many pages, and • The Current Page
each page can contain multiple views, • Layout Page Zero
details, images, CAD objects, or text, or • CAD and Text in Layout
schedules. • Images in Layout
• Keeping Layout Views Current
For detailed information about printing in • Editing Layout Views
Chief Architect, see “Printing & Plotting” on • Rescaling Views
page 992. • Displaying Layout Views
• Layout Page Display Options
• Opening Layout Views
• Editing Layout Lines
• Edit Layout Lines Dialog
• Managing Layout Links
• Printing Layout Files
• Exporting Layout Files
• Layout Box Specification Dialog
1014
Layout Defaults
To access the layout defaults for the disabled. See “General Plan Defaults
current layout file, select Edit> Dialog” on page 68.
Default Settings. The options in the Default
The settings in the Layout Defaults dialog
Settings dialog are similar to those found in
are similar to those in the Plan Defaults
this same dialog in a plan file, although there
dialog. Some options that do not apply to
are fewer choices in the list. See “Default
layouts are disabled. See “General Plan
Settings” on page 63.
In the Default Settings dialog, select Layout
The settings in the Page Setup dialog are
and click Edit.
also file-specific and are particularly
The settings in the CAD Defaults dialog in important considerations in layout files. See
layout are similar to those in a plan file but “Page Setup Dialog” on page 1004.
only affect CAD drawn on the layout page.
You can customize these default settings for
Some options that do not apply to layouts are
future layouts and create a template. See
“Template Files” on page 51.0
Preparing for Layout

Very little preparation is necessary before If you plan to use a printing service, install a
creating a layout file. There are a few things PDF program such as PDF995, which is
that are helpful to keep in mind. supplied with Chief Architect. See “Printing
to a PDF File” on page 999.
Printer Setup You can also print to file using the driver for
You can print to any printer or plotter that the printer that the service will use. See
uses a Windows driver and can change the “Printer Drivers” on page 994.
current printer at any time in the Page Setup
dialog. See “Page Setup Dialog” on page Check Plots
1004.
When a large drawing sheet size has been
specified, you can print a check plot at a
Printing Services reduced scale so that it can be printed on a
Find out what paper size the print service smaller printer. This allows you to make final
uses and select it in the Page Setup dialog. checks before printing to the larger size. See
See “Page Setup Dialog” on page 1004. “Check Plots” on page 998.
1015
Creating a Layout File
Creating a Layout File

Choose File> New Layout to create a Select File> Save to save the layout file.
blank layout file. A layout file is It is important that you save the layout in the
created with the name untitled.layout. By same directory as the plan file from which
default, new layout files open to page one. views have been sent to the layout pages. See
If you have specified a layout template file, a “File Management” on page 42.
new layout file will have its default and layer Although it is possible to use multiple plan
settings. See “Template Files” on page 51. files with a layout, it is generally best to
If a layout file is not open when you try to associate only one plan file with a layout and
send a view to layout, a warning message to use the same file name for both. If more
will ask you if you want to create a new than one plan file is used, all should be saved
layout file. See “Sending Views to Layout” in the same directory as the layout file.
on page 1018. When you save your layout, take a moment
To open an existing layout file, select File> to also save the plan file associated with it.
Open Layout . Browse to a directory and
select the layout file to open. See “Opening a When a view is sent to layout, the lay-
Plan or Layout File” on page 50. out view is linked to the .plan file. Do
not change the path name by moving the
Only one layout can be open at a time. When .plan file to a new folder or renaming it. If the
a layout file is open, it is listed at the bottom path name is changed, the link in the layout
of the Window menu as an open view. file must be reestablished for the view to
Layout files are also listed in the Project appear in layout. Use the Relink File tool or
resend the drawing to layout. See “Relinking
Browser. See “Project Browser” on page
Layout Views” on page 1032.
924.
The Layout Tools

There are a variety of tools available Sending Views to Layout
to send views to layout and edit them,
as well as manage layout pages and links. Select File> Send to Layout to open
the Send to Layout dialog and send
Many of the tools available in layout are the current view to the specified layout page.
described in the Printing chapter. See “The See “Sending Views to Layout” on page
Printing Tools” on page 995. 1018.
In floor plan view, select a saved cross
section/elevation view symbol and
click the Send Camera’s View to Layout
1016
edit button. See “Saving & Printing 3D Managing Layout Pages

Select Files> Layout> Insert Page
Select Tools> Layout> Layout Files to see a button to add a new layout page,
list of the files that are referenced by the moving the current page and all following
layout. See “Layout Files Dialog” on page pages up one page, as long as there is nothing
1032. on page 1000.
Select Files> Layout> Delete Page
Editing Layout Views
button to delete the current layout
A selected layout view can be edited much page, moving all following pages down one
like other box-based objects. See “Editing page, as long as nothing is on the current
Box-Based Objects” on page 164. In page.
addition, a variety of edit tools allow you to
Select Files> Layout> Exchange
control the appearance of each view.
With Next Page button to switch the
Select a layout view and click the current layout page with the following
Open View edit button to open the page.Not available on Layout Page 1000.
view that was originally sent to layout. This
Select Files> Layout> Exchange
tool is only available for dynamic views. See
With Previous Page button to switch
“Editing Dynamic Views” on page 1024.
the current layout page with the page
Select a layout view and click the preceding it. Not available on Layout Page 0.
Rescale Layout edit button to open
Select Tools> Layout> Edit Layout
the Change Scale dialog and apply a
to allow the lines of a Vector View
different scale. See “Rescaling Views” on
sent to layout to be edited individually. See
page 1025.
“Editing Layout Lines” on page 1028.
Select a layout view and click the
Relink File edit button to open the Viewing Layout Files
Choose Layout File Reference dialog and
relink the selected layout view. See Use Tools> Layout> Page
“Relinking Layout Views” on page 1032. Up, Page Down, and
Change Layout Page to navigate the layout
Select a layout view and click the document. See “The Current Page” on page
Layout Box Layers edit button to 1020.
open the Layer Display Options dialog for
Select Window> Swap Views to
the selected view. See “Displaying Layout
switch between the current view and
the view that was current before it. See
“Swapping Views” on page 733.
Note: You can also modify the layers of the
layout file itself. See “Layout Page Display Click the Show Layout button to
Options” on page 1026. switch to a layout file that is currently
open.
1017
Sending Views to Layout
Sending Views to Layout

Layout files can contain many To send a view to layout
different views and details sent to it
from one or more plan files. To send a view 1. Prepare the view so that objects that
to layout, select File> Send to Layout. should be seen are visible and those that
should not are suppressed. See “Layer
You can also send one or more saved, closed
cross section/elevation views to layout by
selecting the camera symbol and clicking the
Remember that if the Reference Display
Send Camera’s View to Layout edit is turned on when a view is sent to lay-
button. See “Saving & Printing 3D Views” out, it cannot be turned off later. See
on page 767. “Reference Display” on page 360.
When a view is sent to layout, the program
sends it to the layout file that is currently If there are layer settings that you use
open. While more than one plan file can be often, it may be helpful to define custom
open at once, only one layout file can be layer sets for your layout files. See “Layer
open at a time.
If no layout file is open, the program
2. Select File> Send to Layout . In the
searches for a layout file with the same file
Send to Layout dialog, the available
name as the plan that the view is being sent
options vary depending on the type of
from. If it cannot find such a layout file, the
view being sent to layout.
program asks if you want to create a new
layout and send the view to it. 3. Click OK to send the view to the speci-
fied layout page.
1018
Send To Layout Dialog
1 3
2 4
1 Select a radio button to specify the 2 Which Send Options are available
method of Scaling for the view sent to depends on the type of view being sent
layout. to layout.
• Select Fit to Sheet to send the view to • Select Entire Plan/View to send to lay-
layout at no specific scale. The view can out the extent of the plan that is visible
be resized on the layout sheet later. when you click Fill Window . This
• Specify the exact scale for the view in option is available for Vector views, wall
layout. The view can be rescaled later details, and cross section/elevation views.
from layout if necessary. Both Imperial • Select Current Screen to send only what
and metric units of measurement are is shown on screen to layout. This option
available and can be selected indepen- is available for Vector views, wall details,
dently. and cross section/elevation views.
• When views are sent to layout at different • Select Current Screen As Image to send
scales, line weights and line styles are only what is shown on screen to layout as
subject to the same scaling. See “Line an embedded image. See “Picture File
Weights and Scaling” on page 1000. In Box Specification Dialog” on page 942.
most cases this is not desirable. When This option is available for all views, and
Use Layout Line Scaling is checked, the is the only option available for Render
lines in views sent to layout appear the and raytrace views.
same as lines drawn directly on layout.
This option is not available for rendered • Uncheck Make Copy of Active Layer
views. Set to reference the currently active layer
set in the layout view. When this option is
checked, a copy of the currently active
1019
The Current Page
layer set is created for use by the layout line weight settings when the view is sent
view. You can specify a New Name for to layout. If unchecked, the Vector view
this layer set if you wish. The copied lay- respects the settings in the 3D Settings
out set is saved with the plan file that the dialog when sent to layout. See “3D Set-
view is sent from. Your choice is main- tings Dialog” on page 744.
tained between sessions. See “Layout • Check Use Pattern Line Defaults and
Layer Sets” on page 127. specify a Default Pattern Weight to
override the Line Weight setting on the
3 Specify the desired Send Position for General tab of the Define Material dia-
the view. These options are available
for all views. log. See “Define Material Dialog” on
page 719.
• Send to Layout Page # - Enter a page
number to send the view to. • Uncheck Merge Generated Lines to
prevent the merging of colinear lines.
• Check Snap to Active CAD Point to
Horizontal and vertical lines still merge.
snap the view you are sending to layout
to the active CAD Point. See “Point
If Merge Generated Lines is selected
and a cross section/elevation view is sent
• Check Show Layout Page to go to the to layout, the program merges any lines
selected layout page when you click OK. that are superimposed or parallel with
each other so that the layout has only one
4 The Vector View Options are available line rather than several. This makes the
when a Vector View is sent to layout.
See “Rendered and Vector Views” on page final view easier to edit in layout if neces-
742. These settings are preserved between sary, but may slow down the process of
sessions. sending 3D views containing non-vertical
or horizontal lines to layout.
• Check Use Edge Line Defaults and
specify a Default Line Weight to over- This option is not available for floor plan,
ride all layer specific and object specific Render, Raytrace, or CAD Detail views.
The Current Page

The current page is indicated click the Open Object edit button to
at the center of the Layout open the Layout Box Specification dialog,
Page buttons. When a layout file is first which allows you to change the page number
created, the current page is page one. on the Line Style tab. See “Layout Box
The current layout page is the default target Specification Dialog” on page 1034.
of any view sent to layout. If sent to the
wrong page, a view may be moved from one To navigate between layout pages
page to another. To accomplish this, click the • Click the arrow buttons on either side of
view you want to move. Once it is selected,
the Layout Page button.
1020
• Click the Current Page number between • Select one of the options from the Tools>
the arrows to open the Go To Layout Layout> menu.
Page dialog. Enter a page number and • Press Shift + N (up one page) or Shift +
click OK. M (down one page) on the keyboard.
• Double-click a page in the Project
Browser. See “Project Browser” on page
924.
Note: Layout pages do not print if they are

blank, even if layout borders are present
Layout Page Zero

Layout page zero is unique • Text Macros. See“Text Macros” on page
because anything on page 869.
zero displays and prints on all pages in the • Imported images. See “Images” on page
layout. This allows you to create a title block 933.
and border that appear on all layout pages
without recreating them on each page.
Note: The printable area varies from printer
Add anything to page zero that you want on to printer. For best results, inset layout bor-
all subsequent layout pages, such as: ders 1/2" to 3/4" from the paper edge.
• Title Block. See “Text, Callouts & Mark-
ers” on page 838. For more information about creating a title
block and border for your layout template,
• Borders. See “CAD Objects” on page see “Creating a Border and Title Block” on
874. page 175 of the User’s Guide.
CAD and Text in Layout

CAD and text objects in views sent to CAD objects and text can also be added
layout are scaled just like other directly to any layout page. These are added
objects in the view. to the layout page itself, not to any specific
view on the page which may have its own
If you want text in a layout view to print at a
CAD and text objects within it.
particular size, specify its size based on the
scaling you will use when you send the view CAD and text objects created in layout can
to layout. See “Character Size” on page 840. be selected and edited just as they can in
other views. See “Editing Text” on page 854
and “CAD Objects” on page 874.
1021
Images in Layout
• To move text or CAD objects to another Line Style tab. See “Line Style Tab” on
page, change the Page number on the page 1034.
Images in Layout
Image files can be imported onto a layout An image on the layout page can be selected
page just as they can into floor plan view. and edited using its edit handles, edit tools
See “Importing Pictures” on page 940. and specification dialog. See “Editing
Pictures” on page 941.
Views can also be sent to layout as images.
In fact, Render and Raytrace views sent to
layout are always treated as imported images Embedded images increase layout
embedded in the file. See “Send To Layout file size. Limit the number of large
Dialog” on page 1019. and/or multiple images.
Keeping Layout Views Current

If a plan changes after views of the model are Floor Plan Views
sent to layout, some of the views may and CAD Details
become out of date. Depending on the type
of view, some may update automatically and Floor plan views and CAD details sent to
other must be updated manually. layout are dynamic. Any changes made to
these items in plan are reflected
Dynamic and Static Views automatically in layout.
• The display of everything is under your
A dynamic view references the view saved
control. All editing must be done in floor
with the original plan. Any changes made to
plan view or the original CAD detail, and
the original plan update the dynamic layout
all changes are automatically reflected on
view.
every copy in layout.
For information about controlling the display • To edit a floor plan view or CAD detail
of dynamic views in layout, see “Displaying sent to layout, select the view and click
Layout Views” on page 1025.
the Open View edit button. This
A static view does not reference the original opens the plan file where editing can be
plan and does not update when the plan done. Any changes made update the lay-
changes. Static views are like a snapshot out.
taken at a specific time; subsequent changes
• If the reference display is on when a floor
do not appear in that snapshot. Changes
plan view is sent to layout, it becomes a
made in the original plan must be resent to
permanent part of that layout view. See
layout manually.
“Reference Display” on page 360.
1022
Cross Sections/Elevations
Views created using the Cross Section/
Elevation , Wall Elevation , and
Backclipped Cross Section tools are
dynamic, but their behavior in layout is
different from other dynamic views.
• CAD objects can be drawn in cross sec- • If the layout view is up-to-date with the
tion/elevation views. Any CAD objects 3D model or if you do not want your
added to a cross section/elevation view changes to be seen in the layout view,
automatically update in the layout. select No.
• CAD objects added in a cross section/ele- • To update the view on the layout page
vation view can only be edited in the choose OK. When the picture is updated,
cross section/elevation view. the layout view is replaced with a new
copy. Any manual changes made to the
• Double-clicking a cross section/eleva- original picture are lost. For this reason,
tion view in layout using the Select you should only make changes made to a
Objects tool activates the original layout view using the Edit Layout
view, allowing you to modify the model tool after the model has been finalized.
or add CAD objects.
• The lines that define cross section/eleva- Static Views
tion views in layout are automatically
generated copies that are no longer linked With the exception of Cross Section/
to the 3D model. Once in layout, these Elevation , Backclipped Cross Section
lines can be edited using the Edit Layout
, and Wall Elevation views, all
button. See “Editing Layout Views” camera views, overviews and Raytrace views
on page 1024. sent to layout are static. They are treated as
imported images embedded in the layout file.
Updating Cross Sections/ See “Picture File Box Specification Dialog”
Elevations on page 942.
If a cross section/elevation view is sent to Any changes made to the 3D model have no
layout,and that camera is activated while the effect on static views. To update these views
layout sheet is open, closing the view opens in layout, delete the old view and send a new
the following dialog: one. See “Dynamic and Static Views” on
page 1022.
The lines that define Vector views in layout
are automatically generated copies that are
no longer linked to the 3D model. Once in
layout, these lines can be edited using the
1023
Edit Layout button. See “Editing Layout

Lines” on page 1028.

To edit a layout view, first select its layout Moving Views to a
box using the Select Objects tool. Once Different Page
selected, the view box can be edited using its
To move a view from one layout page to
edit handles, edit toolbar or specification
another, select the view, click the Open
dialog. See “Layout Box Specification
Dialog” on page 1034. Object edit button, and change the Page
on the Line Style tab of the Layout Box
Using the Edit Handles Specification dialog. See “Layout Box
Layout view boxes can be edited like CAD
boxes. See “Editing Box-Based Objects” on Copying Views
page 164.
Just like many objects, views sent to layout
Floor plan views and CAD Details can be can be copied and pasted onto different
rotated. Both the layout box and the view layout pages or even into different layout
inside it rotate. Cross section/elevation and files.
3D views sent to layout cannot be rotated.
As a general rule, though, if multiple copies
In the Specification Dialog of a view are needed, it is best to send the
view to layout as many times as necessary
Layout views can be customized in their because each view can then be controlled
specification dialog. See “Layout Box independently.
Bear in mind, too, that if a layout has views
copied from a different layout file and is later
moved to a different location on your
A selected layout view or views can be computer, the link to the original plan file
edited in a variety of ways using the buttons may be broken. See “Keeping Layout Views
on the edit toolbar. See “Edit Toolbar Current” on page 1022.
Editing Dynamic Views
Moving Layout Views
Select a dynamic view and click the Open
Layout views can be moved using the Move View edit button to open the original
edit handle using dimensions. See “Moving view that was sent to layout. You can also
Objects Using Dimensions” on page 831. double-click a dynamic view in layout to
1024
open the original view. See “Dynamic and Resizing Non-Scaled Views
Static Views” on page 1022.
If the view was sent to layout using the Fit to
Sheet setting, resizing may have one of
Resizing Scaled Views several results:
Scaled views retain their scale regardless of • Drag a corner handle in or out to resize
how you resize the border. You can resize the both the border and the image proportion-
border proportionally from a corner handle ally.
or select one of the handles on an edge to
• If you drag a side handle in or out, the
change the size in one direction only. The
image stays the same size, but the border
image may be cropped if the border is resized
changes. If you make the border smaller,
small enough.
it may crop the image; if you make it
larger, you may show more of the image.
Rescaling Views
Floor plan views, cross section/
2 Select this option to specify a scale for
elevations,wall elevations and CAD the image. When the scale is changed,
details sent to layout can be rescaled. To the layout picture resizes.
change the scale of a layout view, select the
In most cases, you should specify a scale for
view and click the Rescale Layout View edit
floor plan views, CAD details, and cross
button. The Change Scale dialog opens.
sections/elevation views. Typical scales are
¼ in = 1ft and 1 m = 50 m.
1 3 When a view is sent to layout at a scale

other than that of the original view, line
2 weights and line styles are affected. In many
cases, this is not desirable. Check Use
3 Layout Line Scaling to make lines in the
selected view appear the same as lines of the
same weight drawn on the layout page. See
1 Choose No Scale to remove any “Line Weights and Scaling” on page 1000.
specific scale factor associated with the
selected view.
Displaying Layout Views

Select Window> Show Layout to open the current view. You can also press
make the layout file that is currently Ctrl + Tab on your keyboard.
1025
Layout Page Display Options
When a view is sent to layout,the active layer 2. Click the Layout Box Layers edit
set is used. Some view types give you the button to open the Layer Display
option of duplicating and renaming the active Options dialog. If this edit button does
layer set before sending the view to layout. not display, the view is not dynamic.
See “Sending Views to Layout” on page
• The layer set for the layout view dis-
1018“Displaying Objects” on page 117.
plays at the top of the dialog.
Once sent to layout, static views cannot be • The settings for the currently selected
changed. See “Dynamic and Static Views” layer display below.
on page 1022.
3. You can make changes to settings of the
The layer set referenced by a dynamic view current layer set.
is saved with the plan rather than the layout
file, and the display of the view can be Changes made to this layer set affect all
modified by either editing the referenced other views that use it, not necessarily
layer set or by selecting a different layer set the layout view alone.
for that view. From the layout page, you can 4. Alternatively, you can select a different
quickly do either using the Layout Box Lay- layer set for the layout view from the
ers edit tool. Layer Set drop-down list. Changes
made to this layer set affect the layout
view, regardless of whether the changes
Do not delete layer sets that are used in
layouts.
were made using the Layout Box Lay-
ers tool.
To use the Layout Box Layers tool 5. Save your changes before closing the
layout file.
1. Select a layout view.
Layout Page Display Options

Select Tools> Display Settings> open the Layout Page Display Options
Display Options from a layout file to dialog.
1026
The Layout Page Display Options dialog is For information about how to use this dialog,
similar to the Layers Display Options see “Layer Display Options Dialog” on page
dialog, but controls only the display of 121. For information about controlling the
objects drawn on the layout page, such as the display of views sent to layout, see
layout borders and other CAD objects, text “Displaying Layout Views” on page 1025.
and dimensions.
Opening Layout Views

Dynamic views sent to layout Changes made in this view update in the
reference an original view in a plan. original layout view. Depending on the
From the layout page, you can quickly access changes, other views may also be affected.
that original view by selecting a layout view,
Notice the name of the current layer set that
then clicking the Open View edit button. The
displays in the Active Layer Set Control
original view can also be opened by double-
drop-down list. Changes made to this layer
clicking the layout view using the Select
set affect not only the current view, but also
Objects tool. the associated layout view and any other
views that use this layer set.
1027
Editing Layout Lines
It is important to remember that when a

plan view is accessed by opening a
dynamic layout view, that view uses the same
layer set as the layout view.
Editing Layout Lines

Individual lines in any Vector view Adding New Layout Lines
sent to layout can be selected, edited
and drawn using the Edit Layout tool. Add a line to a layout Vector view by
Changes made using this tool have no effect clicking the Edit Layout button,
on the 3D model. selecting a layout view, and dragging a new
line within the layout box. Once drawn, this
The full set of CAD editing tools is not line can be edited like any other layout line
available when using Edit Layout. In and maintains its position in relation to the
many cases, it is more efficient to edit lines in layout view it was drawn in.
a Vector view by sending it to a CAD detail for
editing first. See “CAD Detail From View” on Editing Layout Lines
page 767.
When a line is selected, use the edit handles
Selecting Layout Lines to change its size, angle, and position, as
with standard CAD lines. A selected layout
CAD lines in Vector views sent to layout line can also be deleted like a standard CAD
cannot be edited with the Edit Layout line.
tool. Only lines generated by the program
can be edited using this tool. Angle Snaps , Object Snaps , and
To select a line in a layout view, click the Grid Snaps are all available in layout.
See “Snap Settings” on page 131.
Edit Layout button and click the line.
You can also select additional lines in the Layout line properties can be changed in the
same layout view using the marquee select or Edit Layout Lines dialog. See “Edit Layout
group select methods. See “Selecting Lines Dialog” on page 1028.
Edit Layout Lines Dialog

When lines have been selected with the Edit The dialog allows you to change the
Layout tool, click the Open Object properties of the selected lines without
edit button to open the Edit Layout Lines affecting the other lines in the view or
dialog. change the properties for all lines in the view.
1028
Line Weight Tab
1 5
6
2
7
3
4
1 Weight for Selected Lines - If this Weight section, where you can specify
value is set to -1, the selected lines use which weights of lines are highlighted.
the Default Weight for their line type
defined in the lower part of this dialog. 6 All Lines Editable - Check this box to
select all layout lines, even those that
Default Weights - Set the line width for all are not highlighted. If All Lines Editable is
Normal lines and all Pattern lines. not checked, only highlighted lines are
selectable until you return to this dialog and
2 Selected lines can be changed to take uncheck Highlight Certain Weight.
on the properties of either the Pattern
Lines or the Normal Lines.
7 Normal Lines / Pattern Lines -
Specify the line weight for each line
3 Normal Lines define the edges of the type to highlight. If All lines editable is
surfaces of the 3D objects.
unchecked, the highlighted lines of the
4 Pattern Lines are define patterns such specified weight are simple to select by
as brick, siding, and shingles. holding down the Shift key and dragging a
marquee around the view (inside the border).
5 Highlight Certain Weight - Check this Only the highlighted lines are selected.
box to isolate lines of a specific weight.
This activates the rest of the Highlight
1029
Managing Layout Links
Line Color Tab
1
3
2
Layout line color can be changed for the

2 Check Use Default Color to restore the
selected lines only or for the entire layout selected layout lines to the default color
line type. for that line type.
1 Click the box under Color for Selected 3 Use the menu to define new Default
Lines and choose a new color from the Colors for Normal Lines and for
menu to change all selected lines to the Pattern Lines. Unless changed individually,
newly defined color. every layout line in that view takes on the
newly defined color for its line type.

Chief Architect allows you to review plan • Save plan files in the same folder as the
files present in a current layout, change layout, or in a sub-folder in that folder.
existing links from one plan file to another, • Legacy plan files referenced by a layout
and reestablish links to plan files that have must have the .plan file extension. Plans
been moved or renamed. from version 9.5 and prior with the .pl
file extension cannot link to .layout files.
Protecting Layout Links
• Custom graphics included in a plan or
Careful file management is needed to avoid layout should be embedded in the file or
disrupting layout links and producing saved in the same folder as the layout.
missing files. See “File Management” on • Plan files used to save CAD details or
page 42. other information should be copied and
The following guidelines can help prevent saved in the same folder as the layout.
layout links from being disrupted:
1030
• Plan files should never be renamed. If a To relocate missing files

new name is desired, make a copy of the
file and rename it. Changes made in the 1. Select the file and then click the Browse
copy do not affect the layout. button to locate the file. Click Open to
• Avoid sending cross section/elevations to restore the link. When all missing files
layout more than once. Changes made to have been restored, click OK.
the view can affect layout views in unin- 2. Choose Tools> Layout> Layout files to
tended ways. double-check that all files have been
• Layout files should never be moved. If a found. If some are still missing, repeat
layout file must be moved, the entire the above process. If a missing file is no
folder it is saved in should be moved or longer needed, delete the view borders
copied and then moved. associated with it in the layout.
• Use Export> Export Entire Plan to 3. Be sure to choose File> Save when
create an independent copy of the origi- the missing files have been restored to
nal layout. Avoid use of “Save As.” save the new path names.
• Do not delete any layer sets that are used 4. Legacy plans with the .pl file extension
by a view that was sent to layout. should be opened and saved in the most
current program version.
• If you relink a layout view to a new plan,
be sure to save the plan file so the layer
Results of Missing Files
sets are updated.
If all missing files are correctly redefined,
Finding Missing Files the layout opens when you click OK.
When a layout file is opened, it looks for If an error message displays, one or more of
dynamically linked views in the following the missing files could not be replaced by the
order: redefined file. Click OK to continue. The
layout opens, but with the following
1. Files in the same folder or subfolder as characteristics:
the layout.
1. Any floor plan views or CAD details
2. Files in the directory the files were sent
associated with the missing file(s) are
to the layout from.
blank. Only the border displays.
3. If files of the same name as those origi-
2. Any elevations or cross sections associ-
nally sent to the layout are not found in
ated with the missing file(s) show the
these locations, the Layout Files dialog
automatically generated lines, but any
displays. See “Layout Files Dialog” on
added CAD objects are absent.
page 1032.
1031
Finding Files from Layout Files Dialog

an Opened Layout
To view a list of the files that the current
layout is linked to, choose Tools> Layout> 1
Layout files to open the Layout Files dialog.
3
See“Layout Files Dialog” on page 1032.
• If all files are located, only one section 2
displays: Files present in layout.
• If files are missing, a second section is
also available: Files NOT FOUND in
layout.
1 Files Present in Layout lists all files
• Each section lists files by full pathname. with intact links to the layout.
Click Browse to locate files in the
directory structure.
2 Files NOT FOUND in Layout lists the
names of files with disrupted links to
the layout. Any files listed here have been
Relinking Layout Views moved or renamed and cannot be found by
the program. Intervention is required to find
You can change the file that a dynamic
these files and reestablish their links to the
layout view is linked to by selecting
layout.
the view and clicking the Relink File edit
button. The Choose Layout File Reference
3 Select a file and click the Browse
dialog opens. Select the file that you want to button to find the file in the directory
link to and click Open. structure. Locate a missing file and click
Open to link it to the layout. You can also
type the entire path and file name of the file.
Missing Layer Sets

The layer set associated with each view in a
layout is saved with the plan file from which
the view was sent. Just as it is important to
not move, rename or delete the plan file, it is
important that you not rename or delete the
If you want to relink all references to this layer set.
file, use the Layout Files dialog by choosing If a layer set used by a layout view cannot be
Tools> Layout> Layout Files. See“Layout found when the layout is opened, the
Files Dialog” on page 1032. Missing Layer Set dialog will display.
1032
This dialog provides information about

which layout view is affected by the missing
layer set, the path name of the plan file that
the layer set is missing from, and the original
layer set name.
Select a replacement layer set from the
Available Layer Sets drop-down list.
Click the Define button to open the Layout
Page Display Options dialog, where you
can make changes to the selected layer set.
Printing Layout Files

Printing layout files is similar to The views sent to your layout pages have
printing directly from a view in a plan already been assigned a scale, and if you
file. See “Printing Directly from a View” on select a scale other than 1 in = 1 in in the
page 997. Page Setup dialog, these views will be
scaled a second time when printed.
As in a plan view, printing options for
layouts are set in the Page Setup dialog.
These options apply to all pages of the layout Layout views will print at their specified
file. See “Page Setup Dialog” on page 1004. scales only when the drawing scale for
the layout file is 1 in = 1 in.
Select File> Print> Print to open the
Print dialog. See “Print Dialog” on page You can also print a Check Plot which is a
1006. test printing, typically at a smaller scale,
made before final output to large paper
Scaling format. See “Check Plots” on page 1015.
The drawing scale is specified in the Page To see or change the current scale of a layout
Setup dialog. While you can specify any
view, select the view and click the Rescale
drawing scale that you wish, in nearly all Layout View edit button. See “Rescaling
circumstances, you will want the scale to be Views” on page 1025.
1 in = 1 in for all layout files.
When a view is sent to layout at a scale other
than that used by the original view, line
1033
Exporting Layout Files
weights may be affected. See “Line Weights

and Scaling” on page 1000.
Exporting Layout Files

Layout pages can be exported to .dxf/ than model units. If a 50” line in a plan
.dwg files much like any other vector- would be scaled to 1” inch when printed, it is
based view. exported as a 1” line instead of its length
before prior to scaling. See “Exporting 2D
The main difference is in the scale of the
DXF/DWG Files” on page 962.
output, which is in scaled paper units rather
Layout Box Specification Dialog

A layout box is essentially a CAD box that
contains a view that has been sent to layout
from a plan. When selected, a layout box has
edit handles similar to those of a CAD box
that allow you to rotate, relocate, and resize This setting affects the size of dimension
the layout box. See “Using the Edit Handles” numbers in the layout view but not in the
on page 164. original view in the plan file, and is only
available for views sent from floor plan view.
Select a layout view and click the Open
Object edit button to open the Layout Line Style Tab
Box Specification dialog, which is very
The Line Style tab allows you to set the
similar to the CAD Box Specification
properties of the selected layout box and to
dialog.
specify the selected layout box’s layout page.
General Tab For more information about the options in
the Line Style tab, see “Line Style Tab” on
On the General tab, you can specify the exact page 889.
size and location of the layout box. See
Fill Style Tab
In addition, you can specify the Number
Height for dimensions in the selected view.
1034
1035
Chapter 38:
Schedules
A schedule is similar to a simple Text object You should check each schedule carefully to
with grid lines separating rows and columns; be sure it accurately represents what is in the
however, schedules are dynamically linked model. You should never assume it includes
to objects in your plan and update as changes what you expect or need.
are made to those objects.
Schedules are available for doors, windows, Chapter Contents
cabinets, fixtures, furniture, electrical items, • Schedule Defaults
plants and rooms. Each schedule can contain • Creating Schedules
information for one or all floors of your plan. • Editing Schedules
• Adding Columns to Schedules
Schedules update automatically whenever an • Schedule Specification Dialog
object is created, deleted, moved, or altered. • Columns and Objects to Include
• Object Labels
Schedule Defaults
The initial settings for each type of display the schedule sub-headings. Select a
schedule can be set in its Schedule subheading and click the Edit button to open
Defaults dialog. Default Settings are the Schedule Defaults dialog associated
accessed by selecting Edit> Default with your selection. See “Default Settings”
Settings. Click the “+” next to Schedules to on page 63.
1036
When a schedule is created, its initial

characteristics are determined by the settings
in the Schedule Defaults dialog for its
schedule type. Label defaults for objects in
each schedule are also set here.
Each Schedule Defaults dialog looks the
same as its corresponding Schedule
Specification dialog. See “Schedule
Once created, individual schedules can be
modified without altering the default
settings.
Schedule defaults can also be accessed by
double-clicking the Schedule Tools
parent button.
Creating Schedules
Schedules are created by selecting the Select Tools> Schedules> Window,
appropriate tool and then clicking in then click to create a Window
the drawing area. In either floor plan view or Schedule.
a CAD Detail window, select Tools>
Select Tools> Schedules> Cabinet,
Schedules to access the Schedule Tools.
then click to create a Door Schedule.
Select a Schedule Tool, then click anywhere
in the view to place a schedule of the selected Select Tools> Schedules> Fixture,
type at that location. You can continue then click to create a Fixture
clicking to place additional copies of the Schedule.
schedule. See “Click-to-Create” on page 142.
Select Tools> Schedules> Furniture,
While you can place schedules in floor plan then click to create a Furniture
view, you may find it helpful to place them in Schedule.
one or more CAD Detail windows instead.
Select Tools> Schedules> Electrical,
Saving schedules in organized CAD Details
then click to create an Electrical
allows you to send them to layout without
Schedule.
needing to resize the layout view box. See
“CAD Details” on page 917. Select Tools> Schedules> Room
Finish, then click to create Room
Select Tools> Schedules> Door, then
Finish Schedule.
click to create a Door Schedule.
Select Tools> Schedules> Plant, then
click to create a Plant Schedule.
1037
Editing Schedules
Editing Schedules
Schedules can be edited using the edit • Any objects present in your plan before a
handles, the edit toolbar buttons, or the schedule is created will be listed first in
Schedule Specification dialog. See ascending alphanumeric order, according
“Schedule Specification Dialog” on page to their Label information.
1039. • A new, unique objects placed in the plan
after the schedule is created will be added
Edit Handles to the bottom of the schedule in the order
A selected schedule has the same edit that they are placed, regardless of its
handles as a CAD box. See “Editing Box- Label information.
Based Objects” on page 164. When an object is edited, its schedule
In addition, schedules have edit handles number may or may not change:
along the side of each column, in the • If an object with a Quantity of 1 in the
Schedule heading near the top. Click and schedule is edited, its position in the
drag one of these handles to adjust the width schedule will not change.
of the columns on either side. See “Tab • If a group of objects listed on the same
Spacing” on page 857. row in a schedule are edited simultane-
ously, their position will not change.
The behavior of the edit handles may • If an object listed on the same row in a
schedule with other similar objects is
edited so that it is no longer similar
enough to share the same row, it will
In the Specification Dialog move to the bottom of the schedule. See
Schedules can be edited in the Schedule “Columns and Quantity” on page 1044.
Specification dialog. See “Schedule To reorganize the items in a schedule so that
Specification Dialog” on page 1039. their order is based solely on their Label
information, select the schedule and click the
Renumber Schedule edit button.
A selected schedule or schedules can be
edited in a variety of ways using the buttons Converting Schedules to Text
Buttons” on page 1140. Click the Schedule to Text edit button
to convert the selected schedule to a
Schedule Numbering tabbed text object. You can then edit the
schedule as text.
Schedule numbering is dependent on the
When a schedule is converted to text, it no
order in which objects are placed in the plan,
longer updates automatically. In addition,
as well as the floor they are on.
1038
shaped labels displaying as specified in the

schedule’s specification dialog will no longer You can copy the text from the Text
be present. Specification dialog and paste it into
other applications.
Adding Columns to Schedules

With the exception of Room Finish 4. Click OK to return to the Components
Schedules, schedules can be customized by dialog, then click the Add button to add
adding user-defined columns. a new “accessory” to the list.
For example, you could create a column for 5. Select the new accessory and click in the
locksets to be included in your door SubCat column. Choose the new sub-
schedules. The information in this column category from the drop-down list, then
can also be included in your Materials Lists. replace “Accessory” with a brief
See “Materials Lists” on page 1048. description in the Description column.
Click OK.
In this example, a custom column for lock
sets is created for a door schedule; however, 6. Next, include the new subcategory in the
the same steps apply to any object that can be Door Defaults dialog. See “Schedule
included in a schedule with the exception of Defaults” on page 1036.
rooms. 7. Create a schedule and note that the cus-
tom column is present and includes the
To create a custom schedule column Components information for the door
that you edited.
1. Select a door in your plan and click the
If a door schedule is already present, the new
Components edit button. column is available but will not display. You
2. In lower left corner of the Components can include this new column in the
dialog, click the Edit Sub Categories schedule’s specification dialog. See “Text
button. See “Components Dialog” on Tab” on page 1040.
page 1062. If you would like to use your door with
3. In the Preferences dialog, create a new custom Components information in other
“LKS” Materials List subcategory for plans, you can add it to the library. See
windows. See “Categories Panel” on “Adding to the Library” on page 700.
page 101.
Schedule Specification Dialog

Schedules and the object labels associated Specification dialog.
with them can be edited in the Schedule
1039
To open the Schedule Specification dialog The options in these dialogs are similar to
for a schedule, either select the schedule and those found in their corresponding Schedule
Defaults dialogs.
click the Open Object edit button or
double- click the schedule itself using the
Select Objects tool.
Text Tab
1 4
2
3
1 Columns to Include - Check the box see “Columns and Objects to Include” on
for each column you want to display in page 1043.
the schedule. At least one column must be
checked to create a schedule.
You can create multiple unique sched-
Columns may be added or removed at any ules using the Columns to Include and
time by selecting or clearing check boxes. Objects to Include filters.
The columns that are available will very

depending on the type of schedule selected. 3 Specify the appearance of the selected
schedule’s Text.
For a description of these options, see
• Specify the Character Height of the text
“Columns and Objects to Include” on page
in the schedule.
1043.
• To specify a printed text size, click the
2 Objects to Include - Check the boxes Scale button to open the Printed Size
for objects you want to include in the Input dialog. See “Scaling Text” on page
schedule. For a description of these options, 856.
1040
• Check Transparent Background to

4 Title - Enter a title for the schedule and
make the schedule background transpar- select the Show Title check box to
ent, allowing items behind the schedule display the title at the top of the schedule.
to show through. If unchecked, the sched-
ule has an opaque background that blocks 5 Include From Floor - Specify the floor
whose objects appear in the schedule.
everything behind it.
The default is the current floor. Uncheck this
• Check Don’t Rotate With Plan to pre- box to specify which floor objects in the
vent the schedule from rotating when selected schedule are found on. This is
Rotate View is used. See “Rotate unchecked by default for Room Finish and
View” on page 189. Plant Schedules.
Attributes Tab
1 Specify the Layer that the selected 2 Specify the Color of the selected
schedule should be placed on. See schedule.
“Layers” on page 116. • Check By Layer to use the color
• Check Default to place the schedule on assigned to the specified layer.
the default layer. Click the drop-down list • Click the Color bar to open the Windows
to select from all layers. standard Color dialog. See “Color
• Click Define to open the Layer Display Chooser Dialog” on page 727.
Options dialog. See “Layer Display
Options Dialog” on page 121. 3 Specify the appearance of the
schedule’s Font.
1041
• Select a font from the drop-down list.

4 Tabs - In this field, specify the number
• The check the box beside one or more of spaces from the left edge of the
text styles: Bold, Underline, Italic, and schedule where each new column begins.
Strikeout. The first column always starts at 0. In this
case, the second column starts 22 spaces in,
the third, 31 spaces in, and so on.
Label Tab
The Label tab of the Schedule Specification This tab is not available in the Room Finish
dialog controls the type, size and appearance Schedule Specification dialog.
of the labels that display in floor plan view.
1 5
2 6
7
3
8
4 9
1 Shape - There are six label shapes to All other label options, except for Character
choose from. The size of the shape is Height and Initial Offset, have no effect.
determined by the text it contains.
If no shape is selected and Show Labels is

also selected, window or door are labeled
If a shape is selected and Show Labels is according to the format defined on this tab and
checked, windows or doors show the shaped the Label tab for the specific object.
label with schedule number and nothing else.
1042
2 Size - Select one of the three formats to

use when showing opening size. This
applies to doors and windows only and also
affects the Size column of the door or
window schedule.
7 Show Labels - Check this box to
display object labels in floor plan view.
3 Include Type - Check this box to This also turns on the appropriate layer for
append the Size and Dimensions
columns selected on the Text tab with letters the objects labels in the Layer Display
designating the opening type. For example, Options dialog. See “Layer Display Options
3050DH describes a 3050 double hung Dialog” on page 121.
window. You can suppress the label for an individual
door or window by checking the Suppress
4 No rotate with plan - Keep the label labels check box in the Labels tab of the
from rotating with the plan.
Specification dialog for that object. Turning
5 Include Schedule # - Shows the off the label removes that item from the
schedule number in front of the size. window or door schedule.
8 Character Height - Specify the height

of characters associated with the labels
(in inches or mm).
6 Product Code Label - Replace the size Note: The size of the label shapes is speci-
label with the Code information from
fied in the Callout Defaults dialog. See “Call-
the Components dialog. See “Components
out Defaults” on page 839.
9 Label Text - Specify the leading

characters to be used for the label.
Columns and Objects to Include

Every schedule has a selection of Columns Information in the Description, Code,
to Include and Objects to Include on the Manufacturer, and Comments columns is
Text tab of its Schedule Defaults and drawn from an object’s Components dialog.
Specification dialogs. The columns that are See “Components Dialog” on page 1062.
available depend on the type of schedule
Some objects have several components, but
selected. See “Text Tab” on page 1040.
the schedule refers to only one. To find the
In addition to the columns that are included correct row, look at the Description column.
in the program, you can create your own Often but not always, the first item in the ID
custom columns. See “Adding Columns to column is the one the schedule refers to; for
1043
Object Labels
doors, this is D1, for windows, W1, for Description columns, the three doors will be
cabinets, C1, and so on. listed in the same line item - even if one is a
hinged door, one a slider and one a pocket
A complete list of the columns and objects
door.
available in the program can be accessed by
selecting Help> Contents and Index Room Finish Totals
from the program menu and browsing to
Schedules> Columns and Objects to Include When the Standard Area and/or Interior Area
on the Contents tab of the Chief Architect X2 columns are included in a Room Finish
Help. Schedule, an additional row is added at the
bottom of the schedule for Totals. The word
Columns and Quantity “Totals” displays in the first cell of this row
and the sums of the Standard and/or Interior
It is important to remember that the number Areas columns are calculated.
of columns you choose to include in a
schedule influences the number of separate The Totals row is included if the first column
line items that will be listed in the schedule. of the schedule is either Standard Area or
Interior Area; however, it will not say
For example, if you have three 30” wide “Totals” in the first cell.
doors, and do not include the Size and
Object Labels
Any object that can be included in a schedule Displaying Labels
can display a label in floor plan view. Object
labels can be generated based on one of An object’s label displays in floor plan view
several parameters: as long as Show Labels is checked in the
Schedule Specification dialog for that type
• Automatic Labels are based on the set- of object. See “Label Tab” on page 1042.
tings in the Schedule Specification dia-
log for the object type in question. The display of object labels can also be
controlled by layer in the Layer Display
• If a schedule is not present in the plan,
Automatic Labels are based on the set-
tings in the Schedule Defaults dialog for
the object type in question. You can choose to suppress the label for an
• You can use an object’s Component Code individual object on the Label tab of its
as its label by specifying it on the Label specification dialog.
tab of the object’s specification dialog.
• You can create a custom label for an
object by defining it on the Label tab of
its specification dialog.
1044
Label Tab
dialogs for a variety of different objects. Note: If you choose a label shape in the
Schedule Specification dialog, the settings
here are overridden and the schedule label is
used instead.
1
2
3
4
1 Check Suppress Label to suppress the 3 Select Use Component Code to

selected object’s label. replace the selected object’s Automatic
Label with one that uses the Component
2 Select Automatic Labels to use a label Code. See “Components Dialog” on page
as specified in either the Schedule
1062.
Defaults dialog or the Schedule
Specification dialog of a schedule currently
4 Select Specify Label to replace the
present in the plan. selected object’s Automatic Label with
whatever you type in the text field below.
1045
Object Labels
1046
1047
Chapter 39:
Materials Lists
Chief Architect can calculate a Materials List Chapter Contents

in three ways: From All Floors, From Area, • The Materials List Tools
or From Room. In addition, a polyline or • Creating an Accurate Materials List
multiple polylines can be used to define areas • Organizing Materials Lists
in a plan a Materials List can be generated • Material List Display Options Dialog
from. • Materials List Columns
Materials Lists can then be created, edited, • Editing Materials Lists
and printed directly from the program. They • Materials Polyline
can also be exported as text, html or xls • Managing Materials Lists
(Microsoft Excel) format files for use in • Exporting the Materials List
other programs. • The Master List
• Components Dialog
The Materials List is based on certain

assumptions that may not match your
building style. Chief Architect makes no repre-
sentation as to the accuracy or reliability of the
Materials List generated by Chief Architect.
Always compare the Materials List with a man-
ual take-off before providing a quote or ordering
materials for a job.
1048
The Materials List Tools

Select Tools> Materials List to access Calculate From Room
the Materials List tools.
To create the materials list for a room,
A materials list is like a snapshot of the select the room, then select Tools>
current plan at the time that the list is made. Materials List> Calculate From Room.
Any changes made to the model after a
materials list is generated are not included in Calculate From Room is also available
that list. Create a new materials list if you on a selected room’s edit toolbar. See
would like it to include these changes. “Editing Rooms” on page 277.
It is not necessary to wait until the plan is A materials list calculated from a room is
complete to generate a materials list. In fact, created for only the contents of that room:
you can create a series of materials lists wall materials are not included.
reflecting costs at various stages of a project.
Materials Polyline
For comparison, generate Materials Lists
with and without a proposed plan modifi- You can also produce a materials list
cation. for a defined area of a plan using a
Materials Polyline. Materials Polylines are
advantageous because they can be edited to
When you close a materials list window, the any shape,saved, and used as many times as
program asks if you want to save the needed. There are also several ways to create
materials list. Type a name and click Yes to them. See “Materials Polyline” on page
save the list or click No to close it without 1057.
saving.
Master List
Calculate From All Floors
SelectTools> Materials List> Master
Select Tools> Materials List> Calcu- List to open the Master List, a list of
late From All Floors to generate a previously used materials and any added
materials list for the entire model. information such as price or manufacturer.
See “The Master List” on page 1059.
Calculate From Area
Select Tools> Materials List> Calcu-
Materials List Management
late from Area to produce a materials Select Tools> Materials List>
list for the portion of a plan on a single floor Materials List Management to open a
that is included within a rectangular list of saved materials lists associated with
Materials Polyline. the current plan. See “Managing Materials
1049
Creating an Accurate Materials List
Creating an Accurate Materials List

In order to take full advantage of Chief better with framing built, however, since
Architect’s Materials List capabilities, there each framing piece can be counted. When
are several things to keep in mind. no framing is present, the framing is cal-
• The accuracy of your materials list is culated based on rules that may result in a
directly related to the accuracy of your different amount of material. See “Fram-
model. It takes more than just making ing” on page 460.
your model look right to generate an • Bear in mind that certain “tricks,” such as
accurate materials list. If, for example, using soffits to represent items that aren’t
you use CAD lines to draw an item on a directly supported in Chief Architect can
floor plan, that item is not included in the result in items being placed in the materi-
materials list. A better way would be to als list that you might not expect.
use a symbol or some other structural ele-
ment.
The more work you put into making your
• Framing items are estimated and added to model accurate, the more accurate your
the materials list even if you haven’t built materials list will be.
framing. The accuracy of framing lists is
Organizing Materials Lists

There are two basic ways to control what
items are calculated in the Materials List:
• By specifying which layers in the plan
are included in the list.
• By specifying which categories and sube-
categories are used.
In addition, you can control how much
information about each item is included by
specifying which columns to display.
There are some parts of a model that cannot
be excluded from the Materials List. Floor
and ceiling platforms are prime examples. If
you need to generate a materials list for only
part of a plan, such as an addition, consider
making a copy of the plan file. In the copy,
delete the as-built portion of the plan and
then generate a materials list.
1050
Columns
Categories
Materials Lists and Layers Categories

You can control which objects are included The line items in the Materials and Master
in the Materials List by layer in the Layer Lists are organized into a set of predefined
Display Options dialog. See “Materials categories, such as Electrical and Framing,
Lists” on page 117. which display in the ID column.
The inclusion of objects in the Materials List You can specify which category each item
is controlled using the Mat column of the belongs to in the Materials List and Master
Layer Display Options dialog. List. In addition, many items can be assigned
to a category prior to generating a materials
An “M” in this column indicates that objects
list in the Components dialog. See
in a layer are included in the Materials List.
“Components Dialog” on page 1062.
Click in the cell to add or remove the “M.”
121.
1051
Material List Display Options Dialog
To specify a line item’s category Subcategories

1. Create a materials list, open the Master You can create any number of subcategories
List, or open the Components dialog for each Materials List category in the
for a particular object. Preferences dialog. See “Categories Panel”
on page 101.
2. Click in the cell in the ID column for a
line item. Items can be assigned to a subcategory in the
Materials List and, for many items, in their
3. Select the desired category from the
object’s Components dialog in the same
drop-down list that becomes available.
manner that they can be assigned to a
The categories that are available cannot be category.
altered; however, you can specify which
Subcategories can be useful when creating
categories are included in the Materials List
schedules. See “Adding Columns to
in either of two ways:
• Globally, in the Preferences dialog. See
“Material List Panel” on page 98. Material List Columns
• For individual lists in the Material List
There are two ways to specify which
Display Options dialog. See “Material
columns are included in the Materials List as
List Display Options Dialog” on page
well as the order in which they display:
1052.
• Globally, in the Preferences dialog. See
“Report Style Panel” on page 99.
• For individual lists in the Material List
Display Options dialog.
Material List Display Options Dialog

When a materials list or the Master List Options to open the Material List Display
is open, select Tools> Display Options dialog for the currently open list.
1052
Categories Tab Columns Tab
Check the box beside each column you want

to include in the materials list. You can
suppress the column’s display by removing
the check next to the column name.
Columns appear in the materials list in the
same order that they display here.
Check the box beside the name of each
category that you want to include in the Move Up - Click on a column name, then
active materials list. click this button to move that item up one
place in the list.
These categories appear in the ID column in
the order they are presented here. Move Down - Click this button to move the
selected column down in the list.
The materials list changes automatically to
reflect any changes you make as soon as the Options Tab
OK button is clicked.
Note: The information in a suppressed cate-

gory is still part of the materials list. If the mate-
rials list is exported, suppressed categories are
exported, as well.
Check Restrict floor and select a floor

number to restrict the materials list to. To
restore it to showing all floors, remove the
check. This only affects Materials Lists Cal-
culated From All Floors.
If all the supplies for a job are purchased
from the same supplier, restricting the
1053
Materials List Columns
supplier saves time. Check Restrict Suppliers can also be added to the list in the
supplier, then choose a supplier from the Components dialog. See “Components
drop-down list. Dialog” on page 1062.
Materials List Columns

The columns in the Materials List, the The following lists the capablities of each
Components dialog, and the Master List are column.
very similar, but not all columns appear in all
places.
Column
Available In Editable In Description
Name
ID Materials List, Materials List, Displays an automatically generated identi-
Master List, Components Dialog fier for each line item. Select the cell in this
Components Dialog column to change an item’s category.
Use Master List, Master List, Com- Check boxes indicate if each item is
Components Dialog ponents Dialog included in the Materials List.
Sub Cat Materials List, Materials List, Select a cell in this column to change a line
Components Dialog Components Dialog item’s subcategory.
Flr Materials List N/A Shows the floor that the line item is located
on.
Size Materials List, Materials List, Click in a cell to edit the size description of
Master List, Components Dialog the line item. To restore the original size,
Components Dialog delete the text you typed in. For a blank
cell, type a single blank space
Descrip- Materials List, Materials List, Click in a cell to edit the description of the
Master List, Components Dialog line item in the same way that the Size can
tion Components Dialog be edited.
Quantity Master List Master List Specify how many of an item must be
found before information from the Master
List is applied to it in a materials list. If at
least this many items are found, price, sup-
plier, and other information is used.
1054
Column
Name
Count Materials List, Components Dialog This is the actual number of an item, either
Components Dialog associated with the selected object or in
the Materials List. Count can increased for
accessories added to a selected object.
Extra Materials List, Materials List, Specify an additional amount of the line
Components Dialog Components Dialog item. Changes made in the Components
are reflected in the Count column in the
Materials List.
Unit Materials List, Materials List, Indicates the units used to measure an
Components Dialog Components Dialog item. When the unit is changed, the Quan-
tity updates to reflect the change.
Price Materials List, Materials List, This is the price of an item per unit. A Price
Master List Master List, in the Master List is not used if one has
Components Dialog Components Dialog been entered in the Components dialog.
% Materials List, Materials List, Specify a markup percentage for the item.
Master List Master List A markup in the Master List is not used if
Markup Components Dialog Components Dialog one has been entered in the Components
dialog.
Labor Materials List, Materials List, Specify a labor cost for the item. A Labor
Master List Master List value in the Master List is not used if one
Components Dialog Components Dialog has been entered in the Components dia-
log.
Equip Materials List, Materials List, Specify an equipment cost related to the
Master List Master List item. An Equipment value in the Master
Components Dialog Components Dialog List is not used if one has been entered in
the Components dialog.
Tot Cost Materials List, Materials List, This is the total cost based on Count, Unit,
Components Dialog Components Dialog Price, % Markup, Labor and Equip values.
Supplier Materials List, Materials List, Specify a supplier for the item. A Supplier
Master List Master List in the Master List is not used if one has
Components Dialog Components Dialog been entered in the Components dialog.
Def Master List Master List Indicates which item is to be used as the
default when more than one item is avail-
able. Click in this column to specify the line
item as the default.
1055
Editing Materials Lists
Column
Name
Code Materials List, Materials List, Specify a Code, such as a SKU, for the
Master List Master List item. A Code in the Master List is not used
Components Dialog Components Dialog if one has been entered in the Components
dialog. The Code can also be used in a
schedule or used as a label. See
“Schedules” on page 1036.
Comment Materials List, Materials List, Additional information related to the item
Master List Master List can be entered here. A Comment in the
Components Dialog Components Dialog Master List is not used if one has been
entered in the Components dialog. A Com-
ment can also be used in a schedule.
Manu- Materials List, Materials List, Specify a manufacturer for the item. A
Master List Master List Manufacturer in the Master List is not used
facturer Components Dialog Components Dialog if one has been entered in the Components
dialog.
Editing Materials Lists

Materials lists can be edited in a variety of cell in an appropriate column. A drop-down
ways. You can adjust the width of a column arrow displays to the left of the cell. Click it
by clicking and dragging the bar on the right to view a list of suppliers or manufacturers
side of the column name. for that item and select one.
When a materials list is calculated, you can
Adding Information have the program search the Master List for
You can enter information in the Price, Price, Supplier, and Code information for
Supplier, Code, Comment and Manufacturer each item by selecting Tools> Update From
columns for each item. Master. The information used is marked as
“Def” (default) in the Master List. See
Adding price or other information for any “Materials List Columns” on page 1054.
item is straightforward. Simply click in the
cell and type the desired information. When
Changing Information
the information is correct, you can add it to
the Master List. See “Adding to the Master Although the information in some columns
List” on page 1061. cannot be saved to the Master List, you can
change the information in any column in an
You can switch between several existing
individual materials list. As with added
suppliers or manufacturers for a given item
by double-clicking on the right side of the
1056
information, click in a cell to select the Count and Price, which are always used in
existing text, then type in the desired text. the calculation even if they are not shown.
To move an item in a materials list to a new
category, select the cell in the ID column and Copying Information
choose a new category from the drop-down Portions of a materials list can be copied and
list that becomes available. You can also
then pasted into a Text object or into a
select a subcategory by clicking in the cell in
word processing program or spreadsheet
the Sub Cat column. See “Categories” on
program using the standard Windows Copy,
page 1051.
Cut and Paste commands. See “Copying &
Pasting Text” on page 858.
Total Cost
Total Cost is calculated using the Count, Changing the Font
Unit, and Price, %Markup, Labor and Equip
The font used for the Materials List can be
columns to calculate the cost. The formula
specified in the Preferences dialog. See
used is:
“Font Panel” on page 74.
(Count + Extra) * Price * (1 + (%
Markup/100)) + ((Count + Extra) * Labor)
If you have problems with the Materials
+ ((Count + Extra) * Equip) List printing too small, try using a different
If a column does not appear, 0 is used for the Materials font.
value of that column with the exception of
Materials Polyline
To create a materials polyline, select When the Materials Polyline is positioned
Tools> Materials List> Materials and shaped as needed, select it and click the
Polyline. Draw a rectangular polyline in Calculate Materials List edit button. A
floor plan view around the area to be Materials List is created for items within the
calculated. polyline on the current floor.
You can also convert a regular closed Objects such as cabinets, furniture, studs,
polyline into a Materials Polyline using the windows and doors are included in the
Convert Polyline edit tool. See “Convert Materials List only if their center point is
Polyline Dialog” on page 206. within the Material Polyline.
Once drawn, a Materials Polyline can be Larger objects such as walls, framing, floors
edited like other closed polylines. See and ceilings, and floor and ceiling joists can
“Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on be partially selected by a Materials Polyline,
page 160. so that only portions of them are included in
the Materials List.
1057
Managing Materials Lists
A few objects, such as floor joists, which are To specify material list polyline categories
counted as pieces in a full Materials List
must be counted in linear measurements to 1. Select the Materials Polyline and click
accomodate this. For example, if three 16- the Open Object edit button.
foot joists fall within a four foot square area,
the Materials List shows 12 linear feet of 2. On the Categories tab of the Material
joist material. This can be useful for List Polyline Specification dialog,
additions and/or remodels. check the categories to be included in
the materials calculation. Categories not
Categories checked for this polyline are ignored.
Since you create multiple polylines for
The Materials List categories included in a
materials calculation, one polyline might
materials list created using a Materials
show only Masonry and Framing while
Polyline can be specified prior to the
another might include only Roofing.
generation of the list in the Material List
Polyline Specification dialog.
Managing Materials Lists

Select Tools> Materials List> Click on the name of a saved Materials List
Materials List Management to open in the list on the left to select it.
the Material List Management dialog, where • Done - Close the Material List
you can access and manage a list of saved Management dialog.
materials lists.
• Help - Open the Help Index to the page
describing this dialog.
• Edit - Open the selected Materials List.
You can also double-click an item in the
list.
• Delete - Delete the selected Materials
List.
• Rename - Open the Rename Material
List dialog and type a new name for the
list.
Exporting the Materials List

Any Materials List can be exported From a Materials List, or the Master List,
into a text (.txt) file that can be opened select File> Export Material List to open
directly by most spreadsheet programs. the Material Export Options dialog.
1058
1 5
2 6
3 7
4
1 Tab Delimited (TXT) - Select this only those columns that would have been
option to create a text file with a tab exported by Version 8. This is useful if you
between each field entry in the Materials are using a program that expects the file to be
List, and a carriage return between each row. in this format.
2 Comma Delimited (CSV) - Select this Estimating Software

option to create a text file with a
comma between each field entry in the You can export a Materials List to a word
Materials List and a carriage return between processor or spreadsheet program to arrange
each row. it in your estimating format. You can also
export the Materials List to a number of
3 Excel (XLS) - Select this option to commercial estimating programs in whose
create a Microsoft Excel format file.
databases you can keep your current pricing,
4 HTML - Select this option to create an labor costs, and markups and generate
html file that you can view with your reports based on this data.
web browser.
Before purchasing an estimating software
5 No Column Headers - Check this box program, be sure that the program supports
to prevent column headings from the direct import of Chief Architect Materials
appearing in the first row of the text file. Lists.
6 Run Default Spreadsheet/Editor - Any questions regarding estimating software

Check this box to immediately open the packages and how they interact with Chief
exported file with the program specified on Architect should be directed toward the
your computer. company providing the estimating software.
Chief Architect is unable to provide any
7 Export Version 8 Columns Only - technical support for third party programs.
Check this box to limit the export to
The Master List

Select Tools> Materials List> Master manufacturer, and other information for all
List to specify price, supplier, of the items in your Materials Lists.
1059
The Master List
When a materials list is calculated, you select however, and only the active list is updated
Tools> Update from Master to have the with new information. You can specify
program search the Master List for a record which Master List is active in the
for each line item. If an identical record is Preferences dialog. See “Master List Panel”
available, its information is included in the on page 100.
materials list.
If the Master List contains more than one You should regularly back up the Master
record for an item, the program references Materials List (mmaster.mat) or lists
the last one entered. You can override this by using Windows Explorer.
defining one specific entry as the default.
This is achieved by clicking on the check box The Master List is almost identical to a
in the Def column. Materials List, but has a few additional
controls to help with viewing.
Chief Architect allows you to have more than
one Master List. Only one can be active,
1
2
3
4
1 The Category drop-down list at the top one particular category for display, or all
left corner of the window lets you select categories.
1060
2 As with individual materials lists, you Similarly, items in a materials list can be
can specify which Columns display in updated to include changes made to the
the list. See “Material List Display Options Master List by selecting rows in the Master
Dialog” on page 1052. List, then selecting Tools> Update from
Master.
3 Use the Find field near the bottom of
the window to search for text in the
Master List. Editing the Master List
The search starts from the currently selected In the Master List, existing line items can be
cell and moves to the right, then moves down modified or deleted. For information about
to the next row starting at the left column, the editability of columns in the Master List,
and so on, until it finds an instance of the text see “Materials List Columns” on page 1054.
you entered. Often, the Master List will include items that
you may not want to include in all materials
4 The Status Bar at the bottom indicates lists.
how many entries are listed.
• Checkboxes in the Use column indicate
Adding to the Master List whether each item is included in the
Materials List. If Use is unchecked, the
You can add edited records in a materials list item is not included. This is useful in
to the Master List by selecting Tools> cases where several line items will be
Update to Master. purchased as a single unit.
• This Quantity column is used to specify
To use Update to Master
how many of an item must be found
before information from the Master List
1. Create a materials list and make changes
is applied to it in a materials list. If at
to any editable column of a line item.
least this many of the item are found,
2. Select the line item by clicking on the price, supplier, and other information is
line number on the left side of the list. used. Quantity is useful for applying a
When selected, then entire line becomes quantity discount.
highlighted.
• When more than one line item is avail-
3. You can select multiple adjacent rows by able for a specific component or acces-
holding down the Shift key while click- sory, the Def column indicates which
ing. item is to be used. Click this column to
4. Select Tools> Update to Master. The specify this item as the default. This is
information in the selected line is saved useful when a line item has been updated
in the Master List. to the Master List more than once with
different price, supplier or other informa-
Once Master List information exists for a tion.
particular item, you do not need to enter it
again until you want to update it. To delete a row from the Master List, click
on the row number at the far left. The entire
1061
Components Dialog
row highlights. Select Edit> Delete, click the

Delete button, or press the Delete key on
your keyboard.
Components Dialog
Many architectural objects in the Select an object, then click the
program, from walls to cabinets to Components edit button to open the
images, have components and accessories Components dialog for that object.
associated with them that are calculated in
the Materials List. You can also define the components for a
variety of items saved in unlocked libraries
In addition to editing and adding information of the Library Browser. When a library item
for objects and their accessories in the is placed into a plan, its component
Materials and Master Lists, you can edit and information goes along with it. See “Editing
add information directly to these objects in Library Objects” on page 694.
the Components dialog.
The information in the Components dialog is copied, even into a different plan, this
is the same as the Materials List line item(s) information is transferred, as well, and will
for the selected object and can be edited in be calculated in the Materials List.
much the same way. See “Editing Materials
In addition to their components, cabinets also
have subcomponents such as their doors,
Price, Supplier, Manufacturer, Comments drawers and hardware. Subcomponent
and Type information can be added and information in the ID, Size and Description
saved with the object itself. When that object
1062
columns is indented to help distinguish it To create a new accessory

from regular component information.
1. Select an object and click the
Accessories Components edit button to open the
In the Components dialog, you can add Components dialog.
additional Materials List entries to a selected 2. Click the Add button and a new line is
object. These user-created entries are called added to the spreadsheet.
Accessories. 3. The new entry is given an item name of
Accessory#. You can give it any name
Note: Accessory quantities can only be edited you wish.
when one object is selected. If multiple objects
4. All other columns for accessory items
are group selected, accessory quantities are
locked. except ID can also be edited.
5. To remove an accessory, click any part
of its row and click the Delete edit
button.
1063
Appendix A
Whats New in
Chief Architect
Welcome to Chief Architect X2 and thank versions of Chief Architect to Chief

you for your purchase. This appendix has Architect X2.
been written to help our upgrading customers
make a smooth transition from earlier Chapter Contents
Before You Begin
Be sure to read this section before opening any plans created in earlier versions
of Chief Architect.
There are many new features in Chief Architect X2, and many existing features have changed.
These changes affect the way Chief Architect functions, so it is very important to be familiar
with them.
Chief Architect X2 can open the .PL1, .LA1, .plan, and .layout files from prior versions.
Before opening any files created in earlier versions of Chief Architect, it is important to be
aware of changes made in the newest version and the effect they may have on your legacy plan
and layout files. As with any software, it is always best to finish any current projects you may
have in progress in the version of the software in which you began them.
The following checklist suggests steps you should take before migrating your files to Chief
Architect X2. More information about each of these steps can be found after the checklist.
1064
Getting Started Check List

1. Check for Program Updates
2. Convert Legacy Library Files
3. Migrate custom graphics files
4. Review the New Features List
5. Review the Preferences settings
6. Create new custom Template Plan and Layout files
7. Set up custom Toolbar Configurations
8. Export Entire Plan
9. Check www.chiefarchitect.com for more information
1. Check for Program Updates

Program updates contain improvements to the original release version and we recommend
using the most current version available. By default, Chief Architect checks for program
updates every day when you launch the program. For information about changing this, see
“General Panel” on page 79. Please note that program updates are available for download,
which means that you need internet access to acquire them.
You can check for updates at any time by:
• Selecting Help> Download Program Updates from the menu.
• Visit the Chief Architect Web site at www.chiefarchitect.com and navigate to the Program
Updates page.
2. Convert Legacy Library Files
Extensive changes were made in Chief Architect X2 to the structure of the library. You should
not install or copy any of your library content from previous program versions into the Chief
Architect X2 library.
The Chief Architect X2 installer will locate any library files from Chief Architect X1 on the
computer and will ask if you want to convert them for use in Chief Architect X2.
If you install Chief Architect on a computer other than the one you ran Chief Architect X1 on,
the installer will not find your X1 library files. If the installer does not ask you to copy your X1
library files or if you decide that you only want to bring some of them forward into Chief
Architect X2, you can do so by selecting Library> Convert Legacy (.alb) Library Files from
the program menu. See “Legacy Library Conversion” on page 701.
3. Migrate custom graphics files
If you have custom graphics files, including textures, images or backdrops, that you were using
in a previous program version, you can copy them manually using Windows Explorer for use in
Chief Architect X2. See “Chief Architect Data” on page 44.
1065
Before You Begin
• Copy custom texture files to the Chief Architect X2 Textures folder located in the Chief
Architect X2 Data folder.
• Copy custom image files to your Chief Architect X2 Images folder located in the Chief
Architect X2 Data folder.
• Copy custom backdrop files to your Chief Architect X2 Backdrops folder located in the
Chief Architect X2 Data folder.
In Chief Architect X1, custom graphics were saved in the Chief Architect X1 Data folder. In
previous program versions, they were located in the program’s installation directory, in folders
that began with “My”. Custom backdrops, for example, were saved in “My Backdrops”.
Texture and image files are not listed in the Library Browser. These files can be assigned to
material and image objects, however, which are stored in the library. There are several tools
available for adding materials and images to the library. For more information, see “Images” on
page 933 and “Creating Materials” on page 712.
4. Review the New Features List
There are a number of important reasons why you should familiarize yourself with the new and
improved features in Chief Architect X2:
• New and improved features allow you to produce drawings more efficiently, so it is to your
advantage to use them.
• Some changes to existing functionality may affect your accustomed drawing style and thus
your productivity if you are not aware of them.
• New features may affect your choice of settings in your template files, as well as your pre-
ferred Preferences settings.
See “New and Improved Features by Chapter” on page 1068.
5. Review the Preferences settings
Any changes that you made to the Preferences settings in your previous version do not migrate
into Chief Architect X2. You should review all the settings in the Preferences dialog to make
sure that they are set to suit your drawing needs. For more information, see “Preferences
6. Create new custom Template Plan and Layout files
Chief Architect X2 installs a selection of template plan and layout files that have been set up to
take advantage of the program’s updated tools and features. See “Template Files” on page 51.
For best results, it is recommended that you either:
• Use the installed templates when creating new plans and layout files in Chief Architect X2
• Use the installed templates as the basis for creating new custom templates.
1066
If you choose to continue using custom template files that you created in a previous program
version, it is very important that you take the time to carefully review all the default settings in
the file, making sure that they will continue to suit your needs in X2. First, make copies of your
custom templates in the Chief Architect X2 Templates directory located in the Chief Architect
X2 Data folder in Windows Explorer. Next, open each template as you would a regular plan or
layout file, by selecting File> Open, and then save any changes you make by selecting File>
Save.
If you do choose to continue using a legacy template plan, it is best to also use a legacy layout
template from the same program version, as well. As with a template plan, take the time to go
through the layout template’s defaults and make sure they are suited for use in X2 and that their
line weight scales do not conflict with those in your template plans. See “Line Weights and
Scaling” on page 1000.
7. Set up custom Toolbar Configurations
It is possible to migrate toolbar configuration files from previous versions to Chief Architect
X2; however, it is not recommended because it is likely that you will be missing new tools
available in X2.
Instead, we recommend that you set up your custom toolbars the way you would like them in
Chief Architect X2. You may find it most effective to customize your toolbars as you get used
to working in the new program version, rather than beforehand. See “Toolbar Configurations”
on page 112.
8. Export Entire Plan
Before migrating a legacy file created in Chief Architect X1 or prior, it is a good idea to open
the plan in the program version in which is was created and use the Export Entire Plan tool to
export the plan with all associated support files, including textures, backdrops and images. See
“Exporting an Entire Plan” on page 58.
9. Check www.chiefarchitect.com for more information
If you have additional questions about the changes in Chief Architect, up to date information is
available in the Support section of our web site. You can also post questions on the Chief Talk
web forum at www.chieftalk.com.
For Files Created in Version 10 and Prior

In addition to the above recommendations, if you wish to open files created in Chief Architect
Version 10 or prior, these additional steps are also suggested before you open legacy files in
Chief Architect X2.
1067
New and Improved Features by Chapter
1. Select the desired Layer Set

Before migrating a legacy file created in Chief Architect Version 10, open it in Version 10 and
make sure that the active layer set is one that is useful in most situations. Extensive changes to
layer sets since Version 10 allow only the active layer set to be migrated in Chief Architect X2.
2. Set up your Legacy File Conversion Preferences
Several different preference settings allow you to control how legacy files from Version 9.5 and
prior are migrated into Chief Architect X2. You may want to do some experiments with these
settings so that you fully understand how they affect your older plans when they are read into
Chief Architect X2.
a. Set your legacy text and dimension conversion fonts - Set your Legacy Text Con-
version and Legacy Dimension Conversion fonts in the Preferences dialog before
opening any old plans. Use the same settings here that you had in your preferences for
your previous version of Chief Architect so that your text and dimensions will look
the same. For more information, see “Font Panel” on page 74.
b. Set your legacy plan and layout page setup information - Page Setup information
can be done on an individual plan basis. Use the Page Setup preference for legacy
plans and layouts so that your plans and layouts are set up the same way they were in
your previous version. Note: You should make sure you leave the scale for layouts at 1
to 1. For more information, see “Text & Page Setup Panel” on page 77.
c. Set your legacy layer conversion settings - Significant changes have been made to
improve the setup and control of layers. Preference settings have been provided to
control how your legacy plan layers are converted when you open a previous version
plan in Version X2. By default, layers should be converted into the new format so that
they more closely match the defaults that we provide in the template plans. You can
modify these settings so that your layers more closely match how they looked in your
previous version. For more information, see “Layers Panel” on page 84.
3. Replace problem symbols
In recent versions of Chief Architect, any symbols placed in a plan are saved with the plan file
and can be read by Chief Architect X2. If you open a plan file created in an older version of
Chief Architect and notice problems with a symbol, however, you can either delete it or replace
it with a new symbol from Chief Architect X2 library. See “Replace From Library” on page
693.

The following is a list of new and improved Where possible, cross-references to
features in Chief Architect Version X2. additional information has been provided.
1068
Installation ing you to easily change how objects are

included in marquee selection. See “Mar-
• New links to on-line videos provided
quee Select” on page 146.
throughout the program’s Help Menu.
See “Online Help Videos” on page 220 or • New Cancel Selection/Previous Com-
http://video.chiefarchitect.com/videos. mand, Next Command and Previous
Command hotkeys allow you to switch
File Management between active tools using the keyboard.
See “Next/Last Command” on page 115.
• Installed template plans updated with a
variety of cosmetic improvements to rail-
Layers
ings, ceiling heights. See “Template
Files” on page 51. • New layers for labels: fixture, furniture,
geometric shapes, hardware, millwork,
• Updated structural defaults in installed
plants and architectural block labels have
template plans to reflect common build-
their own layers, allowing greater display
ing practices today. See “Template Files”
flexibility. See “Object Labels” on page
on page 51.
694.
• Installed template plans updated to better
• New “Roof Plan” layer set included in
agree with NKBA standards. See “Tem-
installed template plans. See “Layer
plate Files” on page 51.
Defaults & Preferences Editing Objects
• New Selection Mode toolbar buttons
• New Nudge keyboard commands use
allow you to quickly specify how selec-
arrow keys to move selected objects in
tion marquees select objects. See “Mar-
2D and 3D views. See “Nudging” on
quee Select” on page 146.
page 179.
• Can now specify transparency of edit
handles and fill color for selected objects. • Fillet Two Lines and Chamfer Two
See “Colors Panel” on page 74. Lines edit tools now change the
• New Soffit Defaults dialog lets you set actual shape of an object rather than just
initial settings for soffits independent of changing its appearance. See “Reshaping
the Wall Cabinet and Floor Defaults. See Objects” on page 184.
“Soffits” on page 660. • No longer any limit to Fillet Radius or
• Improved control of line length format in Chamfer Distance used by Fillet Two
the Status Bar. See “The Status Bar” on Lines and Chamfer Two Lines
page 34. tools. See “Reshaping Objects” on page
184.
Menus and Toolbar Buttons
• Can now convert closed polylines into
• New Marquee Selection Mode but- Floor and Ceiling Platform holes. See
tons can be added to your toolbar, allow-
1069
“Floor and Ceiling Platforms” on page • Foundation walls now display entirely
358. independent of their footings in floor plan
view. See “Foundation Walls” on page
• Improved Center Object edit tool 222.
lets you center objects relative to any
cabinet, even those that are not located in Rooms
a room. See “Center Object” on page
181. • New “Unspecified” room type. See
“Room Types” on page 271.
• Move to Front of Group now avail- • Room labels can now display either the
able for cabinet objects, library symbols Room Type or a user specified Room
and architectural blocks. See “Drawing Name. See “Room Labels” on page 273.
Groups” on page 176.
• Improved feedback when clicking to Doors and Windows
place objects. See “Click-to-Create” on
• Can now set rough opening defaults for
page 142.
exterior doors, interior doors and win-
dows independently. See “Door Defaults”
Walls, Railings, & Fencing on page 293 and “Window Defaults” on
• Can now locate either upper or lower page 317.
pony wall with dimensions. See “Moving • Improved interface in Door and Window
Walls Using Dimensions” on page 233. Specification dialogs. See “Door Speci-
• Can now display either the upper or fication Dialog” on page 303 and “Win-
lower portion of individual pony walls. dow Specification Dialog” on page 332.
See “Wall Types Tab” on page 256. • Improved behaviors of doors placed into
• Windows and doors placed in the parts of Double Walls. See “Casing Tab” on page
pony walls not visible in floor plan view 307.
can now be set to display. See “Pony Wall • Windows on non-default window levels
Defaults” on page 218. can now display labels. See “Window
• Object Snaps now locate lower pony Levels” on page 324.
walls when displayed. See “Pony Walls” • Can now specify default door swing
on page 223. angle. See “Door Defaults” on page 293.
• Improved usability of layers controlling • Can now recess default windows and
walls by replacing “Walls, Beams” layer doors to the main wall layer or sheathing
with two layers. Invisible Beam walls layer. See “Door Defaults” on page 293
are now placed on the “Walls, Invisible” and “Window Defaults” on page 317.
layer and ceiling lines are now on the
“Ceiling Break Lines” layer. See “Dis- Multiple Floors
playing Walls” on page 230.
• Platform Hole tool replaced by two new
tools: Hole in Floor Platform and
1070
Hole in Ceiling Platform . See “Plat- • Improved feedback when placing or edit-
form Holes” on page 358. ing Auto Dormers. See “Dormers” on
page 417.
• Can now use Edit Area All Floors to
copy multiple floors of a plan into a new • Improved feedback when editing curved
plan without first adding floors to the roof planes in 3D views. See “Curved
new plan. See “Copying Floors” on page Roof Planes” on page 404.
357. • Can now specify the smoothness of
curved roof planes in 3D views in the
Foundations Roof Plane Specification dialog. See
• Foundation Defaults dialog reorganized
for greater ease of use. See “Foundation • New Edit All Roof Planes tool
Defaults” on page 363. opens the Roof Plane Specification dia-
log for all roof planes in the current plan.
Roofs See “Roof Plane Specification Dialog”
• Can now specify roof surface, sheathing on page 392.
and ceiling thicknesses in the Build Roof • Easier to use Gable/Roof Line tool.
and Roof Plane Specification dialogs. Can now be used to create a gable over a
See “Options Tab” on page 382. bay. See “Gable/Roof Line” on page 412.
• Can now specify thickness of ceiling sur- • Improved Retain Manually Drawn
faces of manually drawn ceiling planes. Roof Planes and Retain Edited Roof
See “General Tab” on page 410. Planes options no longer generate new
• Both fascia and subfascia can now be roof planes at the same location as a
specified for roof eaves. See “Roof Tab” retained roof plane. See “Rebuilding
on page 477. Roofs” on page 401.
• New Rafter Tails option allows custom • Greater control over the ceiling holes and
rafter tail profiles to generate under roof shafts generated for skylights and roof
eaves. See “Rafter Tails” on page 425. holes. See “Roof Hole/Skylight Specifi-
• Eave depth can now be set independent cation Dialog” on page 416.
of rafter depth, and rafters tails can be
trimmed to the soffit, or full depth. See Framing
“Rafter Tails” on page 425. • Improved organization of Framing Tools.
• New Display on Floor Above and General Framing and Wall Bridg-
Display on Floor Below edit buttons ing are now found in Framing menu
make it easier to move display of roof instead of CAD menu. See “The Framing
planes and truss bases. See “Display on Tools” on page 464.
Floor Above/Below” on page 387. • Framing Tools now have three separate
parent buttons: General Framing Tools
1071
, Floor/Ceiling Framing Tools , cal Service Specification Dialog” on page

522.
and Roof Framing Tools . See “The
• Improved control of electrical fixtures’
Framing Tools” on page 464.
offset from floor, ceiling, wall or cabinet.
• New Automatic Framing options direct See “Electrical Service Specification
the program to rebuild automatic wall, Dialog” on page 522.
floor, ceiling and roof framing whenever
• Table lamps can now be placed on
changes are made to the structure. See
shelves and wall cabinets. See “Placing
“Rebuilding Framing” on page 463.
Library Objects” on page 690.
• New General Framing tool lets you • Ceiling mounted lights now automati-
create framing objects anywhere in a cally locate vaulted and cathedral ceil-
plan, while use-specific framing objects ings. See “Lights” on page 518.
are now confined to their intended struc-
• Improved behavior of lights mounted
tural components in the plan. See “Man-
beneath wall cabinets. See “Placing
ual Framing” on page 462.
• Can now specify rebar and wrap for con-
• Default electrical symbols and their asso-
crete Posts and Beams. See “Post Specifi-
ciated CAD blocks are now saved in the
cation Dialog” on page 492 .
plan rather than the library. See “Electri-
• Wall top and bottom plate defaults can cal Defaults” on page 516.
now be set independent of one another in
• More flexible electrical labels can show
the Build Framing dialog. See “Wall
component codes and custom text. See
Tab” on page 471.
“Displaying Electrical Objects” on page
• Improved ability to assign wall framing 520.
materials to different wall types. See
“Wall Framing” on page 461. Trim & Moldings
• Improved calculation of maximum length • Can now create a 2’ x 2’ Molding
of rafters, allowing for longer rafters in
metric plans. Polyline in floor plan view with a
single click. See “Molding Polyline Tool”
on page 536.
Trusses
• New Ceiling Stepsetting allows you to Cabinets
create trusses that recognize a ceiling on
a lower floor. See “Ceiling Steps” on • New Generate Custom Countertop
page 497. edit tool allows you to create an editable
custom countertop over one or more
Electrical selected base cabinets. See “Custom
• Can now specify size of electrical objects Countertops” on page 549.
in their specification dialog. See “Electri-
1072
• Can now specify panels on cabinet sides • Countertop overhangs can now be seen in
and backs in the cabinet specification dia- floor plan view See “Displaying Cabi-
logs. See “Sides/Back Tab” on page 569. nets” on page 554.
• New Cabinet Filler Tools allow you • Can now dimension to countertop edges.
to place and edit cabinet fillers. See “The • Cabinet doors and drawers can now be
Cabinet Tools” on page 548. placed as stand-alone fixtures in plans.
• Improved automatic cabinet fillers are See “Placing Library Objects” on page
more accurate at corners and can be sup- 690.
pressed if manually placed fillers are pre- • Cabinet width and single/double doors
ferred. See “Cabinet Fillers” on page 551. can now be set entirely independent of
• Automatic and manually placed cabinet one another. See “Front Tab” on page
fillers are now counted in the Materials 565.
List. See “Cabinet Fillers” on page 551. • Improved ability to select all cabinet sur-
• New “False Drawer” cabinet front item faces in 3D. See “Editing Cabinets” on
includes drawer hardware while “Door page 556.
Panel” items include no hardware. See
“Front Tab” on page 565. Terrain
• Default cabinet and countertop display • Can now specify fill style and labels for
now agrees with NKBA Standards for plant images. See “Plant Image Specifi-
Kitchen Floor Plans. cation Dialog” on page 622.
• Automatic cabinet labels agree with • Can now evenly distribute a selected
NKBA Standards for Kitchen Floor plant or other image within a Garden
Plans. See “Cabinet Labels” on page 555. Bed . See “Garden Bed Tools” on
• Cabinet front indicators now display on page 590.
all cabinet types, including special types.
See “Displaying Cabinets” on page 554. Roads & Sidewalks
• Cabinet front indicators can now be dis- • New Spline and Polyline Driveway
played independent of module lines. See
tools. See “Road, Driveway and Side-
• Can now specify either full or partial cab-
walk Tools” on page 636.
inet module lines. See “Displaying Cabi-
nets” on page 554.
Other Objects
• Automatic countertops now display along
with Custom Countertops in floor plan • New 3D Face tool with special edit
view when “Cabinets, Countertops” layer behaviors. See “Primitive Tools” on page
is on. See “Displaying Cabinets” on page 649.
554.
• New Distributed Objects tools
allow you to evenly distribute objects
1073
within a region or along a path. See “Dis- Zoom & View Tools
tributed Objects” on page 666.
• The Zoom Tools are now available
Libraries for use in all 3D views. See “Zoom
• Library Browser reorganized into five
broad categories, including two for easy • Can now choose to zoom in 3D views by
sharing of library content between users cropping or expanding the views extents,
or computers. See “Library Browser or by adjusting its Field of View. See
Contents” on page 685. “Zooming” on page 763.
• Improved speed of library searches. See • Improved Fill Window behavior now
“Library Search Dialog” on page 687. recognizes nearly all visible objects. See
• View of selected library object in the “Fill Window” on page 732.
Library Browser Selection Pane can now • To accomodate new Nudge tools, scroll-
be rotated and zoomed. See “Selection ing in a view is performed by pressing
and Preview Panes” on page 686. Shift + arrow keys rather than just the
• When you move your mouse pointer over arrow keys. See “Using the Arrow Keys”
an item in the Library Browser Preview on page 732.
Pane, a Tool Tip displays the its name.
See “The Preview Pane” on page 687. 3D Views
• Expand All and Collapse All commands • All overviews can now be either perspec-
are now available at all levels of library. tive or orthographic. See “3D View
• Drop-in cabinet fixtures and appliances Tools” on page 749.
can now be placed as stand-alone fixtures • New Exterior Elevations tool cre-
as well as inserted in cabinets. See “Plac- ates and saves front, back, left and right
ing Library Objects” on page 690. elevation views with a single click. See
• The panes in the Select Library Object “Cross Section/Elevation Views” on page
dialog can now be resized, as they can in 752.
the Library Browser. See “Select Library
Object Dialog” on page 689. • New Create Room Elevation Views
edit tool creates an interior elevation for
• A variety of library symbols can now be
each wall defining a selected room. See
placed directly on top of wall cabinets.
“Cross Section/Elevation Views” on page
See “Placing Library Objects” on page
749.
690.
• Improved feedback when creating cam-
• Expand All and Collapse All commands
era and cross section/elevation views.
are now available for library categories.
See “Creating Camera Views” on page
See “Expand/Collapse All” on page 698.
750 and “Cross Section/Elevation Views”
on page 752.
1074
• New Software Edge Smoothing set- • Anti-aliasing (surface edge smoothing)

tings in the Preferences dialog allow can now be performed using your video
you greater control over rendered pre- card. See “Render Panel” on page 102.
views and Final Views. See “Render • New Hardware Texture Filtering
Panel” on page 102. improves the appearance of textures in
• Cross Section Slider is now avail- 3D views. Not supported by some video
able in Vector Views. See “Cross Section cards. See “Render Panel” on page 102.
Slider” on page 764. • Can now specify level of software sur-
• Improved the way 3D overview cameras face edge smoothing. See “Render Panel”
are positioned when first created. See on page 102.
“Creating Overviews” on page 751. • Improved feedback when creating cam-
• You can now control the minimum length era and cross section/elevation views.
of camera and cross section/elevation See “Creating Camera Views” on page
lines of sight as they are being drawn. 750.
See “Creating Camera Views” on page • Improved feedback when editing custom
750 and “Cross Section/Elevation Views” Raytrace configurations. See “Raytrace
on page 752. Options Dialog” on page 801.
• Improved visual feedback when using • Added Light symbols in floor plan
Delete Surface tool in 3D views. See view now indicate if the light is turned
“Delete 3D Surface” on page 757. on, in what views, and whether it casts
• Names of saved views now appear in the shadows. See “Added Lights” on page
program’s title bar. 776.
• Zoom Tools are now available in all Dimensions

3D views. See “Zooming” on page 763.
• New Centerline Dimension tool
• Camera symbols in floor plan view can
locates objects using special centerline
now be marquee-selected. See “In Floor
extension lines. See “The Dimension
Plan View” on page 764.
Rendering & Raytracing • Reorganized, easier-to-use Dimension

Defaults dialog with additional function-
• Six new Rendering Techniques ality. See “Dimension Defaults Dialog”
allow you to create a variety of technical on page 810.
and artistic rendering styles. See “Ren- • Move Object Using Dimension dialog
dering Techniques” on page 785. replaced by more flexible inline text
• Textures and shadows can now be dis- field. See “Moving Objects Using
played in cross section/elevation views. Dimensions” on page 831.
See “3D View Tools” on page 749.
1075
• Improved feedback when drawing Angu- • New Room Name and Room Type text
lar Dimensions . See “Angular macros. See “Text Macros” on page 869.
Dimensions” on page 824. • Text macros associated with rooms can
now display information about the room
• Point to Point Dimensions can now at the endpoint of a Text Arrow. See
be drawn either of two ways, allowing “Plan Info” on page 870.
you to locate objects along their length
only if you wish to. See “Point to Point CAD Objects
• New Line Style Specification dialog
• Improved feedback for the “marked allows you to create custom line styles
object” location on walls. The end han- for use in Chief Architect. See “Creating
dles for extension lines are now located Line Styles” on page 910.
on the dimension layer of the wall, which
is where extension lines are measured • New Revision Cloud CAD tool
from. See “Extensions Tab” on page 835. allows you to easily create and edit revi-
• Improved dimensioning in cross section/ sion clouds. See “Revision Clouds” on
elevations. See “Dimensions” on page page 906.
808. • As an alternative to clicking and drag-
• Improved dimension snapping behav- ging, can now create rectangular
iors. See “The Dimension Tools” on page polylines and other CAD-based architec-
823. tural objects with a single click. See
“Rectangular Polyline” on page 903.
Text, Callouts & Markers
Project Management
• New Text tool allows different fonts • Improved listing of plan floors in Project
and styles in the same text object. See Browser matches description of floors
“The Text Tools” on page 841. elsewhere and now includes the Attic.
• Non-western unicode alphabets are now See “Project Browser” on page 924.
supported. See “Fonts and Alphabets” on • IRC Checklist no longer installed with
page 840. program. Instead, new link to this docu-
• New Chief Blueprint architectural font. ment online helps ensure up-to-date
See “Fonts and Alphabets” on page 840. information. See “IRC Checklist” on
• Can now size text characters to 1/128” page 929.
accuracy. See “Text Specification Dia-
log” on page 850. Pictures, Images, & Movies
• New Room Ceiling Height and Room • Added control over line and fill styles of
Lowered Ceiling Height text macros can 2D plan symbol for images.
be added to Room Labels if desired. See
“Text Macros” on page 869.
1076
• Can now choose to reverse the appear- • New Send Camera’s View to
ance of an image. See “Image Specifica- Layout edit button lets you send
tion Dialog” on page 936. selected saved, closed Cross Section/Ele-
vation views to layout. See “Sending
Importing & Exporting Views to Layout” on page 1018.
• Can now import and export to AutoCAD
2009 file format. See “Importing & Schedules
Exporting” on page 952. • Can now create schedules with a single
• Settings in Export Drawing File dialog click. See “Creating Schedules” on page
are now saved between uses. See “Export 1037.
Drawing File Dialog” on page 963. • Improved schedule renumbering behav-
ior protects the position and number of
Custom Symbols unedited objects when other objects are
• Create Symbol Wizard replaced by easier edited. See “Schedule Numbering” on
to use Import 3D Symbol dialog. See page 1038.
“Import 3D Symbol Dialog” on page • New Room Finish Schedules. See “Cre-
968. ating Schedules” on page 1037.
• Can now import multiple 3D symbols, • New Plant Schedules. See “Creating
even an entire folder of symbols at once. Schedules” on page 1037.
See “Importing 3D Symbols” on page
• New column options in Door and Win-
967.
dow Schedules. See “Creating Sched-
• New “Sits on Roof” option makes place- ules” on page 1037.
ment of cupolas, vanes and other roof fix-
tures easier. See “Options Tab” on page Materials Lists
979.
• Materials Lists no longer include infor-
Layout mation from the Master List unless you
select Update from Master. See “The
• New Exchange With Next Page and Master List” on page 1059.
Exchange With Previous Page tools • Edited line items in a Materials List no
let you adjust order of existing layout longer update to the Master List unless
pages. See “The Layout Tools” on page you select Update to Master. See “Add-
1016. ing to the Master List” on page 1061.
1077
Appendix B
Additional
Resources
Chief Architect offers a variety of resources • User’s Guide

to help you become familiar with the many • Chief Architect Web Site
features it offers. • Chief Talk Online User Forum
• Technical Support
• Reference Manual
Reference Manual
The Reference Manual is a comprehensive The Reference Manual includes a Table of
source of information for Chief Architect. Contents and Index. This manual is also
Chapters are organized by subject, beginning available in electronic format by selecting
with the fundamental concepts and Help> View Reference Manual .
progressing to the more advanced features.
User’s Guide
Written for new Chief Architect users, but a complete model, from the first wall to the
helpful reference for users of all experience interior design and landscaping.
levels as well, the User’s Guide features a
This guide is also available in electronic
series of tutorials designed to introduce the
format by selecting Help> View User’s
basics of using the program.
Guide from the Chief Architect menu.
The User’s Guide is organized by topic and
walks you through the process of creating a
219
Online Help Videos

Another resource designed to illustrate Chief like, and switch to Chief Architect to practice
Architect’s powerful tools is the set of what you learn.
tutorial videos that come with the program.
For more information about the Training
Once installed, they can be accessed by
Series, visit the Chief Architect Web site at
selecting Help> View Training Videos from
www.chiefarchitect.com.
the program menu.You can view them on
your computer, click pause whenever you
Chief Architect Web Site

If you have questions that the Reference versions of Chief Architect is available
Manual and online Help feature have not through a searchable interface.
answered, turn to the our Web site at
Select Help> Visit Chief Architect Web
Site from the menu to launch your
A database of common technical support default Internet browser to
questions and answers related to supported www.chiefarchitect.com.
Online Personal Training

With a Personal Trainer, it's fast and easy to controlling the screen. The action can be
meet your personal training needs from the very close to real time, depending on your
comfort of your own computer. Internet connection.
While connected to the Internet, you Visit the Chief Architect Web site at
converse by telephone with a trainer and www.chiefarchitect.com to learn more about
draw in Chief Architect. You can observe personal training.
each other as you draw, taking turns
Training Seminars
Chief Architect offers training seminars to with Chief Architect. Work at a computer
meet the needs of beginners, proficient that we provide for you, observing and
users, and everyone in between. Seminars practicing as you go.
take place throughout the year in many
Visit www.chiefarchitect.com for
locations in both the U.S. and Canada,
information about upcoming seminars.
delivering two full days of hands-on work
220
Chief Talk Online User Forum
Chief Talk Online User Forum

The Chief Talk Bulletin Board offers several • Experienced users share knowledge with
ongoing discussions about a variety of topics each other and beginners.
related to the use of Chief Architect. It's rich • Chief Architect Staff members post
with useful tips and available free of charge announcements, advice and technical
to all registered Chief Architect users. information.
• Discussions are initiated and carried out
To visit the Chief Talk forum, go to:
by users.
www.chieftalk.com.
• The tone is professional and friendly.
Technical Support
Chief Architect takes pride in offering world us, Technical Support will refer you to these
class technical support services that can be resources if the answer can be found there.
accessed by telephone or on our Web site at
So that our Technical Support specialists can
assist you as efficiently as possible, please
Before contacting Technical Support, take a refer to Appendix A of the Reference Manual
moment to see if the answer to your question for additional trouble-shooting suggestions
is found in the Reference Manual, tutorial and information that will be needed before
videos, or in our on-line Help Database at placing your call.
www.chiefarchitect.com. When you contact
221
222
Appendix C
Technical Support
Services
Chief Architect is committed to providing The primary function of technical support is

world-class technical support to complement to make sure our software is functioning
our professional products and has assembled correctly and to help you quickly resolve
a team of certified trainers offering problems that prevent its normal use. Our
instruction in the use of our software. technical support professionals are eager to
Training is available via online seminars, work with you to make certain our software
online personal training, and on-site is functioning as designed.
classroom seminars.
Reference and Training Resources

Chief Architect offers a variety of reference articles describing how to resolve common
and training options in addition to the technical problems and achieve specific
resources that come standard with the design goals. The Help Database is found in
program. Many of these resources are the Technical Support section of the Web site
available for free or at a significant discount and can be referred to again and again at your
to Support and Software Assurance program convenience.
members.
Video Training
Help Database
Chief Architect has developed a collection of
The Chief Architect Help Database at training videos that contain in-depth training
www.chiefarchitect.com contains a variety of on a wide range of topics from beginning to
1082
advanced experience levels. These videos are Interactive Training

available on our Web site,
www.chiefarchitect.com, for users who If you have questions about how to use Chief
participate in the Support and Software Architect, consider contacting our Training
Assurance program. Department for a Personal Training session.
Personal Training is an excellent way to
Live Seminars learn how to use the program, providing one-
on-one interaction with a certified Chief
Chief Architect regularly conducts live,
Architect trainer via the Internet. Discuss
online training seminars on a variety of
topics that interest you and learn how to
topics. Learn the basics of using Chief
accomplish your specific design goals.
Architect the right way by joining a Jump
Start class, then progress through topics of
interest, such as Construction Documents, User Forum
Kitchens and Baths, and Terrain. A list of Our Chief Talk User Forum is a great place
upcoming seminars is available online at to discuss and exchange ideas with other
www.chiefarchitect.com. Chief Architect users. Here you can post
Throughout the year, Chief Architect also questions, read discussions from other users,
conducts training seminars in various and post suggestions to improve our product.
locations around the United States and In addition to our regular users, from time to
Canada. Information about these seminars is time our support and engineering teams
also posted at www.chiefarchitect.com. monitor the forum and provide input and
discussion on current topics. This resource is
available free of charge at
www.chieftalk.com.
Troubleshooting Common Technical Issues

Chief Architect strives to make certain our installation failures for any type of soft-
software works correctly; however, from ware. Refer to your anti-virus software’s
time to time issues arise that prevent its documentation for details on how to dis-
normal operation. able the software and re-enable it once
installation is complete.
Installation Issues • The recommended minimum system
The following are common reasons for requirements are not met. See “System
installation failure of Chief Architect and Requirements” on page 2.
other software: • The computer has a CD drive but not a
• Anti-virus software is enabled and inter- DVD drive. A standard CD drive will not
fering with installation. Anti-virus soft- read DVD discs.
ware is the most common cause of
1083
Troubleshooting Printing Problems
• The DVD has fingerprints, scratches, or diagnose and provide solutions to most
other defects. Sometimes a small finger- common problems with hardware locks. The
print can prevent the program from Troubleshooter can also be launched
installing. Clean the disk with soft cotton manually by selecting Help > Hardware
cloth. Be sure to use soft cotton rather Lock Troubleshooter.
than paper products on disks to avoid
scratching. Emergency Transfer Message
When using Software Lock Security, you
If you see visible cracking on a CD or may receive an Emergency Transfer message
DVD, do not insert it in your CD/DVD
when moving from one computer to another.
drive. Cracked disks can fly apart and cause
damage to your drive.
To avoid this message, you must deactivate
your license on the last computer on which
• You do not have sufficient rights to install you ran the program. See “Deactivating
the software. Verify that you have admin- Chief Architect Licenses” on page 12.
istrative rights and the administrative If you must use the Emergency Transfer, type
password during the installation process. in the code you were given when you
If you are on a corporate network, consult registered the program. See “Completing the
your network administrator for assis- Registration Wizard” on page 11.
tance.
Remember that you have a limited number of
Refer to the on-line Help Database for Emergency Transfers and that if you use
solutions to common installation problems. them all, you will need to purchase
If the answer to your question is not found additional transers from Chief Architect, Inc.
there, contact our Technical Support You can avoid this expense by always
department for assistance. deactivating your license before using it on a
different computer, or by purchasing an
Hardware Lock Not Recognized additional license.
If your hardware lock is not recognized on
startup, launch the Hardware Lock If you use an Emergency Transfer, your
Troubleshooter. The Troubleshooter can license will be immediately deactivated
on the other computer.
Troubleshooting Printing Problems

Printing problems fall into two main 1. Begin by clicking on the Windows Start
categories: those that prevent the printer button, and select Printers.
from working in any program and problems 2. Right-click the printer that is not func-
printing from Chief Architect. To determine tioning properly in the Printers folder.
if the problem is specific to Chief Architect,
try the following:
1084
3. Click Properties from the menu that “Printing & Plotting” on page 992 for
appears. information on how to set up and use the
4. On the General tab, click the Print Test printing functions in the program. Legacy
Page button. users should bear in mind that each release
has new features and enhancements, so
If the printer does not produce a test page, techniques that were used in prior versions
the problem is not one that Chief Architect may not work in the current version.
Technical Support can solve. Follow these
suggestions: Make sure that you use Print Preview
• Check the connection between the com- before printing. Print Preview displays the
puter and the printer. printed paper, or drawing sheet, as a white
rectangle on screen, and shows how the sheet
• Check your printer documentation for is scaled and positioned relative to your
troubleshooting printer problems. drawing. If the drawing is not on the drawing
• Contact your printer's manufacturer or sheet on-screen, it will not be on the sheet
check their Web site for support informa- when you print. See “Print Preview” on page
tion. 996.
Your printer manufacturer is the best Make sure that your scaling is correct for the
resource for solving problems of this type. paper size. If the plan is much smaller or
Chief Architect Technical Support is not able much larger than the drawing sheet, you may
to help diagnose and solve problems that need to change your Scale. See “Printing to
prevent printing from any program. Scale” on page 997.
It is a good idea to keep the Owner’s 64 Bit Versions of Windows

Manual for your printer or plotter close
Some printers may not function correctly on
at hand. Write inside the Owner’s Manual the
various phone numbers for technical support 64 bit Windows operating systems. If you are
for that printer or plotter – for the original experiencing a printing problem while using
manufacturer and for your local dealer. a 64 bit version of Windows, please contact
the printer’s manufacturer to verify that you
Printers and plotters vary widely in how they have the correct driver installed.
function. Sometimes a faulty cable can be a
Printing to a legacy parallel printer port on a
problem. Other times, a plotter may require
Windows 64 bit machine may not work
that the paper be loaded in a different
correctly when using a hardware lock. USB
orientation. Often, solving a printing
printers should not be affected. If you run
problem is as simple as downloading and
into difficulty with this type of setup, you
installing an updated printer driver. See
may want to consider Software Lock
“Printer Drivers” on page 994.
Security.
If you can print from Chief Architect but are
not satisfied with the output, refer to
1085
Error Messages
Clearing Printer Information view prior to sending it to layout, or change

the orientation of the paper in layout so you
Some information specific to individual do not need to rotate the view. See “Layout”
printers and plotters, such as available printer on page 1014.
paper sizes, is saved with each plan and
layout file.
Help Database
If you are encountering unexpected options
For answers to frequently asked questions
in the Page Setup dialog or results when
regarding printing and other topics, select
printing, select File> Print> Clear Printer
Info to clear the printer-specific information Help> Visit Chief Architect Web Site
stored with the plan or layout file. and browse the Technical Support section of
our Web site, www.chiefarchitect.com. Our
Slow Printing from Layout Technical Support specialists post new
articles periodically to help resolve problems
The most common reason for unusually slow you may encounter.
printing from layout is the presence of a
rotated view. To avoid this issue, rotate the
Error Messages
Most common error messages have a known
cause and simple resolution. When you Press the Print Screen key on your
encounter an error or warning message in keyboard to capture a picture of the
Chief Architect, you can click the Check error message. Open a new word processing
document or e-mail message and choose
Help Database button in the message box to
Edit> Paste to paste a copy of the error mes-
launch your default Internet browser to the sage into the document for later reference.
Chief Architect Help Database on our Web
site, www.chiefarchitect.com. If an article If you encounter the error more than once,
discussing the message is available it will make a note of your steps prior to receiving
display, providing information about the the message.
message and how best to avoid it.
Before you report an error, check the Help
It is important that abnormal errors be Database to see if the error is already
reported to Chief Architect Technical documented by typing the error message or
Support so that we can identify and resolve part of the error message into the search
any problems. form.
The content of an error message is useful in Finally, check to see if there are program
diagnosing its cause. If you encounter an updates available. These updates are
error message, read it carefully and write provided free for the current version of Chief
down the error number and the exact text of Architect and contain enhancements and
the error message. other changes that allow the program to
1086
perform at an optimum level. Select Help> No personal information is sent. When you
Download Program Updates from the click Send, your default Internet browser
Chief Architect menu to visit our Web site, launches and a Web page appears on screen
www.chiefarchitect.com, and follow the This message confirms that the report was
instructions. sent successfully and may give you further
instructions on how to proceed.
Error Reporting
When and error occurs, you may have the
option in the message box to send the report
to Chief Architect.
Contacting Technical Support

Chief Architect provides free online and tele- make a note of the serial number and the
phone support to users participating in the exact version of Chief Architect you are
Support and Software Assurance program. using. Technical support is available to
Users who have not purchased SSA receive the owners of software licenses. When
installation support for 30 days after pur- you contact Technical Support, be pre-
chase. If you would like to sign up for Sup- pared to verify that you are the owner of
port and Software Assurance, please contact the software license.
the Chief Architect Sales Department. • Before contacting Technical Support,
Before contacting Technical Support, take a check to see if there are program updates
moment to see if the answer to your question available for download. Our engineering
is found in the Reference Manual, Help team periodically creates updates to the
index, training DVD’s, or in our on-line Help program to resolve functionality or pro-
Database. When you contact us, Technical gram issues that were unknown at the
Support will refer you to these resources if time of release. These updates are pro-
the answer can be found there. vided free of charge for the current
released version and can be accessed by
Chief Architect's world-class technical selecting Help> Download Program
support is available Monday through Friday Updates from the menu.
from 6 AM to 5 PM Pacific Standard Time
and can be reached at (208) 292-3399 or via • When you first encounter a problem or
our Web site, www.chiefarchitect.com. error message, copy the exact wording of
the message or a detailed description of
There are several things you can do to ensure the problem. This helps us isolate the
a speedy answer to your question when you problem and provide you with a solution
contact Technical Support. as quickly as possible.
• Before contacting Technical Support, • When placing a call to Technical Support,
select Help> About Chief Architect and be at the computer or work station that is
1087
Contacting Technical Support
experiencing the problem and have Chief department. To access these resources, visit:
Architect running. If you do not have www.chiefarchitect.com.
access to the problem computer at the
Our support team is happy to assist you in
time of the call, the technician may be
finding the best resource to answer your
unable to reproduce the issue and/or sug-
questions, and can resolve most issues in just
gest a remedy that can be implemented
a few minutes. In order to allow us to quickly
and verified immediately.
answer your calls, we ask that you limit
• Be prepared to reproduce the problem yourself to one question per support call.
when you contact us. If the problem can-
not be reproduced, there is a reduced Online Support
chance that we will be able to resolve the
problem on your first phone call. Questions can be answered online by the
Technical Support department. To submit a
Priority Support technical inquiry online, visit the Technical
Support section of our Web site and use the
Chief Architect X2 users who participate in Online Support Center.
the Support and Software Assurance
program should use the Priority Support This route ensures that your question is
telephone number provided in their SSA delivered to the first available support
documentation. The Priority Support number professional. Requesting assistance of an
bypasses the regular phone queues to give individual specialist is not recommended,
you the fastest possible answers to your since that person may not be available to
questions. answer your question in a timely manner.
Online Information Telephone Support

Chief Architect has a variety of support Our Technical Support team is committed to
resources available on our Web site. These answering your questions as quickly as
include our Technical Support Help possible and in the order received. Your call
Database, the How do I…? Solution is important to us; however, there are times
Finder, downloadable program updates, and when we get more calls than expected and
ways to contact our Technical Support you may have to wait a few minutes before
speaking to a technician.
1088
1089
Appendix D
Menus & Toolbar

Buttons
Chief Architect’s tools can be accessed using The following is a list of the menus items in
the menus and toolbars, as well as using the program, as well as a list of edit toolbar
hotkeys. The menus provide access to most buttons, toggle buttons and buttons on the
of the program’s functionality, while toolbar MEP Toolbar Configuration.
buttons and hotkeys often provide greater
speed and convenience than the menus.
Using the Menus

Chief Architect’s main menus are found You can activate menus at any time using the
under the title bar at the top of the program keyboard. Press the Alt key and the
window. Menu items followed by an arrow underlined letter in the menu name.
( ) open submenus. Menu items followed
Many menu items have corresponding
by an ellipsis (...) open dialogs.
toolbar buttons. These menu items display
Move the cursor over a menu name to see a their corresponding button images on the left
brief description in the Status Bar at the and corresponding hotkeys to their right.
bottom of the screen. Press the F1 key to
open the Help index to information about
that menu item.
1090
be added to your toolbars if you wish. See

“Toolbar Customization Dialog” on page
107.
Some buttons are included on the toolbars

that come with the program, while others can
File Menu
The File menu contains items related to
opening, closing, saving, exporting, and
printing files.
Menu Toolbar Default

Effect
Command Button Hotkeys
File> New Plan... Ctrl + N Create a new plan file. See “Creating a New Plan
or Layout” on page 45.
File> New Create a new layout file. See “Creating a Layout

Layout... File” on page 1016.
File> Open Plan... Ctrl + O Open an existing plan file. See “Opening a Plan
or Layout File” on page 50.
File> Open Open an existing layout file. See “Opening a Plan

Layout... or Layout File” on page 50.
File> Templates> Create a new plan file using a plan template. See
New Plan From “Template Files” on page 51.
Template...
File> Templates> Create a new layout file using a layout template.
New Layout From See “Template Files” on page 51.
Template...
1091
File Menu

Effect
File> Templates> Save the current plan as a template. See
Save Plan As “Template Files” on page 51.
Template...
File> Search For Search for plans in an existing plan database file
Plans... using the Find Plan Wizard. See “Searching for
Plans” on page 53.
File> Manage Opens Windows Explorer to the archives folder
Auto Archives... for the current plan. Only available when the
current plan has been previously saved. See
“Auto Archive” on page 48.
File> Startup Open the Startup Options dialog. See “Startup
Options... Options” on page 27.
File> Close N/A Ctrl + W Close the current view. If you close a plan or
layout, you will be prompted to save any changes
you have made. See “Closing Plans and Views”
on page 60.
File> Close All N/A Close all windows. If you have made any changes
to the file, you will be prompted to save them. See
“Closing Plans and Views” on page 60.
File> Save Ctrl + S Save the current plan or layout file. See “Saving a
Plan or Layout File” on page 46.
File> Save As... Save the current plan or layout file, and assign file
and path names. See “Saving a Plan or Layout
File” on page 46.
File> Save Plan Save the current view as a thumbnail for the plan,
Thumbnail... which displays in the Open Plan File dialog. See
“Saving a Plan Thumbnail” on page 48.
File> Export> Export all plan files and external referenced files
Entire Plan... to an empty folder. See “Exporting an Entire
Plan” on page 58.
File> Export> Shift + F4 Exports a 2D DXF file of the current floor plan
Current View view. See “Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files” on
(DWG, DXF)... page 962.
1092

Effect
File> Export> All Exports a 2D DXF file which includes all floors
Floors (DWG, in floor plan view. Items of different types or on
DXF)... different floors are placed on distinct layers. See
“Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files” on page 962.
File> Export> 3D Only available from a 3D view. Exports the entire
Model (DWG, model as a 3D DWG/DXF. See “Exporting a 3D
DXF)... Model in DXF/DWG Format” on page 971.
File> Export> 3D Only available from a 3D view. Exports the
Model (3DS)... model as a 3DS. See “Exporting a 3D Model in
3DS Format” on page 972.
File> Export> Export the entire model to a .wrl file which can
VRML (WRL)... be used to create walkthroughs using a VRML
plug-in. Only available in 3D views. See
“Creating VRML Files” on page 949.
File> Export> Exports the entire model as a .pov file which can
POV-Ray (POV)... then be imported into POV-Ray. Only available in
Standard rendered views. See “Rendering &
File> Export> Export a Windows Metafile of the current view.
Metafile (EMF)... See “Metafiles” on page 943.
File> Export> Export any view as a picture file (.bmp, .jpg,

Picture (BMP, .png,*.gif, *.tif, or *.pcx). See “Pictures” on
JPG, PNG)... page 940.
File> Export> Export the set of wall type definitions from the
Wall Definitions... current plan so they can be imported into another.
See “Exporting Wall Type Definitions” on page
246.
File> Export> Export a defined layer set from the current plan so
Layer Sets... it can be imported into another. See “Exporting/
Importing Layer Sets” on page 127.
File> Import> Shift + F3 Import a 2D .dxf file as CAD data. See “Import
Drawing (DWG, Drawing Wizard” on page 954.
DXF)...
File> Import> 3D Imports 3D symbols in .obj, .3ds, and .skp
Symbol... formats. See “Custom Symbols” on page 974.
1093
File Menu

Effect
File> Import> Import a picture file (.bmp, .jpg, .png,*.gif, *.tif,
Picture (BMP, or *.pcx) into a floor plan view, layout, or cross
JPG, PNG)... section/elevation view. See “Importing Pictures”
on page 940.
File> Import> Import a Metafile (.emf, .wmf) into a floor plan
Metafile view, layout, or cross section/elevation view. See
(EMF,WMF)... “Importing Metafiles” on page 944.
File> Import> Import a graphics file into the User Libraries. See
Backdrops> “Adding Backdrops to the Library” on page 701.
Backdrop...
File> Import> Import a folder of graphics files into the library.
Backdrops> See “Adding Backdrops to the Library” on page
Create Backdrop 701.
Library...
File> Import> Import a file containing wall type definitions
Wall Definitions... from a different plan and merge them with the
current plan’s wall type definitions. See
“Importing Wall Type Definitions” on page 247.
File> Import> Import line style definitions from another plan
Line Style and merge them with the current plan's line syle
Definitions... definitions. See “Line Styles” on page 879.
File> Import> Import a defined layer set from another plan file.
Layer Sets... See “Exporting/Importing Layer Sets” on page 127.
File> Import> Import terrain data from a text file in a variety of

Terrain Data... formats. See “Importing Elevation Data” on page
612.
File> Import> Import GPS terrain data from a .gpx file. See
GPS Data... “Import GPS Data Wizard” on page 616.
File> Print> Page Open the Page Setup dialog to assign properties
Setup... to the printed page. See “Page Setup Dialog” on
page 1004.
File> Print> Scale Adjust the drawing scale to fit the drawing sheet.
to Fit See “Printing to Scale” on page 997.
1094

Effect
File> Print> Center the drawing sheet relative to the model.
Center Sheet See “Center Sheet” on page 997.
File> Print> Print Alt + F2 Turn the display of the print preview on or off.
Preview See “Print Preview” on page 996.
File> Print> Ctrl + P Open the Print dialog to print your plan or layout
Print... file. See “The Printing Tools” on page 995.
File> Print> Print Print the current view as an image. Used to print a
Image... rendered view or 3D view showing images, such
as trees. See “Print Image Dialog” on page 1009.
File> Print> Print Opens the Print Model dialog allowing you to
Model... print plan templates for making a model of your
plan. See “Print Model” on page 1009.
File> Print> N/A Open the Customize Sheet Sizes dialog to select
Customize Sheet a sheet size. See “Creating Custom Sheet Sizes”
Sizes... on page 1002.
File> Print> Clear N/A Clear the printer information associated with the
Printer Info current page setup. See “The Printing Tools” on
page 995.
File> Adjust Open the Adjust Image Properties dialog. Only
Image available in Raytrace views. See “Adjust Image
Properties... Properties” on page 803.
File> Send to Ctrl + U Send the current view to a Layout file. See
Layout... “Sending Views to Layout” on page 1018.
File> Exit N/A Alt + F4 Exit from Chief Architect. See “Exiting Chief
Architect” on page 60.
Names of Files N/A The names of the most recently opened plan and
Most Recently layout files displays here. The number of files that
Opened display can be set in the Preferences dialog. See
“General Panel” on page 79.
1095
Edit Menu
Edit Menu
The Edit menu lists options for manipulating keyboard option (noted next to the menu
items. Many of these editing options also item).
have a corresponding toolbar button and/or a

Effect
Edit> Undo Ctrl + Z Undo the last action performed. The ten most
recent actions can be Undone, depending on
your settings in the Preferences dialog. See
“Undo Files” on page 50.
Edit> Redo Ctrl + Y Redo up to ten of the last Undos performed.
See “Undo Files” on page 50.
Edit> Cut Ctrl + X Delete the selected item and copy it to the
clipboard so it can be pasted elsewhere.
Edit> Copy Ctrl + C Copy the selected item to the clipboard so it

can be pasted elsewhere. The original item is
left unchanged. See “Copying and Pasting
Edit> Copy Region as Lets you select a region to be saved as a
Picture Windows metafile. You also specify the size of
the file. See “Metafiles” on page 943.
Edit> Paste> Paste Ctrl + V Paste the last item cut or copied. See “Copying
and Pasting Objects” on page 191.
Edit> Paste> Paste Ctrl + Alt + Paste the last item cut or copied to the same
Hold Position V position on the screen. See “Copying and
Pasting Objects” on page 191.
Edit > Paste> Paste Shift + Alt Pastes the last item cut or copied to the
Special... +V clipboard, provded it is a file type Chief
Architect recognizes. See “Copying and
Pasting Objects” on page 191.
Edit> Delete Delete or Delete the selected object. See “Deleting
Backspace Objects” on page 196.
1096

Effect
Edit> Delete Ctrl + Opens a dialog that allows you to delete items
Objects... Spacebar of a particular type in a single room, all rooms,
or throughout a whole plan. See “Delete
Objects Dialog” on page 197.
Edit> Select Objects Spacebar Activate the tool for selecting objects of all
types. See “Selecting Objects” on page 144.
Edit> Select All N/A Ctrl + A Selects all objects in the current view that are
not on locked layers. See “Selecting Objects”
on page 144.
Edit> Snap Settings> Shift + F11 Toggles Object Snaps on and off. See “Object
Object Snaps Snaps” on page 133.
Edit> Snap Settings> F10 Toggles Angle Snaps on and off. See “Angle
Angle Snaps Snaps” on page 135.
Edit> Snap Settings> Ctrl + F9 See “Grid Snaps” on page 136.

Grid Snaps
Edit> Snap Settings> F11 Toggle Bumping/Pushing on and off. See

Bumping/Pushing “Bumping/Pushing” on page 178.
Edit> Snap Settings> 4 Enables snapping to the ends of lines, arcs,

Endpoint splines, and other objects. See “Object Snaps”
on page 133.
Edit> Snap Settings> 5 Enables snapping to the midpoint of an object,
Midpoint such as a line or arc. For objects such as boxes,
you can snap to the midpoint of any side. See
“Object Snaps” on page 133.
Edit> Snap Settings> 6 Enables snapping to the center of cabinets,
Center fixtures, furniture, as wellas circles and arcs.
See “Object Snaps” on page 133.
Edit> Snap Settings> 7 Enables snapping to the left, right, top, or
Quadrant bottom of an arc or circle. See “Object Snaps”
on page 133.
Edit> Snap Settings> 8 Enables snapping to any point on the selected
On Object object, including CAD obnjects and cabinets.
See “Object Snaps” on page 133.
1097
Edit Menu

Effect
Edit> Snap Settings> 9 Allows you to snap to any temporary points
Points/Markers you have placed, as well as callouts and
markers. See “Object Snaps” on page 133.
Edit> Snap Settings> 0 Enables snapping to the intersection of two
Intersections objects such as lines. Also snaps extension
lines to objects or two extension lines to each
other. See “Object Snaps” on page 133.
Edit> Snap Settings> [ Enables snapping to a point tangent to the
Tangent Extensions objects where the extension anchor sits. See
“Object Snaps” on page 133.
Edit> Snap Settings> ] Enables snapping to a point perpendicular to
Perpendicular the object where the extension anchor sits. See
Extensions “Object Snaps” on page 133.
Edit> Snap Settings> \ Enables snappiong to a point on a 90-degree
Orthogonal axis from the extension anchor. See “Object
Extensions Snaps” on page 133.
Edit> Edit Alt + Z or Toggles the default edit mode on and off. See
Behaviors> Default Alt + / “Edit Behaviors” on page 137.
Edit> Edit Alt or right Toggles to alternate editing mode. See “Edit
Behaviors> Alternate mouse Behaviors” on page 137.
button
Edit> Edit Z, /, or Toggles to Move edit mode. See “Edit
Behaviors> Move middle Behaviors” on page 137.
mouse
button
Edit> Edit X, comma Toggles to Resize edit mode. See“Edit
Behaviors> Resize (,), or X2 Behaviors” on page 137.
mouse
button
Edit> Edit C, period Togglers to Concentric edit mode. See “Edit
Behaviors> (.), or X1 Behaviors” on page 137.
Concentric mouse
button
Edit> Edit F Toggles to Fillet edit mode. See “Edit
Behaviors> Fillet Behaviors” on page 137.
1098

Effect
Edit> Edit Shift + F8 Toggles Edit Object Parts on and off. See “Edit
Behaviors> Edit Object Parts” on page 132.
Object Parts
Edit> Edit Activates the Rotate/Resize About Current
Behaviors> Rotate/ Point edit tool. See “Rotate/Resize About” on
Resize About Current page 188.
Point
Edit > Arc Creation Draw an arc by clicking at the start point,
Modes> Free Form dragging to create the arc, and clicking again
Arc at the end point. See “Arc Tools” on page 894.
Edit > Arc Creation Draw an arc by clicking at the center of the
Modes> Center/ arc, dragging to define the length and radius,
Radius/End Arc then clicking at the end. See “Center/Radius/
End Arc” on page 893.
Edit > Arc Creation Draw an arc by dragging from the start point to
Modes> Start/End/On the end point of the arc, then move the mouse
Arc to adjust the curvature. See “Start/End/On
Arc” on page 893.
Edit > Arc Creation Draw an arc by clicking at the start point, then
Modes> Start/ dragging to define the arc tangent at the start
Tangent/ End Arc point. See “Start/Tangent/End Arc” on page
893.
Edit > Arc Creation Draw an arc by defining the center and then
Modes> Arc About the end points. See “Arc About Center” on
Center page 893.
Edit> Edit Area> Edit Ctrl + H Draw a temporary selection marquee around
Area an area to select all objects within that area on
the current floor. See “Edit Area” on page 210.
Edit> Edit Area> Edit Draw a temporary selection marquee around
Area Visible an area to select all visible objects within that
area on the current floor. See “Edit Area” on
page 210.
Edit> Edit Area> Draw a temporary selection marquee around
Edit Area (All Floors) an area to select all objects within that area on
all floors. See “Edit Area (All Floors)” on
page 210.
1099
Build Menu

Effect
Edit> Edit Area> Edit Draw a temporary selection marquee around
Area (All Floors) an area to select all visible objects within that
Visible area on all floors. See “Edit Area (All Floors)”
on page 210.
Edit> Default Set general parameters for objects and tools
Settings... used in a plan. See “Default Settings” on page
63.
Edit> Reset to N/A Reset a part or all of the plan to the defaults for
Defaults... roof information, floor and ceiling heights, and
wall heights. See “Reset to Defaults” on page
69.
Edit> Preferences... Shift + ~ Define the global preferences for Chief
Architect. Some of these settings are unique to
individual plans. See “Preferences Dialog” on
page 70.
Build Menu
Use the tools on the Build menu to build the
3D model in Chief Architect.

Effect
Build> Wall> Straight Shift + Q Draw straight walls using the Exterior wall
Exterior Wall type as defined in the Wall Defaults dialog.
See “Exterior Walls” on page 219.
Build> Wall> Curved Draw a straight wall of the Exterior wall type
Exterior Wall defined in the Wall Defaults dialog. See
“Exterior Walls” on page 219.
Build> Wall> Straight Draw walls using the Interior wall type as
Interior Wall defined in the Wall Defaults dialog. See
“Interior Walls” on page 220.
1100

Effect
Build> Wall> Curved Draw a curved interior wall of the type
Interior Wall defined in the Wall Defaults dialog. See
“Interior Walls” on page 220.
Build> Wall> Straight Draw straight foundation walls using the
Foundation Wall settings from the Foundation Defaults
dialog. See “Foundation Walls” on page 220.
Build> Wall> Curved Draw curved foundation wall using the
Foundation Wall settings from the Foundation Defaults
dialog. See “Foundation Walls” on page 220.
Build> Wall> Straight Draw pony walls using the settings from the
Pony Wall Pony Wall Defaults dialog. See “Pony Walls”
on page 220.
Build> Wall> Curved Draw a curved pony wall as defined in the
Pony Wall Pony Wall Defaults dialog. See “Pony Walls”
on page 220.
Build> Wall> Straight Ctrl + Q Draw railings as defined in the Default
Railing Railing dialog. See “Railings” on page 220.
Build> Wall> Curved Draw a curved as defined in the Default

Railing Railing dialog. See “Railings” on page 220.
Build> Wall> Draw an Invisible wall to define room areas.

Invisible Wall See “Invisible Walls” on page 220.
Build> Wall> Polygon Open the New Regular Polygon Shaped

Shaped Room... Room dialog and define the specifications for
a regular polygonal room. See “Polygon
Shaped Rooms and Decks” on page 225.
Build> Wall> Hatch Fill a wall with a hatch pattern. See “Hatch
Wall Wall” on page 220.
Build> Wall> Break Ctrl + B Break a wall into two sections. See “Break
Wall Wall” on page 221.
Build> Wall> Fix Connect walls whose ends are within a few
Wall Connections inches of each other but are not connected.
See “Fix Wall Connections” on page 221.
1101
Build Menu

Effect
Build> Wall> Define Open the Wall Type Definitions dialog to
Wall Types... create or modify available wall types. See
“Wall Type Definitions” on page 241.
Build> Deck> Draw a deck defined by straight railings. See
Straight Deck Railing “Deck Railing” on page 221.
Build> Deck> Curved Draw curved deck railing. See “Deck Railing”
Deck Railing on page 221.
Build> Deck> Draw a deck edge with no railing. See “Deck

Straight Deck Edge Edge” on page 227.
Build> Deck> Curved Draw a curved deck edge with no railing. See
Deck Edge “Deck Edge” on page 227.
Build Deck> Polygon Open the New Regular Polygon Shaped

Shaped Deck... Deck dialog and define the specifications for
a regular polygonal deck. See “Polygon
Shaped Rooms and Decks” on page 225.
Build> Fencing> Draw a straight fence. See “The Fencing
Straight Fencing Tools” on page 221.
Build> Fencing> Draw curved fencing. See “The Fencing

Curved Fencing Tools” on page 221.
Build> Door> Hinged Shift + E Place a hinged door into a wall. See “Hinged
Door Doors” on page 294.
Build> Door> Place a doorway into a wall. See “Doorways”

Doorway on page 294.
Build> Door> Sliding Place a sliding door into a wall. See “Sliding
Build> Door> Pocket Place a pocket door into a wall. See “Pocket
Build> Door> Bifold Place a bifold door into a wall. See “Bifold
1102

Effect
Build> Door> Garage Place a garage door into a wall. See “Garage
Build> Window> Shift + W Place a window as defined in the Window

Window Defaults dialog. See “Standard Windows” on
page 318.
Build> Window> Bay Place a bay window into a wall. See “Bay
Window Windows” on page 318.
Build> Window> Box Place a box window into a wall. See “Box
Build> Window> Bow Place a bow window into a wall. See “Bow
Build> Floor> Build Shift + X Create a new floor in your plan. See “Adding
New Floor... Floors” on page 355.
Build> Floor> Insert Insert a new floor at the current floor and
New Floor move all other floors up one level. See
“Adding Floors” on page 355.
Build> Floor> Delete Delete the current floor. The floor above
Current Floor moves down to take the place of the current
floor. See “Deleting Floors” on page 358.
Build> Floor> Exchange the current floor with the one above
Exchange with Floor it. See “Adding Floors” on page 355.
Above
Build> Floor> Exchange the current floor with the one below
Exchange with Floor it. See “Adding Floors” on page 355.
Below
Build> Floor> Build Ctrl + F Create a foundation level. See “Building a
Foundation... Foundation” on page 366.
Build> Floor> Delete Delete the current foundation. See “Deleting

Foundation Foundations” on page 369.
Build> Floor> Hole in Draw a rectangular polyline to place a hole in

Floor Platform a floor platform. See “Platform Holes” on
page 358.
1103
Build Menu

Effect
Build> Floor> Hole in Draw a rectangular polyline to place a hole in
Ceiling Platform the above ceiling/floor platform. See
“Platform Holes” on page 358.
Build> Floor> F12 Update the 3D model to include recent
Rebuild Walls/ changes. See “Rebuilding Walls, Floors &
Floors/Ceilings Ceilings” on page 358
Build> Floor> Rebuild a monolithic slab foundation based
Rebuild Slabs on the current first floor footprint. See
“Rebuild Slabs” on page 368.
Build> Roof> Build Ctrl + R Specify settings for automatic roof generation
Roof... in the Build Roof dialog. See “Build Roof
Build> Roof> Roof Q Manually draw roof planes in floor plan view.
Plane See “Roof Plane” on page 376.
Build> Roof> Ceiling Manually place ceiling planes in floor plan

Plane view. See “Ceiling Plane” on page 377.
Build> Roof> Truss Define a truss base on a roof plane. See “Truss
Base Bases” on page 501.
Build> Roof> Gable/ Draw a gable roof in floor plan view. See
Roof Line “Gable/Roof Line” on page 377.
Build> Roof> Create a closed polyline within a roof plane

Skylight that will be defined as a skylight. See
“Skylights” on page 377.
Build> Roof> Auto Place a floating dormer onto a roof plane. See
Floating Dormer “Auto Floating Dormer” on page 418.
Build> Roof> Auto Place an auto dormer onto a roof plane. See
Dormer “Auto Dormer” on page 418.
Build> Roof> Edit All Open the Roof Plane Specification dialog for
Roof Planes... all roof planes. See “Roof Plane Specification
Build> Roof> Delete Delete all roof planes. See “Delete Roof
Roof Planes Planes” on page 377.
1104

Effect
Build> Roof> Delete N/A Delete all manually drawn ceiling planes. See
Ceiling Planes “Ceiling Plane” on page 377.
Build> Roof> Fix Mend all broken roof edges. See “Fix Roofs”
Roofs on page 377.
Build> Slab> Slab Draw a slab at grade. See “Slabs” on page

370.
Build> Slab> Slab Draw a slab with footings. See “Slabs” on

with Footing page 370.
Build> Slab> Slab Draw a rectangular polyline within a slab to

Hole create a hole. See “Slab Holes” on page 370.
Build> Slab> Slab Draw a rectangular polyline within a slab with

Hole with Footing footings to create a hole with footings. See
“Slab Holes” on page 370.
Build> Slab> Round Place a round pier under a foundation wall.
Pier See “Piers & Pads” on page 370.
Build> Slab> Square Place a square pad under a foundation wall.

Pad See “Piers & Pads” on page 370.
Build> Framing> Ctrl + Shift Display Build Framing dialog to define

Build Framing... +S framing specifications. See “Build Framing
CAD> Framing> Draw a generic framing member. See
General Framing “Framing” on page 904.
CAD> Framing> Draw wall bridging or blocking in Wall

Wall Bridging Details only. See “Wall Bridging” on page
904.
Build> Framing> Manually draw a post. See “Post” on page
Post 465.
Build> Framing> Manually draw a rafter. See “Rafter” on page

Rafter 465.
1105
Build Menu

Effect
Build> Framing> Manually draw roof blocking. See “Roof
Roof Blocking Blocking” on page 465.
Build> Framing> Manually draw a truss. See “Roof Truss” on

Roof Truss page 466.
Build> Framing> Draw a beam in floor plan view. See “Roof

Roof Beam Beam” on page 466.
Build> Framing> Manually draw a ceiling or floor joist,

Joist depending on the platform it is drawn over.
See “Joist” on page 466.
Build> Framing> Draw joist blocking. See “Joist Blocking” on
Joist Blocking page 466.
Build> Framing> Manually draw a floor truss. See “Floor/

Floor/Ceiling Truss Ceiling Truss” on page 466.
Build> Framing> Manually draw a floor or ceiling beam. See

Floor/Ceiling Beam “Floor/Ceiling Beam” on page 467.
Build> Framing> Place a framing reference marker in a plan.

Framing Reference See “Framing Reference Markers” on page
Marker 480.
Build> Framing> Draw a line defining bearing areas for
Bearing Line automatic framing to break joists. See
“Bearing Lines” on page 482.
Build> Framing> Draw a line defining joist direction for
Joist Direction automatic floor or ceiling framing generation.
See “Joist Direction Lines” on page 482.
Build> Trim> Corner Click in floor plan view to place corner
Boards boards. See “Corner Boards” on page 529.
Build> Trim> Quoins Click in floor plan view to place quoins. See
“Quoins” on page 531.
Build> Trim> Draw a molding polyline. See “Layer Tab” on

Molding Polyline page 532.
1106

Effect
Build> Trim> Draw a molding line. See “Layer Tab” on
Molding Line page 532.
Build> Trim> 3D Draw a 3D modling polyline. See “Layer Tab”

Molding Polyline on page 532.
Build> Trim> 3D Draw a 3D modling line. See “Layer Tab” on

Molding Line page 532.
Build> Stairs> Shift + Y Drag to create an UP stair. Hold the Alt key
Straight Stairs and drag to create a DOWN stair. See “The
Stair Tools” on page 429.
Build> Stairs> Click Build a set of stairs with a single mouse click.
Stairs See “Click Stairs” on page 429.
Build> Stairs> Curve Place stairs that curve to the left. See “The
to Left Stair Tools” on page 429.
Build> Stairs> Curve Place stairs that curve to the right. See “The
to Right Stair Tools” on page 429.
Build> Cabinet> Base Shift + T Place a base cabinet as defined in the Base
Cabinet Cabinet Defaults dialog. See “Base Cabinets”
on page 548.
Build> Cabinet> Wall Ctrl + T Place a wall cabinet as defined in the Wall
Cabinet Cabinet Defaults dialog. See “Wall Cabinets”
on page 549.
Build> Cabinet> Full Place a full height or pantry cabinet as defined
Height in the Full Height Cabinet Defaults dialog.
See “Full Height Cabinets” on page 549.
Build> Cabinet> T Place a soffit. See “Soffits” on page 549.
Soffit
Build> Cabinet> Place a shelf used in a closet. See “Shelves”

Shelf on page 549.
Build> Cabinet> Place a vertical partition. See “Partitions” on

Partition page 549.
1107
Build Menu

Effect
Build> Cabinet> Draw a polyline to create a custom counter
Custom Countertop top. See “Custom Countertops” on page 549.
Build> Cabinet> Draw a polyline to create a hole in a custom

Custom Counter Hole counter top. See “Custom Counter Holes” on
page 549.
Build> Cabinet Place a base cabinet filler. See “Cabinet
Filler> Base Filler Fillers” on page 551.
Build> Cabinet Place a wall cabinet filler. See “Cabinet

Filler> Wall Filler Fillers” on page 551.
Build> Cabinet Place a full height cabinet filler. See “Cabinet

Filler> Full Height Fillers” on page 551.
Build> Fireplace Create a free-standing or built-in masonry

fireplace. See “Fireplaces” on page 671.
Build> Electrical> Place 110V outlets. See “Outlets” on page

110V Outlet 518.
Build> Electrical> Place 220V outlets. See “Outlets” on page

220V Outlet 518.
Build> Electrical> Place default lights on walls or ceiling as

Light defined in the Electrical Defaults dialog. See
“Lights” on page 518.
Build> Electrical> Place switches in walls or cabinets as defined
Switch in the Electrical Defaults dialog. See
“Switches” on page 519.
Build> Electrical> Automatically place outlets in room. See
Auto Place Outlets “Outlets” on page 518.
Build> Electrical> Connect electrical items into circuits. See

Connect Electrical “Connect Electrical” on page 519.
Build> Primitive> Draw a 3D box. See “Primitive Tools” on

Box page 649.
1108

Effect
Build> Primitive> Draw a 3D sphere. See “Primitive Tools” on
Sphere page 649.
Build> Primitive> Draw a 3D cylinder. See “Primitive Tools” on

Cylinder page 649.
Build> Primitive> Draw a 3D cone. See “Primitive Tools” on

Cone page 649.
Build> Primitive> Draw a polyline solid. See “Polyline Solids”

Polyline Solid on page 658.
Build> Primitive> Create a 3D Face. See “Primitive Tools” on

Face page 649.
Build> Image> Open the Image Specification dialog that

Create Image... allows you to import an image. See “Images”
on page 933.
Build> Image> Open the Image Specification dialog that
Create Billboard allows you to import an image. See “Images”
Image... on page 933.
Build> Image> Import a folder of images into the library. See
Create Image “Converting a Folder of Images” on page 934.
Library...
Build> Distributed Draw a closed polyline in which you an
Object> Polyline evenly distribute a group of objects. See
Distribution Region “Distributed Objects” on page 666.
Build> Distributed Draw a closed spline in which you an evenly
Object> Spline distribute a group of objects. See “Distributed
Distribution Region Objects” on page 666.
Build> Distributed Draw an open polyline along which you an
Object> Polyline evenly distribute a group of objects. See
Distribution Path “Distributed Objects” on page 666.
Build> Distributed Draw a closed spline along which you an
Object> Spline evenly distribute a group of objects. See
Distribution Path “Distributed Objects” on page 666.
1109
Terrain Menu
Terrain Menu
The Terrain menu contains tools for creating
terrain and landscaping.

Effect
Terrain> Create Create a rectangular terrain perimeter. See
Terrain Perimeter “Terrain Perimeter” on page 581.
Terrain> Terrain Specify how the program approximates the

Specification... terrain and draws contour lines in the Terrain
Specification dialog. See “Terrain
Terrain> Build Model terrain based on elevation data you
Terrain provide using points, lines and splines.
Calculate terrain data such as contour lines
and the 3D mesh. See “Building the Terrain”
on page 594.
Terrain> Clear Clear the plan of 3D terrain data and contour
Terrain lines. To restore information you must rebuild
the terrain. See “Clear Terrain” on page 582.
Terrain> Elevation Place elevation points containing data in floor
Data> Elevation Point plan view. See “Elevation Data Tools” on
page 582.
Terrain> Elevation Draw a line containing elevation data. See
Data> Elevation Line “Elevation Data Tools” on page 582.
Terrain> Elevation Draw a spline containing elevation data. See

Data> Elevation “Elevation Data Tools” on page 582.
Spline
Terrain> Elevation Draw a polyline to create a region of constant
Data> Elevation elevation. See “Elevation Data Tools” on page
Region 582.
Terrain> Elevation Draw a terrain break. See “Elevation Data
Data> Terrain Break Tools” on page 582.
1110

Effect
Terrain> Modifier> Draw a polyline to create a raised region. See
Raised Region “Terrain Modifier Tools” on page 587.
Terrain> Modifier> Draw a polyline to create a lowered region.

Lowered Region See “Terrain Modifier Tools” on page 587.
Terrain> Modifier> Draw a polyline to create a hill. See “Terrain

Hill Modifier Tools” on page 587.
Terrain> Modifier> Draw a polyline to create a valley. See

Valley “Terrain Modifier Tools” on page 587.
Terrain> Modifier> Draw a polyline to create a flat region. See

Flat Region (Cut/Fill) “Terrain Modifier Tools” on page 587.
Terrain> Feature> Draw a retangular terrain feature. See “Terrain

Rectangular Feature Feature Tools” on page 588.
Terrain> Feature> Draw a spline to create a terrain feature. See

Spline Feature “Terrain Feature Tools” on page 588.
Terrain> Feature> Draw a kidney-shaped terrain feature. See

Kidney Shaped “Terrain Feature Tools” on page 588.
Feature
Terrain> Feature> Draw a terrain hole polyline. See “Terrain
Terrain Hole Feature Tools” on page 588.
Terrain> Garden Draw a polyline garden bed. See “Garden Bed

Bed> Polyline Garden Tools” on page 590.
Bed
Terrain> Garden Draw a round garden bed. See “Garden Bed
Bed> Round Garden Tools” on page 590.
Bed
Terrain> Garden Draw a kidney shaped garden bed. See
Bed> Kidney Shaped “Garden Bed Tools” on page 590.
Garden Bed
Terrain> Water Draw a round pond. See “Water Feature
Featurs> Round Pond Tools” on page 591.
1111
Terrain Menu

Effect
Terrain> Water Draw a kidney shaped pond. See “Water
Featurs> Kidney Feature Tools” on page 591.
Shaped Pond
Terrain> Water Draw a stream. See “Water Feature Tools” on
Feature> Stream page 591.
Terrain> Stepping Draw a polyline stepping stone. See “Stepping

Stone> Polyline Stone Tools” on page 591.
Stepping Stone
Terrain> Stepping Draw a round stepping stone. See “Stepping
Stone> Round Stone Tools” on page 591.
Stepping Stone
Terrain> Wall and Draw a straight terrain wall. See “Terrain Wall
Curb> Straight and Curb Tools” on page 592.
Terrain Wall
Terrain> Wall and Draw a curved terrain wall. See “Terrain Wall
Curb> Spline Terrain and Curb Tools” on page 592.
Wall
Terrain> Wall and Draw a straight retaining wall. See “Retaining
Curb> Straight Walls” on page 592.
Retaining Wall
Terrain> Wall and Draw a curved retaining wall. See “Retaining
Curb> Curved Walls” on page 592.
Retaining Wall
Terrain> Wall and Draw a straight curb. See “Terrain Wall and
Curb> Straight Curb Tools” on page 592.
Terrain Curb
Terrain> Wall and Draw a curved curb. See “Terrain Wall and
Curb> Spline Terrain Curb Tools” on page 592.
Curb
Terrain> Road> Draw a road. See “Straight Road” on page
Straight Road 636.
Terrain> Road> Draw a road with smooth curves. See “Spline

Spline Road Road” on page 636
1112

Effect
Terrain> Road> Draw a road polyline. See “Polyline Road” on
Polyline Road page 636.
Terrain> Road> Draw a road median. See “Median” on page

Median 636.
Terrain> Road> Cul- Draw a cul-de-sac. See “Cul-de-sac” on page

de-sac 637.
Terrain> Road> Road Draw road markings. See “Road Marking” on

Marking page 637.
Terrain> Road> Road Draw a road stripe. See “Road Stripe” on page
Stripe 637.
Terrain> Driveway> Draw a driveway. See “Straight Driveway” on

Straight Driveway page 638.
Terrain> Driveway> Draw a driveway with smooth curves. See

Spline Driveway “Straight Driveway” on page 638.
Terrain> Driveway> Draw a driveway polyline. See “Straight

Polyline Driveway Driveway” on page 638.
Terrain> Sidewalk> Draw a straight sidewalk. See “Straight

Straight Sidewalk Sidewalk” on page 638
Terrain Sidewalk> Draw a sidewalk with smooth curves. See

Spline Sidewalk “Straight Sidewalk” on page 638.
Terrain> Sidewalk> Draw a sidewalk polyline. See “Polyline

Polyline Sidewalk Sidewalk” on page 638.
Terrain> Plant> Plant Search for plants using the Plant Chooser
Chooser... dialog. See “Plant Chooser Dialog” on page
627.
Terrain> Plant> Create a new plan image using the Plant
Create Plant Image... Image Specification dialog. See “Plant Image
1113
Library Menu

Effect
Terrain> Plant> Open the Grow Plants dialog. See “Plant
Grow all Plants... Tools” on page 621.
Terrain> Plant> Display a collection of plant hardiness zone

Show Hardiness maps. See “Hardiness Zones” on page 629.
Zones...
Terrain> Sprinkler> Insert a sprinkler head from the Sprinklers
Sprinkler Head library. See “Sprinkler Tools” on page 629.
Terrain> Sprinkler> Draw a sprinkler line. See “Sprinkler Tools”

Sprinkler Line on page 629.
Terrain> Sprinkler> Draw a sprinkler spline. See “Sprinkler Tools”

Sprinkler Spline on page 629.
Library Menu
The Library menu contains items that allow
you to work with the Library Browser.

Effect
Library> Library Ctrl + L Open the Library Browser. See “The Library
Browser... Browser” on page 683.
Library> Library Open the Library Search dialog. See “Library

Search... Search Dialog” on page 687.
Library> Convert Convert .alb files from Chief Architect X1

Legacy (.alb) Library into .calib and .calibx files for use in Chief
Files... Architect X2. See “Legacy Library
Conversion” on page 701.
Library> Import Import a .calib file into your Import library
Library (.calib)... category. See “Import Libraries” on page 702.
1114
Library> Export Export a .calib or .calibx file fromyour Export

Library... library category. See “Export Libraries” on
page 703.
Library> Delete Remove all items from your Import library
Import Items category. See “Deleting Items from the
Import/Export Libraries” on page 704.
Library> Delete Remove all items from your Export library
Export Items category. See “Deleting Items from the
Import/Export Libraries” on page 704.
3D Menu
The 3D menu contains tools that allow you to edit materials and lighting, which can be
create and manipulate 3D views, as well as seen in 3D views.

Effect
3D> Create Orthographic Shift + H Create a cross section view of the entire
View> Cross Section/ model when used inside the model, or an
Elevation exterior elevation view of the entire model
when used outside the model. See “Cross
Section/Elevation Views” on page 752.
3D> Create Orthographic Shift + Create a cross section view of objects
View> Back-clipped Cros F12 between the start and end points of the cross
s Section section line only. See “Cross Section/
Elevation Views” on page 749.
3D> Create Orthographic Create an elevation view of an interior or
View> Wall Elevation exterior wall on one floor. See “Cross
Section/Elevation Views” on page 749.
3D> Create Orthographic Create a front elevation view of the model.
View> Auto Elevations> See “Cross Section/Elevation Views” on
Front Elevation page 749.
3D> Create Orthographic Create a back elevation view of the model.
Back Elevation page 749.
1115
3D Menu
3D> Create Orthographic Create a left elevation view of the model.

Left Elevation page 749.
3D> Create Orthographic Create a right elevation view of the model.
Right Elevation page 749.
3D> Create Orthographic Create four elevation views of the model.
All Elevations page 749.
3D> Create Orthographic H Create an orthographic overview of the
View> Full Overview entire model, including ceilings and roofs.
See “Creating Overviews” on page 751.
3D> Create Orthographic Shift + G Create an orthographic overview of the
View> Floor Overview current floor, without ceilings or roofs. See
“Creating Overviews” on page 751.
3D> Create Orthographic Create an orthographic overview of the
View> Framing Overview entire model showing the only the framing.
Build framing before using this view. See
3D> Create Perspective Shift + J Create a camera view that includes all
View> Full Camera floors, ceilings and roofs. See “Camera
3D> Create Perspective Create a camera view of the current floor
View> Floor Camera only. See “Camera Views” on page 749.
3D> Create Perspective Shift + K Create a perspective overview of the entire

View> Full Overview model, including ceilings and roofs. See
3D> Create Perspective Create a perspective overview of the current
View> Floor Overview floor, without ceilings or roofs. See
3D> Create Perspective Create a perspective overview of the entire
View> Framing Overview model showing the only the framing. Build
framing before using this view. See
3D> Raytrace Current J Create a Raytrace view of the current
View... Standard rendered view. See “Rendering &
1116
3D> Save Active Camera Save the curent 3D view. See “Saving &
Printing 3D Views” on page 767.
3D> Edit Active Open the current 3D view’s specification

Camera... dialog. See “Camera Specification Dialog”
on page 768.
3D> Move Camera With Alt + O Allows you to rotate the camera around the
Mouse> Mouse-Orbit current camera focal point. See “Move
Camera Camera with Mouse” on page 759.
3D> Move Camera With Alt + P Allows you to move the camera up, down,
Mouse> Mouse-Pan left and right. See “Move Camera with
Camera Mouse” on page 759.
3D> Move Camera With Alt + D Allows you to move the camera forward,
Mouse> Mouse- Dolly backward, left and right. See “Move
Camera Camera with Mouse” on page 759.
3D> Move Camera With Alt + T Allows you to tilt the camera in any
Mouse> Mouse-Tilt direction while staying in the same location.
Camera See “Move Camera with Mouse” on page
759.
3D> Move Camera With Allows you to focus the camera at a
Mouse> 3D Center particular point in the scene. See “Move
Camera on Point Camera with Mouse” on page 759.
3D> Move Camera With N/A Shift + Alt Allows you to rotate the camera using the
Arrow Keys> Arrow- +O arrow keys on your keyboard. See “Move
Orbit Camera Camera Tools” on page 760.
3D> Move Camera With N/A Shift + Alt Allows you to pan the camera up, down, left
Arrow Keys> Arrow-Pan +P and right using the arrow keys on your
Camera keyboard. See “Move Camera Tools” on
page 760.
3D> Move Camera With N/A Shift + Alt Allows you to move the camera forward,
Arrow Keys> Arrow- +D backward, left and right using the arrow
Dolly Camera keys on your keyboard. See “Move Camera
3D> Move Camera With N/A Shift + Alt Allows you to tilt the camera while staying
Arrow Keys> Arrow-Tilt +T in the same location using the arrow keys
Camera on your keyboard. See “Tilt Camera Tools”
on page 761.
1117
3D Menu
3D> Move Camera> F Move the camera one step forward while
Move Camera Forward maintaining the same line of sight.
3D> Move Camera> B Move the camera one step backward while
Move Camera Backward maintaining the same line of sight.
3D> Move Camera> L Move the camera one step to the left while
Move Camera Left maintaining the same line of sight.
3D> Move Camera> R Move the camera one step to the right while
Move Camera Right maintaining the same line of sight.
3D> Move Camera> U Raise the camera vertically in space while

Move Camera Up maintaining the same line of sight.
3D> Move Camera> D Lower the camera vertically in space while

Move Camera Down maintaining the same line of sight.
3D> Orbit Camera> I Move the position of the camera closer to

Move Camera In the focal point along the line of sight.
3D> Orbit Camera> O Move the position of the camera away from
Move Camera Out the focal point along the line of sight.
3D> Orbit Camera> Rotate the camera up around its focal point.
Orbit Camera Upward
3D> Orbit Camera> Rotate camera down around its focal point.
Orbit Camera Downward
3D> Orbit Camera> Rotate the camera to the left around its focal
Orbit Camera Left point.
3D> Orbit Camera> Rotate the camera to the right around its
Orbit Camera Right focal point.
3D> Tilt Camera> Tilt Tilt the camera upward while keeping it in
Camera Upward the same location.
3D> Tilt Camera> Tilt Tilt the camera downward while keeping it
Camera Downward in the same location.
1118
3D> Tilt Camera> Tilt Turn the camera toward the left while
Camera Left staying in the same location.
3D> Tilt Camera> Tilt Turn the camera toward the right while
Camera Right staying in the same location.
3D> Overview Direction Adjust the view direction of an

Tools> View Angle... orthographic overview in the View Angle
dialog. See “Creating Overviews” on page
751.
3D> Overview Direction Available in orthographic overviews. Click
Tools> Front View for front view of the model.

Tools> Back View for back view of the model.

Tools> Top View for top view of the model.

Tools> Bottom View for bottom view of the model.

Tools> Left Side View for left side view of the model.

Tools> Right Side View for right side view of the model.

Tools> Restore Original to restore the original view position.
View
3D> Walkthroughs> Play Play back a previously recorded
Walkthrough... walkthrough “movie”. See “Walkthroughs”
on page 948.
3D> Walkthroughs> Record a walkthrough “movie” in .avi
Record Walk-through... format. See “Walkthroughs” on page 948.
3D> Walkthroughs> Stop Stop recording a walkthrough movie. See

Recording “Walkthroughs” on page 948.
1119
3D Menu
3D> Walkthroughs> Pause recording of a walkthrough movie.

Pause Recording See “Walkthroughs” on page 948.
3D> Walkthroughs> Save Save a single frame to the currently paused

Frame walkthrough file. See “Walkthroughs” on
page 948.
3D> Walkthroughs> Create a walkthrough that follows the path
Record Walkthrough of a selected polyline or spline. See
Along Path... “Walkthroughs” on page 948.
3D> Materials> Plan Shift + C Open the Plan Materials dialog. See
Materials... “Managing Plan Materials” on page 717.
3D> Materials> Convert Convert textures to materials. See

Textures to Materials... “Converting Textures to Materials” on page
714.
3D> Materials> Create Create a library of materials in the Import
Plan Materials Library library category based on the materials used
in the current plan. See “Converting
Material Template Plans” on page 714.
3D> Materials> Adjust Change a material definition by clicking on
Material Definition a surface. See “Adjust Material Definition”
on page 712.
3D> Materials> Material Allows you to paint a material onto objects.
Painter> Material See “The Material Painter” on page 707.
Painter...
3D> Material Painter> Allows you to paint a material onto all
Material Painter objects of the same material on the same
Component Mode layer. See “Material Painter Modes” on
page 707.
3D> Materials> Material Allows you to paint a material onto a single
Painter> Material Painter object. See “Material Painter Modes” on
Object Mode page 707.
3D> Materials> Material Allows you to paint a material onto all
Painter> Material Painter objects of the same material in a room. See
Room Mode “Material Painter Modes” on page 707.
Painter> Material Painter objects of the same material on a floor. See
Floor Mode “Material Painter Modes” on page 707.
1120

Painter> Material Painter objects of the same material in a plan. See
Plan Mode “Material Painter Modes” on page 707
3D> Materials> Material Create a new material by blending a solid
Painter> Blend Colors color with a textured and/or patterned
With Materials material. See “Blending Materials” on page
713.
3D> Materials> Material Select a material and apply it to other
Eyedropper objects in a 3D view. See “Material
Eyedropper” on page 709.
3D> Lighting> Add Click in floor plan view to place point light
Lights source. Click and drag to create a parallel
light. See “Added Lights” on page 776.
3D> Lighting> Adjust Adjust the render properties of the lights
Lights within the plan. See “Adjusting Lights” on
page 778.
3D> Lighting> Toggle Turn on or off the light source that
Sunlight represents the sun to simulate day vs. night
exterior views. See “Sun Angles” on page
776.
3D> Camera View Redraw a rendered view using the Final
Options> Final View View settings in the Preferences dialog.
See “Preview vs Final View” on page 774.
3D> Camera View Redraw a rendered view with the Final
Options> Final View with View with Shadows settings in the
Shadows Preferences dialog. See “Preview vs Final
3D> Camera View Open the Cross Section Slider dialog. See
Options> Cross Section “Cross Section Slider” on page 764.
Slider...
3D> Camera View Turn on or off the display of material
Options> Toggle Textures textures in 3D views in which textures are
used. See “Textures & Patterns” on page
757.
3D> Rendering Render the current 3D view using the
Techniques> Standard Standard Rendering Technique. See
“Standard Rendering” on page 785.
1121
3D Menu

Techniques> Vector View Vector View Rendering Technique. See
“Vector View” on page 786.
3D> Rendering Render the current 3D view using the Glass
Techniques> Glass House House Rendering Technique. See “Glass
House” on page 786.
Techniques> Enhanced Enhanced Lighting Rendering Technique.
Lighting See “Enhanced Lighting” on page 786.
Techniques> Duotone Duotone Rendering Technique. See
“Duotone” on page 787.
Techniques> Technical Technical Illustration Rendering Technique.
Illustration See “Technical Illustration” on page 787.
Techniques> Painting Painting Rendering Technique. See
“Painting” on page 787.
Techniques> Watercolor Watercolor Rendering Technique. See
“Watercolor” on page 788.
3D> Rendering Render the current 3D view using the Line
Techniques> Line Drawing Rendering Technique. See “Line
Drawing Drawing” on page 788.
3D> Rendering Open the Rendering Technique Options
Techniques> Technique dialog. See “Rendering Technique Options”
Options... on page 788.
3D> Toggle Low Detail Toggle between low and high detail 3D
Mode view. See “Low Detail Display” on page
798.
3D> Toggle Patterns Turn on or off the display of material
pattern lines in Vector Views. See “3D
3D> Delete Surface Click surfaces in a 3D view to delete them.
Click the button again to restore deleted
surfaces. See “Delete 3D Surface” on page
757.
1122
3D> Remove 3D Remove all 3D views associated with the

current plan. See “Remove 3D” on page
758.
3D> Rebuild 3D Rebuild the entire 3D model. See “Rebuild
3D” on page 758.
3D> 3D Settings... Ctrl + 1 Open the 3D Settings dialog. See “3D

Settings Dialog” on page 744.
CAD Menu
The CAD menu can be used to access the these menu items are also accessible from the
CAD, Text and Dimension tools. Most of CAD toolbar.

Description
CAD> Current CAD Opens the Select CAD Layer dialog and
Layer... allows you to change the current CAD layer.
See “Select Layer Dialog” on page 124.
CAD> Points> Place Click to place a temporary CAD Point. See
Point “Point Tools” on page 880.
CAD> Points> Input Click to place a new point in an absolute

Point... location or relative to the current point. See
“Input Point” on page 880.
CAD> Points> Point Click to place a permanent point marker.
Marker See “Point Markers” on page 881.
CAD> Points> Delete Delete all temporary CAD points at the

Temporary Points same time. See “Point Tools” on page 880.
CAD> Lines> Draw W Click and drag to create CAD lines. See
Line “Line Tools” on page 884.
CAD> Lines> Input Draw a line in an absolute location from the

Line... origin or relative to the current point. See
“Input Line” on page 884.
1123
CAD Menu

Description
CAD> Lines> Line Draw a CAD line with an arrowhead. See
With Arrow “Line With Arrow” on page 886.
CAD> Lines> Sun Draw a Sun Angle to show shadow

Angle information at specific places and times, and
to create a light source in 3D views that use
lighting. See “Sun Angles” on page 776.
CAD> Lines> North Draw a North Pointer to define true North.
Pointer See “North Pointer” on page 886.
CAD> Lines> Create Open the Line Style Specification dialog.

Line Style... See “Creating Line Styles” on page 910.
CAD> Arcs> Draw E Draw an arc by dragging along the desired

Arc curve. See “Arc Tools” on page 894.
CAD> Arcs> Input Draw an arc in an absolute location from a

Arc... point of origin or relative to the current
point. See “Input Arc” on page 894.
CAD> Arcs> Arc Draw an arc with an arrowhead. See “Arc
With Arrow with Arrow” on page 895.
CAD> Circles> Circle K Click and drag to draw a circle. See “Circle
CAD> Circles> Circle Click and drag from a center point to draw a
About Center circle. See “Draw Circle About Center” on
page 898.
CAD> Circles> Oval Draw an oval. See “Ovals” on page 898.
CAD> Circles> Draw an ellipse. See “Circle Tools” on page

Ellipse 897.
CAD> Boxes & Shift + P Draw a closed rectangular polyline. See

Framing> “Rectangular Polyline” on page 903.
Rectangular Polyline
1124

Description
CAD> Boxes & Click to draw a closed regular polygon. You
Framing> Regular specify the radius or side length and number
Polygon... of sides. See “Box Tools” on page 903.
CAD> Boxes & Draw a resizable box. See “Box” on page
Framing> Box 903.
CAD> Boxes & Draw a resizable box containing a cross to

Framing> Cross Box show a cross section of a framing member.
See “Cross Box” on page 904.
CAD> Boxes & Draw resizable insulation for detailing cross
Framing> Insulation section views. See “Insulation” on page 904.
CAD> Revision Cloud Draw a revision cloud. See “Revision

Clouds” on page 906.
CAD> Spline Click and drag to draw connected spline

segments that form a smooth curve. See
CAD> Dimension> Single click to draw dimension lines. Dou-
Manual Dimension ble-click to open the Dimension Defaults
dialog. See “Manual Dimensions” on page
823.
CAD> Dimension> Draw a dimension marking only the
End to End beginning and end points. Double-click to
Dimension open the Dimension Defaults dialog. See
“End-to-End Dimensions” on page 824.
CAD> Dimension> Use this tool to find the angular dimension
Angular Dimension between any two straight, non-parallel lines.
Double-click to open the Dimension
Defaults dialog. See “Angular Dimensions”
on page 824.
CAD> Dimension> Click to draw inside room dimensions. Dou-
Interior Dimension ble-click to open the Dimension Defaults
dialog. See “Interior Dimensions” on page
824.
1125
CAD Menu

Description
CAD> Dimension> Draw a dimension between any two points.
Point to Point Double-click to open the Dimension
Dimension Defaults dialog. See “Point to Point
CAD> Dimension> Draw baseline dimensions for each object
Baseline Dimension located along the line. Double-click to open
the Dimension Defaults dialog. See
“Baseline Dimensions” on page 825.
CAD> Dimension> Draw a centerline dimension. Double-click
Centerline Dimension to open the Dimension Defaults dialog. See
“Centerline Dimensions” on page 825.
CAD> Dimension> Shift + A Automatically generate exterior dimensions as
Auto Exterior defined in Dimension Defaults dialog. See
Dimensions “Auto Exterior Dimensions” on page 825.
CAD> Dimension> Enable temporary dimensions that display
Display Temporary when objects are selected. See “Display
Dimensions Temporary Dimensions” on page 826.
CAD> Text> Rich Y Click on screen to add Rick Text. See
Text “Creating Text, Callouts and Markers” on
page 842.
CAD> Text> Text Y Click on screen to add simple text. See
“Creating Text, Callouts and Markers” on
page 842.
CAD> Text> Text Alt + A Click and drag to draw a text line with an
Line with Arrow arrow. See “Text Arrows” on page 861.
CAD> Text> Leader Alt + L Click and drag a text line with an arrow,
Line then place a Rich Text object. See “Leader
Line” on page 861.
CAD> Text> Callout Click on screen to add a callout. See
“Callouts” on page 863.
CAD> Text> Marker Place a marker in floor plan view. See

“Markers” on page 867.
1126

Description
CAD> Plan Footprint Create a basic footprint of the current plan
in a CAD Detail window. See “Plan
Footprint” on page 919.
CAD> Autodetail Click to automatically generate CAD
Details. See “Auto Detailing” on page 755.
CAD> CAD Block V Insert a CAD block from the list of available
Management... blocks in CAD Block Management dialog.
See “CAD Block Management” on page
913.
CAD> CAD Detail Shift + V Open the CAD Detail dialog to create new
Management... detail or open an existing detail. See “CAD
CAD> CAD Detail Click to convert the current view to a CAD
From View detail. See “CAD Detail From View” on
page 767.
CAD> CAD to Walls... Ctrl + F3 Convert CAD lines into walls. See “CAD to
Tools Menu
The Tools menu offers a tools for a variety of
purposes, such as controlling the appearance
of your drawing, generating materials lists
and schedules, and modifying toolbars.

Effect
Tools> Display ‘ Open the Layer Display Options dialog to
Settings> Display control the display of items in 2D and 3D
Options... views as well as the materials list. See “Layer
1127
Tools Menu

Effect
Tools> Display Open the Layer Set Management dialog to
Settings> Layer Set define, copy, create, import or export, and set
Management... the default layer set. See “Layer Set
Management” on page 119.
Tools> Display Select a layer and assign it to objects in any
Settings> Layer view. See “Layer Painter and Eyedropper” on
Painter page 126.
Tools> Display Select an object, then move other objects the
Settings> Layer same layer in any view. See “Layer Painter
Eyedropper and Eyedropper” on page 126.
Tools> Display F5 Redraw the current window to clean up extra
Settings>Refresh lines, show missing items, and correct
Display random effects caused by changes to a model.
See “Refresh Display” on page 177.
Tools> Display F8 Toggle the color on or off. See “Color On/
Settings> Color On/ Off” on page 757.
Off
Tools> Display Shift + F9 Toggles the reference grid on and off. See
Settings> Display “General Plan Defaults Dialog” on page 68.
Reference Grid
Tools> Display Toggles the display of arc centers and ends.
Settings> Show Arc See “Show Arc Centers” on page 155.
Centers and Ends
Tools> Display Turn on display of line weights for accurate
Settings> Show Line on-screen representation of line weights and
Weights styles. See “Show Line Weights” on page
996.
Tools> Display Alt + F3 Toggle the print sheet on and off. See “Show
Settings> Show Sheet Sheet” on page 996.
Tools> Reference Ctrl + Shift Define the working floor and the reference
Floors> Change Floor/ +G plan. See “Reference Floor” on page 359.
Reference...
Tools> Reference Shift + N Move the current floor plan or 3D view up.
Floors> Up One Floor See “Floor Up / Floor Down” on page 359.
1128

Effect
Tools> Reference Shift + M Move the current floor plan or 3D view one
Floors> Down One floor down. See “Floor Up / Floor Down” on
Floor page 359.
Tools> Reference F9 Superimpose the plan of another floor over
Floors> Reference the current floor. See “Reference Display” on
Display page 360.
Tools> Reference Open the Layer Display Options dialog to
Floors> Reference the Reference Display layer set. See “Layers”
Display Options... on page 116.
Tools> Reference Switch so that the reference plan becomes the
Floors> Swap Floor/ working plan, and the working plan becomes
Reference the reference plan. See “Swap Floor/
Reference” on page 361.
Tools> Checks> Plan Checks for common problems in the floor
Check... plan. Best used when your floor plan is near
completion. See “Plan Check” on page 928.
Tools> Checks> Spell Opens the Check Spelling dialog, allowing
Check... you to check the spelling of the selected text.
See “Spell Check” on page 859.
Tools> Checks> View Display the IRC Checklist using Acrobat
IRC Checklist... Reader. See “IRC Checklist” on page 929.
Tools> Toolbars & N/A Create new toolbars or modify existing ones.
Hotkeys> Customize See “Toolbar Customization Dialog” on page
Toolbars... 107.
Tools> Toolbars & N/A Toggle the toolbars on or off. See “Toolbar
Hotkeys> Hide Arrangement” on page 107.
Toolbars
Tools> Toolbars & Open the Customize Hotkeys dialog. See
Hotkeys> Customize “Customize Hotkeys Dialog” on page 114.
Hotkeys...
Tools> Toolbars & Create a printable list of hotkeys. See “Create
Hotkeys> Create Hotkey List” on page 115.
Hotkey List...
Tools> Layout > N/A Open the Go To Layout Page dialog. See
Change Layout Page... “Displaying Layout Views” on page 1025.
1129
Tools Menu

Effect
Tools> Layout> Page Shift + N Move the current page in the layout file up
Up one page. See “The Layout Tools” on page
1016.
Tools> Layout > Page Shift + M Move the current page in the layout file down
Down one page. See “The Layout Tools” on page
1016.
Tools> Layout> Insert Insert a page before the current layout page as
Page long as there is nothing on page 1000. See
“The Layout Tools” on page 1016.
Tools> Layout> Delete Delete the current layout page as long as there
Page is nothing on that page. See “The Layout
Tools> Layout> Exchange the position of the current layout
Exchange With Next page (except Page 1000) with the page after
Page it. See “The Layout Tools” on page 1016.
Tools> Layout> Exchange the position of the current layout
Exchange With page (except Page 0) with the page before it.
Previous Page See “The Layout Tools” on page 1016.
Tools> Layout> Edit Select and modify any line in any vector view
Layout that has been sent to layout other than CAD
objects. See “Editing Layout Lines” on page
1028.
Tools> Layout> N/A View files present and files not found in the
Layout Files... current layout file. See “Layout Files Dialog”
on page 1032.
Tools> Symbol> Get Place the most recently created symbol into
Last Symbol... the plan. See “Get Last Symbol” on page 987.
Tools> Symbol> From a 3D view, convert the model into a

Convert to Symbol... symbol. See “Convert to Symbol” on page
987.
Tools> Symbol> Add Add a symbol to the Library. See “Adding to
to Library... the Library” on page 700.
1130

Effect
Tools> House Wizard> Open the House Wizard that leads you
Start House Wizard... through the steps to quickly lay out a floor
plan. See “House Wizard” on page 926.
Tools> House Wizard> Build a 3D model of a house based on the
Build House organization of Room Boxes that you
defined. Must be done for each floor of the
building. See “House Wizard” on page 926.
Tools> House Wizard> Turn the display of Room Boxes on and off.
Hide Room Boxes Room Boxes normally display when they are
created and hidden after using the Build
House tool. See “House Wizard” on page
926.
Tools> House Wizard> Place a bathroom. See “House Wizard” on
Bathroom page 926.
Tools> House Wizard> Place a bedroom. See “House Wizard” on

Bedroom page 926.
Tools> House Wizard> Place a closet. See “House Wizard” on page

Closet 926.
Tools> House Wizard> Place a deck. See “House Wizard” on page

Deck 926.
Tools> House Wizard> Place a dining room. See “House Wizard” on

Dining Room page 926.
Tools> House Wizard> Place an entry. See “House Wizard” on page

Entry 926.
Tools> House Wizard> Place a family room. See “House Wizard” on

Family Room page 926.
Tools> House Wizard> Place a garage. See “House Wizard” on page

Garage 926.
Tools> House Wizard> Place a hallway. See “House Wizard” on page

Hallway 926.
1131
Tools Menu

Effect
Tools> House Wizard> Place a kitchen. See “House Wizard” on page
Kitchen 926.
Tools> House Wizard> Place a laundry room. See “House Wizard”

Laundry Room on page 926.
Tools> House Wizard> Place a living room. See “House Wizard” on

Living Room page 926.
Tools> House Wizard> Place a master bedroom. See “House Wizard”

Master Bedroom on page 926.
Tools> House Wizard> Place an office. See “House Wizard” on page

Office 926.
Tools> House Wizard> Place a porch. See “House Wizard” on page

Porch 926.
Tools> House Wizard> Place a stairway. See “House Wizard” on

Stair page 926.
Tools> House Wizard> Place a stairwell. See “House Wizard” on

Stairwell page 926.
Tools> Plans Create a plan database for plans on your

Database> Create Plan system. See “Find Plan Wizard” on page 54.
Database...
Tools> Plans Edit an existing plan database file. See “Find
Database> Edit Plan Plan Wizard” on page 54.
Database...
Tools> Time Tracker> Begin logging time for the current plan. See
Start Time Logging “Time Tracker” on page 922.
Tools> Time Tracker> Stop logging time for the current plan. See
Stop Time Logging “Time Tracker” on page 922.
Tools> Time Tracker> Opens the Time Log dialog. See “Time Log
View Time Log... Dialog” on page 923.
1132

Effect
Tools> Schedules> Create a door schedule for one or all floors.
Door See “Creating Schedules” on page 1037.
Tools> Schedules> Create a window schedule for one or all the

Window floors. See “Creating Schedules” on page
1037.
Tools> Schedules> Create a cabinet schedule for one or all the
Cabinet floors. See “Creating Schedules” on page
1037.
Tools> Schedules> Create a fixture schedule for one or all the
Fixture floors. See “Creating Schedules” on page
1037.
Tools> Schedules> Create a furniture schedule for one or all the
Furniture floors. See “Creating Schedules” on page
1037.
Tools> Schedules> Create an electrical schedule for one or all the
Electrical floors. See “Creating Schedules” on page
1037.
Tools> Schedules> Create a room finish schedule for one or all
Room Finish the floors. See “Creating Schedules” on page
1037.
Tools> Schedules> Create a plant schedule for one or all the
Plant floors. See “Creating Schedules” on page
1037.
Tools> Materials List> Generate a materials list for all floors. See
Calculate From All “Calculate From All Floors” on page 1049.
Floors
Tools> Materials List> Draw a rectangle around an area to generate a
Calculate From Area materials list for that area. See “Calculate
From Area” on page 1049.
Tools> Materials List> Select a room, then this menu option to
Calculate From Room generate a materials list for the selected room.
See “Calculate From Room” on page 1049.
Tools> Materials List> Draw a rectangular polyline defining an area
Materials Polyline to produce a materials list from. See
“Materials Polyline” on page 1057.
1133
Tools Menu

Effect
Tools> Materials List> Ctrl + M View the master materials list. Modify the
Master List Master List by making changes to a materials
list. See “The Master List” on page 1059.
Tools> Materials List> Open the Materials List Management dialog
Materials List to edit, delete, or rename saved materials lists.
Management... See “Managing Materials Lists” on page
1058.
Tools> Loan Open the Loan Calculator dialog. See “Loan
Calculator... Calculator” on page 929.
Tools> Project Open the Project Browser. See “Project

Browser... Browser” on page 924.
Tools > Project Open a box where you can enter contact
Information> Designer information for the designer of the plan. See
Information... “Designer Information” on page 925.
Tools> Project Open a box where you can enter contact
Information> Client information on the client this plan was drawn
Information... for. See “Client Information” on page 926.
Tools> Screen Open a dialog where you designate the kind
Capture> Screen of screen capture you intent to do, whether
Capture Setup... backdrop, image, material, or picture. See
“Creating Screen Captures” on page 946.
Tools> Screen Activate the Screen Capture tool. See
Capture> Capture “Creating Screen Captures” on page 946.
Screen
Tools> Color Open the Color Chooser dialog where you
Chooser... can select a color and create a material. See
Tools> Rotate View... Open the Rotate Plan View dialog to rotate
the current floor plan view. See “Rotate
Tools> Reverse Plan Reverse your entire plan as though reflected
about a vertical line. See “Reverse Plan” on
page 191.
1134
Window Menu
The Window menu determines what window
is active and defines how it appears. Some of
these menu items are common to other
Windows programs.

Effect
Window> Zoom Shift + Z Zoom in on a defined area. See “Zoom Tools”
on page 731.
Window> Zoom In + (Num Zoom in to center of screen by 2x. See “Zoom

Lock on) Tools” on page 731. Use the numeric keypad
for the keyboard shortcut.
Window> Zoom Out - (Num Move back to include twice as much of your
Lock on) plan or view. See “Zoom Tools” on page 731.
Use the numeric keypad for the keyboard
shortcut
Window> Undo Undo the previous zoom. See “Undo Zoom”
Zoom on page 731.
Window> Fill Zoom so that all walls are visible in the

Window Building current window. See “Fill Window Building
Only Only” on page 732.
Window> Fill F6 Show the entire plan in the current window,
Window including the terrain perimeter and drawing
sheet. See “Fill Window” on page 732.
Window> Pan Pan the current window without changing the
Window zoom factor. See “Panning the Display” on
page 732.
Window> Swap F7 Toggle between the current view and the view
Views that was current before it. See “Swapping
Window> Aerial View Create an Aerial View of the entire plan in the
upper left corner. Zooming within this
window adjusts the view of the main plan for
editing. See “Aerial View” on page 736.
1135
Help Menu

Effect
Window> Cascade Shift + F5 A standard Windows option that displays all
open views in a row, each slightly offset from
the others. See “Cascade” on page 734.
Window> Tile Display views tiled one above the other. See
Horizontally “Tiling Views” on page 735.
Window> Tile Shift + F6 Display views tiled left to right. See “Tiling
Vertically Views” on page 735.
Window> Arrange A standard Windows option that lines up the

Icons icons of minimized views in a row. See
“Arrange Icons” on page 736.
Window> Next Ctrl + Tab Cycles through the open views in the order
Window that they appear on the bottom of the
Windows menu. See “Window Menu Tools”
on page 733.
Window> Previous Ctrl + Shift Cycles backwards through the open views in
Window + Tab the order that they appear on the bottom of the
Windows menu. See “Window Menu Tools”
on page 733.
Window> Show Select this to switch to a layout file that is
Layout currently open. See “The Layout Tools” on
page 1016.
Names of Open Views N/A Select an view from this list. The view with a
check next to it is the active view.
Help Menu
The Help menu is an extremely useful yet Help without resorting to other resources.
sometimes under-used resource. You can get The Help menu also provides important
assistance for most topics from the Online customer information.
1136

Effect
Help> Contents and Open the Online Help menu. See “Getting
Index... Help” on page 39.
Help> Current N/A F1 Display information specific to the current

Mode... mode or tool. The F1 function key accesses
this same information, but is more flexible
since it can access information specific to any
toolbar button or menu item the pointer is held
above. Most dialogs also have a Help button
that accesses information related to their func-
tions. See “Getting Help” on page 39.
Help> View User’s N/A Open the User’s Guide PDF using Acrobat
Guide... Reader. See “Getting Help” on page 39.
Help> View Open the Reference Manual PDF using
Reference Manual... Acrobat Reader. See “Getting Help” on page
39.
Help> Visit Chief Vist the Chief Architect Web page using your
Architect Web Site... default Web browser. See “Getting Help” on
page 39.
Help> View Online Launch your default Web browser to the Chief
Help Videos... Architect Online Training Videos page at
video.chiefarchitect.com/videos.
Help> Download N/A Open to the Program Updates section of the
Program Updates... Chief Architect Web site. See “Program
Updates” on page 39.
Help> Download Download bonus library catalogs from the
Library Catalogs... Chief Architect Web site. See “Bonus
Catalogs” on page 701.
Help> Download PDF Launch your default Web browser to the Chief
Reader... Architect Web site, where you can download
Adobe Reader.
Help> Download PDF Launch your default Web browser to the Chief
Printer Driver... Architect Web site, where you can download
the PDF 995 driver.
1137
MEP Toolbar Configuration Buttons

Effect
Help> Chief Talk... Launch your default Web browser to the Chief
Architect user forum, Chief Talk, at
www.chieftalk.com.
Help>Hardware Lock N/A Open the Hardware Lock Troubleshooter,
Troubleshooter... which provides information about hardware
locks detected on your system and helps you
identify problems if any exist.
Help> Deactivate N/A Deactivate the Chief Architect license
License... currently in use so it can be used on a different
computer. See “Deactivating Chief Architect
Licenses” on page 12 of the User’s Guide.
Help> About Chief N/A Open the About dialog to view the registered
Architect... user’s name, serial number, and the program’s
version number and release date. Chief
Architect Inc. contact information is shown on
the More Info tab.
MEP Toolbar Configuration Buttons

The MEP Toolbar Configuration Place 4x8 - Click to place 1 4x8”
displays a variety of toolbar buttons floor vent.
that access line styles and symbols related to
Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing. See Place 22” w/ Gas Upflow - Click to
“Line Styles” on page 879 and “Placing place a 22” gas furnace with upflow.
Place Cold Water Supply - Draw a
MEP Configuration Buttons CAD line using the C/W line style.
Place Hot Water Supply - Draw a

Place Gas - Draw a CAD line using CAD line using the H/W line style.
the Gas line style.
Place Heating/AC Duct - Draw a

CAD line using the H/AC line style. Place Drain Pipe - Draw a CAD
Place Vent Duct - Draw a CAD line line using the D/P line style.
using Vent line style.
1138
Place Waste Water - Draw a CAD

line using the W/W line style.
Place Large Gas WH - Click to

place a gas water heater.
Place Elongated Toilet - Click to

place an elongated toilet.
Place Single 24” - Click to place a

single 24” kitchen sink.
Place Tub-Shower (bar) - Click to

place a 60” tub-shower unit .
Place Data - Draw a CAD line using

the DATA line style.
Place Low Voltage - Draw a CAD

line using the L/V line style.
Place Telephone - Draw a CAD line

using the Telephone line style.
Place TV - Draw a CAD line using

the TV line style.
Toggle Buttons
Toggle buttons access a variety of functions. Show Line Weights - Turn on the
Some control how your plan appears on display of true line weights as they
screen, and others are shortcuts to preference appear when printed. See “Show
settings that control the behavior of various Line Weights” on page 996.
objects.
Show Sheet - Toggle the display of
By default, the toggle toolbars display on the the print sheet, as specified in the
right vertical frame of Chief Architect’s main Page Setup dialog. See “Show
window. Sheet” on page 996.
Color On/Off - Toggle the display

of color. See “Color On/Off” on
page 757.
1139
Edit Toolbar Buttons
Print Preview - Display the print

preview. All line weights and text Display Reference Grid - Turn on
objects appear on screen as they do the reference grid, as specified in the
when printed. See “Print Preview” Plan Defaults/Layout Defaults
on page 996. dialog. See “General Plan Defaults
Display Temporary Dimensions -
Show temporary dimensions when Grid Snaps - Enable snapping to
objects are selected. See “Display the grid as specified in the Plan
Temporary Dimensions” on page Defaults/Layout Defaults dialogs.
826. See “General Plan Defaults Dialog”
on page 68.
Edit Object Parts - Toggle the
ability to edit individual polyline Object Snaps - Enable snapping to
edges. See “Edit Object Parts” on objects as specified in the
page 132. Preferences dialog. See “Object
Show Arc Centers and Ends -
Toggle the display of arc centers. Angle Snaps - Enable snapping to
See “Show Arc Centers” on page allowed angles as specified in the
155. Plan Defaults/Layout Defaults
dialogs. See “Angle Snaps” on page
135.

Edit toolbar buttons only display when one Add to Library - Add a symbol,
or more objects are selected. Various edit CAD block, or molding profile to
buttons are available, depending on the the library. See “Adding to the
object(s) currently selected. Library” on page 700.
If Contextual Menus are enabled, you can Add to Library As - Add a symbol,
right-click an object to open a contextual CAD block, or molding profile to
menu that lists the same options as the edit the library. See “Adding to the
toolbar. See “Contextual Menus” on page 33. Library” on page 700.
Advanced Splines - Turn on
Accurate Move - Select an object, advanced splines. See “Advanced
then click this button to move it with Splines” on page 170.
more accuracy. See “Accurate Align With Wall Above - Align the
Move” on page 179. selected wall with the one above it.
See “Aligning Walls Between
Floors” on page 236.
1140
Align With Wall Below - Align the Chamfer Two Lines - Select an
selected wall with the one below it. edge, click this button, and select a
See “Aligning Walls Between different edge to create a straight
Floors” on page 236. bevel of specified size between
Allowed Angles - Opens the Place them. Double-click to set the
at Allowed Angles dialog. See chamfer size. See “Reshaping
“Place at Allowed Angles Dialog” Objects” on page 184.
on page 211. Change Line/Arc - Turn a line into
Auto Stairwell - Select a staircase an arc or an arc into a line. See
and click this button to create a “Change Line/Arc” on page 186.
stairwell. See “Creating a Stairwell Change Opening/Hinge Side -
Automatically” on page 448. Change the side of a selected door
Automatically Generate that the hinges are on. See
Sidewalks - Automatically generate “Changing Door Swings” on page
sidewalks along a selected road 297.
object. See “Auto Generate Change Swing Side - Change the
Sidewalks” on page 639. direction that a selected door
Break Line - Add a partial or swings. See “Changing Door
complete break to the edge of a Swings” on page 297.
CAD-based object. See “Break Components - Open an object’s
Line” on page 185. Components dialog. See
Build Advanced Deck Framing - “Components Dialog” on page
Build framing and planking for the 1062.
selected deck. See “Decks” on page Connect Walls - Select a wall then
275. click this button to form an
Calculate From Room - Generate a intersection with a nearby wall. See
materials list of the contents of the “Connect Walls” on page 230.
selected room. See “Calculate From Convert Spline to Polyline -
Room” on page 1049. Change the spline into a polyline
Calculate Materials List - Generate made up of straight lines. See
a materials list of the contents of the “Convert Spline to Polyline” on
selected Materials Polyline. See page 208.
“Materials Polyline” on page 1057. Convert to Polyline Road/
Center Object - Center an object Sidewalk - Convert a selected road
along a wall or relative to a cabinet or sidewalk into a road polyline or a
fixture. See “Center Object” on page sidewalk polyline. See “Convert to
182. Polyline Object” on page 640.
1141
Convert to Rich Text - Convert a Edit Dimension Ends - Display

selected simple Text object into only move and end edit handles of
Text. See “The Text Tools” on page the selected dimension line. See
841. “Editing Dimension Lines” on page
Convert to Solid - Convert the 827.
selected polyline solid to a Edit Extensions - Display only the
Primitive. See “Convert to Solid” on edit handles of the selected
page 208. dimension line’s extension lines. See
Convert to Spline - Convert a “Editing Extension Lines” on page
polyline into a spline. See “Convert 829.
Spline to Polyline” on page 208. Edit Text in Place - Edit the
Convert Polyline - Convert a selected text without opening its
selected polyline to a special specification dialog. See “Edit Text
polyline. See “Convert Polyline” on in Place” on page 855.
page 205. Expand Room Polyline - Select a
Copy/Paste - Click or press Ctrl + room and click this button to enlarge
Alt + C to make a single copy of the the current room selection to include
selected object(s) and enable Paste all rooms that are continuous and
mode. See “Copying and Pasting only separated by invisible walls or
Objects” on page 191. railings. See “Room Polylines” on
page 282.
Delete - Delete the selected
object(s). See “Deleting Objects” on Explode Architectural Block -
page 196. Explode the selected architectural
block into its individual parts. See
Delete Gable Over Opening -
“Explode Architectural Block” on
Select a window or door with a
page 679.
gable above it and click this button
to delete the gable when roofs are Explode CAD Block - Explode a
built. See “Gable Over Door/ selected CAD block into its
Window” on page 423. individual parts. See “CAD Blocks”
on page 912.
Display on Floor Below - Move the
display of a selected roof plane to Explode Distributed Object -
the floor below. See “Display on Explode a selected distribution path
Floor Above/Below” on page 387. or region into its individual parts.
See “Explode Distributed Objects”
Display on Floor Above - Move the
on page 666.
display of a selected roof plane to
the floor above. See “Display on Explode Mulled Unit - Explode a
Floor Above/Below” on page 387. selected mulled unit into its
individual parts. See “Editing
Mulled Units” on page 323.
1142
Explode Distributed Object - Generate Custom Countertop -

Explode a selected distributed object Create a custom countertop for the
into its individual objects. See selected base cabinet. See “Custom
“Distributed Objects” on page 666. Countertops” on page 549.
Explode Shape - Explode a selected Intersection - Create a new polyline
Solid object into individual faces. around the area in common between
See “Explode Shape” on page 652. two polylines. See “Union,
Explode Dormer - Explode a Intersection, and Subtract” on page
selected dormer into its component 202.
parts. See “Exploding Dormers” on Join Roof Planes - Join two roof
page 420. planes. Also activated by pressing 2
Extend Objects - Click this button, on the keyboard. See “Join Roof
then select CAD object(s) to Planes” on page 388.
lengthen them until the reach the Load Muntins - Turn a CAD block
selected object. See “Extend drawn over window or door glass
Objects” on page 199. into a custom muntin design. See
Fence Select - Click this button to “Custom Muntins” on page 327.
select CAD objects intersected by Load Values To Make Same -
the currently selected object. See Apply values assigned to a group of
“Using a Fence” on page 147. objects to new objects. See “Load to
Fillet Two Lines - Select an edge, Make Same Value” on page 209.
click this button, and select a Lock Center - Lock the center of
different edge to create a rounded the selected arc. See “Using Lock
fillet of specified size between them. Center” on page 155.
Double-click to set the fillet radius. Lock Control Handle Angle -
See “Reshaping Objects” on page Locksor unlock the control handles
184. for editing advanced splines. See
Flare/Curve Stair - Flare the sides “Lock Control Handle Angle” on
of the selected staircase. See “Flared page 171.
Stairs and Curved Treads” on page Main Edit Mode - Return to the
440. main edit toolbar from the currently
Follow Hyperlink - Launch your active secondary toolbar. See
Internet browser to the web page “Sticky Mode” on page 193.
that the selected Text is linked to. Make Arc Tangent - Make an arc
See “Link Tab” on page 854. tangent to the attached lines/arcs.
Gable Over Door/Window - Place See “Using Make Arc Tangent” on
a gable over a door or window. See page 182.
“Placing a Gable Over a Window”
on page 320.
1143
Make Architectural Block - Move to Front of Group - Click to

Available when one or more objects move the selected item in front of
is Shift + selected. Create a single other CAD objects. See “Move to
architectural block out of the Front of Group” on page 176.
selected objects. See “Creating Multiple Copy - Click this button,
Architectural Blocks” on page 677. then drag to create copies at
Make CAD Block - Available when specified intervals. See “Multiple
one or more CAD objects is Shift + Copy” on page 194.
selected. Create a single unit, or Multiple Copy Interval - Specify
block out of the selected objects. See intervals for Multiple Copy tool. See
“CAD Blocks” on page 912. “Multiple Copy” on page 194.
Make Mulled Unit - Mull selected Open Object - Open the selected
windows/doors into a single unit. object’s specification dialog. See
Available when more than one door/ “Specification Dialogs” on page 33.
window is selected. See “Make
Open Symbol - Open the Symbol
Mulled Unit” on page 321.
Specification dialog for the selected
Make Parallel - Align a selected object(s). See “Symbol
line or polyline edge with another Specification Dialog” on page 974.
object, such as a wall or line. See
Open View - Open a saved, inactive
“Using Make Parallel/
3D view or layout view. See
“Activating Saved Views” on page
Make Room Molding Polyline - 767.
Create a room molding polyline the
Open Wall Detail - Open a framing
same shape as the selected room.
detail for the selected wall. Framing
See “Room Molding Polylines” on
must be built. See “In Wall Detail
page 282.
Make Room Polyline - Create a
Paste Hold Position - Paste a copy
CAD polyline the same shape as the
of the selection at the same
selected room. See “Room
coordinates as the original but on
Polylines” on page 282.
another floor. See “Paste Hold
Move to be Coplanar - Move a Position” on page 193.
selected roof plane to be coplanar
Point-to-Point Move - Move the
with the next selected roof plane.
selection from start point to the end
See “Move to be Coplanar” on page
point of the move. See “Point to
390.
Point Move” on page 179.
Move to Framing Reference -
Record Walkthrough Along Path -
Position selected framing members
Record a walkthrough that follows
in relation to the framing reference.
the path of the selected CAD object.
See “Framing Reference Markers”
See “Walkthroughs” on page 948.
on page 480.
1144
Reflect About Object - Reflect Select Next Object - When many

selected objects about another objects are located in a small area,
object. See “To use Reflect About select one of them and click this edit
Object” on page 190. button until the desired object is
Remove Advanced Deck Framing selected. See “Select Next Object”
Click to turn a framed deck into a on page 146.
solid deck. See “Decks” on page Select Same Type - Open the Select
275. Similar Objects dialog. See “Select
Remove Manufacturer Lock - Same Type” on page 208.
Remove manufacturer data Send Camera’s View to Layout -
associated with the selected library In floor plan view, send the selected
symbol. See “Remove Manufacturer cross section/elevation camera’s
Lock” on page 695. view to layout. See “Sending Views
Replace From Library - Replace to Layout” on page 1018.
the selected object with another Spell Check - Check the spelling in
from the Library. See “Replace the select text object(s). See “Spell
From Library” on page 693. Check” on page 859.
Resize Picture - Resize a selected Starter Tread - Round one of the
bitmap. See “Editing Images” on bottom two treads of a staircase.
page 935. Must select the staircase at one of
Reverse Layers - Reverse the layers the two bottom treads. See “Starter
of the selected wall. See “Drawing Treads” on page 443.
Walls” on page 228. Sticky Mode - Available after some
Reverse Direction - Select a line, edit buttons are is clicked. Click to
arrow, or polyline, then click this keep the selected edit mode active
button to reverse the direction. See and make multiple edit operations.
“Reverse Direction” on page 191. See “Sticky Mode” on page 193.
Revision Cloud(s) Around Objects Straighten Spline Segment -
- Create Revision Clouds around Straighten a segment of an advanced
selected objects. See “Revision spline between two points. See
Clouds” on page 906. “Straighten Spline Segment” on
page 170.
Same Wall Type - Temporarily
enable Same Wall Type edit handles. Subtract - Subtract one polyline
See “Same Wall Type Edit Handles” from another to create a new
on page 232. polyline. See “Union, Intersection,
and Subtract” on page 202.
Select Fence - Click this button,
then click on a line or polyline to
specify it as a fence. See “Selecting
1145
Other Buttons
Transform/Replicate Object -
Click to open the Transform/
Replicate Object dialog. See
“Transform/Replicate Object
Trim Objects - Select cutting
edge(s), click this button, then select
CAD objects to trim back to cutting
edge. See “Trim Objects” on page
198.
Union - Create a new polyline using
the entire area of overlapping
polylines. See “Union, Intersection,
and Subtract” on page 202.
Unload Muntins - Explodes
muntins into CAD lines and objects
for editing. See “Custom Muntins”
on page 327.
Other Buttons
These buttons are not in the menus or the General Wall Defaults - Opens the
default toolbars but can be added to toolbars. General Wall Defaults dialog. See
See “Adding Toolbar Buttons” on page 108. “General Wall Defaults” on page
215.
CAD Default Settings - Open the Image Tools - Access the Image
CAD Defaults dialog. See “CAD child tools. See “Images” on page
Defaults and Preferences” on page 933.
875.
Layout Page Tools - Access the
Empty Space - Add an empty space Layout Page tools. See “The Layout
to your toolbar, which may be Tools” on page 1016.
helpful when customizing toolbars.
Layer Set Defaults - Open the
See “Toolbar Customization Dialog”
Layer Set Defaults dialog. See
on page 107.
“Layer Set Defaults Dialog” on page
Floor Defaults - Open the Floor 129.
Defaults dialog. See “Floor Defaults
1146
Selection Modes - View the

marquee Selection Mode child
tools. These tools can also be added
to the toolbars individually. See
“Marquee Select” on page 146.
Snap Tools - View the Snap
Setting child tools. These tools can
also be added to the toolbars
individually. See “Snap Behaviors”
on page 133.
Switch Default & CAD Toolbars -
Toggle between the Default and
CAD toolbar configurations. See
“Toolbar Configurations” on page
112.
1147
Index
Numerics Export ............................................... 972
Import ............................................... 967
3D
Backdrops ......................................... 748
Box ................................................... 649
Box Specification Dialog ..................... 653
A
Data, Import ....................................... 966 Absolute Location
Face .................................................. 649 New line end ..................................... 894
Menu ............................................... 1115 New point ......................................... 880
Molding Polyline ................................. 536 Active Layer Set Control ................. 121
Molding Polyline Specification Dialog .. 541 Adding
Origin ................................................ 977 to the Library ..................................... 700
Remove 3D ........................................ 758
Remove 3D views .............................. 758 Added Lights ..................................... 776
Settings Dialog .................................. 744 Adding
Surface, Delete .................................. 757 Extension Lines ................................. 829
Tools ................................................. 765 Floor Between Existing Floors ............ 356
3D Box Images to Library .............................. 934
Specification Dialog ........................... 653 Layout Lines ................................... 1028
Molding Profile .................................. 533
3D Framing View ............................... 752 New Layout Lines ............................ 1028
3D Home Architect files..................... 43 New Symbol ...................................... 700
3D Molding Polyline Road Objects to the Library ............... 640
Specification Dialog ........................... 541 Symbol ............................................. 700
3D Roof Designer .............................. 387 Toolbar Buttons ................................. 108
3D View Adjust
Line Weights .................................... 1000 Image Properties ............................... 803
Lights ............................................... 778
3D Views ............................................. 694
Material Definition ............................. 712
Display .............................................. 756
Wall Angle .......................................... 88
Floor Overview ................................... 752
Framing Overview .............................. 752 Adjust Lights Dialog ........................ 779
Full Overview ..................................... 751 Advanced
Generation, Speed up ........................ 797 Deck Framing .................................... 276
Overviews ......................................... 750 Layer Mapping .................................. 958
Panels ............................................... 746 Render Tab ....................................... 725
Save ................................................. 767 Splines ............................................. 170
3D Wall Designer ............................... 228 Aerial View ........................................ 736
3DS Files Aerial View Layer Set ....................... 737
1148
Alcove Roofs ............................. 413 – 414 Architectural Preferences.................. 88

Align Archive Files ....................................... 48
Curved Stairs Between Floors ............ 183 Manage Auto Archives ......................... 49
Curved Walls Between Floors ............ 237 Arcs
Pony Walls Between Floors ............... 237 About center ...................................... 893
Roof Edges ....................................... 388 Aligning Centers ................................ 183
Stem Walls and Footings ................... 368 Creation Modes ................................. 892
Walls ................................................ 235 Draw using center and radius ............. 893
Allowed Lock Center ....................................... 155
Angles Dialog .................................... 211 Make Arc Tangent ............................. 182
Wall Angles ....................................... 229 Show Arc Centers .............................. 155
Alpha Channel................................... 723 Start and End Points ............................ 93
Tangent, make .................................. 237
Alphabets
International ...................................... 840 Area
Unicode ............................................ 840 Living Area calculation ....................... 272
of a Polyline ...................................... 901
Ambient Light
of Rooms .......................................... 274
and Materials .................................... 726
Daytime ............................................ 775 Arrange
Nighttime .......................................... 775 All ..................................................... 736
Icons ................................................. 736
Angle Snaps ...................................... 135
Arrow
Angled Front Cabinets ..................... 561
Auto Positioning ................................ 861
Angles Tab ................................................... 891
Entered as bearings .......................... 887
Arrows
Sun Angle ......................................... 888
Special use ....................................... 862
Angular Dimensions.......... 189 , 824 , 832 Text Line With ................................... 861
Appearance Preferences ................... 71 Artwork
Appliances Creating textures ............................... 715
Built into cabinets .............................. 550 Attenuatation ..................................... 525
Outlets, where placed ........................ 522
Attic
Arc Floor ................................................. 359
Creation Modes ................................. 892 Rooms .............................................. 272
Specification Dialog ........................... 895 Trusses ............................................. 496
Tab ................................................... 896 Walls ........................................ 238 , 251
Tools ................................................ 894
Auto
with Arrow ......................................... 895
Archive ......................................... 48 , 80
Arch Tab ............................................ 345 Detail ................................................ 755
Architectural Block Dormers, Edit .................................... 419
Specification Dialog ........................... 680 Floating Dormer ................................. 418
Architectural Blocks ........................ 677 Place Outlets ............................. 273 , 519
Components ...................................... 680 Rebuild Floors & Ceilings ................... 358
Displaying ......................................... 678 Rebuild Roofs .................................... 401
Edit Sub-Objects ............................... 679 Roof Returns ..................................... 423
Explode ............................................ 679 Save Files ..................................... 49 , 79
Sub-objects ....................................... 679 Stairwell ............................................ 448
1149
Auto Dormer....................................... 418 Blocked Doors and Windows .......... 302

Autodetail ........................................... 755 Blocking
Automatic Joist ................................................. 466
Exterior Dimensions ........................... 825 Roof ................................................. 465
Framing ............................................. 462 Bonus Library Catalogs ................... 701
Roof Styles ........................................ 396 Borders (Layout)............................. 1021
Roofs ................................................ 376
Bounding Box ................................... 989
Roofs vs. Manual Roofs ...................... 375
Bow
Front Cabinets .................................. 561
Window Specification ........................ 351
B Windows ........................................... 318
Box
Backclipped Cross Section.............. 753
Tools ................................................ 903
Backdrops .......................................... 773 Windows ........................................... 318
3D ..................................................... 748
Break
Definition ........................................... 773
Line .................................................. 185
in Rendering Techniques .................... 749
Line, complete ................................... 185
Panoramic ......................................... 773
Line, partial ....................................... 185
Background Color .............................. 74 Wall .......................................... 221 , 226
Balusters ............................................ 258 Build
Definition ........................................... 429 Foundation ................................ 357 , 366
Base Cabinets.................................... 548 Framing Dialog .................................. 467
Baseline (Roof) .................................. 386 House ............................................... 927
Menu .............................................. 1100
Baseline (Roofs) ................................ 393
New Floor ......................................... 355
Baseline Dimensions ........................ 825 Roof Dialog ....................................... 377
Baseline Polylines (Roofs)............... 401 Terrain .............................................. 594
Editing ............................................... 402 Build Roof Dialog ............................. 377
Bay Window Bumping/Pushing ............................. 178
see also Windows
Buttons
Bay Windows ..................................... 318 Edit Toolbar .................................... 1141
Bay/Box Window
Specification Dialog ........................... 349
Beams
Floor/Ceiling ...................................... 467
C
Roof .................................................. 466 Cabinet
Bearing Line............................... 467 , 482 Defaults ............................................ 547
Bearings ............................................. 887 Designer ........................................... 546
Modules Library ................................ 550
Behaviors Panel ................................. 93
Shelf Specification Dialog .................. 575
Birdsmouth Specification Dialog ........................... 562
Depth ................................................ 391 Tools ................................................ 548
Blend Colors with Materials............. 708 Cabinets
Blind Cabinets ................................... 562 Angled front .............................. 559 , 563
1150
Backsplash ....................................... 564 Stile .................................................. 568

Base ................................................. 548 Toe kick ............................................ 565
Bevel ................................................ 568 Wall .................................................. 549
Blind ................................................. 562 CAD....................................................... 64
Built-in appliances ............................. 550 Angle Snaps ...................................... 135
Corner .............................................. 559 Angles in degrees/ bearings ............... 876
Countertop ........................................ 564 Block .............................................. 1144
Countertop, custom ................... 549 , 553 Box ................................................... 903
Countertops ...................................... 553 Box, Framing ..................................... 904
Delete face items .............................. 568 Circle about center ............................ 898
Diagonal door ................................... 568 Circle Tools ....................................... 897
Dimension to corners/sides ................ 818 Convert to Terrain .............................. 621
Door, glass ....................................... 568 Cross box .......................................... 904
Door, on back ................................... 568 Current Layer .................................... 910
Door/drawer style .............................. 558 Current Point ..................................... 882
End cabinets ..................................... 559 Delete Current Point .......................... 882
Exposed End ..................................... 560 Detail from View ................................ 767
Fillers ............................................... 551 Dimensions, locate settings ................ 818
Fillers, automatic ............................... 548 Drawing Tools ................................... 878
Flat sides .......................................... 568 Ellipses ............................................. 898
Front Indicators ................................. 554 Extend Object(s) ................................ 199
Front Tab .......................................... 565 Fillet ................................................. 186
Full Height ........................................ 549 Framing ............................................ 904
Full height ......................................... 549 Layout ............................................. 1021
General Defaults ............................... 547 Line Length Format ............................ 876
Glass doors ...................................... 568 Lines ................................................. 884
Island ............................................... 562 Menu .............................................. 1123
Labels .............................................. 555 Move to Front of Group ...................... 176
Lazy Susan ....................................... 568 Ovals ................................................ 898
Locating with dimensions ................... 816 Point, current ..................................... 894
Minimum Width ................................. 548 Points, moving ................................... 883
Module Lines .................................... 554 Polylines ........................................... 900
Module lines, partial .......................... 548 Preferences ......................................... 89
Moving, with Wall .............................. 558 Rectangular Polyline Tool .................. 903
Normal ...................................... 559 , 563 Resize ........................................ 93 , 140
Opening Indicators ............................ 554 Rotate around ..................................... 94
Outlet placement ............................... 522 Rotate items ........................................ 93
Panels .............................................. 569 Rotate Jump ........................................ 94
Partition ............................................ 549 Snap Properties ................................... 95
Peninsula radius ........................ 559 , 563 Temporary Points .............................. 882
Pilasters ................................... 571 – 572 to Walls ..................................... 205 , 240
Radius end ............................... 559 , 563 Trim Object(s) ................................... 198
Resize Increment .............................. 548
CAD Block
Reverse Appliance ............................ 568
Insert ................................................ 914
Separation ........................................ 569
Management ..................................... 913
Shaped ............................................. 559
Shelves ............................................ 575
Special shapes .......................... 559 , 563 CAD Blocks........................................ 912
1151
Add to library ..................................... 913 Orbit Tools ........................................ 761

Custom libraries ................................. 913 Remove Wall within ................... 744 , 769
Explode ............................................. 912 Restrict to room ................................. 745
Make CAD Block ................................ 912 Rotate Increments ............................. 743
CAD Box Specification Dialog ........................... 768
Specification Dialog ........................... 905 Tilt Angle .......................................... 743
Tilt Tools ........................................... 761
CAD Defaults
Tools ................................................ 761
CAD detail windows ........................... 875
Cross section/elevation views ............. 875 Cascade Views .................................. 734
Floor plan view .................................. 875 Casing
CAD Detail from View ....................... 918 Door ................................................. 307
Ignore for opening resize ..................... 68
CAD Details ........................................ 917
Tab ................................................... 336
Management Dialog ........................... 917
Sent to Layout ................................. 1022 Cathedral Ceilings ............................ 280
Truss Detail ............................... 499 , 918 Ceiling
CAD Menu......................................... 1123 Framing ............................................ 468
Heights ............................................. 268
CAD Objects
Materials ........................................... 268
Converting ......................................... 205
Plane ........................................ 377 , 408
Displaying .......................................... 909
Truss ................................................ 495
Calculate
Ceiling Plane
From All Floors ................................ 1049
From Room ...................................... 1049
Loan .................................................. 929 Ceilings .............................................. 330
Materials on soffits ............................. 661 Automatic ......................................... 468
Basement ......................................... 364
Callout
Cathedral .......................................... 280
Defaults ............................................. 839
Coffered ........................................... 281
Dropped ............................................ 279
Callouts .............................................. 863 False ................................................ 279
Height ............................................... 602 Hole in Platform ................................ 358
Pointers and Arrows ........................... 863 Lowered ............................................ 279
Shape ............................................... 864 Over this room .................................. 286
Size ................................................... 864 Special ............................................. 279
Camera Stepped Trusses ............................... 497
Activating .......................................... 767 Tray .................................................. 280
Change Settings ................................ 768 Vaulted ............................................. 280
Clip Surfaces Within ........................... 744 Center
Clip Surfaces within ................... 770 – 771 Doors ............................................... 300
Create Views ..................................... 750 Object edit tool .................................. 182
Defaults ....................................... 64 , 742 Sheet ................................................ 997
Degrees each rotate ........................... 770 Snapping to ........................................ 95
Field of View .............................. 743 , 763
Centerline Dimensions .................... 825
Height above floor ...................... 743 , 770
Move Increments ............................... 743 Change
Move Tools ........................................ 760 Door Swings ..................................... 297
Move Up/Down One Floor ................... 759 Floor/Reference ................................ 359
Layout Line Length .......................... 1028
1152
Line to arc ......................................... 433 with other programs ............................. 43

Roof Pitch or Height Dialog ................ 390 Components ...................................... 698
Scale Dialog ................................... 1025 Dialog ............................................. 1062
View Panel Factors ........................... 799
Compound Raked Walls ................... 249
Wall Types for Pony Walls ................. 223
Concentric Resizing ......................... 139
Check
Plots ......................................... 993 , 998 Cone ................................................... 649
Spelling Dialog .................................. 859 Specification Dialog ........................... 657
Checklist, IRC ................................... 929 Configurations Tab ........................... 111
Chief Architect Connect
Full vs Interiors vs Lite ......................... 26 Electrical ........................................... 519
Serial number ..................................... 40 Walls ................................................ 229
Version number ................................... 40 Contextual Menus ..................... 71 , 1141
Child Buttons .................................... 108 In Render views ................................. 759
Chimneys ........................................... 675 Contours Tab ..................................... 598
Circle Convert
Specification Dialog ........................... 898 Arc/Circle to Polyline ......................... 187
CAD Lines to Terrain Data ................. 621
Circle Tools ....................................... 897
CAD Objects ..................................... 205
Circles Polyline ............................................. 205
Aligning Centers ................................ 183 Polyline Dialog .................................. 206
Circle about center ............................ 898 Polyline Solid to Solid ........................ 659
Draw using center and radius ............. 898 Polyline to Spline ............................... 208
Ovals ................................................ 898 Room Molding ................................... 537
Clear the Terrain ............................... 582 Special Polylines into Polylines .......... 207
Click Stairs ........................................ 429 Spline to Polyline ............................... 208
Textures to Materials ......................... 714
Client Information............................. 926
To Polyline Object ............................. 640
Dialog ............................................... 872
to Solid ............................................. 208
Close
Convert to Symbol ............................ 987
Plans and Views .................................. 60
Program .............................................. 60 Coordinates ....................................... 143
Views ............................................... 738 Copy
Color Floors ............................................... 357
Chooser ............................................ 727 Folders and Library Objects ............... 698
Displaying images & pictures ............... 73 Layers ............................................... 119
Off/On ...................................... 175 , 757 Library List ........................................ 698
Multiple Copy .................................... 194
Color Chooser
Region as Picture .............................. 946
Dialog ............................................... 727
Trusses ............................................. 499
Eyedropper ....................................... 728
Views .............................................. 1024
Color Palette ..................................... 113
Copy/Paste
Columns Main Edit Mode ................................. 193
Materials List settings .......................... 98 Sticky Mode ...................................... 193
Tab, Materials List Display Options .. 1053
Corner
Tabs ................................................. 853
Boards .............................................. 529
Compatibility
1153
Windows ............................................ 319 Sent to Layout ................................. 1023

Corner Board Culs-de-sac ....................................... 637
Specification Dialog ........................... 530 Curbs.................................................. 641
Countertops Current
Custom .............................................. 553 CAD Layer ........................................ 910
Holes in ............................................. 549 Floor ................................................. 358
Countertops, Edit Custom ............... 558 Floor, Delete ..................................... 358
Create Layout Page .................................... 1020
Bay, Box and Bow Windows Manually . 319 Current Point..................................... 882
Bench Seat ........................................ 330 Curved
CAD Blocks library ............................. 913 Deck Edge ........................................ 221
CAD Details ....................................... 917 Deck Railing ...................................... 221
Camera Views ................................... 750 Stairs ................................................ 429
Cross Section/Elevation Views ............ 752 Walls, Draw ...................................... 228
Doors ................................................ 295
Custom
Images, new ...................................... 934
Counter Tops .................................... 549
Layers ............................................... 119
Counter Tops, Editing ........................ 558
Layout Borders ................................ 1021
Counterholes .................................... 549
Line Styles ......................................... 888
Countertops ...................................... 553
Materials ........................................... 712
Materials for Raytracing ..................... 804 Custom Countertop
Muntins ............................................. 327 Specification Dialog ........................... 578
New CAD Detail Dialog ...................... 918 Customize
New Electrical Symbol ........................ 979 Sheet Sizes Dialog .......................... 1002
New Fixture ....................................... 979 Toolbars ..................................... 32 , 107
New plan ............................................ 45 Customize Hotkeys Dialog .............. 114
Objects in 3D Views ........................... 765
Cylinder ............................................. 649
Plan Database File .............................. 56
Plan Materials Library ........................ 714 Cylinder Specification Dialog ......... 656
Plant Image ....................................... 622
Polyline Solids ................................... 658
Raked Walls ...................................... 248
Raytrace View ................................... 800
D
Rooms Below Staircases .................... 449 Deck
Stairwell ............................................ 448 Designer ...........................................
227
Template Plan .............................. 52 – 53 Edges ...............................................
221
Windows .................................... 301 , 320 Railing ..............................................
221
Wiring Schematics ............................. 519 Railing Defaults ................................. 219
Cross Hair ........................................... 92 Decks ......................................... 221 , 275
Cross Section Lines.......................... 865 Advanced Deck Framing .................... 276
Cross Section Slider ......................... 764 Framing .................................... 276 , 288
Planking ................................... 277 , 288
Cross Section/Elevation Camera
Specification Dialog ........................... 770 Default
Wall Bottom Height ............................ 251
Cross Section/Elevations ................. 749 Wall Top Height ................................ 251
Create ............................................... 752
Detailing ............................................ 755 Default Lights.................................... 775
1154
Default Sun Light Foundation ........................................ 369

Specification Dialog ........................... 782 Framing ............................................ 488
Defaults.............................................. 635 Gable Over Opening .......................... 423
Cabinet ............................................. 547 Layers ............................................... 119
Callout ................................................ 66 Objects ............................................. 197
Camera ....................................... 64 , 742 Objects, warning before ....................... 68
DeckRailing ...................................... 219 Roof Planes .............................. 377 , 392
Defined ............................................... 63 Temporary Points .............................. 882
Dimension ................................... 64 , 809 Tools from Toolbars ........................... 109
Door ........................................... 64 , 293 Wall Hatching .................................... 226
Dormer ....................................... 64 , 375 Deleting
Driveway ............................................. 65 From Import/Export Libraries .............. 704
Dynamic ............................................. 67 Designer Information ....................... 925
Electrical ........................................... 516 Dialog ............................................... 871
Fencing ...................................... 66 , 219
Details
Floor ................................................. 353
CAD .................................................. 917
Foundation ........................................ 363
Cross section/elevations .................... 755
Framing .................................... 461 , 467
Truss ................................................ 499
General Plan ....................................... 68
Layer Set .......................................... 129 Diamond style
Layout ............................................ 1015 see Lites
Marker ................................................ 66 Diffuse ................................................ 726
Material ............................................ 726 Dimension
Object Labels .................................. 1036 Defaults ...................................... 64 , 810
Railing .............................................. 219 Tab ................................................... 833
Reset ............................................ 67 , 69 Tools ................................................ 823
Road and Sidewalk ............................ 635 Dimension Defaults .......................... 809
Roofs ................................................ 375 CAD detail views ............................... 810
Room ................................................ 267 Cross section/elevation views ............. 810
Room Material ................................... 267 Dialog ............................................... 810
Schedule ........................................ 1036 Floor plan view .................................. 810
Settings .............................................. 63
Sidewalk ........................................... 635 Dimension Line
Text .................................................... 66 Specification Dialog ........................... 833
Wall .................................................. 216 Dimensions ........................................ 962
Window ............................................. 317 Angular ............................. 189 , 824 , 832
Define Cabinets ........................................... 816
Light Types ....................................... 779 Centerline ......................................... 825
Line Weight ....................................... 999 Delete extension line ......................... 830
Material Dialog .................................. 719 Display size ....................................... 811
Editing .............................................. 827
Delete ................................................. 699 To electrical items ............................. 818
3D Surface ........................................ 757 End to end ........................................ 824
Built-in Fixtures and Appliances ......... 695 Extension Lines ................................. 829
Current Floor ..................................... 358 Exterior ............................................. 825
Current Point ..................................... 882 Fireplace, suppress dimension ........... 673
Extension Lines ................................. 830 Font .................................................. 820
Floors ............................................... 358 Interior .............................................. 824
1155
Interior, minimum area ....................... 812 Display Options

Line separation .................................. 811 Floor Plan View Display ..................... 117
Locate electrical ................................. 521 Distributed Object Tab..................... 667
Locate Objects ................................... 816
Distributed Objects .......................... 666
Locate opening automatically .............. 812
Locate overall .................................... 812 Distribution Path
Locating railings ................................. 251 Specification Dialog ........................... 666
Minimum Interior Area ........................ 812 Distribution Region
Move Extension Lines ........................ 830 Specification Dialog ........................... 666
Move Objects Using ........................... 831 Divided Lites see Lites
Moving Labels ................................... 828
Door
Number Height ........................... 811 , 833
Defaults ...................................... 64 , 293
Offset between lines ........................... 812
Overall .............................................. 812
Swing Angle ...................................... 304
Point to point ..................................... 824
Tools ................................................ 293
Printing ............................................ 1002
Rounding Method ............................... 811 Doors
Separation ......................................... 812 6-panel see Doors, Library
Temporary ......................................... 826 Arched .............................................. 311
Wall Layers ........................................ 243 Bifold Doors .............................. 294 , 299
Wall openings .................................... 816 Blocked ............................................ 302
Wall surfaces ..................................... 816 Casing .............................................. 307
Center .............................................. 300
Display
Change Opening/Hinge Side .............. 298
3D Views ........................................... 756
Change Swing Side ........................... 298
Arc Centers and Ends ................ 228 , 876
Creating custom doors ....................... 295
CAD Objects ...................................... 909
Doorways .......................................... 294
Center of curved wall ......................... 228
Double-swing .................................... 306
Drawing Groups ................................. 176
Frame ............................................... 310
Drawing Sheet ................................... 996
Framing ............................................ 473
Electrical ........................................... 520
Gables Over ...................................... 423
Foundations ....................................... 367
Garage ............................................. 294
Images .............................................. 935
Garage opening direction ................... 300
Layout Views ................................... 1025
Garage, panels ................................. 306
Library Objects .................................. 694
Glass, muntis .................................... 310
Line Angles ......................................... 90
Handles ............................................ 313
Line Length ......................................... 90
Hardware .......................................... 313
Molding Polylines ............................... 537
Hinged Doors ............................ 294 , 297
Objects .............................................. 117
Hinges .............................................. 313
Options, Layout ................................ 1026
Labels .............................................. 296
Pointer CAD Coordinates .................... 72
Library ............................... 294 – 295 , 304
Pony Walls in Floor Plan View ............ 231
Lites ................................................. 310
Road Objects ..................................... 639
Locks ................................................ 313
Roof Planes ....................................... 387
Muntin Width ..................................... 310
Room labels ...................................... 274
Opening Indicators ............................ 296
Temporary Dimensions ....................... 826
Openings in railings ........................... 301
Terrain .............................................. 593
Plinth Blocks ..................................... 307
Walls, Railings, and Fences ................ 230
Pocket Doors ............................ 294 , 299
1156
Railing openings ................................ 224 Driveways .......................................... 638

Recessed .................................. 301 , 306 Drop Hip ............................................. 507
Sliding Doors .................................... 298
Drop Hip Truss see Trusses
Style ................................................. 304
Swing, change .................................. 297 DXF/DWG
Swing, changing for bifold .................. 299 Advanced Layer Mapping ................... 958
Swing, changing for pocket ................ 299 DXF Code ......................................... 972
Threshold lines .................................. 295 DXF vs. DWG .................................... 953
Transoms .......................................... 301 Elevation Data, Import ....................... 620
Type ................................................. 304 Export 2D .......................................... 962
Wrapped Openings ............................ 301 Export 3D .......................................... 971
Files ................................................. 612
Doorways
Files, Import 2D ................................. 954
Adding a Door ................................... 295
Import ............................................... 967
with Railing ....................................... 302
Layer mapping ................................... 957
Dormer Layers, exporting ............................... 971
Defaults ...................................... 64 , 375 Line Type .......................................... 965
Dynamic
Dormers ............................................. 417 Defaults ........................................ 35 , 67
Auto Dormer ..................................... 418 Print Preview ..................................... 996
Auto Floating ..................................... 418 Views .............................................. 1022
Explode ............................................ 420
Framing ............................................ 477
Manually drawn ................................. 419
Over Windows and Doors, Gable ........ 423 E
Windows in ....................................... 420
Earth Data Tab .................................. 783
Double
Buffer Drawing .................................... 73 Eaves
Buffered Printing ............................. 1008 Boxed ............................................... 382
Truss see Trusses Fascia ............................................... 477
Walls ................................................ 239 Framing ............................................ 477
Plumb Cut ......................................... 382
Draw
Square cut ........................................ 382
Arc About Center ............................... 893
Circle About Center ........................... 898 Edge Lines ......................................... 976
Curved Railing .................................. 228 Edge Lines, Automatic ..................... 976
Curved wall ....................................... 228 Edit
Lines ................................................ 884 Auto Dormers .................................... 419
Roof Planes ...................................... 385 Bay Box, and Bow Windows ............... 328
Walls ................................................ 228 Behaviors .......................................... 137
Drawing Groups ................................ 176 Behaviors, Default ............................. 137
Drawing Sheet Cabinet Door Style ............................ 558
Center .............................................. 997 Camera in floor plan view ................... 764
Select ............................................... 996 Custom Countertops .......................... 558
Show ................................................ 996 Extension Lines ......................... 829 – 830
Files in Home Designer ........................ 69
Driveway
Handle Size ......................................... 92
Defaults .............................................. 65
Handle Tolerance ................................ 93
1157
Layout Lines .................................... 1028 Layer to Material Mapping .................. 979

Layout Lines Dialog .......................... 1028 Library .............................................. 520
Libraries ............................................ 697 Lights ............................................... 518
Library Objects .................................. 694 Outlets .............................................. 518
Materials ........................................... 711 Outlets, automatic ............................. 519
Materials Lists ................................. 1056 Switches ........................................... 519
Menu ............................................... 1096 Tools ................................................ 518
Object Parts ....................................... 132 Wiring ............................................... 519
Panel .................................................. 92 Electrical Service
Paper Size Dialog ............................ 1003 Specification Dialog ........................... 522
Piers and Pads .................................. 371
Elevation
Polyline Parts .................................... 145
Data ................................................. 582
Primitives .......................................... 650
Regions ............................................ 585
Roof Baseline Polylines ...................... 402
Splines ............................................. 585
Roof Planes ....................................... 387
Tab ................................................... 603
Room Labels ..................................... 274
Tools, Terrrain .................................. 582
Rooms ............................................... 277
Terrain .............................................. 595 Elevation Data ................................... 583
Text in Place ...................................... 855 Import DXF/DWG .............................. 620
Toolbar ............................................... 32 Elevation Line
Toolbar Buttons ............................... 1141 Specification Dialog ........................... 603
Truss Envelope .................................. 499 Elevation Point
Trusses ............................................. 498 Specification Dialog ........................... 600
Edit Area Elevation Points ....................... 582 – 583
(All Floors) ......................................... 210
Elevation Region
(All Floors) Visible .............................. 210
Polyline as marquee ........................... 210
Tools ................................................. 209 Elevations
Visible ............................................... 210 Create .............................................. 752
Interior .............................................. 749
Edit Layout Lines Dialog ................ 1028
Ellipse
Edit Object Parts ............................... 132
Edit Types Ellipses .............................................. 898
Concentric ......................................... 139
Fillet .................................................. 140 Emissive ............................................ 726
Move Corners .................................... 138 End Cabinets ..................................... 560
Resize ....................................... 138 , 140 End Truss see Trusses
Egress Windows ................................ 335 End-to-End Dimensions ................... 824
Electrical ............................................. 64 Energy Heel ....................................... 511
Connections ...................................... 519 Enhanced Metafiles .......................... 943
Defaults ............................................. 516
Deleting ............................................. 522 Enter
Dimension to ...................................... 818 Coordinates ...................................... 886
Displaying .......................................... 520 Coordinates Dialog ............................ 143
Editing Objects .................................. 521 Dimensions ......................................... 36
General ............................................. 516 Error Messages ............................... 1086
Labels ............................................... 520 Estimating Software ....................... 1059
1158
Exit Program ....................................... 60 The Exterior Room ............................. 271

Expand Room Polyline..................... 282 Walls ........................................ 219 , 222
Expand/Collapse All ......................... 698 Extrude
Object ............................................... 652
Explode
Architectural Blocks ........................... 679
CAD Block ........................................ 912
Distributed Objects ............................ 666
Dormers ............................................ 420
F
Shape ............................................... 652 F6 Key
Export Fill Window ....................................... 732
2D DXF/DWG Files ........................... 962 Faces
3D DXF, Color or Material Indicator .... 972 3D .................................................... 649
3D DXF/DWG Model .......................... 971 Fascia
3D Files ............................................ 972 Top ................................................... 393
All Floors .......................................... 962 Faster Rendering .............................. 798
Current View ..................................... 962
Drawing File Dialog ........................... 963 Fence Designer ................................. 221
EMF ................................................. 944 Fence Select ...................................... 147
an Entire Plan ..................................... 58 Fencing ...................................... 221 , 227
From the Library ................................ 703 Fencing Defaults ......................... 66 , 219
Layers Sets ....................................... 127
Field of View ...................... 743 , 763 , 950
Layout Files .................................... 1034
Materials ......................................... 1058 File
Materials List ......................... 1058 – 1059 Management ....................................... 42
Picture Files ...................................... 940 Menu .............................................. 1091
to POV-Ray ....................................... 807 Menu, Recent File List ......................... 79
VRML ............................................... 949 Organization ........................................ 43
Wall Definitions ................................. 246 Fill
Windows Metafiles ............................ 944 Window ............................................. 732
Windows Metafiles Dialog .................. 944 Window Building Only ........................ 732
WMF ................................................. 944 Fill Patterns ....................................... 902
Export Drawing File Dialog ............. 963 Fill Style Tab ..................................... 902
Export Windows Metafiles Dialog .. 944 Fillet.................................................... 140
Extend Two Lines ......................................... 186
Object(s) ........................................... 199 Fillet/Chamfer Dialog ....................... 186
Slope Downward ............................... 397
Filter
Extension Lines Imported Terrain Data ........................ 614
Centerline ......................................... 825
Final View .......................................... 758
Edit Extensions tool ........................... 828
Editing .............................................. 829 Find Plan Wizard ................................. 54
Extension Snaps ......................... 96 , 134 Fire Box Tab ...................................... 674
Extensions Tab ................................. 819 Fireplace
Dimensions, suppress ........................ 673
Exterior
Direction facing ................................. 672
Dimensions ....................................... 825
Hearth height .................................... 673
Room types ....................................... 272
Interior wall ....................................... 672
1159
Library ............................................... 674 Floor/Ceiling

Masonry .................................. 671 , 1010 Beam ................................................ 467
No Fire Box ....................................... 674 Truss ................................................ 466
Prefabricated ..................................... 674 Floor/Ceiling Truss
Specification Dialog ........................... 672 Specification Dialog ........................... 513
Symbol .............................................. 674
Floors
Fireplaces........................................... 671 Adding .............................................. 355
Chimneys .......................................... 675 Attic .................................................. 359
Foundations ....................................... 672 Change Floor/Reference .................... 359
Freestanding ...................................... 672 Copying ............................................ 357
In walls .............................................. 671 Current Floor ............................. 354 , 358
Types ................................................ 671 Deleting ............................................ 358
Fix Exchange With Floor Above ............... 357
Connections ...................................... 229 Exchange With Floor Below ............... 357
Fixture/Furniture Resize.................... 68 Floor Up/ Floor Down ........................ 359
FloorTabs ......................................... 468
Fixtures
Hole in Platform ................................ 358
Counter top ........................................ 979
Insert New Floor ................................ 356
Layer to Material Mapping .................. 979
Multiple ............................................. 354
Lights ................................................ 518
Reference Floor ........................ 354 , 359
Stand alone ....................................... 979
Swap Floor/Reference ....................... 361
Wall ................................................... 979
Folders Panel ...................................... 80
Flared Stairs ...................................... 440
Follow Terrain .................... 598 , 663 , 697
Flat Region ......................................... 588
Specification Dialog ........................... 604 Font
Materials List ...................................... 74
Flip layers see Walls
Preferences ........................................ 74
Floating Auto Dormer ....................... 418
Fonts .................................................. 840
Floor and Alphabets ................................... 840
Above Height ..................................... 285 Blueprint ........................................... 840
and Ceiling Trusses ........................... 495 Dimensions ....................................... 820
Build New Floor ................................. 355
Footings............................................. 364
Camera ............................................. 749
Alignment ................................. 368 – 369
Defaults ............................................. 353
Centered on main layer ..................... 255
Export all ................................... 241 , 963
Centered on wall ............................... 255
Export current ............................ 241 , 963
Height ............................................... 255
Framing ............................................. 468
Stem wall .................................. 368 – 369
Height in rooms .................................. 285
Stepped ............................................ 248
Heights .............................................. 268
Width ................................................ 255
Materials ........................................... 268
Overview ................................... 750 , 752 Footprint, Plan .................................. 919
Tools ................................................. 355 Foundation .......................................... 65
Floor Overview .................................. 750 Defaults ............................................ 363
Tab ........................................... 255 , 363
Floor Plan
Thickness ......................................... 255
Drawing .............................................. 35
Walls ........................................ 220 , 222
View ................................................... 37
View Template ................................. 1012 Foundations
1160
Alignment ................................. 368 – 369 Joists ................................................ 466

Build ................................................. 366 Keeping current ................................. 488
Center footings (2 methods) ............... 255 Lap Joints ......................................... 468
Delete ............................................... 369 Layer ................................................ 242
Display ............................................. 367 Lookouts ........................................... 477
Footing size ...................................... 255 Manual vs. Automatic ......................... 462
Footings ........................................... 364 Materials List ..................................... 489
Garage ............................................. 369 Mitered Joints .................................... 487
Monolithic Slab .................................. 364 Mixing Trusses with Stick ................... 501
Piers ................................................. 364 Overview ........................................... 752
Piers specification ............................. 367 Plates ............................................... 472
Rebar ............................................... 365 Platforms .......................................... 468
Room supplies floor ........................... 286 Posts ................................................ 475
Slab at top of stem wall ..................... 365 Rebuilding ......................................... 463
Slab thickness ................................... 365 Reference Marker ...................... 467 , 480
Slab, monolithic ................................. 370 Represented by single line ................. 876
Slab, normal ..................................... 370 Rim Joist ........................................... 468
Slabs, create two ways ...................... 370 Roof .................................................. 477
Stem Wall ......................................... 364 Specification Dialog ........................... 490
Step markers .................................... 364 Stud Spacing ..................................... 472
Turn wall into .................................... 250 Stud Thickness .................................. 472
Types ............................................... 363 Tools ................................................ 464
Use Mesh ......................................... 366 Trimmers ........................................... 473
Walls ................................................ 255 Truss Spacing ................................... 480
Framing ........................................ 65 , 904 Trusses ............................................. 479
Automatic ......................................... 462 Wall Openings ................................... 473
Beams .............................................. 475 Walls ................................................ 471
Bearing Line ..................................... 482 Window Sills ...................................... 473
Build Framing Dialog ......................... 467 Windows ........................................... 473
Butt Joints ......................................... 468 Frieze
CAD Box Tool ................................... 904 Molding ............................................. 538
Ceiling .............................................. 468 Tab ................................................... 385
Creating ............................................ 904 Full
Cross Box ......................................... 904 Gable Wall ................................ 253 , 397
Deck ................................................. 276 Height Cabinets ................................. 549
Decks ............................................... 288 Overview ................................... 750 – 751
Defaults ............................................ 461
Furring................................................ 239
Defaults Dialog .................................. 467
Deleting ............................................ 488
Displaying ......................................... 485
Doors ............................................... 473
Dormer Holes .................................... 477
G
Editing ...................................... 487 , 904 Gable
Floor ................................................. 468 Dormer Over Windows and Doors ....... 423
Furring .............................................. 239 Over Door/Window ............................ 301
Headers ............................................ 474 Roof Line .................................. 377 , 412
Joining Platforms ............................... 484 Gable/Roof Line ................................ 377
1161
Garage Hardware............................................ 741

Door panels ....................................... 306 Lock Issues ..................................... 1084
Doors ................................................ 294 Hardware Tab
Garages for Cabinets ...................................... 571
Foundation ........................................ 369 for Doors ........................................... 313
Garden Bed Hatch
Kidney Shaped .................................. 591 Fill Patterns ...................................... 902
Polyline ............................................. 590 Wall .......................................... 220 , 226
Round ............................................... 590 Headers .............................................. 474
Tools ................................................. 590
Hearth
General ............................................... 353 Depth ............................................... 673
Cabinet Defaults ................................ 547 Height ............................................... 673
Preferences ........................................ 79
Height
Generate Basement ceiling ............................... 364
Terrain .............................................. 594 Ceiling .............................................. 285
Get Last Symbol ................................ 987 Floor ................................................. 285
Getting Help ........................................ 39 Railings ............................................ 261
GFCI Outlet ........................................ 518 Help
Display ............................................... 31
Girder Trusses ................................... 509
Menu .............................................. 1137
Glass, Stained ................................... 320 Tool Tips ............................................. 39
gotolink Fill Style Tab ...................... 671 Hill ...................................................... 588
GPS Hill / Valley
Importing ........................................... 616 Specification Dialog ........................... 605
Grid Hip
Materials list reports ............................ 99 Truss ................................................ 505
Grid Snaps ................................... 69 , 136 see also Trusses
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupt Holes
see GFCI Outlets In ceiling platforms ............................ 358
Group Select ...................................... 144 In floor platform ................................. 358
Gutters ................................................ 385 In Slabs ............................................ 370
Remove ............................................. 425 In terrain ........................................... 590
Home Designer
Allow editing in .................................... 69
H Software Compatibility ......................... 43

Hotkeys ........................................ 32 , 114
Half Create List ........................................ 115
Walls ................................................. 258 Customize ......................................... 114
Snap Behaviors ................................. 133
Half Wall see Railings
Solid House Wizard ............................ 229 , 926
Edit rooms ........................................ 927
Handrail Tab
Multiple Floors .................................. 927
Railings ............................................. 263
Hyperlink ........................................... 854
Hardiness Zone Maps ....................... 629
1162
I Interior
Dimensions ....................................... 824
Fireplace, wall ................................... 672
Icons
Room types ....................................... 272
Arrange ............................................ 736
Intersection ....................................... 203
Image
Specification Dialog ........................... 936 Invisible Walls ........... 220 , 224 – 225 , 251
Image Adustment Dialog ................. 803 IRC Checklist ..................................... 929
Images................................................ 773 iwalllay.dat and mwalllay.dat .......... 243
Adding to Library ............................... 934
Creating ............................................ 934
Displaying ......................................... 935
Displaying in color ............................... 73
J
In Layout .......................................... 935 Join Roof Planes............................... 388
Place ................................................ 933
Joist
Printing ........................................... 1009
Direction Line .................................... 482
Resizing ........................................... 935
Select from library ..................... 623 , 937 Joist Direction
Transparency Color ........................... 939 Specification Dialog ........................... 483
Import ................................................. 967 Joists .................................................. 466
2D DXF/DWG Files ........................... 954 Bearing Line ...................................... 482
3D Data ............................................ 966 Blocking ............................................ 466
3D Files ............................................ 967 Framing Reference ............................ 469
Drawing Wizard ................................. 955 see also Framing
DXF/DWG Elevation Data .................. 620
GPS Data ......................................... 616
Into the Library .................................. 702
Layer Sets ........................................ 127
K
Line Styles ........................................ 879 Keyboard
Terrain Data ...................................... 612 Camera Movements ........................... 761
Terrain Wizard .................................. 612 Commands .......................... 32 , 114 , 699
Wall Definitions ................................. 247 Commands, customize ....................... 114
Information Kidney Shaped
Client ................................................ 926 Garden Bed ....................................... 591
Designer ........................................... 925 Kingpost............................................. 510
Project .............................................. 925
Kitchen Island ................................... 562
Input
Knee Wall ........................................... 397
Arc ................................................... 894
Line .................................................. 884 Knee Walls ................................. 238 , 253
Point ................................................. 880
Insert
Floor Dialog ...................................... 356
Layout Page .................................... 1017
L
Insulation........................................... 904 Label Tab ......................................... 1045
Auto-Detailing ................................... 755 Labels
Show in Elevation .............................. 755 Cabinet ............................................. 555
1163
Door .................................................. 296 Layout

Electrical ........................................... 520 Adding Lines ................................... 1028
Plant ................................................. 626 Borders ........................................... 1021
Room ................................................ 273 CAD ............................................... 1021
Trusses ............................................. 500 CAD Details .................................... 1022
Window ............................................. 326 Change line length .......................... 1028
Landing............................................... 435 Change Pages ................................ 1020
Custom Shapes ................................. 436 Copy files ............................................ 47
Height ............................................... 436 Create ............................................ 1016
Locked .............................................. 437 Cross Section/Elevations ................. 1023
Unlocked ........................................... 436 Current Page .................................. 1020
Defaults .......................................... 1015
Layer
Display contents .............................. 1025
Display Options Dialog ....................... 121
Edit Layout Lines ............................. 1028
Eyedropper Tool ................................ 126
Edit Vector Views ............................ 1028
Layer Sets ......................................... 118
Edit views ....................................... 1025
Painter Tool ....................................... 126
Export ............................................. 1034
Tab ................................................... 125
Finding missing files ........................ 1031
Layer Set Floor plan view ................................ 1022
Control, Active ................................... 121 Images ............................................. 935
Defaults Dialog .................................. 129 Layer Sets ........................................ 127
Management Dialog ........................... 119 Layout Box Layers ........................... 1026
Layer Sets Layout Files Dialog .......................... 1032
Exporting ........................................... 127 Line color ........................................ 1030
Importing ........................................... 128 Links, Managing .............................. 1030
Layout Views ..................................... 127 Missing Files ................................... 1031
Missing in Layout ............................. 1032 Missing Layer Sets .......................... 1032
Modify all ........................................... 119 Moving Views .................................. 1024
Layers Open .................................................. 50
3D DWG/DXF Models ......................... 971 Open View ............................. 1017 , 1024
Adding new layers .............................. 124 Page Display Options ...................... 1026
Advanced Layer Mapping ................... 958 Page Down ..................................... 1020
Colors ............................................... 123 Page Up ......................................... 1020
Copy ................................................. 119 Page Zero ....................................... 1021
Create ............................................... 119 Prepare for ...................................... 1015
Delete ............................................... 119 Print From ................................ 997 , 1033
DXF/DWG files .................................. 957 Relink File ....................................... 1032
Export Layer Set ................................ 964 Rescale Views ................................ 1025
Floor Plan View Display ...................... 117 Saving ................................................ 46
Layout Views ................................... 1025 Scale .............................................. 1025
Locking .............................................. 117 Selecting Views ............................... 1024
Mapping ............................................ 958 Sending views to ............................. 1018
Materials Lists ................................... 117 Templates ........................................... 51
Preferences ........................................ 84 Text ................................................ 1021
Rename ............................................. 123 Title Blocks ..................................... 1021
Reset Names ..................................... 123 View, contents ................................. 1025
Turn off to speed up 3D views ............ 797 Layout Box
1164
Specification Dialog ......................... 1034 Library Object

Layout Files Dialog ........................ 1032 Specification Dialog ........................... 696
Layout Views Library Object Button
Copy ............................................... 1024 Specification Dialog ........................... 692
Display ........................................... 1025 Library Objects
Keeping views current ..................... 1022 and the Materials List ......................... 696
Relinking ......................................... 1031 Display .............................................. 694
Leader Lines ..................................... 861 Editing .............................................. 694
Placing .............................................. 690
Left Mouse Button
Definition ............................................ 29 Library Search Dialog
Include folders ................................... 688
Legacy Plans
Keywords .......................................... 688
Page Setup ......................................... 77
Text Conversion .................................. 74 Light
Libraries
Cabinet Modules ............................... 550 Light Render Data ............................. 518
Renaming ......................................... 698 Light Sources .................................... 775
Library Added Lights ..................................... 776
Add a new symbol ............................. 700 Default Lights .................................... 775
Adding Folders .................................. 700 Default Sun Light ............................... 777
Adding Objects .................................. 640 Fixtures ............................................. 776
Adding third party libraries ................. 702 Parallel Lights ................................... 779
Bonus Catalogs ................................. 701 Point Lights ....................................... 780
Categories ........................................ 685 Spot Lights ........................................ 780
Deleting from Import/Export ............... 704 Sun Angles ........................................ 776
Editing libraries ................................. 697 Lights
Export ............................................... 703 Added ............................................... 776
Fireplaces ......................................... 674 Adjust ............................................... 778
Import ............................................... 702 Attenuated ........................................ 525
Manufacturer Libraries ....................... 685 Auto Intensity .................................... 525
Panes ............................................... 686 Casts Shadows ................................. 526
Search Dialog ................................... 687 Color ................................................. 525
Third Party Libraries .......................... 702 Connect to switch .............................. 519
Third party libraries ........................... 702 Cut Off Angle .................................... 525
User Libraries ................................... 686 Defining Types .................................. 779
Library Browser ................................ 683 Dir Angle ........................................... 525
Adding Items ..................................... 700 Display position in 3D ........................ 526
Docking ............................................ 685 Drop Off Rate .................................... 525
Panes ............................................... 683 Fixtures ..................................... 518 , 776
Preferences ........................................ 76 Floor Number .................................... 781
Preview Pane .................................... 687 Height ............................................... 781
Restore Position .................................. 77 Type ................................................. 525
Selection Pane .................................. 686 Line
Library Categories Angle Format ..................................... 876
Doors ............................................... 294 Color Tab ........................................ 1030
Doorways .......................................... 295 Color, in layout ................................ 1030
Line Styles ........................................ 879 Endcaps .............................................. 90
1165
Length Format ................................... 876 Roof planes .............................. 379 , 391

Properties Panel ................................. 90 Tread Width ...................................... 439
Separation, dimensions ...................... 811 Lookouts ............................................ 477
Low Detail Mode ............................... 798
Start and End Points ........................... 93
Style Tab ........................................... 889 Lower Interactive Quality .......... 73 , 799
Styles, Creating ................................. 910 Lowered
Styles, Importing ................................ 879 Ceiling .............................................. 330
Styles, Library .................................... 879
Tab ................................................... 888
Weight ....................................... 993 , 999
Weight Scaling ................................. 1000
M
Weight Tab ...................................... 1029 Macros ............................................... 869
Weights, Show ............................. 72 , 996
with Arrow ......................................... 886 Main
Edit Mode ......................................... 193
Line Style Layer ................................................ 242
Creating ............................................ 888
Specification Dialog ........................... 910 Make
Arc Tangent .............................. 182 , 237
Line Weight ......................................... 73 CAD Block ........................................ 912
Lines ................................................... 884 Parallel Dialog ................................... 189
Lites Parallel/Perpendicular ............... 181 , 189
Craftsman .......................................... 343 Room Molding Polyline Dialog ............ 282
Diamond .................................... 310 , 343 Make Room Molding Polyline
Doors ................................................ 310 Dialog ............................................... 282
Normal ...................................... 310 , 343 Manage
Prairie ....................................... 310 , 343 Auto Archives ...................................... 49
Tab ................................................... 341 Materials ........................................... 717
Living Area ......................................... 275 Materials Lists ................................. 1058
and Room Types ................................ 272 Manual
Calculation ........................................ 275 Dimensions ....................................... 823
Delete label ....................................... 275 Roofs ........................................ 375 , 385
Label ................................................. 275
Restore label ..................................... 275 Manufacturer Libraries .................... 685
Show .................................................. 69 Marker
vs. Footprint ...................................... 275 Defaults ...................................... 66 , 839
Load Specification Dialog ........................... 867
to Make Same Value .......................... 209 Tab ................................................... 868
Loan Calculator ................................. 929 Markers .............................................. 867
Framing reference ............................. 480
Locate Types ............................................... 868
Openings Automatically ...................... 812
Roof Plane Intersections .................... 389 Marquee Select ................................. 146
Lock Marriage Walls .................................. 239
CAD layer .......................................... 123 Masonry
Center ............................................... 155 Fireplace ......................................... 1010
Center Arc ......................................... 155 Fireplaces ......................................... 671
Control Handle Angle ......................... 171 Stairs ................................................ 447
1166
Master List....................................... 1059 Materials List ................................... 1048

Columns to display ............................ 100 Calculate from All Floors .................. 1049
Materials List .................................... 100 Calculate from Room ....................... 1049
Name of file ...................................... 100 Categories ........................................ 101
see also Materials List Columns to display .............................. 98
Update from Master ......................... 1061 Columns, editing .............................. 1054
Update to Master ............................. 1061 Display Options Dialog ..................... 1052
Master plan see Profile Plan Editing ............................................ 1056
Estimating software ......................... 1059
Material ................................................ 65
Export ............................................. 1059
Defaults ............................................ 726
Font .................................................... 74
Definition .......................................... 719
Framing ............................................ 489
Export Options Dialog ...................... 1058
Grid display on reports ......................... 99
Eyedropper ....................................... 709
Library Objects .................................. 696
Material Painter................................. 707 Manage ........................................... 1058
Blending ........................................... 708 Master List Preferences ..................... 100
Modes .............................................. 707 Material, define .................................. 717
Using ................................................ 708 Preferences ......................................... 98
Materials Report Style Preferences ..................... 99
Add to Library ................................... 701 Materials Lists
Ambient ............................................ 726 Saving ............................................ 1049
and Raytracing .................................. 804
Max Tread Contraction ............. 446 , 454
Applying with Material Tab ................. 709
Artwork ............................................. 715 Median ................................................ 636
Blending ........................................... 713 Menus ................................................... 32
Brightness ........................................ 725 3D .................................................. 1115
Calculating amounts .......................... 661 Build ............................................... 1100
Categories ........................................ 716 CAD ................................................ 1123
Color ................................................ 720 Window ........................................... 1135
Create New Material .......................... 712 Mesh, Specify for foundation .......... 366
Create using Color Chooser ............... 727
Metafile Size Dialog .......................... 944
Define for Materials List ..................... 717
Diffuse .............................................. 726 Metafiles............................................. 943
Editing .............................................. 711 Middle Mouse Button ................. 30 , 731
Emissive ........................................... 726 Minimum
Floor and Ceiling ............................... 268 Alcove ............................................... 381
Managing .......................................... 717
Missing Layer Sets Dialog ............. 1032
Materials List .................................... 717
On Soffits .......................................... 661 Mitre Ends of Angle Walls ............... 472
Polyline ........................................... 1057 Model Maker
Render properties ............................. 724 Floor Plan, View Template ............... 1012
Shininess .................................. 725 – 726 Printing ........................................... 1010
Specular ........................................... 726 Modify
Stained glass .................................... 320 All Layer Sets .................................... 119
Tab ................................................... 709 Name In All Layer Sets ........................ 84
Textures ................................... 723 , 773 Plan Database File .............................. 57
Transparency ............................ 725 – 726 Molding
Walls ................................................ 268
1167
3D Molding Line tool .......................... 536 Specification Dialog ........................... 332

3D molding polyline ............................ 536 Mullions
Changing profiles ............................... 537 Window ............................................. 341
Custom profiles .................................. 533
Multiple
Door .................................................. 308
Copy ................................................. 194
Frieze ................................................ 538
Floors, Reverse Plan ......................... 191
Molding Line tool ................................ 536
Molding Polyline tool .......................... 536 Multiple Copy Dialog ........................ 194
Place Molding Profile ......................... 534 Multiple Select .................................. 144
Polyline Specification Dialog ............... 539 Muntin Bars
Polylines ............................................ 532 see Lites
Molding Polyline Muntins
Specification Dialog ........................... 539 Custom ............................................. 327
Moldings Window ............................................. 341
in Rooms ........................................... 290
Symbol .............................................. 534
Moldings and Profiles Library ......... 537
Moldings Tab
N
for Cabinets ....................................... 573 Name
for Doors ........................................... 308 Of room for Plan Check ..................... 928
for Molding Polylines .......................... 540 New
for Windows ....................................... 338 CAD Line Dialog ................................ 885
Monolithic Slab.................................. 364 Layer Name Dialog ............................ 124
Monolithic Slab Foundations, Plans Preferences ............................... 82
Rebuilding....................................... 368 Polygon Shaped Room ...................... 225
Move Newels
CAD Points ........................................ 883 Definition .......................................... 429
Corners ............................................. 138 Newels/Balusters Tab .............. 261 , 455
Extension Lines ................................. 830 No Locate Wall .................................. 251
Folders and Library Objects ................ 698 Normal style see Lites
Nudging ............................................. 179
North Pointer..................................... 886
Object Using Dimensions Dialog ......... 831
Restrictions ....................................... 178 Nudging ............................................. 179
to be Coplanar ................................... 390 Number Style/Angle Style
to Framing Reference ......................... 180 Dialog ............................................... 917
to Front of Group ............................... 176
Views to a Different Page ................. 1024
Walls with Cabinets Attached .............. 558
Move Point Dialog ............................. 883
O
Mulled Units OBJ Files ........................................... 967
Framing ............................................. 336 Object
Labels ............................................... 335 Based Design ...................................... 28
Mullion Depth ..................................... 336
Object Snaps ..................................... 133
Treat as Door ..................................... 335
Extension Snaps ......................... 96 , 134
Mulled Window Object locations ................................ 134
1168
Preferences ........................................ 95 Overview ...................................... 26 , 130

Objects Camera tools ..................................... 761
Distributed ........................................ 666 Direction Tools .................................. 762
One-Click Auto Dimension .............. 825
One-Click Stairs................................ 429
Open P
3D Home Architect files ....................... 43
Page
Below ............................................... 272
Down .............................................. 1021
Different file types ............................... 50
Up .................................................. 1021
Directory ............................................. 50
Files from a different version ................ 50 Page Setup Dialog
Object ................................................. 33 Legacy Layouts ................................... 77
Plan .................................................... 50 Legacy Plans ....................................... 77
Plan or Layout File .............................. 50 Painting
Symbol ..................................... 699 , 974 Over Materials ................................... 713
Template Files .................................... 52 Pan
View ................................................. 767 Pan Window Tool .............................. 733
Opening Files ...................................... 43 the Display ........................................ 732
Openings Using the Keyboard ........................... 732
Dimension locate ............................... 812 Using the Mouse ................................ 733
Dimensions to ................................... 818 Using the Scroll Bars ......................... 732
Headers ............................................ 474 Panels
Ignore casing for resize ....................... 68 Cabinets ........................................... 569
Optimizations On .............................. 102 Paper
Options Tab ....................................... 382 Size ................................................ 1015
for Materials List Display options ...... 1053 Paragraph Options Dialog ............... 845
for Windows ...................................... 335 Parallel Light ..................................... 779
Organizing see Lights ......................................... 780
your Files ............................................ 43 Parent Buttons .................................. 108
Orthogonal Views ............................. 998 Partition ............................................. 549
Outlets ............................................... 518 Passthroughs .................................... 302
Above cabinet ................................... 522
Paste................................................... 192
Automatic ......................................... 519
Hold Position ..................................... 193
Dishwasher ....................................... 518
in Place ............................................. 193
For appliance .................................... 522
Special .............................................. 194
Manual ............................................. 518
Place ................................................ 519 Path to Master list ............................ 100
Sink .................................................. 518 Pattern Tab ........................................ 722
WP ................................................... 518 Patterns and Textures ...................... 714
Oval PDF Files............................................ 999
Peninsula Radius Cabinets ............. 561
Ovals .................................................. 898
Personal Tutor ...................... 1079 , 1083
Overall Dimension ............................ 812 Picture
Overhang ........................................... 386 Copy Region as ................................. 946
1169
Displaying in color ............................... 73 New .................................................... 45

Picture File Box Open .................................................. 50
Specification Dialog ........................... 942 Search ................................................ 53
Transfer .............................................. 47
Picture Files
Export ............................................... 940 Plant
Import ................................................ 940 2D Symbols ...................................... 623
Scale ................................................. 941 Chooser Dialog ................................. 627
Encyclopedia .................................... 627
Piers
Labels .............................................. 626
Automatic .......................................... 367
Creating automatically ........................ 367
Tools ................................................ 621
Foundation ........................................ 364
Plant Image
Piers and Pads................................... 370
Pitch ............................................ 393 , 398
Plinth Blocks ..................................... 307
Above Wall ........................................ 398
Show as degrees ................................ 68 Plot Plan
North pointer ..................................... 886
Place
Gable Over Window(s) ....................... 320 Plotters .............................................. 994
Images .............................................. 933 Point
Library Object Button ......................... 692 see also CAD point
Library Objects .................................. 690 Point Light ......................................... 780
Outlets .............................. 225 , 273 , 519
Point Markers .................................... 881
Soffits ................................................ 660
Switches ............................................ 519 Point to Point Dimensions .............. 824
Plan ...................................................... 65 Pointer
Database File ..................................... 56 Coordinates .................................. 34 , 72
Drawing .............................................. 35 Cross Hair ........................................... 92
Find Wizard ........................................ 54 Points ................................................. 880
Footprint ............................................ 919 Polygon
Footprint Specification Dialog ............. 920 Shaped Deck .................................... 221
General Defaults ................................. 68 Shaped Room ................................... 220
Materials Dialog ................................. 718
Polyline
Saving ................................................ 46
3D Molding Polyline ........................... 536
Templates .......................................... 51
Area ................................................. 901
Thumbnail .......................................... 48
Definition .......................................... 900
Trace ................................................. 941
Edit Area ........................................... 210
View ................................................... 37
Garden Bed ...................................... 590
Plan Check ......................................... 928 Rectangular Polyline Tool .................. 903
and room labels ................................. 273 Room Polyline ................................... 282
Dialog ................................................ 928 Specification Dialog ........................... 901
Hold .................................................. 928 Tab ................................................... 901
Restart .............................................. 928
Polyline Solid
Plan Footprint Convert to Solid ................................ 659
Specification Dialog ........................... 920 Creating ............................................ 658
Plans Specification Dialog ........................... 659
Copy files ........................................... 47 Polylines
1170
Molding Polyline tool ......................... 536 Box ................................................... 649

Pond, Round ..................................... 591 Cone ................................................. 649
Cylinder ............................................ 649
Ponds ................................................. 591
Editing .............................................. 650
Pony Walls................................. 220 , 223 Face ................................................. 649
Align upper and lower ........................ 219 Sphere .............................................. 649
Change wall types ............................. 223 Tools ................................................ 649
Default height .................................... 218
Print
Dimensioning .................................... 234
3D Views ........................................... 998
Display ............................................. 231
Across Multiple Pages ....................... 998
Display Openings in .......................... 219
Center Sheet ..................................... 997
Show lower wall ................................ 219
Check Plots ............................... 993 , 998
Post .................................................... 465 Clear Printer Info ............. 994 – 995 , 1086
Specification Dialog ........................... 492 Color or Black and White ................. 1007
POV-Ray............................................. 807 Custom Sheet Size .......................... 1003
Prairie style Dialog ............................................. 1006
see Lites Dimensions ..................................... 1002
Directly from a View ........................... 997
Preferences ....................................... 697
Double-buffered printing ................... 1008
Appearance ........................................ 71
Drivers .............................................. 994
Architectural Panel .............................. 88
from Layout ....................................... 997
Behaviors Panel .................................. 93
Image ............................................. 1009
CAD Panel .......................................... 89
Image Dialog ................................... 1009
Categories Panel ....................... 100 – 101
Layout Files .................................... 1033
Colors ................................................. 74
Line Weights ..................................... 999
Defined ............................................... 63
Line Weights and Scaling ................. 1000
Dialog ................................................. 70
Model Dialog ................................... 1010
Edit Panel ........................................... 92
Options ............................................. 995
Folders Panel ...................................... 80
Paper Size ........................................ 993
Font .................................................... 74
Perspective Views ............................. 998
General Panel ..................................... 79
Plotters ............................................. 994
Global settings .................................... 70
Preview ............................................. 996
Layers Panel ....................................... 84
Printable Area ................................... 996
Library Browser ................................... 76
Printing Scale .................................... 993
Line Properties Panel .......................... 90
Scale to Fit ........................................ 998
Master List Panel .............................. 100
Services .......................................... 1015
Materials List ...................................... 98
Setup .............................................. 1015
New Plans .......................................... 82
Sheet Size .............................. 993 , 1002
Render ............................................. 102
Terminology ...................................... 993
Report Style Panel .............................. 99
Text ................................................ 1002
Reset preferences ............................. 105
the Model ........................................ 1010
Snap Properties .................................. 95
Tiled ................................................. 998
Sun Angle Panel ................................. 91
to PDF File ........................................ 999
Text and Page Setup ........................... 77
To Scale ........................................... 997
Time Tracker ....................................... 87
Troubleshooting ............................... 1083
Unit Coversion Panel ........................... 85
Print Dialog...................................... 1006
Prepare for Layout ......................... 1015
Print Image ........................................ 768
Primitives
1171
Dialog .............................................. 1009 Defaults ............................................ 219

Print Model Dialog........................... 1010 Tab ................................................... 258
Printed Size Input Dialog ................. 856 Railings ...................................... 220 , 224
Balusters .................................. 258 , 261
Printer Setup.................................... 1015
Change wall into railing ..................... 250
Printers ............................................... 994 Connect walls ................................... 230
Select printer ................................... 1006 Decks ............................................... 227
Set up ............................................. 1015 Exterior Materials .............................. 259
Priority Support ............................... 1088 Fix connections ................................. 229
Profile Plans ....................................... 51 Height defined ................................... 261
in a Doorway ..................................... 302
Program Updates................................ 39
Locate with dimensions ..................... 251
Project Newels ............................................. 261
Browser ............................................. 924 No Rail ............................................. 259
Information ........................................ 925 No Shoe ........................................... 260
Property lines .................................... 884 Open rail type ................................... 258
North pointer ...................................... 886 Open with middle rail ......................... 259
Proportional Resize .......................... 140 Openings .......................................... 301
Partial ............................................... 445
Raise Shoe ....................................... 259
Q Solid ................................................. 258

Stairs ................................................ 445
Type ................................................. 258
Quoin
Specification Dialog ........................... 531 Raise
Shoe ................................................. 259
Quoins ................................................ 531
Truss Off plate .................................. 511
Raised / Lowered Region
R Raytrace
Aspect ratio ....................................... 801
Radiosity ............................................ 801
Create .............................................. 800
Radius ................................................. 229 Export to POV-Ray ............................ 807
End Cabinets ..................................... 561 Faster raytracing ............................... 805
of Tangent Curved Wall Dialog ........... 235 Image Adustment Dialog .................... 803
Radius To .......................................... 251 Materials ........................................... 804
Radius of Tangent Curved Wall Options Dialog .................................. 801
Dialog ................................................ 235 Quality .............................................. 806
Rafter depth ....................................... 394 Radiosity ........................................... 801
Tab ................................................... 804
Rafter Tails......................................... 425
Window ............................................. 803
Decorative Profiles ............................. 383
Rebar
Rafters ................................................ 465
In Foundations .................................. 365
Bearing Line ...................................... 482
Blocking ............................................ 465 Rebuild
Framing Reference ............................ 477 3D .................................................... 766
Mixing with trusses ............................. 501 Framing ............................................ 463
Monolithic Slab Foundations .............. 368
Railing
1172
Walls/Floors/Ceilings ......................... 358 see also Materials List

Recent File List ................................... 79 Rescale Layout Views .................... 1025
Recessed Reset
Doors ....................................... 301 , 306 Defaults ........................................ 67 , 69
Windows ................................... 320 , 336 Preferences ....................................... 105
Rectangular Polyline ........................ 903 Resize
Redo ................................................... 141 Components ...................................... 329
Enable for symbols .............................. 68
Reduce Gable .................................... 511
Factor ............................................... 941
Reference House using Exterior Dimensions ....... 832
Display Options ................................. 360 Ignore casing ...................................... 68
Grid .................................................... 69 Images .............................................. 935
Regular Polygon ............................... 903 Picture .............................................. 941
Relative Text .................................................. 856
to Current Point, new point ................ 880 Restore Toolbars .............................. 113
Remove Restrictions
3D .................................................... 758 Moving objects .................................. 178
Backdrop .......................................... 748 Retain
Manufacturer Lock ............................. 695 Wall Framing ..................................... 251
Renaming Libraries .......................... 698 Retaining Wall ................................... 592
Render Reverse .............................................. 191
Added Lights ..................................... 776 Plan .................................................. 191
Camera Field of View ........................ 770 Wall layers ........................................ 216
Data Tab ........................................... 524
Revision Clouds ................................ 906
Daytime Ambient ............................... 775
Graphics card ................................... 741 Revolve Object .................................. 653
Light Fixtures .................................... 776 Rich Text
Light Sources .................................... 775 Border Color ...................................... 847
Nighttime Ambient ............................. 775 Defaults ............................................ 839
Preferences ...................................... 102 Specification Dialog ........................... 843
Status ............................................... 104 Text Color ......................................... 845
Tab ................................................... 724 Ridge
Render Data Tab ............................... 784 Top, edit roofs ................................... 393
Render Tips and Tricks.................... 773 Right Button Definition ...................... 29
Rendering Techniques ..................... 785 Rim Joist ............................................ 468
Backdrops in ..................................... 749 Road ..................................................... 65
Defaults ............................................ 788 and Sidewalk Defaults ....................... 635
Options ............................................. 788 Defaults ............................................ 635
Painting Styles .................................. 793 Marking ............................................. 637
Replace from Library Median .............................................. 636
Button ............................................... 693 Polyline ............................................. 636
Dialog ............................................... 693 Specification Dialog ........................... 640
Report style Stripe ................................................ 637
Grid display settings ............................ 99 Road Marking
Materials List ...................................... 99 Specification Dialog ........................... 644
1173
Road Objects Birdsmouth ....................................... 394

Different Types .................................. 636 Birdsmouth Depth .............................. 391
Display .............................................. 639 Boxed Eaves ..................................... 382
Roads .................................................. 636 Build Roof Dialog .............................. 377
Convert to Polyline Object .................. 640 Defaults ............................................ 375
Curbs ................................................ 641 Dormers ............................................ 417
Eaves, aligning .................................. 389
Roof
Energy Heel ...................................... 511
Baseline Polylines .............................. 401
Extend slope downward ............. 253 , 397
Baselines ........................................... 386
Fascia top ......................................... 393
Baselines Polylines, Example Using .... 402
Framing ............................................ 477
Beams ............................................... 466
Full gable wall ........................... 253 , 397
Pitches in Degrees ............................. 426
Gambrel ............................................ 398
Styles, Automatic ............................... 396
Gull Wing .......................................... 398
Tab ................................................... 252
Gutters ..................................... 383 , 385
Tools ................................................. 376
Half-hip ............................................. 398
Truss ......................................... 466 , 495
High shed/gable ........................ 253 , 397
Truss Details ..................................... 499
Hip Trusses ...................................... 505
Truss Specification Dialog .................. 510
Hole for skylights ............................... 414
Roof Baseline Ignore Top Floor ................................ 380
Specification Dialog ........................... 403 Knee walls ................................ 253 , 397
Roof Designer .................................... 376 Lock roof planes ........................ 379 , 391
Roof Hole/Skylight Mansard ........................................... 398
Specification Dialog ........................... 416 Manual ............................................. 385
Min. Alcove ....................................... 381
Roof Plane
Over curved walls .............................. 399
Over this room .................................. 286
Roof Planes ................................ 376 , 385 Overhang .................................. 379 , 386
Aligning ............................................. 388 Pitch .......................... 253 , 393 , 397 – 398
Curved .............................................. 404 Plumb Cut Eaves ............................... 382
Delete ............................................... 392 Rafter Tails ....................................... 425
Display .............................................. 387 Raise off plate ................................... 380
Edit ................................................... 387 Rebuilding ........................................ 401
Intersections, Locate .......................... 389 Retain edits ....................................... 394
Join ................................................... 388 Returns ............................................. 423
Low roof planes ................................. 379 Ridge/top .......................................... 393
Move to be Coplanar .......................... 390 Roof Group ....................................... 285
Raising/Lowering ............................... 390 Roof Plane ........................................ 376
Roof Truss Second pitch ..................................... 254
Specification Dialog ........................... 510 Sheathing ......................................... 383
Roofs................................................. 1012 Show pitch as degrees ................ 68 , 394
2nd pitch ................................... 253 , 397 Skylights ........................................... 414
Angled baselines ................................ 394 Soffits ............................................... 383
Auto Rebuild .............................. 379 , 401 Square Cut Eaves ............................. 382
Auto Roof Return ............................... 254 Step Down Hip .................................. 506
Automatic .......................................... 376 Story-and-a-half ................................ 397
Automatic vs. Manual ......................... 375 Subgirders ........................................ 508
Baseline ............................................ 393 Trusses ............................................ 380
1174
Upslope Mark .................................... 386 Round

Vertical Rafter Depth ......................... 394 Garden bed ....................................... 590
Room .................................................. 839 Pond ................................................. 591
Defaults ............................................ 267
Material Defaults ............................... 267
Molding Polylines .............................. 282
Polylines ........................................... 282
S
Specification Dialog ........................... 283 S Markers ........................................... 364
Room Labels ..................................... 273 Same
Custom ............................................. 273 Height Eaves ..................................... 381
Defaults ............................................ 839 Roof Height at External Wall .............. 380
Display ............................................. 274
Sash and Frame Tab ......................... 340
Edit ................................................... 274
Interior room area .............................. 274 Save
Interior room dimensions ................... 274 3D Views ........................................... 767
Room area ........................................ 274 and Save As ........................................ 46
Standard room area ........................... 274 Layout ................................................. 46
Plan .................................................... 46
Rooms
Plan as Template ........................... 52 – 53
Area ................................................. 274
Plan Thumbnail ................................... 48
Attic .................................................. 272
Auto Place Outlets ............................. 273 Scale
Below Stairs ...................................... 449 Layout view ..................................... 1025
Ceiling height .................................... 285 Picture Files ...................................... 941
Ceiling over ....................................... 286 Printing to ......................................... 997
Editing .............................................. 277 Terrain Data ...................................... 615
Exterior types .................................... 272 to Fit ................................................. 998
Floor height ....................................... 285 Schedule .............................................. 66
Foundation floor definition ................. 286 Defaults .......................................... 1036
Interior .............................................. 272 Specification Dialog ......................... 1039
Interior area ...................................... 274 Schedules
Interior dimensions ............................ 274 Creating .......................................... 1037
Living Area ........................................ 272
Schematics, Wiring........................... 519
Name for PlanCheck .......................... 928
Open Below ...................................... 272 Scissors Trusses .............................. 509
Polygon Shaped ................................ 225 Screen Capture Setup Dialog .......... 947
Roof over .......................................... 286 Scroll Bars ......................................... 732
Room Definition ................................ 267 Search for Plans ................................. 53
Room Types ...................................... 272
Selecting .......................................... 270 Section see Cross section
Standard area ................................... 274 Section/Elevation
The Exterior Room ............................ 271 Views, Create .................................... 752
Types ............................................... 271 Segment Angle at Curved Wall ....... 381
Rotate Select.................................................. 251
CAD items .......................................... 94 All ..................................................... 146
Jump .................................................. 94 Backdrop ........................................... 748
Text ................................................ 1038 Components of Blocked Units ............. 323
View ................................................. 190 Fence Select ..................................... 147
1175
Group, drag method ........................... 144 Arc Centers ....................................... 155

Group, marquee method ..................... 144 Line Weights ............................... 72 , 996
Layer Dialog ...................................... 124 Living Area .......................................... 69
Layout Lines .................................... 1028 Pitch as degrees ................................. 68
Layout Views ................................... 1024 Sheet ................................................ 996
Library Object Dialog .......................... 689 Short extensions ............................... 820
Marquee ............................................ 146 Shutters ............................................. 348
Materials with the Material Tab ........... 709
Sidewalk ............................................ 638
Multiple Objects ................................. 146
Defaults ............................................ 635
Next Object ........................................ 146
Polyline ............................................. 638
Object Parts ....................................... 145
Objects .............................................. 144
Objects button ................................... 144 Skylights .................................... 377 , 414
Objects in 3D Views ........................... 765 Slab
Room ................................................ 270 At top of stem wall ............................. 365
Same Type ........................................ 208 Foundation ........................................ 365
Selected Edge ................................... 145 Monolithic ......................................... 364
Shift+Click ......................................... 146 Specification Dialog ........................... 372
Similar Objects .................................. 144 Slabs
Similar Objects Dialog ........................ 208 and the Materials List ........................ 371
Selected Line Tab.............................. 901 Holes ................................................ 370
Selection Fill Color ............................ 74 Slab Tool .......................................... 370
Tools ................................................ 370
Send
to Layout Dialog ............................... 1019 Sliding Doors .................................... 294
Views to layout ................................ 1018 Sloped Soffits ................................... 664
Service Data Tab ............................... 523 Snap Behaviors................................. 133
Set Angular Dimension Dialog 189 , 832 Angle Snaps ..................................... 135
Extension Snaps ......................... 96 , 134
Settings,3D......................................... 744
Grid Snaps .................................. 69 , 136
Setup Hotkeys ............................................ 133
Screen Capture .................................. 947 Object locations ................................ 134
Shadows ............................................. 777 Object Snaps .................................... 133
Shelf .................................................... 549 Preferences ........................................ 95
Shelf/Partition Soffit
Specification Dialog ........................... 576 Defaults ............................................ 660
Shift Key
Marquee selection .............................. 146 Soffits......................................... 549 , 660
Select multiple objects ........................ 146 Calculating Materials ......................... 661
Place under ceiling ............................ 664
Shininess............................................ 726
Place under Roof .............................. 664
Shoe Roof ................................................. 383
None for railing .................................. 260 Sloped ...................................... 663 – 664
Raise for railing .................................. 259 Sloped soffit ...................................... 664
Short Extensions ............................... 820 Special applications ........................... 660
Shortcut Keys .............................. 32 , 114 Solid
Show Definition .......................................... 652
1176
Specification Dialog ........................... 658 Library Object Button ......................... 692

Tools ................................................ 649 Light ................................................. 781
Space Planner Line .................................................. 888
Toolbar Configuration ........................ 112 Line Style .......................................... 910
Marker .............................................. 867
Special
Molding Polyline ................................ 539
CAD Buttons .......................... 1139 – 1140
Plan Footprint .................................... 920
Shaped Cabinets ............................... 559
Plant ................................................. 626
Specification Dialogs Plant Image ....................................... 622
3D Box ............................................. 653 Polyline ............................................. 901
3D Molding Polyline ........................... 541 Polyline Solid .................................... 659
Arc ................................................... 895 Post .................................................. 492
Architectural Block ............................ 680 Quoins .............................................. 531
Bay/Box Window ............................... 349 Raised/Lowered Region ..................... 606
Bow Window ..................................... 351 Rich Text .......................................... 843
Cabinet ............................................. 562 Road ................................................. 640
Cabinet Shelf .................................... 575 Road Marking .................................... 644
CAD Block ........................................ 915 Roof Baseline .................................... 403
CAD Box ........................................... 905 Roof Hole/Skylight ............................. 416
CAD Circle ........................................ 898 Roof Plane ........................................ 392
CAD Ellipse ...................................... 898 Room ................................................ 283
CAD Oval .......................................... 898 Schedule ......................................... 1039
Callout .............................................. 864 Shelf/Partition .................................... 576
Camera ............................................. 768 Sidewalk ........................................... 644
Ceiling Plane ..................................... 409 Slab .................................................. 372
Cone ................................................ 657 Soffit ................................................. 662
Corner Boards ................................... 530 Solid ................................................. 658
Cross Section/Elevation Camera ........ 770 Sphere .............................................. 655
Custom Countertop ........................... 578 Sprinkler ........................................... 630
Cylinder ............................................ 656 Stair Landing ..................................... 458
Default Sun Light ............................... 782 Staircase ........................................... 450
Dimension Line ................................. 833 Sun Angle ......................................... 782
Distribution Path ................................ 666 Symbol .............................................. 974
Distribution Region ............................ 666 Terrain .............................................. 596
Door ................................................. 303 Terrain Break .................................... 609
Dormer ............................................. 420 Terrain Feature ................................. 606
Driveway ........................................... 642 Terrain Path ...................................... 610
Electrical Service .............................. 522 Text .................................................. 850
Elevation Line ................................... 603 Truss Base ........................................ 504
Elevation Point .................................. 600 Wall .................................................. 249
Elevation Region ............................... 603 Wall Hatch ........................................ 264
Fireplace ........................................... 672 Window ............................................. 332
Flat Region ....................................... 604
Specular ............................................. 726
Framing ............................................ 490
Hill / Valley ....................................... 605 Speed
Joist Direction ................................... 483 3D View Generation ........................... 797
Layout Box ...................................... 1034 3D views ........................................... 746
Library Object ................................... 696 Spell Check........................................ 859
1177
Sphere ................................................ 649 Make Reach ...................................... 450

Specification Dialog ........................... 655 Masonry ............................................ 447
Splines ................................................ 908 Max Tread Contraction ...................... 454
Advanced Splines .............................. 170 Merge Sections ................................. 431
Control Handles ................................. 170 Newels ............................................. 455
Lock Control Handle Angle ................. 171 Open Underneath .............................. 454
Partial Railings .................................. 445
Split
Railings ............................................ 445
Levels ............................................... 270
Reach Next Floor .............................. 450
Walls ................................................. 226
Rise angle ........................................ 451
Spot Light........................................... 780 Rooms Below .................................... 449
Sprinkler Section width .................................... 451
Designer ............................................ 629 Sections ........................................... 452
Specification Dialog ........................... 630 Solid Railings .................................... 446
Tools ................................................. 629 Stairwell ............................................ 448
Stacked Windows .............................. 320 Starter Treads ................................... 443
Straight ............................................. 429
Stair
Stringers ........................................... 453
Designer ............................................ 429
Stringers, steel .................................. 447
Landing Specification Dialog ............... 458
Subsections ....................... 439 , 450 , 452
Sections Move Independently .............. 88
Symmetrically Flared ......................... 441
Tools ................................................. 429
Terminology ...................................... 429
Stair Landing Tread Width .............................. 439 , 451
Specification Dialog ........................... 458 Treads .............................................. 450
Staircase Treads, define ................................... 452
Specification Dialog ........................... 450 Treads, retain number ....................... 452
Stairs Walk Line .................................. 439 , 454
Align Curved Stairs ............................ 183 Winders .................................... 434 , 452
Auto Stairwell .................................... 448 Wrapped ........................................... 444
Balusters ........................................... 455 Stairwell, Create ............................... 448
Change Line/Arc ................................ 433 Start House Wizard........................... 926
Click .................................................. 429
Startup Options .................................. 27
Concrete ............................................ 447
Curved ...................................... 429 – 430 Static Views..................................... 1022
Curved Treads ................................... 442 Status Bar ...................................... 34 , 72
Deck to ground .................................. 430 Angle style ........................................ 917
Direction ............................................ 430 Stem Walls......................................... 364
Down ................................................. 430 Align ................................................. 368
Edit Handles ...................................... 433 and Footings, Align ............................ 368
Editing ............................................... 433 Edit ................................................... 367
Exterior Colors ................................... 454
Step Foundation S Markers ............. 364
Flare Radius ...................................... 441
Flared ................................................ 440 Stepping Stones ............................... 591
Landing Height ................................... 436 Stick Framing
Landings ........................................... 435 Mixing with Trusses ........................... 501
Landings, unlocked ............................ 436 Sticky Mode ....................................... 193
Large Stringer Base ........................... 453
Stop at Ceiling .................................. 251
Lock Tread Width ....................... 432 , 439
1178
Story-and-a-half ................................ 397 Origin ........................................ 966 , 977

Straight Reset origin ....................................... 977
Deck Edge ........................................ 221 Resizing ............................................ 983
Stairs ................................................ 429 Setback space ................................... 989
Sides ................................................ 966
Streams .............................................. 591
Stud Surface normals ................................ 966
Spacing ............................................ 472 Surface Smoothing Angle ................... 976
Thickness ......................................... 472
Symbols
Subfloor Thickness .......................... 470 Converting to ..................................... 987
Subgirders ......................................... 508 Custom 2D ........................................ 913
Subtract ............................................. 204 Editing Custom Symbols .................... 988
Get Last Symbol ................................ 987
Sun
vs. Native Objects .............................. 695
Angle ................................................ 782
Color ................................................ 782
Intensity ............................................ 782
Light Specification ............................. 782
Shadows ........................................... 593
T
Sun Angle .................................. 776 , 888 Tab Key .............................................. 146
Create .............................................. 777 Tabs
Date ................................................. 783 Changing .......................................... 853
Render Data ..................................... 784 Columns ............................................ 853
Specification Dialog ........................... 782 Text .................................................. 853
Surface Tangent
Normals ............................................ 966 Curved walls ..................................... 237
Smoothing Angle ............................... 976 Make arc, edit button ......................... 237
Swap Technical Support ................ 1064 , 1082
Views ............................................... 733 Contact ........................................... 1087
Work-Reference ................................ 361 Error Messages ............................... 1086
Switch Hardware Lock Issues ...................... 1084
Create .............................................. 519 Installation Issues ............................ 1083
Double .............................................. 519 Online ............................................. 1088
In circuit ............................................ 519 Online Articles ................................. 1088
Place ................................................ 519 Priority ............................................ 1088
Three way ......................................... 519 Telephone ....................................... 1088
Symbol Template Files ..................................... 51
Automatic Edge Lines ........................ 976 Template Plan
Bounding Box .................................... 989 Creating ........................................ 52 – 53
Bounding box size ............................. 983 Temporary
Edge lines ......................................... 976 Dimension Defaults ............................ 821
Enable resize ...................................... 68 Dimensions ....................................... 826
Faces ....................................... 966 , 977 File Directories .................................... 81
Insertion point ........................... 966 , 977
Terrain
Moldings ........................................... 534
and 3D Draw Time ............................. 594
Open Symbol .................................... 974
Clear ................................................. 582
Options ............................................. 979
1179
Contour Smoothing ............................ 599 Convert Simple to Rich ...................... 855

Displaying .......................................... 593 Copy, Cut and Paste ......................... 857
Editing ............................................... 595 Creating ............................................ 842
Elevation Tools .................................. 582 Defaults ...................................... 66 , 839
Feature Tools .................................... 588 Displaying ......................................... 843
Flat Region ........................................ 588 Edit in Place ...................................... 855
Grow All Plants Dialog ........................ 621 Editing .............................................. 854
Hill .................................................... 588 Files ................................................. 612
Holes ................................................. 590 Hyperlinks ......................................... 854
Menu ............................................... 1110 Layer ................................................ 843
Modifier Tools .................................... 587 Layout ............................................ 1021
Retaining Wall ................................... 587 Leader Lines ..................................... 861
Specification Dialog ........................... 596 Line Spacing ..................................... 846
Sprinkler Tools ................................... 629 Macros ............................................. 869
Sun Shadows ..................................... 593 Maximum Characters ......................... 842
Terrain Breaks ................................... 586 Move ................................................ 855
Toolbar Configuration ................. 112 , 581 Numbering ........................................ 846
Valley ................................................ 588 Paragraph Options ............................ 845
Wall and Curb Tools ........................... 592 Printed Size ...................................... 856
Terrain Break Printing ........................................... 1002
Specification Dialog ........................... 609 Reshape ........................................... 855
Resizing ........................................... 856
Terrain Data
Rotate .............................................. 855
Convert CAD Lines to ......................... 621
Scaling ............................................. 856
Import ................................................ 612
Special characters ............................. 871
Terrain Feature Specification Dialog ........................... 850
Specification Dialog ........................... 606 Spell Check ...................................... 859
Terrain Features Tab Spacing .............................. 853 , 857
Clip ................................................... 606 Tabbed Objects ................................. 857
Height ............................................... 606 Tables .............................................. 857
Terrain Modeler Text Macros
3D Views ........................................... 594 Contact Info ...................................... 869
Add Elevation Data .................... 582 – 583 File Info ............................................ 870
Build Terrain ...................................... 594 Plan Info ........................................... 870
Clear Terrain ..................................... 582 Special characters ............................. 871
Elevation Points ......................... 582 – 583 Time & Date ...................................... 871
Generate Terrain ................................ 594 Texture
Triangle Size ..................................... 597 Filename Conflict Dialog .................... 970
Terrain Path Tab ................................................... 723
Specification Dialog ........................... 610 Textures ............................................. 773
Terrain Perimeter .............................. 581 Convert to Materials .......................... 714
Text Mapping ............................................ 714
Arrows ............................................... 861 View ................................................. 723
Auto Height, Width ............................. 853 Thumbnails
Bullet Size ......................................... 846 Enable ................................................ 80
Bullets ............................................... 846 Save ................................................... 48
Character Size ................................... 840 Size .................................................... 80
1180
Tiling Views ....................................... 735 Treads

Time Log Dialog................................ 923 Lock width ......................................... 452
Maintain Width .................................. 452
Time Tracker
Overhang .......................................... 454
Preferences ........................................ 87
Retain number in section ................... 452
Time Log Dialog ................................ 923
Thickness .......................................... 454
TimeTracker ...................................... 922
Treatments Tab ................................. 347
Title Blocks ..................................... 1021
Trim Objects ...................................... 198
Toe Kick Height/Depth ..................... 564
Trimmers ............................................ 473
Tool, Gable/Roof Line ...................... 412
Truss
Toolbars..................................... 31 , 1090 Base ................................................. 501
Add Tools ......................................... 108 Details ...................................... 499 , 918
Child Buttons .................................... 108 Envelope ........................................... 499
Configurations ................................... 112 Spacing ............................................. 480
Customize ......................................... 107
Truss Base
Delete Tools ..................................... 109
Drop-Down ........................................ 107
Edit ........................................... 32 , 1141 Trusses ...................................... 380 , 479
Hide ................................................. 107 Attic trusses ...................................... 496
Parent Buttons .................................. 108 Bottom Chord Depth .................. 510 , 513
Parent-Child ...................................... 107 Ceiling Steps ..................................... 497
Restore ............................................. 113 Ceiling trusses ................................... 495
Tool tips .............................................. 31 Copy ......................................... 495 , 499
Create ............................................... 495
Tools
Details .............................................. 499
3D .................................................... 765
Drop Hip truss ................................... 511
Cabinet ............................................. 548
Edit ................................................... 498
CAD Drawing .................................... 878
End truss .......................................... 511
Dimension ......................................... 823
Energy Heel ...................................... 511
Electrical ........................................... 518
Floor and Ceiling ............................... 495
Floor ................................................. 355
Floor trusses ..................................... 495
Garden Bed ...................................... 590
Floor/Ceiling ...................................... 466
Menu .............................................. 1128
Force truss rebuild ..................... 512 , 514
Plant ................................................. 621
Girder ............................................... 509
Primitives .......................................... 649
Hip .................................................... 505
Roof ................................................. 376
Hip jack ............................................. 506
Slab .................................................. 370
Hip Roofs .......................................... 505
Solid ................................................. 649
Jack .................................................. 506
Stair ................................................. 429
Kingpost ............................................ 510
Terrain Wall and Curb ........................ 592
Labels ............................................... 500
Wall .................................................. 219
Laying out ......................................... 495
Transfer Plans..................................... 47 Lock Envelope ................................... 512
Transform/Replicate Object Dialog 201 Mixing with rafters ............................. 501
Transom Window see Windows, stacked Mixing with Stick Framing ................... 501
Raise off plate ................................... 511
Transparency .................................... 726
Reduce gable .................................... 511
Transparency Color.......................... 939 Roof .......................................... 466 , 495
1181
Scissors ............................................ 509 Views

Shape, editing .................................... 499 Cascade ........................................... 734
Spacing ............................................. 480 Dynamic ......................................... 1022
Step Down Hip ................................... 506 Static .............................................. 1022
Subgirders ......................................... 508 Virtual Graph Paper............................ 68
Top Chord Depth ....................... 510 , 513
Virtual Reality Modeling Language
Truss Base ........................................ 501
see VRML
Webbing .................................... 512 – 513
Webbing Depth .......................... 510 , 513 Visual CAD Snaps............................... 68
Volume
Of a Polyline ............................. 599 , 901
U Volume, Materials ............................. 716

VRML .................................................. 949
Undo.................................................... 141 Export ............................................... 949
Files ................................................... 50 Textures and Images ......................... 951
Preferences ........................................ 80
Undo Zoom ........................................ 731
Union................................................... 202
Unit Conversions................................ 85
W
Unrestricted Movement .................... 178 Walk Line ................................... 439 , 454
Untitled Plan Walkthroughs .................................... 948
see New Plan Along a path ..................................... 948
Pause Recording ............................... 949
Update Templates .............................. 53
Playing ............................................. 949
Use Recording ......................................... 949
Framing Reference .................... 469 , 477 Save Frame ...................................... 949
Mesh ................................................. 366 Stop Recording ................................. 949
Use Layout Line Scaling ................ 1019 VRML ............................................... 949
User Specified Walls......................... 242 Wall....................................................... 66
Assemblies ....................................... 241
Bridging ............................................ 904
V Cabinets ........................................... 549
Defaults ............................................ 216
Valley .................................................. 588 Details .............................................. 918
Elevation ........................................... 749
Vaulted Ceilings ................................ 280 Layer Fill Style .................................. 246
Vector Views Specification Dialog ................... 249 , 397
Lower Interactive Quality .............. 73 , 799 Tools ................................................ 219
Vents ................................................... 320 Type Definitions Dialog ...................... 243
Video Card Types Tab ......................................... 256
Status ................................................ 104 Wall Detail Views .............................. 486
Videos Wall Hatch
View Online Help Videos .................. 1079 Specification Dialog ........................... 264
View Wall Type Definitions Dialog........... 243
Angle Dialog ...................................... 762 Walls................................................... 216
to CAD .............................................. 918
1182
Align pony walls ................................ 219 No Room Def .................................... 251

Aligning between floors ...................... 236 Opening with Railing .......................... 302
Aligning colinear ................................ 236 Openings in ....................................... 228
Allowed Angles ................................. 229 Pony Wall .......................................... 223
Attic Walls ................................. 238 , 251 Pony wall height ................................ 218
Centering footings (2 methods) .......... 255 Raked ............................................... 248
Changing into railings ........................ 250 Removing Breaks .............................. 230
Compound Raked .............................. 249 Resizing Using Dimensions ................ 832
Connecting ....................................... 229 Retain wall framing ............................ 251
Curved .............................................. 228 Retaining Wall ........................... 587 , 592
Curved, align between floors .............. 237 Reverse Layers ................................. 228
Curved, center point .......................... 228 Roofs over curved ............................. 399
Delete hatching ................................. 226 Room Def (invisible) .......................... 251
Dimensioning to ................................ 243 Same Wall Type handles ................... 232
Display surfaces only ......................... 230 Show length when editing .................. 216
Double walls ..................................... 239 Show lower pony wall ........................ 219
Drawing ............................................ 228 Solid Railings .................................... 258
Editing .............................................. 231 Split .................................................. 223
Exporting Definitions ......................... 246 Stepped ............................................ 248
Exterior and Interior ........................... 222 Surfaces in 3D ................................... 246
Fill style line weight ........................... 246 User Specified ................................... 242
Fix Connections ................................ 229 Wall Coverings .................................. 262
Flip layers ................................. 216 , 228 Wall Detail Views ............................... 486
Footing width and height .................... 255 Water Features .................................. 591
Foundation ................................ 222 , 255
Webbing
Foundation thickness ......................... 255
Thickness .......................................... 514
Foundation wall ................................. 250
Framing ............................................ 471 Winders ...................................... 434 , 452
Framing Details ................................. 486 Definition ........................................... 429
Framing Layer ................................... 242 Max Tread Contraction ....................... 454
Furred Walls ..................................... 239 Window
Grid snapping ................................... 229 Defaults ............................................ 317
Half .................................................. 258 Menu .............................................. 1135
Hatching ........................................... 226 Specification Dialog ........................... 332
Hatching line weight .......................... 264 Types ................................................ 317
Heights ............................................. 233 Types, CAD Detail ............................. 917
High Shed/Gable ............................... 253 Windows
Importing Definitions .......................... 247 Bay & bow dimensions ....................... 329
Interior, fireplace in ........................... 672 Bay windows ..................................... 318
Invisible .................................... 224 , 251 Bay, roof over .................................... 330
Knee Wall ......................................... 253 Bench Seat ....................................... 330
Knee Walls ....................................... 238 Blocked ............................................. 302
Layer fill style .................................... 246 Blocked units ..................................... 321
Layers .............................................. 242 Bow .................................................. 318
Main Layer ........................................ 242 Bow, roof over ................................... 330
Marriage walls ................................... 239 Box ................................................... 318
Materials ........................................... 268 Box, roof over .................................... 330
No Locate ......................................... 251 Cascade ........................................... 734
1183
Component ........................................ 318

Components ...................................... 329
Corner ............................................... 319
Creating custom windows ........... 301 , 320
Custom Muntins ................................. 327
Egress ............................................... 335
Framing ............................................. 473
Gables Over ...................................... 423
Labels ............................................... 326
Layers see Windows, Levels
Levels ............................................... 324
Library ............................................... 319
Lites see Lites
Match roof ......................................... 345
Minimum Separation .......................... 317
Mulled Units ....................................... 321
Mullions ............................................. 341
Muntins ............................................. 341
Opening Indicators ............................. 326
Recessed .................................. 320 , 336
Shutters ............................................. 348
Stacked ............................................. 320
Stained glass material ........................ 320
Standard ........................................... 318
Vents ................................................. 320
Window Levels ................................... 320
Windows Metafiles ............................ 943
Wiring Schematics, Creating ........... 519
WP Outlet ........................................... 518
Wrapped
Openings ........................................... 301
Stairs ................................................ 444
Z
Zoom ................................................... 731
Fill Window ........................................ 732
Mouse Wheel ............................... 30 , 731
Tools ................................................. 731
Undo ................................................. 731
Undo Zoom ........................................ 731
1184
1185
1186
1187
1188
1189

Reference Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Reference Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CAFull_RM.

book Page 0 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Professional Design & Drafting Software

Chief Architect, Inc.

Copyright © 2009 by Chief Architect, Inc. All rights reserved.

Printed in the United States of America.

Chapter 1: Program Overview

Chapter 2: File Management

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Chapter 3: Preferences & Default Settings

Chapter 4: Toolbars & Hotkeys

Select Layer Dialog..........................................................................124

Chapter 6: Editing Objects

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Reshaping Objects ........................................................................... 184

Chapter 7: Walls, Railings, & Fencing

Displaying Walls ..............................................................................230

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Chapter 10: Windows

Chapter 11: Multiple Floors

Chapter 12: Foundations

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Chapter 13: Roofs

Chapter 14: Stairs & Landings

Merging Stair Sections ....................................................................431

Chapter 15: Framing

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Chapter 16: Trusses

Chapter 17: Electrical

Chapter 18: Trim & Molding

Chapter 19: Cabinets

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog............................................... 576

Chapter 20: Terrain

Importing DXF/DWG Elevation Data...........................................620

Chapter 21: Roads, Driveways & Sidewalks

Chapter 22: Other Objects

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Shape Specification Dialog ............................................................. 658

Chapter 23: Architectural Blocks

Chapter 24: Libraries

Replace From Library ....................................................................693

Chapter 25: Materials

Chapter 26: Zoom & View Tools

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Chapter 27: 3D Views

Chapter 28: Rendering & Raytracing

Sun Angle Specification Dialog ......................................................782

Chapter 29: Dimensions

Chapter 30: Text, Callouts & Markers

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Rich Text Specification Dialog ....................................................... 843

Chapter 31: CAD Objects

Box Tools ..........................................................................................903

Chapter 32: Project Management

Chapter 33: Pictures, Images, & Walkthroughs

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Image Specification Dialog ............................................................. 936

Chapter 34: Importing & Exporting

Chapter 35: Custom Symbols

Chapter 36: Printing & Plotting

Chapter 37: Layout

Chief Architect Reference Manual